Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society.

NTN
RADU

ea

Se
Nay, sek

hicgn alt gee iad
Peer

AN Me

Wee

oF f
W'Sn spine
Atte gets

Pibrary of the Museum

OF

COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY,

AT HARVARD COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, MASS,

f y Ymer ee sr
The gift of Lhe ) Riles phe ag

foo A.
No. 4248. od

/ yi]
nl Aban../0,/5 J Y ja ' 10, BSS,

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL, SOCIETY

FOR

PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE.

Vol. XXI.
MAY 1888 ro DECEMBER 1884.

NOS. 114, 115, 116.

PHILADELPHIA :
PRINTED FOR THE SOCTH TY
BY M’CALLA & STAVELY.

“1884.

March 2, 1883,] s (Hale,

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE
AMERICAN. PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY.
TULD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USERUL KNOWLEDGE.

1883, No. 114.

VOL. XXI.

THE TUTELO TRIBE AND LANGUAGE.
By Horarro Haz.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 2, 1888.)

‘

The'tribes of the Dakota stock, under various designations—Osages,
Quappas, Kansas, Otoes, Omahas, Minitarees (or Hidatsas), Iowas, Man-
dans, Sioux (or Dakotas proper) and Assiniboins, have always been regarded
as a people of the western prairies, whose proper home was the vast region
lying west of the Mississippi, and stretching from the Arkansas River on
the south tothe Saskatchawan onthe north. A single tribe, the Winnebagoes,
who dwelt east of the Mississippi, near the western shore of Lake Michi-
gan, were deemed to be intruders into the territory of the Algonkin nations,
The fact, which has been recently ascertained, that several tribes speaking
languages of the Dakota stock were found by the earliest explorers occu-
pying the country east of the Alleghenies, along a line extending through
the southern part of Virginia and the northern portion of North Carolina,
nearly to the Atlantic ocean, has naturally awakened much interest. This
interest will be heightened if i¢ shall appear that not only must our ethno-
graphical maps of North America be modified, but that anew element has
been introduced into the theory of Indian migrations. Careful researches
seem to show that while the language of these eastern tribes is closely
allied to that of the western Dakotas, it bears evidence of being older
in form. If this Conclusion shall be verified, the supposition, which at first
was natural, that these eastern tribes were merely offshoots of the Dakota
‘stock, must be deemed at least improbable. The course of migration may
be found to have followed the contrary direction, and the western Dakotas,
like the western Algonkins, may find their parent stock in the east. As:
a means of solving this interesting problem, the study of the history and
language of a tribe now virtually extinct assumes a peculiar scientific value.
Philologists will notice, also, that in this study there is presented to them
a remarkable instance of an inflected language closely allied im its vocabu-

PROO. AMER, PHILOS. 800, XxI. 114. A, PRINTED MARCH 26, 1883.

Hale.] 2 [March 2,

lary and in many of its forms to dialects which are mainly agglutinative
in their structure, and bear but slight traces of inflection.

In the year 1671 an exploring party under Captain Batt, leaving ‘the
Apomatock Town,’’ on the James River, penetrated into the mountains
of Western Virginia, at a distance, by the route they traveled, of two hun-
dred and fifty miles from their starting point. At this point they found
“the Tolera Town in a very rich swamp between a breach [branch] and
the main river of the Roanoke, circled about by mountains.’’* There are
many errata in the printed narrative, and the circumstances leave no
doubt that ‘Tolera’’ should be ‘ Totera.’’? On their way to this town the
party had passed the Sapong [Sapony] town, which, according to the
journal, was about one hundred and fifty miles west of the Apomatock
Town, and about a hundred miles east of the ‘Toleras.’? A few years
later we shall find these tribes in closer vicinity and connection.

At this period the Five Nations were at the height of their power, and in
the full flush of that career of conquest which extended their empire from
the Georgian Bay on the north to the Roanoke River on the south. They
had destroyed the Hurons and the Eries, had crushed the Andastes (or
Conestoga Indians), had reduced the Delawares to subjection, and were
now brought into direct collision with the tribes of Virginia and the Caro.
linas. The Toteras (whom we shall henceforth know as the Tuteloes)
began to feel their power. In 1636 the French missionaries had occasion
to record a projected expedition of the Senecas against a people designated
in the printed letter the ‘Tolere,’’—-the same misprint occurring once
more in the same publication.| The traditions of the Tuteloes record long
continued and destructive wars waged against them and their allies by
the Iroquois, and more especially by the two western nations, the Cayu-
gas and Senecas. To escape the incursions of their numerous and relent-
less enemies, they retreated further to the south and east. Here they
came under the observation of a skilled explorer, John Lawson, the Sur-
veyor-General of South Carolina, In 1701, Lawson traveled from Char-
leston, 8. O., to Pamlicosound. In this journey he left the sea-coast at the
mouth of the Santee river, and pursued a northward course into the hilly
country, whence he turned eastward to Pamlico. At the Sapona river,
which was the west branch of the Cape Fear or Clarendon river, he came
to the Sapona town, where he was well received.{ He there heard of the
Toteros as ‘‘a neighboring nation ’’ in the ‘‘ western mountains.” ‘At
that time,’’ he adds, ‘‘these Toteros, Saponas, and the Keyawees, three
small nations, were going to live together, by which they thought they
should strengthen themselves and become formidable to their enemies.’’

*Batt’s Journal and Relation of a New Discovery, in N. Y. Mist. Col, Vol, ili,
p, 191.

+Lambreville to Bruyas, Novy, 4, 1686, in N, Y. Mist. Col., Vol, ili, p. 484.

{ Gallatin suggests that Lawson was here in error, and that the Sapona river
was a branch of the Great Pedee, which he does not mention, and some branches
which he evidently mistook for tributaries of the Cape Fear river,—Synopsis of
the Indian Tribes, p. 85,

¢
1883. } 3 [Hale.

They were then at war with the powerful and dreaded Senecas—whom
Lawson styles Sinnagers. While he was at the Sapona town, some of the
Toteras warriors came to visit their allies. Lawson was struck with their
appearance, He describes them, in his quaint idiom, as “tall, likely men,
having great plenty of buffaloes, elks and bears, with every sort of deer,
amongst them, which strong food makes large, robust bodies.’’ In another
place he adds: ‘‘These five nations of the Toteros, Saponas, Keiauwees,
Aconechos and Schoicories are lately come amongst us, and may contain
in all about 750 men, women and children.”’* It is known that the Tote-
roes (or Tuteloes) and Saponas understood each other’s speech, and it is
highly probable that all the five tribes belonged to the same stock. They
had doubtless fled together from southwestern Virginia before their Iro-
quois invaders. The position in which they had taken refuge might well
have seemed to them safe, as it placed between them and their enemies
the strong and warlike Tuscarora nation, which numbered then, accord-
ing to Lawson’s estimate, twelve hundred warriors, clustered in fifteen
towns, stretching along the Neuse and Tar rivers. Yet, even behind this
living rampart, the feeble confederates were not secure. Lawson was
shown, near the Sapona town, the graves of seven Indians who had been
lately killed by the ‘“‘Sinnegars or Jennitos’’—names by which Gallatin
understands the Senecas and Oneidas, though as regards the latter identi-
fication there may be some question.

The noteworthy fact mentioned by Lawson, that buffaloes were found
in ‘great plenty’ in the hilly country on the head waters of the Cape
Fear river, may be thought to afford a clue to the causes which account
for the appearance of tribes of Dakota lineage east of the Alleghenies. The
Dakotas are peculiarly a hunting race, and the buffalo is their favorite
game. The fact that the Big Sandy river, which flows westward from the
Alleghenies to the Ohio, and whose head waters approach those of the
Cape Fear river, was anciently known as the Totteroy river, has been
supposed to afford an indication that the progress of the Toteros or Tute-
los, and perhaps of the buftaloes which they hunted, may be traced along
its course from the Ohio valley eastward. There are evidences which seem
to show that this valley was at one time the residence, or at least the hunt-
ing-ground, of tribes of the Dakota stock. Gravier Cin 1700) affirms that
the Ohio river was called by the Illinois and the Miamis the Akansea
river, because the Akanseas formerly dwelt along it.| The Alkanseas
were identical with the Quappas, and have at a later day given their name
to the river and State of Arkansas. Catlin found reason for believing

*Lawson’s “ History of Carolina;” reprinted by Strother & Marcom. Raleigh,
1880 3 p, 384.

t‘* Hille” (the Ohio) “s’appelle par les Illinois et par les Oumiamis la riviére
des Akanseas, parceque les Akanseas Vhabitoient autrefois.’—Grayier, Relation
du Voyage, p. 10, Iam indebted for this and other references to my esteemed
friend, Dr, J. G. Shea, whose unsurpassed knowledge of Indian history is not
more admirable than the liberality with which its stores are placed at the com.
mand of his friends,

4 [March 2,

Hale.)

that the Mandans, another tribe of the Southern Dakota stock, formerly
—and at no very distant period—resided in the valley of the Ohio. The
peculiar traces in the soil which marked the foundations of their dwellings
and the position of their villages were evident, he affirms, at various points
along that river. It is by no means improbable that when the buffalo
abounded on the Ohio, the Dakota tribes found its valley their natural
home, and that they receded with it to the westward of the Mississippi.
But the inference that the region west of the Mississippi was the original
home of the Dakotas, and that those of that stock who dwe.t on the Ohio
or east of the Alleghenies were emigrants from the Western prairies, does
not, by any means, follow. By the same course of reasoning we might
conclude that the Aryans had their original seat in Western Kurope, that
the Portuguese were emigrants from Brazil, and that the English derived
their origin from America, The migrations of races are not to be traced
by such recent and casual vestiges. The only evidence which has real
weight in any inquiry respecting migrations in prehistoric times is that
of language ; and where this fails, as it sometimes does, the question must
be pronounced unsoluble.

The protection which the Tuteloes had received from the Tuscaroras
and their allies soon failed them. In the year 1711a war broke out between
the Tuscaroras and the Carolina settlers, which ended during the following
year in the complete defeat of the Indians. After their overthrow the
great body of the Tuscaroras retreated northward and joined the Iroquois,
who received them into their league as the sixth nation of the confederacy.
A portion, however, remained near their original home. They merely re-
tired a short distance northward into the Virginian territory, and took up
their abode in the tract which lies between the Roanoke and the Potomac
rivers. Here they were allowed to remain at peace, under the protection of
the Virginian government. And here they were presently joined by the
Tuteloes and Saponas, with their confederates. In September, 1722, the
governors of New York, Pennsylvania, and Virginia, held a conference at
Albany with the chiefs of the Iroquois, to endeavor to bring about a peace
between them and the southern tribes. On this occasion Governor Spottes-
wood, of Virginia, enumerated the tribes for which the government of
his Province would undertake to engage. Among them were certain
tribes which were commonly known under the name of the “ Christanna
Indians,’’ a name derived from that of a fort which had been established
in their neighborhood. These were ‘the Saponies, Ochineeches, Sten-
kenoaks, Meipontskys, and Toteroes,’’ all of whom, it appears, the Iro-
quois were accustomed to comprehend under the name of Todirichrones.*

Some confusion and uncertainty, however, arise in consulting the col-
onial records of this time, from the fact that this name of Todirichrones was
applied by the Iroquois to two distinct tribes, or rather confederacies, of
Southern Indians, belonging to different stocks, and speaking languages

*N, Y. Hist, Col, Vol. v, p. 655 et seq,

Denti

a

bed
1883,] v [{Hale.

totally dissimilar. These were, on the one hand, the Tuteloes (or Tote-
roes) and their allies, and, on the other, the powerful Catawba nation.
The Catawbas occupied the eastern portion of the Carolinas, south of the
Tuscarora nation. At the beginning of the last century they numbered
several thousand souls. As late as 1748, according to Adair, they could
still muster four hundred warriors. A bitter animosity existed between
them and the Iroquois, leading to frequent hostilities, which the English
authorities at this conference sought to repress. It was the policy of the
Troquois, from ancient times, always to yield to overtures of peace from
any Indian nation. On this occasion they responded in their usual spirit.
“Though there is among you,’’ they replied to the Virginians, ‘‘a nation,
the Todirichrones, against whom we have had so inveterate an enmity
that we thought it could only be extinguished by their total extirpation,
yet, since you desire it, we are willing to receive them into this peace, and
to forget all the past.’’*

The Catawba language isa peculiar speech, differing widely, if not radi-
cally, both from the Dakota and from the Iroquois languages.} The only
connection between the Catawbas and the Tuteloes appears to have arisen
from the fact that they were neighboring, and perhaps politically allied
tribes, and were alike engaged in hostilities with the Iroquois. The
Jatter, however, seem to have confounded them all together, under the
name of the tribe which lay nearest to the confederacy and was the best
known to them.

One result of the peace thus established was that the Tuteloes and
Saponas, after a time, determined to follow the course which had been
taken by the major portion of their Tuscarora friends, and place them-
selves directly under the protection of the Six Nations. Moving north-
ward across Virginia, they established themselves at Shamokin (since
named Sunbury) in what is now the centre of Pennsylvania. It was a
region which the Iroquois held by right of conquest, its former occupants,
the Delawares and Shawanese, having been either expelled or reduced to
subjection, Here, under the shadow of the great confederacy, many frag-

*N, Y. Hist. Col., Vol. v, p. 660,

+ Gallatin, in his Synopsis classes the Catawba as a separate stock, distinct
from the Dakota, The vocabulary which he gives seems to warrant this sepa-
ration, the resemblances of words being few and of a doubtful character, On
the other hand,in the first annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology connected
with the Smithsonian Institution (Introduction, p. xix) the KatAba (or Catawba)
is ranked among the languages of the Dakotan family. My esteemed corre-
spondent, Mr, A. 5. Gatschet, whose extensive acquaintance with Indian linguist-
ies gives great weight to hisopinion on any subject connected with this study,
informs me (March 31, 1882) that this classification was conjectural and provi-
sional, and that his subsequent researches among the few survivors of the tribe
have not yet resultedin confirming it, They show certain traces of resemblance,
poth in the vocabulary and the syntax, but too slight and distant to make the
affiliation certain, We shall have, as he remarks, “to compare more material,
or move attentively that which we have, to arrive at a final result.”

Hale.} 6 [March 2,

ments of broken tribes were now congregated—Conoys, Nanticokes, Del-
awares, Tuteloes, and others.

In September, 1745, the missionary, David Brainerd, visited Shamokin.
He describes it in his diary as containing upwards of fifty houses and
nearly three hundred persons. ‘They are,’’ he says, ‘‘of three different
tribes of Indians, speaking three languages wholly unintelligible to each
other, About one half of its inhabitants are Delawares, the others Senekas
and Tutelas.’’* Three years later, in the summer of 1748, an exploring
party of Moravian missionaries passed through the same region. The
celebrated Zeisberger, who was one of them, has left a record of their
travels. From this we gather that the whole of the Tuteloes were not
congregated in Shamokin. Before reaching that town, they passed through
Skogari, in what is now Columbia county, In Zeisberger’s biography the
impression formed of this town by the travelers is expressed in brief but
emphatic terms. It was ‘‘the only town on the continent inhabited by
Tuteloes, a degenerate remnant of thieves and drunkards,’’} This dis-
paraging description was perhaps not unmerited. Yet some regard must be
paid to a fact of which the good missionary could not be aware, namely,
that the Indians who are characterized in these unsavory terms belonged
to a stock distinguished from the other Indians whom he knew by certain
marked traits of character. Those who are familiar with the various
branches of the Indian race are aware that every tribe, and still more
every main stock, or ethnic family, has certain special characteristics, both
physical and mental. The Mohawk differs in look and character decidedly
from the Onondaga, the Delaware from the Shawanese, the Sioux from
the Mandan ; and between the great divisions to which these tribes belong,
the differences are much more strongly marked. The Iroquois have been
styled ‘‘the Romans of the West.’’ The designation is more just than is
usual in such comparisons. Indeed, the resemblance between these great,
conquering communities is strikingly marked. The same politic fore.
thought in council, the same respect for laws and treaties, the same love
of conquest, the same relentless determination in war, the same clemency
to the utterly vanquished, a like readiness to strengthen their power by
the admission of strangers to the citizenship, an equal reliance on strong
fortifications, similar customs of forming outlying colonies, and of ruling
subject nations by proconsular deputies, a similar admixture of aristocracy
and democracy in their constitution, a like taste for agriculture, even a
notable similarity in the strong and heavy mould of figure and the bold
and massive features, marked the two peoples who, on widely distant
theatres of action, achieved not dissimilar destinies.

Pursuing thesame classical comparison, we might liken the nearest neigh-
bors of the Iroquois, the tribes of the Algonkin stock, whose natural traits
are exemplified in their renowned sachems, Powhatan, Philip of Pokano-

* Life of Brainerd, p. 167, Am. Tract Soo. edition, Quoted in the “ Life of Zeis-
berger,’ by De Schweinitz, p. 71.
+ Lito of Zeisberger, by De Schweinitz, p. 149,

AG

1883.] 7 (Hale.

ket, Miantanomah, Pontiac, and Tecumseh, to the ingenious and versatile
Greeks, capable of heroism, but incapable of political union, or of long-sus-
tained effort. A not less notable resemblance might be found between the
wild and wandering Scythians of old, and the wild and wandering tribes
of the great, Dakotan stock. Reckless and rapacious, untamable and fickle,
fond of the chase and the fight, and no less eager for the dance and the
feast, the modern Dakotas present all the traits which the Greek historians
and travelers remarked in the barbarous nomads who roamed along their
northern and eastern frontiers.

The Tuteloes, far from the main body of their race, and encircled by
tribes of Algonkin and Iroquois lineage, showed all the distinctive charac-
teristics of the stock to which they belonged. The tall, robust huntsmen
of Lawson, chasers of the elk and the deer, had apparently degenerated,
half a century later, into a ‘‘remnant of thieves and drunkards,’’ at
least as seen in the hurried view of a passing missionary. But. -it
would seem that their red-skinned neighbors saw in them some qualities
which gained their respect and liking. Five years after Zeisberger’s visit,
the Iroquois, who had held them hitherto under a species of tutelage, de-
cided to admit them, together with their fellow-refugees, the Algonkin
Nanticokes from the Eastern Shore of Maryland, to the full honors of the
confederacy. The step received the commendation of so shrewd a judge as
Jolonel (afterwards Sir William) Johnson. Ata great council of the Six
Nations, held at Onondaga in September, 17538, Colonel Johnson congratu-
lated the Cayugas on the resolution they had formed of ‘strengthening their
sastle’’ by taking in the Tedarighroones.* At about the same time a band
of Delawares was received into the League. When a great council was to
be convened in 1756, to confer with Colonel Johnson on the subject of the
French war,’ wampum belts were sent to nine ‘‘nations’’ of the
confederacy.| From this time the chiefs of the Tuteloes, as well as o
the Nanticokes and the Delawares, took their seats in the Council of the
League, a position which they still hold in the Canadian branch of the con-
federacy, though the tribes whom they represent have ceased to exist as
such, and have become absorbed in the larger nations,

It would seem, however, that their removal from their lands on the Sus-
quehanna to the proper territory of the Six Nations did not take place im-
mediately after their reception into the League, and perhaps was never
wholly completed. In an ‘account of the location of the Indian tribes,’”’
prepared by Sir William Johnson in November, 1763, the four small tribes
of “Nanticokes, Conoys, Tutecoes [an evident misprint] and Saponeys,”’
are bracketed together in the list as mustering in all two hundred men, and

are described as ‘fa people removed from the southward, and settled on or
about the Susquehanna, on lands allotted by the Six Nations.’’ |
Though the Tuteloes were thus recognized as one of the nations of the

*N, Y. Hist, Col. Vol. vi, p. 811.
{+ Stone’s Life of Sir William Johnson, Vol. i, p. 484,
t Zbid., Vol, ll, p. 487.

Hale.] 8 [March 2,

confederacy, and as such kept up their distinct tribal organization, they were
regarded as being in a special manner the friends and allies of the Cay-
ugas, The latter, a tribe always noted for their kindly temper, received the
new comers within their territory, and gave them a site for their town,
which of course brought with it the hunting and fishing privileges neces-
sary for their existence. The principal Cayuga villages were clustered
about the lake to which the nation has given its name, South of them lay
the land assigned to the Tuteloes. Their chief settlement, according to a
careful observer, was on the east side of Cayuga inlet, about three miles
from the south end of Cayuga lake, and two miles south of Ithaca, ‘The
town was on the high ground south of the school-house, nearly opposite
Buttermilk Falls, on the farm of James Fleming. On the Guy Johnson’s
map of 1771, it figures (by a slight misprint) as Todevigh-rono. It was
called in the Journal of General Dearborn, Coreorgonel ; in the Journal of
George Grant (1779), Dehoriss-kanadia; and on a map made about the
same date Kayeghtalagealat.’’*

The town was destroyed in 1779 by General Sullivan, in the expedition
which avenged, so disastrously for the Six Nations, the ravages committed
by them upon the settlements of their white neighbors. The result, as is
well known, was the destruction of the ancient confederacy. Of the broken
tribes, some fragments remained in their original seats, submitting to the
conquerors. All the Mohawks, the greater part of the Cayugas, about half of
the Onondagas, and many of the Oneidas, with a few of the Senecas and
Tuscaroras, followed Brant to Canada, The British government furnished
them with lands, mostly along the Grand River, in the territory which in
ancient times had been conquered by the Iroquois from the people who
were styled the Neutral Nation. ‘The Tuteloes accompanied their friends
the Cayugas. A place was found for them in a locality which seemed at,
the time attractive and desirable, but which proved most unfortunate for
them. They built their town on a pleasant elevation, which stretches along
the western bank of the Grand River, and still bears the name of Tutelo
Heights. Under this name it now forms a suburb of the city of Brantford.

Fifty years ago, when the present city was a mere hamlet, occupied by
a few venturous Indian traders and pioneers, the Tutelo cabins were scat-
tered over these heights, having in the midst their ‘‘long-house’’ in which
their tribal councils were held, and their festivals celebrated. They are
said to have numbered then about two hundred souls, They retained ap-
parently the reckless habits and love of enjoyment which had distin-
guished them in former times. Old people still remember the uproar of the
dances which enlivened their council-house. Unhappily, the position of

*Tam indebted for this and much other valuable information to my friend
General John 8, Clark, of Auburn, N, Y., who has made the location and migra-
tions of the Indian tribes the subject of a special study. Of the above names
Dehoriss kanadia is apparently a corruption of the Mohawk words Teholerigh
kanada, Tutelo town, The other words are probably, like most Indian names
of places, descriptive designations, but are too much corrujted to be satisfac-
torily deciphered,

eae

NIKONHA, THE LAST TUTELO.

IN 1870; AGED 106.

1883.) 9 [Hale.

their town brought them into direct contact with the white settlements.
Their frames, enfeebled by dissipation, were an easy prey to the diseases
which followed in the track of the new population. In 1832, the Asiatic
cholera found many victims on the Indian Reserve. The Tuteloes, in pro-
portion to their numbers, suffered the most. The greater part of the tribe
perished. Those who eseaped clung to their habitations a few years longer.
But the second visitation of the dreadful plague in 1848 completed the
work of the first. The Tutelo nation ceased to exist. The few survivors
fled from the Heights to which they have left their name, and took refuge
among their Cayuga friends. By intermarriage with these allies, the small
remnant was soon absorbed ; and in the year 1870, only one Tutelo of the
full blood was known to be living, the last survivor of the tribe of stalwart
hunters and daring warriors whom Lawson encountered in Carolina a hun-
dred and seventy years before.

This last surviving Tutelo lived among the Cayugas, and was known to
them by the name of Nikonha. Okonha in the Cayuga dialect signifies
mosquito. Wikonha was sometimes, in answer to my inquiries, rendered
“‘mosquito,’? and sometimes ‘‘little,’”? perhaps in the sense of mosquito-
like. His Tutelo name was said to be Waskiteng ; its meaning could not
be ascertained, and it was perhaps merely a corruption of the English word
mosquito. At all events, it was by the rather odd cognomen of “Old
Mosquito,’”’ that he was commonly known among the whites; and he was
even so designated, I believe, in the pension list, in which he had a place
as having served in the war of 1812. What in common repute was deemed
to be the most notable fact in regard to him was his great age. He was
considered by far the oldest man on the Reserve. His age was said to ex-
ceed a century ; and in confirmation of this opinion it was related that he
had fought under Brant in the American war of Independence. My friend,
Chief George Johnson, the government interpreter, accompanied us to the
residence of the old man, a log cabin, built on a small eminence near the
centre of the Reserve. His appearance, as we first saw him, basking in the
sunshine on the slope before his cabin, confirmed the reports which I had
heard, both of his great age and of his marked intelligence. ‘‘ A wrinkled,
smiling countenance, a high forehead, half-shut eyes, white hair, a
scanty, stubbly beard, fingers bent with age like a bird’s claws,’’ is the
description recorded in my note-book. Not only in physiognomy, but
also in demeanor and character, he differed strikingly from the grave and
composed Iroquois among whom he dwelt. The lively, mirthful disposi-
tion of his race survived in full force in its latest member. THis replies to
our inquiries were intermingled with many jocose remarks, and much
good-humored laughter.

He was married to a Cayuga wife, and for many years had spoken only
the language of her people. But he had not forgotten his proper speech,
and readily gave us the Tutelo renderings of nearly a hundred words. At
that time my only knowledge of the Tuteloes had been derived from the
few notices comprised in Gallatin’s Synopsis of the Indian Tribes, where

PROC, AMER, PHILOS. SOC, XxI. 114. B. PRINTED MARCH 26, 1883,

Hale.] 10 [March 2,

they are classed with the nations of the Huron-Iroquois stock. At the
same time, the distinguished author, with the scientific caution which
marked all his writings, is careful to mention that no vocabulary of the
language was known. That which was now obtained showed, beyond
question, that the language was totally distinct from the Huron-Iroquois
tongues, and that it was closely allied to the languages of the Dacotan
family.

The discovery of a tribe of Dakota lineage near the Atlantic coast was
80 unexpected and surprising that at first is was natural to suspect some
mistake. The idea occurred that the old Tutelo might have been a Sioux
captive, taken in the wars which were ancien tly waged between the Iro-
quois and the tribes of the far West. With the view of determining this
point, I took the first opportunity, on my next visit to the Reserve, in
October, 1870, of questioning the old man about. his early history, and
that of his people. His answers soon removed all doubt. He believed
himself to be a hundred and six years old; and if so, his earliest recollec-
tions would go back to a time preceeding by some years the Revolutionary
war. At that time his people, the Tuteloes, were living in the neighbor-
hood of two other tribes, the Saponies and the Patshenins or Botshenins,
In the latter we may perhaps recognize the Ochineeches, whom Governor
Spotteswood, in 1702, enumerated with the Saponies, Toteroes, and two
other tribes, under the general name of Christanna Indians. The Sapo-
nies and Tuteloes, old Nikonha said, could understand one another’s
speech. About the language of the Patshenins, I neglected to inquire, but
they were mentioned with the Saponies as a companion tribe. When
the Tuteloes came to Oanada with Brant, they parted with the Saponies at
Niagara Falls, and he did not know what had become of them. His
father’s name was Onuséwa; he was a chief among the Tuteloes. His
mother (who was also a Tutelo), died when he was young, and he was
brought up by an uncle. He had heard from old men that the Tuteloes
formerly lived on a great river beyond Washington, which city he knew by
that name, In early times they were a large tribe, but had wasted away
through fighting. Their war parties used to go out frequently against,
various enemies, The tribes they most commonly fought with were the
Tuscaroras, Senecas, and Cayugas. Afterwards his tribe came to Niagara
(as he expressed it), and joined the Six Nations, He knew of no Tutelo
of the full blood now living, except himself,

This, with some additions to my vocabulary, was the last information
which I received from old Waskiteng, or Nikonha. He died a few
months later (on the 21st of February, 1871), before I had an opportunity
of again visiting the Reserve. There are, however, several half-castes,
children of Tutelo mothers by Iroquois fathers, who know the language,
and by the native law (which traces descent through the female) are held
to be Tuteloes. One of them, who sat in the council as the representative
of the tribe, and who, with a conservatism worthy of the days of old Sarum,
was allowed to retain his seat after his constituency had disappeared, was

2 ie

ie.

1883.) 11 [Hale,

accustomed to amuse his grave fellow-senators occasionally by asserting
the right which each councillor possesses of addressing the council in the
language of his people, —his speech, if necessity requires, being translated
by an interpreter. In the case of the Tutelo chief the jest, which was duly
appreciated, lay in the fact that the interpreters were dumfounded, and
that the eloquence uttered in an unknown tongue had to go without reply.

From this chief, and from his aunt, an elderly dame, whose daughter
was the wife of a leading Onondaga chief, I received a sufficient number
of words and phrases of the language to give a good idea of its grammati-
cal framework. Fortunately, the list of words obtained from the old Tutelo
was extensive enough to afford a test of the correctness of the additional
information thus procured. The vocabulary and the outlines of grammar
which have been derived from these sources may, therefore, as far as they
extend, be accepted as affording an authentic representation of this very
interesting speech.

There is still, it should be added, some uncertainty in regard to the tribal
name. So far as can be learned, the word Tutelo or Totero (which in
the Iroquois dialects is variously pronounced Tiaterih or Tehdtirigh, Te-
hiitili, Tititei and Titie) has no meaning either in the Tutelo or the Iro-
quois language. It may have been originally a mere local designation,
which has accompanied the tribe, as such names sometimes do, in its sub -
sequent migrations. Both of my semi-Tutelo informants assured me that
the proper national name—or the name by which the people were desig-
nated among themselves—was Yesing or Yesdh, the last syllable having
a faint nasal sound, which was sometimes barely audible. In this word
we probably see the origin of the name, Nahyssan, applied by Lederer to
the tribes of this stock. John Lederer was a German traveler who in
May, 1670—a year before Captain Batt’s expedition to the Alleghenies—
undertook, at the charge of the colonial government, an exploring jour-
ney in the same direction, though not with equal success. He made, how-
ever, some interesting discoveries. Starting from the Falls of the James
river, he came, after twenty days of travel, to ‘‘Sapon, a village of the
Nahyssans,’’ situate on a branch of the Roanoke river. These were, wn-
doubtedly, the Saponas whom Captain Batt visited in the following year, the
kindred and allies of the Tuteloes. Fifty miles beyond Sapon he arrived
at Akenatzy, an island in the same river. ‘‘The island,’’ he says, ‘though
small, maintains many inhabitants, who are fixed in great security, being
naturally fortified with fastnesses of mountains and water on every
side.”’* In these Akenatzies we undoubtedly see the Aconechos of
Lawson, and the Ochineeches mentioned by Governor Spotteswood. Dr.
Brinton, in his well-known work on the ‘“‘ Myths of the New World,’’ has
pointed out, also, theiridentity with the Occaneeches mentioned by Bever-
ley in his ‘History of Virginia,” and in doing so has drawn attention to

* See ** The Discoveries of John Lederer,” reprinted by O. H, Harpel. Cincin-
nati, 1879, p. 17.

1883. ] 1 2 {March 2,

the very interesting facts recorded by Beverley respecting their Jan-
guage.*

According to this historian, the tribes of Virginia spoke languages differ-
ing so widely that natives ‘at a moderate distance” apart did not under-
stand one another. They had, however, a ‘general language,’’? which
people of different tribes used in their intercourse with one another, pre-
cisely as the Indians of the north, according to Ia Fontan, used the ‘4Al-
gonkine,’’ and as Latin was employed in most parts of Europe, and the
Lingua Franca in the Levant, These are Beverley’s illustrations, He
then adds the remarkable statement: “The general language here used is
that of the Occaneeches, though they have been but a small nation ever
since these parts were known to the English ; but in what their language
may differ from that of the Algonkins I am not able to determine.’’|
Further on he gives us the still more surprising information that this “oen-
eral language’’ was used by the ‘priests and conjurors’”’ of the different
Virginian nations in performing their religious ceremonies, in the same
manner (he observes) ‘as the Cathelics of all nations do their Mass in
the Latin.’’ +

The Akenatzies or Occaneeches would seem to have been, in some
respects, the chief or leading community among the tribes of Dakotan
stock who formerly inhabited Virginia. That these tribes had at one
time a large and widespread population may be inferred from the simple
fact that their language, like that of the widely scattered Algonkins (or
Ojibways) in the northwest, became the general medium of communica-
tion for the people of different nationalities in their neighborhood. That
they had some ceremonial observances (or, as Beverley terms them, ‘‘ado-
rations and conjurations’’) of a peculiar and impressive cast, like those of
the western Dakotas, seems evident from the circumstance that the intru-
sive tribes adopted this language, and probably with it some of these eb-
servances, in performing their own religious rites. We thus have a strong
and unexpected confirmation of the tradition prevailing among the tribes
both of the Algonkin and of the Iroquois stocks, which represents them
as coming originally from the far north, and gradually overspreading the
country on both sides of the Alleghanies, from the Great Lakes to the moun-
tain fastnesses of the Cherokees. They found, it would seem, Virginia, and
possibly the whole country east of the Alleghenies, from the Great Lakes to
South Carolina, occupied by tribes speaking languages of the Dakotan
stock. ‘That the displacement of these tribes was a very gradual process,
and that the relations between the natives and the encroaching tribes were
not always hostile, may be inferred not only from the adoption of the ab-
original speech as the general means of intercourse, but also from the
terms of amity on which these tribes of diverse origin, native and intru-
sive, were found by the English to be living together.

* See the note on page 303 of Dy Brinton’s volume, 2d edition,

+ History of Virginia (ist edition), p, 161.
} Lbid., p. 171.

1883.] 13 [Hale.

That the Tutelo tongue represents this ‘general language’’ of which
Beverley speaks—this aboriginal Latin of Virginia—cannot be doubted.
Tt may, therefore be deemed a language of no small historical impor-
tance. The fact that this language, which was first obscurely heard of in:
Virginia two hundred years ago, has been brought to light in our day on
a far-off Reservation in Canada, and there learned from the lips of the
latest surviving member of this ancient community, must certainly be
considered one of the most singular occurrences in the history of science.

Apart from the mere historical interest of the language, its scientific
value in American ethnology entitles it to a careful study. As has been
already said, a comparison of its grammar and vocabulary with those of
the western Dakota tongues has led to the inference that the Tutelo
language was the older form of this common speech. This conclusion
was briefly set forth in some remarks which I had the honor of addressing
to this Society at the meeting of December 19, 1879, and is recorded in
the published minutes of the meeting. Some years afterwards, and after
the earlier portion of this essay was written, I had the pleasure, at the
meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, held
in Montreal, in September, 1882, of learning from my friend, the Rev. J.
Owen Dorsey, of the Smithsonian Institution, who has resided for several
years as a missionary among the western Dakotas, and has made careful
researches into their languages and history, that they have a distinct tra-
dition that their ancestors formerly dwelt east of the Mississippi. In fact,
the more southern Dakotas declare their tribes to be offshoots of the Win-
nebagoes, who till recently resided near the western shore of Lake Michi-
gan. A comparison of their dialects, made with Mr. Dorsey’s aid, fully
sustains this assertion. Mere traditionary evidence, as is well known,
sannot always be relied on; but when it corresponds with conclusions
previously drawn from linguistic evidence, it has a weight which renders
it a valuable confirmation.

The portrait of old Nikonha, an accurate photograph, will serve to show,
better than any description could do, the characteristics of race which dis-
tinguished his people. The full oval outline of face, and the large features
of almost European cast, were evidently not individual or family traits,
as they reappear in the Tutelo half-breeds on the Reserve, who do not
claim a near relationship to Nikonha. Those who are familiar with the
Dakotan physiognomy will probably discover a resemblance of type be-
tween this last representative of the Virginian Tutelos and their congeners,
the Sioux and Mandans of the western plains.

THE TUTELO LANGUAGE,

In the following outline of Tutelo grammar, it has been deemed advis-
able to bring its forms into comparison with those of the western lan-
guages of the same stock, For this purpose the Dakota and Hidatsa (or
Minnetaree) languages were necessarily selected, being the only tongues
of this family of which any complete account has yet been published,

Hale.] 14 [March 2,

For the information respecting these languages I am indebted to the Da-
kota Grammar and Dictionary of the Rev. 8. R. Riggs (published in the
Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge) and the Hidatsa Grammar and
Dictionary of Dr. Washington Matthews (published in Dr. Shea’s Library
of American Linguistics), both of them excellent works, of the highest
scientific value,

The Alphabet.

The alphabetical method which has been followed by me in writing this
language, as well as the Iroquois dialects, is based on the well-known system.
proposed by the Hon. John Pickering, and generally followed by Ameri-
can missionaries, whose experience has attested its value. The modifica-
tions suggested for the Indian languages by Professor Whitney and Major
Powell have been adopted, with a few exceptions, which are due chiefly
to a desire to employ no characters that are not found in any well-fur-
nished printing-office.

The letters b, d, h, k, 1, m,n, p, 8, t, w, y, @ are sounded as in English,
the s having always its sharp sound, as in mason. The vowels are sounded
generally as in Italian or German, with some modifications expressed by
diacritical marks, thus :

a, a8 in father ; in accented syllables written d.

a, like the German @ in Mann.

a, like a@ in mat.

G, like a in fail.

é, like a in fate ; in accented syllables 4.

é, like ¢ in met.

@, like ¢in machine ; in accented syllables 3.

3, like ¢ in pin,

, as in note ; in accented syllables 0.

6, like the French 0 in bonne.

0, like o in not.

vu, as in rule, or like 00 in pool; in accented syllables %.
uw, like win pull,

u, like uw in but ; in an accented syllable written &,
w#, like the French w in dur.

>

The diphthongs are, a7, like our long ¢ in pine ; au, like ow in loud; dé,
like o¢in boil ; du, like win pure.

The consonants requiring special notice are:

¢, like sh in shine,

g, always hard, as in go, get, give,

Jj, like 2 in azure,

n, like the French nasal » in an, bon, un,

q like the German ch in Loch, or the Spanish j in jovene

6
1888,] 15 [Hale,

The sound of the English ch in chest is represented by ¢¢; the j and dg
in judge by dj.

The apostrophe (’) indicates a slight hiatus in the pronounciation of a
word, which is often, though not always, caused by the dropping of a con-
sonantal sound.

In general, the diacritical marks over the vowels are omitted, except in the
accented syllable—that is, the syllable on which the stress of voice falls.
It is understood that when a vowel (other than the %) has a mark of arly
kind over it, the syllable in which it occurs is the accented or emphatic
syllable of the word. Experience shows that the variations in the sound
of a vowel in unaccented syllables, within the limits represented by the
foregoing alphabet, are rarely of sufficient importance to require to be
noted in taking down a new language. The only exception is in the
sound marked w, which occasionally .has to be indicated in unaccented
syllables, to distinguish it from the w, with which it has no similarity of
sound. It is, in fact, more frequently a variation of the @ than of any
other vowel sound.

Occasionally the accented syllable is indicated by an acute accent over
the vowel. This method is adopted principally when the vowel has a brief
or obscure sound, as in mésdni, I alone, which is pronounced in a manner
midway between misani and miswit.

Phonology.

The Tutelo has the ordinary vowel sounds, but the distinction between
eand ¢, and between o and w is not alwaysclear. The word for ‘‘ mother’
was at one time written end, and at another dma; the word for ‘‘he
steals’? was heard as manoma and manima. In general, however, the
difference of these vowels was sufficiently apparent. The obscure sound
of & (or in accented syllables %) was often heard, but when the word
in which it occurred was more distinctly uttered, this sound was frequently
developed into a clearer vowel. Thus histo’, arm, became histd ; musteé,
spring (the season), became masté ; astit, white, became asani, or (losing
the nasal sound) asat, and so on. The use of the character % (or %) in this
language could probably be dispensed with.

The consonantal sounds which were heard were: p (or b),¢ (ord), k(org),
h (and q), J, m, n, 8, w andy, and the nasal 7%. Neither f, 2, nor 7 was heard,
and ¢ (sh) only as a variant of s. Harsh combinations of consonants were
rare. The harshest was that of ¢s%, as in wagutska, child, and this was not
frequent.* Words usually end in a vowel ora liquid. A double con-

*In wagulska (Dakota, kogka), suntka, younger brother (Dak., sunka) ; tgotgo
or (guiki, dog (Dak., cwfika) und many similar words, the ¢ is apparently an ad-
scititious sound, inserted by a mere trick of pronunciation, The Hidatsa carries
this practice further, and constantly introduces the sound of ¢ before the sharp
s. The Tutelo isi, foot, becomes isi in Hidatsa; sant, cold, becomes tsinia, &e.

Hale,] 1 6 {March 2,

sonant at the commencement of a word is rare. It perhaps only occurs
in the combination t¢ (tsh) and in contractions, as ksdibat, nine, for
kasankat.

It is doubtful if the sonants b, d and g occur, except as variants of the
surd consonants p, ¢ énd &; yet in certain words sonants were pretty con-
stantly used. Thus in the pronouns mifyitowe, mine, yingitowe, thine,
iijitowe, his, the gy was almost always sounded.

The J and n were oceasionally interchanged, as in léné and nani, three,
letci and netqi, tongue. In general, however, the two elements seemed to
be distinct. The aspirate was somewhat stronger than the English h,
and frequently assumed the force of the German ch or the Spanish j (rep-
resented in our alphabet by g). Whether there were really two distinct
sounds or not, could not be positively ascertained. The same word was
written at one time with /, and at another with q.

The nasal % is properly a modification of the preceding vowel, and would
have been more adequately rendered by a mark above or below the vowel
itself; but it has seemed desirable to avoid the multiplication of such dia-
critical marks, This nasal is not to be confounded with the sound of ng
in ving, Which is a distinct consonantal element, and in the Polynesian
dialects often commences a word. In the Tutelo this latter sound only
occurs before a & or hard g, and is then represented by %. It is, in fact,
in this position, merely the French nasal sound, modified by the palatal
consonant. The nasal % is also modified by the labials 6 and p, before
which it assumes the sound of m. Thus the Tutelo word for day, nahambt,
or (in the construct form) nahdmp, is properly a modification of nahanbé
or nahanp. In all words in which it occurs, the nasal sound was at times
very faintly heard, and was occasionally so little audible that it was not
noted, while at other times an was heard in its place. The word for knife
was written at different times maséii and masédi; that for sky, maton, matat,
mantoi, and mantot; that for day, nahambi, nahamp, nahanp, and nahap ;
that for winter, wané, winéni, and wanéi; that for one, nds and nons, and
soon, Whether this indistinctness of the nasal sound belongs to the lan-
guage, or was a peculiarity of the individuals from whom the speech was
learned, could not be satisfactorily determined.

The tendency of the language, as has been said, is to terminate every
word with a vowel sound. When a monosyllable or dissyllable ends with
a consonant, it is usually in a construct form, and is followed by another
word grammatically related to it. Thus, Aisépi, axe, hisép miigitowe, my
axe; monti, a bear, mont nosd, one bear ; tcongo (or tgdnkt), dog, tconk
episel, good dog ; nahdmbi, day, nahadmp lani, three days.

The following brief comparative list, extracted from the more extensive
vocabulary hereafter given, will show the forms which similar words take
in the allied dialects, Tutelo, Dakota (or Sioux proper) and Hidatsa (or
Minnetaree) :

17

1883, ] [ Hale,
Tutelo, Dakota, Tlidatsa.,
ale ate att father
and, hend, henkr ina hinu, hu, ¢kts mother
tagutehat takoghu, taiitket tdigt son
suntha sunka tsuka ‘ @ younger brother
th, thi t t mouth
nétat, neélst, lélgt teajt nejt tongue
thi hi t, tea, he tooth
lott dote doti, lott throat
ash stha dist foot
wasut NUSU tswuata brain
whys, ways we tdi blood
ata tipt ati house
maséni, masdi isan, minna metst knife
ma we mide sun (or moon)
nihampt, nihanpt arpetu mape day
mani ming mint water
wna, wnat make ana land
tounkt, tgongo gunka macuka dog
wanéni, wanét want mand winter
tant ptan miata, autumn
asdnt, asl, asét sar atiki, ohwki white
asépt supa cipt black
stl, wast at tsi, tstdé yellow
te ta te dead
sant snd tsinia cold
Nosal, None wanted, wantes nuéls, ludtsa one
nombat nonhpa nopa two
nani, lant yamne dami, lawt three
topat topa topa four
kisahat eaplan kihu five
akdspe gakpe akama, dkhawa — six
sagomink cakowin sapua seven
luta yuta, wola duti to eat
howa U, Wom hu to come
hitet watet hidict to dance
mahananrka yanka, nanka naka to sit, remain
ktéwa, kitéset kte kitahé to kill

It must be borne in mind that the sounds of mm, b, and 2 are inter-
changeable in the [Hidatsa, and that d, 7, n, and 7 are also interchangeable.
A similar confusion or interchange of these elements is to some extent ap-
parent in the Dakota and the Tutelo languages. Taking this fact into
consideration, the similarity or rather identity of such words as mi in Tu-
telo and zw? in Dakota, meaning ‘‘sun,’’ and loté in Tutelo, dote in Dakota,
and dote or lote in Hidatsa, meaning ‘‘brain,’’ becomes apparent.

PROC, AMER, PIILOS. soc. xxi, 114, 0, PRINTED MARCH 31, 1883,

18 [March 2,

Hale.]

The nasal sounds, which are so common in the Dakota and the Tutelo,
are wanting in the Hidatsa, while the s of the two former languages fre-
quently becomes ¢s in Hidatsa. These dialectical peculiarities explain the
difference between the words for younger brother, suntka, Tu., surka, Da.,
tsuka, Hi., between és?, foot, Tu., and ¢tsi, Hi., between maseri, knife,
Tu., and maetsi, Hi. It will be noticed that the words in Tutelo are fre-
quently longer and fuller in sound than the corresponding words in the
other languages, as though they were nearer the original forms from
which the words in the various Dakota tongues were derived.

JRAMMATICAL Forms.

As is usually the case with allied tongues, the grammatical resemblances
of the languages of this stock are much more striking and instructive than
those which appear in the mere comparison of isolated words.

Substantives and Adjectives.

The Tutelo, like the Dakota and the Hidatsa, has no inflection of the
substantive to indicate the plural number; but in both the Tutelo and the
Dakota, the plural of adjectives is frequently expressed by what may be
termed a natural inflection, namely, by a reduplication. In the Dakota,
according to Mr. Riggs, the initial syllable is sometimes reduplicated, as
ksapa, wise, pl. ksaksapa; tanka, great, pl. tarktanbva ; sometimes it is the
last syllable, as wagté, good, pl. wactégte ; and occasionally it is a middle
syllable, as, tanhkinyan, great, pl. tanhinkinyan.

Sometimes the adjective in Dakota takes the suffix p?,) which makes the
plural form of the verb, as wagté, good witcasta wagtépi, good men, 4. é.,
they are good men,

Similar forms exist in the Tutelo. The adjective, or some part of it, is
reduplicated in the plural, and at the same time a verbal suffix is fre-
quently if not always added, thus ; ati api, good house, pl. att apipisel,
good houses (those are good houses); ati dtdni, large house, pl. ati ttc
tdnsel ; ati ohayéke, bad house, pl. ati okayeyékesel ; ati asain, white house,
pl. att asansdnsel. Occasionally the reduplication takes a peculiar form,
as in ati kutska, small house, pl. ati kotskutskaisel. In one instance the
plural differs totally from the singular ; ati sui, long house, pl. até yumpan-
katskaisel,

The plural verbal termination is frequently used without the reduplica-
tion ; as, wahtdke bi (or pi), good man, wahtdke biwa (or bie), he is a good
man ; pl. wahtahe bihla (or bihlése), they are good men. So ten ze bise, good
dog (or, it is a good dog), pl. tcofige bihlése.

The plural form by reduplication does not appear to exist in the Hi-
datsa.

The Rey. J. Owen Dorsey, who has made a special study of the western
Dakota languages, finds in the Omaha (or Dhegiha) dialect a peculiar
meaning given to this reduplicate plural of adjectives. The following ex-

1888.] 19 [Hale.

amples will illustrate this signification. Jiiga, small, becomes in the re-
duplicate form jirjiaga, which refers to small objects of different kinds or
sizes, Sagi, firm, fast, hard, makes sdsagi or sagizt, Which is employed
as in the following example: wédhihide sagigihnan kafibdha, 1 wish tools
that are hard, and of different kinds, them only. Here the suffix Anan ex-
presses the meaning of ‘‘only;’’ the reduplication of the adjective gives
the sense expressed by the words ‘‘of different kinds.’’ Sabe, black,
makes sdsabe, black here and there. Gdhejé, spotted, becomes gdhejaja
spotted in many places. Piaj’, bad, makes pipiaji, as in uckan pipiajt,
different bad deeds. Nujiija (apparently a compound or derivative form,
from jitigd, small), means ‘‘boy,’? “% ¢., small man; nujinjinga, boys of
different sizes and ages.* It would seem from these examples that in this
language the reduplication expresses primarily the idea of variety, from
which that of plurality in many cases follows. This meaning is not indi-
cated by Mr. Riggs in his Dakota grammar, and it was not detected by
me in the Tutelo, but it is not impossible that it actually exists in both
languages. It is deserving of notice that while no inflection of the noun is
found in the Iroquois to express plurality, this m saning is indicated in the
adjective by the addition of 8, or hots, affixed to the adjective when it is
combined with the noun. Thus from kandjisa, house, and wiyo, hand-
some, we have konoisiyo, handsome house, pl. kanonmsiyos, handsome
houses. So haretnaksen, bad song, pl. harevinaksens, bad songs ; kanaka-
res, long pole, pl. kanakareshois, long poles.

It is also remarkable that the peculiar mode of forming the plural, both
of substantives and of adjectives, by reduplication of the first syllable or
portion of the word, is found in several Indian languages spoken west of
the Rocky Mountains, and belonging to families entirely distinct from one
another, and from the Dakota. Thus in the Selish language we have
Wdus, father, pl. lilidus; tana, ear, pl. teéntdna ; sktiliamigo, man, pl.
shilkeltamigo ; qdest, good, pl. gusqdest. Inthe Sahaptin, pitin, girl, pl. p7-
pilin ; tahs, good, pl. titahs. Inthe Kizh language, wordit, man, pl. worordt ;
tcinnt, small, pl. t¢itginnd.} This has been termed, and certainly seems, a
natural mode of forming the plural. It is therefore somewhat surprising
to find it restricted in America to a compe iratively small group of linguistic
families. It is still more noteworthy that in the Polynesian dialects, which
in their general characteristics differ so widely from the Indian langutger,
this same method of forming the plural is found, but confined, as in the
Dakota tongues, to the adjective; thus we have laau tele, large tree, pl.
lawu tetele, large trees ; taata mattat, good man, pl. taata maitatat, good
men; mahaki, sick, pl. mahamahakt, sick (persons).{ This is a subject
in linguistic science which merits further investigatiqn.

*Tam indebted to Mr, Dorsey’s letters for this and much other information ot
great interest respecting the western languages of the Dakota stock, forming
part of his extensive work, which we may hope will soon be published,

t Ethnography and Philology of the U.S, Exploring Expedition under Chas.
Wilkes, pp. 534, et seq,

AY Ibid. Pp. 2h,

Hale.] 20 {March 2,

Numerals.

The near resemblance of the first seven numerals in the Tutelo, Dakota,
and Hidatsa is sufficiently shown in the vocabulary. The manner in which
the compound numbers are formed is also similar in the three languages,
In the Dakota ake, again, is prefixed to the simple numerals to form the
numbers above ten, as ake wanjidah, eleven ; ake nonpa, twelve. In the
Tutelo the same word (usually softened to age) is used, as agendsat, eleven;
ugenombat, twelve. In the Hidatsa agpi (or ahpt), signifying a part or
division, is employed, as agpi-duetsa, eleven; agpt-dopa, twelve.

In Dakota, wiktcemna, ten, and nojipa, two, form wikiqemna nonpi,
twenty. In Tutelo the form is the same; putgka nomba, tens-two. In
Hidatsa it is similar, but the position of the words is reversed, twenty
being dopd-pitika, two tens.

The ordinal numbers, after the first, are formed. in all three languages
by pretixing ¢ or ed to-the cardinal numbers, as in Dakota, inonpa, second ;
iyamni, third; dopa, fourth. In Hidatsa, ¢dopa, second ; ¢idané, third ;
itopa, fourth. In Tutelo I received einombat, twice; einani, thrice; eintopat,
four times. This rendering was given by the interpreter, but the true
meaning was probably the same as in the Dakota and Hidatsa.. The word for
“first ’’ is peculiar in all three languages; in Dakota, tokaheya, in Hidatsa,
atsika, in Tutelo, elahnt.

In the Tutelo the numerals appear to have different forms; or perhaps,
more accurately speaking, different terminations, according to the context
in which they are used. The following are examples of these forms, the
first or abridged form being apparently used in ordinary counting, and
the others when the numerals are employed in conjunction with other
words. The various pronunciations of my different informants—and some-
times of the same informant at different times—are also shown in these ex-
amples.

Separate, Construct, Variations,
iis if i ant NOSEN, NUSEN, NONSAL, NORSA,
1 nons, nos Nosal, nNonsas { naedii, niaeahy reine
numbal, nomba, numba,
2 nomp nombat nonmbat, nonpa, nombah,
nombag
3 lat, nan nant lani, lanih, lanig
4 top topat toba, topah
5 kisé, kisdn kisthat kisahani
' mee ie whi \ akaspé akaspe, akaspet, agespeg
Y sagom sagomet sagom, sagomig, sagomiik
8 palan palant palanig
9 saorsan, ksank ksahkar kasankat, ksakat
10 putch, bulgh? putskar butghai, putskani, putskan

208at

11 dgenosait aginosat, ak

°
1883.] 21 [Hale.

Separate. Construct Forms and Variations,
12 agenomba aginombat, akinombat
18 agelant agilalt, akilant
14. agetoba akitopa
15 agegisat akikiséhat
16 agegaspe akikaspet
17 agesagomt akisagomet
18 agepalani akipalalt
19 agehesanha akikasaikat

20 putska nomba,

: putsha nombar
puteha nombas J bath

30 putsha nane puteka lant
40 putska tobaé
100 when nosa okent

1000 wkent putshat

The numeral follows the noun which it qualifies. If the noun termi-
nates in a vowel not accented, the vowel is usually dropped, while the
numeral assumes its constuctor or lengthened form, and is sometimes
closed with a strong aspirate. Thus, from mihdnd, woman, we have mihan
Nosa or mihah nowsai, one Woman; mihan nombag, two women; mihai lanigq,
three women, &c. From tgoigo or tgoniki, dog, teotik nosah, one dog;
tconk nombag, two dogs. From monti, bear, mont nosah, one bear; mont
nombah, two bears. From nahambi, day, nahdmp noséh, one day, nahamp
nombat, two days ; nahamp lanig, three days, &e. It will be seen that the
dropping of the final vowel ofthe noun has the effect of giving a sharper
sound to the preceding consonant. When the final vowel is accented, no
change takes place in the noun; thus at, house; att nofisat, one house; att
nonbat, two houses; ats lanig, three houses, &e.

No such difference between the simple and the construct forms of the
numerals appears to exist either in the Dakota or in the Hidatsa. This is
one evidence, among others, of the greater wealth of inflections which
characterizes the Tutelo language.

Pronouns.

There are in the Tutelo, as in the Dakota, two classes of pronouns, the
separate pronouns, and the affixed or incorporated pronouns. The former,
however, are rarely used, except for the purpose of emphasis. In the
Dakota the separate pronouns are miye or mie, I, néye, or nig, thou or ye,
tye, or tie, he or they, and whtiye or uikie, we. In the Tutelo, mim sig-
nifies I or we, yim, thou or ye, im, he or they, which was sometimes
lengthened to imahese. A still more emphatic form is made with the ter-
mination sai or sai, giving the sense of ‘‘alone,’’ or rather perhaps

»)
Hale.) 22 [March 2,

“self,” for which meaning the Dakota employs the separate pronouns
already given, while the Hidatsa has a special form ; thus :

Tutelo, Dakota, Tlidatsa,
misél Or Misdnt miye (mic) might T myself (or I alone)
yisat, or yesand niye (nie) night thou
Csi, Isai or isan dye (ie) ight he
maesii or maesant urkiye (uikig) midokt we

The Dakota unikiye is said to be properly a dual form. The Tutelo appa-
rently, like the Hidatsa, has no dual.

The affixed or incorporated pronouns have in the Tutelo, as in the
Dakota and Hidatsa, two forms, nominative and objective, These forms
in the three languages are very similar :

Tutelo, Dakota, Hidatsa,
Nominative,

ma, wa Wi, We mo I
ya, Ye ya, ye da (na) thou
mae, mai, wae, wat, man, mark, un we
Objective.

mt, we ma, me mi me
yt, hi nb di (nt) thee
é, ev, @ a him
mae, mat, wae, wat un us

The objective forms are also used in all these languages as possessive
pronouns, and they are affixed as nominatives to neuter oradjective verbs,
in the first and second persons. The third personal pronoun is not ex-
pressed in the verb, at least in the singular number. In the plural the
Tutelo indicates this pronoun by an inflection, both in the nominative and
the objective. Thus huhéwa, he says, hahéhla, they say ; minéwa, I see
him, minéhla, I see them.

The Hidatsa makes no distinction between the singular and the plural
of the possessive pronouns. JM signifies both my and our, di, they and
your, and 4, his and their. The Dakota distinguishes the plural by adding
the particle pz to the noun. The Tutelo adds put to the noun in the
second person, and sometimes Jed or kai to the third, With nouns signify-
ing relationship, the Dakota indicates the possessive pronoun of the third
person by adding ku to the noun, The Tutelo sometimes adds ha or kai not
only in this person, but in the firstand third persons, as shown in the fol-
lowing example :

Dakota, Tutelo,

sunka sintha younger brother
misunka wisinth my bh y
yisunka yisiinth thy sf nf
sunkaku esiintha or estinthat his n if
unkisurkape maisuinthat our i re
nisunkape yisiinthaput your Ay {7

ee ee

sunkape cistinthar their

Cpe
1888.] 23 [Hale,

In the Tutelo an ¢ is sometimes prefixed to the possessive pronouns, as
in ati, house, which makes

ewe my house emantt our house
eyate Givi eyatiput your: **
Cale Wee *? cali-led their ‘‘

In this case the final vowel of the pronouns wi and y? is elided before the
initial aof thenoun. Soin minéwa, I sec him, the vowel of the prefixed pro-
noun ma, I, is elided before the vowel of the verb énewa, to see. Some
other euphonic changes of the possessive pronoun in the Tutelo are shown

in the following example :

Dakota, Tutelo,
pa pasit, head
mapa mimpasiut, my head
nipa yinpasit, thy si
po epasut, his ¢e
unpape emankpasii, our heads
nipape eyinkpasuput your
pape epasii-let thei’;

In Tutelo, <a’, my father, isan anomalous form, used instead of mat’,
oremat. With the other affixes the word becomes y@’ (or dati), thy father,
eat’, his father (or their father), emadat’, our father, eyatpui, your father.

A good example of the use of the prefixed personal pronouns in the Tu-
telo is shown in the word for son. There were slight differences in the
forms received from two of my informants, as here given:

witéka witékat my son

yiteka
etéhka
manktéka
yitéhabut

yitékat
elékat
emanktékat
yitékadut

thy son
his son
our son
your son
their son

etéka etehahlét
Minék’, my uncle (in Dakota midekg?) is thus varied: Yiné’, thy uncle
(Dak. nédekgi), einék’, his uncle (Dak. degithw), emainek, our uncle, einek-
put, your uncle, einek? or eek -let, their uncle.
In the word for brother, dijinumbai (or tikinumbat), the possessive pro-
nouns are inserted after the first syllable, and in this instance they are
used in the nominative form :

imoaginumbat my brother matinginumbat our brother
thyagnumbat thy brother thyaginumbabiit your brother
ingiginumbat his brother ingiginumbas their brother

The Dakota and Hidatsa have lengthened forms of the personal pro-
nouns to indicate property in things, or ‘transferable possession.’’ These
are in the former, mita, my, nita, thy, and ta, his, as mita-oispe, my axe,
nita-cuivke, thy dog. These pronouns are also used with koda, friend, and
kitcuna, comrade. In Hidatsa mata, dita (for nita), and ita, are used in a
similar manner. In the Tutelo the pronouns of this form occurred in a

Hale.] 24 (March 2,

few examples, but only with certain words of personal connection or rela-
tions, in which their use seems to resemble that of the Dakota pronouns
with the words meaning ‘‘comrade”’ and ‘friend.’? Thus we heard
witamanki, my husband, yitamanki, thy husband, etémanki, her hus-
band. So witamihewi, my wife (i. e my woman), yitdémihen, thy
wife; and witagitgkai, my son, % e ‘my boy,’ from wagiite-
kai, boy (evidently the same word as the Dakota koghka, young
man). In the latter example witagitckai, apparently expresses a lower
bond or sense of relationship than witékat,—not ‘‘my child,’”? but ‘my
boy,”’ or ‘‘my youth,’? who may leave me and go elsewhere at any time.

In Tutelo the pronouns indicating property or ‘transferable pos-
session’’ were commonly found in a separate and apparently compound
form, following the noun, which was then sometimes (though not always)
heard in the shortened or ‘‘construct’’ form. Thus with hisépi, axe, we
have :

”

hisép’ migitowi (or mikitowt) my axe hisép’ mahgitowi — our axe

hisép’ yingitowt thy axe hisép’ ingitombui your axe
hisép’ gitowt his axe hisep’ gitohner their axe
So sds, bed, has sds mingitowt, my bed, sas yingitowl, thy bed, sas gi- >

towi, his bed.
With tcongo, dog, we find a different form :

tgongo wahkimpt my dog teongo maokimpi (or mahkimpi) our dog

tgongo yahkimpt thy dog teongo yahkimg iti your dog
teongo cohkimpt his dog tgonigo kimpena their dog

The first of these forms, migitowi, &e., is evidently the same that ap:
pears in the Dakota mitawa, mine, witawa, thine, tawa, his, urbitawa, ours.
The Hidatsu has similar forms, matamae, ditamae, and ttamae, often pro-
nounced mataoae, nitawae, and ttawvae. Dr. Matthews regards them as
compounds formed by prefixing the pronouns mata, dita (nita) and tta to
the noun mae (or wae) signifying personal property, which seems a very
probable explanation,

The form wahkimpi may be similarly explained. In Dakota Adpé signi-
fies, to keep for me, and ips, to hold or contain. The sense of property or
possession is apparently implied, and teongo wahkimpi in Tutelo probably
means ‘‘the dog my property,’’ or ‘‘the dog I have.’’

The possessive pronouns are used by themselves in Tutelo in the follow-

ing affirmative and negative forms : i
mimignlowt Cor mimigstowe, or mikitow?) ' mine, or, it is mine
yingitowt (yingttowe, ytnkitow?) thine, or, it is thine
ingitowl (ingitowe, inkitow?) his, or, it is his
maggitowt (or mahgitowe, or mahkitow?) ours, or, it is ours
yingitombus (or yin 'eitombut) yours, or, it is yours

gitonnésel (or kitomnesel) theirs, or it is theirs

1883.1 ‘ PAD) [Hale.

Negative Form.

t is not mine
t is not thine
t is not his
is not ours

kimigitonan (kimthitonan)
kinyigitonan

higitonan

kinaggitonan
hinyigitombonan

be Le ee Ee te He

t
t is not yours
t

higttognénan is not theirs

The proper form of the first personal affirmative is doubtless migitows
Cor mikitowe). In mimigitowt the first syllable is evidently from the sepa-
rate pronoun mam, I, used for emphasis. In the Dakota the forms mye
mitawa, me, mine, niye nitawa, thee, thine, &c., are used for the same pur-
pose. .

The negative form is not found in either the Dakota or the Hidatsa, and
may be regarded as another instance of the greater wealth of inflections
possessed by the Tutelo.

The following are the interrogative demonstrative and indefinite pro-
nouns in the Tutelo, so far as they were ascertained. The Dakota and
Hidatsa are added for comparison :

Tutelo, Dakota, Hidatsa,
élowd, or hetow tuwe tape who?
aken, kaka taku tapa what ?
étuk tukte to ; tua which?
Hkentn tonw ; tonaka tuame how many?
termoahitineda tuwetawa tapeitamm«e whose (is it) ?
néke, or néikin ; heikt de Midi; kint this
yukan ; héwa ; end he; ka hido ; hino that
ohon, or ohd ota ahu many
hok, huk, okahok owasin ; tyugpa etsa; qakaheta all

The general resemblance of most of these forms isapparent. In the Tu-
telo for “whose ?’’ which might have been written tewagi'diwa, we see
the affix of the possessive pronoun (g@towe) inflectedto make an interroga-
tive form. The Dakota and Hidatsa use the affix (¢awa and tamae) with-
out the inflection.

The Verb.

There are two very striking peculiarities in which the Dakota and Hidatsa
dialects differ from most, if not all, Indian languages of other stocks.
These are: firstly, the manner in which the personal pronoun is incorpo-
rated with the verb; and, secondly, the extreme paucity or almost total
absence of inflections of mood and tense. In the first of these peculiarities
the Tutelo resembles its western congeners ; in the second it differs from
them in a marked degree—more widely even than the Latin verb differs
from the English. These two characteristics require to be separately noted.

In most Indian janguages the personal pronouns, both of the subject
and of the object, are in some measure either united with the verb or in-

PROG. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xxt.'114. p. PRINTED MARCH 31, 18838,

Hale.] 26 {March 2,

dieated by an inflection. The peculiarity which distinguishes the languages
of the Dakotan stock is found in the variable position of these incorporated
pronouns. They may be placed at the beginning, at the end, or between
any two syllables of the verb. The position of the pronoun is not, how-
ever, arbitrary and dependent on the pleasure of the speaker. It appears
to be fixed for each verb, according to certain rules. ‘These rules, how-
ever, seem not yet to have been fully determined, and thus it happens that
a Dakota dictionary must give the place of the pronoun in every verb,
precisely as a Latin dictionary must give the perfect tense of every verb
of the third conjugation. Thus, for example, in the Dakota proper, kagkd,
to bind (or rather ‘‘he binds’’), makes wakdeka, I bind, yakahkea, thou
bindest; manom, he steals, makes maw4non, Isteal, may finon, thou stealest;
and etgii, he thinks, makes efga/mi, I think, e¢gdini, thou thinkest, the suf-
fixed pronouns receiving apeculiar form. In the Hidatsa, hidéq?, he loves,
makes makidéet, I love, dakidéci, thou lovest ; eke, he knows, becomes
emake, I know, and edake, thou knowest ; and hitsahike, he makes good,
becomes kitsahikema, I make good, and hitsahikeda, thou makest good. The
Tutelo has the pronouns sometimes prefixed, and sometimes inserted ; no
instances have been found in which they are suflixed, but it is by no
means improbable that such cases may occur, as verbs of this class are not
common in either of the former languages, and our examples of conjugated
verbs in Tutelo are not very numerous. Among them are the following :

1, Verbs with prefixed pronouns:
lakpése, he drinks
yalakpése, thou drinkest
walakpése, I drink
hianthapewa, he sleeps
yahianthapewa, thou sleepest
wahianthapéwa, I sleep
téwa, he is dead
yiléwa, thou art dead
witéwa, Iam dead
2. The verbs in which the pronouns are inserted seem to be the most

numerous class. The following are examples:
hahewa, he says
hayihéwa, thow sayest
hawahewa, I say
mahandnka, he sits down
mahayindika, thou sittest down
mahaminanka, I sit down
tnkséeha, he laughs
inyakseha, thou laughest
inwakséeha, T laugh

ohata, he sees

oyahata, thou seest

owahdia, I see

1883.) 27 [Hale.

The pronouns may be thus inserted in a noun, used with a verbal sense.
Thus wahtéra or wahtakat, man or Indian, may be conjugated:

wahlikat, he is an Indian
wayihtikat, thou art an Indian
wamihtakat, Tam an Indian

It is remarkable, however, that the pronoun of the first person plural
is usually (though not always) prefixed. Thus. from mahandiika, he sits
down, we have (as above) mahaminatka, I sit down, and maiikmahandnka,
we sit down. So, macwkséha (or sometimes wairkséha), we laugh, and
maohata, we see. On the other hand, we find hamankhewa, we say, from
hahewa, he says, making (as above) hawahewa, I say.

The word manom. he steals, has in Dakota the pronouns inserted, as is
shown in the examples previously given. The similar word in Tutelo,
manoma or manuma, has them prefixed, as yimanoma, thou stealest, ma-
manomda, I steal. But on one occasion this word was given in a different
form, as manundant, he steals; and in this example the pronouns were in-
serted, the form of the first personal pronoun, and of the verb itself in that
person, being at the same time varied, as mayinundani, thou stealest, ma-
minundame, I steal. In Dakota the place of the pronoun is similarly varied
by a change in the form of the verb. Thus baksd, to cut off with a knife,
makes dbawdksa, I cut off (with the pronoun inserted), while kaksd, to cut
off with an axe, makes wakéksa, I cut off Qwith the pronoun prefixed), and
so in other like instances.

The other peculiarity of the Dakota and Hidatsa languages, which has
been referred to, viz., the paucity, or rather absence, of all changes of
mood and tense which can properly be called inflections, is in striking
contrast with the abundance of these changes which mark the Tutelo verb.
The difference is important, especially as indicating that the Tutelo is
the older form of speech. It isan established law in the science of linguistics
that, in any family of languages, those which are of the oldest formation,
or, in other words, which approach nearest to the mother speech, are the
most highly inflected. 'The derivative or more recent tongues are distin-
guished by the comparative fewness of the grammatical changes in the
vocables. The difference in this respect between the Tutelo and the west-
ern branches of this stock is so great that they seem to belong to different
categories or genera in the classification of languages. ‘The Tutelo may
properly be styled an inflected language, while the Dakota, the Hidatsa,
and apparently all the other western dialects of the stock, must be classed
among agglutinated languages, the variations of person, number, mood
and tense being denoted by affixed or inserted particles.

Thus in the Hidatsa there is no difference, in the present tense, between
the singular and the plural of a verb. Aédé¢i signifies both ‘‘he loves’’
and ‘‘they love ;’? makidéqi, ‘I love,’”’ and ‘we love.’’ In the future a
distinction is made in the first and second persons. Dakidécidé signifies

9
Hale.] ; 28 [March 2,

“thou wilt love,’’ of which dakidécidiha is the plural, ‘‘ye will love.’’ In
this language there is no mark of any kind, even by affixed particles, to
distinguish the present tense from the past, nor even, in the third person,
to distinguish the future from the other tenses. Aidé¢i signifies he loves, he
loved, and he willlove. The Dakota is a little better furnished in this
way. The plural is distinguished from the singular by the addition of the
particle pz, and in the first person by prefixing the pronoun wi, they, in
lieu of wa or we, {. Thus kagkd, he binds, becomes hagkdpi, they bind.
Wakagka, 1 bind, becomes ufikaghapi, we bind. No distinction is made
between the present and the past tense. Kagké is both he binds and he
bound. The particle kta, which is not printed and apparently not pro-
nounced as an affix, indicates the future. It sometimes produces ¢ slight
euphonie change in the final vowel of the verb. Thus kdckhe kta, he will
bind, kagkdpi kta, they will bind. All other distinctions of number and
tense are indicated in these two languages by adverbs, or by the general
context of the sentence.

In lieu of these scant and imperfect modes of expression, the Tutelo
gives us a surprising wealth of verbal forms. The distinction of singular
and plural is clearly shown in all the persons, thus:

opéwa, he goes opehéhla, they go
oyapéwa, thou goest oyapepua, Ye go
owapéewa, I go maopewa, We Zo

Of tenses there are many forms. The termination in da appears to be
ofan aorist, or rather of an indefinite sense. Opéwa (from opa, to go) may
signify both he goes and he went. A distinctive present is indicated by
the termination oma; a distinctive past by oka; and a future by ta or ata.
Thus from x/é, to kill, we have waktéwa, I kill him, or killed him, wak-
teoma; Tam killing him, and waktéeta, I will kill him. So ohdta, he sees
it, becomes ohatioka, he saw it formerly, and ohatéta, he will see it. Opéewa,
he goes (or went), becomes opéta, he will go, inflected as follows:

opeta, he will go opehéhia, they will go
oyapeta, thou wilt go oyapéltepa, ye will go .
owapeta, IT will go maopeta, we will go

The inflections for person and number in the distinctively present tense,
ending in oma, are shown in the following example :

waginoma, he is sick wagindnhna, they are sick
wayinginoma, thou art sick wayinyindmpo, ye are sick
wameginoma, I am sick min ywaginoma, We are sick

Ohata, he sees it, is thus varied :

ohata, he sees it ohatéhla, they see it
oyahata, thou seest it oyahatbua, ye see it
owahata, I see it maohata, we see it

¢
1883 ] 29 [Hale,

ohatidka, he saw it ohatiokehla, they saw it
oyahatioka, thou sawest it oyahatiokewa, ye saw it
owahatidka, I saw it maohatioka, we saw it

ohatetéhla, they will see it
oyahatetbua, ye will see it
maohaiéeta, we shall see it

ohatéta, he will see it
oyahatéta, thou wilt see it
owahatéta, I shall see it
The following examples will show the variations of person in the aorist
tense :
hahewa, he says hahéhla, they say

haythéewa, thou sayest haythépua, ye say
hawahéwa, I say hamankléwa, we say

hihnindéwa, he is hungry hihnindése, they are hungry
yihihnindéwa, thou art hungry hihnindépia, ye are hungry
mihihnindéwa, I hungry mahkihnindéwa, we are hungry.

Wakciispéwa, I remember it, an aorist form, becomes in the preterite
wakonspedka, and, in the future, wakonspéta. It is thus varied in the aorist

and past tenses ;

wakonspéewa, 1 remember it makikohspéwa, we remember it
uakonspéwa, thou rememberest it yakonspepua, ye remember it
kikonspewa, he remembers it khikonspéhéla, they remember it
wakonspedka, 1 remembered it makikonspedka, we remembered it
yakotsxpeoka, thou rememberedst it yakonspepuyoka, ye remembered it
kikonspéoka, he remembered it kikonspeleoka, they remembered it

In several instances verbs were heard only in the inflected forms. For
the simple or root-form, which doubtless exists in the language, we are
obliged to have recourse to the better known Dakota language. Thus
opewa, he went, and opeta, he will go, indicate a root opa, he goes, which
is actually found in the Dakota,

So manoma (which is probably a distinctively present tense), and man-
» briefer root-form which we find

ondani, both meaning he steals, indicate ¢
in the Dakota manon, having the same meaning. Manoma, which is proba-

bly a contraction of manonoma, is thus varied :

manoma, he steals manonnese, they steal
yumanoma, thou stealest yimanompua, ye steal

mamandma, I steal mankmanoma, we steal

From these examples it is evident that there are variations of inflection,
which, if the language were better understood, might probably be classi-
fied in distinct conjugations. Other instances of these variations will be
given hereafter.

It is well known that in the Iroquois, Algonquin, Cherokee, and other In-
dian languages, of different stocks, there are many forms of the verb, nega-

aaa

Hale.) 30 | March 2,

tive, interrogative, desiderative, and the like, which are among the most
notable characteristics of these languages, and add much to their power of
expression. The Tutelo has several of these forms, but none of them are
found in the Dakota or Hidatsa, both of which express the meaning of
these forms by adverbial phrases or other circumlocutions. The negative
form in Tutelo is made (in a manner which reminds us of the French ne-
pas) by prefixing & or ki to the affirmative and suffixing na. The tense ter-
minations oma, owa, and ewa, become ona and ena in this form :

inkséha, he laughs kinkséhna, he does not laugh

inwakséha, I laugh kinwahsehna, I do not laugh

wameginoma, I am sick kimameginona, I am not sick

waktéewa, I killed him kiwaktéena, I did not kill him

owaklaka, I speak kowaklakna, I do not speak

wakteoma, Lam killing him kiwakteona, Tam not killing him |
yahowa, he is coming kiahona, he is not coming a

Kintséhna, he is not laughing, is thus varied in the present tense :

kinkséhna, he is not laughing’ khinksehanéna, they are not laughing |
kinyakséhna, thou art not laughing kijiyakséhpuna, ye are not laughing ;
kinwakséhna, I am not laughing himaenkséhna, we are not laughing |
The interrogative form terminates in 0, as:

yaktéwa, thou killedst him yaktewo, didst thou kill him ?

yakteoma, thou art killing him yakteonmo, art thou kiling him? |
yatéta, thou wilt kill him yaktéto, wilt thou kill him? }
yatiwa, thou dwellest toka yatiwo, where dost thou dwell?

aléwa, he is going toka alewo, where is he going ?

It is evident that this form is an inflection, pure and simple. It isa vowel
change, and not in any manner an agglutinated particle. It takes the place
of that elevation of tone with which we conclude an interrogative sentence,
and which, strange to say, is not heard among the Dakotas. Mr. Riggs re-
marks that ‘unlike the English, the voice falls at the close of all inter-
rogative sentences,’’

The desiderative form appears to be expressed by the affixed particle bé
| or be, but the examples which were obtained happened to be all in the
negative, thus :

owapéwa, I go howanébina, I do not wish to go
opetése, he is going, or will go kopébenise, he does not wish to go
waktewa, I kill him kiwaktéebina, I do not wish to kill him

| hawilewa, I come kiwilébina, T do not wish to come
I
l

The imperative mood is distinguished apparently by a sharp accent on
the final syllable of the verb, which loses the sign of tense. Thus from the
| nyo, to give (in Dakota und Hidatsa, kw), which appears in maingdwa, I
i

1883, ] 31 (Tale,

give to you, we have, in the imperative, masa mingé, give me a knife.
hitése or kitesel, he kills him, gives kité tgonki, or tenth’ kité, kill the dog.

In the western languages of the Dakota stock, certain particles prefixed
to the verb play an important part in modifying the meaning. Thus in
Dakota and Hidatsa the prefix pa signifies that the action is done with the
hand. From ksa, Dak., meaning separate, we have paksd, to break with the
hand; from qu, Hid., to spill, pagu, to pour out with the hand. The Da-
kota na, Hidatsa ada (for ana) are prefixes showing that the action is done
with the foot. The Dakota ya, Hidatsa da (often pronounced ra or la)
show that the act is done with the mouth. Aa (Dak.) and dah (Hid.) in-
dicate an act done by a sudden, forcible impulse, &c. Attempts were made
to ascertain whether similar prefixes were employed in the Tutelo speech,
It was found that in many cases the latter had distinct words to express
acts which in the western languages were indicated by these compound
forms. Still, a sufficient number of examples were obtained to show that
the use of modifying prefixes was not unknown to the language. Thus
the root ‘usa, which evidently corresponds with the Dakota ksa, signifying
separation, occurs in the following forms :

nanthasisel, he breaks it off with the foot
latkisisel, he bites it off

tikusisel, he breaks it off by pushing
lakathisisel, he cuts it off with an axe

The Dakota na, signifying action with the foot, is evidently found, with
some modification, in the Tutelo nanthisisel above quoted, and also in nah-
kokisek, to stamp with the foot, and in Konagqlotisel, to scratch with the
foot. So the cutting, pushing, or impulsive prefix, lak or laka, which ap-
pears in lakatkisisel, is found also in lakatkusisel, he cuts open, lakaspéta,
to cut off in pieces, lakasdse, to chop, lakapleh, to sweep the floor. La,
which in latkisisel indicates action with the mouth, is found also in lak-

pése, to drink, and perhaps in yilandha, to count or read, which has the

corresponding prefix ya in the Dakota word yd.oa, of like meaning

The affixed or incorporated pronouns are used with transitive verbs to
form what are called by the Spanish writers on Indian grammar transitions,
that is, to express the passage of the action from the agent or subject to
the object. This usage is governed by very simple rules. In the Dakota and
Hidatsa the rule prevails, that when two affixed pronouns come together,
the one being in the nominative case and the other in the objective, the
objective always precedes the nominative, as in mayakoga (Dak.) me-
thou-bindest, dimakidéct (Hid.) thee-I-love. In the Dakota the third per-
sonal pronoun is in general not expressed ; kagtd signifies both he binds,
and he binds him, her, or it; wakdcka is I bind, and I bind him, &c. In
the Hidatsa, this pronoun is not expressed in the nominative, but in the
objective it is indicated by the pronoun ?@ prefixed to the verb, as Aidéqi, he
loves ; ikidegi, he loves him, her or it.

The Tutelo, as far as could be ascertained, follows the usage of the Dakota

Hale.] 32 [March 2,

in regard to the third personal pronoun (which is not expressed) but differs
from both the other languages, at least in some instances, in the order of
the pronouns. The nominative affix oc sasionally precedes the objective,
as in MAYrnewa, I-thee-see. Yet in kohinanvwryahewa, me-thou-struckest
(where the pronouns are inserted), this order is reversed. The rule on
which these variations depend was not ascertained, Owing to the diffi-
culties of an inquiry carried on through the medium of a double translation
(from English into Cayuga or Onondaga, and from the latter into Tutelo),
it, was not easy to gain a clear idea of the precise meaning of many of the
examples which were obtained. An Indian when asked to translate ‘I
love thee,” or ‘‘thou lovest me,’’ unless he is an educated man, or per-
fectly familiar with the language in which he is addressed, is apt to become
perplexed, and to reverse the meaning of the pronouns, The following
examples, however, will suffice to show that the system of t ‘ransitions exists
in the Tutelo, though they do not enable us to analyze and reconstruct it
completely. Many other examples were obtained, but are omitted from
a doubt of their correctness,

wakteama, T am killing him

waikteama (for wayikteéma) I am killing thee
mikteoma he is killing me

yakteoma, thou art killing him

kitedvisel, he is killing them

inéwa, he sees him (or he saw him),

minéwa, I see him (qu. minéwa, for ma-tuéwa)
mayinéwa, I see thee

miinéwa, he sees me

ytinéwa, he sees thee

miinéhla, they see me

yandostéka, he loves him

yandomistéeha, he loves me

yandoyistéka, he loves thee

yandowastéka, I love him

yandoyastéka, thou lovest him

yandoyistéka, he loves thee

mankiandostéka (qu. maikiandoyistéka), we love thee
maihiandostekanése, we love them
waiyandosteka, he loves us

watyandoyastéka, thou loved us

yandostekanése, he loves them (or they love him)
yandomistekana, they love me

hohinawrliwa, he struck (or strikes) him
kohinankyihiwa, he struck thee
kohinanmihiwa, he struck me

1883.) 33 [Hale,

kohinanrwahiwa, I struck him
hohinanyahiwa, thou struckest him
kohinanrkwiyahiwa, thou struckest me
kohinaimarkihiwa, we struck him

gikoha (or kikéha), he calls to him
wigikoha, I call to him

waingikoha, (for wayingtkoha), I call to thee
ingukohise (for yingikohase), he calls to thee
ingikopolése, he calls to you

mingikoha, he calls to me

yigikoha, thou callest to him

ingikopua, they call to you

gikohanése, they call to' them

From the foregoing examples it is evident that the system of transitions
in the Tutelo is as complete as in the Dakota and Hidatsa. But there are
apparently some peculiar euphonic changes, and some of the pronouns are
indicated by terminal inflections, particularly in the second person plural
and in the third person singular and plural,

In the Tutelo, as in the Dakota and Hidatsa, substantives and adjectives
are readily converted into neuter verbs by the addition or insertion of the
pronouns and the verbal suffixes. It is in this manner that these languages,
like other Indian tongues, are generally enabled to dispense with the use
of the substantive verb. Thus in the Dakota witgagta, man, by inserting
the pronoun ma, I, becomes wimatgagta or witgamagta, Lam aman, and_by
inserting w% (we) and adding the plural affix pz, becomes wiuh’gagtapi, we
are men. $o also wagle, good, becomes mawagte, I am good, urwugtept, we
are good,

In the Tutelo the word wahtdika, or wahtakai, man, is inflected as follows :

wamihtakat, Tam aman,
waythiakat, thou art a man,
wahtakat, he is a man.
miwamihlakat, we are men.
inwahlavat, ye are men.
hukwahtakai, they are men.

The Jast two forms appear not to be regular, and may have been given
by mistake. ikwahtakai probably means ‘‘all are men,”’
This verb may take the aorist form, as:

wamihtakadwa, I am (or was) & man,
wayihtakdwa, thou art (or wast)''a man.’
wahtakadwa, he is (or was) aman, &e.

So the adjective U%, good, becomes, with the aorist affix wa, léwa, he is
(or was) good; yimbiwa, thou art good; mimliwa, I am good. In the
PROG. AMER. PHILOS. 800. xxT. 114. m. PRINTED MAY 8, 1888,

‘
Hale.] 34 * [March 2,
present tense we have ease, he is good ; ebilése, they are good; and in the

preterit, ebikoa, he was good,
Adwerbs.

In many cases, as has been already shown, the English adverb is indi-
cated in the Tutelo by a modification of the verb. The negative adverb,
for example, is usually expressed in this manner, as indikseha, he is laugh-
ing, kitksehna, he is not laughing ; migitowe, it is mine, kimigitonan, it is
not mine.

Sometimes the meaning which in English would be expressed by an
adverb accompanying a verb, is expressed in Tutelo by two verbs. Thus
we have thoha, she is sewing, apparently from a root tho or yeoho, to sew ;
and koispéwa yeho, she is sewing well, 7. ¢., she is careful in sewing (lit.,
she thinks, or remembers, in sewing) ; Kebina yeho, she is sewing badly,
j. e. she does not wellin sewing (or is not good at sewing). Here kebina is
the negative form of diwa, he (or she) is good.

Prepositions.

Many phrases were obtained witha view of ascertaining the prepositions
of the Tutelo, but without success. Sometimes an expression which in
English requires a preposition would in the Tutelo appear as a distinct
word. Thus, while adi signifies a house, tokai was given as equivalent to
‘in the house.’? It may perhaps simply mean ‘‘at home.’’ Prairie is
lutahkot, but onii signifies ‘‘at the prairie.”

Other examples would seem to show that the prepositions in the Tutelo,
as in the Hidatsa, and to a large extent in the Dakota, are incorporated
with the verb. Thus /ahhat signifies ‘‘woods,’’ and tahhai aginese, he is in
the woods. So sid, hill, and sai aginése, he is on the hill. The phrase
‘‘Tam going to the house’’ was rendered wiléta dati, and the phrase ‘‘T
am coming.from the house,”’ by wakleta tats. The practice of combining
the preposition with the verb is very common in the Indian languages,
which merely carry toa greater extent a familiar usage of the Aryan speech.
The expressions, to ascend or descend a hill, to circumnavigate a lake, to
overhang a fence, to undermine a wall, are examples of an idiom so pre-
valentin the Indian tongues as to supersede not merely the cases of nouns,
but to a large extent the separable prepositions.

Oonjunctions.

In the Tutelo, conjunctions appear to be less frequently used than in
English. An elliptical form of speech is employed, but with no loss of
clearness. The phrase “when I came, he was asleep,”’ is expressed briefly

wihiok, hiaika, I came, he was asleep. So, ‘‘I called the dog, but he did
not come,’’ becomes wagelakiok tgonk, kihiina, I called the dog, he came
not. When it is considered necessary or proper, however, the conjunction
is expressed, as kuminena, mi Jan hinéka, I did not see him, but John saw
him. Here ‘but’’ is expressed by mi.

;
b

a
2

‘
1883,] 35 (Hale.

Nigds signifies ‘‘and,’’ or ‘‘also.”’ Waklumiha lubis nigds masén, I
bought a hat and a knife. Owahioka waktaka nigds mihér nomba lek, 1
met a man and two women.

Li, which expresses ‘‘if,’’ appears to be combined with the verb, at least
in pronunciation ; thus: Lihiohk, wagelagita, If he comes, I will tell him ;
wihita, Jan ihidk, I will come if John comes. It is noticeable'in the last
two examples that the accent or stress of voice in the word lihiok, if he
comes, appears to vary with the position of the word in the sentence.

Syntax.

The only points of interest which were ascertained in regard to the
syntax of the language related to the position of words in a sentence.

The adjective follows the noun which it qualifies, as wahtake bi, good
man, ata aséh, white house. The rule applies to the numerals, as mihdn
nohsa, one woman, ate nonbal, two houses. In this respect the Tutelo
conforms to the rule which prevails in the Dakota and Hidatsa languages,
as well as in the dialects of the Iroquois stock. In the Algonkin lan-
guages, on the other hand, the adjective precedes the noun.

The position of the verb appears to be a matter of indifference. It
sometimes precedes the noun expressing either the subject or the object,
and sometimes follows it, the meaning being determined apparently, as in
Latin, by the inflection... Thus ‘‘I see a man,’’ is minéwa watwag (I see
him aman); and ‘‘the man sees me”’ is méinéwa waiway (he sees me the
man). Teorko mingo, give me a dog ; hité teonki, kill the dog. In the last
example the change from tgowko to tgonki is apparently not a grammatical
inflection, but is merely euphonic. ‘The verb in the imperative mood suffi-
ciently shows the speaker’s meaning, and the position of the noun is a
not a knife ; ‘‘ Ail the dog,’’ don’t

”

matter of emphasis. ‘‘A dog give me,
let him escape.

A verb is placed after another verb to which it bears the relation ex-
pressed by our infinitive ; as mngilogko waktéta, let me kill him (allow
me, I will kill him). Wakonta opéla, I will make him go (I cause him he
will go).

The euphonic changes which words undergo in construction with other
words are as marked in this language as they are in the proper Dakota
tongue, and seem to be often of a similar, if not identical, character in the
two languages. Thus in Dakota the word guika, dog, becomes cuike
when a possessive pronoun is prefixed. In the Tutelo a similar change
takes place when the position of the noun is altered ; thus we have tgomko
mingo, giveme a dog; kité tgonki, killthe dog. The terminal vowel is
frequently dropped, and the consonant preceding it undergoes a change ;
thus in Dakota yuzea, to hold, becomes yus in the phrase yus majin, to
stand holding. In Tutelo nahdmbi (properly nahanbi) or nahabi, day,
becomes nahaimp (or nahap), in nahamp lali (or nahap lali), three days.
In such instances the two words which are thus in construction are pro-
nounced as though they formed a single word,

jor
Hale.) 36 (March 2,

VOCABULARY.

Particular care was taken to obtain, as correctly as possible, all the words
comprised in the comparative vocabulary adopted by Gallatin for his Syn-
opsis of the Indian languages. Many other words, expressive of the most
common objects or actions, have been added. The alphabetical arrange-
ment is adopted for convenience of reference, in lieu of the different order
which Gallatin preferred for the purposes of his work. The.Dakota and
Hidatsa words are derived from the dictionaries of Mr, Riggs and Dr.
Matthews, with the necessary changes of orthography which are required
for the direct comparison of the three languages.

i | When several words are given in the Tutelo list, they are sometimes, as
will be seen, mere variations of pronunciation or of grammatical form, and
i sometimes entirely distinct expressions. The Tutelo has no less than four
| | words for ‘‘man,”’ wahlaka, waiydwa (or watwag) yrkan, and nona, which
have doubtless different shades of meaning, though these were not ascer-
tained. There are also two distinct words meaning ‘to see,’’ inéwa, and
ohata, and two for ‘ go,”’ opéwaand gala (or, rather ope and la, answering
to opa and ya in Dakota). A more complete knowledge of the language
| would doubtless afford the means of discriminating between these appa-
| || rently synonymous terms.

| The words marked N in the vocabulary are those which were received
from Nikonha himself. The pronunciation of these words may be accepted
. || as that of a Tutelo of the full blood, and as affording a test of the correct-
| ness of the others.

"9 } Tutelo, Dakota. Hidatsa,
i | Alive ini, eni, inina ni hiwakatsa
a All hak, hok, okahék iyuqpa qukaheta ; etga,
| And nigas kha; tqa; ufikafi ;
|| nakun iga
| Arm higto (N) histo isto ara
: Arrow mafiksii; mankoi (N) wanhiikpe ita, maita
. |i Ashes alapok tgaqota midiitsapi
| Aunt watemai; tomin tufiwin igami; ika
i Autumn tanyi, tai ptafilyetu mata
Awake kiklése kikta itsi; hidamitats
| Axe nisép (N), hisépi,
| hisép ofispe maiptsa
Bad okayek (N) okayik,
} ukayik Gitga icia
B ii Bag mafiksii ojuha igi
|| Balt tapi tapa méolapi
Berk (n) qapi; yohifik gattha midaigi; qupi (v)
Bear miinti (N) monti,
| mofidi mato daqpitsi

\} Beads watai totodafi akutohi

1883, ]

Boaver
Beard

Bed

Beg

Bird
Bird's nest
Bite off (to)
Black
Blood

Blue

Body

Boil (to)
Bone
Book
Boy

Bow (n)
Brain

Bread

Break (to) with

foot lakatkisisel
Brother rentimpai (CN)
ifiginumbai
Brother, elder
(my) witafisk ; wital ; wa-
hiik
Brother,
younger (my) wisufitk, minon
Buff ulo
Burn (o. a.) inausinga
Bury stuntése
But mi
Buy kilomiha ; yiglu-
mibinta

Call (0. a.)
Canoe

Cat

Cause (0)

Tutelo.

37

Dakota.

yaop (N) munagka tg vpa

yéhi; istihioi

Sasi

oyéndise
mayink
mayefigiégta,
latkiisisel,
asépi, asp (N)
wayl (N)

asoti

tési; yaqtéki

hieha
wahoi, wahii
minagi

wakasik (N); guts-

kai; waitiwa
indsik, indsek (1)
wasodti, wasut
wagesikwai,

sakpai

wak-

putin hin (hin, hair,

igti, underlip)
owinja
da; kida
zitka ; wakifiyanh
hoqgpi
yaksa,
sapa
we
to; sota

taficafi ; (tezi, belly)

ohan ;
hu
wowapi

ipiqya

hokeidahi ; kogké
itazipa ; tinazipe
nasu

aguyapi

naks&

teilye

teifiye ; timdo

misunika

iap; mampafidahkai tatafika ; pte

kikoha; gelaki
mifikolhapi,
kolahapi

pus (N) (i. e. puss)

konta

mefi-

ghu; aghu
ga; huaka
tuka,

opeton

kitgo

wata ; cahwata
inmucuiika (dog-

panther)
etconkiya

(Hale.

Hidatsa.
mirapa

iki (hi, hair)

aduqtipi

kadi

tsakaka

ikigi

adudatsa

cipi

idi

tohi

iqo (titsi,
stout)

midue

hidu

thick,

makadistamatse
itanuqa ; minuga
tsutita

madahapi

anaqoqi

iaka; itanu; itame=
tsa

itametsa ; iaka
matsuka

kedapi ; mite
anaqa

maihu
kikuha (invite)

midaluetsa; mina-
luetsa

Hale.)

Cheek
Cherry
Child

Chop ()
Churn (”)
Clan
Cloud
Club
Cold
Come
Copper
Count ()
Cranberry
Crane
Yrow (n)
Ory ()
Out (v) with
knife

Dance (v)
Darkness
Diuughter (my)

Day

Dead

Deer

Dewil (evil
spirit)

Die

Dog

Drink (0)
Duck

Har
Barth
Eat
Ligg

Hight

ig
38
Tutelo, Dakota,
ukstéh
yosankrota
wakasik; wagots-

tapon, tyoqa

kai (see small) hokgiyopa
lakasase kaksa

mampamasawohdka botgo
oluskése tsake
maqosi (N) maqpiya

yehéti tgan otoza
sani sni

yahtia, howa, hi uwa

penihéi maza
yilanaha yawa,
hohntnk potkafika, potpaiika
kainstakai pehat

kahi untgigitcadan
qaqise tceya
lakatkosa baks&
wagitgi (N), ketgi watei

usihaa, ohsiha
witéka (N), wi-

ohafike, miohafiik mitcutikei
nahambe, nahamp,

nahafipe afipetu, afipé
té, téka ta
witii taqintga

mampa isi wakancitea

té (N), téolaha ta

tcohig (N) tgofigo
tgonki, tgotik

lakpe, lapéte yatkan

igtai (N), heistafi,
manéaséi (see
Goose)

gunka,

naqoq (N), nahth noghe; nakpa

amani, amai maka
lati yuta
mayitik pos (see

Bird) witka,
palan (N) palani,

palali gadoghan

okpaza (han, night)

maghaksitga ; skiska,

[March 2,

Hidatsa.

teatipa, kakafipidan matsu

daka; makadigta
naktsuki

tsakaka itsi
midakaza titsi
tsinie

hu
netsahigi¢i

opitsa
pedetska
imia

naktstki

kidigi
oktsi; tatsi

maka
mape

te
teitattki
te
maguka
hi; minhi
miqaka
akuqi
ama

duti (nuti)

tsakakadaki

nopapi

1883, ]

Highteen
Kleven
Hivening

Kye

Face

Hather
Fifteen
Hinger
Pinger-nails
Fire

Fish

Pive

Mesh

Hog
Food
Hoot
Forehead
Forest
Four

Fourteen
Fou
Briend

Ghost
Girl

Go
God
Good

Goose
Grandfather
Grandmother
Grass

Great
Green

Tutelo.

39

Dakota.

agepalali, akipalani ake gadoghat

agenosai, akinosai

osihitewa (see Dark-

ness, Night)
tasui, tasiiye (N)

ake wanjidan

qayetu

(mentasiii, my e.) igta

talikna ; tarubna

(mentmloken, my f.)ite ; itohnake
“Ati; tat CN); yat CN) ate

agegisai, akekisai
hak (see Hand)
tsuteaki, teutgag
pite (N) peti, petg
wihoi (NX)

kaca (N) kisé, kisah,

kisahi, kisshéni

wayuqtéki, waytq-

tik
manotibtia
waliiti
igi (N) isi
tikdi ; pania minte
tahkai

top GN), topa, topai,

toba
agetoba, akitopa
tohkai
witaihe, witaqa

wantint¢i

wigate(N) wakasik;

kémqan (N)

opewa ; qala; la
éifigyen, cig’

ebi (N), bi, pi, ipl,

biwa
manéasain
ekufi, higth
higin

siinktaki (IN), muk-

tigi; otdi
iti CN), tan
ot6 (nN), otolakoi

ake-zaptan )
nape

gake

peta
hoghan

zaptan

teeqpi; tgonitga

opo
woyute
siha

ite
tcontanka

topa

ake-topa
eufigidan
koda ; kitguwa
wanaghi

witgihyanna

ya; opa
wakantanku

wagte ; pi (obsolete)

magha
tufikancidan
kufisitku ; untgi

peji
tafika
to

| Hale.

Hidatsa,
aqpidopapi
aqpiduetsa

oktsiade

igta,

ite

ate ; tatig
aqpikiqu
cakiadutsamihe
gakiigpu

mua
kiqu

iduk citi
pue
maduti
itsi

iqi

topa

aqpitopa
iqoka

idakoe ; iko’ pa

nokidaqi

makadigtamia ;
miakaza

nakon ; ne; kaua

daqi, naqi (spirit)

tsaiki
mina
adutaka
iku

mika’
iqtia
tohiga

Hale.)

Gun

FTaat
Hair

Hand
FTandsome

Hane

Fat
Hatchet
ITe

Head
Heart
Here

TTim
Himself
House
How many
Hundred
Hunger (”)

Husband

d

T alone or Imy-
self

Ice

If

Indian

Iron

Island

Kettle
Kil
Knife

Lake
Land

Laugh
Leaf

. otdi, otdg CN)

40

Tutelo, Dakota.
minkté (nN) mazakan
nog wasul
naté6nwe(N), nantdi,

nat6i nati; hin

hag (N), haiki, 4k nape (cake,
finger-nail)

piré (N), ipi, ipikam
(see good)

tahofitanéki tifl-mactifitea

lubiis ; kotubés (N) wapaha

(see aae)

im, i ig, iye

pastiye (N), pasti pa

yanti (Nn), yanti; tapi tcante (tapi, liver)

nei den, detu

e, el, i iye, ig

eshi, ishifi iye, ig

ati (N) tipi

tokénun tona, tonaka

ukeni, okeni opawihghe

kibnindewa wotektehda (hun-
gry)

manki hihna

ma, mi, mim mig, miye
miséni, misi
nohihi; mifigirateah tevgha
li kitthanh
wahtakai (man)
mais, mas, ma-

iktgewiteasta

siqorak mazasapa,
histék, sték, stes-

téki wita
yesinik teegha

kité (N), kté, kitése kte, kata
mas¢hi, maséi, ma-
sii (N) masa isan

(see Sea)

(see Harth)

inks6ha, iikeé (N) iga

ape; wapa

owathyag waste

miye, mig, mignana

(March 2,

Midatsa, |

ma’ kiqpitami
ana; hi \
aki

taki

apoka

i, ge

atu

na’ ta (apiga, liver)
i

iqki

ati

tuami, tuaka

pitikiqtia

aniiti (hungry)
kida, kina

ma, mi

miqki, mitsalki
mantqi

amakanoqgpaka,

uetsa

miduqga
ta, kitahe

maetsi

ka’
midapa.

1883.]

Leg

Tong

Love
Maize

Make
Man

Marry
Me
Meet
Mine
Moon

Morning

Mother
Mountain
Mouth
Myself

Near
Neck

Night
Nine

Nineteen
No
None

Oak

Ola
One

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xxt. 114. ¥.

41

Tutelo Dakota,
yeks& (N), icksa,

yeksai; mini (my

leg) idiki or iniki

yapéske (N) sui;

(Hale.

Hidatsa,

yumpankatska hafiska hatski; (tsua, nar.
row)

yandowasteka wactedaka kidégi
mandagéi, malagé

(yy) wamnaheza kohati
adma, adn uh. he, hini
wahtahka, waiyua

(y), waiytiwa,

waiwaq; yuhkan,

nona witgagta matse, itaka, i-

kaka

ohdén, ohdteha ota ahu
mi, wi ma, mi mi
oaki akipa uzia
migitowe mitawa matawae
minos&’ (N), mi-

mahéi (see Sun) hanhyetu-wi makumidi
kanahampuai, kana-

habnen (see Day) hafthaiina ata
ind (nN), hena, henthi ina hidu
ciige, stihi; oheki qe; paha amaqami
ihi, ih (N) i i
(see ‘‘Talone’’)
inktéi, Askai kiyedanh atsa
taséi, mintaséi (my

ny) tahu ; dote ampa
usi, Osi hafi ; hafiyetu oktsi
tsaen or tea CN), a,

san, ksaink; ksa-

kai, kasaikai naptcinwafka nuetsapi
agekisanika ufima-naptcinwafika agpi-nuetsapi
yahan, ihao hiya desa ; nesa
paqté, paqti poghe apa

tiskahdoi, taskahti
(N)

hoakai, hohka kan
nohg (N), nofis,

nosai, notisa wahji, satini

midakamiqka
qe, qie

nuetsa

PRINTED MAY 8, 1883.

Hale.)

Ours
Ourselves

Partridge
Pigeon
Pine-tree

Pipe

Pound ()
Prairie
Rain

Raspberry
Red

Remember
Riwer
Run (»)

Say (wv)
Sea

See (v)
Seven

Seventeen
Sew (v)
Shoes

Shoot off (v)
Sick
Sing (v)

Sister

Sit
Sia

Sixteen
Sky

42

[March 2,

Tutelo, Dakota, Hidatsa,
maqgitowe ufikitawa matawae
maesaéi, maesfni midohi
wustetkai zitga
maylitkai, waydtkai wakiyedafi
wasti, waste (N) wazi matsi
yehfiistik (x),’ ihir-

tik, ihetistek (qu,
“mouth-stone’’) tgotatika; tgatidu- :
i hupa ikipi
pahe apa pa
latahkoi titta amaadatsa, teduti
qawoi (N), qawoqa,
hawoha, qaw6d maghaju qade
hasisiai takafihetga
atsiti, ateuti, atgit duta (scarlet), oa :
(red) higi
kofispéwa kiksuya
taksita, taksitai wakpa ; watpa azi
hinda, hanté (N) inyanhka tinie
hahéwa (see Speak) eya idé

yetani, yetai, iétai mde (lake); mini-
waritca (onewater) minfiqtia (great

water)

ohata, inéwa, wa- tofiwafi; wafiyaka ;

qéta wanhhdaka ika ; atsiga
sagém (N), sagoméi,

sagomink gakowin gapua
agesagomi ake-cakowin. aqpigapua
ihoha kagheghe ; ipasisa kikaki

handisonoi (N), an-

gohléi, agore,

agodée tcatihafipa
opatatisel bopota
waginoma yazan,

yamiufiiye (N) dowafi; ahiyaya

hupa ; itapa

iqoade

minék (N), tahafik tawinoqtin; tafika,

tanku
mahananka iyotankea
agus (N), akd&sp,
akaspei gakpe
agegaspe akecakpe
mafitdi, matoni,

matoi maqpiya to

inu, itaku, igami
amaki

akama,
aqpiakama

apaqi

1888.) 43 [Hale.

Tutelo, Dakota, Hidatsa,
Sleep (0) hiyifi (nN); hianta,
hiantkapewa igtifima hami, hinami
Small kute¢kai (nN), kittskai,
kotskai teistifina ; tgikadan ;
nigkodah karigta
Snake waigeni wah; wamdugka mapokga
Son witéka (N), tékai;
qiitgkai(see|Small) tginktai (kocké,
young man) idigi
Speak niga (N), sahéfita,
sahita, hahéwa,
oaklaka ia; yaotanin idé, iné
Spring (n) wehahempéi, weha-
éhimpé; maste wetu (magté, warm)
Squirrel nistaqkai tagnahetea; hetk-
. _ adani; zige
Stamp (e)
with foot nankédkisek natata, natatitan
Star tabunitekai (N), tap-
nifiskai witganiqpt i¢ka
Stay (») nafika (see Sit) yanka daka
Steal manoh, manoma manon agadi
Stone histéki, nisték (N) ifiyat mi’
Strawberry haspahinuk wajugtetca amudqoka
Strike kohintnhiwa apa, kactaka
Strong itai; soti; wayupaki suta; waq’aka itsii
Summer ~ wéhé piwa (see
Spring) mdoketu ade, mande
Sun mie or min (N), mi
(see Moon) wi midi
Sweep (0) lakaplék kahifita
Ten . potsk (N), putsk;
butg¢k, putskai,
putskani wiktgemna pitika
That yukan; néikifi ka, kofi ku
Thee hi, yi ni ni
Their gitonnésel tawapi itamae
There kowai hetgi; heii; ka; kafiki hidikoa; kuadi;
gekoa
They imahese iyepi i
Thine yifigitowe nitawa nitawae
Thirteen agelali » ake-yamni aqpinami

Thirty puteka nani wiktcemna yamni.. damia-pitika

Hale,]

This
Think
Thow
Thousand

Three
Thunder
Thyself
Tie (v)
Tobacco
To-day

Toes
To-morrow

Tongue
Tooth
Town
Tree

Turkey
Twelve

Twenty
Two

Ugly
Uncle (my)
Us

Valley

Walk (v)
Warm
Warrior

Water
We

Weave
Weep
Which

Tutelo,
néke, néikii

opemiha; kofispéwa ecifi ; epca

yim, ya, ye

okeni butskai, ukeni

mbutskai
nan (N) nani, Jat, ani
tii; tihangria
yisii, yesaii
olohi
yéhni, yihnt
nahamblekéni (see
Day)

atkasusai

nahampk (see Zo-
day)

neti, netsi, letci

ihi (Ny)

mampi, mambi

oni; wid (iN) miéi
(see Wood)

maéandahkaéi, main-
duhkai

agenomba,

putska nomba
nomp (N) nomba

ukayik (see Bad)
minék’
mae, wae

ofqyay ti

yaléwa (see Go)
akateka, akatia
6rutaofie

mani (N)

mim, mae, wae,
maf, maes4fi

ahktaka

gqaka

é6tuk

What is that? kakaiiwa

44 (March 2,

Hidatsa,
hidi; hini
idie ; inie

Dakota,

de; deteedah

nig, ya, ye na, ni

kektopawiighe pitikiqtia akakodi |
yamni nami, nawi

oti. tahu

niye, ni¢ niqki

iyakacka; paqta dutskiti

teandi ope

etgin; nakaha ; af.
petu kit de hini-mape
siyukaja ; sipitikpa itsiadutsamihe

heyaketcifikan ataduk, ataruk

tgoji dezi (nezi)
hi i, hi
otoiiwe ati, ati alu

teat mina (wood)

zitea tanka

ake-nofipa agpidopa (agpi-

nopa)

wiktcemna nofipa nopapitika
nofipa nopa, dopa
owahyaq sitca icia
midekgi; ate (father) ate ; itadu
un mido, wiro
kaksiza ; teokan. amaqaktupi
mani dide

kata ; tgoza; magte ade
akitcita; mdeta-

huiika akimakikua
mini mini, midi
ut.
' yafika ; kazofita
teoya imia
tukte ' ‘tapa

taku (hat) tapa

1883.)

When

Where
White

Who
Whose
Wife

Wind

Winter
Wolf

Woman

Wood
Wor’ (v)

Ye

Yellow
Yes
Yesterday

Young
Your (pl)

45

Tutelo. Dakota.
tokénaq tohifini ; kehan
‘
toka toki, tokiya

astii (N), asafi,
asai, asei safi; ska
ketoa, hetoa tuwe
tewakiitawa tuwetawa
(same as Woman)
mihani
maninikié (N), mam-
tnkléi, maminkre,

tawitgu

omakléwa tate
wanehi, wanéi wani, waniyetu
mifiiktagin (N),

mitnktokai, mak-

tukat cuiiktoketga
mihéfii, mihafi (N),
mahéi winohintea, wifiyat
miyefii, midi, miyéi tgah
oknaho qtani
yim (see Thou) niyepi
sii vAl
ahd, ahafi, awaga hai; ho
sitd qtanihan
yénki askatudah wota

yifigitambui nitawapi

(Hale.

Hidatsa,
tuakaduk ; tuaka-
cedu
torn, toka

atiki; oqati
tape
tapeitamae

itadamia ; ua

hutsi
mana; tsinie (cold)

motsa ; tgega

mia
mina
dahe ; kikga

dido; niro

tsi

é

hudigedu; huri-
geru

Stated Meeting, April 20, 1883.

Present, 12 members.

President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

Mr. Claypole was introduced and took his seat.
A photograph of Prof. G. H. Cook was presented for the

Album,

Prof, P. E. Chase accepted his appointment to prepare an
obituary notice of Daniel B. Smith.
Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Tolland

[ Continued on page 48.]

Hale,]

{March 2,

I

I

ix

20°
Ne \ ostewan
™ ial oe Ry
AY
{ wef WY
i: ys a
3 aa a/
\ AHAS | -~ w .
1OWAS NR a OTTAWAS
wnt S =
rie oaks (
MINITAREES led }\4% 4
OR ti y Sali
HI DATSAS Pe
\ ; —
MANDANS ine:
\' Ay
‘ WEAS Ry MIAMAS
ee a Pei ‘ SS
—\ OTOES Sour & i BS
sp eal ILLINOIS on ‘
: SHAWNEES
a OSAGES
|
j Leader i
$7 rigk-
ae
QUAPPAS
CHICASAS
LY Curttesye, A OKEES
af
, if CHOCTAWS
L
ae
a

1883. ] 47 [Hale.

\GANTENG)s)

MASSACHUSETT:

neta!
oe

4 ie
Sees:
: bat — aa
Ma iit ea A Skelih Map /
4 2) Mag Re by dhowing the stations § direchon
iGo of the
Futelo Migrations
between’
Aoaliotale.

Proce, Amer. Phil. oc. 4853,

48 [April 20,

Society (110, 111); the Fondation Teyler (111); and the Sta-
tistical Society of London (110, 111).

Letters of envoy were received from the Trigonometrical
Survey of India, March 13th; the Central Observatory and
the Botanic Garden at St. Petersburgh; the Musée Guimét;
and the Meteorological Observatory at Cordoba, S. A.

Donations for the Library were received from the Royal
Academy at Rome; the Société de Géographie; the Revista
Euskara; London Nature; the Canadian Naturalist; Boston
Natural History Society; Mr. J. R. Stanwood, Boston; Mr. 8.
A. Green, Groton; the Pennsylvania Iistorical Society; Phar-
maceutical Association; Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr.; Mr. Albert
S. Gatschet ; Prof. H. Carvill Lewis; the U.S. Museum; U.
8. Fish Commission; Mr. A. G. Bell; the American Antiqua-
rian; University of Michigan; and Argentine Observatory.

The death of Jos. J. Lewis, of Westchester, April 6, aged 81,
was announced by Mr, Fraley.

Prof. H. 8. Williams of Cornell University, communicated
a paper “On a Crinoid with movable spines,” through Prof.
Claypole, who explained the subject.

Prof. Claypole described a downthrow fault of 8500 feet,
South of New Bloomfield, Perry county, Pa., and showed how
the errors in the colored geological map of that county should
be corrected,

Pending nominations, Nos. 979, 981 to 985 were read, and
Nos. 979, 981 to 983 were balloted for.

Proceedings of the Society from 1744 to 1837, as condensed
by the Librarian, were ordered to be printed, on the recom-
mendation of the Committee of Five, the report of which was
presented by Mr. Phillips, with estimates of cost, &. On mo-
tion of Mr. Phillips the Secretaries were authorized to publish
in fac simile the letter of Franklin, 1774, with which the
records commence.

Mr. Fraley reported that he had received and paid over to
the Treasurer $132.48, being the interest on the Michaux
French rentes, due April 1.

On examination of the ballot boxes by the presiding officer,

1883,] 49 (Crane.

the following persons were declared to be duly elected mem-
bers of tha Society :—

Prof. Angelo Heilprin, of Philadelphia.

Mr. Ambrose H. Lehman, of Philadelphia.

Mr. Dillwyn Parrish, of Philadelphia.

’
Mr. Phillip C. Garrett, of Germantown, Philadelphia.

Mr. Blisha Kent Kane, C. E., of Philadelphia,

And the meeting was adjourned.

Mediavat Sermon-Books and Stories. By Professor T. F. Grane, of Ithaca,
New York.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 16, 1883.)

It is the object of this article to direct attention to an important source
of medimval history which has long remained neglected. We allude
to the great collections of stories made chiefly for the use of preachers,
which, besides giving a picture of the culture of the later middle ages,
such as can nowhere else be found, throw a flood of light upon the diffusion
of popular tales.* Before considering these specific works, we shall ex-
amine briefly several other collections, also having a moral scope, but in-
tended for the edification of: the general reader. From the present article
are excluded the Western translations of Oriental story-books, even where
they approach the specifically Christian collections as closely as does the
Disciplina Olericatis of Petrus Alfonsi.}

Until the beginning of the twelfth century, the literature of the class to
which the adjective entertaining may be applied, was almost exclusively
Christian andlegendary. There still survived, it is true, historical and myth-
Ological reminiscences of the classical period, but these secular elements

* Thomas Wright, Latin Stories (Perey Society, Vol. viii), pp. vii-viil, first, to
our knowledge, called attention to this subject. See also K. Goedeke, Hvery
Man, Homulus und Hekastus, Hanover, 1864, p. viii; and Orient und Occident,
Hine Vierteljahrsschrist, herausgegeben von T. Benfey, i, p. 5381 (Asinus vulgi).

t The literature of the subject will be mentioned passim, but a few recent
works of general interest may be noticed now, and hereafter they will be cited
by the authors’ names alone. A. Lecoy de la Marche, La Ohaire francaise du
moyen dge, spécialement au treizieme siecle, Vapres les manuserits contemporains,
Owvrage couronné par v Académie des Inscriptions et Belles Lettres. Paris, 1868 ;
L. Bourgain, La Ohaire frangaise au XLIe sidcle, W@aprds les manuscrits, Paris,
1879; R. Cruel, Geschichte der deutschen Predigt im Mittelalter, Detmold, 1879,
A good survey of the French field will be found in ©. Aubertin, Histoire dela
Langue et dela Littérature Jrangaise au moyen dge, Paris, 1876-1878, Vol. ti, pp.
296-386, and a review of Lecoy de la Marche’s work may be found in the Revue
des deux Mondes, 15. Aug., 1869, Les Sermons du Moyen Age, by Aubry-Vitet,

PROO. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XxI. 114. G4. PRINTED MAy 9, 1883.

Crane.) 50 [March 16,

were swallowed up in the vast legendary cycles of the Churen.* This
slender stream, was, however, about the time of the Crusades, swollen by
a torrent of Oriental fables and stories, which maintained their supremacy
in the learned world until the Revival of Letters, and then became the
cherished patrimony of the illiterate classes, and still delight the people of
all Europe.} The influence of this Oriental element upon the literature of
the West was profound, affecting its form, and contributing a mass of en-
tertaining tales which owe their diffusion and popularity largely to their
absorption into the various later Occidental story-books. The literature of
which we are speaking would have remained unknown to the people, had
they been compelled to make its acquaintance by reading, Fortunately,
there existed an ecclesiastical channel by which some scanty rills of a
literature not exclusively ecclesiastical trickled among the people, and this
channel, curiously enough, was the pulpit. The origin, mode, and matter
of this oral diffusion will constitute the subject of the present article,
after the ground has been cleared by a rapid survey of three characteristic
works which form a group by themselves. :

The method of instruction by figures, parables, apologues and the like, is
too old to be referred to Christian symbolization of classic mythological
elements.{ This undoubtedly gave a specific development to the existing
tendency, and resulted in the mediwval bestiaires and lapidatres. ‘The em-
ployment of fables for serious didactic purposes is also Oriental, and all
students of later medieval literature know the vast influence of the Pant-
schatantra in its various versions. The earliest one which could have any
influence on the Orient was the Latin translation by Johannes de Capua,
Directorium humane vite, made between 1268-78, and based on the Hebrew
version of Rabbi Joel (1250). The so-called Egsopian fables were preserved
in the paraphrase of Romulus, the existence of which as early as the tenth
century has been clearly proved by Oesterley.§ It is all the stranger, then,
that the earliest distinctively medieval collection of fables shows no traces
of a specific Oriental or classic influence—we refer to the Speculum Sapien-

* For the popularity of Valerius Maximus, to which we shall later recur, see
Kempf’s edition, Berlin, 1854, pp. 47 et seq., and for mythological reminiscences
in the poems of the Troubadours, see Diez, Die Poesie der Troubadours, Zwickau,
1826, pp. 127, 140, and Birch-Hirschfeld, Veber die den provenzalischen Tr oubadours
des XIT. und XTIT. Jahrhunderts bekannten Hpischen Stoffe, Walle, 1878, ad init.

+It is not true that Oriental fiction was introduced into Europe by the Cru-
sades; not only had the transmission been going on at a much earlier date (see
Benfey’s Pantschatantra, Leipzig, 1859, Vol. i, p. xxii), bub the earliest Oriental
collection, the Disciplina Clericatis of Petrus Alfonsi,was probably written before
the first Crusade, quite certainly before 1106, the date of the Jewish author’s con-
version to Christianity.

{ See Bartoli, Storia della letteratura italiana, Florence, 1878, Vol. i, p. 83, who
attributes the above origin to the medizval moralizations, We are more in-
clined to trace it to the influence of the Orient,

Romulus: Die Paraphrasen des Phedrus und die Aisopische Fabel im Mit-
telalter, von H. Oesterley, Berlin, 1870,

1883, ] 51 [Crane,

tiae attributed to a certain Bishop Cyril.* Who Bishop Cyril was is not
known, and Grasse. is compelled to refer the work to a certain Cyrillus
de Quidenon poéta laureatus, » Neapolitan from Quidone, a small town
in the province of Capitanata, in the kingdom of Naples, who flourished
in the XIII century. He was a learned theologian, as Greesse remarks,
who has taken the trouble to note the numerous passages cited from the
Bible, and he was also an acute scholastic philosopher. He was not
acquainted. with Alsop, and from a remark he makes in Book I, cap. 18.
it is evident he knew no Greck. His work is of little importance for
the history of medieval fiction, for it exerted not the slightest influ.
ence.} It is, however, interesting in itself, and was translated into Ger-

5

man, Spanish, and Bohemian. The author, ii the prologue, makes an
elaborate apology for the form of his work. This is so characteristic of this
Class of writings that we quote a few lines which may also give some idea
of the author’s extraordinary style. He says: ‘‘Secundum Aristotelis sen-
tentiam in Problematibus suis quamquam in exemplis in discendo gaudeant.
omnes, in disciplinis moralibus hoe tamen amplius placet, quoniam struc-
tura morum ceu ymagine picta rerum similtudinibus paulatim virtutis osten-
ditur, eo quod ex rebus naturalibus, animalibus, moribus et proprietatibus
rerum quasi de vivis imaginibus humans vite: qualitas exemplatur. Totus
etenim mundus visibilis est schola et rationibus sapientix plena sunt omnia.
Propter hoe, fili carissime, informativa juventatis tue documenta moralia
hon de nostra paupertate stillantia sed de vena magistrorum tibi nunc
scribere cupientes cum adjutorio gratiz Dei ea trademus, ut intelligas
Clarius ac addiscas facilius, gustes suavius, reminiscaris tenacius per fabulas
figurarum.’? A glance at the contents of the book will show that the
learned author was more concerned with the moral of his fables than with
the fables themselves.{ No attention, except in a few rare cases, is paid to
the nature of the animals brought upon the scene, and they are made to
utter the most arbitrary and incongruous lessons. <A translation of one of

* This Singular work has recently been made accessible to scholars by the edi-
tion in the Bibliothek des literarischen Vereins in Stuttgart, Bd. 148, Die beiden
aeltesten lateinischen Fabelbiicher des Mittela rs, des Bischofs Oyrillus Specu-
lum Sapientiae und des Nicholaus Pergamenus Dialogus Creaturarum, herausge-
gebenvon Dr. J. OC. Th. Grosse, The full title is: Speculum Sapientiae Beati Cirilli
Episcopi, alias Quadripartitus Apologeticus vocatus, in cujus quidem Proverbiis
omnis et totius Sapientiae Speculum claret, The book had become very rare and
was known chiefly from an old German translation, selections from which
were published as late as 1782: Fabeln nach D. FTolizmann, herausgegeben von
A, Gl, Meissner, Leipzig. 4to, Gresse has given in his edition, pp. 285-302,
all the necessary biographical and bibliographical notices,

} Greosse, ed, cit., p. 291, says, ‘‘Im Mittelalter selbst kann er von seinen Zeitge-
nossen nicht benutzt worden sein, denn ich habe nirgendswo in den aus dem

13.-16, Jahrhundert erhaltenen Schriften sein Werk citirt oder benutzt gefun-
den,”

t In this respect there isa regular gradation in the three works now under
consideration, In the Speculum Sapientie the moral is the all-important thing,
in the Dialogus Creaturarum the fable becomes more attractive, while in the
Gesta Romanorum the story is everything, and the moralization is tacked on
merely to justi fy a sometimes very loose anecdote,

Crane.) 52 {March 16,
Cyril’s apologues will be the hest illustration of his peculiarities. We have
selected one of the shortest, which is introduced by the sentence, Uni dilec-
tissimo tantum, cum necesse fuerit, pectus erede. The Raven and the Dove,
Book I, cap. 20. ‘ While a raven was ruminating in his mind to whom he
could occasionally communicate the secret of his heart, a dove beholding
him thinking these things, approached him, saying: ‘What art thou think-
ing, brother, in such deep meditation? To whom he replied: ‘ Verily, I am
now thinking that infinite is the number of fools and small indeed that of
the wise, for the thought of the heart, itself is most secret. For who reveals
What, therefore, art thou, that I may
give and entrust to thee my heart so precious to me, my most hidden life,
my very inmost substance, the most gecret root of my being? My secret is
mine, because my heart is mine!’ Then the dove, having heard these
things, added: ‘I know, indeed, that thouart cunning by nature. ‘Where-
fore I ask thee, brother, to instruct me, to how many and to whom, if it be
necessary, I may safely entrust my heart at times.’ He soon consenting,
willingly said: ‘Forsooth, either to one or to none, for perfect faith is sel-
dom found. This, however, is made a very precious vase, for in it the heart
is advantageously preserved, because neither of itself is it ever destoyed,
nor broken by the sword or other thing, nor is its wonderful solidity trans-
fixed by the most subtle sting of heat. For nature hides the vein of gold
in the secret places of the earth, and the plant strikes its quickening root
deep in the solid ground, Thus the most precious marrow is hidden in the
bones, and God has placed the ice-like gem of sight under the hemispheres
of seven veils. No wonder then that the mouth of the wise is hidden in

since this is to him most dear, that thus it may be concealed
art of the

what he thinks, shows his heart.

his heart,
and, possessed by the heart, hidden in the ark of life, But the he
foolis in his mouth, because the mouth rules his heart, and having an open
breast despising the heart, it is easily cast forth by a slight breath, where-
fore he quickly perishes, since for nothing he casts away the vein of life.’
After she had diligently noted these things, the dove thus instructed de-
parted.’’

The Speculum Saptentiae, as we have alre
the history of medieval fiction or the diffusion of popular tales. Scarcely
a thing to which the adjective fabulous will apply, is to be found in the
work. Grasse mentions only the story of Gyges (iii, 4), the Indian gold
mountains (iii, 10), and the death of the viper (iii, 26; iv, 8, 10), which is
found in all the bestiaires.* Cyril does not seem to be acquainted with
Aesop, although the fourth chapter of the first book, De cicada et formica
is Esopian. There are also some fox fables (ec. g. i, 24) which resemble
some of the episodes of the Roman du Renart, and a number of the fables
a certain similarity to those in well-known collections.+

ady said, is of little value for

have
* See, for example, Dr, G. Heider, Physiologus, Wien, 1851, p. 28, and the Bestiaire

de Gervaise in the Romania, i, p. 420, et seq., verse 501,

1 references, p. 201, are full of errors: La Fontaine i, 1, = Oyril 1, 4 ;

+ Greesse
5 (the fox praises the singing of the cock, who

i, 20 = fi, 14 (ep. ili, 13); 1, 2= Hi, 1

i 6
1883.] 53 : [Crane,

Of much greater literary interest, although by no means so profound or
original, is the Dialogus Oreaturarum of an otherwise unknown author,
Nicolaus Pergamenus.* The form of this work closely resembles that of
the Speculum Sapientiae ; there is the same apologetic prologue, and the
same arbitrary treatment of the subject, but already the desire to interest
has assumed prominence, and the fable proper is followed by a mass of
sentences, anecdotes, &c. The work contains one hundred and twenty-
two dialogues not divided into books. The work, as Greesse (p. 808) shows,
cannot be earlier than the middle of the XIV century. The writer, as a
glance at the list of authors cited will show, was familiar with the whole
range of medieval literature, including the classic authors popular at that
time.| He does not seem any more acquainted than Cyril with the great
Oriental collections of fables as such, although separate fables from the
Pantschatantra may have reached him through western channels, as Greesse
States, p. 804. Instead of the half dozen fables in Cyril’s work which
may be compared with those of other collections, Nicolaus Pergamenus
offers a rich field for the student of comparative storiology, if we may coin
& convenient word. The absorption of Oriental elements into literature
from oral tradition had already begun, and from literature, as we shall see
later on in this article, these elements were to return again to the people, and
thus the process was to be repeated over and over again until we are no

longer surprised at the marvelous diffusion of medieval stories.§ An English

thereupon descends from the tree and is devoured); vii, 12 = fii, 4; 111,17 = ili, 11.
His other references are incorrect, We have noticed the following: La Fontaine.
14):10 as i, 18, 16 (slightly); Ui, 11 == 1.18; ix. 4=1i, 14 (ep, ili, 18). The edition of La
Fontaine cited in this article is, Fables inédites des XIIe, XITTIe et XIV sidcles,
et Fables de La Fontaine rapprochées de celles de tous les auteurs qui avoient,
vant lui traité les memes sujets, précédées dune notice sur les Fabulistes, par A,
LOR Robert, 2 vols., Paris, 1825. This edition will be hereafter cited as Robert,
Fables inédites, or La Fontaine,

* This work is reprinted in Vol. 148 of the Stuttgart Litt. Vereins, mentioned
above,

} The list given by Grasse, p. 281, needs careful revision, The following are
Some of the most necessary corrections: Alfonsus (that is Petrus Alfonsi Dis-
ciplina Olericalis), De Prudentia, 122, add 56; add Catholicon 90; add Nugis
Phitosophorum, 23,115; add Martialis, 108 (instead of 109),

wil hig may perhaps be noted here that La Fontaine’s well-knowh fable of La La-
tere et le Pot au Laat is found in the Dialogus Cre ¢. 100. Max Muller (Chips.,
iv, 170) gives the old English translation of this version, and says: ‘In it, as far
as I can find, the milkmaid appears for the first time on the stage,” &c, The
version in Jacques de Vitry and Etienne de Bourbon, which will be mentioned
later, must be both of them earlier, or as early, and it is probable that in this
Case, As in so many others, Jacques de Vitry introduced the fable to Hurope. A
Pleasant account of the fortunes of this fable may be tound in ZZistoire de deux
Fables de La Fontaine, leur origines et leurs Pérégrinations, par A, Joly, Pa
1877. The other fable is vii, 1, Les Animaux malades de la Peste.

,

@The tollowing corrections and additions to Greesse’s reterences, p. 304, will
be of use tothe student, Keferences XX XI, XXXIV, and XLVI belong to XXX,
XXXIV ana XLVII, respectively; add XLII, Pauli, 256; the references to

XXXVI and XL ave incorrect ; of the various references given to XLVI (should

Crane.] 54 [March 16,

translation of the Dial. Oreat. was published about 1517 and reprinted in
a limited edition in 1816. é

The third work to be mentioned in this connection is the well known
Gesta Romanorum. We do not propose in this limited space to approach
the still vexed question of the date and nationality of this famous work.*
Its importance is not great in the abstract, the number of stories valuable
for the Oulturgeschichte of the middle ages is small, but the part the work
has played in the transmission of a vast body of classical and Oriental tales
is enormous. Already the morality has been swallowed up in the story,
and the aim is to amuse under the pretext of instruction. Other similar
collections will be noticed, later out-growths of the homiletic compilations,
but the Gesta Romanorwn stands alone, an independent and original col-
lection, the earliest. Occidental effort to throw off the shackles of purely
ecclesiastical entertaining literature, The three collections which we have
just briefly considered are the only ones intended for the edification of the
general reader, and it is only the third which reveals a growing taste that
before long was satisfied by Boccaccio and the French fabliaua, or by
such purely secular collections as the Italian Cento Novelle antiche. The
mass of material at the disposal of the collector in the XIII and XTV cen-
turies was enormous, besides the vast compilations of legends in the Vitae
Patrum and Legenda Aurea, there were the relics of classical lore, and the
new flood of Oriental fiction, both written and oral. In addition to all
this, a tendency now shows itself to collect anecdotes, etc., of famous
contemporaries. Much of the above material would have perished, and
certainly the circle of its influence would have been comparatively nar-
row, had not a new need made itself felt, and a new market, so to speak,
been opened for these wares.

The duty of public preaching, which, at first was reserved for the
bishops, was extended later to the priests, but it was for a long time a
privilege jealously guarded and restricted to comparatively few. The

be XLVI) La Fontaine, vii, 16, is alone correct; to LXX XIX add Gesta Rom., 29;
to XCIII, Schluss, add Gesta Rom., 103; the references to C are to three different
stories: I “Birdin the hand,” Gesta Rom., 467; Kirehhof, iv, 34; If “Dog let-
ting go meat for reflection in water,” Pauli, 426; LIL “La Laitiere et le Pot au
Lait,” La Fontaine, vii, 10, Kirchhof, i, 171; the reference to Cl. Glesta Rom,, 108,
is incorrect; both references to CVI are incorrect; of those to OCVIII, Gesta
Rom., 140, is incorrect, as is also La Fontaine, v, 21; to CX (cp, xliv), La Fon-
taine, iii, 9,is incorrect; CXII contains two fables: 1 ‘ Colombe et Milvi,” and
IL ‘Town and Country Mice,” tol belongs Kirehhof, 7, 146, to If Kirchhof, 1,
62, and La Fontaine, i, 9, erroneously reterred to CXIIL; to CX VIL add La Fon-
taine, iii,9; to OX VIII, Gesta Rom., 63, instead of 52, other references are incor-
rect; finally to OXX11 add Petrus Alfonsi, p. 83, ed. Schmidt, and Glesta Rom.,, 31,

*Jt should seem that little remained to be done after Hermann Oesterley’s
masterly edition (Berlin, 1872), but the results of his painstaking investigations
are chiefly negative. It may be impossible to determine its nationality, but it
seems as if more light might be thrown on its age and mode of compilation.
The results of Oesterley’s studies are given to the English reader in the Intro-
duction to the Karly English Versions of the Gesta Romunorum (Karly Kng-
lish Text Soc. Extra Series, xxxili, 1879).

1883, ] 5 5 (Crane,

foundation in the XIII century of the two great orders of Dominicans and
Franciscans, the former, par excellence the ordo pradicatorum, gave an enor-
mous impulse to preaching and quite changed its character.* The monks
of these orders obeyed literally the words of the Founder of Christianity,
and went into all the world and preached the Word to every creature.
The popular character of the audiences modified essentially the style of the
preaching. It was necessary to interest and even amuse the common
people, who, as we have incidentally shown, were becoming accustomed
to an entertaining literature more and more secular, and who possessed.
moreover an innate love for tales. It is chiefly to this fondness for stories
and to the preachers’ desire to gratify it that we owe the great collections
of which we are about to speak. In the composition of the medieval ser-
mon, which had, moreover, a certain fixed form, the stories, or, to give
them the name they then bore, and which we shall use hereafter, exempla,
were reserved for the end, when the attention of the audience began to
diminish.| The value of these ewempla for awakening the attention and
instructing the people is everywhere conceded.{ These stories are some-
times as long as the rest of the sermon, sometimes, when they refer to a
well-known recital, they merely quote the title or a few words of the be-
ginning, The use of exempla, properly speaking, is rare before the XTIT
century (L. de la Marche, p. 276), and was apparently first introduced as a
principle by Jacques de Vitry. This eminent prelate and scholar was born
in the early part of the last half of the XII century, and took his name
either from the village of Vitry on the Seine near Paris, or from a town of
the same name on the Marne in Champagne. He studied in Paris from
1180-90, and became a presbyter parochialis at Argenteuil near Paris. In
1210 he went to Brabant and became a canon at Villebrouck and after-
wards at Oignies, where he was the intimate friend of the enthusiast,
Mary of Oignies, whose life he wrote after her death in 1213. From 1210-
1217 he preached the crusade against the Albigenses, and took part in the

*The relative importance of these orders may be inferred from the fact that
of two hundred and sixty-one French preachers of the XIIL century ninety-
‘One were Dominicans and forty-five Franciscans ; see Aubertin, ii, p. 308, n, 3.

tIn fine vero, debet uti exemplis, ad probandum quod intendit, quia familia-
ris est doctrina exemplaris, Alanus de Insulis, Summa de arte predicatoria, cap.
I, ed. Migne, p. 113.

{ Herolt in the Prologue to his Promptuarium Hxemplorum says: “ Utile et ex-
pediens est viros predicationis officio preditos proximorum salutem per terras
diseurrendo querentes exemplis abundare, Hee exempla facile intellectu capi-
antur et firmiter memoriw imprimuntur et a multis libenter audiuntur. Le-
gimus enim principem nostrum Dominicum ordinis preedicatorum fundato-
rem hoe fecisse, De eo quidem seribitur quod ubicumque conversabatur edifi-
catoriis effluebat sermonibus, abundabat exemplis quibus ad amorem Christi
Sxeculi ve contemptum audientium animos provocabat.” Ktienne de Bourbon
in the Prologue to his treatise, says: ‘ Quia autem ad hee suggerenda et inge-
renda et irmprimenda in humanis cordibus maxime valent exempla, que maxi-
me erudiunt simplicium hominum ruditatem, et faciliorem et longiorem
‘ngerunt et imprimunt in memoria tenacitatem.”

Crane.)

expedition. After the capture of Narbonne in 1217 he was made Bishop
of Accon (Acre) in Palestine, where he remained, taking an important part
in the crusades. In 1227 he returned to Rome, and between 1228-30 was
made a cardinal and Bishop of Tusculum by Gregory TX, who employed
him on several missions. He was offered the patriarchate of Jerusalem,
but refused it, and died at Rome in 1240.* He is chiefly known by his
Historia orientalis which extends from 622-1218. We are, however, espe-
cially interested in his sermons, We have seen above that he was an
enthusiastic preacher of the Albigensian crusade, and Etienne de Bourbon
says of him: ‘‘ Vir sanctus et litteratus * * * predicando per regnum
Francis et utens exemplis in sermonibus suis, adeo totam osama Fran-
ciam, quod non putat memoria aliquem ante vel post sic novisse.’’ His
printed sermons (Antwerp, 1575) are what are technically known as
Sermones de tempore et sanctis, and are distinguished from the mass of ser-
mons of that day by the use of less scholastic argument and more exam-
ples borrowed from history and legend. His unpublished sermons (Se7-
mones vulgares) are, as L. de la Marche says, literally crammed with stories,
and constitute a treasure house which succeeding preachers have pillaged,
often without any acknowledgment. L. de la Marche says, p. 276, that each
sermon contains three or four evempla in succession, The more simple and
common the audience the more prodigal he is of his stories. He says him-
self, in his preface: ‘*The keen sword of subtle argumentation has no
power over the laymen, To the knowledge ofthe Scriptures, without which
one cannot take a step, must be added examples which are encouraging,
amusing and yet edifying. Let us lay aside the pagan fables and poetry
which do not afford any moral instruction ; but let us open the door to the
maxims of the philosophers which express useful ideas * * * * * *
The inexperienced who blame this mode of preaching do not suspect the
profit it may produce ; for our part we have tried it.’’ He then continues
relating how he excited the attention of his hearers: ‘‘Suchan example,’’
he says, ‘‘seems dull when read, which, on the contrary, will be very
pleasing in the mouth of a skillful narrator.’’ }

*See Histoire litltéraire dela France, X VITI, 209 et seq., Grasse, Lehrbuch einer
allgemeinen Literirgeschichte, ii. BA. ii. Abth.,, ii, Milfte, p. 1058, and Gadeke in
Orient und Occident, i. 541.

+L. de La Marche, op. cit. pp, 276-277, who adds: ‘Les extraits, les reproduc-
tions diverses qui furent faites de ses @uvres presqueimmediatement prouvent
combien son idée eut de succes, & quel point elle s’ adaptait aux besoins des
populations,’ It was fora long time supposed that Jacques de Vitry was the
author of a Speculum Hxzemplorum (see Godeke, op, cit. p. 542); this is not the
case, his exempla are found in his inedited sermons. Itis greatly to be wished
that L, de la Marche who has so ably edited Htienne de Bourbon would do the
same for Jacques de Vitry, whose importance for the diffusion of popular tales
is greater than that of any writer we shall have occasion tomention in the pres-
ent article. How muchthis writer was used by other preachers willappear when
we consider later Etienne de Bourbon’s obligations to him, Goodeke in the arti-
ele above cited mentions another case of wholesale borrowing, that of the monk
Johannes Junior in his Scala coeli

[March 16,

rn
1888,] 57 [Crane,

Jacques de Vitry was followed by Etienne de Bourbon, whose collections
will be examined later in detail, and other writers of this period recom-
mend the frequent use of evempla.* The abuses which arose from the ex-
cessive use of ewempla were great, and the Council of Sens in 1528 forbade
under the pain of interdict ‘those ridiculous recitals, those stories of good
wives (aniles fabulas) having for their end laughter only.” + These
exempla at first were probably collected by each preacher for his own use,
then the collected sermons of such celebrated racconteurs as Jacques de
Vitry offered an inexhaustible magazine for several generations. Finally
special collections of these eeempla were made for the express purpose of
aiding the preacher, and it is to these and similar collections that the re-
mainder of this article will be devoted. The wealth of material can be in-
dicated but incompletely in the limited space at our command, and we
shall therefore select as illustrations a few typical works from the various
classes into,which the literature of the subject may be divided. In the
first place stand the collections containing exempla alone, arranged either
alphabeti ally or topically. We shall make use of one of each class, viz.,
the Promptuarium Huemplorum, and the Speculum Heemplorum, and refer
briefly to later imitations in the modern languages of these collections.
In the second place come treatises for the use of preachers, containing
Stories systematically arranged, but forming only a part of other homi-
letic material. Three of these works will demand our attention : Etienne
de Bourbon, De Septem Donis; Peraldus, Summa Virtutwm et Vitiorum -
and Bromyard, Summa Praedicantium. A. third source of exempla is to

*L, de la Marche, p. 277, cites Humbertus de Romanis, De Hruditione praedica-
torum, Bibl, Max. Pat. xxv, 433, We have examined all the similar treatises at
our disposal, such as Alanus de Insulis, Swnma de arte praedicatoria; Petrus
Cantor, Verbum Abbreviatum, and Guibert de Nogent Liber quo ordine Sermo
heri debeat, and only in the first named work have we found a brief reference to
exempla which we have cited above.

tL. dela Marche, p. 278. The reader will recall Dante’s passionate outbreak
Bhai the preaching of his day (Paradise, xxix, 1038-120, Longfellow’s trans

Florence has not so many Lapi and Bindi

As fables such as these, that every year

Are shouted from the pulpit back and forth,

In such wise that the lambs who do not know,
Come back from pasture fed upon the wind,
And not to see the harm doth not excuse them,
Christ did not to His first disciples say,

“Go forth, and to the world preach idle tales,”
But unto them a true foundation gave ;

And this so loudly sounded from their lips,
That, in the warfare to enkindle faith,

They made of the Evangel shields.and lances,
Now men go forth with jests and drolleries

To preach, and if but well the people laugh,
The hood puffs out, and nothing more is asked.
But in the cowl there nestles such a bird,

That, if the common people were to see it,
They would perceive what pardons they confide in,

PROC. AMER. PHILOS, 800. XxXI. 114. H. PRINTED May 9, 1883.

Crane.] 58 (March 16,

be found in collections of sermons made for the benefit of idle or ignorant
preachers. Two of these collections will be examined: the sermons of
Herolt, already mentioned as the author of the Promptuarium, and those
of Pelbartus of Themesvar; and finally a brief reference will be made to
the class of expository works of which one of the most celebrated, Hol-
kot, Super Sapientiam, may stand as an example.

The author of the Promptuarium Hxemplorum was Johannes Herolt, a
Dominican monk of Basel, who flourished during the first half of the XV
century.* He whimsically called himself Déscipulus, and his works are
generally cited under that name. He himself explains it as follows at the
end of the sermones de tempore: ‘‘Finiunt sermones collecti ex diversis
sanctorum dietis et ex pluribus libris. Qui intitulantur sermones discipuli
quod in istis sermonibus non subtilia per modum magistri, sed simplicis
per modum discipuli conscripsi et collegi.’’ Nothing is known of his
life. Besides the works we have already mentioned he left a collection
of sermones super epistolas dominicales, Hruditorium Vitae, 1 Quadrigesi-
male and a work on the Albigensian war. The Promptuarium be-
gins with the usual apologetic prologue from which an extract has
been given above, then follow six hundred and thirty-four ewempla
with references to two hundred and eighty-three contained in the
sermons. This large mass of stories is arranged alphabetically by topics,
e. g. Abstinentia, Accedia, Adulterium, Amicitia, Acqua benedicta, Baptis-
mus, ete., and reference is also facilitated by a copious index. Before ex-
amining the collection in detail, it may be well to consider briefly its

* Scanty notices of him will be foundin Fabricius, Bib. lat. med. (Florence, 1858),
sub verb, Discipulus, Griesse, Lehrbuch einer Liter irgeschichte, ii, 2,1, p. 169, Cruel,
p, 480, and Val, Schmidt in his edition of the Disciplina Clericalis, Berlin, 1827, p.
99, note 3. The date of the composition of his sermons is given in Sermo DXXX V
(in Dominica secunda post octavas Trinitatis): a Christo autem transacti sunt mille
quadrigenti decem et octo anni, but in the VI of the Sermones de Sanc , he men-
tions as heretics, Huss, Jerome, and Procopius, the latter of whom did not
assume the leadership of the Hussites until 1424, and was not killed until 1484 in
the battle of Boomischbrod. This discrepancy can easily be explained on the
supposition that Herolt inserted in his collection his earlier sermons, and either
forgot to change the first date or purposely left it (Cruel, p. 480), The collection
was probably published between 1435-40, and this will also be the date of the
Promptuarium, as constant reference is made to it in the sermons and vice
versd, and its object was undoubtedly to afford the preachers who used the ser-
mons, a@ wider range of exempla, We do not know whether any edition of the
Promptuariuwm appeared separate from the sermons, but imagine not. The
enormous popularity of the work (including both in one) may be seen by a
glance at Hain and Panzer. The former mentions twenty-nine editions with
place and date, and seven without, before 1500; the latter, fifteen editions after
the above date, The edition cited in this article is Argentine, 1495, M, Flach,
fol, (Hain, No. 8505), It contains the sermons which will be mentioned later,
the Promptuarium, and a collection of miracles of the Virgin, fllling thirty-one
pages. There is an old French translation of the Promptuarium, Fleur des Com-
mandements de Dieu, Rouen, 1496, Paris, 1525, 1536, 1539, and a later arrangement
by another Dominican, Aug.-Vind,, 1728, 4to, Discipulus Redivivus, ete., collecta
a Bonay. Elers, Ord. Pr.

mt
1883. | 59 (Crane,

sources, for, as can well be imagined, such a collection could only be a
compilation, nor does the author, as we have seen, make any claim to
originality.* Herolt himself mentions the following : Arnoldus (Geilhoven
de Roterodamis, author of Gnotosolitus sive Speculum conscientiae) ; Beda
(Gestis Anglorum); Caesarius Heisterbacensis (Dialogus Miraculorum) ;
Gregorious (Gregory I, Dialogi); Gregorius Turonensis; Gulielmus
(Thomas Cantinpratensis, Liber de apibus); Gulielmus Lugdinensis (Peral-
dus, whose Summa virtutum et vitiorum will be examined later) ;
Tistoriis Britonum (Geoffrey of Monmouth); Jistoria ecclesiastica ;
Holgot (Robert Holkot whose Liber super Sapientiam will be examined
later) ; Hugo de St. Victor; Isidorus ; Jacobus de Vitriaco (Jacques de
Vitry) ; Liber de donis (Etienne de Bourbon, to be mentioned hereafter) ;
Petrus de 8t. Amore ; Petrus Cluniacenses ; Vincentius (of Beauvais, Spe-
culum historiale) ; Viridarius ;+ Vitae Patrum and Zosimas To this list
may be added Jacobus de Yoragine whose Legenda aurea is frequently
used without acknowledgment, and some Oriental sources which will be
mentioned later. The ecclesiastical character of Herolt’s collection is evi-
dent at a glance. The compiler gathered his material largely from a few
writers like Caesar of Heisterbach, and does not draw upon his own
experience like Etienne de Bourbon. There are only two or three
fables, and but few traces of the earlier Oriental collections. The Dis-
ciplina clericalés contributes four stories: M. 67 = ed. Schmidt, p. 106 ;
8.5 =< Schmidt, p. 46; V. 12 == Schmidt, p. 51; Sermones de tempore,
120 = Schmidt, p. 86. There are other Oriental elements as we shall
afterwards see, one may be. mentioned here, the story in Barlaam
and Josaphat, c. 29, which furnished Boccaccio with a well-known tale
(Dec. iv, introduc.), is found in Herolt, L. 24. We shall relegate to the
notes a few widespread stories in order to show the value of the work for
the diffusion of popular tales, and proceed to characterize briefly the more
original part of the work.§ Of original historical anecdotes there is scarcely

* Fabricius gives a very incomplete list of Herolt’s sources, which is somewhat
increased by Mansi in the Florentine edition of 1858,

+ We are not acquainted with this work, but the Speculum exemplorum cites a
work, Viridarium sanctorum ea Menaecis Graecorum translatum. We must con-
fess and deplore our distance from a large library of reterence, which prevents
our settling some doubtful points in the present essay, the materials for which
are drawn almost exclusively from our own private library. Our thanks are,
however, due to the library of the Auburn (N. Y.) Theological Seminary which,
with the utmost liberality, put at our disposal its copy of Migne’s Patrologia.

{Of the above, Arnoldus, Cesarius, Gregory, Gulielmus (Cantinpratensis), and
the Vite Patrum furnish about two hundred exempla or nearly one-third of the
whole,

2A. 18 B( Pauli, 260); A. 15 (Gesta Rom, 188); A. 18 (Pauli, 93); B. 9(Gesta Rom.
45); C. 82 (Gesta Rom. 48); C, 89 (Leg. aurea 142); C. 40 (Pauli, 278); D. 3 (Pauli,
546); E. 5 (Pauli, 140); BH. 6 (Wright’s Latin Stories, 65); B. 12 ( Wendunmuth 5, 127);
KF, 2 (Pauli, 891); F. 6 (Pauli, 683); F. 15, 16 (Pauli, 486); F, 17 (Pauli, 435); J. 16
(Pauli, 692); I. 83 (Pauli, 647); I, 88 (Pauli, 129); I. 39 (Pauli, 507); I. 40 (Pauli, 226) ;
I, 41 (Pauli, 118); I, 42 (Pauli, 125); I. 48 (Pauli, 124), I, 44 (Pauli, 186); I. 49 (La
Fontaine, Bk, 1. 7); L. 8 (Pauli, 387); L. 21 ( Wendunmuth I, 220); L. 85 (Pauli, 385);

Orane.] 60 [Mareh 16,

an instance (A. 6; P. 123, 124). Comparatively little can be learned of the
fashions of the day, a rubric so full and extensive in Etienne de Bourbon.
In the eighty-third Sermo de Temp. (De superbid vestium), the long trails
of the ladies of that time are bitterly censured, and a story told which is
probably taken from Caesar of Heisterbach (Dial. V, 7, cp. Kaufmann’s
Caesarius von Heisterbach, 2te, Aufl. Cdln, 1862, pp. 40, 41, 114). The re-
mainder of the stories, ¢. ¢., those which may be regarded as original, so
far at least as no source being cited—are the ordinary monkish tales, of
which there must have been an enormous mass in circulation, and of
which the best idea may be formed by a perusal of Caesar of Heisterbach’s
Dialogus Miraculorum (ed. J. Strange, Cologne, 1851. 2 vols.) From this
hasty survey we see that Herolt’s work does not possess the interest and
value we should expect. It gives, it is true, a very complete picture of the
low intellectual level of preacher and congregation, and so far is impor-
tant, but it,fails to reproduce the society of the day as is so vividly done in
Etienne de Bourbon, for instance. The most valuable part of Heroilt’s
collection is what he borrowed from others, and to which he gave a wider
circulation, and this constitutes his chief interest for the student of com-
parative storiology.

The Promptuarium, as we have seen, was, an appendix to the author’s.
collection of sermons and intended to be used in connection with them.
It was not long before some one conceived the idea of making an indepen-
dent collection of exempla which could be used with any of the numerous
sermon-books. The most famous of such independent collections is the
Speculum Hxremplorum.* The author's name and country are unknown,
but from internal evidence he seems to have been from the Low Countries
or the adjacent German provinces, The popularity of his work led a Jesuit
of Duaci, Johannes Major, to remake the book by casting it into an alpha-
betical form and by a very free handling of the contents, He terms his work
Magnum Speculum Huemplorum,} and justifies this name in his preface by
saying it surpasses all previous collections in the number of its exempla,
which the compiler states to be thirteen hundred and seventy-five. The
source of the story is always given at the end, and there is an attempt at a
bibliography of similar collections. The growing scientific spirit of the day
is very amusingly illustrated in the preface, where an apology is made for
the apparently incredible character of some of the stories, which, however,

M, 3 (Pauli, 81, 90); M.17 (Wendunmuth I, 366); M. 18 (Pauli, 135); M. 22 (Libro de
los Enxemplos, 23; Romania, No, 28, p. 497); M. 39 (Gesta Rom.,, 273) ; M. 68 ( Glesta
Rom, 202); O. 12 (Pauli, 318); G, 18 (Pauli, 318); O, 14 (Pauli, 317); O, 238 ( Wendun-
muth 7,17); P.2 (Pauli, 471); P. 4 (Pauli, 471); 8.10 (Wright’s Latin Stories, 84); T.
5 (Pauli, 281); T. 8 ( Wenduumuth 2, 137, La Fontaine Bk, VIII, 2); T. 9 (Wendun-
muth 2, 187); V. 14 (Pauli, 11); V; 41 (Pauli, 805); Y. 4 (Pauli, 665)?

*The first edition was printed at Daventer, in Holland, in 1481 (Hain, No. 14915),
then followed editions of Cologne, 1485, Strasburg, 1487-90-95-97, and Hagenanu,
1507-12-15-19.

+ Duaci, 1605-7; Antwerp, 1607; Cologne, 1611-72. Our copy is Duaci, 1607, We
have not been able to procure a copy of the original work,

1883. j 61 [Crane,

if closely examined, will be seen to be possibly true, e@ g., the story of the
obstinate woman thrown into the water, who could not speak but moved
her fingers to represent a pair of scissors—here the collector naively adds :
‘Potuit enim daemon cuius rabiosa illa foemina praeda erat, ipsius
articulos in eam formam composuisse.’’ The increasing secular character
of these works is indicated by another passage in the preface; ‘‘Deinde
si qua ineredibilia, vel fabulosa, vel tantum ad ciendum risum efficta
videntur, qualia paucissima sunt, solum in navigiis, vehiculis, mensis
vel iucundis congressibus narranda serventur.’’? The scope of the work
has been enlarged, it is no longer addressed exclusively to preachers,
but to the ‘prudens concionator, cathecista vel narrator.’? We think
we can also notice a distinct advance in the character of the stories ;
more historical incidents are introduced, and the number of puerile
monkish stories is much smaller. Our space will not allow us to exam-
ine in detail this vast compilation ; many of the stories in the Promptua-
rium are to be found in it, and it must have served to spread many stories at
atime when the taste for the older colléctions was rapidly diminishing.* This
is perhaps the most appropriate placerto describe several collections in the
vulgar tongues, which, so faras their scope goes, are purely secular. We
mention these works here rather than in connection with the Gesta Roma-
norum, because they seem to us more appropriately classed here by their
form. They are alphabetical, or ar ranged topically for convenience of ref-

* A work similar to the Speculum Hxemplorum is, A. Davroult, Soc. Jes., Flores
exemplorum, in quo Fides Catholica poene innumeris et exemplis sanctorum, et
vivorum illustrium probatissimis conjirmatur. Colonize, “1656, 1686, 4to, Other
works of this class might be mentioned here, but we will merely call the atten-
tion of scholars to two collections of medieval moralized tales described by the
Vice-President of the Royal Irish Academy in a paper read before that body,
April 10, 1882, and entitled, ‘‘On two Collections of Mediwval Moralized Tales,”
by John K, Ingram, LL.D., F. T. C. D., Dublin, 1882, These collections are found
in MSS. belonging to the Diocesan Library of Derry. The first is in two parts,
one containing exempla arranged topically; the other is arranged in alphabeti-
‘cal order, ‘and the subjects are illustrated not by stories or anecdotes, but by
Sentences quoted apparently from various authors,” The second is entitled,
Speculum sive lumen laycorum, The arrangement is alphabetically by topics.
T cannot do better than quote Dr. Ingram’s account of the sources used by the
compiler, “The materials of the work are borrowed from a great variety of
authors. The classical writers of antiquity are but little quoted ; there are ref-
erences to Aristotle—some of whose works were known through Latin versions
—to Cicero, Horace, Valerius Maximus, and Seneca, But the sources on which
the compiler has drawn most largely, are the writings of St. Augustine, espe-
Cially the De Oivitate Dei, the Historia Tripartita of Cassiodorus, the Dialogues
of St, Gregory, the collection known as Vite Patrum, the curious treatise en-
tited Barlaam and Josaphat, various Lives of Saints, the Disciplina Clericalis ot
Petrus Alfonsus, and the works of St. Isidore of Seville, of Bede, of Jacobus de
Vitriaco, of Peter of Clugny (otherwise known as Peter the Venerable), and of
Jacobus de Voragine, author of the Legenda Aurea, * * * Some of the narra-
tives appear to have been taken, not from books, but from popular rumor or
tradition, commencing as they do with Fertur simply. In the moralizations
very large use is made of the Old and New Testament, with the text of which
the compiler seems to have been thorougly familiar,”

Crane.] 62 [March 16,

erence. They are, of course, all outgrowths of the same spirit, but the
works now under consideration, we think, owe more to the distinctively
ecclesiastical collections than to the Gesta Romanorum. In 1860, Don
-ascual de Gayangos edited for Rivadeneyra’s Biblioteca de Autores Hs-
panoles, a volume (No, 51) of Hseritores en prosa anteriores al siglo XV,
pp. 447-542 of which contain HI Libro de los Hnwemplos, an alpha-
betical collection of three hundred and ninety-five stories. As the stories,
however, begin with C (Confessio devota debet esse et lacrymosa) it is evi-
dent that the first part of the collection is wanting. This loss was repaired by
A. Morel-Fatio who discovered the missing stories, seventy-one in number,
and published them in the Romania, vii, pp. 481 e¢ seg. The compiler was a
certain Clemente Sanchez, Archdeacon of Valderos, in the diocese of Leon.*
His chief sources are the Disciplina Clericalis, which he has incorpor-
ated almost entire in his work, Vitae Patrum, Dialogues of St. Gregory, and
Valerius Maximus. The four furnish nearly one quarter of the whole num-
ber of stories. About twenty are taken from the Gesta Romanorum, or, at
least, are found in that collection ; many others are taken from the Legenda
Aurea, and medieval chroniclers, The number of stories referring to Greek
and Roman history, or taken from classical sources is noteworthy. Hach
story is preceded by a Latin title which is translated in a Spanish distich
which follows, and generally rhymes. The second of the alphabetical
collections in a modern tongue is in the dialect of Catalonia, and was
made prior to the XV century, or in the early years of the same.t
The first volume, all published at present, contains three hundred and
seventy stories, ranging from A to K. The stories are preceded by a
Catalan title (not alphabetical) which usually mentions the source,
then follow short Latin titles arranged alphabetically. The principal
sources are: Jacques de Vitry, Vitae Patrum, Caesar of Heisterbach, Heli-
nand, Valerius Maximus, Petrus Alfonsi, Etienne de Bourbon, Legenda
Aurea, St. Gregory and Petrus Damianus. These alone furnish two hundred
and forty-five stories, and afford a very clear idea of the general character
of this collection.

We have thus traced rapidly this curious branch of our subject. Origin-
ally merely an appendix to a collection of sermons, then forming an inde-
pendent work by themselves, but still with the purpose of furnishing the
preacher with entertaining matter for his homilies, these stories finally

* See Romania, loc, cit., and Nie, Antonio, Bib. hisp. vetws, il, 208,

+Recull de Hximplis e Miractes, Glestes e Faules e alires ligendes ordenades per
A-B-O, tretes de un manuseriten pergami del segle XV, ara per primera volta
estampades (no place or date, in fact, Barcelona, 1881, A, Verdaguer),

{ Some extracts from a collection of edifying stories found in a Portuguese
MS, of the XIV century have recently been published by J, Cornu in the Ro-
mania, xi, pp. 881-390. The stories, twenty-four in number, are drawn from the
Bible, St. Gregory, the Vitae Patrum, ete. No. 9 is the famous parable of the
Friends in Need (Barlaam and Josaphat, cap, 13, see Glesta Rom. ed, Oesterley,
cap. 238), The stories are not alphabetically arranged, and no hintis given of the
extent of the original work.

1883.) 63 [Crane.

became, in their more modern dress, a pastime by no means unprofitable, for
besides introducing secular elements into entertaining literature, they con-
tributed to prepare the ground for the Revival of Letters by diffusing some
remnants of classical lore. The general question of the bearing of these
collections upon the subject of the diffusion of popular tales will be consid-
ered at the conclusion of the present article.

We have now to direct our attention to the class of treatises for the use
of preachers containing exempla systematically arranged, but forming only
& part of other homiletic material. In many respects the most interesting
and valuable work of this class is the Zractatus de diversis matertis praedi-
cabilibus, ordinatis et distinctis in septem partes, secundum septem dona Spirt-
tus sancti et eorum affectus, currens per distinctiones materiarum, per causas
et effectus, refertus auctoritatibus et rationibus et ewemplis diversis ad edifica-
tionem pertinentibus animarum, by Stephanus de Borbone, usually cited as
the Liber de Donis (in the Recull de Huimplis as Libre de Dono Timoris for
& reason which will hereafter be apparent).* The author of this work was
careful to conceal his name, and designates himself in the prologue simply
as: ‘* go, frater S., in ordine Fratrum Praedicatorum minimus.’? From
a brief notice in the Seriptores ordinis predicatorum (I, 184), it appears that
the author was a certain Stephanus de Borbone (Etienne de Bourbon),
born at Belleville-sur-Sadne (department of the Rhéne), a member of the
Dominican order, who died about 1261 in a monastery of his order at

* Copious extracts from the above work have been published under the title,.
Anecdotes historiques, Légendes et Apologues tirés du recueil inédit W Htienne de
Bourbon, dominicain du XITIe siécle, publiés pour la Sociélé del’ Histoire de
France par A, Lecoy de la Marche, Paris, 1877. The plan of the edition is thus
Stated by the editor in his introduction, p, xxv: “On ne trouvera pas non plus
ici le texte intégral de tout le volumineux manuserit d’Htienne de Bourbon ;
mais on y trouvera du moins un texte pur, et plus que des extraits. J’avais &
faire un volume de documents historiques; j’ai done pris tout ce qui pourait in-
téresser Vhistoire, c’est-d-dire la plus grande et la meilleure partie de ’ouvrage,
et, pour ainsi dire, samoelle, Hnun mot, j’ai laissé de cdté les réflexions mo-
rales, les passages de l’ Keriture et le commentuire théologique, n’en gardant que
ce qui était indispensable pour faire comprendre le plan et la pensée de Vauteur,
pour rattacher ensemble sa longue série dexamples, dont je ne pourais songer
interyertir ordre, Quant A ces examples eux-mémes, j’ai di en supprimer
également un bon nombre, qui auraiont grossi inutilement et démesurément ce
volume. Voici la régle générale que j’ai suivie & cet égard: tout ce qu’Etienne
araconté de visu ou de auditu, c’est-d-dire ce quis’est passé de son temps, et les
faits antérieurs, authentiques ou légendaires, dont il a recueillé un récit oral,
tout cela a 6té soigneusement conservé; les traits empruntés par lui & d’autres
écrivains, ordinairement désignés, ¢’est-A dire la partie de son recueil qui n’est
pas véritablement originale, ont 66 sacrifiés, Je n’ai fait que de rares excep-
tions, commandées par des raisons spéciales, “Ainsi, je n’ai pas ecru devoir re-
Jeter les citations de certains auteurs contemporains de ndtre, et dont les écrits
sont peu ou point connus; les historiettes assez nombreuses tirées de la collec-
tion de Jacques de Vitry, par example, ne pouvaient qu’ajouter un attrait de
plus Alédition,” The notes to the separate stories are not as full as might be
desired, and some of the most interesting parallels have been overlooked ; some

additions to these notes will be given when we consider the contents of the
work,

Crane,] 64 [March 16,

Lyons. Further details are furnished in his work itself (L. de La Marche,
pp. iv. e¢ seg.). He studied at the University of Paris, and relates some in-
teresting stories of student life (c. 860). He probably entered the order of
St. Dominick at Lyons, where he became well acquainted with the Wal-
densian heresy. Like most of his order, he became a missionary, and
preached the crusade against the Albigenses, as L. de la Marche says,
probably at the time of the expedition of Louis VIII, in 1226. He was
made an inquisitor by the Pope, and gives many curious anecdotes about
his way of dealing with heretics. His long life, for he must have been
nearly seventy at his death, was spent in the discharge of the busy duties
of his office, which took him on frequent missions, some of which have left
their traces in his work. One of the objects of the book, like those already
mentioned, was to furnish preachers with ewempla. These he does not
give separately, and in alphabetical order, but incidentally in the course
of a treatise on the seven gifts of the Holy Ghost (Isaiah xi. 2, 8): Timor,
Pietas, Scientia, Fortitudo, Oonsilium, Intellectus, and Sapientia, whence
the usual title Liber de Septem Donis.* ach of the seven parts is divided
into titul’, these again into chapters. Unfortunately, the learned author
was overtaken by death in the midst of his fifth division (Consilium).
In the prologue he conscientiously cites his authorities, and an interesting
list it is, giving an excellent idea of the state of learning at that day.
The editor notices the comparatively few classic authors cited; on
the other hand, Etienne de Bourbon was perfectly acquainted with the
whole range of medieval theology, and borrowed freely from the
exempla contained in the sermons of Jacques de Vitry. The editor
roughly divides the evempla in Etienne de Bourbon into two classes :
First, those taken from previous writers, historical works, sacred or
profane, theological compilations, lives of the saints, legends, poetry,
fables, etc.; secondly, those borrowed from events contemporaneous
with the author, from his own recollection or that of his friends, and
from traditions communicated to him by word of mouth, We shall follow,
in the main, these divisions and mention first those stories which have no
historical value, but are of importance for comparative storiology, indica-
ting by means of his initials those which are borrowed from Jacques de
Vitry.

First, fables and apologues: No. 43, the son who bit off the nose of his
father who had trained him up so badly that he ended his life on the gal-
lows (Pauli, No. 19) ;{ No. 225 (J. de V.), the traveler and the viper

* The MS. used by Lecoy de la Marche for his edition is that of the Bibl. Nat.,
fonds lat, 15,970. The work is reprodneced in a mutilated form in other MSS,
mentioned by the editor, p. xxii, These contain generally mere réswmés not ex-
tending further than the first division of the subject (de dono Timoris) hence
the title applied to the work in the Catalan collection above mentioned,

+ These numbers refer to the divisions introduced by the editor for conven-
jence of reference, and which generally correspond each number to one exempla,.

{ In order to economize space, we refer where possible to the corresponding
stories in Pauli, Schimpf und Hrnst, Stuttgart, Litt. Ver,, Bd. 85, and Kirchhof’s

Wendunmuth, same series, Bde, 95-99. These two works are edited by Hermann
Oesterley, who has added the most exhaustive references to each story.

1883. | 65 (Crane.

(Kirchhof 7, 73; ‘sop ed. Furia OXXX; La Font. vi, 18); No. 271 Gh
de V.), the milk-maid and the pot of milk (Kirchhof 1, 171; La Font. vii,
10; Max Miiller, Chips, iv, 170; Joly, Deww Fables, etc., p. 91) ; No. 291,
the mule boasting of his descent, ‘‘the horse is my grandfather ”’ (cp. La
Font. vi. 7; Disciplina clericalis, ed. Schmidt, p. 41; Pauli, No. 170;
(Kirchhof 4, 188) ; No. 297 (J. de V.), the bat pretending to be a bird (La
Font, ii, 5; Aesop ed. Furia, CXXV); No. 875, True and Untrue, the
apes tear to pieces the one who tells them the truth (Pauli, No. 381 ; Phae-
drus, app. 24; Robert, Mables inéd. ii, 547); No. 876, lion, wolf, and fox
dividing prey ; wolf takes better part, and lion tears off the skin of his
head, the fox when asked who taught him to make a better division, re-
plied, “He to whom you guve a red cowl’’ (Kirchhof 7, 24) ; No. 409 ap
de V.), the cobbler and the rich man (Kirchhof 2, 187; La. Font. viii. yy
No. 451 (J. de V.), the old man and his two mistresses, one pulls out his
White hairs, the other, his black ones (Kirchhof 6, 67 ; Aesop ed. Furia,
OXCIX).

The following list embraces all the legends and stories of general inter-
est: Ng. 87, legend of the Knight in the Chapel (Kéhler, Jahrb. Sir rom.
und eng. vit., vi, 326) ; No. 46, archdeacon who killed the bishop (Mra-
cles de Nostre Dame, Paris, 1876, i, 101 ; cp. D’Ancona, Sacre Rappresen-
taztont, "Florence, 1872, ii, 445) ; No. 81, the prince who bought for much
Money "the advice: In omnibus factis tuis considera antequam facias, ad
quem finem inde venire valeas ; which maxim written on all the royal linen,
etc., saves the king’s life by terrifying the barber who had been bribed to
kill him (cp. Gesta Rom. c. 103,.for a more complete version, which is also
found in several Italian popular tales: Gonzenbach, Sicilienische Marchen,
81; Gradi, Pasqua di Oeppo, p. 83); No. 180, a version of the Crescentia
legend (D’ Ancona, Sacre Rappresentaz, ili, 199) ; No. 143, the Sabliau De
Brunain la veehe au prestre (Méon iii, 25; Luzel, Légendes chrétiennes de
la Basse- Bretagne I, 30) ; No. 160, legitimate son recognized by refusing
to shoot an arrow at the body of his dead father (@esta Rom. 45 ; Wright’s
Latin Stories, No. 21); No. 161, a version of Bernier’s Sabliaw of La
Fousse partie (Méon iv, 472; Von der Hagen, Gesammtabenteuer ii, p. lv,
No, 48 ; Pauli, 436) ; No. 168, the legend of Robert the Devil (Greesse,
Literdrgeschichte ii, 2, 2, p. 628; Douhet. Dictionnaire des Mysteres, ad
verb.) ; No. 178, a version of the Alexis legend (Gesta Rom. 15) ; Nos.
16-178, the legend of Theophilus (D’Ancona. op. cit. ii, 445 ; Greesse, op.
ott. ii, 2, 2, p. 625) ; Nos. 242-244 (J. de V.), examples of woman’s obsti-
nacy (Pauli 595 ; La Font. iii, 16; Dunlop’s Geschichte der Prosadichtungen
uebertragen von FB. Liebrecht, Berlin, 1851, pp. 207, 274) ; No. 245, a long
Story of an old woman who makes mischief between husband and wife
(Kirchhof 1, 366; Wright’s Latin Stories, 100; Promptuarium Haemp., M.
17); No, 246, dish of tongues good and bad (Vita Aesop, Bromyard,
Summa praedicantium L, 5, 5, Kirchhof 8, 129 ; a similar story is found in
the Talmud, see Levi, Purabole, etc., Florence, 1861, p. 398, La Lingua) ;

_ No. 248 (J. de V.), story of nun who tears out her eyes and sends them to

PROG, AMER, PHILOS. soc. xxi. 114. 1. PRINTED MAY 21, 1888,

Crane.] 66 [March 16,

king who had fallen in love with her beauty (this story is taken from the
Vitae Patrum, ed. Lugd. 1616, Wd. x, cap. 60) ; No. 298 (J de V.), curiosity
detected by putting a bird in a covered dish (Pauli, 398) ; No. 831, the
famous apologue of the three rings employed by Lessing in his Nathan der
Weise (Gesta Rom. 89); No. 888, Jew converted by seeing the Christian
religion withstand the evil examples of its professors (Boccaccio, Dee. i,
1, see M. Landau, Die Quellen des Decamerone, Wien, 1869, pp. 65, 148) ;
No. 389 (J. de V.), man carrying lamb to market is made to believe it a
dog by three sharpers (for this famous Oriental story see Oesterley’s refer-
ences to Gesta Rom. 132, Pauli, 682) ; No. 870, the legend of the faithful
hound (D’Ancona, J? Libro dei Sette Savy di Roma, Pisa, 1864, p.108, a
Chinese Buddhist version is given by 8. Beal in the Academy, Nov. 4,
1882 (No. 548), p. 331, ‘‘Bedd Gelert;’’ we shall revert to this story
later) ; No. 878, Schiller’s Der Gang nach dem Hisenhammer ( Gest Rom.
283); No. 396, Parnell’s Hermit ( Gesta Rom. No. 80, this legend has also be-
come a popular tale: Gonzenbach, op. cit. No. 92; De Trueba, Narra-
ciones populares, p. 65; Luzel, op. cit. i, 282, ii, 4); No. 414, treasure in
trunk of tree (@esta Rom. No. 109); No. 483 (J. de V.), story of inn-
keeper who used to tip over his customers’ wine, saying: ‘‘ Hoe significat,
abundanciam que veniet vobis, et bonam fortunam.’’? A certain pilgrim to
whom this had been done, privately opened the spigot of a cask, and re-
peated the above words to the angry host (Pauli, 372; Movellette di San
Benardino, No. 29) ; No. 436 (J. de V.), a woman wishing to obtain access
to a bishop in order to demand justice is told she must grease his hands (in
the French sense se faire graissir la main), and follows the injunction
literally (Pauli, 124) ; No. 460 (J. de V.), the famous story technically
known as the Matron of Ephesus (D’Ancona, JI libro dei sette sanj di
Roma, p. 118, Studi di Critica, Bologna, 1880, p. 822; Griesebach, Die
treulose Wittwe, Vienna, 1873) ; No. 494, the legend of the wood of the
Cross (see A. Mussafia, Sulla legenda del legno della Croce, Vienna, 1869 ;
W. Meyer, Die Geschichte des Kreuzholees vor Christus, Miinchen, 1881) ;
No. 502 (J. de V.), the stratagem employed by Sancho Panza while gov-
ernor (Don Quixote, ii, 45) to discover whether a young man had done
violence to a certain woman (Wright’s Latin stories, No. 20); No. 507, a
tradition of Homer who was forbidden to enter the king’s palace while he
wore a mean garb, but clothed in a rich dress was honorably received and.
obtained what he asked ; instead of thanking the king for the favor, he
thanked his clothes (the story is told of Dante, Papanti, Dante secondo la
tradizione ¢ 4 novellatort, Livorno, 1873, p. 72. This story, too, has become
a popular tale, and is related of the typical Sicilian booby, Giufa, see Gon-
zenbach, op. cit, i, 258).

Turning now to the class of popular superstitions, we shall find much
that is interesting as illustrating the condition of society at that day. The
belief in the divination of the cuckoo seems to have been widespread, A.
story is told of an old woman (No. 52), who heard on thé first of May a
cuckoo singing five times, and believed she would live at least that num-

1888,] 67 (Crane,

ber of years more. On her dying bed she refused to confess, saying it was
unnecessary as she should live five years, and when she grew too weak to
Speak she uttered the sound of the cuckoo five times, and finally held up
her five fingers and died (Pauli, 289). In regard to unfavorable omens,
Etienne de Bourbon cites a story from Jacques de Vitry about a king of
Castile, who, while advancing against the Saracens, met a flock of crows.
Some of the soldiers urged the king to return, but he very sensibly said
that the crows were not older than four years, whereas he had fought
more than twenty against the Saracens, and knew more about the way to
fight them than the crows did. He advanced and beat his enemies (No.
353). In another story (No. 355), from the same source, an innkeeper de-
tained a countryman in his tavern by making a noise with a bladder which
the latter said was a bad omen. Fortune-tellers flourished then as now—
one had a house divided into several parts, in one of which he received
those coming to consult him, but overheard from an adjoining part what
they said among themselves. The inquirers were then led by a round-
about way to that very part where the diviner addressed them by name,
and answered their questions (No. 857). Another fortune-teller, an old
Woman, sent her son to steal the cattle of a rich peasant who lived
at some distance, and tie them to a tree in the forest. The owner was
then told by the son that in a certain town there was a good fortune-teller,
Who could inform him where his cattle were. This the old woman did, and
earned great fame thereby (No. 358). The most interesting story of this
kind, however, is one describing an event of which Etienne himself was
“0 eye-witness (No. 860). We give it in his own words: ‘““When I was a
Student in Paris, on Christmas Eve, while our companions were at Vespers,
4 Certain notorious thief entered our lodging, and opening the room of one
of our comrades, carried away several volumes of law books. When the
Owner wanted to use them after the holiday, he found they were gone, and
hastened to the fortune-tellers (malificos). After many had deceived him,
©ne conjured up some evil spirits and made the student look into a mirror,
in which he saw, among other things, that a certain comrade of ours, a
relative of his, and whom we believed the most honest of our number, had
Stolen his books. The owner accused him of the theft not only among the
Students, but also among his friends. When, however, the aforesaid thief
had stolen some other things, and had been detected, he took refuge in the
belfry of a church, and told every one who asked him, what’he had stolen,
and where it was. After some students who lived near us had discovered
in this way a wallet (mantica), which had been stolen, the one who had
lost. hig law books reluctantly consented to go to the thief, and inquire
about them, The thief told him when and where he had stolen them, and
designated the dwelling of the Jew to whom he had pawned them, and
where the owner found them.’’ Even the clairvoyants of the present day
have their counterparts in the old women who had the dresses or girdles
of the sick brought them, in order to divine the diseases of the owners
(No. 363). Those were also the days of witchcraft (No. 364, 366, 367),

Crane, | 68 {Mareh 16,

and the Wild Huntsman whose band was known as familia Allequint vul-
gariter vel Arturi (No. 365).* Many anecdotes of this kind came to the
knowledge of Etienne while searching for heresy in the south of France.
It is to his credit that he did not put much confidence in these absurd
stories, although fortunately he deemed them worthy of preservation.
We have already mentioned the story of the faithful hound, Bedd Ge-
lert, which is of Oriental origin, and is found, for instance, in the Seven
Wise Masters. After giving a version of this story, which has become in
several places a local legend, Etienne proceeds to say that the dog was
considered a martyr, and its grave was visited by the sick just like the
shrines of wonder-working saints. Sick children especially were brought
to the place, and made to pass nine times through an aperture formed in
the trunks of two trees growing over the hound’s grave, while various
Pagan rites were performed, and the child was finally left naked at the
foot of the tree until two candles an inch long were consumed. Etienne,
by virtue of his office as inquisitor, had the dog exhumed, its bones burnt,
and the grove cut down (No. 870). In this connection we may mention
the dances which incur the writer’s ire. He says the devil is the inven-
tor, guide and advocate of the dancers (No. 461), and adds that there
once appeared to a certain holy man the devil in the shape of a little
Ethiopian standing over the woman leading the dance, and guiding
her about as he wished, and leaping over her head (ibid). Etienne de-
rives the origin of dancing from the worship of Apis (/béd), and nar-
rates several examples in which dancers were punished by the floor
breaking through under them, and the church in which they were
performing this incongruous act being struck by lightning (Nos. 462-63).
These dances in the church, or rather, before it, and in the neighboring
cemetery are frequently mentioned by our author. In Roussillon the feast
of the patron saint was celebrated by the young people making and
mounting a wooden horse, and dancing in the church and cemetery (No.
194). Sometimes the officiating priest was disturbed by these dances, and
came out and broke them up very unceremoniously, as, for instance, a
certain Master Stephanus de Cudo (Cudot), who, when he could not
otherwise stop the throng, seized the peplum of the leader, a majorissa of
the town, and pulled it off together with all her hair and the ornaments of
her head (No. 275), a not unlikely proceeding as we shall see in a moment.
Luxury in dress has always beena favorite subject of denunciation from the
pulpit, and some of Etienne’s stories prove that there isa greater permanence
in fashion than we usually imagine. Blond hair seems to have been as popu-
lar in the XIII asin the XIX century, and the length of ladies’ trains
seemed then an invention of the devil. We have just seen how a priest put
an end to a dance by pulling off the leader’s mantilla, and with it her false

* A counterpart to this myth is that of the bonnes choses, or bonesozes (see L de
la Marche’s note to No, 97), women who supposed that they accompanied at night
Diana or Herodias mounted on certain beasts and traversed wide spaces of the
earth and air,

1883. | 69 (Crane,

hair—an incident that occurs more than once in Etienne’s pages. One
Palm Sunday, while the procession was passing the window of a wealthy
clerk, a pet monkey descended by its chain, and snatched off the wig of
an old woman, and then climbed back displaying his trophy in great glee,
Etienne happening to be in the procession when this occurred (No. 274).*
Painting the face was likewise common and liable also to shameful detec-
tion, as where a mountebank filled his mouth with water and blew it into
the painted face of a woman with a result that can easily be imagined (No,
279). A more delicate trick was that of a magnate who made a hole in a
cushion, and blew the feathers in the face of a lady sitting near him ; when
She discovered the feathers sticking to her face she tried to rub them off,
but only made matters worse, until at last she looked like an image that
had undergone repairs, ‘ad modum imaginis reparate’’ (No. 280). The
pointed shoes of this period, as well as the women’s long trains, were
favorite resorts of the devil. A woman who had been dancing for some
time could not move her feet for several days, at last they cut off the points
of her shoes, and out came the devil with a noise, and the woman re-
Covered (No. 281). Etienne repeats (No. 282) a story of J. de Vitry’s,
Who says a certain holy man once saw the devil laughing, and asked him
the reason. He was told that one of the devil’s companions was accus-
tomed to ride about on a lady’s train, and when she lifted her dress at a
muddy spot the devil fell off into the mire.t The costliness and weight
of women’s girdles or belts also called for reproof. They were made of
iron, silk, silver or gold, and adorned with precious stones ; some were or-
hamented with the figures of lions and dragons, and birds wrought in gold
and silver, the workmanship of which was more costly than the material.
They were so heavy that the wearers would refuse to carry in penance
about their waists an equal weight in lead or iron. }

Our space will not permit us to examine at equal length the class of his-
torical anecdotes or those related by Etienne as an eye-witness. A. very
Complete and vivid picture of society might be drawn from this work : the
Schools, the streets of Paris, the open-air preaching, the crusade against
the Albigenses, Saint Louis and his crusade, in short, the civil, ecclesias-
tical, and military life of the day are unrolled before us, while the
theologian or church historian will find valuable materials in Etienne’s de-
tailed account, of the heresies of that time (pp. 290-314).

hl Bourgain, La Ohaire frangaise, p. 12, n. 4, cites the following passage from
Hugues de Saint-Victor, which will illustrate the above exemplum: ‘(Simiam)
due licet villissimum et turpissimum et horrendum sit animal, tamen heu!
Maxime clerici in suis domibus hane habere et in suis fenestris ponere solent,
Ut, apud stultos qui pertranseunt, per ejus aspectum gloriam suarum divitiarum.
Jactitent,”?
sar of Heisterbach, Dial. Mirac. v, 7, says that an honest citizen of Mainz
Saw a multitude of devils on the train of a lady of that city. “ They were small
as mice, black as Hthiopians, laughing and clapping their hands and jumping
About like fish in a net.”

| For further details of this kind see L, de la Marche, La Ohaire franeaise, pp.
404, 412,

Crane, ] 70 {March 16,

The second work of the class of treatises which we shall notice is the
Summa Virtutum ac Vitiorum of Gulielmus Peraldus, also a Dominican
and bishop of Lyons.* He died in 1275, leaving besides the above work a
large number of sermons. The Summa, which is quoted by both Herolt
and Htienne de Bourbon, is, as its name indicates, a treatise on the princi-
pal virtues and vices, forty of the former and forty-one of the latter being
considered in detail. For convenience of reference the work is supplied
with very full indices and analytical tables of contents. The evempla no
longer have the importance attributed to them in the works we have
already cited, and when they are used for purposes of illustration, they are
given in a dry, brief way. For example, under the head of Jnvidia (Vol
ii, p. 281), Peraldus cites a well-known story as follows: ‘‘Exemplum de
quodam rege, qui concessit cuidam avaro et cuidam invido munus quod
eligerent, ita tamen quod munus ejus qui posterior peteret, duplicaretur
et cum uterque differet, preecepit rex invido ut prius peteret: qui petit ut
eruetur sibi unus oculus, volens quod proximo eruerentur ambo.’’ +
Although Peraldus’s work possesses but little of the interest of the work
last discussed, it is still valuable. The writer was a learned man, and
cites not merely the Christian authors popular during the middle ages, but
quotes constantly from the classics, From his pages may also be gleaned
many details of medieval society. |:

The most extensive and in many respects the most valuable of all the
works of the class we are now examining is the Swrwma Pracdicantium ot
John Bromyard, an English Dominican. He was from Herford, and
became a celebrated theologian and jurist at Oxford. He was afterwards

professor of theology at Cambridge, and is said to have been one of

Wicliff ’s opponents in the Council of London, 1382. He died in 1418,

«The first edition is Cologne, 1479. Ithas been frequently reprinted since: our
copy is Cologne, 1629, two volumes, 4to.

+ As this story, which is of Oriental origin (see Benfey, Pantschatantra, i,
304), is found in three of the collections we are examining, we have an oppor-
tunity to compare its treatment by the various compilers. Herolt, Prompt, Hx.
I, 33, is almost as concise; Bromyard, I, 6, 19, is a Mttle more diffuse; Holkot,
Super Sapientiam, lect, XX IX, gives the story as follows: “ Narratur de quodam
cupido et invido insimul iter agentibus quod vox de celo venit ad eos dicens ;
Petat unus quidquid voluerit et habuerit, sic tamen quod socius ejus habebit
duplum, Fit contraversia quis eorum prius peteret, Tandem invidus: Peto, in-
quit, ut eruatur mihi alter oculus.” This story was always a very popular one, as
may be seen by a glance at the long list of parallels cited by Oesterley to Pauli,
647. Another story in Peraldus ii, 307, “true son refusing to shoot arrow at
father’s dead body,” may likewise be compared with Etienne de Bourbon, No,
160 (mentioned above), Bromyard, IF. 5,17, Prompt. Zx,, B.9,and Libro de Hnxem-
plos, 103 (see also Glesta Rom, ed, Oesterly, cap. 45).

198,

{ Peraldus, too, reproves trains and long shoes, ii, 211, 212, 215,

2This work, although popular, has not passed vhrough as many editions as
some of the above mentioned work. The following are all the editions we can
discover: editio prince, s. 1. e. a. fol,; Norinberg., 1485, 4to, (Fabricius, fol.) ; ibid,
1518, 4to,; Parisiis, 1518, 4to.; Lugd., 15, 22, 4to; Venet, 1586, fol. (Fabr.4to); Antverp,
1614, fol. Our copy is the last named,

wo

1883. ] 71 [Crane,

leaving, besides his Summa and some writings against Wicliff, a work
entitled: Opus trivium sive tractatus juris civilis et canonici ad moralem sen-
sum applicati secundum ordinem alphabeti.* Some idea of the extent of
the Summa may be gained from the fact that the edition of 1614 consists of

two parts containing nine hundred and seventy-one folio pages, exclusive

of the indices, The arrangement is the usual one of topics alphabetically
disposed: nineteen letters (or twenty-one, distinguishing i and u) embrac-
ing one hundred and eighty-nine topics treated in as many chapters. The
range of subjects may be shown by the titles under some of the letters
taken at random. We give all the divisions of the letters chosen, naturally,
however, selecting those which contain fewest chapters: Beatudo, bellum,
benefacere, bonitas ; gaudium, gloria, gratia, gratitudo, gula ; labor, laus,
lew, liber, loquatio, ludus, luwuria ; nativitas, negligentia, nobilitas, nocumen-
tum ; tentatio, testimonium, timor, trinitas, tribulatio, etc. Each chapter
is preceded by a summarium of the sections into which it is divided, and
these sections are still further divided into paragraphs or articles. The
exempla are usually, but not always, indicated by the word exemplum or
its abbreviation in the margin. The stories themselves are, as in Peraldus,
generally given in brief and dry versions. These illustrative evempla,
which, for us, constitute the chief value of the work, are very numerous.
toedeke (Orient und Occident, i, 588) says their number is over a thousand,
and remarks ; ‘‘Kaum irgend ein anderes Werk des Mittelalters ist so reich
an Fabeln und Geschichten als das seinige (the Summa), und kaum ein
anderes von dieser Bedeutung so wenig bekannt. Wright (Latin Stories,
Percy Soc., Vol. viii, p. viii) says: ‘Perhaps no work is more worthy the
attention of those who are interested in the popular literature and history
of England in the fourteenth century.’’| Bromyard seldom names his
sources, but as Goedeke (op. cit., p. 588) says: ‘Ueberall darf Entlehnung
vorausgesetzt werden.’? These sources are the whole body of medieval
and classical literature then known to the learned. Scarcely any depart-
ment of these two great divisions is unrepresented: fables, legends, me-
dixval epics, Oriental apologues, anecdotes from Roman history, from
Biblical history, popular jests, etc., are mingled with a mass of references
to contemporary manners and customs which render the work invaluable
to the student of medieval culture. It is impossible in our limited space
to give even a brief selection from Bromyard’s stories. Those cited by
Wright will give those who do not have access to the original a fair idea
of its contents, anda glance through Oesterley’s references to Pauli, Kirch-
hof, and the Gesta Romanorum, will show that Bromyard has absorbed
into his vast encyclopedia most of the popular stories of his day. {

Before leaving the class of treatises, there is one work which may be

* Fabricius, ed. cit,, i, p. 263; Greesse, ii, 2, 1, pp, 166, 380.

t Of the one hundred and forty-nine stories given by Wright, over fifty are
taken from Bromyard, and eleven from the Promptuarium Haemplorum.
t About one hundred and fl fty of Bromyard’s stories are found in these collec-
tions,

Crane.] 72 [March 16,

mentioned here, although, strictly speaking, it is not a treatise in the same
sense as the works already described. We refer to Robert Holcot’s Opus
super Sapientiam Solomonis.* The author was, like Bromyard, an English
Dominican, born at Northampton, and professor of theology at Oxford,
where he died in 1349, leaving a large number of commentaries on various
books of the Bible, the best known being, the one on the Wisdom of Solo-
mon.} This work consists of two hundred and twelve lectiones on the nine-
teen chapters of the wisdom with the usual extensive index. Mxempla
properly so-called are very sparingly used by the author, one of them
(Pauli, 647), has already been given above, and one of La Fontaine’s most
celebrated fables (Bk. vi, 4, “Jupiter et le Métayer’’) is found in Lectio IX.
On the other hand, the work is a vast repertory of historical anecdotes em-
bedded in the most elaborate metaphors. A. good example of Holkot’s
method may be found in the Lectio LXIV, where he discusses Chap. V, v.
9-10 of his text, ‘‘ All those things are passed away like a shadow, and as
a post that hasteth by ; And as a ship that passeth over the waves of the
water, which, when it is gone by, the trace thereof cannot be found, neither
the pathway of the keel in the waves.’’ As there are three kinds of sin ;
original, venial, and mortal, so there are three kinds of shadows corres-
ponding in shape to the cylinder, cone, and inverted cone (chilindroydes,
conoydes, and calathoydes). In speaking of the simile of the ship, Holkot
quotes from St. Jerome’s epistolac, cxv, the story of Xerxes weeping because
none of those he beheld at a review of hisarmy would be alive in a hundred
years, He then compares penitence to a ship on account of its figure, capac-
ity for carrying, and possibility of wreck. This affords Holkot an oppor-
tunity, after citing Job, Boethius, and Gregory, to describe the Sirens and
Ulysses’sadventure with them. His sources are, ashe states : Alewander in
seintillario poesis,{ and Boethius, de Consolat, iii. 8. In his third lecture he

*See Hain, Nos, 8755-61, The first edition is of Cologne, no date, our copy is the
third edition (Hain, No, 8757); Spires, 1483, Petrus Drach, For other editions, see
Greesse, op. cit, 11, 2, 1, }. 470.

+ Holeot left another work which would also come within the scope of this
article, but which we have not been able to procure. It is the Moratitates pul-
chrae historiarum in usum praedicatorum, Venet, 1505; Paris, 1510, and with the
LAber Sap., 1580, This work varies somewhat in the different editions, but the
original form seems to have consisted of forty-seven stories, afterwards ampli-
fled to seventy-five, This collection is of great importance for the question of the
mode in which the Gesta Romanorum was put together, and Oesterley in his
edition of that work, atter an analysis of the Moralitates, says, p.251: “Die Wich-
tigkeit dieses Werkes braucht nicht besonders hervorgehoben zu werden, es ist
in ihm nicht allein die Quelle vieler Nummern des Gesta Romanorum nachge,
wiesen, die bisher unbekannt geblieben war, sondern dasselbe hat auf die Gestal.
tung unserer Sammlung einen so entscheidenden Hinfluss ausgeiibt, dass
man die simmtlichen Handschriften in zwei Classen theilen kénnte, deren eine
von Holkot beeinflusst ist, deren andere aber einen solehen Hinfluss nicht
zeigt, und es ist das ein nicht unwichtiges Moment ftir die Kntscheidung der
Frage tiber das Alter der Gesta Romanorum,”’

{This is Alexander Neckam, see Leyser, Hist, Poetarwm et Poematum Medii
Aevi, Halle, 1721, p. 993.

1883.) 73 (Crane.

mentions Alexander and the pirate (@esta Rom. 146) ; in the ninth oceurs
the fable of La -Fontaine vi, 4, mentioned above ; in the fourteenth, the
story of Atalanta (Gesta Rom. 60), cited from Ovid ; in the forty-fifth, the
story of the two snakes (Gesta Rom. 92), cited from Valerius Maximus (4.
6, 1) ; in the seventieth, Damocles’s sword cited from Macrobius, Somn.
Scip. 1, 10 (Gesta Rom, 148); in the eighty-second, the poisoned wine
from Frontinus, Strateg. 2. 5, 12 (@esta Rom. 88); in the eighty-sixth
“judge flayed,”’ from Helinand, lib. xv. (Gesta Rom. 29); in the one
hundred and thirteenth, ‘‘ the ring of forgetfulness and memory,’’ from
“magister in histortis super Hxodus,’’ the story is told of Moses ( Gesta
Rom. 10, of the Emperor Vespasian) ; in the hundred and forty-first, the
story of Phalaris and his brazen bull from Ovid (Gesta Rom. 48) ; in the
One hundred and seventy-fifth, Coriolanus, Valerius Maximus 5, 4, 1 ( esta
Rom. 137) ; in the one hundred and eighty-eighth, La Fontaine, vii, 1,
Les Animawe malades de la peste ; inthe hundred and ninetieth, the legend
of Silvester IT (Gerbert), v, Milman Latin Christ, iii, p. 220; dbéd, wax
image of husband shot at by wife’s lover (Gesta Rom. 102). We have
mentioned only a few of the stories most popular during the middle ages,
and our citations can give but a feeble idea of the mass of historical and
mythological references to be found in Holkot.

Tt remains finally to notice very briefly the class of sermons from which
Wwe have selected two of the most popular collections as examples.* ‘The
first is the sermons of Herolt who has already been considered as the
author of the Promptuarium Huemplorum. The popularity of his collection
was shown by the large number of editions through which it passed, and
all we have now to do is to examine the form and contents of the work
itself,} The sermons, as is usual, are divided into those for the ordinary
Sundays of the year, de tempore, and those for saints’ days, de sanctis ; ot
the former there are one hundred and sixty-four, of the latter forty-eight.
From one to five sermons are devoted to a single Sunday or saint, and
reference is sometimes made to other sermons in the same collection which
may likewise be used. Where several sermons are given for one occasion,
they are considered as one, and the method of division is continuous. This
Consists in a rude paragraphing by means of capital letters. Not only is
reference facilitated by an alphabetical index, but an additional index is
given of the ewempla in the sermones de tempore and a briefer index of
the sermones de sanctis. As to the organic division of the sermons, the

*For the vast mass of inedited material, see L. de la Marche, La Chaire fran-
Fdise, ete., table bibliographique, pp. 457-499 ; for printed sermons, Griesse, op. cit.
i, 2,1, pp. 152-175; for collections of sermons designed especially for the use of
preachers, Cruel, op. cit. pp. 468-498; for general réswmé (XLV century), ist. litt.
de la France, XXiv, pp. 363-382.

t+ Cruel, p, 480, says: ‘The most used work of this class (the sermons for the use
of preachers) are the Sermones Discipuli, which passed through thirty-six editions
betore 1500. How well known this work was is shown from a passage in Geiler’s
Postils to the eighth Sunday after Trinity, where the author after the division
of his Subject into heads, says: Now mark! you will find these things neither in
Jacobo de Voragine nor in Discipulo.”

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. Soc. XXI. 114. J. PRINTED MAY 21, 1883.

Crane.] 74 {Mareh 16,

author in the prologue to the serm. de sanctis, suys: ‘ Dividendo eundem
sermonem in tres partes. Pria pars erit de dignitate et privilegiis istius
sancti vel istorum sanctorum et sanctarum. Secunda pars principalis erit
pro informatione hominum simplicium et specialiter ad emendationem suae
vitae. Tercia pars erit de miraculis istius sancti aut illorum sanctorum
vel sanctarum.’’ The division of the sermo de tempore is also usually three-
fold, the evemplum coming last. The following brief analysis of one of
Herolt’s sermons may not be unacceptable. Sermo avi, De innocentibus.
“‘ Mittens Herodes occidit omnes pueros qui erant in Bethleem et in omnibus
finibus ejus, Matt. ii. Ex quo hodie peragitur festum illorum puerorum
innocentium qui ab iniquo Herode interfecti sint, tune in presenti sermone
tria sunt dicenda. Primo quod aliqui parentes suos pueros spiritualiter
occidunt sicut Herodes corporaliter occidet. Secundo de solemnitate pre-
sentis festi. Tercio exemplum.’’ ‘There are six classes of parents who
kill their children: those who kill the child yet unborn, those who love
their children too much (‘‘ Qui amat filium vel filiam super me non est me
dignus,’’ Matt. x), those who teach them evil, as dancing, wearing their
rich clothes, painting their faces and curling their hair, those who do not
punish their children when they err, those who set their children a bad
example, and thus kill them spiritually, and finally those who amass
wealth unjustly in order to enrich their offspring. Secondly, the feast of
the Innocents is to be observed solemnly for three reasons: first, on ac-
count of the time, they were the first martyrs, secondly, on account of
their number, thirdly, on account of the place. Thirdly, mark an example
of those who do not correct their children when they err. We read of a
certain father who was accustomed to visit taverns and games, and take
his little son with him. When the son grew up he was so used to taverns
and games that he could not be kept away from them, and after he had
spent his own money, he began to steal, first from his father, then from his
neighbors. His father did not punish him severely, but gently reproved
him. This admonition, however, had no effect, and when he grew to be
a man, he was caught once and again in theft, but twice was saved from
the gallows by a fine. The third time he was detected he was sentenced
to death, and led to the gibbet. There he begged that his father might be
brought to him, He came weeping, and the son asked him to kiss him,
and forgive him the wrong he had done him. When the father did as he
was asked, his son bit off his nose. The son was censured because twice
his father had saved him from death by paying a fine, and would gladly
have freed him a’ third time had he been able, The son, however, an-
swered: ‘I have acted well and justly because he is the cause of my
death, for from my youth up he permitted me to live according to my own
will, neither corrected me at any time for the excesses I committed,’ ’’*
At the end of the Ixxxiv, sermon de tempore (De gaudits coelt) occurs the
following beautiful and well-known exemplum which Mr. Longfellow’s
readers will recognize as the story of Monk Felix in the Golden Legend,

*For parallels si
been already me

xe Pauli, 19. This story occurs in Etienne de Bourbon, and has
tioned.

—o

1883, ] 75 (Crane.

“Likewise we read this example of the joys of Heaven. <A certain de-
vout monk prayed God to reveal to him some of the sweetness of the
heavenly joys. One day while at prayer he heard a little bird singing
sweetly near by. Arising from his prayers he wished to catch the bird
which flew away before him to a wood near the monastery, and alighted
onatree. The monk followed it and stood under the tree listening to the
bird which presently flew away, and the monk returned to the monastery
thinking he had stood beneath the tree an hour or two. When he reached
the monastery he found the door had been built up, and another opened
in a different part of the monastery. He approached and knocked, and the
porter asked whence he came, who he was, and what he wanted. He re-
plied : I left the monastery a little while ago, and now I have returned,
and it has been changed. The porter went in and told the abbot, who
came to the door and asked the monk who he was and whence he came.
He responded: I am a brother of this monastery, and TI went a short time
ago to the wood, and returned, and T know no one, and no one knows me,
Then the abbot and the seniors asked him the name of the abbot who ruled
the monastery when he went out, and searching the chronicles they found
he had been absent from the monastery three hundred and forty years. It
was a great thing that in all that time on account of the sweet song of that
bird or angel, he had felt neither cold nor heat, neither had hungered nor
thirsted. What then shall it be when we enter heaven and hear the nine
choirs of angels singing?’’* In concluding this very inadequate account
of Herolt’s collection, we cannot do better than cite a few words from
Cruel’s appreciation (p. 481). “ The work was very copious, and exerted
from the large number of its exempla, a peculiar attraction. What, how-
ever, above all, made it popular and distinguished it from earlier collee-
tions was the practical direction of its contents, whereby the author held
himself free from all doctrinary generalities, and kept in sight the con-
crete truth in order to bring before the bar the prevailing faults and vices
of his day, and to examine from an ecclesiastical standpoint the most vari-
ous relations of civil life. The editors of the earliest edition (1476) had
this especially in view, when they remarked in their concluding words :
‘Huic (autori) applaudi, hune eflerri laudibus, hune praedicatum iri mire-
tur nemo, cum certissime constet, inter modernos sermonistas eum in vulgi
Scientia tenere principatum.’ In order to become acquainted with this
practical popular side one needs only to glance over a list of the subjects
he treated. Superiors and dependents, masters and servants, manufac-

*See Von der Hagen’s Gesammtabent, xc: Magnum Spec. Hxemp., Coelestis
gloria, Hxemp. xiv; ep. Ralston’s Russian Folk Tales, p. 810; Cox, Aryan. Myth.
i, 413; Baring Gould’s Curious Myths, 1872, pp. 92, 112. The following are some of
the most popular exemplain the sermons; as this work must be rare in this
country, we mention where corresponding stories may be found in more accessi-
ble collections: Gesta Rom. 80, 125, 143, 171, 215, 249; Pauli, 19, 84, 222, 388 898, 462;
Kirehhoft 1, 866; 1, 2,50; La Fontaine vi, 4; Etienne de Bourbon, 48, 258, 298. In
the xxi Sermo de sanctis may be found on interesting version of the legends of
the wood of the cross, see Meyer, op. cit. p. 28,

Crane, ] 76 (March 16,

turers and workmen, nobility, merchants, Jews, usurers, dancing, oaths,
blasphemy and profanity, jesting and play, falsehood, sinful apparel,
superstitions, duties of parents to children, and vice versa, how one can sin
in eating, etc.’”’

The last collection we shall mention is that of Oswald Pelbart, usually
called Pelbartus de Themeswar, a Franciscan monk from Themeswar in
Hungary, who flourished in the latter part of the fifteenth century, and
was widely known by his sermons. The collection bears the fantastic
title of Pomeriwm (orchard), and consists of sermones de tempore, de sanc-
tis, and quadragesimales.* Another work by the same author is usually
bound up with one of the above collections. It bears the somewhat mis-
leading title: Pomerium sermonum de beata virgine det genetrice vel Stella-
rium corone beate virginis pro singularum festivitatum eiusdem predicationt-
bus couptatum. It is not, as might seem, a collection of sermons, but a
treatise in twelve books for the use of preachers, and might perhaps more
properly have been mentioned above. The last, part of the twelfth book is
devoted to the miracles of the Virgin. The sermones de sanctis number in
all two hundred and twenty-one ; ninety-seven in the pars hyemalis, and
one hundred and twenty-four in the pars estivalis. Asin Herolt, so here
several sermons are devoted to the same feast, the first of the series con-
taining the legend at the end of the sermon. The sermons are paragraphed
in the usual way, and there are copious indices. ‘Fhe work no longer has
an anecdotal character, a strict analytical method is pursued, and the
writer generally confines his citations to the Scriptures, and the doctors of
the Church.

We shall take leave of the*last class of our subject with a brief reference
to some sermons in the vulgar tongue containing exempla. They are the
sermons of St. Bernardino of Siena, who died in 1444, and was canonized
six years later. Thus far only ten of the forty-five Italian sermons of St.
Bernardino have been edited (Siena, 1853), the exempla, however, to the
number of thirty-eight have been extracted, and published by Francesco
Zambrini, under the title : Novellette, esempt morali e apologht di San Ber-
narvrdino da Siena, Bologna, 1868 (Scelta di curiosite letterarie inedite o rare
dal secolo witt al avii, Dispensa wevii). Many of these eaempla are contem-
poraneous anecdotes, here and there are found fables or stories forming
part of the common stock of Europe. Among the fables are : iii, La Fon-
taine iti, 1; vi, dbéd. xi, 6; ix. Voigt, Kleinere latein. Denkmaler der Thier-
sage, Strassburg, 1878, pp. 81, 188; wvii, ‘Di una scimia la quale per ven-
detta arse uno orso ;’’ wav,*** DeW asino delle tre ville,’’ for the last two we
have found no paralleis. Among the stories are: xiv (Etienne de Bour-
bon, 456) ; viii (dbtd. 885) ; xxix (db¢d. 483, Pauli, 872).+

* For editions see Hain, Nos. 12548-66 } Greesse ti, 2, 1, p. 420 ; Fabricius, ed. cit, v.
213. We have been able to procure the sermones de sanctis only in the edition of
Hagenau, 1511, fol. containing also the Stellarium coronae B. V. mentioned above,

ft While this article was in preparation, our eye fell on the following advertise-
ment, which again proves that there is nothing new under the sun: ‘* & Co.

—

1883, } tf (Crane.

We have performed our task in a very bungling manner if we have not
enabled the reader to form some idea of the wealth of material buried in
these long unused volumes, material of great value for the historian of
manners and customs, and for one engaged in tracing the affiliation of the
popular tales of Europe. As itis in the latter direction that our own interest
chiefly lies, we may be pardoned for concluding this already lengthy
article with some reference to the light thrown upon the diffusion of popu-
lar tales by the collections just examined. In these we find every class of
Popular tales except fairy stories—legends, jests, fables, etc. The exten-
sive currency given to these stories by their reception into these collections
can hardly be imagined. They were used by numberless preachers in
their sermons to the people, and by them in turn rep sated to others. We
must bear in mind that down to the Reformation Europe constituted a
homogeneous whole, and that there existed a Weltliteratur in Goethe’s
Sense of the word. A legend or story that appealed to the imagination or
taste had free circulation from Iceland to Sicily, and from Italy to Portu-
gal. One or two examples will perhaps best illustrate the part played by
the sermon-books in this diffusion. We have already mentioned La Fon-
taine’s fable (vii, 10), La Laitiére et le pot aw lait, and have shown that be-
fore the version in the Dialogus Oreaturarum, the fable was widely diffused
by Jacques de Vitry and Etienne de Bourbon. A still more striking in-
Stance of another Oriental apologue introduced into Europe by the same
channel is the fable which Goedeke entitles Asinus vulg? (La Font. iii, 1°
Le Meunier, son Fils et V Ane), first found in an Occidental version in
Jacques de Vitry, and copied. from him by Etienne de Bourbon.* The
former of the two stories just mentioned has become popular in the tech-
nical sense, and is found in Grimm’s Ainder-und Hausmarchen, No. 164,
Der faule Heine, but in a version pointing to the Oriental original in the
Pantschatantra and Hitopadesa. It would, however, not be difficult to find
Stories still existing among the people, and which were originally commu-
nicated to them by the sermon-books. An interesting instance of this is
the story found in Grimm No, 145. The ungrateful son (Der Undankbare
Sohn), which is so short that we may give it in full: ‘‘Once upon a time a
man and his wife were sitting before their house-door, with a roast fowl on
a table between them, which they were going to eat together, Presently the
man saw his old father coming, and he quickly snatched up the fowl and
Concealed it, because he grudged sharing it, even with his own parent.
The old man came, had a draught of water, and then went away again.
As soon as he was gone, his son went to fetch the roast fowl again ; but
will begin publication immediately of ‘ The Clerical Library,’ or helps to ser-
Monizing as the series might be called. Three of the proposed twelve volumes,
each of which will be complete, are entitled, ‘Three Hundred Outlines of Ser-

mons on the N. T.,’ and again on the O. T., and ‘Outline Sermons to Children
With Numerous Anecdotes.’ ”

*8ee Gadeke’s article already mentioned in Orient wnd Occident, i, pp. 531, 733;
Pauli, 577, to the references given in these articles may be added, San Bernar-
dino, Novelletie, p. 5.

Sharpless.] 78 [April 6,

when he touched it he saw that it was changed into a toad, which sprang
upon his face and squatted there, and would not go away. When any one
tried to take it off, it spat out poison and seemed about to spring in the
face, so that at length nobody dared to meddle with it. Now this toad the
ungrateful son was compelled to feed, lest it should feed on his flesh ; and
with this companion he moved wearily about from place to place, and had
no rest anywhere in this world.’’ This very story is found in Etienne de
Bourbon, 163, Bromyard, F. 22, Pelbartus, Serm. de Temp. Hiem., 22, B,
not to mention other works of the same class, which aré mentioned in
Oesterley’s notes to Pauli, 437, and in Douhet, Dictionnaire des Légendes,
col. 805, n, 158. Until quite recently Grimm’s version was the only popu-
lar one known, but a version from Lower Brittany has lately been pub-
lished by F. M. Luzel, Lévendes chrétiennes de la Basse- Bretagne, Paris,
1881, vol. ii, p. 179, Le Mils ingrat. There are probably other popular ver-
sions which have not yet been collected, the class of legends or legendary
and religious stories having been greatly neglected by collectors of popu-
lar literature. ‘There is no need of insisting upon the importance of the
exempla in the diffusion of stories, but we may mention in conclusion two
cases of wholesale absorption of Oriental stories into collections of exempla
or similar works, The first case is that of the Disedplina clericalis of Petrus
Alfonsi, which has been taken up into the Libro de Hnxemplos mentioned
above ; the second is the Seven Wise Masters, a compend of which is found
in the Scala Coeli of a Dominican monk, Joannes Junior, who lived in the
middle of the XIV century, and wrote a work of the same general de-
scription as Bromyard’s and Etienne de Bourbon’s.* Separate stories
from both of the above Oriental collections are frequently encountered
among the popular tales of Hurope, and their wide diffusion is doubtless
due to their absorption into the above collections.

The Latitude of Haverford Oollege Observatory. By Isaac Sharpless.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 6, 1883.)

The latitude of Harverford College Observatory was determined in the
year 1854, by Prof. Jos. G. Harlan, by the use of a transit instrument in
the prime vertical. Imperfect records of his results and none at all of
his computations remain, but from them he deduced a value of 40° 0/ 86.5//,

Inthe spring of 1881, a zenith instrument was placed in position in the
observatory. The telescope has an aperture of 1% inches, and with its
standards revolves about a vertical axis. It is provided with micrometer
and levels.

*This compend of Joannes Junior is of great importance in the study of the

Western branch of the Seven Wise Masters, and has been reprinted by K, Go-
deke in the Orient und Occident, ill, pp. 3888-423, Liber de septem Sapientibus.

1883.) 79 (Sharpless.

The latitude was determined by pairs of stars, one of each pair being
horth and one south of the zenith. The difference of the zenith distances
was measured by the micrometer and the latitude calculated by the formula,

“op = hCO+ 0) +342’)

As a preliminary work the value of a revolution of the micrometer
Screw was determined by observing the passage of a star between the wires
Set at some known. distance apart, and multiplying the time by the factor

15 x cos Dec
Dist. between wires’

A. better result was obtained by the method of observing Polaris at
time of greatest elongation. This time ‘I, and the zenith distance Z, were first
calculated and the telescope set at the latter angle. About twenty minutes
before T, the movable micrometer wire was set in front of the star and the
time of crossing recorded on the chronograph ; the wire was then ad-
vanced one-fifth of a revolution, and the time again noted, and so on forty
times. From these were obtained twenty values of a revolution of the
Screw. The computation is given in outline in the following table. The
quantity Z— Z, was computed in each case by the equation :

The mean of twenty-one observations was 111.67’.

cos 3
Zam 7, = gin (T— Tt.
. sin 1//
The level error was so slight that it was not taken into account ;
No. Micrometer 1, py, ZimZigs
Reading.
6.80 er 50m. 18.88 BI BL 4B B.59
2 6.60 Bl 16.2 na 1) 5.1 410,68
8 6.40 52 33.2 ale TR AO eB TO
4 6,20 58 34.2 ee aa a a BAD OO
5 6. 54 AG, Out mae TG ce AO — 843.59
ete. ete. etc. etc.
24 2.80 6. 72 Oe se De eR a
22 2.60 "8 16.4 Fr tance ot “. BOi19
28 2.40 "4 ee ee OR OBR TC Uy hggeRs
24 2.20 5 FEN 1 SAMI Saye Me die am ey (584
2% 2, 16 Rd a ke RR Oe ian
etc. ete. etc, etc.

Comparing the 1st observation with 21st, the 2d with 22d and so on,
and dividing the results by 4, we obtain for the value of a revolution of
the screw by this method the following :

111.'78 111.25 118.04 109.92
112.20 110.71 113.98 112.66
112.05 111.28 113.26 112.76
110.'76 110.67 112.78 111.88
111.08 111.59 112.25 111.16

The mean of these is 111.//9 and this is the value employed in subse-

Sharpless. ]

quent work.
square is 0.//14.

80

[April 6,

The probable error of this mean by the method of least

The value of a level division was obtained by placing the movable mi-
crometer wire on a terrestrial mark, and taking the reading, and again

after the instrument was changed in altitude so as to cause the bubble to |
to move through a certain number of divisions.
ards reduced to dacond.

revolutions, which were afterw:
large number of determinations gave,
The stars used were taken from the Nine Years Catalogue of Greenwich

Observatory for 1872,

the mean declinations

This gave it in micrometer

The

result, of a

as the most probable value, 6//.3.

calculated for the epoch

1881.0, 1882.0, or 1883.0, and the apparent declinations for the night of
observation were obtained by the use of the ‘‘independent star numbers’
of the American Nautical Almanac.

The results were as follows :

Catalogue

Date. No, of Stars,

% (8

ooo

a
AD

a
> SUS

an

a

one S

=

ot
DX

ea

ea)

82/799
56,29

22.00
58,60
59.76
59,645
15.578
57,82
44,92
44,923
57.46
44,92
44,79
56,818

46.794
51.519

| Correction,

| a 157.85

54, 495
50,248

Micrometer

Level Cor-
rection.

|
6.72
b 1018
8.1 .|

==

PIN DAOEEH

a

rt

te
gS

SNP RS

|
wns
RR Ot
‘

=

a 0’

Latitude.

10/742
12.84 &

1883,] 31 [ Williams,
*
wie Catalogue , s7 Micrometer |Level Cor-| + .,,
Date. No. of Stars. 14 (8 + 8"). | Correction, | rection. Latitude,
. 1888.
“:'T™0, 6, 495 | 89 68 56.523) + 1 12.567) + 81,815 89-91
" 550 89 69 66.002 | 4 j 43.19
Ni 569 40 6 19.803 | — 6 86.99
2mo. 8, 475 40 10 44.976 | — 10 86.83
My 475 40 12 12.959) — 11 89.44
hi 495 | 89 68 55.108) + 1 89.67
ni 550 89 69 66.806 | + 40.84
al 569 40 6 20.181) — 5 89.70
by 591 89 61 85.175} + 9 40.88
Ny 59L 40 6 10.217|— 4 89.62
2mo. 9, 475 40 10 44.976} — 9 43.16
hb 489 = 495 89 68 55.198 | + 1 88.79
g 507 «B69 40 6 20.1825; — 5 41.88
ha | Qa 710 89 66 19.1645) + 4 89.20
bn 607 = 710 89 54 84,2665) + 6 42.46
2 mo. 12 466 475 40 10 44.041) — 9 41.97
“\ 189 195 80° 68 65,782 jot 1 85.43
“i 630-30 89 69 58.5065) + 40.84
he 567-569 oH ° 8 575) — 5 89.41
hh 578 ~—s BAL ee — 4 87.78
ib 697-710 B94 6 45.65
2 mo. 13 466 75 40 10 10 3. 87,11
i 5s7 «669 7 6 5 185 87.20
Re 697 710 89 4 6 AG 42.18
2mo, 23 530 «650 89 59 Ay 42 88
Wika Vos) TON 89 56 621. | 4 87,868 | - 1.882 40.01
2 mo, 27, 530 «= B50) | «© 89) 697,081 | + 44,200 1 4 By 44.88
8mo. 8, 812 82 89 64 18.609) + 6 2% - 2.047 44.69
3 mo, 13, 779 |) (81g 40 0 26,399 | + + 11.496 41.27
oe 779 = B84 89 68 63,.750|/ + 6 8 4 11,025 40.06
re 776 859 | 809 66 48.715) + 8 47,881 | + 7.718 88.81
3 mo. 14, 812-822 39 54 19,105! + 6 24.096 43,20

The mean of these 76 results gives the latitude of the Observatory
40° 0/ 40,085,
Assuming them all to be of equal weight, the probable error of a single
Observation is 1.706 and of the final result .191/’.

Norm—The value of the longitude of the Observatory, standing on our
books, but obtained, we do not know how, is 6m, 59.3 sec, East of Washington,
At the time of the Transit of Venus, Washington time was telegraphed to our
railroad Station, distant one-half mile from the Observatory and compared with
Our local time, The mean of three days’ comparisons gave a difference of
6M. 59.6 sec,

On a Orinoid with Movable Spines. By Henry 8. Williams.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 20, 1883.)

Among the rarer forms of the second fauna of the upper Devonian, at
the base of the Chemung group, Ithaca, N. Y., is a Crinoid with some
Interesting features,

Tn its general characters it agrees with the family Platycrinide of Romer,
and. fulls under the section Hewacrinites as defined by Wachsmuth and
Springer in Revision of the Paleocrinoidea, Pt. II, p. 56.

PROG. AMER. PHILOS. soc. XxI. 114. K. PRINTED JUNE 22, 1883.

Williams.] 82 [April 20,

Tt differs from the genus Heaacrinus Austin, as generally understood, in
possessing a well defined third primary radial similar in size to the second,
and from which the free arms abruptly diverge.

In respect of one character it differs fundamentally from all the known
representations of the genus, section or family ; and, in fact, from all
hitherto described Orinoids, in the possession of slender, acicular spines
which were free from the plates, and were evidently articulated by some
means upon elevated pitted tubercles on the surface of the plates of the
calyx, vault and free arms.

We find so-called spines on a few Crinoids, on the plates of the vault in
the genera Dorycrinus and Amphoracocrinus, and upon the calyx plates
of Rhodocrinus and other genera.

Tn all these cases, however, the ‘‘spines’’ or tubercles consist merely of
thorn-like expansions of the plates, and, so far as T can learn, there is no
recorded evidence of the occurrence upon any true Crinoid, of free spines
articulated to the plates as in the Echinoids,

In the absence of the spines themselves, the low rounded tubercles,
pitted at the apex, suggest resemblance to the mamelon of the Hehinoids,
but in the specimens herein described, the spines as well as the tubercles
are represented.

Other specimens have been examined in which the pitted tubercles
alone are seen; the spines have been found in only a single locality, but
there upon several individuals.

These specimens, like most of the fossils of the fine sandy shales of the
upper Devonian, are in the condition of hollow impressions preserving
scarcely a particle of the original substance of the test, but the impressions
are beautifully perfect, showing the finest details of surface marking and
configuration. On the impressions of some of the slender spines, fine
longitudinal strie, invisible to the naked eye, are distinctly seen with a
good lens.

Palontologists accustomed to throw aside these hollow impressions of
fossils in the Chemung rocks, as poor and worthless specimens, will be
surprised at the perfection in which all the surface details, external and in-
ternal are preserved.

Many minute characters are visible in such specimens that are rarely seen
in so called perfect specimens from limestone rocks, where the immediate
surface is very generally removed in taking the fossil from the matrix.

In the present case the specimens break along the cavities from which
the test has been dissolved, the inner and outer surfaces of the plates both
appearing, and the spines in place. That they were true spines, and not
prolongations of the plate surface is evidenced by the fact that the spines,
though in place, like bristles radiating from the surface, are in no case en-
tirely continuous with the impressions left by the removal of the plate ;
there is always a thin film of matrix separating the base of the spine from
the apex of the tubercles, to which in several cases they are closely ap-

proximate.

|
|
i
|

|
}
}
i
}
|

1883, ] 83 (Williams,

When the spines are preserved in relation to the vault, although the
Specimen was crushed and thrown out of normal shape, the vaglt plates
and their spines were held together during the process of fossilization.

The evidence is such as to suggest that the spines were united to the
plates by a tough ligamentous attachment which withstood decomposition
long after the fossil was buried.

The calyx plates were thin and frequently occur detached, but the basal
plates were thickened toward the center of the disk where they joined the
column, and were generally preserved together, though separate from the
test of the calyx.

In studying this genus, I have examined several specimens which agree
with the typical form in the general character of the plates and the arms in
One case, and possess the pitted tubercles on the surface.

The most important among these is the original specimen of a figure is-
Sued by the New York State Museum with the name Platycrinus? puncto-
brachiatus.

The original is in the Museum of Cornell University. The name was
Proposed by Prof. Hall, but, as he informs me, the species was never de-
Scribed. his, with several other undescribed species, was photographed
and the plate was privately distributed abut 1872, with names attached,
but with no descriptions. The arms, the shape of calyx, and the plates
that were preserved, correspond in general with the A. Jthacensis, but the
tubercles on the calyx plates are finer, more numerous, and the pitting
very indistinct, and the basal plates are relatively larger than in the typi-
Cal specimens of that species. Hence we are led to believe that the Ham-
ilton species is distinct from the Chemung specimens, and even if it were
Properly described and published, it is probably safe to regard it as a
distinct species. Although the specimen shows no traces of the free
Spines, the nature of the tubercles leave little doubt of a generic identity
With Arthroacantha Ithacensis, and the Hamilton form may be called Ar-
hroacantha punctobrachiata.

In the Museum of Cornell University are two specimens, each a portion
of the bagal disc, which appear to be identical with A. punctobrachiatus.

One is marked Moscow shale, locality not designated ; the other is marked
Hamilton Period, Delphi, N. Y., and is on a soft dark shale with specimens
of Pholidops.

Another specimen, generically identical, but too imperfect for specific
determination, is in the collection of Prof. 8. G. Williams, from the Hamil-
ton gsroup at Ensinore Glen, Owasco lake, N. Y.

Dr, Charles Wachsmuth of Burlington, Iowa, informs me of having ex-
'mined specimens of apparently the same species, said to have come from
Hamilton group, Ontario, Canada.

A Single calyx plate from High-point, Ontario Co., N. Y., has large,
Coarse tubercles, and the plate is evidently from a much larger specimen
than any seen at Ithaca, or in the Hamilton group, it is probably a dis-
tinct Species,

Williams.] 84 (April 20,

A few detached calyx plates with similar surface markings, but propor-
tionatelyfonger and narrower than those of A. Jthacensis, were found in
another exposure of the rocks near Ithaca.

The tubercles were few and scattered, this may represent another spe-
cies. The generic characters of this new type of Crinoid may be defined
as follows :

Arthroacantha, nov. gen.

(From ’¢p0pov, articulation and ’¢éxeavda spine.) Calyx obconical or
broadly cup-shaped ; height about equal to the breadth. Basal disc broad,
shallow, hexagonal, composed of three subequal plates,

Following the basal disc are six large subequal plates, five of which are
primary radials, and the sixth is the anal.

The first radials are slightly higher than broad with gently diverging
sides, the upper margin excavated by a deep covered notch occupying
about one third the total width of the upper edge.

In this notch lie the second radials, small and short plates which arch
outward and continue upward the rounded carination that begins on the
upper part of the first radial.

The third radial is triangular, smaller than the second and supports the
first plates of the free arms which start out from the radial at a broad angle.

The arms aré ten, and, in the typical species are several times as long as
the height of the calyx, and bifurcate at least twice, and broadly diverge
at each branching.

They are composed of plates which are narrowly wedge-shaped at the
base of the arm, the first two or three reach across the breadth of the arm,
but seriatim they become shorter, the wedge points more blunt, and the
outer portion of the margin more nearly parallel, and for the main part
of the arm the plates interlock along the median line, forming a zigzag su-
ture, the points of the plates from each side reaching less than two-thirds
across the surface of the arm.

Each arm plate bears a slender pinnule of five or more joints.

The anals are a little narrower than the first radials, and have less
diverging sides.’

The vault is composed of numerous small plates, and was probably low
and arching.

The surface of the calyx plates is beset with low scattered, rounded tu-
bercles, pitted at the apex.

The same tubercles are seen on the plates of the vault, a single tubercle
for each plate.

Upon the vault there are five narrow spaces, without tubercles, radiating
from the center; they consist of two rows of interlocking plates which
were probably thinner than the spine-bearing plates; all the intervening
plates have tubercles.

Along the upper rim of the calyx is a row of small plates which lack
the tubercles ; also, the tubercles are wanting on the second and third

pe
1888.) 85 [ Williams.

radial plates. The arm plates pretty generally have a small tubercle for
each plate, but there is an occasional exception.

From these tubercles proceed slender, acicular spines, bristling outward
from the calyx and arms, and upward from the vault.

These spines were evidently movable, and articulated by? ligaments or
?muscle upon the pitted tubercles. The spines are also pitted at their
bases,

The typical species, A. Jthacensis, is from the base of the Chemung
group at Ithaca, N. Y., from a fine, sandy shale, containing Spirifera me-
socostalis, Productella speciosa, Strophodonta mucronata, and other Che-
mung fossils, and the specimens are in the museum of Cornell University.

Arthroacantha Ithacensis, n. 8.
This name is proposed for the typical species upon which the genus
Arthroacantha is founded, and the imperfection of the material and the
actual variation among the few specimens seen create considerable doubt
4s to what may be the permanent characters which distinguish the typical
form from other representatives of the genus, I will give therefore a par-
ticular account of the size and proportions of the parts of the typical speci-
mens, and remark upon the variations observed.
The general shape and features are described in the generic diagnosis.
The typical species has the following dimensions :
MM.
DeLee NGS Wale Viuie eb rslahe eisai Ha WIEN Vee Geleleieieie BNO
DHSHCUL ee ned ON bay Kae em bases we bewa er MOCO!
Aviing, (tHiclmesBvat WASS i UAN Wece Meee ull Niall Td
estimated length ..... EO iC OVO
Stem, thickness at junction with calyx........... 1.9
Basal, radius from center of disc to base of Ist \

re

PROTA erceeivis swwts PRE a gi Giase pS NAL Wyarued

SU ECLA ps ALOT vss digs perdiviais' viv esi eal vimicaperNiatale epic (MeO
nt

Bd BHA, SA radials tOMSvHON iis sinrivia eore vieyrlaia sane t
Lat TACIA AWAGUELU DASOhis Uateleeiiels eciea-win Vise hiNiwers ru O80
Fe ices UD Muse wre TaMMiRlure KuMbendTy N's. Gree V aoe Chua!
MUDELCLES, Ciatneter MW Uwe Wit wwiaewitiy 6 we eyed sui 0.6
number on one basal plate....... 2006 16-18
"s FO OMA et CACHAN Grell Ww hes evecw 21

DPMS LENSE OF LOMBCK su Wdilew 6 Vibesirs viele ayes eee | GaeO
TAMVEUGU HL, ELSIE Wi tie wuethiw chu volwicicere’n Vavouwcanaib, ui eee

The arms have ten to fifteen joints before they bifurcate. The calyx
plates are marked on the inside by several distinct lines parallel with each
other and with the outline of:the plate, arranged concentrically like lines
of growth. This feature is not seen on the specimens from the Hamilton
group.

There is considerable difference in size among the several specimens
from the typical locality, though the majority of specimens are about the

Williams.] [April 20,
dimensions given above. <A large basal disk is seen with a radius of 12.2
mm., but with proportions of the other specimens.

Although the specimens show more or less distortion from pre:sure, it
is evident that the basal disk formed a low shallow cup, the depth of
which was about one-quarter the diameter.

The length of spines vary for the same individual. Those within the
protection of the arms, from the vault plates, are more frequently pre-
served, and are longer than representatives of calyx spines seen on these
specimens, but one calyx spine is thicker than any vault spine, and is
broken off; judging from this and the larger size of the tubercles, it is
probable that the calyx spines were fully as long and strong as those on
the vault. The spines are all very straight, slender, acicular, tapering
evenly to a sharp point, and are finely longitudinally striate on the sur-
face. :

The number of the tubercles to each plate varies somewhat, and, com-
paring specimens of different size, it seems probable that their distribution
was uniform, and that the number increased with the size of the specimen,

This species differs from the Arth. punctobrachiata of the Hamilton
group in the more distinct and less numerous tubercles on the surface of
the calyx plates ; the smaller size of the tubercles leads to the inference
that the spines were smaller in the Hamilton form ; the calyx plates were
apparently thicker in the Chemung species, and the second and _ third
radial of the specimen <Arth. punctobrachata are higher than those of
Arth, Ithacensis.

In all these comparisons normal variation (of which we are ignorant),
the effects of different habitat upon relative development, of parts, and the
distortion incident to fossilization, and the very limited and imperfect nature
of the material, lead us to speak with diffidence both as to specific charac-
ter and as to specific limits.

The character of movable spines, were it not so anomalous for the whole
order, might be regarded as of only specific value; on the other hand,
from a theoretical point of view it would not be unreasonable to establish
a distinct family for Crinoids possessing this Echinoid character,

I have taken the view that for practical purposes the generic distinction
of this from closely related genera is the best that can be done with the
present material.

The character of a vault composed of two sets of plates arranged in ten
radiating and alternate series is suggestive, and calls for further investiga-
tion.

[ have discovered on one of the specimens—somewhat crushed, but ex-
hibiting the main part of the vault and spines in place—five radiating rows
of plates upon which there are no tubercles. In crushing, the folding has
taken place along the line of these rays, from which it, is inferred that
these plates were thinner than the spine-bearing plates which fill the
spaces between them. These smooth plates seem to consist of two rows

1883,] 87 (Williams,

¢

PLatH InnustRATING ARTHROACANTHA I['THACENSIS, NOV. GEN. ET SP.

Lockington.] 88 [April 6,

of interlocking plates radiating from near the center to the circumference
of the vault.

This observation persuades me that it is not improbable that the original
plates of Lepidocentrus eifelianus, described and figured by Johannes
Miiller, from the Hifel limestone of Rommersheim, which were detached
plates associated with spines similar in nature to those just described and
borne upon similar tubercles, were plates from the vault of a true Orinoid
like Arthroacantha,

We have here a possible clue to a relationship between true Crinoids
and Perischeechinide, which is worth following up by any paleontologist
who may have good specimens of these rare forms of Echinodermata.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE.
Arthroacantha Ithacensis, noy. gen. et sp.

Fig. 1.—Calyx and part of arms, showing spines arising from plates of
salyx, vault and arms,

Fig. 2.—Diagram of the elements of the calyx.

Fig. 3.—Enlarged view of part of the vault with spines attached.

Fig. 4.—Enlarged tubercle (b) and base of a’ spine (a), showing pit in top
of former and in base of latter.

Fig. 5.—Spine about three times natural size.
Fig. 6.—Arm-plates. (a) A few joints of arm; external view, showing

tubercles and jointed pinnules. (6) Section of same.
Fig. 7.—Section of the stem at a distance from the calyx.
Fig. 8.—Lower termination of stem. All enlarged except Fig. 1

The Role of Parasitic Protophytes. Are they the Primary, or the Secondury
Cause of Zymotic Diseases? By W. N. Lockington.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 6, 1883.)

Parasitic unicellular organisms or microbes, usually considered to belong
to the vegetable kingdom, are found, in some form or other, in the interior
of the higher animals, both when in their normal state of health, and when
suffering from disease.

Certain rod-like forms have received the generic name of Bacillus ;
spherical globules that of Micrococcus, while other shapes have been en-
titled Vibrio, Bacterium, and Oladothrix. The idea of those who gave
these titles was evidently that each of these forms is actually distinct under
existing circumstances,

Nomenclature has even proceeded farther than this, since such binomials
as Bacillus anthracis exist.

~

~

1883,} 89 [Lockington.

During the last few years the microscope has been largely employed in
the investigation of diseased tissues, especially in cases of those diseases
called ‘‘zymotic;’? and the result of this examination has been to show
that certain specific forms of disease are invariably accompanied by what
appear to be specific types of microbes—or at any rite by types that are
constant in their relation to the disorder they accompany.

In this way Pasteur has made us acquainted with the parasite which ac-
companies anthrax, charbon, or malignant pustule, and with some others,
Laveran has described and figured that of malaria, and Koch has shown
that consumption has also its parasitic companion.

So generally have special forms been found associated with special dis-
eases, and so invariably have these special forms been found to increase in
number of individuals as the disease with which they are associated has
increased in severity, that a large proportion of scientific and medical men
have arrived at the conclusions that every inflammatory disease (if not
every disease) has its specific parasite ; and that the parasite is the cause of
the disease.

This explanation certainly lies upon the face of the facts, but a little
consideration will show that neither the specdfic nature of the parasite, nor
its direct causation of the disease, are proved by any series of observations
yet on record.

Observations upon the higher animals have conclusively proved that
they are subject to considerable changes caused by their environment.

Within the limits of a single so-called species occur so many variations
that the definition of a species has become difficult. Besides those varia-
tions due to sex and to age; individual, racial, and ‘varietal differences
occur, to such an extent as to render the systematic arrangement of living
forms a most bewildering task, and one respecting which no two biologists
agree,

These variations right and left of the average of a species are admitted
on all hands to be produced by natural forces, organic and inorganic, by
gravity, heat, cold, moisture or drouth, plenty or lack of food, confine-
ment or freedom, cultivation (which is an environment of man’s making)
or heredity, which is the effect of the continued environment of ancestors.

No man can look dispassionately at his own physical and mental condi-
tion without acknowledging that, leaving heredity aside, he is what he is
On account of what he has experienced. .

The changes of cell-structure which take place in the arm of a man who
abandons the yard-measure for the blacksmith’s hammer would, could
they be examined with the microscope in the same way that we ean watch
the changes of an amcba, be seen to be a thousand-fold greater and more
complicated than those of that rhizopod,

As instances of what a change of environment can do in creatures built
Up of many thousand cells, each cell as complex as is the entirety of the
parasitic organisms we are inquiring into, the foilowing will suftice : The

PROC, AMER. PHILOS. 800. XXI, 114. L. PRINTED JUNE 22, 1883.

90 [April 6,

Lockington.]

same species of trout attains a larger size in large rivers than in small
streams ; anadromous salmon of a large species have, when by accident con-
fined within a small fresh-water lake, in a few years so altered, becoming
sexually mature when quite small, that a naturalist who did not know the
cause might take them for a new species ; fishes confined within a space so
narrow that normal growth was impossible, yet supplied with food, have
grown to fit the space ; the clear silvery tints and graceful forms of salmon
when in the sea are so unlike the muddy colors and misshapen outlines
presented by the same individuals after ascent of a river that observers
have founded on them many false species; and the larva of the conger
eel becomes at times converted into a transparent, colorless pelagic fish
that has received the name of Leptocephalus Morristi.

Is it not reasonable to suppose that the outline of a plastic atom of pro-
toplasm, bounded only by a delicate pellicle, is more readily amenable to
the influences surrounding it than that of the million-celled creatures
which are known to change so greatly?

The vegetable kingdom offers examples of variation as striking as those
of the animal.

It is as hard to find two leaves of the same plant exactly alike as it is to
find two Dromios. The stem-leaves and root-leaves of the same herba-
ceous plant differ more from each other than from the corresponding
leaves of a kindred species. In some trees, as the ivy and the mulberry,
the play of form is so great, that one unacquainted with the facts would
certainly believe that forms gathered from the same stem belonged to dif-
ferent species. Hach leaf, as truly as each human being, has its own par-
ticular environment, its share of light, heat, nutrition, etc., and these
work changes in its form.

The change effected by the environment upon a plant goes further than.
form, size, or color, and extends to the nature of its secretions, so that
plants which, when grown under certain conditions, are good food for man
and. beast, become toxic under other conditions. This is true of many of
our garden vegetables; and, to come nearer to our microscopic organisms,
it is true of certain many-celled fungi, such as the common agaric of the
meadows. ‘

In the latter case the fungus is on all hands allowed to be the same, yet
while one specimen it innocuous, another is toxic.

Would it be very remarkable if it should be proved that an innocent
one-celled microbe, surrounded with diseased and poisonous pabulum,
should, if able to resist the influences around it without perishing, become
poisonous itself ?

Against the usual form of the germ theory, with its specific germs in-
ducing specific diseases, it is allowable to put forth the following :

The microbes that swarm within the body of the victim of a eymotic disease,
are either the lineal descendants of those which inhabited the same body when
én health, or are the lineal descendants of those which once dwelt in some other

1883, ] 9 1 (Lockington,

body when in health ; and, if poisonous in their nature, have been so rendered
by the poisonous nature of the secretions around them.

Organisms placed in the midst of matter that has undergone a chemical
change, and accustomed to feed upon the products of disease, are likely
to introduce that disease if themselves introduced into a previously healthy
body.

Their substance is permeated with the diseased secretions, their surface
is covered with them. They have fed upon abnormal products, therefore
they excrete abnormal products, and, if placed within a healthy animal,
are apt to start within it the same unhealthy metabolism to which they
are acclimated.

Even if the parasitic germs have not themselves yet become toxic, it is
a physical impossibility to introduce them unaccompanied by the virus
that surrounds and permeates them.

Yet the primary cause of the disease is an abnormal change in the pro-
cesses of life, affecting first the animal, and afterwards the parasite.

All analogy is, as has been shown, in favor of this view, and no obser-
vations yet made have weakened, still less disproved, analogies in har-
mony with evolutional facts.

Many well-known medical men, notably Dr. Lionel Beale, and Dr.
Benjamin Richardson, refuse to believe in the potency of mysterious
Specific germs peopling air, water and soil, and ready at any moment to
enter upon a work of wholesale destruction, and recently Dr. Formad, of
this city, has announced his adherence to the older and more rational
view, at least in the case of consumption.

We need no microscope, and no doctor, to assure us that germs are not
the primary cause of most of the ills that flesh is heir to. He would be a
bold man who would dare attribute the evils following excessive indul-
ence of any kind to the presence of parasites; the catarrh that follows
facing a rough north-easter, or ‘cooling off’’ ina draught can scarcely
be due to germs; nor can the pneumonia that succeeds a thorough wetting
and chilling; the rheumatism of the muscular man who has habitually
exposed himself to cold and damp; or the headache that punishes intel-
lectual excess, be set down as caused by microbes.

Yet these disorders are accompanied with more or less of that inequality
of the bodily processes, that undue activity in one spot, and stagnation in
another, which constitutes inflammation ; and there is little doubt that,
were a microscopic examination made, it would be found that microbes
Were present, probably in larger numbers than usual in a state of health.

Between these ordinary ailments and epidemic diseases there is no
provable distinction in kind. The products of disease, whether particles
of the diseased organism, or parasites become diseased by a residence in
that organism, are dangerous to the health of others, and the danger in-
creases in proportion to the virulence of the disease.

Diseases are processes of dissolution, and dissolution must occur, sooner
or later, as the complement of individual evolution.

|} April 6,

Lockington,]}

The role of microscopic parasites is probably similar to that of the more
tangible teniw and other worms that live as commensals within the body,
devouring the nutriment intended for it; or, at the very worst, they are

feeders upon the secretions of their host. In either case, they are fed at i
| his expense. To one in thorough health they do little harm, but become
a burden to those of weaker powers, and may become, in those attacked hf

with a grave disorder, so diseased themselves that they may act as car-
riers of the disease to previously healthy bodies.

The power possessed by these parasites, taken from the victim of an
infectious disease, of producing descendants which, for several generations, :
are capable of reproducing that disease, is often pointed to as a proof both |
of the specific nature of the parasite, and of its potency as the primary |
cause of the disease. |

Yet these facts, when looked at properly, tend to prove the reverse. |

The presumably toxic microbes, removed from their accustomed pabu-
lum, reproduce themselves, it is true, in healthy infusions, which by their
presence are rendered toxic, but at each removal to a fresh environment
some of the toxic power is lost, until at last the virus has become so at-
tenuated that it can safely be used asa medium of inoculation (as has
been practised largely by Pasteur upon domestic animals) reproducing
the original disease ina mild form, and thus (in some way not easy to |
| explain) ensuring the subjects treated with it against the fatal form of the
| disease.

| What is this gradual enfeeblement of the toxic powers of the parasite
1 | but its gradual return toward its normal condition—toward the neutral
properties and probably toward the external appearance presented by its
| ancestors when they dwelt within a healthy animal ?
| Let the cultivation proceed for a sufficient number of generations, and
I | the reversion will be complete.

Observers, principally chemists, who have studied the microbes of dis-
sase, have figured their forms, and in some cases have registered the trans-
formations of a generation ; but much more than this is necessary to prove
their specific distinctness, or their direct connection with the disease.

If, after an examination of hundreds of individual animals, some in
health, others in every stage between health and the crisis of the disease,
and others in the various stages of recovery, no transition form is in any
one instance noted—no microbe intermediate in character between that of
health and that found in the disease ; the evidence, though still negative, |
will be in favor of the ordinary germ theory, but if in only one animal |
among hundreds intermediate forms are found, that one instance will be
positive evidence in favor of the views here advocated ; since the diseased
form, when once produced, can reproduce its characters for several gen-
erations.

Microscopic examinations of the cultured organisms up to the hundredth
generation would throw some light on the subject.

‘
1883.] 93 {Hagen.

Identity between a micrococcus-form and bacillws-form has already been
noted.

M. Miguel, who has recently studied in a most thorough manner the
germs found in the air, gives figures of the development of an organism
which, at one stage of its life, has all the characters of a very long daciilus,
and afterwards by segmentation into spherules of equal size, forms chaplets
of micrococet, liable to separate into small groups,

The editor of the Revue Scientifique, that stronghold of the microbe con-
tagion theory, admits, in a late issue, that the forms found in disease are
probably varieties of habitat, and not species, yet still considers them as
the cause of the diseases they accompany.

After admitting the great variability of these simple organisms, in ac-
cordance with their habitat, is it not arguing in a circle to maintain that
varieties caused by certain conditions are themselves the primary cause

of those conditions?

On the Reversion of Series and its Application to the Solution of Numerical
Equations. By J. G. Hagen, 8. J. Prof. College of the Sacred Heart,
Prairie du Chien, Wisconsin.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 6, 1883.)

In a treatise entitled ‘‘ Die alleemeine Umkehrung gegebener Func-
tionen,’’ which was published in 1849, Professor Schlémilch maintains, that
all the methods of reversing series, based upon the theory of Combinations,
fail in the point of practical application and that even Lagrange’s formula
presents an unfavorable form of such reversions. The author then proceeds
to develop two new methods of reversing any given function, the one by
means of Fourier’s series, the other by definite integrals. In a theoretical
view, Professor Schlémilch’s methods are no doubt preferable to all the
ancient ones on account of both their generality and their simplicity ; yet
when there is question about computing the numerical values of the
coefficients of a reversed series, it should not be forgotten, that in most
cases these definite integrals, in spite of their elegant form, can not be com-
puted except by development, thus in many cases causing even greater
trouble than the old method of combinations in the case of algebraic func-
tions,

The treatise here published does not claim to furnish a new method, but
isintended to give the recurring formula for determining the coefficients of
the reversed series such a perspicuous form as to render its practical appli-
cation easy, and then to apply the same to the solution of numerical
equations.

Hagen.] 94

Parr I,

nj m. 5

7
§1. Given the series * == » A. y', to find the reversed series y= Y Bs x8,
f= 0 é= 0

where », and B are unknown. Replacing y by the latter series, we obtain

t = Mm 8 en r
xX = JA, | 2 Bs x8 or, applying Waring’s formula,
3 tl

r=0o Oo
ge ay B,“B,“.. . By 2

Pe ae Bice: Ot) oe ge: Ped SE, OO y ate 10 cole Ry te. vin apo te Oy
Lee 0 a,x 7 Ay) Ty). + .7( Ay)

In the formula, z(r) = 1:2°3... r, according to the notation of Gauss,
and the series ay a,.+. a, represents all such combinations of the num-
DOre Or Ly wey Oy sy ee satisfy the condition

Go taka t... +a, =r

(ing
The last formula is an identical equation and, according to the theorem

of Indeterminate Coefficients, may be resolved into the following con-
ditions :

1. Oase. Ou + lay -+ 2a ae as ++ ba, = 0,

This equation admits of the following combinations ;

do Oy Oy ds r
Oe MO Oia Meg
Le rhe Oi One oo
2 0 0 0 2

hence we have the condition

r=m yt r=m
2 By <= 0 or gy ere Ob (1)
r=0o mr) r=o0

Though this equation is of the mth degree with regard to B, yet for
the reversion of series, but one of its roots is fit, because there is but one
way of developing y into a series of ascending powers of %, and indeed we
find that B, is to satisfy still another condition,

Putting y = 0 we have ¥ = Aj, hence

Same
2 Bs Ao se '0.
é=0
In the special case A, == 0 we have By ee 0,
2. Case. Oa + lay + 2a, +... + pay = 1.
This case admits of the following combinations :
ao ay Ay ay 4 T
0 1 0 0 0 1
al a 0 0 0 2
2 1 0 0

{April 6,

1883, ] 95 [Hagen.

Hence we have the second condition

sy m
ea ee We a (2)
r=0 Aaa)
3. Case. Oay + lay + Pag t+. bey =*
" This equation admits of the combinations :
ado On ay as 4 r do ay a a3 a4 | r
a SOO OE ed Cee OS Ue
| 1 0 ul 0 0 2 1 2 0 0 0 eet
I 2 0 i 0 0 3 2 2 0 0 0 4
|
Hence the third condition is
Sala 5 Bi Bi
Ale 0 ; 0 | Ski 8
0) [Seay ay + aw acl =O sf
4 Case. Oa + lay + Pa. +++ >be ay
The combinations of this case are the following :
j Dy Oh Og Oe Cis | r Oy Ong Oy Cy Ga |i MD Gy 1 Ag A, Oy as] Y
Ce Ooo Os LO OURS wie OO ee” te
Loree" 1-0". 0) 2 i ee Me lta 8 1) /8'70):0 4
By Ose O eae OO 8 ee O00) 4 Ro) Og | 5
Oa os eR dite
| Hence the fourth condition
r=m [ Bj" B, Bt? B,B, By? B?
“ mt sy) é = Q, |
2 Arn@ Le@—1 xGy! G8) aU) 7 ne x@—8) 7@)J—%
| 5. Case. Oa + lay + 2a + - py = 4,
Here we have the following possible combinations :
| Hy Ay Ag Ay Aq Ms | I Gy O% % S| L Gy A, Ug A | r
| ee 08 18 be reo the: OR. 10 1 e
N WTC Oude a i a hs) Net U ka at ‘ My 98 ode 4
; RO OMOR 0 108 Body CO aL slid, Pais tree) 5
Oy Oy as | I ie. Ce Oy Cela
0 4 0 4 LUNG OP a a 2
leer: a0) 5 hed Oe! eel 3
Bik Bh pd asl 0 8 ON. ei Ol 4 hee
Wee \
Hence the fifth condition :

tet

1B, Bu ( BB, . B,? By BY By
kin A 060) tee wl) txt —B) (<a a) tx(2))+ a8) w(8)xC1)

Hagen.]

B,-* By) | i. (5)
a(r—4) 2(4)) 0

and so on.

Note.—The lower limit of 7 may be put == 0, because all those terms in
which z contains a negative argument, are zero.

§2. The equations (1) to (5) may be transformed in the following way.
We put for pede 8 sake

‘a n '
= E G) A, Bet = As. .s, (6)
r=c
where

r mee (r—2)... r—d + 1)
Ce i tie mn)
according to the notation of Huler.* For numerical computations we
then obtain from (6)

yo Ay + 2A, B, +3 A; B,? + 4A, Be +...
SA +B ALB) +6 ABS.
,t4 A, By +... (7)

Thus the conditions (1) to (5) present themselves in the more perspicu-
ous forms

x,=0
B, : om
rig af IFS Org oe. O (8)

9 Rp yy > > a
B, B, 2, ak 3," 23 = 9

B, 3 “+ 2 (B, By +4 2 B,?) Xo ate 3 B, B, Xs + B,* Par =0, |

The law of these series being evidenced from inspection, we deduce the
next following conditions ;

Bj ¥, 4 94b) 8; +B, B24 CPB, + BB) ad BPD Ty
Bes = 0
By 2, + 72) (BB, + B, By + - os 3, + (3) (B,B,B, +3 be Bet *)
me B}? me a
7 ae) 5} Fayincay “4” Pr Bee + Bi 2, =O,

and in the general form
Bu 3, + 2(2)(B, But +...) ¥, + 7(8)(B, . 2g te sp Bie 20,
each term with the sign ¥, bien the factor We ) on oAac oh Be having the
denominator z(¢). The factors of 3, are always y in number, and the sum
of their indices y.

There is no difficulty in solving the equations (8), except the first,

* Acta Petropolitana, V. 1, p.89. Though his notation is not much used in
American text-books, it is found very handy in operating on series,

[April 6,

(
1883, } 97 (Hagen.

which is of the mth degree and will be considered presently. The other
equations give the following solutions :

1
B, pad + i
ra |
1
— 5’
B,=-- Vee {
{ » (9)
oe . sliteibe a. 32 b Maen
Bs af V6 (? - “1 =3)
nad
1
ia * R ys PR ST LOT ST yay ste
By ya © xy — 5 21 An As aj 44), ete.
eg!
The formulas show, first, that in general we shall have p= ®, and
secondly, that the series of the coefficients B decreases the faster the

larger 2, is. For the quotient Diy By is of the same order as 1 + 4,.

Fence a few terms will suffice to compute y as often as the coefficient A,
is large in comparison to the following coefficients.

Now as to the condition
r=m

-_— yj’ _
3, = 2 A, BS BS = 0,
Hy 10)
it is evident that its cwact solution is impossible as often as m >4, except
in one case, viz.: when A, = 0, in which we have also B, = 0. The

approximate solution of the above equation by development will be ex-
plained in Part II.

§8. In the special case A, = 0 we have B, = 0, because % and y are
zero at the same time. Consequently we have 3 = A, and the formulas

Dp Ag ee 0
By AG cs 1
B, A, + BY A, =0
B, A, + 2 B, B, A, + B,? A, = 0 gr
B, A, + 2 (B, B, + $B,") A, +8B?B,A,+ Bsa, =0/:°
B.A, 9 (B,.B, + By B,) A, + 8 (BY By+ BY B,) Ay +
4B, B, B, -+ BY At = 0
ete., their solutions being
a
By
1=+ a |
a
Be = A
Chae
t ) (on
B= + it QQ Ag — AVA.)
B= — a (6 A,? —B A, A, A, + Aj? A,), ete.
UAC Dis
§4. When A, is not zero, the given series may be written in the form
r=m
a SA, ee 2 AL yt (10)
rea]

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800. XXI. 114. M, PRINTED JUNE 28, 1888.

98 {April 6,

Hagen.)

Here we have exactly the case of $3 and the formulas (9/) will at once
give the coefficients of the series

HT é =

| y = J Bs (¥ — Ap)’. (10”)

} $6=0

$5. When it is required to have y developed into a series of ascending

powers of ¥ itself, we may proceed in the following way. Let the given
ail series be written in two different ways,
| r=m r=m
s= YA y’ and ¥—A,= 2 Ay’, i
r=o r=] |
and consequently also the reversed series |
$= 0 b= w |
y= Bs xo andy = 2 Os; (% — Ay). (11) |
8=0 8=0 |
The values of the 0 are given by the formulas (9/), provided that we |
write (instead of B, as has been explained in $4, while the coefficients B |
are still unknown. Developing (3 — A,)é by the Newtonian formula, |
we get
ne )
3!
(3 — Ag) = (— 198 2 1p (7) Ava xe;
A=0
HH and equating the two series (11), we obtain
i I 8 =e 0 A = 00 6 re
| BBs x8 =F (— 1) 4 YC 18 Cs (2) Ads
I] §=0 A=0 é&=0 A
1 | and finally by the theorem of Indeterminate Ooefficients,
HI b= BS i |
il Ba ee (yy (—1)8( ) Os AeA (12)
} | é=A A
| This formula may be transformed, by changing the index 9 = 4 +-r1,
| thus :
r=@ th
Bie ie (aw BAS ee C cL "Yon day Ae (12/)
r=0O A
i ‘ Aq (Att
{| where instead of ( M4 ) we may write ( ss ys The convergence of
HH} |
{| i the series (12) will depend upon the coefficients @ and must be examined q
| in each special case; in general we can state that it always converges, a

ath when we have

Tim 108 on 1

| ame se Ay

| Heample.—Let it be required to reverse the series

| Keli tytey tay

Here is As = ; - (J) > 0) and A, = 1, hence we obtain from (9/), writing
O instead of B,

C= —

1 1 1
| Dry 7, =10,= —, - O, =
{| Oyen, Oj 5 Os (2) OC, = + x(3)' x(4y’ etc.,

and in general (except Cy)

t
|
|
|
|
|
t
|
t
|

nis (eye
1888, ] 99 [Hagen.

{ (an tt rl
Os == (— 1) + 1 - tO 2 eee
vader zd)" Cr +x m(A + 1)
This value substituted in (12) gives for 2 > 1
fr -- 5] ( ie Lys +1 ir fod q
B= lesa LS ota SY , = 2 > ee
A= ( ) SQA +r) x(A+4) x(A) Gey

r+o A . r=0
(—1)a +1
‘ine i)
m(A)
and for 2 = 0, since O, = 0,
r= 00 | | 1y a of 1
Bye Py jt Ney ~=1l—e;
a Yr L (tr) re 0 mx)

where e = 2.'718281828 + is the base of, the Mepierian system of loga-

rithms,
Substituting these values into the first of the formulas (11) we obtain

A= 0 A= 7 4)SA+1
y= SD Ba xi =l—e-+e 2 At
A=0 Vel ™(X)
Jonsequently the given series
as ee uh, ai chess de ccm lewis io ake
xai¢ + F+54+74 rae.
is reversed in the following way :
en ene ee Se pill, Gres x)
oar o(1 hs a a HD
Y= 0 *
a Se Sige eens r ‘
=1—e oo ( L) x(t)

if te)

This last formula may be tested in the following way. The given series
requires that we have at the same time }¢ = 1 and y = 0, consequently
the reversed series requires the identity

a 1 1 e—l1
Le aie ARR TO hea?

which may be verified without difficulty,

Part III.

The equations (10) and (10’) imply the approwimate solution of algebrate
equations. Putting Aj==0 and assuming for % any constant quantity,
Say a, we may write these equations in the following way :

r=m é=-
a= J Ay’, solution, y = 2 Bs a? (18)
r=] é6=0

The coefficients B are determined by the equations (8) and (9), We do
not say (8’) and (9/), because the condition Bj =0 is not by necessity
fulfilled in this case, although we have A,== 0. While in §1 we have
Stated that the reversion of the series admits of but one root of the equa-
tion (1), since there is but one way of developing y into a series of
ascending powers of ¥*, we now have to say, that-all the m roots of

Hagen.) 100 [April 6,

the equation (1) are to be considered, since our equation (18) of the mth
degree admits of m solutions. And indeed, equation (13) being no more
an identity, we cannot say, as we did in §8, that a and y will be zero at the
same time.

Consequently the condition (1) is be taken in its full extent and, since

A, = 0, may be written this way : }
r=m
Di bey en wer (14)
r= 1
This equation is at once resolved into the following two :
zr m.
By == 0 amd 2 sae tel =e. 0, (14/)
r=1 |

thus showing that the solution of the equation of the mth degree is made de-
pendent on the solution of an equation of the (m — 1)th degree, as has been
remarked also by Prof. Schlémilch on page 26 of his article referred to.
For each root By the formulas (7) and (8) will furnish a different set of co-

éefticients B, By... . and consequently a different value of y, and the for- |
mulas (9/) give at once the value of "4 for the root By) = 0:
1 1 I
=+-— a——; A, a (2 Aj? — A, A) a? — (5 A’—
v A, AS Ag a} - ‘ 6 2 1 hg, Ay 2
5 A, A, A; + Ay? Ay) aft... (15)

As we have already noted in §2, this method is applicable especially
to such series in which the first coefficient A, is large in comparison
to the following ones,

Hirst ecample.—Let the given equation be

yo+ioy+1=0.

Here we have A, = 1, A, = 10, a==-— 1, and from (14’) we get the
two conditions By = 0 and B, =— 10. By the first we obtain from (15)
1 i 2 5
it gel an se 1010208 2...
v1 i0 108 108 io? a
By the second condition B, = — 10, we compute from (‘7)
= — 10, 3, = 1, 3, = 0, ete.;
and by means of these values from (8) or (9)
uf 1 2
a — i a i ow, 5, " \.
= 07 Bs=-jor? Be iT ei jor? °°
and finally we have from (13)
1 1 2 5
=—104+— — — + ,,.==—9,8980705...
Ya ae ee he ge tee sdeeSeac as

A proof of this calculation is found in that y, +- y, is equal to the nega-
tive cofficient of y.
Second ewample.—Let it be required to solve the equation of the fourth
degree
yt — Ay? —25 y? + 100 y + 1 = 0,
Here we have A,=1, A, =—4, A, = — 25, A, = 100, a= —1,
The equations (14) are now

B, = Oand B,’ — 4 B,? — 26 B, + 100 = 0.

1883, ] 101 (Hagen.

The latter admits of being resolved in the following way :
B,* — 4 B,? — 25 B, -+ 100 = (B,? — 25) (B, — 4),
and thus we obtain for By the following numerical values 0, —5, +-4, +45.
1. By the first we obtain from (15)
4: 25 1650 118125
Ya =— 409 + {008 ~ 1008 1007
== — .009,975,168,8...
2. By the second we compute from (7)

rs 450, ora 185, 4,=— 24, s,= ay Dy ey ete.,
and consequently from (8) or (9)
5 1 TBO 57650
a ey BE aggre Pare on apgee eee

and finally from (13)

Cie ig 1 185 57650
Y= —O+ B59 1 Or F “G05
== — 4.997,775, 744,65...
3. In the third case » == + 4 we find from su
2, = — 86, J, = + 238, 2, = + 12, Y, = 1, 3 =o, ete.,
and from (9)
23 1490 _ 80707
be | +e 3. =e os =.
ear: a B, = gm? Bs 365° Ba 367? Cte;

hence from (13)
23 1490 80707

Ya=4-+ 3G 1.3 368 get
sot ORB ROB, Bh a
4, In the fourth case 6 By = ++ 5 we have from (7)
a = + 50, 3 a= + 65, Xs = + 16, 4, = —— it ER Bre 0) Stes)

and from (9)

ees BB). F080 1115625

Bi gp Be or eee Re Ag ae ogre tO.

consequently :

ne 1 65 7650 1115625

eT BS ST BO RR tay

== ++ 4.979,4538,9...
A. proof of the work is found in the sum of the four roots,
Y, = — 0.009, 975, 163,8
el 4.997, 775, '74.4,5 0
Yo == + 4.028, 296,8
¥, = + 4.979, 458, 9
-+ 4,000, 000,

inclusive of the sixth decimal place being equal to the negative coeflicient
of y’,

6
Davis,] 102 [April 6,

On the Conversion of Chlorine into Hydrochloric Acid, as observed in the
Deposition of Gold from tts Solutions by Charcoal. By Wm. Morris
Davis.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 6, 1883.)

The simple fact of such conversion, while of interest in a chemical point
of view, would not justify me in occupying the time of this meeting in dis-
cussing it.

But in its technical application to the cheap and effective deposition of
gold from its solution, both from the novelty and usefulness of the method
it is deemed worthy of your attention.

Preliminary to the description of the process, and necessary to an appre-
ciation of its value in a technical sense, the following facts have an im-
portant bearing.

It has been estimated that only about one-tenth of the gold of our coun-
try exists in an uncombined state (as free milling ores), or as dust and
grains of gold in river sands, or placer washings; such gold is largely
obtained by amalgamation processes.

The remaining nine-tenths is found in veins of the older geologic period,
and is held in combination by sulphides, arsenides and tellurides ; to these
ores the process of amalgamation with mercury has been found inapplica-
ble ; hence they are generally known as refractory ores.

Two methods have been adopted for working these refractory ores, viz.:
Smelting or fusion with lead, and chlorination ; that is by first reducing the
combined sulphides, &c., to oxides, and then dissolving the gold by means
of chlorine.

The process of smelting is applicable to refractory ores only, when they
varry a high value in gold, because of the high cost attending the method.
Crooks and Roéhrig’s ‘‘ Metallurgy’’ teaches that ‘‘ores containing combined
gold to the amount at $20 per ton cannot be profitably fused with lead;
even could they be raised without mining cost.’’ Asa rule in this coun-
try this process is not applied on ores below the value of $40 per ton.

By chlorination, ores carrying $20 per ton, can be profitably worked,
mining costs included.

Without entering into the question of chlorination, it may be remarked
that various methods have been devised whereby the solvent powers of
chlorine have been applied to the extraction of gold from such ores. The
process is an old one, is one which has been long in use, and the excel-
lence of the method is admitted; it has been found that the solvent power
of a chlorine solution is much increased by operating with the gas under a
pressure equal to two or more atmospheres.

By such proceeding it is evident that the chlorine solution employed in
the chlorinating apparatus will be highly saturated with the gas; it was
with such supercharged solutions that the following experiments with car-
bon were conducted. It is taught that water at ordinary temperatures will!

+

1883.] 103 [Davis.

hold in solution two and a half times its volume of chlorine, and that five
cubic feet of the gas will weigh one pound, and it has been found in prac-
tice that under the Mears’ system or method, by pressure, the resultant
solution carried such volume of gas as to require an excessive amount of
sulphate of iron, or sulphuretted hydrogen (where these precipitants are
used) to neutralize the excess of chlorine, before they could act in pre-
cipitation of the gold, Thus adding a cost that our low grade ores will
not bear; other difficulties and shortcomings, attend the precipitations by
these reagents, not necessary to describe, as they are well known to all
who have adventured on any of the various modes of chlorination, and
which are clearly set forth in Crook and Roéhrig’s ‘‘ Metallurgy,” in de-
scribing Plattner’s Chlorinating works at Richenstein, upper Silesia.

From the unsatisfactory results of thus precipitating the gold after it is
obtained in solution, chlorination processes have been of limited applica-
tion, being mainly confined to operations on a small scale and to the con-
centrated tailings of other processes.

In the effort to overcome these obstacles to success, and to adapt chlori-
nation to the requirements of enlarged operations, the writer reached re-
sults which are herein described and explained.

In an aqueous terchloride, or normal solution of chloride of gold, very
many substances, both inorganic and organic, will decompose the salt and
precipitate the gold in a metallic state, or in combination with the sub-
stances employed ; but excepting the proto-sulphate of iron, or sulphu-
retted hydrogen, they are quite inapplicable in a solution surcharged with
chlorine, especially is this the case, in the use of organic substances,
owing in a measure to their rapid decomposition and disintegration by
chlorine.

In vegetable charcoal we find an organic structure capable of resisting
the destructive influences of chlorine, therefore, after numerous failures
with other organic substances, this was adopted as subject of experiment ;
and it was found possessed of a remarkable power in decomposing the
auric solution, converting the chlorine rapidly into CIE, depositing the
gold upon, and throughout the charcoal, and*allowing contained copper
to pass off in the escaping fluid. Thus, by a simple regulated flow through
charcoal, surmounting the sole difficulty to the employment of the chlor-
ine process, on an extended scale of operations.

The gold was retained in metallic form, and of great purity ; by long
continued action the gold was observed to replace the wasting carbon,
atom for atom, fibre for fibre, retaining the form and structure of the frag-
ment of coal, so that on the dissipation of the carbon by incineration, and
washing away the ash by $03, a brilliant and perfect golden pseudomorph
of the coal was obtained.

The copper in the solution was not affected by the coal, and it passed to
its appropiate tank to be precipitated by iron as cement copper.

In a report made by Prof. F. M. Endlich, to parties in New York, he
Says, ‘In order to test the efficacy of the process, I took, systematically,

Davis.} 1LO4 {April 6,

samples from the receiving tanks, from the collecting tanks, from the pipe
which carried the solution to the filter, and from the stop cock through
which the liquid passed after the solution had been in contact with the
charcoal.

«The unvarying results of these repeated tests may be summed up
briefly:

‘‘While I never failed to get copious precipitates of gold from the solu-
tion in the tanks, and from that taken from the faucet through which it
flowed into the filter, I never obtained the slightest gold precipitate from
the same liquid after it had passed through the charcoal,

“The tests which were employed to detect gold in the liquid which had
passed through the charcoal were varied, and entirely sufficient to be con-
vincing. Sulphate of iron will decidedly indicate the presence of one part
of gold to forty thousand parts of liquid.

“Neither with this reagent, nor with any others that were used could a
trace of gold be detected in the liquid taken from the lower spigot of the
first barrel, containing one hundred pounds of charcoal, measuring twenty-
eight inches vertically, after about nine hundred and sixty gallons of ter-
chloride solution had passed through it.’’

This amount of solution represented about six thousand pounds of ore,
carrying according to assays, $72 in gold.

He continues, ‘‘ Briefly restating what has been said at greater length, I
would repeat that the charcoal filter as here used, is entirely sufficient to
precipitate from a terchloride solution, all the gold contained therein.”’

Prof. Endlich remarked on the disappearance of the chlorine from the
solution after it had passed the filter. At this stage of the experiment the
true cause of the deposition of the gold was not determined, on this point
he writes ;

“As to the chemical exchanges which take place, and produce the re-
sult, I cannot speak positively, and have not, at present, the time at my
command to make the requisite investigations,’’*

It was not until operations were conducted on an enlarged scale that we
arrived at an explanation of the reactions which occur in the contact of the
terchloride solution with carbon.

It was known to a few antiquarian delvers in chemical records, that
among the multitude of substances which decompose a solution of chloride
of gold, carbon was named by Count Rumford as possessing this property,
but it was only under certain conditions that he observed it to act, for he
says, ‘‘recently ignited charcoal separates gold, only in sunshine or at,
109° ;’’ further experiment proved that under the influence of light, or
heat, gold will separate from its solution in the absence of charcoal.

Thus Kane teaches that, ‘‘when chlorine water is exposed to the light,
it is gradually decomposed, chloride of hydrogen being formed, and

*Prof, H, subsequently writes: ‘Your conclusions regarding the decom posi-
tion of water for the formation of C1IT seem a little forced.”

1888.) 105 [Davis.

oxygen being set free, he further states that heat has the effect of decom-
posing such solution with the same results;’? should gold be present, it
will be precipitated in proportion to the disappearance of free chlorine.*

”

When it thus appeared that the recited conditions alone were sufficient
for the deposition of gold from its solution, then was Rumford’s discovery
consigned to the limbus of useless speculations. This remarkable property
of carbon is casually mentioned by a few authors ; but it is nowhere taught
that carbon is distinguished by any remarkable energy, or as differing
from the crowd of organic substances with which it was classed.

Neither is it anywhere suggested that such deposition was of any com-
mercial value, and no use has ever before been made in the metallurgic
separation of gold from its solution, nor has carbon been employed in
obtaining gold from its ores except as a fuel.

Just the opposite has been the case, for when the attention of experts
was called to the claims of this process, they generally agreed that there
was nothing in chemical laws or scientific principles to sustain the assump-
tion, and at this moment well informed minds are at a loss to account for
the remarkable energy of this new agent in reducing gold from a solution
to a metallic state, and the additional fact, that it is inert towards other
earthy and metallic constituents of the solution. Thus serving as a refining
agent also.

As sustaining the claim of novelty, for the hypothesis of the conversion
of chlorine into ClH, by carbon, allusion may be made to the contrary
opinion of many chemists, as expressed in correspondence with the writer.
Several incline to the opinion that the reduction is simply a mechanical at-
traction of the carbon for the gold (corresponding to the action of animal
carbon on the impurities in sugar) ; this opinion has been. held regardless
of the disappearance of large volumes of chlorine, and the formation of its
equivalent of CLIT.

Others ascribe the action to the defective carbonization of the wood, and
seek explanation in the ‘oils, resins, or partially changed wood fibre,’’
which are known to precipitate gold.

Some claim that the action is due to the presence of hydrogen in the
gaseous ammonia, which charcoal absorbs with avidity from the air. If
such were the case, the action would be of short duration in the presence
of highly charged chlorine solutions ; but, that such is not the case, may
be experimentally shown, by submitting a perfectly prepared piece of
charcoal to a high heat, and, while in a state of ignition, quenching it in
distilled water (simply for the purpose of cooling), then immediately
transfer it in the dark to a cold surcharged chlorine solution carrying gold
and copper ; the effect will be the disappearance of the free chlorine, the

*In the quantitative investigation of this subject by Dr. G. A. Kanig of the
Pennsylvania University, as published in Journal of Franklin Institute, May 8,
1882, this property of heat, to decompose a gold solution was overlooked, and
his conclusions are invalidated by his employing heat in the digestion of the
carbon in the gold solution.

PROG, AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXI. 114, N. PRINTED JUNE 23, 1883.

Davis.] 106 [April 6,

presence of its due equivalent of CIH, the deposition of the gold on the
sarbon, while the copper will be found in the solution, That the action
of carbon in effecting such changes is not evanescent has been shown, but
may be repeated in brief :

A filter containing one hundred and sixty pounds of charcoal in the ope-
rations of the mill, after a continuous flow of chlorine solution for ten
days, and passing sixteen thousand gallons (representing eighty tons of
ore) was still effective in producing the above results. Some few writers in
their hasty experiments failed in getting satisfactory results and dismissed.
the subject as ‘“‘the wild dream of a mad inventor.’’

The following formula is offered as explanatory of the reactions attend-
ing the deposition of gold from its solution by charcoal :

AA 2 Au free,
mW BuO, +
O18.
83 Carbon... UO ie at
TH? 6 Cl1H
Loh: ae ae
08 : bra poniidermuite Oo OOF

Chemistry teaches that ‘‘Chlorine has a powerful affinity for hydrogen,
and when brought in contact with other bodies, in the presence of water,
will decompose the water by combining with the hydrogen forming C1H
and liberating oxygen. Thus, substances are frequently oxidized by
chlorine to a higher degree than by nitric acid. Kane teaches that

“‘Selenious acid (SeO*) and chlorine in the presence of water is con-
verted into selenic acid (SeO*) and hydrochloric acid (C1H).

SeO? + Cl + HO = Se0? + CIH.”

Reasoning from analogy, we may explain the reactions in the deposition
of gold: by substituting carbon for selenious acid in this formula; in
which case the carbon is oxidized at the expense of the water, the hydro-
gen uniting with the chlorine to form ClH.

That such are the reactions may be assumed, a priord, as all the ele-
ments involved are satisfied according to their equivalent affinities, and
form definite compounds, leaving the gold free ; and it follows, that the
deposition of the gold is occasioned by the conversion of the chlorine
(which is a solvent of the metal) into chlorohydric acid (in which gold is
insoluble), and it is in nowise owing to an attraction or affinity of carbon
for gold. i ’

As copper is soluble in muriatic acid it is not affected by the change in

|

1888.) 107 [Davis,

the condition of the chlorine, from a free to a combined state, and this
metal remains in solution, as does every contained substance, which is
soluble in ClH.

That the free chlorine is thus converted into the combined state is shown
by the following experiment, which was made after the carbon had con-
verted two hundred times its volume of chlorine, or the filter of 80 gallons
of coal had received 8750 gallons of the chlorine solution, carrying about
twice its volume of gas :

Of the running solution two samples were taken, one from the surface
before it entered the coal, the other from the bottom after it had passed
through the filter; from the first, the chlorine acted powerfully on the
senses ; in the second, no odor was perceptible.

To equal portions of the two samples were added nitrate of silver, the
precipitated chloride was collected, washed and dried with due precautions,
and the weights of the two precipitates exactly corresponded; the one
measuring the sensible, the other the combined chlorine.

In only one experiment of long-continued action, has a sensible diminu-
tion of the carbon been observed ; further and more exact determinations
than could be made in a mine laboratory are required to establish this
point.

Neither has it been determined to what extent the deposit of gold can be
carried by this method, the button of gold now exhibited weighing eigh-
teen and a half pennyweights was recovered from the ash of two ounces
of charcoal ; the filter from which it was taken seemed to have lost none of
its activity. The grains from the surface of this filter yielded the pseudo-
morphs of gold which are before you, and the weight of the gold is above
One-third the weight of carbon, which has been removed.

As affecting this question, and possibly of interest to the chemist, the
following observation was made on the action of dilute 50% on charcoal
taken from a filter after being subjected to the action of chlorine for six
days :

With the thought that washing this carbon with dilute SO® might clean
the coal and increase its activity, a portion of it was placed in a glass per-
colating tube, and the above acid passed slowly through it. The solution
from the bottom came away of a dark brown color, but retaining its trans-
parency ; on passing this through filtering paper no deposit was retained,
showing that the color was not owing to dust of the coal. The solvent
action of the acid continued as long as it was applied, and until the size of
the carbon grains were sensibly diminished, when the acid solution was
replaced by a current of cold water. Now the escaping fluid was almost
black, being many shades darker than the acid solution, This when
largely diluted was of a rich brown color, and perfectly transparent. The
carbon grains were rapidly diminishing in size, and seemingly entirely
soluble, when the process was interrupted to test the power of the remain -
Ing contents of the tube on an auric chlorine solution.

On passing such solution through the residuum, it was found to have

Davis.] 108 (April 6,

lost all power in converting the chlorine or depositing the gold. Although
the coal in the large filter from which this portion was taken, retained its
full power for three succeeding days, and, so far as the eye could judge its
character as a charcoal, remained unchanged ; whilst the portion subjected
to 80° hid lost all characteristics of charcoal in qualities and appearance.
Pressing occupations interfered with a further examination of this method
of reducing charcoal to a soluble condition. This is presented as a new
and interesting feature in the history of chlorine. ‘

From notes of a laboratory experiment in a qualitative examination, the
following details are given as illustrative of the methods employed to ar-
rive at reliable results. The novelty of the subject and the importance
of the conclusions, are offered as apology for the minuteness of detail ;

A. glass percolator, 18 inches deep, was filled with granular wood char-
coal, without other preparation than expelling enclosed gases, and re-
moving adhering substances by immersion in water; a gum tube and
compressor at the outlet served to regulate the flow ; twenty-four ounces
of coal were employed ; 100 gallons of solution were used, carrying chlo-
rine that was evident to the senses in escaping fumes ; inhalation could
not be made at the surface of the coal. This represented 750 pounds of
an ore assaying $15.65 gold to the ton. Temperature of the room about
75° F., density of the liquid 3.75 Beaumé; the rate of flow was regulated
to one gallon per hour, and continued uninterrupted until the close of the
experiment, or 100 hours.

At intervals of an hour samples of the escaping fluid were taken, and
tested for gold with sulphate of iron, in every instance it failed to detect
gold.

The rich blue color of the escaping liquid showed the presence of cop-
per; remembering that the presence of copper had hitherto impaired the
action of sulphate of iron as a precipitant, it remained to be shown. that.
the want of precipitate in the test tubes was a reliable indication of the
absence of gold; to test this, every tenth gallon of the filtrate was sub-
jected to the following treatment :

The copper was precipitated by clean iron wire, the resulting cement
copper washed on a filter, then dissolved by SO%, and the undissolved por-
tions secured on a filter, dried, and incinerated, and the ash assayed for
gold; the return of which was .01 grain. Now as one gallon represented
the y}, part of a ton of ore, the above result shows a loss by reason of the
presence of copper of 2.66 grains of gold per ton == 114 ets.

At the conclusion of the flow, the charcoal was washed, carefully incin-
erated in an iron dish, and the ash smelted with borax. The button of
gold weighed 1389 grains, as the return from 750 lbs. of ore ; which is equal
HOB Bre QAR CM wale nian ve van Nae ew vaeh BLUNT EDO CORN

sea VAN OL DONS! vacane Ke piel |idacely dy Mama MitneieNnMEN MORCOIE SIN
A difference of 12 cents per ton in favor of the finer determinations of
analysis by solution, over the approximative method of smelting by fire
assay.

ae

1883. } 109

Working on a larger scale, the following result was arrived at, in the

chlorination works near Salisbury, N. C. :

1963 tons worked ; average ASSAY. ..eeeeeeeeerrees $6.11 = $11,904.19
Net returns fron U.S. Mint...cccsceoesseerssereee80ld == 11,158.82
$835.37

Which shows a loss in working equal 48 cents per ton.
By careful and constant assays of the spent sands, this loss is accounted

for, by the washing in the leaching tanks being arrested before the last
traces of gold were removed. To thoroughly wash these sands would re-
quire a large volume of water, and the loss is regarded as an economic

waste,
On this point Dr. Jno. F. Boynton, in a report on an experimental test

of the process, reports :

“ The spent ores, or tailings, as found in the leaching vats after washing,
were subjected to rigid examination ; samples were taken of each charge,
and careful fire assays made, and in no case did an ounce assay afford gold
equal to the one-thousandth part of a grain.”’

Without entering into the technical details or the costs of manipulation,
the above results are presented as evidence that the refractory ores of gold
may be worked on an enlarged scale by the joint chlorine and carbon
processes, and may in the end utilize the vast stores of these ores, which
lie useless in our Southern and Western gold fields.

Stated Meeting, May 4, 1883.
Present, 18 members.
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

Letters accepting membership were received from Prof.
Heilprin, dated Academy Natural Sciences, Philadelphia,
April 4; Mr, A. E. Lehman, dated 907 Walnut street, Phila-
delphia, April 80, 1883; Mr. Philip C. Garrett, dated Fair-
field, Germantown, Philadelphia, May 8, 1883, and Mr, Dill-
wyn Parrish, dated Philadelphia, May 5, 1888.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Verein
fiir Erdkunde, at Dresden (108); and the Accademia dei Lincet
at Rome (109, 110, 111).

110 [May 4,

Letters of envoy were received from the Geological Survey
of India, Calcutta, Nov. 8, 1882; the Royal Saxon Society,
Dec, 11, 1882; the Royal Leop. Car. Deutschen Akademie,
Halle, Dec. 7, 1882; the Royal Akademie der Wiss. at Vi-
enna, Dec. 21, 1882; and the Société d’ Agriculture at Lyons,
(1 to 109), requesting lacking numbers of the Proceedings,
which, however, this Society can no longer supply, their
edition being exhausted, viz., Nos. 5, 17, 21, 28, 26, 29, 80, 31,
84, 68 and 64.

A letter requesting exchange of publications was received
from the Cincinnati Society of Natural History, 108 Broad-
way, Cincinnati, April 27. On motion it was placed on the
list of corresponding societies to receive the Proceedings.

Donations for the Library were received from the Acade-
mies at Halle an d. S., Vienna, Buda-Pest, Dijon, and Brussels ;
the Societies at Gorlitz, G6ttingen and Lyons; the Royal
Saxon and Jablonowski Societies at Leipsig; the German
Apothecaries’ Union at Halle; the Royal Lombard Institute ;
the Musée Guimet; the Ethnographical Institute, Zodlogical
Society, Geographical Society, Polytechnic School, Mining
Bureau and N. H. Museum at Paris; the Com. Geographical
Society at Bordeaux; the Revista Huskara; the Royal Astro-
nomical and Asiatic Societies, Society of Arts, and London
Nature; Mr. ©. Piazzi Smyth of Edinburgh; Mr. Kd. C. Pick-
ering of Boston; the American Antiquarian Society; Ameri-
can Journal of Science; New York Academy of Sciences ;
Dr. Daniel Draper; Mr. Thomas Dudley; the Franklin Insti-
tute, Numismatic and Antiquarian Society, and Mr, Henry
Phillips, Jr., of Philadelphia ; the American Chemical Journal
and American Journal of Mathematics; United States Naval
Observatory; United States National Museum; Bureau of
Education; Cincinnati Society of Natural History; Daven-
port Academy; Mr. Horatio Hale; and the Mexican National
Museum.

Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., communicated ‘A brief account of
the more important collections of American Archeology in
the United States.”

1888, 1] 1 (Phillips.

Dr. Frazer read extracts from a letter from M. Daubrée of
Paris requesting information on the subject of subterranean
waters in the United States; and from his correspondence with
Mr. Selwyn of Montreal, Prof. Fontaine and Prof. Winchell,
endorsing his views of the prepaleozoic age of the South
Valley hill rock.

Pending nominations Nos. 985, 986, were read.

The Treasurer was authorized to receive City Loan matur-
ing July 1, 1883, and the meeting was adjourned.

A Brief Account of the more important Public Collections of American Arch-
aology in the United States. By Henry Phillips, Jr.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 4, 1883.)

To the student of American Archeology it is a matter of the greatest
importance to know where in his own land there can be found public col-
lections that will show him the advances made in the arts of war and
peace by the aboriginal inhabitants of this Continent. In Europe there
exist several of such exhibitions which are noteworthy and famous, where
prehistoric America can be studied with great fullness of detail; in the
United States there also are rich and valuable public cabinets of American
archeology, laboriously and carefully got together, offering a vast field to
the seeker after Truth. As to private collections, their name is Legion.
With a view to diffusing a more general acquaintance with these collections,
I prepared a series of queries which I transmitted to every public institu-
tion where I had reason to believe there existed such a cabinet, and from
the answers received, I have framed the following short account, bringing
together matter never before presented at one view.*

Acaprmmy oF Natura Scrences, of Philadelphia.

There are five collections of American Archeology at present in the cus-
tody of this museum, which, with the exception of the Haldeman collection
ofarrow-points, stone axes, celts, bannerstones, &., arearranged geograph-
ically, and the locality given where each specimen was found. The col-

*No notice has been taken in the following pages of any matter which may
relate to collections of foreign archeology in the United States; itsimply men-
tions the American portion of the cabinets,

‘
Phillips.] 112 [May 4,

lections, having lately been placed in another apartment, are in process of
rearrangement, which is taking place under the care of Mr. Ht. T. Cres-
gon, a well-known and careful student of American archeology.

The collections are as follows :

1. The Poinsett collection of Mexican antiquities, the property of the
American Philosophical Society, and deposited by it in the custody of the
Academy. It numbers about 2800 specimens, consisting of terra-cottas,
objects of obsidian, gold and silver, beads, sculptures, manuscripts, &e.,
&c. This very fine collection is unique in the United States.

9, The Haldeman collection (about 10,000 specimens), presented by
Prof. 8. S. Haldeman and wife, in 1879.

3. The Ruschenberger collection of ancient Peruvian pottery (about 200
specimens), presented by Dr. W. W. Ruschenberger, formerly Presi-
dent of the Academy.

4, The Peale collection (about 1800 specimens), formed by Franklin
Peale, Esq., and presented to the Academy by his widow.

5. The Vaux collection (about 900 specimens), bequeathed by Wm. 8.
Vaux, Esq., in 1882.

The especial features are the pottery in the Ruschenberger, Poinsett
and Haldeman collections ; the valuable and important Poinsett collection
as a whole; and a large collection of axes (stone), arrow-points, &c., em-
bracing many rare forms, from all parts of the United States.

AmmricaAN Purmosopurcan Socrmry, Philadelphia.

The valuable collections of this Society are deposited with the Acad-
emy of Natural Sciences in Philadelphia, and displayed with its cabinets.

Arcumonoeican Instrrutr or Ammrica, Boston, Mass.

This institution ‘deposits its collections in existing institutions.”

AMERICAN ANTIQUARIAN Socrmty, Worcester, Mass.

This cabinet was founded in 1812. Its collections, which although not
numerous are valuable, consist of stone implements and mound relics,
whose number has not been furnished. It is only partially arranged,
catalogued and labeled, and the localities where the specimens were found
are not always given.

Amurrst Coutnan, Amherst, Mass.

This collection is about forty years old, and is mainly comprised of
specimens found in the valley of the Connecticut river, within fifty miles
of the town. The best specimens, some twenty-five hundred, are entered
in the catalogue, an outline of each one being drawn, They are properly
Jabeled, and the locality given where each was found. The especial fea-
tures of the collection are samples of all the pottery supposed to be of New
England aboriginal manufacture. It is also rich in Indian pipes.

Lig
1883, ] LLO (Phillips.

Brown University, Providence, R. I

This cabinet was begun in 1872. The specimens, which are numerous
but whose exact number is not known, are arranged for the present typi-
cally. In most cases they are labeled with the name of the place where
found,

Davenport AcApEMY or NATURAL Scrmncus, Davenport, Towa.
,

This cabinet was formed during the last ten years from finds in the
vicinity of fifty miles of the city. The pottery ismostly from the mounds of
the Lower Mississippi valley ; the shell ornaments and bone implements are
also mainly from thence ; the stone and flint implements from Wisconsin
to the Gulf of Mexico, and from Florida to Colorado. It is classified
chiefly typically. It possesses inscribed tablets found at Davenport,
carved stone pipes, typical of the Upper Mississippi, 7. ¢, of the “curved
base’? pattern, of which there are 57. This is the largest collection of this
type in the United States.

Of other patterns of prehistoric pipes there are........, iba
Hammered copper axes.... : ei vedes dese VG
te My BWI cvin wads “Miceepeeey MeO
My cheba 01128 A ur gh Ws wba eves, CUO
‘ ih KNIVGE, WUC ave Caliened reece tin ccm tO

Prehistoric pottery vessels over 1000, some of them the largest ever
found in North America :

PLATENS OVE Ve i iwiecviU eevee testy con LOMOOO

Stone oly OPT viia bet eile, UV are Res ous eee, OOO
Heematite ‘ eR a (A oa eye DR ny 5 Abou eT 52
OUSIAT POMS V cane Mes eevee NO RET WN Ls c Welewd we 25
Shell and pearl beads several hundred.

Gorgets and other shell ornaments.........,... eye 70
BONS UN PIGMENTS MOSTLY AVIS) se ot pee ceth eee 4.4 ve 120

Perforated ceremonial stones, &ec., 21; skulls of northern mound.
builders, 35; skulls of southern mound-builders, 83; skulls of Sioux In-
dians, 807; skulls of Central American, 127, &e.

The collection which is in process of catalogueing, is displayed in glass
cases in such a manner as to be readily accessible.

The localities are given in the labels, together with many other details,
“so that the whole explains itself to the visitor’? writes Mr. W. Vm A Sa HL
who kindly furnished the data for the foregoing account.

IHORGIA HisrorrcaL Socrury, Savannah, Ga.

The collections of this Society were begun in 1839, but, not being very
extensive, are not arranged in a strictly scientific manner. The specimens
Which are labeled, and on exhibition in the Society’s Hall, are not cata-
lowued,

PROC. AMER, PHILOS. 800. XxI, 114, 0. PRINTED JULY 10, 1883,

Phillips.] 114 [May 4,

Merrroprourran Musnwum or Art, New York City, N. Y.

This collection (which is not large) consists of Mexican, Peruvian and
Jentral American antiquities, and of mound-builder’s pottery, all acquired
since 1880, and numbers about 200 pieces. It is classified geograph-
ically. Among the noteworthy features of the collection are a remark-
able Aztec pot and some pieces of Peruvian metal work, The Mexican
terra-cottas are also worthy of remark. <A. catalogue is now in press in
which the localities are given of each specimen so far as known,

MAysvituE AND Mason County Hisrorrocan anp Scruntrrio Assocra-
TION, Maysville, iy.

The collections of this Society were begun in 1875, their object being to
illustrate the various implements used by the mound-builders of the Ohio
Valley. The specimens were mostly found within a radius of fifteen miles
of the town. The collections are not fully catalogued and arranged, but
among the more noteworthy are a hematite skin-dresser, one leaden
implement, two inscribed stones, eight discoidal stones, five boat-shaped
stone images, twenty-two stone maize-beaters, thirty-two ground: stone
hatchets, one stone image of a sheep or Nama (head and half the body),
ninety-two skin-dressers, sixty-two hammer-stones, six chert-choppers,
two flint-choppers, three flint (burial) stones, seventeen slate ceremonial
implements, two and one-half round sinkers, eleven stone sinkers, one
stone plummet, two stone chisels, one stone roller, fifty-two flint drills,
six hundred arrow and spear-points, eighty-seven war arrow-points,
seventy flint knives, sixty-five scrapers, thirteen flint skin-dressers, one
flint gouge.

Mrnnesora Histrortoan Socrrry, St, Paul, Minn.

The fine museum of this Society was destroyed by the fire of March 1, .

1881, It now only possesses two stone hammers and a copper chisel.
Mrssourr HrsroricaL Socrmry, St. Louis, Mo.

The collections of this Society are as yet in their infancy, and not cata-
logued and arranged.

New Lonvon Country Hisrorroan Sacinvy, New London, Conn.

This collection being of recent origin, has not yet been entirely arranged,
classified, labeled, and catalogued. The specimens number about 2500,

Tur Narionan Musnum, Washington, D. C,

This collection was established in 1842, its possessions then consisting
of the specimens obtained during the Wilkes’ Exploring Expedition. In
1858 it passed into the care of the Smithsonian Institution, The general
collection is arranged typically; special collections from mounds, shell-
heaps, &c., are kept together. At present it contains about 20,000 chipped
implements, arrow-heads, &c.; about 8900 hammer stones, celts, pestles,

1883,] 115 (Phillips.

grooved axes, pipes, ornaments, &c.; about 800 objects of shell, beads,
&¢.; about 600 bronze implements and ornaments ; about 600 shell-heap
remains ; about 700 mound remains; and about 800 cave remains. It is
catalogued and the locality given where each specimen was found. ‘‘It
is considered the largest existing collection of North American antiquities,’
writes Professor Baird. The display is made in sixty-two glass cases, in
a hall 200 feet long by 50 wide,

Prasopy Musrum or AmpricAN ARCHAOLOGY AND Ermnonoay, Can-
bridge, Mass.

The Museum was founded by the gift’ of $160,000 by Mr. George Pea-
body, in 1866.

The Museum has made a number of special explorations from which
large returns have come, among which may be mentioned the exploration
by Prof. Hartt in Brazil, those by Dr. Flint in Central America, and the
many special explorations in North America, including those of Dr.
Palmer in various parts of Mexico, and among the Indians of the South-
west; of Miss Fletcher among the Indians of the West; of the late Dr.
J. Wyman (the first curator) in Florida and along the Atlantic coast,
of Dr. Schumacher on the coast of California ; Mr. H. Gilman in Michi-
gan, of Prof. Andrews in Ohio, Mr. Dunning in Tennessee, Dr. Abbott
in New Jersey, Dr. Metz in Ohio, Mr. Curtis in Tennessee and Arkansas,
and the explorations of Prof. Putnam in various parts of the country, par-
ticularly of New England shell-heaps, of mounds and ancient burial places
in the Western and Southwestern States, of caves in Kentucky, ete., eto,

“The Museum’? writes Prof, F. W. Putnam, its curator, “contains by
far the most important collections in existence relating to the archeeology
of America as a whole. (In ethnological material it is not so well off,
but it contains pretty large collections of that.) The arrangement of the
Collections is based upon a geographical distribution of the materials in the
Several exhibition halls, but it is made to embrace an ethnological and
ircheological presentation of the subject. Every specimen in the Museum
(over 300,000) is catalogued and numbered, and unless the exact locality
and conditions under which a specimen was found is known, it is con-
sidered as worthless for exhibition, and of no value to an archeological or
ethnological series.’

Prasopy AcAprEmy or Scrmncr, Salem, Mass.

This collection is composed of those of the East India Marine Society
(begun in 1 99), and of the Essex Institute (1826), which in 1867 were per-
Manently placed in the East India Marine Hall, purchased and refitted by
the Trustees of the Peabody Academy of Science in that year.

The Department of American Archrology contains 2390 catalogue
numbers, in all about 5500 specimens; axes, 100; celts, 150; gouges,
150; club-heads, 50; hammer-stones, 50; long stones (pestles), 100;
discs, 10; spear-points, 500; arrow-points, 2000; scrapers, 200; bones

Phillips.] 116 [May 4,

from shell-heaps, a half bushel; bone implements, 50; grave con-
tents, 25 skulls, and long bones and numerous implements, shell beads,
&c.; copper implements, 2; soapstone pots, 3; broken pottery (soap-
stone), 50; clay pots, 5; broken clay pottery, 500; core stones and
rude implements, 500; chips, a bushel; mortars and mills, 6; cere-
monical objects, 50; shoes, &c., (salt cave, Kentucky,) 20; imple-
ments showing contact with European civilization, 50; bone spoons
from graves, 4; knives, of various shapes; piercing tools, 10. The
bulk of the collection is from the Eastern portion of the United
States, very few being from south of Pennsylvania or west of New
York State. They are arranged by types according to the order of
Abbott’s primitive industry, and the special features of the collection are
the specimens figured in that work. All are labeled. The ‘‘archeology
of Essex County, Mass.,’’ is arranged separately, and made an especial
feature of the Museum. It is in a case seven feet high and forty feet
long. Independent of the usual assortment of axes, celts, gouges, &c. ;
it contains one very fine skeleton intact from a reburial at Marblehead,
Mass., and a number of grave contents, such as beads, wampum and
bones, &c.: also articles from shell-heaps, and the entire valuable con-
tents of one shell-heap opened in 1882. The general appearance of these
implements is rude as compared with those from the Western States, and
the finds are but scanty in comparison.

Especial attention is called to the manner in which the specimens are
fastened, so that placed in upright cases, every kind of article may
be placed. Bent headless pins are used to clamp the objects on black
tablets which are placed on easels and in the cases,

“The Museum is one of the first-class,’’ writes Mr. John Robinson,
Treasurer and temporary Curator, who has kindly furnished the data for

the foregoing account.

PHInApELPHIA. Tun NuMISMATIC AND ANTIQUARIAN Socrery oF

This collection was begun in January, 1858. It is at present undergo-
ing rearrangement and classification, by Mr, Edwin A, Barber, Ourator of
Antiquities, so that no exact details can be given, but it is believed that
by the end of the present year it will be in perfect order; before which
time also the Society expects to receive some remarkable American an-
tiquities, almost unique in this country.

PENNSYLVANIA Musrum Aanp Scroon or INDUSTRIAL Art, Memorial
Hall, Fairmount Park, Philadelphia.

This institution possesses a small but valuable collection of Peruvian,
Pueblo and other American pottery. A large collection of American
archeology at present on exhibition will probably shortly be removed on
account of the death of the owner.

1883.] am hg (Phillips.

Pouyreounie Soorety, of Louisville, Kentucky.
, Y

This Society “possesses some rare and valuable archeological specimens, ”’
but they are neither catalogued, classified norarranged. ‘‘ Among the more
important,’’ writes Mr. E. A. Grant, ‘‘is a copper spool found in a mound,
much oxidized, but still having the remains of fibrous cord imbedded in
the copper, so that the same can be removed.’’

Ruope IsvAnp Hisrortcau Socrery, Providence, R. I.

The collection was begun in 1822. It is not at present fully classified ;
the localities of the specimens are not always given ; their number is un-
known. Mr. Perry, the Secretary of the Society, writes, ‘Our Indian
relics need a thorough overhauling.”’

TpNNESsSEE HistroricaL Socimry, Nashville, Tenn.

In its cabinets are many objects of American archeology (number not
given), including Pueblo manufactures, stone images, arrow-heads,
fleshers, discs, &c., &c. Some are on exhibition in the State Capitol, and.
the Society expects to soon occupy a new hall, where its large and valu-
able collection will be properly arranged and displayed.

University oF MronrGan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

This collection has ‘‘never been classified or catalogued. It is in process
of removal to a special room where it will be arranged geographically.’’
The number of its specimens is not known, Among the most noticeable
are Peruvian pottery, and Alaskan implements, &c,

Wisconsin Naturau History Socrmry, Milwaukee, Wis.

This collection has not yet been fully classified nor catalogued, nor are
the specimens all labeled, but it is expected that before long it will be
properly arranged and put in complete order. ‘‘It contains ’’ writes Mr.
Carl Doerflinger, the Secretary and Custodian, ‘some 2500 specimens, in-
cluding 800 arrow-heads, 100 stone hammers, axes, Ge., 20 copper imple-

”

”

ments, among which latter are some interesting forms.
They are displayed in table and wall-cases.

Wisconsin Hisrortcan Socrmry, Madison, Wis.
’

The collection (which is a large and valuable one) was all found within
the limits of Wisconsin and mainly in the southern part of the State. It
is arranged typically and all specimens are marked with the localities
whence obtained. A catalogue exists in manuscript.

In 1876 the number was as follows : Copper implements, spears, knives
and tomahawks, 109; stone rollers, pestles, scrapers, knives, awls, &c.

Phillips.] 118 [May 4,
600; stone axes (one weighing 8} Ibs.) 865; stone pipes and perforated
ornaments, about 250 ; and over 8000 spear—lance—and arrow-heads,

The collection has been largely increased since 1876. ‘* The especial
feature of the collection’ (writes Mr. I. 8. Bradley, of Madison) ‘‘is the
great number of large and well made copper implements, and some re-
markably fine stone axes.”’

The collection is displayed in horizontal glass cases.

Wyomina EHrsToricaAL AND GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY, Withes-Barre, Pa.

“This cabinet originated in the year 1858, the date of the foundation of
the Society. The collection is in the main made up of local finds, a few
specimens being from other places at a distance ; it may, however, be con-
sidered as a distinctively local collection. It is classified typically, and
consists of specimens as follows :

Pottery : 5 specimens as shown in publication No, 4, also 2 specimens of
such size as to show the shape, size and design of vessel, and about one-halfa
bushel of fragments collected for pupose of studying material used in their
manufacture, ornamentation, &e.

Net sinkers, 125; hoes, 5; hand-hammers or hammer-stones, Al; vub-
bing-stones, 5 ; discoidal stones, 10; ceremonial objects, perforated, 5 as
shown on page 852 of Abbott’s ‘Primitive Industry,’’ 2 such as shown
on page 856, and 1 ason page 859, and several fragments of same ; totems,
gorgets, &e., 25, and fragments ; berds, 5 strings ; pipes, 15 ; cells, skinners
and chisels, 60; and 15 broken specimens ; tomahawks, 11; ground. stone
wees, 223 ground-stone club heads or death mauls, 17; mortars, stone, 8;
lignumoite 1 ; shallow mortars or lap-stones, 5, 2 of them bi-concave ;
crushers, 4; pestles, 20 perfect, and 14 broken ; plummets, 3; engraved
stone, 1; plows, 2 (‘‘I have never seen these implements described, and
call them plows at a venture ;’’ writes Mr. Sheldon Reynolds, the Curator
of the Society, who has kindly furnished the description of the collection),
they are about 18 inches long, 4 inches square at one end, retaining the
square throughout nearly half their length, they are then rounded and the
balance is in shape of a tapering pestle, weighing about 15 or 20 pounds.

Stone last, 1: (Roughly chipped stone bearing close resemblance to a last,
and supposed to have been used for that purpose).

Pitted stones, 2: Supposed to have been used for mixing colors in.

Paleolithic instruments, 4.

1 large flat stone, evidently used for smoothing (dressing) skins, found
covering Indian grave.

Arrow-points, 2400.

Spear-points, 150.

1 copper spear-point, found in mound in neighborhood.

83 crania ; 8 bows; 2 quivers; 1 canoe; 2 belts wampum.

The collection is believed to represent in a fair degree generally the
articles of ornament, domestic utensils, and weapons of the chase and

warfare of the aborigines.

1883.) 119 (Phillips,

It is displayed in glass-covered table cases ; each object bearing a number
and the name of the person who gave it; when practicable the number
refers to a manuscript descriptive catalogue.

It is catalogued with the other collections of the Society. A separate
catalogue of each department is about to be begun.

The localities are given where each specimen was found.

“The stone last is believed to be unique, and perhaps the plows. The
engraved stone is an object of interest as representing growing plants,
resembling tobacco and corn; the stone is broken, of irregular shape, and.
about three inches square. (?) Among the arrow-points are some stained
a light purple; the coloring extends one-half the length, No analysis of
the coloring matter has been made. These arrows are very diminutive,
some not more than three-quarters of an inch over all; others somewhat
larger. They were found on the flats opposite the city of Wilkes-Barre.
Arrow-points of this size are said to be of rare occurrence east of the Alle-
gheny mountains.’’

Norn.—The following list embraces the names of Institutions to which letters
of inquiry were sent upon information that they were in the possession of col-
lections of specimens of American archwlogy, but from which no responses
have been received,

Academy of Natural Sciences, Baltimore, Md.

Academy of Natural Sciences, San Francisco, Cal,
American Museum of Natural History, New York, N.Y.
Boston Society of Natural History, Boston, Mass,

Bristol (town of ), Bristol, R, I.

Bronson Library, Waterbury, Conn,

Brook’s Museum, University of Virginia, Va.

Cincinnati Historical and Philosophical Society, Cincinnati, Ohio,
Firelands Historical Society, Norwalk, Ohio,

Franklin Society, Providence, R. I.

Kentucky State Geological Survey, Frankfort, Ky.

Long Island Historical society, Brooklyn, N.Y.

Macon Public Library, Macon, Ga,

Madisonville Natural History Society, Madisonville, Ohio,
Maine Historical Society, Portland, Me.

Middlebury Historical Society, Middlebury, Conn.

New Hampshire Antiquarian Society, Contoocook, N. H,
Newport Historical Society, Newport, R. I.

New York Historical Society, New York, N.Y.

Toledo Historical and Geographical Society, Toledo, Ohio,
University of California, Sam Francisco,

Vineland Historical and Antiquarian Society, Vineland, N. J.
Western Reserve Historical Society, Cleveland, Ohio.
Yule College, New Huven, Conn,

Young Men’s Library, Atlanta, Ga,

120 [May 18,

Chase.]

Photodynumic Notes, VIII. By Pliny Earle Chase, LL.D.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 18, 1883.)

876. Viriale.

The theory of the virial, or mean vis viva during stationary motion, en-
ables.us to codrdinate all forms of cyclical motion : rotary, orbital and os-
cillatory. The grandest manifestations of the virial, which are given in
cosmical motion, must be governed by the same laws as govern molecular
movements. The complete development of the theory should, therefore,
remove all the obscurity which still clings to the doctrine of radio-
dynamic unity. The science of comparative kinetics is greatly indebted
to Clausius, for his presentation of the theory, for the consequent simplic-
ity which it introduces into the solution of problems which would other-
wise be exceedingly complicated and for the facility of explanation, which
it gives for methods which are substantially the same, but which, on ac-
count of their novelty, have been often misunderstood.

ony

877 Virial Postulates.

My photodynamic and other physical researches have been rewarded
by a great number of cosmical illustrations of virial efficiency, which are
based upon the following postulates :

1. That cosmical masses represent internal energies, such as would be
found if they were condensed from some primitive tenuous, elastic form
of matter.

2. That all chemical elements may have been condensed, in like manner,
from a single primitive element or ether.

3. That the velocity which enters into the primitive radial virial of the
oscillating ethereal particles is the velocity of light @.).

4, That the stationary motions of central inert masses, which represent the
equal actions and reactions of primitive and derived virials should continue
until the velocity of the primitive virial has been alternately acquired. and

lost.
5. That all stationary motions which represent equal actions and reac-

tions should be harmonic,
878. Stellar Virials.

Solar or Stellar centres.of planetary systems are central inert masses
(Post. 4), which are endowed with velocities of stationary motion, tend-
ing to give velocities of stationary revolution, sending forth sethereal oscil-
lations with the velocity of light (Post. 8) ana representing internal energies
like those which would spring from nebular condensation (Post. 1). Their
central stationary motions should, therefore, be cyclically determined by
the alternate acquisition and exhaustion of the radial velocity of light
(Post. 4). Herschel (Outlines of Astronomy, Sect. 399) discoursed eclo-

wh?

¢
1888.] 12 1 (Chase.

quently on the Sun’s rays as ‘‘the ultimate source of almost every motion
which takes place on the surface of the earth.’’ We may, therefore, rea-
sonably look to them for evidences of virial efficiency, in various forms,
which will furnish satisfactory proof of radiodynamic unity.
379. Haual Virial Action and Reaction.
Circular orbital velocity which is due to solar action may be represented
by the equation
an alabtan tO ah o 1,
V.=V In? n
The limiting value of »,, which it cannot exceed, is found at Sun’s sur-
face (7), where g, isa maximum. It may be represented by

4 _ 9
[0 I=V Goro ee
The third and fourth postulates lead to the equation
i 2
V.=Golo o.

This equation should hold good for all values of in an expanding or con-
tracting nucleus, inasmuch as gy varies inversely as 7? and the principle of
conservation of areas requires that the time of rotation should vary direct-
ly as 7. The product of the two factors should, therefore, be constant.

880. Numerical Verification.

Taking Sun’s semi-diameter (7”,) as the unit of length, and the British
Nautical Almanac estimate of Sun’s apparent semi-diameter (961.//88) as
the parallactic unit, we find, for Earth’s semi-axis major

psel4. 457, 4,

FEarth’s mean orbital velocity (1) may be found by dividing 2 TP by the

number of seconds in a year (31558149). This gives
Vy =, 0000001990099 5, 5.

This value varies slightly with varying orbital eccentricity. The great-
est secular range of variation, however, is less than 4 of one per cent.

Circular orbital velocity varying inversely as the square root of the
radius-vector, we find (2), (4), @)

[10,] =.00000291562/, =.0006252557, 6.

Jo==-90000039094457", Ee
Struve’s constant of aberration gives, by (8) and (7)

O, == otp==214.457,--497. 827. 4807727, 8.

{,==1101876 sec.—=12.758 days 9,

This gives for a double oscillation, or complete rotation of Sun, 25.506
days. Laplace’s estimate was 25.5 days. The motion of sun-spots near
the equator is accelerated by centrifugal force, tendencies to orbital velocity,

” or some other unknown influence. Spérer’s formula gives

“repulsion,
24.62 days for the period at the equator, where no spots have ever been
observed. His third estimate, for 1866, was 25.234 days.
881. Virials of Rotation.
The rotating «ethereal tendency of stationary motion, which is limited

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 80C. xxI. 114. Pp. PRINTED JULY 10, 1883.

"vive 0. i
give 0, is

122 [May 18,

Chase. ]

by equations (2) and (8), gives the following value for the limiting radius
(p,) of orbital and ethereal tendencies :
rN

» Ir

P, = Ar =o, 9 10.
{%] Von

Laplace’s limit (7) of equal rotary and orbital velocity is given by the

equation
8 ) aes
1=(%)',=()h? i.
ml ud

The limit at which the equatorial velocity of stationary motion would

5
2 1
‘

18
t\4
3
( t=
To

The limit at which the equatorial velocity of stationary motion would
give v,, as deduced from (10) and (12), is

Laine i
+1, =p.+ 7

(lJ=p,? 775 18,
The limit of a homogeneous, elastic, ethereal atmosphere which would
propagate undulations with the velocity of light, is
M= = 70 [ 1} = 8 alli 14,

382. Virial Oentres of Oscillation.

The virials of rotating tendency must influence grosser inert particles or
masses, 18 well as the sethereal atmosphere. Loci of important oscillatory

influence may be found at radii of mean sthereal momentum (p,), of

linear oscillation (pg), of reciprocal linear oscillation, ,), of spherical os-
: ’ eo , WA ATA nAAg { 106 Wot Tale] ¢

cillation (pg ), and of reciprocal spherical oscillation (Pe): laking py as
the common virial locus of these several oscillating tendencies, we have

Roe tune 15.
Pp 1 5a, 16.
Py = 3p, bit,
p, = 2.50, 18.
At emt AN 19.

All of these forms of action and reaction must be called into play by
solar and stellar radiation, arid they should all be studied in investiga-
ting the maintenance of cosmical energy.

883. Maintained Vibrations.

Lord Rayleigh (Phil Mag., April, 1888) discusses a vibrating system
which is subject to dissipative forces, and the necessity, when the vibra-
tions are maintained, that the vibrating body should be in connection with a
source of energy. In the usual equation

VO dé
j . + nig = 0 20,
dt’? dt

——

stag asaiel

—

oe
1883, ] 123 [Chase.

two principal classes of maintained vibrations may be distinguished ;
the more extensive class being that in which the magnitude and phase of
the sustaining force depend in an approximately constant manner, upon the
amplitude and phase of the vibration itself. The only case in which, ac-
cording to (20), a steady vibration is possible, is when the complete
value of x is zero, If any portion of the energy of cosmical masses is dis-
sipated, ethereal energy must be proportionately increased. The ether
accordingly becomes a ‘‘source of energy,’’ and although we are not yet
able to see fully how the connection of this source with solar radiations is
kept up, the equivalence of 0, to %, (Note 821) shows that it is kept up,
through cyclical actions which cover a period of about 124 days,
884. Virials of Wave Propagation.

It has often been tacitly assumed that there is no actual radial oscillation
in luminous radiation, like that of the atmospheric particles in the propaga-
tion of sound-waves. In 1872 (Proc, Amer, Phil. Soc., xii, 394) I showed
that the secondary centre of oscillation, on returning from the centre of
linear oscillation towards the linear centre, is at of the extreme excur-
sion. Hence the tangential virial of an oscillating sethereal particle (a),
is 2 of the radial virial of the same particle (up ). More than five years after-
wards (Phil. Mag. [5], iii, 453; iv, 209), Maxwell stated that the ratio of
the virial velocity is 2%, but he gave no reason for his inference and none
has yet been found among his unpublished papers. THis statement and
mine are substantially identical, the only difference being that he looked to
the relative mean momentum of the oscillating particles, while [ looked to

their relative virials.
9

Pa = 1.8 LB 21.
885. Zime-Relations of Inertia.

The question of instantaneous action is still, and probably will long con-
tinue to be, a mooted one. The most impressive form in which it has ever
been presented, is Laplace’s statement that gravitating action requires a
velocity which is more than 100,000,000 times as greatas the velocity of light,
and that it may be assumed to be absolutely instantaneous at all distances,
It is sometimes said that inertia is instantaneously overcome. This may,
perhaps, be true in some sense, but we cannot know that it is so, until we
know more than we have yet learned about the way in which velocity is
transferred from one body to another. In general physical investigations
the element of time, usually in the form of time-integrals, requires consid-
eration whenever there is any change of motion.

886. Correlation of Virials.

Questions of kinetic unity and correlation are greatly complicated by
differences of inertia and by the lack of generally recognized standards of
comparison, If all forms of force are transmitted through ethereal interven-
tion, all virials should be capable of representation in terms of ethereal
mass and velocity. The velocity of luminous undulation then becomes ¢

: ¢
Chase.] 124 [May 18,

natural standard of velocity. Whenever velocity is imparted or destroyed
by gradual ¢
which will give the equation
si=%, 22.
By céordinating the times which are required by this equation in differ-
ent forms of energy, the evidences of primitive kinetic unity may be mul-
tiplied indefinitely.

scelerations or retardations (f), a time can always be found

387. A Natural Unit of Time.

Errors of measurement which are of any specific magnitude, increase
in relative importance inversely as the magnitude which is measured, An
error of .0001 inch in any of the dimensions of a microscopic object would
be very serious, but in an object which is a foot or more in length it would
be insignificant. It is desirable, therefore, in studying kinetic unity, to
begin with phenomena which involve kinetic maxima. The most far-
reaching acceleration of which we
gravitation, and the greatest gravitating acceleration of which we have any
direct knowledge (g,) is found at Sun’s surface, Substituting in (22) we
have

n make measurements, is that of

St = Golo = 0 23.

Therefore, Laplace’s principle of periodicity (Note 833), the collateral
hypotheses of various investigators (Note 278), the fourth virial postulate
(Note 377), the considerations which make », a natural unit of velocity
(Note 386), as well as many other correlations of photodynamic and general
cyclical energy, point to the time ofsolar rotary oscillation as a natural unit
of time.

8388. Virial Transfers.

An energy which is wholly transferred from one ethereal mass to
another equivalent ethereal mass, must be accompanied by a like transter
of velocity, whether the transfer isin the form of potential (7,), work (%),
gravitation (,); torsion (0; ), electricity (, ), rotation (Wg ), revolution (w,),
heat (v), chemical affinity (»,), or luminous undulation (»,). We have,
therefore, for limiting velocities when all the units are homologous,

q = Vg = 0, 0s 0, = 0, = 0, = % =O, FM 24.

In cyclical movements which are due to virial tranfers, these several

ated by equations which are based on the third and

equivalents may be indic
fourth postulates (Note 377) and which are analogous to (3),

889. Cardinal Limits.

In seeking further numerical verifications of the foregoing virial equa-
tions, we find the photodynamic limiting radius of orbital and ethereal ten-
dencies (10) by substituting (6) and (8).

» & Or yp - 2 919GRZ On

Pi; 688.954 7, == 8.212654, 25.
Substituting (25) in (11), we get for Laplace’s limit

1 = 86.3667, 26,

' 25
1883.] 125 [Chase.

The substitution of (25) in (12) gives

Py -& 7m = 219.8010, 1.02260, 27.
Hence by (18), we find for the locus of », in solar rotation,

[2] = 151088.17, = 704.538), 28.
And the solar modulus of light (14) is

M = 474657.8 1, = 2218.87 0, 29.

890. Influence of Synchronous Radial and Tangential Virials.

The theoretical variation of ethereal density within the limits of our
planetary system (Note 240) is so slight that the several vector-radii may
be considered as indicative of virial projection against a resistance which
is nearly uniform. The radial and tangential virials (Note 884) being syn-
chronous, we may with reason look for cosmical evidences of the syn-
chronism. Accordingly we find, from (21) and (25), the following regular
series of approximations to planetary loci. ‘The subscripts, 1, 2, 8, denote,
respectively, secular perihelion, mean, secular aphelion.

VS4p, = 30600, Mercury, = ‘29740, 30.

18-8 p, = 55090, Venus, = ORR, 31.
op, = 1°78480, Mars, = 1°765p, 83.

1:8° p, == 8212p, Asteroid 108 eel ae 84.

1°81 p, == 5°7828, Jupiter, Eee JOON Boy hh Eby

1:87 p, = 10-4090), Saturn, . == 10°34380, 36.

15? P, = 18°73620, Uranus, = 19'18860, 37.

1:84 p= 83 7RB20 4 Neptune, == 30°46960, 88.
Geom’] Mean = 3°212%p, Geom’! Mean = 8:22000, 89.

All of these approximations represent loci of belt-condensation, for the
respective planets, which are in accordance with the nebular hypothesis.
The geometrical means differ by less than } of one per cent. The photo-
dynamic mean represents the semi-axis major of Asteroid 108; the
planetary mean, the semi-axis major of Asteroid 122, The second
photodynamic locus ('5509p 5) is, within less than one per cent., the
arithmetical mean between the semi-axes major of Mercury and Venus
(5552).

391. Photodynamic Centre of Various Oscillations.

The common virial locus (Note 382) of mean momentum, linear oscilla-

tion, spherical oscillation, and reciprocal oscillations, gives the following

planetary approximations by (15), (16), (17), (18), (19) and (25) :

Pa = 642589, Cardinal centre : 6.44519, 10.
pp == 481909, Jupiter, = 4:88630, At.
py == 9°6380p, Saturn, == 9'58890, AR.
ps == 808180, .4 Uranus, Se Bie 43.
Pe 5°854504 Jupiter, == 5°2028/s5 Ad.
Ar. Mean = 6°8587p5 Ar. Mean = 68690 , 45,
Ge. Mean == 6'6825/s3 Ge. Mean : 66421), 46,

Chase.] 126 (May 18,

It will be seen from (43) that the second locus of spherical rotary projection
from py, (2°55 X 25, = 20°0795p,), is within the secular orbital range
of Uranus. The cardinal centre (40) is the centre of gravity, at conjunc-
tion, of Saturn, and Jupiter, It represents, therefore, the locus of mean
rotary momentum for their combined masses, at the time of Jupiter’s in-
cipient rupturing subsidence, according to Herschel’s modification of the
nebular hypothesis.

392, Further Relations of the Cardinal Centre.

The cardinal centre, which introduces the series in the foregoing note,
also represents important relations to the following additional virial loci :

pe = V Xmp? + Sm ee 9.24430, 47
Pe —= Sno <b: NG een 7 BR 2805 A8,
po = =} Gaturn,+ Jupiter,) = T5291, 49,
pe = =} (64451 + 82717) = 7°3584p, 50.
Pe + Neptune, == 750845, 51.

The locus of mean planetary nebular inertia (47) is in Saturn’s orbit,
where the rings, the satellite system and the specific gravity bear witness
to the results of nebular condensation. The locus of mean planetary
nebular momentum (48) approximates closely to the arithmetical mean
between Saturn, and Jupiter, (49), to the arithmetical mean between the
cardinal centre and the incipient virial locus of spherical rotation for
Uranus (50), and to the virial locus for the mean linear momentum of Nep-
tune’s semi-axis major (51).

393. Primitive Virial Influence on Mass.

The virial radius of mean momentum not only determines the centre of
gravity of the two chief planetary masses (15), (40), but it also determines
the relative masses of Sun (m,) and Jupiter (m;) at initial nebular rupture
(secular perihelion). We find, accordingly,

MoNy T= MsPos1 52.

Stockwell’s estimate of Jupiter’s secular eccentricity is 0608274, This
Zives ps, —= 9891726 K 5-2 2798 « 214°45 == 1047°8727,. Therefore (52) :

mM, == 1047.872 m, 53

Bessel’s estimate is 1047879. This harmony is the more significant be-
cause Jupiter’s nebular locus of incipient rupture (4°8863) is central be-
tween the loci of incipient subsidence of Uranus (20°6792) and Neptune
(30°4696) at opposition.

Po = + Pos — Pos) 54.
394. Successive Orders of Photodynamic Influence.
While Jupiter traverses the primitive nebular centre, Earth traverses the
centre of the belt of greatest condensation.

}

y (pvr + Pus) = ps BA.

¢
1883.] ] 27 [Chase,

Stockwell’s estimates for the secular limits of the dense belt (Mercury,
and Mars,) are, py == ‘2974; oy = 1:7365. This gives for (55) 1:0169 ps,

1
which is nearly = of the mean proportional (27) between Sun’s radius
ba vb

(7,) and the solar modulus of light (29). These successive indications of
virial influence upon Saturn and Jupiter (40), Sun and Jupiter (53),
Uranus and Neptune (54), and the relative positions of the dense planets,
are full of suggestive interest.

395. Virials of Secondary Rotations.

While the rotation of the chief nucleal centre (Sun) is determined by
the velocity of light (8), the rotations of the secondary centres of nebulos-
ity (Jupiter) and condensation (Harth) are determined, respectively, by
circular orbital velocities at Sun’s surface [2%] and at the mean centre of
gravity of Sun and Jupiter [0,1].

Its eae [ V] bag V Joo 56.

Jats inci [%] oe V Oats \s
The data for the solution of (57) have been more accurately and satis-
factorily determined than for (56).
32-088 . 8616408 Feel yian
Ists = “F580 5 == 261:'821 miles 58.
396. Jupiter's Diameter and Density.
Yircular orbital velocity varying inversely as VY, we find (52), (58),

(57), (58)

sts = [0] = Gaty + V/- 9801728 = 270167 miles 59.
[oy ]== [0] + 21445 = 18:°449 miles 60.
Hall’s estimate of the period of Jupiter’s rotation (9" 55™ 26%.5) gives
f, == 42 57™ 48,25 = 17863.25 seconds 61,
Substituting this value in (59) we find
Js = '19'856 ft, == 2'4887 9, 62.
Hence, by (53) and (69)
Ms = 3815°38 ms 63,
( SalLiAhi Tr, 64.
dy == (22110, 65.

Different estimates of Jupiter’s mean apparent semi-diameter give
values for 7, ranging between 10°87, and 1157,

897. Sun’s Mass and Distance.

Earth’s gravitating acceleration and its orbital velocity (60) being known,
we have all the data which are needed for estimating Sun’s relative mass
and mean distance.

ps = 31,558,149 [v,] + 27 == 92,662,000 miles 66.
1, = pg + 21445 == 432,090 miles 67,

a

eens

je

I 28 [May 18,

Chase,]

At Earth’s surface, Vgr = 4:9078. Tt varies as V2. Therefore (60)
x

Mm, Ms

18°449? : 4:9073? 68.
P3 8
M, > My +: 880482 : 1 69.
All of the results which have been drawn from (3), (56), and (57) in-
volve the principle of persistency of vibrations, by which waves tend to
propagate themselves indefinitely, with the velocity which is due to their

locus of origination.
398. Masses of Harth and Venus.

The influence of Jupiter’s locus of incipient subsidence on the com-
parative masses of Jupiter and Saturn, finds some analogy in the two
chief planets of the dense belt, Harth and Venus.

Molo 5 == Msg 70.

Substituting Stockwell’s estimate of the secular aphelion of Venus
(py == “1744234p5) in (69), (70).

m, == 426750m, ya

Hill’s estimate is 427240, which differs from (71) by less than $ of one
per cent. The combined virial estimate of Harth’s relative mass (69)
differs from the purely oscillatory estimate (Note 23) by less than ? of one
per cent.

899. Comparisons of Potential.

In order to test the numerica) accuracy of the general equation of
kinetic-velocities (24) we may begin with the consideration of potential
energy, which has been largely treated in thermodynamics. Gravitating
potential is usually measured by the height of possible fall, or of virtual
fall, since the heights which are considered are commonly so small that
the variation of g is insignificant. The time of fall (ta), or the velocity
which would be communicated by the fall (2), might be taken with equal
propriety as the basis of measurement and comparison. The cosmical deter-
mination of Joule’s equivalent (Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., xix, 20), shows the
importance and advantage of adopting fundamental units which can be
readily employed in the greatest possible variety of directions,

The general equation of fundamental velocity (24) rests on Laplace’s
principle of periodicity, ‘‘that the state of a system of bodies becomes
periodic when the effort of primitive conditions of movement has disap-
peared by the action of resistances.’? Hence (3), (8).

% =, 72
Moreover, the natural standards of time, gravitating acceleration, dis-

tance, oscillation and undulatory velocity which are indicated by the solar
periodicity of synchronous rotation and evolution at Laplace’s limit, solar
superficial attraction, Sun’s semi-diameter, and luminous radiation, obvi-
ously give the following further equality :

= Ug = Ve = Dy — Vg = VO» fo,

et aS

1988.) 129

400. Oompletion of Correlation.
i 2

In Coulomb's formula of torsional elasticity (Note 162), if we substitute
m

for f, g? = UW (29) and

gi = 0, = 2%, ‘ 74.

The investigations of Weber, Kohlrausch, Thomson, Maxwell, Ayr-

ton, and Ferny have shown that
Oy == Ne 75.

Notes 16, 90-3, 97 give various ways of coérdinating chemical and cos-

mical actions with luminous undulation, so as to get the equation
VY, 76.

In throwing a ball into the air, the thermal equivalent of projectile force
is equivalent to the product of the mass by the sum of the retarding resist-
ances. In solar superficial radiation, the gravitating reaction is exhausted
ina half rotation, By a simple extension of these principles we have de-
duced equations 73-6, which, when combined, give a complete practical
verification of the general kinetic correlation (24).

401. Phyllotaay and Harmony of Absorption Bands.

Langley’s observations with the spectro-bolometer, at Allegheny Obser-
vatory and on the summit of Mt. Whitney, show four remarkable absorp-
tion bands in the infra-red portion of the solar spectrum, at 0.494, 1.14,
{.437 and 1.#83. These wave-lengths are very nearly proportional to the
numbers’4, 5, 6, 8, as is shown by the following table :

Harmonie, Observed,
a 92 ‘04
« aati 1:14
7 1°38 1°37
0) 1:84 1°83
They give, therefore, the following phyllotactic approximations :
O. Be2X tp artyHRsatd=F3;8R + O=f The phyllotactic
Raed is modified by an approximate repetition of the harmonic ratio %.
Warmonic. Observed.
a, 95 94
Bo 114 1.14
Yo 136.8 73h

We thus find, wherever we look, abundant evidence, not only of pri-
Mary harmonic influence, but also of secondary and subordinate modifica-
tions which need to be carefully studied in connection with virial re-
Searches,

402. Consequences of Ferrel’s Law.

The science of Me teorology may, for many good reasons, be 1 regarded as
4 peculiarly American science. William Ferrel’s discussion of the motion
of fluids and solids relative to the Barth’s surface, which was first published
in the summer of 1856, placed the laws of cyclonism and anticylonism on

PROC, AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xxt. 114. Q. PRINTED AUGUST 3, 1883,

[Chase.

sce a eee eee

soiree

Chase.) ] 30 {May 18,

a solid mathematical basis. Ie showed that, in the northern hemisphere,
all moving bodies are constantly subjected, in consequence of the Harth’s
rotation, to a deflection towards the right hand. Hence all atmospheric
surface currents which are mainly governed by a downward pressure, tend
to curve in the direction of the hands of a watch, or successively through
north, east, south, west. All surface currents which are mainly governed
by an upward pressure, tend to flow in an opposite direction, or through
north, west, south, east.* The heavy winds are called anticyclonic ; the
light winds, cyclonic.

There can be no descending currents in one place without ascending
currents in. another ; therefore, in every atmospheric disturbance, there
must be simultaneous cyclonic and anticyclonic winds. Such disturb-
ances originate either in an unusual cooling and condensation, or in an unus-
ual heating and expansion of air. In the former case the inflow, in the
upper regions of the atmosphere, will produce an increased pressure, In
the latter, the outflow will produce a diminution of pressure. In the
restoration of equilibrium, currents of warm air are often brought into
contact. with colder currents. If the currents are both saturated with
moisture, or if they contain more vapor than can be retained under the
temperature of the mixed currents, precipitation takes place, in the form
of rain, hail, or snow. This precipitation reduces the weight of the at-
mospheric column and the barometer falis. Accordingly, there is a con-
stantly increasing tendency to cyclonism about storm centres, and there
has been a very prevalent disposition to look upon all storms as of cy-

clonic origin.

A little reflection, however, will show that the initial mixture of cur-
rents may be due to either of the causes above mentioned ; either to the
flow of warmer air into a cold depression at the top of the atmosphere, or
to a flow of cold air, at the earth’s surface, towards a region of low baro-
metric pressure. In the former case, the initial superficial currents are de-
termined by a downward pressure, and they are, therefore, anticyclonic ; in
the latter they are determined by an upward pressure and are cyclonic.

A careful study of the weather maps shows that the heaviest rains and
snows occur in advance of the centres of low barometric pressure, or in
the rear of the centres of high barometric pressure. If storms began in
the cyclonic currents, the reverse should be true; the greatest effect fol-
lowing the low centre and preceding the high centre.

The frequent failures of forecasts, during the past winter, seem to have
been mainly due to a misinterpretation or a misconception of these facts,
to which the writer first called attention in 1871.

403. Study of Stormy Anticyclonism.

Loomis’s discussions (Note 367) show the need of watching the develop-
ment of storms at all stages, from the first indications of atmospheric

“This will be evident, if we imagine ourselves to be lying in the current and
facing the direction towards which the pressure tends,

|
|
i

1883.] asal

{[Chase,

disturbance, until the restoration of fair weather. The limit between
anticyclonic and cyclonic tendencies, may be approximately assumed
to be midway between the centres of high and low barometric pres-
sure, All cloudiness or precipitation between the limit and the high
centre, represents anticyclonic influence ; all between the limit and the low
centre represents cyclonic influence. Local cyclonism sets in soon after
precipitation begins, and the anticyclonic influence is thus partially hid-
den ; but a critical examination of the weather maps will show that the pre-
vailing currents of the region often continue to be anticyclonic until the
rain or snow is nearly, or quite over. The evidences of storm breeding
and stormy anticyclonism will be still more striking, if the changes of
barometric pressure are studied in connection with the beginnings and
subsequent growth of cirrus, cumulus, and nimbus clouds, as well as with
the rainfall and the final breaking up of cloudiness. There are good rea-
sons for believing that such study, systematically and thoroughly contin-
ued under the direction and with the facilities of the Signal Service
Bureau, would raise the successful verifications of the Washington forecasts
to an average of at least ninety-five per cent.

404. Pressure of Warm Air.

Dr. Képpen, in discussing Ley’s work on the winds prevailing in West-
ern Europe, announces four new theorems (Ann. hydr. und magnet.
marit. meteor., 1882 ; cited by Setence, 499). 1. The air-currents deviate
from the isobars towards the side of the lower pressure in the lower
atmosphere, and of the higher pressure in the upper atmosphere, 2. An ex-
cess of pressure exists upon the side of the warmer air-columns. 38. The
depressions advance approximately in the direction of the air-current
which has a preponderance of accumulated energy. 4. The state of mo-
tion of a certain mean layer, of which the height is still to be determined,
un in general be substituted for the onward movement of the vortex. A
systematic comparison of these propositions with observations and with
Blasius’s discussion of terial currents (Storms, chapter iii), may contrib-
ute towards a fuller knowledge of stormy anticyclonism. It will also be
interesting and instructive to see how readily Képpen’s theorems can be
deduced from Ferrel’s laws.

405. Solar-Barometric Viriatls.

The first physical paper which I communicated to the American Philo-
sophical Society (Proc. A. P. S., ix., 283-8) was based on virial considera-
tions, but the discussions of Clausius had not prepared the way for their
general acceptance. Accordingly, the method of treatment was so new, that
many persons looked upon the results merely as curious and, perhaps, ac-
cidental coincidences, The foregoing relations of virial influence to time
of rotary oscillation enable us to reach the same results in a more sim-
ple way.

The mean barometric fluctuations, both daily and annual, may be re-

20
Chase.] 132 [May 18,

garded as functions of time, mass and distance, The mean daily disturbances
take place at 7’; == 3962.8 miles from the virial centre; the mean annual
disturbances ato, = Earth’s semi-axis major from their virial centre, The
disturbed atmospheric mass and the equilibrating value of g are the same

‘
in both cases. The virtual potential of daily rotation is A X 86164.08? =

22,559,593.75 miles. Gen. Sabine’s means of five years’ observations at,

22
St. Helena, show a daily barometric range of .067 in., and an annual
range of .185 in. (see Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., x, 375, foot-note). The geo-
graphical, magnetic and climatic situation of St. Helena is such as to give
the following simple harmonic approximation for p, (Note 877 ; 5).

0672 : 1852 : : 22,559,593.'75 : 91,590,200 miles.
406. Hneke’s Comet.

Dr. O. Backlund (Oopernicus, Feb. 1883 ; cited in Setence, 531), says
that ‘the investigations hitherto made of the theory of Encke’s comet
really prove nothing as to the existence of a resisting medium in space.
Evenif we should succeed by such an hypothesis to explain sufficiently the
increase of the mean motion and the decrease of the eccentricity during the
period 1819-48, a simple hypothesis like this will not at the same time suf-
fice for the motion of the comet after 1865, as the variation of the mean
movement after that time has most probably become different. Not until
the period 1865-81, and its connection with the earlier one have been fully
discussed, will it perhaps become possible to find indications of the
nature of the unknown forces which act on the comet.’’ If an ethereal
medium is set in vibration by the passage of comets or other cosmical bodies,
there will be, as in the case of tidal disturbances, both accelerating and re-
tarding influences. We must know more than we now do, of the nature
of the medium as well as of the laws of elasticity, before it will be safe to
dogmatize about a resisting medium or about the second law of thermody -
namics. The equality of action and reaction may, perhaps, set limits both
to nucleal condensation and to ethereal expansion, the two limits being op-
posite phases of cyclical changes which all matter is always undergoing.
The unity,of energy which is indicated by ethereal relations of mass and
velocity (Notes 388, 400), gives great likelihood to this hypothesis.

407. Sound- Spectra.

Frazer’s ‘‘Examination of the phonograph record under the micro-
scope’ (Jour. of the Franklin Inst., \xxv, 848; Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., xiii,
581), showed that each of the alphabetic sounds has a special combination
of vibrations, which may be visibly impressed upon a metallic sheet. The
harmonic correspondence between the wave-lengths of musical notes
and those of the principal lines in the visible spectrum (Proc, Am. Phil.
Soe., xiii, 149), increases the probability that there may be an unbroken series
of waves, from the lowest audible sound to the highest actinic impulse.
Mayer’s experiments with the antennxe of mosquitos and Langley’s ob-

ena

ee

ge

1883, ] 133 (Chase,

servations of absorption bands (Note 401), approximate the gamuts of light
and sound and suggest the desirableness of some more sensitive method
for recording audible waves and interferences than is furnished by the
phonograph. The radial virials of light and the tangential virials of sound
(Note 390) furnish a field for research which is almost wholly unexplored.
In view of the wonderful advance of spectral photography during the last
decade, we may venture to hope that the record may sometime be extended
so as to include the interferences of sound-waves.

408. Investigators of Spectral Harmony.

The earliest indications of harmony in spectral lines of which I have
found any record, were given by Prof. Gustavus Hinrichs, in the Ameri-
can Journal of Science for 1864 (vol. xxxviii, p. 31, seq). In the Comptes
Rendus of the French Academy, for 1869 and 1870, Lecoq de Boisbau-
dran published several harmonies of a character analogous to those of
Hinrichs, his first paper being deemed of so much importance that the
Academy allowed its insertion without abridgment, although it exceeded
the statutory length. He referred to a communication of Mascart, on the

‘same subject, in August, 1868, and also to a pli cacheté of his own which

was deposited in the archives of the Academy in 1865. G. Johnstone
Stoney (Rept. Brit. Assoc., 1870 ; Proc. Roy. Irish Acad., 1871; P. Mag.,
1871) and J. L. Soret (Bid. Universelle, Sept. 15, 1871, cited in P. Mag.,
1871, xlii, 464) seem to have been next on the list. My own investiga -
tions began in 1864, with the study of ‘‘oscillations moving with the ve-
locity of light’? (Proc. Am Phil. Soc., ix., 408), but my first indications of
harmonic wave-lengths were not published until 1873 (Jb., xiii, 150).
Guided by a conviction of the physical necessity that all ethereal undula-
tions must be harmonic, I have been led into the discovery of a great
variety of spectral and other coordinated harmonies.

409. Velocity of Wave Propagation.

As there has been some misapprehension with regard to my deduction
of the relation between the mean velocity of oscillating wthereal particles
and the velocity of wave propagation (Note 884), it may be well to explain
the ground on which it rests. In considering the ‘‘ uniform wave of oscil-
lation,’’ in a star which is rotating under the condition that gf, = 0)
(Note 879), the vés viva of a revolving particle at J (Note 381), is } as great
as the ois viva of the same particle from the indefinite fall* which has produc-
ed central condensation. Vis viva varies as distance of possible projection
against uniform resistance ; therefore 7 and }/ may be taken, respectively,
as the measures of the virials of indefinite and of virtual fall. Hence arises
a tendency to the formation of an oscillatory node at $1, together with a
tendency to the radial projection of the node, in the equatorial plane, by

* This is rigidly true only when the fall is infinite, butin falling from Neptune
toSun the deviation from exactness would be less than yy of one per cent.

€
Grote,] 134 [June 16,

the centrifugal force of rotation. The direct and reciprocal centres of
linear oscillation, at 3 7and 47, tend to throw the node at $7 from or to-
ward the centre. The reciprocal centre, 4 1, is pivotal in respect to the
direct centre, 2 J, thus producing a secondary centre of linear oscillation
at £/. This indicates the relative vis wiwa of radial projection which cor-
responds to an oscillatory tangential vis viva of 1. The corresponding rela-
tive velocity is 1/%.

410. Propagation of Haplosive Waves.
3erthelot and Vieille (Ann. de Chim. et de Phys., xxviii, 293) give the

equation 0, = 0, ye na ue in which ( is the amount of heat set free at the
q

moment of chemical combination ; q, 278 times the specific heat ; @,, the
velocity of explosive translation of gaseous molecules; @,, the velocity of
mean translation after the explosive wave has ceased to exert any influence.
They have verified the formula approximately, for a score of gaseous
mixtures of very various compositions. They think that in the act of ex-
plosion a certain number of molecules are thrown forward with all the
velocity corresponding to the maximum temperature developed by the
chemical combination ; this movement is transmitted from one inflamed
edge to another, in a wave which is propagated with a velocity either
identical, or comparable, to that of the molecules themselves,

Introduction to a Study of the North American Noctuidae. By A. R.
Grote, A. M.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, June 16, 1883.)

In my ‘‘List of the Noctuide,’’ 1874, the ‘Check Lists ’’ of 1876 and
1882, my ‘‘TIllustrated Essay ’’ and a number of different papers, I have
explained the characters of Noctwidw, a family of moths of nocturnal
habit and of very general distribution. These structural features, which
are used in establishing genera and other divisions are briefly summarized
as follows, taking the three divisions of the body in turn:

I, The Head: character and structure of the compound eyes, which are
either full or ovate, small, large, or more or less constricted, and have their
surface naked or studded with hair, and the orbits sometimes provided with
longer hair, dependent over the eye and called lashes ; the character and
structure of the clypeus or front, between the eyes, which is swollen or
flat and sometimes provided with a tubercle, or horns of various shapes
and sizes, or a depression ; the presence of ocelli ; the shape and size of palpi
and tongue ; the vestiture of the different parts,

cinaiamenaeed

r

ved
1883.] 135 [Grote,

If. The Zhorae: the shape of the wings, their squamation and neura-
tion; the structure of the feet, the tibix being variously spined, or armed
with claws, or again unarmed, the tarsi which are always spinose show a
variation in the character of the spines ; the shoulder covers or patagia may
be either deflected or closely applied ; the collar which varies in size and
shape.

Ill. The Abdomen: its comparative length and form ; the male geni-
talia which vary in shape, the female ovipositor may be protruded or not.

teneral characters may be drawn from the vestiture and tuftings along
the dorgal lines of the body. The clothing of the thorax varies from hairy
to being composed wholly of flattened scales. I have also used the infra-
clypeal plate at the base of the “ front,’’ which is variously produced and
in Rhodosea seems slightly mesially projected. Compa rative characters
are offered by the size of the appendages, width of clypeus, the retraction
or projection of the head. Secondary sexual characters are to be used as
of generic value when they are of such a nature, that if shared by both
sexes they would be held sufficient to found a genus upon. This would
exclude the antenns from their variability, so far asthe usual pectinations
are concerned, but admits such abnormal male characters as are oflered in
the antenne of the genera Renia, Syllectra, etc.; also the genitalia, upon
which sections may be founded, but which do not seem to be sufficiently
stable in their modifications to form part of the diagnosis. The color and
pattern of ornamentation often give a clue to the affinities of a species and,
in my opinion, should not be entirely disregarded, but afford no ground
by themselves to establish any structural group. ‘The immature stages,
egg, larva and chrysalis should also be studied, and they will often give
a certainty as to the location of a form not to be attained in any other way.
Unfortunately they are generally unknown; on this account alone our
classification is provisional and it must remain so to a greater or less extent
so long as the natural history of the family is not completely known
and studied.

The family Moctwidw, then, may be said to contain moths, having
12-veined forewings, of which vein 5 belongs to the series attached to the
median vein, being nearer vein 4 than vein 6, except in the genus Nola-
phana, where it seems to be nearly central in its location, and having two
internal free veins on the hindwings. This latter character divides them
from the Pyralida, a family which the lower genera of the Noctuidw ap-
proach in general form. The former character separates them from the
Geometridw, a family which is lower and next succeeds the Noctwida, as
may be seer from the fact that the larval form which is characteristic of
the Geometride only obtains in certain lower genera of Noctwidw, which,
in the perfect stage, also show a tendency (Homoptera) to copy the posi-
tion of the wings in repose, and the ornamentation habitual with the Geo-
metride. The wings in the Noctwide are entire, except in Bulinineria, in
which genus the male has a slip on the external margin, a secondary
sexual character of generic value. They have a simple frenulum in the

—

Jrote.] 136 [June 16,
males, which is divided (not ‘‘double’’) in the females. The wings may
be said to be short and narrow ; they broaden in the lower genera and
again in some genera may be said to be long in comparison with the body
(i. e., Ouceullia, ete.). The ocelli are almost always present, while in the
Geometridw they are almost always absent. The palpi lengthen as we de-
scend to the lower genera, where they assume unusual shapes as in Palthis.
The male antenn are ciliate, bristled, brush-like or toothed and pectinate,
the female antenns being almost always simpler in structure ; Renia, Zan-
clognatha, and other genera have them furnished with tufts, coils of hair or
nodosities. The ‘‘front,’’ or clypeus, isbroad and square as compared with
either the Geometrida or Pyralide, The maxillary palpiare short and con-
cealed. The tongue is equally stout, but occasionally short, weak or rudi-
mentary. The eyes are full, and may be either naked or hairy, the hairs
being weak and short in Zrichocosmia, but usually prominent as in Mames-
tra, The orbit of the eye is furnished with a more or less complete circle of
hair in some genera, and there is often a circie of discolorous scales lying
back from the orbit. The vertex of the head is sometimes clothed with scales,
differing in shape and position from those on the ‘‘front,’’ which are often
short and converge mossily about a central protuberance varying in char-
acter. The thorax is short and stout, thickly scaled and often tufted on
the dorgal line, with the tufts divided in some genera, and more or less
lengthy and peculiar. The metathorax is short ; the middle region of the
body is well developed as compared with the other families and muscular,
the base of the wings and their framework of veins being usually stout and
stiff; the flight is most often strong and rapid, and approaches that of the
Sphingide. The habit of hovering over flowers is characteristic of certain
genera such as Plusia. The abdomen is conical, and usually exceeds the
hind wings, the contour is definite ; it is variously tufted, or again smooth
or with a carina on the dorsal line; again. if is flattened, seldom weak or
short.

The colors are brown and gray. The hind wings are quite highly
colored, but, as a rule, simple and slight in their markings as com-
pared with the fore wings; oftenest they are quite plain or with one
or two cloudy lines parallel with the outer margin and a discal
spot. The fore wings are usually distinctly lined. They have a basal
half-line (b. h. 1.), an inner median or transverse anterior (t. a.) line,
a median shade (m. s.), an outer «median or transverse posterior
(t. p.) line, a subterminal line (s. 1.), a terminal line (t. 1.) at the
base of the fringes. There are three stigmata: the orbieular, a rounded
anterior spot on the cell; the reniform, a usually kidney-shaped spot out-
ward the cell; the claviform, a pointed spot attached to the t. a. line below
the orbicular. In the genus Catocala there is also a subreniform spot,
while the claviform is absent. The typical ornamentation is displayed in
such genera as Hadena and Mamestra. Almost always it can be made out
and its presence renders a description recognizable if drawn up with care,
and the different lines and spots, which are thus easily executed, fully and

—

1883,] 137 (Grote.

comparatively described. The descriptions in French of M. Guenée seem
to me very good asa rule, and, as a consequence, but few of his North
American species are in doubt. A study of the ornamentation of the Noe-
tuide is interesting. In related species I found that the differences showed
themselves first on upper surface of primaries, then of secondaries, lastly,
beneath.

T only mention the genus Catocala now to refer to’a paper, published by
me some twelve years ago, in which I identified one species previously
described, and in order to recall the fact that IT showed thaf the origin of
the subreniform spot to be the outer median (transverse posterior) line
itself. It here set back a sulcation which became gradually separated
from the line, and in some species now appears as an almost round spot
without any connection with its point of origin. In like manner I con-
ceive the stigmata to have originated. The reniform probably form the
median shade, the orbicular and claviform form the inner median (t. a.)
line. The spots are then developments from the transverse lines, although
it may not be certain whether the reniform is not a relic of a former band,
or perhaps of the outer line, though this is not so probable, judging from
the course of the median shade, which, in some species, seems to be inter-
rupted by the reniform. Every one has read or should read the best chap-
ter in Mr. Scudder’s book on butterflies, that on classification and origin,
and will remember his theory of the primitive style of marking, a succes-
sion of lines following the shape of the outer margin. It seems quite exact
to me from my previous studies of the markings of the Moctuida. It also
works in with my conclusions as to the law of variation in this group,
which I showed affected the upper surface of fore wings first, then the hind
wings, and then the under surface, following the exposure of the surface,
to the light and air.

From these characters we may offer the following réswmé by which the
student may recognize a Noctuid. The front is square and broad, the
labial palpi are divergent and prominent, obliquely ascending, the second
joint longest and thickly pilose, the ocelli are present, the eyes are full,
the tongue stout, the maxillary palpi concealed, the antenne thread-like,
ciliate or brush-like, rarely pectinate in the males. The thorax is heavy
and stout, the prothorax broad and distinct, the patagia relieved, the meta-
thorax very short, the flanks broad ; the wings stiff, strong and short, the
secondaries plain, covered by the fore wings in repose, the primaries 12,
the secondaries 8 veined, the latter with two internal veins counted as
one; the legs are strong, tarsi spinose, tibiz sometimes with claws or
spines. The abdomen is conical, and exceeds the hind wings, its contour
defined. The vestiture is hairy or mixed with flattened scales, usually
dense.

The form of the Noctuida (as insisted on by Agassiz as a family charac-
ter), united three structurally distinct groups, regarded as families by
Lederer. The first of these is represented in our fauna by a few species,
and is nowhere numerous. No name hitherto employed for it is tenable

PROC, AMBR. PHILOS, SOC. XxI. 114. R. PRINTED AUGUST 3, 1883.

py
Grote.] 138 {June 16,

under an amended nomenclature, Dr. Harvey and Dr. Packard have
shown that the term Cymatophora is to be applied to a genus of Geome-
tride. The terms Bombyciwv and Noctuobombycint have not a proper form.
Only one of the genera comprising it is beyond dispute, and is represented
in Europe, Asia and America by distinct species, viz. : Thyatira. I shall
call this group, then, Thyatirida. It differs by the course of vein 8 of the
secondaries, and the position of vein 5 of the primaries from all the rest of
the Noctwde. The second family is the Moctuidw proper. Tt contains
subfamilies, which I have designated in my ‘‘ New Check List,’’? and which
I discuss here so far as the present, paper extends. Other writers have seen
in it three principal groups, the Non-fasciate of Borkhausen (= Noctuinw
of Packard) and the Fasciatw (= Catocalinw Pack.) ; also the Deltoides of
Latreille, so called from the wings in repose forming the outline of the
Greek letter Delta (4). At the time of writing his paper, Dr. Packard
seems to have regarded the latter as Pyralide. It is not possible to sepa-
rate them from the lower Noctuidw as shown by Dr. Herrick-Schieffer.
They fall into two subfamily groups: the Hermindina and Hypenine. The
differences between these groups are a mere extension of the general com-
parative characters by which smaller assemblages of genera may be de-
fined. I have restricted Dr. Packard’s terms to two special groups of
smaller extent, and these I believe to have an equivalent value to his sub-
family groups in the Geometridw, and which T have discussed above. We
have then in the Noctuidee primarily three families :

Nh Nl a Ne Bi
II. NOCTUID A.
III. BREPHID 2.

This last, again, a group of very limited extent, destitute of ocelli,
broad winged and hirsute, has vein 5 midway between 4 and 6, but
differing by the neuration of secondaries from the THyaTrRip A.

In the Thyatiridw no subfamily groups seem to me recognizable since
the discovery of our Western forms, 7hyatira Lorata and Bombycia semi:
cirewlaris. At first sight the genera Leptina and Bombycia (= Cymato-
phora), and again the genera Thyatira, Pscudothyatira and Habrosyne
(= Gonophora) seem torafford two series which in the European fauna
appear distinguishable. Tlubner was the first to associate these genera,
some of the earlier European writers classifying Tiyatira with Plusia. In
our fauna Pseudothyatira stands nearest to Habrosyne, while our species of
Thyatira approach our two Bombycide in several respects.

The general characters of the moths of the NoctuidwI have thus gone
over quite fully, and I now mention those of the subfamily groups, after a
few remarks which suggest themselves to me, since I finally deal with the
subject after a quarter of century.of more or less continuous study of it.
As to nomenclature, the Preface to Staudinger and Wocke’s Catalogue
seems to me to give the most practical and feasible rules whereby the
choice of names is to be regulated. There should be a uniformity in

rence

pe
1888.] 139 (Grote.

family and subfamily terminations, and I am finally opposed to the bar-
barous names used by Mr. Scudder for these groups in the butterflies.

There is a certain amount of natural error which a student may fall
into while gradually becoming acquainted with a large amount of new and
differing species, as to which no work was before him, and through which
he had to break a path. All things considered, no one in my position
could have escaped having to change his views and cancel some of his
work, Ihave always quickly acknowledged and corrected my mistakes,
as all who have followed and used my previous writings, I think, admit.

With these explanatory remarks, I would now offer a 7éswmé of my con-
clusion and studies on the family.

It must be acknowledged that the Noctwide are dificult of limitation as a
family by exclusive characters. They may be shown to differ in turn in
single points from other family groups of moths, but certain genera in
every fauna are difficult to place. As to subfamilies, Lederer shows that
these can only be defined comparatively, and not exactly, or, as he calls
it, scientifically. The groups here recognized are merely tentative associa-
tions of genera to which I have given a subfamily name ; they contain all
of them genera which may be displaced by future enquiries, but they help
the comprehension of the family and enable us to consider certain assem-
blages together. As to their names, I have not followed any rule of
priority ; Guenée gives some of them a family form. Ihave given them a
uniform termination, and derived them from the most prominent genus

they contain.

The summer, that pulse of the year, the length of whose recurring beat
ig at once the measure of the time elapsed since the culmination of the last
ice period, gives us a prevailing northward direction for the winds that sweep
the North American Continent. These offer serial paths along which num-
bers of feathery-winged moths are hurried. We have wind visitors from
the West Indies upon our shores during the whole season. Some of these
become partial citizens by breeding here, others do not, and their lodg-
ment upon our territory is precarious and accidental. The list of species
known to visit us in this manner is already somewhat extensive, while the
southern part of the peninsula of Florida is occupied permanently by the
assemblage of tropical insects. This subject leads us to consider briefly
the distribution of our Voctwida.

The Geographical Distribution of the North American Noctwide must be
studied in connection with the topography of the country and the range of
the food-plants of the caterpillar. It is found that mountain chains afford
the most eflective barrier to the distribution of species. Their presence
explains the fact that Ohio insects are often absent in New York, or not
go abundant on the north and east of the Alleghanies. <A study of the
ranges and lateral branches of the Rocky mountains, as they are deline-
ated, gives an idea of the different faunal provinces which are discovered
to be more or less restricted to the valleys between the spurs. It is shown
that, often at short distances in this region, the character of the moths in

J 40 [June 16,

trote.]

adjacent valleys changes. We have essentially one fauna, which is arrested
at the St. John’s river by a tropical colony inhabiting Southern Florida.
The Labrador fauna is a true extension of the Canadian, and the Noctuidae
of that region may be found again inhabiting the sides of Mount Wash-
ington. I disagree then with Staudinger, who includes the Labrador with
the European fauna, believing him to be misied by the identity of alpine
species with our more northern forms. On the west our fauna extends
downwards along the table-lands occupying the centre of the Mexican
peninsula, the hot and low lands on either side being occupied by a differ-
ent and tropical fauna. Singularly enough some more northern west
coast species have been found in Maine and Canada. There must be a
northern outlet in the mountain ranges of the Pacific coast. The princi-
pal feature in the distribution of our fauna is the migrations. A yearly
zodlogical wave sets in from Mexico and the West Indies, and carries on
its crest a number of light-winged Noctuidw, which eventually range up
our entire coast, and are found in Maine in the fall. The most import-
ant to us of these species is the cotton worm, which I have studied a long
time. This moth, which feeds on the perennial cotton of South and Cen-
tral America, must have visited our mainland for years before the cultiva-
tion of our annual cotton gave ita lodgment on our soil. Now it in-
creases by the rich fields offered as food for its larva, and traverses the
country in successive broods from the South to the Ohio river. Beyond
this it flies, but it ig doubtful that it again accomplishes its transformations
on a substitute food-plant in the fall. The probability is that it does.
[ originally showed that, in the South, it would feed on nothing but cot-
con, from my observations and experiments. I find now that Prof. Riley
occupies my ground, and states that it only feeds on cotton and that its
northern journey is fruitless. I originally discovered that the whole
inquiry, from an economical point of view, hinged upon the discovery
of its successful hibernation, after being the first to positively ascertain
that it wintered as a moth.

In my paper (1874) I suggested that this might still be extra limital or
confined to a narrow southern strip of land in Texas or Florida. In this [
was probably mistaken, and it may be that it has a hold throughout the
cotton belt. But I wish to point out distinctly that this was the matter to be
ascertained, and that my theory is to-day the correct one. It showed that
the area of successful hibernation was the point for future enquiry, and
I suggested in the Z'rébune the means to get this information, and the
preventive measures to be employed, if this region was such as could be
dealt with by preventive measures in the spring. As to its extra limital
origin, Professor Riley finds a short letter anticipating my theory, but
necessarily presenting few facts as the range of North American Noctuida
was not then known. However this may be, neither Prof. Riley nor I
knew of this letter, when I read my paper in 1874, five years after I had
formed my conclusions. To suggest that my theme was not original, is
to deal unfairly with the facts. I have shown that Prof. Riley did not

1883.] 141 [Grote.

study the cotton worm in connection with the cotton plant. I protest
against his Cotton Worm Report as doing me throughout grave injustice.
I find even the, moths which I named for Professor Baird, which were
mistaken for cotton moths by unskilled observers, recapitulated in this
report, in which my observation as to the larval feet of Aletia and Anomis
is appropriated. I have named moths for Prof. Riley for twenty years.
He even lately tries to make me responsible for his re-description of the
“Gorn-bud Worm” of Abbott and Smith, the Laphygma frugiperda of
authors, as a new Prodenia autumnalis Riley ; and quotes a fragment of a
private letter of mine to substantiate the charge. But I never saw the
moths till after he had named them, and my letter merely acknowledges
the specimens, and gives no opinion on the matter. Since 1864 I knew
Abbot’s work thoroughly, as shown by my writings on the Sphingide,
and my identification of his species.

As to practical Entomology I allow myself here to express an opinion
founded on my experience. ‘The reports of State entomologists often re-
iterate a good deal, and do not seem to reach the farmers for whom they
are intended. An inquiry about the way in which the money of the United
States Entomological Commission has been spent with the results attained
will show, Lam confident, that the facts it has published have not reached
the great body of American agriculturists, the principa! parties interested.

The system of State entomologists must be changed, and these officials
should lecture before the public schools and institute meetings in the
county districts, and thus bring the outlines of entomology and a knowl-
edge of common pests before the young. In this way farmer boys will
learn to respect robins’ nests and pull down the nests of the tent caterpil-
lar instead. As matters are now, it is little use of one man’s cleaning out
his orchard while another next door keeps a breeding place for the codling
moth. Public education must take charge of the matter, and there will
then be a prospect of saving much that is now wasted. Krom a perusal of
Mr. Wm. Saunders’ excellent book* on ‘‘Insects Injurious to Fruit
Trees,’’ it is plain that personal labor and mechanical appliances for jarring
and gathering or crushing are better than poisons in most cases, and I re-
iterate here the opinion I expressed at the Saratoga meeting of the American
Association, that the use of Paris green is to be deprecated from the Jia-
bility of poisoning to stock, and the persons handling it, to say nothing of
its criminal use which has not unfrequently happened.

In the following arrangement I have given our Thyatiride and the bulk
of the Noctuidw down to the Catocaline and Deltoids. All the genera are
here cited, but I have only given the species described by myself as a
rule; the other species are cited in my “New Check List,’’? and do not
usually give different characters from those here presented, which I have

* This work (which should be used in public schools), from its admirably sim-
ple and correct style, its illustrations and arrangement of material used, is
entitled to be regarded as the best on the subject since the now classical treatise
of the late Dr, Harris.

Grote.] 142 [June 16,

specially studied. I have also omitted the synonyms and subgenera. I
follow this list by a discussion of the twenty-four groups into which I have
divided the genera, and conclude the paper by special generic descriptions.

I trust this paper will be of general service to the student, and it. is
offered as my probably final contribution to a knowledge of this interest-
ing group. The paper was written for the most part several months ago,
and was intended to be of wider extent, and include some plates which I

cannot now give.

SYSTEMA NOCTUIDA AMERICA BOREALIS.

I, THY ATIRID A,

Habrosyne I[ubn.
Scripta Gosse.

Pseudothyatira m.
Cymatophoroides Gwen.

var, Expultrix m.

Thyatira Ochs.
Pudens Guen.

Lorata m.

Bombycia Hubn.
Semicircularis m.
Improvisa //y. dw.

Leptina Guen.
Ophthalmica Guen.
Australis m.

Doubledayi Guen.
Dormitans Guen.
Latebricola m.

II. NOCTUID 4.

1. Dicopine.

Butolype im.
Rolandi m

Dicopis m.
Muralis m.
Viridescens Walk.
Klectilis Morr.
Depilis m.
Thaxterianus m.
Damalis m.

Copipanolis m.
Cubilis m.

2, Apatelina.

Andela Walk.
Acromyctoides Walk.

Platycerura Pack.

Furcilla Pach.

Charadra Walk.
Propinquilinea m.
Derideus Gwen,
Dispulsa Morr.

Palata m.

Raphia [ubn.
Abrupta m.

Hywater m.

Feralia m.
Jocosa Guen.

Momaphana m.
Comstocki m.

Diphthera Hubn.
Fallax H.-S.

Apatela Hubn.
Occidentalis G. and R.
Morula G. and R.
Thoracica m.

Faleula m.
Parallela m.
Albarufa m.
Paupercula m.
Vinnula m.
Quadrata m.
Tota m.
Americana JTZarr,
Dactylina m,
Spinea m.
Lupini m.

a

Sao —

afc asc casbeciactistnnle

1883.]

Vulpina m. .

Felina m.
Luteicoma G. and I.
Distans m.
Subochrea m.
Noctivaga m.
Afflicta m.

Jonnecta m,
Harveyana m.
Ovata m.
Hxilis m.

Hieesitata m.

Dissecta G. and Rh.
Sperata m.

Edolata m.

Extricata m.
Lithospila m.
Lanceolaria ™m.
Insolita m.

Arsilonche Led.
Henrici m.
var, Evanidum mm.

Copablepharon Harve}

Absidum J7arvey.
Album Jlarvey.
Subflavidens m.
Longipenne m.
Harrisimemna i.
Trisignata Walk.

8. Bryophiline.

Cerma Hubn.
Cora Hubn.

Polygrammate Iubn.
Hebraicum ZZubn.

Microccelia Guen.
Fragilis Quen.
Diphteroides Gwen.

var Obliterata m,

Bryophila Tr.
Lepidula m.

Cyathissa m.
Percara Morr.

Chytonix m.
Sensilis m,

143
4. Noctuine.

Carneades mm.
Moerens m.
Citricolor m.

Agrotis Hubn.

Jadicollis m.
Janualis m.
Pallidicollis m.
Opacifrons m.
Perattenta m.
Attenta m.
Stellaris m.
Phyllophora m.
Rubifera m.
Perconflua m.
Rosaria m.
Planalis m.
ILospitalis m.
Viralis m.
Ksurialis m.
Quarta m.
Apposita mm.
Fishii m.
Normaniana m.
Conchis m.
Mirabilis a.
Innotabilis m.
Washing toniensis m.
Treatii m.
Juneta m.
Haruspica m.
Muscosa m.
Invenusta m.
Terrealis m.
Mercenaria m.,
Auxiliaris m.

var. Agrestis m.

var. Introferens m.
Perexcellens m,
Gularis m.

Immixta mm.
Docilis m.
Evanidalis m.
Herilis mm.
Vittifrons m.

[Grote.

Grote.)

TInsularis m.
Costata m.
Idahoensis ™m.
Formalis m.
Facula m.
Emarginata m.
Observabilis mm.
Bimarginalis m.
Bicolaris m,
Letula m.
Cupida m.
var. Brunneipennis 7,
var. Alternata m.
var, Cupidissima m.
var. ? Orbis m.
Variata m.
Minimalis m.
Placida m.
Discoidalis m.
Brunneicollis m.
Havile m.
Murenula @. and R.
Dolis m.
Dapsilis 1.
Catenula m.
Atrifera m.
Vernilis m.
EKuroides m.
Milleri ™m.
Vocalis m.
Hollemani 7.
Silens m.
Albalis m,
Cloanthoides m.
Infimatis m.
Lagena m,
Pluralis m.
Pleuritica m.
Pitychrous m.
Niveivenosa ™,
Niveilinea m.
Olivalis m.
Quadridentata G. and I.
Jicatricosa G. and R.
Ridingsiana m.
Lewisii m.

144

Versipellis m.
Colata m.
Declarata Walk.
var, Campestris m.
var. Decolor Morr.
ow’. Albipennis m.
var. Nigripennis .
Verticalis m.
Tessellata aris.
oar. Atropurpurea 7.
Tesselloides m.
Strigilis m.
Geniculata G. and I.
Oollaris G. and R.

Jadinodis m.
Bollii m.
Atrifrons 7.
Piscipellis m.
Grandipennis m.
Perfusea ™.
Velleripennis m,
Pastoralis mm.
Balimitis m.
Friabilis m.
Fuscigera m.
Brunneigera m.
Rubefactalis m.
Micronyx m.
Fumalis m.

Dollii m.

Hriensis m.
Worthingtoni m.
Sublatis m.

Munis m.,
Violaris G. and R.
Wilsonii m.
Specialis m.
Basalis m.
Mimallonis m.
Gagates m.
Oatherina m.

Yircumdata mm.
Vancouverensis 7.
Semiclavata m.
Gravis m.
Vapularis m.

[June

‘}

1883, ]

Aneipennis 7.
Nanalis m.
Clodiana m.
Texana m7.
Pellucidalis mm.
Jeata m.
Ceenis m.
Nigrovittata m.
Trabulis m.
Pressa m.
Anytus m.
Sculptus m.
var. Planus m.
Ammoconia Led.
Decipiens m.
var. Parentalis
Distichoides m.
Adita m.
Chionanthi A. and S.
Eucoptocnemis m.
Kimbriaris Gawen.
Agrotiphila m.
Montana Morr.

5. Hadenine.

Fishia m.
Kuthea m.
Copimamestra 1.
Occidenta m.
Mamestra Ochs.
Purpurissata m.
Disealis m.
Lubens m.
Beanii m.
Legitima m.
Liquida m.
Noverc
Goodellii m.
Vittula m.
Farnhamii mm.
Nevade m.
Subjuncta G. and R.
Atlantica m.
Dimmockii m.
Bisulca m,

Md.

PROC, AMER.|PHILOS. S00.

Sty Ody. 8

145

Crotehii m.
Chartaria m.
Defersa m.
Sella m.
Pensilis m.
Vicina m.
Acutipennis m.
Gnata m.
Glaciata m.
Cuneata m.
Quadrilineata mm,
Alboguttata mm.
Comis m.
Sutrina m,
Lustralis i.
Meditata mm.
Innexa m.
Spiculosa m.
Ferrealis m.
Cinnabarina m.
var. Ferrea m.

Niveiguttata m.
Leucogramma, 7.
Insolens m,

3 Arietis m.

Trichoclea in.
Decepta m.

Lucerfa Von Hein.
Delicata m.

Hadena Schrank.
Ducta m.
Separans m.
Occidens m
Bridghamii G. and R.
Violacea m.
Hulstii m.
Sputatrix m.
Plutonia m.
Vultuosa m.
Oristata m.
Lignicolor Guen.

var, Queesita m.
Genialis m.
Auranticolor m.
Cuculliiformis m.

[Grote,

PRINTED AUGUST 16, 1883,

Grote.]

Vulgaris G. and R.
Idonea m.
Semilunata m.
Discors m.
Perpensa m.
Yinefactia m.
Leucoscelis m.
Olorina m.
Hillii m.
Indirecta m.,
Tusa m.
Tonsa ™.
Chryselectra m.
Charactra m.
Genetrix m.
Adnixa m.
Fumosa m.
Longula m.
Diversilineata m.
Tortilis m.
Marina m.
Misera m.
Oylindrica m.
Vulgivaga Morr.
Fractilinea m.
var. proce. ?
Modiola m.
oar. prac. ?
Hausta m.
Pseudanarta Ily. Hdw.
Jrocea Hy. Hdw.
Flava m.
Singula m.
Flavidens m.
Aurea m.
Oligia Hubn.
Chalcedonia /Tubn.
var. Tracta m.
Versicolor m.
Fuscimacula m.
Perigea Guen.
Epopea Cramer.
Oupentia Cram.
Infelia Guen.
Oonfederata m.
Oondica Palpalis Wall,

146

Tole m.

Xanthioides Guen.
var. Enixa m, pall.

Luxa m.

Falsa m.

Albolabes m.

Loculosa ™.

Vecors Guen.
Lussa In.

Nigroguttata m.
Dipterygia Steph.

Scabriuscula Linn.
Hyppa Dup.

Xylinoides Guen.
Hillia m.

Senescens m.

Vigilans m.

Algens m.
Valeria Germ.

Opina m.

? Conserta m.
Dryobota Led.

Stigmata m.
Arthrochlora mn,

Februalis m.
Copivaleria m.

Grotei Morr.
Oncocnemis Led.

Flayesi m.

Dayi mm.

Mirificalis mm.

Behrensi m.

Levis m.

Pernotata m.

Hennyi m.

Homogena m.

Oblita m.

Augustus Harvey.

Chandleri m.

Riparia Morr.

Major m.

Aqualis mm.

Jurvicollis m.

Cibalis m.

Gracillima m.

Saundersiana m,

[June 16,

1883. ] 147 (Grote.

Occata m. Conservula m.

Atricollaris /larvey. Anadonta Gwen.

i Atrifasciata Morr. Trigonophora Hubn.

Griseicollis m. Periculosa Guen.

| Aterrima m. : var. V-brunneum m.

Homohadena im. Huplexia Steph.

| Chorda m. Lucipara Linn.

| Badistriga m. Brotolomia Led.

| Vulnerea m. Iris Guen.

Kappa m. Nephelodes Guen.

Figurata Harvey. Minians Gwen.

| EKpipaschia m. oar. Violans Gwen.

' Induta /Zarvey. Tricholita m.

Incomitata Zarvey. Semiaperta dor.

Inconstans ™. Kistula aro.

| Fortis m, [Inconspicua m.,

| var. ? Picina m. Admetovis 1.

Aporophyla Guen, Oxymorus 7.

| ? Yosemite: m. Helotropha Led.

he Trichopolia m. Reniformis m.
Dentatella m. var. Atra m.

Ptilodonta m. : Sera G. and R.

| Pachypolia m. Apamea T'r.

} Atricornis ™. Purpuripennis mm,

| Polia Fr. Nictitans Bkh.

Acutissima m. Juvenilis m.

| Medialis m. Erepta m.

} Illepida m. Gortyna Hubn.

Pallifera m. Inquiesita G. and Re.

; Adon m. Cerina m.

| Theodori m. Rigida m.

| Kpichysis m. Cataphracta m.

| Hadenella m. Impecuniosa mm.

i Pergentilis m. Purpurifascia G'. and RB.

Actinolia [ubn. Harrisii m.

| tamosula Gwen. Speciosissima G. and R.
Stewarti m. Cerussata m.

Callopistria Hubn. Necopina ™.

: Strena m. Serrata m.

f Laphygma Guen. Ochria Hubn.

FKrugiperda A. and S. Sauzalitee m.

Prodenia Guen. Buffaloensis m.

| Commelins A. and 8. Achatodes Guen.
Preefica m. Zex Harris.

Bupsephopeectes m. Macronoctua m.

Procinctus m. Onusta m.

=_———

Grote.)

Huthisanotia Hubn,

Timais Cram.
Lathosea m.
Pulla m.

6. Arzamina.

Sphida m.
Obliquata G@. and R.

Arzama Walk,
Densa Walk.
Vulnifica m.
Melanopyga ™.
Diffusa m.

7%. Nonagriine.

Nonagria Ochs.

Permagna ™.
Subflava m.
Oblonga m.

Tota m.
Armata m.
Minorata ™m.

Senta Steph.
Defecta m.

Platysenta m.
Atriciliata m.
Angustiorata m.

Tapinostola Led.
Orientalis m.

Ommatostola m.
Lintneri m.

Heliophila Hubn.
Oxygala m.

Preegracilis m.
Patricia m.
Bicolorata m.
Rubripennis G. and Rh.
Ligata m.

Dia m.
Lapidaria m.
Adjuta m.
Farcta m.
Adonea m.
Flabilis m.

148

timosa m.
Pseudargyria Gwen.
var, Callida m.
Zosteropoda m.
Hirtipes m.
Ufeus m.
Satyricus m.
Plicatus m.
Unicolor m.
Sagittarius m.
Pteroscia Morr.
Atrata Morr.

8. Scolecocampina,

Scolecocampa Guen.

Liburna Geyer.
Enucalyptera Morr.
Bipuncta Morr.
Obscura m.
Doryodes Guen.
Bistriaris Geyer.
Phiprosopus m.
Jallitrichoides m.
Amolita m,
essa m.
Cilla m.
Distema m.

9, Nolaphanina.

Nolophana ™.
Malana /ttch.
Triquetrana Pitch,
Zelleri m.

Labecula m.

Adipsophanes in.
Miscellus am.

Crambodes Guen.
Talidiformis Guen.

10. Caradrina.

Fotella m.
Notalis m.

Caradrina Tr,
Miranda m,

[June 16,

|
|

ny

—

1883.]

Fragosa m.
Civica m.

Pyrophila Hubn.
Tragopoginis (Linn.).
Triquetra m.

11. Zaeniocampina.

Orthodes Guen.
Nitens m.
Himella m.
Intractata (Morr.).
Teeniocampa Guen.
Agrotiformis m.
Virgula m.
Furfurata m.
Peredia m.
Rufula m.
Puerilis m.
Perbrunnea m.
Jonsopita m.
Garmani m.
Perigrapha Led.
Normalis m. ,
Muricina m.
Behrensiana m.
Plusiiformis /Zy. dw.
Erythrolita m.
Transparens m.
Preses m.
Crocigrapha m.
Normani ™m.
Xylomiges Guen.
Hiemalis m.
Curialis m.
Patalis m.
Tabulata m.
Perlubens m.
Dolosa m.
Morrisonia m.
Hvicta m.
var. Vomerina m.
Infidelis m.
Anchocelis Guen.
Digitalis m.

149

Parastichtis Hubn.
Gentilis m.
var. Perbellis m.

12. Orthostina.

Metalepsis m.
Cornuta m.
Pachnobia Guen.
Carnea Thunb.
Trichorthosia m.
Parallela m.
Pseudorthoria m.
Variabilis m.
Pectinata m.

Choephora G. and R.

Fungorum G. and R.
Pseudoglea im.
Tredata m.
Slanda m.
Decepta m.
Zotheca m.
Tranquilla m.
var. Viridula m.
var. Viridifera m.
Cea m.
Immacula m.
Calymnia Hubn.
Orina Guen.
Trichocosmia m.
Tnornata m.
Ipimorpha Hubn.
Pleonectusa m,
var, Subvexa m.
Orthosia Ochs.
Purpurea m.
Crispa Harvey.
Decipiens m.
Ralla G. and R.
Kuroa G. and R.'
Tnops m.
Helva m.
Conradi m,
Citima m.
Cosmia Hubn.
Infumata mm,

[Grote,

Grote.]

Homogleea Morr
Hircina Morr,
Carnosa m.

Gleea Hubn.
Viasica m.

Inulta m.

Epigleea m.
Apiata m.

Decliva m.

Deleta m.

Jodia Hubn.
Rufago Hubn.

Eucirreedia m.
Pampina ( Gwen.)

Scoliopteryx Germ.
Libatrix Linn

Xanthia Hubn.
Togata Hsper.

Scopelosoma Curtis.
Pettiti m.

Greefiana m.
Moffatiana m.
Ceromatica m.
Devia m.
Morrisoni m.
Vinulenta m.
Sidus Gwen.

var, Walkeri m.
Tristigmata mm,

Litholomia m.
Napiea (Morr.).

Lithophane I[Tubn.
Hemina m.

Petulca m.
Gausapata m,
Ferrealis m.
3ettumei G. and R.
Oriunda m.
Semiusta m.
Contenta m.
Georgii m.
Antennata Walk.

Cinerea Riley.
Laticinerea m.

Grotei Riley.

Cinerosa || m.
Unimoda Lintn.

150

Tepida m.
Baileyi m.
(Querquera m.
Viridipallens m.
Pexata m.

var. Washingtoniana m.

Thaxteri m.

Capax G. and R.
Lithomia [Tubn.

Germana Morr.
Calocampa Steph.

Cineritia m.

18. Cuculliina.

Cucullia Schrank.
Convexipennis (. and R.
Montane m.

Cita m.
Serraticornis Lintn.

Cleophana Boisd.
Kulepis m.

Nyctophzata Smith.
Magdalena lulsts

14. Murhipiine.

Ripogenus m.
Pulcherrimus m.
Marasmalus m.
Ventilator m.
Histrio m.
15. Ingurine.

Ingura Guen.
Declinata m.
Preepilata m.
Flabella m.
Oculatrix Guen.

16. Anomiinm.

Anomis [Tubn.
Wrosa //ubn.
Exacta /lubn.

Aletia Hubn.
Argillacea /Iubn,

ene

|
|
/

1883.]

Hostia Harvey:
Pterzetholix m.
Bullula m.
Chytoryza m.
Tecta m.

17. Litoprosopina.

Litoprosopus mM.
Futilis G. and R.

18. Calpine.

Calpe Tr.
Canadensis Beth.

19. Stirdina.

Hypsoropha Iubn.
Monilis abr.

Hormos /TZubn.

Plusiodonta Guen.
Compressipalpis Gwen.

Basilodes Guen.
Pepita Guen.

Chrysopis m.

Stiria m.
Rugifrons m.

Sulphurea Veum.

Stibadium m.
Spumosum m.

Aureolum //y. Hdw.

Chameeclea m.
Pernana mm.

Cirrhophanus m.
Triangulifer m.

Fala m.
Ptycophora m.

Plagiomimicus m.
Pityochromus 7.
Expallidus m.

Tepperi Morr.

Acopa Harvey.
Carina /arvey.
Perpallida m.

Tneana Jy, Hdw.

151

Neumoegenia m.
Poetica m.

20. Plustina.

Diastema Guen.
Tigris Guen.

Telesilla H.-S.

Jinereola Guen.
Navia Harv.

Behrensia m.
Conchiformis mm.

Abrostola Ochs.
Ovalis Guen.

Urentis Guen.

Deva Walk.
Purpurigera Walk.
Paligera m.

Plusia Fabr.
/Breoides m.

Metallica a.

Contexta ™.
Putnami mm.
Striatella mm.
Formosa 7.
Mappa @. and R.
Dyaus 7.
Labrosa 7.
Monodon mm.
Pseudogamma 7.
Fratella 7.
Pedalis mm.
Viridisignata 7.
Epigeea m.
Sarena 77.
-asipheeia m.
Sackenii m.

21. Heliothine.

Lepipolys Guen.
Perscripta Guen.

Anarta Ochs.
Cordigera Thunbd.
Luteola @. and R.
Quadrilunata mm.

Grote,]

Nivaria m.
Subfuscula m.
Submarina m.
Sympistis Hubn.
Proprius Hy. Hdw.
Pseudanthececia Sm.
Tumida m.
Dasypoudeea Sim.
Lucens Morr.
var. Luxuriosa m.
Meadii m.
Buedwardsia m.
Neumegeni Hy, di.
Xanthothrix Hdw.
Ranunculi Ay. Hdw.
Axenus in.
Arvalis m.
Pseudatamila Sm.
Vanella m.
Perminuta Hy. Hada.
Heliaca H.-S.
Diminutiva mm.
Heliosea m.
Pictipennis mm.
Heliophana m.
Mitis m.
Heliolonche m.
Modicella m.
Melicleptria Hubn.
Celeris m.
Pulchripennis m.
Villosa m.
Persimilis m.
Honesta m.
Sueta m.
var. Californiensis mm.
Dysocnemis m.
Belladonna Jy. Mdw.
Melaporphyria 7.
Immortua .
Prorupta ™.
Ononis Habr.
Heliochilus m.
Paradoxus ™.
Heliothis Hubn.
rmiger /Zubn.

oar, Umbrosus m7.

15

2

[June 16,

Lupatus m,
Cupes m.
Pyrrhia Hubn.
Angulata i.
Stilla m.
Oxylos m.
Jitrinellus G. and R.
Alaria Westw.
Gauree A. and 8.
Rhodophora (uen.
Florida Gwen.
Rhodosea m.
Julia mm.
Derrinia Walk.
Stellata Wath.
oar. Wenrietta m,
Rhododipsa m.
Volupia (itch (m.).
Miniana m.
4&dophron Led.
Snowi m.
Lygranthoecia G. and R.
Marginata Law.
Rivulosa Guen.
Thoreaui G. and R.
Saturata mm.
Separata m.
var. Balba im.
vay, Acutilinea mm.
var. ? Coercita m,
Velaris m.
Tertia m.
Limbalis m.
Acifera Guen.
var. Spraguei m.
Brevis m.
var. Atrites 2.
Meskeana m.
var, Rufimedia mm.
Packardii mm.
Mortua m.
Nobilis m.
Buleucyptera in.
Cumatilis m.
Tennescens 7.
Tricopis m.

Chrysellus mw,

ee

1883.]

Hulotia Zepper.
Aleucis Harv.
Pippona Harv.
Bimatris are.
Antaplaga m.
Dimidiata 7.
Sexseriata 7.
Grotella Harv.
Septempunctata //aro.
Dis m.
Oxycnemis m.
Adrena 7.
Triocnemis m.
Saporis m.
Pseudacontia Sm.
Crustaria Morr.

22. Acontiina.

Trichotarache m.
Assimilis m.

Tarache I[Tubn.
Flavipennis m.
Abdominalis 7.
Lanceolata 2.
Angustipennis 1.
Sutrix m.

Binocula m.
Virginalis mm.
Jretata G. and R.
Terminimaculata m.

Chamyris Gwen.
Cerintha Fr.

Xanthodes Guen.
(?) Buxea m.

Trileuca m.
Rectifaseia 7.
Gulnare Streck.

28. Hustrotiine.

Lithacodia Hubn.
Bellicula 7lubn.
Annaphila m.
Diva m.
Divinula m.
PROG, AMER. PHILOS, SOC. XX1

Re

400 [Grote,

Decia m.
Depicta m.
Danistica mm.

Eustrotia Hubn.

Malaca mm.

Mitographa a.

Secta mm.
Concinnimacula Quen.

var. Parvimacula m.
Synochitis G. and R.
Musta G and R.

Retis m.
Distineta om,
Caduea m.
Marive mm:
Aeria m.
Dividua m.

Escaria m.
Olauda m.

Buherrichia m.
Monetifera Guen.

Thalpochares Led,
AXttheria m.

Orba m.
FKortunata 7.
Perita mm.

Tripudia.
Quadrifera Zell.
Flavofasciata m.

Jasicinerea mm.
Lixiva m.

Gyros Hy. Edw.
Muirii Hy. dv.

Spragueia m. i
Magnifica mm.
Plumbifimbriata 7,
Pardalis m.

Funeralis 7.
Sordida m,
Guttata mm.
Tnorata mm.

Fruva m.
Fasciatella m7.
Obsoleta m.

Georgica m.
Apicella m.

.114. 7. PRINTED AvausT 16, 1883,

r
Grote.) 154: [June 16,

Azenia m. Rolandiana .
Implora ™. Lepidomys Guen,
Edentata m. Irrenosa (wen.
Prothynia Hubn. Metoponia Dup.
Coccineifascia m. Obtusa H.-S.
Rosalba mm. Perflava Haro.
Orgy m. Galgula Guen.
Plana m. Hepara Guen,
Xanthoptera Guen. Subpartita Guen. ‘
Nigrofimbria Gwen,
Clausula m. 24. Hybleina,
Exyra m.
Semicrocea Guen. Hyblea Fabr.
Fax m. Puera Habr.

1. Dicopinw m. In thissection are grouped genera with the head sunken,
the squamation rough or thick, the abdomen tending to be weak and
plump, as in the Apateling, the tibie unarmed except by a strong claw on
anterior pair, the ocelli present, the male antenn thick and stoutly pecti-
nate, the eyes naked and lashed, the labial palpi short, the tongue mode-
rate, the chrysalis hibernates, and the moths appear early in the year, As
to the ornamentation it is typical in Dicopis, and agrees with the /ade-
nine. I believe the group to be really close to the latter, and would bring
the genera either before or after that group. It does not appear to be rep-
resented in Hurope. As an instance that natural structural characters are
only of subordinate value in arranging the family groups, [ would instance
the genera Dicopis, Oopivaleria, Oncoenemis and Basilodes, all have naked
eyes, unarmed tibise with a claw on anterior pair, yet we cannot associate
them in a single group, their general appearance and form is so diverse.
Hutolype is singular for a small central chalybeous tuft of thoracic scales
(easily overlooked and removed when the moth is pinned) only noticeable
also in Tolype and Hudryas ; there is a somewhat analogous posterior tuft
in Oxycenmis. Copipanolis is a very singular Bombyciform genus, reddish
in color with variably thick median lines, narrower in the female, found
from Massachusetts to Texas. There is a faint resemblance to the Kuro-
pean genus Panolis, but on the whole, I think, a mere analogy.

2. Apateline m. This is Boisduval’s Bombycoidea. The genera are
more or less like Notidontidw or Dasychirinw as to moth and larva. The
wings are even, the body plump, often the males have pectinate antennie,
though the typical genus was then simple. The larve are usually hairy,
bristled and bizarre in appearance. Apatella Funeralis has club-shaped
hairs, and represents in our fauna the European A. Alnt. Raphia is rep-
resented by two species, of which the neuration of Abrupta seemed to me
to agree with that of R. Hybris, the European type of the genus which I
have never seen. Charadra has hairy eyes, and is nearly related, perhaps
not distinct. Awdela and Platycrura seem to me related, The term Diph-

————

——

———

1883.] 155 [Grote.

thera is first used for the European Aprilina with which our D. Hallam is
songenerical, the term Moma is incorrectly used for this latter form. For
the European Ludifica, the term Zrichosea must be used. The genera
Raphia, Charadra need a re-examination, which now that several species
are described can be profitably undertaken. Apatela falls into sections
which may in some cases have a generic value.

3. Bryophiline m. The typical genus has flattened scales on the thorax,
and is of slight form, the larva feeding on lichens as observed in Europe.
The immature stages of our species are not known. Oyathissa differs by
its narrow form, and an excision below apices of primaries. Ohytonia is
somewhat stouter, with Hadeniform ornamentation; the type was de-
scribed by Guenée under Apamea, but appears to me to be the male form
of Bryophila Palliatricula Guen. The thorax is scaled; the species are
brown with a white sub-median spot attached to t. p. line, or the median
field shaded with white. A. new title may be necessary for Qora, which in
many respects is near Trisignata. Perhaps only the three last genera be-
long strictly to this group.

4, Noctuiine m. This group I place here following Lederer ; it seems
to me really lower than the Hadenina and to have affinities with the Or-
thostine. It comprises the typical genus Agrotis, with naked, unlashed
eyes, untufted abdomen, spinose tibix and smoothly haired thorax with
the normal Noctuid markings. I have lately very fully discussed the
genus in the pages of the Canadian Entomologist, to which paper I refer
the student. Carneades differs by the mucronate clypeus ; Anytus by the
lashed eyes ; Agrotyphila by the constricted eyes ; our species of Ammoco-
nia by the ridge on the thorax, they may not be congeneric with the
FBuropean as they seem slighter, but their essential character refers them
here. Finally, Hucoptocnemis is used for a species of Guenée’s described
by Mr. Morrison, which differs in the claw to fore tibie, and Adita is em-
ployed for a large species with spinose middle and hind tibis but unarmed
fore tibix provided with a stout claw. Pachnobia is referred by Lederer to
the Orthosiina.

The very numerous species of Agrotis described by me are here again
gone over as far as practicable, and I believe I have retained none but
valid species. The type of Millert (named for the poet), is in the fine col-
lection of Mr. Henry Edwards, and disputes with Z/illiana and Otreum-
ducta, the claim of the handsomest species among many very pretty but
some plain and even ugly (Oochranii) forms. T have referred to Cupida,
all the forms which are possibly varieties, but which no one at first could
be blamed for considering distinct. Alternata is at least a good variety ; I
have seen some reddish specimens approaching Cupida, but still with pale
terminal field. Owpidissima is represented by specimens, tending to brown-
ish in Mr. Neumoogen’s extensive collection. Brunnetpennis is applied to
small specimens with obliterate markings, very deep red-brown varying
to bright orange red. Orbis has the orbicular minute, and may be distinct.
On the other hand, Bécollaris, small with a band on the collar, and Variata

.
Grote,] 156 {June 16,
much shaded with white are without any doubt on my mind valid species.
I have united under the name Declarata, all the distinguishable forms
allied to the Western type. I think that some of these may turn ont dis-
tinct, in particular Albipennis with whitish secondaries in both sexes,
while Zricosa and Subgothica may be varieties, this cannot, I think, be
predicated of Herilis. The only yellow-winged Agrotis we have, my G@il-
otpennis, is now held to be the same as Chardinyi from Siberia. Among
our showiest species are Mimallonis, Bimarginalis, Conchis, Mirabilis,
Crandipennis, Mireivenosa, Beata and Dollii, chiefly from the West.

5. Hadenine m. This group has the eyes full, naked or hairy, the palpi
well developed, the second joint pilose and long, ocelli, the body hirsute,
and often tufted on the dorsal line, the ornamentation normal. shia has
the tibise spinose, Oncocnemis, Copimamestra and Copiwaleria have a claw
on front tibise, otherwise the tibie in thig group are unarmed. Polyphanis
herbacea, described by Guenée, is unknown to me. Mamestra has hairy
eyes ; [ include in it the species of Dianthacia which have the 2 ovipositor
exserted. Copimamestra includes tie European Brassica, and has a tibial
claw. adena has naked eyes, otherwise agreeing with Mamestra. Oligia
is used for very slight species referred by Guenée to Celwna in part; they
are glistening and the usual tufts are obsolete. Perigea also wants the tho-
racic tufts except behind the collar, the eyes are naked, the vestiture mixed
with scales, silky. The European species of Dryobota and Valeria have
not been examined by me and our North American forms needs to be
compared with these ; the same is true of the species referred to Aporo-
phyla, and in part of Palia. In this genus the last three species form a
distinct group ; Pallifera seemed to me a true Polia ; while Jllepida is aber-
rant, with pectinate (fj antenne and approaches Pachypolia. I have dis-
covered a true Callopistria in Florida ; the species formerly referred to
this genus I have removed under Huherrichia to a later group. Adme-
toris has hairy eyes and extruded ovipositor, and seems to me best placed
near Nephelodes. Tricholita has the jj‘ antenne pectinate, the vestiture
longer, the apices pointed, the size smaller. Ochria has the clypeus mu-
cronate, otherwise the species are similar to the forms I arrange under
Gortyna. Macronoctua approaches the Nonagrians, while as to
Lathosea T am doubtful of its true affinities. The moth is hirsute
with retracted head, and has some resemblances also to the Nona-
grians. The Hadenoid moths belong principally to Huropean
genera, and should be studied with these in hand. After a very
diligent study of European authorities, I find it impossible to arrive
at a certainty without the types of European genera to consult. Our fauna
is remarkable for the numerous species of Oncocnemis. Among the Amer-
ican genera Hadenella is to be noted for the clypeal horn and Lussa for the
long ‘untufted abdomen and narrow wing, looking like a Pyralid; the
genus is from the tropical faunal province of southern Florida, and maybe
West Indian also; I am not certain that it is rightly placed, it has a cer-
It is difficult to separate some of the species

tain resemblance to Perigea.

acca acceaee

im
1883. ] 157 [Grote,

T have placed under Gortyna from Orthosia, and perhaps when the early
stages are known, and the species more minutely studied, some changes
will be found necessary. The principle changes from my classification,
however, will probably be made with Polia, Dryobota, ete.

The true type of Apamea, is, I believe, Nictitans. The genera Gortyna
and Hydracia have the same type, Micacea. TY have employed the genus
Ochria, used solely for Flavago in the ‘«Verzeichniss,’’ for our two spe-
cies which have also a clypeal thorn, This character may be trivial,
but it is everywhere used, and cannot be rejected arbitrarily. As with
Sphida, it separates here species I would gladly keep united. From the
pectinate antennw (the opposite of Nephelodes), the thoracic tuft and the
general contour I would keep Tricholita, with its three species, distinct
from Nephelodes ; the white reniform is characteristic, and allies the moths
to Nietitans. I have a note to the effect that Seméaperta had been described
previously by Walker, but cannot at the moment find the citation. With
some few other changes, the fewer the better, this will be made whenever
the British Museum collection is compared with our material. If the idea
of justice or injustice can be held to be properly associated with matters
of this kind, it may be held unjust to restore any of Dr. Walker's names
where recognition is a matter of impossibility without reference to the
type. This is the case with about three-fourths of his descriptions in the
Noctuide. But, disagreeing with Professor Riley, Mr. Walker’s descrip-
tion of Xylina Antennata and FH. Signosa are not of these, and the moths
are referred moreover to the right genus.

6. Arzamine m. This remarkable group has aquatic larvee, with spira-
cles, as discovered by Prof. Comstock, and the larvee may be taken in the
leaves of pond lilies and other water-plants and swimming free in the
water. They inhabit ponds from Canada to Florida, and the chrysalis
may be found under stones and logs on the margin, Obliquata is found in
Niagara river, the pupa having occurred on Strawberry island. Vulnifica
has been found at Ithaca, and what is probably a variety, with the anal
(uft blackish, in Florida lakes. Déf'usa has been found in Maine and also
collected by Mr. Moffat in Canada. The moths are very thick-bodied and
heavy insects, remarkable for the large female anal tuft, like that of some
forms of Bombyx. Sphida has the clypeus niucronate, Arzama unarmed ;
the difference is very slight and unessential.

%. Nonagriing m. This, to me the most interesting subfamily of the
group, is equivalent to the Nonagriada of Dr. Harris, The eyes are full,
naked or hairy, the thorax smoothly haired, rarely with a crest, the abdo-
men untufted. The wings are rather narrower and longer than usual, most
often of a pale buff, or the color of dried reeds. The moths are found by
the sea-coast, or in marshy places quite often, and the larvee live on grasses.
Nonagria has naked eyes and a large clypeal protuberance ; one species
from Florida is of unusually large size. I class here Zota, which has some-
what ovate fore wings and a triply pointed clypeal horn ; it resembles
Senta in shape of wing, but the ornamentation is hadeniform. Tapinostola

Grote.} 158 [June 16,

has one undoubted American species, but I am doubtful that I have cor-
rectly referred Senta Deflecta, of which I have given a figure (which in
some copies of my Plate is colored). My genus Ommatostola has been ex-
amined by Dr. Speyer, and found to be valid as compared with the type
of certain European genera not known to me in nature. The moth 0.
Lintnert (the “Dune Wainscot’’) occurs on the shores of Long Island.
Heliophila, the typical genus, has hairy eyes and smooth clypeus,
matostola the naked eyes are lashed, and the moth is larger than any of
our species of Feliophila. Following the law of priority, I have adopted
this pretty generic name instead of Leucania, which latter is proposed by
Ochsenheimer without diagnosis while he quotes /eliophila of Hubner as
synonymous. Our species are very pretty. ubripennis is beautifully
shaded with pale red ; Patricia is a lovely little Western form with a sil-
very white stripe ; a few are obscurely marked and difficult to separate,
but al! are very interesting. Unipuncta (the ‘‘ Army Worm’’) is a very
destructive species in the East; Pallens is also Kuropean. The eyes are
hairy, the body smoothly haired, the fore wings rather narrow and tend-
ing to be pointed at apices.

The genus Zosteropoda is remarkable for the long hairs on secondaries
above and the tufted legs. Ufeus is an aberrant flat form, by the form of
the wings referable here, but resembling Agrotis in the spinose tibie.
Pteroisca, of which I have seen but not examined the type, is a rough,
rather odd-looking insect superficially resembling Ufews, but which may
not belong here. I do not know Thaumatopsis longipalpus Morr., nor
Monodes nucicolora Guen., the latter may be the same as Oligia Paginata
of Morrisoa. Under Leucania Guenée, without studying the structure of
the eyes, has classified such a dissonant species as Pseudolimacodes Littera,
probably misled by its color resemblance to some aberrant European /e-
liophila. A. number of his species are not known to me, and the synony-
my may be disturbed when these and the British Museum forms are accu-
rately known.

3. Scolecocampine. | first in the North American Entomologist showed
the relationship of Scolecocampa, Hucalyptera and Doryodes, uniting the
two former which are certainly very little different. The body is slender,
linear, the palpi long, the legs long, slender, and unarmed, the fore wings
pointed. The ornamentation tends to the development of a central stripe
tapering to apices. There is certainly a species of Doryodes figured by
Geyer, which may or may not be our acutaria, but seems to me that spe-
cies. Guenée refers the moth to the Geometridw, but is corrected by
Clemens, who takes occasion to sharply review Gueneé’s whole work in a
criticism which has become celebrated from the notice taken of it in
Europe. Zeller refers Phiprosopus also to the Geometride, but TI detected
ocelli, and the neuration being also Noctuidous T referred the moth origi-
nally to the present family and as allied to Calpe. [ think now the moth
is best placed next to Doryodes from its similar form, but it is not without
resemblances as to extra European genera which seem related to Oalpe.

n Om-

1883.) 159 {Grote,
My paper, whith is earlier than Zeller’s, was published while I was in the
South, and the generic name was mis-spelled Phyprosopus, how the error
occurred I cannot now say ; I derived the genus from philo and prosopus,
shortening the first word from the undue length of the combination. I am
led here to review the few cases where my names were misprinted so far
as noticed by me. In all cases IT made the correction as soon as possible,
and in the case of the Pluria in the same volume.

Phiprosopus Callitrichoides as Phyprosopus Jallitrichoides.
Phisia Viridisignata as Plusia Viridisigma.

Perigea Sole as Perigea Scole.

Hadena Perpensa as Hadena Perpenoa.

Oncocnemis Gracillima as Oncocnemis Gracillinea.
ITeliochilus Paradoxus as Heliocheilus Paradoxus.

9. Nolaphaninw m. The genus Nolaphana was considered a Tortria by
Fitch, and a Lithosian by Zeller. I detected ocelli, and was disposed to
consider the moth a Noctuid, which Zeller agreed to, and figured the neura-
tion. Three species are known to me in nature which differ somewhat in
structure ; Malana has pectinate antennex, while Zeller? has them simple,
and in other respects comes nearer my genus Acliprophanes which has a
posterior thoracic tuft and longer, Jaradrina-like wings, whereas in ola -
phana the wings are somewhat fuller and rounded, and the moth looks
not unlike a Nola, from which ocelli, form of labial palpi and neuration
separate it. However, I found vein 5 much more removed from 4 than
usual, in a preparation of Malana, and perhaps we may not have the best
location for the moth yet. Irambodes looks a little like the European

Aaylia Putris.

10. Oaradrine.
tufted, often flattened abdomen and somewhat narrow palpi. The moths

are closely allied to certain. Hadenoid genera, and the material arranged
under Oaradrina is possibly not consonant. otella resembles in appear-
ance the species figured by Herrich-Schefter as Bryophila Teratophora. It
is more robust, the fringe on hind wings longer, and the moth seems rela-
ted to Acosmetia. Our species of Pyrophila are fewer than the Kuropean.
The moths all have a greasy or silky look, and are fond of hiding under
dead bark, where I have found Pyrophila Pyramidoides in numbers asso-
ciated with Agrotis Olandestina.

11. Teniocamping m. The forms here grouped have as a rule hairy
eyes, retracted head, unarmed tibise, and hairy or woody vestiture. They
are brown in color and usually hibernate as moths. Ovrthodes and /Zimel-
lw are silky, like the preceding Caradrina, Teniocampa contains species
which resemble Agrotis in look, and have untufted rather weak abdomen
and thick vestiture ; Jncerta inhabits Hurope and America; some of the
forms are rather slight and difficult to separate from Dianthecia, Peri-
grapha has a medial ridge ; Irociarapha a small tuft behind the collar ;
Xylomiges is something like Lithophane in form of thorax ; Morrisonia has

4

This group contains genera with smooth vestiture, un-

Grote.] 160 [June 16,

simple antennse with ornamentation recalling Oloantha ; Anchocelis has
naked eyes with the clypeus mucronate, our species is much smaller and
differs slightly from the European type ; Parastichtis (Dyschorista Led. ),
has naked eyes and exserted 9 oviduct, with somewhat the form of Dian-
theta.

12. Orthosiine m. The numerous genera grouped here seem to fall
in between Teniocampa and Cucullia. The moths hibernate, as in the
former group ; they are colored yellow and brown like the autumn leaves
in which they hide, and among them may be found some of our hand-
somest insects. The eyes are naked, the body as a rule untufted, tending
to be flat, the ovipositor is concealed. Wetalepsis has spinose tibixe, sunken
head, pectinate male antennse, a hollowed out collar, in front discolorous,
untufted thorax, short untufted abdomen, naked, lashed eyes. The moth
has probably a European congener. Pachnobia Carnea has a more woolly
thorax, the collar straight ; it it found in richly colored varieties on Mount,
Washington ,and in Labrador; both these genera have resemblances to
preceding group. The ensuing genera have also spinose tibie. Zrichor-
thosia has hairy eyes and sharply pointed wings. Pseudorthosia to the ap-
pearance of Orthosia has spinose tibise. Choephira is broader-winged with
stoutly pectinate antenne, and in the body parts resembles Zotheca.
Pseudoglwa has a flattened abdomen, and appears related to the European
Mesagona. Cea is wide winged, slight and mealy scaled, with naked eyes
and unarmed tibis ; Calymnia differs by the smooth front. Trichocosmia
with similar habit has shortly-haired eyes. Ipimorpha (= Plastenis) has
straight costal margin and sharp apices. The typical Orthoste much re-
semble Hadena ; they are yellow and brown and the genus contains three
stout species. Conradi, Lutosa and Citima which would be taken for
Hadenew with untufted abdomen. Oosmia is longer winged, and our spe-
cies may be the same as the European Palwacea. Homoglea has pectinate
antenne ; Glaa simple antennse and untufted flattened body ; Hpiglva
has a thoracic ridge. Jodia resembles Trichorthosia in shape of wings
with naked eyes; the species has sharply pointed wings, and is red in
color, and prepares us for Hucirredia with uneven produced external
margin, and Scoliopteryx with angulate wings and exaggeratedly tufted
flattened body, the tufts like Hurhipia which the moth approaches in color
and pattern, the flattened body like Lithophane. Scopelosoma has a flat-
tened body with a small tuft behind collar and even outer margin ; our
species are numerous, in part variable, whether all strictly belong here is
a question Tam disposed to be pretty confident about, but Pettiti and the
yellow forms incline to Xanthia. Our species of Lithophane are numer-
ous; Pewats may be the same as Ingrica and Thaateri is regarded as a
geographical modification of the Kuropean Oonformis. ‘Till the stages are
all known and compared, it is safer to keep our forms under separate
names; they should not be united except under complete evidence,
judging from what we know of Occidentalis for instance, where the larvic
are so distinct. I incline to believe Lithomia Germana is not different from

|
|
|

1888, ] 161 [Grote.

the European Solidaginis ; the genus has a tuft behind collar; also our
Oalocampa Impera is closer to the Kuropean Vetusta than I once thought
it to be; Calocampa Cineritia is found across the Continent, and is de-
cidedly a different species from either of the European ; the same (as to
distinctness) is true of the prettier C. Curvimacula from the Rast. In this
group Oarnosa is beyond doubt the handsomest species ; even the egg laid
in the fall on maple leaves, is of a rich wine-red color. There is ¢ very
interesting study opened by the colors of the moths of this group which
blend with the ripening leaves among which they hide. Mr. Moffat,
a most painstaking observer, has beaten fresh specimens of several Scope-
losome out of oak leaves, in particular S. Grefiana, 8. Moffatiana and the
deeply red S. Ocromatica, with its waxy chalybeous shadings, have been
captured in this way beautifully fresh.

13. Cuculliine m. The wings are long and narrow, the hind wings re-
duced in size. The eyes are naked. The antennse simple, except in
0. Serraticornis, an anomalous species from the Western coast. The
collar is hood-shaped ; the body cylindrical, heavy, long and tufted on the
dorsum of abdomen which much exceeds the secondaries. Cuculléa is rep-
resented by but few species in comparison with the European, yet all the
groups seem represented in our fauna, in which C. Conveatpennis comes
nearest to the European type of the genus. Oleophana is represented by
two species which have a claw on fore tibie, the collar hood-shaped, and
the general appearance more like Cucullia than the European species, Q.
Hulepis, is a handsomely marked species; OC. Antipoda was erroneously
described as a Cucullia. The genus Myctophwata was described by me
almost simultaneously as a Heliothid under the name of Hpinyctis. The
naked lashed eyes, the hairy vestiture, the absence of a hood-shaped
collar, the sunken head, the truncate, thickly spined tibiee are all Heliothid
characters, and bring the moth near to Grotella and allied genera. Its de-
scriber excludes it from the Heliothians, and does not indicate its position.
After seeing a very fine specimen of the beautiful moth in Mr. Neume-
gen’s large collection I can only place it here from the long narrow wings
and stout body ; but it contradicts the main features of the group so much
that the form. alone unites it, and my original position for the moth may
finally be found the most natural. The Rev. Mr. Hulst’s paper is, I find,
dated two months before my own in ‘‘Canadian Entomologist ’’ so that
my G@. Notatella has to be dropped for N. Mugdalena. The moth is among
the most beautiful and elegant of the family.

14. Hurhipiine m. This group agrees with Oucullia in the small hind
wings. The genus Ripogenus is close to the European Hurhipia, but dif-
fers in detail in the shape of primaries and tuftings of the body. The moth
is provided with two terminal abdominal tufts, one on each side, and is
tufted along the dorsal line, with longer tufts on the basal segments
above. The moth is of a beautiful brownish-red of various shade, with a
bluish patch on median field below enclosing yellow dots. Apices shaded
with bluish-white ; two superposed dots in place of reniform; transverse

PROG, AMER. PHILOS. 80C. XxI, 114, U. PRINTED august 17, 1883,

162 {June 16,

Grote.]

lines pale, irregular ; the terminal narrow field and the sub-basal field of
a deep rich brown. Hind wings white at base, with a black subterminal
shade band followed by a terminal rich brown edge. The margin is angu-
lated on both wings. The other genus Marasmalus is narrower bodied, and
has the remarkable faculty of holding the wings when at rest like a fan,
The two species occur from Maine to Texas; the larger and handsomer
M. Ventilator is colored like Ripogenus ; the other is darker and more
obscurely tinted, and apparently not uncommon. I took the generic
name ot Pulcherrimus from the Indian, as its colors and ornamentation
lent themselves to my fancy as being like the work made by our North
American Indians; I did not know then, twenty years ago, that it had a
near ally in southern Europe. The names in the other genus are sugges-
tive of the fan-folded wings, which my friend Sanborn likened to those of
Tettiv, and the way in which the moths seem suddenly to disappear. 2.
Pulcherrimus is one of our handsomest Noctuids of this division of the
family. I do not think the European fauna has anything prettier than
our Agrotis Hilliana, A. Oireumdata, Oncocnemis Atriafasciata, Homo-
glea Carnosa, Nyctophuta Magdalena, Ripogenus Pulcherrimus, Rhodosea
Julia, Rhodophora Florida, Huleucyptera Oumatilis, Adonisea Pulchripen-
nis, Dasypoudea Lucens and Meadii, while in the Plusias, those brilliant
gems of color, our Plusia Mappa is hard to beat.

15. Ingurine m. The genus Ingura is characterized by the antenne of
the male being pectinated at base, the pectinations decreasing suddenly at
tip. This form gives the genus a notodentiform look, which Mr. Walker
has availed himself of to classify some of our species among the Bombyces.
The abdomen is cylindrical, the wings rather narrow and the rounded
secondaries are rather small. There is thus a certain resemblance to the
preceding groups. Hubner figures a species, which I have not made out,
in the ‘Zutraege,”’ and this seems the earliest notice of any species. The
colors are black and dingy, and the ornamentation offers a certain resem-
blance to Abrostola. But Oculatrix is an exception, the species having
pinkish eye-like markings on the fore wings, and being a showy little in-
sect. In structure it cannot be doubted the genus stands next to Maras-
malus.

16. Anomtine m. This subfamily is characterized by the large naked
eyes, the smoothly scaled body, tapering abdomen and close silky vesti-
ture. The wings tend to be wide and perhaps Hulepidotis belongs here,
The larva are half-loopers and approach the Plusia type. Anomis has the
wings angulated, and the type rosa is colored not unlike Xanthia ; the
larva has an additional pair of feet developed as compared with Aletia, In
a study of the false or abdominal feet of caterpillars, I find that there is
always some indication in the Noctuid genera which have the superior
pair aborted, of the position of these feet, and that the discontinuance of
use and the consequent arching of the body at this point is very gradual,

Aletia Argillacea, the cotton worm moth, has been studied by me in the
South. It has undoubtedly effected a lodging with us during the latter

o¢
1883. ] 1 63 [Grote,

part of the last century, owing to the cultivation of cotton upon which it
feeds. It came every year with the zodlogical wave which follows the
rising thermometer and the extension of summer over the northern-part of
our Continent. I discovered that the moth hibernates with us (where it
occurs) as a moth, and that it gradually proceeds northward, breeding as
it goes, until in the early full months it has passed the area of cotton
growing, and is found in Maine and Canada in the months of September
and October. In the North it is very probable that it has found a substi-
tute food-plant, though I do not know it, upon which the final brood is
matured. But I found out that it was winter-killed over a large region, or
sutyiving, the wintering moths failed to make a spring brood. How far
North this state of affairs is complete is not yet ascertained.

To resume my remarks on the Anomiingw. Plerwtholix has the male pri-
mary provided with a blister-like expansion, and the male of the broader-
winged Ohytoryzea has a smaller one. It. is here that the wings, being en-
tire, and broadening, tend to resemble the Ophiusinw, and make it likely
that the large naked-eyed and smoothly-haired Hulepidotis belongs more
naturally in this subfamily. The body structure is very similar in all the
genera here discussed and its type, once apprehended, is easy of detection.
The head is broader and freer than in the Drasteria-like group with which
I precede Catocala and allies. We have at least two species of Aletia ; the
second a Texan form which may have also a more southern parentage. In
form the genus Aletéa is more typical of the group than Anomis with its
angulated wings.

1%. Litoprosoping m. This group has the terminal joint of palpi
elongated, and resembles Plusia, differing by the more robust and un-
tufted body. The eyes are naked ; tibise unarmed, The wings are long
and without the broadening outwardly, and the tooth at anal angle which
characterizes the three next groups. Litoprosopus is a tropical form, and
Professor Posy describes a species, L. Hatney, from Cuba. Our form is
found in Florida.

18. Calpinw m. We have only one genus which is equivalent to the
FBuropean, and in fact our single species may not be different from Thalic-
tri. I do not know Hemiceras Cadmia of Guenée, nor whether it really
belongs to the present group. ‘

19. Stirdinw m. This group is characterized by rather weak body-parts,
the thorax short, having the tegule often deflected at the tips, the collar
a little relieved, the abdomen untufted, the ovipositor prominent, the
wings widening outwardly, and often with a projection at anal angle, the
fore tibises with a claw, the palpi weak and with small third joint, conical
and more prominent in Basilodes. As a group it oscillates between Calpe
and Plusia in shape of ‘wing and ornamentation, this being sheeny or me-
tallic quite often, in armature of tibiee and in appearance (Plagiomimicus,
Acopa) it presents an oceasional resemblance to the Heliothinw. The palpi
differ from the Plustinw as also the untufted abdomen and the impromi-
nent head. I have lately reviewed the genera in ‘*Canadian Entomolo-

Grote.) 164 [June 16,

gist.’’ The perfect insects are fond of flowers and one (Oirrhophanus)
appears to be an internal feeder in stems or capsules as a larva.

20. Plusiine m. The head is more prominent, the third palpal article
longer, and the body tufted on the dorsal line. These tufts are prominent
in Plusia, and there is an exaggerated tuft, fan-shaped, on the abdomen in
Behrensia, a genus which is nearest to Abrostola. Diastema Tigris has
been sent to Mr. Hy. Edwards from Florida, and seems generically dis-
tinct from Zelerilla; I have not been able to examine it carefully. The
species of Plusia hover over flowers in the evening like Sphingidw ; a few
species, Ni, Precationis, Dydus, Verruca, I have found active in the day-
time, as are several species in the next group. Our species are both numer-
ous and beautiful, but a little darker and richer-colored, less metallic per-
haps, than the European. Most interesting are two forms, Z’hyatiroides and
Formosa, which are mimetic of the genera Thyatira and Leptina respec-
tively ; a curious circumstance when we reflect that Tiyatira was placed
near Plusia by certain early authorities.

21. Heliothine m. The abdomen is conical, untufted, the vestiture
hairy, the head usually retracted, the antenne simple, ocelli present, eyes
naked or hairy, often narrowed or constricted, the tibia armed, the ante-
rior tibix shortened. The colors are bright and pretty, and the species
frequent flowers; in the chosing blossoms of Q?nothera Biennis, as de-
scribed by Prof. Kellicott, who has watched the species in all stages, the
moth of Rhodophora Florida conceals itself, flower and moth being of the
same colors. My arrangement of the genera commences with the nine
typical forms JZ/eliothis and the genus Melicliptria, which I have sepa-
rated from Heliothis, and closes with the usual paler, white genera which
show an approach to the following Acontians. As I have shown, [ recog-
nized, in 1874, the probable large extent of my genus Lygranthacia. I
kept, however, certain forms distinct upon modifications of tibial struc-
ture, leaving the responsibility of certain genera with Guenée. But any
student with the microscope in hand, and my remarks before him, could
have come to the conclusion now reached by Mr. Smith, with a show of
originality which is wanting in fact. Mr. Smith unites my species of 7’rico-
pis, Huleucyptera and Schinia with Lygranthecia, for which genus he keeps
the term Schinia, a name which I alone had ‘‘resurrected’’ for the species
described by Hubner, thus destroying my connection with the genus
which is essentially my work. 'These do, in fact, present but slight modi -
fication of tibial structure, the changeable nature of which is shown by an
excellent plate furnished by Mr. Smith, who, from a comparison of all ac-
cessible types, arrives at conclusions which, as a rule, [ feel bound and
glad to accept. But I believe he goes too far in sinking Zricopis and
making Huleucyptera synonymous. I also believe that Tertia, which I had
described under Zamila (under a mistaken view of the characters of that
genus which Mr. Smith now corrects), will prove, with Cupes, generically
distinct. I refer to some points in the generic descriptions given in this

|
|

And
1883.] 165 [Grote.

paper, and now only notice the most prominent characters of certain of
the genera.

Rhodosea differs from Alaria by the fore tibie having two terminal
claws, else unarmed ; these claws are on each side at the extremity of
joint ; the other two tibia are unarmed, although in my first notice I de-
scribed these tibix as sparely pilose. The genus is remarkable for the
apparent slight exsertion of the infra-clypeal plate at the middle, the shape
of wings, palpi, give comparative characters to separate the roseate, most
delicately colored moth from our Eastern genus Rhodophora. This last I
keep distinct from <Alaria, the palpi, colors and pattern of the moth
seem to me sufficiently modified as to warrant a different term. I
draw in Porrima (proposed for Ovia), a term which I employed for
Sanguinea, 4 moth to which Regia is allied, as not distinct enough
from Lygranthacia, and, except as to the points here discussed, accept
Mr. Smith’s conclusions. As to Cupes, it is admittedly out of place
in Lygranthecia, and I keep it in Heliothis, to which it is at least as
strongly allied, for the present. I used the narrowed eyes to separate cer-
tain genera, and this character is adopted by Mr. Smith, who finds it of
great value. It led me to classify Agrotiphila in this group, and-near
Anaria. In this latter genus are one or two species (Submarina, etc.), in
which the hairy eyes are not ovate but full, but which from the untufted
abdomen and general aspect and ornamentation I cannot refer to Mames-
tra. Oxycenemis is a bright gray moth, looking a little like a species of
Oharadra or even a Dianthecta capsularis, which has short front. tibiee
terminating in a single claw, and a posterior thoracic tuft of shining
curved scales. It is thus allied to Zrdocnemis, which has the shortened
tibial joint of the fore feet also corneous, but tridentate, a posterior thora-
cic tuft, of which the scales are similar, while the moth recalls in ornamen-
tation the European genus Oalophasia., Derrima, placed by Walker in the
Acontide, which led me to overlook this description, has one pretty spe-
cies Henrietta m., quite common in Rhode Island, where Mrs. Bridgham
has collected it. After examining Mr. Walker’s type of Stellata, which is
larger and with pink hind wings and an apparent slight modification of
the markings of fore wings, I feel sure that it is only a varietal:form of
Henrietta, though this was next to impossible from the description. I have
seen no such specimen among hundreds of Henrietta which have passed
through my hands, and the only approach to it was a 9: specimen, collec-
ted by Mrs. Bridgham, which had a faint pink flush on hind wings. The
genus Huecdwardsia is based on a fine species somewhat stouter and larger
than Xanthothrix Ranunculi, with hairy vestiture, unarmed tibie, the clyp-
eus with a projection below a cup-like excavation. The eyes are naked,
the primaries are rather short and broad, with sharp apices. There will be
a difference of opinion as to the value of structure in this group. I do not
agree with Lederer in referring Pyrrhia Umbra and Ohariclea Delphinti to
one genus. But there is no need of personal criticism, and no mental in-
feriority or biological ignorance implied in separating certain species upon

166 [June 16,

Grote.]

slight structural characters. IT am inclined to keep in view the general ap-
pearance and pattern of the insects in sorting them into genera, this has
led me too far in the present group, as shown by Mr. Smith, and I have
modified my views in consequence. There may be a question as to two or
three genera which I here retain, but no harm is done by keeping them
separate, and the natural grouping of the insects is facilitated. In but few
cases have I overlooked the characters as charged by Mr. Smith, I have
rather failed to recognize their true importance, and, without the Euro-
pean types before me, and wanting some rare American. species, it was
difficult to avoid making too many genera, considering the strong modifi-
cations in armature exhibited by the different species. After having posi-
tively referred Oxylos to Heliothis, Mr. Smith as positively now refers the
genus to Alaria. Perhaps, when our species are all known, the genus may
turn out to be valid ; it differs very slightly from Heliothis as stated by me,
the shape of the wings divide it from Alaria ; thus I leave it for the pres-
ent with one or two others, and having again gone over the generic types
accessible to me in this group, the present arrangement expresses my final
decision and comprehension of the matter.

22. Acontiine m. This group contains the large genus Tarache (Acontia
Ochs.) which is numerously represented in Africa and Southern Europe.
Our American forms are only partially known. The vestiture is scaly,
mossy and short on the front, the eyes are full, large, naked and unlashed.
The colors are white with shades of olivaceous or purply, on fine dark
streaks and scintillant patches. The finest species is Twrache Lactipennis
Harvey, which simulates Ovris Wilsontt. Trichotarache differs in the im-
portant character of hairs mixed with the body vestiture ; it borrows a
character from the preceding group; the moth closely resembles 7. Hlavi-
pennis in appearance, Trileucw has the shining look of Zarache, and in the
body parts resembles my Buea from Texas, which has an European ana-
logue, judging from descriptions. The tibie are unarmed; both forms
have three pale transverse lines, and are of a peculiar fady ochry color.

23. Hustrotiine m. This group is equivalent to the Moctuo-Phalwnidi of
Boisduval, and contains mostly weak-bodied and frail-winged forms of
which a few are remarkably distinct in structure. Spragueta differs from
the European Agrophila, by the absence of vein 5 on the secondaries, and
the narrower fore wings, which have the course of the subcostal veinlets
modified. Thalpochares has no accessory cell; I have examined the neu-
ration alone of Avtheria and Putula. Huherrichia is of a rich brown color
with silver spots and lines, and has been confounded with the European
genus Hriopus, of which latter genus we have a Floridian representative.
Annuphila is a curious Californian genus, the species looking like minia-
ture Catocale ; the genus appears to me related to Hustrotia, Azenia is re-
markable for the clypeal structure. Hxyra has a roughly haired thorax,
and the species feed, in the larval state, on the Pitcher Plant (Sarracenia).
The economies of nature are very curious. While many flowers, in losing
their honey, have their seeds ripened by the pollen brought to the ovary

1883, | 167 (Grote,

attached to the moth or bee that steals their sweets, in the genus Sara-
cenia the leaves are eaten by the larva of Hueyra, the moths of which are
afterwards caught in the trap which first helped them to exist. The in-
sect first devours the plant, and then the tables are turned, and the plant
catches the moth which eat its leaves as a caterpillar. The species of
Heyra are all pretty, while 2. Rolandiana is one of the most beautiful of
our smaller Noctuidae, in fact few equal it in depth and richness of color-
ing. Prothymia coccinetfascia has beautiful waxy, red stripes on its yel-
low wings, while for bright and elegant markings and high color few
natural objects are as exquisite as Spragueia Leo and 8. Magnifica. The
latter species, from Arizona, is even handsomer than the species of the
Tineid genus ta, which these little Noctuide somewhat recall, TI have
worked out the structure of Agrophila (Hrotyla), Spragueta and Xanthop-
tera very fully in the pages of the “ Canadian Entomologist,’’ edited by
my kind friend, Mr. Wm. Saunders.

24. Hybleineg m. This group is tropical and is composed of singular-
looking Noctuids, having tortriciform primaries, pointed apices, smoothly-
haired thorax, with pointed palpi. The narrow wings and closely-haired
body give the group a resemblance to the Acontiine. The hind wings are
black and yellow, and in many features the group prepares us for such
Catocaline forms as Hypocala. We have one species from Florida, Hy-
blaa Puera Fabr., which has been apparently redescribed by Mr. Strecker
as a new genus and species under the odd name of ‘‘_Wnigma Mirandum,”’
the genus being based on a ‘‘ very large number of subcostal nervules,”’
an impossible one where it is considered that the number of these veins
is invariable.

FERALIA Grote (1874).

Type: Diphthera Jocosa Gruen.

The eyes are small, naked, lashed. ‘The head is retracted and the palpi
shorter than in Diphthera fallaa, which latter I regard as belonging to
Diphthera as Hubner originally intended the genus. The male antenne
are stoutly but shortly bipectinate throughout their length. I could not
find ocelli, but Mr. Smith says they are small but present. The vestiture
is very shaggy and hairy. The species varies by becoming suffused with
black; the fore wings are green, and the female has them pale green with
distinct black mesial bands and lunule beneath,

1. F. Jocosa Guen. Noct. 1, 47; Grote, B. B. 8. N. 8. IL., 58 ', Can.
Ent. XV., 28 @. Maine; N. York ; Canada.

MOMAPHANA Grote,

Type: M. Comstocki Grote.

This genus is allied to Diphthera, the vestiture being similar, and the
moth otherwise in markings and color resembling D. Fallaw. The male
antenne are distinctly pectinate, however, and in this resembles Feralia,
from which it differs by the less retracted head. The single species is so

Grote.) 168 [June 16,

rare that I never have had but one specimen to examine in which the
labial palpi were much shorter than in Diphthera Fallaw. The eyes were
fuller than in Yeralia, and the body less pilose. The ocelli were present.
The moth stands evidently between the Feralia Jocosa and Diphthera
Fallax, and the genus must be again studied, though I do not doubt its
validity.

1 M. Comstocki Grote, B. B. 8. N. 9. II., 59 (Feralia), Stett. Ent. Zeit.
New York.

ADITA Grote (1874).

Type: A. Chionanthi Abbott and Smith.

The moth is allied to Agrotis, from which it differs by the fore tibice
being provided with a stout claw as in Oncocnemis. Middle and hind
tibiee sparsely spinose, while the front tibiae seem to have only the termi-
nal claw, and to be destitute of spinules. Abdomen untufted. Male an-
tennee bipectinate, rather long. Head prominent, eyes full, naked. Fore
wings retreating at anal angle. The thorax is crested behind. The moth
is figured by Abbott in 1797, and remained undiscovered, and even unno-
ticed again until 1874, when I found it in a collection made by Prof. Com-
stock at Ithaca, New York. It isa large, distinctly marked and handsome
species, expanding about 42 mil., and has since been found in Massachu-
setts, but is as yet rare in collections.

1. A. Chionanthi Abd. & Sm., II., Pl. 98; Grote, B. B. 8S. N.S. IL, 63.
Mass. to Georgia.

HILLIA Grote.

Type: Hadena Senescens Grote.

This genus is allied to Hadena with which it essentially agrees, but
differs by the retracted head and short body, and the straight costal mar-
gin of the primaries, the wings being wide and short, rather than compara-
tively long and narrow. Male antennw simple, ciliate; eyes naked,
lashed. A tuft behind the collar and on thorax behind. Tibise unarmed.
Abdomen untufted.

1. H. Senescens Grote, Can. Ent. 10, 235, New York.

2. H. Vigilans Grote, B. U. 8. G. 8. 4, 176, Maine.

8. H. Algens Grote, Can. Ent. 10, 236, Maine.

[name this genus for W, W. Hall, Esq., of Albany, who collected the
type, and has been exceedingly kind to me in scientific matters.

COPIVALERIA Grote.

Type: Valeria Grotei Morr.

This form has a roughly haired thorax, the head being somewhat
sunken, the male antenne impectinate. The form is like Haudena, but it
differs by the claw on front tibie. The aspect is not unlike the European
genus Valeria, and it is removed from Dicopis by the longer wings and
abdomen.

1. CO. Grotei Morrison. Eastern and Middle States,

|
|
I

1888. ] 169 [Grote.

HADENELLA Grote (1888).

This genus is based on a Hadenoid of slight build, having triangulate,
broad wings, the infra-clypeal plate prominent, a curious projecting
frontal horn terminating in a navel-shaped expansion. The thorax is
tufted behind, the antenne simple, the eyes naked ; a small basal tuft on
the abdomen. The little moth is gray, shaded over apices and the middle
of the wing with ochreous, thus resembling in miniature Agrotis Pluralis.
It is of the same slight form, but brighter colored than the dusty gray Ha-
dena cylindrica.

1. H. Pergentilis Grote, Arizona,

PSEUDANARTA. Hy. Edw. in litt.

Type: P. crocea Hy. Hdw.

This genus is composed of small Hadenoid forms which have clear yel-
low secondaries with black borders, and resemble Anarta myrtilld in ap-
pearance. The eyes are naked, the head not as prominent as in typical
Hadenoid species. The antenne are simple, the vestiture hairy, the
thorax tufted. It is a color genus apparently as the tibise are unarmed,
and beyond the peculiar color, and somewhat compressed form I do not
find distinctional characters, although I cannot help believing that such ex-
ist. The species are near, but I now believe are all distinct. All but
Aurea have yellow, this has orange secondaries. The fore wings of
Crocea are shaded with ochrey and paler than the others. It is probable
that the Q oviduct is exserted, which would give a slight character,

1. P. Crocea Hy. Hdw. Colorado.

2. P. Flava Grote, Col. ; B. Columbia.

TOTA Grote (1882).

Type: T. Armata Grote.

Size small, form compact, fore wings somewhat tortriciform, shaped
like the Furopean Senta, with hadeniform ornamentation, gray, with faint
markings finely outlined. Tibise slender, unarmed, fore tibise with a short
claw. Olypeus with an exceedingly. prominent wedge-shaped protuber-
ance, surmounting the greatly exserted infra-clypeal plate. Hind wings
rather full, rounded, the fringe prominent. 'Two species, one larger with
pale fuscous or smoky secondaries, the second smaller with glistening
white hind wings, resemble each other closely in appearance. On exami-
nation, the central point of the clypeal wedge has a shallow depression on
top in the second smaller form (minorata), in which the head and collar
are distinctly ochrey. The larger form (armata) has a variety having a
submedian and discal black streak; this recalls the var, Bipuncta of the
European species of Senta, although it is the stigmata which are filled
with black. The untufted body, the clypeal armature resemble Nonagria;
the small species have the look of internal feeders.

1. F. Arnata Grote, Can. Ent. 175. Arizona.

2. F. Minorata Grote, Can. Ent. 181, Arizona.

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800. XXI. 114. Vv. PRINTED AvGuST 17, 1888.

170 [June 16,

Grote.)

UFEUS Grote (1878).

Type: U. Satyricus Grote.

A very flat-bodied, coarsely-haired genus with shiny feet and simple an-
tenne, the middle and hind tibia spinose, as also the fore tibise in at least
two of the species. The body is untufted, and in form the moths resem-
ble Heliophila, and are classified by me at the end of the subfamily group.
Nonagriing m. The naked eyes are lashed. The type is found in Canada,
and the Northern States. I suspect it hibernates as a moth. The early
stages are unknown.

1. U. Satyricus Grote, B. B. 8. N. 8. T, 101, Pl. 3, fig. 4. Can. to N. Y.

2. U. Unicolor Grote, B. U. 8. G. 8. LV., 179. Illinois.

3. U. Plicatus Grote, B. B. S. N. 8. 1, 102. Jan. to California,

4. U. Sagittarius Grote, Pap. III., 31. Jali fornia.

The ornamentation is simple ; Satyricus, a large species, fuscous, with
cloudy medial lines, unicolor smoky -fuscous, unlined,

Plicatus is brownish-red with medial lines and varies in tint ; it is smaller
than Sagittarius, which has red primaries with a yellow longitudinal
streak on cell joining the bow-shaped yellow reniform, while beneath the
secondaries have a thick triangulate mark. This species is the most inter-
estingly marked in the genus. The flat form, coarse hair, strongly spinose
and powerful feet are unmoth-like, and when I examined Satyricus I was
reminded of a cockroach, though I confess it requires a strong imagina-
tion to even suggest such a resemblance,

FOTELLA Grote (1882).

Type: F. Notalis Grote.

This genus is related to Oaradrina, and has a slight correspondence to
Acosmetia in form, the fringes are long on hind wings. Clypeus with a
navel-shaped expansion, yes unlashed, naked. Ocelli, Wings full;
the color and markings recall Bryophila Teratophora, Tibiee unarmed ;
body slender, untufted ; vestiture silky.

1. F. Notalis Grote, Can. Ent, 14, 181. Arizona.

ACERRA. Grote.

Type: A. Normalis (rote.

This genus is, I believe, synonymous with Perigrapha Led. Tt has the
characters of Taniocampa, except that the body seems stouter and shorter,
and there is a medial ridge on the thorax. Our species seem to differ by the
impectinate J antenne. The Buropean species have large confluent stig -
mata, and our first two species have them thus, and very prominently
colored, the next two have them also coalesced, but not so prominent, and
in the last two the stigmata are separate and inconspicuous, The genus
seems to sustain a similar relation to Teniocampa, that Ammoconia does to

Agrotis or Hpiglea to Glea.
1. P. Normalis Grote, B. B. 8. N. 8. IL., 162; Check List, fig. 4. Cali-

fornia.
9, P. Muricina Grote, B. B. 8. N, 8. III., 85. Oregon.

i

1883, ] 1 [Grote,

8. P. Behrensiana Grote, Can. Ent. VIL, 71. California.

A. P. Plusiiformis Hy. Hdw., Pac. Coast Lep. 4, 3, Pl. 1, fig. 9. Nevada.

5. P. Brythrolita Grote, Can, Ent. XI., 208. California.

6. P. Transparens Grote, B. U. 8. G. 8. VIL, 582. Washington Terr.

The genus Stretchia of Hy. Edwards, with the type 8. Plustiformis, is
also synonymous. The handsomest and most striking species is Muricina,;
while Mrythrolita has much the look of a Teniocampa, its larger ally.
Transparens has a certain false look of Phragmatobia, from its subtranspa-
rent rufous primaries with their faint ornamentation. The hairy eyes and
the dorsal ridge of scales on the thorax must be observed.

CBA. Grote (1883).

Allied in form, texture and vestiture to Trichocosmia, between this and
Calymnia. Byes naked, unlashed. Vestiture of narrow scales. Antenne
simple. Front wide, rising to an embossed protuberance, around which
the short clypeal vestiture circles ; infra-clypeal plate distinct. Ocelli.
Labial palpi slender, rather weak, with elongate third joint. The body
has a pale integument, the outline weak, and the vestiture is not strongly
adherent. ibis unarmed ; legs rather short and weak, not hairy. Body
untufted ; abdomen with dorsal carina. Wings entire, rather broad and
short ; apices determinate and outwardly the primaries are full, One spe-
cies with thorax and primaries very pale yellow, almost white, immacu-
late. Hind wings pure silky white above and below, abdomen white, ex-
pands 27 mil.

1. O. Immacula Grote, p. TIL, 78. Arizona.

CIRRHOPHANUS Gr. (1872).

Type: O. Triangulifer Gt.

The eyes are full, naked, unlashed. The clypeus has a central rounded
tubercle. The vestiture consists of hair-like scales with broader ones,
arranged like shingles, rising from the thorax, which is short and in shape
allies the moth to this group. The fore tibie are also not truncate, but as
long as in the preceding gener and unarmed. The parts of the thorax re-
semble the preceding genera, but there is a divided posterior tuft. The
patagia are not as deflected as in Plagiomimicus, but do not lie close to the
thorax. The female ovipositor is not exserted. The abdomen is untufted.
The labial palpi have the terminal joint concealed, ind are not unlike,
though longer, the palpi of the genera separated here from Basilodes, bat
unlike that genus. The antenne have the basal joint scaled. The palpi
are rather thickly haired. The tibie are unarmed. Wings ample, without
tooth, rounded exteriorly, with blunt apices, and running in a little and
forming a prominent angle at internal margin. The genus seems to be
somewhat intermediate between the preceding and Plusia. The species is
golden-yellow with orange-brown lines disposed somewhat like the Huro-
pean Chariclea Delphinit.

1. Triangulifer G7. Ohio, Missouri.

Pretiosa Morr. (Chariclea).

6
Grote.] 172 [June 16,

CHAMAECLEA Gr. (1883).

Type: C. Pernana Gr.

Allied to the genera typical of the Stiriinw vy the bulging clypeus and
Plusia-shaped wings. Front with a slight depression, rising in the middle.
Vestiture scaly. Tibia unarmed ; in all the examples I have seen the fore
legs are broken off. Fore wings wide, produced at internal angle. The
tegule are not deflected ; the thorax short. (i antennee simple.

1. Pernana Gr. Arizona. This genus is curious for the way in which
Chameclea Pernana mimics Chariclea Delphinii. The type is figured in
my Illustrated Essay on the Noctuids of North America, Plate ITI.
ni a a

PLAGIOMIMIOCUS Gr, (1878).

Type: P. Pityochromus Gr,

Front with an empty and exposed cup-shaped protuberance, the frontal
scales being short and mossy. A. slender terminal claw on front tibia. In
Leppert the frontal excavation is less prominent, but otherwise this species
agrees. As compared with allied genera, the three species are slenderer
and have a casual resemblance to the Heliothid genera Schiniaw and Ly-
granthecia. Asin Stibadium the labial palpi are short, here they hardly
reach the top of the more prominent infra-clypeal plate in the more typi-
peal forms. The species are olivaceous fuscous (Pityochromus, Hupallidus),
or of a delicate olivaceous green (Zeppert). Both Mr. Morrison and Mr.
Smith wrongly give the fore tibise of Tepper as unarmed.

1. Pityochromus @r. Mass to Kansas and the South.

Schinia media Morr.

2. Expallidus Gr. Montana.

. Tepperi Morr. Southern States, Arizona.

ie)

HELIOSEA Grote (1875).

Type: H. Pictipennis rote.

A small Heliothid allied to Heliophana and Melicleptria. It differs by
the fore wings being more widened outwardly, and the claw to the front
tibia being single. Mr. Smith says of it: ‘‘ Very unsatisfactorily distin-
guished from Heliophana and probably identical with it.’’ I cannot re-
examine my type at thé moment. When I established the genus, I was
under the impression that the modifications of the armature of fore tibic
gave generic characters. With the discovery of numerous Heliothid forms
this opinion has become modified.

1. Heliosea Pictipennis @rote, Ill. Essay, p. Plate 3, fig. . California.

MELICLEPTRIA. Hubn. (1816).

Type: M. Cardui Hubdn,
This genus, which I took from Hubner, is equivalent to Lederer’s first
section of Heliothis as shown by me, and, with the same type, the equiva-
lent of Guenée’s genus Anthacia. I followed Guenée in including in it

1883,] i 73 (Grote,

such forms as Saguarina, etc., but in my ‘New Check List’’ limited it
more rigorously to the purple and black forms. Celeris, a magnificent
species, is, as I twice showed from examination of specimens, a true Meli-
cleptria, it was misplaced accidentally in my list. Mr. Smith has farther
taken out a few species described under it by Mr. Hy. Edwards and Mr.
Morrison, which with similar ornamentation are shown to differ structur-
ally. I cannot now examine all these while he is apparently justified in
his course. I cannot believe he has correctly placed Perminuta, but I only
saw the type, and have never had the species under the microscope. He
follows Mr. Edwards in regarding my genus Adonisca as synonymous. I
suspected as much myself, but the species was too handsome to leave un-
distinguished, and it has a slightly different proportion from the rest.
This insect, which I call ‘Adonis’ Moth,’’ is purply red and blue, the
latter shade a very unusual one in the ornamentation of these insects. TIT
described the genus with other Californian genera, but my present knowl-
edge of related forms would have deterred me from doing so. The species
of Melicleptria have naked, small or ornate eyes, which are sunken in the
hairy vestiture of the retracted head. The middle and hind tibiee are spi-
nose. The fore tibia in Pulchripennis have a longer inner and two outer
claws, and as in most of the genera the joint is short. Mr, Smith says
“the body is clothed with thin divergent hair, usually of a paler color
than body [?] and somewhat silky.’’ He thus describes the sericeous
somewhat olivaccous or yellowish longer vestiture on thorax and abdomen
which is distinctive and with the purply red wings, with paler median
spots on both pair, is characteristic of most of the species. Mr. Smith
further gives the “claws of tarsi simple or but slightly dentate.’’ In the
female the ovipositor is extended beyond the conical and rather short un-
tufted abdomen. A. typical species is MZ Sueta, with its Californian
variety Oaliforniensis.

1. M. Celeris Grote, B. B. 8S. N.S. I., 148. California.

2, M. Pulchripennis @rote, Ill, Essay, 62, Pl. IL. fig. 81, var, Languida
Hy. Edw, California.

8. M. Villosa Grote, P, &. 8. P., 581, Pl. VI., fig. 6. Colorado.

4, M. Persimilis Grate, B. B. 8. N. 8. T., 117, Pl. IM. 11. Colorado.

5. M. Greefiana Tepper, Tr. Am. E. 8. 245. California.

6. M. Honesta Grote, Papilio I., 77. Jalifornia,

7. M. Sueta Grote, B. B. 8. N. 8. I, 117%. Colorado,

var Californiensis Grote. California.

LYGRANTHGICIA G. and R.

Type: Anth. Rivulosa Gwen.

The type of this genus was first described as Orambus Marginatus by
Haworth. It is a sufficient answer to Mr. Smith’s prejudiced procedure of
calling this genus Sehinia, and giving himself the air of first discovering
it, to quote my words from my paper in the Buffalo Bulletin IL., 220,
which is the only one I had published on the subfamily Heliothinw. ‘The

174 {June 16,

Grote.]

eyes are full. The fore wings of the usual shape, crossed by two or more
less evident lines. The fore tibixe have a series of three outer claws or
spinose, a single inner longer terminal claw, succeeded by a row of slen-
der spines. The species are numerous, and [ refer them all to Lygran-
thecia G. and R. They are bina, lyna, brevis, atrites, arcifera, Spraguet,
Packardi, Mortua, jaguarina Marginata, Thowreani, saturata.’’ Tt will
thus be seen that I referred all the then known species to this genus. I
only left out my Tricopis and Huleueyptera, which to-day I am not willing
to add, as also Hubner’s Schinia then not known to me, or but partly. I
afterwards in my ‘‘ New Check List,’’ proposed to divide the species into
two genera, but incorrectly. I also described some new species (incor-
rectly, as Mr. Smith has shown) under Tamia. But the first attempt ta
limit this large genus scientifically is that above given, and to now call
that genus Sehinia, aterm ‘resurrected ’’ by myself out of Hubner for two
or three of his species, is quite unjust and against the usual comity and
practice, and I hope will not be followed by any one, The species [ now
arrange as follows: I have adopted Mr. Smith’s conclusions except as
above noted, but the genus is virtually my genus Lygrantha@ecia, and its
value is not altered by referring to it a few species hitherto wrongly placed
by me. [had not the type of Zumila, and was misled by Guenée’s diag-

nosis, and my own prepossession that the flattened thoracic scales dis- “
tinguished Tumila, while in reality all the species have them. The genus
is well distinguished by the full, not ovate or narrowed eyes from its
allies, and thus stands near the typical //eliothis armiger.

SS ee

RHODODIPSA Grote (1879).

Type: R. Volupia itch.

This genus is nearest to Lygranthecia, and differs in detail of armature
from Rhodophora and Alaria, The second species from New Mexico may
not belong here, the front tibia of the type were imperfect. Both have
light crimson secondaries and honey-yellow thorax. The fore wings of
Volupia are also red with fine pulverulent pale lines, while those of Mini-
ana are clay-color with broader white lines, recalling those of Z. Velaris.
Mr, Smith unites the first species with Alaria, and having been so fortu-
nate as to see Dr. Fitch’s type, confirms my identification in my [lustra- .
ted Essay, p. 63, and elsewhere ; alone from the description certainty as to
the species intended by Dr. Fitch could not be attained.

1. R. Volupia Pitch; Gr. B. U. 8. G. 8. ILT., 797; Til, Ess. 68, Pl. 8, 83.
Texas ; Colorado.
2. R. Miniana Grote, Papilio I., 175; II, Pl. I., fig. 1-2. New Mexico.

Ee

PORRIMA. Grote (1875).

Type: Oria Sanguinea Geyer.
This is a catalogue name proposed by me instead of Guenée’s generic
term Oria, preoccupied by Hubner. I found afterwards that the near-

—

e
1883.] 175 [Grote.

est ally of this moth was the Heliothis Regia of Mr. Strecker, a moth
which I had previously referred to Lygranthecia (= Schinia Smith) be-
fore Mr. Smith wrote on the subject. In his ‘‘Synopsis,’’? Mr. Smith
says: ‘““Congeneric with this (Alaria) are Porrima Gr., and Rhodo-
phora Guen. The, former seems to differ in being rather more
coarsely haired, more wooly (woolly) beneath, having the primaries
a little wider, and the fringes longer. ‘The latter has the vestiture
a little finer, and the palpi slightly drooping instead of horizontal ;
there is also a very slight difference in the armature of the anterior tibis ;
but compared carefully with each other the conclusion that they are identical
is irresistible ; not only do they agree in outine and general characteristics
but even the coloration, slight as it is, would seem to bring them
together”? (1. c. p. 19). The italics are mine, In his next paper Mr.
Smith refers Sanguinea to Schinia! [ believe Mr. Smith is right in his last
conclusion, and I have referred Sanguinea, next vo Regia, to Lygranthecia.
If this opinion should be reversed by later discoveries Porrima may come
into use for the genus as intended by Guenée. I have quoted Mr. Smith
to show how easy it is to be positive and change one’s opinion quite
quickly. A very long continued study and a knowledge of the greater
part of our Voetwide has shown me that it is better to be not so positive as
matters are at present. I differ decidedly from Mr. Smith’s opinion that
Sanguinea is like Mlorida, The genus Porrima must for the present be re-
garded as not sufficiently distinct from Lygranthacia, I do not in the
least object to a change in opinion upon such matters, but I object to
being adversely criticised for changing my opinions by one who changes
his own. The process in itself is a very natural one, without which all
progress would be impossible. A scientific man is one who changes his
views with facility upon the discovery of fresh evidence, and one also who
is quick to see the bearing of fresh evidence upon the subject in hand,

OXYCNEMIS Grote (1882).

Type: O. Advena Grote,

A Heliothid genus with shortened fore tibim which are corneous and
terminate in a single claw. Vestiture sealy. Thorax with posterior tuft
of curved scintillant scales, widening towards their tips. Eyes naked, un-
lashed. Abdomen short, untufted. The moth is gray, brightly marked,
with distinct hadeniform ornamentation, of small size and from its essen-
tial features I place the moth next to Trioenemis. The type is in Mr. Neu-
moegen’s extensive collection.

1. O. Advena Grote, Can. Ent. 14, 182. Arizona.

AZENLA Grote (1882).
Type: A. Implora Grote.
Size small, allied to Prothymia. The vestiture is flattened hairy. Eyes
naked, unlashed. Antenne simple. Legs unarmed and tibiee thinly scaled.
Front with infra-clypeal plate prominent, overshadowed by « parallel,

Grote.) 176 [June 16,

long, distinctly tridentate, flattened clypeal protuberance. Labial palpi
oblique, rather stout and longer than in Xanthoptera. The type is pale
lemon yellow with dots in place of median lines and pale fringes. The
second species is dark yellow without marks and uncolorous fringes ; the
frontal armature has its outer edge roundly scalloped instead of forming
the three sharp teeth of A. Implora.

1, A. Implora Grote, Papilio II., 186. Arizona,
2. A, Edentata Grote, Can. Ent. XV., 25. Arizona.

EUHERRICHIA. Grote (1882).

Type: Eriopus Monetifera Guen.

Form slender ; abdomen not exceeding the secondaries, tufted at base,
and especially on third segment, Eyes naked, unlashed. Ocelli. Tibise
unarmed. Vestiture consisting of flattened scales mixed with hair. Wings
broad, entire, apices determinate, outer margin retiring below apex, full
at median nervules ; a distinct accessory cell; 9 out of 8 to apices, about
half the length of 8; cell open; 8 twice further from 4 than 4 from 5 at
base. Hind wings with vein 5 a little weaker, indistinctly connected with
median series. The species are rich reddish-brown ornamented with
silver spots and lines recalling Plusia and having somewhat the soft rich
color of Plusia Mappa. The species have been mistaken for forms of
Hriopis.

1. HE. Monetifera Guen, Can, to Florida,
2. E. Mollissima Guen, Can. to Florida,
E. Floridensis Guen Florida,

>
De

I conclude this paper by briefly referring to the fact that I have deter-
mined my species in many collections. I enumerate those of Mr. Thaxter,
Mr. Neumoegen, Mr. Hy, Edwards, Mr. Tepper and in the Albany col-
lections. A large number of my types are in Mr. Neumoegea’s grand
collection, and I have figured a good number of the species. There can
thus be but few cases of doubt as to what I have described. I had in-
tended, in memory of many kindnesses, to dedicate a second illustrated
work to Mr. Roland Thaxter, but circumstances prevent me, and if he will
accept the present paper on his favorite subject, I shall be glad. I know
of no one who’by natural temper and talent is better fitted to continue the
description of North American Noctuid@ than Mr, Thaxter, could he be
induced to undertake the work,

|

1883, ] 1 17 { Packard.

A Revision of the Lysiopetalida, a family of Chilognath Myriopoda, with a
notice of the genus Cambala. By A. 8. Packard, Jr.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, June 16, 1883.)

In the course of some studies on the cave-fauna of the United States, it
became necessary in treating of the cave-inhabiting myriopods to work
carefully over their structure, and as they all, with a single exception,
belong to the Lysiopetalida, a revision of a group which has been hitherto
much neglected, may prove of service to zodlogists.

My material mainly consists of specimens collected by myself for the
Kentucky Geological Survey ; also, some collected by Mr, F. G. Sanborn
for the same survey. I have also been indebted to Mr, E, Burgess, Prof,
©. V. Riley and U. 8. Department of Agriculture, for a few specimens.

Until 1840, when Brandt described the genus Lysiopetalum (and its
synonym Spirostrephon), no genus of the family, as it is now understood,
existed. In his Recueil, p, 42, he referred some southern Huropean spe-
cies to his new genus Lysiopetalum, mentioning Julus fatidissimus Savi
as the type. On p. 90 of the same work he proposed the genus Spiro-
xtrephon for our more common American. species, the Julus lactarius de-
scribed by Thomas Say in 1821. f

In 1845, in his classical memoir in the Philosophical Transactions of
London, on the Myriopoda, Mr. G. Newport proposed the sub-fumily (with
Platops and Cambala as generic types) Lysiopetaline, with the following
brief diagnosis ; Pedes laminis mobilibus affiat.

In 1865, in his Myriopoda of North America, published in the Transac-
tions of this Society, Dr. H. O. Wood, Jr., recognized the family rank of
the group for which he proposed the name, Lystopetalide, with the fol-
lowing diagnosis : “Sterna atrophied, not coalescent with or united by
suture to the scuta.’’? The type and only genus mentioned is Sptrostrephon
(SN. lactarius).

Mr. Ryder’s paper in the Proceedings of the U. 8. National Museum,
1880, was the first attempt to enumerate the species, and his detection and
account of the genus Zygonopus added materially to our knowledge of
the group.

The synonomy of the family will be as follows ;

Family LysroprraLipa Wood.

Lysiopetaline Newport, Phil. Trans., xix, 278, 1845.
Lysiopetalida Wood, Trans. Amer. Phil, Soc., xiii, 187, 1865,
Koch, Verh. Zool.-bot. Ges, in Wien, xvii, 186% (Zool.
Record, p. 194, 1868).
Ryder, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Museum, fii, 524, 1881.
Packard, Amer. Nat., xvii, 828, March, 1883.
PROC, AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXT. 114. W. PRINTED serTeMBER 15, 1883.

Packard,] 178 [June 16,

Synopsis of the Genera.

A. Body not setose ; antennse long ; male legs of eighth pair not modified;
genital armature of normal proportions. ...,.Lysiopetalum Brandt.
Male legs of eighth pair modified, six jointed ; genital armature small
Pscudotremia Cope.

B. Body setose.
Body short and thick, eyes triangular; antenne slender; sets one-
fifth as long as body is thick ; legs short..... Oryptotrichus Packard.
Body short and fusiform, eighth pair of legs of male two-jointed ; setw
half as long as body is thick..........-. ..+. Lrichopetatum Harger.
Body slender ; eighth pair of male legs two-jointed, ending in a claw ;
sete very long ; CYel€SS.....+sseeroreeererssersens Scoterpes Cope.
Like Scoterpes ; sete a little shorter; sixth pair of male legs greatly
POOH is tiv ade eoleec dhledeiuniln Vue veeeygonopus Ny Cer,

Characters of the Family. The diagnostic characters of the group, as
distinguished from the Julide, are as follows ; Head broad, wider than the
body in front; gene much swollen, front flat ; eyes situated in a triangle,
often partly or wholly aborted; antenn®w seven-jointed, much longer
and more setose than in the Julidw, especially the third and fifth joints,
and also the seventh (terminal) joint. Body subfusiform, constricted be-
hind the head, the first and second segments being much narrower than
in the Julide. The segments usually divided into an anterior raised por-
tion, often with longitudinal ridges, and a posterior plain depressed
smaller portion ; on the sides of the anterior portion of the segments of
the anterior half or two-thirds of the body a swollen boss or hump, with
three setiferous tubercles ; the sete: from one-third to two-thirds as long
as the body is thick. Feet very long and slender, as long as the body is
thick, or sometimes longer. The coxe contiguous, the sterna very rudi-
mentary, not united with the scuta. In the males the sixth pair of feet
enlarged and swollen (in Zygonopus) ; the eighth pair two-jointed and
rudimentary ; number of body-segments variable ; end of body pointed.

To enter into more detail, the following comparative description of the
family characters may be useful :

The Head. The head of the Lysiopetalidee is more like that of the Poly-
desmide than the Julide ; the gene are remarkably swollen, and as in
the Polydesmid separated by suture from the rest of the epicranium ; they
are higher and narrower oval than in the Polydesmidx. The front of the
head is much flattened, forming a squarish pseudo-clypeal region sepa-
rated by a faint suture from the epicranium ; the sides of the head or genal
region are swollen, forming a slight median depression on the vertex,
The labrum is much asin the Julide, with three median nearly’ equal
teeth, and with four sete on each side asin the Julide. Finally, in the
form and anatomy of the head, the Lysiopetalide approach the Polydes-
mide more closely than the Julide ; the nearest approach to the family in

1883, | 179 {Packard,

the Polydesmidee is seen in the head of Polydesmus ocellatus Pack. and P.
cavicola Pack., both American forms.

The Hyes. When well developed the eyes are equilaterally triangular,
d.¢., the ocelli are arranged in a triangular area ; in Lystopetalum lactarium
there are 40-41 facets arranged in rows. In Cryptotrichus cwsioannulatus,
where the eye is also developed, there are about 24 facets ; as several of the
species inhabit caves, and suffer a partial or total loss of eyes, there is
much variation in the number of ocelli; in Psewdotremia cavernarum the
eyes are irregularly linear ; the ocelli being arranged in about four irregular
groups, with 11-19 ocelli, the number of ocelli varying in different indi-
viduals of the same species. In Trichopetalum the ocelli vary from 10-19.
In Scoterpes and Zygonopus the eyes are entirely wanting. In those eyes
which are partially aborted, there are a few partly developed ocelli, less
than half as wide as, and scattered irregularly among, the normal ones.

The Antenne. These are much longer and slenderer than in any Julide,
and more nearly resemble those of the Polydesmidse than the former
family ; but differ from both groups in the much longer terminal joint,
and in the decided inequality in the relative length of the joints, the third
and fourth joint being much longer than the others ; the number of joints
in our American species being invariably seven (not counting the basal
undeveloped eminence to which the first joint is attached). The antennx
are longest and slenderest in Pseudotremia and Lysiopetalum, and shortest,
in Scoterpes, Zygonopus and Trichopetalum. 'The joints are more setose
in Trichopetalum, and least so, perhaps, in Scoterpes. In all the genera
there are from two to four flattened, enlarged, broad, fusiform tactile hairs
situated on the end of the terminal joint. As observed in Lysiopetalum
and Pseudotremia, these hairs are two-jointed, the basal joint short and
broad ; they are filled with granules like the material filling the spaces in
the nervous fibres between the nerve-cells in the terminal antennal joint,
which is nearly filled with nerve fibres and very small nerve-cells, show-
ing that the antenns must be very sensitive tactile organs, especially in
the blind forms.

The Arthromeres. The body-segments of the Lysiopetalidee have a defi-
nite family form and style of ornamentation. In Lysiopetalum and Pseu-
dotremia all the scutes are ornamented with numerous longitudinal ridges,
which end in a point overhanging the depressed, flattened portion of the
scute; in Pseudotremia, which is a modification by cave-life of the first
named genus, the ridges are more or less obsolete and replaced by flattened,
coarse granulations, and the lateral swellings of the scutes are well devel-
oped.

In all the other genera, the scutes are not thus ridged, and the lateral
bosses or swellings are distinct; in all except Cryptotrichus, the bosses have
three setiferous, acute tubercles arranged in an irregular triangle; in Cryp-
totrichus the tubercles are further apart, arranged almost in a straight

1 80 [June 16,

Packard.)

line, but one situated on the boss, which is smaller than usual; the upper
most tubercle is very near the median line of the body. The sete are
straight and stiff, pointing upward and either forward or backward, and
are longest in Scoterpes, and shortest in Oryptotrichus where they are min-
ute and about one-fourth as Jong as the body is thick. Below and behind
the lateral boss, the surface is sometimes chased with nearly parallel oblique
lines, or, as in Cryptotrichus, the depressed hinder edge of the scutes is
finely striated longitudinally. The end of the body is usually much more
acutely pointed than in the Julide.

Having received, through the kindness of Dr. Latzel, specimens of Ly-
siopetalum carinatum Brandt, from Dalmatia, which is a very large species,
T have been able to examine the repugnatorial pores, which are very dis-
tinct, their crateriform openings being situated each between two ridges
on the anterior edge of the raised portion of the scute, In L, illyricum
Latzel, from Austria, they are with difficulty perceived, the area in which
they are situated not being discolored with yellow ; but they can be de-
tected with a half-inch objective. The two European species mentioned
are provided with sete, while our L. lactariwm is naked. In the latter
species the repugnatorial pores are situated in the middle of the yellow
lateral spot, between two carine, which are higher and closer together
than any of the others, They can be seen with a Tolles triplet.

Examining the cave Lysiopetalid, Pscudotremia cavernarum Cope, from
Wyandotte cave, anda variety, carterensis, which inhabits the Carter caves,
Ky., I cannot with certainty discover their site, as they are nearly, if not
quite, obsolete. It is possible that in cave species, where there are appar-
ently no enemies of these myriopods, their pores become at least exter-
nally obsolete.

The Legs. The number of joints of the legs in general is six ; the second
and third, especially the third, being the longest (this inequality in the
length of the joints is an important family character); the fourth and fifth
joints are very short, about equal in length, while the sixth and last joint
is long and slender, ending in a slender claw.

Of the three pairs of primary or larval legs, the first pair are variously
modified in different genera. In Lysiopetalum lactarius the first legs are
rather flat and short; the third joint from the claw nearly thrice as long
as the second, while the terminal joint is broad, with a series of close-set,
stiff setee of nearly equal length, but increasing gradually in length dis-
tally ; the joint is evidently a comb-like structure adapted for cleaning the
body, perhaps the mouth-parts. The first pair of legs in Pseudotremia
are much longer and slenderer than in Lysiopetalum, six-jointed, and the
terminal joint is less comb-like, both edges being densely setose, the inner
edge, however, having the stoutest, most regular setee.

The sixth pair of legs in Zygonopus are modified for clasping purposes,
the fourth and fifth joints being much swollen, as described in the descrip-

re

|
|
“

tec

1883.) 1 81 (Packard.

tion of the genus; in all the other genera, as in all Diplopod myriopods, so
far as we are aware, the sixth pair of legs are like the others.

In each genus of Lysiopetalide, except Lysiopetalum itself, the eighth
pair of legs, ¢. ¢.,, the pair situated on the sixth segment or that bear-
ing the male genital armature, is much modified. In Lysiopetalum lac-
tariwm the seventh and eighth pair of feet, ¢ ¢., those before and behind
the male genital armature, are as well developed as the other legs ; it is
probable that, owing to the large and long genital armature, reaching
beyond the basal joints of the legs, that the latter needs no change in form
to assist in clasping the female. Tn Pseudotremia, however, the eighth
pair of legs are much modified, though still six-jointed ; the two basal
joints are much swollen, of very irregular shape, the coxe being consoli-
dated ; the rest of the leg is much smaller, slender, four-jointed, the third
joint of the leg or basal joint of the free portion being as long as the three
terminal joints less the long claw. In the three lower genera, Trichopet-
alum, Scoterpes and Zygonopus, the eighth pair of legs are on the same
type; the two latter genera being evidently derived from the out-of-door
form, Trichopetalum. In these three genera the eighth pair of legs are
much aborted, two-jointed ; the onter joint about thrice as long as the
basal, and either unarmed or ending in a claw.

The Male Genital Armature.* This apparatus has only been incidentally
studied. In Lysiopetalum lactarium and Pseudotremia the lamina externa
and lamina interna are much as in other Chilognaths. In the first-named
genus the armature is about as large asin the Julidw; in the Pseudotremia
itis minute. In Pseudotremia and in Scoterpes and Zygonopus there is
developed either upon (Pseudotremia) or at the base of the outer lamina
a minute spinous appéndage which we have not noticed in the figures of
Vosges, Wood or Humbert, .In each genus observed by us the armature
presents characteristic features, so that they appear to have generic but no
family characters. In Scoterpes, Trichopetalum and Zygonopus the arma-
ture is minute and rudimentary. In. Scoterpes its outer lamina is tridentate
at the enlarged end, while the inner lamina is sac-like and simple.

LystoprraLtum Brandt.

Julus Say, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc., Phil., ii, part i, 104, 1821.

Lystopetalum Brandt, Recueil, 42, 1840.

Spirostrephon Brandt, Bull. Sci. Acad., 1841. St. Pet., 1840. Recuil, p.
90, 1840.

Platops Newport, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. xiii, 266, 1844.

Lysiopetalum Gervais (in part), Aptéres, iv, 188, 184’7,

* The genital armature of Julidse have been described and figured by EK. Voges
in Zeitschrift far wissenschaftliche Zoologie, xxxi, 150, 1878. He regards the
seventh segment as the *‘Copulationsring” of the male, and says, “at the bot-
tom of the deep sac-like membranous connection of the sixth and seventh body-
rings lies the Copulations-Organ”’ of the female,

\

Packard. | 182 [June 16

Cambala Gervais, Aptéres, iv, 134, 1847. Exped. & l’Amer. du Sud
(Castelnean), Myriop., 17.
Reasia Sager, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc., Phil., 109, 1856.
Spirostrephon Wood, Myriop. N. Amer., Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc., 192, 1865.
Cope, Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., 179, 1769.
Ryder, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., iii, 526, 1881.
Not Cambatla Gray, Griffiths, Cuvier, An. King. Ins., pl. 135, fig. 2, 1882.

“ Reasia Gray.

“© Reasia Jones, Todd’s Cyc. Anat. Art. Myriop, 546.

Body-segments numbering as many as upwards of 60, with as many as
115 pairs of legs ; the body unusually long and slender, tapering gradually
towards the subacute tip. Head with the front flat, high and narrow,
more so than usual; the eyes in a rectangular triangle, composed of as many
as 40-41 facets, and not depressed. Antenne rather long, the joints subcla-
vate, joint 6 not much longer than 4; joints 3 and 5 of the same length ;
joint 6 rather thick at the end; joint 7 short, thick and conical, much
more so than usual.

Body-segments swollen and full, becoming suddenly depressed on the
front edge ; the swollen portion with numerous raised lines or ridges, with
deep concave valleys between ; the ridges projecting behind in an acute
point. The segment next to the head rather narrower than the head, with
the posterior two-thirds ridged ; the sides of the segments are somewhat
swollen high up on the sides, but not so conspicuously as in Pseudo-
tremia. Legs rather stout, and larger than in Pseudotremia; the first
pair rather short and broad, with regular comb of stiff setse on the inner
edge of the terminal joint. The seventh and ninth pairs of legs, 7. ¢, the
pair immediately preceding and following the genital armor, are like the
others, not being in any way modified as in Pseudotremia, etc. The gen-
ital armature is large and better developed than in any other genus of the
family ; the outer lamina large, stout, spatulate-mucronate at the tip;
inner lamina much shorter than the outer, and with two long acute forks ;
repugnatorial pores difficult to find.

The genus may be recognized by the long, slender body, tapering to a
point, and by the very short conical seventh antennal joint; by the ribbed
swollen segments, which are very numerous ; by the seventh and ninth
pairs of legs being normal, like the others, and by the short, broad first
pair, with the regular comb of setee on the terminal joint.

The genus as here defined will apply to the two Southern European
species Lysiopetalum carinatum Brandt and L. iélyricwm Latzel, except that
they are setose, while our species is not. Iam indebted to Dr. Latzel for
specimens for comparison.

In proposing the genus Spirostrephon, Brandt (Bull. Se. Acad. St.
Pet., 1840), regarded Say’s Julus lactarius as the type species, and adding
that the eyes are in a triangular area, he indicates its generic difference
from Oambala annulatus, with which it has been so often confounded.

Although I had originally retained Brandt’s name Spirostrephon for our

|

1883,] 183 {Packard.

species, yet upon receiving from. Dr. Latzel authentic types of European
Lysiopetalum, it is plain that our S. lactarius is congeneric with them.
The name Spirostrephon should, then, be considered as a synonym of Ly-
siopetalum. It is difficult to see why Brandt should have separated lacta-
rius from his L. carinatum.

In his Recueil, p. 42, Brandt thus characterizes his genus Lysiopetalum:
Lamine pedifera omnes libera, mobiles, cutis ope cum parte abdominalt cor-
poris cingulorum conjuncte. Frons ante antennas dilatata et deplanata in
maribus in simul depressa. The two species mentioned under the generic
diagnosis are Lysiopetalum fatidissimum (Savi) and L. carinatum Branat.

Again, on p. 90, ‘‘Subgenus seu genus II. Spirostrephon Nob.’’ is thus
characterized, and he apparently regards it as a subgenus of Julus: Gna-
thochilarii pars media fossa haud instructa, sede jus loco aream tetragonam
planam, plica seu linea derata duplici, superiore breviore et inferiore longi-
ore, supra et infra terminatam, sed sutura longitudinali haud divisam of-
ferens. Spec. 27. Julus (Spirostrephon) lactarius Nob....... Differt
habitu a Julis genuinis et Julo (Lysiopetalo) foetidissimo et plicato affinis
apparet. Annuli corporis, quorum posteriores brevissimi, incluso anali
58. Pedum paria 95. Longitudo 10-11"; latitudo summa #1 Oculi tri-
angulares—Julum lactarium protypo generis Cambala Grayi habuissem,
quum figura ab hocce zoologo sub nomine Cambalee lactarii data (Griffith
Anim. Kingd. Insect., pl. 185, fig. 2). The generic characters are not very
applicable in distinguishing the genus, the mention of the type alone ren-
dering it possible to understand what the genus is,

The synonymy will be farther discussed under Cambala. In 1844,
Newport, having been misled by the specimen of Ownbala annulata alleged
to have been sent by Say as the type of his Julus lactarius, places the latter
in his genus Platops, which he proposes, with a doubt, thus: ‘‘Genus
Platops? mihi.’’ The generic characters apply well to the present species,
S. lactarius.

Dr. Wood, in his Myriopoda of North America, does not attempt, for
want of material, to define the genus. Prof. Cope characterizes this and
the next genus thus :

Annuli without pores.......++.- iar 6 vibe Nae Via dws Hoi ohte Spirostrephon.
Annuli with two pores on each side the median line.......Pseudotremia.

As we have seen, there are pores in Lysiopetalum, while the “two
pores”’ of Pseudotremia are two of the three setiferous tubercles on the
side of each segment.

The genus appears thus far to be represented in North America by but
a single species, which ranges from Massachusetts west to Iowa and south
to Florida and Louisiana, while in southeastern Europe Lysiopetalum is
rich in species.

LystoPETALUM LACTARIUM Say.

Julus lactarius Say, Journ, Acad. Nat. Sc. Phil., ii, part i, 104, 1821.
Sprrostrephon lactarius Brandt, Bull. Sc. St. Pet., 1840; Recueil, 90, 1840.

Packard] 184. {June 16,

Platops lineata Newport, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xiii, 267, April 1844.
Lystopetalum lineatum Gervais, Aptéres, iv, 138, 1847.
Cambala lactarius Gervais (in part), Aptéres, iv, 134, 184’.
Reasia spinosa Sager, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phil., 109, 1856.
Cambala lactaria Gervais, Exped. Amer. du Sud (Castelneau), Myriop.
lv, ‘
‘‘ Reana chinosa Saeger,’’ Gervais, Exped. ]’Amer. du Sud, (Castelneau)
Myriop. 14.
Spirostrephon lactarius Wood, Myriop. N. Amer., Trans. Amer Phil. Soc.,
Phil., pl. ii, figs..11, 11a, 192, 1865.
Cope, Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., Phil., xi, No. 82,
179, 1869. Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., iii, 66,
May, 1870.
Ryder, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., iii, 526, Feb. 16,
1881.
Tysiopetalum tactarium Packard, Amer. Nat., xvii, 555, May, 1883.
Not Cambala lactaria Gray, Griff., Cuvier An. King. Ins., pl. 135, fig. 2,
18382.
Newport, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xiii, 266, April,
1844,

Two o', two 9. Body-segments exclusive of the head, 61, with 115
pairs of legs, Body and head horn-color, usually mottled and banded
with dark blackish horn-color. The head usually with a broad, interan-
tennal, black, conspicuous band enclosing and connecting the eyes. Eyes
(compound) of 40-41 facets. Antenne dull, blackish brown; tip of the
terminal joint pale, as also the other joints at their articulation. The body
with a median dull yellowish dorsal stripe, and with a lateral row of con-
colorous diffuse spots, one on each longest lateral ridge (the spots vary
much, sometimes covering four or five ridges and extending low down on
the sides of the scute, Each scute has, except those near the head and at,
the end of the body,' about twenty-five prominent ridges, the dorsal twelve
larger than those on the sides ; these ridges are high, with concave valleys
between them ; the end of the ridges are acutely conical and project over
the ends of the scutes.

Length of the entire body 85™ ; thickness 2™,

The above description was drawn up from the Louisiana specimens which
were highly colored, banded and spotted. In the Massachusetts specimen
the color is uniformly light brown, without the yellowish dorsal line and
the lateral spots. The antenns are much darker, while the legs are paler
than the body. The head is much paler than the body ; it is dusky on the
vertex between the eyes; but there is no definite interantennal band as in
the Louisiana examples.

The Iowa specimens resemble in coloration those from Louisiana, but
the yellowish dorsal band and lateral spots are not quite so distinct, though
the interantennal blackish band is distinct.

Magsachussetts and McGregor, Iowa. Mus. Agricultural Department,

——

=

{SS

ay x4
1888] 185 (Packard.

Washington, D. C. (Prof. C. V. Riley); Pilatka, Fla., and Milliken’s Bend,
La. CH. Burgess); ‘‘ astern United States’? (Wood); Found under bark
in the mountain regions of Tennessee and North Carolina (Cope) ; St.
Louis (Theo. Pergande).

Although this species is evidently the parent form of the cave-inhabit
ing Pseudotremia cavernarum, it has not yet been observed near the In-
diana and Kentucky caves, though undoubtedly yet to be found in their
vicinity, as it isa wide-spread species. It probably ranges through Central
into South America, as Dr. Wood remarks; ‘‘I have seen a single speci-
men, a female, labeled as coming from New Grenada, which apparently
belongs to this species.’? This specimen I have seen in the Museum of
the Philadelphia Academy of Natural Sciences, but did not compare it
closely with our species ; itis much larger than individuals from the United
States,

PsruDOTREMIA Cope.

Pseudotremia Cope, Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xi, No. 82,179, 1869. Trans.
Amer. Ent. Soc., iii, 67, May, 1870.
Spiroatrephon Cope, Amer. Naturalist, vi, 414, July, 1872.
Pscudotremia Harger, Amer. Journ. Se. & Arts, iv, August, 1872.
Ryder, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., iii, 524, Feb. 16, 1881.

Body consisting of thirty segments; rather long and slender, with as
many as fifty pairs of legs. Head with the muscular area (gena) behind
the eye very full and swollen, globose, swelling out far beyond the side of
the succeeding scutum ; front a little longer than wide. Eyes present,
black, the outline of the eye-patch narrow triangular, composed of about
twelve to fifteen facets, arranged in four or five transverse oblique series.
Antenne longer and slenderer than in any of the other genera of the fam-
ily ; joint.3 is‘twice as long but not as thick as joint 2, but equals 5 in
length, the latter, however, being very slender and clavate ; the terminal
seventh joint is unusually long, pear-shaped and elongated towards the tip.

The body constricts in a neck-like fashion behind the head ; segments
(scuta) 5-20 especially have a lateral shoulder or raised portion character-
istic of the genus Lysiopetalum ; this swollen portion has on each side about
six longitudinal ridges, with deep valleys between; above, especially
on the posterior half of the body, the dorsal portion of the laterally swollen
scuta is coarsely tuberculated, instead of ridged, and the rounded tubercles
are rather flat and unequal in size. ‘Chere are no sete or lateral setiferous
tubercles. The end of the body is as usual in the family, the last segment
with three pairs of small sets arranged one above the other.

Above the middle of the side of the posterior scuta, especially the last
six, isa tubercle like those in Scoterpes and Zygonopus, but much smaller,
from which a minute hair arises, and above on the upper part of the
shoulder there are two rudimentary, very small tubercles.

The legs are long and slender, about one-third longer than the diameter
of the body. In the male the eighth pair of legs are much less modified

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800, XxI. 114. xX. PRINTED SEPTEMBER 15, 1883.

Packard.,] J 86 [June 16,

than in the succeeding genera ; it consists of five joints, while in Trichope-
talum, Scoterpes and Zygonopus it is very rudimentary, consisting of but
two joints. The basal joint is large and constricted near the middle, with
a large setiferous tubercle on the inside; the constriction may represent
an obsolete articulation, and thus the basal joint really represent the two
basal joints of the other legs. The smaller multiarticulate extremity of
the leg is composed of four well marked joints, the basal as long as the
three terminal ones without the claw, which is long and slender, and
nearly as well developed as in the other legs.

The male genital armature is well developed, nearly as much so as in the
Julidw. There is a median very long curved forked chitinous rod, a pair
of median boot-shaped pieces, and a pair of lateral double blades or
pseudorhabdites, composed of the usual lamina externa and lamina interna,
which are variously spined and denticulated at their extremities, one sup-
plementary spine being minutely and densely spinulated.

The genus was characterized by Cope thus: ‘‘ Annuli with two pores on
each side the median line ;’’ as already remarked, the so-called pores ap-
pear to be simply the lateral tubercles giving rise posteriorly to minute
sete, which are difficult to detect with a half-inch objective.

The genus differs from Lysiopetalum in the slenderer, longer antenns,
the rudimentary eyes, the more swollen and prominent lateral bosses or
shoulders of the segments, while the body has about half as many segments
as in Lypsiopetalum, and is much shorterand more fusiform. The generic
characters are very marked, though the species is clearly enough derived
from the common out-of-door Lysiopetalum lactarium.

- PSEUDOTREMIA CAVERNARUM Cope.

Pseudotremia cavernarum Cope, Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc.,xi, No. 82, 179, 1869.
Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., iii, 67, May, 1870.
Packard, Amer. Naturalist, v, 749, Dec., 1871.
Spirostrephon cavernarum Cope, Amer. Naturalist, vi, 414, July, 1872.
Spirostrephon (Pscudotremia) cavernarum Harger, Amer, Journ. Sc. and
Arts, iv, 118, 119, Aug., 1872.
Pseudotremia cavernarum Ryder, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., iii, 526. Feb. 16,
1881,

Eyes black, conspicuous, forming a somewhat irregular, narrow triangu-
lar patch, with from twelve to fifteen facets, Antenne unusually long and
slender, the joints pilose; joints 3 and 5 of the same length, or 3 a little
longer; joints 2 and 6 of equal length; joint 7 elongate, pear-shaped,
pilose, the extremity truncated, with two or three sense-sete not so long
as the end of the joint is thick.

The first scutum next to the head is scutellate in shape, rounded on the
front edge, somewhat produced anteriorly in the middle; the margin be-
hind slightly sinuous ; itis about two-thirds as longas broad. The sec-
ond scutum is a little wider than the first; the third somewhat wider,

2

+

y-

1883.] 1 87 [Packard,

while the fourth is much wider; dorsal face of first scutum smooth ; the
posterior part of the second scutum a little swollen ; that of the third more
so ; that of fourth scutum swollen and ridged much as in fifth and succeed-
ing scuta, Scuta 5-20 are swollen high up on the sides into a shoulder,
giving a quadrilateral instead of a circular outline to the segment, bulg-
ing out more subdorsally than below ; the swelling has six longitudinal
ridges, while the posterior swollen end of the scuta above, especially on
the posterior half of the body, is coarsely tuberculated, the tubercles being
rounded rather than flat, and unequal in size. No well-marked setiferous
tubercles on the side from the middle of the body to the head ; but on the
last six segments there are on cach shoulder or scutal swelling two minute
rudimentary swellings or tubercles; but in my specimens I can see no
sete except on the two terminal segments of the body in Gand 9, where
on the end of the last scuta there is a seta arising from a basal movable
joint ; there are three pairs on the lateral anal plates (80th segment).
Length 18™™; thickness of the body 1.5",

The young when about half-grown are white, the back of the antennx
and anterior segments having a very slight dusky tinge. In numerous
mature specimens from the Senate Chamber, Wyandotte cave, three miles
in, the body is white, with a slight flesh-colored tint. In numerous (150)
specimens from this locality, the head and dorsal side of the anterior seg-
ments are slightly dusky ; the antenne are also usually slightly dusky,
except the two terminal joints, which are white.

There is thus seen to be a slight amount of variation in color in speci-
mens collected at the same date in the same chamber in Wyandotte cave.

Among the 150 specimens taken at one time and place from Wyandotte
cave (Senate Chamber) and individually examined, I could see none
without black eyes, the pigment being well developed. There was a fair
proportion of males,

Four specimens which TI collected in Little Wyandotte cave were ex-
actly the same size as those from Great Wyandotte cave ; they were white
tinged, dusky on the head and fore part of the body. The eyes are black
and the eye-patch of the same size and shape, while the antenne are the
same,

Six specimens from Bradford cave, Ind. (which is a small grotto formed
by a vertical fissure in the rock, and only 800 to 400 yards deep), showed
more variation than those from the two Wyandotte caves. They are of
the same size and form, but slightly longer and a little slenderer, espe-
cially joints 8 and 5; joint 7 is decidedly longer than in any others ;
whiter, more bleached. The antenne are much whiter than in those
from the Wyandotte caves, and the head and body are paler, more
bleached out than most of the Wyandotte specimens. The eyes vary
more than in the Wyandotte examples, one having but 12 facets, another
14, and another 15, with a few minute rudimentary facets between the
others. It thus appears that the body is most bleached and the eyes the
most rudimentary in the Bradford cave, the smallest and most accessible,

188 [June 16,

Packard.)

and in which consequently there is the most variation in surroundings,
temperature, access of light and changed condition of the air. Under
such circumstances as these we should naturally expect the most variation.

Var. carterensis. A decided approach to 8. lactarius is seen in certain
brown specimens, only partly bleached, found in the Carter caves, Ken-
tucky, viz. : Bat cave, X cave, anc Zwingler’s cave, besides a Gave across
the road from the hotel, which is used as an ice-house.

In the specimens from Bat cave, the antenn are slightly shorter, and
a little slenderer, particularly joints 8-5 ; but joint 7 is much shorter and
blunter than in the Bradford cave individuals; the antennme, however,
are of the same length, though slenderer than those living in Great Wy-
andotte cave. The eyes form a nearly equilaterally triangular area,
with from 28 to 25 facets. The segments behind the head are thirty.
They differ from the Wyandotte examples in the posterior or swollen por-
tion being rather more prominent than in the former, forming more
marked lateral swellings, with about eight ridges on the side of each boss,
and the body is larger and thicker, but the legs are of the same length.

The head is dark in front, mottled above and below with paler horn-
color. The antenne are concolorous with the head and body, but the
terminal joints are paler, as are the legs, which are also paler at the articu-
lations. The entire body is dark horn-brown, mottled and irregularly
lineated,

The smoother anterior portion of the scuta shows a tendency to be paler
than the tuberculated portion, and of a bluish-gray tint. The tubercles
are no more prominent than in the Wyandotte individuals.

The segments in both the Wyandotte species and var. carterensis rap-
idly decrease in size, the penultimate segment being pointed, and each
segment is provided with regular, high-raised parallel prominent ridges
on the shoulder or lateral boss, about 40-45 on a scutum on the sixth seg-
ment from the end of the body.

Length 23" ; thickness 2.5", the body being considerably larger and
thicker than in the Wyandotte specimens,

Two specimens from X cave are exactly in size and color like those
from Bat cave.

Three specimens from the ice-house cave only differ from those in Bat
cave in being somewhat paler, but the eyes and antennw are the same.

A large and a partly grown one from Zwingler’s cave was collected by
Mr. Sanborn, Aug. 23; these were also paler than those from Bat cave.
With them were associated a Ceuthophilus with eyes well developed, and
Polydesmus.

This form or variety would be, perhaps, mistaken for Lysiopetalum lac-
tarium, but it is true in all the generic details to Pseudotremia ; at the
same time it is what may be called a ‘‘twilight’’ species, living in small
caves in situations partially lighted. It is probably derived from L. lac-
tarium, or a closely allied species ; we doubt if it will ever be found living
in the same situations as L. lactarium.

—

=

——

Serre

1883. ] 1 89 (Packard.

Prof. Cope’s types were first’ found by him in Erhart’s cave, Mont-
gomery county, and Spencer Run and Big Stony Creek caves, in Giles
county, Pennsylvania ; also, in Lost Creek cave, on the Holston river, in
tranger county; and in other limestone caves of the valley of the Tennes-
see. Prof. Cope afterwards (Amer. Nat. vi, 14) discovered this species
in Wyandotte cave, remarking, ‘‘The species is quite distinct from that
of the Mammoth cave, and is the one I described some years ago from
saves in Virginia and Tennessee,’’

CRYPTOTRICHUS,* nov. gen.
Pseudotremia Cope (in part), Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xi, No. 82, 180,
1869.

The head seen from in front is wider than long, as usual in the family,
but the gene (or sides above the base of the jaws) are not so much swol-
len as usual, being muchas in Zygonopus; the front is broad and not
very long, and is distinctly marked by a ridge from the vertex. The eyes
are large, well-developed, prominent, and equilaterally triangular. The
antenne are large and slender, much more so than in Zrichopetahum or
Scoterpes, but not so long and slender as in Pseudotremia. The joints
have somewhat the same proportionate length as in the latter genus, but
while the second joint in Pseudotremia is about half as long as the third ;
in Cryptotrichus it is much longer, being about two-thirds as long as joint 3;
joints 2 and 4 are of the same length, while in Pseudotremia joint 4 is con-
siderably longer than joint 2; joint 5 is a little shorter than joint 3; joint
6 is very short and thick compared with that of Pseudotremia, being about,
one-third longer than thick, while in Pseudotremia the same joint is over
twice as long as thick and regularly clavate ; the terminal (seventh) joint
is oval, moderately short and thick, about twice as long as thick ; regu-
larly oval, with two or three sensory flattened hairs of the usual form.

The body consists of thirty segments, including the lateral anal plates ;
it is thick and rather short, having the general proportions of Trichopeta-
lum, The sete being of microscopic size, the segments (scuta) appear to
the naked eye to be naked and smooth ; each scutum (tergite) is divided
into two portions, an anterior plain and a posterior spotted portion, but
there are no ridges, and. but a single slightly prominent tubercle project-
ing backwards and situated a little below the middle of the side of the
tergite ; each of these tubercles, at least on the posterior half of the body,
directly sends off a fine seta which is directed backwards. From each of
the pale, equidistant spots, extending in a nearly straight line around the
posterior edge of each scutum arises a minute hair; the same spots in
front give rise to minute conical tubercles,

The legs are long and slender; as long as the body is thick.

No males have been obtained, so that the secondary sexual characters
cannot be here given.

* Kpbxrw, I conceal; Opts, THOS, hair; referring to the minute sete, difMi-
cult to detect,

Packard,] 190 [June 16,

In describing S. cwsoannulatus, forming the type of the genus, Dr.
Wood, in his ‘‘Myriopoda of North America,’’ p. 194, remarks: ‘ This
species ought, perhaps, to be the type of a new genus ; but, asI am unable
to make out the generic characters in this family, it seems preferable to
retain it in this for the present.’’

The genus may be recognized by its slender antenns, its smooth scuta,
and three transverse rows of setiferous pale dots; in these respects differ-
ing from Lysiopetalum and Pseudotremia,

CRYPTOTRICHUS CAJSLOANNULATUS (Wood).

Spirostrephon cusioannulatus Wood, Myr. N. Amer,, 194, Pl. ii, Fig. 14,
1865.
Pseudotremia vudit Cope, Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xi, No. 82, 180, 1869.

Two 2. Hyes equilaterally triangular, convex, prominent, black. Body
horn-brown in color, stained and spotted with darker brown. Head and
antenne concolorous, being dark purplish-brown ; antennex pale at the
articulations of the joints. Feet slightly paler than the antennx, whitish
at the articulations. Segments (scuta) dark brown on the posterior edge,
with three pale rounded distinct spots on each side, and a fourth spot be-
low, or eight in all; from the centre of these three upper spots, on each
side, arise short microscopic sets, A median pale dorsal impressed line
along the whole body, which dilates on the anterior part of each segment
into a short, broad diamond-shaped area, The extreme hinder edge is
smooth and pale, giving a transversely-banded appearance to the body.
In one of the two specimens the lower white dots are, towards the head,
more or less confluent, forming an irregular lunate spot. Length 15™™,

Two 2 specimens were kindly collected for me by Mr. C. L. Herrick,
either at Culmana, Ala,, or at Ocean Springs, Miss., the bottle containing
Myriopods from both those localities. Dr. Wood’s specimens were from
Allegheny county, Penna. ; and Prof. Cope’s examples were from Penn-
sylvania.

This isa rather characteristic form, owing to the transverse series of
light dots, and the linear pale transverse line on the hinder edge of each
segment, so that the specific name is well chosen. What Dr. Wood is
disposed to regard as ‘‘ pores,’’ appear to be slight tubercles, bearing sete
on the posterior half of the body. Ihave been thus far unable, with a
half-inch objective to detect any repugnatorial pores in this genus or any
except Lysiopetalum, but am not disposed to deny their existence. The
hairs are minute and mostly rubbed off in alcoholie specimens which have
been transported far. My specimens agree so well with Prof. Cope’s de-
scription that I do not doubt but that his Pseudotremia vudii is this species.
There seem to be no difference of importance. The dorsal impressed line
in my specimens is a faint crease, being neither a ‘‘keel’’ or ‘ groove.’’
Cope rem irks that it has twenty-nine segments ; his specimen was eleven
lines in length.

sini —

{4~o

1883. ] 191 [Packard,

This Myriopod is a rather characteristic form, and appears to range from
Pennsylvania to the Gulf States.

TricnorperaLuM Larger.
Trichopetalum Harger, Amer. Jour. Sc. Arts, iv, 118, 119, Aug., 1872.

Body rather short and thick, fusiform compared with the succeeding
genera, being thicker in the middle and tapering more towards each ex-
tremity than in Scoterpes and Zygonopus. Head of the general shape
of that of Zygonopus, the proportions of the front and vertex being about
the same; but the gena is much fuller, more globose, and the genal are:
is shorter and rounder. The eyes are present, black, the facets 10-19 in
number, arranged in two curvilinear series, the eye-patch being lunate in
shape. The antenne are short and thick, much more so than in Scoterpes,
pilose, with a few rather coarser sete than usual ; joint 2 is but slightly
more than half as long as joint 8, and rather shorter than joint 4; joint 3
is conside rably longer than joint 5, the latter being thick, subpyriform
and swollen toward the end; joint 6 is much swollen and rounded, and
about as thick as long ; the seventh or terminal joint is shorter than in any
other genus of the family, being rather shorter than in Scoterpes ; and
with two flattened sensory terminal sete. Number of body segments, 28-
31; number of pairs of legs in the female, 46. The legs are much shorter
than in Zygonopus. The scute are posteriorly a little swollen on the
sides, much less so than in the two following cave-genera ; the bosses
being not much over half as large ; from the upper part of the boss or
shoulder arise three warts or tubercles arranged as usual in a scalene tri-
angle, and giving rise to short, rather stiff sete, which are half as long as
the segment is thick.

In the male the three pairs of legs in front of the genital armature are
slightly longer than those behind or in front, but the seventh pair or that
directly in front of the rudimentary eighth pair are not swollen, nor do
they in any way resemble the swollen pair in Zygonopus. The eighth or
rudimentary pair are two-jointed, the outer joint without a claw, only
sending off a few small sete.

The genital armature is somewhat similar to that of Zygonopus, but
better developed. I could detect no lateral pores.

Mr. Harger gave the following diagnosis of the genus: ‘‘Sterna not
closely united with scuta; third and fifth joints of antenne elongated ;
scuta furnished with bristles; no lateral pores; eyes present.’’ He does
not attempt to give any generic characters drawn from the genitals, and
in his description of 7. lunatum, says: ‘‘The under side of the seventh
segment of the male (Fig. 8) is furnished anteriorly with a pair of appen-
dages directed backwards and curved upward,’’ and then describes the
rudimentary eighth pair of legs. Our description of the genus has been
drawn up from Mr. Harger’s types belonging to the Museum of Yale Col-
lege, kindly loaned us for study. On such examination as we could make
without dissection, the genital armature is evidently more perfectly devel-

Packard.] [June 16,

oped than in Zygonopus and Scoterpes, but a number of specimens are

needed for dissection before the structure can be clearly made out. The

number of segments is 28in 7. lunatum ; 80in T. culiotdes, and 81 in 7.

glomeratum. The genus appears to be distributed from the Atlantic to

the eastern slope of the Cascade mountains in Oregon, as well as on the

Pacific coast of Oregon. ‘

The following are the known species of the genus which have been de-

scribed by Mr. Harger :

Trichopetalum lunatum Harger, Amer. Jour. Se. and Arts, iv, 118, Aug.,
1872.* Ihave found in April several specimens
hybernating under leaves at Providence, R. I.

Trichopetalum glomeratum Harg., 1. ¢., 118, 1872. Valley of the John Day
river, Oregon,

Trichopetalum tuliotdes Harg., 1. c., 118, 1872. Simmon’s harbor, North
shore of Lake Superior.

Genus ScormRrPES Cope.
Spirostrephon (Pseudotremia) Pack., Amer. Naturalist, v, 748, Dec., 1871,
Scoterpes Cope, Amer. Naturalist, vi, p. 409, 414, July, 1872.

Body very long and slender, not fusiform ; consisting of thirty seg-
ments besides the head, and with about fifty-two pairs of legs, with the
penultimate joint very long. Head rather large, and unusually broad ;
no eyes present; the genw unusually large, extending high up on the
vertex, but not so globose as in Trichopetalum; the front is also car-
ried farther up on the vertex than usual, and is much broader than long ;
the clypeus flat, slightly bilobed on the front edge. The antenne are
moderately long and hairy, with the sixth segment scarcely longer than
in Trichopetalum, but more uniform in thickness, scarcely longer than
thick ; the terminal joint as long as the sixth, the end conical, more pro-
duced than in Trichopetalum or Zygonopus ; at the tip are four rather long
sense-sete. Body segments becoming as usual smaller next to the head ;
the anterior of each division of the arthromere much swollen high up on
the sides; each shoulder with three tubercles, which are arranged in a
scalene triangle and bearing much longer sete than in the other genera,
though not quite so long as the body is thick. The legs are long and
slender, much more sv than in Trichopetalum, and somewhat more so
than in Zygonopus. In the male the eighth pair of legs are rudimentary,
being two-jointed, the second joint only one-fourth longer than the basal,
and ending in a well-developed stout claw. The genital armature minute
and very rudimentary, pale, scarcely chitinous; the outer lamina short
and thick, with a stout external recurved spine, and two terminal obtuse
points ; the inner lamina shorter, forming a truncated angular spine, and
not much more than half as long as the outer lamina; between the inner
and outer lamina, its base next to the inner lamina is a middle spine end-

ing in an irregular tuft of fine spinules.

* Author’s extras, published July 18, 1872, New Haven, Conn,

+"

ee ees en

ae

ae

$x

TUE et ternnteetunaneneneerneeeenereertet

2
1883.] 193 (Packard,

The genus is distinguished from Trichopetalum by its want of eyes, its
broader head, its long slender body, with long sete, by the eighth pair of
female rudimentary legs ending in a claw. From Zygonopus it differs in
the shorter sixth antennal joint ; its broader head ; its slenderer legs, the
sixth pair in the female not being unlike the others, and by the more
prominent, shoulders and longer seta. The species of the two genera are
of the same general form and size.

The genus Scoterpes was proposed by Prof. Cope for the present species
in the American Naturalist for July, 1872, p. 414. The characters given
are the ‘lack of eyes and of lateral pores ;’’ the absence of the latter hav-
ing been ‘asserted by Dr. Packard.’’ Ignorant of the difference be-
tween the Mammoth cave blind Myriopod and Lysiopetalum, the latter
being the only genus of the family then known, we referred it to that
genus (Spirostrephon).

ScormrRrEs copxnr Cope.

Spirostrephon (Pseudotremia) coped Packard, Amer. Nat.,v, 748, Dec., 1871,
Scoterpes copet Cope, Amer. Nat., vi, 414, July, 1872.
Sptrostrephon copet Harger, Amer. Journ, Sc., iv, Aug., 1872.

Packard, Zoélogy, Edit, 1-8, 1879-81.

About 20 oi and 2 examined. Body white, with no dusky discolora-
tions ; 80 segments besides the head in specimens 11™™ in length and 52
Pairs of legs ; in one female individual 8"™" long there were 49 pairs of
legs, including the eighth or rudimentary pair; in other individuals 6m
long there are 24. segments behind the head. The head is provided with
short, fine erect hairs of different lengths, especially on the sides of the
Senex. In the absence of a second species, we cannot distinguish all the
Specific from the generic characters; for minor specific characters the
reader is referred to figures to be hereafter published by the Geological
Survey of Kentucky.

The males and females are alike in size and form.

The specimens were most abundant in the Labyrinth in Mammoth cave,
but also occurred in other localities in the cave. It is also common in
Diamond cave, where I collected it, and was discovered by Mr. Sanborn
in Poynter's cave, 800 yards from daylight. In one of the specimens
from the last-mentioned cave, the antennx were rather more slender than
usual,

The genus Scoterpes, and its single species copet, appears to be limited
to Mammoth eave and the others near, in apparently the same system of
caves. It was erroneously reported by me to occur in Weyer’s and the
Luray caves, as the specimens collected belong to Zygonopus whiter.
Without doubt the genus is a modified Trichopetalum, which has become
longer and slenderer in body, with longer legs and antenne as well as
sete ; whether it is a descendant of Trichopetalum lunatum or not is un-
certain ; it may have descended from a different species ; but there seems

PROC, AMER, PHILOS. 800. XXI. 114. Y. PRINTED SEPTEMBER 17, 1883.

Packard.) 194 {June 16,

to be no reasonable doubt but that it is a modified form of a small hairy
Lysiopetaloid form, with antennse exactly like those of Trichopetalum,

Zxeonopus Ryder.
Zygonopus Ryder, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., iii, 527, Feb. 16, 1881.

Body rather slenderer than in Scoterpes. The head differs from Sco-
terpes in being much narrower and higher, the swollen sides or gens
being much less swollen ; the vertex is swollen ; the front as broad as long
with the upper edge a little hollowed, but quite distinct from the vertex
itself. The eyes entirely wanting, as in Scoterpes. The antennex are
rather thick, and in this respect approach Scoterpes, but the sixth and
seventh joints are much longer, and rather more setose ; the sixth joint is
about two-thirds as thick as long, and the last (seventh) joint nearly twice
as long as thick. The sides of the segments are swollen subdorsally as in
Scoterpes, and the setiferous tubercles are arranged as in that genus, but
the setse are shorter; the lower posterior edges of the arthromeres below
the shoulder or hump is chased obliquely with fine impressed lines, The
feet are less in number than in Scoterpes. The diagnostic characters of the
genus lie in the remarkably swollen sixth pair of feet of the male, in which
the second joint is rather thick, while the third joint is long, and with the
fourth joint remarkably swollen, with a series of about nine oblique re-
tractor muscles diverging from the proximal end of the terminal joint,
which is long and slender and straight, with a well-developed claw. The
seventh pair of the male are of the normal form. The rudimentary or
eighth pair are like those of Trichopetalum, the second (terminal) joint
not ending in a claw, thus differing from those of Scoterpes. The male
genital armature is entirely unlike that of Scoterpes, though it is rudimen-
tary and minute ; the outer lamina consists of a basal subtriangular portion,
ending in a long slender curved spine, beneath which is a stouter spine,
shorter and less curved ; a minute median setose lamina is present, while
the inner lamina is a weak, slender setose filamentary outgrowth,

Mr. Ryder’s generic characters are stated very briefly, as follows:
«Sixth pair of legs very robust, and with the third joint greatly swollen.”’
The generic characters are not contrasted with those of Scoterpes.

This genus differs from Scoterpes in the remarkably swollen, clasping
sixth pair of legs, and in the male genital armature, while either sex dif-
fers from Scoterpes in the much narrower head, and longer sixth and
seventh antennal joints.

Zyaonopus waiter Ryder.
Spirostrephon copet Pack., Amer. Nat., xv, 231, March, 1881.
Zygonopus white: Ryder, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus,, iti, p. 527, Feb. 16, 1881.

Hight 3, 102. Body white, long and slender, number of segments 32.
Head with scattered, fine sete ; antenna with the second joint not quite
one-half as long as the third, which about equals the fifth in length, both

1883, ] 195 (Packard.

being rather long ; the sixth is thick, barrel-shaped, not quite one-half as
long as the fifth, but scarcely thicker; the seventh joint is unusually long,
a little more than three-fourths as long as the sixth joint ; the end thick
and well rounded, with the usual tactile large flattened sete ; the 3-7th
joints with long dense sete, a few in the end of joint 5 longer than any on
joints 6 and 7%. The sete on the body arise from tubercles arranged as
usual in a scalene triangle, and the sete themselves are half as long as the
body is thick; they are considerably shorter and finer than in Scoterpes.

The number of pairs of legs in the male is 47 ina specimen 8™ in length,
in the female there are 48 pairs. The sixth pair of legs of the male are
somewhat longer and much swollen, the suture between joints 8 and 4 is
very slight, the two joints together forming an ovate section of the leg a
little thicker than the length of the second joint ; terminal joint long and
slender, considerably longer than joints 8 and 4 together. The 2-jointed
eighth rudimentary pair of legs are longer-and larger than in Scoterpes
copei, the basal joint nearly twice as long, while the second (terminal)
joint is larger and swollen, and besides being larger, ends in three or four
fine minute setx, instead of a short claw, as in Scoterpes. Length 8™™,

The male genital armature is very minute and rudimentary, and has
already been described in a general way ; with but one species as yet
known, it would be unsafe to assign their specific characters. The two
inner lamine are quite unequal in length and development, and the arma-
ture in general shows signs of degeneration, as though the species had
originated from some form in which the male armature was more com-
pletely developed. Nine specimens were found by us in New Market
and Luray caves, and about twenty in Weyer’s cave, Virginia; Luray
cave, Virginia (Dr. C. A. White, Ryder).

This species in size and general appearance would be easily mistaken
for Scoterpes cope’, which we at first, from a too hasty examination, sup-
posed. it tobe. Mr, Ryder’s excellent description characterizes the spe-
cies, but his figures are indifferent, the third joint of the male is much
more swollen in our specimens; and the normal leg (his fig. 8) is drawn
too slender, while the front of the head is not correctly rendered. In our
Specimens drops of a yellowish secretion were attached in alcoholic speci -
mens to the base of many of the sete, indicating the presence of repugna-
torial glands, though no pores could be found, On breaking the body in two
nearly ripe eggs occurred in June; they were rounded, oval; length
about 3",

NOTE ON THE GENUS CAMBALA OF THE FAMILY JULID&.

CAMBALA Gray.

Julus Say, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phil., ii, 108, 1821.

Cambala T, B. Gray, Griffith’s Cuvier’s An. King, xiv, Insecta, i, pl. 185,
fig. 2, 2a, 2b, 2c, no deser., 1882.

Reasia R, Jones, Todd’s Oyclop. Anat. Phys., Art. Myriopoda, 546.

196 [June 16,

Packard. ]

Cambala Gervais, Newport, Annals and Mag. Nat. Hist., xiii, 266, 1844.
Aptéres, iv, 187, 1847.

Spirobolus (in part) Wood, Mgr. N. Amer., 212, 1865.

Cambala Cope, Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc., xi, No. 82, 181, 1869.

The essential, diagnostic characters of this genus are the linear eyes, the
long slender body, with keeled scutes ; while the antenn® are short, and
thick, much as in Spirobolus.

The body consists of 59 segments ; the scutes with high keel-like ridges,
The eyes are arranged in a linear row of ocelli, forming a straight line
situated far behind the insertion of the antenns, next to the front edge
of the first segment. The front of the head is somewhat longer than
broad; the surface full and convex as in Julus. Antenne are short and
unusually thick, more so than in Julus or Spirobolus ; 7-jointed, joint 2a
little longer and thicker than 8; fourth shorter and more clavate than
third ; fifth rather thicker at end than fourth, but of about the same length ;
sixth thicker than any of the other, about as long as fifth ; seventh very
short, round, no longer than broad. The feet are slender, not quite so
long as the hody is thick, On the fourth lower large ridge is a whitish
microscopic spot, which under a half inch objective is seen to be a short
acute tubercle; these are Say’s ‘‘stigmata,’’ but they occur on each seg-
ment, and are doubtless homologous with the setiferous tubercles in Tri-
chopetalum, etc.

The only species known has been mistaken for Lysiopetalum lactarvum
by Newport, Gray and Gervais, hence the synonymy of the two genera is
somewhat confused, Newport, adopting Mr. T, E. Gray’s MS. name
Cambala, was the first to characterize the genus, remarking, ‘‘I have de-
rived the characters of this genus from the specimens originally sent by Say
to Dr. Leach.”’ It is probable that Say by mistake sent an example of his
Julus annulata instead of a L. lactarium, as the two species would be easily
confounded, although his Julws annulatus must have been of course
familiar to him. The mistake was a natural one.

JAMBALA ANNULATA (Say) Cope.

Julus annulatus Say, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phil. if 108, 1821. :

Cambala lactarius T. EK, Gray, Griffith’s Cuvier’s Animal Kingdom, pl.
135, fig. 2, 2a, 2b, 2c. Insecta i, Vol. xiv, Vol. ti, 784, 1882.
Cambatd luctaria Newport, Annals and Mag. Nat. Hist. , xiii, 266, 1944,
Cambala lactarius Gervais, Ann. Soc. Entom. France, 1844.
Aptéres, iv, 187, 1847.
* Spirobolus annulatus Wood, Myr. N, Amer., 212, 1865,
Cambala annulata Cope, Proc. Amer, Phil. Soc., xi, , No. 82, 181, 1869.
Trans. Amer, Ent. Soc., iii, 66, May, 1870.

Body very long but blunt at the end, consisting of fifty-nine segments be-
sides the head ; eyes consisting each of six ocelli arranged in a straight line,
The first segment behind the head is smooth, about half ag long as wide,

aoe

1883.] 197 [Packard.

evenly convex, considerably broader than the head; the three succeeding
segments are of about the same length, and each are about half as long as
the fifth and succeeding segments. On the first segment are about ten bead -
like tubercles seen from above; on the third about eight longer tubercles
can be seen from above; on the fifth and succeeding segments there are
about nine dorsal and subdorsal high, prominent, thick, parallel ridges, be-
coming sharp behind. On the middle segments of the body about six
sharp ridges with broad hollow valleys between can be seen from above.
These are mounted on each side lower down by about twelve less distinct
ridges, becoming towards the lower edge of the scuta less and less convex
and distinct, until they are indicated by simple impressed lines. There are
thus about thirty ridges in all on each scute. The segments (arthromeres)
are short, and the smooth spaces between the rigid portions are very short
above. The color of the body is horn-brown, the head, feet and antenne
pale flesh-colored, and there is a dark median spot on the vertex between
the eyes. The ridges are darker than the rest of the body. Length 80™™,

Little Wyandotte cave, Indiana ; and Cave of Fountains next to Weyer’s
cave, Virginia (Packard), Zwingler’s cave, Carter’s cave, Kentucky (F. G.
Sanborn), Spruce Run cave in the Kanawha river, Giles Co., Va. (Cope).
One of the most abundant of the Myriopoda in the mountain region of
Tennessee and North Carolina (Cope).

This species is not unfrequently found in caverns, where DL. lactarium
more rarely occurs. This well-marked species may readily be distinguished
from Lysiopetalum lactarium by the very short, thick antenne, linear eyes,
and by the slenderer body, which, however, ends much more obtusely.
We know of but one other species of Julidie with the eyes arranged in a
linear series ; this is the Trachyjulus ceylonicus Peters of Ceylon, figured
by Humbert,

The cave specimens which we have found are partially bleached, the re-
sult of probably a limited number of generations in the darkness.

On the Morphology of the Myr seed By A. 8. Packard, Jr.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, June 16, 1883 ny

5

The following notes have reference to the hard parts especially of the
diplopod Myriopods :

The Head. In the Chilognaths, which are the more primitive and in
Some respects the lowest group of the sub-class, the Pauropoda excepted,
the structure of the head is on a much simpler type than in the Chilopoda.

The epicranium constitutes the larger part of the head ; it may be re-
garded.as the homologue of that of hexapodous insects. Of the clypeus
of Hexapoda there is apparently no true homologue in Myriopods ; in the
Lysiopetalid Chilognaths there is, however, an interantennal clypeal re-

Packard.) 198 [June 16,

gion slightly differentiated from the epicranium and forming the front of
the head. In the Chilopods there is no well-marked clypeus ; only a short,
narrow transverse preantennal clypeal region to which the labrum is at-
tached. Meinert, in his valuable and pains-taking work on Myriopods
designates what we here call the epicranium, the lamina cephalica ; the
division sometimes indicated in front next to the antenna, he calls lamina
Srontalis disereta,

The labrum in the Chilognaths is a short, but broad, sclerite, very per-
sistent in form, and not affording family or generic characters ; it is emar-
ginate on the sides, with a deep median notch containing three acute
teeth. The labrum may on the whole be regarded as homologous with
that of the Hexapoda, but is very broad and is immovable. Very differ-
ent is the so-called labrum of the Chilognaths, in which it consists of two
parts, a central portion which may be homologized with the labrum of the
Chilognaths, but is narrower, with a deep broad median notch at the bot-
tom of which is a central stout tooth.

In Orya barbarica Gerv., according to Meinert, the labrum has a me-
dian suture, dividing it into two pieces, each with numerous fine teeth on
the outer edge.

‘In Dignathon microcephalum Lucas (Meinert. Tab. ii, fig. 15), and in
Geophilus sodalis Bgs. and Mein., Meinert figures and describes the lab-
rum as consisting of pars media and two partes laterales, distinctly sepa-
rated by suture; no such differentiation as this is known to us as occur-
ring in the labrum of Hexapods,

This labrum is flanked on each side by a transverse sclerite, much
broader than long ; these pieces may be called the epilabra ; to the outer
edge of each is attached the cardo of the so-called mandible (protomala),
What we have for brevity called the epilabra (fig. 1) are the “lamine
fulcientes labri’’ of Meinert.*

The so-called mandibles of the Myriopods are the morphological equiva-
lents of those of insects, but structurally they are not homologous with
them, but rather resemble the lacinia of the hexapodous maxilla. For
this reason we propose the term protomala (mala, mandible) for the man-
dible of a myriopod ; mala would be preferable, but this has already been
applied by Schiddte to the inner lobes of the maxilla of certain Coleop-
terous larve.

The protomala consists of two portions, the cardo and stipes, while the
hexapodous mandible is invariably composed of but one piece, to which
the muscles are directly attached, and which corresponds to the stipes of
the myriopodous protomala, The stipes instead of being simply toothed,
or with a plain cutting edge, as in Hexapoda, has, in the Chilognaths, two

*Myriapoda Musaei Haurinensis. Bidrag til Myriapodernes Morphologi og
Systematik. Ved Fr. Meinert, af ‘‘ Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift,” 3 R.7B., Kjében-
havyn, 1871, p. 105. See Tab. i, fig. 4. Meinert states that the lamin fulcientes
do not belong to the labrum itself, and that the form of these pieces varies
greatly according to the species.

1883.) 19 9 (Packard,

outer unequal long teeth; and within, a series of singular processes like
stout sete: edged with dense spines on the inner side. This double appa-
ratus of teeth and spinose processes, which may be called the pectinedla,
gives the stipes a decided resemblance to that of the hexapodous maxilla.
In the Chilopoda, according to the figures and description of Meinert,
there is a greater variation in the nature of the pectinella of the stipes.
As we have observed in the protomala of Scolopendra and Lithobius,
there are three or more stout teeth, with an inner series of spinulated
slender processes; but in several genera figured by Meinert, as Mesocan-
thus’ albus Mein., Scolioplanes crassipes Koch, Ohetechelyne vesuviana
Newp., @eophilus sodalis Bgs. and Mein., and Mecistocephalus punctifrons
Newp., the cutting edge is provided with spinose processes alone.

For the second pair of mouth appendages of the Myriopoda we propose
the term deutomala, or second pair of jaws. They form the so-called
labium of Savigny and later authors. In the Chilognaths they have a su-
perficial resemblance to the labium of winged insects ; but the correspond-
ing pair of appendages in Chilopoda are not only unlike the labium of
Nexapoda, but entirely different in structure from the homologous parts
in Chilognaths. The ‘“labium’’ of Newport, or first maxille of Meinert,
have been described and figured by those authors, to whose works the
reader is referred.

‘The following remarks apply to the homologues of these parts in the
Chilognaths. While most authors designate this pair of appendages as the
‘Jabium,’? Meinert more correctly calls them the first maxille, briefly
in the Latin abstract of his ‘‘Danmark’s Chilognather’’* in his diagnosis of
the order describing them as ‘‘ Stipites maaitlares appendicibus instructi,
detecti ;’’ but in his description of Julus referring to them as ‘ Lamina la-
bialis parva, stipites labiales modo partim sejungens.”’

Meinert aiso describes what he designates as a third pair of mouth-parts,
or labium, which is enclosed by the second pair, behind which is a trian-
gular plate (Lamina labialis) which he regards as a sternal part, correspond-
ing to the mentum of insects. He then adds: ‘‘In front of the labium
in the Polydesmide are two short round styles (stilt linguales), which are
toothed at the end.’? He also speaks of the curved piece behind the
laminia labialis, which he designates as the hypostoma (see our fig. 2).

It should be observed that Savigny states that the labium (lévre infévi-
eure) isin Julus composed of what he designates as the first and second
maxille ; his second maxille being Meinert’s labium.

It seems to us that the researches of Metschnikoff+ on the embryology
of the Chilognaths (Strongylosoma, Polydesmus and Julus) leave no
doubt that these myriopods have but two pairs of mouth-appendages,
which Metschnikoff designates as mandibles and labium. The latter
arises as a pair of tubercles or buds, at first of exactly the form of the man-

*Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift. 8 R. 5 B.
tEmbryologie der doppeltfussigen Myriapoden (Chilognatha), Von Elias
Metschnikoff. Zeitschrift far Wissenschaft. Zoologie, xxiv, 253, 1874.

6
-ackard.] 200 (June 16,

dibles, and like the primitive embryonic mouth-appendages of any arthro-
pod. Hence the differentiations of parts and coalescence of the two limbs,
while closely resembling that of the labium or second maxille of hexapods,
really occur in Myriopods in a different pair of appendages, 7. ¢., the second
instead of the third pair. Hence the parts called labium (many authors)
in Myriopods are really homologous with the first maxillee of insects ; and
they should, to prevent misconception, receive a distinctive name (deuto-
male). With the aid, then, of embryology we have arrived at a clearer
conception of the homologies of the second pair of mouth-appendages in
the Chilognaths. It formsa broad flat plate, becoming the floor df the
mouth, and forming an under lip; it is differentiated into two sets of broad
plates, an outer and inner stipes; the outer stipes (stipes ewterior) bears at
the free edge two movable toothed appendages, which may be designated
as the inner and outer malellw. The inner stipes (stipes interior), are
united firmly, and are supported behind by what Meinert designates as the
lamina labialis, behind which is a curved, broad sclerite called by Meinert,
the hypostoma ; a rather unfortunate name, as it has been used by Meigen
and Bouché for the clypeus of Diptera. Differentiated from the front edge
of the inner stipes, is a piece usually separated by suture, which, as we un-
derstand it, is the stelus linguahs of Meinert ; it is our malulella. A. median
portion of the deutomala has been apparently overlooked by authors ; it is
our labiella (fig. 2), and corresponds in a degree to the lingua of
hexapods ; it is a minute rounded piece situated between the malulelle ;
in Julus minute and single; in the Lysiopetalide much larger, and divided
into a large anterior, and a much smaller posterior crescent-shaped part ;
it is supported by two long cylindrical divaricating styles.

It thus appears that the head of Chilognaths bears but three pairs of ap-
pendages, viz., the antenns, and the mouth-appendages, the proto and
deutomale. Without doubt the Chilognaths, as proved by their embry-
ology and morphology, and their close relationship with the Pauropoda, the
simplest. Myriopods, represent the primary form of the Myriopods, while
the Chilopods are a secondary, less primitive group. Paleontology appa-
rently supports this view. We may now turn to the structure of the head
of Chilopod Myriopoda, which has been fully described by Newport,* and
also by Meinert.+

Having already briefly described the morphology of the epicranium or
antennal segment of Chilopods, with the labrum and ‘‘ mandibles ’’ (pro-
tomale = ‘‘true maxille’’ of Newport), which are close homologues of
those of diplopod myriopods, we may next take upthe second pair of mouth-
appendages, which are the morphological equivalents of the so-called la-
bium of Chilognaths. These, as seen in Scolopendra, are very different

* Monograph of the class Myriopoda, Order Chilopoda; with Observations on
the general arrangement of the Articulata, By George Newport, Trans. Linn.
Soc., xix, p. 287.

+Myriapoda Mussei Hauniensis Bidrag til Myriapodernes Morphologi og
Systematik ved Fr. Meinert, Af Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift, 3 R. 7 B., 1871.

Se

——

a a et See SS

oo

1883, ] 201 [Packara,

from the so-called under lip of Chilognaths ; they are not united, and are
separate, cylindrical, fleshy, 5-jointed appendages, but as Newport states
“connected transversely at their base with a pair of soft appendages (c, ¢),
that are situated between them, and which, as I have already stated, I re-
gard as the proper lingua, as they form the floor of the entrance to the
pharynx.’ These 5-jointed appendages are Mr. Newport’s ‘‘ maxillary
palpi;’’ his true maxille being the homologues of the ‘‘mandibles”’ of
Chilognaths,

The portion of the head of Scolopendra and other Chilopods, thus far
considered, together with the antenne and proto and deutomale, we con-
sider as homologous with the entire head of Chilognaths ; the basilar seg-
ment of Newport, and the two pairs of head-appendages have no homo-
logues in the head of Chilognaths. They are rather analogous to the
maxillipedes of Crustacea, and nothing like them, speaking morphologi-
sully, exist in other Tracheata. We therefore propose the term malipedes
(mala, jaw ; pes, foot, or jaw-feet) for the fourth and fifth pair of cephalie
appendages of Chilopoda. At the same time it is easy to see that they are
modified feet; especially when we examine the last pair in Scolopendra,
which are attached to a true sternite, and see that they are directly homo-
logous with the feet and sternite of the same animal.

The first pair of malipedes are the ‘labium and palpi’? of Newport ;
the ‘first, auxiliary lip’’ of Savigny. They, however, bear little resem-
blance to an insect’s labium and labial palpi. They are separate, not coa-
lescing in the middle as in the labium of Hexapods. The so-called labial
palpi are 4-jointed, with an accessory plate. They arise directly in front
of the ‘basilar segment’’ of Newport, but appear to have in adult life no
tergite of their own.*

The second pair of malipedes or last pair of mouth-appendages, are the
poison fangs ; they are the ‘second auxillary lip” of Savigny ; the ‘‘man-
dibles or foot-jaws’’ of Newport and subsequent authors. The dorsal plate,
or what may be called the second malipedal tergite is the ‘basilar and sub-
basilar plate’? of Newport.

As to the number of segments in the head of Chilognaths, both mor-
phology and embryology prove that there are but three ; in the Chilopoda
five, Newport’s observation on the young recently hatched Geophilus
(his Pl. xxxiii, fig. 3), shows that the sub-basilar plate is the tergum or
scute of the fifth segment; and the basilar plate is consequently the
tergum of the fourth segment, or second malipedal segment. The ster-
nite of the sub-basilar plate is usually a very large plate, deeply in-
dented in front in the middle, with teeth on each side, and forms the ‘‘la-
bium’”’ of Newport. It may for convenience in descriptive zoology be
termed the ‘‘pseudolabium.’’

>

* Balfour also states, as we find after writing the above, that the basilar plate
is really the segment of the poison claws, and may fuse more or less completely
with the segment in front and behind it, and the latter is sometimes without a
pair of appendages (Lithobius, Scutigera) Comp. Embryology, i, p. 225,

PROC, AMER. PHILOS. SOC, XXI. 114. Z. PRINTED SEPTEMBER 17, 1883.

Packard.] 202 [June 16,

As embryological proofs of our morphological views may be taken the
admirable researches of Metschnikoff* on the development of Geophilus.
His Taf. xx, fig. 4, shows plainly the four pairs of mouth-appendages be-
hind the antenne, the latter developed as in Hexapods from the proce-
phalic lobes. His fig. 15 shows that the pleurum and tergum of two poste-
rior (or fourth and fifth) cephalic arthromeres, with their appendages, are
the primitive scuta of the proto and dentomalar arthromeres which at this
period have coalesced, and are intimately united with the procephalic lobes.
His fig. 18 shows that at a later peviod the primitive scuta of the fourth
cephalic segment has disappeared, or at least is merged into the fifth
primitive scuta or sub-basilar plate of the adult. An examination of
Metschnikoff’s paper will prove conclusively that Newport’s views as
to the sub-segments of the chilopods are not well founded in nature ; and
that they are merely for the most part simply adult superficial markings.

The following table will serve to indicate, in a comparative way, the
number of arthromeres in the head of the three sub-classes of Tracheate
arthropods, their corresponding appendages, and the more important syn-
onyms:

Hexapoda. | Arachnida, Myriopoda. Myriopoda,
| (Chilopoda ) | (Chilognatha.)
nt Boma Antennee, Wanting.t Antenne. Antenne,
reoral)
2d Arthromere|Mandibula. Chelicerese.t Protomale. Protomale.
(Postora]) (Mandibles.) (Mandibles Sa-|(Mandibles Sa-
vigny.) vigny.)
8d Arthromere|ist Maxille. (Pedipalpi, Deutomale. Deutomale.
maxillee.)} (1st Maxillee Sa-|(Labium.)
| | BET tot A
4th . ../2d Maxillee. Ist pair of bee-|Ist Malipedes, |2d pair of Pedes.
nopoda. (Ist Auxiliary
| lip, Savigny.)
5th. ti aero or vidas -».(2d pair of bee-|2d Malipedes.|2d pair of Pedes.
| nopoda, (Auxiliary
lip, Savigny;
Mandibles.)
6th bi ..|Ist pair of bee-/8d pair of bee-|Ist pair of Pedes|3d pair of Pedes.
nopoda. nopoda.

General Morphology of the Body. The well-known researches of New-
port on the development of Julus, and the embryological studies of Met-
schnikoff already referred to, show that the larva of Julus and other diplo-
pod myriopods is hatched with but three pairs of feet. In Julus terrestris,
as stated by Newport, the 8d body-segment is apodous; the 1st, 2d and
4th segments behind the head bearing feet. The number of body-segments
are at first 9; the new segments appearing six at a time. In Strongy-

* Embryologisches, tiber Geophilus. Von Elias Metschnikoff. Zeitschrift far
Wissenschaft. Zodlogie, xxv, p. 818, 1875.

+ Balfour claims that the Ist pair of cephalic apppendages are wanting; and
the fact shown by his Fig. 200 C, D, that the stomodseum at first lies between the
procephalic lobes, and that the latter do not even bear appendages appears to
prove his statement,

{On the Organs of Reproduction and the Development of the Myriopoda
Phil, Trans,, 1841,

1888, ] 203 (Packard.

losoma, according to Metschnikoff, the larva has eight segments behind
the head, the second segment footless ; in Polydesmus there are but seven
body-segments, the second apparently being apodous, though it is difficult
to determine with certainty from the drawing which of the three first
segments is apodous.

In two embryos of Julus multistrratus Walsh? kindly communicated to
us by Prof. Riley, and which he assures us were freshly hatched right from
the egg, the larve are much more advanced than in the freshly-hatched
larve referred to ; still the second body-segment ts footless instead of the third;
but there are seventeen segments, the Ist, 8d and 4th each bearing a sin-
gle pair of legs; the 5th-10th segments each bearing two pairs of legs.
In one of the three specimens, which was apparently a little longer out of
the egg than the two others, there were five penultimate short secondary
segments (11th-15th) on which there were rudiments apparently of but a
single pair of legs to each segment, whereas Newport states that two pairs
bud out from each segment, and while in Julus terrestris the new segments
arise in sixes, in our species they arise in fives. In adult life a single pair
of limbs arises from the second segment, and the first three segments each
have but one pair of legs, the fourth having two as in the fifth and fol-
lowing segments,

It thus appears that the larval diplopod Myriopod is a six-footed Trach-
eate, though neither its mouth-parts nor primary legs are directly homolo-
fous with those of the Hexapodous insects.

Looking at the embryo diplopod Myriopod from a deductive or specula-
tive point of view, it doubtless represents or is nearly allied to what was
the primitive myriopodous type, a Tracheate, with a cylindrical body,
whose head, clearly separated from the hind body, was composed of three
cephalic segments, one pair of antennex, succeeded by two postoral arthro-
meres, the protomalal and deutomalal arthromeres ; while the hind body
consisted of as few as seven arthromeres, whose scuta nearly met beneath,
with three pairs of six-jointed legs distributed among the first four seg-
ments. It is evident that the form represented by the adult is a secondary
later product, and arose by adaptation to its present form. The embryo
Geophilus, the only Chilopod whose embryology has been studied, leaves
the egg in the form of the adult; it has, unlike the diplopods, no meta-
morphosis. Its embryological history is condensed, abbreviated.

But in examining Metschnikoft’s sketches, primitive Chilognath charac-
ters assert themselves ; the body of the embryo shortly before hatching is
cylindrical ; the sternal region is much narrower than in the adult, hence
the insertion of the feet are nearer together, while the first six pairs of ap-
pendages (the sixth apparently the first pair of feet of the adult) are indi-
cated before the hinder ones. These features indicate that the Chilopoda
probably arose from a diplopod or diplopod-like ancestor, with a cylindri-
cal body, narrow sternites and with three pairs of legs, which represent
those of the larval Chilognaths, the two anterior becoming the two pairs of
malipedes of the present Chilopoda, Thus the first six appendages of the

6
204 (June 16,

Packard.]

embryo Geophilus correspond to the antenne, two pairs of mouth-parts
and three pairs of legs of the larval Julus.

The phenomenon of two pairs of limbs to a segment, so unique in Tra-
cheata, may be explained by reference to the Phyllopoda among the
Branchiata. The parallel is quite exact. The larvee in both groups have
but a single pair of appendages to a segment; the acquisition of a second
pair in the diplopods is clearly enough a secondary character, and perhaps
necessary in locomotion in a cylindrical body with no sterna.*

The larval Julusand the ancestral Chilognaths were hexapod Tracheata,
but sufficiently different to indicate plainly that the Myriopods branched
off from a much more primitive form than the Scolopendrella-like hexapod
ancestor, and which form somewhat agrees with our hypothetical lepti-
form ancestor of all Tracheata,

The Myriopods also differ from Hexapoda in that the genital armature
of the male (the females have nothing corresponding to the ovipositor of
Hexapoda) is not homologous with that of true insects ; moreover, the
armature is not homologous with the limbs or jointed appendages of the
myriopodous body. On the contrary, the apparatus of hooks arises from
the sternum of the sixth segment, between, but a little in advance of the
origin of the eighth pair of legs. It should be observed that the legs in
Myriopods are outgrowths between the tergites and sternites, there being
no pleurites differentiated, and in this important point also, the myriopods
are quite unlike the Hexapodous Tracheates.

Affinity and systematic position of the Pauropoda. The nearest living
forms which approaches the larval Diplopod are Pauropus and Eury-
pauropus. These organisms are practically primitive diplopods. Looking
at the lowest Chilognath, Polyvenus, and comparing Pauropus with it, it
will be seen that the latter scarcely differs from it ordinally. Pauropus
has a head with a pair of antenne and two pair of mouth-appendages,
The antenne are quite unlike any other myriopods, being 5-jointed and
bifurcate, somewhat as in certain Coleopterous larve ; the peculiar sense
filaments may be the homologues of the flattened sense-sete at the end of
the antenne of Diplopod Myriopods.

The ‘‘mandibles’’ are rudimentary, very simple, and are scarcely more
like Chilopod than diplopod protomale ; there is a second pair of append-
ages which, as Lubbock states, are ‘‘minute and conical ;’’ they bear a
closer resemblance in position and general appearance to the ‘‘under lip ”’
of Chilognaths, especially the under lip of Siphonophora ; in fact, the

*Tt is plain that, as Balfour suggests, Comparative Embryology p. 824, the
double segments have not originated from a fusion of two primitively distinet
segments. There is, however, a misconception as to the nature of the double
segments.” They are not so in fact. The scutes are single, undivided, but the
ventral region is alone imperfectly double, bearing two pairs of append-
ages, just as single segments of Apodidse may bear from 2-6 appendages; the
differentiation is confined to the ventral limb-bearing region and limbs alone;
the dorsal part of the segment does not share in the process,

1883, ] 205 [Packard,

mouth-appendages of Pauropus are much nearer the normal type of those
of the true Chilognaths than the degraded mouth-organs of the Sugentia.

The body of Pauropus is cylindrical, the scutes are as much like those of
Polyxenus as those of the Chilopods; the number of body segments ‘is
seven, the same as in the larve of certain Diplopods; the feet are 6-jointed
as in Diplopods, and there are nine pairs, six pairs to the four penultimate
segments. The three anterior pairs are developed from two segments,
#. @, arise from the ventral and lateral sclerites corresponding to two
scutes. This fact should not, we venture to suggest, exclude them from
the Chilognaths, as there is a considerable irregularity in the positions of
the three pairs of anterior feet in larval Chilognaths. The terminal body-
segment is much as in Chilognaths. When we examine the larva of Pau-
ropus, we find a strong resemblance to the larval hexapodous Chilognaths.
Hence we scarcely see good grounds for placing Pauropus in a distinct
order from Chilognaths. Their distinctive characters, and they are im-
portant ones, are we submit. only of subordinate value, and we should
therefore place the Pauropoda as the second sub order of Chilognaths,
throwing all the genuine Chilognaths into a first sub-order,

Turning to Eurypauropus, we find that this singular form is in a degree
& Connecting link between Pauropus and Polyxenus; the head has much
the same shape, the antennw being inserted beneath far back from the
front edge of the broad top; the legs are much the same shape, and more
truly diplopod than in Pauropus, as they are arranged nearly in two pairs
to a segment; there are six segments, four of them bearing legs, there
being nine pairs of legs to four scuta, The scutes are much as in Polyx-
enus, spreading out flat on the sides, the animal being elliptical oblong,
broad and flat. There are no true sternites like those of Chilopods, and
though the feet are inserted wider apart, the entire structure of the soft,
membranous sternal region is much as in Polyxenus. We therefore feel
warranted, although originally accepting the ordinal rank of the Pauropoda,
assigned them by Sir John Lubbock, in regarding them as Chilognaths,
with aberrant features which would throw them into a suborder of the
latter group.

The Systematic Position of Scolopendrella. ‘This singular form is usually
regarded as a Myriopod, while Mr, Ryder refers it to a distinct order,
Symphyla. We have already* given our reasons for the view that it
is a Thysanuran,| with only superficial resemblances to the Chilopod
Myriopods. Our fresh studies on the latter confirm our opinion. that
the Scolopendrella is a hexapod. The mandibles and mavxille, the
former especially, are like those of the Thysanura, rather than the myrio-
pods, not being divided into two parts (stipes and cardo). It seems to us
that Scolopendrella with its numerous postcephalic legs may fulfill the

* American Naturalist, xv, 698, Sept. 188i.

+ Compare the excellent figures of the mouth-parts of Seolopendrella in Dr, I.
Muhr, Die Mundtheile in Scolopendrella und Polyzonium, loer Jahresbericht
Uber das Deutsche Staats Gymnasium in Prag-Altstadt, 1881-2. Prag, 1882.

OYAYA
206 [June 16,

Packard.)

phylogenic requirements of the early embryo of Hexapoda and Arachnida
in which there are a number of embryonic primitive abdominal append -
ages. Thus it preceded Campodea as a stem-form.

Genealogy of the Myriopoda. The pseudo-hexapodous larval forms of
Chilognatha, including the Pauropoda and the early germ of the Chilopoda
(Geophilus), indicate that the many-legged adults were derived from what
we have called a Leptus-form ancestor. Our present knowledge of the
embryology of the Myriopoda shows that unlike the Arachnida and Hexa-
poda the embryo is not provided with primitive, transitory legs. There
seems then no direct proof that the Myriopoda had an origin common with
that of insects and arachnida, from a Scolopendrella-like, and perhaps still
earlier Peripatus-like ancestor; but from a six-legged form, which, however,
may have been derived from some worm-like ancestor. The Leptus-form
larva of Myriopoda, with their three pairs of cephalic appendages and six
legs, may, then, be the genealogical equivalent of the six-legged Nauplius
of Crustacea; which type is generally believed to have originated from
the worms.

A genealogical tree of the Myriopods would then be simply two
branches, one representing the diplopod and the other the single paired
type (Chilopoda), both originating from a Leptus-like six-footed ancestor
(i. ¢., with three pairs of cephalic and three pairs of postcephalic append -
ages).

Dr. Erich Haase in his ‘‘ Beitrag zur Phylogenie und Ontogenie der
Chilopoden’’ publishes a ‘*stammbaum der Protochilopoden.’’ He pro-
poses a hypothetical group, Protosymphyla, from which the Symphyla,
Thysanura and Chilopoda have originated. But, as we have seen, this view
is based on mistaken views as to the relations of the Chilopods to the dip-
lopod Myriopods, and of the homologies of Myriopods with insects. As we
have seen, the Chilopods must have originated from a Chilognathous stock,
or at least from a branch which arose from Pauropus-like forms, and the
Thysanura, with Scolopendrella, must have arisen from a separate main
branch, which led to the Hexapodous branch of the Arthropod genealogi-
cal tree.

For the reason stated, also, we should disagree with the views of Haeckel
(Naturliche Schépfungsgeschichte, 1870, 2d edit.) that the Diplopod My-
riopods were derived from the Chilopoda. In the English transaction
(1876) he remarks. ‘‘ But these animals also originally developed out of a
six-legged form of Tracheata, as is distinctly proved by the individual de-
velopment of the millipede in the egg. Their embryos have at first only
three pairs of legs, like genuine insects, and only at a later period do the
posterior pairs of legs bud, one by one, from the growing rings of the hinder
body. Of the two orders of Centipedes * * * * the round double-
footed ones (Diplopoda), probably did not develop until a later period out
of the older flat, single-footed ones (Chilopoda), by successive pairs of rings
of the body uniting together. Fossil remains of the Chilopoda are first men-
tioned in the Jura period.’? The Chilognaths, however, as shown by Daw-

i
;
i]
}

1882, | 207 [Packard

FT?

Oo Oy pe “AL REGION ~~

sresenm EPILABRUM,
Fi 79.1,

MALULELLA rad)

mug ma ve -

MOUTH-PARTS OF MYRIOPODS,

208 [June 16,

Packard.]

gon, Meek and Worthen, and lately by Scudder, were numerous as far
back as the Carboniferous period ; the Chilopods are the later produc-
tions ; perhaps not older than the Tertiary period, since Munster’s Geophi-
lus prawus is a doubtful form.

In this connection, reference should be made to the singular fossil, Pa-
leocampa, from the Carboniferous formation of Illinois, originally de-
scribed as a caterpillar-like form by Meek and Worthen, and lately
claimed to be a Myriopod by Mr. Scudder,* who proposes for the hypo-
thetical groups, of which he considers it as the type, the name, Protosyn-
gnatha. Tt seems to us, after a careful reading of Mr. Scudder’s article,
that this obscure fossil presents no features really peculiar to the Myrio-
pods; but that there are as good or better reasons for regarding it as the
hairy larva of some Carboniferous neuropterous insect. Mr. Scudder de-
scribes it substantially thus: ‘It is a caterpillar like, segmented creature,
three or four centimeters long, composed of ten similar and equal seg-
ments, besides a small head; each of the segments, excepting the head,
bears a single pair of stout, clumsy, subfusiform, bluntly-pointed legs, as
long as the width of the body, and apparently composed of several equal
joints. Each segment also bears four cylindrical but spreading bunches
of very densely packed, stiff, slender, bluntly tipped, rod-like spines, a
little longer than the legs. The bunches are seated on mammille and
arranged in dorsopleural and lateral rows,’’

We do not recognize in this description any characters of a myriopodous
nature ; on the contrary, in what is said about the head, ‘‘composed of only
a single apparent segment’’ (p. 165), and of the legs in the above descrip-
tion, and again on p. 165, where it is remarked: ‘‘ The legs were different,
in form [from modern Chilopoda], but their poor preservation in the only
specimen in which they have been seen, prevents anything more than the
mere statement of the following difference ; while the legs of Chilopoda
are invariably horny, slender, adapted to wide extension and rapid move-
ment, those of Paleocampa are fleshy, or at best subcoriaceous, very
stout and conical, certainly incapable of rapid movement, and serving
rather as props,’’ the author appears to be describing rather a caterpillar-
like form thana Myriopod. It seems to us that the larve of the neuropter-
ous Punorpide, with their two-jointed abdominal prop-legs, small head
and singularly large spinose spines, arising in groups from a tubercle or
mammilla, come nearer to Paleocampa than any Myriopod with which
science is at present acquainted. or these reasons, and while the nature
of these fossils is so problematical, we should exclude them, as regards
the Myriopods, from any genealogical considerations,

We have also attempted to show that the Archypolypodat} are a subdi-

*The Affinities of Palseeocampa Meek and Worthen, as evidence of the wide
diversity of type in the earliest known Myriopods, by Samuel H. Scudder.

Amer. Journ. Science, xxiv, No, 141, p. 161, Sept, L882,
+The Systematic Positions of the Archipolypoda, a Group of Fossil Myrio-
pods. Amer, Naturalist, 826, March, 1883.

\
|

188.] 209

vision of Chilognaths, allied not remotely to the Lysiopetalidse ; or at
least that they are true diplopod Myriopods. Hence we are still reduced
for our materials for a phylogeny of the Myriopods to existing orders, Pau-
ropus being, perhaps, a more aberrant and stranger type than any fossil
forms yet discovered.

EXPLANATION OF THE FIGURES.

Fig. 1. Head of Scolopendra, seen from beneath, showing the ‘“mandible’’
(protomala) with its cardo (card.) and stipes (stv. ), also the labrum
and epilabrum.

Fig. 2. So-called under lip or deutomala of Scoterpes copet ; hyp., “ hypo-
stoma ;’? lam. lad., lamina labialis ; stp. ¢., stipes exterior; with
the malella eaterior (mal. e.) and malella interior (ml. 7.) ; the
stipes interior (stip. ¢.), with its malulella; and the labdella, with
its stilus (stil.).

Fig. 8. The deutomala of Julus sp. ; the lettering as in Fig. 2. Author
del,

Stated Meeting, May 18, 1888.
Present, 9 members.
President, Mr. Frauey, in the Chair.

Dr. Heilprin, a newly-elected member, was introduced to
the presiding officer, and took his seat.

A. letter requesting a renewal of correspondence was received
from the Keyptian Institute.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Royal
Societies at Amsterdam and Munich.

Letters of envoy were received from the Heyptian Institute,
and the Royal Academy at Munich.

Letters requesting No. 95 from the Manchester Literary and
Philosophical Society, April 26; and requesting 102, 108, 104,
from the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, April 20, were
read and referred,

Donations were received from the Egyptian Institute; Cen-
tral Observatory at St. Petersburg; Royal Geological Insti-

PROC. AMER. PHILOZ. SOU. XXI. 114, 24. PRINTED OoTOBER 30, 1883.

210 [May 18,

tute and Anthropological Society at Vienna; Royal Academy
and Observatory at Munich; the National Verein, at Bonn ;
Société de Géographie and Revue Politique at Paris; Société
de Géographie Commerciale at Bordeaux ; Royal Academies at
Modena and Bruxelles; the Geographical and Geological So-
cieties and London Nature; Literary and Historical Society
of Quebec; Boston Natural History Society; Prof. 0. A.
Young; Numismatic, Antiquarian and Zodlogical Societies,
at Philadelphia; the Library of Congress, Bureau of Eduea-
tion, Engineer Department, and the Philosophical Society, at
Washington; the Chicago Historical Society; and the Bra-
zilian School of Mines.

Photodynamic Notes, No. VIII, by Pliny Earle Chase, were
read by title.

A note on the relic of the native flora of Pennsylvania,
surviving in Perry county, by Professor EK. W. Claypole, was
read by the Secretary, and specimens of the plant, Vaccinium
brachycerum Mich., were exhibited.

Minutes of the last meeting of the Board of Officers and
Members in Council were read.

Mr. Fraley reported that, after conference with Dr. Brinton,
he could recommend to the Society to accept the proposed
gift. On motion, the recommendation was approved and

adopted. (See MS. minutes.)

Pending nominations, Nos. 985, 986, and new nominations,

Nos. 987 to 1004, were read.

A Committee of Five, to co-operate with other Societies in
extending an invitation to the A. A. F. A.S. to hold their
meeting of 1884 at Philadelphia, was appointed, consisting of
Dr. Brinton, Dr. Barker, Mr. Lesley, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr.,
and Mr. Wm. M. Davis. On motion of Dr. Frazer, the Com-
mittee was requested to ascertain if measures can be taken to
secure the fixing of a date for the meeting of the Geological
Congress at Berlin such as would permit those who have par-
ticipated in the A. A. F. A. S. meeting to be present at the

Congress.
And the meeting was adjourned,

|

—_

1888,] PAM E

Stated Meeting, June 16, 1883.
Present, 5 members.
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Royal
Academy at Lisbon (109, 110, 111), and Royal Academy at
Amsterdam (109),

Letters of seid were received from the Royal Avademy at
Lisbon, June, 1882; the Museum Teyler; the Société Holland-
aise, March 30; the Royal Academy at Amsterdam, March 1;
and the Surgeon General’s Office, Washington, June 6.

Letters from M. J. Vidal, at Cairo; M. Gaston Planté,
Paris; Dr. A. S. Packard, Jr, Providence, R. I.; Edmund
Gol damit) of Hdinburgh; and Mr. A. R. Grote, of Buffalo,
were read,

Donations for the Library were received from the Acade-
mies at Amsterdam and Rome; the Societies at Salem, Boston
and Worcester ; the Trigonometrioal Survey of India; the
Holland Societ ty, and Museum Te eae Dr. G. D. H. Weyer,
of Kiel; the Geographical Societies at Paris and Hoek:
Revue Polisianne, and Keole des “Minal: British eooauon,
Victoria Tnstitute, Royal Astronomical, pull Antiquarian ts.
ties and London Nature; Canadian Institute ; Cambridge Mu-
Seum; Medical Journal; New York Observatory; Rutger’s
College ; Franklin Institute, Historical Society, College of
Pharmacy, H. Phillips, Jr, and Dr. P. Frazer; American
Chemical Journal; Smithsonian Institution, National Muse-
um, Engineers’ Devartinant Bureau of uaision and Fish
Commission : Wabash College; Medical Journal, at Indian-
apolis; and tite Ministerio de Fomento,

The death of Col. Robert S. Williamson, at San Fr: WNCISCO,
Noy. 11, 1882 2, was Kubbeaabd by Dr. Horn,

The di sath of the Hon. Judge George Sharswood, at Phila-
delphia, May 28, 1883, aged 78, was announced by Mr. Fraley.

o

5
212 [July 20,

Dr. A. S. Packard, Jr., of Providence, R. I., communicated,
through Prof. Cope,—

1. A revision of the Lystopetalidw, a family of Chilognath
myriopoda; with a notice of the genus Cambala, (See page
177, 195.)

2. On the Morphology of the Myriopoda, with a plate. (See
page 197.)

Mr. A. R. Grote, of Buffalo, communicated : An Introduc-
tion to the North American Noctwidwe. (See page 184.)

Pending nominations, Nos. 985 to 1004, were read,

And the meeting was adjourned.

Stated Meeting, July 20, 1883.
Present, 4 members.
Curator, Dr. Horn, in the Chair.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Royal
Library, Berlin (112); the Wiirtemberg V. N. V. (109, 110,
111); the Prague Observatory (107, 108, 109); New Hamp-
shire Historical Society (118), Essex Institute (113), Ameri-
can Antiquarian Society (118), Rhode Island Historical So-
ciety (113), Connecticut Historical Society (113), W. D. Whit-
ney (113), New Jersey Historical Society (113), Buffalo So-
ciety of Natural Science (113), W. B. Taylor (118), Theodore
Gill (113), Wisconsin State Historical Society (113), and Geor-
gia Historical Society (118).

Letters of envoy were received from the Society of Sciences
at Bordeaux, the Hungarian Academy, Lisbon Academy, Bel-
gian Ministry of Foreign Affairs, and Institut Ethnographique
at Paris.

Donations for the Library were received from the Royal
Academies of St. Petersburg, Berlin, Vienna, Buda-Pest, Mu-
nich, Brussels, Lisbon ; from the Societies at Bremen, Emden,
Batavia, Stuttgard, Bordeaux, Dublin; from the Observato-

1883.) 213

ries at Prague, Offenbach, Geneva, New York; from the Royal
Museum. at Brussels ; Geographical, Anthropological and Eth-
nological Societies at Paris and Bordeaux; Revue Politique,
Annales des Mines, Musée Guimet, Revista Huskara, Royal
Astronomical Society, Museum at Rio de Janeiro, New Zea-
land Institute, Boston Natural History Society, New Bedford
Library, Yale College, Brooklyn Library, Prof. Guyot; Frank-
lin Institute, College of Pharmacy, Library Company; Pea-
body Institute, United States Naval Institute, Smithsonian In-
stitution, National Museum, Bureau of Interior, and Fish
Commission,

The death of Prof. Stephen Alexander, at Princeton, N. J.,
June 25th, aged 76, was reported.

The death of Prof. Charles E. Anthon, at New York, in
June, aged 60, was reported.

The death of Major-General Sir Edward Sabine, in England,
about May 28, aged 95, was reported. (See London Nature
for July 5, p. 218.)

The election for new members was postponed to October
19th,

And the meeting was adjourned.

Stated Meeting, August 17, 1883.
Present, one member.
Curator, Mr. Henry Puiuuirs, Jr.

Letters of acknowledgment from Harvard College Library
(112); the Wyoming Historical and Geological Society (118);
the Royal Academy at Copenhagen (110, 111); Mr. Phillips
(118), and the Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of Phila-
delphia (113).

Letters of envoy from the R. Accademia dei Lincei, the
Geological Survey of India, the Royal Society at Liege, the
Cambridge Philosophical Society, and the Musée Guimet.

}
|

214 [Sept. 21,

Donations to the Library from the Indian Survey; Royal
Society at Tasmania; Imperial Academy at St. Petersburg ;
Imperial Society at Moscow ; Imperial Geological Institute at
Vienna; German Geological Soolery, Berlin; Royal Academy,
Brussels; Statistical Bureau, Stockholm ; ‘Antiguaivien Society,
Copenhagen; Royal Academy and Observatory at ‘Turin;
Accademia dei Lincei, and Geological Committee at Rome ;
International Geological Congress at Bologna; Geographical
Society, Annales des Mines and Revue Politique at Paris; Geo-
graphical Society, Bordeaux; Revista Huskara; Nautical Al-
manac, Barcelona; Scientific Expedition, Lisbon; Royal In-
stitution, Victoria Institute, Royal Astronomical Bdeiety., Royal
Geographical Society, Meteorological Society, Geological So-
ciety, Royal Asiatic Society, and London Nature; John B.
Lawes, of Herts, England; W. J. O’n Daunt, of Dublin; Mu-
seum of Comparative Zodlogy, Cambridge; American Jour-
nal of Science; New York Observatory; C. A. Barratoni,
Ed. of Travel, N. Y.; Franklin Institute, Academy of Nat-
ural Science, American Journal of Pharmacy, and Prof. HK. D.
Cope; the Wyoming Historical and Geographical Society ;
American Chemical Journal and Journal of Mathematics ;
National Academy of Sciences; Polytechnic Society of Ken-
tucky, Louisville ; State Library of Natural History, Ilinois ;
American and Oriental Journal; and Museo Nacional.

And the meeting was adjourned.

Stated Meeting, September 21, 1888.
Present, 8 members.
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.
A letter was received from Mr. J. B. Lawes, dated Roth-
umstead, Herts, England, July 31, 1883

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Astro-
nomi¢o Observatorio Nazional de Faenbaya, Mexico (113) ;

|
|

1883,] 215

Prof. J. J. Stevenson (118); and the Cambridge University
(109),

Letters of envoy were received from the Prussian Academy,
Swiss Society, Belgian Statistical Bureau, Musée Guimet, In-
stitut @’Ethnographie, Greenwich Observatory, and United
States Coast Survey.

A letter requesting information was received from the Uni-
ted States Signal Service Bureau.

A. letter requesting the completion of their set of Transac-
tions of the American Philosophical Society was received from
the London Statistical Society. So ordered.

‘A letter proposing full exchanges from the beginning was
received from the United States Geological Survey, Washing-
ton, D.C. So ordered.

Donations for the Library were received from the Prussian,
Bavarian, Belgian, Turin, Modena and Madrid Academies ;
from the Institutes at Venice and Philadelphia; from the
Adelaide, Greenwich, Radcliffe, Yale and New York Observa-
tories; from the Statistical Bureaus at Stockholm and Brussels ;
from the Societies at Hanover, Glarus, Leipsig, Gorlitz, Lau-
Sanne, Leeds and Boston; from the Historical Societies at New
York and Newark; from the Geological Societies at Vienna,
London, Glasgow and Dublin; from the Geographical Socie-
ties at Paris, Bordeaux and London; from the Zovlogical So-
cleties at. Paris and London; from the Antiquarian Societies
at Paris, London and Worcester ; the Kthnographical and An-
thropological Societies at Paris, the Society of Americanists,
Keole Politechnique, Bureau des Longitudes, M. Loewy, and the
Revue Politique ; the Musée Guimet; Revista Kuskara; Ex-
pedition Serra Kstrella; Office of Mines, Victoria; London
Nature ; Canadian Naturalist ; American Journal of Science ;
American Journal of Pharmacy; Pennsylvania Magazine of
History and Biography, the Engineers’ Club, Dr. Hugh Ham-
ilton, Dr. Charles W. Dulles, and Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., of
Philadelphia ; Johns Hopkins University and the University
of Virginia ; the United States Naval Institute; the Smith-
sonian Institution, United States Board of Engineers, Signal

216 [Sept. 21,

Service, Coast Survey, National Museum and Fish Commis-
sion; C. O. Thompson, of Terre Haute; Dr. Ladislaus Netto,
George Basil Digwell, and the State Geological Survey of
Illinois.

The death of John C. Trautwine, at Philadelphia, Septem-
ber 14, 1883, aged 74, was announced by the Secretary.

The following communications were read :

From Prof, K. W. Claypole, New Bloomfield, Perry county,
Pennsylvania :

1. Ona large Crustacean from the Catskill rocks of Me-
shoppen, Wyoming county, Pa., in the collection of Mr. Lacoe,
of Pittston, Pa., with a small photograph of the head; a plas-
ter cast of which was exhibited.

9. On the genus Rensselaeria in the Hamilton group, in

Perry county, Pa.
3. On the equivalent of the New York Portage, in Perry
county, Pa,

From Prof. E. D. Cope, a letter to the Secretary, dated
Sully Springs, Dakota, Sept. 7, 1883, was read, as follows:

“‘T have the pleasure to announce to you that I have within the past
week discovered the locality of a new lake of the White River epoch, at a
point in this Territory nearly 200 miles north-west of the nearest boundary
of the deposit of this age hitherto known. The beds, which are unmis-
takably of the White River formation, consist of greenish sandstone, and
sand-beds, of a combined thickness of about 100 feet. These rest on
white calcareous clay, rocks and marls, of a total thickness of 100 feet.
These probably also belong to the White River epoch, but contain no
fossils. Below this deposit is a third bed of drab clay, which swells and
cracks on exposure to weather, which rests on a thick bed of white and
gray sand, more or less mixed with gravel. This bed, with the overly-
ing clay, probably belongs to the Laramie period, as the beds lower in the
series certainly do.

“The deposit as observed, does not extend over ten miles in north and
south diameter. The east and west extent was not determined.

“The fossils, which indicate clearly the age of the formation, are the
following *

PISCES.
Rivineaetes, 8). DOV cowl vce ddeervrrvvriace delldlid es cael
ANATUNIG, BPs TOV. ceaceesertiabsccvedcdues ileal inca J

Sa

¢ le
1888.) 217

Lacertinta. ,
SWS ty 6 ads eis caleid o Weenie Wah walorsin'e sisioiene es Realising
TESTUDINATA.
LTLONAG, BP. voccvecevuseeseses SMvilawig Ries eaten TY | :
LOVONY®, BPvias cies sivviviee sis sree te Bivlintinists paren hans Pa Ga
EDTOMNS, (RDU bins vin senebe resin § Nee Anca s pte
Roprnrra. :
CUHON, BDod os sd aves Leheiee ENG vas alla cess Fee NNO carla
CARNIVORA.,
Galecynus GTEGATIUs...e.screrecrecercres a Rea i
Hoplophonews, 8p. wsscvecseeeeees pete meant 44
? Hoplophoneus, Sp..eeereeees es eae | pd aiecaniene Rivne
PERISSODACTYLA.
Acerathertum, 8p.rveccceeeeesees i ataid dna ah qondoige'™ velviieies :
Aceratheriwm, SP..ccseeccescevecenccessseccsecsonsees ( &
Anchitherium, sp. .+++ See Rea taaaas SG Live ata ce eld
ARTIODACTYLA.
Mlotherium TUMOBUM. ocvvcrecrerencees olesicanes Ce ee
TTyopotamus, SP... soceveeccececers eee owing ne Gbig NEL Das
Oreodon,. BP. ...++0. ewe MUO doe ke RaQNACN TO Mesa bekin ayy dng ‘
ORE0G 07s RDU vin aha ive Tei CG aap ML MiMi UTNE Waa We
GREOAOT, BDiscsecuvuccersstenracers tse. A Na i rie
Leptomerya, sp..cccccecevee cecencnces Weave eh 064 aes
Hypertragulus, 8p. .csccecvreeeccaecees PE SACO RN URE Dc 0
9
Total species.....-++++sseee5: PUMA GSN EA Cen ale ¢ 20

“Interesting features of the above catalogue are : The absence of Hyra-
codon and Poébrotherium, go abundant in the beds of this age elsewhere ;
the presence of fishes, not hitherto detected in them ; and the presence of
the genus of tortoises, Trionyw. The latter genus has not hitherto been found
in our Western lacustrine beds of later than Eocene age ; while they are
abundant in our modern rivers. This discovery partially bridges the in-
terval. The same is true of the fishes mentioned, which represent the
order Nematognathi.”’

From Mr, Joseph Lesley, a letter to the Secretary, dated
Princeton, Mass., August 22, was r sad, and specimens of seeds
exhibited which had germinated between blocks of ice in the
ice-house attached to the hotel of Mr. Edwin Grimes.

“In 1882 Mr. Grimes noticed that seeds, which had been dropped in

packing the ice, had thrown out stems and roots, In the winter of
1882~'83, he experimentally scattered seeds of rye, barley and wheat be-

PROC, AMER. PHILOS. SOC, XxI, 114. 28. PRINTED OCTOBER 380, 1883.

218 rApril 20,

Claypole. }

tween the cakes. To-day (Aug. 22) I was called to look at some of the
results, and Isénd you a rough drawing of one of the germinated rye
seeds. You will notice that the roots pushed out laterally between two
blocks of ice; the shoot, or stem, did the same for half an inch, but then
turned upwards at a right-angle and penetrated the solid ice vertically for
a distance of two inches,

‘‘No matter how the seed‘lay, whether with its germinating point up,
down or sideways, the growth was always in the true vertical through the
solid ice.

‘“‘T have seen, in 1882 and 1883, at least fifty similar cases occurring in
this ice-house.”’

Pending nominations, Nos. 985 to 1004, and new nomina-
tions, Nos. 1005, 1006, were read.

The President reported that he had received, and paid over
to the Treasurer, $132.75, being the interest on the Michaux
rentes, last due.

And the meeting was adjourned.

The Perry Oounty Fault. Note on an important Correction in the Geo-
logical Map of Pennsyloania. By H. W. Claypotle.
A I y' y YI

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 20, 1883.)

Tar DISTRICT IMMEDIATELY SoutH or New BLOOMFIELD.

The country lying immediately south of Mahanoy ridge, is one of
the best collecting grounds that I have found in the county for the fossils
of the Hamilton and Chemung groups. The Upper Hamilton shales are
there exposed better than I have found them elsewhere, and the Chemung,
especially the lower part of the group, may also be examined in many
small wayside cuts and field-exposures.

3ut very soon after beginning to work this field. I became aware that
some difficulty hitherto unrecognized stood in the way of deciding the
horizon from which the fossils came. It was impossible to recognize the
different rocks according to the views expressed in the preliminary map of
Perry county. References to this geological map of the county will show
that the ground between Mahanoy ridge and Dick’s hill is there repre-
sented asa close syncline bounded by outcropping edges of Hamilton
sandstone, the middle of which is occupied by a sheet of Chemung rocks.
But a very short examination sufficed to show that the Hanhilton Upper
shales extended much farther out into the valley from Mahanoy ridge

Fog.

2 y a
“ny, a
oy, LHel.Lime, §
xine ie
SSNS ayant rs THA

<Q i mt 7
BOA concealed = doa"

Maceo

Roig
E Hay : \
WRVON i hoy ys yi \
AT \ We” Hh Nes
Ws \\ % \
WHO a) A\\ \ <
SAU .. \ ANG

Cheng

CUintor V,
ow. Hel.
Oriskany vit

tamilion., VM

i\ I VI, OnisKavrey.
ey Wt sess
Cortiale s
NUUNG
rales Fault.
Hamilton «
‘Cardiola shale,

Hod. Cross-section of thesfaulted district.
Fig2. Diagrammatic section across the fault.
Fig: Copy from the published map.of Ferry Co.

Li. Corrected representation, ORE a

¢
Claypole.] 220 {April 20,

than the bounding line drawn on the map. Hamilton fossils were found
farther and farther out from the ridge in the grounds represented as Che-
mung on the map, until it become evident that in the western part of the
basin or trough the Hamilton Upper shales were repeated by the ex-
tension to the eastward of one of the anticlines represented at the end of
the trough. Crawley hill is a mass of Hamilton sandstone rising imme-
diately to the south of the township road running to Little Germany at a
point not more than three miles from Bloomfield. The influence of this
anticline is to bring up the Hamilton Upper shales again to the surface so
that the lower beds crop out at or near the school-house on the branch road.
to the south, Continuing along the branch road these Hamilton shales
still occupy an immense space, far more than their thickness, and yet they
dip very steeply. Another anticline, running up from the south-west, pro-
duces another repetition. The crest of the Hamilton Sandstone ridge which
encloses on the east the Perry Furnace valley throws up the upper shales
again, so that in passing south, about half a mile from the New Bloomfield
and Little Germany road, one passes over two anticlines rising first to the
top layer of the Upper Hamilton shales or perhaps even into the Genesee,
then descending to the edge of the Hamilton sandstone, again rising over
the syncline and again descending on the second anticline. Noris it until
both the ridges have been passed over that one finds the strata regularly
dipping outwards at an angle of almost 90° from the last anticlinal axis.

The consequence is that the Chemung rocks do not occur, as represented
upon the map, along the middle of the eastern part ofthe valley. The whole
of this area is occupied by Hamilton shales. The area, colored to represent
Hamilton rocks on the map, between the roads leading to Perry Fur-
nace and to Gibson’s rock is occupied by rocks of later date. Most of
them are the equivalents of the Portage-Chemung, very similar in appear-
ance,

In fact, among the slight though rather numerous exposures of shale oc-
curring in this valley, it would be almost impossible without the assistance
of paleontology to determine their different horizons. Even with this aid,
the difficulty, although diminished, is not removed. Many of the beds are
totally barren; but, by the study of the fossils yielded by others the folds
and varying angles of dip were followed out and Chemung fossils and
rocks were found to occupy the whole southern side of the Middle basin,
close up to the foot of its bounding range, Dick’s hill and Iron ridge.
Inasmuch as the base of these hills is in many places occupied by lime-
stone, it is evident that two so distant horizons can only be brought into
contact by a fault,

Following the various roads out of New Bloomfield it is not difficult to
trace this fault through the county.

No. 1. The Ridge road to Carlisle. On this line the successive formations
occur in regular sequence from New Bloomfield for about two and one-
half miles, when the ground suddenly changes from Chemung shale to
Lower Helderberg limestone.

1883, ] 221 [Claypole.

No. 2. Old road to Carlisle. The same result is obtained along this
line. At about two miles from New Bloomfield is a small roadside cut-
ting showing Chemung shale and at about one hundred yards further on
is an indistinct but manifest Oriskany ridge. Between the twois a narrow
strip of Lower Helderberg limestone.

No. 3. West road to Gibson’s rock. At about two miles anda half from
New Bloomfield, the lower Portage bed (Cardiola shale) dipping at
nearly 90° crops out on the roadside, and within one hundred yards the
road passes over the Oriskany sandstone (near Mr. 8. Brown’s).

No. 4. Road to Montebello narrows. This road, running almost due
east, passes over a great distance of Chemung shales rising to a higher
horizon than along either of the roads already mentioned. But on turning
to the south at the entrance to the narrows two cuttings, only one hundred

and fifty yards apart, show the Chemung shales and the lower Helderberg
limestone.

No. 5. Road from Perry Furnace to Gibson’s rock. The old Perry
Furnace lies upon the lower Helderberg limestone. The Oriskany sand-
Stone does not make any conspicuous ridge along this road. But at a few
hundred teet south of the Furnace the base of the Hamilton sandstone is
seen and passing through the narrows its upper limit may be easily de-
tected, Following this at a distance of about four hundred feet comes in
the Oriskany sandstone, forming a distinct ridge of rocks. he fault there-
fore comes through in this interval, bringing the Lower Helderberg lime-
stone in contact with the Hamilton Upper shale. The throw here is less
than farther east, not exceeding 1650 feet measured at right angles to the
beds, or 2300 feet if measured vertically.

No. 6. Road to Losh’s run (Polecat road and Ohio Wharf road), This
road strikes the line of fault about six miles east from New Bloomfield.
The exposures are not quite so striking as in the places already mentioned,
but the fault is equally conspicuous. Chemung shales occupy the ground
south trom Mahanoy ridge to Dick’s hill with, so far as can be determined,
a tolerably uniform dip of about 40°. Immediately at the northern foot of
Dick’s hill the lower Helderberg limestone is quarried. Though no cut-
ting showing the shales can be seen close to the quarry, yet the surface of
the fields shows the presence of the Chemung sandstone, and, from the
color, it is apparently nearer the top than the bottom of the group. Some
indications also are present, which seem to show that the yellow shales and
brown sandstones of the beds underlying the limestone, are brought up into
contact with the Chemung. The throw of the fault here is consequently
greater than at any one of its western exposures, amounting, if measured
square across the beds, to about 4650 feet, or vertically 6510 feet.

Westward of the lines hitherto followed the fault may be traced. It
cuts off the Hamilton sandstone of South Furnace ridge, which declines in
consequence to the general level of the country. This extinction of the
Hamilton Sandstone ridge takes place about two miles south-west of the

Clay pole.]

Perry Furnace, It cuts through the Oriskany ridge, almost at the point
where the two outcrops are about to meet, and passing out of the Oris-
kany near the high point behind Adam’s Glen school-hause, near Landis-
burgh, cannot be followed through the monotonous red shale, of which the
valley consists. There is, however, no ground for supposing that it con.
tinues into the Blue mountains, no traces of displacement being visible in
Kennedy’s valley or on Pilot Knob,

Eastward beyond the display near Montebello narrows, described above,
the fault continues, and its investigation becomes difficult. After leaving
the exposure at No. 6, which is about a mile east of the narrows, and
where the throw is greatest, it suddenly diminishes. The Hamilton sand-
stone which has been faulted up and has formed the monoclinal ridge of
Dick’s hill, suddenly sinksand vanishes underground, The land being low it.
is not easy to find evidence of its presence, but sections along the river and
in Watts township show that it continues to Half Falls mountain,

From the facts that have been collected the only possible conclusion is
that the fault here doubles itself and rapidly diminishes. The line already
traced continues nearly along the course of Losh’s run and forms the most
southern of the four separate ranges of Hamilton sandstone, which to-
gether form Half Falls mountain. About the meridian line on which the
sudden descent of the Hamilton sandstone takes place and Dick’s hill dis-
appears, a subsidiary fault develops itself about half a mile northward, near
the end of Mahanoy ridge and continues to and across the river where it
throws up a third ridge of Hamilton sandstone immediately south of the
second and nearly equaling it in height.

These two minor faults—extensions of the Perry County fault—run
westward along the range of Half Falls mountain to a distance which it is
not possible to determine without a greater expenditure of time than the
other work on the county would justify. The southern fault probably has
but a short range, but the northern not improbably runs for two or three
miles,

The fault here describedis thus shown to be one of no trifling extent, hav-
ing been traced in the above notes about eighteen miles along its outcrop
from E.N. E. to W. 8. W. The changes which it renders necessary on the
map are considerable. The whole outcrop of the Hamilton rocks ranging
along the north side of Dick’s hill must be canceled and its place occupied by
Chemung shales. The great patch of Chemung shales in the western end of
the valley must be replaced by Hamilton and the Hamilton by Chemung.
These changes may be seen in a moment by comparing two sketch maps
accompanying this paper with one another. The narrow middle valley of
Perry county is not a syncline but a monocline. Half of it has been re-
moved and elevated above the level of the rest, from which height it has
been washed by atmospheric action and swept into the Atlantic.

The mass of material thus removed will be evident when the diagram
shown below is compared with the maps and with the figures show-
ing the amount of “‘throw’”’ of the fault. This section, though not

9
222 [April 20,

oe
1883.) 223 [Clay pole,

drawn minutely to scale is yet sufficiently accurate for our present purpose.
It occurs at, Montebello narrows about four miles from New Bloomfield and
shows what would be seen, if the exposure of the rocks permitted, along
the whole course of the fault. The details, such as the amount of throw
and the horizons brought into juxtaposition, would vary to some extent,
but these variations do not in any way affect the principle.

The fault is indicated on the surface only by a slight and interrupted
depression, not inany way noticeable ; but along at least a part of its course
it is marked by a line of strong springs. So evident ts course, when the
structure of the county is understood, that a man can stand with one foot
on the Chemung shales and the other on the Lower Helderberg limestone.

Throw.—In estimating the throw of this fault it must be remembered that
it is not everywhere of the same extent. At its greatest the olive shales of
No. 8, the Chemung, are brought into contact with the limestone of No.
6, the Lower Helderberg. If we then calculate the throw where it is
greatest we shall get the following results. The part of the Chemung ap-
pearing at the surface at the fault is as near as I can determine about 2000
feet above the base of that group, including the Portage :

Feet.

Partial thickness of Portage-Chemung (lower portion). .2000
Total bi (6) GOMOROOOSMAIEL Ved satis cesses Pian 9 10)
ih i Haniliton Upper shale ss isscees. ae BOO

Ny Mi OTOL Me: SARICS TOM Oui s4 «ives alee COO

te Ny “Lower Hamilton shale; svi. ss... 500

oh ule CF MET COL MIS URGE SILO iis Gel de vow diate 100

or hy ‘¢ Marcellus limestone and shale...... 50

vi Ni “ Oriskany sandstone and shale..... 100
Partial Mi “ Lower Helderberg limestone....... 200
Total “ rocks thrown by the fuult .........4050

This, within certain small limits of error, is the amount of throw calcu-
lated at tight angles to the bedding. The total dislocation is, however,
much greater. The tangential or horizontal thrust, to which is due the
folding of the Appalachian strata and their accompanying or subsequent
fracture, forced the the rocks on the 8. E. side of the fault over those on
the N. W. side, along a slope whose angle cannot be determined. Tt has
been represented in the section at 45°, but was probably less. If the
amount above given be now increased in the proportion of the sine of this
angle to the radius, or multiplied by about 1.4, we shall obtain as the actual
displacement of the strata along the line of the fault about 5600 feet.

Tur LirtheE GERMANY FAvuLT.

Further investigation has developed another fault parallel to the first
and at the distance of about a mile to the northward,

It develops itself near the hamlet of Little yermany, in Spring town-
ship, and runs east-north-east into Centre for nearly five miles. Though

far inferior in length and throw to the Perry County fault it yet produces
much complication and several noteworthy changes in the topography and.
landscape. }
The most westerly point at which I have been able to detéct the fault
| is on the hill west of Little Germany, where it produces a fork in the Oris-

Claypole. 224. April 20,

kany sandstone, one ridge continuing on its previous course, while the
other diverges slightly to the southward. The latter thrown up by the
fault is cut off at a short distance, the ridge terminating in a field. \
| In thus bringing up the Oriskany to the surface, the dislocation has also
brought up the Lower Helderberg limestone adjoining it, and the result is

that limestone has been quarried and burnt at one place, while at the
distance of about 100 feet northward, or geologically speaking below it, lies
Fra. 5.

Map of the Hastern Hind of the Perry

County Faults.

il H. 1. Hamilton sandstone and Lower shale. L. Limestone.
H. 2. Hamilton Upper Shale. EB. F. Fault.
O. Oriskany, &c. C. D. Fault.

the Marcellus Black shale with no intervening Sandstone ridge. The
Marcellus thus occurs on both sides of the narrow belt of limestone. Fol-
lowing the line of fault a little farther to the east, we find the Lower Ham-
ilton shale brought up on the south side against the Marcellus on the
north, and farther yet the lower shale, about 500 feet thick, occupies both
sides of the fault. As we approach the township line, which lies on the
watershed parting the south fork of Montour run from the tributary of the
Little Juniata, a high connecting ridge of Lower Hamilton shales rises on
the south side of the fault, exposing the Marcellus at its base, into which
|| a tunnel six feet square in section has been driven in search of coal,

ye

im

O«
225 [Claypole,

1883.]

The north side is occupied by the Hamilton sandstone, through which
the fault here cuts obliquely and the throw having increased it causes a
lateral displacement of nearly a mile, through which the road passes from
the Lower to the Upper shale without crossing any Sandstone ridge.

Entering Centre township, the fault passes along the strata as they rise
to the Crawley arch, leaving the synclinal west end of Mahanoy ridge
separated from the anticlinal east end of Crawley hill. The latter is so far
eroded as to expose the Hamilton Lower shale for more than two miles
from Little Germany.

The throw is greatest near the watershed on the township line, where
the lower part of the Lower Hamilton shale is brought up against the
Upper Hamilton shale and may be estimated thus :

Upper Hamilton, SHals COMDL) seu te tise cuss tc cscs. 150 feet.

Hamilton BAMdstOnes bus ceners ee ti gst eae Ve Ae hur

Lower Hamilton shale (part)....... ek 4h eh Wibod 400 *
1150

But as the beds dip at about 45°, the actual vertical displacement is more,
being in proportion to the sine of the angle of dip. This will give 1600
feet. The Little Germany fault extends into Centre township almost to
Bloomfield, gradually dying out. But it may be traced by a slight valley,
and by the increased thickness of the Hamilton Upper shale, as far at
least as the residence of Mr. William Brunner. Its total length is about
four and a half miles.

INTERMEDIATE FAULT.

Yet further in this connection, a third fault of small dimensions passes
between the two above described. Manifesting itself near the house of
Mr, George Meck, it causes a repetition of the Hamilton sandstone, bringing
the middle and upper beds to the surface after they have dipped south from
the Crawley anticline,

This fault is of no great extent, apparently disappearing in a mile and a
half. Nor is its throw more than about 200 or 300 feet. But it makes a
distinct short ridge of Hamilton sandstone, and a deep intervening valley
between it and Crawley hill.

Ne Bye consequence of the discovery of this third dislocation, a slight
Correction is rendered necessary on the map representing the eastern end
of the Perry County fault. The middle one of the three short anticlines
there represented, is the small ridge thrown up by the third fault, and is
therefore monoclinal, with south-east dip, and not anticlinal in structure.

PROC. AMER, PHILOS. 800. xxt. 114, 20. PRINTED NOVEMBER 2, 1883.

oe
Olay pole, ] 226 [May 18,

Note on a relic of the Native Flora of PennsyWwania, surviving in Perry
County. By H. W. Claypote.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 18, 1883.)

One of the inevitable, but, to the biologist, deplorable consequences of
the spread of cultivation, is the extinction of many of the native or wild
species of plants and animals. Could we have complete catalogues of the
original flora and fauna of any country where nature has been long and
entirely subjected to man, we should find many a name which would to
us represent no existing being. It would be the name of a member of the
aboriginal races which had proved unable, essentially or accidentally, to
maintain its ground in the changed circumstances against its former com-
panions, and had consequently died in the struggle. Orit might be, in
the case of America, the name of one that, though able to hold its own
against all its native competitors, failed in the contest with some of the
new species introduced from more highly developed Europe, where for
centuries the struggle has been more intense than here. In either case the
result has been the same to the species—ultimate extinction.

It is a notorious fact in geology and botany, that many animal and vege- *
table species from the Old World have crossed the Atlantic in the traces
of the white man, either as his friends or his foes, and have squatted on
the lands of America, and made themselves as completely at home here

asin Hurope, some of them much more so. Without entering into the
subject at any length, it may suffice to mention among the former, the
house fly, the honey bee, the brown rat, the cabbage butterfly, the Eng-
lish sparrow, the currant and apple worm, the wheat midge, and, though
some have disputed this, the Hessian fly. Among the latter may be
named the white weed, the purslane, the carrot, the parsnip, the chicory,
mullein, toadflax, catnip, &c., &c. All these have proved themselve;
fully competent to hold their own against the native races of America, and
even to conquer them by one means or another in the struggle for exist-
ence,

Cultivation, however, is a more deadly foe than competition to many of
our native species. The axe and the plough change the conditions of life
so suddenly and so greatly that many a plant and animal are deprived at
once of both food and shelter. Confining our attention now to the former,
the plants, we may notice two or three principal causes of the destruc-
tion of some of our aboriginal species, r

1. The loss of shade resulting from the destruction of timber. The
plants of our woodlands and forests cannot all endure the brilliant,
blazing sun that pours down upon them when the trees are felled. The
direct heat seems fatal to many, The resulting drought destroys more.

The moisture-loving ferns, without exception, dislike the sunshine, and
though some of them, such as the common polypody, do not require much
water, yet they shrivel and die when deprived of shade. It is not too

QO”
1883, | 227 (Claypole.

much to say that were it not for cool, moist glens and caves, where plough
and ploughman can never come, many of these beautiful plants, the love-
liest ornaments of the herbarium and the garden would have long since
disappeared from the land. As it is, many of them, both here and in
Europe, are almost extinct. They linger on, their lives hanging by a
thread, which accident, or the hand of a ruthless collector, or of an over-
eager botanist, may at any time snap asunder, Such are the elegant Kil-
larney fern in Ireland, and the Trowbridge fern in England, and such may
before long be the condition of the Hartstongue and the Climbing fern
in this country.

2. The competition of native races, and of introduced species under the
new conditions, is another element in the problem. Enough, however, has
been said above on this point.

8. The cultivation of the ground is a most potent factor in the destruc-
tion of many native species. Few, except annual plants, can long sur-
vive this incessant disturbance of their roots. Of these consist, for
the most part, our weeds. 3ut the perennial species, especially
those which require several years to produce seed, and then produce it
sparingly ; those that are choice of soil and conditions, cannot maintain
themselves under cultivation, and soon fail and die.

There are certain species, I may say certain groups, which are less
tolerant of man and the conditions which he introduces than others. The
gap between them and civilization seems wider than it is in other cases.
They are the real “wild”? flowers which cannot be tamed, and usually
die if the attempt to tame them is made. Like the wild Indian tribes of
this continent, who are so far removed from the white man and his ways
that their civilization seems scarcely possible, these ‘‘wild’’ denizens of
our “wild land”’ refuse to acknowledge man’s supremacy, and die if he
tries to assert it.

Among these truly wild flowers are many of the Hrarm Faminy ; spe-
cially attached to the moor and the forest. Their very name is synony-
mous with wildness and freedom. The heather of Scotland brings up
vividly the breezy moor and brae and fell. It isan emblem of the ‘‘land
of brown heath and shaggy wood.’’ But the Scotch heather, like many of
its relations, refuses to be confined within the garden fence. It is difficult
to transplant and difficult to nurse even if successfully transplanted. It
Seems as & mountaineer imprisoned in a dungeon, impatient of its confine-
ment, and rather than live in such conditions, refuses to live at all. The
Mayflower, gem of the spring in North America, manifests similar impa-
tience of confinement, and the same is true of several other members of
the family. ;

In Perry county there lingers one of these survivors of our native flora
doing battle for its existence against conditions in which no member of its
family can long survive. It is struggling against the inroads of cultivation
On its native haunts, and struggling against heavy odds.

In the ‘Flora of North America,’’? Michaux described Vacoiniwm brachy-

DIOR
Claypole.] 428 [May 18,

cerum or pumilum, the box-leaved huckleberry, a low evergreen plant
of the Heath Family, giving as its habitat ‘‘near Winchester.’’ Its dis-
covery was a testimony to the thoroughness and minuteness of his work in
a day when traveling for botanical investigation in North America meant
hardship, privation and even danger. ‘The county was unsettled and un-
inhabited, and the botanist was compelled to wander over pathless moun-
tains, and through forests where the lumberman’s axe had never been
heard, and to carry with him the results of his labors on his shoulders, or
at best on horseback. Yet in some cases he and his fellow-workers lighted
on plants to find which again has required long and painstaking search or
lucky accident.

Michaux’s description and specimen remained for many years the only
evidence of the existence of the Box Huckleberry in the world.

About the year 1846, Prof. 8. F. Baird, now Secretary of the Smithso-
nian Institution, was engaged in teaching at Carlisle, Cumberland Co.,
Pa., when he was informed by a friend living in New Bloomfield (Thomas
McIntyre, Esq., recently deceased) that a plant called in the neighbor-
hood ‘‘Boxwood,’’ was growing wild near that town. He paid a visit to
the place under Mr. McIntyre’s guidance, and obtained specimens of the
plant both for the herbarium and for cultivation. The latter he sent to
the Botanical Garden at Cambridge. This was Michaux’s plant, Vaccind-
um brachycerum. Its existence in Pennsylvania had been previously un-
suspected, and it was thought to be a lost species. Prof. Gray kindly
informs me that those specimens planted in the Garden nearly forty years
ago, are still living, and that the plants bloom, but never produce any
fruit. Evidently the climate of New England does not suit the species,
or it resents the attempt at domestication.

Irs HABITAT IN PurRyY County.

Vaccinium brachycerum, Michaux, Gaylussacia brachycera, Gray, now
occupies in Perry county a spot of about ten acres, one mile south of New
Bloomfield, the county-seat, This tract lies on a hillside sloping princi-
pally to the north-west, and occupied by small timber and laurel. Culti-
vation has encroached upon it, and so far as I can determine its range was
somewhat greater only a few years ago. This is, however, not certain,
as Professor Baird does not very clearly recollect how far it spread in 1846.
One of the most remarkable facts connected with it is the very sharp line
which marks its limit. The wood in which it occurs extends for some dis-
tance along the road, but the Box Huckleberry only grows as far as a hollow
occupied, in wet weather, by a small stream. Along the right bank of this
stream it is found freely, on the left side I have never seen a plant. Hence
it is quite possible that the plant has been restricted in its range for a
longer time, and that it did not previously occupy the rest of the wood.
This is rendered more probable by the fact that in other directions its
range is equally restricted, and its limits as sharply defined. It is per-

1883.] a Gate (Claypole

fectly easy to walk round the space on which it grows, and see a thick mat
of it on one side and not a plant on the other. No difference, so faras I can
discover, exists to account for this limitation. The soil and subsoil are
alike on both sides. Both are timbered, and with the same kind of trees.
Slope, exposure, sunshine and drainage are the same. Yet the limitation
exists, and is most emphatic.

The most probable conclusion is that we have here a plant to which the
conditions of life are becoming or have become unfavorable, and which
is very gradually yielding to their ill effects. These have, perhaps, been
at work for ages in restricting its range, and would in time have destroyed
it. Cultivation, however, is its most formidable foe—a foe which may, in
% Single season, inflict more injury than natural enemies could accom-
plish in centuries. Two seasons of ploughing would blot the species out
of the county, and, saving the garden specimens at Cambridge, probably
out of the world ; for Professor Gray informs me that it cannot now be
found at the locality given by Michaux in his description, ‘‘ near Win-
chester,” or at that given on his specimen, ‘‘Warm Spring,’’ and, with
the exception of one small habitat in Delaware, no other place is known
in which it has ever been seen.* One or two other supposed habitats,
which have been tnentioned to me turned out on examination to be erro-
neous or doubtful,

In its native dwelling place in Perry county, it is now (May, 1883) in.
abundant blossom, but judging from the appearance of the fruit of last

* With regard to this habitat for the Box Huckleberry I had not been able to
obtain any definite information at the time of writing the above paper. Since
then, however, I have been favored by A. Commons, Esq., of Faulkland, New
Castle Co., Delaware, with a few particulars concerning it. I give an extract
from Mx, Commons’s letter :

“The Box-leaved Huckleberry was found by me some years ago growing on
the banks of the Indian River, near Millsborough, in Sussex Co,, Delaware. I
have collected it there at various times but none very recently, Another local-
ity was reported to me when at Millsborough, said to be about a mile from the
town in an opposite direction, but I did not visit it. Lam not aware of its oc-
currence elsewhere in this State, and the patch here is not large. The locality
is at the head of tidewater on this river. It extends along the steep bank which
is here 10 or 12 feet in height from a few feet above the water-line to the top of
the bank, but not, beyond this. My impression is that it may have been intro-
duced by tidal agency.”

A hill-side in Perry Co, and the bank ofa tidal river in Delaware, are places
affording very different conditions, but Mr. Commons has kindly sent me spec-
imens between which and those from this county I cannot discover the slight-
est difference,

I may further add that while gathering some of the plants I one day found a
small caterpillar feeding on the leaves and spinning them together to form
nest, I putitinto a box and it almost immediately went into a chrysalid and
in about a month emerged a small Tineid moth with black forewings speckled
with white, Isentit to V. T. Chambers, Hsq., of Covington, Ky., who has made
® special study of this fumily, and he informs me that it belongs, almost with
certainty, to a species described by himself as Glelechia dubitella, Chamb., and
which has been reported to feed on the Hogweed or Bitterweed, Ambrosia arte-
Misiifolia,

y
Claypole.] 230 [Sept. 21,

year, it does not produce seed very freely. If this is true, one potent
cause of its diminution and decay is obvious.

Like some other plants apparently also verging towards extinction,
such as the Big Trees of California, this little survivor of the old flora of
Pennsylvania shows no disposition to spread in Perry county, even in
directions where it is unmolested. Ground lost by such a species cannot
well be recovered. Point after point has been ceded to its foes ; it has
been killed off here and headed back there till now it lingers on this hill-
side, its last stronghold in the State, and almost in the world. What
special causes have enabled it thus and there to maintain its ground
against its foes it is impossible to say, but its position is very precarious.
A little more cultivation, a little more ploughing and harrowing, a little
more ‘clearing up’’ and ‘burning of brush,’’ by the farmer, unaware of
the value of what he was destroying, and the little Box Huckleberry will
be numbered with the things that were and are not. Its only chance lies
in the steepness and sterility of the hillside, which all botanists must hope
will enable it long to maintain the unequal contest against so many dan-
gerous foes. Perry county and Centre township will then continue to
boast the possession of a natural botanical garden, containing one of the
most interesting vegetable relics on earth.

APPENDIX.

August, 1883. The fruit of the Box Huckleberry is now ripe, and com-
pared with that of other species is scanty. The berries grow singly and
not one plant in ten is productive. They are edible, but lack sweetness,
and are hence perhaps less attractive to animals. The blossom in early
May was profuse, more so than that of its kindred species. The fruit is
of the same size as theirs and is covered with a bloom like that of the low
blueberry.

On the Kquivalent of the New York Portage, in Perry County, Middle Penn-
sylwania.

(Read before the American Philosophical Soetety, September 21, 18: 3g)

THe CARDIOLA SHALE.

About 200 feet above the Fenestella shale, the topmost bed of the 800
feet of Hamilton Upper shale, which in Perry county is the highest layer
in which a Hamilton fauna occurs, isa mass of shale differing in some
respects from that above and below it. Though no sharp plane of limita-
tion can be drawn at its base to separate it from the 200 (2) feet of barren.
black slate which is here the representative of the New York Genesee
shale (so far as hitherto determined), yet a good physical distinction be-
tween the two is afforded in the field by the bleaching of the latter under
the action of the air and light., This is so complete that a bank of weath-

1883,] 231 [Claypole.

ered material from these (Genesee) beds is quite white, whereas a fresh
broken mass is nearly black. The shales of which Tam now writing do
not manifest any so marked change of color, but retain much more firmly
their original black tint. They are very smooth and free from sand, usually
dark, but sometimes greenish. They may be distinguished somewhat
roughly in the field from the overlying Chemung proper, by the former of
these characters and especially by the absence of those even-bedded, thin,
fine-grained, square-fracturing beds of sandstone which so distinctively
mark the Chemung proper in this region.

The beds below these Cardiola shales, that is the representatives of the

tenesee of New York, are remarkably barren, and have thus far yielded

me no fossils in Perry county. The lower beds of the Chemung proper
have also proved unprofitable ground. But the 200 feet of shale to which
T have assigned the above name, though by no means rich in fossils, have
nevertheless yielded a few species which enable me with confidence to
assign them their place as representatives of the Portage group of New
York. Some of these are peculiar to these beds, and must therefore be
considered ‘‘characteristic’’ for the district. Chief among them, and
almost everywhere present where these beds are exposed, is the small but
beautiful lamellibranch figured in the Geology of the Fourth District of
New York, by Prof. Hall, under the name of Avicula speciosa, now Car-
diola speciosa, This shell was confined in its range to the Portage group
of New York at the time of publication of the Geology of the Fourth Dis-
trict, but is reported in the later volume (vol. v. p. 1) to occur also in the
Genesee. In Perry county this species occurs toward the top of the beds
that lie between the summit of the Hamilton'and the base of the Chemung
proper, and there is consequently little precipitancy in referring them to
the Portage, a conclusion which is in full accord with the evidence fur-
nished by stratig raphy.

[have not yet succeeded in establishing any wide or general physical
plane of demarkation at which the fossils given on the next page cease and
the Chemung fauna proper begins. The beds are somewhat barren with
the exceptions here noted, Buta very convenient local horizon is afford-
ed by a heavy bed of sandstone which occurs about 200 feet above the
top of the equivalent of the Genesee slate.

This bed of sandstone does not crop out in many places, but I have
found it on the north side of the Buffalo hills on the road running from
the old Juniata Furnace, where it forms the bank of the stream, and is
thicker and more solid than anywhere else. It is also exposed on the road
from Bloomfield to Newport, about a mile from the latter town,

Adopting this view we have, for Perry county, the following section in
this part of the column :

Feet,
Chemung shale and sandstone ....
Portage-Chemung sandstone......... ceceeveee 20
Jarcdiola (Portage) shale eveicseei dees Be CHARS GH NROO

JRE
Clay pole.]} 232 [Sept. 21,

Feet.
POUCHES PhMCs hp toy merunin ene eiaa sume hus usnnie ere eUU
PICMG RLG COLA a. ca orc aaare eal Wilu's Eels 4's Wabiviheis Gwe iN IIe 15
Tropidoleptus shale.......... VERE NeW sigan bth: Bieldl 9h Sulina): SLO
Hamilton Upper (Ochrey) shale... ccsecee ees vecescenre 100
Hamilton Fossil ore and Paracyclas shale.............+.. 5

PEM TOR CHI OEEOMO) Cle ia's'c veo Vk pace uw sthie Rute ci eee

Tae CarpioLa SHALE AND Portraan Beps or Parry County.

List of Fossils.

1. Cardiola speciosa, Hall.

2. Styliola fissurella, Hall

3. Lunulicardium fragile, Hall.

4. Amboceelia fimbriata, n. s.

5. Strophodonta perplana, v. parva, n. v.
6. Goniatites complanatus ?, Hall.
7. Coleolus acicula, Hall.

8. Poteriocrinus, sp. ?
9. Aulopora tubiformis, Hall,

10, Streptelasma, sp. ?

11. Pleurotomaria ?

Details on the paleontology and descriptions of the new species are de-
ferred for want of time.

The new species Ambocelia fimbriata named in the preceding list very
much reserables the kindred species from the Hamilton, Ambdocalia umbo-
nata Hall, but differs from it chiefly in being set with small, fine spines in
regular concentric rows, a feature of which I have seen no trace in the
fossils of this genus from other horizons in the county. The presence of
these spines gives the casts of A. fimbriata an appearance much like those
of Spirifera fimbriata, Hall.

Wherever the two beds can be examined in position I have found that
those containing Ambocelia lie above those containing Oardiola. In most
sections only one of these fossils can be obtained, the exposures being
usually small. Both are, however, so far as I have observed, strictly
limited to this horizon, and consequently either is available for determin-
ing it.

The best exposure of the Cardiola shale in Centre township is about two
miles 8. W. of New Bloomfield opposite the house of Mr. Samuel Brown,
and for some distance thence toward the hill (Iron ridge) where a small cut
shows the shales containing Oardiola speciosa and Ambocalia Jimbriata in
abundance. Measurement of their thickness is difficult on account of the
concealment of their base and the uncertainty of dip which is not uniform
in either degree or direction. Considerably more than 100 feet ig exposed,
and towards the upper part of the section the typical Chemung sandstones
begin to appear among the shales. The Genesee slate is entirely con-

r

1883.) 233 [Claypole.

cealed, unless its topmost layers yield the loose material shown in the

roadside cut nearly opposite Mr. Brown’s house. This part of the section

has yielded no fossils.

The Cardiola shale also appears in the side of the road leading to Perry
Furnace near the house of Mr. Quigley. It is here a very smooth, yel-
low green shale, and has yielded

Cardiola speciosa.

Strophodonta perplana v. parva.
Amboceelia fimbriata.

Styliola fissurella,

Goniatites complanatus ?

A third exposure of these beds is at the mouth of Losh’s rup, in Wheat-
field township, where, ina cut on the roadside, the lower or Cardiola
beds may be seen and their fossils collected. I have obtained here,

Jardiola speciosa.
Strophodonta perplana v. parva.

A fourth exposure of these Portage beds is onthe south branch of Losh’s
run, about two miles west of the Juniata and near the cross-roads, at
the house of Mr. D. Bosdorf. Here the upper beds only occur, yielding

Amboceelia fimbriata,
Strophodonta perplana v. parva.

A. fifth exposure of these shales is on the road leading south from New-
port to the ore works on Limestone ridge, near Pine grove. Near the
house of Mr. J. Ramer occur dark smooth shales by the road yielding

Styliola fissurella.
Jardiola speciosa.
Coleolus acicula,

A. sixth exposure of the same shales occurs near Newport, on the upper
road to Baileysburg, soon after leaving the river. Here the Portage-
Chemung sandstone is cut twice at a bend in the road, and close under-
neath it come the shales yielding the usual fossils. Only a few feet of
the highest. part of the Portage are exposed, but the following species
were found after a short search :

Cardiola speciosa.

Ambocéelia fimbriata.

Styliola fissurella.

Aulopora tubiformis.
Strophodonta perplana v. parva.

This exposure has also yielded me a small crinoid Poteriocrinus, appar-

ently undescribed, and a Streptelasma, both of which I have been unable
for want of time to examine minutely.
; T have little doubt that the fauna of this Portage group might be much
Increased by longer search. One or two additional species have been
gemcets obtained by recent visits to some of the other places mentioned
above,

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800, XXI, 114, 2D. PRINTED NOVEMBER 2, 1888,

Claypole.] 234 [Sept. 21,

The following extract from the Geology of the Fourth District of New
York will show the close resemblance between the rocks at the two places:
““The thick-bedded sandstones at Portage form the terminal rocks of the
group.’’ ‘The upper part consists of thick-bedded sandstone.”’ ‘‘ The
arenaceous strata of the Portage group are always more argillaceous than
those of the Chemung group.”’

It appears from Prof, Hall’s description of the group that it begins with
beds very free from sand—the Cashaqua shale—and ends with a heavy
thick-bedded sandstone. At least this is its character at its eastward ex-
posures on the Genesee river. Farther west the sand, as usual, disappears
and the group contains little except shale.

The Portage group in Perry county comes, therefore, as near to the typical
Portage group in New York, as can be expected—near enough in strati-
graphical and paleontological characters to give full confidence in their
identification.

I may add, in conclusion, that some of the shale beds near the Portage-
Chemung sandstone are much valued locally as whetstones. These ap-
parently occur both above and below the sandstone.

In one place also, a bed of light-colored brown hematite has been exposed
lying on the top of the sandstone and about eighteen inches thick. This
is the only case of the occurrence of a bed of iron ore of any appreciable
thickness in the Chemung of Perry county. No trial has yet been made
of it, but judging from appearance it would not be of high grade.

The facts given above are useful in that they enable us to separate 400
feet from the great mass of olive shale in Perry county. The separation of
200 feet, as the Hamilton Upper shale, was mentioned in the beginning
of this article. The total thickness of the olive shales of VIIT has been

given in the neighborhood of Newport, at about 5500 feet, thus divided :

ONC heath ag MMR eR rae oni io ta Weer ons Orc nnniun, uae panenegeye th, 10,0]
POPC siisvie cu UN ale ele alintile nhs cavities Va Wee sles divenie nt COU A DOUb:
PEAR Es hie vc \iels Hal Wisin 04 Hea telvlnun ni eip Welvlelsd Mass tinis ian LAND)

5520

3ut these measurements are much exaggerated, They have apparently
been made along the Juniata, without noticing a fold which occurs at
Inoculate run, and the effect of which extends beyond the river. The
ground is very difficult, but the following figures, which I have ob-
tained with considerable trouble and checked as carefully as was possible
with the limited time at my command, are certainly nearer the truth for
the neighborhood of Newport :

CGI T Soo: oho, dial Hivinsy Ninh, pans eine ev ia ek RENE TO Wie Hsiao vue 4 8000
Portage. we H Pele Nie OAihid alwveluni aiden he Vateee OUD
GONCSEC so. 0.6 vies Meee blo Hy WE debs Hole MV Wellpee Sr Rime rere: ie OU

8400

It thus appears that after the sepa ration of the 600 feet above mentioned,

€ =
1883, ] 235 [Claypole.

the thickness of which is only approximately given here, there yet remains
an immense mass, the subdivision of which is more difficult, but would not
perhaps be impossible if sufficient time were allowed.

[Tam unable as yet to say if these Cardiola shales extend far north and
south, no exposures having been yet found. But the places above men-
tioned trace them through the middle of the county from south-west to
north-east, a distance of seven or eight miles. Their farther extension is
very little less than certain.

APPENDIX.

Since the above paper was read I have spent a few hours with Prof. Le
Cj White, now engaged in the survey of Huntingdon county. With his
assistance I found the bed here described and most of its fossils near
Huntingdon. The thickness, though shortness of time prevented meas-
urement, seems also very nearly the same,

Note on the Genus Rensselacria in the Hamilton Group in Perry Co. By
HH. W. Olaypote.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, September 21, 1883.)

The Genus Rensselaeria, Hall, was established to receive certain Brach-
iopods, some of which were new, and others of which had previously been
Known under other names. They were distinguished by their general
outward form and certain peculiarities of internal structure from other
Brachiopods nearly allied to them.

The Genus Rensselacria is limited in Eastern North America to the
Lower Helderberg and Oriskany groups, four of its twelve species oceur-
ring in the former and seven in the latter. One only, a small species, 2.
Johanni, Wall, has been described from the Upper Helderberg of Water-
loo, Iowa. Of this Prof, Hall speaks doubtfully, referring it to this
Senus only on account, of its external characters.

Prof, Hall informs me that he has since that time removed this species
from the genus. It is, therefore, rather surprising to find well-marked
Specimens of Rensselaeria high up in the Hamilton group of Middle Penn-
Sylvania. Yet the sandstone, so conspicuous a feature of this group in
Perry and adjoining counties, yields, near its middle, a bed which is in
some places little more than a mass of shells of a form which can scarcely,
ifat all, be distinguished from R. Marylandica of the Oriskany sandstone.

Tn some places this shell is found almost alone, but in others it occurs
mixed with Spirifera formosa, or a species so like it that I cannot distin-
guish them. This Spirifera is the most abundant fossil in the Hamilton
Sandstone of the county, occurring sometimes in myriads.

236 (Sept. 21,

Claypole.]

The Hamilton sandstone is a peculiar deposit of sand in the midst of a

vast accumulation of shales. It covers a district extending from the Blue
mountain northward for about fifty miles ‘and eastward to the nvigh-
borhood of the Schuylkill river. Westward its limit cannot be traced, as
it is destroyed by erosion, but from appearances it was as great as in the
vast. It lies between a mass of shale above and another mass below, and
at its greatest development is about 800 feet thick, at the Susquehanna
gap. Some of its beds, especially toward the middle, are very hard and
flinty, but it grows more and more shaly as it recedes from this point.
Apparently it exists at some distance from its point of greatest develop-
ment as a sandstone mass below and another above, with intervening
shales.

Note on a large Crustacean from the Catskill Group of Pennsyluania. By
H. W. Olaypotle.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, Sept. 21, 1883.)

I have lately received from Mr. R. D. Lacoe, of Pittston, a slab of green
sandstone, from the Catskill group of Wyoming county, containing a well-
preserved head of some creature. Though not complete, yet enough re-
mains to enable me to form a good idea of what the full form of the head
must have been.

It measures eight and a half inches across the broadest part, and the
same from front to back. The outline is semi-elliptical, the part preserved
corresponding to a piece cut from one of the ends of an ellipse. It is
somewhat distorted, and may when perfect have been more nearly semi-
circular. The outline is slightly wavy, but this also may be due to distor-
tion. Fortunately the right side is almost perfect and, being symmetrical,
it is not difficult to reconstruct the other. A good idea of its general shape
may be suggested to a paleontologist by saying that it resembles the head
of Cephalaspis.

A longitudinal median ridge runs from near the front margin almost to
the back of the portion preserved, dividing the head surface into two
equal parts. This ridge rose near its front end into a low tubercle, or
perhaps a spine, and near its hinder end into a distinct and boldly elevated
spine which is, however, crushed down almost flat. Posteriorly the ridge
narrows and tapers down to the general surface.

At the place of the posterior spine another ridge, less distinct, crosses
the former at right-angles, and itself rises at its two ends, midway to the
outer margin, into low prominences from which two semicircular ridges,
convex outwardly, run curving in toward the median line at both their
ends, one in front, the other behind the cross-ridge from which they start.
Each cross-ridge, with its semicircular branch, resembles in outline an

aes

Proceedings of the Amer. Philos. Soc. Phila. Sept. 21, 1883. Vol. XXI. Page 236,

i in

a

: \ An
| iH t ns : i i i

Fd

Scale of Inches.
a)

BRM: ATLASES: Fe stth

DoLIcHOCEPHALA LACOANA, Claypole, from the Catskill rocks ot
Wyoming county, Pennsylvania.

‘ ,
|

|

|

|

\
AN
|

'
_

QQ
1883. ] 23% [Claypole,

anchor-shank with its two arms. Right and left of the anterior tuber-
cle, and not quite half way between them and the margin, arise two
broad, rounded prominences anteriorly, elongated and connected with the
median ridge by a scarcely perceptible elevated tract.

The whole surface of the head is covered with small wrinkles or tuber-
cles, the former chiefly in front, the latter behind, and the margin is
marked by a narrow groove about one-eighth of an inch in breadth, resem-
bling that which often marks the head of a trilobite.

No trace of bone can be found upon the specimen, so that there is no
ground for supposing that it is the head ofa fish. But the greater part of
the surface is covered with a thin, black, perhaps carbonaceous, coating,
highly suggestive of the carapace ofa crustacean, This is, beyond doubt,
its nature, and the fossil represents a large species hitherto unknown, and
from an horizon which has thus far yielded nothing similar to it. The
only crustaceans yet announced from the Catskill are some small entomos-
tracans mentioned by the writer at the meeting of the American Associa-
tion at Montreal. The specimen in question possesses therefore an un-
usual interest.

From so small a portion of the specimen it is difficult to assign it its ex-
act place in the animal scale, but among the crustaceans we are led im-
mediately to look at the allies of the existing king-crab, Limulus, and
those of the fossil Hurypterus and Pterygotus. Both of these possess the
peculiar trilobitic head-shield, and may, therefore, supply useful informa-
tion concerning this species.

But the general outline of the fossil being semi-elliptical, does not well
agree with that of Lémulus, and its fossil allies, which is semicircular.
Limuloid forms descend to us from Silurian days, but they all present a
semicircular head-shield similar to that of the living king-crab, Limulus
Polyphemus, or Moluccanus, ‘of the east coast of America, and the Molueca
islands. The same form of head-shield characterizes all the fossil genera
allied to Limulus — Hemiaspis, Bunodes, Huproops, Belinurus, and Haly-
cine. It is, consequently, impossible to refer our specimen to the dagger-
tailed family of Xyphosurans.

Not better does the outline of the head agree with that of the rounded,
oblong head-shield of Pterygotus and Burypterus. Yet, in some respects,
it reminds us of these. But the discrepancy is too great to allow of its
reference to any established genus of the Burypterids. This will be evi-
dent on an examination of the accompanying outlines.

The eyes being undiscoverable in the fossil, the important evidence
which they might afford towards settling its relationship is not available,
but very important and conclusive testimony is derived from the markings
on the surface of the carapace. Beside the wrinkles or tubercles men-
tioned above, the crest is covered with small, delicate, crescentiform sculp-
ture, resembling that which is characteristic of the Eurypterids, and a
representation of which is given in the plate.

Os
Clay pole. ] 238 [Sept. 21,

Considering all these facts I have determined to place the fossil in a new
genus established to receive it, and named from the elongated head Dol-
ichocephala. The generic and specific descriptions are necessarily im-
perfect, being founded on imperfect specimens, but the characters of the
head are distinct.

ah og exe

a.* db,

a. Kurypterus remipes,

b. Stylonurus Logani.

c. Pterygotus Anglicus.

Limulus rotundatus.

e. Scale-like sculpture of Dolichocephala, nat. size.

Ps
a

DoLICHOCEPHALA, n. g.

yenus of Crustaceans allied to Hurypterus. Head-shield only known.

General outline semi-elliptical (the length being parallel to the major
axis of the ellipse). Surface slightly convex; margin furrowed. Medial
line marked with an elevated ridge, beginning near the front, and rising
into spines or tubercles at different points along its course, sinking again
to the general level posteriorly. Another obscure and interrupted ridge
or row of tubercles lies between the median ridge and the margin, and
another, more or less defined, crosses the median ridge at right angles
near its hinder extremity.

Whole surface marked with small, low tubercles, and, beside these,
with minute delicate scale-like sculpture.

DOLICHOCHPHALA LACOANA, Nn. Ss.

General outline as in genus; margin with two narrow furrows and a

fillet between them, the whole almost a half an inch wide. Median ridge

1883,] 239

well marked, rising anteriorly in a low spine or tubercle, and again in a
larger or more prominent one at its hinder end. A lower ridge crosses
this at right angles, extending about half-way to the margin, and at the
end of this are two semicircular ridges curving inward half-way to the
median ridge, and sinking to the general level. In the hinder angle, be-
tween this and the cross ridge, is a roundish mark which may indicate the
place of the eye. Another elongated tubercle or short ridge lies between
the anterior end of the median line and the margin.

Surface marked with crowded, low tubercles, and with the delicate,
‘scale-like sculpture of the genus.

The fossil was found in the sandstone of the Catskill group at Meshop-
pen, Penna., and is the property of R. D. Lacoe, Esq., of Pittston, to
whose kindness I am indebted for the use of the specimen, and in whose
honor I have named it.

There is a species of Kurypterus described by Prof. Whitfield, in the
forthcoming volume of the Paleontology of Ohio (New fossils from Ohio.
Pamphlet), of which he says:

“The cephalic shield is proportionately broader than that of 7. remipes
or H. lacustris, and is more regularly rounded or arched on the anterior
border, lacking that subquadrate form characteristic of those species.’’

This species, Hurypterus Briensis, from the hydraulic limestone of Put-
in-Bay, Ohio, shows a manifest departure from the ordinary type of the
head of Kurypterus, but the variation seems rather in the direction of
Limulus or Huproops, than in that of Dolicocephala. As Prof. W. does
not mention the size of his specimen, it is impossible to say how nearly
the two approach in that respect. The horizon from which it comes in
Ohio is the equivalent of the waterlime of New York, to which the genus
Eurypterus is almost entirely confined. Two species are described from
the Coal Measures, and one from the Devonian, of Pennsylvania.

Stated Meeting, October 5, 1883.

Present, 10 members.

A photograph of Professor James Morgan Hart was pre-
sented for insertion in the Album.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Smith-
sonian Institution (118), and the Sociedad Keonomica de Va-
lencia, September 16.

240 (Oct. 5,

A. letter of envoy from the Department of the Interior was
read.

Donations for the Library were reported from the Annales
des Mines, Revue Politique, Commercial Geographical Society
at Bordeaux, Meteorological Committee and London Nature,
Hssex Institute, Boston Natural History Society, American
Journal of Science, New Jersey Historical Society, Franklin In-
stitute, American Medical Association, Journal of Pharmacy, H.
Phillips, Jr., United States Fish Commission, Surgeon-Gen-
eral’s Office and United States Geological Survey.

An obituary notice of the late Henry Seybert was read by
Mr. Moncure Robinson.

The death of Prof. J. Reinhard Blum at Heidelberg, August
22, aged 80, was reported.

The death of Prof. W. A. Norton at New Haven, Connecti-
cut, September 21, aged 72, was reported.

“The Zone of Asteroids and the Ring of Saturn,” by Prof.
Daniel Kirkwood, of Bloomington, Indiana, was read by the
Secretary.

y

Prof. Barker brought to the attention of the Society a num-
ber of electrical novelties: small batteries which can be sealed
up and applied to special practical purposes, such as lighting
gas lamps, treating nervously diseased patients, ringing an
alarm bell when the heat of a room becomes unduly raised,
&c., and a new and much cheaper method of coiling and insu-
lating wire, by winding the naked wire and a cotton thread
together on the same spool. These inventions of Mr. Clarke
of Manchester, were exhibited and explained.

Pending nominations Nos. 985 to 1006 were read.
And the meeting was adjourned.

6
1883.) 241 {Robinson.

OBITUARY NOTICE OF HENRY SEYBERT.
By Moncurr Rosrnson.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 5, 1888.
of

Mr. PrestpENT AND GENTLEMEN:

I have occasionally, when asked to write an obituary
notice of a departed friend, felt, as a prominent citizen
in the earlier days of our Republic is said to have
replied, when asked if he would accept a nomination
to the Presidency, “The office” (his reply was) “is one
not to be sought or declined.” ‘The eminent and vir-
tuous citizen who, sixty years ago, made this reply,
made it in view of the immense responsibility of the
office. But, Mr. President, more or less responsibility
attaches to the performance of all the duties of life,
and the writer of a brief sketch of the life of a de-
parted fellow-citizen, for the information of the public,
is obliged to recollect the motto “de mortuts nil nisi
verum,’ as well as that “de mortuis nil nist bonum,”
None of us, sir, are infallible, or free from the frailties
which pertain to our humanity, and we should act
tenderly and affectionately, as well as truly, in dealing
with either frailties or mistakes, especially when, as in
the case of our departed friend, they were only pecadt-
arities not amounting to a fracture, or a flaw, or evena
blemish, in the escutcheon of a life of blended useful-
ness and goodness.

The friend, Mr. Seybert, of whom you have re-

PROC. AMER, PHILOS. 800. xxi. 114. 28. PRINTED NOVEMBER 7, 18838.

242 (Oct. 5,

Robinson,]

quested me to write an obituary notice, was at the
time of his death the oldest member of our Society;
one who at an earlier period in the annals of societies
would have borne the title of zés Dean. He was
elected one of its members January the 16th, 1824,
three weeks only after the twenty-second anniversary
of his birth, at a period when the Society had on its
list of members as many distinguished and learned
men as at any period before, or since, when (as I pre-
sume is still the case), new members were nominated
and elected without the slightest previous knowledge
of their nomination being proposed, and when in the
case of rejected nominations, no one besides those
present knew that their names had been presented for
consideration. On the 5th of March, 1824, between
six or seven weeks after his election, Mr. Seybert
read to the Society a clearly written and most inter-
esting analysis of the chrysoberyls of Haddam (Con-
necticut), and Brazil, a mineral and gem next to the
sapphire in hardness, and which had for some years
previous attracted much attention on account of its
rareness, rather than its value. ‘This inaugural dis-
course of Mr, Seybert will be found in Volume 2d,
Article No, 3, of the new series of transactions of the
Society, page 117.

It is proper before proceeding farther, to tell you
something of the parentage and early training of Mr.
Seybert, which will explain how he became a member

of our association at an earlier age than any member

¢ Ap
1888. ] 243 [ Robinson.

who preceded or succeeded him, since its foundation
to this day.

His father, Adam Seybert, was a Philadelphian by
birth and education, and distinguished as a chemist
and mineralogist, who represented his native city in
Congress during eight successive years, three of them
(the years 1812, 43 and ’14), years of great trial, and
at the time characterized as the period of our country’s
second war of independence. Between the close of
this war and 1818 Mr. Seybert found time to prepare
and give to the world, whilst performing faithfully his
duties as a member of Congress, and in his laboratory,
his “Statistical Annals of the United States of America,”
a work reviewed in the Edinburgh Review of January,
1820, by the Rev. Sydney Smith, in an article which
Speaks of it as “a book of character and authority,”
“which will form a pretty complete portrait of Amer-
ica, and teach us here to appreciate the country, either
as a powerful enemy or a profitable friend.”

Asa chemist and mineralogist he is spoken of in a
work by Professor Benjamin Silliman, of Yale College,
entitled “ American Contributions to Chemistry,” page
36, as follows:

“ Adam Seybert is one of the few American chemists
who enjoyed the advantages, rare at that time, of a
training in the School of Mines at Paris, late in the
last century. He has left few papers, but his memoir,
read before the American Philosophical Society, March

10, 1797, entitled, ‘Experiments and Observations on

244. [Oct. 5,

tobinson.]

Land and Sea Air,’ is of interest, as the earliest exam-
ple of such a research on our records, It relates the
results of twenty-seven analyses of air made by the
author at sea, in a voyage across the Atlantic, and also
the comparison of these results with other analyses
made by him on land, near Philadelphia, by.which
comparison he reaches the conclusion that the air over
the sea is purer than that over the land; that, while
the latter varies with locality, the former is nearly con-
stant ; and he then ventures the suggestion that ‘ per-
haps the impurities are absorbed by the agitation of
the waves,’ a conclusion to which modern investiga-
tion, by the use of more exact methods, has also
arrived. Considering the imperfect condition of
eudiometric methods in Seybert’s time, his research
and conclusions therefrom are decidedly creditable to
his skill and sagacity.”

The mother of Henry Seybert was Maria Sarah,
daughter of Henry Pepper, Esq., of Philadelphia, one
of its wealthy and respected citizens. Mrs, Seybert
died during the early infancy of her son, and the care
of him in infancy, and responsibility of his whole edu-
cational training, thereby devolved exclusively on his
father, who remained a widower until his death, in
Paris, on the 2d of May, 1825.

I met there a few days after the death of his father,
Mr. Henry Seybert, who had accompanied him to
Paris, and been there his constant companion and

solace, during the critical disease which ended his

DAB
1883,] 245 (Robinson.

father’s patriotic and useful life, at the comparatively
early age of fifty-two years. He was in deep mourn-
ing, and, being naturally reserved, had but few ac-
quaintances among his countrymen in Paris, themselves
then comparatively few in number. Being within a
few weeks of the same age with him, and sincerely
sympathizing with him in his profound sorrow, we
became, naturally, in a short time well acquainted.
This acquaintance ripened, during our travels together
in England the following .summer, into a respect and
friendship which continued uninterrupted, until we
were separated by his death on the 3d of March last,

At that time, and indeed until recently, I knew but
little of the honorable and valuable life which Mr. Henry
Seybert had been leading for several years previous
in his native city. His disposition was taciturn, and
he preferred generally listening to the opinions and
conversation of others to taking part in conversation
himself, and but for the request of’ the Society to pre-
pare this tribute to his memory, I should probably
never have known how highly he was estimated at the
time of our first meeting, by eminent chemists and
mineralogists, of both Europe and America. Professor
Benjamin Silliman, in the volume before quoted from,
in which he speaks of Mr. Adam Seybert, makes the
following mention in page 74, of the same, of the son:

“Like his father, Adam Seybert, he was educated in
the School of Mines in Paris, and was an early con-

tributor to our knowledge of the constitution of Ameri-

246 [Oct. 5,

Robinson, ]

can minerals. In 1882 he analyzed the sulphuret of
molybdenum from Chester, Pa.; chromate of iron from
Maryland and Pennsylvania; the tabular spar pyrox-
ene, and colophonite, of Willsborough, N. Y., and the
Maclurite (chondrodite) of New Jersey (in which he
independently discovered fluorine as Dr. Lanstaff had
done before). He also analyzed the manganesian
garnet, found with the cheisoberyl at Haddam, Conn.,
and the chrysoberyl of the same locality, In 1830 he
analyzed the Tennessee meteorite of Bowen, since
which date I have been unable to find any further con-
tributions from Mr. Seybert, whose attention was un-
fortunately diverted from science, to which his early
life was so advantageously devoted, to other and less
fruitful lines of investigation.”

It is to be regretted that Professor Silliman knew
but little of the occupations of Mr. Seybert after the
death of his father in the spring of 1825. Being the
only living descendant of his father and mother, he
inherited a large fortune, and it is certainly not singu-
lar, that a young gentleman of twenty-three years of
age, who had inherited a fortune estimated by his con-
temporaries at $300,000, who had been occupied
closely for several years in the laboratory, in chemical
and mineralogical investigations, which had made him
an honored member of our body, and given him a
name and reputation among the scientists of Europe,
at the early age of twenty-two, but who had at that

time seen nothing of the great world, should have

1883.] 247 (Robinson,

been tempted to give up for some years, to a great
extent, the laboratory, for the pleasures of society and
travel. To this, is no doubt ascribable the fact that
after May, 1825, the period of his father’s death, Pro-
fessor Silliman was unable to find “any further contri-
butions from Mr. Seybert,”’ besides the analysis of the
Tennessee meteorite of Bowen in 1830.

It has been suggested that the last sentence above
quoted from the discourse of Professor Silliman, had
reference to his spiritualistic investigations. If so,
Professor Silliman labored under a great mistake as
to Mr. Seybert’s occupations between 1830 and 1850.
During all that period he was certainly much more of
a Materialist than a Spiritualist, but I think more of a
Christian, though for a time a doubting one, than
either. But notwithstanding his religious doubts, and
perplexities, he gave, during that period, both in this
country and Europe, where he passed much of it, his
attention and aid to works of charity, and valuable en-
terprises. Among the latter I recollect his perfect
confidence, speedily verified, notwithstanding the de-
cided opinions and predictions of Lardner and others
to the contrary, in the general adoption, within a brief
period, of steamships between America and Europe.

It may indeed be doubted whether the large acces-
sion of fortune to Mr. Seybert, on the death of his
father, was a fortunate feature in his history, and it very
probably was not. Had it been less, he would proba-

bly have continued a co-laborer with his friends in

¢
Robinson. ] 248 [Oct..5,

Europe and the United States, in his previous employ-
ments, and his reputation as a chemist and mineralo-
gist, would probably have increased in a corresponding
ratio with theirs. But it may fairly be inferred from
what we now know of his traits of character, that he
was one of those who believed in doing their duty in
that state of life in which it pleases the Almighty to
place them, and if so, he naturally inferred that duty
in his own case, was materially modified by the posses-
sion of a large fortune, which, properly employed,
might enable him to be more widely useful to his fel-
low-citizens and fellow-men, than he could be even if
enrolled with the Elie de Beaumonts of Europe or
the most distinguished chemists and mineralogists of
America.

The change in the views of Mr. Seybert as to the
life most proper for him in the future, was probably
adopted soon after the death of his father, and a few
weeks previous to his visit to England, in the summer
of 1825, referred to in a previous page. We had the
good fortune to have as traveling companions in this

visit, that pure and excellent man and-Christian g

en-
tleman, Mr. Nathaniel Chauncey, of Philadelphia, and
Mr. Jaquelin Ambler, of Virginia, a member of one of
the old and honored families of that State, in its better
days.

We harmonized wonderfully in our views as to the
places and objects to be visited by us; our scientist,

Mr. Seybert, preferring, like the rest of us, a view of

6
1888.] ’ 249 (Robinson,

the magnificent residences, and beautiful parks, and
venerable Gothic temples of the past, with a brief stay
in her manufacturing and commercial cities, to any
other disposition of the time at our disposal. We
found, in short, our companionship in England so
agreeable, that we sought to continue it on our return
to Paris by dining frequently together at the same
restaurants, and table d’hotes, and passing our even-
ings at the same theatres, especially the Theatre Fran-
¢ais, which, in the winter of 1825 and ’26, still num-
bered Talma and Mars among its attractions. But
there was one place in Paris especially attractive to
our partie carrée. This was the residence of Madame
de L., who had been unfortunate in her marriage, but
was blessed with a lovely and beautiful little daughter,
at the time only five or six years old, who was the pet
of all of us, The husband of her mother, though well
connected, was extravagant and wasteful in his habits,
and had expended not only his own fortune, but a
large part of that of his wife, thus creating the neces-
sity of her receiving table boarders, and occupants of
rooms, in order to secure the accustomed comforts to
herself and daughter. Mr. de L. was occasionally, but
not often, one of her guests.

Their daughter, who still retains a great deal of her
own and her mother’s ‘grace and beauty, sent to my-
self, as well as Mr. Seybert, two or three years ago, an
admirably executed photograph of herself, with a re-

quest, which I promptly complied with, that we would

PROC, AMER, PHILOS. SOC. XXI. 114. 2F, PRINTED NOVEMBER MG 1883.

250 , [Oot 5,

Robinson. ]

send her ours. But my excellent though modest
friend, Mr. Seybert, would not be persuaded that the
wish expressed by her, was anything more than a com-
pliment, and I do not think, at the time of his death,
that he had sent his. I was truly gratified to find from
his will, that though the compliment paid us was not
responded to by him, Mr. Seybert did not doubt her
warm and affectionate regard.

I ought here to say on what this regard was found-
ed. It was the result of one of those incidents or ac-
cidents of life which cause us to realize that “truth is
sometimes and not unfrequently stranger than fiction.”
The fact of Messieurs Chauncey, Seybert, Ambler, and
myself dining together at the apartments of Madame
de L. made us all feel a strong interest both in Mad-
ame de L. and her lovely little daughter. Mr. Sey-
bert remained in Europe for a year or more after the
return home of his fellow-travelers, and afterwards
divided his time for many years between Europe and
the United States, and thus had the opportunity, which
they had not, of witnessing the development, in form
and feature, as well as in intellect and beautiful nature,
of the gifted daughter of Madame de L., and profited
of the opportunity to offer to Madame de L. the ad-
vance of any funds she might require during the im-
portant period between girlhood and womanhood, to
procure for her daughter the best instructors in lan-
guages and music, and such other accomplishments as

she might deem appropriate and desirable for her.

}
}
‘|
|

°

: ¢
1883.) 251 (Robinson,

A few years later, when Madame de L. found it
necessary to obtain what is termed in France a divorce
“de corps et de biens” from her husband, in order to
protect a small remainder of her property, Mr. Sey-
bert, believing in her ability to manage a large Hotel
Garni, well and profitably, advanced to her the means
of leasing and furnishing one, advantageously situated
on the Rue Castiglione. The enterprise was so suc-
cessful that, in an unusually brief period, Madame de
L. was enabled to return to Mr. Seybert his advances,
and leave for herself a modest but sufficient property
for her support in her declining years.

It has been forty or more years since these services
were rendered by Mr. Seybert, and Mlle. de L. had
become within that period the wife of an honorable
and respected citizen of Paris, and the mother of at-
tractive and accomplished daughters worthy of their
descent. But the services rendered by Mr. Seybert to
her mother, now no more, and herself, will never be
forgotten by the lovely and accomplished daughter,
Madame de Saivre, who was for many years a con-
stant and regular correspondent of Mr. Seybert, and
whose affectionate and grateful remembrance was re-
markably evinced, during and since, the illness which
preceded his death.

Not hearing from him for a longer period than usual,
she feared he might be ill, and wrote me asking me to

inform her if he was seriously, or dangerously so. In

compliance with her request, | gave her several times

RO
Robinson.] 252 (Oct. 5,

information of him during his illness, writing on each
occasion as encouragingly as I could, in view of her
evident solicitude. When requested by you to write
an obituary notice of Mr, Seybert, I thought it proba-
ble she could give me, in regard to his views on many
subjects, information of interest to his American
friends, and expressed in a letter to her the hope that
it would be agreeable to her to do so. In reply, I re-
ceived, in the month of June last, a letter from Madame
de Saivre, from which I have copied and translated into
English the following extract. It is impossible, I
think, to read it carefully without coming to the con-
clusion that the course of action of Mr. Seybert, dur-
ing the last half of his life, is most correctly and satis-

factorily explained by it.

“During the long period (says Madame de Saivre)
“of our acquaintance in France, he occupied himself,
“ at first, a good deal in reading scientific works, and
“attending lectures on History and Chemistry, but it
“seemed to me even then that his principal vocation
was in doing good. He aided the unfortunate and
improvident in their efforts to recover themselves,
“ and lead an honorable existence, and in order to en-
“rich himself to promote this object, I know estab-
“ lished several persons in America; often, also, I have
“known that he was not repaid money advanced by
‘‘him to persons who had profited of his confidence

“and credulity, but were not in haste to repay the

ORS
1888. 2! 3 Robinson,

money borrowed by them. Nevertheless he did not
weary in being charitable.

“Years ago Mr. Seybert spoke often to me of his
studies in Spiritualism, and of a great mission with
which he was charged here below. I confess I did
not at the time divine what the mission might be. I
asked myself only whether sediwms, more or less
sincere, were not abusing his confidence, in order to
guide him, after their fashion, in their interests.
Though I made many inquiries, Mr. Seybert never
explained himself c/ear/y on the subject of this mis-
ston. But now, aided by the knowledge of his last
will, I think I understand that beautiful mission which
he has made the object of his life, and can inform
you what has given rise to it.

“T recollect hearing Mr. Seybert say (I was then
about sixteen years old), that he was discouraged and
saddened, that he was studying uselessly, and seeking
vainly the shortest and surest way to save his soul,
which, in spite of his efforts, he could not see clearly.
He had read in the Holy Scriptures that a rich man
could no more enter Paradise than a camel could
pass through the eye of a needle, and he was tor-
mented with the thought that all his attempts to lead
a good life were useless, as regarded a future life,
because he was rich. Our poor friend was really very
unhappy, and, I recollect, sought conference with our

eminent religious men and casuists, and went even

to Rouen to see the Prince de Croy, the Archbishop,

n

Robinson. |

OB
254 [Oct. 5,

on the subject. They all assured him, that this sen-
tence was addressed to the sezful rich only, and not
to those who gave of their goods liberally to the
poor. In fine, they affirmed to him that @ really good
rich man should fructi/y his property, with the object
of distributing it among the poor, and needy, and

that on this condition only, could he be sure of reach-

‘ing the Almighty after his death. From this mo-

ment, dear sir, the vocation of our friend has been
fixed. He has lived modestly, even economically,
having reference to his large fortune, in order to ful-
fill here below the Christian mission of the good rich

man; that is to say, he has /fructified (increased) the

‘estate which God had confided to him, in order to

be able to bestow more on those who suffer! Is not
this exemplary and magnificent? May we not feel
assured that God has already rewarded our friend?
As regards myself, I am persuaded that he was drawn
into his studies of Spiritualism, by the hope of finding
in it some day the assurance that he was in the best

of ways—that of charity.”

We see in the above extract why Mr. Seybert ex-

ercised so close an economy in his personal expenses,

and reserved his large benefactions until his death.

Why he bequeathed so small a proportion of his for-

tune to his relations and attached friends, most of

whom were in easy circumstances, knew his views, and

expected nothing from him, and others who, like Mad-

S

1883. ] hel Ded [Robinson,

ame de Saivre, knew and approved them, and would
not have desired them to be changed.

Few men certainly have lived of more expanded be-
nevolence, but he was especially devoted to the repu-
tation and welfare of his native city, and his views were
well defined as to what should be done by him from a
sense of duty as a citizen, and to relieve want and suf-
fering.

Many of our older citizens probably recollect that
thirty or forty years ago he gave his time and expended
large sums of money, in endeavoring to substitute ex-
tensively in Philadelphia, soda and other mineral
waters at low prices, for alcoholic drinks. At a later
period he improved, at considerable cost to himself
and with much personal trouble, the dread of the city,
and within the last eight years he gave to Philadelphia
“a magnificent clock and bell, for which, at a special
meeting of the Select and Common Councils of the
City,” on the roth of July, 1876, the thanks of the city
were tendered him. ‘This clock and bell as yet, it is
believed, unsurpassed by anything yet executed for a
like object in our country, have been doing good ser-
vice night and day since, “from the tower of Indepen-
dence Hall,” toa large proportion if not to all the in-
habitants of our extended city.

The above services of Mr. Seybert to his fellow-

citizens could not have been “done in a corner,” and

were necessarily known to many of them, but those

who were acquainted with Mr. Seybert knew that his

Robinson. | [Oct. 5,

object in rendering such services was ot to be talked
about, but to be useful, His acts of charity to individuals,
manifold more numerous, were known only to their
recipients and those whose co-operation was neces-
sary to their being carried out. He was faithful all
his life as far as possible to the injuction of our Saviour,
in His sermon on the Mount, “Let not thy left hand
know what thy right hand doeth,”

In the commencement of this discourse, I alluded to
traits of character in Mr. Seybert which I termed
“ peculiarities,” but most of which might more prop-
erly be termed exaggerated ideas of duty. To one of
these Madame de Saivre alludes in the extract read
by me from her letter, in which she refers to the eco-
nomical habits of Mr. Seybert, with the object of in-
creasing the amount he purposed giving to the poor at
his death, We may, I think, reasonably believe that
the Almighty could not have intended that the liberal
man, who gives liberally of his goods during his life-
time to the unfortunate and needy, should also econo-
mize closely in expenditures probably essential to his
health and comfort in order to add to the large
amount he designs giving at his death. The opposite
of this I cite as one of the peculiarities of this most
estimable gentleman. Another equally remarkable
and equally creditable has attracted my attention in
reading his will; this is zamcng the endowments au-
thorized in the will after one or both of his parents.

No one can respect more than the writer of this obitu-

|
1
|

Or
1883. ] 257 { Robinson,

ary notice does, the feeling of reverence and affection
which dictated this direction ; but his mother had died
in his earliest infancy, eighty-one years ago, and his
father fifty-eight years ago, and he, himself, was an aged
man,

He could, therefore, not reasonably have been sup-
posed wanting in respect and reverence for his parents
in letting the endowments bear zs own name instead
of theirs, but the memories of his youth and the //¢h
commandment, “Honor thy father and thy mother
that thy days may be long upon the land which the
Lord thy God giveth thee,’ seem to have been always
primary and paramount considerations with him.

Madame de Stael in one of her works, but which of
them I cannot at the moment recall, expresses herself as
having no veneration for any being in the universe but
God and her father. Mr. Seybert has been for many
years a sincere believer in the Christian religion, and
of course could have used no language as little rev-

erential to the Almighty, as that of Madame de Stael,

but he has appeared to me to have had, ever since I

have known him, a sincere veneration (which he would
have been unnatural not to have had) for his father ;
for though that father was what the world would now
perhaps call a hard father, Mr. Adam Seybert was so
in consequence of his profound affection for his son,
whom he desired to make at least his equal and if prac-
ticable his superior in the sciences of chemistry and

mineralogy, to his knowledge of which he was mainly

PROG. AMER. PHILOS. 800. xxt. 114. 24. PRINTED NOVEMBER 14, 1883.

258 [Oct. 5,

Robinson, }

indebted, at a comparatively early period of life, for
both reputation and fortune, and the importance of
which, in the future to his country and the world, he
fully appreciated.

In speaking of Mr. Seybert’s will I am reminded of
his delay and difficulty in determining its provisions.
This was the result of what he believed to be informa-
tion from on high; that though he had long since
passed the three score and ten years allotted to man,
enough more years would be allowed him to enable
him to witness great moral changes in the world, and
the commencement of the “Heavenly Kingdom on
earth.” The excellent health he had for many years
enjoyed, due to his regular habits and even temper,
naturally aided in encouraging this idea, and but for a
protracted illness growing out of a very slight cause,
he would probably have postponed indefinitely signing
and executing a will, which, in such a contingency, he
would probably have deemed superfluous and perhaps
undesirable.

The slight cause alluded to, was his wearing for the
first time, about three years ago, at a dinner party in
the country, some twenty miles from Philadelphia, a
pair of boots not before used, the pressure of one of
which for six or eight hours (the day being warm)
upon a bunion on one of his feet, produced a serious
swelling ending in inflammation of the whole foot and
its suppuration, by which he was confined to his house

and bedroom for many months; preventing, during

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1883] ale (Robinson.

that period, his usual exercise in walking and driving,

and causing thereby a corresponding diminution of

appetite and strength. This great change produced,
naturally, doubts in his mind as to his previous antici-
pations of his life being much longer extended, not-
withstanding the assurances of the Spiritualistic medi-
ums consulted by him, and a gradual though slow
improvement in his health and appetite during the
spring and summer of 1882, by visits to the Saratoga
and Richfield Springs and the Coney Island baths, near
New York, and these doubts caused him to consider
and act on the presumption that he and those who
looked to his life being prolonged were probably mis-
taken, and the early and close consideration by him of
such a will as would carry out as nearly as practicable
his views.

He had frequently in previous years, asked my
Opinion as to what I would do zz zs place, and with his
views; that is to say, if I were unmarried and had no
children and my near relations were all in easy cir-
cumstances. I had always replied to the inquiry that
I knew of no charity which, in my opinion, would be so
beneficent and valuable to Philadelphia as an institu-
tion having from the Legislature paternal powers to
take up little boys and girls, neglected or abandoned
by their parents, and who were crowding our streets
either openly as beggars, or in the guise of “ News-
paper boys,” or on other pretexts, and who would

necessarily grow up unfitted for any useful occupation,

|
|
|
|

92
260 [Oct. 5,

Robinson.]

but who, if under the care and control of a benevolent
association, duly authorized to apprentice them to
proper parties at the proper times, would be fitted for
lives of usefulness in the occupations selected for
them; that I believed there would be no serious diffi-
culty in getting the proper legislation for such an
institution, and in finding competent, honest, honora-
ble and benevolent gentlemen to act as trustees in it,
of he would found it and act as one of its trustees during
his life time, and that such an institution would proba-
bly live and do its work for centuries, if the trustees,
carefully selected, were not only authorized but ve-
guired to fill promptly vacancies by death or other
causes as they occurred. Mr, Seybert was impressed
by these views, and at an earlier period of life, and
previous to his belief in Spiritualism, when he could
have acted as a member of the trust, would probably
have adopted them. As it was, realizing that he
could not reasonably expect to live more than two
or three months, he deemed it best to give up the idea
of an early trusteeship for the proposed charity, and
do what he could to promote the object in his will
which was signed, sealed and executed on the 25th of
December last.

A reader of the will will find in one of the last
clauses of it, that he directs his body to be “ cremated
at the Lemoyne Cemetery at Washington, Pennsyl-
vania.” I knew that cremation had been for many

years preferred by him to the usual mode of sepul-

|
|
|
if
t

>
1883. ] 26 1 {Robinson,

ture, or any other plan yet adapted for disposing of
the human corpse, and here was one of his most re-
markable singularities or peculiarities as I termed them
in the first paragraph of this memoir: for it was whilst
he was considering, or had perhaps determined on,
cremation for himself that he was planning the trans-
fer of the remains of his father from Paris, where
they had for many years previous been interred in [I
think] the Pére la Chaise Cemetery; and those of his
mother from her supposed last resting place many
years earlier in Philadelphia, to the older portion .of
the Laurel Hill Cemetery of our city, where he wished
their remains to be interred side by side, and where he
expressed to me many years ago the desire that any
ashes which might remain from the cremation of his
own body should be used in sprinkling their graves,
and causing the flowers and turf thus to grow fuller
and more perfectly over them! Such was his respect-
ful and affectionate reverence for both father and
mother |!

Peculiar and even paradoxical as Mr. Seybert some-
times appeared to be, he had the high respect and re-
gard of those who knew him well, and during his last
serious illness, he was not only comforted, but his life,
it is believed, prolonged by the thoughtfulness of
ladies, who sent him delicately prepared food which
nourished and sustained him, and without which he
would probably have died some months earlier than he

did, but which made his more sanguine friends, even

Robinson,] 262 (Oct. 5,

as late as January last, hopeful of his recovery. About
that time, it was ascertained by his able physician, Dr.
Pepper, that “ Bright’s disease existed in a latent and

“unsuspected form. Although, therefore, he con-

‘tinued able to drive out daily for some time, and
“ was able to discuss business subjects, as well as all

“ other topics, until within a very few days before his

‘ death, he failed gradually but steadily,” and his death,
which occurred on the 3d of March following, was an-
ticipated by him.

I have said, I think, enough in this memoir to give to
those who may read it a fair impression of Mr. Sey-
bert and his peculiarities. I do not think that any one
understood him better than myself, or enjoyed more
his confidence, and knowing his charitable views I was
happy to give him counsel and aid when it was desired
by him in investments, or in any other way. For these
services he would, I have no doubt, have offered com-
pensation if he had not been satisfied it would be de-
clined, during his lifetime, and would not be expected
at his death,

No one could have regarded death more firmly or
with more composure, and it pleased the Almighty
that his death should not be a painful one. To the
last days of his life, he was occupied in charitable acts
or suggestions, and directing as to the funeral services
to be performed at his house, previous to the transfer
of his remains for cremation at the Lemoyne Cemetery.

His composure and firmness in death might naturally

1883.] 263 (Kirkwood.

have been expected in one who, not only in the close,
but during the greater part of his matured life, had
been governed in all his acts by a paramount sense
of duty.

I met with, some years ago in a newspaper, the fol-
lowing lines, of which I have not been able to ascer-
tain the author, but which.seemed to me so applicable
to Mr. Seybert that I gave him at the time a copy of
them, which will probably some day be found among
his papers :

I slept, and dreamed that life was beauty,
I woke, and found that life was duty ;
Was thy dream then a shadowy lie ?

Toil on, worn heart, unceasingly,

And thou shalt find that dream to be
A truth, and noon.-day light to thee.

The Zone of Asteroids and the Ring of Saturn. By Professor Daneel Kirk-
wood,

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, Oct. 5, 1883.)

Evidence in support of the following theses was published by the

present writer in 1866-7
Le

In those parts of the zone of minor planets where a simple relation of
commensurability would obtain between the period of an asteroid and
that of Jupiter, the original planetary matter was liable to great pertur-
bation. The result of such disturbance by the powerful mass of Jupiter
was the necessary formation of gaps in the asteroid zone.

Il.

The great division in the ring of Saturn may be expl: ained by the dis-
turbing influence of the satellites, and the more narrow division discov-

a
Kirkwood.] 264 (Oct. 5,

ered by Encke may be regarded with much probability as the effect of a
similar cause. *

The recent able and noteworthy papers of General Parmentier,} of
Paris, and Dr. Meyer, { of Geneva, have invested these older discussions
of the same subjects with fresh interest and importance. The actual dis-
covery of chasms in the asteroid ring was the result of a previous theo-
retical determination of the parts where void spaces would be produced
by Jupiter’s influence. The definite claims of the writer then are :

(1.) To have designated the theoretical positions of
asteroids ;

gaps in the zone of

(2.) To have shown that these divisions actually exist; and

(3.) To have first assigned a physical cause for the divis ons of Saturn’s
ring.

A restatement of the principal evidence, showing the harmony of re-
cent discoveries with the conclusions announced seventeen years since, is
given below. The portions of the ring in which the periods would be
commensurable with that of Jupiter are :

1, THe DISTANCE 3.2776.

At this distance a planetary mass would make precisely two revolu-
tions while Jupiter completes one. Hence, as has been frequently shown,
a chasm in the ring would be the probable consequence of Jupiter’s dis-
turbing influence. How far is this theoretical inference sustained by facts ?

An examination of the table of distances shows

POCWEOM CUSHING WCCO uve odin HN S ua Leica tel thevest Ov Baterolds
bhp 8.200 HOU BBO Tie vs PT TKS et Female Ge Pinca ies puaieel tain bh
nde 8.857 and 8:404.0 00004, Pinu ver eoneod vemtaseticesd Men ple Gk MaMa pal Oh iy

That is, the part of the zone just within the distance at which a planet’s
period would be one-half that of Jupiter, contains the extraordinary num-
ber of thirty-seven minor planets, while the next space of equal breadth
(that containing the distance 3.2776), is a total blank, not a single asteroid
having yet been found within it. The exterior space immediately ad-
jacent, and of the same extent, contains eight. The confirmation of the
theory is thus most striking in precisely that part of the zone where we
have most reason to expect it.

II. THe DISTANCE 2.5012.

ILere an asteroid’s period would be one-third that of Jupiter. The order
of commensurability would be less simple, but the results of perturbation
would be of the same nature. The part of the zone included between the
distances 2.30 and 2.80 contains 143 minor planets; 45 within the critical

*See Proc. A, A. A. S., 1866 and 1875; Met. Ast. Ch. xiii; Monthly Notice, R.
A. §., Jan. 1869; Proce. A. P. 8., vol. xii, p. 163; Smithsonian Rep., 1876; London
Observatory, July, 1882.

t L’Astronomie, for

{ Astr. Nach., No. 2

», 1883,

par
1888. ] 265 | Kirkwood.

distance and 98 exterior to it. The average interval between adjacent
members is 0.00849, while that containing the distance 2.5012—between
Thetis and Hestia—is 0.05886, or more than fifteen times the average. Or,
if we take spaces adjacent to the chasm and of equal breadth with it, we
find twenty asteroids in the interior and eighteen in the exterior.

III. Tum pisrance 8.70.

Kfere five periods of a minor planet would be equal to three of Jupiter.
The distance falls in the wide hiatus interior to the orbits of Hilda and
Ismene.

IV. Tum DISTANCE 2.82.

At the distance 2.82 five periods of an asteroid would be equal to two
of Jupiter. The difference between the two terms of the ratio is three,
and hence the conjunctions would occur at angular intervals of 1209.
Between the distances 2.758 and 2,803 we find twenty-three minor plan-
ets. In the next space of equal breadth, containing the distance 2.82,
there is but one. This is No. 188, Menippe, whose elements are still some-
what uncertain. Between 2.858 and 2.903 we find ten asteroids.

Several other gaps have been noticed, but they become less distinctly
marked as the cases of commensurability become less simple. Those con-
sidered are the only cases in which the conjunctions would occur at less
than four points of the asteroid’s orbit.

The orbit of Tilda is doubtless nearly, if not quite, the outer limit of

ROE

the zone. Its mean distance is 8.9528, and in the space immediately be-
yond—at the distance 3.9683—an asteroid’s period would be two-thirds of
Jupiter’s. It may be observed, moreover, that at the distance 2.068, just
within the orbit of Medusa, a minor planet would make four revolutions
to Jupiter’s one.

Arp ton Gaps IN THE Zone AccrpENTAL?—In 1870, before half the
asteroids now known had been discovered, Mr. Proctor, the well-known
astronomer, wrote :

“The question may be suggested, however, is it not possible that the
gaps thus apparent are merely accidental, and their accordance with the
mean distances simply another accidental coincidence? It may seem, at
first sight, that we have not as yet determined the orbits of a sufficient
number of asteroids to decide very positively on this point. If another
hundred were discovered, it might well happen, one would suppose, that
the gaps would be filled up. But, in reality, the doctrine of chances is
wholly opposed to.this supposition. A law, such as that exhibited in the
figure,* does not present itself without a cause. Irregularity is to be ob-
served in all chance combinations, and the figure may be said to exhibit
irregularity. But irregularities resulting purely from accident, never by
any chance (when a fairly large number of cases is taken) simulates, so

*Mr. Proctor’s diagram was merely a graphic representation of the groups
and chasms of the zone,

PROG. AMBER. PHILOS. SOC, xx1. 114, 2H. PRINTED NOVEMBER 14, 1883.

Pepper. ] 266 (Oct, 19,

to speak, the operation of law. Therefore we may assume that when
many more asteroids have been discovered, the law exhibited in the figure
will appear even more dlistinctly.’’*

One hundred and twenty minor planets have heen added to the list since
this passage was written, and, as was then predicted, the chasms in the
zone have been rendered the more obvious.

In three portions of the ring the clustering tendency is distinctly evi-
dent. These are from 2.35 to 2.46, from 2.55 to 2.80, and from 8.05 to
2.22; containing forty-three, ninety-six, and forty asteroids, respectively.
We have thus an obvious resemblance to the rings of Saturn ; the partial
breaks or chasms in the zone corresponding to the well-known intervals
in the system of secondary rings.

Tue Rinas or SATURN,

In the writer’s Meteoric Astronomy, published in 1867, the same princi-
ple employed to explain the chasms in the ring of minor planets was
shown also to account for Cassini’s division in Saturn’s ring; and, in a
paper read before the American Philosophical Society, on the 6th of Oc-
tober, 1871, the division discovered by Encke was explained in like man-
ner. The details of these calculations need not here be repeated, espe-
cially as Dr. Meyer has quite recently discussed the whole subject, not
only confirming the conclusions of the present writer, but indicating also
other parts of the ring where the satellites unite in exercising special dis-
turbing influences, So exhaustive is Dr. Meyer’s discussion that ‘the
correspondence between calculation and observation, as to the division of
Saturn’s rings, would now seem to be complete.’’

OBITUARY OF JOHN FORSYTH MEIGS, M.D.
By Wriu1AM Perper, M.D., LL.D.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, Oct. 19, 1883.)

There are many men who, in their quiet, unobtrusive
course, are of incalculable value to the community,
and yet who leave» but scant material for the biogra-
pher. The record of their life-work is to be sought in
the cherished recollections of thousands who owe what

* Intellectual Observer, vol. iv, p. 22.

1883.] 267 [Pepper.

they hold most precious to their skill, energy and
devotion,

Nowhere are such men found so frequently as in
the ranks of the medical profession. Battles which
call for the display of varied knowledge, ready re-
sources, quick resolution, and unflinching courage and

self-reliance in the face of tremendous dangers and

responsibilities—and for these in such large measure
as would win the world’s applause if shown on some

are waged by the physician in

conspicuous stage
many a silent and secluded chamber against disease
and death. And the man who turns aside from all
allurements of personal ease, and, seeking no noto-
riety or other reward for his labors, save the conscious-
ness of duty done, and of good results wrought out
of perilous conditions, wages ceaselessly such warfare
year after year, must rank as truly great.

Eminently such an one was the subject of this me-
moir, which, as I well know would accord with his own
wish, shall be plain and brief in statement. John
Forsyth Meigs was born in Philadelphia on October
4, 1818, and died there on December 16, 1882, at the
age of 64 years. In an eloquent and _ instructive
memoir of his eminent father, Charles D. Meigs,
M.D., which he read in 1872, before the College of
Physicians of Philadelphia, a full account is given of
the staunch stock from which he was derived. Cer-
tainly no one who enjoyed familiar acquaintance with

that remarkable man, the elder Dr. Meigs, as I myself

268 [Oct. 19,

Pepper.]

did, though his junior by half a century, could doubt
that there would be transmitted to his children unusual
and notable traits of mind and character. Of these
children it is not fitting that I should now allude to
any but the immediate subject of this sketch.

After being educated at Dr. Crawford’s well-known
school, John Forsyth Meigs began the study of medi-
cine at the University of Pennsylvania, at the prema-
ture age of 16 years, and received his degree in 1838,
when he was still under 20 years of age. He then
served as Resident Physician in the Pennsylvania
Hospital for eighteen months, and in April, 1840, he
went abroad, remaining until August, 1841, a con-
siderable portion of whichtime he spent in Paris, en-
joying the then unrivaled advantages of that city
for students of medicine. Immediately after his return
he began the practice of medicine in Philadelphia, and
from that time until a few days before his death, he
continued the practice of his profession with almost
unequaled assiduity.

His chief public service was in connection with the
Pennsylvania Hospital, which institution he served as
Attending Physician from 1859 to 1881, when he re-
signed* and was succeeded by his son, Dr. Arthur V.

* Resolutions passed Nov. 28, 1881, by the Board of Managers of
Pennsylvania Hospital upon the resignation of Dr. J. F. Meigs:

Dr, John F. Meigs having presented his resignation as one of the
attending physicians of this hospital, which, at his request, has been ac-
cepted, it is therefore

Resolved, That this Board desire to record their grateful recognition
and appreciation of the faithful and efficient work done by Dr. Meigs in

Qe2
1883, 269 [Pepper.

Meigs. He was also Consulting Physician to the
Women’s Hospital, to the Blind Asylum, and to the
Children’s Hospital.

The services he rendered to the Pennsylvania Hos-
pital were most devoted and loyal, as has been the
case with so many of those connected, as managers or
as members of the medical staff, with that venerable
institution. For many years Dr. Meigs sacrificed a
large part of whatever summer recreation he other-
wise might have enjoyed, for the opportunity of devot-
ing to the cases in his hospital ward more time daily
than would have been possible had he chosen a term
of service during the months when his private practice
was most pressing in its claims,

He was a model Hospital Physician. His manners
to the poor sick seamstress or servant girl in his ward
were as kind, courteous and attentive as though he
were in the chamber of his wealthiest patient. The
care given to the study of each case, though with no
thought of preparation for publication, was most thor-

ough and minute.

the various positions in the medical department of this hospital, which he
has filled for twenty-five years past, and which has added largely to the
reputation our Institution now enjoys.

Resolved, That in addition to the faithful discharge of all his official
duties, this Board recognizes the obligations of this hospital to Dr. Meigs
for other ways in which he has testified his interest for the Institution,—
notably in procuring for it pecuniary aid, and in the thorough manner in
which he has completed the historical record of the hospital to the year
1876.

Resolved, That a copy of these resolutions be engrossed, signed, on
behalf of the Board, by the President and Secretary, and sent to Dr,
Meigs.

270 (Oct. 19,

Pepper.)

An insatiable reader of medical literature, he was
ever acquainted with the latest views as to the nature
and treatment of disease, and while his extensive
opportunities of observation had rendered him con-
servative and critical of mere theory, he was always
willing to recognize and profit by real advances in the
healing art.

He employed a special assistant, whom he paid lib-
erally, to make full records of every case under treat-
ment in his wards, and I have had many opportunities
of knowing that these records, embodying as they did
his own accurate observations, and wise or ingenious
suggestions, were admirable specimens of clinical work.
But here, as in all his medical work, it was clear that
his great and abiding interest was the welfare of his
patients, and the actual relief of their sufferings.

During the entire period of his connection with
the hospital, he took his full share of the public clinical
teaching, which has been carried on there for 107
years. His lectures were unlike any others to which
I have listened. With no pretence at oratorical effect,
but with, on the other hand, the most perfectly natural
and conversational style, there was such an air of can-
dor and utter truthfulness, so much delicate and
refined disclosure of his own nature and thoughts,
upon many other subjects than the medical question
immediately under discussion; such varied and _ rich
illustration of the question from the stores of a curi-

ously retentive memory, charged with all the details of

¢
1883.) 271 [Pepper.

thousands of instructive precedents; and, above all,
such uniform advocacy of the purest and highest and
most disinterested aspects of medical work, as com-
bined to render these lectures strikingly suggestive
and valuable. But in addition to this routine work,
though done with such spirit and enthusiasm as showed
that it was always fresh to him, there were occasionally
important original investigations suggested by him
and carried out with his assistance. The most extend-
ed and complete of these special studies was that
upon “The Blood in Malarial Fever,’ which was based
upon an unusual series of cases of severe malarial
fever from Southern seaports admitted to the Penn-
sylvania Hospital in 1866. The results of this investi-
gation were highly important, and established, certainly
for the first time in this country, certain additional
facts in regard to the nature and mode of action of
this singular poison, It was characteristic of the lib-
erality and courtesy with which Dr. Meigs invariably
treated his junior colleagues, that in publishing these
results he insisted upon the names of his collaborators,
who were then the resident physicians serving under
him in the hospital, being associated in the authorship.
How many times have I heard him, when about to
leave the hospital, after several houts enthusiastic
work in the wards, in the microscope room, or in the
pathological laboratory, exclaim that if it was only
possible he would prefer infinitely to spend his life in

a hospital, devoting himself to original researches

6
BD (Oct, 19,

Pepper. ]

upon the nature and treatment of disease, to any other
conceivable plan of existence. I have mentioned these
details because they illustrate the character of the
man, and indicate the value of his public services, and
especially of his influence upon all those who were
fortunate enough to be brought into close contact with
him in the discharge of these duties. It is no small
tribute to the genuineness and disinterestedness of
a man’s devotion to science that, year after year,
when overburdened with lucrative professional work,
he should forego pleasure and much needed rest to
spend laborious hours in such eager study in hospital
wards as would stamp with distinction a young and
enthusiastic investigator.

I have incidentally alluded to some of Dr. Meigs’ writ-
ings, but it may at once be stated that, although not a vo-
luminous author, he possessed admirable literary quali-
ties and a most attractive style.. The fact that he
never sought any chair in either of Philadelphia’s great
medical schools, and that from an early age he was
absorbed in the cares and fatigues of a large private
practice, explain why he wrote no more and, why, with
one notable exception, his writings were not of an
elaborate character. He suffered also, as the sons of
greatly distinguished men must do, from being viewed
as an author in comparison with his gifted father, who
was one of the most eloquent and facile writers ever
produced by the medical profession of this country.

But in fact the writings of Dr. John Forsyth Meigs

1883, ] al 3 [Pepper.

stand successfully the strictest criticism. As an exam-
ple of his style, and as proof that he possessed literary
gifts which, if leisure had been afforded, or if his am-
bition had been in the direction of more frequent pub-
lication, would have won him high rank as a writer,
I would refer again to the memoir of his father, which
seems to me a charming piece of biographical writing,
abounding in evidences of correct taste and of delicate
delineation of character, and written throughout in a
pleasing, vivacious and sustained style of narrative.

The following list comprises the more important of
his shorter writings :

April, 1847. History of Seven Cases of Pseudo-
membranous Laryngitis or True Croup; with Remarks
on tne treatment, and the distinction between it and
other Laryngeal Affections of Children, Vol. 13, N,
S. Amer. Jr. of Med. Sciences, page 277,

October, 1848. A Practical Treatise on Diseases of
Children.

April, 1849. History of Five Cases of Pseudo-
membranous Laryngitis or True Croup, in three of
which Tracheotomy was performed. Vol. 17, N, S.
Amer. Jr. of Med. Sciences, page 307.

November, 1850. Pneumonia in Children. Vol, 1,
N.S. Trans. Coll. of Physicians and Surgeons, page 5,

June, 1852. Remarks on Atelectasis Pulmonum, or
Imperfect ‘Expansion of the Lungs, and Collapse of
the Lungs in Children, Vol. 23, N. S. Amer. Jr. Med.
Sciences, page 83,

PROC, AMER, PHILOS. 800, xx, 114, 21, PRINTED DECEMBER 1, 1883,

274 [Oct. 19,

Pepper.}

October, 1856. History of Three Cases of Inter-
mittent Fever, Showing the Natural Course of the
Disease. Med. Examiner, page 56.

October, 1859. Remarks on Chronic Gastritis,
Duodinitis and Colitis, Vol. 1, Proc. Path, Society,
page 243.

September, 1860. Clinical Lecture on Diabetes
Mellitus, delivered at Pennsylvania Hospital.

June, 1860. Remarks on Transposition of Arteries.
Vol. 2, Proc. Path. Society, page 37.

January, 1861. Remarks upon Intestinal Concre-
tions in the Appendix Ceci, causing Perforation and
Fatal Peritonitis. Vol. 2, Proc. Path. Society, page 77.

April, 1864. Heart-clot as a Cause of Death in
Diphtheria. Vol. 47, N.S. Amer. Jr. Med. Sciences,
page 305.

October, 1865. On the Pathological Appearances
presented in Marsh Fever, Vol. 50, N.S. Amer. Jt.
Med, Sciences, page 305.

April, 1868. On the Morphological Changes of the
Blood in Malarial Fever, with Remarks on Treatment,
Vol. 55, N. S. Amer. Jr. Med. Sciences, page 475.

January, 1869. History of Two Cases of Embol-
ism; in one following Scarlet Fever, with recovery ; in
the second, connected with Disease of the Aortic
Valves and Coarctation of the Thoracic Aorta, ending
fatally. Vol. 57, N. S. Amer. Jr. Med, Sciences,
page 24.

January, 1869. Address on the Opening of the New

6
1883.] 2I5 (Pepper.

Lecture and Operating Room of the Pennsylvania
Hospital. Published September, 1871.

July, 1869. History of Two Cases of Cerebritis :
one from unknown cause, the other traumatic, with
recovery under active depletion. Vol. 58, N.S. Amer,
Jr. Med. Sciences, page 146.

November, 1872. Memoir of Charles D. Meigs, M.
D. Vol. 1,N.S. Trans, Coll. Phys. and Surg., page 417.

January, 1875. A Case of Pneumo-] [ydroperi-
carditis. Vol. 69, N. S. Amer. Jr. Med. Ses., page 81.

September, 1876. A History of the First Quarter
of the Second Century of the Pennsylvania Hos-
pital.

September, 1878, Atelectasis Pulmonum. Proc.
Obstet. Society.

January, 1879. Cases of Collapse of the Lungs and
Cyanosis in Young Children. Amer. Jr. Obstetrics,
Vol. 1, page 79.

February, 1880. Lecture on Water.

1880. Annual Address before the Alumni Society
of the University of Pennsylvania.

The work, however, by which Dr. Meigs will be
longest and best known, is the treatise on “Diseases
of Children,” the first edition of which was published
in 1848, and which immediately attained the position of
a standard authority. A second and third edition ap-
peared in rapid succession, and were quickly exhausted,
after which, owing to his excessive occupation, it was

allowed to become out of print. In 1860, he requested

Pepper.] 40 [Oct, 19,

me to associate myself with him in the task of bring-
ing the work up to date, and the fourth edition, which
appeared in 1870, has been followed by three others,
the last having been published in 1882. The estima-
tion in which this has come to be held may be appre-
ciated from the language of the London Lancet: “ It
is a work of more than 900 good American pages, and
is more encyclopedical than clinical. But it is clinical,
and withal most effectually brought up to the light,
pathological and therapeutical, of the present day.
The book is like so many other good American medi-
cal books which we have lately had occasion to notice ;
it marvelously combines a résumé of all the best Euro-
pean literature and practice, with evidence throughout
of good personal judgment, knowledge and experience.
There are few diseases of children which it does not
treat of fully and wisely in the light of the latest physi-
ological, pathological and therapeutical science.”

But unquestionably, it is as the wise and trusted phy-
sician that Dr. Meigs will be most vividly and fondly
remembered, so long, at least, as any of those survive
who had the benefit of his ministrations and advice. I
doubt whether there could be found, in any other large
city, prominent physicians occupying precisely the rela-
tion to the community which has, for a hundred years
past, been borne by a succession of eminent medical
men in Philadelphia.

For the most part, as communities enlarge, the lead-

ing physicians are forced by the demands upon their

ara
1883.] 27 é [Pepper.

time to assume more and more the role of consultants,
and to abandon, in large measure, the more intimate
and personal relations with their patients which is occu-
pied by the family physician. But in this city, despite
its rapidly enlarging proportions and population, the
case has always been different. There have. ever
been physicians in Philadelphia, whose important hos-
pital positions, popular and authoritative writings, and
eloquent teachings, have combined to render deserved-
ly illustrious, but who have continued willing to devote
themselves to the daily routine of family practice. It
need not be indicated that such a course has displayed
singular unselfishness; since such combined labors
have involved almost superhuman exertions and ap-
plication, while their personal services have been ren-
dered for remuneration scarcely greater than that re-
ceived by their less experienced and less eminent col-
leagues. But this self-sacrifice and devotion to the
interests of their patients, has been repaid by a degree
of affectionate gratitude and loyal attachment on the part
of the community, which has rendered almost unique
the position of the leading medical men of Philadel-
phia. Of this long line of distinguished practitioners
Dr. John Forsyth Meigs was an excellent example,
and it is scarcely too much to say that, owing to a
variety of causes which cannot be here discussed ap-
propriately, he was the last of that line. Whether
the people of Philadelphia will gain or lose more by

the changes which, during the past decade, have rapid-

fond
Pepper.] 2 ‘ 8 (Oct, 19,

ly come over the relations between the medical profes-
sion and the community, is an open question. But it
is evident that such changes were unavoidable, and the
only matter of surprise is, that they could have been
postponed so long by the conservative spirit, so strongly
prevalent here, and by the respect paid by the medical
profession to its deeply rooted traditions. In this re-
lation of trusted and confidential adviser, Dr. Meigs
could not have been surpassed. Of spotless integrity
and purity of character ; with a lofty conception of his
duty as a physician, and with unselfish devotion to the
pursuit of medical science; with such courtesy and
charm of manner and conversation as made him one of
the most agreeable companions ;, with infinite tact, pa-
tience, gentleness and sympathy with the sick and suffer-
ing; and yet with firmness of will, vigorous energy, calm
and dignified self-reliance which commanded implicit
confidence and obedience in the hour of most urgent
and deadly danger; it is not easy to conceive or por-
tray the large and important place such a man filled
in the lives and affections of hundreds or thousands
who cherished him as their physician. I well know that
this poor tribute would be re-echoed in stronger and
warmer accents from many a sick chamber, which is
to-day deprived of its brightest cheer and strongest
comfort through his death.

But few details of his private life need be added to
this sketch. He was married Oct. 17, 1844, to Miss
Ann Wilcocks Ingersoll, daughter of the late Charles

J
1883,] 2 4 9 (Pepper.

J. Ingersoll, Esq., and was so unfortunate as to lose
this amiable woman by death on Dec. 30, 1856. He
remained faithful to her memory and never married
again, Eight children were born to him, of whom the
eldest and the youngest died. His son, Dr. Arthur V.
Meigs, after graduating at the University of Pennsyl-
vania in 1871, has devoted himself with signal success
to the profession followed by his distinguished father
and grandfather, and already occupies the same im-
portant public positions in connection with the Penn-
sylvania and Children’s Hospitals, which were formerly
held by his father.

His habits of life were extremely simple and almost
austere. He clung to the simplicity of his early days,
and lamented the luxury of our own time. His
constant and absorbing occupation, as well as his own
tastes, prevented him from moving to any considerable
extent in general society, or, during his later years,
from even attending the meetings of the scientific or
medical societies to which he belonged. Although he
worked incessantly and arduously, it is certain that his
strength was never great nor his health robust. He
had two serious illnesses, pleuro-pneumonia in De-
cember, 1854, and a second attack of pneumonia,
complicated with hemorrhage from the lungs, in De-
cember, 1863. His last illness was also pleuro-pneu-
monia, which was contracted in December, 1882, by
exposure during a professional visit, when he was re-
duced by a heavy cold; it ran a rapid course, and
ended fatally on the eighth day.

280

Stated Meeting, October 19, 1888.
Present, 12 members,
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Fayen-
baya Observatory (112), the Pennsylvania Historical Society
(118), and the Franklin Institute (Cat.).

A letter of envoy was received from the United States De-
partment of State for the Government of the Netherlands.

A letter from Edmund de Schweinitz, President of the So-
ciety for the Propagation of the Gospel among the Heathen,
dated Bethlehem, Pa., October 9, 1888, requesting the return
of the Zeisberger and Perleus MSS. to their owners, was read
and referred to the next Stated Meeting for consideration, the
Curators being instructed to examine into the subject in the
meantime and report. (See page 284.)

Donations for the Library were received from the Royal
Academy of Science at Rome; Royal Venetian Institute;
Sociéié de Géographie and Revue Politique, at Paris; Société
de Geographie Commerciale, Bordeaux; Observatory at San
Fernando; London Nature; Boston Natural History Society ;
Rhode Island Historical Society ; New York Academy of Sci-
ences; Cornell University ; Journal Medical Sciences; Chemi-
cal Journal; United States Naval. Institute; United States
National Museum; and Mr. H. T’. Cresson, of Philadelphia.

An obituary notice of Dr. John Forsyth Miegs was read by
Dr. William Pepper. (See page 266, above.)

Mr. T. U. Walter was excused from preparing an obituary
notice of the late John Trautwine, as he had already read one
before the Society in Washington, which would be published,

The death of Dr. J. Lawrence Smith, at Louisville, Ky.,
October 12, aged 64, was announced.

A memoir entitled “The history of the Mexicans, from their
Paintings,” was communicated by Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr.,
being an annotated translation of the Ramirez MS,

1883,] 281

A memoir on the “Course and growth of the fibro-vascu-
lar bundles in Palms,’ by J. C. Branner, was read by the
Secretary.

Dr. Frazer exhibited a map of Radnor township and the
adjoining districts of Delaware and Chester counties, on which
he had delineated the Sienite belt and the outcrops of Serpen-
tine, the stratigraphical relationships of which he discussed,
dissenting from Mr. Rand’s theory of their echelon structure
and exogenous origin.

A communication was read from Mr. Hillborn T’. Cresson,
of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, respect-
ing the minutes of March 15, 1883, Proceedings of American
Philosophical Society, pages 648, 649,

“‘The statement that the instruments in question were studied by Mr.
Cox isa mistake. The gentleman above named (Mr. Cox) was employed
by me as a professional musician to verify and illustrate, with the Boehm
flute, the points of a.lecture upon Aztec music, delivered by me, before
the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia during their seance of
April 17th, 1888, having previously furnished him with a score showing
all the notes, fingering and stoppings necessary, and by reference to
which he so manipulated the instrument in question that, upon the Mexi-
can flutes or flageolets the entire chromatic scale was obtained ; and upon
those instruments denominated by me pitch-pipes or whistles (made of
like material) an octave was obtained ; also, a ninth, eleventh and twelfth,
the tenth note being missing (or the instrument made to produce it lost,
or otherwise destroyed, and it will rest with musical experts to determine
whether this note really existed). It is due Mr. Cox to state, that I men-
tioned him in my pamphlet entitled ‘Aztec Music,’ on account of the val-
uable hints he gave me in regard to modern music, formation of orches-
tras, &c., as my musical knowledge is limited. It was simply my inten-
tion, as an archeologist, to call the attention of musical experts to facts
first observed by me while arranging certain collections of antiquities in
France and Italy, trusting that they might be of interest, and serve to
aid investigations in this branch of ethnology, about which little is known
at present. It is necessary to make a distinction between the two kinds
of instruments borrowed by me from your Society, as they are entirely
different in construction and character, viz.: four-holed flutes, made of
baked clay or terra-cotta, and those instruments of like material, which I
have denominated ‘pitch-pipes,’ both kinds of which instruments are of

Mexican origin. I beg leave to ask that, at your next stated meeting,

PROC. AMER, PHILOS. S00. xxx. 114. 25. PRINTED DECEMBER 1, 1883.

282 (Nov. 2,

you will kindly correct the mistake above shown and published in your
Proceedings, and kindly insert the following, viz. :

‘«« The Curators reported the safe return of the four-holed Mexican flutes
or flageolets of terra-cotta, and the ‘‘pitch-pipes’’ or whistles of like ma-
terial, which were borrowed and studied by Hillborn T. Cresson, who
found that the first-mentioned four-holed clay flageolets could be made to
produce the entire chromatic scale by proper manipulation and finger-
stopping. The Mexican whistles or pitch pipes gave in regular succession,
from tonic to octave, a full diatonic scale; also, a ninth, eleventh and
twelfth existed, ‘‘the tenth being absent,”’ giving in allan octave and a quar-
ter.’

“I regret to say that this is somewhat long, yet the facts deduced by the
investigation of these instruments, owned by your honorable Society,
prompt me to ask you to record them, merely claiming that they are in-
teresting facts, and, if Tam correct, first noticed by myself. Please state to
your Society that, for the past eight months, I have devoted my spare
time to the arrangement and classification of the Mexican antiquities con-
tained in the Poinsett and Keating Collection, and that I hope in a few
weeks to have these unique specimens of art so arranged that they can be
properly labeled and catalogued.’’

Pending nominations, Nos. 985 to 1006, were read.
And the meeting was adjourned.

Stated Meeting, Nov. 2, 1883.
Present, 9 members.
President, Mr. FRAuEy, in the Chair.

After reading the minutes it was resolved that the Secreta-
taries be instructed to cancel the concluding part of the rough
minutes of the last meeting.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Royal
Society at London (102, 110 and 111 to complete set), and the
Statistical Society, October 15 (112).

A letter of envoy was received from the United States Naval
Observatory.

Donations for the Library were received from the Geological
and Trigonometrical Survey of India, the Danish Society of

= -

tse

cy

_—»

€
1988.] 288

Antiquaries, the Congress of Americanists; the Societies at
Koénigsburg, Giessen and Geneva; the Geographical Societies
at Vienna, Paris, Bordeaux and London, the Royal Academies
at Berlin and Dublin; Zoological Societies in Paris and Lon-
don; Professor Paul Albrecht, of Brussels; Revue Politique and
Revista Huskara; the Royal, R. Asiatic and Linnean Societies
in London, Greenwich Observatory, Cornwall Polytechnic So-
ciety; Boston Natural History Society; American Academy of
Sciences ; American Journal of Science; New York Observa-
tory, United States Observatory; Franklin Institute; Mr.
Henry Phillips, Jr., and the Mexican Museum,

The death of Oswald Heer, of Zurich, at Lausanne, Septem-
ber 27, aged 74, was announced by the Secretary; the reading
of a letter from Mr. Leo. Lesquereux, of Columbus, was post-
poned to the next meeting. (See page 286.)

The death of Joachim. Barrande, at Prag, aged 83, was re-
ported by the Secretary.

Mr. Chas. A. Ashburner gave a brief description of Dr.
Kintses’s fire-damp indicator which he had recently examined
in conjunction with a Committee of the Franklin Institute.

Although he did not feel at liberty to state the conclusions to which the
Committee had arrived in regard to this special apparatus, he expressed
grave doubts as to the practi “bility of any such appliance to prevent mine
explosions from fire-damp, and the consequent loss of life. Fire-damp is
not the most deadly foe of the coal miner as is popularly supposed, It is
an acknowledged fact that anthracite contains the greater quantity of fire-
damp ; and greater risks from gas explosions are experienced in anthra-
cite mines.

He stated that in the decade from 1860 to 1870 less then 11 per cent
of the fatal accidents in the Pennsylvania anthracite mines resulted from
fire-damp explosions ; while during the year 1882 only 8} per cent of the
fatal mine accidents were to be attributed to this cause. In most
cases the fire-damp, whose presence was already known, and therefore
no automatic indicator was necessary to locate it, was fired either through
the carelessness or recklessness of a miner, from a neglect to comply
with the superintendent’s orders, or from criminal disobedience to the
mine laws.

In his judgment, in no case during the year 1882 would an automatic in-
dicator have prevented an explosion. The greatest foes of the coal miner
are his negligence, his disobedience and his recklessness,

284. [Nov. 2,

The experience of the English miner with automatic fire-damp indica-
tors, particularly Ansell’s, which the speaker thought a more sensitive
fire-damp detector than Dr, Kintses’s, goes to prove that the use of such
instruments is not practical. The mine laws if rigidly enforced would
diminish the risk of fire-damp explosions and the resulting loss of life more
than any other means. The experience of Mr. Ashburner in fiery mines
was adduced in support of his views.

The reading of pending nominations Nos. 985 to 1006 was
postponed,

The Report of the Curators on Bishop de Schweinitz’s letter
was read and accepted, and the resolution recommended there-
in was agreed to. (See below.)

Mr. Fraley reported that he had received and paid over to
the Treasurer the interest on the Michaux Legacy due Octo-
ber Ist, amounting to $132.43.

Mr. Lesley was authorized to insert in the minutes the fol-
lowing correction of the note in his communication on the
Progress of the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, in
Chester county, read January 19, 1883 (Proceedings No. 113,
page 539, lines 17, 18), which he desired to have read as fol-
lows:

“The delay in’ the publication was caused by an unforseen and un-
avoidable delay in the receipt of Dr. Frazer’s notes which form the latter
part of the volume.’’

A Committee of five, consisting of Dr. Brinton, Mr. Price,
Dr. Horn, Mr. Phillips and Dr. Frazer was appointed to report
what improvement, if any, can be made in the mode of ballot-
ing for members, and the meeting was adjourned,

Letter of Bishop de Schweinttz.

To the President and Directors of the American Philosophical Society :

GENTLEMEN : In accordance with a resolution adopted by the Directors
of the ‘Society for Propagating the Gospel among the Heathen,’’ I here-
with respectfully request you to return, at your earliest convenience, the
seven Manuscripts by Zecisberger and Pyrleus on Indian languages,
which Manuscripts are the property of said Society, and which were de-
posited in your Library subject to a call from our Board. Their titles
and the fact that they were deposited by our Society, are set forth in Vol. I

of your Transactions, 1819. I inclose a list of these Manuscripts.
The reason why we now claim them is, that the Church has made com-

1888,] 285

plete arrangements for preserving all its documents and papers here at
Bethlehem ; that its library and collection of manuscripts are properly
ordered and displayed in its *‘ Archives ;’’ that a most valuable library of
Moravian literature has recently been presented to us; and that we wish
to bring together all the papers which we own, especially with regard to
the Indians, and arrange them in our collection. At the time that the
Manuscripts for which we ask were deposited with the American Philo-
sophical Society, none of the conveniences existed which we now have
for preserving such documents,
IT remain, gentlemen,
Yours, very respectfully,
EpMUND DE SCHWEINITZ,
President of the 8. P. G.
BETHLEHEM, PA., October 9th, 1883.

Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, Vol. I,
1819. By its Historical and Literary Committee.

p. xlvii. ‘‘ Deposited by the Society of the United Brethren of Bethlehem.’

1. Deutsch und Onondagoisches Woerterbuch, von David Zeis-
berger. 7 vols. 4to,

p. xlviii. 2. Essay of an Onondago Grammar, ora short introduction to
learn the Onondago, alias Maqua Tongue; by David Zeis-
berger. 4to, 67 pp.

8. Onondagoische Grammatica ; by the same. 4to, 87 pp.

. 4, Another Onondago Grammar in the German language; by
the same. 4to, 176 pp.

5, Affixa Nominum et Verborum Lingua Macquaice. Auctore
Chr. Pyrleo. 4to, 25 pp. [With this work are bound
several Iroquois Vocabularies and Collection of Phrases, the
whole together making 178 pp. 4to. ]

6. Adjectiva, Nomina et Pronomina Lingue Macquaice, cum
nonnullis de Verbis, Adverbis ac Praepositionibus ejusdem
lingue. Pyrleus. 4to, 86 pp.

%. A Collection of Words and Phrases in the Iroquois or Onon-
dago Language, explained into German, By the Rey. Chr.
Pyrieus. 4to, 140 pp.

Report of the Curators on the subject of the Zeisherger and Pyrleus MSS.
November 2, 1883.

It appears to the Curators that these MSS. were deposited by ‘‘ The
United Brethren of Bethichem,’’ and therefore cannot be given up except
to them or by their order, The present demand comes from the ‘‘ Society
for Propagating the Gospel among the Heathen.’’ We have, therefore,
no right to surrender these MSS. to an alien Society.

|
|

226 [Nov. 2,

If the “Society for Propagating the Gospel, &.,” be the successor of
“The United Brethren,’? we should be formally and legally notified to
that effect, and likewise the resolution of request should be under seal. If
we were to accede to this demand without a greater knowledge of the cir-
cumstances we might be liable to a demand from the real owner of these
MSS. with which the Society could not comply. We, therefore, recom
mend that the Society adopts the following resolution :

That Bishop Schweinitz be requested to inform the Society by what
right the ‘Society for Propugating, &.,’’? demand from us these MSS.
deposited by “The United Brethren.’’

PHILLIPS, )
j Ourators.
720, H. Horn, | ~

Noy. 2, 1883,

Notes of Reference Appended.

Deposited, 1819. Trans. Vol. I, page

1865. Dec. 1. (Proc. Vol. X, p. 187.) D. W. Fiske writes in rela-
tion to the Zeisberger MSS.

Dec, 15. (Proc. Vol. X, p. 198.) Letters read in reference thereto.
Contents not given,

Literary Committee made a recommendation which was referred to the
Secretaries to report on.

1866. Feb. 16. Vol. X, p. 205. The Secretaries reported they had
found these MSS. noted as deposited, &c. The United Brethren were re-
quested to allow the American Philosophical Society to publish them,

March 2. (Vol. X, p. 207.) Mr. Fraley states that the United Brethren
desired themselves to publish these MSS.

March 16. A. letter from Bethlehem én ea re read.

The matter ended there, and nothing further appears on the minutes to
o :

, this day.

PHILLIPS )
é Curators,
Gno. AY Horny, J o7

Novy; 2, 1888.

Letter of Leo Lesquereun,

Oswald Heer, the celebrated Professor of Zurich, was born at Glaris in
1809. His father was a doctor. He first studied theology, and was ordained
as minister, but afterwards studied medicine, and became interested in the
science of Natural History. He has lived at Zurich since 1882. In 1837
he was Professor either at the University or at the Polytechnic School,
and Director of the Botanical Garden, He was for a few years a mem-
ber of the Council of Zurich, but resigned his seat to be able to attend
entirely to his studies. In 1869 Zurich received the celebrated scientist as
an honorary citizen (member of the city Bourgeoisie).

The letter of communication of the family, 29th September, says only

1883,] 287

this: ‘‘Prof. Dr. Oswald Heer was called to God at the age of 74 years,
27 days, after a short illness, He died at Lausanne on the 27th.’’ Berth-
‘ ond, who writes me also on the 29th, gives me a few details on Heer’s last
days. He says: ‘“‘Icome to be with you to deplore the loss of your friend
and to share your sorrow. Heer is dead, THe was of late very tired. In
order to get some rest he went to Montreux, that fine warm place on the
borders of the Lake of Geneva, where he expected to regain some strength
| for new works. There he had after a few days an attack of bronchitis.
Well knowing the danger of that disease for a man advanced in years, he
hurried to his brother at Lausanne, where he died the day after his
arrival.’’

Heer had worked the whole winter beyond human forces, to bring to a
close the seventh volume of his Arctic Flora which came out in July. The
great Swiss exposition of industrial products, held at Zurich, gave him
constant occupation and some excitement by the numerous visits he re-
ceived. The meeting of the Society of Natural History of Switzerland of
which he was President was also held at Zurich, increasing his work of
course, and forcing him to long and severe exertion. In his last letter, end
of August, he writes me that his task is nearly finished, and that he feels
that it is time to close his work.

A Swiss journal announcing the death of Prof. Heer says, that the loss
is irreparable, and this expression is echoed by many. The loss of a mem-
ber of our poor humanity is never ‘irreparable ; that of Meer has left a
vacant place which will be unoccupied for a long time to come, Why?
Allow ie to trace a short outline of his career as the more fitting answer
to the question.

I know little of the early years of the celebrated Professor of Zurich.
His family came from St. Gall. He studied first theology in Zurich, I be-
lieve. But then, prompted by his ardent love of nature, he abandoned his
calling for the study of entomology and botany, From the beginning of
his career, he took a high standing in the world of science by the publica-
tion of a memoir on the relation of the insects with the plants, enumera-
ting and describing a large number of species of plants with the insects re-
lated to each by their habitat, their food, their mode of life, ete. He had
already given his attention to fossil botany, when, in 1848, he began to
collect, materials for the preparation of a fossil flora of Switzerland and
the adjoining countries. He went to work, helped by most favorable cir-

cumstances ; by the rich collections of the Museum of Zurich ; by the com-
munications of numerous friends, among them the celebrated Alex. Braun,
j later Professor.of Botany at the University of Berlin, and Director of the

3otanical Garden ; especially by the resources of a rich lady, Mrs. von
Bumine. This lady, endowed with a great love of science and of admira-
tion for the works of Heer, who was already a professor of reputation,
opened upon her property near Lausanne quarries and tunnels for the dis-
covery and collection of fossil plants, materials which were sent to Zurich
by tons to be studied by Heer, A large part of the specimens figured in

288 [ Nov, 2,

the Flora tertiaria Helvetica came from that source. One cannot read
without a deep feeling of admiration a note of thanks written by Heer in
honor of that lady in the beginning of the third volume of that work. The
third volume ends the Tertiary Flora of Switzerland. The work was then
supposed to be complete, but a fourth volume, Mora fossilis Helvetica was
published in 1876, containing descriptions and figures of plants of the Car-
boniferous, the Trias, the Jurassic, the Cretaceous and of the Eocene of
Switzerland. This great work in 4to, with a very large number of splendid
plates, is too well known to demand description. It has given to the author
the first place in the ranks of Phytopaleontologists of our time.

A kind of antecedent résumé of this work was already published in 1865
under the name of Die Urwelt der Schweite (the Ancient World of Switzer-
land). It isa large F° volume of 600 pages, splendidly illustrated by figures
representing fossil remains of plants and animals of the different geological
periods. The best proof of the worth of the volume is the fact that though
relating only to the paleontology of the geological formations of Switzer-
land, the book has had already three or four editions, and been translated
into six different languages,

At this time Heer was requested by professors and directors of museums
to determine and describe numerous collections of fossil plants, and as a
result of his researches published many separate memoirs on the plants of
divers localities of Burope. Among the more important ones I may men-
tion: The Flora of the clays of Borey Tracy, England (1861). The Baltic
Miocene flora ; the Eocene flora of Bornstaedt (1863 and 1869). The Oreta-
ceous flora of Moletin ; that of Quedlinburg (1871). The Phyllites creta-
ciés of Nebraska, the Fossil flora of Alaska, the fossil plants of Vancouver,
contributions to the fossil flora of Sumatra, and a number of others, half a
dozen of which are mentioned in the catalogue of Heer’s work by Schim-
per.

During this time Heer was already at work on his most important pro-
duction, the Hlora fossilis Arctica, which, begun in 1862, was finished by
the publication of the seventh volume a few months before his death.

Considering only the large number of the publications of Heer, they
already constitute a weighty monument as the result of the life of a man,
But that number is not the essential value. Other paleontologists, Brong-
niart, Sternberg, Unger, Goeppert, Schimper, Lindley and Hutton, among
the illustrious dead, have left works which may be compared to those of
Heer, though in a far reduced degree of value. None of them, however,
has raised fossil botany to a high degree of importance in the scientific
world. None of them has, like Heer, opened new fields for the exercise
of the mind, and prepared for vegetable paleontology an honorable place
in the domain of science enlarged by researches in that specialty.

In the Arctic Flora Heer has brought to light, for the polar regions of
treenland, Spitzberg, Sachalin, a subtropical vegetation, attesting, dur-
ing the Tertiary period for those northern regions, a climate about like
that of Florida and the Gulf shores at the present time, He has recog-

1883. ] 289

nized an analogous kind of vegetation in following the data furnished by
remains of fossil plants southward to the shores of the Baltic sea, and
even to those of the Mediterranean in Italy. This fact of course concern-
ing the distribution of plants during the Miocene or Tertiary period has
forcibly modified the views formerly admitted respecting the physical cir-
cumstances which have governed the earth during geological times, and
has compelled physicists and geologists to renew their researches for the
solution of important problems concerning the distribution and the cause
of heat, and changes in the temperature of the globe. Heer has described
also a Cretaceous flora from Greenland bearing evident relation to that of
the same period observed in North America and in Europe ; a flora
representing a number of types which, persisting through the floras
of the more recent formations, are still present in the North American
vegetation of the present epoch. He has thus evidenced by his Arctic
flora the gradual development of vegetable types since the times when
the first traces of dicotyledonous plants are recognizable. He has com-
pelled the admission of vegetable paleontology into the domain of geol-
ogy by the manifest determination of the age of any formation from the
characters of its plants only. With only one mistake on that subject has
he been unjustly reproached, viz., his reference to the Tertiary of three or
four Cretaceous leaves of which he had merely poor sketches to base his
determination on.
The noble character of Heer has greatly contributed to give to his works
a degree of authority superior to that acquired by any paleontologist be-
fore him. Simple, modest in the highest degree, of a serious though con-
templative mind, his life was resumed on the fulfillment of the duty o
every day. When the University of Switzerland was established at
Zurich, he had been named Professor of Natural History and Director o
the Museum. THis lectures at the University were always followed by a
large number of students ; So full of interest were they that even strangers
and common town-people requested the privilege of attending them.
Ie never missed an opportunity to show his deep interest in the scientific
and moral progress of the students. Even in his days of sickness (for all
his life he has had to fight against attacks of severe illness), he gave his
lessons in his own room, lecturing from his bed. He had been called
once by his countrymen to a highly honorable position as a member of the
Jouncil of State; but he found that the new duty required too much of

his time, and he gave in his resignation in order to continue without hin-
drance his scientific pursuits,

What can I say more of the fri

=

rH

end with whom I have been in intimate
relationship long years, Heer united in himself a powerful intellect,
trained by severe studies, with the simplicity of a child and the conscience
Me a true Christian. His works are the expression of the principles of his
ife.

L. Lasquerevx.

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc, xxt, 114. 2x. PRINTED JANUARY 10, 1884.

290 [Nov. 16,

Stated Meeting, November 16, 1883.
Present, 12 members.
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

Mr. P. C. Garrett was introduced to the presiding officer, and
took his seat.

A photograph of the Chev. Damiano Muoni was received
through Mr, Phillips for insertion in the album.

Letters of acknowledgment were read from the Boston Public
Library (XVI, i); American Antiquarian Society (XVI, i);
New Jersey Historical Society (XVI, i); United States Military
Academy (XVI, i); State Historical Society of Wisconsin
(XVI i,), and the University of the city of New York (118, i).

A letter of envoy was received from the Academy of Sciences
at Rome.

Donations for the Library were reported from the Mining
Engineers at Melbourne, Mad. C. Royer of Paris, the Geo-
graphical Commercial Society, Bordeaux; the Geological
Society and Sefior Goodolphim of Lisbon; London Nature ;
American Astronomical Society, Boston; Harvard University ;
Mr. Scudder, Mr. Phillips, the Brooklyn Library, the American
Chemical Journal, Mr. Gatschet, the editor of Scandinavian,
and the Astronomical Observatory of Mexico.

Dr. Brinton read an obituary notice of Oswald Heer, in a
letter from Mr. Lesquereux to Mr. Lesley.

The death of Dr. John Lawrence Le Conte, one of the Vice-
Presidents of the Society, at Philadelphia, November 15th,
aged 58 years, was announced by the Seeretary.*

* John Lawrence Le Conte, the son of Dr. John Le Conte, was born May 18th,
1825, in New York, and graduated at the College of Physicians and Surgeons in
1846. He traveled extensively on this continent on tours of scientific investiga,
tion. He served as surgeon and medical director in the volunteer and regular
armies during the war of the Rebellion. In 1873 he was elected President of the
American Association for the Advancement of Science, He was an active

member of the Academy of Natural Sciences in Philadelphia. Dr, Le Conte was
ason-in-law ofthe late Judge Grier, of the United States Circuit Court,

|

1883] 291 (Lesley,

Mr. Lesley desired to express his feeling that while the Society has sus-
tained a serious loss in the death of one of its estimable Vice- Presidents,
science has suffered a lamentable blow by the withdrawal of one of the
best investigators and one of the truest philosophers that ever did duty in
her service, Not a common soldier only has fallen—not a non-commis-
sioned officer—not a mere colonel of a single regiment in her army—but a
general of high rank, a leader of forces, one who could plan and execute
the manwuvres of a large and long campaign, an organizer, a ruler in her
realm.

My private grief, said the speaker, at the loss of an old and intimate per-
sonal friend gives me no peculiar right to tell his virtues and abilities in
this hall where he has been known and honored for so many years; but it
gives me the power to speak of these virtues and abilities with the confi-
dence of absolute knowledge. Others have known and loved him, and will
regret his death, and will speak of him affectionately and respectfully in-
side and outside of this hall. But it was my good fortune to be one of his
special companions for the past thirty years; and he often expressed the
wish that if I survived him I would place on record some memorial of his
life. Once, when I felt. vigorous and hopeful, I promised to gratify his
wish, although he was the younger of the two, and had a natural right to
give what he desired to receive. But now, how is it possible to do more
than say: ‘Le Conte is dead, the precocious youth, the affectionate son,
husband, father and friend, the just and truth-loving man, the accurate
and precise observer, a master in the divine art of classifying facts, a per-
fectly trained and nobly developed genius in science.”’

Le Conte is a famous name in American science. The foundations of its
fame were laid by the father, and built up by the son. Both these have
passed away from the eastern shore of the continent ; but on its western
shore two brothers, children of the father’s brother, prolong and enhance
the reputation of the name,

A memorial of the life of our fellow member and friend would be incom-
plete without a personal description of old Major Le Conte, to whose vig-
orous intellect, excellent common sense, and great experience in zoologi-
cal studies, John owed not only his extraordinary abilities, his aptitude for
mathematics, his eye for form and color, his exactness, his imagination,
his love of the study of languages, his taste for historical metaphysics, and
especially mythology, and his pronounced capacity for practically putting
things in order and managing affairs, but also the opportunity for cultivat-
ing and displaying all these various, and, as many people vainly imagine,
contradictory mental powers,

I ray: vainly imagine, For, it is a vulgar prejudice to suppose that a life
spent in counting the number of segments and legs of bugs, and describing
the microscopic foliation of their antennee, incapacitates a man for com-
prehending the Méc nique Celeste, or the writings of Plotinus; for the
enjoyment of the Mahabahrata, or the safe conduct of his hereditary
estate. What stamps the character of Le Conte as a genius is precisely

292 [Nov. 16,

Lesley.]

what gives the lie to this vulgar prejudice. He was as fine a mathemati-
cian as he was minutely true with the microscope. His wide and varied
learning checked any tendency to narrowness in study, and gave him a
power and richness of language which reacted on his reason to enrich it
with a copious store of generous and noble ideas. The infinite variety of
insect forms was not more attractive to him than the infinite variety of
words in the languages which he studied ; nor the infinite variety of myths
with which the imagination of past ages has attempted to explain, or at least
1o portray, the mysteries of the Universe. Will it excite surprise then in
any well equipped mind, that the skill which nature gave him to arrange
facts of the organic world, relationships of numbers, and the ideas of men,
availed him quite as well in the leasing of his father’s storehouses in New
York, the reorganization of the wards of an army hospital, and the conduct
of the business of the United States Mint?

All this went together, and comes quite natural to a superior genius. It
matters little what the man regarded as work, and what he regarded as
play ; his work was creation and recreation in one, and his recreation was
all good work. Every hobby a true genius mounts becomes under his man-
agement a trained war-horse or sagacious hunter. The contradictory
occupations of such a man would be a reproach to less gifted mortals ; but
in the career of such a man they are merely alternately diverging and con-
verging careers of usefulness. The recognition of this truth by Major Le
Conte was gratefully acknowledged by his son in narrating such anec-
dotes as the following:

Young Le Conte was put to school at St. Mary’s College, in George-
town, D. C. The discipline of the class-room was very strict. Everybody
was kept to silent study ; none could leave his seat without command or
permission, The Major visited the school to learn how John was getting
on. The master said that he was good and diligent, but regretted to add
that he was too much interested in a sort of knowledge which lay apart
from his regular studies. He hoped that the father would endeavor to re-
press these inclinations in his boy. he Major asked the master what they
were. The master replied—a love of birds and bugs, shells and stones, in
fact, everything that grew, or moved in the air, on the ground, or in the
water. If he indulged in such pursuits he would never excel as a mathema-
tician or linguist. ‘‘Is my son behindhand then in his studies?’ asked the
father. ‘‘No,’’ replied the master, ‘‘he recites well, and is as good a scholar
as the best of them ; but we wish him to excel all the rest, as he evidently
might do if he gave his undivided attention to the studies of his class.”’

a

“Tam not of that opinion,’’ quoth the Major, withthe twinkle in his eye
for which he was famous among his cronies—all now dead——‘‘ I am not at all
of that opinion, and I must request that you will not discourage my son in
obtaining a kind of knowledge which I have myself pursued all my lifes
and which I believe will make all the other kinds of learning which John
will get here all the more useful and noble.”

—~——~4—

1883,] 293

[Lesley.

The good sense which prompted this request from the side of the father,
prompted the master also to grant it, and thenceforward the young natu-
ralist, while being subjected to the same rigid discipline, was not repressed
in his inclinations for extra scholastic investigation, on a small scale.

One day silence reigned in the school-room. Everybody was conning
his task at his seat. The tutor was silently reading at his desk. Suddenly
there was a great fracas—John Le Conte was scen starting from his seat
and scrambling on the floor in the middle of the room. He was called
up to the tutor’s desk to give an account of himself. He held in his hand
two beetles. He explained that they were rare, that he could not help try-
ing to catch them, that he had to be quick about it, that he did not know
that he would make such a noise, etc. The other scholars in great, excite-
ment sat expecting dolorous consequences for John. But they were dis-
appointed. The tutor remembered the Major. or perhaps had received
orders from the upper region. He merely sent the boy back to his seat
with his beetles , and a warning not to make so much noise another time.

But he received less mercy from his schoolmates. One holiday the boys
Were on an excursion in Frederick county. John captured two remarkably
fine and rare coleopterids—I forget their name, but he always gave it when
he told the story—and put them into a pill-box. At night two of his com-
panions stole the box, threw the bugs away, neatly substituted two quids
of tobacco, and returned the box to its place without detection. Great was
John’s grief at the discovery. But he never thought on any kind of re-
venge. He did not know enough Horace then to comfort himself with
the barren consideration, that Quid quisque vitet nunquam homini satis
cautum est in horas; but he thought it all the same, in a schoolboy’s way,
and learned by this experience to keep his shiny-backed pets out of the
reach of profane fingers. Dr. Horn can best describe to us the care he
took of his great collections.

Le Conte loved to tell such personal stories of his early life, and during
the week preceding his death his mind lived entirely in those remote years.
Me laughed heartily to himself at the recollection of his adventures. He
wished to have them published, Why? Was he vain? He was the re-
verse of vain ; he was a man singularly free from vanity, Why should he
have had so set a desire to be memorialized after death? I
out a shade of hesitation, because he had inherited a loving disposition, had
led an affectionate and sympathetic life, and wished above all things to re-
tain forever his kind and good relations with his fellow-men. His love of
his kind was strong. His sympathy with his fellow-workers in science was
not only strong but unalloyed with baser sentiments. Even when his fine

scorn of fraud, duplicity, pretension and untruthfulness evoked denuncia-

tion, I never knew him to depreciate any kind of talent. He was exceed-

ingly just to just men, and generous towards those who had not had
talents or opportunities sufficient to give them distinction. He honored
the old and loved the young. He honored the masters and loved the stu-
dents of science. He worshiped the shade of his father, and never spoke

'S

answer with-

Horn. 294 |Nov, 16,

of himself and his own attainments and accomplishments as anything
more than an effort to follow in the footsteps of him who had given him }
the ability and opportunity to do so, hn

[ dwell principally upon the moral qualities of our departed friend, be-
cause I trust that the Society will obtain a complete account of his scien-
tific abilities from Dr. Horn, who has been first his pupil and then his col-
laborator for twenty odd years, Let us place on our records that memorial
of a blameless career in science, and its application to the uses of human
existence.

For myself I can only speak of what fills my heart to the exclusion of
all other thoughts—of the lovable nature of the friend whom we shall never }
again see, Let the world reverence his memory as a discoverer, as a
philosopher, asa genius. I can only remember John Le Conte as an en-
gaging friend, a faithful friend, a speaker of the truth, a judicious adviser,

a companion to think with, a reliable coadjutor to deal with, but still,
above all, as a most affectionate and trustworthy friend.

I place above all his other exceptionally shining qualities his affection-

ateness. He was a lover; and all the world loves a lover. But good lovers
are said to be good haters. I doubt the truth of the saying. Selfish lovers
may be good haters, but the perfect lover is incapable of any hate that de-
serves the appellation. Le Conte was one of the men who liked to be hp
called John, He had a regularly woman’s heart. And yet he could not
hate anybody. When he tried, he simply made himself ridiculous. I have
often laughed at his wrath ; it would no more counterfeit real hatred than
a crystal of smoky quartz can counterfeit charcoal, His innate lucidity of
good nature could not be veiled; it was as if a cherub knit its brows.
And this innate good nature, allying him with the universe, was the sal-
vation of his science, for it protected his mind against those damaging and
delaying passions which futilize the career of men of talent, hough their
horses and steal the linchpins from their chariot- wheels.

Lovingly he lived and worked many, many years—as many as were good
for him. The world wants us all ; and yet needs none of us. It is of no great
consequence who is who, or what or how much any one does. What one
leaves another takes; what one begins, some one else is sure to finish.

But surely the memory of a friend is blessed, and such a friend as has just
left us can never be forgotten.

Memoir of John L. LeConte, MD. By George H. Horn, M.D. or
\
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 7, 1883.)

John Lawrence LeConte was born in New York City, May 138, 1825, ana
died in Philadelphia, November 15, 1883. He was the son of Major John
Eatton LeConte and Mary A. H. Lawrence. When but a few weeks old
his mother died, and the father thenceforth seemed to live solely for the

1883.) 295 (Horn.

care and development of his only child. The devotion of the father was
rewarded in living to see the son take a foremost place umong the scien-
tists of his day, honored at home and abroad. The father had already made
the name well known in science, when the son entered the field and added
greatly to its renown,

After arriving ata suitable age, the boy was placed in St. Mary’s Col- .
lege, Maryland, from which he graduated in 1842, from the Doctor’s ac-
count the discipline of the school was severe, the training accurate and
thorough, and the tutors conscientious in the discharge of their duties. At
this early period of his life he exhibited the tastes of a naturalist, and he
has often recounted the annoyances and ridicule to which he was subjected
by his fellow-pupils, who had no sympathy with his pursuits. His teachers,
even, feared that his, to them, more important studies would be neglected,
and the father was made acquainted with their suspicions. Finding that
the pupil was in no respect deficient in his regular duties, the father
directed that these tendencies should not be repressed. The boy made
rapid progress, and exhibited a peculiar aptitude for the study of languages
and mathematics, and, doubtless, in this manner laid the foundation for that
accuracy and retentiveness of his memory so characteristic of his maturer
years,

After the completion of the collegiate course, he returned to New York,
and entered the College of Physicians and Surgeons, receiving his medical
degree in 1846. Before this date his first essays in original work made their
appearance, and, to use his own language, gave unmistakable evidence of
his youth and inexperience.

During 1849 he made several visits to the upper shore of Lake Superior,
collecting largely, and publishing the results, with many new species, in
Agassiz’s work on that region. In the autumn of 1850 he visited California,
stopping for a short time at Panama, remaining absent during the greater
portion of the following year. His explorations in California were made,
for the most part, south of San Francisco, at San José, San Diego and their
surroundings. From the latter point he crossed the Colorado desert, then
and for many years after a terror to travelers, going as far eastward as the
Pima villages, The entire region was a new one to science, and he made
abundant use of his opportunities. On his return the results of his journey
were published in the ‘‘ Annals of the Lyceum” of New York. The new
material was, however, so abundant that some yet remains in his cabinet
unstudied.

Tn 1852 the LeContes removed to Philadelphia, and the works of both
have, with few exceptions, been published in the periodicals of our socie-
ties since that time.

For a few months in 1857 he accompanied the Honduras Inter-Oceanic
Survey, under the command of the late John C, Trautwine, publishing his
observations in that region in the report of the survey. At the same time

he visited the Fuente de Sangre, publishing his account of that phenome-
non in Squier’s Nicaragua,

Horn.) 296 [Nov, 16,

After these yoyages, his scientific studies were uninterrupted until the
early years of the war, when he was appointed surgeon of volunteers, and
shortly after medical inspector, with the rank of Lieut.-Colonel, in which
he showed that his capability for direction and organization was adaptable
to wider uses than the cabinet to which he had hitherto confined himself.

During the summer of 1867 he accompanied General W. W. Wright on
the survey for the extension of the Union Pacific Railway southward to
Fort Craig, in the capacity of geologist. His report, which in no way de-
tracts from his reputation as an entomologist, was published as part of the
report of the survey.

In the autumn of 1869 he determined on a visit to Europe, in which he
was accompanied by his family, remaining abroad until near the close of
1872, visiting also Algiers and Egypt. His residence abroad interrupted
somewhat his authorship, but not his studies, and his letters to me, now
doubly valuable, gave abundant evidence of his activity. He visited all
the accessible public and private museums, and his wonderful memory of
the species in his own cabinet enabled him to settle many hitherto doubt-
ful points of synonymy. Those who met him abroad were deeply impressed
by his thorough scholarship, and his quick and accurate perception of the
affinities of insects never before seen by him. On his return to Philadel-
phia his work continued, with but slight interruptions by periods of sick-
ness, until within a week of his death.

The lives of men eminent in science are rarely fertile in events of gen-
eral interest, and LeConte’s is no exception. Trained from his boyhood
as a naturalist, with no cares, and no interruptions by daily professional or
business duties, his life was passed in the pursuit of his favorite studies
and the pleasures of social life. The father died in 1860, leaving the son
in possession of an ample estate. The following year Dr, LeConte married
Helen, daughter of the late Judge Robert C. Grier, who, with two sons,
survives her husband.

The account of the life in science of LeConte should properly begin with
that of the father—the one is the result and continuation of the other. An
abler pen than mine has already traced the life of the elder LeConte, and
I merely purpose to recall such incidents in his life as seem to havea bear-
ing in determining the subsequent studies of the son.

Major LeConte contributed a short entomological paper to the ‘* Annals
of the Lyceum,”’ of New York, as early as 1824, describing a few new spe-
cies, illustrated bya plate drawn by himself. At this time Say and the elder
Melsheimer were at the height of their career, and entomology, through
the labors of Latrielle in France, was assuming a higher position among
the sciences. The Major was an ardent collector, and, desiring the light
not attainable at home, much of his material was sent abroad ; he, how-
ever, retained either carefully compared specimens or drawings to permit
the future identification of the species. The cabinet thus formed, small in
comparison with what we now have, made the basis of the subsequent
work of the son. In 1845 the father and son contributed entomological

—s

1883.] 297 {Horn

papers to the Boston ‘Journal of Natural History,’”’ the former a mono-
graph of Histeride, the d rawings for which were made by the son, the
latter a small paper of little moment.

The first paper by Dr. LeConte appeared in 1844, in the ‘‘ Proceedings of
the Academy of Natural Sciences,” having been transmitted by the Ento-
mological Society of Pennsylvania, an association with no permanent
locality, consisting of, probably, not more than a half score of enthusiasts,
who met at long intervals at the house of one or another. Among the num-
ber we find the two Melsheimers, Ziegler and Haldeman, while the Rev,
J. G. Morris, D.D., of Baltimore, alone survives to recount their history.

The early papers by LeConte gave very little evidence of his analytical
power until, in 1850, he published his “Monograph of Pselaphide,’’ pro-
posing an arrangement which remains at present the basis of the general
classification of these minute insects. In the same year appeared the com-
mencement of his “ Attempt to Classify the Longicorn Coleoptera of Amer-
1ca north of Mexico,” requiring several years in publication, a work of
much wider application than indicated by its title, contributing much that
Was new to science, and aiding greatly in the rational classification of these
favorite beetles,

From this period his contributions to entomology were for the most part
monographic, and from their importance soon attracted attention abroad,
many of them being reprinted in foreign journals, winning for their author
the reputation he justly deserved. In their scope his papers cover nearly
Pik portion of his specialty. They contain evidences of patient and
original research, and added greatly to science. His work was in every
case an improvement on what had previously been done ; he left a subject
better than he found it,

Several of his works call for special mention. In 1859 he collected the
entomological works of Say, with notes on the species described, In this
he was assisted in their Specialties by Baron Osten-Sacken and Mr, P. R.
Uhier. The writings of Say were widely scattered in almost inaccessible

publications, his typical collection almost entirely destroyed, and the spe-

cies depended practically on traditional knowledge; and while some of
re 4 4 ney yey . . . .
Say’s cotemporaries were yet living LeConte gathered the information
in by them, and placed it in permanent form.
Res

alizing that his Specialty needed greater assistance, he undertook, at
the request of the Smithsonian Institution, the ‘‘Olassification of the Cole-
optera of North America,”’ with the “List of Species,’’ and descriptions
of new ones. The first parts appeared in 1861 and 1862 ; its continuation
was interrupted by the war and his absence abroad. It was resumed in
1878, but never completed, T

he assistance thus given to students vastly in-
creased their number

» and the limited edition soon became exhausted, and
it became necessary to decide either for a reprint or a new book.

Befor > & new edition could be completed, it became imperative to study
the Rhynchophora, and at this point LeConte made one of the boldest

strokes of his career in the isolation of that series, and purposing a classi-
PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800, Xxr, 114.21, PRINTED JANUARY 10, 1884,

Horn.) 298 (Nov. 16,

fication as remarkable in novelty as it was true to nature. This was fol-
lowed in 1876 by the ‘‘ Species of Rhynchophora,’’ published as a separate
volume of the Proceedings of our Society.

The preliminary studies having been completed, LeConte's desires
seemed to be concentrated in the preparation of a new ‘‘ classification,’’
which should be complete in all its parts. He invited my coédperation in
the preparation of monographic essays, hoping thereby to lighten his own
labor, and prepare the work in a shorter time. Two years ago, when he
realized that his health was failing, he expressed the desire that I should
join him in more active authorship in the work. The first pages went to
press in January, 1882, and the book was completed in March of this year,
in time for him to realize that it has been, at least, well received. For
obvious reasons I cannot dwell upon the merits even of his share of this
work, except to say that his earlier edition is the basis of the present ; with-
out the former the latter might not have appeared. Evidences of his in-
fluence will be fotind on every page, and whatever it was my privilege to
contribute was made possible entirely by his early instruction and guid-
ance,

Since last spring he has done but little study, his general health, uncer-
tain vision and unsteady hand having unfitted him for close application.
He, however, continued work in the form of ‘‘short studies,’’ until with-
in a few days of his death, and the incomplete manuscript now in my
hands will appear in the form in which he desired to present it.

While LeConte’s reputation as a naturalist will rest upon his entomo-
logical writings, he did not limit himself to this field. Mention has already
been made of several important geological contributions ; there are others
of less moment. He has contributed a number of articles on Vertebrate
Paleontology, and several synopses of some genera of rodents. His ‘‘Zod-
logical Notes of a Visit to Panama,’’ illustrate the extent of his study in
another department of science. At least one article on purely social
science, has emanated from his pen.

In a general review of LeConte’s writings, we find them remarkably free
from controversial tendencies. He gave to science the results of careful
study, knowing that in time whatever was worthy would be adopted. His
dissent from the views of another was always couched in the mildest
terms. He was above the limit of those petty jealousies which too often
prevail between those working in the same field.

Numerous were the demands for his advice and assistance from all parts
of the country ; rarely did he repel them, and no small portion of his time
was consumed in the determination of specimens for correspondents, with
no other reward than the hope that the seed thus sown might some day
bear fruit.

The results of LeConte’s works in Coleopterology in America are plainly
marked, Ie entered the field ten years after the death of Say, who seems
to have had no higher ambition, if indeed capacity, than the description of
the species which he collected. LeConte, on the other hand, began the

{
i
}

|
i

1888, ] 299 [florn.

framework of a systematic structure which he lived to see completed in all
its parts. He reduced chaos to order. His influence in entomological
progress in general is admitted on all hands, and so rapid has been the
advance that we now have nearly as many purely entomological societies
and clubs as there were interested individuals forty years ago. At that
time the American literature consisted of very little beyond the works of
Say; to-day five periodicals are devoted solely to entomology.

Some idea of the actual work performed by LeGonte may be obtained
from a summary recently published, in which more than five hundred
genera and nearly five thousand species are placed to his credit, three-
fourths in each series remaining valid. It would, however, be unfair to
estimate the value of his work from a mere numerical basis ; others have
done much more, but the systematic, analytical studies, spread over the
vast field of Coleopterology, show the real power of his mind. While he
was quick to perceive specific differences, he was not always happy in ex-
pressing them ; in his analyses his reasoning was always clear without the
slightest ambiguity.

That his work has been appreciated at home and abroad is shown by the
number of societies which have elected him to membership. Diplomas
from fifteen American and seventeen Kuropean societies may be seen in
his portfolio. Prominent among them are the diplomas of honorary mem-
bership in the entomological societies of London, France, Berlin, Brussels
and Stettin, an honor rarely conferred and given only to the most worthy.

In 1874. LeConte was elected President of the American Association for
the Advancement of Science, and his address on retiring, regarding the
relation of the geographical distribution of Coleoptera to Paleontology,
opened a new line of investigation, showing how a combination of the
facts of two such dissimilar sciences might result in advantage to both.
He was one of the founders of the American Hntomological Society, and
at the time of his death its President ; of our own Society he was a Vice-
President, and has been a member nearly thirty-one

We all knew him as a cultured scholar, a refined gentleman, a genial
companion, a true friend. ‘To me he was more. For nearly twenty-five
years our association has been of the most intimate nature. I sought his
advice and instruction as a neophyte in entomology, finding a welcome
which T had no reason to except. Our friendship ripened to an intimacy
never shadowed by the slightest cloud. My last visit to him, two days
before his fatal attack, will never be forgotten ; bright, cheerful and much
clearer in mind than he had been for weeks before, he seemed to have re-
gained his mental and bodily strength, and gave me
might for some time enjoy his society.
days after, the change from brilliant intell
was almost too great to realize.

years,

strong hopes that we
When called to his bedside two
ection to death-portending coma
His life closed painlessly, without a
struggle. A few short hours sufficed to extinguish a bright light in
science, and inflict on us an irreparable loss.

Dr. Horn testified to the scientific ability, activity and repu-
tation of Dr. LeConte; and Mr. Fraley to his personal
worth,

On motion of Mr. Eli K. Price, Dr. Horn was appointed to
prepare an obituary notice of Dr. LeConte, and accepted the
appointment,

Dr. Brinton reported his reception as delegate of the Society
to the Congress of Americanists at Copenhagen, and described
the proceedings.

Mr. Phillips, the other delegate, explained that he had been
unable to attend the Congress.

General Thayer described the trial balloon which he is build-
ing, and explained the principles involved in the problem of
of aerial navigation. (See 801.)

Professor Cope described the geological formation and fossil
wealth of the valleys and mountains of New Mexico, traversed
by him during his recent explorations.

Pending nominations Nos, 985 to 1008 and new nominations
Nos. 1009 and 1010 were read.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Board of Officers and
members in Council were read.

The Committee of Five reported the following resolution,
which was adopted :

Resolwed, That hereafter at the stated elections for members of the So-

ciety, the presiding member shall appoint two tellers to open the ballot-
boxes, and report to him the result of the poll.

On motion of Mr. Law, the following was adopted:

Resolved, That Dr. Brinton be authorized to translate and prepare for
publication the Kakchiquil Grammar now in the archives of the Society,
and that the same be published in the Proceedings in such type as the
Secretary may deem best suited to the purpose,

Mr. Phillips noticed an ambiguity in Sec, 8, Chap. I, of the
By-Laws, and Mr. Fraley recounted the traditional interpreta-
tion of it by the Society.

The meeting was then adjourned.

300 [Nov. 16,

ST

1883, ] 301 [Thayer.

Aerial Ships. By Russell Thayer, CO. H.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, Nov. 16, 1883.)

At the close of an interesting paper on the subject of aerial navigation,
read before the Institution of Civil Engineers, by Mr. William Pole, F.R.S.
M. Inst. C. E., the following conclusions are stated, viz. :

“The problem of aerial navigation by balloons is one as perfectly
amenable to mechanical investigation as that of aquatic navigation by
floating vessels ; and its successful solution involves nothing unreasonable
or inconsistent with the teachings of mechanical science.

“Tt has been fully established by experiment that it is possible to de-
sign and construct a balloon which shall possess the conditions necessary
for aerial navigation, ¢.e., which shall have a form of small resistance,
shall be stable and easy to manage, and, if driven through the air, shall
be capable of steering by a proper obedience to the rudder.

“Tf, by a power carried with the balloon, surfaces of sufficient area can
be made to act against the surrounding air, the reaction will propel the
balloon through the air in an opposite direction.

““The modern invention of the screw-propeller furnishes a means of ap-
plying power in this way, to effect the propulsion ; and the suitability
and efficacy of such means have been shown by actual trial.

“Sufficient data exists to enable an approximate estimate to be made
of the power nec assary to propel such a balloon with any given velocity
through the air,

“The recent great reduction in the weight of steam motors has rendered
it possible to carry with the balloon an amount of power suflicient to pro-
duce moderately high speed, say twenty or thirty miles an hour through
the air; and by taking advantage of other recent improvements it would
also be possible to carry a moderate supply of fuel and water for the
working,

; “The practical difficulties in the way are only such as naturally arise
in the extension of former successful trials, and such as may reasonably
be expected to give way before skill and experience.’’

Tn the discussion of the question, Mr. Pole considered the propeller as
being the only known available means of utilizing the force generated for
the propulsion of the aerial ship; and the deductions above quoted are
based upon this means being used to apply the force. My investigations
and experiments, however, have induced me to believe that for the pur-
pose desired the propeller is a most clumsy and unsuitable contrivance ;
indeed, the immense size that would be required for the propulsion of even
gear of ordinary dimensions renders its use impracticable.
eat the past year I have been making somewhat of a study of this sub-
Ject, with the object in view of ascertaining whether any practicable
method of propulsion could be devised which would enable an aerial ship
properly constructed to have a rapid motion through the air, in any direc-
tion, entirely independent of the atmosphere or medium in which it floats,

Thayer.] 302 [Nov. 16,

An investigation of the methods heretofore devised to accomplish this
object, viz., wheels, propellers, wings, etc., convinced me that all plans
so far suggested are quite impracticable ; and my experiments led me to
the following discovery, based on the well-known law of mechanics that
“action and re-action are always equal, contrary and simultaneous.’’

My invention is simply to make use of the reactive force of a powerful
jet of air, gas or vapor, acting rearwards under pressure ; thus producing*
a re-action forward equal in every respect to the pressure backwards.
Under these circumstances the aerial ship will be forced forward at rates
of speed depending upon the amount of pressure applied, and it is surpris-
ing to note the small pressure required to send a structure of considerable
size through the atmosphere at rates of speed varying from ten to fifty
miles an hour, without the assistance of the wind, which, under some
circumstances, could be most beneficially employed in generating very
high rates of motion.

For the following formule and values of co-efficients below mentioned,
Iam indebted to Mr. Pole’s paper above referred to; and I have con-
densed my ideas on the subject in the following memorandum of notes,
giving all the salient points of the problem :

Shape.

d = diameter midship section.

e = length of axis.

Shape, cylindrical, pointed at both ends (fore and aft), the best form
wherein e = 34d.

Ascending Force of Gas.

Ad’l, in which A is a co-efficient, depending on the shape of the vessel
and on the specific quantity of the gas compared with that of the surround-
ing air, may be taken = .08. 3

The levity of 1 cu. ft. of hydrogen = .0761 Ib.

Resistance to Motion through the Air.

x == .000193 d? v?, in which v = velocity in feet per second. The re-
sistance varies as the square of v.

Propeliing Horce.

The propelling force should act in a horizontal line with all the resist-
ances, which would be a little below the line of the axis (Pole). This
force would be produced by air, gas or vapor, acting sternwards under
pressure ; preferably compressed air, forced through a nozzle suitably
connected with a high speed air-compressor.

Machinery Required.

Boiler, steam-engine, air-compressor (receiver), outlet-pipe with nozzle

steam-condenser, with chemical refrigerating mixture.

*Genl, Thayer has taken out patents for this invention,

1883. ] 303 (Thayer.

To Raise and Lower Ship without using Ballast.

Use an interior air-vessel connected with air-pump,the exterior balloon
being connected with a strong light receiver containing hydrogen gas
under high pressure. ‘To lower ship, pump air into interior sack and re-
move hydrogen from exterior balloon. To ascend, remove the air from
the interior sack and allow hydrogen to flow into balloon under pressure
from receiver; the hydrogen in the receiver would also be utilized to sup-
ply loss from leakage.

To Steer Ship.

Use rudder and also a movable nozzle, through which the force of pro-

pulsion is applied. i
To Hlevate or Depress Bow.

Shift ballast or elevate or depress nozzle.

Miscellaneous Data.

In landing, turn the head of the acrial ship to the wind, thus avoiding
all danger from dragging, ete. In navigating, it is only necessary to go
high enough to clear terrestrial objects.

Weight of motor, 40 Ibs. per H. P., loss about 15 per cent.

Fuel, 4 lbs. per indicated H. P. per hour.

Water, 28 Ibs. per H. P. (condense the steam),
Giffard made envelopes successfully to contain gas with scarcely any
loss.

In conclusion, I would say that the general appearance of the aerial
ship would be as follows, viz. :

A, balloon ; B, upper deck ; O, lower deck for machinery ; D, smoke:
stack ; E, nozzle; F, rudder ; a/, interior air-sack,

Heample.
d= BO } total ascending force Ad2] == 29'70 II
1 = 110/ ¢ Total ase ig force Ad] == Q¢ 8,
Resistance to passing through the air ata speed of twenty miles
an hour == 29.33 lin. feet per sec., 000193 d? v? == 149.5 lbs.,

a force that can readily be obtained and applied, as I have suggested.

55

Hi

| Lilley.] 304 [Dee. 7,

| »

Detailed Section of Chemung Rocks Haposed in the Guif Brook Gorge at Le
Roy, Bradford County, Pennsywania. By A. T. Lilley, of Le Roy.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 7, 1883.)

Feet.
1. Cap of Chemung with Atrypas and many unrecog-

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
: ‘ . . .
| nizable forms in light shale. (Spirorbis among

LORY). i Hive pau. + ehee rues Peedi bah eatin hele ob 1
2. Producteiia bed in gray sand............ swinhtededed WO
8, Green shale... 2... eer otutaa hes che Bane COM NId, oso ertis 15
A VGC RINE isiy devisyi- cis vceig vine min doce. petite fibeecciret Rey dake a
| De CRRCOM BUUIO athe wo viele, eases HNN NES ORR) denieioue asa to ie? 0,
6. Grammysia bed and gray shale ......+ ib Gayl Gua Givsinin | wO
7. Iron ore, with Spirifer, Pterinea, Crinoids, Grammy-
| sia, and fish remains. (Spirorbis among them)... 4
Oe GCE RING Titi Vianteelar ee viligt ae b echenine a hate ii ile 20
B.. REG. FUCOtd: DEO. sesso oie « Hebi h Was en ORT ed Wihioveeatigi:
10. Green sandstone........... bbe ch cr REE OMEN Wie 20
11. Red shale and sand with unrecognizable fossils..... 4
12. Conglomerate with pebbles, lime, Spirifer, Produc-
| POU CUCL Foe/e VOTMMINB YY ee yan ed ne seine wah ceee vet 6
TF CABS CD SOUS yyiviya ial Gira FU NPA OWEN H bee se Niw vite bie 10
14, 2
15. 40
16. 2
i Lie 19
Hee 1
19, 52
20 1
Qh; Greer seas tomes ye iki Nile dls bind OAR edly qlee ie 14.
I 99. Green sHalesies. sss. i's Bee Wek Wether vides e bie 40
| 23. Brown sandstone, with Spirifer and Productella..... 1
24. Gray sandstone, with Crinoids and plants........... 8
| 25. Green shale.. 6
i 26. Green sandstone and shale, with Crinoids and Spiri-
| FONC 6 bs v's i ie Aker eek Rawle PiMlaWr a ay Bice ace Meee sa aude 8
| Oh Gray Sandstone and shales. ive vd wise s ove dive cee owe 60
| 28. Green sandstone, with shells and fish remains........ 5é
29. Red shale and sandstone,.......-.+000. eee ee
30. Brown sandstone, with shells and fish remains....... 39
SL, Green BAIS een sss oe AOU ND 6 bisa wl orure EP macta sing O
32. Red sandstone, with don ore and shells ...... a coie hey
| BG. Grey BALE. ie: ceieie'y vero ecewide ohh Mv ole re «oii Rivet che
34, Calcareous tron ore and sandstone.....+.....6 ee
SO) Brown SHAG: wiivtevivien eve es CU MULE VETER Woes 20
86, Calcareous tron ore (red) and sandstone...... ew inyiey: uae

4”

1883, 305

{Lilley.

Feet,

37, Gray sandstone and shale with carbonized plant
stems, sulphate of iron and shclls. .....eeeeee..00. 2
88. Brown BEMOSTONG, With) A118) sivev tienen.) “e ie ae
39. Brownish sandstone, with Spirorbis and shells. . 8D
40. Crinoidal WMERTONE A es wate Kan eat soi a era eee) nee
A LUIBHENGLSs nee it ees
42. Caleareous red sandstone. ‘i sesee 9
43. Brown sandstone. WON Mile bales sees 18
44. Green BULICSUOMEN ila uk 4 ’ a ich
45. Oaleareous SOME EOIG 4h aviess deareenre dis Wiekued jars’ kings tn canl
46. Green sandstone and shale.... Wahl CMA a Lian tase heey ete aU
47. Oalcareous sandstone .......... SERMON ies Cae aya
48. Light gray sandstone and shale........... HUAN thre LOU
49. GRAV EN Alay nck yea mul oy KO Ribe i OB
50. Conglomerate, With shells .... LAs Medal Melb pe 3
51. Green CUALE Sv eit Hea \ See wicseeieelba wee i cei
52. Green sandstone and shale .. SWRPA Haigiily's Sica TO!
53. Limestone, with shellg......... SS RUE en A

54. Gray sandstone and shale, with eee is. ier ee. oie 880
55. Gray sandstone, with FP UCOND te Ty cial leatlwnil Waban wigs fa
56. Green BAMOSTOM ONS isa vinh aide iiiy Wildl te tou. 42

57. Blackish shale, with LO DULOUAONO Vi aise Wl veers st ies MOU
58. Green and brown sandstone and BIMLOW Meus dive oul 6 SLOU)

SPs GHEOME BATON Lian We Wht aacceW ils i eeu te ain tiehy io eR
60. Upper Ambocalia bed, with Loxonema, Spirifer,
Grammysta and Bellerophon. ..cocccccececcccccce 2
Ol WEORNGEEC TORRY oni Rieremeer mney ct te 70
62. Lower Ambocalia bed in STSCUNENAIO OME Riedel G 50

63, Unexposed to line of Granville township, Bradford
COUT Ae sigan 6 MALU Watkin a slMeOhiaie NON Mta gins wien BO
: 1855

Mr. Lilley has made extensive collections of fossils from these rocks,
Some of which have been studied by Prof. Claypole, of the Second Geo-
logical Survey. Recently he has added largely to his number of fish from
the Chemung and Lower Catskill rocks ; some of the forms seem new.

The Upper Mansfield red beds occasionally contain vast numbers of
the plates and scales of fish large and small; he has one perfect scale that
measures more than four inclies across.

Mr, Lilley has found Spirordis in Nos. 1, 7 and 89 of the section ; that
18, at intervals of 74/ and 540/ respectively. ;

He has found a Holoptychius scaie marked on a rock which contains ten-
taculites, spirifer, ambocelia, pterinea, and numerous minute shells the
species of which he cannot recognize, in the Gulf Brook among the débris
of the Mansfield red beds. The rock resembles that of one of the Mansfield
red beds outcropping in a small gorge a quarter of a mile west of Gulf
Brook, and containing also tentaculites, an orthoceras, Jish bones, crinoids,
and concretionary balls about the size of mustard seed.

PROC. AMER, PHILOS, SOc. xxt. 114. 2M. PRINTED JANUARY 17, 1884.

306 Dee. 7,

Stated Meeting, December 7,. 1883.

Present, 12 members.
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

The resignation of Judge Thayer was received and accepted.
Letters of acknowledgment were read from the Astor Li-
brary (XVI, i), the Franklin Institute (XVI, 4), the American
Statistical Association (118) and the American Ethnological
Society (113).
Letters of envoy were received from the Natural History |
Society at Chemnitz; the Second Geological Survey of Penn-
sylvania; the Society of Natural Science, at Poughkeepsie ;
the United States Geological Survey, and Prof. J. J. Steven-
son, of the University of the City of New York. «ye
A letter from the S. N. M.S., at Cherbourg, was read, re-
questing numbers of Proceedings of American Philosophical
Society to complete a set.
A letter of inquiry was received from W. F. EB. Gurley,
dated Danville, Ill., Nov. 80, 1888.
Donations for the Library were reported from Mr. B.S. Ly-
man, late Chief Geologist of Japan; the German Geological So-
| ciety; the Anthropological Societies at Vienna and Paris; the
q Natural History Society at Chemnitz; the Royal Academy
at Brussels, and Prof. Paul Albrecht; the Musée Guimet; the
Revista Euskara and Revue Politique; the Commercial Geo-
graphical Society at Bordeaux; M. Claudio Jannet, ot Paris;
the Annales des Mines; the Royal Astronomical Society and
London Nature ; the editor of Cosmos; the Canadian Institute ;
Littlefield, bookseller, of Boston; the Bunker Hill Monument
Association (Hon. R. C. Winthrop); the Boston Natural His-
tory Society; Cambridge Museum of Comparative ZLodslogy ;
Harvard University ; Essex Institute; American Journal of
Science, New Haven; Meteorological Observatory, New Y ork;
Vassar Brothers’ Institute; Franklin Institute; Dr. D. G. Brin-

Se es

ae se

Pd

1883] 307

ton; American Journal of Pharmacy; Mr. Herbert Welsh;
Mr. H. Phillips, Jr.; the Secretary of the Geological Survey
of Pennsylvania; the United States Naval Institute; United
States Fish and Education Commissioners; United States Geo-
logical Survey (C. E. Dutton); H. L. Abbot; S. W. Rauck,
of Lexington, Ky.; and the Old Charter of the Hudson’s Bay
Company, with Arthusen’s description, De Boy’s and Le
France’s maps from Prof. J. J. Stevenson.

Dr. Horn read an obituary notice of the late Vice-President,
Dr. John L. Le Conte. (See page 294.)

The death of Dr. Charles W. Siemens, at London, Noy. 20,
aged sixty-three, was announced by the Secretary.

A section of 1856 feet of Chemung rock at Gulf Brook, Le
Roy, Bradford county, Pa., by Mr. Lilley, was read by Mr.
Lesley. (See page 804.)

Prof. Cope communicated the following papers:

1. On the distribution of the Loup Fork formation in New
Mexico. (See page 308.)

2. A second addition to the knowledge of the Fauna of the
Puerco Epoch. (See page 309.)

3. On the Trituberculate type of molar tooth in the Mam-
malia, (See page 324.)

The Synchronous Multiplex Telegraph invented by Mr.
Patrick B. Delaney, of New York, was described deg Marton
Houston. (See page 826.)

The Treasurer’s annual report was presented.

Pending nominations Nos. 985 to 1010, and new nomination
No, 1011 were read.

The Curators were instructed to obtain expert advice from
some member of the Society as to the better preservation of
the portraits in oil of former officers of the Society.

And the meeting was adjourned.

308 [Dec. 7,

Cope.]

On the distribution of the Loup Fork formation in New Mewico. By H. D.
Cope.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 7, 1883.)

In his report on the Geology of New Mexico to the Secretary of the
Interior by Dr. . V. Hayden, in 1869, this eminent geologist described
the Santa Fé marls in their principal physical features, In 1874, in my
report to Capt. George M. Wheeler, U.S. Engineers, I showed that this
formation is a member ofthe Loup Fork division of the Miocene Tertiary,
a conclusion clearly deducible from the remains of vertebrata which it
contains. An illustrated report on the latter was published in the fourth
volume of the report of the United States Geog raphical and Geological
Survey, W. of the 100th meridian, Capt. G. M. Wheeler in charge (1877).

Since that time the writer has made several visits to part of New Mexico
not previously explored, and I am able to show that the Loup Fork for-
mation has a much wider distribution in that Territory than has hitherto
been supposed to be the case.

In descending the Rio Grande, beds appear on the west side of the
river which strongly resemble those of Santa Fé, ‘They extend along
the eastern base of the Magdalene mountains, and as far south as Socorro,
in considerable extent and thickness. South of Socorro they appear, but
less extensively. The eastern part of the plain which lies. between the
Rio Grande and the Mimbres mountains is composed of beds of this age
where cut by the grade of the Atchison, Topeka and Santa Fé railroad,
west of Hatch station. West of the Mimbres mountains the valley of the
river of the same name is filled with débris of the bed of eruptive outflow
which once covered the country, as far as t raversed by the railroad from
Deming to Silver City. Its age I could not ascertain,

A great display of the Loup Fork formation is seen in the drainage basins
of the heads of the Gila river. In traveling westward from Silver City, its
beds first appear in the valley of Mangus cre which enters the Gila
from the east. Crossing the Gila, the mail route to the west passes
through the valley of Duck creek, which flows sastwards into that river.
Though bounded by eruptive hills and mountains and their outflows, the
valley was once filled with Loup Fork beds, which have been extensively
eroded, the principal exposures being on the north side of the valley,
forming the foot-hills of the Mogollon range. On the divide between the
waters of the Gila and San Francisco rivers the formation rises in bluffs
of 300 feet elevation. The descent into the valley of the San Francisco
brings to light a still greater depth of this deposit. The valley which ex-
tends from the cafion which encloses the river south from the mouth of
Dry creek to the Tulerosa mountains on the north, and between the Mogol-
lons on the east and the San Francisco range on the west, was once filled
with the deposit of a Loup Fork lake, This mass has been reduced by the
erosive action of the San Francisco and its drainage, to a greater or less

,

ae

1883. | 309 (Cope.

extent, as it has been protected by basaltic outflows or not. When s0 pro-
tected, the river flows through comparatively narrow cafions. Where
the outflow is wanting, the valley of the river is wider, and the Loup
Fork formation remains as wide grassy mesas which extend to the feet of
the mountain ranges,

The age of these beds would have remained problematical but for the
fortunate discovery by Mr. Robert Seip, of the skull of a species of Rhi-
noceros of the typical Loup Fork genus, Aphelops. It is apparently the
A. fossiger Cope, a species abundant in the Loup Fork beds of Kansas
and Nebraska. It was found near the mouth of Dry creek in a conglom-
erate bed of the formation.

In the valley of the San Francisco the Loup Fork beds reach a thick-
ness of 500 feet, and consist of sand, clayey sand, soft sandstone, and
conglomerates of larger and smaller pebbles of eruptive material, having
® near resemblance to those of the region of Santa Fé.

Second Addition to the Knowledge of the Puerco Epoch. By EB. D. Cope.*
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 7, 1883.)

Recent collections from the formation above-named, include many finer
specimens than have been previously obtained, Skulls of several species
in calcareous concretions were received, so that their characters can be de-
veloped more fully than heretofore. I mention especially Deltatherium
Sundaninis ; Periptychus rhabdodon and P. coaretatus ; Haploconus linea-
tus ; H. entoconus ; Anisonchus sectorius ; Protogonia plicifera ; Mioclanus
turgidus, M. ferow, M. subtrigonus and M. cuspidatus, sp. nov. Some species
hitherto rarely seen, prove to be abundant, as Hemithlaus kowalevskianus,
Protogonia plicifera, Mioclanus minimus and M. subtrigonus. With the
additional species now described, the number of Mammalia from the de-
posit of the Puerco epoch amounts to seventy-four species.

DIpYMioris PRIMUS, sp. nov.

That the genus Didymictis existed during the Puerco epoch, has been
already demonstrated by the discovery of the D. haydenianus Cope. This
species is of aberrant form however, so that it remained to prove that the
typical form had appeared so early in Tertiary time. This is now shown
to have been the case by the discovery of the present animal, which is
allied to the D. leptomylus of the Wind River and Wasatch epochs.

The Didymietis primus is known from two maxillary bones with teeth,

*The “ First Addition” appeared in the Proceedings of the American Philo-
sophical Society for 1888, beginning at page 545. Since that date I have described
in the Proceedings of the Philadelphia Academy, 1883, p. 168, the following spe-
cies: Periptychus courctatus, Pantolambda cavin , Zelodon gracilis (g.n.) and
Conoryctes ditrigonus.

310 [ Dee, 7,

Cope.]

and a part of a mandibular bone with the last two molars in place, all be-
longing to different individuals, The inferior sectorial tooth is much like
that of the D. leptomylus, but the tubercular is only two-thirds as long, and
is not only absolutely, but relatively narrower posteriorly. It has the
usual three cusps in a reduced condition. In the first superior true molar
the external cusps are conical, and there is a small cusp between the ante-
rior one and the produced anterior angle of the crown, There is an ante-
rior intermediate tubercle, but no posterior one. The cingulum does not
extend all round the inferior base of the crown, as it does in D. protenus.
The sectorial has a distinct anterior basal conic lobe. The internal lobe is
in transverse line with the last named, and is conical and not large.

Measurements. M.
HiainGior taveriow deatoetal f anteroposterior.........- «¢ SOF8S
transverse. ..esrenss ehsie. ware QOBB,

ay > aT 5
Tiawieterinferianracercwlans anteroposterior...... veles ena
UV ETBNIBV ODIO Wa siweeiieid view ee 00838
Depth of Pam us. bt) Made cies rerieevewegemesiele sie ¥ als Veen VO0RS

fs anteroposterior. .. .0110
(transverse. ....... .0060
anteroposterior . 0050
transverse... 6. .0090

Diameter superior sectorial (No. 1)

Diameters superior sectorial (No, 2) {

The fourth specimen is especially important as presenting almost the
entire dentition including canines and incisors, and the anterior part of the
skull from the line of the coronoid process of the mandible. The specimen
shows that the species differs from the species of the Wasatch period with
oval inferior tubercular, in the absence of the posterior cutting lobe of the
third, and probably fourth inferior premolar. The corresponding superior
premolars are also simple. The first premolars in both jaws are one-
rooted, The canines are long and acute, and are directed vertically. Both
have flat facets on their external (the only visible) faces: on the superior
canine I count four lateral, and one nearly anterior. On the inferior I see
three lateral and one nearly anterior. There are three small superior in-
cisors, of which the first is the largest, and has a subconical crown. The
infraorbital foramen is large, and is above the anterior border of the supe-
rior sectorial,

Measurements. M.
Length of superior dental series to front of canine...... 041
Mi € crown Of superio’ caning ......usere. Ebi aie « O11
is "6 RUPOTIOL LIU MOlALS , cee veveceereseene ee [HOLUO
Depth of ramus at inferior sectoral... ccccreseesececces 0090

Tn its simple premolars this species agrees with the D. haydenianus, and
is more primitive than the Wasatch species.
TRIisODON RUSTICUS, Sp. NOV.

Founded on a portion of the mandible which supports the first two true
molars and part of the last premolar, The species is of the type of 7.

1883. ] 311 [Cope.

levisanus, but is much larger. I give here a synopsis of the species of the
genus, so that its affinities may be better understood. In general, the
genus Triisodon is characterized by the rudimental character in the infe-
rior molars of the anterior cusp. It is thus like Jctops, but differs in having
the fourth premolar different from the true molars and like the premolars.
From Mioclenus it difters in having the anterior and posterior cusps of the
inferior molars unequal; the anterior forming together an elevated crest
with two apices, while the posterior are low, and on the borders of a heel.

I. Cusps of inferior molars compressed.

Anterior cusp de) gala yA ceursent' arate aver tines orais van OWaharse ine tl TL. quivirensis.
IL. Cusps of inferior molars not compressed.

Anterior cusp very low ; 7. rusticus ; T. levisanus, and 7.

Anterior cusp as high as other anterior cusps to which it is

T. bats fat ° ee
+ conidens and 1. hetlprinianus.

assurgens.
closely united.

In dimensions the 7. rusticus is about equal to the 7. quivirensis, thus
exceeding the other species excepting the 7. conidens. The interior ante-
Tor cusp is nearly as elevated as the exterior, and is united with it nearly
to the apex ; the anterior cusp is a tubercle which projects forwards from
ite anterior base. The heel of the tooth is wide, and is rounded poste-
riorly, and supports three tubercles, an external, a posterior and an inter-
nal, all in contact with each other, On the second true molar the internal
anterior tubercle presents a slightly projecting edge anteriorly and poste-
riorly, which bounds a shallow vertical groove of the mass which repre-
sents their united bodies. This is not apparent in the first. The enamel
18 smooth, but the animal is rather old.

Measurements. M.
ANUOTOPOSTETIOL vs scvee ees soe van, SOLRB
Diameters of m. i 4 transverse..........+.. HOR hg: 0068
P (LI ELOME Wag cle WN oe .0068

vertical

UC aHeL VEG Vin codiO0RS
( anteroposterior ..... ETRY, oR 01387

Diameters of m, ii 4 transverse........-.5 wee OW

( : POOTIV Nv. 4 007

vertical on is

Weateel eau ein idee LOOCR:

D. Baldwin, discoverer.

TRiisopon ASSURGENS, 8p. Nov.

This is the least species of the genus, and resembles in its inferior denti-
tion the species of Diacodon. It is very much larger than the D. alticuspis,
the larger species of that genus, which is found in the Wasatch formation,

The 7. assurgens is known from a mandibular ramus which supports the
last four molars, the last premolar having lost its principal cusp. The
peculiarity of the true molars is seen in their generally more produced
character ; the anterior cusps are higher and the heels are longer. The an.
terior cusp is very small and basal; the principal anterior cusps are united

Cope.] 312 | Dee. 7,

to near their free summits. There are the usual low marginal tubercles on
the heels. That of the fourth premolar is a short simple edge.

Measurements. M.

Length of four molars on basis...........5+ Aico dis eeaiKipiaiss eS
cs FT UE OG) UL WG. OLNEY s hie bide aus olasiatts Vssusiwia med Bika ed RLS

hi VT BGGCMC CMG MONEY Visita sis.e uy malen misirceiocm alain ate -008
Elevation of cusps of molars........++.+s% si 5G yn than ds ooh ast 0045
ONGC OF LAS tee TLOVAYs V4 6. wel) 4 wd sbule «o> bib sibenteajelecoOOGG
Width of last tiwe molars sili. ih Hpac vEsre wad WUUOU:
Elevation of last true molar in fromt..sscsiceeseescocs 0085

Found by D. Baldwin.

Mrocuanus CUSPIDATUS, Sp. nov,

The species of this genus known to me are, with the present one, nine
in number, They range in size from that of a rat (M/. minimus) to that of
a wolf (If. ferox). The general osteological characters of the last named
species are best known, and are described in the Proceedings of the Amer-
ican Philosophical Society, 18838, p. 547. In two of the species the supe-
rior dental series only is more or less known, and one species rests on
mandibular dentition only. In the remaining seven species the dentition
of both jaws is more or less known. The species may be arranged in
groups as follows:

I. The posterior heel of the second inferior molar bordered by a curved
edge or crest.

a, Posterior cingulum of superior true molars obsolete ; If. minimus.

aa, Posterior superior cingulum weak; JL turgidus.

aaa, Posterior superior cingulum large, angulate ; IZ corrugatus ; M.
Seron.

II. The posterior heel of the second inferior molar supporting a cusp.

a, Posterior inner cusp of superior molars small, present on m. ii only ;
M. cuspidatus.

aa, Posterior inner cusp large, present on m,. i and m. ii; premolars
small, I. subtrigonus; premolars large, M. opisthacus (Hemithleus mihi
olim).

III. Second lower molar unknown. J protogonioides, and M. mandib-
ularis.

The supposed M. baldwini, resembles closely the species of Hemithleus.

It is probable that two genera are here included under the head of Mio-
clenus. If the character is permanent, these will be distinguished as fol-
lows :

Third superior premolar with internal tubercle..............»Mloclanus.
Third superior premolar without internal tubercle......... «.. Oxyclanus.

The species of Mioclenus are M. turgidus (type); and very probably
M. opisthacus, minimus and M. subtrigonus; but the diagnostic tooth has
not been seen in them as yet. The species of Ovyclenus are: O. cuspidatus

=
¥

a ES SEARLE Aa
2

1883,] 313 [Cope.

and O. corrugatus ; and very probably, O. ferow. The position of the dz.
protogonioides, M. baldwint and IM mandibularis is uncertain, though the
last two are probably Oxyclent.

The Mioclenus cuspidatus is distinguished among its congeners, by the
transverse character of its superior molar teeth, that is, by the relatively
smaller anteroposterior diameter as compared with the transverse ; and by
the prominence and acuteness of their principal cusps. They thus stand
at the opposite extreme of the genus from the M. turgidus, where the teeth
are characterized by the robustness and obtuseness of the cusps, although
in the triangular basis of the second superior molar they agree. The ex-
ternal cusps are compressed cones, and in contact at the base; the inter-
mediate tubercles are small and distinct. The internal cusp is large and
prominent. The base of the fourth premolar is T-shaped, and is as long
as wide. Its internal and external cusps are well developed. The cingu-
lum of the true molars is complete all round on the last one, and on the
two others except at the internal base, where it is interrupted. The second
molar only displays a posterior inner tubercle of the cingulum, which is
small, and does not give a truncate interior outline of the crown, charac-
teristic of M. opisthacus, M. ferow, etc. On the ms. i and ii, the cingulum is
expanded at the external angles of the crown, most so anteriorly. The an-
terior expansion rises in a low cusp in the P-m, iv. The enamel is smooth.

This species need only be compared with M. opisthacus and M. subtri-
gonus, which are of about the same size. Passing by the differences
already mentioned in the table, the fourth premolar has a different form
from that of the M opisthacus. Inthe latter it is narrower and more trans-
verse, and with larger conical cusps, much as in AZ. turgidus ; in the pres-
ent species it has the trilobate outline seen in JZ subtrigonus. As to the
latter species, the tecth are wide, and the cusps smaller and separated
at the base, and the cingulum is crenate and lobate, in a manner quite
different from the smoothness and compactness of structure seen in the
M. cuspidatus.

Measurements. M.

Length cf base of last four superior molars..........++: .026

hy “hi CCH POS TIME MMONUTE Viny ibe ee ¥ Meme be, VOLO

. A ATVOTOPOBLOTION os sles sates sewn sOO8
Diameters of P-m. iv 4 anteroposters

WE MBVOLEOU Te Vcc das Wesau sce ys | 1008

. 2

Diameters of mm. {. j anteroposterior -

AHIR EN SOC Vii d: aicheupia-dnd Sev oes nimiala: On UUID

Diameters of m. iid QUGROPOSLONION sss cscesesisvenne O0GE
LUMA OMG rl epeiescoinrectny es OUR

Diameters of m. wid EUTLOBODORTOTION,S «sss tu ous sya s moe OO
transverse...... CEN SRA CREAM AO

D. Baldwin, discoverer.

Curracus TRUNCATUS, Sp. nov,

The genus Chriacus m. was characterized in the Proc ceedings of the
PROC, AMER. PHTLOS, 800. XxI. 114. 2N. PRINTED JANUARY 17, 1884.

314 [Dec. 7,

Cope.]

Academy of Philadelphia, 1883, p. 80, and two species were mentioned,
O. pelwidens (type) and ©. angulatus. The former of these is from the
Puerco, the latter from the Wasatch formation ; the former is the larger
species ; the latter quite small. I now add two species to the genus which
are intermediate in dimensions between those already known.

I. Posterior cingulum of superior molars with large tubercle.

Large species ; O. pelwidens ; small species, C. truncatus.

II. Posterior cingulum with small tubercle ; small species ; C. angulatus.
III. Posterior ciugulum without tubercle; small species; @. sémplem.

In the @. truncatus the posterior singular (inner) tubercle reaches the
largest development, but is not present on the cingulum of the last supe-
rior molar. The anterior cingulum is weak on that tooth and on the first
true molar, but on the second it is thickened into a small anterior or
inner tubercle. This, with the posterior inner, gives the crown a truncate
internal outline, as is also the case in the O. peloidens. The intermediate
tubercles are distinct, and the external cusps are separate at the base. An
external cingulum. The fourth premolar has a triangular base ; a single
compressed external cusp, and a small acutely conical internal one. The
internal tubercle is small and acute on the third premolar. The second pre-
molar is small and probably one-rooted, and it is possible that there is no
first premolar. The canine is directed vertically downwards, and the base
of the crown is oval.

3esides the considerably smaller size, the posterior internal cusps are
relatively larger than in O. peloidens.

Measurements. M.
3 Length of superior dental series including canine...... .039
Length: Of tous MOlat COTO viv wae eu iviess erase varnis Acide evra is Oka
Migitotere ont ti f anteroposterior..... Pace ee mcm (0:

\ transverse. .... oh edule een rues varerinOUe
Tibictere: Doane av { AVUCTOPORLOHIOL We nw ides dion vee wk 004.
S CYOMSVCVSC Wa We ee si se aioe va cele COUT

¢ ay ror lay
iametora Mu { SECOTOMOSUSTION tie evsldicro vig ane: ateeivielwia }OUD
CTH TOVOTRA Ley ch Vea aciieer abe ewe nk Wl0Od
{ ANCELOPOSLETION s hewseio esd owevens views HOU00

Diameters m._ iii-
ltransverse..... ee pe ae Racike wxttiay ; W000

Two individuals from New Mexico. D. Baldwin.

CHRIACUS SIMPLEX, Sp. nov,

This species is represented by a part of the left maxillary bone, which
supports the true molars except a part of the last one ; and by parts of the
mandible, with the first and second true molars, and perhaps one of the
premolars. The true molars are about the size of those of the O. truncatus,
but of very different detailed structure, as already pointed out. The pos-
terior cingulum is stronger than the anterior, but does not support a trace
of a cusp, and they do not unite on the inner face of the crown, External

ae

1883,] 31 5 [Cope.

cingulum present. External cusps rather smail, separate. Intermediate
cusps present ; V large and distinct. Enamel smooth.

The inferior trae molars support Vs; in the second the anterior is
smaller and is more elevated than the posterior. The latter is continued
as a raised posterior, and partly interior border of the heel, without promi-
nent cusp. The crown has a distinct external and a very faint internal
cingulum. In the supposed first true molar, the anterior V is more pro-
longed anteroposteriorly as in the corresponding tooth of Mioclanus ferox,
ete., and the fourth premolar of Phenacodus primevus. The anterior
cusp is the lowest. The heel supports three low cusps, of which the ex-
ternal has a crescentic section, and the posterior is the smallest.

It is probable but not certain that the fourth premolar has an internal
cusp, as the tooth, presumably this one, is injured at that point, Should
the internal cusp be absent, this species cannot be referred to Chriacus.

Measurements. M.

Length of superior true molars... .eeereeseeses sees ance 0135
Di fanteroposterior......... .005
Jiameters of first true molars ) pe eat OR het Siete
i anteroposterior. ..... .Q05€
Diameters of second true molars { ; I nm
TPODRVELSC) se cua ys ous SOUS

; , f anteroposterior......... .0084
Diameters of third true molar 4 — t
UETHYISVOLSGr sv cesis cue ccs CCUG

f anteroposterior... .005
Utransverse...... .0085

: : f anteroposterior 0056
Diameters of second inferior true molar 1 ; I ,
transverse,.... .0043

Diameters of first inferior true molar -

D. Baldwin, discoverer.

TRICENTES CRASSICOLLIDENS, gen. et sp. NOV.

9

Char. gen. This genus is Ohriacus with only three premolars in the su-
perior, and probably inferior series. The canines are well developed, and
lateral in position, leaving space for small incisors, thus differing from the
genera of the Mixodectidw, Miwodectes, Microsyops, and Cynodontomys, on the
one hand, and from Necrolemur on the other. It has, so far as known, the
dental formula of several genera of typical Lemuride, but differs from these
in the following points. The orbit is open posteriorly ; the inferior molars
have the anterior triangle of three cusps ; and the fourth inferior premolar
has an interior cusp. I have demonstrated the last mentioned characters
on the type, 7 erassicollidens only, but suspect its presence on some or all
of the other species. In their details the superior true molars are like those
of Mioclenus, as distinguished from those ot Pelycodus.

To this genus belongs the Mioclenus subtrigonus, and probably, from the
small size of its fourth premolar, the I, bucculentus. Tadd to these three
a fourth, 7" inequidens, and remark that it is yet uncertain how many pre-
molars are present in the Thriacus simplex. Should the latter possess
three only, it will be properly referred to Tricentes.

Cope.] 316 [Dec 7,

These species differ as follows :

I. Posterior cingulum of true molars i and ii, wide, rising into a small
cusp.

Length of trie molare, Ma OUGG is i ieis cb Wile bee eho eo OV aserColLeaene,
If. Posterior cingulum distinct, thickened inwards.
Length of true molars (m. ii inferential) .0175, crowns narrowed, trans-
VEUEC ues svn wol awe dare vows ease Mim ay Wce elyicds Ctlad'y ete wR OMMCCIUVEsUCCE ay
Length of true molars .0170; crowns quadrate..............8subtrigonus.*

Length of true molars .0135 ; crowns narrowed, transVerse.....sseesvers
(Chriacus) simplen.
III. Posterior cingulum weak, disappearing inwards.
Length of true molars .0105, crowns transverse except the third, which is
VOUY SMALL. sec vi ve eWec tie vwedeselbever vas tay) uiblean ves we MMEQUIGENS,
Char. Specif. The Tricentes crassicollidens is about the size of the
Chriacus truncatus and resembles it a good deal. The latter has, however,
a more transverse form of true molars, as compared with the present spe-
cies, where the form is subquadrate. In the present animal the premolars
are smaller, and if the third (second present) has an internal cusp, it is
much more ins:gnificant than in the C. truncatus. ‘These two species and
the Mioclenus opisthacus resemble each other in the similar size, and in the
true molars having the posterior inner cusp more distinct than in other spe-
cies. They differ in the dimensions of their premolars, those of the If
opisthacus being the largest, and those of CO. truncatus being intermediate
in size. In the 7. erassicollidens the anterior cingulum is also distinct. The
external cusps are conic, and are well separated, and the internal V is dis-
tinct. The internal cusp of the fourth premolar is small and compressed,
so as to be transverse. The base of the third premolar is triangular and
much longer than wide, All the superior molars, except the first premo-
lar, are furnished with an external cingulum, which rises into a more or
less distinct apex at its anterior and posterior angles. The first’ premolar
isa simple cone. The alveolus of the canine tooth is of large size. The
last true molar is not much reduced, and the first is as large as the second.
This is not the case with the 7. buceulentus, where the first is considerably
smaller than the second.

Measurements. M.
Length of dental series to canine, exclusive............ .086
ig MT AUELCMID ys vos vud veld b viet anes n ee tines 4l om 6 eee el OUR

®y TT OROMLOLT RELIONV 6 ebrtreuuvaveeeener ihe seven sivOLEO

o CV MOUO MOM BOMB) Caves vib vb ors eet esionbie eve deals SOLOS

SANUETOMOBLGTION rises iceveevenee «OUMS

Diameter of P-m. iv
Wa varme ss CP EE he goals

*There may be two species confounded under this name, A specimen figured
in Vol, III of the final (4to) Report of the Hayden Survey, Plate XXIV, f, fig. 4,
has four interior premolars, all simple,

a?

la
)

Ta

1883.} 317 (Cope.

Measurements. M.

‘ienctentok Mot SANtCTOPOStCTION... cree ee rereeeeeees .0058
{TAN GVOTEO sys oe \ spe apie wimlativese Sareutere) SUUDO
Wate ote Nadie ANteYOPOSteTIOL...ceserereeevoineee -00B0
HHS MUST Guanes’ Meare w Vide busldtese’s 1s OUR)

A pair of mandibular rami, found on the same day, and at or near the
same place, probably belong to the same species, if not to the same animal,
they support all the teeth, but only the P-m iv and the M. iand ii have
yet been disengaged from the matrix. The P-m, iv is rather large and
robust, and has a short wide heel, and an anterior cusp which leaves the
main cusps half way to the apex, or at the same elevation as the internal
cusp. The anterior three cusps of the true molars are elevated above the
heel, and the anterior is nearly median, forms no blade with external ante-
rior, and is smaller than the anterior internal cusp. The heel is well de-
veloped, and its borders rise in two obtuse open Vs, whose apices look away
from each other. The internal supports two cusps, the external, but one.
No cingula ; enamel smooth.

Measurements of inferior teeth. M.

Riiahemiitl cian WOOU
.. 0085
atte MOO
UAPADSVOTSA\ sd Vivi sila sameness sOUBO

Length of bases of my Landi, i.e ices ve eee vee sie, pOLL0
From Upper Puerco; D. Baldwin.

nN: . : anteroposterior...
Diameters of P-m. iv ie |
APATIGY OLBG wae biavein eee

faNteropOsterxiOn...os.cesn ibe edis

Diameters of m. ii

1 %
T RICENTES IN ALQUIDENS, Sp. NOV.

This species is represented by two mutilated crania, obtained on the
same day and near the same locality as the preceding species. One of
these, which I select as type, embraces the muzzle and palate anterior to
the posterior border of the maxillary bone.

Besides its inferior size, other characters distinguish this species. The
simplicity of the superior molars is seen in no other, and the very reduced
size of the third superior molar is not found in any of its allies. This is
correlated with an oblique reduction of the maxillary bone behind, which
gives the second true molar an oblique external border instead of the longi-
tudinal one seen in the other species. The external cusps of the molars
are conic, and are not in contact at the base. The internal cusp is also
conic, and is larger than the external. The internal cusp of the fourth pre-
molar is large. It is probablé that the third premolar supports an internal
cusp, as the crown base is as wide as long. The premolars are spaced in
this species, as in the last, but the diastema is shorter than in the 7. crassi-
colledena, not exceeding the premolar interspaces. The external cingulum
8 quite weak. The canine alveolus is large. The incisors are wanting,
but the premaxillary region is wide. The inferior dentition is unknown.

318 [Dec. 7

Measurements of superior teeth. M.

Length of dental series, including canine......+.++++ . 0272

ip from canine to m. i, exclusive...... Rat) aie: . 0180
Length of true molar series...... POV odtiene sone else LOU
f anterdpieetiertot sun onuveu'a’s ii vvecsMOUee
NEPAMeVOREG, ulir’s He vere slepic nes 40080)

Pyare tente Oe aati tie anteroposterior.,.......+++sse++ .0080

Diameter of P-m. iii-

\ transverse..... WLay Chak evetwlek OOO

Dikrosiere M14 anteroposterior’. ..... a ie Oe 0038
(transverse ...... i a eee Velivis ye OO

By

Dintheters Mist ee OTE sida pecrenmptlt peng nig Pe Nore NE)
LUATIBVETBO i, 0 eivk » iveervieln sume bun os eve a LUUOU.

sergere vin OD
a aR

Diameters ity iit fanteroposterior ...+.+.++
COAT ATETES's \aaibitil's citise

Upper Puerco ; D. Baldwin.

INDRODON MALARIS, gen. et sp. nov.

Char. gen. Family Anaptomorphide, suborder perhaps Lemuroidea, as
indicated by the dentition only. It differs from Anaptomarphus in three
points. First, there are three superior incisors ; second, the first (third)
premolar has no internal lobe; and third, there is a distinct posterior in-
ternal tubercle on the first and second superior molars.

The animals of the Hocene period of the family of the Adapidw, may be-
long to the Lemuroidea, but the evidence which I have derived: from the
feet of Pelycodus* has led me to refer them} to the Insectivorous division
of the Bunotheria, to the neighborhood of the Tupmide and Erinaccide.
At the same time I retained provisionally the genera with three and two
superior premolars in the suborder Lemuroidea, although the foot struc-
ture of these extinct genera is yet unknown. I also indadvertently defined
the Lemuroidea as having quadrituberculate superior molars, a character
which I well knew to be wanting in various extinct and recent genera
where they are tritubercular. T'wo families were proposed} for the Eocene
lemuroids, which are defined as follows :

Superior premolars three........+++-- GeO e eye EAN WHEN veh Minodectidea.
vi hi WVO) vies 6s SEV Kee Cul PuReT VT BRYN Hs He ... Anaptomorphida,

The genera of the first named family are defined as follows :

I. Canine teeth large and lateral, well separated.
superior premolar without internal lobe ; superior true

molars tritubercular with cingula..scsecseesesecseeeersee Lricentes.
II. Canine teeth median in position or much reduced in size,

a, Last inferior premolar without internal tubercle.
Inferior premolars al} one-rooted ; canine and incisor small. . Necrolemur. }

* Report of U.S. G. G. Survey W. of 100th Mer., G. M. Wheeler, iv, p. 140,
+ Proceedings Academy Natural Sciences of Phiiadelphia, 1883, p, 78-80.
{ Filhol Rech, Phosph, Quercy,

A
dy

a

1383.4 319 [Cope.

First premolars only one-rooted ; canine small ; incisor very
langes. 3%

OS Ee OMS ew AW Ww eliounas valte lev As bu, sbuliMeomomecdeds ®
aa, Last inferior premolar with internal tubercle.
A very large ? canine ; first premolar only, one-rooted....... Microsyops.+

A very large ? canine ; first and second premolars both one-

POOUG COIS Wo sive nye UNAM CuSO Mies NIAID aisisie as Wiehe; Cra TCO ORULONEU Brine

The genera of Anaptomorphide, which on dental characters includes
Indrodon, differ as follows :
%, Incisors three,

aa. Incisors two,
First superior incisor with’ inner lobe; no posterior inner
tubercle on AUPEHION MoOlars 44.004 RIG NUMON Wie ky Petnle Anaptomorphus.

The superior dental formula of Indrodon is I. 8; C. 1; P-m. 2; M. 4.
The canine is compressed and acute ; the third premolar is compressed
conic, and has two roots. The fourth premolar has but one external cusp.
The external cusps of the true molars are conic and acute, and are con-
nected with the internal cusp by ridges which form a V. Posterior inner
cusp distinct on ms. i and ii, a part of the posterior cingulum, Intermedi-
ate tubercles present, small. The superior incisors are well developed,
and display no tendency towards the rodent type. A portion of lower jaw
adheres to the skull, and may belong to the same animal. It supports
the last two molars. These have two anterior, Spposite, approximated
cusps. The heel of the penultimate molar is rather large, and has a raised
edge, which develops low tubercles at the angles.

Char. Specif. The first and third superior incisors are a little larger
than the second. Canine preceded and followed by diastemata, each of
which is 1.5 times as long as the long diameter of the base of the crown.
Premolars separated from each other and from the first true molar by in-
terspaces half as long as the diastema. Neither tooth has any basal
tubercles, but the posterior has a weak external cingulum, which is
stronger posteriorly. The internal cusp of the same tooth is anterior, is
acute and elevated. The superior true molars have a strong external
cingulum, which rises into a small tubercle Opposite the space between the
external principal cusps. Of the latter, the anterior is a little more conic
than the posterior, and both are well within the external border. On the
last molar, the posterior external cusp is continuous with the exte
termediate tubercle, and forms a cutting edge within the posterior margin
of the crown. The posterior inner tubercle is rather large, and projects
further inwards than the apex of tne anterior V on the second true molar,
but not so far as in the species of Andsonchus and Haploconus.

rnal in-

*Proceedings American Philosophical Soclety, 1888, p. 559.
}Leidy Report U.S. Geol. Survey, Terrs. I.
Cope, Pal. Bull. No, 84,

820 [Dec. 7,

Cope.]

The surface of the cranium is too much obscured by cracks and films of
matrix to permit a view of the sutures and foramina. 'The face is wide, as
the posterior part of the maxillary and the malar bone are expanded out-
wards. I have not yet been able to ascertain the condition of the orbit
posteriorly. The mandibular ramus is rather slender,

Measurements. M.

Length of dental series from posterior base of iiii..... .0248
id ! DaheS Of SUPOTION NCISOLS Wis wnsimiunilin’ selewie MOU

id from dill to’ Pm, Ty) Ox clusiven yc vw cows une Oe

‘\- of premolars on maxillary bone....5.660....+ 0060

oy ££ ERC Ol EMOTE Gil wich. cioi Valeur EM hee ODO

Li POUR AVN eotn WEW He Nei Kuh eee ORS
Width.) i COD ofe nibh Wik vents eeu Wilk oh OOBS

santeroposterior ......e.eeseeee see ee 20080
WAVER ONES son's! Vasbewisrnls prervelbiveroote boar OURS
ANCSVOMGBTCTION 1b ul vis Mivieceus semuie ies nit MORO.

Diameters m. i

Diameters m. ii {

tramsverse...... A RRO MiMite cag oe hi +» «0040

F snes BLLCOLOPOBUATIOL vs. uisip bie vo bin eelenridie eto WOOO
Diameters m. iii f°"

ERE BOTRB casi ollie oi siete skis aaa ab WAN

i ‘ ‘ og PIMCCLOPOSUCTIOR wis o's, chee oa) pei8 a DOR
Diameters inferior m. ii Moin
Tae CARER REEE. viii Vani nn cew eae

DGpth OLTAMUS MANGUM At Melissa. ns ven em heen QOL
The skull is about the size of that of the Bassaris astuta. D. Baldwin,
discoverer,
The discovery of this type in the Puerco formation is a fact of interest.

In the shortening of its dental series it is the most specialized genus of

the epoch, while the forms of its true molars are like those of the simpler
Creodonta, and more specialized than those of Anaptomorphus, and the
lemurs generally. In the simplicity of its premolars, however, it main-
tains the general character of the Puerco fauna, and is more primitive
than the forms jus’ named. Its nearest ally of the Puerco yet known
is Ohriacus.

ANISONCHUS AGAPETILLUS, 8p, Nov.

This species is founded on parts of six mandibular rami, none of which
has more than four continuous molars in position, including the last. It is
not entirely certain that these belong to a species of Andsonchus, because
the superior molar teeth by which that genus is distinguished from Zaplo-
conus and Hemithleus, are wanting. The inferior molars have the ante-
rior inner cusp moderately well developed, as in Anisonchus gillianus.

The crowns of the true molars consist of two Vs; of which the posterior
base of the posterior one, is rendered irregular by the presence of a small
posterior median tubertle. Of the anterior pair of cusps, the external is a
little the more elevated, and the internal is more elevated than any ot the
posterior ones. The internal posterior as well as the external posterior

eccrine nc

—————

1883, ] 321 [Cope.

cusp has a V-shaped section, because its anterior border is continued as an
oblique ridge to the base of the anterior internal cusp. Internal cingular
none ; a slight one on the external base of the large anterior external
cusp. The heel of the third true molar is well developed, and rises into
an acute cusp. That of the fourth premolar is short and flat. The anterior
cusp of the same is basal and rudimental. This tooth is not enlarged as is
usually the case in the Periptychide, and it first here differs from these
animals, and agrees with the unguiculate types in that its lateral faces are
unequally convex,

Measurements. M.

Length of last four molarsron bases ys ecwe iil laid ewon ow OLE
My He MOULOMVEHUOLAM ym sl dvd. g Mite ae aeliveetualy sine 0085

Elevation of « NN Vea vin wsiinibudeuwaviesi ds vise eve! 2008

Length of second true molar. WY CPAP Vi 6G dh ys Govlnn Vila OA Ae « 008

Width ‘i “ A CENGRUGR UT iiarsinis coreieihd evrvia vie .008

Length of third « My “e Paneer nee . 004
Width Wy & Ms eel ania Sine Aarne ORS

Depth of ramus at second true molar. .
ANISONOHUS COPHATER, sp. nov.

A mandibular ramus supporting three molars
that I have seen of this species,
the A. agapetillus, that is,
single premolar is muc

EU wat edna . 007

, two of them true, is all
Its proportions are the same as those of
much smaller than the A. gilianus, and the
h more like that of other species of the genus. The
true molars differ from those of the A. agapetillus in tw
First, the internal posterior cusp is inside the
that is, outside the bordering edge,
posterior median cusp,

o strong characters.
rim of the heel of the crown,
and is therefore very distinct from the

It isa sharp cone 3 Secondly, there is a cingulum
extending from this cusp round the internal base of the internal anterior

cusp. There is also one at the base ofthe external anterior cusp, which con-
tinues to the heel only on the last inferior molar, The posterior heel is rela-
tively wider, and the anterior V relatively more contracted, than in the A.
agaupetillus. The anterior tubercle ig moderately developed at the anterior
base of the anterior V. The third or fourth premolar is equilateral, and
larger than the true molars, Tt has ashort apiculate heel, and a rudimental
anterior basal tubercle.

Measurements. M.
f anteroposterior. ..... .0082

horizont:
f orizontal transverse , «+ 0080

Diameters of m. ii

vatiloal (MOT STION ee eee ec eae + 0025
; POSTORIG I Rey, 0018
| Anteroposterior........., 0048

Diameters of P-m. iii or iv 2 vertical (restored apex)... .0040

WANS VOTBOy siiis OM dive ilies .0023
D. Baldwin, discoverer,

JHIROX PLICATUS, gen. et sp. nov.

Char. gen. These are known from three superior molars ;

PROC, AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xxt, 114, 20.

viz: the last
PRINTED JANUARY 28, 1884,

Cope,] 322 (Dec. 7,

premolar, and the second and third true molars. The fourth premolar has
two external, and one internal cusps, and the true molars have four cusps
each, The cusps are of peculiar form. The second true molar resembles
a convex body which has been divided by two cuts at right angles to each
other, from which the quarters thus produced have spread away from each
other subequally. The external faces of the cusps are convex. The
apices are acute. The last superior molar is larger anteroposteriorly than
transversely. The fourth premolar (supposed) is two-rooted.

These molar teeth remind one of the inferior molars of Ptilodus, through
they differ much from them. The genus is probably nearer to Catopsalis,
and belongs to the Marsupial order. The presence of only two series of
cusps in the superior molars, distinguishes it from these genera, which
have presumably three series of such cusps. Lemoine has shown this to
be the case in WMeoplagiaulaa.

Ohar. specif. The external cusps of the fourth premolar are flattened
on the external side, and lean a littleinwards. The internal cusp (proba-
bly homologically the anterior) is opposite the anterior external, and
has a convex internal face. Its apex is acute and compressed ; the apices
of the external cusps are trihedral and acute.

The cusps of the second true molars are more widely separated trans-
versely than anteroposteriorly ; that is, the longitudinal fissure is wider
than the transverse. The apices are all acute, the internal trihedral, the
external more compressed.

The transverse diameter of the last. true molar is smaller than that of
the second true molar, while the longitudinal is nearly the same. The
crown projects convexly posterior to the posterior pair, and there is a small
tubercle at the anterior base of the external anterior cusp.

None of the teeth preserved display cingula. The bases of the crown
are smooth, but the cusps are sharply and finely parallel-grooved on their
external faces.

Measurements. M.
: i) COMUOLODORTOTION.. iisioetuleveys es) .O0B0
Diameters of P-m. iv { ULAMSVOTROUG iil dee ces havuwed 0088
F ve GC MMLCTOPORUCTION ss sibleie Welds da moede MOBO
Diameters of m. if j TONS VOLEC ss 650+ ebialevuss dileiebin » 1 MOUBD:
, we» ¢ anteroposterior...... bolas Hate KOOOD
Diameters of m. tii TOE V OTRO 6 ieiebiy ganiviire we vinyls UOBU

D. Baldwin, discoverer.

CATOPSALIS FISSIDENS, Sp. NOV.

This Marsupial is represented by a portion of the lower jaw which sup-
ports the molar teeth. The first, which is probably the fourth premolar, is
represented only by its single root, which fills a round alveolus near the
antérior base of the first true molar.

In size this species is intermediate between the small 0. folatus and the
large O. polluw, The first molar is the longer and narrower, and the

”

1883,] 323 [Cope.

second the shorter and wider, as in the known species. The first molar
differs from that of both the latter, in having the tubercles of one side sepa-
rated nearly to the base. These tubercles are conic, and not flattened
in OQ. foliatus and O. pollua, and the two rows are separated by a distinct
valley, as in the first named. There are five tubercles on one side, and four
on the other side of the crown, and in addition, two small cusps at ule an-
terior extremity of each row, and another at the posterior extremity of one
of therows. These additional cusplets are not present in the other species.

The jast molar is relatively wider than in the other species. Its crown
is a good deal worn, but there are probably more than two rows of tuber-
cles, as there are some appendicular rows on one side of the crown at least.

Measurements. M.
Diameters M, if ®Mteroposterior.............c.cee e008 10185
/ |) Utransverse........ 5. THN Ne eb Ki sien OUOD
. 3; § anteroposterior... .. i RANE NC ua Salat .0090
Diameters M. ii ; ae
UPHMSVCTSGN Ii dehe WN aleurlatensnnieh faiccs wine 00%

The Upper Puerco; D. Baldwin.

GENERAL REMARKS ON THE CHARACTERS OF THE MAMMALIA OF THE

Punproo Erocn.

I have already called attention to the fact that the Mammalia of the

Puerco epoch possess, with but few exceptions, superior molar teeth whose

crowns include only three of the component tubercles of the normal

mammalian moiar, in a condition of full development.* In the number
of species of supposed pl
of species (1), with qu:
being

acentals now known, sixty-seven, the proportion
idrituberculate superior molars is even smaller,
only four to sixty-three. The premolars display equally primitive
characters, and to these I wish now to draw attention.

2. The presence of two internal tubercles of the fourth superior pre-
molar is unknown as yet in the fauna.

3. The presence of two external cusps of the same tooth is known or
inferred in only five species in the sixty-seven, and in two of the five it is
of reduced size.

4. The presence of one

internal cusp of the fourth superior premolar is
demonstrated or inferr

ed in all of the placental species,

5. The presence of the internal cusp of the third superior premolar is,
on the other hand, only demonstrated in twenty-two species. In seven-
teen it is wanting.

Referring to the inferior premolars :

6. No species presents an internal cusp of the third premolar.

7. An internal cusp of the fourth premolar is present in only fourteen
Species. In twenty-nine species it is certainly wanting. .

* Proceedings of the

American Philosophical Society, 1883, 562. American
Naturalist, 1888, 407,

Cope.] 324 [Dec.7,

8. In no species of this formation is the fourth inferior premolar like a
molar tooth.

It is thus evident that the dentition of the mammalia of the Puerco
fauna presents a much greater degree of simplicity than does that of the
species of any of the later Hocene or other age. This result coiacides
with the results I have already obtained from a study of the structure of
the feet, etc.* These may be summarized again as follows:

1. The species in which the number of toes is known, have them 5-5.

2. Those in which the feet are known are plantigrade.

8. No species is known to have interlocking carpal and tarsal bones,
excepting the two species of Puntolambdu (carpus unknown).

4. No species is known to have well grooved astragalus (its presence is
inferred in two species of Dissacus).

5. No species is known to have a faceted radius or ulno-radius, adapted
to the separate carpal bones of the proximal row.

6. Inno species is the tongue in the metapodio-phalangeal joints devel-
oped on the front of the metapodial bones.

Y. The zygapophyses where known are all flat, except in some species
(probably all) of Oxyclenus, where they are simply convex-concave, and
not doubly so.

On the Trituberculate Type of Molar Tooth in the Mammalia, By H. D.
Cope.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 7, 1583.)

It is now apparent that the type of superior molar tooth which pre-
dominated during the Puerco epoch was triangular or tritubercular ; that
is, with two external and one internal tubercles. Thus, of sixty-seven
species of placental mammalia of which the superior molars are known,
all but four have three tubercles of the crown, and of the remaining sixty-
five, all are triangular, excepting those of three species of Periptychus, and
three of Conoryctes, which have a small supplementary lobe on each side
of the median principal inner tubercle.

This fact is important as indicating the mode of development of the
various types of superior molar teeth, on which we have not heretofore
had clear light. In the first place, this type of molar exists to-day only in
the insectivorous and carnivorous Marsupialia ; in the Creodonta, and the
tubercular molars of such Carnivora as possess them (excepting the plan-
tigrades). In the Ungulates its persistence is to be found in the molars of
the Coryphodontids of the Wasatch,and Dinocerata of the Bridger Hocenes.
In later epochs it is occasionally seen only in the last superior molar.

It is also evident that the quadritubercular molar is derived from the tri-
tubercular by the addition of a lobe of the inner part of a cingulum of the

* American Naturalist, 1888, p. 1056; Science, 1888, p. 275.
+See American Naturalist, April, 1883, p. 407.

és

1883,] 325 (Cope.

posterior base of the crown. ‘Transitional states are seen in some of the
Periptychide (Anisonchus), and in the sectorials of the Procyonide.

The tritubercwlar or triangular superior molar is associated with a corre-
sponding form of the anterior part of the inferior molar. This kind of in-
ferior molar* I have called the tubercular sectorial, and is very variable
as to the degree of development of the sectorial cutting edge. The anterior
triangle is formed by the connection by angle or crest, of the median and
anterior internal crests with the anterior external. Its primitive form is
seen in Didelphys, Pelycodus, Pantolambda and the Amblypoda generally ;
in Centetes and Talpa; and in its sectorial form, in Stypolophus and
Oxyeena, ete.

The mechanical action of such teeth is as follows : Of course, it results
from the form of the superior molars that the spaces between them are
wedge-shaped, the apex external, the base opening to the palate. The base
of the triangular section of the anterior part of the inferior molar is inte-
rior, and the apex exterior, and when the jaws are closed, this triangular
prism exactly fits the space between the superior molars. The lower heel
of the inferior molar receives the impact of the crown of the superior
molar, Thus the oblique edges of the inferior triangle shear on the edges
of two adjacent superior molars. The anterior parts of the inferior molars,
and the superior molars, form an alternate dental series as distinguished
from the prevalent opposed dentition of most mammalia. In so far it re-
sembles the reptilian dentition.

This primitive dentition has been modified in two directions ; viz., to
form the grinding and the sectorial dentitions. As already remarked, the
superior molars gradually acquire a posterior internal lobe, which produces
the quadrituberculate type. This lobe, by opposing the anterior internal
lobe of the next posterior inferior molar, precludes the entrance of the an-
terior triangle of the latter between the two superior molars. Hence we
find in the types which possess quadritubereular superior molars, that the
anterior triangle of the inferior molar is not elevated, if present, as for in-
stance in Rhinocerus. It is, however, more frequently atrophied, and dis-
appears, forming the inferior quadritubercular molar so well known.

On the other hand, as I have pointed out,{ the anterior internal cusp
of the triangle of the inferior molar may be more developed antero-
posteriorly, giving the antero-internal edge of the triangle much greater
obliquity than the postero-internal. In correspondence with this modi-
fication, the superior triangular molar loses its equilateral character
by the more anterior position of its internal angle, thus elongating the
posterior internal side of the crown. ‘The latter thus fits the correspond-
ing form of the triangle of the inferior molar, forming with it the shear of
the sectorial tooth.

*See Report G. M. Wheeler, D, Chief of Engineers on Explor, Surv. W. 100th
Mer. Vol. IV, pt. ii; on the Creodonta,

PIN the origin of the sectorial tooth of the Carnivora, American Naturalist,
S75,

Houston.] 326 (Dec. 7,

In a former article, ‘‘On the Homologies of the Molar Teeth,’’ etc., I
traced the modifications of the superior and many of the inferior molars ot
the ungulate mammals to a parent quadrituberculate type. In a subse-
quent essay* I traced the origin of the inferior sectorial to a primitive five-
tubercled, or ‘‘ tubercular sectorial’’ type. Farther than this I did not go,
and made no attempt to derive the few cases of triangular superior molars
then known, nor the type of the superior sectorial. The revelations of the
Puerco fauna show, that the superior molars of both ungulate and unguic-
ulate mammalia have been derived from a tritubercular type; and that
the inferior true molars of both have been derived from a “tubercular
sectorial’’ type. Shall we look for the origin of the latter in a trituber-
cular tooth also, ¢.¢., tubercular sectorial without heel; and will the
crowns of the true molars of the primitive mammals alternate with, in-
stead of oppose each other? This is a probable result of future discovery.

On the Synchronous-Multiplea Telegraph. By Prof. Houston.
(Tiead before the American Philosophical Society, December 7, 1883.)

Prof. Houston said: ‘It is with considerable pleasure, Mr, President
and gentlemen, that I am here this evening to call your attention to a dis-
covery in electricity that appears to.me to be of very great practical value
to the world, The present decade has witnessed such marvelous progress
in electrical inventions that many of us have perhaps been disposed to be-
lieve that but little new could reasonably be expected, but, unless I am
greatly mistaken, the invention which I am about. to describe to you, is
greater even than that of the telephone.

“Before proceeding to the details of the invention of the synchronous-
multiplex telegraph system of Mr. Patrick B. Delany, it will, perhaps, be best
that your attention should first be called to some of the practical purposes
for which it is applicable. Briefly stated, the value of this invention is to
be found in the fact, that by its use the simultaneous transmission of
numerous telegraphic dispatches over one and the same wire is readily ac-
complished, Hitherto, the only system that accomplished this, to any con-
siderable extent, in actual practice, was the quadruplex system, and this,
as you well know, is not only limited to the simultaneous transmission of
four dispatches, but these are necessarily sent, two each, in opposite direc-
tions. You will, therefore, readily understand the great value of Mr.
Delany’s wonderful invention, when I inform you that not only can the
number of simultaneously transmitted dispatches be very gr satly increased,
even indeed as far as seventy-two, but that all of them can be sent in the

*Journal Academy Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, March, 1875,

f

1883,] 327 { Houston.

same direction, or any part in one direction and the remainder in the op-
posite direction.

“Tt would be difficult, on the eve of an important discovery like that we
are discussing, to predict the extent and nature of the effect its practical in-
troduction will have on the world at large; but this I think will appear
evident, that the synchronous-multiplex telegraphic system will do for the
most distant cities of our country, what the telephone has done for the in-
habitants in the same city, or for those of neighboring cities, with, how-
ever, this difference, that in the case of the synchronous system, a perma-
nent record is obtained of all dispatches sent or received, while in the tele-
phonic system of transmission there is none.

“Without, however, secking to look further into the future, let us pass
to the descriptions of the details of this remarkable invention.

“The multiplex system differs radically from the quadruplex, which, as
you are probably aware, is based on. the balancing of resistances, or the dif-
ferential method. The multiplex system, on the contrary, is based on the
synchronous rotation of two trailing contact arms which are connected to
the ends of the line, one at cach end of the main line. Series of contacts,
on the face of discs, swept by the trailing arms, are in electrical connection.
with the various operators that desire to use the line. By the rotation of
the arms, the main line is brought successively into electrical contact with
such of the operators, and carried from one to another, and again given back
to each successively, so rapidly, that before any of them can realize that
he has been disconnected from the line, it is again given to him, so that
the line is at his disposal, to the same extent as if he alone was using it.

“The appliances whereby Mr. Delany maintains practically absolute syn-
chronism in the revolving arms at each end of the line are of remarkable
simplicity. A few of the contacts pefore referred to, as being placed on
the face of the discs, are reserved for the maintenance of synchronism
Some of these contacts are connected to a battery and others to cor-
recting devices at each end of the line, while others are left open or un-
connected with anything. If the synchronous rotation of the two arms
is maintained, ‘no correcting impulses pass over the line, since, although
one end thereof is in electrical connection with one of the batteries, the
other end is on an unconnected segment, and the battery circuit: being
open, no current flows ; should, however, the line at one end be brought
in contact with a part of the dise, very slightly in advance of its position
on the dise at the other end, then the battery is connected, and an electri
cal impulse flows over the line, and slows the rotation of the arm.

“The manner in which this correcting impulse is made a retarding one is
as follows: the rotation of the trailing arm at each end of the line is main-
tained by an electric magnetic device, invented by LaGour, of Copenha-
gen, and termed by him a phonic-wheel. The rapidity of rotation of this
wheel is dependent on the rapidity with which an electrical current tra-
versing the coils of its electro-magnet, is made and broken.

“The makes and breaks in the circuit of the motor-magnet of the phonic-

Houston.] 328 [Dee. 7,

wheel, are governed by the vibration of a tuning-fork, maintained in its

vibration by the action of a voltaic battery. Since the rate of vibration of

the fork governs the rate of rotation of the arm, it is only necessary to main-
tain the synchronous vibration of two forks, placed at each end of the line.

“Although the duration of vibration of a fork, like the oscillation of a pen-
dulum, is sensibly the same for all amplitudes, provided the amplitude is
very small, yet, as you are aware, the duration becomes longer, or the
vibration slower, if the amplitude of the oscillation be very sensibly in-
creased. Now the inventor obtains the requisite slowing of that fork’s vibra-
tion, that is connected with the phonic-wheel that has gained on the
other, by causing the electrical impulse that flows over the line to in-
crease the strength of the electrical current that is traversing the battery
circuit that is keeping it in vibration. This he accomplishes by cutting a
resistance out of this circuit, and thus allowing more current to pass.

“Tn order to avoid the disturbance produced by the static charge, that is
generally found in long lines, the inventor has provided a series of extr:
contacts, placed between each of the separate contacts that, at each end

of the line, are connected to the transmitting or receiving instruments.
These extra contacts are connected together and to the earth, so that when
the line is disconnected from one instrument, it is put to the earth before it
is given to the next instrument, and is thus completely freed from its
static charge. These discharge contacts are absolutely necessary to the
successful operation of the synchronous system, where the length of line
employed is extended,

“Since the circuit of any operator is constantly made and broken, as
often as the line is taken and again returned to him, the use of an ordi-
nary Morse relay would be inapplicable in the practice of this system,
since all the impulses (a number of which make up a single character, as
well as the characters sent into the line from the transmitting key of the
operator connected) would be recorded. In order to avoid this confusion the
transmission battery is split and grounded in the middle, and polarized
relays substituted for the ordinary instruments, Since these relays re;
spond, not to makes and breaks in the circuit, but to changes of polarity
only, the receiving instruments are influenced only by the characters sent
by the operators, and not by the suceessive makes and breaks.

“The successful solution of the problem of maintaining synchronism
by the methods I have explained, render many things possible that without
it would have been impossible. Among these I may mention the various ap-
plications of fac-similies, and autographic telegraphs. Without attempting
to go into the details of their application, it will suffice to say that the proba-
ble applications of Mr. Delany’s system are so numerous and important,
as to entitle him to a very high rank among the world’s inventors,’’

|

z— a

|

a

1883. 329
Stated Meeting, December 21, 1883.
Present, 8 members.
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair,

A letter from Bishop de Schweinitz, dated Bethlehem, Dee.
12th, enclosing a certified extract from the minutes of the
‘Board of Directors of the Society of the United Brethren for
Propagating the Gospel among the Heathen,” was read, and, on
motion, it was

Resolwed, That the Curators be authorized and requested to return the
Zeisberger and Perlaus documents to their proper owners, and take a re-
ceipt for the same.

Donations for the Library were received from the Society
at Riga, the Royal Society of Victoria, Royal Academy
and Prof, Paul Albrecht of Brussels; Geographical Society of
Paris and Bordeaux; the Institute of France; Royal Academy
at Madrid; Meteorological, Zodlogical, and Royal Asiatic Soci-
eties at London; Cambridge Museum of Comparative ZLoodlogy ;
American Oriental Society; Prof. Oswald Seidensticker, Prof.
Edwin J. Houston, and Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr.; Mr. Wm.
Hand Browne of Baltimore, American Journal of Mathemat-
ics; United States National Museum; J. L. Smithmeyer; Ohio
Mechanics’ Institute of Cincinnati; and the American Anti-
quarian and Oriental Journal.

Also framed phototypes of the Smithsonian Institution
Building, and of Henry W. Longfellow, presented by Mr. F.
Gutekunst of Philadelphia.

The death of Dr. Thomas 8. Kirkbride, Superintendent of
the Pennsylvania Hospital for the Insane, in West Philadel-
phia, on the 17th of December, aged 74, was announced by
the President, who was requested to appoint a member of the
Society to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased.

A communication for the Magellanic Premium was. re-
ceived through the President from “Time is Money,” consist-
ing of a description and model of “A Universal Time-piece.”’
Referred to the Board of Officers and Council.

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xxI. 114. 2P. PRINTED JANUARY 28, 1884.

Phillips.] 330 [Dee, 21,

Prof. Rothrock read a paper entitled: “The microscopic ex-
amination of timber with regard to its strength; a contribu-
tion from the Eli K. Price Botanical Laboratory of. the
University of Pennsylvania, by Frank M. Day.” Remarks
were made on the interesting subject of the paper by Dr.
Brinton, Mr. Ingham and Mr. Price, and the Treasurer was
authorized to pay for necessary illustrations. (See page 833.)

Mr, Phillips communicated “A note respecting the correct
name of the last letter of the English Alphabet?”

Mr. Lesley exhibited a small copper-plate map of Pennsyl-
vania which he had colored geologically according to the
system of Major J. W. Powell, Director of the United States
Geological Survey, as a contribution to a general map of the
United States now in preparation at Washington for illustrat-
ing the coloration adopted by Major Powell, and intended for
presentation at the Congress of Geologists to meet at Berlin
in 1884.

Dr. Allen read a paper “On a case of human congenital
malformation,” and exhibited two photographie views of the
subject.

The reading of pending nominations was postponed.

Mr. Phillips reported that the Curators were consulting with
Mr. Rothermel respecting the oil paintings of the Society.

The Report of the Finance Committee was received.

The annual appropriations for 1884 recommended therein
were passed.

And the meeting was adjourned.

A Note respecting the Correct Name of the Last Letter of the English Alpha-
bet. By Henry Phillips, Jr.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 21, 1883.)

A dislike of what seemed to be a growing evil, one which had greatly
increased within the past twenty years, the misnomer of the last letter of
the English alphabet, by which it was called gee instead of zed, led me to
investigate so far as the material was accessible to me into the origin of
this usage, and into the authorities by which it was countenanced.. I have

1888.] 331 (Phillips.

accordingly consulted various English Dictionaries, of which I subjoin a
list, from the year 1656 to the present time, with the following results,
Veit

1. That the name zee for zed (or dzeard,* as the letter was formerly termed),
seems to have made its appearance in the first edition of Webster’s Dic-
tionary of the English Language, published in 1828. But in the editions of
that work, published respectively in 1860, 1864 and 1869, and possibly
earlier, zed is given as the Hnglish name of this letter, while zee is the
American. It is noteworthy that Webster seems to have no authority for
his change of nomenclature, nor can I find in his published writings any
reason therefor, unless it be perhaps that some petty local peculiarity in
the small country towns of New England led him to believe that no other
pronunciation could be a correct one. In a Dictionary of the English
Language, “by an American Gentleman,’’ published in Burlington, New
Jersey, in 1818, the name is given as zed.

As conclusive of former usage, the passage in Lear, Act IT, Scene 2,

may be quoted ;
“Oh thou Zed! thou unnecessary letter,”

I have not been able to find in Ben. Johnson’s English Grammar any
usage bearing on this point.

2. The analogy with the similar letter 2 of the German alphabet, of
which the name is tseét, certainly deserves respect.

Freeman, in his impressions of the United States (p. 84), writes: “I
think [ see another instance of the schoolmaster in the name which in
some parts of America is given to the last letter of the alphabet. This in
New England is always zee; in the South, it is zed, while Pennsylvania
seems to halt between the two opinions. Now Zed is a very strange name,
* * * Does it come from the old form dzard * * which I was de-
lighted to find remembered in America. * * * But gee is clearly a
schoolmaster’s desire to get rid of the strange sounding zed, and to make 2
follow the analogy of (some) other letters. But this analogy is wrong; @
ought not to follow the analogy of 0b, d, t, but J, m, n, 7, and above all of
its brother 8, so that if we are not to have ged, the name should clearly be
CBs,

But there seems no necessity or reason why any change whatever
should take place in this respect.

3. From the forty-seven dictionaries which I have consulted I obtain the
following result :

NAIC Ofte Biter SVON AG BEC «ys c's dissin seme ener nee sls c 4 oN cub ne ecu anu
“* given as zee (none earlier than 1828, and all American)......... 3

F HOULOUIGD HOM PIVENAY Allis ca taivat evdu ube coves veawcule VobeasneO
Av

* Nares’ Orthoepy, tr, 188, London, 1792, speaks of the letter as izzard; than which,
however, he considers that the name zad would be “ more elegant and proper,”

Phillips.] 332

1656,
1678.
1691.
1720.
1736,
174%,
1755,
1757,
yi
1775.
1780.
1782,
1788,
1783,
1784.
1785,
1789,
1795,
1797.
1804,
1805.
1806,
1813.
1813,
1818,
1819,
1824,
1828,
1835.
1835,
1841,
1845,
1846.
1851.
1853,
1853.
1856,
1857.
1860.
1860,
1862,
1863.
1864,
1866,
1869,
1880,
1882,

This brief note is simply intended as a suggestion to call the matter to

LIST OF DICTIONARIES CONSULTED,

T. Bas

Phillips, World of Words,
Seweil, Dutch and English,
Phillips,

Bailey,

Junius,

Johnson,

Serenius, English and Swedish,
Skinner,

Ash,

Sheridan,

Cox,

Kendrick,

Barclay,

Nare’s Orthoepy,

Johnson,

Sheridan,

Ash,

Walker,

Jones,

Perry,

Johnson,

Barclay,

“An American Gentleman,”
Johnson,

Johnson,

Walker’s Rhyming Dictionary,
Webster, first edition,

Booth,

French, German and English,

Fleming and Tibbin, French and English,

Knowles,

Bolles, Phonographic Pronouncing,
Richardson,

Todd, Johnson and Walker,
Millhouse, Italian and English,
Ogilvie’s Imperial,

Nare’s Glossary,

Worcester,

Johnson,

Wilson, French and English,
Webster,

Grieb, German and English,
Webster,

Webster.

Skeat,

| Dec. 21,

not given. |
not given, ay
not given.
not given.
not given,
not given.
ned,
zed.
not given,
not given,
not given,
Zed,
not given,
not given,
zed.
not given,
not given,
zed,
zed.
zed,
not given.
zed,
not given,

Burlington, N. J., zed, oe

zed,
zed,
zed,
Zee,
not given,
zed,
zed,
not given,
Zee,
not given,
zed.
zed,
zed,
zed,

England, zed; in the U.S. zee,
London (Bohn), zed.
Reiff, Russian, French, German and English,

zed,
zed,
wed (also izzard).
zed,
zed,
not given,
not given.

the attention of those better qualified to consider it than myself.

Norr.—Since the foregoing went to press I have found in reading Tay-
lor’s History of the Alphabet (London, 1883), the following matter bear-

ing upon this subject, and confirmatory of my views :
“The name zed is a survival of the early tsadde. (Vol. II, p. 1387). * * *

1833,] 333 (Day.

Z% was the last introduced of the letters of the Roman alphabet. * * *
It crept into English during the fifteenth century from the French, and in
use is now pretty nearly restricted to foreign loan-words * * * ¢edilla
means little zed: zediglia is the diminutive for zetécula.”” p. 138.

The Microscopic. Hxamination of Timber with regard to its Strength. A
Jontribution from the Bi Kk. Price Botanical Laboratory of the University
of Pennsylwania. By Frank M. Day.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 21, 1883.)

The valuable paper of Dr. J. T. Rothrock upon “Some Microscopic
Distinctions between Good and Bad Timber of the Same Species,’’ re-
cently read before the American Philosophical Society, has opened a broad
field for original investigation. The question there suggested as to the
possibility of approximately determining the strength of timber by micro-
scopic examination (involving as it does the question of the ‘differences
in the strength of wood due to the molecular differences in the structure
of the fibre ’’) is one that can be answered only after the most extended
and carefully conducted investigation.

As long as we confine ourselves to the examination of various specimens
of the same species the task of distinguishing the good pieces from the
bad, and of roughly predicting the relative strains which they will resist,
is comparatively easy.*

Plate I showing transverse sections of two pieces of Rock Elm (Ulmus
racemosa Thomas), furnishes illustrations of the general differences be-
tween good and bad wood of the same species. The upper figure is a sec-
tion of the wood used by a well-known firm in their highest grade. of
hubs ; the lower isa section of wood which they declare to be practically
worthless, It is evident froma glance at these drawings that the good differs
from the bad, in 1st, The much smaller area occupied by ducts; 2d, The
smaller bore and consequently thicker walls of the woody fibres ; 3d, The
more compact arrange vent of the woody fibres, giving them a polygonal
rather than a circular outline; 4th, The much greater annual growth,
These are the elements which it is but reasonable to suppose would give
strength to the wood, They are further those which are found to do so
in the great majority of cases.

The strength of the cellulose of which the wood is composed, is, in va-
rious species and under various conditions, by no means the same. For
example, Buttonwood (Platanus occidentalus L.) rapidly loses the greater
part of its strength, by a natural process which the woodsmen call ‘‘doat-
ing,’’ the only indication of which isa bleaching of the tissues. Hence
any statements as to the strength of timber, made from an examination of
the structure alone are open to question.

* This it will be urged can be done by the practical eye without the aid of the

microscope, but it must be remembered that the entire investigation of the
Subject is, at its present stage, of theoretical rather than practical interest,

Day.] 334. [Dee, 21,

We are, however, able to leave this uncertain element out of consider-
ation when we turn our attention to the following experiments upon the
transverse strength of the coniferous woods, the results of which point to
an almost identical value for the strength element of the cellulose in the
several pieces tested. Each piece was exactly one-and-a-half inches
Square by two feet nine inches long, and rested upon rounded edges at a
distance of two feet six inches apart. The pressure was gradually applied
at a point half way between the supports, and the deflection was taken at
each hundred pounds.

Plate IL shows, side by side, transverse sections of three pieces thus
tested, The detail of the experiments are exhibited in the following table :

a) [83-2 aT.
‘ 8 4 Des eel o 1A.
Hs Efe | BEE Res
fal n | O¢ gn lee yim 4B
bie NAME OF Woop. oh| be | Sa ee es] cm ee
BE eo) 2 | o@ | Se lee) sm ¥o
2% Sb r ve Og |o™] He le
3 o on
fe ge; e | eo | ee 8'| as ea
= Ho| 5 | @ [AGIA | AE i
[ns In, jIn.| In, |In
.817| 2000 Broke, 84) .20) £165) 125
415) 1190! Broke.| 2.21 +43). 169} .088
+422 36] 6176) O71

the total number of fibres formed during the year, becoming greater the
greater the number of thickened fibres. Thus it is seen that in Z, by far
the strongest of the three pieces tested, the thick-walled fibres occupy
almost half the year’s growth, while in # they form a mere strip at the
end of the growth. In connection with this statement it may be well to
remark that the absolute breadth of the annual growth in the coniferous
woods does not seem to be as important an element in the problem of
strength as in the so-called ‘ hard-woods ’’ (Angiosperms). The reason of
this is the absence of the ducts which in the ‘hard woods”’ are formed,
as a rule, in the early part of the annual growth. After this the solid
wood is formed. Hence, the value in them, other things being equal, of
a large annual growth.

The ease with which the results of the tests upon the coniferous woods
are explained gives place to the greatest difficulty in the case of the hard
woods. Important factors in this case, and ones which we have not been
called upon to consider in the coniferous woods, are, Ist, the weakness due
to a greater or less abundance of ducts, and second, the strength added by
more or less highly developed medullary rays.* The following table con-
tains the results of eight experiments as to transverse strength made in
exactly the same manner as described in the previous case. The pieces of
timber were in all cases carefully selected and accurately dressed. They

*The medullary rays being much less conspicuous in the Coniferse,

ti

is

[Day.

NAME OF WOOD. |

s that might tend to vit

10n

t

Hickory (Carya porcina, Nutt.).........-..--

335

B |Hickory (Carya porcina, Nutt.).............-
D |White Oak (Quercus alba, L.).................

|White Oak (Quercus alba, 41.).-... 2... -5------

results

J ‘Chestnut (Castanea yesca, 11)... 22. -. = -=- se;

y

K |Tulip Poplar (Liriodendron Tulipifera, L.)......

3,]

| White Ash (Fraxinus Americana, L.)...........| |e15|1750
7 Red Ash (Fraxinus pubescens, Lam.) .......... | 669 1600.

: | .609 1600

.|.441 900
|.414 1200

|

est Strain,

tion of Greatest
Strain.

Greatest Strain,

Kiffect of Great

Detlec

Broke.

|_966 1400 No sig® Of 4 59 99).

Breaking.

-|-706|1500 Broke. 1.08 .40.0.

|-8% 1200 Ne sign Of 4 56 46.055

reaking.

Broke. 55

Broke. 94

Length of Woody Fibre.

Broke. 1.08 .29 .047
Broke. (1.28: .36).0

24 .053

xterior Diameter of
Woody Fibre.

1}

-000811

00057

000696

- 000699

-000904
-000888
00104

001176

Woody Fibre.
Ratio of Hxterior to In-

Interior Diameter of

terior Diameter,

23

sai
.000784 1.33 -
-000768 1.53

Average Annual Growth,

029.125

189 .047

048 .107

.333 .051

188;
Ne free from shakes and all other imperfec
ate the

* Stick bent to support.

Hence could bend no further.

Day.] 336 [Dee. 21,

Each of the numbers given in the columns headed, Length of Woody
Fibre, Exterior Diameter of Woody Fibre and Interior Diameter of
Woody Fibre is the ave rage of twenty micrometric measurements. The
numbers in the column headed Duet Area represent the area occupied by
ducts in one square inch of transverse section, Kach of the results there
given is the average of planimeter measurement of three camera Jucida
drawings taken at various parts of a section.

The results of the first four of the above experiments may be summed
up thus: A and D stiff hickory and white oak had small annual growth,
moderately large duct area and moderately thick fibre walls ; whereas B
and C, elastic hickory and white oak, had moderately large annual growth,
smal} duct area and thick fibre walls. Whether the general difference
between elastic and stiff timber is chiefly due to a difference in the char-
acter of the cellulose, or whether it is chiefly due to a difference of cell
structure is a question that would require a much more extended series of
experiments than the above to settle finally. The results given, though
too few in number to be of great value, point to the latter view of the
vase ; While the fact that the same piece of wood will, at various ages, ex-
hibit various degrees of elasticity, inclines us to the former, The experi-
ments G, J, Jand K show the difficulty of comparing woods of different
species. For instance, the pieces Gand Jhad almost the same annual
growth, duct area and fibre thickness. Yet they broke with strains of
respectively 1750 lbs. and 900 1bs. An observation. that brings out more
clearly than before the fact that differences of strength in woods of different
species are largely due to differences in the cellulose,

The measurements of length of woody fibre given in this and in the
table of the results of experiments upon the coniferous woods, furnish ex-
cellent proof of the correctness of the statement made by Dr. Rothrock,
that the relation between the absolute length of fibre and the strength of
timber is a very slight one,

The importance of the medullary ray as a strength giving element,
though suggested, has not, heretofore, been insisted upon with sufficient
positiveness. The following experiments, undertaken with reference to
this point, show that in woods such as Oak and Buttonwood, in which the
rays are highly developed, a large part of the strength is due to their
presence. Irom cubes of wood, the edges of which measured six inches,
plates six inches square and one inch thick were cut in a direction trans-
verse to the woody fibres. From these, pieces of a Shape suitable for
testing in a cement testing machine were cut, in such a manner that half
of the pieces had ‘he medullary rays running in the’ direction in which
the tension was applied, and half of them in a direction perpendicular to
this. In each the area subject to strain was one square inch. The result
gives, of course, the lateral adhesion of the fibres, with and without the
strength added by the medullary rays.

4

ut

“k

et

d3T (Day.

1883.)
‘ | Red Oak
Live Oak, | nied
Bs ee ae +, \\(probably either @.
(Quercus virens, Ait) rubra or Q. palustris.)
|
Lbs. | Lbs.
The five pieces tested with 1265 440
900 | 490
the rays running in the direc- 1250 | 480
960 | 425
tion of the tension broke at. . 1225 ATO
AYVG@THZO. s ne. 00s 1120 | 461
The five pieces tested with 500 245
the rays running perpendicu- ce a
es ee a OE 4 55
lar to the direction of tension 590 | 190
DPORG: Btiiet NT sete ste ius 680 | 160
Average. ssn sed. 592 | 189

The surprising fact will be observed that in the Live Oak the force re-
quired to overcome the lateral adhesion of the fibres when reinforced by
medullary rays is almost, and in the Red Oak more than twice that re-
quired when not so reinforced, Similar experiments upon Buttonwood
(Platanus occidentalis, L.) would probably show an equal, if not greater,
difference, While Hemlock, Pine, Tulip-Poplar or other woods with
weak rays, it is but reasonable to expect, would show but slight differences
in the two directions.

In view of the above results it is easy to see that resistance to splitting,

although usually ascribed to ‘crookedness of grain,’’ is also in a large
measure due to the binding action of the rays. Where, however, we
have both of these qualities present, we find a wood admirably adapted
for certain purposes, as for example the manufacture of hubs. Hence it
is that Rock Elm (Ulmus racemosa) and Black Gum or Tupelo (Nyssa
multiflora, Wang.), in both of which abundant rays are found coupled with
reat contortion of fibres, are much in demand by hub makers.
In Lignum Vite (Guatacum officinale) the crossing of the fibres of dif-
ferent layers is very apparent, and in a specimen of Black Gum, fibres
were found which deviated from the vertical as much as ten times their
breadth in their own length.

Plates III and LY are given as illustrations of the statement concerning
the resistance to splitting or wedging made above. ‘The upper half of
Plate III shows 4 transverse section of Buttonwood, enlarged 125 times.
The drawing is made from the wood of the butt of a tree which portion
presented such great resistance to wedging that it was finally reduced to

o
o

manageable size by the use of gunpowder, In it are seen the abundance

PROC, AMER, PHILOS. 800, XXI, 114.2Q. PRINTED FEBRUARY 1, 1884,

eps )
Day.] 338 {Dee, 21,

of ducts and great size of medullary ray characteristic of this wood.
Below it is placed a transverse section of Tulip-Poplar (same amplifica-
tion), a wood which splits as easily as Pine. In it the abundance of ducts
and weakness of medullary rays are shown. Plate IV gives the same
woods, with the same amplification in tangential section, thus cutting the
rays transversely and showing the contortion of the fibres in Buttonwood
and their straightness in Tulip-Poplar.

To Dr. J. T. Rothrock, for his kind assistance and advice during the
preparation of the present article, the writer wishes to express his sincerest,
thanks. Thanks are also due to Mr. Simmonds, of the University, for
his careful preparation of the specimens tested, and to Messrs. Riehlé
Bros., upon whose machines the work of testing was performed.

EXPLANATION OF ILLUSTRATIONS.

The drawings were all made by the aid of the camera lucida,
In Plate II the amplification is 75 Ciameters.
In Plate I, IIL and LV the amplification is 125 diameters.
Plate I, a, Ulmus racemosa. (Good.)

b, Ulmus racemosa. (Bad. )
Plate II, a, Pinus (sp. 2)

b, Abies Ounadensis.

6, Pinus Strobus.

Plate III, a, Platanus occidentalis, ) : (
ae eh ti . Transverse sections,
b, Liriodendron Tulipifera, |

Plate IV, a, Platanus occidentalis, ) A fi (
nit eve ae langential sections
b, Liriodendron Tulipifera, §

In all the illustrations the following lettering is used ;
W F—Woody Fibre.
D—Duct.

M R—Medullary Ray.

1883.] 339 (Day.

Good Rock Elin

y IOUS
COD OOU a Oam
aS RAIS
Meola
Yy oes,

mi

)

([Day.

341

1883, }

SO <A

=< — bi
LD
=

5

ie

"Oy WY

‘ ><] \
oR = =

\V, Nie Fullonwood.
g \\ J ee

ag
343 (Jan. 4, 1884.

Stated Meeting, January 4, 1884.
Present, 7 members.
President, Mr. Fraupy, in the Chair.

Donations for the Library were received from Captain
R. C. Temple, Allahabad; MM. August Berger and Fried.
Pressel, Ulm; Prof. Paul Albrecht, Brussels; the Geological
Cominehs lal Society, Bordeaux; the Geographical Society and
M. Luciano Cordeira, of Lisbon; the Revista Euskara; Revue
Politique; Mr. H. M. Stanley; Mr. W. Marriott; Mr. John
donnie: London Nature; Meteorological Society ; Royal
Astronomical Society, Victoria Institute; Kew Observatory ;
Royal Geological Society of Cornwall; Mr. F. B. Hough, of
Concord, New Hampshire; the Essex Institute; B. N. H.S
Science Record; Meteorological Shame ip ak New York ,
Philadelphia Library Company, Franklin Institute, Mr. Henry
Phillips, Jr., United States Fish Commission and United States
National Museum.

The death of Sven Nillson, at Lund, November 30, 1883
aged 96 years, 8 months, 22 days, was announced.

The death of General Thomas Leiper Kane, at Philadelphia,
December 26, 1883, aged 6L years, 11 months, was announced
by Mr. J. S. Price.

The death of General Andrew A. Humphreys, at Washing-
ton, December 27, 1888, aged 78 years, was announced by Mr.
Fraley, who was, on motion, authorized to select members of
the Society to prepare notices of General Kane and General
Humphreys.

Mr. Lesley offered to the inspection of the members a photo-
graphic print of one of Mr. George Simpson’s beautiful draw-
ings of Mr. Mansfield’s cannel co: al shale specimens, on which
was exhibited a nearly perfect specimen of Dolichopterus
Mansfieldi 0. i. Hall (see Proceedings American Philosophi-

cal Society, Volume XVI, page 621 1877), lying across a mass
of broken ferns and st ems, Papuan s, Neuropteris, Annularia,
Sigillaria, &. Twenty-five figures of Kurypterids, in whole or
in part, with enlargements of scales, &c., will be published by
the Second Geogr :phic: al Survey, with the three plates of simi-
a forms rom Warren county, ‘drawn and described by Mr. ¢
1. Beechet

344 (Jan. 4, 1884,

He exhibited also a quartz pebble, with coal adhering to
its sides, about the size of a goose egg, found in the floor of Mr.
Mansfield’s Cannel coal bed, at his mines near Cannelton, in
Beaver county, Pennsylvania. Four such had been found at
different times in the progress of mining this bed. Similar
finds have been made in other coal fields in America and
in Hurope. One very large rock of limestone in the body of
a coal bed in Fayette county, Pennsylvania, was reported by
Prof. J. J. Stevenson. Such events could only have taken
place beneath very slowly running water bearing along upland
trees with stones attached to their roots, and drop ying these
stones one by one into the marsh vegetation t through which
the water moved.

Mr. Lesley communicated a note, or suggestion, in mytho-
logical studies, respecting the original meaning of the animal
ideograph of the god Set.

Dr. Brinton, Mr. Phillips and Mr. Lesley were appointed ¢
Committee to examine the Mexican manuscripts belonging to
the Society, now on deposit with the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philade mr to report on the propriety of prepar-
ing any of them for publication, and with power to reclaim the
same.

Mr. Lesley was nominated Librarian.

The Report of the Judges of the Annual Hlection was read,
by which the following officers were declared duly elected for
the ensuing year, 1884:

President,
Frederick Fraley.
Vice- Presidents,
Eli K. Price, EH. Otis Kendall, Pliny H. Chase.
Secretaries,
Geo. F. Barker, Daniel G. Brinton, Henry Phillips, Jr.,
J. Pi Lesley:
Counsellors for three years,
Daniel G. Goodwin, W.S. W. Ruschenberger, Henry Winsor,
Wm. A. Incham.
Curators,
Geo. H. Horn, Charles H. Ames, Philip H. Law.
Treasurer,
J. Sergeant Price.

And the meeting was adjourned.

QAR
Jan, 4, 1884.) 345 (Brinton

A GRAMMAR OF THE CAKCHIQUEL LANGUAGE OF
GUATEMALA.

Translated from a MS. in the Library of the American Philosophical
Society, with an Introduction and additions,

By Danie, G. Brinron, A.M., M.D.,

One of the Secretaries of the Society.

COW Dats.

INTRODUCTION.

PAGE

SL) POO OWRCMTOMG MM INAON tuys Ceri cat lence selva od wu ee 847

S lt Histony OM UNG resent WOM re irti ls eevee ree vines cacy 849

§ III. Literature of the Cakchiquel Lamguage...0.../....... 0000. 350

© LV. Phonology onthe Oakoniquela sys iy series sos ven Si us ee cite 357
A GRAMMAR OF THE CAKCHIQUEL.

Craprem Ts) OF thes Nout y stydiecvael erin vee Geis ai creat wll 861

IPRSIGH SION OL INGUBES VN iwey Cues Wan Vea tue eer

On the Use"ot Ndi@etive Nou i au econ 363

CHAPTER IT.) OP Mier PRON OUne tn VGN Cail God scwiie is buleenuss 865

PALEATULY.B) ERMOMOUITTANS Wu usecbeisane iuidioniienet aun bane Pirie BOO

TOSSREBIVG EATGMOUNE Ni dani discs caus vces tose ket ows 366

DOMmOnstrathy GP TONOUNE (44s 1 +s sua yay vealviede erbe 369

UB OPV OUN HG Lamia eb visors tiweee i ast tans ei)

DASEEIBUUIVE! WiOTdR IW. ca veeuNNin cu Ws peed Galas 871

Cae vin TDL (OF TeV GROR iva: iss Ove ous SAGs SiN HOTU vey 872

UT CEN TUN cue VM ame UNG U RG ul cc ty Pee mgt sn 872

On the Conjugation of the Verbs................0+ 381

Active Verbs beginning with a Consunant.. 881

Active Verbs beginning with a Vowel...... 385

Neuter, Absolute and Passive Verbs....... 889

Formation of Absolute and Passive Verbs........ 889

HG DIMPELALVB a We niin wiveceemele ey dcongt cal ecw dail 390

The Optative, Subjunctive and Infinitive.......... 391

The Gerund and Supine.............. PRON Mksaieltighs 893

PROC, AMER. PHILOS, 800. xxI. 115. 2R. PRINTED APRIL 2, 1884

) ce
Brinton.| 346

(Jan, 4,

PAGE.
Cuaprer TY. On the Formation of Participles and Verbal Nouns. — 895
Verbal Nouns from Active and Absolute Verbs.... 895

Verbals with the prefix ah,........¢ yh atv ROD

VODA) OMAR I Ov Pie isceiyiey ch atee’y vialelain ws 895

VerbaleEmamg i YOM. ewer ics ves e 896

Verbal Srcmimt, ely oie ie cued vs We es) eel einie s 896

Verbals Omciig tm Gad, eee ea ieee elk aoe 896

ViGr Pals CN CIM IIE TOs givietie ae gee saws ecoiale t6 396

MVOVDEIS CUCU WL C7Un ihr Wi oneal te isierud hs 896

Verbrle Cree Im Gab iis sete w wee 6's 897

Verbele CHO TO OP Ubi en eee e's ce iar « 897

Verbals ending iO OF Uh. cece eee ees 897

Verbal Nouns from Passive Verbs........6+e.+54. 897

Vorb ledtchwwryviihiides sieve li sece nace sieleaias 397

VGPDAIB LE CM eels tack viel Wivivina'e cairn aie Wet ws 898

Verbals in ye.ccccseecereeccsencceceosnes 898

Verbale 10 O70 c es dese vee heiiak vad ae ne ven'e 898

Verbal Nouns from Neuter Verbs .....--..eee eres 398

Of Certain Pronouns...-.-.++ eer gidhe deaanowlec keen 899

Accusatives and Reciprocals.....++ i vanin vicars 899

.

Cuaprer V. Of the Composition and Derivation of Verbs...... 401
Derivation.of Active and Neuter Verbs.....+..++++ 401

Neuter Verbs ending in ¢ of more than one Syllable, 402

Frequentative Verbs....++-++++++ Lee eshdabstan Wines 408

Cuaprar VI. Of some Particles and AAVELDS. coe 0e sects eet nees 408

Of vi; ach; quereq@. The four verbs, el, apon,
kah, pe. Of can; na ; CAO OC udieens 403
SUPPLEMENT.

Comparison of Adjectives. ...-. Cree ene Weipa neon Kat Nr CSC 407
TritOrjectlOUe vweiriivivin sevens si tenes eleileitiacige ee swe yee s eas ste ty aT:
Adverbs..... Fi Vio elvele pve eboney Wie 8 o/¥ ep iules See He AEE Bi det Rardivanceiy OL
vin 408

Numerals....- HEREC re CO urd hk erg MRWidre OER NOT 8 er8 09

2
1831.) 347 (Brinton,

INTRODUCTION,

$I. The Cakchiquel Nation.

The Cakchiquel language was, and continues to be, spoken by the na-
tives in the vicinity of the city of Guatemala. It is a dialect of the Maya
group of languages, and is very closely related to the Kiche and Tzutuhil
dialects, and more remotely to the Chorti, Mam, Pokomam, Ixil, Pokon-
chi and Kekchi, all yet-extant in that part of Central America.

At the time of the Conquest, the Jakchiquels were divided into two
States under the senior and junior branches of the same reigning house.
The capital of the elder branch was called Putinamit, The City, par ea-
cellence, or Ivimehe, the name of a tree, a species of Brosimium, fam. Arto-
carpeacee, but it received from the Aztec invaders the name Tecpan
Guatemala, The Royal House of Guatemala, by which it is usually en-
tered on modern maps. The junior branch had its seat at Zolola, sit-
uate ona lofty summit north of Lake Atitlan, a site called by
the Aztecs, Tecpun Atitlan, the Royal House of Atitlan.* The whole of
this district is elevated, and the climate temperate; but there were also a
few Cakchiquel colonies in. the hot lands near the Pacific Coast, as at Patu-
lul, Cozumelguapam (celebrated for the inscribed slabs lately discovered
there) and other places. Here they were in immediate contact with the
Pipiles, of Aztec descent, and speaking a slightly corrupted Nahuatl
dialect.

As the city of Guatemala was founded in the midst of a Cakchiquel-
Speaking population, this language early attracted the attention of the
missionaries. The first bishop, Francisco Marroquin, appointed to the See
in 1584, was himself an earnest student of the tongue, and secured the
publication of a doctrinal work in it. When in 1678 the University of
Guatemala was formally founded, a chair of the Cakchiquel language was
created, the first occupant of which was Fr. José Senoyo, a Dominican.
In 1743 Guatemala was raised to the dignity of an Archbishopric, and
thereafter it was customary to call the Cakchiquel “the metropolitan
tongue,”’ la lengua metropolitana, or la lengua Guatemalteca. It was regu-
larly taught in the University until the dissolution of the political depend-
ence of Guatemala on the Spanish Crown (1822), since which event, I be:

*¥For the full explanation of these and other Nahuatl names found in Guate-
mala, see Buschmann, Ueber die Aztekischen Orisnamen, ?°VIIT,

348 [Jan. 4,

Brinton.]

lieve, no Professor of Cakchiquel has been appointed, and no systematic
instruction given in the tongue,

The meaning of the name Cakchiquel is obscure. A passage in Herrera
gives it the translation, ‘eagle,’ with the explanation that it was the
name of the site on which the city of Guatemala was founded, and was
derived from the custom of the war chief of that nation carrying an eagle
asa banner.* The dictionaries, however, do not support this derivation.
Evidently Herrera’s informant took the name from cakia, the ara or gua-
camaya, Trogon splendens, a bird of beautiful plumage, held sacred by
most of the Central American tribes. But the derivation is too violent.

The root cak means ‘‘red,’’ or more correctly, something red; cht, is
mouth, literally and metaphorically, hence speech, language, dialect ; and
in such proper names as Pokonchi, Kakchi, etc., it apparently has this lat-
ter signification, as the dictionaries translate Oakchiquelehi by ‘the Cak-
chiquel language.’’ The last syllable quel, has been translated ‘stone,’
though I do not find this form in the dictionaries, but only the allied ones,
qual, a term applied to all precious and supposed medicinal or sacred
stones, such as were used for amulets, and qgeley, brick, a connection
strengthened by the adoption by some writers of the form Oakchigel.t
Dr. Berendt suggested that the three syllables could thus be fairly trans-
lated, ‘‘The Red Mouth of the Rock,’’ or mountain ; the reference being
to the active volcanoes whose fiery outbursts have so often desolated that
region, and which we know were regarded and worshiped with supersti-
tious veneration.

The natives, however, derived their name from a mythical tree, the caka
chee, or red tree, which they brought with them from Tullan, their an-
cient home beyond the sea. This is expressed in the following sentence
from the Annals of Xahila :

“Xa ka hun chi caka chee ka qhamey ok xoh pe xi qo ka qama pe chu
chi Tullan, quereqa ka binaam vi Cakchiquel vinak.”’

The Oakachee is now the name of one of the dye woods which grow in
Guatemala.

T have said the language was called Oakehiquelchi, and they spoke ot

*«“Ta, ciudad de Santiago de Guatemala, culo sitio llamé Cachequil, que sig-
nifica Aguila, porque el General de esta Nacion, quando salia & la Guerra, lleva-
ba un Aguila por Penacho, ete.” Herrera, Descripcion de las Indias Occidentales ,
Cap. XII.

+The anonymous dictionary of the Cakchiquel, lately in the possession of Mr.
E. G. Squier, usually gives this form.

349 (Brinton.

1884.)

themselves as ahcakchiquele, but generally by the simpler term Oakeht-

queles.
Il. History of the Present Work.

The present Grammar of the Cakchiquel is the translation of a portion
of a Spanish manuscript presented to the Library of the American Philo-
sophical Society in 1836, by Sefior Mariano Galvez, then Governor of
Guatemala, and obtained, it would appear, from the library of one of the
religious houses. I have described this MS. in a previous publication, and
will transcribe what I have there written :

“The next work is a small quarto of 109 leaves. Unfortunately, the first
leaf with the general title is missing. The top of the second leaf com-
mences in the midst of a sentence in a Doctrina Christiana in Cakchiquel.
This covers ten leaves, and is followed by two leaves of ‘Preguntas de la
Doctrina,’ all in Cakchiquel. Next comes a ‘Confessionario breve en
Jengua Cakchiquel.’ The Spanish translation of each question and answer
is also given.,

“After the Confessionario are three leaves, unnumbered and blank, ex-
cept that on the recto of the second isa Latin Prayer to the Virgin, diffl-
cult to decipher.

“‘On the recto of the next leaf is the following :

«<«Arte || de la lengua cak || chiquel.’

“Tt is written in a clear small hand, covers fifty-four pages, with an
average of thirty lines to the page, sometimes with one column, some-
times with two, and closes with the colophon ;

“«Martes & 24 de Junio de 1692 afios dia del Nacimiento de 8. Juan
Baptista se acavo el traslado de oragiones y Arte en Kakchiquel.’

“From the close of this to the 96th leaf there is another series of doc-
trinal questions in Cakchiquel.

“Then follows another ‘Confessionario breve en lengua castellana y
eakchiquel,’ 12 pages in length, differing considerably from the previous
one. The rest of the volume is taken up with ‘Platicas,’ short discourses
on religious subjects. * * The characters of Parra are employed in all
the divisions of the book, and the writing is generally quite legible.

“There is no hint throughout where the original was written nor by
whom. * * * The linguistic value of the Arte is considerable.’’*

As no part of the collection presented to the Society by President

* A Notice of Some Manuscripts in Central American Languages, by Daniel G.
Brinton, American Journal of Science and Arts, March, 1869.

Brinton,]

(Jan. 4,

Galvez, has ever been published, it was resolved at a meeting toward the

close of 1888 to have this short grammar translated and printed, and the
task was referred to me.

A. close examination of the MS. showed that the copyist had not been
always accurate, sometimes failing in a congistent orthography, and once
or twice having manifestly neglected the observance of the proper order of
the original. Where there was no doubt about such negligence, it has
been corrected in the translation ; but elsewhere the original has been
adhered to, even when another disposition of the subject seemed prefer-
able to the translator,

Fortunately, the exhibition of the language could be rendered more sat,-
isfactory by the aid of two manuscript grammars in my own library. One
of these is that of Fray Benito de Villacafias, a Dominican who died at
the Convent of Guatemala in 1610, at the age of 73 years, and who for
more than thirty years had been a missionary among the Cakchiquels. His
knowledge of the language, therefore, dated back to the first century of
the Conquest, and his works represent it in its primitive form. The second
Grammar is by Fray Estevan Torresano, and was written shortly after the

publication in 1758 of the Cakchiquel Grammar of P. Ildefonso Joseph

Flores, and with the especial object of improving and correcting that un-

necessarily complicated and ill-arranged book. Torresano’s is, I believe,
the latest grammar of the Cakchiquel which has been composed, as that
of Villacafias is the earliest now in existence, and they therefore offered
particularly useful aids in this undertaking.

All these grammars take as their plan that of the Latin or Spanish lan-
guages, and apply it to this American dialect. To scientific linguists it is
needless to say that this method is quite erroneous, and that it forces
American tongues into a form wholly uncongenial to their spirit, But it
would have been impossible to have adopted any better system, and at the
same time to have maintained the semblance of a translation. Therefore,
I have confined myself to an obedience of the plan chosen by the authors
I had to follow, trusting that the material furnished for the study of the
language will be sufficient to allow the linguist to complete a scheme of
its organization and to arrange its elements in accordance with the de-
mands of modern science,

Ill. Literature of the Cakchiquel Language.

The Maya group of languages, of which, as T have said, the Cakchiquel

isa member, has several points of peculiar interest. It was the linguistic

icq
1884.) 351 (Brinton.

expression of one of the most cultivated indigenous races on the continent ;
it was, and still is, maintained with a singular tenacity ; it is largely
composed of monosyllabic or dissyllabic roots ; and its grammatical con-
struction presents a marked contrast to that of its near neighbor, the Na-
huatl (Aztec), and still greater to the native tongues of the United States
with which we are most familiar, the Algonkin, Iroquois, Dakota, Musko-
ki, Cherokee, etc., by its very much more pronounced analytic tendency.
The latter trait prevails through all its dialects, though more obviously in
some than in others. Especially for the latter reason its examination is
important to students of languages, as indicating the feeble development

of polysynthesis in an American tongue.

Moreover, the Cakchiquel has been, as I have above intimated, one of
the most thoroughly studied of native languages. There isa large body
of theological literature extant in it, and several semi-historical works by
native writers. Very little of this has been printed. So far as I know the

following memoranda show all that has been put to press.

1556. According to Remesal, Historia de Ohiapa y Guatemala (Lib.
III, Cap. VII), there was printed at Mexico in this year a Doctrina Chris-
tiana, in ‘‘the Utlateca language commonly called the Quiche,’’ by order
of the first Bishop of Guatemala, Fray Francisco Marroquin. Remesal
adds, ‘‘although the title of the book sets forth that the work was accom-
plished with the aid of the friars Juan de Torres, and Pedro de Santos
(read, Betanzos), of the Franciscan and Dominican orders respectively,
yet this was owing to the humility of the Bishop, who could readily
write in the native tongue without their aid, but who was anxious to have
the terms used in the translation satisfactory to both orders.’’

Although no copy of this edition is known to exist, I have no doubt
that Remesal was in error when he said that the above work was in the
Utlateca or Kiche dialect, Elsewhere he himself says it was in ‘the lan-

’

guage of the country’’ (la lengua de la tierra), which, with reference to
Guatemala, would undoubtedly mean Cakchiquel. But the most conclu-
sive evidence is the following title from a work, evidently another edition

of the above :

1724, Doctrina Christiana en lengua Guatemalteca: Ordenada por el
Reverendissimo Sefior Don Francisco Marroquin primer Obispo de Guate-
mala, y del Consejo de su Magistad, y con parecer de los interpretes de

Brinton.] 352 (Jan. 4,

|
)
las Religiones del Sefior Santo Domingo y §S. Francisco: Frai Juan de |
Torres y Frai Pedro de Betanzos. |

Fronting the above : P

Christianoil tzih pa Cakchiquel, qhabal, relegan ahau Obispo Francisco
Marroquin ; nabei Obispo Cakchiquel, ru poponel Emperador. Qui hu-
nam vach erah cakchiquel chi Santo Domingo Santo Francisco, Padre
Frai Juan de Torres, Frai Pedro de Betangos.

Colophon:

En Guatemala con licencia de los Superiores, por el B. Antonio Velasco,
1724.

The volume is small 4to, 82 unnumbered leaves, the first 80 in two col-
umns, Spanish in the first, Cakchiquel in the second. The 1st and 2d leaves

”

contain a ‘‘Prologo’’ in two columns, Spanish and Latin; leaves 31 and

82 contain a Declaration of Faith, Act of Contrition, and a Prayer, all in

one column and in Cakchiquel only. |
The only copy known of this work is in a private collection in Guate- .

mala, and the description given above is from Dr. C. H. Berendt’s notes, a

taken from the book itself. It is not mentioned by any of the bibli-

ographers, I think the title leaves no doubt but that it is a reprint of the

Doctrina referred to by Remesal, and that he was in error in speaking of

i) it as in the Kiche.

1753. Arte de la Lengua Metropolitana del Reyno Cakchiquel 6 Guate-
malico, con un Paralelo de las Lenguas Metropolitanas de los Reynos
Kiché, Cakchiquel, y Zutuhil, que hoy integran el Reyno de Guatemala.
Compuesto por el P, IF’. Ildefonso Joseph Flores, hijo de la Santa Provin-
cia del Dulcissimo Nombre de Jesus de Guatemala, de la Regular Obser-
vancia de N. Seraphico P. 8. Francisco, Ex-lector de Phylosophia, Predi-
cador, y Cura Doctrinero por el real Patronato del Pueblo de Santa Maria
de Jesus, En Guatemala, por Sebastian de Arebalo, afio de 1758. Small
4to, pp. 387.

I take the above title from Squier’s Monograph of Authors who have writ-

ten on the Languages of Central America (New York, 1861). The work

has now become very scarce, although about half a dozen copies are known

to be extant in private hands.

1840. M. Ternaux-Compans in his Vocabulatres des Pricipales Langues
du Mewxique, published in the Mowvelles Annales des Voyages, Tome IV,
printed about 500 words of the Cakchiquel, taken from an anonymous

1884,] 353 [Brinton,

MS. dictionary in the National Library, Paris, and accommodated to the
French orthography.

1857, Extracts. in the original with a French translation from the
‘‘Manuscript Cakchiquel ou Memorial de Tecpan-Atitlan’”’ in Brasseur
de Bourbourg, ZZistoire des Nations Civilisées du Meaique et de V Amérique-
Centrale (Paris, 8vo). Two pages, in two columns, French and Cakchiquel.
The Abbé frequently referred to this document and considered it, with
reason, one of the most important extant on the pre-Columbian history of
America as well as for its great linguistic value. It was the work of a
native Cakchiquel noble, Francisco Ernantez Xahila, who wrote most of
it about 1570, and after his death it was continued by a relative, Francisco
Gebuta Queh. "

1862. Cartilla Breve traducida en Lengua Quiche y Cakchiquel al pié
de Ja Letra para el uso de los Cristianos Indigenas. 2 pp. Pp. VII and
VIII of the Grammaire de la Langue Quichée, by the Abbé Brasseur de
Bourbourg (Paris, 8vo, 1862). The orthography is brought into con-
formity to French types. The Abbé does not give the origin of this piece.
The same volume contains a comparison of the three dialects, Kiche, Cak-
chiquel and Tzutuhil, and a Vocabulary of Roots common to the three,
both derived from the works of Father Francisco Ximenez.

With the exception of a few unimportant vocabularies, by Galindo,
Scherzer, and others, and the discussion of the Cakchiquel in general
works on language, such as those of Hervas, Pimentel, Lucien Adam,
etc., the above includes all the printed material relating to the tongue
known to me.*

I should not omit, however, to mention the interesting studies in com-
parative grammar, which have been made with reference to it and its
allied dialects by M. Hyacinthe de Charencey. His observations are based
on a critical and conscientious analysis of the hitherto accessible materials,
and are aided by an extensive acquaintance with the idioms of the Old
World. The articles he has published, and which I name in a note, throw
more light on the structure and relations of the whole group of languages

* Since the above was in type, I have received Dr, Otto Stoll’s excellent mono-
graph, Zur Hthnographie der Republik Guatemala (Zurich, 1884), in which, pp. 129-
158, he gives a grammatical sketch of the modern Cakchiquel as spoken in the
vicinity of San Juan Sacatapequez. He also adds many words and phrases in
the tongue,

PROO, AMER. PHILOS. 800. Xxt. 115. 28. PRINTED APRIL 2, 1884.

Brinton. ] 354 (Jan, 4,

to which the Cakchiquel belongs, than the production of any other philol-
ogist whose writings I have met. Those who would use the present gram-
mar to the best advantage should acquaint themselves with these essays of
M. de Charencey,*

The following alphabetic list contains a brief reference to all the writers

and works which have been produced in Guatemala in or upon this tongue :

ALARCON, BALTASAR DE, Flourished 1600.
Franciscan. ollected a volume of sermons written in Cakchiquel by

various members of his order. In the Brasseur collection.

Atonzo, JUAN. Flourished about 1550.

Native of Guatemala (?). Dominican. Composed a Calepino or Dic-
tionary of the Cakchiquel, yet extant.
ANGEL, Fr. About 1700,

Franciscan, A Grammar and Dictionary attributed to him were in the

Brasseur collection.

Beranzos, Pepro pr. + 1570,
Native of Spain. Franciscan. Composed a Grammar and. Vocabulary
of the Cakchiquel, and prepared, assisted by Juan de Torres, the Doctrina

srinted at Mexico 1556, and Guatemala, 1724, described above.
,

Corrau, Fruren Ruiz. +1636.
Native of Guatemala. Prepared a Grammar and Vocabulary of the

Cakchiquel for the use of the priests.

Coro, Tomas. Franciscan, 17th century.

Native of Guatemala. He is the author of Vocabulario de la Lengua
Cakchiquel vel Guatemalteca * * Hn que se contienen todos los modos y
frases elegantes con que los Naturales la hablan, folio, 476 leaves, 2 cols.
MSS. in the library of the American Philosophical Society. It is complete

down to the word vendible, but the last few leaves are missing.

* Sur les lois phonétiques dans les idiomes de la famille Maya-Quiché.

Sur le pronom personnel dans tes idiomes de la famille Maya- Quiché, |

Sur le systéme de numération chez lez peuples de la famille Maya- Quiché.

Recherches sur les noms de nombres cardinauax dans la famille Maya- Quiché,

Sur la langue dite Mame ou Zaklo-pakap.

These are included in Mélanges de Philologie et de Paleographie Américaines par
le Comte de Charencey, Paris, Ernest Leroux, 1883, except the last two, which are
later and separate publications. I am glad to add that we may expect shortly
from the same competent hand a thorough analysis of the verb in this lin

guistic group.

1884,] Ore (Brinton.

DELGRADO, DAMIAN.

Order of Preachers. Prepared a Grammar and. Dictionary of the Cak-
chiquel.
Friores, Inppronso Josmpn. +1772.

Native of Guatemala. Franciscan; Professor of Cakchiquel in the
University of Guatemala. Wrote the only published Grammar of the

tongue, which has already been described.

tUZMAN, PANTALEON DE. Flourished 1700.

Order of Preachers. Cura of Santa Maria de Jesus Pache. Wrote a
Thesaurus Verborum and a Doctrina. A copy of these is in my possession.
HILLON, JOAN DR.

Dominican. ‘Maestro gravissimo yemui gran lengua.’’ Coto. His

works are not known.

Tronpo, JUAN FRANCISCO.
Native of. Guatemala. Franciscan. Wrote in Cakchiquel an Haposicion

del Simbolo de San Atanasio.

MAuponapo, Francisco, Flourished 1640,

This minorite friar wrote a Ramillete, manual para los Indios sobre la
Doctrina Christiana, and an Haplicacion de la Doctrina Christiana, copies
of both of which, made in 1748, are in the library of the American Philo-
sophical Society, in folio, He is frequently quoted by Coto for the purity
of his style.

Marroquin, Francisco. +1568.

Native of Spain. Franciscan. Bishop of Guatemala, 1538 to 1563,
Was the first to reduce to writing the Kiche language. Wrote a Cakchi-
quel Grammar, and ordered the preparation of a Doctrina in that tongue
by the Brothers Betanzos and Torres. See above.

Menpoza, Juan. +1619.

Native of Mexico. Franciscan. Wrote a Doctrina, Lives of the Saints,
and Doctrinal Sermons in Cakchiquel.
OrpoNnz, Dinao, 1490-1607 (2).

Born in Spain. Franciscan. Said to have been the first to reduce the
Cakchiquel to writing. Composed in it a Doctrina and a number of ser-
mons.

Parra, FRANCISCO DE. +1560,
Native of Spain. Franciscan. Devised the five peculiar characters

Brinton.) 356 [Jan. 4,

of the Cakchiquel alphabet, and composed a trilingual vocabulary of
Kiche, Cakchiquel and Tzutuhil,

Paz, Atonzo. +1610.
Native of Guatemala, Franciscan. Taught Cakchiquel and wrote in it
a work entitled Scala Oali, frequently quoted by Coto as an authority.

Quru, Francisco Gmsura, 1580.
A native Cakchiquel. Wrote a continuation of the Annals of Xahila, q. v.

RODRIGUEZ, JUAN.
Native of Spain. Franciscan, Composed a Grammar and Vocabulary
of the Cakchiquel.

Sancnpo, FRANCISCO,

Native of Chiapas. Franciscan. Professor of native languages in the
University of Guatemala. Wrote a Grammar and Dictionary of the Cak-
chiquel.

Saz, ANTONIO.

Native of Chiapas. Franciscan. Wrote Sermons in Cakchiquel and an
improved Grammar called Manual en la “Lengua. Also Manual para los
Casados. His works are often quoted by Coto as models of style.

Soromayor, Pzpro. + 1631.
Native of Guatemala. Franciscan. Wrote a Grammar, Vocabulary

and Sermons in Cakchiquel.

Torres, JUAN DE. Flourished about 1550,

Native of Spain. Dominican. Assisted by Pedron de Betanzos, he pre-
pared, by order of Bishop Marroquin, the Doctrina in Cakchiquel, subse-
quently printed,

TorRESANO, Estrvan. Flourished 1750,
Native of Guatemala. Wrote an improved Grammar of the Cakchiquel,
described above. A copy is in the national library of France, and another

in my collection.

Varna, Francisco, Flourished 1600.

Native of Spain. Franciscan. Wrote a Oalepino or Dictionary of Cak-
chiquel, a copy of which, made in 1699, by Fray Francisco Geron, is in the
library of the American Philosophical Society. Squier in his Monograph
erroneously gives his name as Varela. The volume is small 4to, 239

1884, ] 357 [Brinton.

leaves in all, closely written, and gives the translation of about 4000 Cak-

chiquel words.

Vico, Domineo. + 1555.

Native of Spain. Order of Preachers. Composed a Grammar and
Vocabulary of the Cakchiquel, and in it some sacred poems, and the cele-
brated Theologia Indorum. A copy of the latter is in the library of the
American Philosophical Society.

VILLACANAS, BentTO DE. + 1610.
Native of Spain. Dominican. Wrote a Grammar and Dictionary, both

preserved, and copies of both are in my collection.

ViiitEaas, ANTONIO PRimTO DE. 17th century.

Commissary of the Holy Office. For thirty years beneficiado of Matza-
tenango. Thoroughly versed in Kiche. Wrote Zratado sobre el Baile
Lotetun. Coto.

XAHILA, FRANCISCO ERNANTEZ ARANA. {15(?).

A native writer. Composed the Annals of his nation, the so-called Me-
morial de Tecpan-Atitian. Copy in the Brasseur collection and another in
mine,

XimMENES, FRANcrsco. Flourished 1710,

Native of Spain. Dominican. Wrote a Catechism and Confessionario
in Cakchiquel, and a Comparative Grammar of the three dialects, printed
by Brasseur de Bourbourg. See above.

To the above should be added various anonymous productions and
those whose authors are unknown. Among the last mentioned is the
work now printed, to the authorship of which I have obtained no clue.

In the National Library at Paris there isa fine 4to MS., of 202 pp., in
Cakchiquel, dated 1558, said to be a translation of the Pentateuch (?).
That library also possesses an anonymous Vocabulario en lengua Castel-
lata y Guatemalteca, a recent copy of a much older work.

I have in my library a Calendario de los Indios de Guatemala, 1685, in
Cakchiquel, a copy of an original in the city of Guatemala, and I have
heard of other written calendars in various parts of that country.

§ IV. Phonology of the Cakchiquel.

The Spanish missionaries complained of the idioms of Guatemala as ex-
cessively rough and guttural, con asperisima pronunciacion gutural, as the

Brinton.] 358 [Jan. 4,

historian Juarros says.* Nor do they seem to impress recent travelers of
other nations more agreeably. One of the latest of these, an Englishman,
writes : ‘‘When an Indian speaks, it is always in a high, unmusical tone ;
the language is hideous, and sounds like a person speaking without any
roof to his mouth.’’+

In the present work, as in most that have been written in or upon the Cak-
chiquel, the phonetic basis is the Spanish alphabet. Of that alphabet the
following letters are used with their Spanish values, a, b, c, ¢, ¢, i, 1, m, n,
Oy Dy Gy Ty’ ty Ys Br

The following are not employed :

Gy hy Jy By bby. Mey

The following are introduced, but with sounds differing from the
Spanish ;

h. This is always a decided rough breathing or forcible expiration, like
the Spanish j, or the strong English h ; except when it follows c or q when
it is pronounced as in the Spanish cha, che, &e,

k. This has never the sound of ¢, but is arough palatal, the mouth being
opened, and the tongue placed midway, between the upper and lower
walls of the oral cavity, while the sound is forcibly expelled.

». This letter whether as a consonant (v) or a vowel (wz) is pronounced
separately, except when it is doubled as in vwh (wuh), book or paper, when
the double vowel is very closely akin to the English w. The Spanish
writers are by no means consistent in their orthography of the Cakchiquel,
in distinguishing the vowel » and the consonant 0.

‘a. In Cakchiquel and its associated dialects, this letter represents the
sound of sh in the English words she, shove, etc. It is of very frequent
occurrence in all of them.

Besides the above, there are five sounds occurring in the Cakchiquel,
Kiche and Tzutuhil, for which five special characters were invented or
rathér adopted by the early missionary Francisco de la Parra, who died
in Guatemala in 1560. They are the following:

4464 6 %

«He adds, “ y que con solo pronunciar con mas 6 menos fuerza las palabras mu-
dan de significado.”’ Compendio de la Historia de la Ciudad de Guatemala. Per
el Pr. Don Domingo Juarros, Tomo II, p. 36 (2d ed, Guatemala, 1857),

+ Across Central America. By J.W. Boddam-Whetham, p. 264 (London, 1877).
The particular dialect he refers to is the Kekchi of Coban in Vera Paz.

€
1884, 5 (Brinton.

The origin and phonetic value of these are as follows;
This is called the tres¢llo, from its shape, it being an old form of
rd the figure three, reversed, thus, g. It is the only true guttural in
‘the language being pronounced forcibly from the throat, with a
trilling sound (castaneteando).
¥rom its shape this is called the ewatrillo, Parra having adopted for
it an old form of the figure 4. It is a trilled palatal between a hard
¢ and k,

aN

The name applied to this is the ewatrillo con coma, or the 4 with a

5 comma, It is pronounced somewhat like the ¢ with the cedilla, (oh

aN

only more quickly and with greater foree—ds ordz.
This resembles the ‘4 with a comma,’’ but is descibed as softer,

the tongue being brought into contact with the teeth.

] A compound sound produced by combining the quatrillo with
4 3 a forcible aspirate is represented by this sign. @

Naturally, no description in words can convey any correct notion ot
these sounds. To learn them, one must hear them spoken by those to the
manner born.

Unfortunately, there is no uniformity about the use of Parra’s signs
among the writers in Cakchiquel. Of the considerable number of
Cakchiquel. MSS. I have examined, I find scarcely two alike in this
respect. Most of them use the ¢resdilo and the cwatriilo ; some discard all
of them; and but few fully carry out the scheme he suggested. The
writers differed in nicety of ear, and the same word occurs written in more
than one way.

In the printed works no special type has been obtained to imitate these
characters. I have some recent publications from Guatemala in the Kiche
dialect where the figure three reversed, g, and the figure 4, are employed
in the type to represent the tresillo and cuatrillo.* Brasseur used a g, and
introduced hyphens and apostrophes in his editions of Kiche writings, but
these were all foreign to his original manuscripts, and cannot therefore be
approved by exact scholarship.

I think there are sound objections to using Arabic numerals to express

*T refer to some songs, etc., in Kiche, published in Hl Federal Indiano, Quin-
cenario de antiguedades hist6ricas, costumbres indigenas i jeneralidades, published
at Totonicapam, 1888, by the eminent Guatemalan linguist and antiquary,
Sefior Don Manuel G, Elgueta.

Brinton.] 360 (Jan, 4,

phonetic elements (though I am aware it has obtained in books printed in
Iroquois), and I agree with those who advocate employing rather the
Buropean alphabets with diacritical marks. In the present work, there-
fore, I have concluded to adopt for the tresillo the somewhat similar Greek
sigma 3; and for the cuatrillo the full-faced q this having, indeed, the
authority of Varea in his Oalepino and also of the native writers, Xahila
and Queh, who use a modification of this letter for the cuatrillo of Parra,
The cuatrillo con coma is then readily represented by a full-faced q, with
a comma, and thus the necessary phonetic distinctions are observed)
without going beyond the resources of an ordinary printing office, and
without presenting to the reader figures or signs which he cannot possibly
connect with any sounds whatever.*

* On the general subject of the phonology of the dialects under consideration,
the student will find the best information in Dr, ©. H. Berendt’s essay, An
Analytical Alphabet for the Mexican and Central American Language, (New York,
1869, published by ‘the American Ethnological Soctety); and in Dr. Otto Stoll’s.
work, Zur Hthnographie der Republik Gautemala, pp. 40-44, The description
given in the text of the peculiar sounds is taken from that in Torresano’s.

Grammar,

}
}
|
|
}
;

4
1881. ] 361 [Brinton,

GRAMMAR OF THE CAKCHIQUEL LANGUAGE.
CHaprer I, Or tur Noun.
Declension of Nouns.

The first matter which it is necessary to discuss is the declen-
sion of the Noun. In this language there is no declension
of cases, as in Latin, as the singular serves for all cases of the
singular, and the plural for all cases of the plural. The follow-
ing rules will explain which nouns have plurals, and which
have not:

§{. Every noun which signifies an inanimate thing lacks the
plural; as abah, stone, che, wood, stick, vlewh, the earth.

“|. Every noun which signifies an animate thing without
other relation or any accident,* has no plural. Such are gene-
ric and specific names, as, chicop, animal or brute, tz¢quin, bird
queh, horse,t balam, tiger.

{{. An exception is yok, the female, which makes yaxoki,
the females, and dalam which is found with the plural balami,
the tigers,

4. It is to be noted with reference to these rules that when
such nouns are united to the primitive or derivative pronouns
of the plural number, then they have 4 plural, not in expres-
sion but in signification. For example, mani kochoch, we have
no houses; go kapop, we have mats.

4]. When any of the above nouns are united to the primi-
tive or derivative pronouns, in metaphorical expressions, prais-
ing or blaming, then they have the plural form; as, yx quere
axe, you are like hens; ya quere balami, you are like tigers.

4]. The nouns referred to in the above two rules also have a
plural by union with words signifying plurality, as q?, much,
conohel, all, and with the ordinal numbers; as qwtyache, many
sticks, oxtvay, three loaves, tzatcht vinak, many people.

* Here used in its metaphysical sense.

+ Properly ‘deer,’

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. Xx1. 115. 27, PRINTED APRIL 9, 1884,

362 (Jan. 4,

Brinton,]

“. Names of animate things which signify an accident of
nature as “the young,” “the old,” etc., or of fortune as “the
poor,” “the rich,” and also participial nouns form their plural
by adding to some a, and to others y; but which termination is
to be added must be taught by use. Examples, mama. the old
man, mamae, old men; qahol, the youth, qahola, youths;
aqual, the child, aquala, children; ala, the boy, alabon, boys;
Sopoh, the girl, Xopohiy, girls; Sinom,rich, Yinoma, rich people ;
meba, poor, mebat, poor people.

“. Nouns ending in » or m form their plural in a; as ahtt-
con, the owner of a cacao plantation, plural, ahticona ; ahtz-
com, a tailor, plural, ahtzigoma.

{. Participial nouns ending in a form their plural by adding
y; as ahtzeola, the rower, ahtzeolay, the rowers ; ahloXola, the
buyer, ahloSolay, the buyers; ahpitzola, he who makes works
in feathers, ahpitzolay feather-workers. There are some adjec-
tive nouns which have a plural form, as nim, great, plural,
nimak ; chutim, small, plural, chutik. To express that a road
is lofty or extended, one would say in the singular naht, large
or extended or distant, and in the plural nahtih ; nima ya, a
great river; chuti ya, a small river or small rivers.

This particle he or e added to the noun forms a plural, as,
zah he qui Su, they have white clothing.

The Grammars of Villacafias and Torresano give some farther particu-
lars of plural forms. The general rule is that nouns denoting inanimate
objects have no plurals, and those denoting animate objects are pluralized
either by the terminations @ or ¢ (= y), or by the use of words conveying
plurality. Of the latter the most common is he or e, which is simply the
plural demonstrative pronoun, these or those. This pronoun is also in-
serted even when the noun has the plural termination, as Xe be he ahq’-
aki chi cochoch, the plasterers went to their houses, It carries with it a
specific and definite meaning, and is omitted even with animate nouns
without plural forms when these are employed in a general sense. Torre-
sano shows this by the following two examples: conohel he nugqahol we be
pa caman, all my sons have gone to the village corn field ; but, inulefinitely,
ronohel vinak we be pa camah, all the people have gone to work,

There are also a number of nouns signifying animate objects which are
used absolutely, without the pronominal prefixes, and which may be plu-
ralized by prefixing the ¢, Of these are tata, tataatz, or tataixel, the father,
not stating whose, qhol, qaolata or qaolawel, the son, not stating whose,

1884.] 363 (Brinton,

hi, hiate, or hiawel, the son-in-law. These approximate to verbal forms,
and appear to be confined to nouns indicating family affinity.

Abstract nouns may be constructed by adding the termination a to the
concrete. They do not form plurals, but contain the notion of plurality.
Thus, nw tzam, is ‘my nose,’’ but tzamah, is “the nose,’’ without. refer-
ence to person, So 2a, hand, nw Za, my hand, Sabah, the hand, which
alsomeans the two hands, as they are always associated in nature.

§ I. On the Use of Adjectives.

The adjective noun is always placed first, and then the sub-
stantive noun, and between adjective and substantive is placed
one of the following particles, which by themselves have no
signification :

a,—y,—tlah,—olah,—lah,—ah,—olah,—vlah,—elah.

Examples: nim, large, nima che, large stick; q’/,much, qija
gaXul, much fruit; gak, white, gaki qui, white cloak; naht,
high, nahtik vinak, great persons; vtz, good, vizilah ya, good

water; q,l, dirty, q,ilolah qui, a dirty cloak ;

; meXen, hot, me-
Zenalah ya, hot water; chaom, pretty, chaomalah Nopoh, a
pretty girl; tew, cold, tewlah ya, cold water; qay, bitter, qaylah
ya, bitter water; ytzelulah huyu, a bad descent; loX, beloved,
loxolah tata, beloved. father; chug,huh, maimed, chugq,huhilah
ahauh, a maimed ruler; ache, sterile, acheelah yxok, a sterile
woman,

4. Other words add ie, as qulan, joined or married, qulante
yxok, a married woman; hebel, something pretty and pleasant,
hebelic qul,* pretty clothing.

§|. Note that when one substantive noun is united to another
substantive noun, with the signification of an adjective, one of
these particles, alah or ylah, is placed between them; as abahi-
lah bei, a stony road; gixalah huyu, a thorny mountain; chico-

pilah vinak, a bestial person.

{{. The particles elah and vlah are also placed between such
substantives, as q,echelah ticon, a cacao field neglected and
overgrown; eivanilah bet, a rough road.

4. And take notice that the least important substantive is
placed first, and used as the adjective; as, gi, a thorn, bez, a
road, giwalah bei, .a thorny road.

*The generic word for clothing is qui; the specific term is Sw, the
latter is varied, the former is not. (Coto.)

-possessive pronouns, although we might say, nw zacil, my whiteness.’’

©
Brinton.] 364 (Jan, 4,

4. Observe that when any derivative or possessive pronoun
is united to the first noun in such a connection, then one of the
following particles is added to the noun, ai, el, ¢l, ol, vl; as,
ahauh, lord, rahaual vinak, the lord of the people; ru yaal bo-
hot, the water of the jar; ru cheel hat, the wood of the house,

ru caxulil che, or rua che, the fruit of the tree; ru bakil balam,

the bone of the tiger; ru bohoil cab, the jar of the honey; rw
popol hat, the rug of the house. And this is not only the case
with third persons, but with all persons, both singular and
plural, as:

vahaual Jesu Christo, My Lord Jesus Christ.

auhaual Jesu Christo,Thy “ i f
rahaual-Jesu Christo, His “ i re
kahaual Jesu Christo,Our “ i! it
yahaual Jesu Christo, Your “ ‘!
cahaual Jesu Christo, Their “ i

To make the above explanation clearer, it should be stated that in
Cakchiquel, as in most American tongues, there is no such separate part
of speech as an adjective. The word nim, does not mean ‘‘great,’’ but ‘a
great thing ;’’ hebel, ‘a pretty thing,’”’ ete. Such words only assume the
sense of adjectives when used to express the quality of a subject. Hence
the Spanish grammarians divide the Cakchiquel nouns into the two
classes, ‘‘adjective nouns,’’ such as the above, and ‘‘substantive nouns,”’
which can express being without relation.

Of the terminations alah, elah, tlah, olah, ulah, Torresano states that the
most frequent are alah and wah, as these may be added to almost all
nouns, both substantive and adjective ; ola is used only in the word
loXolah.

On the terminations al, el, il, ol, vl, Villacafias has the following import-
ant remarks: ‘The possessive pronouns unite with both substantive and
adjective nouns, and it is to be noted that when the pronoun conveys the
notion of ownership, no termination is added to the noun; but when the
pronoun expresses the connotation of a quality or accident, and not
ownership, then one of the following particles is added to the nouns, al,
el, vl, ol, vl. For example, nu uh, my book, the book which T own; nu
uhil, my book, that in which matters relating to me are written ; nw colob,
my cord, the cord I own, nw colobol, my cord, the cord with which I am
bound, etc. When these particles are added to adjective nouns, they ex-
press the quality in the abstract, as zac, white, zacdl, whiteness ; tz, good,
vtzil, goodness. These abstract nouns can rarely be used with the personal

oR
1884.] 365 (Brinton.

Cuaprer II. Or tur Pronouns,

]. There are primitive and derivative pronouns. The

primitive are:
yn, I.
at, thou.
ha,* that one.

oh, we.

yx, you.
he,t these.

Other pronouns are: yn, at, ha, oh, yx, here.

Genitives of these words are:
vichin, my or of me.
avichin, thy.
rrichin,t of that one.

Datives of these genitives:
chuichin, to or for me,
chavichin, to or for thee.
chirichin, to or for that one,

kichin, our.
yvichin, your.
quichin, their.

chikichin, to or for us.
chivichin, to or for you.
chiquichin, to or for those.

The following are datives of the same sense ‘and rendering.§

chue, to or for me.
chaue, to or for thee.
chire, to or for that one.

Accusatives of these words:
chuth, against me.
chavih, against thee.
chirth, against that one.

chike, to or far us.
chive, to or for you.
chique, to or for those.

chikth, against us.
chivth, against you.
chiquih, against those.

Those words also mean, of or from me, of or from thee, ete.

Torresano adds the explanation: ‘‘ This accusative has two other sig-
nifications (besides the one given above). One is ‘at my cost,’ or ‘in

’

my care,

as, ‘It isin my care to aid you and to look after you,’ Chwih

qohvt ytoote tgq’eti navipe. The other is, ‘behind me,’ ‘behind thee,’ as,
‘The garment is behind thee,’ Chahoih qor vi qui.’’ So Coto gives the ex-
ample: Ohuth akilam vi ri, ‘This is at my cost or expense. ””

* Should read 77; ha is the demonstrative.

+ Or, e@.
} Better, richin,

§ This form is not given by either of the other grammarians.

Brinton.] 366 [Jan. 4,

In the reciprocal accusative Torresano doubles the terminal vowel, and
also adds another form as follows :

chinubil vij, within myself,
chabil avij, within thyself.
chubil rij, within himself.
chikibil kij, within ourselves,
chibil wij, within yourselves.
chiquibil quij, within themselves.

It is used as in the following example : qa mahaniok tuinakiricah Dios
cah vleuh waki chubil rij aqohe vi, Before God created the heaven and the
earth He was within Himself. The term 071 is here used with the posses-
sive pronoun and the preposition chi.

In reference to vocatives the same author remarks that they have no
peculiar form in this language, and that in place of them they use the
second persons, singular and plural, as, Ye alabon, Boys, come here (lit-
erally, You, boys).

The following accusatives are used in the present tenses :

guin, me. koh, us. |
cat, thee, quix, you. y
que, them.
There are other accusatives which are used to form recipro-
cal verbs, e. y., tin loXoh vi; I love myself; and thus in the
other persons prefixing the particles tin, ta, tu, as:
tin—vi, to myself, tika—qui, to ourselves.
ta—avi, to thyself. n— 1V4, to yourselves,
tu—rt, to himself. tique—qui, to themselves.
The ablatives are:
vumal, by or from me. kumal, by or from us.
aumal, by or from thee. yumal, by or from you.
rumal, by or from that one. eumal, by or from those,
There are other ablatives which signify, with me, with thee, .
etc., to wit:
viquin, with me. kiquin, with us. |
aviquin, with thee. yviquin, with you.
riquin, with that one. quiquin, with those. |

‘|. Possessive pronouns or particles to distinguish the pos-

1884,] 367 (Brinton,

session of the object; these are, for nouns beginning with a

vowel:

v, my. k, our.
av, thy. Ww, your.
rr, that one’s, ®, their.

Thus, vochoch, my house, avochoch, thy house, rochoch that
one’s house, kochoch, our house, yvochoch, your house, cochoch,
the house of those. And in this same way many other nouns
are declined, as vahawah, my lord, vahtih, my master, vetam, I
know or arn acquainted with, an expression used to signify
that one knows or understands some art.

The following particles are used with words beginning with

a consonant:

nu, my. ha, our.
a, thy. y, your.
ru, of that one. gut, of those.

As, nuvach, my face; avach, your face; ruvach, his face;
kavach, our face; yvach, your face; quivach, their face. In
the same way the following and many other words are de-

clined:

nutata, my father, nuque, my heart.

nute, my mother, nuguicotem, my joy.

nuXahol, my son, nughahomonel, my wash-wo-
man.

numial, my daughter. nuhalon tzih, my false testi-

nuyavabil, my sickness. mony.

nutztk, my clothing. nulzih, my word.

nuqazlibal, my soul. nupixa, my word.

nuqazlem, my life. numac, my sin,

All the following nouns are declined by these particles v
and nu:
nunimial, my elder brother.

nuchas, my younger brother.
vana, my sister.

numama, my ancestor.

vatit, my ancestress.

Brinton.} 368

numam viy, my grandchild.

vican nutata, my uncle.

nute, vana, nutata, my aunt.

vieos, my nephew or niece.

gechan, or nubalue, my brother-in-law.

vienam, my sister-in-law.

vali or valibatz, my daughter-in-law.

nu hinam, my father-in-law.

nuhite, my mother-in-law.

nuchaX nunahti nimal, my male cousin.

nunahti ana, my female cousin.

nuchi, my son-in-law.

nuyahtata, or, nutata bal, my stepfather.

nuyahte, or nutebal, my stepmother.
4. The women say among themselves:

nuxibal, my elder brother.

nughuti xibal, my younger brother.

nunimal, my elder sister.

nuchaXilatz, my younger sister.

valinam, my father-in-law.

valite, my mother-in-law.

nunahti xibal, my male cousin.

nunahti numal, my female cousin.

The women call the nephew val and the niece also, and to
know if.it is a son or not one asks: Avteih pe aval? Is it
really thy son? If it is she says: Val; and if not, Ralgual
nuxibal, it is the son of my brother; and of the niece, Rumeal
nucibal. Aval pe? Isit thy son, or thy daughter? She re-
plies, Val, my son.

The following table from Villacafias and Coto exhibits the terms of con-
sanguinity and affinity as used by the two sexes :

By males, By females,
my son nu qahol val
my daughter nu mial vixokal
my elder brother nu nimal nu wibal
my younger brother nu chad nu qhuti wibal

my elder sister vana nu nimal

1884.]

my younger sister
my spouse

my father-in-law
my mother-in-law
my brother-in-law
my sister-in-law

my son by a former marriage

369

By males,
nu qrute Vana
viahail
nu hinam
nu hite
nu baluc, nu hi
vianam
nu yah qahol

my daughter by a former marriage nu yah mial

my male cousin
my female cousin
my grandson

my granddaughter

nu chad
nu nahtiana
nu mam
nu mam

(Brinton,

By females,
nu nimalate
vachahiil
valinam
wvalite
vechanim
vali
nu yah al
nu yah twok at
nu nahtt aibat
nu nahtt nimal
oly
oly

Many of these are compound words, whose meanings are easily
reached ; nimal is from nim or nima, large, great ; ghuti, is small, little ;
twok, female ; widal, male; yah, the organs of generation of either sex (nu
yah qahol = the son of my body) ; nat or nahti, remote, distant. Balue
and /4do not mean brother-in-law in our senso, but are applied to all
males of the chinamétl or gens into which the speaker has married. The
general word for parentage is aca, which is used as in the following sen-
tence: qoh pe aca quichin qui chiquibil qui vac qvlubel? Is there any rela-
tionship between these who are about to marry ?

The terms given as used by women only do not in any manner indicate
a different linguistic origin. It will be seen that several of them are from
the word al, used above for son and daughter (¢wok al == female al) ; this
is a form from alan, to bring forth, to give birth to, and is no doubt con-
nected with al, a load, a burden, as in English we say of a pregnant
woman, ‘‘She is carrying.’”? These terms, therefore, must be considered
specializations of relationship which are used only by the women because
they are from points of view, which, in the nature of things, are peculiar
to that sex. Strictly speaking, they are not linguistic peculiarities at all.

These particles, rt, ha, hart, mean “this;” as ta bana ri, do
this. Ha may be used demonstratively as in this sentence, Ha
tahox tiban avumal, This is proper, that it be done by you. It
may also be used for tle, tlla, tllud; as: Dios xbana cah vleuh
waviha xbano ronohel q,etom maqui q,etom (tzetom). God
made the heavens, the earth, and He made all that we see and
do not see. The particle hari may stand for iste, ista, istud, as
in this example: Hari vae tzth tavi tibija chivichin kiteth
cht lo, These words which I speak to you are truly precious,
It may also be used for ipse, ipsa, ipsum, as, Mixcam ri Pedro,

PROC. AMER, PHILOS. 800, xxr. 115. 20. PRINTED APRIL 9, 1884.

Brinton.] 370 (Jan, 4,

Pedro has died. Nakchi Pedro? Which Pedro? Hari aa
q,¢/ pa bet, The one you sai in the road,

Other compositions are made with these pronouns in the
following manner:

xavi yn ri, IT myself. xaviohri, we ourselves,
cavi at ri, thou thyself. xavyxrt, you yourselves.

cavi ha ri, that one himself. waviherd, those themselves.

The following particles carry with them a notion of benefit
or of injury. I give an example of benefit: Xaa in vi tool yvi-
chin, I am the same ally to you as heretofore. Of injury:
Xax in vi agutel, I am your opponent.

xax in vi, I the same, xax oh vi, we the same.

wax at vi, thou the same. vax ix vi, you the same.

vax ha vi, that one the same. wax he vi, they the same.

Another composition: vae means the same as ecce, behold;
as, Vae nutzih, Behold my words; Vae amac, Behold your
sin,

yn vae, I the same. oh vae, we the same.
at vae, thou the same. ya vae, you the same,
ha vae, that one the same, he vae, those the same.

Thus it is used by one who knows himself and humbles him-
self: Yn vae inqazhol, in macol, I, that same evil sinner,

Another composition is:

yn va, behold me here. oh va, behold us here.
at va, behold thee here. ya va, behold you here.
ha va, behold him here. ha va, behold them here.

As: Yn va in ahauh, Behold me here, me, a lord; it is
used in pointing out, in this manner, greatness, or wisdom, or
strength, or pride.

The particle ha placed at the beginning of a sentence corre-
sponds with vae; as, Ha bin ya chavichin vae tin ya, This is
what I have to give you.

Quis vel Qui. Wuo.

Nak and chinak signify “who.” Nak ca tua? Who art
thou? Nak? Quid est? Nak achock ychin ri? or, Nak ah

|
|

1884.] B71 [Brinton.

yelin ri? Whose is this? Nak pe ah ychin? or, Nak pe qo
rrichin 2? Whose is this? Or, To whom does this belong?
Nak chiquichin? To whom? Nak chiquichin atin ya vi? To
whom am I to give it? or, To which of them ?

Nak chinak, whom or what, to or in whom or what. Nakehi-
nak chirth qo vi ri mac? In whom is this sin? Nak chinak wa

camicah? Whom or what have you killed?

DistRiBUTIVE Worps.

He or hetak signifies “all” or “every one.” These two
words are much used, as Za ya he (or, hetak) qui vat vinak
alabon ri wtani, &e,, Give bread to each one (or, to all) of the
persons, boys or girls, &. Za ya he (or hetak) qui vuh aquala,
Give the letters to the boys, and to each one of them (the sense
of the words being distributive),

vonohel, I all. konohel, we all.
avonohel, thou all. yvonohel, you all.
ronohel, that one all. conohel, they all.

It may be remarked of this word that the first and second

pronouns singular are not used, although they say: Que be
vonohel qugin e val nuqahol, I shall go with all my people
and sons. Cat be avonohel quqin eaval eaqahol, Thou shalt go
with all thy family. But it is chiefly used with the third per-
son singular and the plurals.
{. Note, that the third person singular forms the plural,
when united to inanimate nouns as: ronohel yaim, all the
maize; ronohel abah, all the stones; and we must not say,
conohel abah. Further, this third pronoun singular, when
added to collective names of plural signification, forms their
plurals; as: ronohel ama, all the town; ronohel vinak, all the
people; kobe ronohel, we shall all go; bata bey ronohel, you
shall all go; que be ronohel, they shall all go.

Compounds of quis or qué.

4. Naktux, means who, which or what.
nakchique, which of them.
bilataon, something.
huhunal or chuhunal, to each one.

Brinton.] 372 [Jan, 4,

The numeral hun, one, is sometimes used for the indefinite article,
and at other times as an indefinite pronoun ; as, hun chivichin aqui ya in,
one of you must give me; hun vinak, a man. Reduplicated it means
each one, as huhun chivichin abig mo hun che, Each of you must bring
a stick. For ‘‘somebody,’’ the verb qoh, to be in a place, is used, as,
qor wxbano, somebody did it, i.e. : ‘‘There was (who) did it.’’

The termination don, means ‘‘alone,’’ and is used with the possessive
pronouns which precede consonants, it being a curious rule which holds
good throughout this language that two initial vowels have the phonetic
force of a consonant ; thus;

nuton, I alone. kaion, we alone.
aion, thou alone. yton, you alone.
ruion, he alone, quiion, they alone.

The negative ‘‘nobody’’ may be formed from hun, manthun, no one,
as, manthun tibe chi rochoch, let no one go to his house,

CHaprrer III. Or tur Verss.

The verbs are rather difficult in this language on account
of the variety of their compounds, and their number and
diversity, because they have a particular verb for each specific
act; thus, to eat, in its absolute sense is gu va, I eat, cat va,
thou eatest, etc. For eating bread they say, tin vaih; for
cating fruit or eggs, tn lo; for eating anything toasted, tin
ax; for eating vegetables, tin vechaah. For this reason
the whole difficulty in this language is in learning the verbs
and their properties, and therefore something must be said
about them, although it is a difficult topic.

There are two kinds of verbs; one kind governs cases and
the other does not. All those which govern eases are held to
be active, although in the Latin language they may be neuters,
or deponents or common, ‘Those which do not govern cases
are neuter, and it is necessary to know this, because there are
four classes of verbs, active, passive, neuter and absolute. The
passive and the absolute are formed from the active verb, so
that the active being known, the passive and the absolute can
be formed, because, as I say, these are formed from the active

Sum, es, fut.
In this language there is no proper word to express this
verb, and those who up to this time have employed a definite

|
|
|
|
|

© 6
1884. J 373 [Brinton,

word have taken that which corresponds to sto, stare, or to
habeo, habere; for the word goh, does not mean “to be”
(Spanish, ser), but “to be in a place” (Spanish, estar). To
translate this sentence, “I am good,” we may not say, yn qoh
utz, ‘To express all that. we say by the verb swum, es, fut, the
Indians make use of the following method: They take the
primitive pronouns in the appropriate person and number, and
place them before any adjective or substantive noun, and thus
form the verb; and by various additions and circumlocutions,
they express themselves as freely and with as many moods and
tenses as we do,

The above statement about the verb ‘‘to be’’ agrees with that in the
grammar of Villacafias, but is attacked by Torresano. He writes, ‘ Al-
though other grammarians who have written of this idiom have stated
that it does not possess the verb sum, es, fut, the contrary is clear enough.
In certain tenses the primitive pronouns can be used with the verb wa,
which, although usually conjugated with the pronouns of the passive voice,
may also be conjugated with those of the active, and in that case it has
the proper sense of swm.’’

Father Coto, who has a long note, covering several folio pages, on the
rendering of the Spanish verb ser, cannot be said to endorse the above,
He observes, ‘‘This verb we seems to me to correspond in some way to
the Latin fio, fis.’’ The word to express the essentia, or natural character
of a thing, he gives as qeohlem, which is generally strengthened by the
affirmative particle zaa and the correlative vi, as vax qohlem abah vi, it is,
in its nature, a stone; but it may also mean custom, habit. This
was the most appropriate word found in Cakchiquel to express the being
of God. The declaration of the persons of the Trinity runs thus: Que-
Tega wax owivt ru vinakil, waga hun qui qohlem, hun navipe Diosil, chi waa
huna Dios vi chupam ru qohlem, Truly three are the persons, one, the
Being (of God), and one, God, and one, God in His Being. This highly
abstract expression shows the capacity of the tongue for recondite
thought: certainly it is not less clearly put in the Cakchiquel than in
any European idiom.

InpicativE Moop.

Present tense.

yn utlz, I am good, oh utz, we are good.
at wtz, thou art good, ya ulz, you are good,
ha utz, he is good. he utz, they are good.

This present is in very common use, and very properly takes

Brinton. ] 3T4 (Jan. 4,

the place of I am, thou art, ete. In phrases of the third per-
son, with a nominative expressed, the ha is dropped, as, wtz
Pedro, Pedro is good.

Imperfect pretertt.

This tense is formed by adding to the primitive pronoun
the particle naek.

yn naek utz, 1 was good. oh naek utz, we were good,

at naek utz, thou wast good. ya naek utz, you were good.

ha naek utz, he was good. he nack utz, they were good.

This is a circumlocution, and to complete its signification a
word must be added, as in Latin when we say, tu eras—
the phrase rests in suspense; hence we must say, yn naek ute
oher, | was good in past time, thus conveying the sense of an
action which was begun but not completed,

Perfect preterit.
The perfect preterit is formed from the present by suffixing
a particle of past time, as oher or wueri, formerly; yhir,* yes-
terday ; cabihir, day before yesterday, dropping the pronoun in
the third. person singular.

yn utz oher, I have been oh ute oher, we have been

good, good,
at utz oher, thou hast been ya wtz oher, you have been
good. good,
ha uta oher, he has been good. he ulz oher, they have been
good,
Pluperfect.

To form this tense the letter is prefixed to theprimitive
pronouns and after them is placed the noun; except in the third
person of the singular, where the pronoun is not used, but
merely the w, This tense requires a sentence to follow it, for
its explanation, and at its close is placed the particle vi; as:
xin utz vi mahaniok cat wl, I had already been good before
thou camest. But the vi may also be omitted, as, win ulinak

*Tbir, Coto.

1884, ] 375 [Brinton,
tok wat ul, I had already arrived when thou camest. Such a
use of this tense is quite customary and elegant. Thus to
speak of God as a great Lord before heaven or earth was made,
we say, Xaha vi xdinom vi atigil vi Dios nimahauh mahaniok
tu ban cah vleuh. Such expressions are aided by a manner of
speaking current among those Indians to express nature or
habit in anything, although the time is not the same as in the
tense we are discussing. Thus they say, Xaw ru cak wi ri ya
gak ruach, This water is by its nature white. Xaw ru qohlem
vi ri Pedro mima eleSom, Pedro makes a habit of stealing.

Torresano gives several methods of forming the pluperfect, none pre-
cisely corresponding with the above. Thus:

hawin vt, T had been. haw oh vt, we had been.
haw at vi, thou hadst been. haw tx vt, you had been.
hax ha vi, he had been. hax he vi, they had been.
Another is

yn ok, T had been. oh ok, we had been.

at ok, thou hadst been. yx ok, you had been.

ha ok, he had been. he ok, they had been.

As, You had been sick when I came, Jv ok yavat tok win ul. It may
also be formed by the particles cht, ok, as, at fiscal cht ok toxide, thou hadst
been fiscal when I went; or the particle clic may be added, as, In wan
oinak chic tok aat ul, I had been well when thou camest.

Future Imperfect.

This future is formed from the present by adding the verb
quin ux, to have become (ser hecho).

yn utz xequinux, I shall have become good.

at ute «cat ux, thou wilt have become good.

In the third person the particle’ ha is not used, but the phrase
is expressed thus:

utz «tux Pedro, Pedro will be good, or will have become
good.

This tense may also be formed by placing at the end an ad-
verb of future time as,

yn utz chuak, I shall be good to-morrow.

Also the particle edie, more, may be placed before the said
adverb, as:

yn ulz chic chuak, I shall be more good to-morrow.

Brinton.] 376 (Jan. 4,

The original omits the future prefix win this tense, but I presume this
is a fault of the copyist, and [ restore it, following Torresano. He adds
this example of its employment : Lv lod wquia ua chire Dios ve tiXil ivit pan
imac, You will become the beloved of God, if you abstain from your sins.

Future Perfect.

This tense is formed from the pluperfect by dropping the
vi and suffixing the adverbial particle ¢ok, when, and then the
verb; as:

ain ulz tok cat ul, I shall have been good when thou wilt
have come.

vat ute tok tul Padre, already thou wilt have been good
when the Father comes.

For this tense Torresano simply postfixes the particle chic, as:

yn nimanel chic, I shall have been obedient,

at nimanel chic, thou shalt have been obedient, &e.

It is difficult to appreciate the precise value of chic as a temporal par-
ticle. The following examples of its use from the Calepino of Varea will
illustrate its force: At mama chic, already thou art an old man; ul chic
he had returned ; xcamican chic, he returned again to killing, etc.

Imperative Mood.

The imperative is formed from the present of the in-
dicative by adding the particle ok after the pronoun and be-
fore the adjective-noun; but in the third person singular the
ha is not used, and the ok is placed after the adjective noun; as

at ok utz, be thou good.

utz ok Pedro, let Pedro be good.

Note that this form of expression is more appropriate where,
for example, one asks for a stone and they bring him a stick,
and he says, Abah ok, maqui che, A stone, I say, and not a
stick. They make much use of this verb, guin ua, cat ua, tux,
which is, in Latin, fio, fis, fit, as an imperative, giving it its pro-
nouns and numbers, as,

quin ux, may I become.

cat ux, may thou become.

tux, may he become, and so the rest of the persons, repeat-
ing them after the imperative forms, as,

at ok utz cat ux, become thou good,

1884.) BY [Brinton,

They also use this imperative thus:

ute ok, let it be well done,
hebelo ok, be it well done.

Also in commands, as wan ok, bring bricks, abah ok, bring
stones,

Future. perfect of future time.

This future is formed from the present of the imperative by
the use of one of the following particles: chiok, qateqa, chur,
chuhach, chirth, chupantok. Thus, to translate the following
sentence, Be thou good, after thou shalt have been baptized,
At ok ute kahinak chiok, ru ya Dios pan avi. Again: Thou
shalt be baptized and afterwards thou wilt be made good,
Ti kahna ruya Dios pan avi qateqa at tz cat ux.

Optative Mood.

Present tense,

This tense is formed from the present indicative by inserting
the particle tah between the pronoun and the noun which fol-
lows it, except in the third person of the singular where the
pronoun is dropped.

yn tah utz, would I were good!

at tah ute, would thou wert good!

ulz tah Pedro, would Pedro were good!

And so on for the other persons.

Torresano observes that there is but one form in this tongue for the
optative and subjunctive mood, and he gives the above and the following
tenses as subjunctives. He translates the particle tai in this connection
by utinam, but adds that it has other significations. Si, if, the subjunctive
sign, is ve or veta, and it will be seen that by its use, and some changes in
the particles, our author frames his subjunctive mood.

Imperfect pretertt.

This tense may be formed by adding to the present of this
mood the particle tok and adding what sentence we wish, as:
Yn tah ute tok wirah oquecax chi ahauarem, oh, would I had
been good when they wished to make me cacique |

PROC, AMER.PHILOS, 800, xxi. 115. 2V PRINTED APRIL 10, 1884.

Brinton, ] 378 [Jan. 4,

It will be noticed that the author directs this and the following tense to
be formed alike. This is no doubt an error of the copyist. Torresano
forms the imperfect preterit by adding guin ua, as, yn tah naonel quin ua,
Ishould be understood ; and the perfect, preterit by repeating the primitive
pronoun and adding the perfect particle inak :

yn tah mitih in ux inak, I should have been careful.

Preterit perfect,

This tense is formed from the present of this mood by add-
ing the particle ¢ok, and afterwards the sentence that we wish,
as in the preterit imperfect. Hxample: Yn tah uta tok vin ul
vave, oh, if I had been good when I came here!

Preterit pluperfect.

This tense is formed by the present by prefixing to the pro-
noun the letter «, and beginning the following sentence with
tok, as win tah ute tok eul ru tzih Dios, oh, if I had been good
when the word of God came! Xatah ahaw. tok win ul vave,
oh, if thou hadst been ruler when I came here! -Xahaw tah
Pedro tok wtbe, oh! if Pedro had been ruler when I went
away |

Torresano forms this tense by prefixing the particle watavi (x +- ha +

tah -+- vi) to the pronoun.
vatavi win nimanel, would I had been obedient !

Future.

This is formed from the present in the same manner, by add-
ing some particle of future time, as chic, chuak.,
Torresano prefixes veta, if, and adds wa, as:
veta in nimanel quin ua, if I shall be obedient,

Subjunctive Mood.
Present,

The present of this mood is formed from the present of the
indicative by prefixing the particle vetah, as: Vetah yn utzilah
christiano qui be chi cah, if I be a good Christian, I shall go to
heaven. Note that a common use of this tense is in sentences
like the following: If I were a sinner, I would say that I am:

1884,] 379 (Brinton,

but it is not true that which they charge me with, Vetah yn
ahmae xquichatah, xaha magqui quere xa tan tth atow chirth.

Preterit perfect.

This tense may be consistently formed like that of the opta-
tive by dropping the tah and putting in its place ve; as: Ve
yn ute tok, qui cam mani tin aibih vi rumal Diablo, If I should
have been good, when I die I shall not fear about the Devil.

Preterit pluperfect.

This tense is like the optative, dropping the tah and putting
in its place ve or vetah, as, Vetah waa yn Sinom vi chila Cas-
tilla, magqui tah win ul vave, If T had been rich there in Castile,
I should not have come here. Vetah wax at vi ahauh, maqui
tah quere catzihon vi, If thou hadst been ruler, thou wouldst
not speak in this manner,

Future subjwnetive.

This tense is formed from the present by adding some adverb
of time or some verb referring to the future, as, Vetah yn ute,
quin ux xavi cat uteir vmal, If I shall be good, let it make
thee good,

Infinitive Mood.

This is formed by a circumlocution, taking the present of
the optative and varying it with the verb tevaho, I wish, tava-
ho, thou wishest, etc. Thus, yn tah ute tivaho, I wish to be
good, ete. The Indians also use many other methods of speak-
ing in this mood, as

ule tah nuqua tivaho, I wish to have a good heart.

ule tah nuqohlem tivaho, I wish to have a good life.

uta tah gui qohe tivaho, I wish to be in peace.

quinutzir tah tivaho, I wish to be good.

tirah tah nuqux yn tah utz, I wish that my heart may be
good,

yn tah hebel, to be handsome.

yn tah chaom, to be beautiful.

Brinton.) 380 (Jan, 4,

The preterit can use the adverb oher or the others already
mentioned, as, Tivaho tah nuqua yn tah utz oher, I wish to
have been good formerly or in past time.

Future.

This tense is formed by placing the verb quin ua, before the
desiderative verb, as, at tah utz cat ux, tavaho, Thou hast a de-
sire to be good. It may also be formed in other ways, as, 7iaho
tah nugua yntah ute, quinux, My heart wishes me to be good;
or, Yn tah nugohlem, tivaho; yntah ute huna caba, yntah ule
chic tivaho.

4. Note. As there is no proper word for this verb in any of
its moods, tenses or persons, but it must be expressed by cir-
cumlocutions, its translations are numerous; and this is not
surprising; it is enough to say that although there is no proper
word for it, every one of its forms found in the Latin can be
rendered into this tongue.

The verb cat ua, in the second and third persons singular
and plural, may be used to ask questions, like sum, es, fut;
as: Nak cat ue? Who art thou? Answer, Yn, I. Asking
again, Nakchi at? Who art thou? Answer, Yn Pedro. So
in thep lural, Nak qui cua? Who are you? When, seeing
a person, the question is asked, Nak cat ux? Who art thou?
it is equivalent to Nak atah chok chinamitl? Of what clan or
lineage art thou? To ask, What wood is this? we say, Nak
che el vi? and to ask of what dignity or position is this man, we
say, Nak ri kalem ri vinak ?

After a similar attempt to render into Cakchiquel the Spanish verb ser
in its different forms—an attempt which is evidently out of place, as it has
no correspondent in the tongue—Torresano translates the conjugation of
the Spanish estar, in which he succeeds better, as that is properly trans-
lated by the Cak, qo’. I will give the first persons of the tenses with their
Spanish equivalents, the Spanish grammar being richer in flexions than
the English,

Indicative Mood.
Present: tan in qoh, yo estoy.
Preterit Imperfect : aan in qoh, yo estaba.
Preterit Imperfect Negative : atan in qohmani, yo no estaba.
Preterit Perfect ; w qohe, yo estuve,

1884, | 381 : [Brinton.

Preterit Pluperfect : yn ok qohevinak chic, yo habia estado.
Future Imperfect : equi qohe, yo estaré.
Future Perfect : yn qoh chic, yo habré estado.
Imperative Mood.
cat qohe, esta tu.
Optative and Subjunctive Mood.

Present, qui qohe tah, yo esté,

or, vé qui qohe.
Preterit Imperfect, aqud qohetah, yo estaria.
Preterit Pluperfect, wigohe tah, yo hubiese estado.

or, veta wiqohe, si yo hubiese estado.

or, veta in qohevinak.
Future, ela aqui qohe, si yo estuviera estado.

Infinitive Mood.
Present, tan Woah qui qohe, yo quicro estar.
Preterit Perfect, advao ai qohe, quisé estar.
Future, etivaho gui qohe, querré estar.
Gerunds.
Genitive, qui qohedic, para que yo esté.
Dative, hata qut qohevi, para que yo esté.
Participles.
Present, qoh, el que esta,
Future, qoriel, el que ha de estar.
As I have already stated in the Introduction, this arrangement, on the
plan of the Latin grammar, is forced, and violates the spirit of the Cakchi-
quel, as it would of all other American tongues.

On the Conjugation of the Verbs.
: Active Verbs.

As has been already said there are four kinds of verbs in
this language, active, passive, absolute and neuter.

The verb never varies its termination in any mood or tense,
The mood and tense are distinguished by certain particles
which in some tenses are placed at the beginning, in others at
the beginning and end of the verb.

Active verbs are of two kinds, those which begin with a
consonant, and those which begin with a vowel; and each of
these has its appropriate particles to distinguish the number,

person and tense.

Brinton.) 382 [Jan. 4,

The particles of active verbs, both of one or more syllables,

which begin with a consonant are:

tun or tinu, I. tika, we.
ta, thou. tt, you.
tu, that one, tiqur, they.

The form t/nw for the first person is rarely used in the pres-
ent, but more frequently in the future.

Present tense.

ti ban, I do. tika ban, we do.
ta ban, thou dost. ti ban, you do,
tu ban, he does. tiqui ban, they do.

All the verbs of this class, of one or several syllables, are
conjugated in like manner; as, of one syllable:

tin ya, I give. tin quir, I wntie.
ny, ’ a 2A nN ¢ 1c

ten q’et, I see. tin too, I aid.

tin qam, I seize. tan toh, 1 pay.
tun tak, I send. tun Lat, I cut.
tin yak, I lift. wn qat, I burn.

tun piz, I wrap.
tin toz, I spill.
Of several syllables; as:

tin loXoh, I love. tin qutuh, I ask.

tin bijh, I say. tin chahih, 1 keep.

tin rapah, | whip. tin q,apih, I shut.

tin tthoh, I teach. tin chomiricah, I direct.

tin qahicah, I flog.
And many others of one or more syllables.
Preterit.

The particles for the preterit of both these classes of verbs
are,

ain or winu, I. aka, we.
xa, thou xt, you.
xa, that one. xqui, they.

The forms win or winu are used indifferently by the natives.

QE
1884,} 38e (Brinton.

Perfect preterit.

ain ban, I have done. aka ban, we have done.
xa ban, thou hast done. ai ban, you have done.
xu ban, that one has done. agui ban, they have done.

And so of all the above verbs of one or many syllables.

xin ya, I have given. ain piz, I have wrapped.
xin q,et, | have seen, xin tiz, | have spilled.
xin qam, I have seized. ain quir, I have untied.
ain tak, | have sent. xin too, I have aided.
win yak, I have lifted, xin g,at, I have burned.

And also,
ain loXoh, I have loved.
ain bijh, I have said.
win rapah, | have whipped.
win tihoh, I have taught.
xin qahicah, I have flogged.
xin qutuh, I have asked.
win chahih, I have kept.
ain g,apih, I have shut.
xin chomiricah, I have directed.

Pluperfect.
To form the pluperfect the particle inak is suffixed to the
perfect as,
ain ban nak, I had done. eka ban (nak, we had done.
ata ban inak,thou hadst done. at ban inak, you had done.

au ban inak, that one had agut ban nak, they had
done. done.

Future imperfect.

To form the future imperfect, the particle w is prefixed to
the present tense.
att ban, I shall do. atika ban, we shall do.

eta ban, thou wilt do. ati ban, you will do.
atu ban, he will do. ctiqui ban, they will do.

[Brinton, 384 [Jan. 4,

And so all these verbs, whether of one or more syllablesl
xtin ya, I shall give, tin q,et, I shall see, atin loXoh, I shal,
love, etc.

Future perfect.
This tense is formed by prefixing the following particles
o Le jem} ?
nu, a, ru, and suffixing the adverb chic.
nu ban chic, I shall have ka ban chic, we shall .have

done. done.
a ban chic, thou wilt have y ban chic, you will have
done. econ)

ru ban chic, he will have qui ban chic, they will have
done. done.
This future is also formed with the particles, v, av, r7, as,
vaqaxah chic, I shall have heard.
avaqaxah chic, thou wilt have heard.
raqaxah chic, he will have heard.
kaqaaxah chic, we shall have heard.
yvaqaxah chic, you will have heard,
qui aqaxah chic, they will have heard.
Another future is formed by the particles of the present
and the suffix na.
xin loXoh na, I shall have loved.
xa loXoh na, thou wilt have loved.
xu loXoh na, he will have loved.
xka loXoh na, we shall have loved.
xt loSoh na, you will have loved.
aqui loXoh na, they will have loved.
These tenses are conjugated both with the primitive and
derivative pronouns; as,
yn loxon inak, I had loved.
at loXon inak, thou hadst loved.
ha loXon inak, he had loved.
oh loXon inak, we had loved.
yx loXon inak, you had loved.
he loXon inak, they had loved.*

* Hither an error of the copyist for yn loXoh inak, etc., or an euphonic
change.

€ Nene
1884.) 385 [Brinton.

And so, yn ban inak, I had done.
yn rapan inak, I had whipped, ete.

“{. The particle tan prefixed to the present of all verbs,
active, passive, neuter or absolute, carries the notion of present
action of the verb, as,

tan ti ban, I am doing, i]
tan ta ban, thou art doing.
tan tu ban, he is doing.
tan tika ban, we are doing.
tan ti ban, you are doing. |
tan tiqui ban, they are doing.
And so,
tan ta bijh, I am saying.
tan tin ya, I am giving.
tan tin loSoh Dios, I am loving God.

“. Particles for active verbs which begin with a vowel.

These are for the present tense, tiv, tau, tir, tik, tiu, tre. ‘
tivaho, I wish. tékaho, we wish.
tavaho, thou wishest. tiuaho, you wish.
tiraho, he wishes. técaho, they wish.

And so,

tivetamah, | know (conosco).
tivoquicah, I obey.
tivuqaah, I carry.
tivaqaxah, I hear,
tivulicah, I cause to come.
tivutziricah, I bless.
tivatinigah, I cause to bathe.
tivelecah, I take out.
4. The particles for the preterit of these verbs beginning
with a vowel are: aiu or wu, wau, wr, wh, xiu, xc; as,
aivaho, | wished, or, have wished.

zauho, thou “ :
xraho, he Us “
skaho,we .
aivaho, you “ .
19 (79

xeaho, they

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xxr. 115. 2w. PRINTED APRIL 10, 1884.

Brinton.)

So also,

386 (Jan, 4,

wivetamah, I knew, or, have known.
aiuagacah, I heard, or have heard.
ciuuqaah, I carried, or, have carried.

The pluperfect is formed from the perfect by adding the

particle inak :

xiu aqaxah inak, I had heard.

cau aqaxah inak, thou “

xr aqaxah inak, he
eka aqaxah inak, we
xiu aqaxah inak, you
xea aqaxah inak, they

46

cb

ab

79

§[. The following particles are used with neuter, absolute
and passive verbs, which begin with a vowel, quin, cat, t, koh,

quix, que:
quin ul, I come.
cat ul, thou comest.
tul, he comes,
Again,
quin ugquia, I drink,
cat uquia, thou drinkest.
tuquia, he drinks.
And so,
quinuclan, I rest.
quinoc, I enter.
quinel, I go out.

koh ul, we come.
quix ul, you come,
que ul, they come.

koh uquia, we drink.
quia uguia, you drink.
que uquia, they drink.

quinos, | weep.
quinoxXeh, I weep for some-
thing.

The particles which are used for the preterits of these verbs

Ane, Win, Wat, @, woh, aim, we, ae:

«inul, I came, or, have come.

catul, thou, “ "
cul, he, ”
And so,

cinuguia, I drank.
cinuclan, I rested,
ainoc, I entered.

K

xohul, we came, or, have come,
eicul, you, “ a

Ne4 hn ¢ 6b ob
aeul, they,

xinel, I went out.
xinox, I wept.
ainnoxeh, I wept for some-

thing.

387

1884.)

recent

(Brinton,

The pluperfect is formed by adding the particle inak to the

perfect ; as,
winul inak, | had come.
wvatul inak, thou “

cul inak, he ib

xohul inak, we had come.
wicul inak, you 8“

meul anak. the oc
aeul inak, they

“|. The following are the particles used with passive, neuter,

and absolute verbs which begin with a consonant: gut, cat, t2,

koh, quia, que, as,
quipe, I come.
catpe, thou comest.
tipe, he comes.
Again,
que be, I go.
cat be, thou goest.
ti be, he goes,
Another,
qui va, I eat.
cat va, thou eatest.
ti va, he eats.
Again,
qui var, I sleep.
cat var, thou sleepest.
ti var, he sleeps.
And others, such as,
quicuque, I

kohpe, we come.
quixpe, you come.
quepe, they come.

koh be, we go.
quia be, you go.
que be, they go.

koh va, we eat. |
quia va, you eat,
que va, they eat.

koh var, we sleep.
quix var, you sleep.
que var, they sleep.

kneel.

qui bigon, I am sad.

quiqaze, I hi

ve.

The particles for the preterit are: wt, wat, x, woh, aim, we.

wipe, I came or have come.

wate, thou i
«pe, he i"
And
aibe, I went or have gone,
catbe, thou “ <
(13 “c

abe, he

cohpe, we came or have come.
aiape, YOu ‘i
wepe, they

bb

xohbe, we went or have gone.

it 6b

aiabe, you
b 6b

xebe, they

Brinton. ] 388 [Jan, 4,

And
xiva, I ate, or have eaten, xohva, we ate or have eaten.
catva, thou LILVA, YOU. Me
ava, he i 1 weva, they i

So also,
xivar, I slept, or have slept.
aixuque, I kneeled, or have kneeled.

The verb vah is a neuter and means ‘to wish.”
quivah, I wish. kohvah, we wish.
catvah, thou wishest. quixvah, you wish.

tivah, he wishes. quevah, they wish.
Thus,

quiquicot, I rejoice. kohquicot, we rejoice,
catquicot, thou rejoicest. quixquicot, you rejoice.

tiquicot, he rejoices. que quicot, they rejoice,

The verb qoh, to be in a place (Span. estar).

yn qgoh, I am. oh qoh, we are.
at qoh, thou art. yaqoh, you are.
ha qoh, he is. he qoh, they are.

The following convenient presentation of the verbal particles is taken
from Torresano’s Grammar :

Verbal Particles.
1. ‘For active verbs which begin with a consonant :

Hor the Present Imperfect and Future,

tiha ~--~
rae loLoh. t
tqui.------

loXoh.

The particles are used in the Present with the prefix tan: in the Future
with the prefix #, and in the Imperfect by prefixing « to the Present, as

tan tin loXoh, T love; w tin loXoh, I shall love; x tan tin loXoh, I was
loving.

For the Perfect.

Same 8 wha ~~~.

2. ta — tame loLOh, at

8B, en GU trrnnnnrner®

The particle md is prefixed to these when the action is recent ; ain lodoh,
T have loved; mi ain loXoh, I have recently loved,

sem lo Loh,

1884, | 3889 [Brinton,

2. For active verbs which begin with a vowel :

For Present, Imperfect and Future.

MO Oiaes We
s oqueqah, |.
vagilvte pune hehe
Ot ae to

The same prefixes are used, tan tin oquecah, I believe ; tan tin oqueqah,
I was believing ; wtin oquegah, I shall believe.

SSE tre oquecah.

For Perfect.

Yi te Cm
mm oguecah, wiv Sunt
we or “gu

2. BAU ran nn
8, ar gece nt

noRanRT Zam oguecah.

8. Particles for absolute, passive and neuter verbs,

For Present, Imperfect and Huture.
koh ~~...
sam DC, ZO, Yuta —-----

artes at

1. quin or qui,--

2. cat i

Be von wn om que ——

To these tan is to be prefixed for the Present, etan for the Imperfect,
and @ for the Future,

For Perfect.

Ly) OU ii, LO
De hd iwc sour ceo ~zp,.0¢ have in nbs e
ECC IN mana barni tS gone. QC— mm

As in active verbs, the particle mé may be prefixed to these to denote
recent past time (the Preterit Proximate).

“. The rules for the formation of absolute and passive verbs
from active verbs of several syllables are as follows: The verb,
loXoh, for instance, drops the final / and takes in place of it n,
and thus forms the absolute verb. This form may be used
without an object, as gud loon, I love, not saying whom.
But when the pronouns yn, at, etc., are prefixed, it has the force
of the active, as yn loXon Dios, I love God; yn quirrapan
alabon, I whip the boys. This is the general rule for all active
verbs of several syllables,

“|. Passive verbs are formed from active verbs of more than
one syllable by dropping the / and substituting , as qui loXoa, -
Tam loved, After this form the ablative of the person must
be used, as, gui loXow rumal Dios, I am loved by God; que
rapax rumal vahtih, I am whipped by my master. This is

Brinton.] 390 (Jan, 4,

also the formation of the passive in verbs of several syllables
which begin with a vowel, as quinaqaxan, I hear, guinaqavan,
I am heard, r
‘|. Active verbs of only one syllable form their passives in
two manners,

The first is to drop the particles of active verbs, which are,
tin, ta, tu, ete., ard substitute those of neuter verbs which are,
qui, cat, tt, etc., as,

tin ban, I make. que ban, T am made.

tin ya, I give. qur ya, I am given,

And so with all verbs of one syllable,

T'he second form of the passive is by adding the particle tah
to the verb preceded by a vowel like that in the verb, as, ban-
atah, yatah, ete.

The Imperative.

All verbs of one syllable or vowel if it is a, e, or @, form

their imperative in @ in both singular and plural, e. g., 1
tiban, I do; imper. tabana, do thou; pl. tibana, do you, Oy

ting,et, I see; imp. taq,eta, see thou; pl. tig,eta, see ye.

tin quir, I untie: imp. taquira, untie thou; pl. tiguira, untie
ye.

tin piz, I wrap; imp. tapiza, wrap thou; pl. tépiza, wrap ye.

Those of one syllable with the vowel o form their impera-
tive in 0, as,

tin bot, I wrap up; imp. taboto, wrap thou up; pl. tiboto,
wrap ye up.

tun cot, 1 scrape; imp. tacoto, scrape thou; pl. ticoto, scrape
ye.

tin lo, I buy; imp. taloXo, buy thou; pl. tloXo, buy ye.

Those of one syllable with the vowel w form their impera-
tive in u; as:

tinqut, I appear: imp. taquiu, appear thou: pl. téqutu, ap-
pear ye.
tinchup, I quench; imp. tachupu, quench thou; pl. tichupu,
quench ye,
But if the verb is of more than one syllable, the imperative
has the same form as the indicative, and one of these particles
) I ’

1884, ] 391 (Brinton.

is added: tah, tace, or oc; and these particles can follow all
verbs, active, passive, neuter and absolute. In this case no
vowel is added to the verb, For example, taban tah, taban taoe,
taba noc, do thou. This form is deprecative, rather asking
than commanding.

The pronouns rw, first person singular, and ka, first person
plural, are often used with active verbs instead of these parti-
cles. For example: Nug,ecta na missa, qateqa quibe, Let me
first see the mass, and then I shall go. Ka Sihala na xoLohauh
Sancta Maria, qateqa tin bijh rw qohlem sancto, Let us first
salute the queen, Holy Mary, and then we shall speak of the
saint.

Another imperative and prohibitive is formed by dropping
the first letter of any one of the above mentioned particles, and
substituting the letter 6 or m; as, baban, do it not; machup,
do not quench it. In this case no vowel is added to active
verbs of one syllable, but the simple form of the verb is used,
whether it be active, passive, neuter or absolute.

Optative Mood.

The particles of the optative mood are the same as those of
the indicative, with the addition of the particle tah; as: tin
loXotah, would I loved God! ain loXotah, would I had loved
God!

The particle tah is also placed after the particle of present
time tan, and before the verb; as, tan tah tinw q,et nu tata,
would I could see my father now !

Subjunctive Mood.

The particle vetah is used for this mood; as, vetah tin loSoh
Dios, qui loXox rumal Dios, If I loved God I should be loved
by God.

Infinitive Mood.

This is formed in a variety of ways.

The first is by taking the verb tirah, he wishes, preterit
xrah, in the third person, without variation, and for the sub-
ject the pronouns nw, a, ru, or, if the verb begins with a vowel,
v, au,7r; and then the active verb, and not a passive or neuter ;
as, tirah nu loSoh Dios, I wish to love God.

392 (Jan, 4,

Brinton.)

But if the sentence includes any of those accusatives above
mentioned, to wit, guin, cat, koh, quia, que, the infinitive is
formed by placing first this accusative, next, the verb rah with-
out any particle, then the pronouns nu, a, ru, or, if the verb be-
gins with a vowel, v, au, r, and lastly the active verb; as, cat
rah nu loXoh, I wish to love thee.

{[. Note that if the verb trah, rah, is followed by a passive,
neuter or absolute verb, then this verb t’rah, is to be conju-
gated with the particles of the neuter verb; as

qui rah, I wish. koh rah, we wish.
cat rah, thou wishest, quix rah, you wish.
ti rah, he wishes, que rah, they wish,

It agrees in number and person with the person who acts,
and is followed by the passive, neuter or absolute verb without
a particle; as,

qui rah var, I wish to sleep. koh rah var, we wish to sleep.

cat rah var, thou wishest to guia rah var, you wish to

sleep. sleep.
ti rah var, he wishes to que rah var, they wish to
sleep. sleep.

Another method of forming the infinitive is by taking the
verb tivaho, I wish, and then placing the active, passive or
absolute verb with its pronoun in number and person, as,

tivaho tin loSoh Dios, I wish to love God.
tavaho ta loSoh Dios, thou wishest to love God.
tivaho qui var, 1 wish to sleep,
tavaho cat var, thou wishest to sleep.
tiraho ti var, he wishes to sleep.
tikaho koh var, we wish to sleep.
tivaho quia var, you wish to sleep.
ticaho que var, they wish to sleep.
tivaho qui loXox, I wish to be loved.
tavaho cat loSox, thou wishest to be loved.
tivaho quitihon, I wish to teach.
tavaho catihon, thou wishest to teach, ete.

1884.) 393 {[ Brinton,

Of the Gerund with the Accusative, and the First Supine.

To form a sentence containing a gerund with accusative,
they make use, for the present and future tenses of the verb
tibe, and for the preterit of abe, both from be, to go.

They also use for present and future the verb ¢tu/, preterit
wul, to come.

Both are used in the third person, and are not conjugated, but
are followed by nu, a, ru, or, v, au, 7, of the subject, the latter
when the active verb begins with a vowel, and this active
agrees in number and person with the subject. Examples: tibe
nu loXoh Dios, 1 am going to love God; tul nu rapah ala, I
come from (I have just been) whipping this boy.
{. Note, that if either of these verbs signifying movement,
which are used in forming gerunds, tide, abe, tul, wul, is followed
by a neuter, passive or absolute verb, then the verb of move-
ment is conjugated with the proper particles of a neuter verb,
and agrees with them in number and person, and the neuter,
passive or absolute verb follows without variation. Examples,

qui be var, 1 am going to koh be var, we are going to

sleep. sleep.
cat be var, thou art going to quix be var, you are going to

sleep.
ti be var, he is going to que be var, they are going to
sleep. sleep.
quin ul tihow, I am going to be taught.
catul tihow, thou art
tul téhox, he is .
kohul tthow, we are Me
gquicul tthow, you. are in
que ul tihow, they are i
quibe va, I am going to eat. kohbe va, we are going to eat.
catbe va, thou art i quiabe va, you "
tibe va, he is Me quebe va, they :
winul augue, I come from kneeling down.
catul cuque, thou comest _
ib

cul wugue, he comes from
PROG. AMER. PHILOS, 800. xxt. 115. 2x, PRINTED APRIL 10, 1884.

394. (Jan, 4,

Brinton.)

xcohul wuque, we come kneeling down.
aroul muque, You oi
xeul wuque, they uh

Hxample: Quibe tihon chuitak amas, I am going to teach

in all the villages.

{. Note that if a sentence with a gerund contains one of

these accusatives, guin, cat, ti, the accusative is placed first,
then the verb be, or wl, without a particle; next, the pronoun
nu, a, ru, for the subject; and last the active verb, without a
particle; as:

Quixbe nu loXoh, | am going to love you.

Kohul ig,eta, you are coming to see us.

If with this accusative form it is desired to express a wish,
as, I wish to go to see you, in this case the verb térah, to wish,
is inserted between the accusative and the verb of movement, as,

Quix rah be nug,eta, I wish to go to see you.

Koh rah ul y camigah, you wish to come to kill us.
“|. Note that when in a sentence like the above we place the
subject first, or use the pronouns nak, who, or, ha, he, then the
arrangement is, first the subject, next the verb de or wi, and
lastly the absolute verb, not the active, and the pronouns nz,
a, ru, are omitted; as,

Ahg,hamix xibe gamo chi vochoch, the Alguacil was going to

my house to take me.

Nak xat rapan? Who whipped thee? Ha ain rapan, That
one whipped me.

In such sentences the absolute formof the verb isu sed,

“. Observe further that when we speak in the imperative,
using a gerundive sentence, as, Go call the fiscal, or, Go and
bring bread; such sentences are not formed with the verb tibe,
but with the verb hat, go thou, or, hi, go you, a syncopated
form from the same verb, the « being dropped ; this is followed
by one of the pronouns, nw, a, ru, for the subject and then the

active verb; as,
Ha taka fiscal, Go thou and call the fiscal.
Mi qamar vai, Go you and bring bread.
Ha velegah manteles, Go thou and take the mantles.

|
|
|

=
—

1884.] O90 (Brinton,

CHAPTER IV. ON THE ForMATION or PARTICIPLES AND
VERBAL Nouns,
There are participles and verbal nouns derived from active,
passive, neuter and absolute verbs.

Verbal Nouns Srom Active and Absolute Verbs,

Verbals with the prefix ah. These verbal nouns are formed
from active verbs by prefixing ah to the root; as loXoh, to love,
lox, a thing loved, ahloy, he who loves, or, in whom love is;
tth, teaching, ahtih, the teacher. These are declined by

means of the primitive pronouns, as,

yn ahtih, I am a teacher. oh ahtih, we are teachers.
at ahtth, thou art a teacher. ya ahtih, you are teachers.
ha ahtih, he is a teacher. he ahtih, they are teachers.

yn ahloXoh, I am a lover, or have love. (s?c.)

66

at ahloXoh, thou art

ha ahloXoh, he is
oh ahloXoh, we are lovers, ‘
yx ahloXoh, you a

73

he ahloXoh, they

These do not govern any case after them.

This particle qf, prefixed to nouns signifies, native country,
nation or business; as qhamiy, the staff of office ; ahqhamiy, the
person who carries it, the Alguacil; ahpanYan, a resident of
Guatemala.

Verbals ending in y. LoXoy, he who loves. This termina-
tion corresponds to the -for or -tria of the Latin, amator, ama-
trix. It is suffixed to active verbs of more than one syllable,
and if they terminate in h, this letter is dropped. A primitive
pronoun is prefixed, and’ the verbal governs the genitive,
which is placed after it, as,

yn loSoy avichin, I am a lover of thee.
at loXoy vichin, thou art a lover of me.
ha loXoy kichin, he is a lover of us,

oh loSoy quichin, we are lovers of them.
he loXoy yvichin, they are lovers of you.

Brinton.) 396 [Jan, 4,

Verbals ending in yom, LoXoyom, he who loves; this parti-
cipial is formed from an active verb of more than one syllable,
the terminal 4 being dropped, and yom substituted, as, loYoh, to
love, loXoyom, he who loves; chahih, to guard, chahiyom, he
who guards; etamah, to know, elamayom, he who knows.
Dios etamayom ronohel ka banoh, God knows (is the one who
knows) all our works. In rare cases these verbals govern cases
after them.

These participials can also be formed from absolute verbs de-
rived from actives of but one syllable, as q,e¢, to see, g,etoyom,
he who sees. he following sentence contains examples: Mani
q,cloyom, mani aqaxayom, ri tuya Dios chiquichin eloXoy
richin, literally, They are not seen, they are not heard, those
things which God has to give to those (who are) lovers of him,

Verbals ending in el. LoXonel, he who loves.’ This parti-
eipial is formed from absolute verbs of more than one syllable
by adding el, as, active, loXoh,. absolute, loon, loSonel, he who
loves; active, rapah, absolute, rapan, rapanel, he who whips.
It is preceded by the primitive pronouns, and does not govern
sases after it.

Ir
from an absolute verb derived from an active of only one sylla-
ble; in which case the termination added is sel ; as, colo, to set

some cases, but not in all, this participial may be formed

=]

free, colonel, he who sets free; tionel camiganels qaxtok, a biter
and a slayer is the Devil. These do not govern cases,

Verbals ending in inak. LoXoninak, he who loved. This
participial is formed from absolute verbs of more than one syl-
lable by adding inak, as, loXon, loXoninak. From these parti-
cipials is formed the pluperfect tense, as has already been
stated. They are used like the last mentioned and do not
govern cases, as, yn loXoninak, I am he who loved.

Verbals ending in ic. This participial is formed from the
absolute verb by adding zc, as, loXon, loXonic. It signifies the
result of the action of the verb from which it is derived, as
loXonic, a work of love. They are not much used.

Verbals ending in em. This participial is in common use.

'

tia

vie

1884, J B9T {Brinton,

It is formed from absolute verbs by adding em; as, lodon,
loXonem, that is a work of love. It is not united to pronouns,
but is used absolutely, as tan tiban loXonem, even now a work
of love is performing; tan tiban rapanem, even now a work of
whipping is performing; tan tiban Sihalonem, now a work of
praying is performing, or, they are at prayer.

Verbals ending in bal. This is a verbal form in very fre-
quent use; loXobal, the love with which I love. It is formed
from an active verb of one syllable by adding dal, as, ban, to
do, bandbal, that with which anything is done; and from those
of more than one syllable by changing the terminal h, if there
is one, into dal. It is conjugated by prefixing the pronouns
nu, a, ru, and governs the genitive after it; as, nw loXobal
avichin, my love, or manifestation of love for thee; so, when
an Indian brings a present, he says: Nw loXobal avichin vae,
This is the manifestation, or proof, of my love for thee.

Verbals ending in ol or ul. These are formed from active
verbs of one syllable, as, ban, to do, banol, he who does; q,et,
to see, g,etol, he who sees; if the vowel in the verb is w, the
termination is wi, as, cup, to snatch, ewpul, one who snatches.
They are used with the primitive pronouns prefixed, and fol-
lowed by the genitive, as, yn q,edol avichin, IT am one who sees
thee, that is, I come to see thee.

Verbals ending in oh or uh. These are formed from active
verbs of one syllable. They signify the result of the action of
the verb, as, ban, to do, banoh, that which is done, the work ;
how, to fornicate; howoh, the deed of fornication; lo, to buy,
loXoh, the work of buying. They are used with the pro-

nouns nu, a, ru, as, nw banoh, my work.

Verbal Nouns from Passive Verbs.

Verbals in el. These correspond to those in Latin in dus ;
they are formed from passive verbs by adding el, as, loXow, to
be loved, loXowel, that which is to be loved, Latin, amandus,
da, dum; ban, to be done, banel, that which is to be done.
They are conjugated by prefixing the primitive pronouns, and
require the ablative after them, as, ha banel vumal ri, it is to

Brinton.) 398 [Jan. 4,

be done by me; Dios loXoxel vumal, God is to be loved by me ;
at loXoxel rumal Dios, thou art to be loved by God.

Verbals in inak, This is a past participle formed by adding
inak to the passive verb, as, loXow, to be loved, loXowinak, the
having been loved. It is conjugated by prefixing the primitive
pronoun and requires the ablative after it, as, yn loSoainak
avumal, I have been loved by thee; at rapaxinak rwmal
ahtih, thou hast been whipped by the teacher.

Verbals in ye. These are formed by adding ye to the pas-
sive, and signify the passive action of the verb, as, loXow, to be
loved, loXoxye, the condition of being loved. They require the
possessive pronouns to be prefixed, as, nu loXoayc rumal Dios,
the love with which I am loved by God; a loXoxye vumal, the
love with which thou art loved by me.

Verbals in om. hese correspond to the Latin tus, ta, tum,
and are formed from passive verbs of more than one syllable
by changing the final a into m, and when the verb is of one
syllable by adding om, or, if the vowel in the root is « or a, by
adding wm or am; as loSow, loXom, that whichis loved ; banom,
that which is done; chup, to be quiet, chupum, that which is
quieted. hey are conjugated with the derivative pronouns,
as nu banom, the thing that has been done by me; nw q,etom,
that which has been seen by me; nu loXom, that which has been
loved (or bought) by me; maihax, to be held in reverence, nu
matham, that which is heldin reverence by me. ‘This particip-
ial is in very common. use.

Verbal Nouns from Neuter Verbs,

The participials and verbal nouns formed from neuter verbs
may be understood from the following examples:

Verbals in el. Oc, to enter, oquel, he who has to enter, as,
vae nu qahol oquel pa escuela, this is my son who has to enter
into the school.

Verbals in inak, Ogquinak, the thing which has entered.
These are conjugated with the primitive pronouns, as, yn
oquinak pa hay, 1 am he who has entered into the house ;
oqguinak pe ha that one has entered.

399 (Brinton,

1884.)

Verbals in ic. Oquic, the entrance. These are conjugated
with the derivative pronouns, as, voguic, my entrance, avaquie,
thy entrance.

Verbals in bal. Oquibal, the entrance ; this word conveys all
the meanings which I gave to the passive verbalsin dal. These
are used with the derivative pronouns, as, mant voquibal aviqin,
I have no entrance with you, or, I have nothing to do with
you; mani roquibal nu vay ; I have nothing for its entrance (to
enter with) my bread, that is, I have no meat to eat with it.

Verbals in em. Oquem, the entrance, signifies the action of
the verb. It does not admit any pronoun before it, as, aban
oquem pa hay, an entrance was effected into the house. To de-
note whose action it was, the genitive is used, and then the sig-
nification becomes of the present time, as Oquem richin kahaual
Jesu Christo pa templo tan qoh chi la Jerusalem—Our Lord
Jesus Christ, entering into the temple which is in Jerusalem.

Of certain Pronouns.

In sentences like some of the above, and like, “I love thee,”
“Thou lovest me,” etc., there are five accusatives which serve
for the presents and futures. They are:

quin, me. koh, us.
cat, thee. quia, you.
que, them.*

The following are for past time :

win, Me. woh, us.
wat, thee, aie, YOu.
xe, them.

To form a sentence, we must first place the appropriate ac-
cusative as above, next, the derivative pronoun, nv, a ru, or, if
the verb begins with a vowel, v, au, 7, and then the active verb
without a particle; as, cat nu loXoh, thee I love; gui nu loXoh,
myself I love; quix ka loSoh, you we love.

Tt will be noted that the n of the first person of the present
accusative is dropped when the subject of the verb is of the

*In the future these are preceded by the future sign, «.

400 (Jan. 4,

Brinton.]

third person singular or plural, as gui ruloxoh Padre, the father
loves me; qui lodoh vizilah vinak, good men love me.

Observe that in these sentences the subject of the verb is
placed at the end; and if we place it at the beginning of the
sentence, as in using nak, who, or, ha, that one, then we must
use the absolute and not the active form of the verb; as nak
wat bano? Who made thee? Dios xi bano, God made me.
Nak wat vinakiricgan? Who created thee? Dios at vinakire-
gan, God created me, Pedro woh camigan, Pedro killed us.

There are some reciprocal pronouns, which, although, they
have already been spoken of, must: be mentioned here. They

are:
vi, myself. kv, ourselves,
avi, thyself. yvi, yourselves.
ri, himself. qui, themselves.

They are placed after active and absolute verbs, as follows:

tin loSoh vi, I love myself.
ta loXoh avi, thou lovest thyself.
ti loXoh ri, he loves himself, ete.

The same meaning may be expressed thus:
qui loSon vi, I love myself.
cat loXon avi, thou lovest thyself.
ti loXon ri, he loves himself.
These accusatives may also be used with verbal nouns, as:

oh loXon kt, we love one another.

And with passive participials in on, .as,
nu loon vi, I love myself.
cat loSon avi, thou lovest thyself.
ru camican ri, he is killing himself.
The'particle rij, placed at the end of verbals ending in bal,
conveys the idea of universality, as, loSobalrijl, the love which
one has for all; mathabalrijl, the reverence which one has for

all.

This explanation of what are called the ‘Transitions ’’ is not very full,
but contains the essentials, The other grammarians note some elliptical

——

1884.) 401 {Brinton,

forms. Thus with the negative adverbs ba and ma, there is a synthesis of
pronoun and adverb, as :

bina (ba + quin + a) camigah, thou dost not kill me.

bat (ba + cat) nu camigah, I do not kill thee.

bohi (ba 4- koh +- 4) camigah, you do not kill us.

be (ba + que) a camigah, thou dost not kill them.

In the same way :
mina (ma + quin -- a) camigah, thou dost not kill me.

OnarterR V. Or THE COMPOSITION AND DERIVATION OF
VERBS,

Verbs may be formed from almost all nouns, both substantive
and adjective, by adding one of the following particles: ar, e,
ir, or, ur, according to the usage of the Indians, as mamar, an
old man, t mamar, to grow old; ulz, a good thing, tutzir, to
make oneself good; teu, something cold, ttewr, to grow cold.

Active verbs may be formed from nearly all neuter verbs by
adding the particle icah or egah; as tutzir, to become good.
tutziricah, to make another good ; titewr, to grow cold, titewrigah,
to make something cold.

The particle beh added to active verbs of one syllable, and to
those of more than one syllable, dropping the terminal A, if they
have one, forms an instrumental verb; as, ban, to do, tbanbeh,
to do something with an instrument; loXbeh, to show love
with some act, as by giving a gift. Tipe halal ya tin chahbeh
nuda, Bring a little water that I may wash my hands with it.
Ta ya hun tomin, tin loxbeh nu vay, Give me a tomin that I
may buy my bread. A passive may be formed from this by
changing the final / into w; as, Vae hun abah ti camicabex q,?,
Here is a stone, with which the dog may be killed. These in-
strumental verbs, whether active or passive, may govern. geni-
tives after them; as, Vae hun colo taximbeh avikam, Here is a
cord for tying thy load; or, Vae hun colo tixinbeh avikam,
Here is a cord with which thy load may be tied.

Neuter verbs may be treated in the same manner, though less
frequently than actives, except that with them the form seh is
employed. Actives and passives of these instrumental neuters
are also used, as, neuter, oc, to enter, instrumental oguibeh, pas-

PROG. AMER. PHILOS. S00. XxI. 115. 2¥. PRINTED MARCH 10, 1884.

Brinton.) 402 [Jan, 4,

sive form, oqguibex. Thus, Xoquibeh Pedro avochoch, Pedro
entered thy house; Xoguibea rumal Justicia avochoch, Thy
house was entered by the police.

Active verbs are formed from substantive nouns by adding
one of these particles, ah, eh, ih, oh, uh; as achbiil, a companion,
tevachbilah, to take one as a companion; zed, laughter, téntze-
beh, to laugh at one.

Of Neuter Verbs, ending in e, of more than one Syllable.

There are in this language some neuter verbs, of more than
one syllable, ending in e, as, pae, to stand up, quque, to sit down,
qule, to marry, hote, to ascend. All these form active verbs
by dropping the e, adding the initial vowel of the root, and suf-
fixing the particle da; thus, pae forms paaba to erect; quque
forms ququba, to set down; qule, quluba, to give in marriage ;
hote, hotoba, to lift up. Qut pae, I stand up, tin paaba, I erect
something ; qui quqwe, I sit down, tin ququba, I set something
down.

From these verbs ending in e certain participials are formed
of frequent use, by changing thee into /; as wuque to kneel
down, «uqul, he who is on his knees; pae, to stand up, paal, he
who is on foot. The plural of these participials is formed by
changing the final / into the initial consonant of the root and
adding oh or uh; as paal, he who is on foot, paapoh, those who
are on foot; gaal, clothing or anything else laid out to sun,
caacoh, all the things laid out to sun. An exception is qulan,
married or united, plural quluquh.

From this participial in /, are formed some active verbs with
instrumental signification by adding ibeh. As this is a difficult
point, it is best shown by examples. Qui qotze, to lie down;
its participial is qotzol, he who is lying down; tin qotzolibeh, I
lie down upon something, Tipe hun varabal qul, ruqin hun
pop, tin qotzolibeh, Bring me a sleeping dress, and a mat, so that
I may lie down upon it. So, gui quke, I sit down, ti qubulibeh,
I sit down upon something; Dios nima ahauh, ru qukulibeh
xt tan g,hacat puakin, God, the great Lord, is seated upon a seat
of gold, or emeralds,

1884. ] 403 [Brinton.

Of Frequentative Verbs.

These include frequentative verbs properly, and also distrib-
utive verbs.

Active verbs of more than one syllable, ending in fh, change
the h into la, as, tin gipah, I divide, tin giala, I divide many
times, or among many persons. Active verbs of only one’syl-
lable add the vowel of the root, and then the particle la, as, tin
chap, I seize, tin chapata, I seize often or many things. There
are not many frequentatives proper, with an active sense, ‘in
this language.

With regard to the passive verbs derived from these fre-
quentatives, they are not formed as the other passives and abso-
lutes above mentioned, but as follows: the @ in which the fre-
quentatives end is changed into 9, and then the absolute is
formed in on, and the passive in aw; as, tin cipala, I divide
often, qué gipalon, I divide out, qui gipalow, T am divided out
frequently.

CHapreR VI. Or some PARTICLES AND ADVERBS.

The particle vd is much used in this language, and for many
purposes.

Whenever time or place is speci fied before the verb, the lat-
ter must be followed immediately by vz; as chi rochoch Dios
qo vi Padre, In the house of God is the father. But if the verb
is placed first, the v7 is not used; as, qoh chi rochoch Dios, he is
in the house of God (the church).

Again, in employing the dative, if it precedes the verb, the
latter must be followed by wi; as, cht richin Pedro taya vt, to
Pedro thou must give. But if the dative is placed after the
verb, the vi is not used; as, enw ya chirichin Pedro, I gave it

to Pedro.

Tt has also the signification of the instrument, if it immedi-
ately follows the verb; as, abah xin camicah vi taiquin, with
a stone I killed the bird; but if the instrument is placed after
the verb, vi is not used, but the particle chi, as, win camicah
tziquin chi abah, I killed the bird with a stone.

Brinton,] 404 (Jan. 4,

Whenever the verb is preceded by the particle ha, the parti-
cle vt must follow; as, Ha quix colotah vi, With this you will
ascend to heaven.

In other cases vi is used to convey affirmation, as, Kiteih chi
caban vi mac, Certainly you committed a sin.

The particle ach has no signification by itself; but joined to
nouns it conveys the idea of participation in their signification,
and it is used with the possessive pronouns; as, amac, sinner,
achahmac, he who sins jointly with another; vachahmac, my
accomplice in sin; achbilatz, he who goes with another; vach-
bil, my traveling companion.

The particle guereqa is illative, and corresponds to ergo or
igitur, therefore, then, for that reason. Whenever it precedes
a verb in this sense, the latter must be followed by the particle
vt; as Quereqa ta loXoh vi Dios, Therefore love thou God.

‘|. There are four very important verbs which are placed
absolutely at the end of sentences containing a gerund with ac-
cusative. They are e/, departing, apon, arriving, kah, descend-
ing, pe, coming; and this particle Saneh, or aSaneh, which
means “ upward.”

The verb e/ is used by the Indians thus: ta qama el ri plato,
Take out, departing, this plate; ta waa el ya qoh chupam
wxarro, Pour forth, going out, the water which is in the pitcher.
The Zutuhils are accustomed to add o when the sentence ends
in el,

The verb apon means “arriving there,”

not “coming here.”
It is used as follows: ta bith apon chire fiscal chuac quin apon
chire, say to the fiscal on arriving there (or, when thou arrivest
there) that to-morrow I am going there. Chuak tel apon nu
camahel rugin Padre, To-morrow will go forth my messenger
to the place where the Father is.

The verb kah, is used when one being in an elevated location
speaks, or writes, or sends to one who is situated lower. ‘T'hus,
when one is in Atitlan and speaks of the coast, he would use
this hah, as, tibe qamar hah q,th taXah, they are going to carry
flowers, descending (or down) to the coast,

The verb pe, to come, is used as follows: ta tzth pe candela,

—— ar:

‘i
1884. ] 405 [Brinton.

light, coming, a candle (come and light a candle). Thus the
preacher says to the people, that they be attentive during the
sermon: 7% ya pe yquax, i ya pe yuiquin, tivaqaxah pe, vae
loXolah tzth «tin biih chivichin, Give your hearts hither (coming
hither), give your ears hither (where I am), listen (in this
direction), they are precious words which I shall speak to you.

The particle aSaneh, means upward, Latin, surswm, as, qua
mul aSaneh, I look upward.

The particle can means “remaining ;” as, vu bwh can ka-
haual Jesw Christo, the aforesaid our Lord Jesus Christ; a rw
piaabah can nu tata tok xbe panXan, my father discharged me, I
remaining behind, he going to Guatemala; quere nu tzth, nu
pixa, vae atin ya can atin qoh ba can, These are my words, my
commands, which I give to remain, as I shall go away. The
expression wambey can, means, remain behind; chuth can, in my
absence, after I had left.

The particle na “has no signification when used alone; but
when joined to other words it has various meanings. It is from
nabey, first, or, the first. Thus it may mean “until,” Latin,
donec, as, cat nu chubicah na chicam tiqo na nuquc chavih qate
ti tuker nuqux, I shall punish thee and shall not be satisfied
until I have visited on thee my anger. Tul na Padre qateqa
catbe, Do not go until the father hears thee; qahaok na f -adre
tibiin ru chohmil chuo qateqa tinu kiquih, I shall not consider it
true until the father tells me. Nu qua na tahoon tinw ya
chaue, Until my heart desires it, I shall not give it thee. Tin
bith na ruchohmil Justicia, In the first place I shall tell the
truth to the magistrate ; qacamic na, until death ; qe ta na, pres-
ently, after a while. A boy about to be whipped will say, hu-
mul chita na, pardon me this time, wait until the next time.

The particle bala means “somewhere.” Ba qo vt Padre?
Where is the father? Bala qo vi, Somewhere, I don’t know
where. It also corresponds to all four of the adverbs of place,
ubi, unde, quo, qua. Ba ape vi Padre? Whence came the
father? Bala ape vi, I don’t know whence he came. Bi che
el, or, nak che el? How? In what manner?

Bilanak, “something,” “anything.” Tok bilanak t biin

Hi
Ny
i
i

Brinton.| 406 (Jan, 4,

chaue ylzel tziih, ma qutuba, When any one speaks evil words
to you, do not answer him. Mani bilinak wu bith Padre chue,
The father did not say anything to me, i

Other particles: qabala, from time to time; it may be used
with repetition ; qahantak la nu nantil,thesame; qa ru naht, the
same; go guipe, qo qa mani, sometimes I go, sometimes not ;
mani humul vakan chirochoch, not one time have I put foot in
his house; vave, here; varal chire, there or then; chila, over
there, far; halal, a little; halal chic tiraho tijh; the food lacks a
little, it is not ready, an Indian phrase; halan-halqat, difter-
ently, pl., halahoh qui qohlem ahaua, the modes of life of the
chiefs are different; halahoh que tzhon, they speak differently,
some well, some ill; were, only this; huqigie wa were tin bith
, only this do I say to thee; hugrgic* atin ya chavichin re, or
vae, this only will I give to thee; Aiqucl, intimates a fixed pur-
pose, as, higuil nube te chuak, My departure to-morrow is cer-
tain; kiteih, truly, certainly; chi kitzth vi chi, the same;
kitzih ute Dios, truly God is good. The following are used
with reference to past or future time in narration or reference,
haok, katok, tok; but in asking about past time they say,
chaniqal? How much time? And for future they say, ha-
ruh, when? Haruh cat be? When wilt thou go?

12,

2

*The word huqigte ig a compound of the numeral one, Aun, and the
verbal qigic, from qiz, to finish, to end, hence, ‘‘that which ends in one,”’
oris alone. (Coto.)

=——

ry
1884, ] 407 [Brinton,

SUPPLEMENT.

The following additional material, necessary to a grammatical survey
of the tongue, I have culled from the various MS. sources heretofore men-
tioned.

CoMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

This is accomplished by the use of the particles chic, as, nim chic halal,
a little larger, ki, and atea, as, atea quiwan pe, come a little nearer ; and
by adding the past participles, iqovinak and yalaquhinak, which mean to
pass beyond, to exceed, as, iqovinah chi nim, greater (it exceeds in great-
ness), yalaquhinak chi ute, better (it surpasses in goodness).

INTERJECTIONS.

Ahkook! or akookee! Ah! Alas! Oh! Expressive of sadness or com-
passion, This is much used by the priests in their sermons.

Acay! When one is beaten or ill treated.

Age! When one is suffering pain, as, for example, when bitten by
some animal. The correlative of this interjection in the particle Xe, which
is placed at the end of the sentence, as, Age, equi cam Xe | Alas! TI shall
die !

0, A, Ae, are exclamations of admiration asin the compounds, A bin q%
O mathan re, ete.

Aco! Oh! expressing a wish, as, Aco mixat nuqul, Oh! that thou
hadst come !

Kitah, kitari, kitanari, kitanaqa, kitanaan, queretah, queretare ; all these
are desiderative or deprecatory. The root of the first five is the particle hi
which is used to ask a question in a confident and friendly manner, hence
kiteih, the truth,

ADVERBS.

AFFIRMATIVE ADvERBS. Kitath, truly; kiteihan, very truly ; waigqa,
also; qo, he, waviute, itis well; haquere, be it so ; haqgaquere, in the same
way.

Nuoarrvn Apverss. Mani or maqui, not ; caw mani vi, by no means, not
at all; mahani, not even ; maquiam queretah, it is not so; mahaniok, is a
negative indicating past time, as, mahaniok tikaxih tok mt winol, the sun
had not yet set when Icame. The particles da and ma are used as nega-
tives in the singular number, second and third persons, especially with im-
peratives, as, ba ban ri, do not thou do that; ba malih aque, do not be
faint-hearted. In the plural these words become 0é and mi, as, mt ban ri,
do not you do that; b¢ pokonarigah iti, do not abuse one another. The
form maqui tanaan, x compound of maqua, not, tan, particle of present
time, and an, an emphatic particle, is a negative, corresponding to the
affirmative ki tanaan; they have the meanings, ‘‘not now at any rate,’’
and, ‘even now at any rate.’”?’ The compound mamanion, is a negative
interrogative, or alternative, as, awvetaam pe, mamanion? Dost thou know

408 [Jan, 4,

Brinton,]

me, or not? Avelaam pe nu qohlem, mamanton? Dost thou know me,
or not? Quere pe, mamanion? Is this so, or not ?

Inrerrogative Apverss. The general interrogative is nak? What,
or, What is this? Who? Which? Mak qut wow vi? Who art thou? Nak
la qa rumal? For what reason? Nak peri? What is this? Ba, where?
Ba pe qo vi? Where is he? Balaga qo vi ruchohmit? Where is the truth
of this? Bé and be also have interrogative force, as, Be chok ta vetumah
wi ri? How didst thou know it? Been aa ban? How didst thou do it?
La biteth, truly? as, La kiteih pe wabiih ri? Truly, didst thou say this?
The particle makd is in very common use for the affirmative interrogatives,
well, well then, etc., as, Maki tekumu halal ya? Then, thou willst not
drink water?

Dupirative Apverss. The particle la expresses a doubt as to whether
the action referred to has occrured ; asin answer to the question, Has the
father come? The reply, I la aul, or Mi wul la, means, He may have
come, it is possible. A much used compound of similar signification is
pachZom qa vach, from pachzom, to turn, to change ; it is used with the
possessive pronouns, as, pachzom ru vach nuqua, I am in doubt, literally,

my mind (heart) changes its face.

NUMERALS.
41—hu nrowg a.

1—un.
42—cay roxqal, &e.

2—cay.

8— ont. 60. —ong al.

4—cahi. 61—hun vu humugh, &e.
5—v00. 80—humugh.

6—vakaki. 100—oqal.

101—hun ru vakqal.

8-—vakaaki. ik 20—vahqal.
9-—bdelehe. 121—Awn vu oukq al.

10—lahuh. 140—vukqal.
11—hulahuh. 160—vakeak qal.
1 80—belehq at.
200—otuc.

Y—vuku.

12—cablahuh.
18—oalahuh.

14—cahlahuh. 300—volahuhqal.
15—voolahuh. 400—omuq/.
16—oaklahuh. 500—omugh oqat.
1%—vuklahuh. 600. —omugh otuc.
18—vakaak lahuh. 700—omugh volahuh qa.
19—beleh lahuh. 800—caxXo.

20—hu vinak. 900—oaqal T0XOX0.
2—hu vinak hun, &e. 1000—otuc rowoXo.
40—ca vinak. 8000—hu chuoy.

The numeral voo, five, when joined with the possessive pronoun loses
its initial letter, as, 700, his five. Verbals are formed from these numbers,

as from other radicals.

1884.] 409 [Brinton

The ordinal numbers are formed from the cardinal by prefixing the pos-
sessive pronoun and dropping the final letter.

ruhu, first. roo, fifth.

ruca, second. ruvakak, sixth.

row, third. ruouk, seventh.
rucah, fourth. ruvakeak, eighth, ete.

The use of numeral particles is very frequent. TI take the following list
from Torresano’s Grammar in the order he gives them,

pwh, for counting words. With this particle the numerals lose their last
vowel, and vakake its last three letters, as, hupah, capah, oxupah, vakpah, &e.

rabah, for counting skeins, threads, or things sewed ; hurabah, carabah,
etc.

Za, for counting hands, and fives, huxa, caxa, oda, etc.

quiah, for counting pairs.

mo, for counting handfuls, or fists.

lep, for the same.

q'vh, for counting drops.

bix, for counting chips and crumbs.

vie, for counting spoonfuls,

yacah, for counting large things, as beams, logs,.and weights.

remah, for counting provinces.

q/ob, for counting districts.

qolwh, for counting spherical things, such as eggs, balls, ete.

cholah or ley, for counting things arranged in order,

tzeah, or chiah, or quiah, for counting bundles of things tied together.

chacah, for counting bundles like those of sarsaparilla, tied together.

ot, for counting shoots and stems of trees, etc.

telah, for counting armfuls of wood or grass.

ram, for counting clubs or sticks,

molah, for enumerating the differences between things.

twe, for counting high things, as the ceilings of rooms, or the upper
rooms of a house.

rap, for counting strokes or blows.

perah, for counting paper, the leaves of a book, tortillas, or other thin
articles which are laid one over the other.

bucah, for counting things that are doubled or folded, as pieces of cloth.

q’z, for counting sewed sheets or other sewed articles,

hah, for counting armfuls of woods, sticks, ete.

yatah, for counting bundles or other tied articles.

Leteh or borah, for counting small bundles of grass or wood which can
be carried under the arm.

cep, for counting sites of villages.

bolah or Xer, for counting bundles of straw.

cutah, for counting pieces of sown land.

tzobah, for counting small patches of corn-land, of good soil.

PROG, AMER, PHTLOS. 800. XXI. 115, 2z. PRINTED APRIL 8, 1884.

Brinton.)

410 (Jan. 4,

qvtu, for counting spans.
wad, for counting paces.
le, for counting spaces between floors.
tanah, for counting degrees, chapters, sins, law-suits, etc.
Lala, for counting cacao grains, by scores.
vinak, for counting months according to the method of the Indians, from
20 to 20.
a, for counting years.
may, for counting years by twenties.
mul, for counting repetitions. 2
oc, for counting with exclusion, hunoc, one only, cayoc, two only, etc.
Lat, for counting long strips.
hal, for counting changes,
qhay, for counting businesses.
To these from Torresano may be added from other sources :
bic, for counting songs, words, or blows, as hubic chibia, one song.
* lah, for counting 14 at a time.
patal, for counting loads, hun patal aqwm, one load of salt, ete.
To express that a quantity is finite and can be counted, the word choyol
is used ; to express that it is infinite or cannot be counted, they have the
word ramal; or the negatives maqué choyol, maqui Latal, innumerable.
To express a half, the word ¢anal is placed before the numeral, which \t
takes the possessive, as tanal ru cay, tanal rox, tanal ru cah, etc.

PARTICLES.

In American tongues the study of the particles is preéminently required
in order to gain an insight into the shades of meaning between similar ex-
pressions. To them also we must turn if we would trace these tongues to
their primitive forms, and gain a clear conception of their organic pecu-
liarities.. By some writers these particles are considered worn down verbal
or nominal roots, but I rather hold that this is the exception, and that
most of them are true radical forms themselves, and must be ranged under
a grammatical category foreign to any known to the Latin grammarians.

This question need not be discussed here,, and it will be enough for
practical purposes to arrange in alphabetical order the principal but by
no means all the particles found in the Cakchiquel.

Aco. Expresses satisfaction, as if one had found that which he was

searching for.
Saneh. Verbal particle, see p. 404.

An. Particle to say that it is well. Utzan, it is well.

Avah, or Avahuh, Generic part, applied to any animal, bird, or bee,
such as builds itself a house.

Atza, Enough ; atea qgoh, taqa mape, ‘trae bastante.”’
Ba. Imperative and prohibitive particle.
Benakil. Many times ; benakil nu bijm chaue, I have often told you it.

1884.] 411 [Brinton,

Beh. Particle added to verbs to signify the instrument with which the
action is accomplished.

Ben. Particle to express ‘‘since” or from a certain time; aruliben
Padre, since the Father came ; wu ka hi bem (sic) ya panuvi manitan qua
qule, since I was baptized, I have not sinned.

Can. Particle signifying past time ; nw biin can, I have already said.

Cant or canih, soon; canicabe vacami man chia catgohe vaue, ahora
luego vete ya no estes aqui.

Oo. Particle to concede or grant something ; coco, all right, very well,
yes.

Cohol, between ; cohol hay, between the houses.

Chic. See p. 876.

Ha, that one; also, it is, or, it is so; ha ri, it is thus; also in’ causal
sense, ha nim vi ri Sancto, because the Saint is great; something great or
strong, ha Xih, a hot sun, ha hab, a heavy rain.

Hak, to open out, or to separate things joined ; tahaka ru nakavach,
open your eyes; hakal ouh, the book is open; té haka yaiquin, open your
ears, 7. ¢., listen attentively.

Haz, to shut up, hence a secret, in secret; hazha pa ru wiquin, to tell in
the ear.

Ho, interjection intimating going ; hoho, come along, let us go hence;
applied to the woman who offers herself to a man ; tu ho rt ywok, the
woman offers herself; of the day which goes quickly (as holoho) ; wholo
yan Xth, the day is soon gone; eholoho ranima, his soul departed (he
died) ; hote, to go upward, rise ; cat hote chirth queh, get on your horse ;
hotoba, to lift, to raise up ; hotay, the sprouts of trees which shoot up, also
the descendants, offspring of a man ; enwhotay, my descendants.

Yan, particle denoting brevity ; watul yan, you have just come ; qo yan
xinul, I have already come. Thus this particle may mean both a short and
a long time,

Yeu, part. of past time.

Yehal, part. denoting plurality.

Yben, part. joined to names parts of the body to distinguish them, as
qalqaxibent (sic), ré aa, the water came to my knees.

Ka, part. of direction, downward ; as verb, ka, to descend, mia ka chi,
wibathay, he descended into hell; to tear down a house ; to set (of sun or
moon) ; to diminish (of a boil) ; to descend in health, to grow sick, etc.

AG. 1. An interrogative, putting a question in a friendly manner ex-
pecting a truthful reply. 2. In space, that which is locally nearest, as,
hakiha vochoch ri qo oc chachi bey, my house is nearest the road.

La, particle to intimate that one has not seen what has taken place ; ex-
presses a doubt.

Ley, part. to denote that something is one of a class, hw ley vinak, a per-
son of one, age, nation, dress, color, etc. :

Na, first, in all senses. Hence, as a verbal, to be first, to await others ;

412 [Jan. 4, 1884,

Brinton.]

nare, before me, thee; etc; nach, but, although (7 ¢, = consider first) ;
navipe, or naype, then, next, and.

Naht, far, deep; of time, long.

Noe, a word of disfavor, or disapproval ; used, for instance, when one
counts erroneously, or makes a mistake.

Paki, at once, immediately, tin ban paki, I do it at once.

Pam, or Pa, in, within; hence, the stomach, belly or bowels, as the
“inwards”? of old English writers.

Pe, toward this place, hither; as a verbal, to come hither.

Ta, a particle of courtesy used by and to married people ; as, Dios ca
chahin ta, God protect you; hence, ta ta, O lord !

Tah, particle to express like or desire, used in asking something which
one is uncertain about receiving ; as a noun, pleasure, satisfaction ; as a
verbal, to desire, to wish. i

Tahin, particle of present time, as tan pe que tahin ywoki chuque wie nu
vay? are the women now grinding my corn? Ans. Zan que ta hin,
They are even now doing it. In the combination qataAin, it means ‘a
little,’’ a short time.

Tak, conveys the idea ot repetition. With reference to events it signi-
fies that they happen recurrently ; added to numbers above five it means
a division among many. Thus they say of intermittent fever, hw tak petoe
rax tev chuvih, Y am suffering from recurrent chills. It is also used to form
certain plurals which have an implied idea of recurrence, as, ronohel tak
mul, all the time, every time.

Tan, part. of present time, see tahin, and page 885.

ToSe, an exclamatory particle used to call a person who is near.

Va, a particle of assent, or of intimation that one is near what he is
seeking.

Ve, primarily expresses a doubt, and from this a concession, hence is
used to signify consent or yielding to a request ; ve ta, be it so.

Vi, see page 403,

Xambey, after others ; as, wambey can, he comes after, either in space or
time.

Xe, below or beneath ; we hoy, beneath the house ; rw we che, the root ot
a tree.

q@, conveys the idea of a short distance either in space or time, as, qa
tan tul Pedro, Peter came a short time ago ; qa aqual yq, the new moon ;
qa aqual Pedro, Peter is young yet; qa tan tahin missa, they are still say-
ing mass; qa aqa hay, a newly-built house,

¢
Dee, 21, 1883.] 413 [Allen,
On a Case of Human Oongenital Malformation. By Harrison Allen, M. D+
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 21, 1883.)

T desire to place upon record the facts in the case of a man born with
rudiments.of the superior extremities. Similar cases, it is true, have been
recorded, and in a sense, this history lacks the claim of a positive contri-
bution to knowledge. But it is well to record each example of unusual
conformation, when novel facts pertaining to the adult state, to habit and
to acquired deformity, can be demonstrated. *

The case is one of a group denominated Perobrachia and is embraced
in the following account :

John KE. Casey, aged sixty-four years, one of a family of seven well-
formed children of healthy parentage was examined Noy., 1883. The
subject was four fect and seven inches in height. In the place of the left
superior extremity a small pedunculated lobule one inch in length was
suspended from the axilla a short distance behind the group of axillary
hairs. This lobule retained a slender rod of bone which could easily be
determined, and which doubtless was homologous with the bones of the
normal left superior extremity.

The right superior extremity was a small unidigitate member, bent at
the middle so as to resemble a letter I, and when at rest so disposed to
the trunk as to correspond in length to the side of the thorax.

The humerus was apparently dislocated upon the dorsum of the scapula
onan outward extension of the glenoid cavity, and the bone was thus
held in an exceptional relation to the seapula. The shaft of the humerus
was bent at the distal third so as to present a convexity outward and
yielded a short distance above the elbow to its lateral side, a small spine
which while detected with ease, did not form an elevation of the skin.

The position of the olecranon and that of the elbow-joint could be read.
ily determined. The remaining portion of the extremity represented ele
ments in a single axis excepting at the terminal phalanx. Within this
axis the bones of the forearm, of the metacarpus, and the two phalanges
of one digit could be identified.

The bones of the left shoulder-girdle were small but complete.

Of the right elements it was found that those of the shoulder. girdle were
unusually well developed. Both scapulas were elevated, and the clavicles
obliquely placed, the sternal ends determining the lowest, and the eleva-

*A somewhat similar specimen to the one described is reported by Otto
(Monstru. Tab, xvi, figs. 7,8, p. 188). The condition was symmetrical, the radius
absent, and the single finger was identified as the fifth, since the ulnar nerve
passed to it. The subject was an unviable female foetus, of the seventh month,
Forster (Missbildungen) refers to several cases; references imperfect and not
reliable, See also Anger (Nouveaux Hlements de VAnat. Chirurgicale, 578, 574).

Allen.] 414 (Dec. 21,

tion of the scapulas (through the agency of the trapezii, rhomboidei and
elevators of the angle of the scapula) the highest levels.

Fig. 1.

Fie, 1—Front view of a'éase of Perobrachia, showing the rudiment of the left
upper extremity, and the undigitable right upper extremity.

, ~
1883. | 415 [Allen,

Kia, 2.—Back view of a case of Perobrachia, showing the rudiment of the left
upper extremity, the disproportion between the scapulas, the deviation of the
vertebral column, and.the relaxation.of the muscles of the buttock,

Allen,] 416 : | Dec, 21,

The measurements were as follows :
Left Side.
The length of the spine of scapula .......+eeeseoeee
Jreatest length Of SCADUIHiMWiWins is ss sks teevererccs OVO”!
Distance from angle vo tip of acromion.. 6/7,.61//
Length of clavicle: aan eon iiene inves sis vieeesise 6 O01!

Right Side.
The length of spine of scapuld..ceesesssee cece eveees
Greatest length of scapula. ..s.cscse senses seccsrsoee
Distance from angle to coracoid process. ....
Lengih of clavigle., . scan aes atte vay gee wes ea
Length of SGM. |... aceite ves ee eh cers se LON GON!
Distance from proximal border of exostosis #6 the

BM Bi

B/G
BGO

6.91

6/7, 0/7

Al Ol

QI QI!

CLDOW, iki eee Miler ees wiv eit aie e cllaly n WravevelW.aib\6ip's S06 0.9 9s
Distance from elbow-joint to wrist-joint.........0666
Length Of met pualditey este eyes Weta hese sicess liens LM,
Length OGeecOnd PNM ivenwi eh eeeyricctas scene, Ol,

Gir
Qi

The motions of the left extremity were confined to upward traction of
the scapula as already mentioned, and backward traction of the lobule,
the latter apparently through the agen¢y of a pannicular muscular sheet.

The motions of the right extremity embraced the powerful effects of the
tractors of the scapula, and the flexors and extensors of the forearm. The
shoulder-joint being anchylosed, the extrinsic muscle of the shoulder-
girdle, the trapezius, the serratus magnus, the levator anguli scapula, and
the serratus magnus, and possibly the sub-clavius, were mainly effective in
moving the extremity. The pectoralis major was also powerful. Abduc-
tion of the arm (probably rhomboidal) was associated with marked median
(i. e. vertebral) deviation of the scapula ; adduction (pectoral) with equally
marked ‘lateral deviation. Abduction was limited, the arm not being
carried out from the trunk beyond “an angle of 45°, Adduction on the
other hand was powerful and complete.

The motion of the elbow permitted all the portion of the limb placed
distally to the joint to be moderately extended. At the end of extension
the elbow was distinctly angulated. At the end of flexion the forearm
and hand are doubled up to the median side of the humerus. The termi-
nal phalanx when the limb was at rest was strongly adducted, and a re-
entering angle was formed between the median border of the first and the
second phalanx. When the limb was flexed this angle was directed up-
ward and outward; but when the limb was extended it was directed out-
ward. From this circumstance it may be said that the flexion and ex-
tension at the elbow-joint was accompanied with sub-rotation,

Together with the primal or congenital defects numerous acquired ones
were present, The most conspicuous of these was a lateral deviation of
the vertebral column to the right, the result, probably, of the unantagon-
ized traction of the muscles of the right side, and in part also to imperfect

1883. | ANT [Allen.

ossification in the bones comprising the column. As aresult of this devia-
tion the scapula of the left side was displaced and the angle lodged behind
the wpper border of the ilium. Tt thus appeared to be wedged down. in the
pelvis. A second acquired defect was found in the muscles of the buttock
and the back of the thigh. The gluteus maximus of each side was feeble,
and in no position of the body became tense. The entire labor of holding
the trunk erect was thrown upon the hamstrings which, particularly the
biceps flexor, was on each side of enormous size.

Under the head of Aabdits, the result of the defects described, may be in-
cluded the manner by which the subject could attend to acts of the toilet
and to the handling of tools, ete. Like most persons whose arms are either
defective or absent, the toes and lips become highly functionalized, and
the methods of their use are in this case no different from others recorded.
Casey has supported himself, honorably, as a farm laborer and peddler;
and has, for a period of years extending beyond the average longevity,
preserved good health and character. For many years he was em-
ployed as a driver of oxen. The guiding staff was held by the powerful
pectoral muscles between the arm and the chest. A nail can be driven
with accuracy and force by placing the handle of the heavy hammer be-
tween the arm and the chest wall, holding the nail upright between the
first and second toe of the left foot, and while standing erect on the foot
of the opposite side, he flexes the left leg at the knee. In this position the
body is supposed to be standing on the right leg, the left leg flexed and the
left foot raised upon a bench or stool. The motion of striking the blow
is secured by throwing the trunk suddenly forward from a position of back-

yard traction or extension ; the shoulder-muscle being occupied keeping
the hammer in position between the arm and the trunk. The act of
writing is accomplished by holding the pen between the flexed arm and
the side of the head, the lips being used in guiding the pen. Other acts
such as dressing, shaving, etc , are possible.

Remarks.—The modern method of studying congenital defects, as for-
mulated by Meckel and St. Hiliare, father and son, is based upon the
assumption that every embryo exhibiting an aberrant disposition of parts
is an example of perverted or arrested development. The school Od Ste
Hiliare accepts the conclusions that such perversions and arrests are exhi-
bitions of and reversions to the characteristics of lower animals. *

While these statements cannot be in all respects controverted, an error
is prevalent as to the systematic value of aberrant structures, An exam-

* “These (specimens) compose organic entities perfectly characteristic, amen-
able to law but placed in another kind of regular arrangement. When mon-
sters are thus rigorously determined, I propose to group them after the zoologi-
cal method and to determine for them genera and species.” (Etienne Geotlroy
St. Hiliare, Ann. Sc. Nat. xiv, 1828, 408.)

“An animal exhibiting anomaly which is essentially the same in structure as
a part normally developed in a lower form, may be said to be degraded, and
thus to have taken on the characters of creatures lower in the scale than itself,”
(Isodore Geoffroy St. Hiliare, Propositions, etc., 61.)

PROC, AMER. PHILOS. 800. Xxr, 115 384. PRINTED APRIL 8, 1884.

418 (Jan. 18,

ple in the form above described, of a solidungulate extremity would sug-
gest to the evolutionist a comparison with the foot of the horse; the single
unguis, the nearly straight though multi-articulate axis from the unguis
to the elbow, the main lines of motion, are identical in the two instances.
But it is equally like the wing of a bird, and an analogy might be instituted
with that limb: the extreme degree of flexion possible between the two main
segments, the presence of two bones in the forearm, are the same in both.
Such a method of comparison is no more conclusive than the likeness of
clouds to camels and to whales. We can say with Polonius, such things
are very like, and yet be no nearer in the end to a conclusion than in the
beginning. The real comparison and only comparison which is profitable
to make is with the general history of the superior extremity studied as
a distinct subject, no matter what special form of limb may be differen-
tiated in various animals. The presence of the exostosis upon the humerus
is in this way comparable to other spinous outgrowths such as are seen in
long slender shafts (as in the ribs of fish and of birds), and in many ex-
amples of diseased and perverted action in the long bones of man.

While such strictures are applicable to the various regions of the body,
they cannot be made to apply to the subdivisions of a given anatomical
system, The variations in the muscular system of man, for example, are
often precise instances of reversion to the normal arrangement as met
with in lower forms. In this way the study of minute variations in the
shape of a muscle, or in the distribution of a nerve or a blood vessel, is
more valuable for the purpose of the student of evolution than is the inves-
tigation of monstrous deformations.

Stated Meeting, January 18, 1884.
Present, 17 members.
President, Mr. Franny, in the Chair.

The resignation of Dr. William Camac was received in a
explanatory letter dated Woodvale, January 7, 1884, and, on
motion, accepted.

The receipt of the Zeisberger and Perleus MSS. was ac-
knowledged by letter, signed Edmund de Schweinitz, dated
Bethlehem, January 7, 1884.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Anthro-
pological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland (110-112), and
Yale College (XV, i).

1884.) 419

Letters of envoy were received from the Geological Survey
of India, U. 8. Coast Survey and Smithsonian Institution.

Donations for the Library were received from the Societies
at Batavia, Bonn and Freiburg; the Geological Survey of
India; the Society of Antiquities, Copenhagen; Royal So-
ciety, Upsal; Meteorological Institute, Vienna; Royal Acade-
my and Bureau of Statistics, Brussels; Geographical Societies
at London, Paris and Bordeaux; Geological Societies at Dres-
den and London; Nature; American Journal Science; Frank-
lin Institute; College of Pharmacy; Profs. H. C. Lewis, H.
D. Cope and H. Phillips, -Jr.; Wyoming Historical Society ;
U.S. Coast Survey; Fish Commission; National Museum and
Dr. Alex. Graham Bell.

The death of Strickland Kneass, at Philadelphia, January
14, 1884 (born July 29, 1821), aged 62 years, was announced,
and the President empowered to appoint a member to prepare
an obituary notice of the deceased.

Dr. Thos. G. Morton was appointed by the President to pre-
pare an obituary notice of Dr. Kirkbride.

Mr. Wm. V. McKean, for that of Gen. Kane.

Mr. H. L. Carson, for that of Gen. Humphreys.

Prof. Cope exhibited fossil specimens of genera and spe-
cies of the family of the Oreodontide, and described their char-
actermtic structure and geological relations.

Jommodore EH. Y. McCauley’s colored drawing of a sar-
cophagus in Memorial Hall, Fairmount Park, Philadelphia,
was exhibited by the Secretary, who described the legends
on its cover,’translated by Com. McCauley.

Dr. Frazer communicated a table of barometric levels taken
by him recently in Texas and New Mexico, and described the
geological structure-of the neighborhood; also, specimens of
Maguéy needle and thread; and a specimen of the cheap hand-
made waterproof Mexican blanket. Prof. Cope remarked that
the valley formation was Tertiary.

Mr. Lesley was elected Librarian for 1884.

The Committee on Mexican MSS. was continued.

420 (Feb. 1,

The following new members were elected :—

Prof. Wm. L. Stevens, of Brooklyn, New York.

Prof. Henry M. Baird, University of the City of New York.
Hon. William D. Kelley, of Philadelphia.

Col. James Worrall, of Harrisburg, Pa.

Mr. Heber S. Thompson, C.H., of Philadelphia.

Prof. John M. Maisch, M.D., of Philadelphia.

Capt. Richard Mead Bache, U.S.C. 8., Philadelphia.

Prof. John Ashhurst, M.D., of Philadelphia.

Hon. George H. Boker, of Philadelphia.

Hon. James R. Ludlow, Judge Court Common Pleas, Phila.
J. Solis Cohen, M.D., of Philadelphia.

Mr, Henry Flanders, of Philadelphia.

Hon. Richard Vaux, of Philadelphia.

Prof. Ellerslie Wallace, of Philadelphia.

Prof. Isaac Sharpless, Haverford College, Pa.

Col. William Ludlow, Chief Kng., Water Dep., Philadelphia.
Prof. John Bach MeMaster, University of Pennsylvania.
Lord Coleridge, Chief Justice of England.

Prof. Allen C, Thomas, Haverford College, Pa.

Rey. Jesse Y. Burk, Gloucester co., N. Y.,Sec. B. I. Un. Pa.
Mr, Isaac Burk, of Philadelphia.

Prof. M. B, Snyder, Central High School, Philadelphia.

Stated Meeting, February 1, 1884.
Present, 18 members.
President, Mr. Franny, in the Chair.

Letters accepting membership were received from Henry M.

Baird, James Worrall, Heber 8. Thompson, R. Meade Bache,
John Ashhurst, George H. Boker, Richard Vaux, Isaac Sharp-
less, Wm. Ludlow, John B. McMaster, Allen C. Thomas, Jesse
Y. Burk, Isaac Burk, and M. B. Snyder.

1884 J 421 .

A letter declining membership for sufficient reasons was re-
ceived from Henry Flanders.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Tacu-
baya Observatory, Mexico (110, 111), and the Franklin Insti-
tute (118

Letters of envoy were received from the Central Physical
Observatory of Russia; the Tee ra the Dutch Colonies,
through the Department of State, U. , Washington, D. GC.
January 2!

A. letter vetaalite full exchanges was received from the
Johns Hopkins University, dated Baltimore, January 26.

On motion, the Secretaries were authorized to furnish back
volumes and numbers of Transactions and Proceedings to the
Johns Hopkins University.

A letter requesting information was received from the
Oneida Historical Society, dated Utica, New York, Jan. 29.

A letter respecting the discovery of Penn MSS., and request-
ing information was received from John Lyon Denson, dated
21 Upper Northgate Street, Chester, England, January 11.
The subject was referred to the Secretaries to report action,

Donations for the - ee wore received from the govern-
ment of the Dutch Colonies and the Society at Batavia; the
Geological Survey of India; the Imperial Austrian Academy ;
the Statistical Bureau of Sweden; the German Geological So-
ciety; Fortschritte der Physik and Garten Zeitung ; the Leo.
Car. Academy of Science; the Geological Society at Dresden ;
the Societies at Greifswald, Freiburg and Bonn; the Danish

Academy and Society of evens aries; the Belgian Ac oo.
M. Henri de Saussure, of Geneva ; ties A Academia dei Lincei ;
the National Academy and Geogr aphival Society at Bordeaux ;
the Zodlogical and Anthropological Societies and Keole Poly-
technique, Revue Politique, and Science et Nature; the
Meteorological and Astronomical Societies in London, and
London Nature; Dr. 'T. 8. Hunt; the Boston Natural History
Society, and American Academy of Sciences; the Museum of
Comparative Zodlogy, and Cambridge Obser ratory ; Magazine

422 [Feb. 1,

of American History; Franklin Institute, Academy of Natural
Sciences, Board of Health, Richard Vaux, Lorin Blodget and
H. Phillips, Jr.; the Johns Hopkins University ; U.S. National
Museum ; Dr. Peter, of Frankfort, Kentucky; Isaac Smucker,
of Newark, Ohio, and the Statistical Bureau of Mexico.

Professor Cope exhibited specimens and described his classi-
fication of the fossil Creodonta.

The President reported that he had appointed the following
Standing Committees for 1884:

Finance.

Eli K. Price, Henry Winsor,
J. Price Wetherell.

Publication.
D. G. Brinton, G. H. Horn,

C. M. Cresson, Persifor Frazer,
J. Blodgett Britton.

Hall.
J. Sergeant Price, Wm. A. Ingham,
C. G; Ames.
Library.
HE. KK. Price, Henry Phillips, Jr.,
Hi. J. Houston, Wm. V. McKean,

Thomas H. Dudley.

The President reported that he had received and passed to
the Treasurer the quarterly interest of the Michaux legacy,
last due, amounting to $1383.07.

The Committee on Aztec MSS. reported that they had re-
claimed some of them for publication.

Mr. Phillips offered a resolution respecting the order of
business, which was, on motion, referred to the Board of Off-
cers and Council.

1884. ] 423
Stated Meeting, February 15, 1884.
Present, 12 members.
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

Messrs. Parrish, Ashhurst and Cohen, new members, were
introduced to the presiding officer and took their seats.

Dr. Maisch accepted membership by letter, dated Philadel-
phia, February 17.

Letters respecting missing publications were received from
the Batavian Society at Batavia, the Geological Society of
France, and the Johns Hopkins University. (See rough min-
utes.)

Letters of enquiry respecting publications were read from
Mr. D. Lyman, of the U.S. Revenue Department, and Prof.
A. L. Guss, of the U. S. Treasury Department ; and a letter of
envoy from Col. Jas. Worrall, of Harrisburg.

The Lee MSS.,2 Vols., having been returned to the Library,
the Librarian read a letter of explanation from Mr. Justin
Winsor, dated Cambridge, Mass., Feb. 9.

Donations for the Library were reported from the Geo-
logical Survey of Victoria; Revue Politique; Geographical
Societies of Paris and Bordeaux; Annales des Mines; R. Acad-
emy of History, Madrid; Revista Euskara; London Nature,
R. A. Peacock, and B. Ward Richardson; the Glasgow Philo-
sophical Society ; the Geological Survey of Canada; the Bos-
ton Natural History Society; Museum of Comparative Zodl-
ogy; American Antiquarian Society; American Journal of
Science; Astor Library; Academy of Sciences and Prof. J.S.
Newberry, of New York; American Journal of Pharmacy,
and Numismatic and Antiquarian Society; Col. Jas. Worrall,
of Harrisburg; the U.S. Naval Institute; the U.S. War De-
partment, and Mr, H. Phillips, Jr.

The death of Arnold Guyot, at Princeton, N.J., February 8,

1884, aged seventy-six years and four months, was reported,

424. [March 7,

and the President requested to appoint a member to prepare
an obituary notice of the deceased.

An obituary notice of Dr. Robert Bridges was read by Dr.
Ruschenberger.

Mr. Blodget described the transfer of certain manufacturing
industries from England to Philadelphia.

Sections of the Anthracite Coal Measures, recently executed
by the Geological Survey of the State, were exhibited.

Dr. Frazer exhibited copies of prehistoric hieroglyphs,
found in the Puerco San Antonio, Coahuila, Mexico, 25 8. E.
of Coahuila, not previously described, sharply cut. Also, his
discovery of a granite sacrificial stone, of great weight and
age, lying sixty or seventy miles distant from any rock of that
kind in the region. Size, 5’, 6” by 3’, and 4’ high; shape pe-
culiarly curved; edges full of fine sharp serrations; weight at
least five and a half net tons. A natural ravine cut in the stone
would allow the blood to flow off without overflowing the
stone. The locality isa narrow mountain pass, which has a
history both ancient and modern.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Board of Officers
were read and their consideration postponed,

The Committee on Aztec MSS. reported progress.

Stated Meeting, March 7, 1884.
Present, 12 members.
Vice-President, Hii K. Pricn, in the Chair.

Mr. Lehman, Mr. Isaac Burk and Professor Pancoast were
introduced to the presiding officer, and took their seats.

Acceptance of membership was reported from Dr, Ellerslie
Wallace, Dr. J. Solis Cohen and Lord Coleridge.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from Le Minis-
tere des travaux publics (Annales des Mines), February 4

¢
1884. ] 425

(XVI, i; want XIV, ii, and 97 and 100); the Society of Nat-
ural Science, Cherbourg, January 31 (118; want 16, 87, 46) ;
the Royal Institution, London, February 2 (XVI, i, 113); the
Society of Antiquaries, London, February 20 (XVI, i, 118); the
University Library, Cambridge, February 14 (118); Radeliffe
Observatory, March 7 (XVI, i, 118); Cambridge Philosophical
Library, February 11 (XIII,i; XIV, ii; XVI, i, 62, 71-3,
118); Hssex Institute (114); New Hampshire Historical So-
ciety, Concord (114); American Antiquarian Society, Worces-
ter, Mass, (114); Brown University (114); Connecticut His-
torical Society (114); W. P. Blake, New Haven (114); Uni-
versity of the City of New York (114); Prof. J. J. Stevenson
(114); Astor Library (114); United States Military Academy
(114); Chemical Society, University Building, Washington
Square, New York (114); New Jersey Historical Society
(114); Historical Society of Pennsylvania (114); Numismatic
and Antiquarian Society of Philadelphia (114); Mr. Henry
Phillips, Jr. (114); Prof. Thomas C. Porter, Easton, Pa. (114);
Wyoming Historical and Geological Society (114); Rev.
Joseph A. Murray, D.D., Carlisle, Pa. (114); Asaph Hall,
Washington (114); Theo. Gill, Washington (114); William B.
Taylor, Washington, D.C. (114); J.M. Hart, Cincinnati (114),
and the University of Michigan (114).

Letters of envoy were received from the Philosophical So-
ciety, Washington; the Netherlands Legation and Henry B.
Dawson, of Morrisania, N. Y.

Donations to the Library were reported from the Asiatic
Society of Japan; the Society at Wiesbaden; Royal Acade-
my, Brussels; Flora Batava; Royal Academy, Rome; Geo-
graphical Society, Bordeaux ; Geographical and Kthnographi-
cal Societies at Paris; Revue Politique; Congrés des Orient-
alistes; Royal Astronomical Society and London Nature; Geo-
logical Survey of Canada; Essex Institute; B.S. Lyman, of
Northampton, Mass.; Museum of Comparative Zodlogy ; Har-
vard University ; Prof. Henry Draper; Boston Society of Nat-
ural History; Science Record; American Journal of Science ;
Buffalo Society of Natural Sciences; Franklin Institute;

PROC. AMER, PHILOS. 800, xxr. 115, 8B. PRINTED APRIL 28, 1884.

426 [March 7,

American Journal of Pharmacy; Pennsylvania Magazine;
American Bar Association; Mercantile Library, Philadel-
phia; Haverford College; Wyoming Historical and Geologi-
cal Society; Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania;
Pennsylvania Secretary of Internal Affairs; Richard Vaux, of
Philadelphia; American Journal of Mathematics; United
States Light-house Board; Bureau of Education; Dr. Hay-
den’s Geological Survey; Colonel Charles W. Whittlesey ;
American Antiquarian Society, Chicago; Richard Mansill,
Rock Island; the University of Michigan; Wisconsin State
Historical Society; and the San Francisco Mercantile Library
Association,

A letter from Mr. Jedediah Hotchkiss, Staunton, Va., was
read, requesting permission to have photographs taken of the
plates of the Natural Bridge from DeChastellux’s ‘Travels in
North America; the photographing to be done in the rooms
of the society. On motion, the request was granted.

The death of Prof. George Englemann, at St. Louis, Febru-
ary 11, aged seventy-five, was announced.
Dir ee ’

Mr. Lesley was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of
Professor Guyot.

Professor Cope read a paper entitled, On the structure of the
skull in the Elasmobranch genus Didymodus.

Mr. Ashburner presented some notes “On aneroid hyp-
sometry,” and exhibited a self-registering field instrument.

Mr. Hotchkiss explained his request regarding pictures of
the Natural Bridge, and spoke of the fine photographs recently
made of it by order of Mr. Kemble, 883 Walnut street, Phila-
delphia.

Pending nominations, Nos. 1012, 1018, and new nominations,
Nos. 1014, 1015, were read.

1881.) 427 ( Ruschenberger.

OBITUARY NOTICE OF DR. ROBERT BRIDGES.

By W. 8S. W. RuscHensperGer. M.D.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, Heb. 15, 1884.)

A man whose honest conduct and toil through a long life
contribute, in any marked degree, towards the comfort, or en-
lightenment of his fellows, or the good name of the community
in which he lived, earns a claim to kindly remembrance after
he has left the field of his labor forever. It is good for the liv-
ing to know something of his ways and services, though he may
not have won a foremost place among the leaders of science or
of letters. Even an imperfect sketch of the life of a man who
has striven to increase or to diffuse knowledge, is more or less
valuable, because it may incite others to emulate his example,
and toil patiently among followers till qualified to fill a chief’s
place. Ifthe reputation of a workman is in proportion to the
quality and quantity of his work, then a fair relation of what
Dr. Bridges has done will suffice to secure, without aid of rhet-
oric, the degree of encomium which his life deserves in this
connection. A kind and generous disposition enhanced the
merit of his work. He did much that brought no pay beyond
the satisfaction which comes from doing to help others, and to
contribute to the common progress, His life was characterized
by uniform, unremitting labor.

The details of this sketch may be somewhat tiresome, but as
they contain the gist, all the testimony in the case, they may
be patiently heard at least, if not excused.

The ancestry of Dr. Robert Bridges is traced to Edward
Bridges who, in 1648, was a lieutenant of the English army.
Edward, his eldest son, who was an architect, married in 1692.
He left two sons. The elder, named Edward, married Cathe-
rine Bullen. He was a merchant in Cork. He had six sons
and two daughters. Edward, the eldest of the sons, who also
was a merchant in the city of Cork, married a second wife in
Rotterdam, Cornelia, the second daughter of Thomas Culpeper,
of Kent county, England. By her he had four children,

428 [Feb, 15,

Ruschenberger.]

Edward, their third son, settled in Philadelphia, and, in 1739,
was este ablistied at a corner of Front and Walnut streets, in the
dry goods trade. His place of business was commonly called
“the Scales.”

He left three sons: Hdward John, who was born in Rotter-
dam, in 1786, and died in Jamaica, surgeon of the Africa, a
sixty-four gun ship; Culpeper, who died a midshipman on
board of the Northumberland, at the siege of Louisburg, Cape
Breton, 1758, and Robert, who was born in Philadelphia, No-
rennet 18, 1739, and masviedl in 1769, Jemima Sheppard, of
Bensalem sonnel Bucks county, Pa. He had five sons, Barns-
ley, Robert (who probably died young), Culpeper, Robert and
Edward; and five daughters, Cornelia, Mary, Sarah, Harriet
and Emily.

Robert Bridges was a sailmaker. THis residence was at (old
number) 259 South Front street, and his sail-loft was on the
wharf, Delaware avenue, north of Lombard street. James For-
ten, an almost “colorless colored man,” was his foreman, and,
in 1800, when Robert Bridges died, succeeded him in busi-
ness.

Culpeper Bridges, the third son of Robert, the sailmaker,
was born in Philadelphia, December 21, 1776, and died Decem-
ber 29, 1823. He was trained to be a merchant by John
Leamy, whose “ counting-house” was at the south-east corner
of Walnut and Third streets. He married, February 21, 1804,
Sarah, the fifth daughter and eleventh child of William Cliff.
ton, of Southwark, a blacksmith and machinist, and had two
sons, William Cliffton, and Robert, the subject of this sketch,
who was born in Philadelphia, March 5, 1806.

We are what our mothers make us, all therefore it seems
proper to state that the iron master, William Cliffton was born,
probably in Philadelphia, March 4, 1729, and died February
94,1802. He married, September 2, 1763, Catherine Hallo-
well, by whom he had twelve children in the course of less than
nineteen years. She died July 16, 1786, They were all mem-
bers of the Society of Friends. One of the sons, William, who
died November 25, 1799, was a poet as well as blacksmith, It

é
1884.] 429 (Ruschenberger.

was said that he was “read out of meeting,” expelled from the

society, for the reason that he indulged in the frivolity of writ-
ing verses. If no other cause of expulsion existed, it is demon-
strable that Friends of the present time are not so austere as
they were then. But there is .proof that other reasons probably
influenced the decision. The preface of a volume of “ Poems,
chiefly occasional, by the late Mr. Cliffton,” printed for J. W.
Fenno, in 1800, claims that he was “an expert swordsman, a
scientific and admirable musician, an accomplished painter
and a graceful dancer,” clearly showing that his acquirements
were of a kind not likely to be commended in the community
of Friends,

William Cliffton, blacksmith, resided, 1785, in Water street
between Almond and Catharine streets,* andin 1797, at No. 74
Swanson street.t About this date he seems to have transferred
his business to his sons, William and John, for the City Direc-
tories of 1798, and subsequent years, give his residence at No.
76 Swanson street, and style him “gentleman,” a term used in
those days to designate a man of income sufficient to live at
2ase without work or a vocation.

This outline of lineage, which is purely English, implies that
the ancestors of Dr. Bridges were vigorous, enterprising, intel-
ligent, industrious and respectable.

Both sons were liberally educated, both were pupils in the
University Grammar School. William Cliffton graduated from
the department of arts of the University of Pennsylvania in
1821. Robert was for a short time one of the sophomores of
the University—there was no freshman class: at that period—
and then, for no assigned reason, entered Dickinson College,
Carlisle, Pa., from which he graduated 1824. In July of the
same year he was elected a member of the Societas Philosophize
Consociata of the College.

Immediately after his return to Philadelphia he became a
pupil of Dr. Thomas T. Hewson, and remained under the

*The Philadelphia Directory, by Francis White, made upto September 1, 1785.
It was the first work of the kind published in the city. Up to that time num-

bers had not been attached to the houses.
+ Philadelphia Directory, by Cornelius William, Stafford, 1798, 1802.

jectured to be peroxide of potassium, would furnish pure oxygen

Ruschenberger. | 430 [Feb. 15,

instruction of that eminent medical teacher and surgeon nearly
four years. He had associated with him, in teaching his large
class of students, several assistants. His office was a two-storied
house, on the north side of Library street near to Fourth street.
Tn it were a students’ reception-room, a laboratory and a lecture.
room, and, in the rear of the house, a dissecting-room.

In Dr. Hewson’s private medical school Dr. Franklin Bache
taught chemistry. He appointed young Bridges his assistant
very soon after he began his medical studies. In this capacity
he served Dr. Bache through many years, in the courses of
chemical lectures delivered by him in the Franklin Institute,
in the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, and at the Jefferson
Medical College. This practical training made him an expert
chemist and an admirable teacher of chemistry.

His close attention, habitually given to whatever he might
be doing, qualified him in a high degree to assist the lecturer ;
on tg’ In May, 1827, upon pouring water into an iron 3
mercury flask, which had been used for obtaining oxygen from
nitre, for the purpose of washing it, he noticed a lively effer-
vescence. He proceeded at once to investigate the nature of
the gaseous matter, and found it to consist of oxygen of a purity
of ninety-five per cent, as he ascertained by Dr, Hare’s accurate
sliding-rod endiometer. He observed the same phenomenon,
November 27, at the Franklin Institute, and found in this
instance that the oxygen contained only one per cent of im-
purity. He suggested that this residuum, which Dr. Hare con-

to the experimenter without trouble. He was anticipated in
this discovery. Mr. Richard Philips, of London, had made the
same observation and given the same rationale of the phenome-
non, an account of which he published in the Annals of Phi-
losophy, for April, 1827. Nevertheless, Dr. Franklin Bache,
published in the North American Medical and Surgical Journal,
for January, 1828, a note of the observation of “Mr. Robert
Bridges, student of medicine,” on the “ Residuum of Nitre after
exposure to red heat,”

1884.) 431 (Ruschenberger,

The circumstance indicates his character as a student and at
the same time Dr. Bache’s kind appreciation of his worth.

Dr. Bridges graduated from the medical department of the
University of Pennsylvania, March,1828. “ Neuralgia” was the
subject of his thesis.

He immediately opened an office at the south-east corner of
Vine and Thirteenth streets, where he remained till 1837. He
did not obtain a lucrative practice.. His mother died, February
19, 1839, in the fifty-cighth year of her age, a loss generally
among the saddest in man’s experience.

A carefully prepared tabular record of 2099 cases of vacci-
nation under his observation, between April 1, 1880, and May,
1840, indicates that he was a vaccine physician of the south-
western district of the city during ten years. An ordinance of
January 2, 1830, divided the city into four districts, designated
as the North-eastern, North-western, South-eastern and South-
western Districts, and directed the Mayor to appoint a vaccine
physician to each on the first Monday of January every year.*

The Board of Health appointed Dr. Bridges, July 17, 1832,
the cholera year, one of the attending physicians in the district
which included the Eastern Penitentiary, then at the north-
west corner of Broad and Arch streets. The work was ardu-
ous. Entire nights were passed in the prison ministering to
cholera patients. The remuneration for this perilous service
was very small,

Dr. Bridges was a constituent member of the Friday Even-
ing Medical Club, which was formed in 1835 or’86, and ceased
to exist about 1872. The meetings were held, in turn, at the
houses of the members. The entertainment was limited to tea,
coffee and biscuits. The object of the club was to promote
social intercourse among members of the medical profession in
the city.

He was elected a member of the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia, January 1835; of the Franklin Institute, Jan-

* Vaccine physicians were appointed in the Northern Liberties underan ordi-

nance of May 15, 1820, and in Kensington, under an ordinance of December 4,
1822,

QC
432 [Feb, 15,

Ruschenberger,]

uary, 1836 ; a resident member of the Philadelphia College of
Pharmacy, December, 1838; a fellow of the College of Physi-
cians of Philadelphia, July, 1842; and he was chosen a mem-
ber of the American Philosophical Society, January 19th, 1844.

He was a councillor of the Society from January, 1855;
chairman of its publication committee six years, from 1860,
and served on many special committees.

His first work in the Academy of Natural Sciences was the
preparation, in conjunction with Dr, Paul B. Goddard, of an
Index of the genera of the Herbarium, which was presented
August, 1835. He served on the Botanical Committee twenty-
one years, from January, 1836. In May, 1848, he presented a
new Index of the Academy’s Herbarium, and an Index of
Menke’s Herbarium, works which were long the main guides
to the Academy’s botanical collections.

He was librarian from June, 1836, till May, 1839, when he
resigned. The thanks of the Society were presented to him
for “his able and efficient discharge” of the duties of the
office.

He served as Recording Secretary five months in 1839 and
40; and as Corresponding Secretary from May, 1840, till De-
cember, 1841. He was an Auditor six years, from December,
1843, one of the Vice- Presidents more than fourteen years, from
September, 1850, and was elected President, December, 1864.
He declined re-election December, 1865.

He served twenty-three years on the Publication Committee,
declined re-election in 1872; twenty-nine years on the Library
Committee, from December, 1842; seven years on the Com-
mittee on Proceedings; five years on the Committee on Finance;
seventeen years on the Committee on Entomology and Crusta-
cea. He labeled and arranged anew the collection of crustacea
according to the nomenclature and classification accepted at
the time as the best. He was a member of the Committee on
Herpetology and Ichthyology nine years, from January, 1857 ;
on Physics ten years, from January, 1866; on Chemistry five
years, from December, 1870, and a member of the Council more
than five years, from December, 1869. ‘

a6
1884.] 433 [Ruschenberger,

When the Academy’s building was extended in 1846, and
the extended building was raised and improved in 1855, he
served on the building committees, and aided in obtaining sub-
scriptions for the work on both occasions.

Again, December, 1865, Dr. Bridges was appointed a mem-
ber of a committee to solicit subscriptions to erect a fire-proof
building for the use of the Academy; and, January 8, 1867, he
was elected one of the Board of Trustees of the Building
Fund, and by it a member of the Building Committee, Janu-
ary 11, 1867, on which he served faithfully until the Society
was established in its new quarters, January, 1876.

The official positions to which he was annually elected, his
appointment to several standing and many special committees,
imply that he had the respect and unreserved confidence of his
fellow-members. Among them none was more constant, none
who worked more industriously. He promptly discharged all
duties imposed upon him and, during forty years, was seldom
absent from the meetings of the society. In addition to his
valuable services, he contributed to its funds, to its library and
its museum as liberally as his modest income justly allowed.

As a token of their estimate of his worth, a number of mem-
bers presented to the Academy a portrait of him which, painted
by B. Uhle, an eminently skillful young artist of this city, will
soon be hung in place among the portraits of the presidents of
the society.

His remarks “On infusoria found in stagnant water’
ported in the Proceedings of the Academy for May, 1842; on
“The influence of the contact of copper in preserving human
bones,” and on “Indian reliques,” May, 1848; on “ istimates
of the length of the year,” and on the “ Formation of lithoid
carbonate of iron,” in the volume for 1848.

At the Franklin Institute Dr. Franklin Bache taught chem-
istry, as lecturer and professor,* from September, 1826, till
1881. During the whole period, five years, Dr. Bridges was
his assistant. After that time he did not participate in the

’ are re-

*Dr. Bache was appointed lecturer on chemistry, September, 1826, and profes-
sor, March, 1828,
PROG. AMER. PHILOS. soc, xxr. 115, 80. PRINTED APRIL 28, 1884.

€
Ruschenberger. | 434. [Feb. 15,

proceedings of the Society though he was occasionally present
at its meetings.

As already stated, he was an active and prominent member
of the Academy of Natural Sciences, but all his time was not
given to it. He labored most earnestly in another institution,
the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, with which his career
was so closely associated, that, to understand it clearly, a state-
ment of the circumstances which attended the origin and pro-
gress of the College seems necessary.

A National Convention of Physicians assembled at Wash-
ington, D. C., January 1, 1820, for the purpose of devising a
code of formulas, and establishing it as the sole standard for
medicinal preparations. The object was to have them made
exactly alike in composition and strength by all physicians and
apothecaries throughout the land.

At that period the London, the Edinburgh, the Dublin and
other pharmacopceias were recognized authorities in the United
States. Their directions were not alike. Therefore, as every
apothecary followed the standard he considered best, officinal
preparations of the same name, found in the shops, differed
from each other just as the standards differed. The composi-
tion and potency of the physician’s prescription were contin-
gent, in an important degree sometimes, upon the pharmaco-
poeia followed by the apothecary who dispensed it.

It is obvious that the interest of both patients and physicians
required that these several authorities should be superseded by
a single standard. ‘To attain this end, to establish a permanent
authority in the premises, and obtain for it general confidence
and respect everywhere in the United States, it was determined
that a national convention composed of delegates from the
medical colleges and incorporated medical societies of the
country should be convened every tenth year; that each dele-
gation should be invited to submit to the convention a report
of suggested amendments to the work; that from the reports
presented the convention, through the agency of a select com-
mittee appointed for the purpose, should compile and publish
a revised edition of the Pharmacopceia every ten years. An

1884.) 435 {Ruschenberger.

advantage of this plan is, that each revision represents at the
date of publication the common opinion of the profession, and
the work is kept in accord with the progress of pharmacy and
of medical knowledge.

The result of the labors of the convention of January, 1820,
was the publication, at Boston, Mass., December 15, 1820, ot
the first Pharmacopoeia of the United States of America, and
since, of decennial revisions of it, the sixth of which is now in
use.

The achievement is notable. The pharmacopoeia of every
nation of Kurope is a public work directed and paid for by the
government. Without the influence of a statute of any kind
to sanction or enjoin its use, this, through the force of public
opinion created in its favor, has been established as the law,
the standard in the premises, which is generally respected.

The work is purely charitable. It has been done, for three-
score years at least, at the cost of the labor, time and money of
many medical men without any compensation to the workmen
for their work; and the results of it have been freely given for
the common good.

Dr. Bridges was among the most skillful of those who labored
to perfect the Pharmacopoeia. The Philadelphia College of
Pharmacy appointed him, March, 1847, one of a committee to
revise the issue of 1840, and prepare the report on it to be
given to the National Convention of 1850, the first in which
pharmacists were represented. He assisted on a committee of
the College of Physicians, appointed February, 1868, to report
on the fourth decennial revision ; was one of the delegates from
the college to the meeting of the National Convention of 1870,
and was amember of the committee on publication of the fifth
decennial revision. In July, 1877, the College of Physcians
appointed him one of a committee to revise the Pharmacopoia
of 1870, and prepare a report on it for the National Conven-
tion of 1880.

The labor of those committees of revision is considerable.
Inspection of materials, pharmaceutical experiments and thera-
peutic observation are often necessary to determine the value

436
Ruschenberger,] J [Feb, 15,

of a formula. Hach committee held weekly sessions of about
two hours, and, on an average, required two years to complete
its work. All the institutions which participate in the prep-
aration of a revised edition of the Pharmacoposia, give it like
attention, so that it is not easy to conjecture the aggregate of
labor bestowed upon it. So much care merely signifies that,
in the estimation of the profession, accuracy in all the details of
the work is very important.

About the time when the first National Convention met,
the drug and apothecary business was regarded as a trade,
rather than as a profession based on scientific principles, as it
isnow. It was known that deteriorated drugs were sold, and
that valuable preparations in daily use were adulterated or
made of materials of inferior quality. Such abuses were
charitably ascribed to ignorance of pharmacy which was sup-
posed to prevail among druggists and apothecaries generally.

To remedy this lamentable condition of the apothecary’s
vocation, some three-score of intelligent, philanthropic men,
including a large proportion of members of the Society of
Friends, associated in this city and founded, February 23, 1821,
the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, asociety which was in-
corporated, March 80, 1822, with all legai authority necessary
to establish and support a school of pharmacy.

The University of Pennsylvania had then recently provided
for teaching pharmacy in connection with materia medica, and
conferring the degree of Master of Pharmacy, which was con-
ferred the first time in the spring of 1821 onsixteen graduates.
This action of the University, it was said, greatly influenced, if
it did not determine the formation of the Society known as the
Philadelphia College of Pharmacy.

It consists of active or resident, honorary and foreign mem-
bers. The conduct of its ordinary affairs is confided to sixteen
trustees, one-half of whom are elected semi-annually by the col-
lege. The stated meetings of the board of trustees are monthly,
and of the college, quarterly.

The first courses of lectures, which were limited to materia
medica and chemistry, were given in the winter of 1821-22,

6
1884.] 437 {Ruschenberger,

but the degree of “graduate of pharmacy” was not conferred
till the spring of 1826, when there were three graduates.

The lectures were delivered in a building on the west side of
seventh, between Market and Chestnut streets, the site of which
is now occupied by the Gas Office of the city.

In 1882 the society erected for its use a building on the
south side of Zane, now Filbert street, west of Seventh, and
occupied it until the college was established in its present well
adapted quarters, No. 145 North Tenth street, September, 1868.

Under the authority of the Society, the American Journal
of Pharmacy, which is devoted to the advancement of pharma-
ceutical knowledge, and the advocacy of thorough education
of pharmacists, was established in 1825. Tt was issued quar-
terly, till 1853, then bi-monthly till 1871, since that date
monthly, and continues to be a prosperous periodical.

Dr. Bridges was assistant editor of this journal about six
years, from 1839 till 1845, and contributed several original
papers to it.

The college grew very slowly. But the strict probity ob-
served in its management and the great care taken to select
only the most competent and conscientious teachers, have
enabled it to surmount all impediments in the way of its pro-
press,

Now, graded courses of instruction are given on materia
medica, botany, the theory and practice of pharmacy, chem-
istry (practical and analytical), and pharmaceutical manipula-
tion, by a faculty consisting of four professors and three assist-
ants. The teaching is very thorough. Since the establish-
ment of the school 7109 students have matriculated ; upon
2049 of whom, 28.82 per cent. the degree of graduate in
pharmacy has been conferred.*

Dr. Bridges entered the college, May, 1831, as private assist-
ant of the professor of chemistry, Dr. Franklin Bache, and
was elected an active member of the society December 18,
1888, and, March 25, 1839, a member of the Board of Trus-

*Sixty-third Annual Announcemen tof the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy,

1888,

Ruschenberger.] 438 [Feb., 15,

tees, and also of the Publication Committee, to which he was
annually elected, till 1861, twenty-one years, when he declined
re-election. He was elected chairman of the Board of Trustees,
October 9, 1860, and, being annually re-elected, held the posi-
tion till the close of his life.

When Dr. Bache gave up the chair of chemistry to take
the professorship of the same department in the Jefferson Medi-
cal College, Dr. Bridges was a candidate for the vacant place,
but Dr. William R. Fisher was elected, May 31, 1841, by a
majority of two votes. He resigned the following April, and
Dr. Bridges was unanimously elected Professor of General
and Pharmaceutical Chemistry, May 16, 1842. Still he contin-
ued to be the private assistant of Dr. Bache, till his death, in
1864, severed their continuous laboratory association of forty
years. Dr. Bridges, also aided Dr. George B. Wood im his work
while he held the professorship of materia medica in the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania, from 1835 till 1850.

Besides the routine work of the professorship, Dr. Bridges
did his full share on standing and special committees, delivered
many introductory and other addresses, and represented the
College among its delegates to the American Pharmaceutical
Association and other bodies.

It is related substantially that, prior to 185], the average
number of graduates annually, from 1826, was less than seven,
and that the public commencements were biennial. That
year the matriculants numbered 82, and the graduates 19. The
class determined that the commencement should be attended
with more demonstration than had been made on previous occa-
sions. The ceremonies had been conducted in an apartment
of the college, not capable of seating comfortably a hun-
dred persons. Other arrangements were proposed, but opposi-
tion to them from an unexpected quarter was strong.. The
president and some of the trustees of the college belonged to
the Society of Friends, They are notably conservative of their
customary ways and averse to ostentation. The commence-
ment had consisted in the delivery of diplomas to the graduates
by the president according to a prescribed form, and a suitable

1884.] 439 {Ruschenberger.

address by a professor in the presence of invited friends. The
ceremony was sedate, without manifestation of that sense of
triumph which successful young candidates are supposed to feel
on such an occasion. As many Friends regard the fine arts,
painting and sculpture, as frivolities, things not only unneces-
sary to happiness, but in their influence detrimental in some
indefinite way to a proper observance of purely moral life; and
music, by its charms, as likely to allure to evil ways, to divert
the mind from industry and the pursuit of substantial things,
their aversion to the proposed display was entirely in harmony
with their ancient opinions in this connection. Rather than
assent to the proposed arrangements some of them resigned, or
purposely were absent.

Nevertheless, the commencement was held, April 4, 1851, in
Sansom Street Hall, in the presence of a large audience, attended
‘ by a band of good music. Those most concerned were highly
pleased. ‘The vacancy caused by the resignation of the presi-
dent was well filled on the occasion by Dr. Bridges, who con-
ferred the degree of “graduate of pharmacy” on those entitled
to the honor.*

The painstaking and kindly ways of Dr. Bridges in teaching,
won for him affectionate and enduring respect from those whom
he taught. At the commencement, March, 1867, a portrait of
him, in oil, was presented to the college by the Phi Zeta
Society; and the graduating class, at the commencement, March,
1877, presented to him astem-winding gold watch.

The additional labor imposed by adopting the method of
teaching in graded courses, induced Dr. Bridges, in June, 1878,
to procure an assistant. And in January, 1879, at a meeting
of the Board of Trustees, he stated informally that his impaired
health constrained him to announce that he would relinquish
the chair of chemistry at the close of the course.

On hearing of his intended resignation, the graduating class
of one hundred and fourteen members, representing eighteen
States, held a meeting and adopted a preamble and resolutions,

*See The Annual Address before the Alumni Association of the Philadel-
phia College of Pharmacy, By James Stratton, Ph. G., 1879.

Ruschenberger.] _ 440 [Feb. 15,

expressing regret, sympathy, and, for themselves as well as
their predecessors, “profound respect for Dr. Bridges as a
chemist, and their most grateful esteem for him as their friend
and instructor,” and earnestly invoking the divine blessing
upon his remaining years.

He tendered his resignation in a letter dated March 4, 1879.
At a meeting of the Board of Trustees, March 14, a preamble
and resolutions were unanimously adopted, stating in substance
that he had devoted his time and abilities to a conscientious
discharge of the trust assigned him for a long period, during
which the professors received a scanty remuneration, that ‘to
his sound judgment and patient labor” the success of the col-
lege is much indebted ; that the good work he has accomplished
has its record in those who have been his pupils in the college
—about five thousand—and that he has the sincere thanks and
sympathy of the Board.

At the celebration of its twenty-fifth anniversary, March 11,
1879, the Phi Zeta Society, which is composed of alumni of
the college, created a scholarship and named it the Robert
Bridges scholarship, as a token of its high estimation of his
character and official services.

The Board of Trustees after due deliberation, “in view of
his faithful and efficient labors,” conferred upon him, May 6,
1879, the title of Hmeritus Professor of Chemistry, with an
annual salary of one thousand dollars, to be paid in equal in-
stallments quarterly, in advance, during his life, from the first
day of July ensuing.

By this spontaneous act of benevolence, the Trustees have
shown themselves to be worthy of honor as distinguished as that
which they conferred on Dr. Bridges; and they have set an ex-
ample eminently proper to be followed by all incorporated
educational institutions. There are no skilled laborers whose
work is more important to the community, and yet none so
inadequately paid, as professors and teachers in our colleges and

schools of every name. During the vigorous period of their
lives their remuneration affords them and their families a very
modest living; but it is too scanty to permit investment of a

1884, | 441 [Ruschenberger,

part of it annually to create resources sufficient for invalid days
and old age, even after continuous toil during thirty or forty
years. Possibly better than increased remuneration for these
beneficent servants of the people would be a college fund from
which those professors who have become incapable of perform-
ing their official duties, by age or otherwise, might receive a
moderate pension or retired pay ; at any rate the emeritus pro-
fessor should have a salary.

When the professorship of chemistry in the Jefferson Medi-
cal College was vacated, in 1864, by the death of the incum-
bent, Dr. Bache, Dr. Bridges was one of séven candidates for
the vacancy. It was filled by the election of Dr. B. Howard
Rand.

While discharging, efficiently and most acceptably, his duties
at the Academy of Natural Sciences, and in the Philadelphia
College of Pharmacy, he found time to teach medical chemistry
in the Philadelphia Association for Medical Instruction, to
attend the meetings of the American Philosophical Society,
and of the College of Physicians of Philadelphia, and render to
it valuable service. He was one of its delegates to the National
Medical Convention held in Philadelphia, May, 1847, and sub-
sequently was one of the representatives of the college in the
American Medical Association.

He analyzed the collection of one hundred and eighty-five
urinary-calculi in the Miitter Museum, which belongs to the
college, and made a catalogue of them,

In January, 1867, he was elected a member of the library
committee and appointed librarian. The duties of the office
occupied him daily from 11. o’clock, A.M., till. 8--o’clock,
P.M. In January, 1879, he declined re-election to the library
committee, and failing health induced him to resign the office
of librarian, January, 1881, having filled it during fourteen
years. Then, on motion of Dr. DaCosta, it was unanimously
resolved “that the thanks of the college be tendered to Dr.
Bridges, for his long, faithful and intelligent services to the
college, and that they deeply regret that failing health will
deprive the college of his labors; that as a slight token of ap-

PROC. AMER. PHILOS, 80. XxI. 115. 83D, PRINTED MAY 8, 1884,

442 [Feb, 15,

Ruschenberger, }

preciation of his long services, his annual dues be hereafter re-
mitted.” And at its stated meeting, January 26, 1881, the
library committee presented to Dr. Bridges “the expression
of their sincere regret that the care of his health obliges him to
retire from the office of librarian, which he has held for so
many years, and in which they have learned to appreciate his
industry, fidelity and courtesy. They sincerely hope that he
may find in repose and recreation the means of improving his
health, and the opportunity of observing the growth of the
library with whose early history he has been identified.”

Cultivation and teaching of the medical sciences have ever
been among the pursuits which contributed to the good name
of Philadelphia. The'excellence of the medical colleges in the
city is generally acknowledged. This high character is ascrib-
able, in some degree at least, to aspiring young physicians who
joined together in little bands to lecture and teach the several
branches of medicine while the incorporated colleges were
closed. In past times this recess continued during six or seven
months of the year. ‘Those engaged in the summer schools, as
they were called, soon became trained teachers, well qualified
to fill professorships. Several of the most distinguished pro-
fessors in our medical colleges were partly indebted for their
appointment to the preliminary training, and reputation
acquired in a summer school.*

In the spring of 1842, the Philadelphia Association for Medi-
cal Instruction was formed. The constituent members or
founders of it were Dr. John F. Meigs, who taught obstetrics
till 1845, and afterwards lectured on the diseases of children ;
Dr. Joshua M. Wallace, who taught surgery; Dr. Robert Bridges,
chemistry; Dr. Francis Gurney Smith, Jr., physiology; and
Joshua M. Allen, anatomy. Dr. Bridges, was the only con-
stituent member of the Association who remained in it until it
was dissolved at the close of 1860, a period of eighteen years.

*The History of the Philadelphia School of Anatomy and its relations to
medical teaching. A lecture delivered March 1, 1475, at its dissolution, By Wil-
iliam W. Keen, M.D. (published by J. B. Lippincott & Co.).

Many of the associations for medical teaching in Philadelphia are sketched or
referred to in this very interesting paper.

1884.] 443 {Ruschenberger,

Several retired to accept professorships in medical colleges, and
their places were supplied by new appointments, so that during
the career of the Association the names of many distinguished
physicians are recorded on its list of members.*

Dr. Bridges was elected professor of chemistry in the Frank-
lin Medical College in 1846, and filled the office till the insti-
tution was dissolved in 1848.

His contributions to medical and scientific literature are
valuable, but not very numerous.

His papers in the American Journal of Pharmacy are
entitled, “Chemical symbols,” and “ Pyroacetic spirit and its
derivative compounds,” in 1839; “The manufacture of sul-
phuric acid,” and the “ Adulteration of lac sulphuris,” in
1840; “Notice of Professor Kane’s researches on ammoniacal
compounds,” “ Poisoning by long continued use of acetate of
lead,” in 1841; “Observations on two species of aristolochia
which afford serpentaria,” “Observations on the action of ether
on galls,” “ Report on Procter’s hydrated peroxide of iron,” in
1848; “Hxperiments on the absorbing power of anthracite,”
“Precipitated carbonate of lime,” “Solution of iodide of iron,”
“ Solidification of carbonic acid,” in 1844; “Pil hydrargyri,”
in 1846, and “Southern prickly-ash bark,” in 1865.

In July, 1845, Dr. Bridges “edited with additions” the
American reprint of Elementary Chemistry, Theoretical and
Practical, by George Fownes, and subsequently several editions
of this popular volume. The latest American, from the twelfth
English edition of the work, was issued May, 1878.

He also edited, 1852, the American reprint of Graham's
Hlements of Chemistry.

From 1854 till 1877, inclusive, he contributed very many
bibliographical notices and reviews, chiefly of works on chem-
istry, to the American Journal of the Medical Sciences.

*David H. Tucker, William V. Keating, J. H. B. McClellan, Ellerslie Wallace,
Addinell Hewson, John H. Brinton, 8. Weir Mitchell, Alfred Stillé, Morton
Stillé, J. M. DaCosta, Francis West, James Darrach, and Edward Hartshorne,
were teachers in this Association, Including the constituent members, a corps

of better qualified instructors than those associated in this summer school could
not be easily found anywhere.

444 [Feb. 15,

Ruschenberger.]

He assisted Dr. George B. Wood in the preparation of the
twelfth, 1865, the thirteenth, 1870, and the fourteenth, 1877,

editions of the United States Dispensatory, a leading work on.

materia medica and pharmacy of such acknowledged excellence
and accuracy as to be generally accepted as authority in the
premises.

During the last few years of his life, Dr. Bridges endured
most patiently the constant molestations and frequent pain

which attend chronic cystitis. His repose at night, broken into .

a series of hourly naps, did not bring to him for the next day
the refreshing effect of normal sleep ; and so his physical vigor
was continuously abated, and his mental pursuits greatly dis-
turbed. Butin spite of worry from this condition of his health,
he was serenely cheerful and manifested his usual interest in
scientific topics.

Within a few days of the completion of the seventy-sixth
year of his age, he died, February 20, 1882, in the house he had
occupied with his brother and family twenty-eight years.

He wasnever married. His generous and sympathetic kind-
ness, self-sacrificing spirit and habitual amiability won the
almost filial love and respect of his brother’s many children.
Their devotion to him is conclusive evidence of the excellence
of his domestic qualities and the tenderness of his nature.

Frugal in his living, punctual and loyal to all duties, accu-
rate, learned, unremittingly industrious, rigidly self-respecting
and pure in conduct in every sense, he worked faithfully
throughout his long life, but did not reap compensation com-
mensurate with his toil. He lacked of that self-asserting, aggres-
sive spirit which leads many a good man to fortune under cir-
cumstances in which one of far greater intrinsic worth often
fails only because he is too shy, too modest to assert his claims
to consideration. He was always content to leave to others the
appraisement of his worth.

Without being ready in debate or at all eloquent in speech,
he was an admirable and efficient .teacher, as thousands of his
pupils can testify. They will teach his lessons and thus long

é

J

-

1884. } 445 (Ruschenberger,

continue and expand the beneficent influence of his instruc-
tion and example.

Though he was baptized in the Protestant Episcopal Church,
and was occasionally present at its services, he seemed to hold
views in harmony with the tenets of the Society of Friends, of
which his mother and her ancestors were members. As long
as the golden rule. squared and regulated the daily practice of
his life, the sunday observance of church ceremonies and lis-
tening to continuously iterated inculcations were insignificant,
and, to our philosopher, seemingly without profit of any sort.
The purpose of his life was to learn truths demonstrable to the
senses, Of the kind of palpable truth, which is patent to the
expert naturalist who perceives that the Creator is everywhere
present in all His works, the church rector does not often
speak; and if he did, could teach him nothing. To one earn-
estly engaged in the study of God’s visible works, the attrac-
tions of pulpit teachings are comparatively feeble. To him
doctrines and dogmas of every kind, though he may compla-
cently listen to them, are of very small importance, because he
knows that all doctrines and theories are unstable, and that
the ascertained facts of the creation are permanent forever.
He lived and believed as a christian, but without adhesion
to any sect.

Dr. Bridges was notably reticent about himself among his
most intimate friends. He left no letters or papers bearing
testimony to his merits. A friend who had been intimate with
him during a third of a century, says, in a letter, September
10, 1881: “Few men in this world—and I have met many
who are good and generous—-have ever, in my judgment, with
such self-sacrificing generosity, bestowed as heartily their
sympathy and their best efforts to gladden the lives of those
around them, as our friend Bridges has always done, And the
quiet, earnest and unflagging way in which he has bestowed
the best energies and all the small rewards of his life among his
friends is beautiful to behold. i i e ad

“Tam quite surprised to hear that he is able and enjoys so
much exercise as to go twice a day to the cool hall of the

Ruschenberger.] 446 [Feb, 15,

Academy to read in the library. I am very glad of it, and,
especially, as he will there have the benefit of the refreshing
atmosphere of that large room; and will enjoy the very best
thing for him, not infrequent meeting with old acquaintances,
and always find most congenial topics of conversation. I never
shall forget the force with which, before I was well acquainted
with Dr. Bridges, an assertion of Leidy one day struck me.
Leidy said, he thought he had as much broad and general
knowledge and accurate learning as could be found among us,
and that he was a man of most sound and solid judgment.
This I have found to grow upon my convictions of his mind
and acquirements for the period of thirty-three years since
Leidy spoke of him so sincerely and soundly.”

His knowledge of natural history in general was extensive,
accurate and always at command. He was a well-informed
botanist, thoroughly versed in materia medica and chemistry,
and a skillful practitioner of medicine. Naturally modest,
almost shy, his manner to strangers was somewhat reserved,
but cordial with his friends, all of whom regarded him with
affectionate respect, because they recognized his perfect integ-
rity, sincerity, extensive learning and good sense.

In the annual oration before the Alumni Association of the
Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, March 18th, 1882, Mr,
Frederick B. Power, spoke of him, as follows:

“T cannot refrain from adding my tribute to the memory of
him whose loss we have so recently been called upon to mourn
—-the late Professor Dr. Robert Bridges. His faithful teach-
ings, during an unparalleled period of service of nearly forty
years, will long be held in grateful remembrance by those who
were permitted to listen to his instructions, while his generous
and noble nature, so beautiful in its simplicity, so approach-
able and free from ostentation, had endowed him with attri-
butes well worthy of emulation, and endeared him to his
pupils by ties of affection which will be ever fondly cherished.”

In his valedictory address to the graduates of the college,
March 15th, 1882, Professor Samuel P. Sadtler said :,

“The Philadelphia College of Pharmacy has just lost, in the

|
|

———

1884.] 447
death of Professor Robert Bridges, her Emeritus Professor of
Chemistry, one, who, while he added much to her present sub-
stantial reputation, will be remembered and revered by those
who knew him, chiefly because of his eminently lovable and
unselfish character, his devotion to duty, and his faithful labors
for the institution with which he was so long and so honorably

2.

connected.

“If we, younger men, and especially you, young gentlemen,
just about starting upon your life’s career, will emulate these
qualities of character, we may expect some day, when the cur-
tain drops upon the drama of our life, to have it said of each
of us, as it is now said of him, ‘his was a noble life.

Addition to these just eulogies seems redundant. But truth
suggests that the most tender and considerate of all the testi-
mony of his worth should be recorded, The Philadelphia Col-
did not limit its manifestation of respect to
aying flowers on his bier. Its sense

a7,

, lege of Pharmacy

memorial resolutions or |
x of sympathy and regret was substantially expressed in a spon-
taneous act of pure generosity. Tt asked, asa privilege inuring
to long and intimate fellowship, to be permitted to defray the
expenses of his funeral and to pay to his heirs an extra quar-
ter’s salary of the emeritus professor. Such homage is rarely
offered; and when offered is seldom declined, even by opulent

people.

Stated Meetiny, March 21, 1884.

Present, 6 members.
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.
f

>

received from Prof. W.
LeConte Stevens, dated the Packer Collegiate Institute, Brook-
lyn, New York, March 11.

Acknowledgments of the receipt of Proceedings were re-

An acceptance of membership was
ceived from the Museum of Comparative Zoology (114) ;

—

448 {March 21,

W. L. Stevens (114); U. S. Naval Institute (114); Leander
McCormick Observatory (114); Cincinnati Observatory (114);
Dr. Robert Peter (114), the Chicago Historical Society (114) ;
the Wisconsin State Historical Society; the Christiania Uni-
versity (112); the K. L. C. Deutschen Akademie at Halle
(108, 110, 111, 112; wants 109), and the Natural Historical
Society, Northumberland, &c. (XVI i, 114).

Letters of envoy were receivéd from the K. L, 0. D. Akade-
mie, November 8, 1883; Prof. W. L. Stevens; the Proprietors
of Locks and Canals on the Merrimac river; James B. Francis,
of Lowell, Massachusetts (wants 75, 96); the Department of
Internal Affairs of Harrisburg, Pennsylvania; and the Cincin-
nati Observatory.

Donations for the Library were received from the Hgyptian
Institute; the Society at Stuttgard; the Revista Euskara;
Revue Politique, Geographical Societies of Paris and Bor-
deaux; J. A. K. Newlands and J. Hambden, of London; the
R. G. S. Cornwall; Canadian Record; J. B. Francis, of
Lowell; American Chemical Society; American Bookseller ;
W.L. Stevens; H. Phillips, Jr.; Second Geological Survey of
Pennsylvania; U.S. Bureau of Education; T’. Gill; American
Chemical Journal; American Journal of Philology; Univer-
sity of Cincinnati; C. Whittlesey; Chicago Historical So-
ciety; A. T. Andreas, and the A. A. A.S.

The death of Dr. Alfred L. Elwyn, at Philadelphia, March
15, aged 80, was announced by Mr. J. 8. Price, and, on motion,
the President was authorized to appoint a suitable person to
prepare an obituary notice of the deceased.

The Librarian reported that he had received from Dr.
Brinton the trunk of documents mentioned in the minutes of ©
April 6, 1883, and requested orders respecting its disposal.

Pending nominations Nos. 1011 to 1015, and new nomina-
tions Nos. 1016 to 1022, were read.

An obituary notice of Strickland Kneass, by Mr. Fred.
Graeff, was read by the Secretary.

A communication was received from Prof. Claypole, of
Oberlin, Ohio, entitled, “On the Clinton and’ other Shales,

1884.) 449

&c., composing the Fifth Group of Rogers, in the First Survey
of Pennsylvania.”

The amendment of the Rules was referred to the consid-
eration of the President.

The Committee on Aztec MSS. reported progress.

The Committee on the Michaux Legacy reported as follows :

That under last year’s authority of the Society, the sum
appropriated was expended in the delivery of fourteen lec-
tures in the Fairmount Park, during last year, according
to annexed schedule, to increased and interested audiences.

The Committee recommend that the like appropriation be
made for the present year, of two hundred and eighty dollars,
for fourteen lectures, according to schedule annexed, and fifty
dollars for advertising.

Free Lectures in Fairmount Park on Botany and Tree Cui-
ture, by Prof. J. T. Rothrock, on Saturdays, at 4 P. M., 1884.

April 19. Relation of American forests to American pros-
perity.
26. Plant freaks,
May _ 38. Insects and plants.
10. Insects and plants.
17. How timber matures, how it decays and how to
use it.
24. Natural selection as related to increase of plants.
31. What evolution has done for science and for edu-
cation, and where its possibilities stop.
Sept. 6. Plants in literature and in superstition.
138. Plant life during winter.
20. Stray plants.
27. Bread plants.
Oct. 4. Water plants.
11. A talk about trees.
18. The extinct plants of our land.

Mr. Fraley announced that he would send to the Society an
original copy of the draft of the agreement proposed to be
executed between the City and the Society when the latter

PROC. AMER. PHILOS, 800. XXI. 115, 88. PRINTED MAY 38, 1884.

re
450 [April 5,

entered into the tenancy of the building. It recites the status
between the City and the Society, which has lasted until now,

Stated Meeting, April 5, 1884.
Present, 10 members.
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Peabody
Institute, Baltimore (110, 111, 118), the U.S. Surgeon Gen-
eral’s office (114), and the Society at Winnipeg (114).

A letter of envoy was received from Dr. A. C. Fryer, dated
Elmhurst, Wilmilon, Cheshire, England, March 10.

A circular letter from the Accademia dei Lincei, announced
the death of its President, Sig. Quintino Sella.

Donations for the Library were received from the Acade-
mies, Sovieties and Observatories, at St. Petersburg, Moscow,
Vienna, Berlin, Halle, Marburg, Turin, Bordeaux, Liverpool
and Winnipeg; from the Swedish Statistical Bureau; from
the Ethnological and Geographical Societies; the Museum
of Natural History and Revue Politique, Paris; from the
Royal Institution, Astronomical, Geographical, Asiatic and
Geological Societies, A.C. Fryer and Nature; James Free-
man Olarke, of Boston; James Hall, of Albany; the Rhode
Island Historical Society; American Journal of Science; the
New Jersey Geological Survey; the American Journal of the
Medical Sciences; Academy of Natural Sciences; Franklin
Institute; Dr. H. C. Chapman; Prof. Wm. Dennis Marks; H.
Phillips, Jr.; the Johns Hopkins University ; U.S. Fish Com-
mission; Washington Philosophical Society; and the Illinois
State Museum of Natural History.

Dr. John Curwen, of Warren, Pennsylvania, accepted the
appointment to prepare an obituary notice of the late Dr.
Kirkbride,

Mr. Lesley read Mr. J, F. Carll’s correction of a wrong hori-

Se. —__<——

1884.) 451 (Graff.

zon assigned to a specimen of Hurypterus pennsylvanicus,
found 72’ + top of Pithole well, Venango county, Pennsy]-
vania, which places it 167’ above top of Pithole (Berea) grit
struck in the well; therefore, a considerable distance beneath
the Garland or Olean (Pottsville conglomerate bottom member)
conglomerate. In Proceedings American Philosophical So-
ciety, Vol. XVI, page 621, its horizon is wrongly made to be
above the Garland conglomerate, and therefore in the Pottsville
conglomerate No. XII. Mr. Lesley remarked that Prof. James
Hall's description of this and other Eurypterids, beautifully
drawn by Mr. Simpson of Albany, was about to be published
in Report of Progress, P. 8, of the Second Geological Survey of
Pennsylvania.

Mr. Blazius read a paper on the unhealthy conditions of
certain portions of great cities, produced by prevalent winds
from certain quarters, and on the necessity for providing for
their inhabitants means of rapid transit to and from the sur-
rounding country.

Pending nominations Nos. 1012 to 1022, were read.

And the meeting was adjourned,

Obituary Notice of Strickland Kneass. By Frederic Graff.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 21, 1884.)

On the morning of January 14, 1884, one of the valued members of this
Society, Mr. Strickland Kneass, died at his residence in this his native city.
We realize with sincere regret the loss of one intimately identified with
the local affairs of this city, and the valuable railroad interests of the State
connected therewith, and present this brief sketch of his life, as a record
of a worthy and useful man.

Mr. Kneass was born July 29, 1821. His father, Mr. William Kneass, was
an engraver of some note, and for several years employed in that capacity
by the Government in the Mint in this city.

Mr. Kneass obtained his early education under the care of Mr. James
P. Espy, who was one of the first to devise and suggest the present
methods of anticipating changes in the weather, though from the lack of
telegraphic communication at that time they fell short of the completeness
that they have since attained.

After leaving school Mr. Kneass decided to adopt the profession of Civil

Graff.j - 452 {April 5,

Engineer, and an opportunity soon offered for the commencement of his
practical training as such, under the care of his elder brother, Mr, Samuel
H. Kneass, assisting in the surveys then making for the Delaware and
Schuylkill Canal, and later took part in the surveys and construction of
the Philadelphia and Wilmington Railroad.

Upon completion of this road, wishing to become grounded in the scien-
tific part of engineering, he became a student in the Rensselaer Polytechnic
Institute, at Troy, New York, whence he graduated, in 1889, as Civil
Engineer, taking the highest honor.

Soon after this Mr. Kneass was made assistant engineer and topographer
on the State survey fora railway between Harrisburg and Pittsburgh ; he
then became draughtsman in the Naval Bureau of Engineering at Wash-
ington, and was afterward employed by the British Commission in prepar-
ing the maps of the northern boundary, between the United States and
the Provinces; and subsequently, by the Federal Government on the
general map of the boundary survey.

At a later date, 1869, he was appointed, jointly with Colonel James Wor-
rall, a commissioner to settle the boundary between Pennsylvania and
Delaware. The location of this line permanently and correctly (an are of a
circle of about twelve miles radius) required great care, for the accom-
plishment of which Mr. Kneass’s remarkable thoroughness peculiarly
fitted him. The proposed line was not accepted by the Delaware com-
mission,

In 1847, Mr. J. Edgar Thomson, Chief Engineer, selected.Mr. Kneass as
one of his assistants in conducting the preliminary surveys, which result-
ed in the construction of the Pennsylvania Railroad. He was soon pro-
moted to the position of Principal Assistant Engineer, and engaged in the
construction of that part of the road from ‘“ Jack’s Narrows ’’ to Tyrone,
including nine bridges and Tussy Mountain tunnel,

Under his supervision, and from his designs, the first shops and engine
house at Altoona was erected.

The construction of the road from Altoona to the summit of the Alle-
ghenies was a work of much difficulty, and called forth engineering
ability of a very superior order, in the accomplishment of which Mr, Kneass
proved himself fully capable. We must remember that at that, time none
but hand-drills were used in rock excavation and tunneling, and no high
explosives or steam excavators employed.

In 1858, he resigned to accept the position of associate engineer with
Mr. Edward Miller, Chief Engineer of the North Pennsylvania Railroad,
in which capacity he remained two years, leaving to accept the office of
Chief Engineer and Surveyor of the consolidated City of Philade)phia, to
which position he was elected by Select and Common Councils, March 29,
1855, and subsequently re-elected three times, namely, April 12, 1860;
April 12, 1865, and April 14, 1870, each for a term of five years.

Mr. Kneass’s services in the Department of Surveys were of great value.
The City proper and the seven adjoining Districts were, up to 1855, en-

1884.] 453 (Graff

tirely distinct and separate corporations, each having its own boards, offl-
cers, surveyors and engineers, working without any concert of action, or
connected fixed plans either of grades, standard of measures, or de-
signs of sewerage. Even the records of the old Districts were deposited in
discriminately in a City warehouse, and had to be collected, arranged and
classified, \

It therefore became necessary to establish a general plan of grades, sew-
ers, &c., &c., that would combine as far as possible the disjointed work
previously done. To this task Mr. Kneass applied himself with all his
energy, engineering knowledge, experience and capacity for classification,

Maps were made of the whole area of the consolidated City, from which
the grades were adjusted, the drainage areas carefully computed, and a
standard of size for sewers established, that was intended to be useful not
only for the sewers built whilst he was in office, but which amply provid-
ed for the entire future drainage system of the City.

Up to 1865, there was no record or plan by which the ownership or di-
mensions of an individual property could be ascertained, Under an Act of
Assembly, passed March, 1865, Mr. Kneass organized and put into suc-
cessful operation, what is known as the Registry Bureau. By an exceed-
ingly simple system of plans, and records, arranged in book form, the
information in regard to any individual property can be obtained in a very
few minutes, The record is of very great value and importance to the
general public, and exceedingly usetul in getting data for an equal assess-
ment of taxes, to effect which object the Act of Assembly was mainly in-
tended.

The method devised and employed has since been adopted by other
cities, without any attempt to improve upon it,

During Mr. Kneags’s term of office several very important bridges were
required to be built across the Schuylkill at various points, the first and
most important being at Chestnut street.

In 1857, Councils advertised for designs for a bridge at that street, and
appointed a Commission, consisting of J, Edgar Thomson, Ashbel Welch,
and John C. Cresson, to decide upon the merits of the designs, which were
all presented anonymously, being simply distinguished by the private
marks of the designers,

Mr. Kneass considered it his duty to present a plan, and did so in the
manner described above, This plan was fully approved by the Commission,
and recommended to Councils for adoption.

The design was for the cast iron-arch bridge, essentially as erected, ex-
cept in respect to the width of roadway, and length of the approaches; in
regard to which the suggestions, and first plans of the engineer and sur-
veyor were mot adopted by Councils, because of the increased expense, a
matter much to be regretted, now that the traffic has increased so much
beyond that anticipated by Councils, but foreseen by Mr. Kneass.

This is believed to have been the first cast-iron arch bridge constructed
in this country.

Graft.] 454 [April 5

The location of the bridge, and particularly its western abutment and
approaches, presented some difficulties of construction, but were believed
to have been fully guarded, and at the time considered by the board of
commissioners and all connected with the work as ample to insure its per-
manency.

In 1866, a commission was appointed by an Act of Assembly to build
a bridge across the Schuylkill at South street, under the general supervis-
ion of Mr, Kneass, as Chief Engineer and Surveyor. The plans received
from a number of bridge builders were referred by the commission to Mr.
Kneass, who reported upon their relative merits, and recommended that sub-
mitted by John W. Murphy, with certain important modifications ; among
them the substitution of iron girders and cast-iron piers for the stone and
brick arches over the marsh on the west side of the river. These suggestions
were at first fully approved by the commission, but by subsequent action
his advice was neglected, and the erection of the brick arches which he
had condemned, and which have since failed, show their error in not
being guided by the Chief Engineer and Surveyor,

In April, 1869, under direction of Councils, plans of a bridge were
called for at Powelton avenue, or Bridge street. Mr. Kneass recommended
the site of the old wire suspension bridge at Callowhill street, and a
double roadway truss bridge. The general plans for such a structure were
approved October, 1868, but owing to the tardy action of Councils in au-
thorizing a loan, and making the appropriation, the contracts for the
bridge were not fully entered into, and the work commenced, until after
he had resigned his position ; but the original designs were fully carried
out by his successor.

During the war, in 1862, in company with the late Colonel C. M. Eakin,
he was engaged in making reconnoissance of the military approaches to
the city, extending along the Susquehanna river, from Duncan’s Island
to Havre de Grace. The work in the field and accompanying maps were
highly useful at the time of Lee’s last raid into Pennsylvania. This report,
with the maps, are now deposited in the office of the Department of Sur-
veys.

Mr. Kneass built the first street passenger road (the Fifth and Sixth or
Frankford and Southwark) put in operation in this city, and then devised
and established the form of tram rail, now used on all similar roads in this
country. He subsequently acted as chief engineer of a number of the pas-
senger roads of the city.

In 1871, Mr. Kneass was selected as one of two engineers to make a sur -
vey, and report upon the best means of draining or culverting Jones
Falls, Baltimore, Md.

During Mr. Kneass term of office he was officially one of the Board ot
Jommissioners of Fairmount Park, and rendered essential service in that
capacity; his knowledge of the ground covered by the Park and its sur-
roundings being very useful.

April 12, 1872, Mr. Kneass resigned his position as Chief Engineer and

1884] 455 [Lesley.

Surveyor to accept the post of assistant to President J. Edgar Thomson,
of the Pennsylvania Railroad, and subsequently occupied the same posi-
tion under Thomas A, Scott, and Mr. George B. Roberts, the present
President. In connection with this office he served as President of the fol-
lowing companies, viz.:

Belvidere and Delaware Railroad Co.

Jolumbia and Port Deposit Railroad Oo,

Freehold and Jamesburg Agricultural Railroad Co.

Lewisburg and Tyrone Railroad Co.

Mifflin and Centre County Railroad Co,

Philadelphia and Trenton Railroad Co,

Pomeroy and Newark Railroad Co,

Philadelphia and Long Branch Railroad Co.

River Front Railroad Co.

New Jersey Warehouse and Guarantee Co.

Cressons Springs Company.

He was also a Director in forty-four of the companies identified with
the Pennsylvania Railroad.

Mr, Kneass was a member of the American Philosophical Society, the
Franklin Institute, the Historical Society, the American Society of Civil
Engineers, and the Engineers’ Club of Philadelphia, of which Club he was
President during the year 1881.

He was one of the early members of the Union League, of this city, and
one of its Board of Directors from December, 1879, to December, 1883.

Mr. Kneass was married, in 1853, to Margaretta Sybilla, granddaughter
of the Hon, George Bryan, of the Supreme Court of Pennsylvania.

Mr. Kneass was a sincere Christian, a member of the Seventh Presby-
terian Church ; in 1856 was elected a member of its Board of Trustees ‘
acting as Secretary until 1872, when he became President. His principles
of honor were of the highest character, always just and impartial ; asa pub-
lic officer, most carefully guarding the interests of his employers, whilst
at the same time he was mindful of the rights of employés. A warm and
reliable friend, kind and generous, his sound judgment caused him to be
looked up to by those requiring his advice. His manner was courteous
to all, inspiring respect from those with whom he was associated.

Note on a possible Geographical Meaning for the Set Griffin. By J. P. Lesley.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, Jan. 4th, 1884.)

This chimerical animal sits on his haunches, with ears and tail erect, his
breast and fore legs being vertical ; his back slopes at 45°, and the end of
his vertical straight tail is on a level with his head, so that the whole
figure resembles a capital Roman letter N.

ie
Lesley.] 456 [April 5

There is nothing peculiar about the animal except his ears and tail. He
is evidently a jackal, fox or dog. But his ears are very long, stiff and
straight in the air, diverging; and his rod-like tail is forked, at the end.
He is usually called a grifin; by some a girajfe.

Set was the genius of destruction and mischief, in some radical way con-
nected with the sea, and I believe was the demon of the Red sea He was
the demon of the desert also. The Red sea is the sea of the desert lying
between the Lybian and Arabian deserts. Egyptologists are familiar with
the varying history of the religious worship of this deity, its opposition to
the systems of Nile worship and Osiris worship, and its later fusion with
the Sutech-Baal worship of the Syrian immigrants.

I wish to point out a plausible geographical explanation of the original
idea of Set, derived from the shape of his ideograph.

In hieroglyphic inscriptions running from left to right, the animal sits
facing the west, his back slopes south-east, and his ears are often portrayed
not only diverging but pointing a little forward, a little west of the verti-
cal. I fancy that a representation of the Red sea, with its two gulfs of
Suez and Akabah, was intended ; and that its tail was meant to represent
the Persian gulf, forked to represent the Euphrates and Tigris rivers.

A forked vertical tail to an animal so simply constructed in the ordinary
shape of a jackal was certainly a most extraordinary freak of fancy, if
there lay no hidden meaning behind the design. It cannot be objected
that the old Egyptians were not good geographers. The orientation of the
pyramids in the fourth dynasty, and the expedition of Hannu to Punt, in
the 11th or first Theban dynasty, are in evidenee to the contrary. But it is
a question how early the Egyptians knew Mesopotamia or Chalde well
enough to represent its two rivers (the rivals of their Nile) by the fork of
a tail to their ocean deity, or otherwise. The god Set appears to have been
worshiped by the mother of the builder of the first pyramid. The cam-
paign of Kedarluomer was a comparatively late event, probably subse
quent to the 12th dynasty ; but it suggests similar movements on a less
heroic scale in much earlier days; and no one has yet made out the direct.
tion from which the pyramid builders came to take, possession of Egypt.
It is evident that they introduced a foreign Ra, and Hor worship ; but

. whether they brought with them.Hathor and Set, or found them in Egypt

is not known.

I think the Ata-Teta-nomenclature of the very first dynasty is good
evidence that the pre-pyramid rulers had come from Yemen ; but the
pyramid builders would more likely come in from Syria, and stop at
Memphis. If so, they would undoubtedly be familiar to someextent with
Mesopotamia, if only through wandering merchants, or, if there were none
such, through that transmission of information from region to region which
has characterized all ages.

ee

1884.] 457
Stated Meeting, April 18, 1884.
Present, 12 members.
President, Mr, FRALEY, in the Chair.

Mr. Vaux was introduced and took his seat.

Letters of acknowledgment were read from the Vienna Cen
tral Institute for Meteorology (113), Royal Danish Society
(112), Yale College (114), Vassar Bros. Institute (114), Mary-
land Historical Society (114), and the Franklin Institute (du-
plicate numbers of their Journal).

Donations for the Library were received from the Heyptian
Institute ; the Geological Survey of India; the Imperial Bo-
tanical Garden, St. Petersburg; the Royal Academy, Bruxelles;
R. Accademia dei Lincei, Archives of the Chamber of Depu-
ties, Rome; Society of Natural Sciences, at Pisa; Société de
Geographie, Annales des Mines, and Revue Politique; Socié'é
de Géographia Commerciale; Journal of Forestry and London
Nature; Robert Atkinson, LL.D., Dublin; Canadian Institute ;
Boston Society of Natural History; American Journal of
Pharmacy, Engineers’ Club, A. E. Foote, Persifor Frazer and
Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; Johns Hopkins University ;
U. 8. Naval Institute; U. S. Department of the Interior;
Chicago Historical Society, American Antiquarian, and Wil-
liam Bross, of Chicago.

A letter from Mr. William Brooke Rawle, Secretary of the
Historical Society of Pennsylvania, to the President of the
American Philosophical Society, dated April 17, 1884, was
read, explaining the delay in returning the Penn and Logan
Correspondence MS&., loaned to the Historical Society April
18, 1879, and requesting permission to keep them a short time
longer for the copyist. On motion, the request was granted.

Mr. Phillips having prepared a Register of written com-
munications printed in the Proceedings of the American Philo-
sophical Society, Vols. I to XX, inclusive, it was, on motion,
ordered to be printed.

PROC, AMER, PHILOS. 800, XxI. 115, 8F, PRINTED MAY 12, 1884.

458 [April 18, 1884.

‘Photodynamic Notes, No. IX,” was communicated by P.
E. Chase.

Extracts from a report on the Hams Fork coals of Wyo-
ming Territory, by P. W.Sheafer, were read by the Secretary.

Mr. Lesley exhibited # model of the Nittany valley and
| Bald Eagle mountain, east of Tyrone City, Pa., made by Mr.
| Hi. B. Harden, from his own surveys.

| Also a model of the Jones’ iron ore mine in Berks county,
| by J. H. and H. B. Harden, after their own surveys.

Dr. TS. Hunt gave an account of his examination of this
and other like iron ore mines in Pennsylvania, assigning them
all to the horizon of Prof, H. D. Rogers’ Primal slates, although
they lie in immediate contact with the Triassic rocks,

Dr. Frazer described the ambiguity of data respecting their

true horizon, with facts to prove that while some of the mines
(as at Dillsburg in York county) penetrate the Trias, these
may be merely the redeposited detritus of more extensive \

i Primal Slate iron ores.

| The President, to whom the resolution on a change in the
i Order of Business Rules had been referred, reported an emenda-
tion of it, which was laid on the table for consideration at the
i next meeting.

New members elected :—

Richard L. Ashhurst, of Philadelphia. |
Samuel Dickinson, of Philadelphia. |
Rey. Joseph I’, Garrison, M.D., of Camden, N. J. - 4
John R. Baker, of Philadelphia.

| Prof. Kdmund J. James, of the University of Pennsylvania

i Wharton Barker, of Philadelphia.

James H. Hutchinson, M.D., of Philadelphia.

} Francis Jordan, Jr., of Philadelphia. |
i Herbert Welsh, of Philadelphia.

i Prof. Henry 8. Frieze, of the University of Michigan.

i Francis Wharton, LL.D., of Philadelphia. |
| 7 |
| a

EQ
April 18, 1884.] 459 {Branner,

The Course and Growth of the Fibro- Vascular Bundles in Palms. By John

Casper Branner, B. S.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 19, 1883.)

The classification of phenogamous plants as endogens and exogens was
based upon the theory of the supposed course and development of the
fibro-vascular bundles in.the stem of the palm, That a question of so
much importance botanically has received no more careful attention, is
probably due to the fact that the original theory of endogenous growth
was considered so simple, satisfactory, and self-evident from a transection
of a palm trunk, that its very simplicity wasan impediment to investigation.

Jomparatively few Botanists have given especial attention to the subject
of the structure of the palm stem, and those who have done so, have en-
countered so many difficulties in obtaining proper material,* and in
getting satisfactory results from material to be had, that our certain knowl-
edge upon the origin and course of the fibro-vascular bundles is still con-
fused, and the theories and explanations of growth unsatisfactory and
even perplexing. The best observers failed to grasp the whole subject,
while others have given us masses of useless, irrelevant, and erroneous
matter with only here and there a useful fact.. From such results it is so
difficult to select that which is useful, that it is simpler to leave the whole
to one side and do the work all over from the beginning.

The difficulty, almost impossibility, of tracing the course of the fibro-
vascular bundles in the hard, complex palm stem, has added not a little to
the uncertainty and doubt that every one has felt who has advanced a
theory of growth, or tried to prove their direction by actual dissection.

The peculiar structure of the trunk of the palm was mentioned about
300 B. C., by Theophrastus in his Historia Plantarum, Bk. I., Chap. LX.
In the sixteenth century, Rumphius, French Consul on the Dutch Ts-
land of Amboyna, called attention to the same point, and in the seven-
teenth century his observations were confirmed by those of P. Labat, in
the West Indies, and also’ by those of Desfontaines, made in Tunis and
Algiers.

As a botanical question it may be said to have been opened by Desfon-
taines, member of the French Academy of Sciences, who, while he pro:
pounded a theory, personally took very little part in the discussion he had
raised.| A general statement of his theory given by Mirbelt is sufficient for
present purposes. In the “Fragment d’un voyage dans les Régences de
Tunis et d’Alger, fait de 1783 & 1786,” p. 290, Desfontaines says: ‘La

* Mirbel went to Africa to study the structure of the date palm, but even there
found it almost impossible to obtain a grown one, and was about to abandon
his work when a gentleman gave him a specimen.

t His views were published in the ‘ Mémoires de l’Institut National,” Vol J.,
1708, pp. 478-602.

{ Comptes Rendus de l’ Académie des,Sciences, 1843, Vol, I., June 12.

Branner.] 460 {April 18,

moelle des Dattiers est placées dans l’interval des fibres qui vont toujours
en se serrant du centre & la circonférence, en sens contraire des autres
arbres, et elles ne sont pas placées par couches comme j’ai en mille fois
Voccasion de l’observer sur des troncs coupées.”’

Although Desfontaines kept comparatively quiet upon the subject,
pupils of his, and especially Daubenton, took up his theory, and did all in
their power to give it general acceptance in the scientific world. We know
how successful they were, for, in 1819, de Candolle published the classifica-
tion in which all phenogamous plants were divided into endogens and ex-
ogens. This classification was based upon the theory of Desfontaines, and,
after its publication, was accepted without question of importance up to
1824, when Hugo,von Mohl published his ‘‘De Structura Palmarum.’’
Previous to Von Mohl, however, Moldenhawer had denied the theory of
Desfontaines. As stated by Mirbel,* this theory of Moldenhawer was, that
the fibro vascular bundles in monocotyledons take the place of the woody
layer in dicotyledons, and that the lignification begins at the centre, and
gradually approaches the circumference. If Mirbel’s be a true statement
of Moldenhawer’s theory, I see no reason for considering it of much im-
portance, as it was only proposing to replace one error by another,

The next work upon palm structure is that of Hugo von Mohl, published
in 1824, as an introduction to Dr, OC. F. P. von Martius’ “ Genera et Spe-
cies Palmarum.’’+ Von Mohl’s work was done so carefully and conscien-
tiously that although his theories have been attacked, and more or less
modified by Meneghini and Mirbel, they have been generally and justly
accepted as the best, if not the true ones, up to the present time. And,
however much one may disagree with Yon Mohl’s conclusions, he cannot
help feeling that his work would have been more thorough and more sat-
isfactory if he had had more extended opportunities for observation. He
admits that he had only young specimens, and portions of full-grown
palms to work upon,} and any one who has tried to investigate this sub-
ject, can appreciate the difficulty or impossibility of demonstrating any-
thing satisfactorily in a short section of a mature trunk, and may well
wonder that Von Mohl came so near the truth with such unsatisfactory
material from which to gather his facts and draw his conclusions.
Writers upon pa!m structure are continually referring to the difficulty of
dissection and investigation, and in the literature of the subject we find
them admitting their inability to make out certain points$ on account of
the impossibility of following the bundles,

Next after Von Mohl came Meneghini in his ‘‘Recherche sulla Strut-
tura,”’ etc.,|| published in 1836, and followed in 1843 by more recent
observations, under the title of ‘‘Intorno alla Struttura,’’ etc. ||

*Comptes Rendus de l’Acad. des Sel., 1848, Vol, I., p, 1216,
+See under Von Moh! in literature at end,

{V. Ray Society, 1849, pp. 73-77.

# Ray Society, 1849, p. 85.

| V. literature at end, under Meneghini,

1884.] 461 {Branner.

In 1839 the French Academy of Sciences sent out one of its members,
M. C. F. B. Mirbel, to Africa for the purpose of investigating the structure
and manner of development of the date palm, and in 1843 the results ot
Mirbel’s work were given to the Academy.* The following year Mirbel
contributed a paper on the structure of Dracena australis, in which he also
referred to the question of palm structure.| Contributions to the subject
were made by Lestiboudoist in 1840, and by Unger§ in the same year.

In 1845 Dr, C. F. P. Von Martius gave a statement of his theories upon
the subject. Sachs, in his text-book4 refers to Nigeli,** and Millar-
det** as authorities upon the direction of the fibro-vascular bundles, but
there is nothing in his own explanations to lead one to suppose that these
writers differed materially from Von Mohl.

These are the names of the principal contributors to the literature, and
since Von Mohl published his appendix in reply to Mirbel and Meneghini
in 1845, it will be seen that little or nothing has been done in the way of
original investigation. |+

I will now briefly restate the theories held by the principal investigators
in regard to the more important characters of palm structure.

First, we have the theory of Desfontaines, Daubenton and de Candolle,
which prevailed up to 1824, and which has scarcely yet been completely
eradicated from text-books on botany .{{ This was the theory of endogenous
or inward growth. It held that the inner fibro-vascular bundles in a palm
trunk ran to the new fronds, and the outer ones to the old. This theory
was probably largely due to the fact, that in a transection of a palm trunk
the outer bundles are hard and bony, while the inner ones are tender, and
generally of a lighter color. Considering the state of botanical knowledge
at the time this theory originated, it was perhaps a natural conclusion to
draw from so limited an investigation of the subject. A hemisection of a
palm trunk, as they understood it, would be represented diagrammatically
by fig. I., and a transection by fig. II. Fig. II. has the fibro-vascular
bundles displayed just as we find them in fact, the softer and lighter-col-
ored ones through the centre, aud the hard bony ones next the periphery.
This crowded condition of the outer bundles was supposed to be the result
of the growth of the new bundles at the top of the trunk, which pressed

*Comptes Rendus de 1l’Acad., 1848, Vol. I., p. 1218.

+t Comptes Rendus de l’Acad., 1844, Vol, II... p. 689.

+‘ Etudes sur lV Anatomie et le Phystologie des Végétaux.”’

2" Ueber den Bau und das Wachstum des Dicotyledonstammes,”’ 1840, p. 85.

| Comptes Rendus de l’Acad., 1845, Vol. I., p. 1033.

q{ Oxford ed., 1875, p. 552.

*k'V.. literature at end.

tt Dr. Gray refers (Text-Book, 6th ed., 1879, p. 71, foot note) to a memoir of recent
date by Guilland: “ Recherches sur l’Anatomie Comparée et Je Developpement
des Tissus de la Tige dans les Monocotyledones.” Ann, Sci. Nat., Ser. 6, V., 1-176,
1877. I have not seen this work,

tt Dr, Gray says that the word “endogenous” is still retained for the purpose
of indicating a peculiar stem structure,

Branner,} 462 (April 18,

them out, and packed them closely together. This was also supposed to
account for the even size of palm trunks.

The theory of Von Mohl, based upon careful study, completely over-
threw the theory of Desfontaines. His investigations showed too that the
structure of the palm trunk was no such simple matter as had been sup-
posed. The leading features of Von Mohl’s theory are as follows : Dissect-
ing out a fibro-vascular bundle from the base of a frond, it curves in to the
centre of the stem, and downwards, and after a short course through the
centre of the trunk gradually approaches the periphery, and then runs
down into the base. Later Von Mohl modified this statement, recognizing
the fact that his investigations had been made upon too young specimens,
and that in a full grown stem the bundles did not reach the base * He
then concluded that their lower extremities ended blindly on the periph-
ery, and that at their upper ends they grew into the phylophore.} He
observed their difference of structure in different parts, their varying size,
their hardening, colosing, the slight growth in size of the bundles blend-
ing, and, after it was called to his mind by Meneghini, recognized their
spiral direction (though he attached no importance to itt), and that the
course of the fibro-vascular bundles was the same in all palms.

Meneghini laid stress upon the oblique course of the bundles, and ex-
plained it as a mechanical result of unequal growth of stem and frond scars.
He supposed the trunk to outgrow the leaf so much that the base of the
frond was thrown out of its former relation to the other fronds, and that
the bundles were thus drawn to one side, causing this obliquity in their
direction. The occurrence of fronds at the same angle to each other on
the stem was accounted for in the following manner: In the apex, as he
believed, the fronds were arranged in a helix, which, in the course of
growth, became a spiral line upon the stem, the fronds all having been
drawn aside equally. He also advanced a theory of the creation of the
fibro-vascular bundles by currents of sap in the phylophore, and thought
they were to ‘‘be regarded as descending from the nascent leaf in the
centre of the bud.’’ § /

*Duchartre, in his fléments de Botanique,” p.179, gives Von Mohl’s theory
in its original form, and in a figure represents the fibro-vascular bundles as
all running into the base,

7 Tnere has been no little misunderstanding of Von Mohl’s theory and deserip-
tions, Mirbel did not know whether he meant that the bundles grew down-
wards from the bases of the fronds (Comptes Rendus, 1843, p. 1218, et seq.). In
Stating Von Mohl’s theory, he says that “selon M, Mohl, les filets * * * * %
partent des feuilles,’’ and a little further on he declares that he does not know
what Von Mohl means by saying that “les filets partent des feuilles et descend-
ent vers la base.”’ :

Duchartre in his “Kléments de Botanique,” p. 177, in explaining Von Mohl’s
theory, says of a filbro-vascular bundle: ‘Il descend verticalement sur une cer.
taine longueur,”’

}Duchartre has eredited Von Mohl with the discovery of the spiral direction of
the bundles (“fléments de Botanique,’’ p. 177), but Von Mohl confesses
that he laid no stress upon it, leaving us to infer that he had observed it. Ray
Society, 1849, p, 52, third line from bottom,

? Ray Society, 184), p. 90.

iy
1884, | 463 [Branner.

Mirbel stated that the fibro-vascular bundle originated in a utricle at
the periphery of the phylophore, and grew upwards into it, whence it
curved outwards and entered a frond base on the side opposite the one
upon which it originated.* ‘Le plus grand nombre, si n’est pas la tota-
lité, nait & la surface interne du phylophore * * * * une partie
entre eux s’allongent et monte & peu de distance de cette surface, puis
se courbe tout 4 coup vers la périphérie et va joindre la base des feuilles,
qui elles rencontre chemin faisant.’’? He believed the number of bundles in
a stem might increase indefinitely, and in this way he accounts for the
spindle-shaped trunks of certain palms.

Gaudichaud’s theory was, that the bundles all originated at the frond
bases} in the phylophore, and grew downwards to the base, and out to
the ends of the roots. Says M. Gaudichaud:t ‘M. Mirbel soutent que
e’est de bas en haut qu’elle agit; moi je prouve par des faits, par tous ceux
que j’ai observés que c’est de haut en bas, des bourgeons aux racines *

* * Ils marchent done !’’

At the close of the reading of his seventh and last paper on this subject
before the French Academy, he says, that whatever the Academy may
think about the matter ‘il ne me restera plus qu’’m’écrire, moi aussi: Et
pourtant ils descendent’!’’§

Dr. Von Martius stated, | that all fibro-vascular bundles connected with
fronds ; that they originated in the phylophore, exterior to and below the
others ; that the points of origin were organic; and that they grew up-
wards and downwards. He believed the bundles to end blindly below in
the periphery, and that they might come to the surface above, either on
the same side of the stem, or on the side opposite.

It is not my purpose to offer just here the objections that might be raised
to the theories of these different authorities, but to present the result of
my own observations in order, and to point out wherein they differ mate-
rially from those of others.

A. transection of a, full-grown palm trunk shows a number of hard
fibro-vascular bundles scattered through it, without any further arrange-
ment than that they are more numerous, harder, and generally colored
near the circumference, while the parenchymous or pithy part prevails in
the centre. A. hemisection from base to apex shows (Figs. ILI, IV,) that
the bundles have, for the most part, the appearance of being parallel,
while at short intervals a few of them are seen to curve out from the
centre of the stem to the fronds, or to the spadices growing in the axes of
the fronds, or in case both spadices and fronds have fallen, to their old
scars, i
In trying to trace any one of these bundles, we find that it, sooner or

* Comptes Rendus de Vv Acad , 1844, Vol. IT., p. 690,
+t Comptes Rendus de 1’ Acad.,, 1845, Vol. IL, p. 264,
} Loe, cit,

¢ Loe, clb., p, 272.

| Comptes Rendus de lAcad., 1845, Vol, IT., p. 1038.

Branner.] 464 {April 18,

later, becomes entangled in the mass, or that it has been cut across in
making the section. With a hard stem this is invariably the result, but if
the stem be a decayed one, in which the cellular tissue has disintegrated
and left the bundles more or less free, the direction of a bundle may be
followed with more or less certainty. Beginning with one of these where
it curves inward and downward from the base of a frond, it may be traced
inward to or near the centre, then downward, gradually approaching the
circumference again. In this lower part of the bundle, however, the
angle of divergence from a parallel with axis and periphery is so small in
most palms, and the little curves made by the bundle in crossing others
so misleading and confusing, that it is with some difficulty one can appre-
ciate the tact that the bundles are not all parallel to each other and to the
axis of the stem. If, however, the internodes are short, and the trunk is
comparatively large, we may expect to find this angle more defined. This
is very marked in the rhizomes of the so called trunkless palms* upon
which the fronds are crowded in the shortest possible length of trunk. In
these rhizomes this direction of the lower extremity of a division of a
fibro-vascular bundle is visible at a glance. On approaching the per-
iphery of the trunk the bundle is found to decrease in size, and finally it
breaks off and appears to end blindly in the mass of other bundles near
the surface. As far as can be made out then, in a full grown stem, by
this method of dissection, this is what we find the course of the fibro-vas-
cular bundles to be: from the base of the frond they curve sharply in-
wards to the centre, and then gradually outward to the surface, and there
end. Ifit were possible to take up the bundles in any part of a stem, and
follow them wpwards, one after another, it would be found that they all
connect, sooner or later, with fronds or spadicest (or their scars), and
that none of them end blindly on the internode

So far I have spoken of tracing a bundle downward from the insertion
of the frond. To this method of dissection is largely due the uncertainty
about the lower extremity of a division. By examining the apex, or
growing part of the trunk, it may be seen that these bundles do not end
blindly at their lower extremities upon the surface of the stem, but that
they are connected in sections or divisions$ from the base to the apex,
one with another, and one on top of another.

* In classifying palm stems according to their structure, Von Mohl made a
sub-division of the rhizomes of trunkless palms, but made no investigation of
them on account of lack of material. V. Ray Soc., 1849, pp. 6-7.

}t Dr, Von Martius does not mention bundles connecting with spadices,

{In his ‘*Text-book on Botany’’ (Ed, of 1879), Dr. Gray gives a figure of a palm
trunk which represents the fibro-vascular bundles coming to the surface very
much at random, and bending outward all through the stem, This is not what
is seen ina palm stem, especially if the internodes are of any considerable
length, but the bundles turn out to the fronds or sears only, and never to inter-
nodes,

¢I have spoken of the parts of a bundle between the points of branching as
divisions,

(Branner.

465

]

1884

‘daNaVING JJ] 40 1Luvg

Saag SS
ae ee Pa
Se eee eee ae]
>

Fira. IT.

Fra. IIT. Fie. IV.

Fre. I.

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. s0C. xxI. 115. 8@. PRINTED MAY 12, 1884.

Branner,] 466 {April 18,

T will first show how these divisions came about, and then show how
this effects the whole system of structure. From the points of connection
with the fronds or spadices, the fibro-vascular bundles branch, one part
having the immediate external growth (either frond or spadix), developed
in connection with it, and the other continuing to form part of the stem
proper above this point.* It will be seen later that these divisions of the
bundles reach their greatest developement within the stem just at this
point of branching. Whether it is on this account, or for some other
reason, whenever a bundle has a frond developed in connection with it,
the development of the stem branch is retarded. The attenuation of the
lower extremity of a division, consequent upon this retarded development,
renders it impossible, in most cases, to trace out the connection between
the divisions, however carefully one may work. The elimination of the
harder part of the bundle renders the observation of «he connection still
more difficult and uncertain.| In cases where this connection has been
observed, it has been mistaken for blending, { which often occurs, but
which is quite another matter. Blending may take place in any part of
a bundle’s course, and may be in almost any direction, while the branch-
ing I here refer to, always takes pluce somewhere between the point
where the bundle is tangent to a line parallel with the axis of the stem,
and the point of insertion of the frond, and is always in the direction of
the apex of the trunk. Blending may be upwards or downwards or side-
wise, and may take place in any part of the whole length of the stem,
It is often observable that just above the point of branching another
bundle is developed on the inner side of the main division, but this piece
is not continued as a distinct bundle, but as a part of the principal one.

Beginning then at the base of a palm trunk, a bundle is traceable into
a frond, at the base of which it branches; the stem division gradually ap-
proaches the centre of the stem, and there curves sharply outward to con-
nect with another frond, and so, curving.in and out, it connects with
frond scars and spadices from base to apex.

Let us now consider these two directions of the fibro-vascular bundles :
the gradual approach toward the centre of the trunk above the point of
branching, and the comparatively sharp curve outward to connect with
the external growth.

Why does a bundle always return to the centre of the stem, instead of
going in a straight line from one scar to another?

First: the development of a fibro-vascular bundle is always in the

*The connection between the divisions is seldom easily found, some species
show it much more plainly than others. The spectmens in which I have seen it
most often and most distinctly were of Raphia tedigera,

+ Von Mohl admits his inability to determine how these small bundles ended
below. Ray Society, 1849, p. 69. 4

Duchartre (“fléments de Botanique,” p.179) says: ‘Ilse réduit & état de
filament délie A son extremité inferieure,”’

{ Blending is mentioned by Lestiboudois (V, Literature at end), by Unger,
and by Von Mohl. Ray Society, 1849, p. 8.

1884.] 467 [Branner.

direction of the apex of the phylophore. When in the process of develop-
ment, a bundle has a frond or spadix formed in connection. with it, it is
clear that the base of this frond, being left behind by the growth of stem
and bundle, must at some time become a scar upon the side of the stem,
and as the developing point of the bundle is always near the apex, the
bundle will be formed more or less in a line connecting the sear or point
of branching and the apex of the phylophore which is in the axis of the
stem. But although the bundle is' formed in this line, it does not follow
that on the growth of the trunk it will be found in a straight line from
the scar to the apex. In reality we find the lower extremity of the divis-
jon as nearly as may be parallel to, and very near the side of the stem.
This will be better understood from figs. V, VI and VII.

Let © be the apex of the phylophore at which a bundle branches. In
the process of growth of the phylophore, the point C will be left behind
at D, and the growing division of the bundle, pointing always toward the
centre, will be developed in the direction DC or JI, practically very nearly
parallel with the side CHD. Now when the apex is far beyond the origi-
nal point of branching of this bundle, say at A, while the original point
of C is at B, this part of the bundle that was formed first after the branch-
ing took place, will still have its original relation to the side of the stem,
that is, it will be about parallel to it. When the point © is left at E, the
direction will be still further changed, and will be IK, farther from the
periphery, and when IK is left far behind it will be in a position like MN
in figure V. Then again when the point C is left at B (Fig. V) we shall
have the part IL forming, and thus will the growth of the bundle in length
gradually approach it to the axis of the stem. Upon its arrival at a suffi-
ciently advanced stage of development to take its place again, and again
have a frond developed in connection with it, it will have crossed in its
course all the bundles that have branched since it branched at © original-
ly. I would suggest that this development of the fibro-vascular bundles,
always in the direction of the apex, is due to the light. This apex, at its
central point, is very pulpy and translucent, while its sides are enveloped
by the young and growing fronds, which render the parts surrounding the
centre more or less opaque.

The outward curve of these bundles is a simple matter. It marks the
line traversed by the base of the frond from the time it originated at the
apex of the phylophore until it reached its place on the side of the trunk.
In figure VII, let © be the centre of the growing part at which the frond
and bundle connect. Now when the apex has grown to O/, the point C will
have been left behind at A upon the side of the growing cone, and when
the apex is at O//”, the point which was originally at © will have taken
its place at EH upon the side of the stem. In this outward curve, the
longitudinal growth of the bundle is shown. In figure IX if C be the
former position of the apex at which a frond was developed, and which
takes its place later upon the surface of the stem at D, it might be inferred
that OF were the vertical distance grown by this section of the stem from

Branner, | 468 [April 18,

the time the frond originated at C until it reached D. But such is not the
case, for some allowance must be made for the increase of altitude caused
by the side CG becoming parallel with the lower part of the stem. Tak-
ing GC asa radius and describing CI, the distance IE must be deducted
as this difference in altitude of the point C when it reaches I, and the
length grown by the whole section is FL or DI. It is true that when CG
reaches D, CF will be the difference in altitude made by ©, but this is not
all due to the growth in the length of the fibro-vascular bundles. In
actual hemisections of palm stems it is noticeable that the curve CD is not
an even one, but has a shorter radius near the point D. This is due to the
fact that during the younger stages growth was principally in length,
while as the part approached maturity, the lengthening was less marked,
and the lateral growth predominated. This growing in size after prolon-
gation has ceased is a characteristic of the fibro-vascular bundles in the
palms. In the phylophore, the lengthening of the bundles is still possible
to a limited extent, but it will be shown later that the growth in size con-
tinues even below the phylophore. It will also be seen later that this in-
crease in the size of the bundles, and consequently in that of the whole
stem after longitudinal growth has ceased, causes the fronds to droop
more,

It has already been observed that the fronds are developed in connection
with the central bundles in the phylophore. In regard to the origin of
the bundles it is sufficient at present to say that they originate at the apex
of the phylophore, and are developed in it, with it, and as a part of it.
Von Mohl and Mirbel maintain that these bundles grow up into the
phylophore ; Gaudichaud that they grow downwards from it—from the
frond bases; Von Martius that they grow both up and down, while I
maintain that they are perfected in all directions at the same time, though
the lateral growth continues to a certain extent after the longitudinal
growth has ceased, and that they can no more be said to grow upwards or
downwards than can it be said of the bones of the body that they grow
outwards into the limbs, It is true that the general lengthening of the
bundles takes place at the superior end, but there is a growth beside this.
At the first appearance of the fronds at the apex of the phylophore the
fibro-vascular bundles are already connected with them, and just as in-
timately as they are in the perfectly developed frond. The internodes at
this point are very short, but the bundles are the same in number, and
have exactly the same connections, directions, and relations to each other
that they have in later life. But in the perfected frond we find them
larger, longer and harder, and in the perfect stem the internodes are
longer, the stem and bundles larger, while the whole plant has grown
both longitudinally and laterally. In view of this general growth, the
relations of the parts remaining the same, it is clear that growth does
take place in all directions. In figure IX, p. 471, the upward and down-
ward growth of a bundle is represented approximately by the line CD,
This line cannot be upward growth alone, for the point D was once at ©,

1884.] 469 [Branner,

Fia. V. Fra. VII.

Branner.) i 470 [April 18,

and when there, was a point on the surface of the phylophore. Now it
has become a point on the surface of the trunk, the distance CD be-
yond its original position. so that the whole bundle must have grown in
this part. ;

The theory of downward growth from the frond to the base, as held
by M. Charles Gaudichaud, appears to me, as it did to Von Mohl,* un-
worthy of serious consideration. Mirbel’s theory of upward growth of
the fibro-vascular bundles was denounced by M. Gaudichaud as a physio-
logical impossibility ; and it might be said of M. Gaudichaud’s theory,
that downward growth, as held by him, is a mechanical impossibility.
From the course of the bundles, as already explained, it is seen that to
grow downward, they would have to pass through the bony outer layer of
the trunk twice: once on entering it, and again on approaching the sur-
face lower down. Moreover the bundles at the base of the trunk would
either have to be extremely small, or the base itself very large, neither of
which is the case. It will be seen later, also, that the lower extremity of
a bundle division hardens first, thus precluding all possible growth.

The reason that the fronds are always developed in connection with the
central bundles, is because the central bundles are the ones there present,
and the ones in the most advanced stage of development. It has already
been noticed that when a frond is developed and a bundle branches, the
part in connection with the frond is developed rapidly and at the expense
of the part leading upwards, Having its development thus retarded, and
being carried to one side by the growth of the trunk, this ascending di-
vision is attenuated at its lower extremity. Other bundles gain upon it
in point of development, and take its place at the centre of the growing
part. But in the course of time this division regains its vigor, and its
place at the centre of the phylophore, where it is again the most advanced
in development, and again has a frond or spadix formed in connection
with its branches, and is again curved outward.

At the time of branching the formation of the frond is the immediate
object of the bundle, but provision is at the sarhe time made for other
fronds higher up,

The branching goes on from the base of the trunk to its apex, varying
only as the tree becomes old, and its vital powers diminish, the result ot
which is shorter internodes, and consequently shorter divisions of the!
fibro-vascular bundles,

The number of bundles may be said to be the same in all parts of. the
stem, and’ it is to this fact, taken in connection with the average even
size of the bundles themselves, that the equal size of the palm trunk must
be attributed. In specimens of which I have estimated the number of
bundles at different altitudes, there has generally been a difference in|
favor of the base of the stem, but this difference is so slight that I believe
the decreased vitality of the plant is sufficient to account for it. It is also

'

* Ray Society, 1849, p. 62.

H
i>)
=I
S
q
raat
(a2)
—

471.

1884. |

Fro. IX.

VIII.

Fra.

Branner.] 472 [April 18,

possible that the same number of bundles was present in the upper sec-
tions as in the lower ones, but that being smaller, they escaped my atten-
tion. In this connection I will refer to Mirbel’s explanation of the spindle-
shape of the stems of Iriartea ventricosa and Acrocomia lasiopatha. Re-
ferring to Von Mohl’s theory, as originally stated, that all bundles ended
in the base, M. Mirbel said :* ‘Il est un fait dont sans doute M. Mohl a
connaisance, c’est qu’il existe des Palmiers pourvus d’un stipe mince & la
base, mince au sommet et notablement renflée dans sa partie moyenne.
Ce stipe resemble donc a une enorme fuseau * * * * * Je demande
a M. Moh] comment il explique cette anomalie en restant fidéle a son hy-
pothése. Pour moi, rien de plus simple depuis que j’ai reconnu dans le
Dattier que les filets naissent de bas en haut, de tout le pourtour interne
du stipe, et & toutes les hauteurs, A la naissance de l’arbre fusiforme, la
végétation est faible, les filets sont peu nombreux, et par consequent la
stipe est gréle. A mesure que l’arbre s’éleve, la végétation devient de
plus en plus active, le nombre des filets augmente sensiblement, le stipe
grossit. Mais quand l’arbre a atteint une certaine épaissure la végdétation
s’affaiblit, le nombre des filets diminue, le stipe va s’amincissant jusqu’au
sommet,’’

Had M. Mirbel ever examined the trunk of one of these fusiform palms,
or had he even read a description of their method of growth, he never
would have tried to explain this increase in size in this manner.

Tam not able to give at present the physiological reason for this pecu-
liar growth, but Iam able to give some explanation of how it occurs. In
transections these palm stems show the same number tf bundles in the
swollen part as in the more slender parts both above and below it. When
there is a difference, it is such as may be found in any palm having a cy-
lindrical trunk. In the swollen part there is a great increase of cellular
tissue, and a very slight increase in the size of a few of the fibro-vascular
bundles. M. Mirbel represents this enlarging as taking place during the
growth of the tree, and at the top, whereas it does not occur until the
palm has attained almost its full growth. The young Iriartea ventricosa
never shows this enlargement in any part of its stem, and when it does
occur in the grown plant, it is at a considerable distance below the grow-
ing part.} In some species of Acrocomia the swelling takes place near the
summit, but always after the crown of leaves or phylophore has passed
the part. In one species examined at Asuncion, in Paraguay, the trunk
has no certain point at which it swells, but may swell out either at the
base or the summit, or anywhere between the two parts, and there are
many cases in which there are swellings both at the base and just below
the fronds. Neither is the tapering of a few palms like Oreodowa oleracea
and Muterpe oleracea to be explained by a decrease of the number of fibro-
vascular bundles toward the top. In examining many trunks of Huterpe,
I found the number of bundles near the base and near the top about the

* Comptes Rendus de |’Acad, 1848, II, p. 1128,
t Wallace’s “ Palms of the Amazon,” p. 87,

“i?

sl

=e

ae

7

1884, ] 473 [Branner.

same, but I always found, where there was a decided tapering of the trunk
from base to summit, that there was a difference in the size of the bundles,
slight to be sure, but quite as marked as the difference in size of the two
parts of the trunk. This difference in the size both of the trunk and of
the bundles is more noticeable in Qreodoawa oleracea, or the royal palm,
than in any other palm which came under my observation.

I have spoken of the branching of the fibro-vascular bundles and their
return always to a frond base, as if their course was on the same side of
the trunk and in a vertical line. Neither is the case. It often happens
that instead of returning to a frond base upon its own side, the bundle
crosses through the whole stem and connects with one on the side oppo-
site.* Mirbel claimed that in the date palm, the bundles all crossed from
one side to the other. I shall not say this is not true of the date palm,
for [am well aware that there is a great variation of structure among
palms, but I have never found this crossing from side to side to be the
rule, although it often occurs, and is more marked in some palms than in
others,

In addition to this occasional crossing the stem, the bundles have a
winding direction, so that their course is not directly vertical, but spiral,
both right and left, about the stem, part of them going to one side and
part to the other, From base to summit then, a bundle may be said to
have a spiral plane within which it grows, and whether it returns to the
surface upon the side on which it originated or upon the opposite side, it
is always in this spiral plane. Meneghini tried to explain this spiral direc-
tion of the bundles as a mechanical result of the growth of the tree where-
by the relative sizes of the trunk and frond bases became changed. He
supposed the fronds upon the apex to be arranged in a helix, and that as
the tree grew this helix developed into a spiral line upon the stem. He
believed the leaf bases to be always of the same size, both upon the grow-
ing cone and upon the stem. The growth of the trunk then, and the un-
changed size of the bases of the fronds necessitated a drawing of the
bundles toward these bases, which resulted in the spiral direction.

But I have observed that the relative position of the fronds is always
the same, a matter which Von Mohl was in doubt about. The spiral
direction of the bundles is in no way a mechanical one, but exists alike in
stem and phylophore as I have often observed, and until some better
reason can be assigned for it, must be considered as organic.

The existence of a palm having its fronds arranged in one plane} would
of itself be sufficient to upset Meneghini’s theory of the helix and spiral.
This spiral direction of the fibro-vascular bundles is an important one,

* Dr. Von Martius believed this to be the case, as will be seen in the Comptes
Rendus de l’Acad., 1845, Vol. I, p. 1038,

ft About Paré and the mouth of the Amazon a distichous palm is very com-
mon, It is popularly known as the bacedba, and is tne Ginocarpus baccaba
of Martius, Urania speciosa and U. amazonica are other distichous monocot.
yledons,

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800. xxt. 115. 8a. PRINTED MAY 29, 1884.

Branner,] 474. [April 18,

both in connection with the structure of the plant, and in its influence
upon the plant’s general appearance.* It varies greatly in different species,
and may be almost wanting. In trying to split palm stems, those in
which the spiral direction is less marked, split more readily than those in
which it is more decided. It is not very marked in Mauritia carand, Huterpe,
and Iriartea, while in Maximiliana and Manicaria it is a very prominent
feature,

It is not in the trunk alone that spiral direction is to be seen, but it is
more or less observable in the fronds and spathes. The trunk may have
a very decided spiral direction in its fibro-vascular bundles, which may be
wanting in the fronds, and vice versd. Raphia tadigera (vulg. Jupaty),
for example, hag a marked spiral direction of its bundles in the trunk,
while the petioles of the fronds split with almost perfect evenness. Spiral
direction in spathes is well shown in the spathe of Manicaria saccifera
(vulg. Ubuss%), which resembles coarse cloth somewhat.

In the petioles and midribs of some palms, modifications of spiral direc-
tion give rise to peculiar and characteristic forms of midribs, resulting in
changes of the leaf planes from a horizontal to a vertical position, which
are characteristic of the species in which they occur.

It has been noticed by those who have studied and observed palms in
their native forests, that, after a certain amount of experience in familiari-
zing one’s self with the general appearace of them, the common palms can
be distinguished at almost any distance at which they are visible, if only
the fronds can be seen. In those having pinnate fronds this is very largely
due to the effects produced by changes in the leaf planes, which are the
result of changes in the shapes of the midribs, which, in their turn are
the result of the direction of the fibro-vascular bundles. In the Maaimit-
tana regia Mart. (vulg. Inajé) and Attalea ewcelsa (vulg. Urucurg) of the
Amazon region, and in Acurg,}+ of the upper Paraguay, the bundles in the
midrib are turned to one side as shown in figure X, page 477.

In No. 1 is shown a section across a midrib not far from the trunk,
where it has the usual shape of a midrib, In No. 2, a section further out-
ward, the bundles of the side CB (1) have moved up and gone to form an
extension of AB, while a corresponding number from the side AC have
taken their places on CB. The result is a figure like No. 2. No. 8 rep-
resents a section still further out, and No, 4 is one near the tip, this direc-
tion to one side being more marked the nearer we approach the end of the
frond. The midrib assuming these forms, it is impossible for the frond to
maintain its horizontal position, whereupon it changes its leaf plane from
a horizontal to a vertical position, and droops over on its edge. It might
be supposed that this twisting of the frond is due to some arrangement of
the leaflets with reference to the light, but in the Maaimiliana regia
CInajaé) the tips of the fronds are completely inverted in a great many

*T have not studied the relation of the spiral direction of these bundles to
the phylotaxis, but I suggest that the two are related,
} Botanical name not known.

——

1884,] 475 [Branner.

cases, if not always, so that what was originally the lower side of the
frond is turned upwards,

In a number of transections of a large, living and nearly grown palm
stem, in those made near the base, it is found that the fibro-vascular bun-
dles are all black, if black be the characteristic color of the mature bun-
dles,* except a few in the centre. A section made anywhere below a cer-
tain distance from the fronds would show the same general character as
regards hardness and color. But on coming near the growing part the
sections appear less and less colored, and above the fully-matured fronds
they are all found to be colorless. Dissecting out these bundles in the
phylophore we find that those already colored, or nearly so, connect with
the lower or more mature fronds, while those connecting with the younger
fronds are, for the most part, colorless ; and, when showing any color at
all, it is only at the lower extremity of the division. We find, then, that
there are uncolored bundles near the base of the trunk at the centre, and
also all through the section near the top. I therefore place these facts
against the theory of Mirbel, that the color of the bundles is due to age
alone,} and also against that of Von Mohl, which is that color is:due to
position alone. In regard to this coloring, the element of age is a neces-
sary one when the division is considered longitudinally, for in this case
the bundle is colored for a short distance at the upper end where it passes
in to the centre, then follows a part in which it is comparatively uncol-
ored, while the remainder, and larger part, is colored. But in considering
a transection of a trunk with reference to the coloring of the bundles,
position is the necessary element. This is because the lower extremities
of the divisions begin to color and harden before any other parts, and, as
has already been explained, these lower extremities lie next the surface of
the stem. t

Thec omplete hardening and coloring of the fibro-vascular bundle divis-
ions does not take place until the frond or spadix, with which they are con-
nected at their upper extremities, have fallen or died. Ags has already been
mentioned, the bundle divisions begin to harden and color at their lower
extremities before the frond or spadix dies, but not before it is unfolded
and active. At the fall or death of the frond the hardening and color-
ing are complete, and this marks the limit of growth of the division bun-
dles originally connected with it. As far as these hard, colored bundles.

*Some palms have the mature fibro-vascular bundles of a waxy color, such.
as Oreodoxa, Huterpe and Geonoma; others have them of a deep, reddish-black,.
like Mauritia; while the majority of them are black. Examples: Acrocomia,,

Gutlielma, Astrocaryum, Bactris, ete., ete,

t Ray Society, 1849, p, 82.

{ The edible part of the “palmito” of Brazil and of the “ cabbage palm” of the
‘West Indies, is the long phylophore in which all the fibro-vascular bundles are
soft and colorless.

¢I mention the falling or death of the frond because in some palms the fronds
fall as soon as they die, while in others they cling to the trunk for a long time
after death, Ex,: Acrocomia lasiospatha.

476 [April 18,

Branner.]

are concerned, the growth of the whole stem is at an end. In fact, how-
ever, the stem does continue to grow to acertain distance below the phylo-
phore, but this growth is lateral and not longitudinal, A palm trunk
may grow laterally as long as the fibro-vascular bundle divisions of the
given part are in connection with active fronds.* It is plain, then, that
there can be no longitudinal growth below the lowest active fronds. But
in regard to lateral growth, there is no practical line of demarkation be-
tween the full-grown and growing parts of a trunk, because full-grown
and growing parts overlap each other. Theoretically the growth has
ceased below the lower extremity of the bundle divisions connected with
the lowest active fronds. Practically it varies much with the species, age,
vitality and circumstances of the individual.

Being impossible below the fronds, longitudinal growth is necessarily
confined to the phylophore or part above the lowest active frond. We
may therefore naturally expect to find palms that have long phylophores
attaining considerable heights, and having the internodes long. In almost
all young palms, whatever the species, we find the phylophore very much
longer than in full grown ones of the same kind, and the internodes
longer in the same proportion. The young Mauritia flewwosa has its active
fronds covering it down the trunk four or five times as far as an old indi-
vidual of the same species, and the same is true ofall the palms I can now
call to mind. But this long phylophore gradually shortens with age, while
the internodes shorten in the same proportion, and the fronds have a more
decided drooping. In genus Desmoncus the trunk is covered with active
fronds for a large part of its whole length, or, in other words, it is nearly
all phylophore, and, as might be expected, we find it attaining enormous
lengths,+ with a very slender stem and long in ternodes, in comparison to its
size. The length of the phylophore in this genus, as compared to its size,
has caused it to assume the habit of a clambering or climbing palm. It
reaches so great a length before any of its fronds cease to be active, that
is, before any of its fibro-vascular bundles harden, that it is incapable of
sustaining its own weight. If an Assat (Huterpe oleracea) palm retained
its fronds active to the same length proportionally that Desmoncus does, it
would grow to be about a hundred feet long before its fibro. vascular
bundles hardened near the base, and the result would be that it would
fall over and become a clambering palm. The slender trunk alone of
Desmoncus ig not sufficient to account for its habit, for it falls over
while it is still a mere shoot, not more than three or four feet in length.
Then too there are many palms even. more slender than Desmoneus, palms

* Sachs (Text-Book, p, 552), says that ‘‘each portion of the stem, when once
formed, maintains the thickness which it had already attained within the bud
near the apex of the stem.” There may be some palms of which this is nearly
true, but it is far from being true in all cases, while it leaves the swelling of
spindle-shaped trunks as badly accounted for as do the explanations of M.
Mirbel.

+I have seen this palm over thirty metres long with a stem but little more
than one centimetre in diameter.

(Branner.

4T7

1884.]

eg

Fra.

be a

2S

Branner. } 478 [April 18,

whose trunks are not larger than an ordinary lead pencil, but which,
having the phylophore comparatively short, have the fibro-vascular bun-
dles hardened early, and are consequently perfectly upright in habit.

J have not seen the Asiatic genus Oalimus growing, nor have I been
able to see any careful description of it, but judging from its slender stem
and long internodes, I venture to guess that it hag a very long phylo-
phore, and to suggest that its great length and clambering habit is to be
explained in this same manner.

Speaking of palms in general, in the same individual, the length of the
internodes has much to do with giving it character as seen in its general
appearance. As the length of the internodes, the age and vigor of the
plant, and the drooping of the fronds are all intimately related, I will speak
of these subjects in the same connection.

The drooping of fronds which is so much more marked in old palms
than in young ones, in feeble than in vigorous ones of the same species, is
caused ;

First. By a decrease of the strength and vigor of the fibro-vascular
bundles of the midrib. This variation in the strength of the midrib effects
the drooping of the frond throughout its whole length,

Second. By the decrease of the vital powers of the whole plant, from
which it results that the angle made by the outcurving bundles with the
axis of the stem is larger than in the case of more vigorous growth.*

This effect can be seen by diagram, figure XI, in which O is the
point of the phylophore where a frond is originated. In a case of feeble
growth, the frond would stand out at B, making a large angle with the
axis of the stem, while in case of vigorous growth, it would stand out at
A, making a comparatively small angle with the axis. The result of dif-
ference in growth is very distinctly seen by comparing the young plants
with old ones of the same species grown on the same soil. In the young
ones the internodes ure invariably| longer, and just as invariably the fronds
are more erect. The fronds being continuations of the bundles, the angle
made by the bundles with the side of the stem is continued into the fronds
under slight modifications, The effect of this angle upon the fronds is also
noticeable in the phylophore, for the angle at which the bundles cross the
periphery being smaller in the cone-shaped apex, the fronds have a more
nearly erect position, In figure XII, the upper fronds make a smaller

*fence the angle of drooping in fronds, taken alone, is not always a specific
characteristic, as stated by Wallace in his ‘‘ Palms of the Amazon,” p. 5.

} Peculiar circumstances may change this, as I once saw well illustrated in the
case of a Mauritia flexuosa near Pardé. The whole trunk was about thirty metres
high, and about six metres below the fronds, the old scars were very close
together, and the trank had every appearance of having completed its growth
at that point, Above this, however, the trunk appeared to have renewed its
youth, and the internodes were long and smooth like those ofa vigorous palm,
In seeking the possible explanation of this new growth, I found that the place
where the palm stood had, a great many years before, been a forest, and that it
had originally stood in the edge of a stagnant pool which had been drained,
Whether these were the causes of the renewed vitality there were no means of
ascertaining, but the evidence of that vitality was unquestionable,

veel

[Branner.

479

1884. ]

XII.

Fre.

Branner.} 480 [April 18,

angle with the surface of the apex, and are more nearly erect. But when,
in the course of time, the fronds which are now the highest, come to be
the lowest, the angle they make with the periphery will have been much
increased by the lateral growth of the trunk, which will bring the fronds
out at shorter radii, and the result will be a more decided drooping of the
lower fronds. In this arrangement upon the growing part is a provision
for the weakness of the young fronds, which could not sustain their own
weight if the angle made with the trunk were a larger one. I have already
explained that the shorter radius at the surface, as seen in the lower fronds,
ig due to the lateral growth being greater than the longitudinal, and, of
course, takes place as the fronds come to be the lowest in the crown.

T have also stated that in palms having perfectly cylindrical stems, the
fibro-vascular bundles average the same size from the base to the upper
end of the full grown part. They vary however in each division, reach-
ing their gréatest development within the trunk just where they curve
outwards to connect with the external growth, and beyond this to a dis-
tance in the petiole varying with the length and weight of the normal
frond. The variation in size appears to be due to the purpose which the
bundle serves at the given part. In those palms which have long and
heavy fronds, the bundles are greatly developed near the base, and in
addition, they assume structural forms capable of adding to their strength
in the manner needed by the tree, while in those having short and light
fronds there is comparatively little development of the bundles at the bases
of the petioles.* The frond of Raphia tadigera (Jupatg) is noted for its
great length and weight.+ In this palm the fibro-vascular bundles are
cylindrical, or reach their greatest lateral development just at the june-
ture of the frond with the stem, and are flattened laterally in the base of the
petiole, the upper edge being the thicker. This shape gives them about three
times the strength they would have in the ordinary cylindrical shape, for
supporting a weight applied as it is in this part of the petiole. There is
another structural peculiarity about these bundles in Raphia tadigera,
which I have not sufficiently investigated. When a frond dies, it breaks
oft just beyond the enlarged part of these bundles, and in time the broken
petiole that remains fast to the trunk decays, leaving the larger fibro-vas-
cwar bundles exposed. In this condition, one might expect to find
them bent downwards by the strain of great weight sustained by them
from the beginning until they became rigid. But so far are they from
being warped downwards, they ar not even straight, but bend back

* Jupatg, pataud, murumurt, urucurg and uauasst all have large fronds, and
proportionately large fibro- vascular bundles in the bases of the petioles. Assat,
the marajds, the paxitibas and mucajdés have small fronds, and small bundles in
the bases of their petioles.

+ I have measured fronds of this palm that were fifteen metres long. Wallace
says he has seen them fifty feet long, V. Wallace’s “Palms of the Amazon,”
p. 43.

-

ES

=

a=

1884,] 481 [Branner.

in exactly the opposite direction to that given them by the drooping of
the frond.*

Gaudichaud maintained that the fibro-vescular bundles of the palm-
trunk ran down into the roots. My own observations agree with those of
Von Mohl, that there is no such direct connection between the bundles of
the stem and those of the roots. Anyone acquainted with the habits of
such a palm as /riartea exorrhiza could never have conceived a theory so
out of keeping with the facts of the case. This palm puts out new roots
continually, as do almost all palms, and always above the older ones. If
the bundles of the trunk ran directly into the roots, the same roots would
have to serve the tree through its whole lifetime, for the number of bun-
dles in the trunk does not increase. To be sure, Gaudichaud maintained
that the bundles descended from the fronds to the roots, and granting his
premises there might have appeared to be some reason in this conclusion.
But the supposition that the bundles ran downwards necessitates, as a
consequence, a base much larger than the upper part of the trunk, as well
as a continually increasing one, or else very small bundles at the base.
None of these things are found to be so, but it is found that the bundles of
the trunk do not run into the roots.

Von Mohl considers the spines on the aérial roots of Driartea exorrhiea
to be aborted rootlets, and directly connected with the fibro-vascular
bundles of the roots. I also found them to be aborted rootlets, but they
are as independent of direct connection with the bundles of the roots
proper, as are the roots themselves of the bundles of the trunk.

In conclusion I find: (1) that all fronds and spadices originate at the
centre of the phylophore ; (2) that the fibro-vascular bundle division con-
tinues to grow until its frond reaches maturity ; (8) that the growth of a
palm trunk continues as long as the bundle divisions of the part are in
active connection with living fronds, and no longer; and (4) that the
growth of palms is therefore an internal growth, and the term endogen is
not a misnomer as far as palrns are concerned.

From another point of view I find, that the outward appearance of a
palm, the form of its trunk, the plume-like drooping of its fronds, the
motion given them by the wind, the breaking and twirling of its leaflets,
and its general picturesque beauty are only the outward manifestations
of the laws of its internal growth and structure.

* Another interesting point in regard to the bundles in the fronds is the direc-
tion in which they face. (For want of a better definition I have spoken of the
side of the bundle connecting with the parenchymous system as the face.) T
have not made a sufficient number of observations to enable me to speak au-
thoritatively upon the subject, but in the few instances in which TI observed
this facing of the bundles, they tended to face the centre in the petiole and
midrib just as they did in the trunk, In order to assume this position the
bundles in the lower side of a frond retain the position they have on leaving
the trunk, while the upper ones twist one way or another in what seems an en-
deavor to turn over and face the centre of the new stem—that is, of the petiole.

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800. xxi. 115, 81. PRINTED MAY 29, 1884.

Branner,] 482 {April 18,

Norn :—The preceding discussion is based upon direct personal obser-
vation and study of a large number of specimens of the following genera,

together with others, the botanical names of which I do not at present a
know :
Acrocomia, Desmoncus, Mauritia,

Attalea, Euterpe, Maximiiiana,

Astrocaryum, Geonoma, , Ginocarpus,

Bactris, Guilielma, Oreodoxa,

Copernicia, Hyospathe, Raphia.

Cocos, Triartea,

THE LITERATURE OF THE SUBJECT.

DESFONTAINES :
1'783-6.—Fragment d’un voyage dans Jes Régences de Tunis et d’ Alger,
fait de 1783 a 1786, p. 290.
1798.—Mémoire de l'Institut Nacional, Vol. I., 1798, pp. 478-502.

DAUBENTON : |
1790.—Mémoires de 1’ Académie des Sciences, 1790, p. 6656-75. |
Huao Von Moun: f
1824.—‘*De Structura Palmarum’”’ contained in Von Martius’ ‘‘Genera
et Species Palmarum.’’
1845,—Same, published in ‘‘ Vermischte Schriften botanischen Inhalts,’’
Tiibingen, 1845.
1845.—‘‘Gelehrte Anzeige’’ of the Royal Academy of Sciences of
Bavaria, 1845.
1845.—Comptes Rendus de 1l’Académie des Sciences, Vol. I., for 1845,
p. 1088.

1849.—Reports and Papers on Bofany. Ray Society, 1849. (This is
an English translation of the article in ‘‘Vermischte Schriften ’’
containing Von Mohl’s reply to Mirbel.)

1855,—Bot. Zeitung, p. 878, 1855.

Gruserrr MENEGHINI :
1836.—‘‘ Recherche sulla Struttura del caule nelle Piante Monocotile-
doni,’’ Padova, 1836, Poligrafo IV., pp. 15-19.

1843.—Considerazioni sulla questione attualmente agitata all’ academia
de Francia fra Mirbel e Gaudichaud intorno alla struttura del
tronco delle Monocotoledoni (in Miscellanee di Chemica, Fisica
e Storia Naturale, 1848).

1843.—Same, Pisa, Miscell. Med. Chir., 1843 (pte. 2), pp. 197-207.

1848,—Giornale Encyclop. Italiana, Vol. I., p. 1%. Written 1843,

@

483 [Branner,

Lrst1rBoupors :
1840.—Ktudes sur 1’ Anatomie et le Physiologie des Végétaux, 1840.

UNGER:
1840.—Ueber den Bau und das Wachsthum des Dicotyledonstammes,
184, p. 85.
C. F. B. Mrrpez:
1843.—Comptes Rendus de 1’ Académie des Sciences. Vol. I., 1848, p.
1218.
1844.—Comptes Rendus, Vol. IL., 1844, p. 689.

CHARLES GAUDICHAUD :
1843.—Comptes Rendus de 1’ Académie des Sci., 1848, Vol. I., p. 12385.

1845.—Comptes Rendus, 1845, Vol. I., pp. 1875, 1486, 1677.
1844.—Comptes Rendus, 1844, Vol. I., pp. 597, 899.
1845.—Comptes Rendus, 1845, Vol. IL., pp. 99, 201, 261.

C. F. P. Von Martius: .
1845.—Comptes Rendus, 1845, Vol. L., p. 1038,

Minnarper :
1865.—Mémoires de la Soc. Imp. de Sci, Nat. de Cherbourg, Vol. XI,
1865.

GUILLAND ;
1877.—Recherches sur l’Anatomie comparée et le Developpement des
Tissus de la Tige dans les Monocotylidones. Ann. Sci. Nat.

Ser. 6, VI., 176, 1877

Naneent ;
1864.—Beitriige zur Wissensch. Bot, Heft I. Das Deckenwachsthum
des Stammes u. die Anordnung der Gefiisstriger bei den Sapen-

dacien, Miinchen, 1864.

ScHnLacut :
1856.—Lehrb. der Anat. u. Phys. der Gewiichse, pp. 216, 807, 354,
1856.
Navupin:
1844.—Ann. des Sci. Nat., 1844, L, 162.

ScHLEIDEN:
Grundziige, II., 189,

484 [May 2,
Stated Meeting, May 2, 1884.
Present, 9 members.

President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

New members, Mr. Baker, Dr, Garrison, and Prof. James,
were presented to the presiding officer, and took their seats.
Acceptances of membership were read from

Prof. H. J. James, dated Philadelphia, April 22.

Mr. Wharton Barker, W ynoote, Jenkintown a Apr. 28
Dr. Joseph F’. Garrison, Camden, N. J., April 2

Mr. Francis Jordan, Jr., Philadelphia, April 2 25,

Mr. Jno. R. Baker, P " ‘ladelphia, April 25

Mr. Rich. L. Ashhurst, Philadelphia, April 25.

Prof. Henry 8. Frieze, Ann Arbor, Mich., April 28.

Mr. Francis Wharton declined membership by letter dated
Philadelphia, April 29, assigning as a reason his inability to
attend the meetings,

Change of address, Geo. L. Vose, Prof. of Civ. Hng., in the
Mass. Inst. of Technology, Boston.

A circular letter to attend its 25th anniversary on the 11th
of May, was received from the Offenbacher Verein.

Acknowledgments were received from the Royal Bavarian
Academy of Science (two copies of ma i i and of 110-118);
Holland aetna, of Science (XVI,1; 112, H. H. R. Peters
(114); and the Smithsonian Taaiittitton (1 1a

Envoy letters were receivrd from the Belgian Ministry ot
the Interior and the Musée Guimet.

A letter was received from Brentano Bros., booksellers, New
York city, appointed agent for the Bib. Nat. ‘ile Paris, desiring
the Society’s publications and bill for the same.

A letter of advisement was received from the Royal Institute
of Higher Studies at Florence.

Donations for the Library were reported from the Depart-
ment of Mines, at Melbourne; Royal Society, New South

485

1884,]

Wales; Central Bureau of Statistics, and Bibliothéque Royale,
at Stockholm; Accademia dei Lincei; Société de Geographie,
Revue Politique, and M. Paul Chevallier, at Paris; Victoria
Institute, Royal Astronomical Society, Royal Meteorological
Society, Mr. William Marriott, and Nature, London; Royal
Society of Edinburgh; Boston Society of Natural History ;
Massachusetts Historical Society; S. EH. Cassino & Co.; Library
of Harvard University; American Journal of Science; Me-
teorological Observatory, at New York; New Jersey THistori-
cal Society; Franklin Institute, Hibernian Society, Commis-
sioners for the erection of the Public Buildings, Charles A.
Ashburner, and Henry Phillips, Jr., of Philadelphia; M. H.
Boyé, of Lehigh county, Pa.; the Second Geological Survey
of Pennsylvania; Johns Hopkins University, and United
States National Museum.

Mr. Phillips made a communication “On a supposed Runic
inscription near Yarmouth, N.S.,” and exhibited a photograph

of a squeeze from it.

Mr. Ashburner exhibited recently printed sheets of Cross-
sections, made by the Geological Survey, in Schuylkill and
Luzerne counties, and explained some of their curious exhibi-

tions of structure.

Mr. Fraley reported that he had received the Michaux
rentes last due (April 1), amounting to $133.39, and had paid
them over to the Treasurer.

The pending resolution on change of Order of Business was
postponed for consideration at another meeting.

And the meeting was adjourned,

486 LMay 16,
Stated Meeting; May 16, 1884.
Present, 10 members.

President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

A. photograph of Prof. rv S. Frieze, of Ann Arbor, Michi-

gan, was received for the album.

An acceptance of membership was received from Mr. Samuel
Dickson, dated 901-Clinton street, Philadelphia, April 20,

Letters of envoy were received from the Batavian Society of
Sciences, through the Minister of the Netherlands and the
United States Department of State; Fondation Tyler; Cen-
tral Cisatauhe of St. Pete msburg + Musée Guimet, and the
United States Census Bureau,

Donations to the Library were received from the Batavian
Society of Arts and Sciences; the Royal Academy of Bel-
gium; the Accademia dei Lincei; the Royal Academy of
Arts and Sciences in Modena; the Geographical Society at
Paris; the Geographical Society at Bordeaux; the Meteoro-
logical Council of the Royal Society; Dr. Benjamin Ward
Richardson, and London Nature; the Toronto Observatory ;
the newly organized Bostonian Society in the old State House ;
the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy; Dr. Samuel Abbott
Green; the American Chemical Society; the Meteorological
Observatory in New York; the American Journal of Phar-
macy; the Pennsylvania Magazine of History and Biography ;
Mr. Richard Vaux, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr Dr. Persifor
Frazer; the American Chemical Journal; the American
Journal of Mathematics; the United States Naval Institute ;
the United States Fish Commission; and the American Mete-
orological Journal.

The death of Dr. Samuel D, Gross, at Philadelphia, May 6,

= zy —

1884.] 487

aged 78 (born July 8, 1805), was announced; and Dr. DaCosta
was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased.

Prof. Cope described the rich collections of vertebrate fossil
remains in the Muséo Nacional under the care of Dr. Barcena,
and in the Museum of the School of Mines in the care of Prof.
Ant. Costino, which he had examined during a recent visit to
Mexico—Glyptodon, Mastodon, Elephas, Equus, Llama, Bear,
Dog and Deer, and the several genera and species into which
they seemed divisible, some of them being undescribed. Im-
portant geological points he reserved for another communica-
tion.

A question from Mr. Hale elicited the opinion, that while
no certain proof that man was coéval with either mam-
moth or elephant had yet been obtained, yet that facts calcu-
lated to give the supposition much probability multiplied.
The discovery of human facial bones in an uplifted silico-calea-
reous bed, on the shore of Lake Tescuco, remained incomplete
until the beds had been searched for other fossils.

New nominations Nos, 1028 to 1028 were read.

A special Committee on the renovation of the oil paintings
in the Hall, consisting of the Curators, with Mr. Phillips and
Mr, Rothermel, was appointed and requested to report at the

next meeting in June.

A resolution respecting the entertainment of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science, by Mr. Fraley,
was called up and passed.

And the meeting was adjourned.

488
PROC. A. PHILOS, SOC, PHILA. Jan. 18, 1884.

Weeoe te

a i er OD

Drawn by Com, £. Y. McCauley, U, S. N.

bh es

a

489
PROCG.*A, PHILOS. ‘SOC. PHILA,, Jan. 18, 1884,

dl
Snserifotriw ow ov IM umimyg - cane, of he AIX By nooly,
uv Memorial Hall we Ph acted Joktas i
eee, MELE hee
Iscs Geni of the Deal Nepthys
o Hh
laa _ ™
— a** — Ml Ws all
imarMNNN MRR AS ACL SAL Heoyat.
3A =o“ IP ARR te Ay
O MK, Ft ' 8 ~ ~ Mn)
JOA per = Arnen-Ra Meb Hor aye CL meh] Plah Web ent, Tucatvatass Mut per
| Mother of the joel, ArmewRa yoat, Nore | prah, Soret of- Geni of the Mother of the!
fruwse~ dove of Jreavew , ai eae thangs. Dead, Rouse.
heaven ay ae
Pea! “aS Poa | oath | =] |
a 8 my ay P| Ma TL Pres hg
Shue, Se Ra Web Aliow Nb pet] Innen Ra, So RevTarw, Welter ao,
pet. Shu, Som Alin, Sorel ep neler; Imen-Ra, Neb pet. Ra-Tum,
af Ra, Loved of heaven. King - Goel, Great Gud Lord of: heaven,
heaven
wien A = aS *
ot Hr) Cee) ~
Yap, Neb pet, Aapi,Noleraa,|\Nsaicd Hopi, — Aset Jed rAment’e
ap, Revs of eb pet’. Nelir aa. Isis, Seely of (ihe west)
feavew,, Aaj Greal'God Osiris. A focs Ament,

Aord of heaven (Seredo ts) Greet

God

Avra mann 9 Ee = Tye Oe ee
~ @ =o ed
Tat Suliw feltp' en Plah-SeKero (sar Jeran Mb ry gti a
Royot gre of (Co) Pthak Sochana ,0sins God great, Lord mouth grave gave he
A voy oblation [3 the Plok-Sochars ,the Osiris, Great God, Lord,‘of the entianee tothe Lend, of

®
vla rm titan ® ox nd & g: oa Li Le
Perera opt, tebe. u ary - ou Shet curv merle aw Ka

Ceremoncah lwetts, Beever’, Wines Bivong made, Rovies , Spire
Te grave; Hewos given for he’ ceremoncel of tie Peat? Ducks, Beaves Strong wines, for

-
atti — em Ker’ sal en pT aml! joer l” eat
of wheat 5 grease \e ‘mother Rouse dag! stn g-
Ke Sfirdtrat body Mf AGm a nnnm tal’ ; Also, of wheat and greave Co the Mother vf thei house,

eb.

her melir han Har.

Supercar Hig hy Preest™ dforur
tie dawghtér of the Jitgh Priest of JHorvs.

Drawn by Com. E. Y. McCauley, U.S. N.
PROC, AMER. PHILOS. soc. Xxt. 115. 8s, PRINTED JUNE 5, 1884.

1884, ] 491 (Phillips.

On a supposed Runic Inscription at Yarmouth, Nova Scotia.* By Henry
Phillips, Jv.

On the shore of the Bay of Fundy, opposite the town of Yarmouth,
stands a rock weighing about four hundred pounds, which, about the end
of the last century, was discovered by a man named Fletcher. It has
been well known for nearly an hundred years, and those who dwell in its
vicinity have always accepted it as a genuine relic of antiquity, no breath
of suspicion ever having fallen upon it. The glyphs thereon have been
at various times copied and sent abroad to men of learning who have made
more or less attempts at deciphering them, more than one savant seeing
traces of Semitic origin. In 1875, a rubbing procured from the stone was
placed in my hands for investigation. Since that time I have carefully
considered the circumstances of the case, and have become ultimately sat-
isfied of its bona-fide nature, that the inscription was neither a modern
fraud nor the work of the wayward playfulness of the leisure hours of the
sportive red-skin. Having become imbued with a belief that no deception
was intended, or practiced, I entered upon the study of the markings with
a mind totally and entirely free from prejudice ; so far from believing that
the inscription was a relic of the pre-Columbian discovery of America, I
had never given any credence te that theory. I therefore approached the
subject entirely unbiassed in my opinion, in fact, somewhat prejudiced
against the authenticity of any inscription on this continent, purporting to
emanate from the hardy and intrepid Norsemen.

The difficulty of interpreting these markings was greatly increased on
account of the nature of the material on which the rubbing had been taken,
and the fact that in the Runic alphabets the letters frequently have many
varying values and forms. But like as in a kaleidoscope, word after word
appeared in disjointed forms, and each was in turn rejected until at last an
intelligible word came forth, followed by another and another, until a reat
sentence with a meaning stood forth to my astonished gaze: Larkussen
men varu, Hako’s son addressed the men.

Upon examining further, I found that in the expedition} of Thorfinn
Karlfsefne, in 1007, the name of Haki occurs among those who accom-
panied him. I confess that I was staggered by the remarkable coincidence
and began to waver, and the finishing touches were placed to my unbelief
when I observed the map, and saw how short the distance was from
Iceland to Greenland, compared with the stretch of water from Norway
to Iceland. It seemed more than probable that the fearless race that actu-
ally did cross the latter expanse of ocean, were not likely to be deterred

*The squeeze of the inscription was made by Mr. 'T. B. Flint, Barrister at
Law, of Yarmouth, N. S., and photographed by Mr. E. B. Harden, of Philadel-
phia.

+ On this voyage “they came to a place where a firth penetrated tar into the
country. Off the mouth of it was an island, past which there ran strong cur-
rents, which was also the case farther up the firth.’—Antiq. Americans, p,
xxxi, Hafnive 1887.

¢
492 [May 16,

Claypole.}

from navigating the former. As to the reason why such a memento
should be left of the visit, of course no definite answer can be given,
but it is a fact well known that memorials were often made or erected,
engraved or placed at localities where events had taken place, and the
address of the chieftain to the men may have been of some noteworthy
matter, perhaps even to commemorate the fact of having landed at that,
spot.

In conclusion, I would say, that the circumstances are worthy of con-
sideration, if not absolutely convincing.

On the Clinton and other Shales, &e., composing the Fifth Group of Rogers
in the First Survey of Pennsylwania. By Prof. #. W. Claypole.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 21, 1884.)

This group has been the field for considerable discussion in regard to
the proper place of its different beds when compared with those supposed
to be of similar or nearly similar age in New York. It has not been easy
to prove where one formation began and another ended. By throwing all
those shales into a single group Prof. Rogers avoided discussion on this
point and No. 5 became a local or Pennsylvanian term, The group has
the merit of being a very natural one regarded from a physical standpoint,
Based on the massive Medina sandstone, and capped by the conspicuous
Lewistown limestone, there was no question of its physical limits in the
State, and all further. differentiation was postponed.

But with the advance of geology, the necessity arises for closer com-
parison and correlation. It is not enough to suppose that the fifth group
of Rogers corresponds with the New York beds between the top of the
Medina sandstone, and the Lewistown or Lower Helderberg limestone.
More exact division and definition are desirable, and my recent work in
Perry county has put into my hands the means of examining this question
in a new method—by the means of the fossils. Palaeontology has hitherto
done little towards its solution, and by paleontology alone in many cases
can the true solution be reached.

In the present paper I propose to examine these rocks constituting the
fifth group of Rogers, and to set forth the evidence thus far attainable,
both stratigraphical and paleontological, for the places assigned to them
among the paleozoic rocks.

Tum OLINTON GROUP.

Beginning at the top of the Medina sandstone regarding the age of
which there has been no question I will consider first the beds lying upon
it in Perry county. These are shown in the following section :

©
1884.] 493 [Claypole,

Section of the Rocks in Perry County correlated with the Clinton Group of
New York.

Fossil haematite and limeston@....1.s cece eeeeeeee 2 feet.

POHRCLEO Okereienuibovionalvtt PU VM We dea L Mieeieretele erry © acuuags bebe beet lone.
PIEOMathte voici ee ye Lenore alee Wate nees Bl aialbreheyelGF slonal ay 1 Hear
MCLE OC La leis vii Cicate wood rae aia wien te Pe PN UR he SOs ia
Shale, green.......-. vowing hOOss a4
+ | Iron sandstone........% i S23!
Upper green shale MV ORRLCOUEN Veen sinners eas wal ate
| Shale, green. ......66: 00 Nee UUM a
TROr BHHOSHOMO sh seine sll nena pie erties aes
FArGerORsil DlVOOk OnE Vey tie ss Oe anes PRS Cae (earn ea Bos
Lower green shale.......cseeeeeeeenees Naas ate OOO a
989

Medina sandstone.

The thickness here assigned to the different beds is not a constant
quantity, and the diagram does not represent any actual section. It is,
with this exception, accurate wherever the whole series crops out in the
county. The measurements have been taken or estimated where it was
possible to obtain them, and the details may be found in the forthcoming
report on Perry county.

ComMPARISON WITH THE Criinvon Rocks or New York.

Ets New York. Ft. Perry Co., Pa.
18.4 Limestone. 2 Limestone and hematite.
5 Sandrock
1 Hematite.
Tron Ore. 5 sandrock.
24.0 Upper green shale. 363 Upper green shale and fossil
ore.
15.2 Iron ore and limestone. 13 Iron sandstone and fossil ore.
23.0 Lower green shale. $00 Lower green shale.
Thickness, 80 ft. 6 inches. Thickness, 989 feet.

POINTS OF DIFFERENCE.

°

Diversity of opinion may prevail in regard to the identity of the beds
of iron ore on the above diagram, but this is of little moment, They are
usually discontinuous and probably their horizons vary. This is the case
even within the limits of Perry county and cannot therefore excite sur-
prise at the distance of several hundred miles.

No sandstone is shown on the New York section and little limestone in
Pennsylvania, but the sandstones in the latter are thin, only 10 and 20 feet
thick respectively, and the same is true of the limestones of New York.

Claypole.] 494. [May 16,

Beds so thin are not likely to be continuous over so great a distance. Such
discrepancies are due to difference of conditions during deposition. They
are no argument against correspondence.

Pornts OF RESEMBLANCE.

It is impossible to avoid noticing the close correspondence, in general,
between the two sections looked at as wholes. The lower parts of the two
sections are absolutely identical except in thickness. And in Perry county
the lower portion includes 965 feet out of the 989 which represent the
total mass. In New York it includes 62 feet 2 inches out of the total 80
feet 6 inches. That is, practically, the column presents a close resem-
blance in the two sections through three-fourths of its length in New
York and through forty-nine fiftieths of its length in Perry Co., Pennsyl-
vania. Closer correspondence could not be looked for.

This reduction of its mass also brings the group in Pennsylvania into
rather closer resemblance in thickness, to that which it possesses in New
York. It is still vastly thicker, but this is the usual condition. If the
whole of the shales of the fifth group be included the disproportion is
enormous,

The resemblance can be traced even into more minute detail. Prof.
Hall describes the Lower green shale as consisting of thin smooth laminie
containing lenticular masses of limestone. If sandstone be substituted
for limestone, these words exactly describe the Lower green shale of
Perry Co. Of the Lower limestone he says: ‘‘This mass is composed al-
most entirely of thin beds of impure limestone which alternate with thin
layers of green shale.” Again the change of the word will adapt the
description to the iron sandstone and ore of Perry Co. Of the Upper
green shale we read (p. 64): ‘This is readily distinguished from the
Lower green shale by its being everywhere fossiliferous ;’’ a statement
also true of the two shales in Pennsylvania, The Lower has yielded me
almost nothing, while from the Upper I have obtained a fair collection.

Stratigraphically, therefore, it is almost impossible to expect a closer
agreement between two correlated beds than that which we actually find
here. And unless contrary evidence be found elsewhere, it is not only a
reasonable, but an inevitable inference that these beds must be considered
equivalents.

PALMONTOLOGICAL EvripENon.

It is not possible at present to give in full the evidence furnished by
palwontology in favor of the classification above adopted. The suspension
or termination of the work of the survey in this department will delay
for a considerable time the working out of the collection I have made and
the making of a larger one. So far, however, as I have been able in the
intervals of field work to study this material, it is decisively in favor of
the views here set forth. A few details are appended, the parts of the
group being taken in order,

1884.] 495 [Clay pole.

Lower Shale.

Omitting the lower shale, in consequence of the scarcity of its fossils so
far obtained, and the fact that there is no question of its affinity, I pass on
to the next member of the series ascending.

Tron Sandstone and Block Ore.

The Iron sandstone is in some places very fossiliferous, and, aside from.
the fossils which relate to my present purpose, has yielded me some which
promise to be of considerable interest to paleontology. Two species,
however, bear on the present subject.

Beyrichia lata, Vanuxem.
Calymene Clintoni, Vanuxem.

Both are distinctly Clinton species described from that group in New
York.

Upper Green Shale. i
The three species already recognized from this bed are

Reyrichia lata, Vanuxem.
Oalymene Olintoni, Vanuxem.
Olaymene Niagarensis, Hall.

All are Clinton species in New York, the last extending its range into
the Niagara group also.

Ove Sandrock.

This rock is in many places abundantly fossiliferous. Again we find

Beyrichia lata, Vanuxem.
Calymene Clinton’, Vanuxem.

Sandvein Ore Bed.
The same evidence comes from this horizon. I have recognized

Beyrichia lata, Van.
Calymene Olintont, Van.
Ormoceras vertebratum, Hall.

Thus we find the results of a study of the fossils completely in harmony,
so far, with those deduced from the stratigraphy. Clinton fossils range up
to and into the Sandvein ore bed.

On the other hand in all these beds I have not yet found a single speci-
men belonging to any other horizon. Negative evidence is therefore con-
firmatory. We have consequently paleontological evidence, at present
scanty, it is true, but unmistakable, of the persistence of the typical Clinton
fauna of New York up to and through the Sandvein ore bed.

aypole.,] 496 {May 16,

LiMir oF THE CLINTON Fauna.

At this horizon the Clinton fauna, pure and alone, altogether ceases.
Above the Sandvein ore bed (or limestone in some places) comes a mass
of green shale and thin hard limestone bands about 150 feet thick, in which
fossils are scarce, but from which I have obtained a few species. Among
these the only ones yet recognized with certainty are :

Lingula oblonga, Hall.
Beyrichia notata, Mall.

The former of these is a Clinton species in New York, and the latter
was described from the Lower Helderberg rocks. We have here, there-
fore, 4 mingling of the faunas of the two groups indicating passage beds
from one to the other.* This commingling of species is limited, so far as I
have yet observed, to the belt of green shales and limestones above men-
tioned. Immediately over it lies the great (Bloomsburg) Red shale, whicl
is almost barren, but which will be discussed below. Tere it will suffice
to observe that no Clinton forms have been found in it.

Paleontology, therefore, fully bears out the division above adopted for
the lower part of this great mass of shales and sandstones, which have
been hitherto thrown together into that Limbo of shale, No. 5 of Rogers.
The arrangement deduced from the above train of reasoning is as given,
below :

Table of the Olinton grouv as proposed for Perry county.

Onondaga group. Red shale.
150 Passage beds. Green shale and limestone.

( Sandvein ore bed.

Ore sandrock and haematite.
Upper green shale and fossil ore.
Tron sandstone.

Hard fossil block ore.

Lower green shale.

139

989) Clinton, ProuUpii su eivws es
3 |
|
These beds are thus correlated, with those in the Report of the First
Survey of Prof. Rogers (Vol. I, p. 182), of which they are here considered
equivalent.
Onondaga, Red shale. Surgent red shale.
{ Green shale and lime-
UC BtOM GN ihe Waite vin'y 5
( Ore sandrock and ore. Ore sandstone.
Upper green shale
SOG OMS NG wl ,
Tron sandstone a

Passage beds. Surgent upper shale.

Lower shale, Upper slate.

d
NC Tron sandstone,
OLR HL ee es pale .

OUDtORE ys. |

(Lower green shale Lower slate.
£

* Later examinations render probable the presence of several other Clinton
forms in these green shales and limestones, which will give a more decidedly
Clinton aspect to the fauna without invalidating the conclusions here reached.

—

1884. ] 497 [Clay pole,

Tar ONONDAGA SALT Group, oR Gypstous Groupe oF New YORK, IN
Perry County, Pa.

Having thus, in appearance, satisfactorily placed the lower portion of
Rogers’ fifth group on the horizon of the Clinton of New York, I proceed
to consider its upper portion.

This, in the district under consideration, consists of a vast mass of shales
with almost no variation, except that caused by a few thin layers of sand-
stone. These shales are red at base, but graduate upward with gray beds,
the red color disappearing as we ascend through the series. The lower or
red portion is about 700 feet thick, and the upper or gray portion about 150
or 200 feet. These are separated by about 700 feet of what have been
called the variegated shales, consisting of alternate beds of red, green and
ashen-gray color with a few interbedded sandstones.

It would be of course natural to correlate this shale with the limestone
immediately overlying the Clinton in New York, but for reasons, which
will appear presently, I have preferred to make it the equivalent of the
Onondaga group of New York, which immediately overlies the Niagara,
and thus to leave the latter unrepresented in Perry county.

STRATIGRAPHICAL AND LITHOLOGICAL EVIDENCE.

The Onondaga group of New York consists, like that just described, of a
mass of variegated shales, and, as some of its names imply, it there yields
salt and gypsum. Its total thickness, given by Vanuxem in the Report of
the Third District, is about 700 feet, and it is divided as shown below.
The section in Perry county is given in another column for comparison.

New York. Perry County, Pa.
Magnesian rock == Limestone with
Stylolites.
Gypseous bed (upper).
Porous (vermicular) limerock. Gray, calcareous marl.
Gypseous bed (lower).
Variegated shale (red and green). Variegated shale (red
and green).

Red shale, Red shale.

Thickness 700 feet. Thickness 1600 feet.

. Very close correspondence exists between the beds at the two places.
At both they consist, at base, of a thick mass of red shale. At both,
overlying the red shale is another mass of varying color. At both, these
two beds form the bulk of the group. So closely do the two sections re-
semble one another, that the description given of these lower beds in New
York may be copied and applied literally to those in Perry county.

Mr. Vanuxem says (Report on Third District of New York, p. 96) of
the red shale :

“The great mass is of a blood-red color, fine-grained, earthy in fracture,
breaking or crumbling into irregular fragments.’’

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xxt. 115. 83K. PRINTED JUNE 5, 1884.

498 [May 16,

Glaypole.]

And of the variegated shale he says (p. 97) :

“Tt consists of shales and calcareous slate of a light green and drab
color, intermixing and alternating with the red shale at its lower part.

“Thus we have at the top of the series, green, then red under it, green,
red, bluish, green and yellow, this latter by exposure to the air; then
green and red layers with a little white and greenish sandstone, being
several repetitions of the first two, and finally red shale as the lowest vis-
ible mass.”’

No better description can here be given of these two shales as they
occur in Perry county.

The thickness of the separate beds is not given in Vanuxem’s Report,
but the total mass varies from 700 to 1000 feet. In Perry county the two
lower masses—the red and variegated shales—measure 1400 feet, making
the whole group, as usual, much thicker in Pennsylvania than in New
York.

Again (p. 97.), ‘‘In several localities the red shale shows numerous
green spots, varying from one inch or less to several inches in diameter.

“The red shale presents a thickness of from one to nearly 500 feet, yet
nowhere has a fossil been discovered in it, or a pebble or anything ex-
traneous, excepting a few thin layers of sandstone.”

Similar green spots occur in the red shale in Perry county (near
Wagoner’s mill, for instance). The great scarcity of fossils is also re-
markable, though these are not totally absent in Pennsylvania as will be
mentioned farther on.

Advancing one step more Jet us compare the third division in Perry
county with the similarly situated beds in New York. Here again we
find the description of Vanuxem applicable to a great extent. He says
(p. 99):

“The great mass of the deposit consists of rather soft, yellowish or drab
and brownish colored shale and slate, both argillaceous and calcareous.”
It contains ‘‘ argillaceous and calcarcous slates, and more compact masses,
which are hard.’’ So in Perry county, though seldom exposed, this is the
nature of the mass.

But one very important difference in these gray marls at the two places
must be mentioned. No trace exists in this part of Pennsylvania of those
concretions of gypsum which characterize the upper part of the Onon-
daga in New York, and which, together with its brine springs, render it
the most valuable stratum in the State. These gray shales contain no
valuable mineral, except the lime which enters largely into their composi-
tion. Such deposits as the gypsum and salt in New York rarely extend
over very great tracts of country. Their absence in Perry county is not
an objection sufficient to invalidate the argument. Indeed, the gypsum
is not present over all the Onondagan outcrop in New York. Professor
Hall says (Geol. of 4th District, p. 126), ‘‘ There is a considerable space in
the western part of Monroe county where no beds of gypsum are known.”’

1884.] 499 [Clay pole.

Gypsum and salt, like iron ore, occur usually in scattered and discon-
tinuous beds.

No closer correspondence can reasonably be looked for than that which
T have here established between the Onondaga rocks in New York and
those in Perry county, which I have placed in correlation with them.
Only the uppermost stratum, called the Magnesian limerock, is unrepre-
sented in the Pennsylvanian section. This is of inconsiderable thickness,
measuring only twenty-four feet.

PALAONTOLOGICAL HVvIDENCES.

The great barreness of these shales, which has been alreddy alluded to,
prevents the production of very strong evidence derived from their fossils.
Only a single species bearing on the subject has rewarded a considerable
amount of search. This is Leperditia alta, Conrad, which has been found
in the Red shale in a few places abundantly, near Buffalo Mill, for ex-
ample, in Saville township. It is also found in the second division—the
Variegated shale—in Centre township, and becomes exceedingly abund-
ant inits upper part, whole slabs being completely covered with its casts.
These gray shales afford few opportunities of examination, but this spe-
cies runs up into and through the massive limestones, forming in this
county the lowest division of the Lower Helderberg rocks or Water Lime
of New York. Above this horizon I have not found it.

In regard to this species Vanuxem says (l.c. p. 99) :

‘At one place only I succeeded in finding fossils in the second deposit
(the Varigated shales), ‘consisting of Cytherins ’ (Leperditia) about
half the size of those in the group above.”’

In this respect, therefore, the correspondence is exact.

No fossils having been reported from the Red shale in New York, the
presence of Leperditia alta in those of Perry county is not without inter-
est, though it supplies no additional means of identification.

It has been mentioned that Beyrichia notata occurs in the passage bed
below the Red shale. It may, therefore, be looked for in the Onondaga
group, but I have not been able to find it. Its range, at present, is from
the passage shales to the basal beds of the Lower Helderberg in Perry
county, but it is yet known only in its extreme limits.

Summing up the evidence now presented, it is impossible to dispute the
inference that the rocks above described are the real equivalent in Perry
county of the Onondaga series in New York. By adopting this view,
order is introduced into a mass of deposits hitherto the home of much
confusion and uncertainty.

Below is added the correlation of these rocks with those of the First
Survey.

Gray calcareous shale. Scalent gray marls.
Variegated shale. Surgent variegated marls.
— oS o'

Red shale. Surgent red shale.

Claypole.] 500 {May 16,

Tur NIAGARA Group oF New York ABSENT FROM Parry County, Pa.

From the identifications here established it follows that nothing is left
to represent the Niagara group in Perry county. If such a representa-
tive existed it must lie on the top of the iron ore capping the Clinton
group. But the green shale of the passage beds has yielded no fossils
that can belong to a bed of that age. It holds, as above shown, & mingled
fauna of the Clinton and Lower Helderberg ages. There is, consequently,
no conclusion possible, except to infer the absence of the Niagara group
from Perry county.

The rapid thinning of the Niagara rocks in New York to the eastward
prepares us for this conclusion. Two hundred and forty feet thick at
Niagara Falls, it dwindles down to about one hundred and thirty feet in
Wayne county, near Rochester. No other exposure occurs until we reach
the slope of the Cincinnati anticline in Southwest Ohio, where it scarcely
exceeds fifty feet. :

Tun Uprrr Limit of Tan ONONDAGA GROUP.

It is scarcely necessary to follow this subject further, as no doubt exists
concerning the age of the mass of Limestone overlying these shales, The
Lower Helderberg group in Perry county has a well-defined summit,
being capped by the Oriskany sandstone, but an ill-defined base where it
meets the Onondaga gray shales. Difference of opinion, consequently,
may exist concerning the exact plane at which the separation should be
made. <A short statement, therefore, of the facts and argument bearing
on this point is appended.

The Lower Helderberg rocks in Perry county as here defined, consist
of the following :

10’. White flint shales, ) Oriskany Sandstone.
80’ Yellow flint shales.

8’ Black cherty limestone. | Lower Helderberg 348’,
150’ Lime shales.
100’ Massive limestone. Onondaga Gray Shales.

Regarding the age of all these beds, except the lowest, there is no room
for doubt.* The Lime shales and the White flint shales both abound in
the fossils that characterize the Lower Helderberg group in New York,
The following partial list is sufficient to support this assertion.

Fosstzs Common to tHe Limp SHALES OF PERRY County, PaA., AND
ton Lower HeLpERBERG Rocks or New York:

Discina discus, Hall. Merista levis, Vanuxem.

+ Strophomena rugosa, Dalman. Mevista bella, Mall.
Rensselaeria mutabilis, Hall. Megambonia aviculoidea, Hall.
Rhynchonella nucleolata, Hall. Murchisonia minuta, Hall.

Rhynchonella formosa, Hall.

*This doubt is now removed by the note added below.
+ This species and Spirifera macropleura, Con., abound in the White flint

shale.

1884. 501 [Claypole,

In regard to the lowest bed given in the section above, it must be ad-
mitted that in the determination of its horizon paleontology affords
very little aid. Still paleontology is not our only guide in the. solution
of such problems. Indeed, she is only at best a guide whose authority is
borrowed from stratigraphy, but nevertheless invaluable and indispensable.

JOMPARISON OF THE Lowpr HELpERBERG Brps or New Yor«K WITH
THOSE REFHRRED TO THAT GRouP IN Perry County, Pa.:

New York. Perry County, Pa.
sp ( Upper Pentamerus limestone,

i white ¥ 4 f awe
# O | HEncrinital limestone. Flint shales with Crinoids.
2

3 4 Delthyris shaly limestone. ‘

68 thyris shaly ime tone re cialas,
Hs | Lower Pentamerus limestone. !

| Waterlime (Tentaculite bed.) Massive limestone.

& [ ‘

2 | Magnesian rock.

S , Vermicular rock.

= | Gypseous marls. Gray calcareous shale.

en)

If the identifications previously made are accepted, there is no alterna-
tive but to admit the correlation of the Massive limestone with the Water
lime, or to deny it any equivalent in the New York series. It is so closely
connected with the overlying lime shales that to separate these would be
in the highest degree illogical. They graduate into one another and can
only be distinguished by the thinness of the beds and the abounding fos-
sils of the upper strata. Their physical resemblance to the water lime is
exceedingly great, but nowhere in Perry county have I been able to find
any hydraulic beds, All slake equally when burnt.

PALMONTOLOGICAL EVIDENCE.

In a case when stratigraphical evidence is so conflicting, the slight aid
which palwontology can afford becomes exceedingly valuable. The Mas-
sive limestone being almost barren of fossils, the argument must rest on
one or two species.

The Water lime is characterized in New York by abundance of Leper-
ditia alta. As already mentioned, this fossil occurs for the last time, so far
as yet observed in Perry county, in the massive limestone, where it is very
abundant and often very large.

Occasionally, also, corals have been seen in this limestone, resembling
species occurring in the lime shales above it, thus forming a link between
the two. Below this limestone no fossils of this kind have been found in
the shales.

Considering the high probability that this class of evidence would be
increased by closer and wider search, especially in other counties, there can
be no doubt that this Massive limestone should be included in the Lower
Helderberg group of which it must then form the base, (See note, p. 502.)

res
Claypole.} 502 [May 16, 1884,

If, however, any should prefer to relegate it to a system of ‘‘passage-
beds ’’ connecting the Onondaga and the Lower Helderberg, no valid ob-
jection can be raised to the course pending the discovery of further and
conclusive evidence. It will not affect the arrangement above proposed.

I must remark in conclusion, that the suggestions now made are pro-
visional, and therefore subject to change, according to future evidence.
It does not seem probable, however, that the main outline of the plan will
be altered.

Note. Since this paper was written I have obtained an excellent speci-
men of Pterygotus Osborni, Hall, from the massive limestone of Juniata
county. This may be considered a proof of the identity of this limestone
with the Water lime of New York. For this specimen I am indebted to
Mr. Jas. Stevenson of this city (Akron, O.), a former resident of Juniata
county, Pa,

SUMMARY OF THE GROUPING DETAILED ABOVE.

New York. Perry County, Pa.

oe Upper Pentamerus limestone.
% 2? | Encrinital limestone. Flint shale with Crinoids.
are Delthyris shaly limestone. \ ‘lime shales with Zentaculites,
4 | Lower Pentamerus limestone. Meristetla, &e.

iC Water lime (Tentaculite bed). Massive limestone with Ptery-

: gotus and Lep. alta.

i

© | Magnesian rock.

& | Vermicular rock.

s 1 Gypseous marls, Gray, calcareous shale.

© | Variegated shale. Variegated shale.

© | Red Shale. Red shale.

Passage-beds.

_ [ Limestone. Limestone and hsematite.

Be Sandrock,

z Iron ore. Teematite.

br 4 Sandrock.

= | Upper green shale. Upper green shale and fossil ore,

= Tron ore and limestone. Iron sandstone and fossil ore,

~ | Lower green shale. Lower green shale,

Medina sandstone,
ERRATUM.

In Mr. Branner’s paper on the growth of the Palm, for Guéliand,
read Guillaud ; and for Ser. VI, 176, 1877, read, Ser. V, L—176 1877.

Jan, 18, 1884] 503 [Cope,
Synopsis of the Species of Oreodontide. By H. D. Cope.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 18, 1884.)

The tribe Ruminantia first appears in the White River Miocene period
in North American geological listory. It is represented there by a num-
ber of genera, which pertain to several family types. The most aberrant
of these, the Oreodontida, includes the largest number of forms, generic and
specific. The Poébrothertide certainly embraces but few species, while
a third group of genera, represented by Leptomeryx, which are inter-
mediate between the Tragulina and Pecora, and should be perhaps regard-
edas aberrant Zragulida, also includes a small number of species.

The Oreodontide constitute a family related to the Anoplotheriida of
the later Eocene, but representing a more specialized condition of the
structure of the molar teeth, in the full development of the selenodont
type, which is rudimental in the Anoplothertide. Their feet, on the other
hand, are less specialized than in the latter family. Asa family, the Oreo-
dontide display very little tendency in their limbs to the specialized con-
dition of the Ruminantia, but are more like those of the suilline groups,
und, among recent families, of the Zippopotamida.

OREODONTID ©,

Dentition ; superior mcisors present; molars selenodont. Cervicals
with the transverse processes perforated by the vertebrarterial canal. No
alisphenoid canal. Ulna and radius, and tibia and fibula distinct. Meta-
podial bones four on each foot, with incomplete distal troch}gar keels.
Lunar bone not supported by magnum, Navicular and cuboid bones dis-
tinct.

The preceding synopsis of its characters should furnish a basis for the
definite location of the Oreodontide in the system. Dr, Leidy called its
species Ruminating hogs, and created a family for Oreodon and the allied
genera, under the name of Oreodontide. 'This family is adopted by Prof.
Gill who includes in it the Agriochoeride of Leidy, and places it in his
division Pecora, which is more comprehensive than the Pecora of Prof.
Flower, being nearly identical with the Selenodonta of Kowalevsky.
More precise expression of its affinity to the existing families is not given,
excepting to place it under a division ‘‘incertx sedis.’’

As a selenodont type, this family is excluded from the Artiodactyla
omnivora, and as having its metapodial bones distinct, it cannot be placed
in any recent family excepting the Zragulidw. From this family it is
distinguished by the distinct ulna and radius. We then turn to the ex-
tinct families Poébrotheriidw and Anoplotheriidw. The former agrees
with the Zragulide excepting in its Cameloid cervical vertebra,
while the latter differs from the Oreodontidw in the structure of
the feet, The <Anoplotheriidw are didactyle in front, and tridactyle
behind. The posterior foot has a well-developed second digit directed

PROC. AMER. PHILOS, 800, XxT. 116 8L. PRINTED JUNE 6, 1884.

Cope.) 504. (Jan, 18,

more inwards than the others, which it is supposed supported a nata-
tory web. In the Oreodontide all the feet are regularly tetradactyle.*
The Anoplotheriidx differ also in the presence of an additional cusp on.
the inner side of the superior molars, accompanied by an imperfect de-
velopment of one or both pairs of the internal crescents. In Anoplo-
therium the internal crescents of the inferior molars are incomplete, and
more or less represented by tubercles. In the Oreodontide there are two
pairs of fully developed crescents, and no internal tubercles. The de-
tails of the structure express various affinities. The axis is intermediate
between that of the suilline and ruminant Artiodactyla; the other cer-
vicals are suilline, while the remaining vertebre are ruminant. The
scapula is ruminant, not suilline; while the humerus is like nothing but
Anoplotherium. The radiocarpal articulation is intermediate between that
of hogs and ruminants. The unciform supports the lunar bone. The sac-
rum is ruminant, the ilium suilline. The femur and tarsus are much like
those of the peccary.

The genera of this family known to me are the following :

I. Orbit incomplete ; last premolars in both jaws with two external
crescents or Vs.
PreniOlare THTOO! is eee Viele es eins vate wie eld th vivels ee mae COLOTCOQOTds
PPHOMIOLATS TOUT) sie oasis oe ewige oop siumlecn iene ules Reha wiaontis Agriochoerus.

IL. Orbit complete ; premolars four, the fourth with one external crescent.

au. No facial vacuities.

Premaxillaries distinct ; otic bullw not inflated. ..:....... vee ben Oneodon.
Premaxillaries distinct ; otic bulle inflated. ................Mucrotaphus.
Premaxillaries codssified ; otic bulle inflated. ......... ...- Meryeochoerus.

aa. Facial vacuities present.
Premaxillaries coéssified, dentigerous ; vacuities prelachrymal
Wl disse eWeek Sesebes iin nlenyonyie.

foal aN ai Oe I sete eee vee Mae ‘
Incisors six above, persistent ; vacuities prelachrymal and pre-
frontal; nasal bones much reduced..... seeeeecececcee Leptauchenta.

Incisors very few, caducous ; vacuities very large.........+.. Cyclopidius.
Ill. Inferior premolars three.

True inferior canine functional; inferior incisors one on each side. Pithecistes.
The number of species referred to these genera in the succeeding pages

is as follows :

Oreodon. wines CVG Ueno
Eucrotaphus. Pe Svate a's MIR UNK DEER ik é
Merycocheerus. «1... seer eee cues Fv cisco be dca legumes shiner ye
Merychyus........ See IR REVI Ch Hel Chose Uie Sele Wigals Mia RACAL A os)
Leptuuchenia...... .....- SEL aRnE LSE AO Vee sal aeee é
Oyclopidiuis........ cece eee cece ieee ees 2
Pithectetesy ss. oes eevee seule Pit ecain's atacwey é
Agriochoerus . sen 6
Coloreodon... 2

35

* I have observed this in the genera Oreodon, Eycrotaphus, Merycochorus,
and Merychyus,

1884, ] 505 [Cope,

The present paper is chiefly devoted to the {proper distinction of these
species and genera or cranial characters only. Figures of all will be
given in my volume which embraces this subject, in the Report of the
U. S. Geological Survey of the Territories.

Coloreodon ferox Cope, one-half natural size, Original; from Report U.S,
Geolog, Survey Terrs,, vol, ili, fF. V. Hayden in charge.

OREODON Leidy.

Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1857, p. 288. Ancient Fauna of
Nebraska, Smithsonian Contrib. to Knowledge, 1858, p. 29. Extinct
Mammalia Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, p. 72. Report U. 5. Geological
Survey Terrs., 1873, I, p. 201. Merycotdodon Leidy, Proceeds. Acad.
Philada., 1848, p. 47 (nomen nudum). Ootylops Leidy, Loe. cit., 1851,
p. 239.

Premaxillary bones distinct from each other. Otic bull not inflated.
No lachrymal vacuity of the face ; nasal bones normal. Premolars four
in both jaws.

Dental formula I. $; ©.+; P-m. 4; M. $; the series uninterrupted.
Crowns of the molars robust, well distinguished from the roots. Grind-
ing surface of the true molars simply selenodont, ¢. ¢., with but two pairs
of crescents. Superior premolars composed of a single external compressed
cusp with crescentic section, and internal cingula or crescent. The fourth
premolar with a well developed internal crescent ; the first three with rudi-
mental internal crescents in the form of basal cingula. Superior canines
distinct. Inferior premolars of two kinds; the first canine-like in form
and function ; the others consisting of a single external cutting edge rep-

Cope.] 506 |Jan, 18,

resenting two crescents, of which the anterior has its posterior horn
developed as an obliquely transverse crest directed inwards. Last true
molar with a heel composed of two columns.

In the superior temporary dentition the last premolar has the form of the
first permanent true molar. The third premolar has five lobes, 7. ¢., four
crescents and an anterior odd one. The other temporary premolar resem-
bles that of the permanent series. The last inferior temporary premolar has
the three pairs of lobes usual in the Artiodactyla, and the two which pre-
cede it resemble the corresponding permanent teeth. Says Leidy :* ‘‘The
permanent true molars successively protrude and occupy their functional
position before any of the deciduous molars are shed. The displacement of
the latter by their permanent successors appears to begin with the eruption
of the last of these, which is followed by those in advance. The first
permanent premolar of the upper jaw appears to have protruded after the
deciduous teeth, and occupied a position with them in the functional series,
but remains after these are shed.”’

The cranial characters which belong to Oreodon as a genus are the fol-
lowing: Orbit completed behind ; temporal fosse separated by a sagittal
crest. A lachrymal fossa, but no facial nor frontal vacuities. Premaxil-
lary bones distinct from each other and from the maxillaries. Nasal bones
well developed. Auditory bulle not inflated.

The preceding dental and cranial characters have been pointed out by
Leidy in his various paleontological works. On account of the absence
of the necessary material he was unable to give the characters of the
remaining parts of the skeleton. These are of course necessary to a
correct, estimate of the affinities of the genus, and I will endeavor to add
such information as my material will permit. This consists of numerous
more or less complete skeletons found in connection with the skulls by
myself in Colorado in 1878.

Vertebre. The cervical vertebree are rather short, and the character of
the articulation of the centra slightly opisthocoelous, and the articular
faces are quite oblique. The axis is the longest vertebra; the three last
centra are subequal in length. In one of my series the seven cervicals
are preserved. In all of these, excepting the seventh, the bases of the
diapophysis are perforated by the vertebrarterial canal. In the sixth
vertebra, the decurved parapophyses are especially robust. The axis and
three succeeding centra display strong hypapophyses at their posterior ex-
tremities, which are carried forwards as strong median keels. The odon-
toid process is depressed so as to have a lenticular section ; it is not exca-
vated above, but in my largest specimen the internal borders of the facets
for the atlas are continued so as to enclose a short groove on each side at
its base. In one smaller and immature specimen this is wanting. The
vertebrarterial canal of the axis is enclosed as in the other cervicals. The
canal for the second spinal nerve hasa narrow roof, but there are no canals

* Ancient Fauna of Nebraska, p, 44.

1884, | 507 [ Cope.

for the succeeding pairs of nerves perforating the neural arches. The atlas

is not very elongate. The base of the diapophysis has a perforating canal, ,
which issues in a large inferior fossa. The vertebrarterial canal then per-

forates the diapophysis upwards anterior to the middle of the base, and

then soon enters the neural canal just posterior to the superior margin of

the cotylus of the occipital condyle.

The centra succeeding the cervicals increase gradually in length poste-
riorly. Those of the anterior part of the dorsal series are quite depressed,
but the vertical diameter rapidly increases, so as ta be equal to the trans-
verse in some of the lumbars. <A trace of the opisthocoelous articulation
exists throughout the dorsals but is very little marked in the posterior
centra, There are no hypapophyses on the dorsals, but on one of them,
probably the third, the inferior and lateral faces are separated by a strong
angle, which is strongest anteriorly, giving the articular face a subquadrate
outline. The rib-bearing diapophyses are robust. On the posterior dor-
sals the capitular and tubercular surfaces are confluent, forming a narrow
facet on the anterior face of the diapophysis, in a manner not seen in
Cervus elaphus or Sus seropha. The centra of the lumbars, after lengthen-
ing, become shorter immediately in front of the sacrum. The vertical
diameter of one or two posterior ones is less than that of the anterior
ones. The greater number of the lumbars display a small compressed
hypapophysis at their anterior extremity ; but this is wanting on the
posterior ones. The neural arches of the dorsal and lumbar vertebrae are
nowhere perforated for the spinal nerves.

The lumbar prezygapophyses embrace the articular faces of the poste-
rior ones, which have a section of one side (below), the end (external),
and a half the other side (above), of a transverse ellipse. The superior
recurved surface does not appear.

The sacrum consists of five vertebre, with very depressed centra. The
ilium is attached to the diapophysis of the first, and a small anterior por-
tion of that of the second. That of the fourth is flat and free. The an-
terior zygapophysis of the first displays a slight degree of the superior
incurvature general in Artiodactyla. The caudal vertebree were numerous,
forming a long tail. The proximal ones are moderately depressed, while
more distal ones with wide diapophysis and complete neural arch, are sub-
cylindric, and more elongate. The number of vertebra preserved in the
most complete of my specimens, is as follows :

Cv. Dy L. 5 Cd
O. culbertsoni ad......... fg 5 6 4 4
O. culbertsont juv.......+ 5 8 6 2 1
GieGrOnieviiueb evi cue: 4 5 3 * *
O. g. coloradoénsts....... i 8 6 5 3

An anterior, perhaps second, sternal segment is flat and subquadrate in
outline, with large hemal articular face of the lateral margin anteriorly,
and a small one posteriorly. No inferior carina.

508 [Jan. 18,

UVope. |

The spine of the scapula rises abruptly from the neck as in Ruminantia,
and the coracoid process is short and obtuse. The spine continues'to the
distal extremity, which is regularly convex.

The most perfect énnominata in my collection are deficient in the sym-
physis. The form of the ilium is more that of a hog than of a ruminant.
The peduncle is even stouter, and the superior border is abruptly expanded
below the middle of the length of the bone. The superior and inferior
borders are subparallel as in the hog, and not divergent as in the rumi-
nants. The anterior edge is acute, and uninterrupted by an anterior in-
ferior fossa or spine. The pubis is robust and transverse, and without
prominent basal pectineal tuberosity. The incisura acetabuli invades the
base of the pubis a little, but the ischium more extensively. The ob-
turator foramen is quite large. The distal border of the ischium is ob-
liquely truncated as in many other Artiodactyla, and more nearly re-
sembles that of the peccary than any other recent form I have observed.
The tuber proper is a convex edge, not thickened, and its superior edge is
continued into a strong up-looking tuberosity. This region is not so
robust as in most recent forms.

The humerus of Oreodon is readily distinguished from that of recent
Artiodactyla by several peculiarities. The greater tuberosity is large, ris-
ing above the head ; and is incurved, terminating inwards in an acuminate
apex, Its border at the base is thrown into an obtuse angle. The lesser
tuberosity is small, and is well separated from the greater by a deep and
wide bicipital groove. The deltoid ridge is distinct. The condylar ex-
tremity is more transversely extended than in any recent Artiodactyle,
owing to the fact the posterior interior distal tuberosity is placed interior
to the trochlea instead of partially behind it, and that there is, in addition,
an internal epicondyle not seen in the recent suilline or ruminant mem-
bers of the order. The intercondylar ridge is strong, and wider than In
most recent ruminants ; in the suillines it has nothing like such a develop-
ment. Another peculiarity is the flange-like free border of the external
trochlea, which is especially recurved at its superior part.

The radius is distinct from the ulna throughout. The relation of the
ulnar to the radiocarpal surface is posterior as well as exterior; the com-
mon suture of the two, making an angle of 45° with the long axis of the
radiocarpal surface. The head is a transverse oval, with the inferior face
forming a regular curve without notch. Its articular surface is divided into
three portions in adaptation to the internal and external humeral trochles
and the wide median ridge. The external face is beveled forwards above,
to fit the flange-like projection of the external trochlea, The shaft of the
radius is not very stout, and has a nearly equal transversely oval section
to near the distal expansion. Here are wide grooves for the extensor
tendons, one superior, the other obliquely exterior. The carpal articular
facet, has the general ungulate characters. The scaphoid facet is concave
above, convex and condyloid below, and is only distinguished from the

wy

1884, } 509 [Cope.

lunar facet by a contraction of the anterior and posterior borders. There
is no indication of distinguishing ridge between the lunar and cuneiform
facets. The posterior border at their junction is prominent, enclosing a
fossa with the scaphoid condyle, which does not, however, excavate the
intervening surface. The scaphoid condyle is not divided by a ridge.

The ulna gradually contracts distally from a robust olecranon. The
shaft beyond the humeral cotylus has an oval section, with its long axis
forming an angle of 45° to the perpendicular. The olecranon is short and
compressed, its posterior border rising nearly as high as the coronoid
process. The edges of the humeral cotylus are not flared beyond the
shaft.

In the carpus the unciform nearly reaches the scaphoid, which is sup-
ported by the magnum and trapezium,

The great trochanter of the femur is not produced beyond the line of
the head, and is well recurved, enclosing a large fossa. The little trochan-
ter is large. The fossa ligamenti teris is submedian, subround and large.
Distally, the patellar trochlear groove is quite elevated ; its lateral crests
are of equal prominence, and nearly equal superior prolongation. The
patellar groove is continued some distance above the crests, but there is
no fossa in this region as in the hog. The popliteal fossa is well marked,
and the condyloid articular surfaces are not entirely cut off from the
rotular. The external linea aspera terminates first in a rugose muscular
insertion, and then in a shallow fossa a short distance above the condyle,
There is no crest nor deep fossa. This element is more like the corre-
sponding one in Dicotyles torquatus than in any other mammal. The
patella is a short wide bone, with a large anteroposterior diameter. One
extremity is acute, the opposite one truncate.

The head of the dédia is also like that of Dicotyles. The spine is divided
as usual, and not much elevated ; the crest is prominent, but is wide and
truncate above at the head. It is not excavated asin Sus. The external
tendinous notch is well marked. The external margin of the shaft does

‘not display any sutural surface for the fibula, he surface of attachment

of an external malleolus is distinct. The internal malleolar process is nar-
row and is produced well downwards. The anterior intertrochlear angle
is prominent ; the posterior only convex. The trochlew are deep, the
outer being both the wider and the deeper.

The astragalus presents well marked characters. The distal extremity
displays the two usual parallel trochles, which are separated by a pro-
nounced angle. The cuboid trochlea slopes somewhat backwards, while
the navicular is strongly concave. The tibial trochlew are unequal, the
internal being smaller than the external. It is separated from the latter
by a constriction which is well rounded and not angulate as in the hog.
The external side of the astragalus displays a wide malleolar band, a wide
posterior and narrow anterior calcaneal facets, and an undivided concavity
intervening between the latter. On the inner side, the malleolar face

Cope. | 510 (Jan. 18,

descends to below the middle, as in Hypertragulus, and there is no verti-
cal nor horizontal distal crest. The inferior calcaneal facet is undivided
and not grooved, and does not extend over the internal border of the in-
ferior side of the bone. It exhibits an acute border on the external side.
The calcaneum is rather elongate, and the free portion is compressed and
with obtuse margins above and below. The transverse astragalar pro-
cess is not large and is not produced beyond its facet. The ascending
plate is well developed and has a superior, uninterrupted convex facet for
the fibula, with a narrow facet on its inner side. The inner distal astraga-
lar facet extends the entire length of the cuboid facet. There is a longi-
tudinal ridge on the external side of the distal end of the calcaneum.

The navicular and cuboid bones are distinct from each other and from
the e¢ctocuneiform. The astragalar ligamentous fossa is in the naviculo-
cuboid suture. The inferior proximal angle of the cuboid is produced
posteriorly, and the peroneal process well forwards. The ectocuneiform
is distinct, and much wider than long. The mesocuneiform is exterio-
posterior in position, and the transverse diameters are small, It is pro-
duced distally, overlapping the head of the second metatarsus. Ento-
cuneiform wanting. The metapodial bones are entirely distinct. The
lateral metatarsals are weJl developed. The second articulates with both
the ecto-and mesocuneiform bones, by a proximal extremity which is
laterally compressed. The third and fourth are subequal in width, and
articulate exclusively with the ectocuneiform and cuboid respectively.
The fifth metatarsus is compressed proximally, and the external part of
its extremity articulates with a lateral fossa of the cuboid. The distal
articular extremities of the metapodials are separated from the anterior
face of their shafts by a transverse groove ; and they have a well marked
articular fossa on each side. The trochlear tongue only exists on the
posterior face, where it is prominent and compressed. It disappears on
the middle of the distal end, and is wanting on the anterior face. The
phalanges are depressed proximally, the penultimate ones distally also.
The ungues are rather depressed and have convex.external borders. There
is a pair of sesamoid bones below the distal articular extremity of the
metatarsals.

Ilistory. The dental and cranial characters of this genus were fully
described by Dr. Leidy in 1852, as already cited. In the Extinct Mam-
malia of Dakota and Nebraska, published in 1869, Dr. Leidy added the
following points in the osteology of the skeleton of the Oreodontida (p.
72): ‘*What are supposed to be the bones of the forearm and leg are
discrete, as in the hog, and the bones of the feet correspond in number
with those of this animal.’’ In 1873* Prof. Marsh confirmed these state-
ments so far as regards the metacarpal bones, and added that ‘the navicu-
lar and cuboid bones were loosely codéssified or separate.’’ The structure
of the vertebra, and of the greater part of the scapular and pelvic arches,

wh Amer. Journ. Sci, Arts, p. 409.

1884.) 511 [Cope.

with the carpus, tarsus and feet, with the exceptions above noted, are now
described for the first time.

This genus appears first in time in the known history of the family, and
presents us with its primitive or least specialized characters, or those
nearest the average condition of the ordinary primitive ungulate.

Species. The species of this genus are difficult to discriminate from the
evidence of crania alone, and their true number will remain uncertain
until we can study entire skeletons. My material enables me to make
some progress in this direction. After the removal of the forms with in-
flated bulle to the genus Hucrotaphus, there remain the two species origi-
nally referred to Oreodon by Leidy, the O. culbertsoni and the O. gracilis.
To these Leidy subsequently added two others, the O. affinis, which is in-
termediate in size between the two named, and the O. Aybridus, of larger
size than either. As the condition of the otic bull in the last is unknown,
its generic reference is not certain. AJ] these forms are from the White
River epoch of Dakota, Nebraska and Wyoming.

My material is largely from the White River beds of Colorado. I find
from this region the true 0. gracilis and the O. culbertsond, abundantly
represented. Besides these there is a form intermediate between the 0.
gracilis and the O. affinis, which is nearer the former than the latter. Of
O. gracilis there are two skulls complete; of the form next larger, which
Teall 0. gracilis coloradoénsis, two complete crania (one with skeleton),
and a face with teeth. Of a form between the 0. afinis and the 0.
culbertsoni, there are four skulls complete (two with skeletons) ; and of
O. culbertsoné proper, numerous parts of skulls with teeth, but none com-
plete. No other regions which I have explored have produced these
species ; not even the Ticholeptus beds, where they might have been rea-
sonably expected to occur.

The distinction of the previously known species will remain as Leidy
has left it, with certain reservations in the matter of dimensions ; while I
add two sub-species.

Nasal bones obtuse posteriorly ; frontals little produced on
either side of them ; true molar teeth not exceeding M. .085
in length; canine and premolars .080; width of front .046. 0. gracilis.
Nasal bones obtuse posteriorly, frontals little produced on
either side of them; true molar teeth not exceeding .037 in
length ; canine and premolars .039 ; width of front at middle
OL OTDIGS LOMB ei v's ic SO Gaia Due ee aie a Weare cd O. coloradoénsis,
Nasal bones obtuse posteriorly, frontals little produced on
either side of them; true molar teeth not exceeding .038 ;
front at orbits .057 in width. ........ Mirch Wario sheik cs Vieay wie CN TIOIDs
Nasal bones acute posteriorly ; frontal produced to an acute
apex on each side of them; molar teeth .040; front, .056.
O. periculorum.
Nasals and frontals as last ; molar teeth .047 ; front, .0504-.. O. culbertsoni.

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xxt. 116. 3M, PRINTED JUNE 6, 1884.

Cope.) 512 [Jan, 18,

From this table it may be seen that the passage from the small 0.
gracilis to the large O. culbertsoni is accomplished by a series of inter-
mediate steps. That these extreme forms belong to one species cannot be
admitted without evidence of more complete transition than we yet
possess. As above remarked, groups of specimens represent each form
and adhere to the definitions given with considerable fidelity. The largest
of the specimens I refer to, the form 0. periculorum, however, reaches
.042 in the length of the true molar teeth, and the smallest of the 0.
eulbertsoni measures .046. These I must consider as sub-species only, As
regards the three remaining forms the length of the true molar series
shows a complete gradation, The size of the cranium, as indicated by the
interorbital width, is in the O. afinis as large as that of the O. culbertsont
according to Leidy, and the combination of characters presented by this
form, would seem to entitle it to specific rank as suggested by Leidy. On
the other hand the form coloradoénsis agrees in interorbital width with the
small O. gracilis, differing from it in the greater length of the muzzle and
of the cranium, But here, while the proportions of the premolar teeth
distinguish the forms well, the length of the brain-case does not coincide
exactly with the other measurements. The measurements of four skulls
are as follows: O. gracilis No. 1, length of skull M. 114.5 ; No. 2, .180.
0. coloradonésis No. 1, .129; No. 2, .185.

Oreodon gracilis Leidy.

Proceedings Academy Philada., 1851, 289; 1858, 392 ; 1854, 157 ; 1857,
89; Owen’s Report Geolog. Survey, 1852, 550, Pl. XI, figs. 2-8 ; Pl. XIII,
figs. 5-6. Ancient Fauna Nebraska 1853, p. 53, Pl. V, figs. 8-4; VI, figs.
1-7. Extinct Fauna Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, 94, Pl. VI, figs. 2-8.

Abundant in the White River beds of Dakota, Nebraska, Colorado and
Wyoming,

The two sub-species are distinguished as follows :

Length of superior premolar series, M. .028..,.....4+ eueleve 0. g. gracilis
Length of superior premolar series, M. .020........+. 0. g. coloradoénsis.

Oreodon gracilis gracilis Leidy.
Dakota, Nebraska and Colorado.

Oreodon gracilis coloradoénsis Cope.
Jolorado.

Oreodon afffiimis Leidy.
Extinct Mammalia Dakota and Nebraska, p. 105; Pl. TX, fig. 3.
Probably from the White River beds of Nebraska.

Oreodon culbertsoni Leidy.

Owen’s Report Geological Survey, 1852, 548, Pl. X, figs. 4-6 ; XIII,
figs. 8-4; Ancient Fauna Nebraska, Smithsonian Contrib. to Knowledge,
1858, 45; Pl. Il, III, IV, figs. 1-5, V, figs. 1-2, VI, figs. 8-11; Proceeds.

bi

#)

1884,] 513 [Cope.

Academy Philada., 1858, 3892 ; 1854, 85, 157; 1857, 89; Bronn Lethea
Geognostica, 1856, 930. Extinct Fauna Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, p .86 ;
Pl. VI, fig. 1; VII fig. 2; IX, figs. 1-2. Merycoidodon culbertsont Leidy,
Proceeds, Acad. Phila., 1848, 47, Pl. 11; 1850, 121; 1851, 239. Oreodon
priscum Leidy, Proceed. Phila., Academy 1851, 238; Cotylops speciosa
Leidy, Ibidem 239 ; Oreodon robustum Leidy, Ibidem 276.
The White River epoch of Dakota, Nebraska, Colorado and Wyoming.
The two sub-species are defined as follows :
Length of superior true molar series from M. .040 to (OGRE We ees
0. ¢. periculorum.
Length of superior true molar series from .046 to .050.... 0. ¢. culbertsont,

Oreodon culbertsoni periculorum Cope.

This smaller race or sub-species has as yet only been found in the
White River beds of Colorado and Wyoming. I do not detect any differ-
ences between it and the Nebraska form other than those of size. The
largest measurement of the O. ¢. culbertsont given in the above table is
derived from Leidy ; my largest specimen gives .047 as the length of the
true molar series.

Oreodon culbertsoni culbertsoni Leidy.

Very abundant in the White River formation of Dakota, Nebraska,
Colorado and Wyoming.

EUCROTAPHUS Leidy.

Proceedings Academy Philada., 1850, p. 92. Ancient Fauna of Nebraska,
Smithsonian Contrib. to Knowledge, 1853, p. 56. Hporeodon Marsh, Amer.
Journ. Sci. Arts, Vol. ix, 1875, p. 249.

Premaxillary bones distinct from each other. Otic bulla swollen. No
prelachrymal or nasal vacuities.

This genus presents us with the first step in the series of modifications
which the primitive form underwent with the advance of geological time.
It appeared contemporaneously with the earliest representatives of the
family, @ ¢., in the White River epoch, but in small numbers. In the
succeeding or John Day epoch the genus Oreodon had disappeared, and
the present form had multiplied enormously in individuals, if not in
species. Subsequent to that epoch it is unknown.

The greater number of the Oreodont remains found in Oregon belong to
this genus. The Hucrotaphus jacksont bore the same relation to the Oregon
John Day fauna, as the Oreodon culbertsont did to that of the White River
epoch.

The species of Eucrotaphus are distinguished as follows :

I. Palatonareal border well posterior to posterior edge of maxillary
bones.

Sope.)} 514. (Jan, 18,

a. Infraorbital foramen above front of P-m. iti,
Skull depressed, muzzle short; psroccipital process behind
bulla and not separated from it by grooves; bulla grooved
to apex for styloid ligament, etc. ; zygoma more robust,
H. trigonocephalus.
II. Palatonareal border in line with posterior edges of maxillary bones.
aa. Infraorbital foramen above posterior part of third premolar.
Paroccipital process behind otic bulla, the internal border of
its base opposite that of the bulla,.........seeseeessveee Lr Jacksont.
Paroccipital process external to the middle of the otic bulla ;
Povrerally LavwrePi ype vivcsHeiee werent ames wner vege tells MGIONs

The name here employed for this genus is the one first given with a
definition. The typical species, #7. javksoni, was widely distributed, and
appears under several varietal forms and sizes, some of which have re-
ceived names. Subsequently to the original description, Dr, Leidy added
to the genus a second species, which probably belongs to the genus
Agriocherus. On this account Leidy inclined at one time to combine the
two genera, but afterwards abandoned the idea,

Eucrotaphus trigonocephalLus, sp. noy.

This distinct form is only known to me from a single skull of an old
animal. In the character of its otic bulla it has resemblance to the species
of Agriocheerus, while the maxillary part of the skull has the posterior
position of a true Oreodon,

The muzzle is rather depressed, and the premaxillary alveolar border is
almost transverse. The position of the canine alveolus is swollen later-
ally, and between it and the infraorbital foramen the side of the face is
slightly concave. The expansion leading to the malar bone commences as
the posterior slope of the concavity mentioned, and spreads laterally, without
interruption, beginning to project beyond the superior alveolar border at
the fourth superior premolar. In the #. jacksoni this is not apparent
anterior to the first true molar. The top of the muzzle and the front are
wider than in that species, and are gently concave in the transverse direc-
tion. The anterior temporal ridges are well defined, and concave in out-
line, uniting early to form a prominent sagittal crest. The malar bone is
a little concave below the orbit. The malar process of the maxillary pro-
jects downwards in an obtuse angle, opposite the penultimate superior
molar. In #. jacksoni the malar is convex, and the tuberosity is opposite
the last molar, The squamosal process is deeper than in the #. jacksond,
and sends a more robust apex into the malar bone, the apex not extending
in front of the posterior border of the orbit. The supraoccipital crests are
well developed, and project beyond the vertical plane of the condyles ;
they continue into well marked posttemporal crests, as in the other species
of the genus, as well as send an obtuse ridge downwards on each side to-
wards the foramen magnum. The median supraoccipital plane disappears
downwards in a wedge-shaped apex, which causes the transverse section

t

1884.] 515 [Cope.

above the foramen magnum to be obtuse angulate instead of broadly
flattened as in #. jackson. The mastoid crests are roughened and are
vertical, but do not continue directly into the paroccipital processes, but
are separated from them by a deep excavation of the external margin,
due to the internal position of the base of the process.

The long diameter of the base of the paroccipital process runs outwards
and backwards, and it is attached to the bulla at the middle of the posterior
extremity without any intervening grooves such as are seen in the other
species of the genus. The bulle are ovoidal in anteroposterior section, the
regularity interrupted, however, by the presence of a ridge on the exter-
nal side directed posteriorly, enclosing a groove which is continuous with
the stylohyoid fossa. The ridge continues into the inferior crest of the
tympanic bone. The sphenoid bone is regularly convex in transverse sec-
tion, while the basioccipital is concave on each side with a narrow median
keel, which commences opposite the anterior edge of the paroccipital pro-
cesses. The basicranial axis is not quite in line with the basifacial, but
does not present such an angle with it as is seen in the species of Mery-
cochoeerus, where the skull is known to me. In this respect it agrees with
the other species of the genus. The postglenoid processes are less promi-
nent than in H. jacksoni, but have a base more widely extended outwards.
The external border is very oblique, since the apex is narrowed. The
glenoid region is more extended, both transversely and anteroposteriorly
than in the #. jacksoni. The anterior border is continued as an alisphe-
noid angle which becomes prominent, and overhangs the foramen ro-
tundum, ‘The descending alisphenoid ridge commences within the anter-
ior border of the foramen ovale. The pterygoid angle is anterior to the
middle of the palatosphenoid wall of the nareal foramen, and in front of
it the edge of the processus pyramidalis is marked by a shallow fossa or
mark of insertion of the internal pterygoid muscle. The nareopalatal
border is as far posterior to the line connecting the posterior edges of the
maxillaries as the width of the second molar tooth. The palate is every-
where nearly flat. The malar bones spread well away from the maxillaries
on each side, the anterior border of the zygomatic foramen being a seg-
ment of a circle. The squamosal part of the zygoma is more widely ex-
panded than the malar part. In H. jacksoni the shape of the zygomatic
foramen is quite different. Its anterior outline is interrupted by the pro-
jection of the maxillary bone posteriorly, which gives its anterior outline
a bilobate form. It is longer than wide in that species, and wider than
long in the ZH. trigonocephalus.

The infraorbital foramen is small. There are two lachrymal foramina ;
one larger, within the preorbital border, the other smaller, below the
tuberosity on the rim of the orbit. The frontal foramina are separated by
& space equal to one-fourth the entire frontal width. The supraorbital
notches are wanting. The preorbital fosse are well marked, are distinctly
defined above, and extend as far as the anterior border of the lachrymal
bone. The orbit is round, and looks upwards as well as outwards and

516 (van. 18,

Jope.]

forwards, on account of the prominence: of the zygomatic arch. There
are two postparietal foramina, one below and behind, the other on the
parieto-squamosal suture. The mastoid foramen is not small. The incisive
foramina are large, are longer than wide, and are separated by a rather
wide isthmus. The palatine foramina are opposite the third premolars.
There is a foramen immediately below the postfrontal process. The optic
foramen issues posterior to the line of the posterior border of the orbit,
and in front of the anteroinferior angle of the alisphenoid. The
foramen rotundum is large and round, and is immediately below and
within the ridge above mentioned, and is not overhung by a transverse
ridge of the same, as in the species of Merycochwrus known to me.
The f. rotundum doubtless includes the f. sphenodrbitale. The f.
ovale is smaller and is separated by a considerable interval from the f.
lacerum. ‘The latter is subtriangular in form and is rather small, since
the base of the otic bulla is in close sutural contact with the sphenoid
and basioccipital for a considerable distance. The f. jugulare is sub.
triangular in outline and is smaller than the f. rotundum, It is entirely
distinct from the f. condyloideum, which is the size of the f. ovale. No
f. supraglenoideum. In comparing these foramina with those of the
Hi, jacksoni, a general resemblance is to be seen, The frontal fora-
mina in that species are generally closer together than in ZH, trigonocepha-
lus, and the palatine foramen is generally opposite the fourth premolar in-
stead of the third. The foramen magnum is slightly notched on its
superior border in both.

The posterior outline of the nasal bones is truncate ; it is more or less
acuminate in all the specimens of H. jacksoni and H. major accessible to
me. The prolongation of the frontal on either side of the nagals is also
short and truncate in this species, and narrow and acuminate in the /.
jackson and H. major. The lachrymal is deeper than long ; in the species
last named it is of variable size and form, but is usually as long as deep.
There is no distinct ridge along the parieto-squamosal suture. The ali-
sphenoid has a considerable contact with the pariétal. The palatomaxil-
lary suture is irregularly convex backwards on each side of the median
line. It erosses the palate as in the H. jacksoni, at the front of the second
maxillary tooth.

The teeth are much worn, and the first and last true molars with several
of the premolars have been lost, indicating the age of the animal. The
incisors are small and have round roots, The canines are large and of
the usual form. The space between them and the first premolar is short.
The fourth premolar is small. The second true molar is wider than long,
and has no internal cingulum except between the lobes, and has a trace of

anterior cingulum.

Measurements. M.
Axial length from occipital condyles to premaxillary
POLAEL sis siewieie os vei oles Tee HUE AM calle Vue wareyue t

Axial length from occipital condytes to postglenoid pro-
COBB eeaie ling es ceungenete ine ¥ O31

1884,] 517 (Cope,

Measurements. M.
Axial length from occipital condyle to postfrontal pro-

GOSS cibun hyd atelealigs arvlgn weincolenet sjajantiaieen waive wus WlNus Wet Vly, Wee MITh 076
Axial length from occipital condyle to palatonareal bor-

LOBE aye eed Gi ache RW Ww inn a Ginna Wi Nw 8 ys wvaror bow VN GEN CRO Ne 079
Axial length from occipital condyle to end of last molar. .091
Diameters bf-orbtt WVOLUCHL 54 Ja.e:eosinrs spd ialousl viaty dvvs eOBL

UHOMZOMUD I sid sani wc waoraeehs 02%
Depth malar bone at middle of orbit........00-- ss eens 016

“zygomatic process posteriorly to glenoid face.... .028

“ gkull (right angles to profile) at glenoid face,... .045

te a KH hy OLD bearbe sea bi: sisi ie .046

‘ at i ie Pater Lec. cist sion OOO)
Elevation of occiput from foramen magnum......++-++ 044
Width top of muzzle at preorbital fossa. ........06.6+ .040

«at middle of supraorbital border, 10... 6.6.00 059

vie ¢ postfrontal PrOCESS. cee e ei ies ence ewe eeecnees 075

£60. MMGIAD GLOW OLDI 4 sis vielen s vis wise 899 iw aie) ece 110

MN ‘« zygomatic process of squamosal...........605 145

of oceiptt at condyles. ..... Si Wybik seven oie) ugvanle pene 6 066

sh “© Ocipital CONAYV1EBi ccc sees d vewitrodite si wales OOO

sit “ palate at palatonareal foramen...........6..- 028

Oe ES UMN FENG NL MANS a voAiG Ml psNTerNty pMbta ae PG/LIBISIO giiapsy eayete 082

Co Oe Ch ERY CREANLO BL ‘siVid erie 'ein « aba OraV EIN Gel Nive wee SUOU
Length of superior dental series with canines.......... .088

: SE ONOMUGINT BOLIGR iss cares sind bons ely ei cave ujaa 8 047

ui #6 CPU MONAT BOLIC: vis’ sibs iki s,s 5, ecuwierd webie sey Ob .036
TlAmmatebe canine At base speed ag Unis vavCesnitl 84.9 8 .009

CYAMSVETSO.. soceesersecees .010

Tt eteve Pome: sf anteroposterior ........50...0es . .009
\transverse...... ds ujelasa pala leney a sha qos Ole

Miwmmeterekt. dee ANtOROPOStEMION. scvv sasveeuua vases cs 014
UPPARSYCUBG Ht ey bvu ets cd Muwee y noes) 018

The typical specimen of this species was found by Charles H. Sternberg
on the North Fork of the John Day river. The horizon is probably some-
what different from that of the true John Day epoch.

Eucrotaphus jacksonii Leidy.

Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1850, p. 92. Ancient Fauna of Ne-
braska, Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, 1852, p. 56, Plate VilLy
figs. 4-6. Orcodon bullatus Leidy, Extinct Mamm., Dakota and Nebraska,
1869, p. 106. Report U. S. Geol. Survey, Terrs. 1878, I, p. 818. Oreodon
occidentalis Marsh, Amer. Journal Sci. Arts, 1873 (May), p. 409. Zpor-
eodon occidentalis Marsh, Loe. cit., 1875, p. 250. Hucrotaphus occidentalis
Cope, Bulletin U. §. Geol. Survey Terrs., V, p. 59.

Comparison of numbers of crania from the White river and John Day

Cope. | 518 (Jan, 18,

formations fails to reveal any characters distinguishing them as more than
one species, In fact the variation in various respects is greater among the
individuals of the John Day epoch, than between those of the two epochs.
This was by far the most abundant mammal of the John Day epoch
while it appears to have been rare during that of the White River.

Specimens differ in the size of the preorbital fossa irrespective of other
differences. ‘In some specimens it is wide and profound, including the
lachrymal bone; in others it is less extensive and is shallow, involving but
part of the lachrymal. It is never wanting or obscure. For estimation of
other characters, I select ten crania, nine from Oregon and one from
Dakota, as expressing the greatest range of variation. Of these, three
display a peculiarity in the form of the otic bulla, Instead of being con-
tracted backwards in front, it is protuberant and full at its inferior anterior
part. Five other crania, agreeing with:these three in other respects,
possess the normal form of bulla. In one cranium, which is rather more
robust than the others, the infraorbital foramen is a little posterior to its
usual position, being above the anterior part of the fourth premolar.
This tooth is also distinctly smaller than in other specimens of otherwise
similar dimensions. The majority of specimens range nearly alike in
dimensions, but there are forms distinctly larger and smaller, which may
represent distinct species. This question can be better decided when the
skeletons are known. I give three sub-species which are defined as fol-
lows:
Length of cranium M. .197; of molar series M. .086; long

diameter of base of paroccipital process transverse ; its pos-

MOTTON OABE: MAU ies valve as ole stb areca uy Mua Pele vivevus din gugOnBOovits
Length of cranium M. .219; of molar series M. .091 ; paroccipi-
TAY PLOCEBB AG ADOVE. oc, eseee eves due Daub e aoe debi ree ciodin Jy DUCUICUs.

Length of cranium, M. .235; of molar series, M. .099; paroc-
cipital process strongly compressed, its posterior base an.
Pulate Omthe middlegiMeyti sic iis i « cour ee Lj. leptacanthus.
The above measurements of length are made from the occipital condyles
to the premaxillary border inclusive. .

The three forms may represent good species. The Z. j. jacksoni is of the
size of the Oreodon culbertsoni ; the H. j. leptacanthus is larger than the #.

major, While the H. j. pacificus is intermediate between the two.

Eucrotaphus jacksoni jacksoni Leidy.

The typical specimen of the Oreodon bullatus Leidy agrees so nearly with
the original type of Hucrotaphus jacksoni, that I cannot doubt their pert-
inence to the same species. There are two specimens in the collection of
the Philadelphia Academy, besides the last named, and at least one in the
museum at Princeton, A specimen from the John Day, Oregon, cannot
be distinguished from these. It agrees with Marsh’s measurements and
description of his Oreodon occidentalis, and no doubt represents it. Its

1884.] B19 [Cope.

identity with his 0. bullatus has already been surmised by Leidy (Report
U. S. Geol. Survey Terrs., I, -p. 318).

Bucrotaphus jacksoni pacificus Cope.

This form is materially larger than the last named, equaling in dimen-
sions and resembling in general form the Hucrotaphus major Leidy, of
the White River beds, It is no doubt the form which has been identified
under that name by Leidy' in his report on John Day Fossils in the Report
of the U. S. Geological Survey of the Territories, Vol. I. It is different
from that animal in the form and position of the ‘paroccipital process, as
already pointed out. I have eight crania disengaged from the matrix
which agree in dimensions and other characters assigned, to this sub-spe-
cies. In one of them the paroccipital process presents an approach to the
form of that of the 4. j. leptacanthus. A specimen from the White Buttes
of Central Dakota agrees with those from Oregon in all the essential

. chidracters, and is the second one of the sub-species I have seen which is
not Oregonian. I have many crenia of this sub-species not yet entirely
cleared of matrix.

From John Day river and Crooked river, Oregon ; C. H. Sternberg and
J. L. Wortman ; White river of Nebraska, Mus. Princeton.

Eucrotaphus jacksoni leptacanthus Cope.

This is the largest form of the genus, exceeding the typical H. major in
the length of the skull by 23 mm. It is thus far represented in my collec-
tion by two very perfect crania. There is considerable reason for-antici-
pating that this form will turn out to be a valid species. Besides the pecu-
liar form of the paroccipital processes, the typical specimen presents the
following characters :

The frontal region is flatter than in the two other sub-species, and is
concave on the median line in transverse section. This concavity is
probably partly abnormal. The profile of the sagittal crest instead of pre-
senting a gently convex outline, is concave, rising posteriorly. The lateral
occipital crests instead of being®angulate are truncate behind, and the in-
ferior angle projects much beyond the vertical line of the occipital con-
dyles, As this part is broken off in most of my specimens of the ZH. j.
pacificus, I cannot decide as to its value. The inferior carina of the tym-
panic bone extends forwards to contact with the internal extremity of the
postglenoid process. It does the same in the Oregon specimen of Z. j.
jacksoni, and in the Dakota specimen of the Z. j. pacificus. In two of
the latter, from Oregon, where the part is cleaned, the keel does not extend
so far forwards or inwards.

The typical specimen is from the John Day beds of John Day river,
Oregon, and was found by Jacob L. Wortman,

Eucrotaphus major Leidy.

Oreodon major Leidy, Ancient Fauna of Nebraska, 1853, p. 55, Pl. IV,
fig. 6, Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1853, 398 ; 1856, 164; 1857, 89.

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. xxt. 116. 8N. PRINTED JUNE 9, 1884.

Cope. | 520 (Jan, 18,

Extinct, Mammalia, Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, p. 99, Pl. VII, fig..i;
VIII. Hporcodon major Marsh, Am. Journ. Sci. Arts, 1875, p. 250.

I find this species to differ in the external position of the paroccipital
process, as related to the otic bulla, from the HZ. jacksoni. I might add that
it differs in dimensions from all excepting the 2. jacksoni pacificus. In
the #. jacksoni the base of the paroccipital process.is in the same line as
the interior base of the otic bulla. In the Oregon form of the . major
the base of the paroccipital process is much flattened, so as to be trans-
verse, and its internal border is on the external side of the extremity of the
large swollen bulla. ‘This species differs also from the W. jacksond in the
median vertical carina of the occipital bone above the foramen magnum,
a region which is in the H. jachsoni broadly flattened.’ Besides these
points I do not notice any divergence from the #. jacksoni, with which it
agrees in the various characters in which the latter differs from the #.
trigonocephalus.

The Nebraska and Oregon forms do not agree in all respects. Thus,
while the dimensions of the dental series are the same in both, the frontal
region is more elongate in the Oregon animal, giving greater length to the
skull. The third superior premolar has a somewhat different form in the
two. They may then be characterized as follows :

Dental series M. .125; skull .224 ; third superior premolar, sub-

CEPATRULA Te aie: a \ecwy ne, 918 Pes K RRL e Sube hg Ubi Wi busiiltay oH noe MK dubce as gn Snes H. m. major.
Dental series M. .125.; skull .240; third superior premolar sub-
QUACTALC co osecercesecmevinenensleceavns set neg seeee elt, m. longifrons.

Eucrotaphus major major Leidy.
Known only as yet from the White River epoch of Nebraska and Dakota.

Eucrotaphus major longifroms Cope.

Known from a single skull from the North Fork of the John Day river,
Oregon, found by Charles H. Sternberg. It may bé observed here that
the Oreodontide of this locality are mostly distinct from the species of
the John Day river proper. by

MERYCOCHGRIUS Leidy.

Report U. 8. Geol. Survey Terrs., I, 1878, p. 202. Bettany, Quart.,
Journ. Geol. Soc. London, 1876, p. 262; Cope, American Naturalist, 1884,
p. 281. Leidy, Extinct Mammalia of Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, p. 110
(momen nudum). Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1858, p. 24
(nomen nudum).

As indicated in the analytical table at the head of this article, I can only
distinguish this genus from Mucrotaphus by the confluence of the pre-
maxillary bones. The position of the external infraorbital foramen can-
not be regarded as furnishing generic characters, especially as it displays
considerable variation and gradation, Some,of the species are in this
respect quite identical with species of Merychyus (1, superbus), while others

18841)! 521 [Cope,

possess the widely different: position ascribed to this genus by Leidy. Few
ifany of the characters given by Mr. Bettany as those of the genus, can
be regarded as other than characters common to several of its ‘species.
Perhaps the most important of these is the angle formed by the basifacial
with the basicranial axis, by which the face is presented as much forwards
.as upwards. The species present considerable variety in form. The ge-
nus embraces the largest species of the family, such as I. macrostegus, M.
superbus, etc. The characters of the species are as follows :

I. Foramen infraorbitale above middle of fourth superior premolar ; pose
terior part of zygoma expanded ; palate moderately produced posteriorly.
Squamosal part of zygoma less expanded anteriorly and with

rounded border; head elongated; premaxillary bone not

produced ; otic bulla larger, compressed, extending anterior

to postglenoid process ; size large .......eceecsecseceeeedl, superdus,
Head shortened occipitally, so that a line drawn through post-

glenoid and paroccipital processes makes 90° with the

middle line; malar bone openly grooved. below orbit;

angle of mandible obliquely truncate. ....ecssereccenceees M. leidyt.
Lacey part of zygoma most expanded in front, and elevated

behind, so that the cranium is as wide as from the paroccipi-

tal process to the canine tooth ; its posterior angle rising to a

level with the sagittal crest; its inferior edge spread out-

wards ; its superior edge truncated ; occiput not shortened ;

malar flat below orbit ; postglenoid process marking front

OLFOUUIM Ee inevebiviiene ld aways Hie MAVGe s10,8i8r6 whbctih ik puma melas UA chelydra..

II. Foramen infraorbitale above the first true molar. Palate greatly
produced posteriorly.
Squamosal part.of zygoma much expanded, and with truncate
edge; malar bone robust, prominent; skull, width equal
length from condyles to first premolar ; maxillary produced
anteriorly ; frontal plane, transverse diamond-shaped ;
bulla small, conical, posterior to anterior edge of postglenoid
PTOCOSS.. cece eee cee reece eee enecerseerecceseseees «Dh, macrostegus.
Squamosal part of zygoma little expanded upwards or lateral-
ly, edge rounded; malar bone flat; bulla large, extend-
ing in front of postglenoid process; front longitudinally
diamond-shaped, decurved at orbit...... teeoeereeciev un Dh, montanus
III. Foramen infraorbitale above anterior border of second
true molar.
Zygoma originating above second molar; large; incisors
AMA CUS MBI Y Aye Gish tis a sip a sloidial bin avsn Wie koru man ei snngtlel URTICUDD
Zygoma originating above third true molar; larger; incisors
Ne xeOx GACG TOL VDE iinnn's vise din Wp adua tease iecaraioraentiye Wh yyarelere's M. proprius.

Of the above seven species, four are represented in my collection, some
of them by a large amount of material. The latter are from the John

6
Cope. ] §22 (Jan, 18;

Day and Ticholeptus Miocene horizons. The M. rusticus of Leidy is only
known to me from the descriptions of that author. It is from the Sweet-
water river, Wyoming, from a bed of probably Ticholeptus age. The
M. proprius Leidy, also unknown to me by autopsy, is from the head ot
the Niobrara river, Nebraska, from a bed said by Hayden to be inter-
mediate ‘between the Oreodon or White River and Procamelus, or Loup
Fork horizons, and therefore probably ot Ticholeptus age also. The M.
leidyt I only know from the description of Mr. Bettany. It.is from the
John Day beds. Mr. Bettany also describes an M. temporatis, which I
cannot distinguish from the M. swperbus Leidy.

Merycocheerus superbus Leidy.

Oreodon superbus Leidy, Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1870, p.
109. Extinct Mam. fauna, Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, p. 211; Plate I,
fig.1; Il, fig: 16; VII, figs. 7-11. J temporalis Bettany, Quar. Journ.
Geol. Soc., London, 1876, xxii, p. 269; Pl. XVII.

Of this fine species I have nine crania extracted from the matrix, and
a good many not yet cleaned. As the specimen described by Leidy is in
a very imperfect condition, ‘the characters of the species, and even its
generic position, have remained hitherto very obscure.

As compared with the allied species, the IZ, superbus is slightly exceeded
in size by the M. macrostegus and M. montanus. Its posterior zygo-
matic expansion is less pronounced than in the M. macrostegus and M.
chelydra, and its border is rounded, even when, as is sometimes the case,
it is greatly thickened. In the first and last named of the above species,
its border is separated by a distinct angle from both the internal and ex-
ternal faces, forming thus a distinct truncate face which looks upwards.
The otic bulla is larger than in the two species mentioned, and extends
anterior to the postglenoid process. The nareal fissure extends well down
towards the alveolar border of the premaxillaries, which are therefore
more extensively separated than Leidy represents to be the case in the M.
rusticus. The external face of the malar bone below the orbits is flat.
The anterior extremity of the zygomatic process is not so prominent as in
M. chelydra, and is rounded instead of being flared out below, as in that
species. The greatest width of the skull is at the glenoid surfaces, and
not anterior to them, as in J chelydra. In only one of seven crania,
where the parts are preserved, does the posterior squaimosal angle rise as
high as the sagittal crest.

I cannot detect any difference between the specimen described by Mr.
Bettany as the type of his Mf temporalis, and those of the M. superbus
in my possession. The shallowness of the preorbital fossa described by
Mr. Bettany is‘repeated in one of my crania, and its depth is very vari-
able in the others. As regards the MW. leddyi of Bettany, I have none ex-
actly like it, although the type specimen does not differ much from the
M. superbus, to judge from the figure and description given in the Quarter-
ly Journal of the Geological Society, 1876, p. 270.. The two distinctive

1884. ] 523 [Cope,

characters, which appear most tangible among those mentioned by Mr.
Bettany, the shortness of the occipital region, as measured by the angle
made by a line drawn through the postglenoid and paroccipital processes,
with the middle line, and second, the grooved character of the sub-

orbital part of the malar bone, are not found in any of my specimens of .

M. superbus. The anterior extremity of the squamosal process of the
zygoma is protuberant in one of them, as in the I leidyi. Another char-
acter is suggested by Mr. Bettany’s figure, but is not mentioned in the
text. The angular border of the mandibular ramus extends obliquely
forwards instead of being prominently convex as in the best preserved
entire mandible of the M. superbus in my possession. Nevertheless in
another specimen, where a good deal of the posterior border is preserved,
the outline is nearly as oblique as in the M. leidyi. The species, however,
is distinct so far as now known. ‘
John Day epoch, Oregon, C. H. Sternberg and J. L. Wortman. Local-
ities, John Day river, Bridge creek, and Camp creek of Crooked river.

Merycocheoerus leidyi Bettany.

Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society of London, xxxi, 1875,
p. 270; Plate XVIII.

Defined and discussed under the preceding species.

John Day epoch, Oregon ; Lord Walsingham. John Day river.

Merycocheoerus chelydra, sp. nov.

This species is known to me by a skull without mandible, which is
entire, except that the extremity of the nasals and the border of the pre-
maxillary bones are broken off. It is unfortunate that I have no second
skull to confirm its characters, but my numerous specimens of the M
superbus, to which it is most nearly allied, do not present any approxima:
tions which suggest transitions between the two.

The striking character of this cranium is its great breadth at the tem-
poral region, as compared with its length and other dimensions. The
forms of the otic bulla difter from those of the I. superbus: One method
of expressing the width of the skull is as follows. The point of the frontal
bone which is equidistant from the supraoccipital notch and the external
edge of the zygomatic arch, measured in a horizontal plane, is directly
above the posterior or nareal palatal border, when the skull rests on the
teeth. In the MZ. superbus, in the most robust examples, this point is above
& point which is a good deal nearer to the line of the anterior edge of the
glenoid surfaces than to the palatal border, and at least 30mm. posterior
to the latter. That this relative shortness of the basicranial axis is not
due to a shortening posterior to the gleroid surfaces, as is the case in J
letdyt Bett., is proven by the fact that a line drawn through the postglenoid
and paroccipital process makes an angle of 90° with the middle line, as
in M. superbus.

The muzzle is compressed and its superior surface is regularly rounded

Cope.] 524. (Jan, 15,

The side is divided by the gentle convexity continued forwards from. the
malar region. Below this and above the premolars the face is concave.
Above it the preorbital fossa is well marked, though not deep, and gradu-
ally fades out anteriorly, The-interorbital region is flat, as in J. macroste-
gvs, and the supraorbital border is not decurved, as it is in I, swperdus and
M. montanus. The supraorbital and preorbital borders of the front are,
however, not continuous as in M. macrostegus, though: nearly in the
same line, which they are not in JZ syperbus. The orbits are more oblique
than in I, superbus, looking more upwards)and forwards, and their verti-
eal. exceeds their transverse diameter. Themalar bone though oblique, is
more vertical than the orbit below the latter, ‘and has an uninterrupted
gently concave surface. The postorbital bridge is narrow, and consists
one-half of the malarand one-half of the frontal bones. The inferior edge
of the malar is thin and is slightly convex downwards, and passes behind
the protuberant squamosal at-a point behind the line of the postfrontal pro-
cess. The anterior extremity of the squamosal is not protuberant below the
orbit and only begins to rise gradually below the line of the postfrontal
process. It then expands rapidly downwards and outwards in a strong
curve, with its flat surface looking upwards as much as outwards. After
making a short downward turn it rises steeply, contracting gradually in-
wards, and presenting a convexity posteriorly, with its truncate edge
looking outwards. Its apex is nearly on a level with the sagittal crest.
The inner or descending edge of this process is concave, so that the apex
overhangs a little the posterior outlet of the temporal fossa. The anterior
temporal angles are strongly marked and unite into a sagittal crest. The
edge of\ the crest is thickened, so that its section is a letter T.

The supraoccipital bone presents a wide flat convexity above the foramen
magnum, in distinction from the stronger convexity of MZ. superbus, and
the still stronger of the IZ macrostegus and M. montanus. As in the other
species, the posttemporal (= lateral occipital) crests are only present
at the upper half of the occiput. Between them there are two ligamen-
tous or tendinous insertions, but no median keel. The exoccipital and
posttympanic borders form a tuberosity below the meatus auditorius, which
passes upwards into a short convex posttemporal crest. ‘The paroccipital
process nearly reaches the postglenoid by its anterior external edge. The
tympanic is complete, is not keeled below, and extends itself as a lamina
over the posterior side of the postglenoid process. The section of the
basioccipital is open V-shaped. The inferior flat surface of the sphenoid
is produced backwards in a wedge-shaped prominence to a line connect.
ing the anterior edges of the paroccipital processes, It has the same form
in MU. macrostegus, but in three skulls of IL superbus, where it is visible,
the apex of the wedge does not extend posterior to the middle of the otic
bulle. The bulle are small and subconical, and reach as far as the ante-
rior edge of the postglenoid process. In the latter the transverse diam-
eter exceeds the anteroposterior, which exceeds the vertical diameter.
This process and the otic bulla are of about equal protuberance. In four

1884.) 525 ' [Cope
crania of the Ma superbus, where both are well preserved and exposed, the
bulla is considerably more prominent than the postglenoid process. The
glenoid surface is well-defined and equally wide at both extremities. The
inferiorly: presented surface of the zygomatic arch, is wider than in any of
the other species, including examples of JZ, superbus of superior dimensions
in other respects.. The surface is rugose. The length from a line connect-
ing the median external columns of the last superior molar, to the poste-
rior nareal border, enters three.times into the distance from the latter to
the border of. the foramen magnum. In JM. superbus it goes three to three
anda half times; in J macrostegus and M. montanus once only. Be-
inind the molars the produced palatal roof is more, concave than between
the last two true molars. The palate becomes then more concave (convex),
and between the first premolars and canines ‘becomes flat, and expands
laterally. The nareal fissure is not much contracted between the pre-
maxilliaries.

The infraorbital foramen is above the anterior half of the superior fourth
premolar, and is of moderate size. The frontal foramina are separated by
a space which is less than half as wide as that which separates each one
from the superciliary border. There is no supraorbital notch. The in-
cisive foramina are large, are wider than long, and approach close to the
bases of the canine teeth. The palatine foramina are minute or obsolete:
The foramen ovale is isolated and is opposite the junction of the glenoid

and postglenoid surfaces. The jugular foramen is isolated by the exten:

sive contact of the otic bulla and the basicranial axis. Perhaps the
condyloid foramen is included in it, as I do not find it in the usual position.
The animal is so old that no sutures are visible.

The teeth are not all cleared from the matrix, which is hard and brittle,
The first true molaris much worn. The first premolar is two-rooted, and
ig separated from the canine by a diastema equal in length to the long dia-
meter of its crown.

Measurements. M.

Length from occipital condyle to front of canine tooth. B00
y vy yy fe ‘« postglenoid process... .041
uf i ‘i wee « yostfrontal process. .. .1382
B NY i Hf ‘« palatonareal border .. .118

af st if WN «end of last molar..... .146

Diaiierare oprorbice VOTPICAT: isisrasaueneie nis Waieauewe manne dys doses ROE
. (transverse ...... Pee enna hare «O89
Depth of malar bone at middle of orbit, .....-.+-- whe yen oe
« « zygomatic process to glenoid face behind,.... .088
Width of top of muzzle at preorbital fossa ....+..+..++ .048
‘at middle of supraorbital border.,..++++.-..++++ O94

ce © malar. below Orbit. 0... ese eeeeer erence nee eens 160
«© middle of zygomatic arch. ..sseeeee renee eres 254
‘© of occiput at superior crests. .....esee cere ress 050

526. {Jan, 18,

Measurements. ; M.
Elevation of occiput from foramen........-+ decir LibgmeheN 084
Width of occipital condyles....... sila a Wide vd lela aini owed 068
Width of ‘oeciput at condyles. 2.20) i caicdiity le clot ww 095
Depth of skull at right angles to profile at glenoid face. .095
Be ae ne Re urate a orbit: sc ain OST
aA ” at set) tus bs Pimrdaixvesie 075
Length of superior dental series with canine..........5 159
“ig of premolar series is said icici vinatav 1 OGY
“ ue true Molar seriesy visu. oe. ok. s wiry!) O65:
Giemeters tts anteroposterior ........ Adal wats Wid Dei .. 0180
Uitransiversensial lobes weit’. senebade ievid KOLB
iniotene or canine! anteroposterion se ciicidais iG. wales .016
\ transverse. .... SOS RERE TNE fie at 020
Dinctere Pan, a § anteroposterior. ...... wage ale veces 0155
(transverse eis wuss Cociulanc000
Widti of palatetatim dic ia. eigen wen WE SA 044
an s PP at TO AOE abide Ai Stale! stbiiies a are\b 057

The typical specimen was found on the John Day river, Oregon, by
Mr. J. L. Wortman.

Merycocheerus macrostegus, sp. nov.

‘T have been able to discover in my collection as yet, but one cranium
with entire mandible of this species. The very marked characters of this
skull are such that no farther evidence of its reference to a peculiar species
is needed. Its affinities, as expressed in the analytical key which accom-
panies the general discussion of this genus, are with the MM. montanus.
This is shown in the posterior positions of the infraorbital foramen, and
of the posterior nares. As peculiar characters may be added the form of
the frontal plane and of the otic bulla; also the prolongation of both the
premaxillary and supraoccipital regions, and the forms of the zygoma, the
angle of the mandible, and the first inferior premolar tooth. The skull
reaches a greater length than that of any species, excepting the M. mon-
tanus, but is not nearly so robust as in the M. chelydra, resembling in
this respect rather the M. superbus.

The muzzle is compressed, and there is a decided concavity just above
the second premolar, above which the surface is a little convex. Above
the infraorbital foramen, the face is abruptly convex, the convexity slop-
ing upwards to the base of the median ridge formed by the convex nasal
bones. Behind this the side of the face is a plane which slopes outwards
as it descends, which is only interrupted by the rather small, but well de-
fined, preorbital fossa. The fossa is better defined in front than in the other
species, but I do not know whether the character is constant. The front
is a transverse diamond-shaped area, bounded posteriorly by the anterior
temporal ridges, and anteriorly by the lines of the supraorbital’ borders

1884.] 527 (Cope,

produced to their point of intersection with each other. Such point of
intersection is above the second true molar in this species ; in AM. superbus
and M. chelydra it is above the posterior part of the second premolar. The
area in these species enclosed by the lines in question is half as long again
as wide, instead: of wider than long by 18mm. This difference is partly
caused by the greater prominence and flatness of the postorbital angle of
the frontal bone in the Jf. macrostegus, and the more anterior direction
of the orbits, which I may add have none of the tendency to superior
direction seen in M. chelydra. The wide triangular area thus enclosed on
its external sides by the orbit and anterior temporal ridges, is perfectly
flat. Such an area can hardly be defined in. the other species, and the
surface there is rounded and descending. The malar bone is deep, flat
and.a little oblique outwards, and the rim of the orbit projects a little,
giving it a slight concavity. The orbit is deeper than wide. The anterior
part of the zygomatic process of the squamosal is not protuberant below
the orbit, but gradually rises outwards posteriorly, attaining its greatest
expansion opposite the middle of the zygomatic foramen ; above, its course
is for a time parallel with the middle line of the skull. The form of the
zygomatic arch is more like that.of I chelydra than any other species,
but it is not so much.expanded, especially anteriorly. Its inferior and
posterior surface is, however, widened, making an angle with the ex-
ternal or marginal surface, which is in turn separated by an angle from
the superior and anterior surface ; at the middle of the arch the superior
surface has a width of 19mm., and the external a width of 23mm.. The
posterior angle rises to the plane of the summit of the sagittal crest, and
the apex, which is less than a right angle, stands above the. external
base of the postglenoid process. The preglenoid border is not exactly at
right angles with the middle line, but makes.a slight angle outwards and
forwards. The long diameter of the zygomatic foramen is parallel with
it. The ridge along the pariétosquamosal suture is insignificent. The
supraoccipital region is very prominent, and as in the other species of this
genus is narrowed below by the disappearance of the posterior temporal
or exoccipital crests. They are continued downwards.and disappear, leav-
ing a wide convex surface above the foramen magnum. This is separated
by the usual lateral fossa from the posterior temporal angles.

The codssified mastoid and paroccipital processes much contract the
auricular fossa below, but do not close it. The latter is contracted at the
base of its terminal part, and is distally slender. The otic bulla is. the
smallest known in the genus, it is compressed and oval, and not produced
beyond the postglenoid processes either forwards, backwards or down-
wards, in this differing much from the MZ. montanus. . It is separated by
wide and equal intervals from this process, the glenoid surface, and the
basisphenoid. It sends a process backwards and inwards. to a sutural
junction with the basioccipital bone. The tympanic bone is flat below,
and is united with the posterior base of the squamosal by a flat expansion.
The postglenoid process is robust, and has the height and thickness equal,

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800. XXI. 116. 80, PRINTED JUNE 9, 1884,

Cope.] 528 [Jan, 18,

while the width exceeds both. The basioccipital bone is prominently
keeled on the middle line, so that the section is a V of a more compressed.
character than the section of the same in M. superbus. The median plane
of the sphenoid is prominent, and is continued as a wedge with the apex
opposite the posterior borders of the otic bull. The palatine borders are
parallel, except where they form on each side ‘an open angle at the junc-
tion of the descending process of the sphenoid, which is here directed for-
wards. Its external border is distinct from that of the palatopterygoid
plate, and makes a groove with it. The maxillary bone is not produced
posterior to the notch on either side of the base of the posterior production
of the palatine bones. The middle line of the latter is deeply concave
opposite the former, and the palate is also especially concave between the
first true molars. The palate is flat between the first and second pre-
molars. The inferior surface of the squamosal process of the zygoma, is
roughened for the origin of the masseter muscle. The inferior edge of the
mular comes from its inner side, and is narrow and with a median groove.
Its inferior edge is’ continued as a ridge of the maxillary as far as opposite
the anterior lobe of the second true molar. The maxillary bones are more
produced anteriorly than in any of the other species. The apex of the
nasal bones stands above the posterior border of the canine in this species;
above the anterior edge in M. superbus, M. chelydra and M. leidyt (fide
Bettany). The posterior border of the nares is above the anterior part of
the first premolar in the three species named, except M. chelydra wherevit
is over the posterior edge of the canine: in I macrostegus it is above the
posterior edge of the longer first premolar,

The infraorbital foramen is large, and its posterior border is above’ the
anterior root of the first true molar. The incisive foramina are large, and
each one is a little longer than wide. The nareal opening contracts gradu-
ally to its inferior apex. There is a considerable maxillary foramen op-
posite the middle of the fourth superior premolars. The posterior nareal
is not large; its anterior outline is regularly concave. Its lateral (sphe-
noid) borders reach to opposite the anterior faces of the postglenoid pro:
cesses and bound the foramen ovale on the inner side. The latter is round,
is rather small, and is opposite the middle of the postglenoid surfaces.
The foramen rotundum on the other hand is large and vertically oval,
and is bounded below by a transverse prominence of the base of the ali-
sphenoid bone. It probably includes the sphenodrbital foramen, a foramen
anterior to its inferior border probably communicating with the nareal
chamber. The optic foramen is small, and is situated opposite the ante-
rior two-fifths of the zygomatic fossa and a little above the line of the
apex of the foramen ovale, The foramen lacerum is ovoid and not large.
The posterior foramen lacerum is a transverse sigmoid, one extremity
being the jugular foramen.’ The mastoid and postpariétal foramina are
of moderate and equal sizes. No postsquamosal or supra- or postglenoid
foramina.

The animal described is too old to exhibit sutures.

1884, | 529 (Cope.

The mandible possesses some distinctive characters. The angular
border is not prominent posteriorly, extends forwards below, and projects
below the general level of. the inferior, border, of the ramus. Neither of
these characters. is observable in the only ramus of the J. superbus in
which the lower, part of this border is well preserved, but in some others
of that species the superior part of the border iis much as in M. maero-
stegus. The inferior edge of the ramus is ‘straight, but. there is a descend-
ing tuberosity of the symphysis which may ‘bean individual peculiarity.
The symphysis is very concave in profile, and the incisive’ border is pro-
duced in accordance with the prolonged muzzle. In the M. superbus it is
sometimes convex, sometimes a little concave, but not so much so as in
this jaw. The coronoid processes. are small and slightly everted. The
inner ridge of its anterior base is more prominent than the exterior, and
encloses a fossa, with it... The masseteric fossa) is not’noticeable. There
is one large, mental foramen below the third premolar. The dental fora-
men is large and oyal, and when the mandible stands on a level surface is
opposite the middle, lobe of the third: inferior molar. tooth.

In dentition this species is distinguished by the relatively large size of
the premolar teeth, of which the first, second and third are two-rooted in
both jaws. .Both.the first and second in the upper jaw have short diaste-
mata anterior and posterior to them, the largest being behind the canine
tooth, and nearly.as long as the premolar’s crown. All the teeth are a
good deal worn in the specimen, One can see two internal cingula in-
closing fossee on the third premolar. The true molars increase in size
rapidly ‘posteriorly and the third has a well-developed external heel. The
molars have no internal cingula ; these are present in five of seven skulls
of the! M. superbus where. these parts .are cleaned. The most noteworthy
point in the mandibular dentition is a very rudimental character of the in-
ternal vertical ridge. of the crown of the’ firstipremolar. The posterior
fossa of the fourth. premolar is closed,.and the anterior remains open, on
wearing. In &. superbus both are closed in the specimen whete visible.
The anterior inner. wall is represented in thé second and third premolars
by a cingulum. No.cingula on ‘the true molars. First premolar very ro-
bust, its section lenticular. }

Measurements. M.
Axial length from occipital condyles* to premaxillary
BORCRE oi aig 60 yi NE CEN ORR RIOYE OEN NU SG id B85
Axial length from occipital condyles to postglenoid pro-

COSR Seve ch sae SOD WEST Gg OU MUI ORIG Nya bebe use ss OAD
Axial length from opi condyles to postfrontal pro-

OB aie ined hails iaisein CIV MERE EY SMART Bl i a a MN aes Cea eee
Axial length from occipital condyles to palatonareal

DOLE sways ities Lisleta lui PURE Vatdoa a Laat otS ons Cle lonce, . L100

*The occipital condyles are broken off in the specimen, so I measure from the
Superior border of the foramen magnum, which is, in the other species, in the
vertical line of the occipital condyles.

Cope.)

530 [Jan, 18,

Measurements. M.

Axial length trom occipital condyles to end of last mo-
MDs se tiibtcict ble bth GEL hs bby WADE GG AL we Ed be Old 04. 088
Diameters of orbit { VoTtCal. cece eee e eek eee eee eee es Odd
\transverse..... wh dt Ws Abb aie el O88
Depth malar bone at middle of orbit......... Hees HONOR,
“« zygomatic process to glenoid face behind. . ede OV7
skull (right epales to profile) at glenoid face, 088
sf i" ne Hor bits 640 e'sine's's, 088
Ms “ rs Us sf fo ani 2, youaietl .068
Elevation of occiput from foramen magnum...... wesees, 084
Width top of muzzle:at preorbital fossa............s6+ .038
‘« at middle supraorbital border........ sible oul itt!’ LOB
‘© postfrontal process... si0.0..... aden se ei LOFT
[60 of imalebelow: Orbit sels vill valida’ dctowainte 6 L068
‘« « middle of zygomatic arch. ........ wi lblelale ume eee:
‘of ocelputcat superior i¢rests, vi. deel leeds 050
Shani 4 COMMS Ls celal, Gasca ele One 101
Length superior dental series, with canine............. 177
sf f premolar seriée:s stv. sia cies Oi, evar DOR)
a ef true molar series, 2........ Waly aan oie 088
Didmeters canine PUTITELOMORLSDIGT alii: sii elas Pek WNL 018
{IANSVETSC. 6.6.06 e cee I tee AOR 018
Disineters’ Pom’ ys esd tical ibapanaisel ab ley Fatt, Oe Oly,
NEAMAV OREO. 6c sie Od woe ble etal Wale 075
Diameters m. 14 #2teroposterior.......... fe WOU Om, 019

\ transverse....... ab Mast teal iis soda ORLS
Diameters m. iii / @2teroposterior. ...........64. vee es 6088
\ transverse (at middle column),...... .029
Width of palate at P-m. i. didrewhdier dd thelaltidel eid sietiis's OBL
if uf MOS Hike hpivaai Gah seatok ial Cah wi NaidWeweeld S008
ff fs middle of zygomatic arch.......... 047
Length of inferior dental series with canine. .......... 179
rr Me PTOMOlAY SCLIOSN. weds viele Vid wi wml 6088
i b true molar series, ........... euler COSB
. of ramus to posterior edges sec isescedceseweees w QUO
Depth of ramus mandibuli at condyle........... saw bce rwdiad
bi ey 6 \* suf my At mostetlonl yaa law eidid.VOW8
i ‘ i m. i posteriorly..... eooeees 048
“ “ 54 Bamival GONG i seine ote vies wlend 6} OLS
Hidmmareretomow Dat AnteroposteriOr,.....s0seeaes 019
‘ {PANSVETSE..) 0. ese ie leas 0125

Ml peictere | Heh Ben te f anteroposterior. ........ «tds re O24
URAMAVEDBOW eis iecislelini «0's ~ O18
4: ( BDILELODOBLETION),« .¢nsce¢ ieee» ae» 020

Diameters) ‘©: mi
UPtANSVETEG colon ny éosionaued bebieiry ssh

=

Pay
1884.) 531 (Cope.

Measurements. M.
anteroposterior. ....... seeeeee: O44
C thansverses! ii cveatdiy. Wiles OUD
This fine species is from the John Day epoch of the Miocene. The
typical specimen was found by my assistant, Charles H. Sternberg, on
Bridge creek, Oregon. Much credit is due Mr. Sternberg for his unwearied
exertions in the cause of science, which have been continued through
many occasions of risk and discomfort.

Diameters inferior m. iii

Merycochoerus montanus, sp. nov.

This large animal is represented in: my collection by a nearly entire
skull with parts of both mandibular rami complete. Rami of another in.
dividual give the entire dentition of the lower jaw except the incisors,
A third individual is represented by a symphysis with premolars, ca-
nines and incisors, and by various parts of the skeleton, including feet.
Of the cranium mentioned, the muzzle to the preorbital fossa and the
palate to the first true molar are wanting. The region of the larmier is
lost, but the general resemblance of the species to the J macrostegus in
other respects, leads me to suspect that it is absent, and that the J. mon-
tanus, is rightly referred to the genus Merycocherus. This course is indi-
cated by the structure of the superior molar teeth, which have the character
of those of this genus, rather than that, found in Merychyus. That is, the
posterior internal crescent sends its anterior horn to the external wall of
the crown, thus cutting off the posterior horn of the anterior crescent.
Dr. Leidy has shown that the reverse is the case in the Merychyus major ;
that is that the posterior horn of the anterior crescent, reaches the external
wall of the crown, cutting off the anterior horn of the posterior crescent.
Ihave observed that this is also the case in the other species of Merychyus
which have come under my notice.

The posterior position of the infraorbital foramen and the greatly pro-
duced palate distinguish this species from those of the John Day epoch,
excepting the M. macrostegus, while in the WM. rusticus and M. proprius,
the infraorbital foramen is still further posterior. The palate of these
species is unfortunately unknown.

The part of the maxillary bone posterior to the infraorbital foramen is
nearly flat, and the proximal part of the malar bone is also flat. The in-
ferior edge of the latter is narrow and is marked by a groove which ter-,
minates anteriorly in a shallow fossa. The ridge continuous with this edge
terminates above the anterior lobe of the second true molar. The zygoma
as far as the anterior border of the glenoid cavity is slender, and not con-
vex, but flat in every direction, nor is it decurved as in MZ. superdbus. The
zygomatic foramen is relatively much smaller than in that species. Its
posterior or preglenoid boundary is not at right angles to the sagittal crest
as in that species, but is oblique outwards and forwards at an open angle.
The obtuse median edge of the zygoma looks upwards, not outwards as it
does in M. superbus and M. macrostegus, and the superior expansion is

532 | [Jan. 18,

Cope.)

opposite the internal extremity of the glenoid face, instead of the external
as in M.. superbus,.or the middle, as in M. macrostegus. The border
descending to.the supraauricular crest. is thin and vertical in direction,
and the superior angle standsabove the middle of the postglenoid process,
not external to it, as in the two species above named. The postglenoid
process is robust.and has a convex posterior face. The paroccipital pro-
cess is long and acuminate. An external truncate ridge on the front of its
base partially embraces the meatus auditorius, and curving forwards be-
comes the anterior edge of the process, which is separated from the post-
glenoid by but a narrow interval. The tympanic bone forms a tube more
distinct from the surrounding regions than in the other species here de-
scribed, and has a longitudinal inferior keel, which is not visible in the
superbus and M. macrostegus. It is separated at the meatus by but a’
short interval from the base of the postglenoid process. The supraauricu-
lar and mastoid crests unite and form a short acute crest, which does not
continue into a prominent posttemporal, but descends into a mere angle,’
which continues as a fine line to the convexity of the true posttemporal
crest above. The latter arises from the bifurcation of the sagittal crest,
and after a strong convexity descends with its fellow to a narrow promi-
nent convex ridge, which rises from the foramen magnum, Thus the oc-
ciput on either side of this prominent middle line is deeply excavated, and
the fossa is bounded on each side and anteriorly by the low posttemporal
angle, and the more prominent mastoid ridge. There is no median keel.
The median ridge of the occiput is more prominent and not so flat as in
M. superdbus, but is more as in M. macrostegus. The sagittal crest is well
developed, and has a straight superior border, which is not thickened as
in M. chelydra, The anterior temporal ridges are represented by an angle
which is nearly right. The superior squamosal suture is marked by a

_ prominent ridge. The front is gently convex transversely, and the supra-

orbital border is more strongly decurved than ins MZ. superbus, which are
more so than in M. macrostegus.

The basicranial axis makes a strong angle with the basifacial as in the
other species of the genus, showing that the face was presented obliquely
forwards, as in the peccary. The section of the basioccipital bone be-
tween the paroccipital processes is V-shaped, owing to the presence of a
strong median angle. In ‘MM macrostegus this bone is similar, but in IZ '
superbus it is much flatter, and there is a weak median keel. The sphenoid
is in line with the occipital and has a broadly rounded-truncate inferior
face. The otic bulle are large and compressed. They extend from ‘the
middle of the base of the paroccipital process to considerably in advance
of the postglenoid process, and approach very near to the glenoid surface.
The interval which separates them is small, equaling one-fifth the antero-
posterior diameter of the bulla. This is very different from the
macrostegus, where the space between the glenoid surface and the bulla,
is equal to the anteroposterior diameter of the latter near the middle. As
already pointed out, this species agrees with the species just named in the

1884.) 533 [Cope.

great, prolongation of the palatal floor of the nareal cavities. The distance
from the foramen magnum to the nareal border equals the distance from
the latter to the line connecting the median external vertical crests of the
last superior molars. In Jf superbus the former measurement is two and
one-half times as great as the latter.

The mandible shows the nearer relationship to the M. macrostegus
than to the IZ superbus, in the anterior elongation and greater relative size
of the premolar teeth. It agrees with the former in having the profile of
the symphysis concave, and not convex asin M. superbus. It is less con-
cave in my single specimen than in that of Jf macrostegus. The posi-
tion of the posterior extremity of the symphysis is below the middle of
thé third inferior premolar. The coronoid process is low, and of small
size. Its compressed convex apex is directed at an angle of 45° from the
middle line outwards and forwards. Its anterior face soon widens out
and the internal edge becomes much more prominent than the external,
with which it encloses a shallow, subtriangular, subvertical fossa, The
external border is continuous with the external alveolar border. The
masseteric fossa is small and has no distinct inferior border, and does not
descend below the level of the line of the middle molar teeth. The in-
ferior border of the ramus is nearly straight. The inferior ificisive alveo-
lar border is much more strongly convex than in the MZ superbus, The
condyle has the posterior articular face on the inner side, as in other
species.

The infraorbital foramen is large and is above the anterior part of the
first true molar tooth. The meatus auditorius is small. There are two
postparietal foramina on the pariétosquamosal suture. No supraglenoid
or postglenoid foramina. There are two mental foramina, one not small
below the anterior part of the first true molar, the other, quite large,
below the posterior part of the third premolar. The dental foramen is
situated on a level with the alveolar border and well posteriorly, its ante-
rior border being a little in front of a line dropped vertically from the
apex of the coronoid process. It is thus similar in position to that of JZ.
macrostegus and different from tbat of MM. superbus, where it is above
the line of the apices of the molars, and is posterior to the line dropped
from the apex of the coronoid.

In the superior true molars, the size increases rapidly posteriorly. The
third is relatively of more elongate form than the first, but the posterior
external column is but little produced. The other vertical ridges are
quite prominent. The external faces of the external lobes are nearly flat.
Besides the relation of the adjacent horns of the internal crescents already
mentioned, the posterior horn of the posterior crescent in the first and
second molars is cut off from the external wall of its own crown by the
anterior horn of the anterior crescent of the crown next posterior. This
does not exist in worn molars of M. swperbus and M. macrostegus, but
is observable in little worn teeth of the former. It does not look as though
the character would disappear with wear in the M. montanus. The only

oe
Cope.] 534: [Jan. 18,

trace of cingulum on the superior molars is on the inner base of the ante-
rior lobe, where it is weak, and in the interspace between the internal
lobes, where it is a narrow tubercle. Enamel obsoletely vertically striate.
It is wanting on the external side of the internal crescent, as Leidy has
shown to be the case in certain species of Merychyus. The fifth lobe of
the last inferior molar is well developed and has its two crescents separated
by a groove. The adjacent horns of the external crescents are of about,
equal length. No cingula, except a trace on front and rear of crowns, and
a tubercle between the bases of the external lobes. The fourth premolar has
two fossi isolated, one anterior to and the other posterior to the principal
apex, which is double, and anterior to the middle. Before wear, each of
these fossee opens inwards. The crown of the third premolar has its inner
face unequally divided by a crest behind the middle. Posterior to this
the space is occupied on the inner side by two shallow fosse of which the
‘posterior is the narrower, Anterior part of inner face of crown concave.
One principal angular cusp. The second premolar has a compressed
triangular crown with a long base, and a weak vertical ridge on the in-
ternal side. The first premolar is a very robust tooth with a straight
posterior border directed at 95° forwards, and is vertically truncaté in the
specimen by friction with the canine. Section of crown lenticular,
rounded in front. r

Measurements. M.

INO: 1)
Length from occipital condyle to postglenoid process... .049
“N o i ul ‘« postfrontal process... .135
Width of occiput at posttemporal crests, .............. 054
" re TE COMOV ICR ts Vee nse seer e eet hes «LOS

Elevation of occiput above foramen magnum.......... .084
Length from foramen magnum to palatal border. ...... .060
Width between apices of otic Dull@.'.....0... cece eens O42
Length from inferior m. iii to apex of coronoid process. .075
i of superior true molar serlés, +. 6.0... ese ve 084
Dinnvetancset i{ scored nea por Og Foul ce taba by -026
transverse (at middle trib) ..........0. .085

( AMLELOPOBUCLION, pe vecds is cials view ey vin) USe

Diameters m. iii ' ;
(transverse (at*middle rib). .......... .025

Length of inferior true molar series. .... ......... vey OSD
: anteroposterior, ..... PVE W ah eh a vied .0205
Diameters P-m, iv { ni Hl vind ag
transverse behind. ..... rie ou ipa arian vl a,

t anteroposterior ...... Mew veelode as ewe wOee
Diameters m, i / #2teroposterior O28
KOPAHEVOLSG ilu Cokin e tubule yeu vei i ielew Out

Fi He LLUCLOPOBUCILON ss isiin cu ec Chae sce
Diameters m. iii { 224T! SRLCTIOE 040
WUMIBVOLEON GHGea les nhvueenineh oad MURe
No, 2.

Length of ramus mandibuli from incisive border to
condyle (Oblique)! iii cee eee

ra
1884, | 535 [Cope

Measurements. M.

Length of dental series (straight line)........... Pa rene a RO
Sf from last molar to apex of coronoid............ 0785

ss OT; PYSMOLT BORO vie eee wee nu wes teeceseees 000
uy MUMS) MAGIAT SOMES ii ed's us 5/3 so dieia hate Cueva GcMnncE OCH

sf ** second premolar on Dage. ....6..+ 00s Tae 021
ve ‘TRY DRCMOLT ON DASE.) vee ere Seer ane eeo
Depth of ramus at coronoid....... Resale ane eaten te rcareene hove OBOE
" Pan CTCL Ne MDA Sie iai ilaly banana He Vaio OG

WY SOC MOCO Lely cstv a sauiee mare oleh WOOO

fy SO SE Li VOLVIGAII VAS vi chic ma hue e sv es 08:

The specimens of this species were found by Mr. J. CO. Isaac in the
Ticholeptus{beds of Deep river, Montana, during his Expedition of 1880.

Merycochoerus rusticus Leidy.

Report U. 8. Geological Survey Terrs., 1878, i, p. 199, Pl. III, figs. 1-3 ;
VII, figs. 1-5 ; XX, figs, 9-81. Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1870,
109.

The smallest species, characterized among other things by the closure
of that part of the nareal fissure which separates the premaxillary bones
below. According to Leidy’s figure above quoted, the depth of the middle
line of the undivided premaxillary is greater than the width of the bone,
a state of things not approached by any of the species of this genus de-
scribed in the preceding pages. The premaxillary in the JZ proprius is
not described.

From the ? Ticholeptus beds of the Sweetwater river, Wyoming.

Merycochoerus proprius Leidy.

Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1858, p. 24; Extinct Mammalia
Dakota and Nebraska 1869, p. 110; Pl. X.

This large species represents the extreme form of the genus in the ante-
tior position of its dental series as compared with the braincase. The
zygomatic arch and infraorbital foramen are therefore more posteriorly
placed than in any other species. The premaxillary bone is more promi-
nent than in any other, and the incisor teeth have relatively larger dimen-
sions. The size is about that of the IZ superbus. Ihave not seen any
other than the typical specimen.

From the Ticholeptus beds at the head waters of the Niobrara river,
Nebraska.

MERYCHYWUS Leidy.

Proceedings Academy Philad’a, 1858, p. 24, (nomen nudum), Extinct
Mammalia Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, 115. Report U. 8. Geological
Survey Terrs. i, 1878, p. 202. Cope, American Naturalist, 1884, p. 281,
Ticholeptus Cope, Bulletin U. 8. Geolog. Survey Terrs., 1878, p. 380.

Premaxillary bones coéssified ; otic bulla swollen; a vacuity between

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xxi. 116. 8p. PRINTED JUNE 16, 1884.

el
Cope.] 536 |Jan, 18,

the maxillary, lachrymal, and nasal bones, or larmier. Nasal bones nor-
mal. First inferior premolar caniniform,

This genus has not been defined prior to the present article, although
some characters common to the species of the genus known to him, have
been given by Leidy. As now defined it is identical with genus Ticholep-
tus Cope. This group was distinguished by the presence of a larmier, a
character whose presence in the species of Merychyus has been hitherto
unknown. It is not yet reported indeed as present in any of the original
species of the latter, but I think that there can be no reasonable doubt of
its presence there, A character found by Leidy in the MZ major I find to
be present in one or more of the superior molar teeth in all the species.
The posterior horn of the anterior internal crescent cuts off the adjacent
or anterior horn of the posterior internal crescent from contact with the
inner side of the external wall of the crown. It is the anterior horn of the
posterior internal crescent which reaches the external wall, in the genera
Merycochcerus, Eucrotaphus and Oreoden. In Leptauchenia the arrange-
ment is generally as in Merychyus ; see under the head of that genus.

This genus is confined to the Upper Miocene beds, the Ticholeptus and
Loup Fork epochs. In size the species range from medium to large, the
M. major equaling any species of the family in dimensions. They are
distinguished as follows:

I. True molar teeth not prismatic.
Infraorbital foramen above fourth premolar; malar bone shal-
low ; squamosal with superior zygomatic angle anterior ;
TUS MOMATE NM Oder 6 elitis sa el olhnie aint seuecerees dM, pariogonus,

II. True molar teeth more or less prismatic.
a. Infraorbital foramen above third premolar.
Larmier a slit ; front marrow......+.ssseeeee- dh, arenarum leptorhynchus.
aa. Infraorbital foramen above fourth premolar.
f. Zygomatic arch vertical, and with posterior angle small and rounded,
Larmier triangular; front wide; true molar series M, .044;
THCE CONVER driescis vsvin's Wei y vc eby 4 vlalnnsy vie es QTOMAIUI UNeOmUNt.
£8. Zygomatic arch expanded horizontally; posterior angle strong,
acute.
Larmuer large; trie molars 061... . 0. even seers ernest oe Lt) CYQOMANICUS.
6B. Zygomatic arch unknown.
Facial plate generally concave ; true molars M. .045..........0 elegans.
True Gurenior) molars, MinQOve es niseravaiibnuewinvars socrevedd, medvus,
True (superior) molars (m. ili inferred), M. .095...............M. major.

Of the above species, the M. arenarwm and M. eygomaticus are known
from entire skulls. In the first named, the foramen infraorbitale appears
to be partly above the posterior edge of the third premolar, as well as
above the anterior edge of the fourth,

1884. ] 537 |Cope.

Merychyus arenarum Cope, sp. nov, Sub-species leptorhyn-
chus Cope.

This species is represented by a skull which lacks of completeness only
the extremity of the muzzle and the angles of the lower jaw. Its size is
about that of the Oreodon culbertsoni or of the Merychyus elegans. The
confluence of the premaxillary bones shows that the place of the species
is with the last-named genus, and the sigmoid flexure of the masticating
line of the superior dentition is a point of resemblance to the species of
the same. The position of the external infraorbital foramen is one de-
gree further posterior than in the species of Oreodon, and agrees with
the position in two other species of Merychyus (1. arenarum and M,
pariogonus), which is more anterior than in the other species of the
genus. ‘The foramen is in fact quite identical in position with that seen
in most of the species of Hucrotaphus, to which genus the above named
species must be regarded as the nearest in the genus to which they belong.

As in other species of the genus, the malar bone is deeper and less prom-
inent laterally than in those of Oreodon. The preorbital fossa is wider
and shallower. The orbit is closed behind.

The premaxillaries are convex in every direction, least so transversly.
The fissure which separates them is quite narrow, and is separated from
the alveolar border by a rather narrow isthmus of uninterrupted bone.
At the canine tooth the direction of the surface becomes longitudinal by
an abrupt turn, and the side of the face above the second premolar is un-
interruptedly gently concave. The lateral convexity which bounds the
preorbital fossa below, appears above the third superior premolar, and be-
comes more prominent posteriorly as it passes into the flat surface of the
malar bone. The anterior orbital border is prominent and thin, and does not
develop a distinct tubercle, although its edge is roughened. The profile of
the muzzle is astraight line descending gently from the interorbital region.
Above the middle of the orbits the frontal bones are gently convex; on
the line of their anterior border, there is a concavity of the median line.
The superior face of the nasal bones is flat, and is peculiarly narrowed,
especially posteriorly, where the large preorbital fossee approach each
other,

The anterior temporal ridges are well marked, and after a gradual
approach unite into a sagittal crest, which has a gently convex ris-
ing profile. After the posterior bifiurcation of the latter, the convex
posterior tempofal crests do not project beyond the occipital condyles
when the inferior edge of the lower jaw rests on a horizontal plane,
as in so many other species of this genus and of its allies. These
crests continue without interruption above the auricular meatus to the
posterior base of the postglenoid process. As compared with the
Oreodon culbertsont, the postorbital part of the cranium is short; it is
also shorter than in any other species of Merychyus. Thus the
length from the posterior border of the orbit to the convexity of the

588 (Jan. 18,

Jope.]

posterior temporal crest, is as long as from the former point to the
anterior base of the first premolar. In the Oreodon culbertsoni, the same
measurement is equal to the length from the same point to the anterior
base of the third incisor. This shortening posterior to the orbit is seen to
involve the zygomatic fossa as well as the region posterior to it. Thus the
horizontal diameter of the orbit in the M. leptorhynchus is exactly equal
to the distance between the posterior border of the same and the anterior
edge of the glenoid cavity. The posterior part of the superior edge of
the squamosal zygomatic process is thin and strongly convex. The apex
of the convexity is above a point just anterior to the posterior border of
the glenoid cavity, The posterior edge of the process is nearly vertical,
and if continued would reach the middle of the base of the postglenoid
process. The latter is compressed and rather elongate, and its convex
edge has considerable transverse extent. The paroccipital process is long
and is flat on its posterior face. The postorbital process of the frontal is
clongate wedge-shaped, with its truncate apex below joining a slight ele-
vation of the malar bone, which is much less prominent than in Oreodon
culbertsoni. It presents an angle outwards and forwards, as the orbital
border, The anterior half of the zygomatic process of the malar bone is
rounded.truncate below. The glenoid surface is plane transversely, and
slightly convex, rising backwards, anteroposteriorly. The anterior border
of the squamosal bone is not developed into a ridge.

The frontal bone extends forwards on either side of the nasals, forming
a narrow process above the lachrymal bones. It overlaps the superior
edge of the maxillary, of which a narrow splint appears between it and
the nasal. The nasals are rather narrow, and each has the posterior bor-
der rounded. The latter fall above the middle of the first true molar
tooth when the inferior edge of the mandible is horizontal. The lachry-
mal bone has greater anteroposterior than vertical diameter, extending
nearly to the line of the infraorbital foramen, or much in advance of its
position in Oreodon culbertsoni, Hucrotaphus jacksoni, or Merycocharus
superbus. The malar bone has a correspondin ely large anterior extension,
reaching to above the posterior part of the fourth premolar. It does not
extend so far in the three species just named. The zygomatic process of
the squamosal is more deeply received into the malar bone than in any of
the three species mentioned, reaching to below the posterior third of the
orbit.

The larmier in this species is small, and its anteroposterior diameter is
more than twice as long as the vertical. More than half of its inferior bor-
der is formed by the maxillary bone. As it is exhibited in the specimen,
its superior border is formed by the ascending process of the maxillary
bone; whether this is overlapped by the laminar process of the frontal so
as to bound the foramen, when in a perfect condition, is uncertain. The
posterior edge of the larmier is the lachrymal bone. ‘The external foramen
infraorbitale is on one side double. The supraorbital foramina form
notches at the anterior edge of the supraorbital border. The frontal

1884, ] 539 (Cope.

foramina are well separated from each other, as in the species of Meryco-
chorus. The space between them is about equal to that between each
one and the superciliary border. There is a large postpariétal foramen
near the pariéto-squamosal suture. If the supraglenoid foramen be pres-
ent it is not distinguishable in the specimen. The orbit is rounded sub-
quadrate, with the inferior anterior angle a little produced.

The ascending process of the mandible is relatively elevated. The
horizontal ramus narrows rapidly anteriorly, and the symphysis mandibuli
is produced so as to rise at a very low angle. The alveolar portion is ©
horizontal.

The superior incisors are small and their apices are but little expanded,
the external the most so. ‘They are directed vertically downwards. The
superior canine is quite small; its crown exceeds in length that of the
first premolar by but little, and is directed a little posteriorly as well as
downwards. The roots of the first premolar are not as well distinguished
as in many other species, and are united in their extra-alveolar part at
least. The same is true of the second premolar. The apex of the cutting
edge is in line with the anterior border of the crown ; the rest of the edge
rises obliquely backwards. In the third premolar there is a slight bevel in
front of the apex, which is much better developed on the fourth. These
teeth are more truncate than the corresponding ones of the species of
Oreodon and Eucrotaphus, and the larger species of Merycocherus. The
external faces of P-m. iand ii are convex; that of P-m. iv is concave,
but without the reverted vertical borders seen in Oreodon culbertsont. The
first true molar has long roots and a short crown. 'The last two molars
have crowns of a more elongate character, with well developed anterior
and middle ridges. The latter are not so prominent as those of the molars
of the Merychyus zygomaticus. :

The inferior incisors are directed upwards at an angle of about 80°.
They are similar and closely packed. The inferior canine is in close con-
tact with the third incisor, from which it differs in its larger, leaf-shaped
crown. The inferior first premolar is a slender one-rooted caniniform
tooth, with narrow crown and acute apex. The second premolar is one-
rooted, and has a leaf-shaped crown, with acute-angled apex. The third
is two-rooted, and has a wider and nearly symmetrical crown, The fourth
is much larger, and its elongate crown laps inside of that of the third.
Its low angular apex is median. The last inferior true molar is dispro-
portionately larger than the others. No external cingula.

Measurements of Skull. M.

Length from occipital condyle to premaxillary border.. .161
i uy ms ut « pyostglenoid process... .080

ie Af big ve « postfrontal process... .078

ie ihe a nt ‘* preorbital border..... 130

VOTO Ce celaeie nee vale ee be vee .0250

Diameters of orbit -
transverse. .... SETA ORES Ye sis OROO

540 (yan, 18,

Measurements of Skull. M.
Depth of malar bone at middle of orbit............... .0195
he “« zygomatic process at glenoid fae (greatest).. .021

Width of top of muzzle at larmier.......... Heenan ahi lindy)
“«. ‘at middle of supraorbital border. ..........+..+ 051
i MC MAIAT DONE... cererecoeavoeseevvace hein ein te O77
is “« zygomatic processes of squamosal. ....+.++.+ 0795
of occipital Condyles., 266s. ss eee rece ete ones yea a)
Elevation of occiput, including condyles......++0+++++ .054
Width Of occiput at middle vi. ae eee ee oe fi i UOb
Depth skull at right angles to profile, at glenoid oa . 046
bh (i i We “ hee orbit. seer veces 049
hi sy Wie " “« Jarmier, exclu-
RIVE OF LOCUy evils esse leni twenty ties eres ratte yeu | Uae
Depth of mandible at bondyle. UAC ARE ee abe in GUCE
me My (UM, We COM COUG) it weld cals anode a wats UR
ay bh bids ges i Pye plas I etl RE NAO)
Length of superior dental series ...........cecseseaee . 60885
vi TO BUPCTION PM Dice ey aleve: vue wy ois We ater TOLOU
iy “i bh TOG Ueber WN ACU Wucdevnoty it eirpamieieletys 0470
a Ohi Vn ha Mea Da AN Fas ARUN MHLW, LOLOO
i vi Nd Game, COLO Wii Fab ues Hw ace Wa ie Oe
yy CO MUMSTION Meet ds vii» vsepaiice CEE COS CROC MEN HA TLR
ak an HLUs Ue pivier whl’ s 9 sa vib TMCR ELPA erat ima 0425
My Obes! dental series... . 66.465 WAN ere EVOO
iY Mtl My vy ey ROE | AG SHA SSF a Os

The unique and beautiful specimen on which our knowledge of this
species rests, was found in a formation of the Ticholeptus Miocene near
Laramie Peak, Wyoming Territory, by my assistant, J. O. Isaac.

Merychyus arenarum, sp. nov. Sub-species arenarum,

This species was more abundant than the IZ leptorhynchus during the
Ticholeptus epoch, if we may judge from the number of specimens which
have been procured. I enumerate here the five most important, viz. :
No. 1, A skull which lacks the muzzle as far as the preorbital fossa, and
the palate as far as the third premolar, and which has the mandible com
plete as far as the coronoid processes, and which is accompanied by fore
and hind feet and other limb bones. No. 2, A muzzle and right side of the
face including the orbit, with the entire dentition, including that of the
premaxillary bone, and that of the right mandibular ramus as far as the
second true molar inclusive. No. 8, A skull with a part of the mandible,
of an immature individual, in which the last superior molar is just ap-
pearing, and the last two temporary molars are in place, and which is ac-
companied by a few bones of the limbs. No. 4, Palatal part of skull with
nearly all the teeth, accompanied by perfect mandible with all the teeth,
and a large part of the skeleton. No. 5, A skull from which the basi-

~
1884, | ‘ 41 [Cope.

cranial region, zygomata, and left maxillary bone, have been lost. The
measurements of No. 4 somewhat exceed those of the other specimens,
80 that it is doubtful whether it really belongs here,

The characters which distinguish this form from the J. leptorhynchus
are not numerous. In the first place the front and muzzle are relatively
wider. Secondly, the larmier is of a different form. Instead of being a
horizontal slit, it is subtriangular, with the base above, and the angle
below ; thirdly the canine teeth are more robust in both jaws, But the
position of the infraorbital foramen is slightly variable, and the width of
the front in one specimen is about as in the sub-species leptorhynchus.
The size of the canine is not invariable. I am therefore precluded from
regarding the M. leptorhynchus as more than a sub-species.

As compared with the JZ elegans, the strong convexity of the side of
the face distinguishes it. The convexity continues from the malar region
forwards above the infraorbital foramen, and nearly reaches the nareal
opening. Judging from Leidy’s fig. 11, Plate XI, of the Extinct Mam-
malian fauna of Dakota and Nebraska, the premaxillary bone of the J.
elegans is flatter than in the JZ arenarwm. The infraorbital foramen has a
more anterior position in the latter than in the former.

The size is always a little larger than in the type specimen of J lep-
torhynchus.

Measurements. M.

ING ode
Length from occipital condyle to postglenoid process... .087
sy he A uy “ postfrontal process.... .076
ut uk hi Ws ‘* preorbital border,.... .105
(DYAMEVETse) GIBICUGL OF OL DIG isis viva tibee seule. wns vee ODO
Depth of malar bone at middle of orbit. ...... seinen na OLD
«© 7ygomatic process at glenoid face (greatest) .. .019
Width at middle of supraorbital border, ...... . 062
Oe aot) STEIN SONS E MN iin eae pales Cute SOU Her Meee
‘+ © gygomatic process of squamosal. ........ see LOU
| of octipital condyles... PC vec ren see OBS:
My PV OCGLDUT HU MOLOCWOy.. ie diuties ce ee ae Se ENUOO
Elevation of occiput including condyles. ...+++++...+5+ 054
Depth of skull at right angles to profile at glenoid face. .041
i ‘Vorbit (exclus, teeth)....... SO aot 051
iH Of mandibular rAMUs AG Mees cee ee. ess .OBU
Hi os Ore OTN lis Vie by 04 peneeuin cs 022
Length of last five superior molars. ......-... Tiss ee UOw
a CETUS MOUGTS, velavie eve dscns se ovieie yc ily eta Uae
Dinmmeters Penis ANTETOPOSteLlOL. veseseveceeseveees -010
CIATIBVELSO seve d tev va vse cues bs ce .010
Diameters m. i j ANTETOPOSteLIOL ...cceeeses sevesecees .018
WADSVOIRG Clu taebeb pene eelincwe ee One

AS
Cope.) 542 (Jan, 18,

Measurements. M.
No. 1.

Disniererecaita: HILSLODOSUGDIOL s veny iiriy bisctlepiin by ¥8 Ane ng tit)
transverse..... pia Sia a: areas ae A ie ishe O15

Length of inferior dental series (axial)........... Ae rvea (lh!
" i premolar series (axial). ......... Dando
Long diameter of crown of canine, ......5...00565 en eOOK
by Py EM Me de sunk Wao vagitile dina akialhie Tate «2. .0086
nt vs Se Prete Ap aisha gw ainey BN EIU ik AT PN etE 0084
Tiarnaters Gatniane f QINVOPOPORTOLION is eit eva sinte ae ES .012
UIPBHSVOTBG NO vices o's ve 009
‘y < ss f anteroposterior,........ 0147
cera da { PLGMIBVCCBOL Tend ire ao tune teks dy tce .010
idm ekene act A AMTCLOPOBTCHION i iii ca ee sid) wees viv .URRO
CAMEMBVORSG NE Cle b a emi Wdl tired pied eins Oni)

The specimens all came from the Ticholeptus beds near Laramie Peak,
Wyoming, and were discovered by my assistant, J. C, Isaac.

Merychyus pariogonus, sp. nov.

The generic position of this species is uncertain, and it may belong to
Merycocheerus or even to Eucrotaphus, as its otic bulle are inflated. The
doubt as to its position is due to the fact that the anterior part of the skull
of the typical specimen is lost as far back as the anterior border of the
orbit, and the second molar tooth. I place it here provisionally because
the internal crescents of the superior molars are arranged as in JZ major
and iM. arenarwm, ¢. e., with the anterior crescent excluding the posterior
at the point of junction of the two.

The Merychyus pariogonus is about the size of the Oreodon culbertsont.
The braincase is full, so that the internal side of the temporal fossa is
strongly convex, but without very prominent ridge along the pariéto-
squamosal suture. The anterior temporal ridges unite at an acute angle,
but the sagittal crest is obsolete as faras a point above the posttympanic
process, where it gradually rises. The posterior temporal ridge is promi-
nent superiorly, but is not produced beyond the line of the occipital
condyles. It is discontinued in the direction of the supraauricular ridge,
but continues downwards as an obtuse ridge on each side towards the
foramen magnum. Between this and the squamoso-occipital angle is
a large open fossa which is present in the species of this genus, of Mery-
cochcerus and of Eucrotaphus, but is wanting in Oreodon culbertsont. In
the obsolescence of the posterior temporal crest it agrees with the last
named species, and with some of those of Merycocheerus, but differs from
Hucrotaphus jacksoni where it is low, and from Merychyus leptorhynchus,
where it is well developed. In the size of the lateral occipital fosse this
species exceeds any of the others of this family. Below the depression,
the posterior temporal crest rises abruptly, forming a convex edge which
continues downwards nearly obsolete, on the suture between the post-

¢
1884.] 543 [Cope.

tympanic and paroccipital processes. It is not distinetly continuous over
the auricular meatus. The paroccipital process is elongate and acumi-
nate, and becomes compressed so as to be anteroposterior for the greater
part of its length. The auricular meatus occupies but a small part of the
space between the posttympanic and postglenoid processes. It is partially
enclosed by the robust rounded ledge of the squamosal bone, which
separates it from the postglenoid process. This ledge is much more devel-
oped than in any other species of this family known to me.. The bulla of
the petrous bone is longer anteroposteriorly than transversely, and its
anterior and posterior borders coincide with the anterior border of the
postgléenoid process, and that of the paroccipital process. The postglenoid
process is robust, much as in the large species of Merycocheerus, and not
compressed as in Merychyus leptorhynchus and M. wrenarum. The zy go-
matic arch is slender. The elevation of the posterior part of the zygo-
matic process of the squamosal has a diflerent form from that seen in the
species last named. It is angulate, not rounded. The position of the
angle is different from that in JZ. eygomaticus in being more anterior,
marking a point well in front of the anterior base of the postglenoid pro-
céss. The border which connects the angle with the supra-auricular crest
is then not vertical as in the species just mentioned, but is oblique, and it
is also somewhat concave. The malar bone is shallow and stout, with
truncate edge below. The squamosal process enters it to below the poste-
rior third of the orbit. The postfrontal process is slender, and the post-
orbital process of the malar is elongate, meeting the former opposite the
middle of the orbit. It is thus longer than in any species of the family
known to me,

The frontal foramina are separated by an interspace equal to four-fifths
the distance between each and the superciliary border. The pariéto-squa-
mosal suture ascends posteriorly in a nearly straight line to within M. .015
of the posterior zygomatic crest. The posterior squamosal suture then
turns directly downwards, reaching the depressed portion of the crest
where it bounds the huge mastoid fossa and foramen.

The posterior part of the mandibular ramus, shows a regularly convex
angular border commencing just below the condyle. ‘The coronoid pro-
cess is quite small and the short connecting edge between it and the con-
dyle is not excavated below the level of the latter. The articular face of
the condyle is directed upwards, and on the internal third, presents a face
posteriorly also. The ramus diminishes rapidly in depth anteriorly. The
masseteric fossa does not descend below the level of the second true molar,
and is not sharply bordered anywhere. The internal pterygoid fossa on the
other hand occupies the entire inner face of the angle between the condyle
and the inferior border, and anteriorly to the line of the last inferior molar
tooth.

The superior true molars have short crowns, as in Hucrotaphus and
Oreodon, The anterior and median vertical ridges are very prominent,
and the posterior vertical border of the posterior column projects to a slight

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800. xxt. 116, 8Q. PRINTED JuNE 16, 1884.

iW
Cope.} 544 (Jan. 18,

extent posteriorly. Enamel smooth, The last inferior molar is not so
disproportionately larger than the second as in J. leptorhynchus, arenarum
and elegans ; and with the second, has little of a prismatic character. No
cingula,.

Measurements. M.

Length from occipital condyle to postglenoid process... .047
ae WW v a “* nostfrontal process. .. .101
Vertical diameter of orbit.......... AD TaN Martie UO
Depth of malar bone at middle of orbit. .... alia bade @ Ht Ue
Mi “« zygomatic process at posterior angle. ......-. 024
Width at middle of supraorbital border.............05+ 060
66 Fe IAL OMG He aisle. iubig AA ed WN tae MN Ee em ON

‘ of occipital condyles..... Sieh ea WETS RGA A 032

++ occiput at lateral crests, 66.0... seecrses sens .0B6
ete ff © OOM CV UGH eis iely divides mivin® nyse! eth bnipony duals 061
Elevation of occiput with condyles. ....... SH etO wiv as oe 054
Depth of skull at glenoid surfac 058
SB CO OE OOTY, ORCUUS a UMBILRL LY ine, Anciete Vita) Heir eaWod

s« ¢* mandible at-condyle...... NCS ey ay rah INE O75

LS Aa fe FF COLO OL ios 4iraei 9) eieuiiinee via eee ea eral .083

a ie “« posterior edge of m. iii, ......+. .042
Depth mandible at middle of m. ii......... Lend shee ae
fanteroposterior. .......+.. nee

Diameters superior m. ii ;
UETAMSVCLEGH cp sev baie ee fate ei Ono

anteroposterior. 6.6.6.6. een O00

Diameters superior m. iil | i
{HAMSVETSC, .eccesaseeensees sOLD5

¢ Fi A + fanteroposterior..... at anaes 015
Diameters inferior m. ii f pon

PYRE V OTIC) siccah ia tiene ae ae

yy (PANtErOpPoOsterlory... 6. ccrewsy 0225

Diameters inferior m. ili :
Ute VERSO Ay eyaiicun eel see AOL

A second specimen of this species consists of the occipital, pariétal, and
part of the frontal regions, with the right maxillary bone, and fragments
of the left maxillary, of the mandible, etc. The latter demonstrates the
position of the infraorbital foramen to be above the anterior border of the
fourth superior premolar. The middle line of the occiput presents a keel
on its superior half. The basioccipital bone between the paroccipital pro-
cess is expanded laterally, and is without median angle or groove. Between
the bulle it is compressed, and its middle line forms a narrow truncation.
Opposite the posterior third of the bulla, this surface ascends at an angle,
and gradually widening, spreads into the general flattened convex inferior
face of the sphenoid. The anterior part of the sagittal crest isa little
better developed than in the typical specimen. The worn teeth indicate
an old individual. The canine is large, and the first premolar has its
roots well distinguished. The facial plate of the maxillary concave above
second premolar. No appreciable diastema.

1884.] 545 (Cope.
Measurements. M.
Length of molar series. see eee a aN OSL
of § “PYEMOIATA ON DASES Lee a cesee ier vactenvens O41
Width of canine posteriorly......... ET OGRE .010
Diameters P-m, iv MaNteroposteuiol. own i ens (OVA OTO
HYEMSVEISOs Cove VON es ewes ena ew Lae

Of ,this species I have but two specimens, which were obtained from the
Ticholeptus beds of Deep river, Montana, by my assistant, J. C. Isaac.

Merychyus elegans Leidy.

Proceedings Academy Philada., 1858, p. 24. Extinct Mammalia
Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, p. 118, Pl. XI, figs. 1-11.

Niobrara river, Nebraska.

Merychyus zygomaticus Cope.

Ticholeptus eygomaticus Cope, American Naturalist, Feb. 1878. Bulle-
tin U. 8. Geolog. Survey Territories, 1878, p. 880.

This species is peculiar in having the posterior expansion of its zy go-
matic arch horizontal instead of vertical. It has a thickened external edge
which continues into a strong posterior angle which projects behind the
posterior margin of the postglenoid process. The auricular meatus is
directed posteriorly in a way quite peculiar, resembling somewhat the
position seen in some of the hogs. The malar bone is very prominent.
The infraorbital foramen is above the contact of the third and fourth
superior premolars. The larmier is large and its maxillary border descends
posteriorly. a

In size this species is between the JL elegans and the MW. medius. If
my identification of New Mexican specimens is correct, this species differs
from the 4. medius in the much less production of the premaxillary re-
gion, besides the smaller size.

Ticholeptus beds of Deep river, Montana ; J. ©. Isaac.

Merychyus medius Leidy.

Proceedings Academy Philad’a, 1858, p. 25. Extinct Mammalia,
Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, p. 119, Pl. XI, figs. 12-14. Cope U. 8. Expl.
Surv. W. of 100th Mer., G. M. Wheeler, iv, pt. ii, p. 824.

Niobrara river, Nebraska, Hayden ; Santa Fé, New Mexico, Cope.

Merychyus major Leidy.

Proceedings Academy Philada., 1858, p. 26. Extinct Mammalia, Da-
kota and Nebraska, 1869, p. 121, Pl. X, figs. 15-16.

This species, known hitherto from Leidy’s descriptions of four of the
superior molars, is the largest of the genus, and perhaps of the family.
More information regarding it is much to be desired.

Headwaters of the Niobrara river ; from Loup Fork beds, according to
Hayden.

Cope. | 546 (Jan, 18,

LEPTAUCHENTA Leidy.

Extinct Mammalia of Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, 122. Proceedings
Academy Philad’a, 1856, 88, (nomen nudum), loc. cit. 1656, 163 (nomen
nudum),

As already remarked by Leidy, this genus is characterized by the pres-
ence of enormous vacuities of the superior surface of the muzzle. The
genus might be described as lacking the usual superior osseous wall of the
nasal cavities and maxillary sinuses, The generic diagnosis is as follows:

Otic bulle inflated. Four premaxillary teeth. Nasal bones excessively
contracted, leaving a wide interspace between them and the maxillaries.
Symphysis mandibuli codéssified.

This genus has but a short range in time, not having been yet found out
of the Ticholepttis beds. It shows in its deficient ossification, and smaller
size, that this line of the family was approaching its extinction, its deca-
dence having already commenced in the genus Merychyus. The genera
which follow in systematic order, Cyclopidius and Pithecestes, exhibit the
last steps in the downward course,

I. Infraorbital foramen above P-m. iii.
“Three inferior incisors; nagal sinuses to middle of orbit ;
true molars .048 s skull 186.’ Cheldyy iis evince sed evuldl MOTT.
‘Nasal sinuses not extending so far posteriorly as in L. major ;
true molars Obes eleull; 101,’ CLeldy ie svi dee owe 6
‘‘Nasal sinuses reaching to front of orbit; true molars .020 ;
BR O80. CGT yes viv vet CUS sie We ere Wie Cini wlhy he soerdn nitida,

» Gecona.

Leptauchenia major Leidy.
Proceedings Academy Philad’a, 1856, p. 163; 1857, 89. Extinct Mam-
malia, Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, p. 124, Pl. XII, figs. 1-5.
Tributaries of White river, Nebraska,
Leptauchenia decora Leidy.
Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1858, p. 88; 1857, p. 89. Extinct
Mammalia of Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, p. 127, Pl. XII, figs. 6-20.
Tributaries of White river, Nebraska.
Leptauchenia nitida Leidy.
Extinct Mammalia of Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, p. 129; Pl. XII, figs.
21-22,

White Earth creek, Dakota, tributary of the White river.

IWCLOPIDIUS Cope.

Proceedings American Philosophical Society, 1877, p. 221. Brachy-
meryx Cope, Ibidem, p. 220.

Dental formula: I. 9; C.+; P-m. $; M. % Premaxillary bones much
reduced ; mandibular rami coéssified. Otic bulla inflated. Prelachrymal
vacuities present, and confluent with enormous nagal vacuities, which are
due to the excessive reduction of the nasal bones. Orbit closed behind.

1884,] 547 [Cope.

This genus is Leptauchenia without superior incisor teeth, and with but
two on each side below. I originally asserted the presence of superior
incisor teeth, and it is true that there is in early life a minute tooth in each
premaxillary bone, as indicated by the alveoli in a specimen which con-
tains the full deciduous molar dentition. I have not seen the teeth them-
selves, and it is evident that they are early shed. In an adult specimen
of 0. simus it seems that the alveolar portion of the premaxillary bone has
been absorbed.

The meatus auditorius externus occupies a more elevated position in
this genus than in any other of the family. It is also directed somewhat
posteriorly, There are postpariétal foramina,

The cerebral hemispheres are not large, and scarcely rise above the
plane of the summit of the large cerebellum. Yonvolutions three on each
side, weakly defined.

The concavity of the superior border of the premaxillary bones, to-
gether with their upward production, leads me to suspect that the exter-
nal nares were superior in position. This is the indication of an aquatic
habit of life, such as is led by the hippopotamus. Like that animal, the
nostrils in Cyclopidius were probably valvular to prevent the ingress of
the water. The animals probably passed much of their time in the water,
and the nostrils could be brought to the surface for the purpose of respira-
tion, while the remainder of the head and body remained concealed, The
prominent rim of the auditory meatus suggests a similar valvular closure
of the organ of hearing, and is also a provision for its easy approximation
to the surface of the water when necessary.

The milk dentition is like that of Artiodactyla in general. That is, in
the superior series the third molar is more elongate and complex than its
permanent successor, and the fourth is like the first permanent true molar
in constitution. In the inferior series the anterior three teeth resemble
the permanent premolars, while the fourth is trilobate.

In the loss of the incisor teeth and the subprismatic molars, we observe
in Cyclopidius the same evidences of specialization already known in other
types of Ungulates.

I know of but two species of Cyclopidius.

Cc

rClopidius simius Cope.

Proceedings American Philosophical Society, 1877, p. 221. Brachy
merya feliceps Cope, Ibidem, p. 220 (immature).

The specimens of this species in my possession embrace a complete
skull with one zygoma and half of the brain-case wanting; a left maxil
lary bone with all the tecth; and three mandibular rami with dentition,
all of adults. Of immature individuals, I have two muzzles with denti
tion of both sides, and six mandibular rami; in all, parts of thirteen in-
dividuals. The following description of the skull is taken from the speci-
men first named, which is the type of the species.

The cranium is wide and depressed, and the muzzle is short. The pro-

Cope. | 548 (Jan. 18,

file descends at the orbits into the nasal vacuities, which cause a deep ex-
cavation of the facial plate of the maxillary region. The small nasal
bones form a promontory below the level of the orbits, whose supe-
rior borders are convex. The maxillary bones rise at the end of the
muzzle, forming, probably, with the confluent premaxillaries, a sub-
quadrate projection, ‘The superior side of this process is concave on its
interior aspect forming a curved suture of an expanded nasal bone. Its
anterior edge is also concave on their inner side, as though adapted to
a forward-looking nareal opening. This anterior border is produced
downwards into a free conical process which bounds the canine alveolus
in front. This I suppose is all that there is of the alveolar portion of the
premaxillary bone. The corresponding part of the other side is lost.
There is a well-marked preorbital fossa. Its supero-interior border bounds
the huge nasal vacuity on each side. The nasal bones form a narrow
promontory, with convex superior face, which extends a little beyond a
line connecting the middles of the preorbital fosse. The vacuities exca-
vate the frontal bones as far back as a line connecting the middles of
the supraorbital borders. The frontal bone is thus of a A-shape. The
anterior temporal ridges are well defined, but do not reach the free edge
of the frontal bone. Their union into the sagittal crest is gradual. The
brain-case is moderately elongate, the postorbital process of the malar
bone marking the middle of the total length. In profile the posterior part
of the skull is nearly straight. The sagittal crest is gently convex, and
is not so deeply bifurcated posteriorly as in most other forms, The posterior
temporal crests are expanded laterally, and continue well developed to
above the meatus auditorius, into the superior edge of the zygoma, They
are not continued downwards on the occiput, as in most of the other genera
of the family, but resemble the species of Merychyus more than any
others in this respect. The temporal fossa has a wide floor, due to the
lateral extension of the meatus auditorius, and the glenoid portion of the
squamosal. The superior edge of the zygomatic process of the squamosal
is little elevated, and is regularly convex. The process is not produced
as far anteriorly as the posterior border of the orbit. The malar bone is
remarkable for its depth, exceeding in this respect any species of the
family yet known. Its external face slopes obliquely outwards below, but
not very much, and is slightly and uniformly convex. Its inferior edge
is thickened and descends anteriorly, and then thins and rises continuous-
ly to the zygomatic process of the squamosal.

The occipital aspeet of the skull is wide and low. Its superior region
is slightly convex and roughened on each side of the median line. From
and below this valley, the middle line presents a sharp carina, which dis-
appears in a narrow convexity above the foramen magnum. Between
this convexity and the meatus auditorius, the surface is concave. The
occipital condyle is small, and the exterior half is more extensive than the
posterior half. The paroccipital process is large. Its base diverges from
the occipital condyle, and is adherent by its anterior face to the otic bulla,

L884.) 549 [Cope,

without intervening ridge. The posttympanic mass is broken away. It
is inferior in position to the auricular meatus. The latter, being directed
posteriorly, is considerably produced behind the postglenoid process, leav-
ing a wide postglenoid fossa. The postglenoid process is rather small,
and its posterior face is entirely covered by the tympanic bone, while its
interior edge is in close contact with the otic bulla. The bulla is of enor-
mous size, and is a slightly compressed oval placed anteroposteriorly, It
fills the entire space between the postglenoid process and the basicranial
axis, and reaches anteriorly almost to the line of the anterior border of
the glenoid region. The pterygoid process adheres to its internal wall
for half its length, and it sends forwards on the external side of the ptery-
goid, a narrow acuminate apex. The internal extremity of the glenoid
savity is concave, and the surface descends, forming a robust peduncle, as
large as the postglenoid process, to which the anterior part of the otic bulla is
attached, This is a character I have not seen in any other species of the
family. A wide surface, continuous with that of the glenoid face, extends
on the external side of the pterygoid ala of the sphenoid, to the angle
where it unites with the pyramidal process of the palatine. It there termi-
nates abruptly, but the external angle marks the end of a ridge, which ex-
tends upwards and forwards to the postorbital process of the frontal. An-
terior to this line the cranial wall is concave ; posterior to it, convex. The
processi pyramidales are divergent, and have thickened and rounded infe-
rior edges. The maxillary bones are produced a little beyond their bases,
leaving a notch between. The palatal surface is uniformly moderately
concave,

The incisive foramina are large; the septa are wanting in my speci-
mens, perhaps accidentally, The infraorbital foramen is above the middle
of the fourth premolar tooth. The frontal foramina are further apart than
in any other species of the family, being equidistant between the median
line and the supraorbital border. There is an internal orbital foramen be-
low the postorbital process, as in other species of the family. There are
three postpariétal foramina, two of which are on the squamosal suture.
Below the anterior of these two is a large postsquamosal foramen.
No supra or postglenoid foramina. The meatus auditorius externus
looks equally externally and posteriorly. It is large and of oval out-
line, the long diameter being parallel to the superior border, which
is the usual suprameatal crest. Its tympanic or anterior border is very
prominent, while the posterior border is wu little less so, A posttym-
panic tuberosity marks the middle of the inferior edge. Posterior to
the meatus is the rather large mastoid foramen, which is above the in-
ternal base of the paroccipital process. The basicranial bones being lost,
the characters of the basal foramina are not determinable. The posterior
nares are deeper than wide. The palatonareal border is a Gothic arch, of
which the apex is opposite the posterior border of the last molar tooth, I
perceive no palatal foramina,

-The median and posterior nasal sutures remain. The latter isa V with

550 (Jan. 18,

ope. ]

the apex opposite to the frontal foramina. Lambdoidal suture confluent.
The malosquamosal suture marks the posterior edge of the posterior orbi-
tal rim at the middle of the orbit. The pariéto-squamosal suture has an in-
ferior position in front. Opposite the front of the postglenoid process it
converges inwards in line for the occipital bifurcation, and is continued as
the pariétoéccipital suture, nearly to that point. The squamosal border,
however, extends in a Z-form to the posterior temporal crest half-way be-
tween the bifurcation and the meatus auditorius. It embraces an area of
the posterior face of the skull, and the posterior half of the rim of the au-
ricular meatus.

The typical specimen presents only the alveoli of the canine and. first
premolar teeth ; otherwise the dentition is perfect. The crowns of the
second and third premolars are obliquely quadrate in horizontal section,
both a little wider posteriorly than anteriorly. This is due to the presence
of a half crescent of the internal side, whose posterior horn is attached
to the external wall, while the anterior is free. The external faces of these
premolars is slightly convex; of the fourth premolar is slightly concave.
The first true molar is decidedly smaller than the second, and the second
is smaller than the third. The external sides of the external columns are
flat in the first true molar, but become more concave on the third. The
anterior edges of the columns project; forming ridges; or in section, project-
ing angles. No intermediate ridges, nor cingula. The third superior true
molar has a prismatic crown, no roots being visible in either of the adult
specimens, of which the typical one is rather old, ag indicated by the wear
of the teeth. In the latter specimen the roots of the second true molar are
apparent, although the crown is elevated. The first true molar is not pris-
matic, although the crown is not low. The specimen represented by the
left maxillary bone contains the teeth which are wanting from the typical
one. ‘The section of the crown of the canine ig a semicircle, the truncate
face being posterior internal. It is not a large tooth, and is separated from
the first premolar by a diastema equal to its diameter, The first premolar
is one-rooted, the root with a groove on the internal side. The section of
the base of the crown is a triangle, the faces being anterior, external, and
posterointernal. Its inner face is concave above the base.

None of the separate mandibular rami are complete, all lacking the
angle and condyle. The former is full and round, judging from a frag-
ment in my possession, The ramus diminishes regularly in depth for-
wards. The symphyseal region is short, and its anterior face is very steep,
except at the alveolar region, where it is everted forwards. No trace of
suture. The internal pterygoid fossa is large and strongly marked, so that
the inferior edge of the ramus is inverted, so that the surface is convex ex-
ternally. The last molar is placed somewhat obliquely. The first and
second premolars are directed outwards and forwards, and the incisors
directed forwards.

There are two incisors on each side of the symphyseal line. They are
very small and subcylindrical, and are closely packed between the canines.

ih

1884.) 551 [Cope.

The canines are much larger, with cylindrie root and flat, incisor-like
crown. The first premolar is still larger, and is of about the same form as
the canine, from which it is only separated by a slight divergence of the
crowns. There are no diastemata, The second premolar has a compressed
triangular crown, with a median ridge on the internal side. Its long
diameter is diagonal, running outwards posteriorly. The long axis of the
third premolar is similar, while the other teeth are more nearly in line. In
the third premolar the fossa interior to the median internal heel is much
deeper than that posterior to it. The corresponding fossa is still Jarger in
the fourth premolar, while the crown has a heel in the form of a trans-
verse curved crest, separated from the median heel on the inner side by
a fissure. The true molars increase rapidly in size posteriorly, but not so
abruptly as in the Pithecistes brevifacies. The internal crescents are very
flat, and the posterior edges of theit columns project moderately. The ex-
ternal crescents are very convex. The prismatic character of the teeth in-
creases much posteriorly, so that the roots of the third tooth are short, and
the crown long. The enamel is minutely rugose.

The third superior temporary molar has two pairs of crescents. The an-
terior pair are, however, not so well developed as the posterior pair and the
two valleys are soon obliterated by wear. The crescents are equal in the
fourth temporary molar. The fourth permanent premolar is protruded at
least as soon as the third true molar, sooner than the posterior column of
the latter. In this it differs from the Oreodon culbertsoni, where the last
true molar is protruded first, and is a cotemporary of both the third and
fourth deciduous molars ;* and the 0. gracilis, where the last true molar is
a cotemporary of the third deciduous.

In the inferior temporary dentition, the lobes of the last molar are sub-
equal, the posterior one being a little the larger. The protrusion of the
last true molar is also probably delayed until the shedding of the deciduous
series, as in the superior series ; but my specimens are either very young
or fully adult, and therefore I cannot demonstrate this point as fully as in
the case of the superior series,

Measurements of Skutt.

M.
Length from condyle to front of canine inclusive...... He's he
Mh Mi TH OUG) UNG, (AMIRI ww eVien bes oc SOLO
hd bg i *€ palatonareal notch,....... vies, SOON
: : ‘* anterior line of glenoid cavity. .088
Depth of occiput, including condyle...... Ne rye 041
«« at middle of orbit, exclusive of teeth............ .087
ne ‘« infraorbital foramen ST On W eaten a: Sata 016
« “ premaxillary border Stata Uatitoctes sl Wiest eras .02:
Width at Ms dh BWVOVGisass doa URS

Phy SM OUW GIR OLUEGS sy cv Vices isl ere Gigs VEN Ok oe hs SUBS

*Leidy. Ancient Fauna of Nebraska, 1853, p. 51, Pl. IV, figs. 1, 2.
PROC. AMER, PHILOS. 800, xxi. 116. 8k. PRINTED JUNE 24, 1884,

Cope.]
Measurements of Skull. M.
Width at malars below orbits.......... doaslnnags Wayhe’s 086
ne “ azygomata at middle...... We tbe hotline pare lainwie! NOOR
nt GF onitowlay: Metis bie eidiew abana lal. Wiis ceva O10
‘ of occipital: comdy legis iiss siniew viv oie sieie'd a soie ara! ORD
oe at middle of last molars inclusive....,......+ .049
‘ tf ‘« gecond premolars inclusive.. .030
( anteroposterior. 6c. s deere »» 023
Diameters otic bulla 4 transverse .....s ssc ee eee eeee O18

Uiwestical. abel Wl’ ta io Loe ewes Ole
{length of timiecantt of, voce O24
Lwidth at base... ..ieceecees 0125
Length of dental verter, ii viidilneGv noes e iene duvlene 8002:

Diameters of nasal bones

be “ premolar series....:s00s adits Het V NN ONE eteO

ef ga falc pierce) ty uMeperaste Rr Ameer en at dines ete OBB
Diameters Pan. ats Aiiteroposterloni i waists bw wens «OO
(transverse. . RR REL EN Heals OOOO
Diameters in’ , f anteroposterior. . Tah orev tec Poy wip 2008S
on tYANBVELEC, 66). 665 Pi bivodlo ate cblebetaredd vee iQ085
Hidietere wae HNTSLEPORPETION aide iio sy evens? OLEG
\ transverse (greatest). ..ssesesenees O11

Depth of mandibular ramus at m, ili.......... ey epetays!| > 1k
ha “ Sh 8 CED om way Oe Rr 019
Length of symphysis...... LAA, Hee ee ar ORAS
Mi £€) ROTO LAT ROLL iis avian odie amitiud) vtaldont vine sa iNORe

mt MS APUG MOTRIN vei aut ane eae nivale vie vk OBO

Mi ** of total dental series ..... HP Mel hi ay 06%
Didineterw Pan, 8 VUTSHOPORMGLTOM Wine’. sislars dea .0085
CEPA MO MOMS Viti view bite eli vand nae 006

Hiakerera nies § anteroposterior ...... Capote se oat) .009
(APOIO VOLMD: is. siditi divlte sis iki UDAWIWiia Galiras 0068

Dintiovers ta 4G Fanteroposterlor.,..cescceesveviecees O16
CEBTAVETEG cd Velie etude Gaited ee OUR:

The second specimen with permanent dentition is of smaller size than
the type, and the canine teeth are small. It may ei been a female, The
dental series, including the canine, measures dea 0,59 ; the premolar series,
0,28 ; the true molars, 0,31.

The number of specimens of this animal found in the restricted area of
the Ticholeptus bed of Deep river, Montana, shows the former abundance
of the species. It was probably gregarious, in the manner of the other
Oreodontids. We can depict it as seeking the swamps of the shore for its
vegetable food, and svending much of its time in the water when not feed-
ing. It was doubtless a good swimmer, and the characters of its feet will
be sought for with interest for light on this point. The use of the huge
superior nasal vacuity of the skull of this genus and Leptauchenia can

1884. ] 553 [Cope,

only be guessed. Perhaps it supported an inflatable bladder like that of
the crested seal, or a swollen muzzle like that of the saiga antelope.

Cyclopidius emydimus, sp. nov.

This species is represented in my collection by a nearly perfect cra-
nium. It indicates an animal of about the same size as the UO. simus. The
differences between the two species may be enumerated in advance of
the detailed description. Firstly, the external vertical ridges or crests of
the true molars are directed obliquely forwards so as to overlap the ex-
ternal wall of the anterior crescent much more extensively than in Q.
simus. (2) The crowns of the true molars have a relatively greater trans-
verse diameter. (3) There is a peculiar process at the external base of the
otic bulla, between the paroccipital and postglenoid processes, which may
be called the subtympanic process. (4) There is no median occipital
Keel. (5) The maxillary bone is prolonged posterior to the last superior
molar, which it is not in O. simus. (6) The oblique orbitosphenoid ridge
is wanting. (7) The otic bull are shorter and wider in their form. This
character will require confirmation by examination of many individuals.

The skull is singularly depressed and expanded laterally, so as to pre-
Sent an outline not unlike that of some river turtles. The orbits are in
the anterior half, and look forwards and upwards, as well as outwards.
The muzzle is short, so that its lateral borders approximate rapidly to a
harrow truncate extremity. The maxillary borders do not contract quite
so abruptly, and are visible outside of the canthus rostralis, when the
skull is viewed from above. The brain-case is depressed, and is expanded
posteriorly, and narrowed at the anterior line of the zygomatic foramina.
The posterior temporal ridges are much expanded, forming a wide rim
round the brain-case posteriorly, which is continued into the squamosal
processes of the zygoma on each side. The anterior temporal ridges ap-
proach each other very gradually on the middle line, and only reach the
union into a sagittal crest a centimeter posterior to the frontopariétal su-
ture. The edge of the crest is truncate, and it is not bifurcate posteriorly,
as in most Oreodontide.

The occiput is broad and low, and differs in character from that of most
other members of the family. Its posterior face is flat, only interrupted
by a fossa on each side, just within the posterior edge of the meatus audi-
torius externus. This edge is continued downwards into the external bor-
der of a distinct mastoid process, which is also the external border of the
occiput, deflected a little forwards. ‘The paroccipital process is flat at the
base, and is applied to the external half of the otic bulla. Its free extrem-
ity is subround. The mastoid process forms a prominent ala of its exter-
nal side, having a transverse width equal to that of the base of the par-
occipital. Its inferior edge is truncate obliquely outwards and downwards
to a subacute angle. The occipital condyles are relatively small.

The external meatus of the ear looks outwards and backwards at an
angle of 45° to the middle line. The prominent edge of the mastoid pro-

—

ee

Cope.] 554 (Jan, 18,

cess is directly below its anterior border. Thus the tympanic bone is
directed obliquely downwards and forwards. Posteriorly it is separated
by a groove from the mastoid process. Anteriorly it is separated by a fossa
from an osseous mass which occupies the space between it and the post-
glenoid process. Before the skull was reconstructed from its fragments, this
mass was observed to be entirely distinct from the postglenoid process,
which it equals in height. Continuous with it, there descends another
osseous body to near the line of the extremity of the mastoid process, with
a truncate inferior edge, which is separated from the otic bulla by an open
grooye. The stylohyal ligament is probably inserted into a fossa at the
anterior extremity of this groove. The postglenoid process is low and
more extended transversely. The anteroposterior diameter is small. The
glenoid surface is much extended transversely and terminates externally in
a slight thickening. The zygomatic process of the squamosal bone is at
first expanded horizontally and has a low convexity of the thin superior
edge. Its vertically compressed portion is entirely supported by the ma-
lar, and does not extend so far forwards as the anterior edge of the
zygomatic foramen. The malar bone is remarkable for the depth of its
suborbital portion, which fully equals the diameter of the orbit. Its infe-
rior edge presents a thickened angle downwards below the anterior part of
the last superior molar. Its superoanterior angle terminates in a promi-
nent rib of the side of the face, which extends along the inferior edge of
the facial vacuity, Beneath the anterior part of the latter the face is con-
cave, Above this concavity the ascending plate of the maxillary is con-
vex in the vertical section, turning inwards at the apex to unite with
the lateral part of the extremity of the nasal bone. The preorbital fossa
is small and looks forwards and upwards.

The otic bullee are larger than in any other Oreodontid. They are of a
short oval form, somewhat truncate anteriorly and posteriorly. Thus they
differ from those of CO. simus, where they are elongate-oval. They only
reach as far anteriorly as the middle of the internal extremity of the
glenoid surface ; while in C. simus they reach the line of the posterior
outline of the zygomatic foramen. They terminate near the inferior inter-
nal point, in a little acute osseous apex, which is smaller than in (. simus.
The bull approach so closely together that the bassioccipital is much nar-
rowed, and the sides of its inferior surface are excavated so as to reduce
the middle line to a narrow acute keel. The lateral excavations follow the
posterior internal base of the bulls, leaving a median table, which is itself
excavated by a shallow fossa, which extends from the median keel to the
foramen magnum, The median keel disappears anteriorly. The sphenoid
is protuberant downwards as a narrow convex rib, which rises and disap-
pears in the presphenoid,. The descending sphenoid ala forms the posterior
boundary of the posterior nareal trough, and makes a strong angle with
the pyramidal process of the palatine, which is turned outwards. The
pterygoid squama terminates in an apex which points downwards and
posteriorly towards the apex of the otic bulla. The palatonareal border is

1884. 555 (Cope.

V-shaped, and is in line with the posterior edge of the maxillary bone. The
latter projects beyond the last molar tooth as far as the anteroposterior
diameter of the latter. It has no projection in the 0. siémus. There is no
notch between the maxillary bone and the processes pyramidalis of the
palatine. The palate is of nearly equal width from the last molar to the
third premolar ; its roof is gently concave posteriorly ; nearly flat anteri-
orly.

The premaxillary bone is a narrow strip which rises nearly vertical-
ly from its short alveolar border, and is curved outwards above in
agreement with the expansion of the anterior edge of the maxillary, to
which it is united by simple suture. The nasal bones are of remarkable
form. ‘Together they enter the anterior part of the frontals in a V-shape,
and extend forwards in a narrow shaft. Opposite the anterior borders of
the orbits the shaft begins to widen gradually, and the surface to flatten,
until they reach the posterior angle of the ascending part of the maxillary.
Each one then expands outwards, terminating in a semi-disc which fits
the concavity of the superior edge of the maxillary above mentioned.
The entire shape of the nasal bones is that of a spade with a triangular apex
to the handle, and the short blade at the opposite (anterior) extremity.
The frontal bone is V-shaped, the angle posteriorly directed, and engaged
between the pariétal bones, and each branch terminating above each orbit.
Narrow prolongations extend anterior and posterior to the orbit, joining the
lachrymal and malar bones respectively. Its median suture is, like that of
the nasal bones, well defined. The alisphenoid and pariétal have extensive
connection. The pariétosquamosal suture is horizontal in front ; it then
gradually rises. It is not associated with a ridge as in some other species.
The occipital forms the posterior five millimeters of the sagittal crest.

The nasal opening is subtriangular, with the base above, and is directed
anteriorly. The facial vacuities are enormous, and excavate the frontals
to a point which make the anterior third of the orbit’s diameter. They are
only separated on the median line by the very narrow isthmus of the
nasal bones. The infraorbital foramen is above the anterior part of the
fourth surperior true molar. The frontal foramina are small, and are not
symmetrical. That of the left side is half-way between the median suture
and the superciliary border; the other is nearer the superciliary border.
No supraglenoid foramen. Postsquamosal present; that part of the
cranial walls is injured. The anteroposterior diameter of the orbit ex-
ceeds the vertical. The auricular meatus is the largest known in the
family, and it has a prominent border and regularly oval outline. Its
long diameter rises posteriorly from the horizontal. It is more lateral-
ly and less posteriorly directed than on the typical and only skull of
0. simus. The foramen magnum has an openly angulate superior bor-
der. Jugular, condyloid, and carotid foramina not obvious, owing to the
close contact of the otic bulla with surrounding bones. oramen ovale
larger than the 7. lacerum anterius, and external to it in position. 2 ro-
tundum still larger, inferior in position, bounded on the external side by a

a

—

eee

Cope. ] 556 |Jan. 18,
tuberous projection of the angle from the anterior edge of the glenoid sur-
face. There is a deep fossa at the internal base of the postglenoid process,
which possibly enters a foramen. No postglenoid foramen,

Although the skull of the Oyclopidius emydinus is more robust than
that of C. simus; the length of the tooth-line is the same. The in-
cisive edge of the premaxillary bone displays one empty alveolus, from °
which the single incisor was easily shed. The canine is not large, and
the base of the crown has a regularly convex anteroexternal face ; apex
lost. The diastema posterior to it is equal to its diameter. The crowns of
the premolars are worn; théy are of about the size and proportions of
the (. siémus. The true molars differ, as I have already pointed out, in
their greater transverse diameter, and the greater anterior prolongation
of the anterior horns of the posterior external crescents. The deep notch
which is enclosed between this fold and the wall of the crescent in front
of it is filled with cementum. As to the form of the true molars, the
transverse diameter of the first considerably exceeds its anteroposterior
diameter ; in the (. simus the former diameter is equal to the latter. In
O. emydinus the last true molar is as wide as its length without the heel ;
in the C. simus, the transverse diameter is much less. In C. simus the heel
is more prominent, and is recurved into a vertical ridge, which is wanting
in the 0. emydinus. In 0. emydinus this tooth shows but little of the pris-
matic character, as the roots are of usual length.

The lower jaw of this species is not yet known.

.
Measurements,

M.

Length of skull along bases. .seesseeverss db Uae VLRO
Length from condyles to posterior edge of ay gomatic

FOVEM OTs vi erasin's ewibii i Weve dees cue vewlewens L042

Length from condyles to palatonerea! foramen) ss,.44's. -.068

My “ fo Ine Of leah true molarins ies OV
ag ‘occipital crests to line of orbite....¢.s.03 074
is “fi “ ‘oe etal Wetter hui, « 084
" ie Me “ascending process of
MALIMATY DOMES isis veView Wha dienere Wares RU mT T ie 115
Length from occipital crest to free end of nasal bones, .126
Elevation occiput, including condyles...... veel Vb’ 045
hid of front at middle of orbit, without molars,. ,035
ef ‘mexiilary bone. Ate Pty lidies iileses 015
i Ny ih Pec A ST ge wat is tis i lst bid woe ORO
Width of skull at occipital condyles.......... 0675

eee superior edge of meatus audttoniaiis: 057
fou Moe eo omiddle of zygomatie foramina, 1.4), 008
«« Drain-case at middle of zygomatic foramina... .029
(60 4° SUL Qt OP Dies aneus Pe en ree 083
Me Fo os DOUWRGD. OP UI y Vaeimed eS eee ed iis cuint OMT,

‘‘muzzle at superior edge of nares.... eas 0215

1884.] 557 (Cope.

Measurements. M.

; VOTUCHL Fess ertiet yak Coe OLE
Diameter external nares f

Utransverse above... ...... .017

anteroposterior. . .0380

Diameter of a facial vacuity t ‘

Utranverse...... 018

‘ : BYONOSUELION vised vis veiyess uns ORe

Diameter of orbit 3 ant oe
VEL UCC Wisig) view lees SOMES Ronen antes ee

{ anteroposterior..... .058
tYANSVETSC...s+.ee0e -O26
( VEPHCHL iecveseccuensn cudeo

Diameter of zygomatic foramen

Diameter of foramen magnum

VAPAMAVEPSO. Cices ves wu
BE LIGAL kasi de as OUD.
Digamoter of meatus auditorius ; § vertical . :
‘ anteroposterior. .....+. O11
VOLULOBIN verses SEG EM SES CAV ag [93
Diameter of otic bulla + anteroposterior. ......eeeeeee+ 025
| tHANBVETEC. 60s sseieevcersevtes Ue
Width: BOUWSEN CANINS TOGED ys des vise es cree s cewns ee S00

“ 6

last true molars » .0285

Length of dental series... 065
hi true molar series. . 08:

ie Premtolar ys Vb. Ne PUNT FAS sir ee vals seo .0254
DikmetersPanci» anteroposterior....... VACA alie de WOD0E
a TYANSVETHO. Vink Ge vw es Deven otvdiats wit OU U
Diatnelere Pee dy ( ANtETOPORTELIOP 1. cess ee. Emons EAU
UVABEVOISG IG ch veic’ civavatwi mene nUUG
Tle eteon tay § anteroposterior,....... Oe ROW OUND
CATAMEVODSG Wiiaes cevuvwernueuaa ee ie ie OLD

§ anteroposterior. .... oie ei wae Ns) ode ily

Diameters m. iii
¢ transverse (with extertial tobe wash 012

:

The only specimen of this remarkable species known to me was found
in the valley of Deep river, Montana, by my assistant, Mr, J. C. Isaac.
The wear of the true molars shows that the animal was of full age, though ,
not old.

PITHECISTES Cope.

Proceedings American Philosophical Society, 1877, p. 219.

This genus represents the final term in the decadence of the once
powerful and numerous family of the Oreodontide. It is unfortu-
nately established on a mandibular ramus only, and although some
maxillary bones are referred to it with much probability, they are not
preserved in such a way as to demonstrate the presence of the large
nasal sinuses characteristic of Leptauchenia. I, however, suspect that
they occur. The genus further resembles Leptauchenia in the coés-
sification of the mandibular rami, and the reduction in number of the in-
cisor teeth. In P. brevifacies there is but one inferior incisor tooth on each
side. As reduction in the superior incisors usually precedes reduction in

558 (Jan, 18,

Cope.]

those of the lower jaw, I suspect that the former were absolutely wanting
in this genus. If s0, we have in the Oreodont line the same process of re-
duction above, as has taken place in other lines of Artiodactyla at the
latest or modern stage of their history.

In Pithecistes the inferior canine is caniniform, and masticated in con-
tact with the superior canine, owing to the great abbreviation of the sym-
physeal region.

The diagnosis of the genus is as follows :

Inferior premolars three ; incisors one. Canine caniniform, masticating
with the superior canine. No diastema, Symphysis codssified.

Two species are referred to this genus without conclusive evidence as to
the number of their premolars. It is probable that they have but three,
since their superior fourth premolars are of reduced size and incomplete
type of form,

Pithecistes brevifacies Cope.
Proceedings American Philosophical Society, 1877, p. 219.
Ticholeptus beds of Deep river, Montana, Discovered by J. OC. Isaac.

Pithecistes decedens Cope, sp. nov.

Established on a right maxillary bone, which contains the fourth pre-
molar, the first and second true molars, and part of the alveolus of the
third true molar. The last named tooth was not probably entirely pro-
truded. This, with the moderate wear of the fourth premolar, indicates that
the animal was fully grown, though young.

The species differs from all the members of the family whose dentition
is known to me in the small size and simplicity of structure of the fourth
premolar, The internal crescent of this tooth bounds only the posterior
three-fourths of the external wall, and therefore leaves the anterior edge
of the latter free. It is, moreover, not very convex, and its edge is not so
elevated asis that of theexternal wall. The latter is flat on the external side,
and its anterior marginal angle corresponds with the point of junction of
the anterior extremity of the internal crescent. The true molars have the
anterior horns of their crescents prominent, being sections of well-de-
veloped vertical columns. In this they differ from those of the P. hetero-
don, where these ridges are very weak.

The malar process of the maxillary bone is robust and prominent, and
begins to expand opposite the first true molar. It presents a tuberosity
downwards. The infraorbital foramen issues above the front part of the
fourth premolar.

Measurements. M.
Tylana reel chen de POMOTODOSLEPI OL v.yiy- breve sew «6 vine eG
UPAR EV GTO), Jus tiik dai v4 90 diet 0 elena: vac OU
Tiiimater anny anteroposterior .....+... eee nigeyS ah 6 OORT
C ATANBVEIBO. ce ees ene Hine viuds even ACO Ie
aie teieva: Pe i Ganteroposterlor. weveceieveneserens 0115
CAPONS POLES) Vv celal vinrenlih-Chcinne aed . 008

Ticholeptus beds, Deep river, Montana. J. C. Isaac.

1884.] 559 (Cope.

Pithecistes heterodon Cope.

Oyclopidius heterodon Cope, Proceeds, American Philos. Society, 1877,

99
p. 22.

In this species the fourth premolar has the same form as in P. decedens,
but the first true molar differs much in the more prismatic shape, and the
absence of the external vertical ribs. It is quite possible that it does not
belong to this genus.

Ticholeptus beds of Deep river, Montana. J. C. Isaac.

AGRIOCHGERUS Leidy.

Proceedings Academy, Philadelphia, 1850, p. 121. Extinct Mammals
Dakota and Nebraska, 1869, p, 181 (as family Agriochwrida).

Orbit not closed behind. Fourth superior premolar with two external
Vs. Fourth inferior premolar like true molars. Otic bulla inflated. Pre
maxillary bones distinct; no vacuities in the facial bones.

This genus commences cotemporaneously with the genus Oreodon, and
persists longer, viz. ; to the close of the John Day epoch. It represents :
distinct line of succession from that which we have been considering, and
one which contains but two known terms. Next to Agriochcerus comes, in
this line, the genus Coloreodon Cope, which outlasted its predecessor so far
as is yet known. It commenced with it in the John Day epoch, and con-
tinuing into the North Fork beds, which are of later age, did not ap-
pear later. This series Leidy regarded as a family distinct from the Oreo-
dontide. For the present I prefer the view of Gill, that it constitutes a
subfamily, the Agriocherine.

This genus presents us with one of the very few cases in the suborder
Artiodactyla, ia which the last premolar approaches (above) or accom-
plishes (below) identity of structure with the true molars. This degree of
complication was attained at the same period by both the equine and
rhinocerontice lines of Perissodactyla, and all existing members of that
order exhibit it. In the Agriocheride it made a beginning, but soon dis-
appeared from the earth, and no Artiodactyle has developed such perma-
nent premolars successfully since.

In the characters of the skull this genus is less robust than the Oreodon-
tide ; but the general skeleton remains unknown.

Five species have been described which are referable to this genus, and
two others are now added. One of the former is without premaxillary or su-
perior incisor teeth, and I therefore regarded it as representing a distinct
genus under the name of Merycopater. It, however, appears that no speci-
mens exist in our museums which exhibit this part of the skull in other
species of the genus, so it is absolutely uncertain whether Agriochorus
possesses those teeth or not. The species may then be distinguished as
follows :

[. Otic bulle compressed, base anteroposteriorly ovoid.

4% Foramen infraorbitale above junction of P-m. iii and iv.

PROG. AMER. PHILOS. 800. xxt. 116. 88. PRINTED JUNE 24, 1884.

ree
Cope.] 560 (Jan. 18,

Front narrower; internal wall of fourth premolar not com-

DISA w ores We S Gian a tearolees flarwaoee § LENT ety Aue EMOU URN
Front wider ; skull shorter and higher ; internal wall of inferior
Pins fy complete ciievswl bie. LENA EEE Ne TAU TONS

aa, Foramen infraorbitale above junction of P-m. ii and iii,
Front medially concave, laterally descending to orbits ; sagit-
VE CPGRE BOLE. Wives ee ACU elev Nar L Malpas Wi tNiale elbie aco eldadha TRITON,
II, Otic bullee mammiform with triangular base.
Front convex ; nasal bones acute posteriorly ; fourth inferior
premolar complete ; infraorbital foramen above junction of
Pome HP and dy vv si ss 0. Geo AMV VN MIRCLD SHERI e RPE LIA GA enue” DORUOLC2UICS L
III, Otic bulle oblong, constricted at the middle,
Infraorbital foramen above junction of P-ms,. ii and iii; front
plane ; nasal bones truncate posteriorly ; postglenoid pro-
CESS, TODUSE nce ecdereserruore see tetany Wb rh NEN WE VCdlnk A, ryderanus.

Besides the above, Leidy has described an A. major* as near to the A.
antiquus, but of larger size. Marsh has described a small species from the
Uinta formation under the name of A. pumilus.| Lydekker figures and de-
scribes a superior molar tooth from’ India as probably belonging to this
genus.{ It is stated by him to have been found in the earlier pliocene for-
mation. If this determination be correct, it represents the latest known
species, as the A. pumilus of Marsh is the earliest, Owing to incomplete-
ness in the descriptions of these species I cannot include them in the above
synoptic table.

Agriochoerus antiquus Leidy.

Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1850, 121; 1858, 892; 1854, 157;
1857, 89, Ancient fauna of Nebraska, 18538, p. 24, Pl. I, figs. 5-10. Bronn
Lethiea Geognostica, 1856, 9383; Leidy Extinct Mammalia Dakota and
Nebraska, 1869, 182, Pl. XTII, fig. 4.

White River epoch of Nebraska and Dakota,

Agriochoerus major Leidy.

Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1856, p. 164; 1857, 89. ? Hucro-
taphus auritus Leidy, Owen’s Report Geological Survey, 1852, p. 568,
Pl. XV, figs. 1-8. Ancient Fauna of Nebraska, 1858, p. 56; Pl. VII,
figs. 1-8. Bronn Lethaa Geognostica, 1856, 931.

White River formation of Dakota and Nebraska.

Agriochoerus latifrons Leidy.

Proceedings Acudemy Philadelphia, 1867, p. 32, Extinct Mamm.
Dakota, Nebraska, 1869, p. 185, Pl. XIII, figs. 1-8.

White River epoch of Dakota and Nebraska.

*Hxtinct Mammalia of Dakota and Nebraska, p. 134,

+ Amer. Journal Science and Arts, 1875, p. 250,
| Paleontologica Indica,

&

1884. ] 561 [Cope.

riochoerus trifrons sp. nov.

This species is known to me by a single cranium of an immature indi-
vidual. It lacks of perfection only the basioccipital, the pterygoid, and
the alveolar border of the premaxillary bones. It retains the third and
fourth deciduous premolars, while the third true molar is still in its alveo-
lus, where it is exposed in place.

Although the specimen is immature, its characters will not permit me to
place it with any other species known to me. I have specimens of like age
of the A. guyotianus, and these are quite different. From A. ryderanus
it differs in the form of its otic bulla, ete.

The muzzle and front form a flat horizontal profile, while the pariétal re-
gion is convex. The profile descends gently to the supraoccipital border,
or inion. The muzzle is compressed above and below the canine alveolus,
and there is a concavity above the third and fourth premolars, and behind
the foramen infraorbitale above this fossa the lachrymal region is con-
vex. The nasal bones are lost, so that the form, of their posterior suture
cannot be ascertained. The frontal bones are gently concave in transverse
section between two lines produced forwards from the anterior extremities
of the temporal ridges, that is at the postorbital constriction of the cranium.
These lines are represented by a rounded longitudinal angle, from which
the frontal bone descends to the superciliary border on each side. A trace
of this form is seen the A. ryderanus. The supraorbital borders diverge
outwards and backwards to the postorbital processes. These are prominent
horizontally, and are abruptly decurved at the apex. The temporal ridges
enclose an urceolate area, having a gentle convexity in their direction be-
fore they unite at a point more posterior than in the other species, that is
above a line connecting the anterior borders of the postglenoid processes.

The malar bone is slightly concave on the external face, and is mode-
rately deep, and not thick. The squamosal part of the zygoma is rather
slender, and does not rise above the postglenoid process. Its superior edge
continues without interruption into the posterior temporal crests, and so
into the supraoccipital. The, postglenoid process is like that of A. guyo-
tianus, narrow and produced downwards. Paroccipital lost. The otic
bulla is large, its anterior edge extending anterior to the postglenoid pro-
cess. It is nearly twice as large as in JZ guyotianus, and extends much
further forwards. It presents two flat sides, one external, the other out-
wards and forwards, and a convex side inwards and backwards. These
sides meet at an angular edge below, which runs outwards and backwards.
The sphenoid bone is convex between the bulle. Basioccipital lost. The
palatonareal border is convex, and is opposite the middle of the second
true molar. In the mature skull it would be probably more posterior. The
palate is everywhere concave in transverse section.

The frontopariétal suture is broadly convex, and is opposite the anterior
edge of the glenoid surface, and 25 mm. in advance of the sagittal crest.
The anterior processes of the bone on each side of the nasals are wide and
truncate, and do not extend beyond the interior suture of the lachryma)

26
Cope. | 562 (Jan, 18,

bone. The latter is about as long on its superior sutures as it is deep at
the orbit. It presents a distinct preorbital angle above a prominent tuber-
cle, The occipito-pariétal suture extends well forwards, 30mm. in advance
of the crest. The squamosal does not reach to the lateral occipital crest.

The infraorbital foramen occupies the position it has in the A. ryderanus.
In a young specimen of A. guyotianus it has the same position as in
the adult. The frontal foramina are about as far apart as each is from the
supraorbital border. There is a postpariétal foramen on the pariéto squa-
mosal suture, and there are three postsquamosals, two of them near
together, and near the posterior suture, the other below the postpariétal
foramen. Horamen ovale oval, about as large as the / rotundum, and
separated from the foramen lacerum by the produced base of the inferior ala
of the sphenoid bone. Palatine foramen opposite the third deciduous pre-
molar.

Superior canine teeth robust, bases of crown one-half lenticular, the pos-
terior face truncate. A considerable diastema anterior to first premolar, and
a short one behind it. Other teeth in continuous series. First and second
premolars two-rooted ; absolutely simple. Third and fourth crown of first
of usual form, First true molar smaller than second. Enamel minutely
roughened,

Measurements. M.

Length from supraoccipital crest to canine inclusive... .180

és ie fs Ce CR OULO Sie MULLEN ee ee OOO
i al My « —““ nenultimate molar. .108
“ hy ey OTD: COTA): y aOD
" Mi " oe TOO ny Om ONG 9 126
ue Of BURIAL CVORT cui wermeens onee TN ele ORS:
" “superior molars (last included)......... ee, WOO
ihe nl VEGMIOIBIE ys vhheed's rad Velvet san VOU
Hiatioters Nod § anteroposterior,........ A Wa eee Na Wave CO Oe
COMMEVOLRO IN sels v ns udee nya l evirr ey ULM
WONVELOPORTCTION ites veers obey views 1 OLGO

Diameters M. ii
C PUMEVCTRG Vane REN Flies Levee Uru een OeU

Width of skull at postglenoid inclusive ..........06.+. .O77

iy ‘middle of ZyG@Omas.. 2... ys. Cann t ey 050
nf ba ‘fundus of canine alveolus..:........ .088
ie between canines........... Ke ULPOV Vee buN eee iO
si Aas BOCOMG THUS TOUTS 5 view y eben Ve ud tenis . 088
OF SKULL At DOBTITORTA] PVOCEBSOBS sc devveisieveen) sO0G
Mii My “* between anterior rims of orbits........ .066

The label from this specimen is lost. It is, however, from Oregon, and
to judge from the color, from the true John Day epoch, rather than the
North Fork bed.

>
1884.) , 563 [Cope.

Agriocheerus guyotianus Cope.

Hyopotamus guyotianus Cope, Proceedings American Philosophical So-
ciety, 1878, p. 77. Merycopater guyotianus Cope, American Naturalist,
1879, p. 197, Proceeds. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1879, 375.

Three crania, one with nearly entire mandible, and numerous fragments
with mandibles, represent this species in my collection. It is the most
abundant species of this genus in the John Day beds of Oregon.

The cranium is of peculiar form. It is elongate from the orbits back-
wards. The muzzle is elevated and compressed, so that the profile is hori-
zontal, with subordinate irregularities. The occiput is therefore low as
compared with the muzzle. The zygomata are rather slender, and are not
expanded. The side of the muzzle is concave just below the superior
border of the maxillary bone and above the fundus of the canine alveolus.
The inferior part of the maxillary is concave from below the anterior
border of the orbit to the line of the canine alveolus, The region above
and anterior to the lachrymal bone is convex, leaving the flat nasal bones
a little depressed. The frontal has a convex swelling on the middle line
just posterior to the frontal foramina, from which point the surface slopes
gradually and evenly to the supraorbital borders, and not in two planes,
as in A. trifrons. At. the front of the orbit the section of the frontal bone
is convex at the sides and a little so at the middle. The supraorbital
border is short and concave, not long and straight as in A. trifrons, and
the postfrontal process is moderately prominent, and is not decurved. The
anterior temporal ridges do not reach them. The former converge in
nearly straight lines at an acute angle to a long sagittal crest. This in turn
bifurcates into two very prominent posterior temporal crests, which over-
hang the occipital condyles. The brain-case is an elongate-oval, and the
olfactory portion is long and narrow, but not especially constricted at any
one point. There is a prominent small tuberosity at the inferior part of
the lachrymal bone ; above it the preorbital border is not defined as far as
the beginning of the supraorbital. The postfrontal process originates be-
low the anterior temporal surface which is continued along its posterior
edge. The malar bone is concave on its external face. The zygoma is
compressed, and has a long low superior convexity behind. Its crest con-
tinues into a fine, low, posttemporal crest, which turns posteriorly above
to its prominent posterior expansion above mentioned, The latter turn
outwards at the apices, and send a low ridge downwards towards the occi-
pital condyle. Below, the latter form a low angle on each side, which sep-
arates a median from a lateral plane. Above, the occiput is deeply con-
cave, and has a trace only of median keel.

The basicranial axis is flat and rather wide between the otic bullte.
The occipital condyles have distinct inferior boundaries which are sepa-
rated by a flat interval. The posttympanic region is wide, and is bounded
inferiorly by the deep styloid fossa. This is surrounded internally and pos-
teriorly by the funnel-shaped base of the paroccipital process, which ex-
tends first posteriorly as a longitudinal lamina, and then outwardly. Its

Cope.] 564 (Jan, 18,

e

edge terminates in a rough band which curves upwards and backwards to
a point above the line of the occipital condyle. It is separated by a shal-
low groove from the corresponding posttympanic ridge. The tympanic
bone is not so long as in the species of Oreodontine, and presents a tube-
rosity externally. Like the paroccipital its base unites with the otic bulla.
The bulla is small. Its base is extended towards the postglenoid process,
but it is well separated from it, and does not reach the line of its anterior
border. It presents a face anteriorly, and one inwards. The postglenoid
process is narrow transversely, the depth and width being equal, and is
elongate downwards.

The coronoid process of the mandible is short, but has a base extended
anteroposteriorly, The articular face of the condyle is convex anteropos-
teriorly, and is extended downwards on the inner side behind. The hori-
zontal ramus is slender, and has a straight inferior border. (The angle is
broken away from this specimen.) The symphysis is oblique and nearly
straight in profile. It is moderately elongate, and has the suture persist-
ent, There is a tuberosity looking downwards from its posterior extremity,
where it is rounded-compressed.

The facial part of the lachrymal bone is longer than deep, and the lateral
anterior part of the frontal is wide and obtuse, and extends anterior to the
lachrymal. The nasals extend posteriorly to terminate in an acute angle
which is above the anterior edge of the orbit. The frontopariétal suture
extends across the space between the anterior temporal ridges at a point
half way between the anterior border of the orbit and the anterior glenoid
margin. The malomaxillary suture has no anteroinferior process. The
mastoid forms a distinct mass between the exoccipital and squamosal. The
sutures are largely codssified.

The infraorbital foramen is above the contact of the third and fourth
premolars. The space between the frontal foramina is about one-sixth the
interorbital width, There isa large postpariétal foramen on the pariéto-
squamosal suture, and there are two small postsquamosal foramina, in line
above the posttympanic tuberosity. The mastoid foramen is small, and is
not situated in a fossa of any extent, as is the case with the species of the
Oreodontine. There is a large foramen intermediate in position between
that of the anterior condyloid and the jugular. Anterior and a little ex-
ternal to it and slightly elevated between the confluent base of the paroc-
cipital process and the otic bulla is another foramen, perhaps the jugular,
Between the posterior base of the bulla and the basisphenoid, is a smaller
foramen, probably the carotid. The other foramina are yet concealed by
the matrix.

The teeth do not differ in their form from those of other species of the
genus. The second and third premolars have triangular bases, the second
the narrower, The first has two roots. It is accidentally lost from one
side, which circumstance led me to suppose at one time that this species
has but three premolars above. The fourth premolar has its posterior ex-
ternal V well developed, though a little smaller than the anterior. In the

1884.] 565 [Cope,

specimen now described, the posterior internal rudimental cusp is quite
well developed ; in the two other specimens now before me it is not so
large. The superior canine is elongate, and not very robust, and its con-
vex anterior border is directed partly posteriorly at the apex. The
enameled portion of the crown is quite short. The premaxillary bones
are narrow and weak, and are separated so as not to be in contact on the
middle line. Its border displays two minute alveoli, from which teeth
have been shed. I do not suppose that their presence is constant in the
species. The external alveolus is twice the diameter of the internal. The
inferior incisors are of normal number, but are very narrow, and much
crowded. The canines are very narrow, but are longer than the incisors.
The first inferior premolar is more caniniform than in any other species of
Oreodontidee known to me. The crown is a compressed oval in section,
and is not expanded at its base. It is enameled to within 5 mm. of the
alveolar border. A considerable diastema separates it from the second
premolar. The description of the remaining teeth I take from a separate
ramus of similar dimensions, as they are concealed in the type by their po-
sition in juxtaposition with the cranium. The cusps of the true molars are
pyramidal and acute, and entirely separate from each other. The external
faces of the external are convex, their internal faces flat. The external
faces of the internal are convex, the internal faces concave at the base, and
convex near the apex. The anterointernal angle of the posteroexternal
cusp extends to the base of the anterointernal cusp. The only difference
between the first true molar and the fourth premolar, is that the anterior
crest of the anteroexternal cusp is continued round to the front of the an-
terointernal cusp, and to the internal side of the crown ; and the apices of
the two anterior crests are separated by a shallow notch. The second in-
ferior premolar has two roots. The heel of the third true molar is well de-
veloped, and is convex posteriorly.

Measurements. M.

Length from occipital condyles to postglenoid process,. .038
bY hh Ny . ‘* preglenoid border... .058
ah i ey “‘nostfrontal process. .104
Mu os Ms he “ canine, inclusive.... .226

My ‘f orbit to canine inclusive ...... ss+.e.++. 085

r of mandibular ramus from condyle.........+.+ 176

“ ‘‘symphysis mandibuli below........+.+. spre sh UD
Width of occipital condyles inclusive......+ S dieaaa aw wee 046
WN SP GOCIDUUT ADOV.G sions ed niic be sinha optatens asd a SesiNie ED

“ ‘‘ between otic bulle.... 1c hen

i ‘at postglenoid processes inclusive........ rere)

‘< ‘‘ of skull above glenoid surfaces,............ 100

a) ETO" DOLOW “ONDIER) ba aie si dale bi sis sya cw bah lanes 099
WY Poe» DRtWCGM. OLDIE b9'ecisierd afl aie CE NORPRO =)

44 SY BG CUMS Oe OAMING CAV EOy iivisiccsne, «ORO

Pe fe
Cope.] 566 (Jan. 18,

Measurements. M.

Width of skull between last upper molars, inclusive... .070

Depth of occiput to foramen MagnUM....+....+eeeeee 048
Peay ee uM f DaBLOCCIPITAl: DOME yeh» u's ete ODS
‘« ¢ gkull at last superior molar, exclusive........ .058
Fett ek CCS Tat, DTEMOlTs: CXGUIBLY.C' Vibra. bie: «i tcv,et 055
fe O VAMUS MANGO Ab ALO OL Dl Whee» resis .035
IO ath ih by ih POOMP MMLC) oo a ue eee hg oO),

‘« «© zygomatic arch above glenoid facet............027
Diameters of base of crown § anteroposterior.......... .009

of superior canine COPAMBVCREG, hale ci yy ve 0085
Length of superior diastema.....sessseseceasrsererne 022
EE DPOMOIAT BETICB, 6 by shvwiis sae vpn e'e i valk ukbagen Oe
ff EAMG TOLAT SETIOR) dere oeine sie apne yi cpinie.«, olnui are 043
Width of premaxillary bones together...... He adi via (O45
Diameters of base crown inferior P-m. i; anteropos-
COTLOL sd cieivis wy ov si vieiewyivs,ei see y'ey ewe dw.o'e Fiat ier VOR
Length inferior diastema........-cceseeeereeees dsr ey OLD
hi i last three premolars.....serceccotrecs OGL
ie e true molars....... COR, Ibe dante sca ohh UO
si tie last true molar..... eal er vipe RNa wve Wass Ue
ie ha THAN PIEMOLAT. 46 sins Sa ewe nee biplane 009
ki i LOUWP Gin ce vine es Wah wy aio oss west (ia euntn cnile

anteroposterior. .. .019

Horizontal diameters of otic bulla §
tUANBVOPSE se e00+ se OLE

The specimens of this species which I have seen, are from the John Day
river, and were obtained by Messrs. Sternberg, Wortman and Davis. The
skull from which the above description was taken is the most perfect one
of the genus Agriochoerus which has yet been found.

Agriochoerus ryderanus Cope.

Ooloreodon ryderanus Cope, Bulletin U. 8. Geological Survey Territo-
ries, vi, p. 173.

This species is represented in my collection by three nearly complete
skulls without mandibular rami. While of the general size of the A. guyo-
tianus, this species displays various well marked peculiarities. The most
important of these are (1) the shape of the otic bulla, in which it differs
from all other known Oreodontide ; (2), the position of the infraorbital
foramen, in which it resembles in this genus only the A. trifrons ; (3), in
the form of the nasal bones posteriorly, in which it differs from the species
where this part is known; (4), in the form of the palatonareal border ;
(5), in the form of the postglenoid process; (6), in the outline of the sec-
tion of the frontal bone.

Agriocharus ryderanus has the muzzle compressed laterally and flattened
on top, as seen in the A. guyotianus and A. trifrons, and the side of the

1884. | 567 [Cope.

muzzle has three distinct fosse. The largest of these is above the position
of the fundus of the superior canine alveolus; the second is below the
fundus; and the third is behind the position of the infraorbital foramen,
and above the third and fourth premolars, and the first true molar. The
lachrymal region is plane, and the nasals are flat. ‘The frontal bone is
nearly flat in section between the posterior borders of the orbits, but each
is decurved to the lachrymal opposite the anterior border of the orbit.
There is no indication of the three planes of the infraorbital region charac-
teristic of the A. trifrons, nor of the median convexity of the A. guyotianus,
The anterior temporal ridges commence about the middle of the width of
each frontal bone, and unite after a shorter independent course than they
have in A. guyotianus into a long, narrow saggital crest. This bifurcates
posteriorly into two prominent lateral crests, which are directed down-
wards and soon terminate, but which send forwards and downwards a
delicate posttemporal crest. This passes without interruption into the supe-
rior edge of the zygomatic arch. This arch is not expanded either upwards
or laterally, and is rather weak. The external face of the malar bone is
gently concave, and the inferior edge is rather wide, is truncate, and
grooved along the middle. The occiput is deeply concave between the
crests, and below them is gently convex. The superior edge of the fora-
men is deeply notched at the middle, much as in MZ. guyotianus.

The occipital condyles are large, and their inferoanterior angles are pro-
duced horizontally for a short distance, forming short processes which are
separated by a concavity of the basioccipital bone. The latter is plane be-
low, but anteriorly develops a low meridian angle, which, widening on the
sphenoid, causes its inferior face to be convex. The posttympanic element
is distinguishable from the mastoid by a superficial groove, and a slightly
free apex, and the mastoid from the paroccipital by a slight groove. The
external base of the paroccipital extends but 5 mm. external to the line of
the external border of the occipital condyles, and is therefore much less
prominent than in the majority of species of Oreodontinse. The base of the
paroccipital has a posterior and an anterior face, nearly at right angles
with each other. The latter is continued into the pinched posterior promi-
nence of the auditory bulla, and encloses on its external side, with the
apex of the posttympanic, the deep stylohyoid fossa. The tympanic bone
is represented by a tuberosity below the meatus, and a laminar expansion
on the posterior face of the postglenoid process. The otic bulla’s long axis
is inwards, and a little posterior from the internal side of the postglenoid
process, from which it is separated by a narrow interval. The bulla is con-
stricted at right angles to its long axis, in two parts. The external part
is subglobular with the side next the postglenoid process flattened. The
internal part is roughened, displays a flat side posterointernally, and has
an apical keel which extends posteriorly and a little externally into the
base of the paroccipital processes. This form is not known in any other
Species of the family. The postglenoid process is more robust than in
either M. guyotianus or M. trifrons. Its width and thickness are equal,

PROG. AMER. PHILOS. 800. xxi. 116. 87. PRINTED JuLy 1, 1884.

Cope. ] 568 (Jan. 18,

and are a good deal longer than its height ; in the species named the height
equals the other measurements. The pterygoid ala rises opposite the
middle of the end of the glenoid surface, and the angle of its junction
with the pyramidal process of the palatine is considerably in front of the
middle of the trough of the posterior nares. Its edge posterior to this
angle is shallowly grooved, The palatonareal border differs from that of
any other species of the family known to me. It is acute in front, forming
a Gothic arch, its apex being opposite the middle of the superior third true
molar. In a young M. guyotianus, the only specimen of that species in
which it is perfectly preserved, it is rounded, and extends to the posterior
part of the second true molar. In an adult specimen, where the middle
portion of the margin is lost, it extended at least as far forwards ; but its
form is uncertain. The palate in the A. ryderanus is strongly concave
throughout,

The lachrymal bone has a different form from that of a A. guyotianus,
more resembling that of A. latidens figured by Leidy. Its anterior superior
angle is not produced, and its outline is a little deeper than long. The an-
terior lateral prolongation of the frontal extends beyond it by nearly its
width, and is wide, and terminates in an obtuse angle. The posterior edge
of the nasals is broadly rounded, truncate at the middle, and is situated
much in advance of the frontal foramina, The pariétal is in contact with
the alisphenoid. The squamosal does not extend beyond the vertical line
from the base of the paroccipital process.

The infraorbital foramen is above the anterior edge of the third superior
premolar, a position only seen elsewhere in the genus A. trifrons. The
superior border of the orbit is concave and short as in A, guyotianus, and
not straight and flat as in A. ¢rifrons. The frontal foramina are above
their middle, and their distance apart goes 4.5 times into the interorbital
width. There is a large postpariétal foramen on the pariétosquamosal su-
ture, and a large postsquamosal immediately below it. This arrangement
differs from that seen in the other species here described, where there are
two or three postsquamosals well posterior to the postpariétal. Mastoid for-
amen small. There are two palatine foramina on each side of the mouth,
one opposite the posterior edge of the second premolar, and one opposite the
posterior part of the fourth premolar. The anterior condyloid foramen is
large. On one side isa small posterior condyloid, the only occurrence I
have met with in the family, The foramen lacerum posterius is not divided
into three foramina as in the A. guyotianus, but remains open as in the
species of Hucrotaphus and Merycochawrus. It shows its nearer affinity. to
the first named species, however, in its triradiate outline ; and in the three
grooves of the side of the bulla, which correspond to two of the three fora-
mina. The f. lacerum anterius is not large, and is oblong in shape. The
ovale is rather small, and is entirely bounded on the inner side by the
pterygoid ala of thesphenoid. The /. rotwndum is large and rather poste-
rior. It is not bounded below by a transverse shoulder as is seen in the spe-
cies of Merycocheerus, but is continued into a longitudinal groove, whose

1884. ] 569 [Cope.

external wall is longer than in any of the other genera of the family, ex-
tending to a point half-way between the inferior edge of the foramen and
the middle of the last superior true molar tooth. It is curved both inwards
and downwards just posterior to the foramen.

The superior molar teeth do not differ from those of M. guyotianus, M.
antiquus and M. latifrons, The canines are very robust, and are separated
from the first true molar by a considerable diastema.

Measurements. M.

Length from occipital condyles to line of postglenoid
f PRORGHEGR NG Veeder a Lai sei cues Wie waien COMO

Length from. occipital condyles to line of preglenoid
POLICE CoV Ko ckven ee CTO ER MEM CMeTTCCe Tew caine e vOOU

4 Length from occipital condyles to line of postfrontal
PLOGURE cy He ciaWit-ia vie eee Set Umea eae rTt CU alG bearen eRe
Length from occipital condyles to line of canines, in-
GUSIVG hows VeN ven niu veey Mtn Ouaics ys Fee UMass. (eeU
Length from orbit to canine inclusive ..........eese008 076
Width of occipital condyles inclusive..... ........... .050
Le COULD HU DHTOUOLDIMIG tins Wow Uv ew ine sas s wee COOL,

1. DOUW GEM: OUOIDUMES WEN SANNA Ce iris tee e ssn eens COLO P
** at postglenoid processes inclusive............+. .098
‘« of skull above glenoid surfaces, ... sine ced UO)
Pho ReSeC Ca CO RMGNYY: MORRIS I gle wisi vs wyiis ww Gly Wigs sv OM
Li ce ORY OOM COMMU eae aN ¥4. 5 Uae caters eae

«at fundus of canine alveoli; about. 029

eee between last upper molars, inclusive... “080
“palate at second true molars.... seve bee UDB
ence eee Ir Dromore; Cee CUGn
«between superior canineé......... O21
Depth of occiput to foramen magnum... 08

Shoe tS * DHSIOCCIPIIAL sve can wny Rema Oty
re § skull at last superior molar sxsiasies, Riieroas caw 6 OOO.
ML ay ‘¢ «first premolar, exclusive.... ‘ 046
| «“ gygomatic arch above glenoid facet ...... 021
Diameters base crown superior canine ald gat a hace
(transverse ..... .012
Length diastema to first premolar 0185
by PLOMICLAL MOTION). icdied'ndendasmes nes 0865
oh COUS LOD BOLIOS Wii ee wile a 045
Diameters Pein. iv if anteroposterior a Otl
(transverse... O14
f anteroposterior. .......0:. . 014

Diameters M. i hi
NERDS VOTSO TURE Cea wee Canty fv OLS
Diameters M. iii { MMteroposterior.... cece eee eee ees 018

TRAM VETSO OCU N Vevey oe deviain vung AON

Cope.} 570 (Jan, 18,

The skulls of this species came from the John Day bed of the John Day
river, Oregon, and were found by Mr. J. L. Wortman. The species was
established on an immature individual. The adults show that it belongs
to this genus.

COLOREODON Cope.

Proceedings American Philosophical Society, 1879, p. 875.

Superior premolars three, the fourth with two external Vs, no facial va-
cuities.

The mandibles of the species of this genus are unknown, so that the
character of the inferior dentition is unknown. The otic bulla are also
destroyed in all the specimens, so that their character is unknown.

In its reduced dental formula this genus represents one stage of that
specialization which Owen has shown, has overtaken all the modern types
of Mammalia. In this series this process seems to have stopped at this
point, and not to have gone further, as the entire line has come to an end.

The first superior premolar probably exists in a rudimental condition for
a short time, and is early shed. The same state of things has been found
to exist as an abnormality on one side in the Agriocharus guyotianus, and
may be found again, but not so as to invalidate the characters of the genus
Ooloreodon.

Two well-marked species of this genus have been described, which dif-
fer as follows:

Smaller ; palatonareal border opposite posterior cusps of second
true molar; sagittal crest anterior, commencing opposite
OPtic FOAMING... 6 ccereeseerererneereceeseresees sete wan Ong Crows
Larger; palatonareal border opposite posterior cusps of third
true molar; sagittal crest posterior, commencing opposite
preglenold border. .cccsceceosessraeteesrsscvesees Os macrocephalus.

Coloreodon ferox Cope. Fig, 1, p. 505.

Proceedings American Philosophical Society, 1879, p. 375.
The size of Oreodon culbertsont. Known from one skull from the North
Fork of the John Day river, Oregon. OC. H. Sternberg.

Coloreodon macrocephalus Cope.

Proceedings American Philosophical Society, 1879, p. 876.

Size of the Hucrotaphus major. The typical skull is from the North
Fork of the John Day river. A second skull, lacking all the parts posterior
to the anterior origin of the sagittal crest, is undistinguishable from the
first. It was tound at the ‘‘Cove’’ of the John Day river, Oregon. Both
were obtained by Mr. J. L. Wortman.

1884, | 571 [Cope

GENERAL CONCLUSIONS.

From what is now known of the history of the Oreodontide, the following
conclusions may be drawn, These are especially instructive as far as
they go, since they involve the causes of the rise, great development, de-
cadence and extinction of one of the best-marked types of Mammalia the
world has seen. The history of this type involves more or less the history
of the life of the North American continent during the Miocene epoch of
Tertiary time. It moreover involves the laws which regulate the vital
success of all types of life, and which express the causes of multiplication,
of energy, of weakness, and of sterility.

Two lines of the family, the Oreodontine and the Agriocherine, come to
light simultaneously in geological time, the White River epoch, or the
Oligocene. The latter is a higher type than the former in its more com-
plex fourth premolars, while it is inferior in the non-closure of the orbits
posteriorly. It may then be regarded as a parallel line. It has but two
generic types, while the Oreodontine present us with seven. So far as yet
known, the Agriocherinse did not continue as long as the Oreodontine,
as will be shown in tabular form below.

In the progressive.modifications of the Oreodontini series, the first step
was the inflation of the otic bulla (genus Eucrotaphus). This was suc-
ceeded by the codssification of the premaxillary bones (genus Mery-
cochorus). These changes were accompanied by a regular increase in
dimensions. The species of Merycochcerus are all of the largest size, and
there are no small ones. The smallest species of Eucrotaphus are equal to
the largest ones of Oreodon. The fourth genus Merychyus, while it loses
none of the points already gained, shows a deficiency in its facial walls
where vacuities appear, There is the greatest range of size here : with one
species (Mf. major), as large as any of the Merycocheri, we have another
as large as the usual Eucrotaphi (JZ eygomaticus), and several one degree
smaller, or as large as the largest Oreodons. In the next genus the facial
vacuities have attained to an enormous size. The premolar teeth become
smaller, and the weakness of the narrow symphysis of the lower jaw is
made up for by its codéssification. The size is reduced from equal to the
smallest Merychyi, to that of the smallest Oreodons (genus Leptau-
chenia). In the next stage (genus Cyclopidius) the superior incisors dis-
appear. Finally, the lower jaw is so reduced in front that it loses both
incisors and premolars, in spite of its symphyseal codssification (genus
Pithecistes),

The species may be thus arranged in accordance with their distribution
in time,

White River Hpoch. Oreodon gracilis; O. affinis; O. culbertsoni. Eu-
crotaphus jacksoni; E, major. Agriochcwrus antiquus; A. major; A.
latifrons.

John Day Epoch. ucrotaphus jacksoni; E. major. Merycochwrus
superbus; M. leidyi; M. chelydra, sp. nov. ; M. macrostegus, sp. nov

a O/4 [March 7,

Cope. |

Agriochcrus guyotianus; A. trifrons, sp. nov. ; A. ryderanus. Coloreodon
macrocephalus.

North Fork of John Day River Epoch. ucrotaphus trigonocephalus,
sp. nov. ; H major, Coloreodon ferox ; C. macrocephalus.

Ticholeptus Beds. Merycocherus montanus, sp. nov.; M. rusticus; M,
proprius. Merychyus arenarum, sp. nov. ; M. pariogonus, sp. nov. ; M.
zygomaticus. Oyclopidius simus; C.emydinus, sp. nov. Leptauchenia
major; L. decora; L. nitida. Pithecistes brevifacies; P. heterodon; P.
decedens, sp. nov. 4

Loup Hork Beds. % Merychyus elegans ; M. medius; ? M, major.*

The stratigraphic relations of these species may be represented under
their generic heads in the following table :

Ades al sea z
Poe aoe ieee 2 Bact 2 a
|e | Ae A'S onl oS "9
[ae a a a ee Se ee
| 6 bal | acs] | im} a}
[ees i A eC be KS "oO fx &
ie| ee .
Oreodontina. |
Oreodon Leidy........, 3 |———|
Eucrotaphus Leidy....| §
Merycocheerus Leidy..| 7 |
Merychyus Leidy...... Beals, eee mnt
Leptauchenia Leidy ...| Pe eyerged
Jyclopidius Cope......| 2 beget sopemnarie
Pithecistes Cope..... Figs aa hseugemecomenn
Agriochwrine. |
Agriocherus Leidy.
Coloreodon Cope

On the Structure of the Skull in the Elasmobranch genus Didymodus.
By H. D. Cope.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, March %, 1884.)

The genus Diplodus was described by Agassiz from specimens of teeth
from the European Coal Measures. In America, Newberry and Worthen
have described four species from the Carboniferous of Illinois and Ohio ;
and I have reported two species from the Permian beds of Illinois and
Texas. Recently Mr, Samuel Garman has described a shark, said to have
been taken in the Japanese seas, under the name of Chlamydoselachus

* The questions refer to the geological age.
t Geology of Illinois, vol. il.

ae

1884, ] 573 (Cope,

anguineus, whose teeth, as represented, do not differ generically from those
of Diplodus. This is an interesting discovery, indicating that this genus,
and not Ceratodusa, is the oldest type of vertebrate now known in the liv-
ing state. :

My collections from the Permian beds of Texas include not only
numerous teeth, but jaws and crania, Among these I recognize two types
of teeth, which I cannot distinguish from those of the D. compressus
Newb., and D. gibbosus Agass. Whether these species belong to the same
genus, is a question, which I will discuss at the close of this article. I pro-
visionally refer the D. compressus to a distinct genus, Didymodus, and
will so call it in this article.

The determination of the characters of this genus is a point of much
interest The teeth resemble those of the existing sharks more than do
those of any other genus of the Paleozoic ages, but the antecedent im-
probability of the modern type having existed at such an early period of
the earth’s history, is shown to be well founded by the present investiga-
tion, which also throws much light on the question of the general phylo-
geny of the fishes.

I. DxEscriprion.

Twelve more or less complete crania of species of Didymodus are in my
collection, and one set of jaws with small teeth and part of the cranium
attached. One of the crania, unfortunately much broken, exhibits also
some large teeth. All were found by the late Jacob Boll in the Permian
beds of Texas.

The skull of this species forms a continuum, which, however, displays
distinct segments. First, however, as to the tissue of which it is composed.
Both on the surface and in transverse fractures, it is more or less finely
granular, the granules distinctly visible to the naked eye. These granules
are composed of gypsum, as is also the matrix of a darker color in which
they lie imbedded. Two hypotheses may be entertained regarding this
structure. Hirst, These granules may be regarded as the casts of coarse
cartilage cells, and the matrix be in the place of the intercellular cartilage,
replaced like the woody tissue in petrified wood. Second, The granules
may be looked upon as replacements of osseous granules, such as cover
the chondrocranium of most Elasmobranch fishes, while the matrix may
be a replacement of the cartilage. The latter hypothesis is the more

_ probable of the two, for two reasons: First, There is little probability of

an unsupported chondrocranium retaining its form sufficiently long to per-
mit the filling of its cells with a mineral deposit. Second, The granular
type of ossification is well known in existing Elasmobranchs. It is only
necessary to believe that the chondrocranium is penetrated by this kind
of ossification. This state of things exists in the jaws also, which I de-
scribe later. This structure has already been observed by Kner in the
genus Pleuracanthus.

The osseous cranium is abbreviated anteriorly, and elongated posteriorly,

Cope.] 574. [March 7,

The orbit occupies part of the anterior third of the length. It is bounded
in front by an obtuse preorbital process, and posteriorly by a laterally
expanded and decurved postorbital process. The latter*bears an articular
facet on its posterior and inferior face. The top of the muzzle is exca-
vated by a fontanelle which does not extend posterior to a line connecting
the preorbital processes,

Thereis a prominent cup-shaped occipital condyle. On each side of
the cranium a short distance anterior to it, is a prominent process extend-
ing outwards and a little backwards, which is excavated on its inferior
side, but whose posterior side is decurved, so that the inferior concavity
looks partially forwards. Into this cavity, and abutting against the
decurved posterior edge, is a lateral process of the basal axial bone of the
skull, which I take to be homologous with the lateral alee which occupy
the same position in the sharks. Anterior to this junction no doubt the
hyomandibular bone was suspended, for I suspect that it was articulated to
a small condyle which is wedged into the fissure between the inferior and
superior elements described, a centimeter anterior to their posterior
extremities. This condyle is a distinct clement of a subglobular form.

The interorbital plane is continued posteriorly, bounded on each side by
a depression which probably corresponds to the temporal fossa of higher
vertebrates, The edges of this plane are thus well within the lateral
borders of the cranium. The plane rises a little posteriorly, and is split
into two narrow wedge-shaped processes, which project freely upwards
and backwards, The rather short remaining part of the roof of the skull
has a keel or sagittal crest on the middle line, which descends gradually
to the foramen magnum.

The base of the skull forms a continuum from the edge of the large occi-
pital cotylus to the acuminate anterior extremity. The lateral basal ale
are subcylindric, and are separated from the basicranial axis by a fissure
for a short distance, and then unite with it. Two or three foramina ante-
rior to this reunion, are in line with the defining fissure just mentioned.
The basis cranii sends out a process on each side below the postorbital
processes, giving a cross-shape to this part of the base of the skull. An-
terior to this point it is free from other elements and contracts to an
acuminate apex,

The cranium is segmented, but a clean specimen is necessary to per-
mit the straight sutures to be seen. In the first. place, there is a distinct
occipital bone, which includes exoccipital and basioccipital elements com-
bined. The latter includes the large occipital cotylus, as in the Rhachi-
tomous batrachian Trimerorhachis, and difters from the structure seen in
the Lepidosirenide, where exoccipital elements only are present. ‘The
occipital extends but a short distance on the inferior face of the axis. It
is preceded directly, and without imbrication, by a continuous axial ele-
ment, If we recognize in the granular character of the tissue evidence
of true ossification of the chondrocranium, we have here true continuous
sphenoid and presphenoid bones,

1884.] 575 [Cope.

Returning to the superior face of the cranium, we observe that the
exoccipital elements form a wedge-shaped body, divided on the middle
line by suture, with the apex forwards. Traces of this division are figured
by Gegenbaur as present in Heptanchus.* Anterior to this the middle
of the cranial roof is apparently occupied by another triangular bone with
the base posterior and the apex anterior, and concealed beneath the free
extremity of the element in front of it, The lateral sutures only are dis-
tinguishable, appearing as grooves (fig. 2). This is the pariétal bone. Hx-
ternal to this and the occipital, and filling the space behind as well as an-
terior to the postero-lateral angle of the pariétal, is the element which is
produced outwards and backwards as already described. Were I describ-
ing a true fish, this bone might be intercalare (epiotic) or pterotic. Perhaps
it is both combined, or it may be the cartilage bone called by Giinther,
in Ceratodus, the ‘tympanic lamina.’’?+ The element anterior to the
pariétal is the cartilaginous representative of the frontal, and the fact
that it terminates posteriorly in two free processes is significant of the
true homology of the bones which terminate in like manner in the crania
of the Lepidosirenidx.{ In this family and in the Ceratodontide these
bones are inore or less separated on the middle line by the median pos-
terior element. In Ceratodus the separation is wide ; in Lepidosiren the
interval is uninterrupted, but narrow in front. In Protopterus these
elements are in contact on the middle line, but diverge posteriorly.
Bischoff, Stannius$ and Giinther identify these elements with the frontals
in the genera they have described. Huxley] calls them supraorbitals, so
that it becomes necessary to name the median posterior element a fronto-
pariétal, as a combination of two bones usually found distinct in fishes.
The furcate structure of the frontal cartilage in Didymodus goes to show
that the identification by Bischoff and Giinther is the correct one. There
are also in this genus distinct paired membrane bones which do not take
part in the bifurcation in question, and which appear to represent the
frontals of Ceratodus. Hach of these is a flat, subcrescentic supraorbital
plate, which has a concave superciliary border. It is separated by a con-
siderable interval from its fellow ‘of the opposite side. Its anterior
extremity is notched by a fossa which I suppose to represent the ante-
terior (posterior in position) nostril. The ? frontal of the right side is dis-
placed, and appears as a lamina lying on the frontal cartilage, showing
that it is a membrane bone. From its relation to the nostril the question
arises, whether it be not the homologue of the nasal.

For hyomandibular bone, palatopterygoid arch, and mandibular arch,
we have to rely principally on one specimen. On one of the skulls, two

* Ueber den Bau des Schedels der Selachier, 1872, Pl. I.

+ Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society, 1871, p: 511, indicated on
the plates by the letter d.

}$ Lepidosiren paradoxa by Bischoff, Prof. in Heidelberg ; Leipsic, 1840,

@ Handbuch der Anatomie der Wirbelthiere; Rostock ; Erstes Buch, die
Fische, 1854, p. 49.

| Anatomy of Vertebrated Animals, 1871, p. 145.

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC, xxt. 116. 8u. PRINTED JULY 1, 1884.

ree
Cope.] 576 {March 7,

curved rib-like bones lie parallel and divergent posteriorly on the right
side of the frontal, in the temporal fossa. I cannot identify them. They
are not present on the opposite side. As already described, there is a
facet on the infero-posterior face of the postfrontal process. “This in-
dicates the point of articulation of the palatopterygoid arch, as it exists
in the group Opistharthri of the sharks as defined by Gill, and as is clear-
ly proven by the specimen now to be described.

This includes the entire palatopterygoid and mandibular arches of one
side, and the greater part of that of the opposite side, together with a
considerable part of the right hyomandibular bone and probable ex-
tremity of the ceratohyal. The anterior parts of both jaws support
numerous small teeth, which closely resemble those described by Agassiz
as belonging to his D. gibbosus. They differ from those of the D. compres-
sus in their smaller size. The palatine bones do not project much beyond
the mandible, which, taken in connection with the form of the muzzle
above described, renders it probable that the mouth was nearly terminal.

In the palatopterygoid arch there is no noticeable separation or suture
between the palatine and pterygoid elements. The inferior border of the
palatine is swollen below the orbit; its superior plate rises into a strong
suborbital ala, which is concave externally, with thin superior edge. This
edge rises posteriorly, giving the outline an elevated convexity, whose
greatest upward prominence is above a point a little posterior to the
middle of the jaw, and which probably articulated with the postorbital
process of the cranium. Its surface gives indication of an articular sur-
face appropriate to the corresponding one of the cranium. The superior
border then descends rapidly to a vertical posterior border, which forms
a somewhat prominent rim. This descends to the mandible, forming a
regular ginglymus, the mandible bearing the cotylus. The mandible is
rather robust; its inferior edge is rather thin, and becomes incurved
anteriorly. Its superior border is regular, except that it rises a little at
the coronoid region, and is impressed, corresponding with a concavity of
the surface, and arch of the border of the pterygoid region, just anterior
to the posterior prominent ridge which forms its posterior edge.

The hyomandibular bone is only exposed for its inferior half. It issues
from behind the palatopterygoid as a narrow shaft with obliquely truncate
extremity.

It is thus evident that the arrangement of the jaws is as in the two ex-
ceptional existing genera, Hexanchus and Heptanchus.

The external nostril already referred to, is a distinct, rather small fossa,
on the lateral part of the superior face of the muzzle, near the extremity
of the osseous portion. It is visible on both sides of the best-preserved
specimen. It is continued forwards as a shallow groove. At the apex of
the muzzle, is a fossa looking downwards, where roofed on each side by
the ? nasal bones, which may represent the posterior nasal cavity. Or the
latter may probably be represented by a lateral fossa just in front of the pre-
orbital process. In either case it is evident that the nares are separated,

dy 4
1884.] v4 7 [Cope.

and that the posterior one cannot be said to be within the oral cavity, as
is the case in the known families of the Dipnoi. It is probable that there
is a frontoparietal foramen at the posterior bifurcation of the frontal bones,
corresponding to the conarium or pineal body of the brain. In a cranium
broken across just anterior to the bifurcation, a canal passing forwards
and downwards is exposed. There is a foramen, or possibly only a deep
fossa on each side of the middle line on the occipito-sphenoid suture. The
foramen magnum is rather small and opens upwards. Its border displays
no articular surfaces. At the middle of a line connecting the posterior
borders of the postorbital processes is a small shallow fossa, or probably
foramen, from this there extends on each side backwards and outwards, a
shallow groove apparently for a vessel, which terminates at the anterior
one of three foramina already mentioned as in line with the fissure which
distinguishes the lateral ala of the basicranial axis posteriorly. A. similar
groove connects the first and second of these foramina, and in one speci-
men the groove from the median foramen joins this connecting groove.
In front of the median foramen is a rather larger one on the median line,
situated at the fundus of a short longitudinal groove. It is placed just
posterior to a line connecting the preorbital processes. The grooves easily
become obsolete by weathering.

II. AFFInrTins.

In determining the systematic position of this animal, it will be con-
venient to take a survey of the characters of the primary divisions of the
fishes. In 1840 Bischoff published the first account of the osteology of
Lepidosiren. In this description he called the frontal bones malars with
a question, and the pariétals frontopariétals. He described the skull as
having an os quadratum. In 1854, Stannius in the Handbuch der Zod-
tomie* correctly determined the frontals and pariétals, and stated further
that the ‘‘lower jaw and hyoid bone articulate directly with continuous
processes of the chondrocranium.’’ This appears to be the first correct
description of the cranial structure of the Dipnoi. In 1864,+ Huxley re-
Stated the view of Stannius as to the nature of the mandibular articula-
tion ; adopted the opinion of Bischoff that the frontal is a frontopariétal,
and took a new position in calling the frontals supraorbitals. He also
restates in general, the description of the skull of the Holocephali already
given by Stannius.

The system of Johannes Miiller, adopted by Stannius, was a great im-
provement over preceding ones. It embraced, however, the error of in-
cluding the Holocephali in the same sub-class (Elasmobranchi) with the
sharks, This was adopted by Gill in 1861,{ by Huxley in 1864§ and in
1871.] All of these authors adopt at these dates the sub-class Ganoidea,

*Krstes Buch, die Fische, p. 49.

t+ Elements of Comparative Anatomy, p. 210.

{Catalogue of the Fishes of the Bast Coast of North America, p. 24.
? Elements of Comparative Anatomy.

| The Anatomy of Vertebrated Animals, p. 120.

Cope. | 578 [March 7,

In 1871* the writer gave the following as the primary divisions of the sub-
class Pisces: Holocephali, Selachi, Dipnoi, Crossopterygia, Actinopteri.
The Holocephali was raised to an equivalency with the other sub-classes
on account of the absence of distinct hyomandibular bone. The Dipnoi
were defined by the median pelvic element, by the distichous arrangement
of the segments of the pectoral and ventral fins, when present, on a me-
dian axis, and by the supposed presence of a distinct hyomandibular bone.
The latter definition must be abandoned, for though an ossification exists,
it has been shown by Stannius, Huxley and Giinther, to be merely a de-
posit in the continuous chondrocranium. The sub-class Crossopterygia
was substituted for the sub-class Ganoidea of Agassiz and Miiller, as the
latter was believed to have no actual existence as a division of fishes, After
comparing the osteology of Polypterus, Lepidosteus and Amia, I remark
(p. 820) ‘It is thus evident that the sub-class Ganoidea cannot be main-
tained, It cannot be even regarded as an order, since I will show that
Lepidosteus, Accipenser, and Amia, areall representatives of distinct orders.
Thope, also, to make it evident that Polypterus should be elevated to the
rank of a sub-class or division of equal rank with the rest of the fishes and
with the Dipnoi, already adopted.’’ The sub-class Ganoidea has not yet
fallen into disuse, but there are strong symptoms that it will do so.+
Among others I select the following extract from Huxley’s paper on the
ovaries of the smelt, published in 1883. +

“As is well known, Lepidosteus presents an example of a Ganoid with
oviducts like those of the higher Teleostei; in Osmerus, on the other
hand, we have a Teleostean with oviducts like those of the ordinary
Ganoidei. It is tolerably obvious, therefore, that the characters of the
female reproductive organs can lend no support to any attempt to draw
a sharp line of demarkation between the Ganoids and the Teleos-
teans,

‘Boas has recently conclusively shown that the same is true of the sup-
posed distinctive character afforded by the conus arteriosus; and it has
long been admitted that the spiral valve which has been described in the
intestine of Chirocentrus is the homologue of that which exists in all the
Ganoids, though greatly reduced in Lepidosteus. Indeed I am inclined to
believe that the circular valve which separates the colon from the rectum
in the smelt is merely a last remainder of the spiral valve. Thus, among
the supposed absolute distinctions between the Ganoids and the Teleostei,
only the peculiarities of the brain, and especially the so-called chiasma of
the optic nerves, remain for consideration. My lamented friend Mr.
Balfour, in the last of his many valuable labors, proved conclusively that
the brain of Lepidosteus is, both in structure and development, a 'Teleostean

* Proceedings Amer, Assoc, Adv, Science, p. 826. Transac. Amer, Philosoph.
Soc., p. 449,

+The term ganoid can be used as an adjective to describe the scales already
known by that name, and thus be preserved,

{ Proceedings Zoélogical Society of London, 1883, pp. 187, 188, 139,

1884. | 579 [Cope.

brain. But it is singular that no one, so far as I know, has insisted upon
the fact, not only that the Teleostean brain is essentially similar to that of
the Ganoids, but that it is exactly in those respects in which the Ganoids
and Teleostei agree in cerebral structure that they differ most markedly
from the Plagiostomi and Chimeeroidei.

“With respect to the chiasma of the optic nerves, the exact nature of
that structure has not yet been properly elucidated either in the Selachians
or in the Ganoids. But, whatever may come of such an investigation,
the establishment of the existence of a true chiasma in the Ganoids, and
of its absence in Teleosteans, can have but little bearing on the question
of their affinities, since Wiedersheim has shown that a simple decussation
of the fibres of the optic nerves, as in ordinary Teleosteans, takes place in
many lizards.’’

In 187'7* I proposed the following primary divisions of the fishes, and
have seen no reason to alter my views as to their value as a correct ex-
pression of the affinities and diversities of this class of Vertebrata. The
system differs only from that of 1871 in the consolidation of the Crossop-
terygia and Actinopteri into a single sub-class, the Hyopomata; and in a
few corrections of the definitions given. They are as follows :

I. Suspensorium continuous with the cartilaginous cranium, with no
hyomandibular, No rudimental opercular bone ; no maxillary arch ;
pelvic bones present ; axial series of fore limb shortened, the deriva-
tive radii sessile on the basal pieces; axial series of hinder limb pro-
LOMMCCIMMMIS iis ise Qe viv vivieeeeCen eset eeneuage cee Holocephali.

II. Suspensorium articulated with the cranium; no maxillary arch; no
opercular nor pelvic bones; bones of limbs as in the last. ...........
Hlasmobranchi.

III. Suspensorium rudimental, continuous with cranium, supporting one
or more opercular bones ; cranium with superior membrane bones ;

no maxillary arch; a median pelvic element ; the limbs supported by
segmented unmodified aXesss.cvecive sree ces vei yio erin h dosiley eee TLObs

IV. Hyomandibular and palatoquadrate bones articulated with cranium,
supporting opercular bones; a maxillary arch; no pelvic element ;
axes of the limbs shortened, the derivative radii sessile on the basal
DISCOS ewe eau Ca visihwele aoe ALUN THOME SUN Gut eee cela OD OMTauOn

Tn the definition of the Dipnoi, it is necessary to make the correction in
accordance with the best observations on fresh specimens, above referred
to, as [ have not been able to determine the question from dried speci-
mens in the Hyrtl collection. The suspensorium cannot be properly said
to be articulated to the cranium in the sense in which it is said to be such
in the Elasmobranchi. In the latter it is articulated by ginglymus; in

* Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society, 1877, p. 25; and in the
Annual Reports of the Commissioners of Fisheries of Pennsylvania for 1879-80,
p. 67 and 1881-2, p, 111.

K
Cope.] 580 [March 7,

the Dipnoi merely by suture or contact, with other cartilage bones. Its
character is therefore more nearly that of the Holocephali than of the
Elasmobranchi or the Hyopomata.

In the light of the above considerations, to which sub-class must be re-
ferred the genus Didymodus? Does it possess a freely articulating hyo-
mandibular bone, and maxillary, palatoquadrate and mandibular arches?
The question must be primarily determined by these considerations, since
the fins and their supports are unknown to us.

The lateral posterior processes of the skull are in its superior plane,
and their extremities do not present an articular facet for the lower jaw.
It is improbable that they were continued downwards as cartilage for the
former articulation, as in the Holocephali and Dipnoi. Both from the
presence of an articular condyle, and from the mechanical necessities of
the case, I have little doubt but that there was a freely articulating hyo-
mandibular bone. I have already described this element in fact as visible
ina single specimen. The choice is thus limited to the Elasmobranchi
and Hyopomata. It is decided in favor of the former by the absence of
maxillary arch and of opercular apparatus. So then Didymodus is a
shark, in spite of its peculiarities. Kner* speaks of the presence in the
nearly allied Pleuracanthus (= Diplodus), of premaxillary and maxillary
bones ; but this is no doubt a misinterpretation of the homologies, as he says
they articulate with the lower jaw. In my jaws there is but one bone on
each side, a palatopterygoid.,

In his researches on the structure of the skulls of sharks, Gegenbaurt
shows the different methods of articulation of the palatopterygoid arch in
the sub-class Elasmobranchi. In Heterodontus the palatopterygoid arch is
attached to the skull throughout by its superior border,’ anterior to the
orbit, but is free posterior to the orbit. In Hexanchus and Heptanchus
it is free anteriorly, but articulates by its elevated posterior portion with
the postorbital process. In the remainder of known recent Elasmobranchs
it is free throughout, and merely in contact in front. These relations are
also described by Huxley.} Professor Gill utilizes them as definitions of
three (of four) primary divisions of the sub-class Elasmobranchi,§ which
he names the Opistharthri, (fam. Hexanchide) ; Proarthri (Heterodon-
tidec) ; Anarthi (sharks proper) ; and Rhine (Squatinas). According to
these definitions, Didymodus must be referred to the Opistharthri. The
skull, however, presents other characters which must claim attention, Its

*Sitzungsberichte Wiener Akademie, LV, p. 540.

+ Untersuchungen zur Anatomie der Wirbelthiere, Leipzic, 1872.

{On the Anatomy of Ceratodus. Proceedings Zoél, Society of London, 1876,
p. 43-4, with figures,

@Bulletin of the U. S, National Museum, No, 16, 1883, p, 967. Gills fourth group,
Rhine, does not appear to me to possess the value of the other three, nor are
the ' Rais” and ‘‘Pristes’? more distinct. I therefore propose that the order
Selachii, as defined in the following pages (of the sub-class Hlasmobranchi),
be divided into three sub-orders: Opistharthri, Proarthri and Anarthri, the lat-
ter to include the true sharks, the Squatinee, the sawfishes and the rays,

a

1884. ] 581 [Cope.

reference to the Hlasmobranchi is confirmed by the following characters :

(1) The nares are not oral. (2) There isa large fontanelle on the summit,

of the muzzle. (3) There are processes corresponding to the lateral alee

of the basicranial axis.

In another character Didymodus differs from this and all other sub-classes
of the Pisces. This is the penetration of the granular ossification through-
out the chondrocranium.

In the following characters it agrees with the Dipnoi: (1) The distinct
exoccipital, pariétal, and frontal elements. (2) The occipital cotylus.
(8) The posterior bifurcation of the frontal cartilage.

In the following characters Didymodus resembles the Hyopomatous or
true fishes: (1) In the basioccipital bone with condyle. (2) In the ?0s
intercalare or pteroticum. (8) The presence of a distinct element articu-
lating with the proximal end of the hyomandibular. (4) The presence of
membrane bones in the position of frontals.

The characters above cited as constituting resemblances to the true
fishes, will not, it appears to me, permit the reference of this genus to any
of the divisions of sharks established by Prof. Gill. I therefore proposed
anew order of the Elasmobranchi* for its reception, with the following
name and definition. .

A basioccipital bone and condyle. Occipital, ? pterotic, and frontal bones
distinct. Supraorbital (or nasal) bones present............lehthyotomi.
The remaining Elasmobranchi, in which the above characters are want-

ing, may be termed by way of contrast, utilizing an old name, Selachii.

Were it not for the probable presence of the free hyomandibular bone,
the order Ichthyotomi might be regarded, in the absence of knowledge of
its limbs, as the possible ancestor of the Rhachitomons Batrachia. But as
the Batrachia have no distinct suspensorium, or are, to use Miiller’s con-
venient term, monimostylic, their origin must still be sought for in some yet
undiscovered type of Dipnoi. It is on the other hand very probable that
the Ichthyotomi are the group from which the Hyopomata derived their
origin. The distinct basioccipital with its two foramina, the superior
origin of the hyomandibular, and the superior nostrils, all point towards
the true fishes. The tribe of Hyopomata which must be their most im-
mediate descendents, are the Crossopterygia, as I define that division.

I must now compare the Ichthyotomi with such groups of the Hyopo-
mata as they may be supposed to approach most closely. I begin by refer-
ring to the marine eels of the order Colocephali. In 1871} I characterized
this order as follows: ‘‘Pariétals largely in contact; opercular bones
rudimental ; the preoperculum generally wanting. Pterygoids rudimental
or wanting ; ethmoid very wide. Symplectic, maxillary, basal branchi-
hyals, superior and inferior pharyngeal bones, all wanting, except the
fourth pharyngeal. This is jaw-like, and is supported by a strong supe-
rior branchihyal ; other superior branchihyals wanting or cartilaginous.”’

* American Naturalist, 1884, 413,
t+ Proceedings American Ass, Adv, Science, xx, pp. 328-334.

Cope.) 582 {March 7,

”

The statement ‘‘ maxillary wanting,”’ isin contradiction to the definition
of the sub-class Hyopomata, which asserts the presence of those bones.
Stannius* hag asserted the absence of the ‘‘oberkiefer’’ in the eel ;
Giinther} describes their presence. As the absence of the maxillary bone
would constitute a point of resemblance, if not affinity to the Elasmo-
branchi, I have reéxamined my material to determine the homologies of
the lateral dentigerous bone of the upper jaw of the eels. My specimens
of species of’ the Colocephali include the following from the Hyrtl collec-
tion: Myrus vulgaris ; Sphagebranchus rostratus ; Moringua rataborua ;
Murena sp.; Murena unicolor; Murena sp.; Poecilophis polyzonus,
and Gymnomurena tigrina. The pterygoid bone exists in a rudimental
condition in the @ymnomurana tigrina, Myrus vulgaris, and one of the
species of Mureena ; and whether lost in the preparation of the other crania
or not, cannot be stated. In the Anguilla vulgaris the pterygoid bone is con-
siderably larger, and extends to a point halfway between its base and the
extremity of the muzzle. In the Conger vulgaris it extends still further
forwards, reaching a transverse process of the anterior part of the vomer.
No palatine bone appears. The premaxillary bone is not distinguished
from the ethmoid in the Colocephali, nor in the Enchelycephali (Anguil-
lide, etc.). It is quite possible, therefore, that the external dentigerous
bone or upper jaw, in both of these orders, may be the palatine, and the
maxillary be wanting. The family of the Mormyride appears to furnish
the solution. In this group the structure and connections of the pterygoid
bone are much as in Conger, and there are in addition distinct premaxillary
and maxillary bones. It is clear that in this family it is the palatine, and
not the maxillary bone, that is wanting. Similar evidence is furnished
by the family Monopteride. The definition of all four of the orders,
Jolocephali, Enchelycephali, Ichthyocephali and Scyphophori must, i
therefore, embrace this character. The Jymnarchidse agrees with the
Mormyride in this respect, and both families have the transverse process
of the vomer which receives the pterygoid, as in the genus Conger.{ The
supposed resemblance to the sharks presented by the Colocephali is then
not real, and the question as to the point of affinity of the Ichthyotomi to
the true fishes remains open as before,

I now refer to the remarkable characters presented by the deep sea fishes
of the family Eurypharyngide, as recently published by Messrs. Gill and
Ryder.§ These authors find the characters of the skeleton so remarkable,
that they think it necessary to establish a new order for its reception,
which they call the Lyomeri. The definition which they give is the fol-
lowing: ‘‘Fishes with five branchial arches (none modified ag branchi-
ostegal or pharyngeal) far behind the skull; an imperfectly ossified skull
articulating with the first vertebra by a basioccipital condyle alone ; only

* Handbuch der Zootomie, Fische 1854, p. 76.

} Catalogue Fishes, British Museum, vol, vili, p, 19,

{ These transverse processes are enormously developed in Gymnarchus,
? Proceedings U.S. National Museum, Novy. 1883, p. 262.

1884. ] 583 (Cope,

two cephalic arches, both freely movable ; (1) an anterior dentigerous one—
the palatine, and (2) the suspensorial, consisting of the hyomandibular
und quadrate bones ; without maxillary bones or distinct posterior bony
elements to the mandible; with an imperfect scapular arch remote from
the skull ; and with separately ossified but imperfect vertebre.’’

M. Vaillant came to no conclusion as to the affinities of this group ; and
Messrs. Gill and Ryder remark, ‘We are unable to appreciate any affinity
of Gustrostomus to any Anacanthines, Physostomes, or typical Apods,
nor does it seem to be at all related to Malacosteus, which has been
universally considered to be a little modified Stomiatid.’? Tt is, how-
ever, clear to me that the relationships of this family Eurypharyngide
are to the order Colocephali, and that they represent the extreme de-
gree of the modification of structure which that order exhibits, In
other words, the modification of the ordinary piscine type which is
found in the Anguillide (order Enchelycephali), is carried to a higher
degree in the Colocephali, and reaches its extreme in the Eury-
pharyngide, The points of identity between the two groups last-named
are so many, that it becomes desirable to ascertain whether they are
susceptible of ordinal separation from each other. The characters
above given to the order Lyomeri are in fact identical with those which
define the order Colocephali, with a few possible exceptions. First, how-
ever, I note that the supposed palatine arch, is probably the maxillary,
as in. the Colocephali, and that it is the palatopterygoid arch which is
absent. The five branchial arches exist in the Colocephali, but the three
anterior are rndimental, and the basal branchihyal bones of the fourth
and fifth are closely united. There are, however, five arches. There is a
ceratohyal arch in Murena and Gymnomurena, but of very slender pro-
portions. Whether this element is absolutely wanting in Gastrostomus,
or whether the first branchial arch is its homologue, remains to be ascer-
tained. Should the last two be coherent as in the Colocephali, we would
then have the same number of hyoid arches in both, viz., six. The ‘“im-
perfectly ossified cranium ’’ is shown in the detailed description given by
Messrs. Gill and Ryder, to support the same bones which are found in the
Murenoid skull. The degree of ossification of the skeleton does not con-
stitute a basis for ordinal distinction, if the same elements be present.
For this reason the perforation of the vertebral centra by the remnant of
the chorda dorsalis does not seem to be of ordinal importance.

In the more detailed description, there are a few charecters worthy of
notice. First, ‘‘The notochord is persistent in the skull for half the
length of the basioccipital.’’ This indicates further the primitive condi-
tion of the vertebral column, but scarcely gives basis for an ordinal defi-
nition, Second (p. 266.), ‘The neurapophyses are slender, diverging
(instead of convergent), cartilaginous distally, and embracing the neural
sheaths on the sides, while by the neurapophyses is supported a membra-
nous sheath which roofs over the nervous cord,” etc. The nerual canal
is well closed above in the Murenide, but in the Anguillide it is largely

PROC. AMBER, PHILOS. 800. XxI, 116, 8v. PRINTED JuLY 21, 1884.

‘Cope.] 584. [March 7,

open above. The neurapophyses it is true unite, but at a distance above
the neural cord, and as attenuated rods. Third, ‘‘There isno vomer de-
veloped, but a triangular cartilaginous element pendent from the cranial
rostrum affords attachment for the palatine (read maxillary) element
anteriorly,’”’ etc. This element probably exists in the Colocephali and
similarly takes the place of the vomer, only differing in being ossified.
I have been accustomed to regard it as the homologue of the bone called
ethmoid in fishes.

The character which distinguishes the Colocephali from the Enchely-
cephali, now that their maxillary and palatine structure are shown to be
essentially the same, is found in the hyoid apparatus. In the Enchely-
cephali, the structure is as in ordinary fishes ; there is a glossohyal, and
there are basihyals, and axial branchihyals, and superior pharyngeals. In
the Colocephali all these elements are wanting, excepting the fourth supe-
rior pharyngeal, which has the form of an antero-posteriorly placed den-
tigerous jaw, which opposes the lateral branchihyal of the fifth arch or,
as it is generally called, the inferior pharyngeal. It is evident that the
Eurypharyngide are more similar to the Colocephali than to any other
order in this respect also, but the description of these parts is not yet suffi-
ciently detailed to enable me to determine what difference there may be
in this respect, if any. The mobility of the quadrate bone on the hyo-
mandibular cannot be regarded as of great systematic significance, although
it is doubtless important in the economy of the fish.

It is then evident that the Eurypharyngidee belong very near to, if not
within, the order QVolocephali. Towards the end of their description,
Messrs. Gill and Ryder (p. 270), recognize this relationship, but deny that
it indicates that this family is ‘‘from the same primitive stock as the
Mureenids.’”’ I incline to the belief that it is the ultimate result of the
line of development of which the Anguillide form one of the first terms,
and the Murenide a later and more specialized one.

It is therefore clear that the point of relationship of the Ichthyotomi to
the true fishes is not to be found in the Eurypharyngide or the Colo-
cephali.

In the following point Didymodus resembles Polypterus. The fossa
above described as on each side of the basioccipital, is found in Polypterus.
There it serves as a place of insertion of a strong ligament on each side,
which is attached externally to the epiclavicle, and serves to hold the
scapular arch in its place. A similar structure exists in the Siluirde,
where the ligaments are ossified. It suggests for Didymodus a scapular
arch suspended more anteriorly than in sharks, possibly even to the skull.

The genealogy of the fishes will then be as follows, first, however, it
is to be understood that in asserting the derivations of one group from
another, I mean that in accordance with the rule which I have termed
“the doctrine of the unspecialized,’’ the later type in each case is the

descendant of the primitive and not the later sub-form of its predecessor.
In this way is to be explained the apparent anomaly of regarding the

1384,] 585 (Cope.

notochordal sturgeons as descendants of Crossopterygia, whose modern
representatives are osseous. The primitive Crossopterygia, and probably
even the Actinopteri, were doubtless as cartilaginous as are the existing
sturgeons :

( Actinopteri.

Hyopomata = Chondrostei. Batrachia.
( Crossoptery gia. pe
Blasmobranchi <=) L¢hthyotomi. Dipnoi.
¢ Selachii. orn
i TLolocephali. 7

In this phylogeny, the Holocephali, which have not differentiated a
suspensorium, are regarded as the primitive fishes, although the living
representatives display some specialized characters, as, for instance, a
membranous gill-cover which conceals the primitive slits. The line to
the right continues the monimostylic character and passes into the reptiles,
whose primitive types are also monimostylic, as Johannes Miiller called
them. In the later forms or streptostylicate reptiles of Miller (Lacertilia,
Ophidia), the quadrate becomes freely articulated.*

In the left hand series, the Elasmobranchs immediately present us with
the free suspensorium or hyomandibular, which is a well-known character
of the remainder of the line, the modifications being the addition of sepa-
rate elements, as the metapterygoid, ‘‘quadrate,’’ and symplectic.

The penetration of ossification into the chondrocranium of Didymodus,
in regions not ossified in either fishes or batrachia (sphenoid and pre-
sphenoid), and into regions not ossified in any vertebrate (frontal and
pariétal cartilages), may be, so to speak, only a local phenomenon, and
not indicative of extensive phylogenetic consequences. For if it be so
regarded, it evidently proves too much, giving affinities in the base of the
skull to the reptiles, and in the roof exhibiting a character more highly
developed than any known form of vertebrata.

The Ichthyotomi include, so far as yet known, but one family, the Hybo-
dontide of Agassiz. According to that author this family includes four
genera, Hybodus, Pleuracanthus, Cladodus and Sphenonchus. It ranges
from the coal-measures to the Jura inclusive.

The genus Didymodus may be described as follows :

Frontal plane well defined on each side by the temporal fosse, and ter-
minating in two cornua posteriorly. Anterior nares on the superior gur-
face of the muzzle. Supraorbital (or nasal) bones well separated on the
median line and constituting the only membrane ossification. Teeth with
large lateral denticles.

The species Didymodus compressus Newberry, may be defined as follows :

Skull with massive walls. Form elongate, depressed, the orbit not ex-

*The phylogeny of the Reptilian series can be found in the Proceedings
American Association Advancement of Science, xix, 1871, p. 233, The Batrachia
are supposed to be their ancestors.

Cope.] 586 {March 7,

tending behind the anterior third of the length. Basicranial and basifacial
axes in one line, flattened, the supraorbital border flat, concave on the
edge ; postorbital processes obtuse, the temporal ridges commencing with
thin posterior border, which they excavate. The ridges then turn, ex-
tend parallel posteriorly, terminating in the horn-like processes already
described, with a slight divergence. The apices mark the posterior third
of the length of the skull. The occipital condyle is wider than deep, and
its superior border retreats forwards so as to cause its cup to look upwards.
The exoccipital diameter at the foramen magnum is less than that of the
basicranial axis, the osseous element of which, probably sphenoid, is re-
curved on the sides to their middle. The sides of the latter expand a
little to meet their lateral ale. Immediately above their contact is situ-
ated the supposed condyle for the hyomandibular element. The basicranial
axis is convex opposite the postorbital processes, from the bases of which
a concavity separates it. It has a slight median groove at this point. It
is much narrower than the interorbital width above. A short distance in
front of the postorbital processes it begins to contract, and gradually
reaches an acuminate apex. Superior to this apex, commencing posterior
to it, the space between it and the supraorbital or nasal elements is occu-
pied by a massive element (? ethmoid) which forms the floor of the nasal
median fontanelle.

The surfaces are smooth, but readily weather so as to be granular. The
granules are subround, with flattened surface.

Measurements of skull. M.

Total length of skull to end of frontal bone (No. 1)..... .180
io £6) ee OE MTZ LS TOW OL ONY tL SLRLY ier civibanisie tela ee ORs

Mi fol COB TOs POSLOM OU! PTOCGSB is! vise vb s'a's 058

me oth te to apices of trontal cartilages.’ 117

a ONES th ERO UO OULG COR (ERIDL: hse tlraie oti wD:

Width, of skull: at pretomtalaaiiis aise witha Wei twain) ORO
Po Ah KO AE UOMAOR DIAL WOLMONE: sav vate mutnernen ur GOO

CF OES sO TSU OUIC ED LOO J 6% PLE ee ORS
OE OCCIDILAL COMMU LGWNGi iy oie gisie sista y Melita eines: ORM
Depth ‘‘ i CTU OU ately slot uch Hlentioa Miia ae KORO

Measurements of jars.

Length of mandibular ramus from cotylus, inclusive. .145
sais (o MANOIVULAY TAMIUS GY COUVMUB, ies bev. see wave) sORO

tie . o Vel UCU orth se ace ey eee dO

Length ‘‘ palatopterygoid bone from cotylus, inc lusive. 145
Depth ‘‘ i ‘« at postorbital articula-

tion.. Ve M Ninel iG + eae Heep hap uMneeN tee

Depth of pulntonter VEO DONG ATOLDIL. .cevievedevyes «U0

Length“ ui ‘* posterior to orbit....... .070

A second species has been brought to light by the researches of Mr. W.

}
i
t
|

1884.] 587 [Cope,

F, Cummins in the Permian beds of Texas. Parts of the jaws with two
of its teeth are preserved, The lower jaw is distinguished from that of
the D. compressus by its small transverse as compared with its other di-
ameters. The ramus is quite compressed, and is not thicker at the inferior
edge than the superior, and is slightly concave on the inner side. Its ex-
ternal face is nearly vertical. The angle is rounded forwards, and there
is no angle behind the cotylus, which is raised above the superior line of
the ramus. ‘The cotylus is rather large, and has a shallow anterior supe-
rior, and a posterior subposterior facet. There is no indication of a coro-
noid process. The inferior edge of the ramus is swollen on the outer
side, below the anterior border of the condyle, so as to mark with the
thickened posterior edge of the ramus a fossa in the position of the mas-
seteric.

The teeth are pecular in the form of the root (Figs. 8-9). This part has
no anterior projection, and the posterior portion is a flat, thin-edged plate,
wider than long. It carries a button, but no notch, There is a minute
median denticle, The form of the root is thus very different from that of
the tooth of the D,. compressus (figs. 5, 7).

Measurements. M.
Depth of ramus.at cotylus (vertical).............% Nie crs OR
if My " 120 mm. anterior to cotylus. .048
Transverse diameter at the same point.........s....... «009
Long diameter (oblique) of cotylus............ Gerda an QOL
g 1 J

anteroposterlor........4'. O11
LLANSV OIG. iieiile elon eels . 87
{anteroposterior .0048
( transverse..... .006

Diameters of base of tooth |

Diameters of crown of lateral denticle

I call this species Didymodus platypternus. Should the name Didymodus
be found hereafter to apply to species of Pleuracanthus, the latter generic
name must be used for this species.

Tit. Hisrorican.

Tn 1837 Prof. Agassiz (Poiss. foss., iii, 66), described a spine which
he believed to have belonged to a fish like the sting-rays, as Plewracanthus
levissimus. The only example'was obtained from the Dudley Coal field.

In 1845 Prof. Agassiz (Poiss. foss., iii, 204), made known certain
teeth, which he referred to sharks of the family of Hybodonts. ‘Two spe-
cies were distinguished, D. gibbossus and D. minutus. Both were obtained
from the English Coal measures.

In 1848 Prof. Beyrich (Berichte vernandl. k. Preuss. Akad. wiss.,
1848), proposed the generic name Xenacanthus for a German Carbonifer-
ous form, referred to Orthacanthus by Goldfuss (1847), but which ap-
proached nearer to Pleuracanthus.

In 1849 Dr, Jordan (Jahrbuch fiir Min, u. Geol., p. 843), described,
under the name Z?iodus sessilis, a form subsequently ascertained to be
identical with the Xenacanthus.

Cope.] 588 {March 7,

In 1857 Sir Philip de Malpas Gray Egerton (Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.,
xx, 423), contended that the spines of Pleuracanthus belonged to the
same fish as the Diplodus teeth, and that Xenacanthus was likewise refer-
able to the same type.

In 1867 Prof. Kner (Sitzb. k. Akad. wiss. Wien, lv, 540-584), published
a memoir, illustrated by ten plates, in which he proved that Diplodus and
Xenacanthus were generically identical.

In 1875 Messrs. St. John and Worthen proposed the genus Thrinacodus
for the Diplodus incwrvus and D. duplicatus of Newberry and Worthen and
the 7. nanus St. J. and W., from Illinois.

In 1888, in the Proceedings of the Philadelphia Academy (p. 108), I
proposed the name Didymodus for the Diplodus compressus Newberry.

Tn Science for 1884, p. 2'74 (March 7th), I called attention to the close re-
semblance of the teeth of this genus to those of the recent shark, called by
Garman Chlamydoselachus, and expressed my belief in the identity of the
two genera.

In the American Naturalist for April, 1884, p. 418, I gave a brief ab-
stract of the characters of the skull of Didymodus, and proposed to regard
it as the type of a new order to be called the Ichthyotomi.

Tn Science, 1884, p. 429 (April 11), Prof. Gill objects to the identification
of the genera Didymodus and Chlamydoselachus ; onthe ground of the dif-
ferent forms of the teeth. He states that he doubts the pertinence of the
two genera to the same order. He points out that the oldest name for Dip-
lodus Ag. is Pleuracanthus Ag., and that the order Ichthyotomi had been
already defined and named by Liitken, with the name Xenacanthini.

On these various propositions the following remarks may be made.

(1.) There is no generic difference to be detected, in my opinion, be-
tween the teeth which are typical of Diplodus Agass. and Thrinacodus St.
J. and W, and the recent Chlamydoselachus. Differences there are, but;
apparently not of generic value. The identification of the recent and ex-
tinct genera rests, as far as this point goes, on the same basis as that of the
recent and extinct Ceratodus.

(2.) At the time of my proposal of the name Didymodus, I was not con-
vinced that fishes of this type bore the spines referred to the genus Pleura-
canthus Ag. None of the authors cited figure any specimens which pre-
sent both tricuspidate teeth and a nuchal spine. None of my ten speci-
mens possess a spine. However, Kner describes two specimens as exhibit-
ing both tricuspidate teeth and a spine, and Sir P. Egerton’s statements
(1. ¢.), on this point are positive. So we must regard Pleuracanthus as the
name of this genus, with Diplodus as a synonym.

(3.) Diplodus being regarded as a synomym of Pleuracanthus, it follows
that Chlamydoselachus Garm. is distinct, on account of the different struc-
ture of the dorsal fin, which is single and elongate in Pleuracanthus, ac-
cording to Geinitz and Kner. The presence of the nuchal spine in Pleura-
canthus is also probably a character of distinction, although we do not yet
know whether such a spine is concealed in Chlamydoselachus or not.

Proc. Am. Philos.

Soo. NE 116

Or

DIDYMODUS

clair é

Lith

1884. ] 589 [Cope.

(4.) The identity of Didymodus (type Diplodus compressus Newberry)
and Pleuracanthus, may now be questioned. None of the specimens are
figured and described by the authors above cited, as displaying an occi-
pital condyle, or posterior frontal cornua. My specimens of Didymodus
compressus do not exhibit teeth on the roof of the mouth, as Kner describes.
There are no spines with the crania, although separate Pleuracanthus
spines are not rare in the same beds. The tecth associated with the skulls,
moreover, present a button on the superior side of the root (Fig. 5). Agassiz
figures teeth of this kind as belonging to the Diplodus gibbosus. St. John
and Worthen make these teeth typical of Diplodus, and confer the name
Thrinacodus on those without the button, a character which I do not think
aconstant one, The latter name is then probably a synonym of Pleuracan-
thus. The button-bearing teeth are figured and described by Kner as occur-
ring scattered, and in a somewhat different horizon from that of the Pleu-
racanthus specimens. In Germany, as in Texas, the button-bearing teeth
are the larger, I suspect that the skull I have described represents a different
genus from Pleuracanthus proper. This genus will not differ from Chla-
mydoselachus Garm., in the lack of other evidence ; the tecth presenting
only specific difference. , :

(5.) Of course, a study of the anatomy of Chlamydoselachus, which I
hope Mr. Garman will soon give us, may reveal differences between that
genus and Didymodus ; but of these we know nothing as yet.

(6.) The order Xenacanthini was proposed by Geinitz (Dyas) for Pleu-
racanthus, on account of the supposed suctorial character of the ventral
fins. This character is supposed by Kner to be sexual. In any case this
division, whatever its value, must be subordinated to the order Ichthyo-
tomi, as I define it,

EXPLANATION OF PLATE.

All the figures two-thirds natural size, except fig. 6, which is one-half
larger than nature.

Fra. 1. Skull from above, right frontal bone displaced, and its anterior
extremity broken off. Posterior apex broken from right frontal cartilage
bone. a, Frontal or supraorbital bone, that of the right side displaced ; 8,
anterior nostril ; ¢, postfrontal facet for palatopterygoid ; d, frontal fissure.

Fig. 2. Posterior part of skull of another individual, from above ; a, ocei-
pital bone ; 0, pariétal ; c, a cornua of frontal bone.

Fie. 8. Anterior view of fig. 2, displaying section of brain case ; a, frontal
or pariétal cartilage bone; b, sphenoid ; ¢, brain cavity ; d, frontopariétal
fontanelle ; ¢, hyomandibular condyle (? pterotic bone).

Fie, 4, Anterior part of skull from below, of a third individual, display-
ing orbits and postorbital processes.

Fira. 5. Tooth of Didymodus compressus Newb., natural size, posterior
view.

Chase.) 590 {April 18,

Fra. 6. Palatopterygoid and mandibular arches of a fourth individual
from right side, with Am, hyomandibular.

Fie. 7. Superior tooth of external row, without apices of two of the
cusps ; from the palatine bone of the specimen represented in fig. 5 ; one-
half larger than nature, anterior view. *

Fria. 8. Tooth of Didymodus platypternus Cope, nat. size, from above
posteriorly.

Fra. 9. Tooth of a second specimen of Didymodus platypternus from
below.

Photodynamic Notes, IX. By Pliny Harle Chase, LL.D.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 18, 1884.)

411. _dithereal Oscillation.

Some readers of the Photodynamic Notes have found a difficulty in ap-
plying the laws of pendulum oscillation to the undulations of the luminifer-
ous wether. It is well to guard against the conception of material pendu-
lums, hung in or across the solar system, but it is also well to remember
that the modern theories of molecular motion explain the rigidity of steel,
and of all other solids, by the rapidity of motion, in ultimate discrete par-
ticles. If this view is correct, all changes in molecular movement are
probably transmitted in and through the same elastic medium as the un-
dulations of light, and all oscillations are in some way dependent on ethe-
real oscillations.

412. Illustrations of Nodal Tendency.

The well-known experiments of placing bits of paper on vibrating
strings, sprinkling sand on Chladni plates, depositing fine powders in
transparent musical tubes, and eliciting musical notes from glass vessels
which are partly filled with water, illustrate the tendency of all vibrations
to drive material particles towards musical nodes. These nodes are sub-
ject to the same laws of inertia which determine centres of oscillation in
ordinary pendulums. The nodal tendency is greatest where the relative
elasticity and the consequent undulatory velocity are greatest. As we
know of no other medium in which the ratio of elasticity to density is so
great as in the luminiferous «ther, we can reasonably look in no other
direction for such striking evidences of rhythmic influence as are to be
found in cosmical and molecular arrangements.

4138, Atthereal Rotation.

The supposed properties of the luminiferous ether are so similar, in
many respects, to those of ordinary gases, that we may suppose it to act
and react on all grosser forms and aggregations of matter. The rotations
and revolutions of suns, planets and satellites are not only in harmony

/

-
1884.] 591 [Chase.

with ethereal undulations, but they are also, as we may reasonably pre-
sume, produced by them. If cosmical rotation is dependent, in any way,
upon wthereal waves, the reaction of cosmical inertia should produce a
tendency to ethereal rotation.

414. Hatent of Rotating Influence.

It is not unreasonable to suppose that the tendency to swthereal rotation
at stellar centres, may be felt at a distance which is at least as great as the
modulus of light. That distance in our system is very nearly equivalent to
seventy-four times Neptune’s mean radius vector, Although the rigidity in
a rotating ethereal sphere may seem to be of a very different character from
the rigidity of metallic rods and cosmical globes, it must evidently be ac-
companied by similar tendencies towards gravitating and oscillatory
centres.

415. Kinetic Postulates.

All modern researches which have been guided by the theory of uni-
versal kinetic correlation seem to justify the following postulates :

1. An all-pervading, elastic ethereal medium, the particles of which are
subject to gravitating attraction,

2. Consequent cyclic, rhythmic and harmonic tendencies of various
kinds,

8. Probable frequency of simple forms of harmony, which are governed
by centres of oscillation.

4, Mutual and equal action and reaction between centripetal gravitation
and centrifugal radiation.

5. Radiating as well as projectile velocities, which are measured by
the sum of cyclical resistances

6. Correlation and mutual convertibility of light, heat, electricity, gravi-
tation, ete.

7. Tendency of harmonic approximations to become numerically exact,
as demonstrated by Laplace in discussing the motions and orbital periods
of Jupiter’s satellites,

416. Importance of Reciprocals.

Tn some text-books on arithmetic, a few lines are given to the explanation
of reciprocals, and the statement is sometimes added, that the reciprocals
of an arithmetical progression constitute a harmonic progression. Few,
except those who devote themselves to a thorough scientific study of
music, ever get any further knowledge of a subject which is full of interest,
and which is likely to become of great importance in the future annals
of scientific research, In his pamphlet on ‘‘ Electrical Units of Measure-
ment,’’ Sir William Thomson enlarges upon the want of a unit of con-
ductivity to represent ‘the reciprocal of the resistances.’’ He says: ‘It
is the conductivity that you want to measure, but the idea is too puzzling ;
and yet, for some cases, the conductivity system is immensely superior
in accuracy and convenience to that by adding resistances in series.’’

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800. xxt. 116. 3w. PRINTED JULY 21, 1884.

592 (April 18,

Chase. ]

41%. A Universal Want.

°

Blectricity is the form of force which is now, for many practical reasons,
commanding general attention ; but its need of a more satisfactory and sys-
tematic study of reciprocal and harmonic activities is no greater than we
can find in many other fields of physical research, Ohm's law brings all
electrical phenomena so directly within the realm of resistance that Max-
well was inclined to regard electro-dynamics as more fundamental than
thermo-dynamics. A. full consideration of the subject would require a
knowledge of mathematical principles which are somewhat intricate.
There are many facts, however, which are so simple and intelligible that
they may be easily learned, and a knowledge of them may awaken an in-
terest which will facilitate investigation in every possible field.

418. Spheral Music.

’

We have all heard of the ‘music of the spheres ;’’ how many of us

understand the literal truth of the statement :

“There’s not the smallest orb which thou behold’st,
But in his motion like an angel sings.”

The music of the spheres, as well as the music of the human voice, or
of stringed or brazen instruments, is due to elasticity, which makes suc-
cessive vibrations follow regular laws, so as to produce rhythmical and
pleasing results. The beats of pendulums are governed by some of these
harmonic laws and may be represented by harmonic formulas. The lumi-
niferous eether, which is supposed to pervade all planetary and insterstel-
lar spaces, and which Newton suggested as the possible storehouse of
gravitation, should, on account of its enormous elasticity, furnish endless
illustrations of faultless rhythm.

419. Confirmation of the Hypothesis.

We find, in accordance with the foregoing note, that the resistance of the
gun to the interstellar vibrations of light produces a series of twenty-
seven musical nodes, within the region in which solar attraction predomi-
nates over the attraction of the stars. Nine of the nodes are between
Mercury and the Sun ; nine are at points which account for the positions
of the eight primary planets and of the asteroidal belt ; and nine are be-
tween Neptune and the nearest of the fixed stars. The middle node of
the middle nine, or the fourteenth node of the twenty-seven, is in the as-
teroidal belt. These facts, which have been already given in previous
notes, are repeated in this connection as indicative of the probability that
the sthereal rotation extends much further than was intimated in Note
414, and as giving the most stupendous evidence which has ever been pub-
lished of the nodal tendencies to which reference is made in Note 411.

593 (Chase.

1884.]

420. Revelation.

The foundation of all knowledge is revelation, which is always self-evi-
dent and infallible. The inspiration of the Almighty giveth understand-
ing. All that we have and all that we are come from Him. In the interpre-
tations of revelation, we are left in some measure to ourselves. While the
self-evidence is given to us, we combine, in various ways, premises which
we accept on account of their self-evidence or supposed self-evidence ; in
that combination we are liable to mistakes and fallacies of judgment. All
truth is God’s, allerroris man’s, They therefore makea fatal mistake who
would set up the decisions of fallible judgment against the revelations
which are offered for the acceptance of their own faith, or those which
have been clearly apprehended through the faith of others, in truths which
have been made self-evident to them,

421. Fallacy of Agnosticism.

We have no right to question the assertion of any individual that he
does not know God. Neither has any one a right to say that God is un-
knowable. Receptivity, power, and knowledge, are the three funda-
mental axioms of all science and of all truth. So far as either of them is
finite it is dependent upon something superior to itself. The agnostic, who
recognizes a Supreme Power and who fails also to recognize a Supreme
Receptivity and a Supreme Wisdom, has but a partial view. If in his
teachings he implies, in any way, that human receptivity or human wis-
dom can be superior to any other receptivity or wisdom, he is guilty
of arrogance and cannot shield himself under any assumption of
humility, The only power of which we have any practical knowledge, is
that of will; and will itself is always directed by purpose, So far as man,
through the exercise of his purpose, his will and his intelligence, controls
the powers of nature, he is imitating the Supreme control. Although it
is true that we cannot “find out the Almighty unto perfection,”’ and
although it is also true that we should avoid any narrow anthropomorph-
ism, there is no doubt that the purpose, the will, and the wisdom of man
differ from those of the Almighty, not in kind, but only in degree, and
that in these respects man has been created in the image of his Maker.

422. The Oxygen Unit.

Marignac (Ann. de Ohim. et de Phys., March, 1884), in his late re-exami-
nation of some of the atomic weights, considers that Prout’s law is only
approximate, and that, since the numbers which express tho atomic weights
only represent ratios, there is no reason for taking the hydrogen unit in
preference to 16 or 100; but the choice of 16 is justified by its practical
advantage. It allows us to represent the atomic weights of the greatest
number of elements, and especially of those which are most important, by
the most simple possible integers and with the least difference from the
The fact that the atomic weights exhibit

rigorous results of experiment.

Chase, } * 594. (April 18,

more exact ratios to the oxygen than to the hydrogen unit, appears to have
been first pointed out in No. 138 of the foregoing notes.

428. Universal Rotation.

The hypothesis that every material particle is endowed with rotation, by
which it represents a definite amount of living force, has often been
broached. Its probability is strengthened by the magnetic theories* of
Arago, Ampére, Barlow, Lecount, Challis, Babbage, Herschel, Christie,
Maxwell, Imray, Forbes and others ; by my own investigations confirma-
tory of the hypothesis that ‘ there can be no weight without some degree
of momentum ;’’+ by the connection of magnetism with rotation in a
magnetic field through Laplace’s principle of periodicity (note 333) ; and by
the evidences which are furnished, by notes 418 and 419, of interstellar
ethereal rotation, producing nodes which are determined by stellar
moduli of light. According to this hypothesis no material particle can be
wholly divested of energy, and no particle can ever acquire energy
enough to free it from the equilibrating tendencies which spring from the
law of equal action and reaction.

424, Nascent Nebular Rotation.

The beginning of the transfer of rotation from ethereal particles to cos-
mical masses, is illustrated by the equivalence of ratios between masses
and rupturing distances, in the two ruling globes of the solar system.
Taking Bessel’s estimate of the mass-ratio of Sun to Jupiter (1047.879),
the vector-radii of the two bodies, when in static equilibrium with regard
to their common centre of gravity, should be in the same ratio. The pro-
jectile energy, which changed the static into an oscillatory dynamic equi-
librium, has produced a secular eccentricity, according to Stockwell, of
.0608274, the secular perihelion being, therefore, .9391726 of Jupiter’s mean
radius vector, Dividing the static ratio of vector radii, 1047.879, by
.9391726, we get 1115.7469 x Sun’s semi-diameter for Jupiter’s mean radius
vector. Dividing this value by 5.202798, we get 214.4513 for Harth’s mean
radius vector, which represents a mean solar apparent semi-diameter of
961//.8254. The British Nautical Almanac estimate is 961//.83.

425. Nascent Resistance.

”

Laplace’s principle of periodicity, and incipient ‘‘subsidence,’’ according
to Herschel’s modification of the nebular hypothesis, are both exemplified
in the equation;

(1— ¢) sts = Vg, 7%
in which ¢ == Jupiter’s secular eccentricity ; J, gs == gravitating accelera-
tion at the equatorial surface of Sun and Jupiter, respectively ; ¢, == time

*Cited in Proc, Amer, Phil. Soc., ix, 356-8, 367-9, 491; Proc, Roy. Soe., xxil, 852-3,

ete.
T Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., ix, 857, 402,

1884.) 595 [Chase.

of Jupiter’s half rotation = 17863,25 sec. ; 7) == Sun’s semi-diameter.
8
Hence V Jo % = 2 7% X 214.4518? 7) + 81558149 = 0006252614 7.
Jp == .0000008909518 7
Js = .00000008727 7) == .09538064 gp
1, = .10005238 1

1

426, Nascent Centre of Condensation.

The incipient subsidence of Jupiter, as indicated by the factor (1 — 2)
J5, CoOperates with solar attraction in the formation of a belt of maximum
condensation. Accordingly, the second planetary mass, in regard to the
simplicity of harmonic relations, is Earth, which occupies the centre of
the dense belt. Its distance from the Sun and its mass may be found by
means of the equation

V (16) 57% = (Ps + Ps) VY G5"
The mean radius vector is designated by p, Jupiter and Earth being in-
dicated by subscript , and , respectively. We have, therefore,
Jn = .00607728 miles
7, == 8962.8 miles
V 93 73 == 4.90748 miles
Ps” 1 a= 5.202798
Vi (l= 6) gs == 09464615 7/9, 7% = 0000591786 7,
7 == 481445.64 miles
= 214.4518 7) = 92524100 miles.
V Jo 1 = 269.766 miles
Mg +- Ms, = 828997
7, = 10.898 x,

Ps

427. Nascent Nodal Harmonies.

The formation of a belt of maximum condensation, by the action and re-
action of subsidence and rotation between the two principal masses of the
system, establishes the conditions which are requisite for nodal harmonies of
various kinds. One of the simplest harmonic series is ?, 3, 2, etc. The cen-
tre of linear oscillation adds its influence to the natural rhythmic tenden-
cies of the second of these nodes. Both the moment of rotary inertia of a
thin spherical shell and the nodes of aggregating collision in condensing
nebul* also introduce the factor 3, and the moment of a rotating ethereal
or other homogeneous sphere introduces the factor 2. Moments of inertia
vary as distances of projection against uniform resistance ; we may, ac-
cordingly, look for the frequent recurrence of the factors ? and , in the
harmonic rupturing nodes of condensing and rotating nebule, especially
in the neighborhood of the most important centres of condensation.

*Proc, Am, Phil, Soc., xvil, 99.

596 [April 18,

Chase.]

428. The Sun-Harth Balance.

The situation of Earth’s orbit, between the orbit of Jupiter and the
Sun, introduces tendencies to condensation and rotation of the character
referred to in the foregoing note. The action and reaction of setvhereal
waves, between the principal centres of attraction and of condensation,
have produced an amount of gravitation, at the earth’s equatorial surface,
which is sufficient to give a circular orbital velocity of V gr = 4.90743
miles per second, The linear oscillation of the Earth around the Sun, as
well as the centre of rotary inertia fora superficial film of condensation or of
luminous undulation in the orbit of Mars, multiplies this energy by }; the
rotary ethereal oscillation of a sphere which has its limit in the asteroidal
belt also multiplies the energy by §. Accordingly, if the Earth’s orbit
was always circular, its velocity of revolution, as thus determined, would
be § x % X 4.90748 = 18.40286 miles per second. There are 31558149
seconds in a year, therefore the Sun’s distance should be, if Harth’s orbit
were always circular, 18.40286 x 31558149 + 2 ~ = 92430800 miles. This
is probably correct within less than 4 of one per cent. (See Note 434. )

429. Accuracy of Harmonic Method.

The above method of estimating the Sun’s distance is the shortest. which
has ever been published. I believe that it is also the most accurate if
proper allowance is made for orbital eccentricity, for the following rea-
sons :

1. If the hypothesis of an all pervading luminiferous ether is true, all
its cyclical movements must be rhythmic, or harmonic, the various forms
of rhythm being governed by various centres of oscillation.

2. The simplest kinds of oscillatory motion, in cosmical bodies, are
linear and spherical.

3. Laplace showed, in discussing the motions of Jupiter’s satellites, that
whenever there are tendencies to simple numerical relations, in planetary
arrangements, all the forces of the system combine to make those tenden-
cies exact.

4, The Sun is the principal centre of attraction, and the EHarth is the
principal centre of condensation in the solar system.

430, Rhythmic Weight of the Sun.

The Sun can be weighed by its musical rhythm with a corresponding
facility. Orbital velocities vary inversely as the square root of the dis-
tance from the centre of gravity. Any two attracting bodies bear the
same ratio to each other as the distances at which they would communi-
cate equal orbital velocities, to particles which revolve about the centre of
gravity of the attracting bodies. Hence we have:

EKarth’s Radius Vector, Karth’s Radius,

92480800 x (% X 4)? : 8062.8 ; : 828002 : 1.

1884, ] 597

| Chase.

In other words the Sun would weigh 328002 times as much as the Earth,
if Harth’s orbit were always circular.* The remarkable accordances
among the various harmonic estimates which are deduced from the corre-
lations of mechanical, electrical, chemical, luminous and other forces, in-
dicate an amount of probable error which is much smaller than those of ordi-
nary astronomical estimates.

431. Lunar Mass. First Estimate.

Ferrel (Methods and Results, p. 20) gives '7989 metres as the height of
the homogeneous atmosphere. The equilibrium of atmospheric elasticity,
between the mutual interactions of Barth and Moon (Notes 8, 316), gives
the following proportion :

(20000000 + x) :'7989 : : 7, : 00125497, : : (x? x 80.74) 21

432. Lunar Mass. Second Estimate.

The estimates of the height of a homogeneous atmosphere differ for
different latitudes and for slight variations in the elements of the calcula-
tion, It may, therefore, be more satisfactory to deduce the Moon's mass
from the simple principles of oscillation.

From Notes 8, 162, 246, we find:

t\? 2.08776
l=g (=) = “Fag9 X (48082.04)? +- x? = 1142874 miles

for the length of Harth’s theoretical pendulum. From this equation we
deduce the ratio of Eurth’s mass (ms) to Moon’s mass (u), by the propor-
tion :

pg tbls ms tm.

92524100 : 1142874 : : 80.957: 1

433. Harth’s Secular Hecentricity.

The harmonic relations of the Earth and Moon are still further shown
by the evidences of original terrestrial projection before the Moon sepa-
rated from the Earth. If we designate Harth’s secular perihelion radius
vector by p's, we have the proportion, g, 7, (m5 ++ 2) : (Jy ty)? my 3: ere

In other words, the orbital vis viva of original solar projection, for the
combined masses of Earth and Moon, is represented by the mean radius
vector, while the limiting oscillatory vis viva of the Earth alone is repre-
sented by the radius vector of secular perihelion. Substituting in the above
proportion the harmonic values which we have already found, we have

269.766? X 81.957 ; 261.8194? x 80.957 :: 1 : 930462
this gives, for Harth’s secular eccentricity, .069538,

Stockwell’s estimate of this eccentricity for the value of Barth’s mass

which we have deduced from its harmonic oscillation is .06901. The dif-

* See Note 434,

Chase.) 598 {April 18,

ference between his perihelion radius vector and the corresponding har-
monic radius is less than 7, of one per cent.

434, Correction for Secular Hecentricity.

In Note 428, Sun’s distance was estimated upon the hypothesis that
Earth’s orbit was circular. The mean distance, however, may be con-
sidered as having been established at the time of original rupturing pro-
jection, or, in other words, at secular perihelion. The circumference of an

uh 1a Nit all,
ellipse is 2 z a (1 — 7? — orp et — 5242. G ef, ete.)

Substituting the theoretical value e = .06954, this becomes 2 z a X
.99879. The corresponding value of Harth’s mean radius vector is
92430800 -+- .99879 = 92542790, which differs by less than ?y of one per
cent, from the value which was deduced in Note 426, from the incipient
subsidence of Jupiter. The corresponding value of m, + mg is 829196.

435. Twin Planets.

Action and reaction, in a system which is fundamentally dependent
upon two largely preponderating bodies, may naturally lead to a grouping
in pairs. Laplace’s modification of the nebular hypothesis, which supposes
that the first ruptures are in the form of rings or belts, and Herschel’s hy-
pothesis of subsidence until the acquired velocity becomes rupturing, also
favor the simultaneous formation of companion perihelion and aphelion
planets. Accordingly, we find two supra-asteroidal groups, Neptune-
Uranus, Jupiter-Saturn, and two infra-asteroidal, Mars-Mercury, Earth-
Venus. The grouping in the belt of greatest condensation indicates a
double tendency ; Earth-Venus representing influences which appear to
have orignated in the Sun, while Mars-Mercury seem to be more specially
referable to activities at the centre of condensation, than to those at the
centre of nucleation.

436. Mass Relation of Jupiter and Saturn.

The discovery, by Prof. Stephen Alexander, that the masses of Jupiter
and Saturn are nearly in the inverse ratio of the squares of their mean
vector-radii, was the first step towards a demonstration of the fundamental
principles of harmonic astronomy. This ratio represents the moments of
sethereal or nebular rotary inertia for the two planets, respectively. The
closeness of the approximation is shown by the proportion

5.202798? : 9.53852? ; : 104.879 : 3522.3.

Hall’s estimate of Sun -- by Saturn is 3482; Bessel’s 3501.6; Lever-
rier’s 3512. The greatest difference between either of these estimates and
Alexander’s approximation, is only about 1} per cent, the least difference
is less than + of one per cent. I know of no other mass-approximations
which rest upon purely rhythmical laws, except my own.

1884.] 599 [Chase.

487. Mass-Relation of Harth and Venus.

The simplicity of the harmonic mass-relations between Sun and Earth,
as well as between Jupiter and Saturn, increases the likelihood of similar
relations, which are equally simple, between Earth and Venus; but the
wide range of discrepancy among the estimates of different astronomers
makes it somewhat difficult to ascertain what rhythmic influence has
prevailed, Stockwell’s estimate of Venus’s mass is about .945 of Earth’s
mass ; Hill’s is only .831 ; Leverrier’s mean of two estimates, .872. The
value which would give Harth and Venus equal orbital momenta is .85049.
We may, therefore, claim a great probability for the proportion, mp : mg
: 1 (829196 -- .85049 = 887066) : 1.

438. Mass-Relation of Neptune and Uranus.

In the exterior twin planet belt, we find a harmonic mass relation which
is no less striking than those that have already been given. It is es-
pecially interesting, as pointing to an early stage of nebular condensation,
as well as to a blending of external and internal influences which accounts
for retrograde satellite rotation and revolution. The gravitating accelera-
tions, which are due to the actions and reactions between two cosmical
masses, are proportioned to the respective masses. The vis viva of gravi-

mv
tating subsidence ( 5 ) is, therefore, proportioned to the cube of the
2

masses. We find, accordingly, that

Me sm? +3 pg! : py

In this proportion ps’ Yrepresents the locus of incipient subsidence, or
secular aphelion of Neptune, while p; represents the mean radius vector
of Uranus. The values which satisfy this proportion are very exact, as

will be seen by the following comparison :

Harmonic, Newcomb.
Sun -+- Neptune 19872.86 19380 -+ 70
Sun + Uranus 22603.88 22600 +: 100

439. Mass-Relation of Mars and Mercury.

The Earth appears to have exercised an influence upon the two ex-
terior planets of the belt of greatest condensation, analogous to that which
the Sun has exercised upon Neptune and Uranus. We find, accordingly,

MPs mP ss py? pr

In this proportion, if we let , and p, represent the mean distances of
Mars and Mercury, respectively, the mass of Mars would be 1.5789 times
that of Mercury. Adopting Hall’s estimate of Sun +- Mars = 3093500,
we find Sun + Mercury = 4884366. Encke’s estimate is 4865751. These
estimates are based upon the hypothesis that Sun + Earth = 854936. If
we substitute the harmonic value, 829196, we get Sun ~ Mars == 2869151 ;
Sun + Mereury = 4530150.

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. 800, xxt. 116. 8x. PRINTED JuLY 381, 1884.

Chase. ] 600 [April 18,

440, Linkage of KHarth and Neptune.

It was shown in Note 428 that Earth’s mass may be harmonically de-
duced from Sun’s mass through its limiting value of circular orbital ve-
locity. Neptune’s mass may be deduced from Earth’s through the cor-
responding limit of orbital time. We have, accordingly, mg : m3 ::ta it, ::

rm
16.98: 1. In this proportion f¢ = 2x / 3 ig =a sidereal day.

441, Harth’s Oblateness.

The importance of Earth’s position, at the centre of the belt of greatest
condensation, is further shown by the fact that its centrifugal force of
daily rotation, by which it is harmonically connected with Neptune, has
also determined its oblateness. For we find that (fq tg)” = 288.4.
Listing’s estimate (See Note 249) is 288.5.

442. Linkage of Rarth and Uranus.

Another interesting connection between the dense belt and the outer
twin-planet belt, is shown by the proportion, 865.2565 : 338.2183 + + 4’ :
po In this proportion, 338.2183 is the distance, measured in Harth’s semi-
diameters, at which a satellite particle would revolve in a solar year ;
po is the secular aphelion distance of Uranus, while pg is its mean distance.
This relation is also interesting because the aphelion of the 83.25 year me-
teoric belt is in the orbit of Uranus, and because a ray of light would tra-
verse the same meteoric orbit in the time of one solar rotation, The pro-
portion gives, for the secular aphelion of Uranus, 1.07994. Stockwell’s
estimate is 1.07797.

448, Another Linkage of Harth and Jupiter.

Tn notes 425 and 426, the gravitating accelerations of arth and Jupiter
were shown to be harmonically related to each other, as well as to the
gravitating acceleration of the Sun, The moon furnishes another har-
nonic link, which is shown by the equation

60.2778 « 5.202798 x 1047.879 == 3828629.

In this equation 60.2778 is von Littrow’s estimate of Moon’s mean dis-
ance in equatorial semidiameters of the Earth; 5.202798 is Jupiter’s
mean distance, in Earth’s mean veetor radii; 1047.879 is the quotient of
Jun’s mass by Jupiter’s mass; 828629 is, within less than 4 of one per
cent, the harmonic quotient of Sun’s mass by Earth’s mass.

444, The Meteoric Theory of World Building.

Proctor (North American Review, May, 1884) criticises the theory of
Olbers, which has been lately advocated by Herbert Spencer, and consid-
‘rg that the asteroidal belt has been formed by meteoric influence, in con-
nection with the attraction of Jupiter, rather than by the explosion of any
primitive planet. In many of the foregoing notes there has been evidence

601 [Chase.

1884. |

of influences which may be regarded as meteoric. Indeed, Herschel’s
subsidence-theory recognizes the continual activity of such influences,
provided we consider every particle which is falling towards the sun as
meteoric, If we still further regard the luminiferous sther as material,
we may consider ourselves as living in a condensing and rotating nebula.

445, Linkage of Sun, Harth, Jupiter and Saturn.

The influence of simple primitive subsidence, which was so strikingly
exemplified in the mass-ratios of Neptune and Uranus (Note 488), is no
less evident in the four important cosmical bodies which represent, re-
spectively, the chief centre of nucleation (Sun), the chief centre of con-
densation (Earth), the primitive nebular centre (Jupiter), and the centre
of inertia of the primitive planetary system (Saturn). This influence is
shown by the equation

Sun x Earth x Saturn = Jupiter’.

Substituting in this equation the harmonic ratio of Sun to Earth (829196)
and Bessel’s estimate of Sun -- Saturn (3501.6), we get for Sun + Jupi-
ter 1048.5.

446. Saturn’s Secular Hecentricity.

The mutual actions and reactions, among the four cosmical masses
which were introduced into the foregoing note, are still further shown by
the connection of the orbital periods of Earth and Jupiter with the secular
eccentricity of Saturn,

This connection is shown by the proportion

4382.5848 : 365.2565 ;: 1: .0848045.

Stockwell’s estimate of Saturn’s secular eccentricity is .0848289.
This differs by less than s'; of one per cent from the harmonic estimate.

447, Primitéve Phyllotactic Relations.

The centre of a nebula which is bounded at opposite extremities of its
diameter by the secular aphelia, or loci of incipient subsidence, of Nep-
tune and Uranus, according to Stockwell’s estimate, is 4.8952. This differs
by less than } of one per cent from Jupiter’s secular perihelion, or locus
of incipient nebular rupture. The mass of Neptune is approximately
of Earth’s harmonic mass. Uranus is almost precisely °; of the Uranus-
Neptune belt. Saturn is almost precisely ;°; of the Jupiter-Saturn belt.
The numbers }, 2 X 4, 44; and 4, are all phyllotactic. The values which

fully satisfy these mass relations are

Sun + Neptune : 19352.'76
Sun + Uranus 22578. 22
Sun -- Saturn 8490.71

Sun + Jupiter. 1047.21

Ay aX4
Chase.| 602 [April 18,

448, Phyllotaay in the Asteroidal Belt.

Kirkwood (Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xxi, 266) in discussing the gaps and
clusters of the Asteroidal belt, says: ‘‘In three portions of the ring the
clustering tendency is distinctly evident. These are from 2.35 to 2.46,
from 2.55 to 2.80, and from 8.05 to 3.22; containing forty-three, ninety-
six and forty asteroids, respectively. We have thus an obvious resem-
blance to the rings of Saturn; the partial breaks or chasms in the zone
corresponding to the well known intervals in the system of secondary
rings.’’ He accounts for the gaps by the periodic harmonic perturbations
of Jupiter, but he gives no explanation of the clustering tendency.

If we take ,%, 4, and $ of Jupiter’s mean distance, we have 2.401, 2.601,
8.252. The numbers 2 x ,';, }, and gare all phyllotactic. The first of
the clusters, 4;, seems to indicate a harmonic connection with the primi-
tive rupture of the Uranus-Neptune belt which was pointed out in the
foregoing note.

449, Constant of Aberration.

Magnus Nyrén has published, in the Memoirs of the St. Petersburg
Academy, a valuable paper on the determination of the constant of aber-
yation. A summary of his results is given by A. M. W. Downing, in
The Observatory, vi, 865. The value which has long been accepted by
astronomers is 20//.445. Struve discussed the possible sources of error,
some years after the publication of his memoir, and adopted the value
20/463. Nyrén deduces, from three different sets of observations at
Pulkowa, 20//.492 4- 0//.006, which Downing thinks ‘‘must be an ex-
tremely accurate value of this important constant, and will probably have
to be considered final until it can be corrected by an equally accurate and
extensive series of determinations made in the southern hemisphere, Such
a determination is, at the present time, a desideratum in astronomy.’’

450. Succession of Harmonic Mass Influences,

According to the foregoing notes, the first harmonic influence in the
determination of relative planetary masses seems to have been that of
simple subsidence, represented by the cubes of masses. Next was the
simple product of mass by distance, representing the beginning of the
change from static to rotary equilibrium. Then came the product of mass
by the square of the distance, representing nebular rotary inertia. This
was followed by the quotient of mass by the square root of distance, rep-
resenting simple orbital momentum. These relations seem so natural and
go important that it may be well to give the calculations in detail, for
future reference, and also to extend those calculations to the most import-
ant linkages which have been indicated among the different planetary and
satellite belts. ‘

451. Simple Subsidence.
There are three planetary illustrations of the determination of mass by

simple subsidence ;
1. In the Neptune-Uranus belt (Note 438) the mass of the belt (am, +-

Way
1884. | 603 tChase,

mg) and the mean eccentricity of the outer or subsident member are so
influenced by the change of centripetal into tangential orbital motion
that we find
me” (1 + 65) Cindy ++ mg) = Ms.
According to Stockwell, Neptune’s mean secular eccentricity, ¢, =
.0100889. ILlence we derive the data for the following calculation :

30.46955 1.4838661
19. 183581 1.2829297 2
1's) 1.1667527 0669788
“1h 9942998 4
1+ 6 - 0043381 5
8.0208111 6
(4+ 5 + 6) = log. 1 + (m, ++ m,) 4.0189490 7

‘ N A 1.1667527
log. (8) representing the ratio of mg :m,, log. mg = log. 3. 1667527 + (%, and

1
log. m, = log. 2.1667597 + 6)»

2,1667527 3858093 8
(7+ 8 =1+m, 4.3547583 9
9 —3)=1+m, 4.2877795 10

2. In the actions and reactions of the chief centres of nucleation (Sun),
condensation (Earth), nebulosity (Jupiter), and planetary inertia (Saturn),
the mass relation arises which is given in Note 445.

1 -+ my = 829196 5.5174544 11
1+ m,== 3501.6 3.5442665 12
4 (11 + 12) 3.0205736 13

3. In the Mars-Mercury belt, as modified by solar and terrestrial action
(Note 489).

a= 1.5236898 1828960 14
A= 3870987 T.5878218 15
(14 — 15) 5950742 16
4 (16) 1.5789 1988581 17

8098500 6.4904501 18
(17 +- 18) 4884366 6. 6888081 19

354986 5.5501499 20
(18 + 11 —20) 2869151 6 4577546 21
(19 + 11 —20) 4530150 6.6561126 22

452. Change of Static to Rotary Hquilibrium.
The following logarithms represent the influence of the change from
static to rotary equilibrium as explained in Note 424.

1 ++ a, = 1047.879 8.0208111 23
p's 9391726 T.9727454 24.
(28 — 24) 1115.747 3.04°75657 25
(5 5.202798 7162869 26
ps 214.4518 2,3318288 7
rs 206264! 806247 58144251 Qs

(28 — 27) % = 961/'.8254 2.9830963 29

Chase, ]

Dr. Meyer’s estin

value (8512).
mean distance, 9.
the generally accept

Subst

The logarithms wl
(Note 437) are as fo

} (82)
(hb 4°88)

Notes 451-4 give

uniform scale has be
lessly for comparisor
astronomical data,

5

4

We are now prepa
the different belts.
the chief centres of
give the equation :

The value of V gy 7
27
cD
31558149

“5,

(41) — (89)
by (128 au 49)

Meyer includes the r

cording to Meyer, 351

525

(26) -- } (30 — 28)

the eight primary pl:

(85) ++ (86) — (87)

(38) — (24) —» (40)

604

[April 18,
458. Mass of Saturn.

rate of m, —- mg (The Observatory, vi, 279), is 8482.93

+ 5.5. This is nearly identical with Hall’s value, as given in Note 436.

1
ings, estimating their mass as equivalent to {19.17%

ib
Bessel’s estimate was 118" If we omit, the rings, ™m) -- m, becomes, ac-

2.2, which is substantially identical with Leverrier’s

‘ituting in Alexander’s harmony we get, for Saturn’s

1395, which differs by less than 7 of one per cent from

ed distance.

8512.2
9.52513

3.5455792
9788709

30
31

454. Orbital Momentum.
1ich represent orbital momentum for Karth and Venus
llows ;
1238828 T.8593379 82
85049 T.9296690 83
837066 5.587'7854. 34.

simple harmonic approximations to all the masses of
vets, I think this is the first publication in which a
en adopted for all the planets, and I submit it fear-
1 with any estimate which has been based on ordinary

6

5. Linkage of Harth and Jupiter.

red for a systematic examination of the linkages among
In note 425 we found that the gravitating energies, at
nucleation and of nebulosity, are so connected as to

(1 -- 6) gs t5 = V gy %

‘y may be found by the following logarithms :

1981799 85
8.49699382 86
7A991115 3
4.960616 38
759212382 39
17863, 25 4.2519605 40
*'8.5718557 41
2. 9792325 42
T,.0002282 43

1884.] 605 [Chase,

456. Harth’s Mean Radius Vector.

The mean radius vector of the chief centre of condensation is harmont-
cally found by the methods of Notes 428 and 434,

Js = .00607723 miles. B.7837055 44
4's = 8962.8 8.5980022 45
Vo ta "= = 4,90748 . 6908538 46
bx 4 5740813 4
(46) Bn elroy 1.264885 1 48
(48) +. (87) — (85) 7,9658167 49
99879 T.9994742 50
(49) — (50) 7,9663425 BL

The value of m) -- ms, which represents this mean distance, may be
found by the formula :

8

Me

4 ee m1, + (Jy X 815581497) = m, + m,
8

8 (51 — 45) + 2 (85) + (45) — (44) — 2 (87) = (11)
457. . Second Linkage of Harth and Jupiter.

The linkage between the superficial gravitating energies of Earth and
Jupiter, which is shown in Note 426, may be computed as follows :

4 (24 + 42 4 48) 2.9761080 52
(38 +. 52) B.7721646 58
(26 + 46 — 58) 5.6849261 54
(27 ++ 54) 1.9662549 55
(38 ++ 54) 2.4809877 56
2 (56 — 46) +. (54 — 45) B.OLT1917 57
(48 + 54 — 45) 1.087152 58

458. Other Terrestrial Linkages.
The linkage of Earth, Moon and Jupiter, which is represented in Note
448, introduces the following logarithms,
60.2778 1.78015'74 59
(59 +- 26 -+- 23) 5.5167054 60

The linkage of Earth and Neptune (Note 440) with Harth’s oblateness
gives the following logarithms ;

} (45 — 44) 2.9071484 61
(61 -L 85) 8.058288 62
86164.08 4.353268 63
(63 — 62) 16.9824 1.2299980 64
Cie ey 19384.58 42874564 65

2 (64) 288.4 2,.4599960 66

Chase.] 606 [April 18,

The linkage of Earth and Uranus, Note 442, gives the following loga-
rithms :

865.2565 2.5625979 67
338.2183 2.5291971 68
(67 — 68) 1.07994 0384008 69

459, Moon's Mass and Harth’s Hecentricity.

The harmonies of lunar mass and Karth’s orbital eccentricity (Notes
431-3) introduce the following logarithms :

n 4971499 10
7989 8.902492 val
20000000 7.8010300 12
(70 97 — 99) 0012549 B.0986128 713
~~ (78) 2.9013877 "4
(74) — 2 (70) 80.74 1.9070879 15
43082.04 = ty 4.6842963 716
(44) + 2 (76) — 2 (70) 6.6579983 11
(55 — 77) 80.957 1.9082566 78
81.957 1.9135861 719
(44 +. 76) 2.4180018 80
2 (80) + (78) — 2 (56) — (79) T.9686987 81

460. Series of Harmonie Hquations.

The harmonic analogy between the Neptune-Uranus and the Mars-
Mercury belts may be still further extended by the following equations,
which enable us to deduce all the masses of the primary planets from the
harmonic value of the mass at the chief centre of condensation :

0, m

j= tr a
Be Soh hia res i B
ta + = eh - Ms ne
— /) NY

7 (1 + €3) (Mg -+ M,) = Mz n)
7? (1m, ++ mm) = my, + Mz €
ps! > pr = ohio - m5 §
My M, My, = m,* ut)
A pm) + mo ¢

Pa Ps = m,? + m,?

461. Haplanation.

In the foregoing note g = gravitating acceleration of any mass m, at
any distance 7, provided m and 7 are expressed in units of Sun’s mass and
semi-diameter ; 0, == velocity of light ; ¢ = time of solar half-rotation ; n=

solar gravitating acceleration at Harth’s mean radius vector (p3)3 tg =

time of theoretical satellite rotation at Barth’s equatorial surface

ion

1884,] 607 (Chase,

Ue)
2 aN Tite

Ys’
tricity ; py’ = Neptune’s mean secular aphelion ; p; to ps == Mean vector

a sidereal day ; ¢; = Neptune’s minimum secular eccen-

radii and m2, to mg == masses of the eight primary planets,

The equations represent various obvious radial and tangential actions
and reactions. Equation (1), when applied at the Sun’s surface, which
is the point of greatest gravitating acceleration in the solar system, gives
gt=. This satisfies Ohm’s law, as applied to solar rotation in a mag-
netic field, Fourier’s theorem, Laplace’s principle of periodicity, and the
projectile velocity which balances ethereal resistance at Sun’s surface.
The actions and reactions of centripetal gravitation and centrifugal radia-
tion are thus codrdinated in such ways as to give simple forms of expression
for all kinetic correlations. Equations (4) and (5) represent similar tan-
gential tendencies to belt formation by the vis viva of primitive tangential
motion, both at the outer limits of the solar system and at the outer limits
of the belt of greatest condensation, Equation (2) represents a harmonic
relation of tangential velocities, at the chief nucleal centre and at the
chief centre of condensation, This equation satisfies Laplace’s demon-
stration of the tendency to exactness in simple numerical relations. It
also satisfies various tendencies of subsidence as well as of linear and of
rotary inertia, Equation (9) gives harmonic tangential velocities to the
two interior companion masses, in the belt of greatest condensation.
EKquations (6), (7) and (8) represent radial and belt-rupturing tendencies
of simple subsidence. In the mutual interactions of gravitating subsi-
dence the sums of the gravitating accelerations, along mutually connect-

my

ing lines, vary as the respective masses ; therefore “9°, or the wis viva of
subsidence, varies as m%. Equation (3) represents harmonic interactions
between the centre of primitive subsidence (m,) and the chief centre of
condensation (m,). The importance of these interactions is still further
exemplified by the fact that (tg + tq)? = Harth’s oblateness according to
Listing’s estimate (Note 440). This accordance seems calculated to throw
great doubt upon Delaunay’s hypothesis of retardation by the ‘tidal
brake.’’

462. Deduced Values.

The following harmonic values satisfy the equations of Note 460. Some
of the latest astronomic estimates are also given, in order to show the
closeness of accordance :

Harmonic. Astronomical, j
My + ™ 4527977 4512885 Encke.
Mo “- My 887066 896256 Hill.
My -- Mg 829196 829161 Faye.
My i My 2867780 2869157 Hall.
My -- Ms 1049.4 1050 Leverrier.

9

PROC, AMER. PHILOS. $0c, xxi. 116, 8Y. PRINTED JULY 381, 1884.

Chase.] 608 [April 18,

Harmonic, Astronomical.
My -- Me 8510.7 8512 Leverrier,
Mg —- M_ 22508.'7 22600 = 100 Newcomb.
My -- Mg 19384. 6 19380 + 70 Newcomb,

463. Hvidence of Nebular Subsidence.

The outer portion of the Neptune-Uranus belt is harmonically connected
with the belt of greatest condensation, as we have seen (Note 440), by an
important mass-relation. One linkage of the inner portion of the same
belt was given in Note 442; another is found in the proportion

ta: ty ae (ps + $00)” 3 pr’.
1 : 866.2565 : : (1.00288155)? : (19.1824)?

Leverrier’s estimate of p, is 19.18264, which differs from the harmonic
estimate by less than } of Sun’s semi-diameter. This harmony introduces :
(1) The rupturing tendencies of nebular subsidence through $7; (2) The
interstellar parabolic influences which have determined the harmonic po-
sitions of the eight primary planets and of the asteroidal belt (Note 46);
(3) The conversion of parabolic into elliptical influence, with foci at the
centres of Harth and Sun ; (4) The variation of the times of nebular rota-
tion inversely as the square of radius. These relations, taken in connec-
tion with equation 3, Note 460, furnish conclusive evidence in support of
Herschel’s ‘‘ subsidence theory.’’

464. Harth’s Dependence on Luminous Undulation.

The influence of luminous undulation in determining Harth’s orbital
period is quite as remarkable as its influence upon the time of solar rota-
tion, The latter represents the maximum energy, while terrestrial revolu-
tion represents the mean energy of luminous undulation, in accordance
with the general principle that, when a disturbance consists of terms in-
volving sines or cosines of angles which vary with the time, the maximum
energy is twice the mean energy. According to Stockwell, the secular
centre of the belt of greatest condensation is at 1.0169394.5, which is an
arithmetical mean between Earth’s mean radius vector and its mean
aphelion. arth, like Jupiter, shows the energy of wthereal projection as
well as the mean energy of luminous undulation, We find, accordingly,
9s X 1 yea = 1.08387880,. This gives 1, == 185501.5 miles.

465. Jupiter's Dependence on Luminous Undulation.
The combined influence of luminous undulation and central condensa-
tion, in determining Jupiter’s orbital velocity, is equally striking.
1.01693947, : psi: V7.5 py 2%.
Substituting the harmonic value of Ps (92542800), this proportion gives
0, == 185498.1 miles.

:
1884.] 609 [Chase.

466. Neptune's Dependence on Luminous Undulation.

The varied harmonies which have been pointed out between the Nep-
tune-Uranus belt and the dense belt, may naturally lead us to seek for
some additional evidence of luminous influence at the outer limit of the
solar system. Such evidence is furnished by the proportion :

Pa * Pp : * Py py

In this proportion p, = Neptune’s secular aphelion -+- Harth’s mean
aphelion ; pg = Neptune’s secular aphelion; p, = centre of belt of

greatest condensation. Substituting Stockwell’s apsidal elements and the
harmonic value of p,, the proportion gives ¥, = 185492 miles. The ex-
treme range of discrepancy in the three estimates (Notes 464-6) is less
than +4; of one per cent, or less than ten miles per second.

46%, Harmonic Estimate of the Constant of Aberration.

Earth’s mean orbital velocity is 12960007 ~- 31558149 = 0.041067 ; 0,
== 185497.2 miles, if we take the mean of the three foregoing estimates,
To find the constant of aberration we have the proportion :

185497.2 : 92542800 : : 1 sec, : 498.89 sec,
0/4.041067 X 498.89 = 20//.488.

The close accordance of this value with Nyrén’s estimate (Note 449),
furnishes satisfactory confirmation both of the accuracy of Stockwell’s cal-
culations and of the precision of the harmonic estimate.

AOS oes

The foregoing results abundantly show that the principle of harmonic
motion is of ‘‘immense use not only in ordinary kinetics, but in the
theories of sound, light, heat, etc.” * Analogy, the law of parsimony,
the theories of kinetic correlation, and the various principles enumerated
in Note 461, all point to the value of »,, which is given in the foregoing
note, as equivalent to the ratio ‘“V’’ between the electrostatic and electro-
magnetic units of electricity, electric current, magnetic potential, electric
displacement, surface density, magnetic force, and strength of current at
a point. The corresponding resistance in the field of rotation is 29.853
Ohm’s. This agrees very closely with Foucault's estimate, 29.836 Ohm’s.
Weber’s estimate} was 81.074; Thomson’s{ 28.2 ; Maxwell’s { 28.8 ;
Michelson’s§ 29.982. The modulus of light which is represented by the

harmonic constant of aberration may be found as follows: 7 = p, --
214.4518 == 481582.8 miles ; gy == 27 12 + Mg My = -16878 miles ; x7 +
%, == 7.3085 sec. ; 7.80859, = 1.283 miles = 0 of solar rotation ; V go 1%) =

269.82 miles ; 269.82 -- 1.283 = 218,833 ; (218.8337)?79 = 47268879 = modu-

* Thomson and Tait, Vat, Phil,, i, Sec. 52.
1 Pogg. Ann,, Aug, 10, 1856,

{ Rept. Brit, Assoc,, 1869, pp. 434, 436.
2Am. J. Sci, NOV., 1879.

Chase, ] 6 1 0 [April 18,

lus of light at Sun’s surface ; Laplace’s limit, L = 218.833! 7, = 86.3147,.
An additional linkage of Sun, Earth, Jupiter and Neptune is shown by
the proportion ;
Lt ps? pga} Pear
In this proportion ,,, p,, represent secular perihelion of Harth and
Neptune, respectively. Substituting Stockwell’s value of p,, gives p,, =

29.680,. Stockwell’s estimate is 29.'78p,.

469. Another Linkage of Jupiter and Harth.

Let va = vis viva of circular orbital revolution which Jupiter, when at —
mean aphelion, would be able to give to a particle at the centre of the
solar system = m,;” -- og; V;= molecular ois viva which Earth would
be able to communicate to the same particle = % (m,’ + py); Va == ve-
locity of light; 0, = circular orbital velocity of a particle at the chief
centre of condensation in the solar system (Earth). Then we find vg :
V, 2:10. Substituting the harmonic values of Harth’s mass and of the
constant of aberration, with Stockwell’s estimate pg + p; = 5.427351, we
find va + v, = 10067.61 ; ms + my = 818.61; my + m; = 1049.69, which
differs by less than ;!; of one per cent from the value which was deduced
in Note 462. This relation shows that, when nebular subsidence and
luminous undulation had established incipient orbital motion around the
Sun at Jupiter’s mean aphelion, the actions and reactions among nuclea)
centres established the molecular motion, at the chief centre of density,
which resulted in Earth’s orbital oscillation. The first indication of the
importance of the factor 2 appears to have been given by me (Proc, Amer,
Phil. Soc. xii, 394). Maxwell subsequently adopted it (P. Mag., June
and Sept., 1877, pp. 453, 209) without leaving any record of the source
from which he derived it, or of the reasons upon which it was based
In all of my investigations my first inquiry is, what obvious radial or
tangential velocity, momentum, or os viva is there, which would be likely
to operate in producing or maintaining such exactness of cyclical harmony
as is necessary for the stability of the system, The first trial usually
gives some clue which suggests the next. These alternations, between
Baconian observation and the ‘‘scientific use of the imagination,’”’ have
been rewarded by frequent confirmations of predictions which [ had haz-
arded and recorded weeks, months, or years, before they could be sus-
tained by any known data.

470. Dense-Belt Projection.

The interstellar parabolic trajectories, which have tangential directices
at Sun’s surface, and a common focus at Sun’s centre, have a vertical
" ‘ ‘ ;
locus at ~5. The length of the luminous undulation which becomes
2

semi-circular in solar rotation is x79, The sum of these two centrifugal

1884 J 611

)
tendencies is 8.641598”, or .0169414 (0; -+- ay which differs by less than

a; of one per cent from Stockwell’s estimate of the projection of the centre

. “ Po s
of the dense belt. For the influence of p, 4+ upon the orbital locus of
URS

Uranus, see Note 463.

A4Y1, Sun’s Hquatorial Acceleration.

The luminous projection of Jupiter and of the centre of the dense belt, as
well as the other evidences of apsidal influence upon planetary harmonies,
show that molecular ods viva has slightly modified the simple undulatory
vis viva of the luminiferous ether, The amount of the solar equatorial
acceleration ig not precisely known, because no Sun-spots have been ob-
served very near the solar equator ; it cannot, however, differ much from
Earth’s mean secular eccentricity, We may, therefore, regard this as
another evidence of the harmonic importance of ‘subsidence ’’ to the belt
of greatest density.

Stated Meeting, June 20, 1884.
Present, 5 members.
President, Mr. Fratny, in the Chair.

A letter accepting membership was read from James inf
Hutchinson, M.D., dated May 16, 1884, No. 183 South Twenty-
second street, Philadelphia.

The decease of Prof. Dr. Heinrich Robert Géppert, at Bres-
lau, May 18, 1884, aged 83, was announced.

A letter was received from J. M. Da Costa, M.D., accepting
the appointment to prepare an obituary notice of the late Dr.
Gross.

Prof. Baird requested, by letter, a copy of Proceedings No.
110 for the Library of the Imperial Museum at Strasburg,
which was ordered to be sent.

Prof, KE. D. Cope requested, by letter, the insertion of a
paragraph in the Proceedings enlarging the notice of the
minutes of January 18, 1884.

612 [June 20,

An application was read for the Magellanic Premium,
signed “ Arcturus,” on the explosion of tanks containing petro-
leum, and the method of preventing the same.

Prof. Cope sent a paper on the Extinct Mammalia of Valley
of Mexico.

Mr. Richard Vaux read a paper on the history of the Penn-
sylvania prison system,

Nominations Nos. 1023 to 1028, were read.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Holland
Society at Harlem (114); the Fondation Tyler (114); the
Royal Zodlogical Society, Amsterdam (118, XVI, i); the
Observatory at Prague (118, XVI, i); the Royal Society of
Sciences, G6ttingen (XITI, i, ii); the Radcliffe Observatory
(114); the Royal Observatory, Edinburgh (118, XVI, i);
Win. Blades, 28 Abchurch Lane, London (114); the Statisti-
sal Society, London (114).

Letters of Hnvoy were read from the United States Consul
at Budapest, April 29, 1884; the Royal Zodlogical Society,
Amsterdam, June 4; the Musée Guimet, April 16, and the
National Academy at Cordova, South America, requesting
exchanges,

Donations for the Library were received from the Geologi-
cal Survey of India; Academy at St. Petersburg; Mr. Joseph
de Lenhossek, of Budapest; Anthropological Society, Geo-
logical Institute, Vienna; Royal Bavarian Academy; Royal
Saxon Society; Royal Society, Gottingen; Royal Prussian
Academy; Society at St. Gall; National Antiquarian So-
ciety, Copenhagen; Tuscan Society of Natural Sciences,
at Pisa; Musée Guimet and Society Agriculture, Lyons;
Commercial Geographical Society and Meteorological Com-
mission, Bordeaux; Institute of France, Ethnological So-
ciety, Anthropological Society, Zodlogical Society, Geo-
graphical Society, M. Leon de Rosney, Society of Ameri-
canists, Society for Japanese Studies, Bureau of Longi-
tudes, M. M. Locroy, Paris; Royal Academy of History at
Madrid; Astronomical Society, Geographical Society, Nature,
London; Cambridge University ; Glasgow Observatory; Pat-

1884. ] 613

rick Geddes, of Edinburgh ; Nova Scotia Institute of Sciences;
Boston Society Natural History; American Journal Science ;
American Chemical Society; New York Historical Society,
New York Academy of Sciences, New York Meteorological
Observatory, Philadelphia Academy Natural Sciences, Frank-
lin Institute, Journal of Pharmacy, Engineers’ Club, Zod-
logical Society, Dr. Geo. L. Harrison, J. A. Kirkpatrick,
Heber S. Thompson, Edwin Atlee Barber, Henry Phillips,
Jr, E. D. Cope, A. E. Foote, Hli K. Price, American
Journal of Philology, Baltimore Johns Hopkins University,
United States National Museum, United States Army Bureau
of Engineers, Census Bureau, Jed. Hotchkiss, of Staunton,
Virginia, American Antiquarian, Chicago.
And the meeting was adjourned.

Stated Meeting, July 18, 1884.
Present, 8 members.
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

A letter was received from the President of the Committee
for erecting a statue to Jean Baptiste Dumas, and requesting a
subscription for the same,

The death of Dr. Karl Richard Lepsius was announced as
having taken place July 11, 1884, stat. 83.

A letter was received from Gen. W.F. Reynolds announcing
a change of address to Detroit, Michigan.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Royal
Academy of Sciences, Amsterdam (118, XVI, i); Royal In-
stitute, Lombardy; Prof. J. 8. Steenstrup (118); K. K. Cen-
tral Institute (114); University Library, Cambridge (114);
New Hampshire Historical Society, Concord (115); Ameri-
can Antiquarian Society, Worcester (115); Hssex Institute
(115); Boston Athenseum (115); American Statistical Asso-

61 4. {July 18,

ciation, Boston (115); Connecticut Historical Society (115);
W. P. Blake, New Haven (115); W. D. Whitney, New
Haven (115); New York Historical Society (115); Library
United States Military Academy, West Point (115); C. H.
F. Peters, Clinton, New York (115); New Jersey Histori-
cal Society (115); Numismatic and Antiquarian Society (115);
Wyoming Historical and Geological Society, Wilkes-Barre
(115); Pennsylvania State Library (115); Thos. C. Porter,
Haston, Pennsylvania (115); treat McCormick Observatory,
Virginia (115); Georgia Historical Society (115); Cincinnati
Observatory (115); Robert Peter, Lexington (115); Library
of the University of T'ennessee (115); Henry 8. Frieze, Ann
Arbor (114, 115); State Historical Society of Wisconsin (115);
Kansas State Historical Society (115); Geological Survey,
Washington, a set of the publications of the American Philo-
sophical Society.

Letters of envoy were received from the Society of Natural
Sciences of Elberfeld, and the Royal Society of Canada.

Donations to the Library were received from the New Zea-
land Institute; Royal Friedlander, Berlin; K. K. Observatory
in Prag; Societies of Natural Sciences at Emden, Hlberfeld
and Letusiane Central Bureau of Statistics, Stockholm ;
Royal Academy of Belgium; Royal Observatory at Brux-
elles; M. Paul Albrecht; ‘Heole des Mines; Societies of Geog-
raphy at Paris and Bordeaux; M. B. Balliere & Son; M. Paul
Tournafond; Society of Physical and Natural Sciences at
sordeaux; Prof. C. H. F. Peters; Prof. Luigi Ambiveri;
Society of Antiquaries; Royal Astronomical Society ; Journal
of Forestry; Nature; Essex Institute; M. Franklin B.
Hough; American Academy of Arts. and Sciences; Ameri-
can Oriental Society; the Boston Society of Natural History ;
S. EH. Cassino & Co.; the Peabody Museum; Harvard Univer-
sity; the Free Public Library of New Bedford; American
Journal of Science; Yale College; American Chemical So-
ciety; Mercantile Library; New York Meteorological Obser-
vatory; American Journal of Medical Sciences; College of
Pharmacy; McCalla & Stavely; the Franklin Institute ; Prof.

1984.] 615

EB. D. Cope; Dr. D: Jayne; Mr: Henry Phillips, Jr.; the
Wyoming Historical and Geological Society ; Johns Hopkins
University ; Peabody Institute; United States Geographical
and Geological Survey; Department of the Interior; Mr, Jed.
Hotchkiss; Geological Survey of Kentucky, and the National
Academy of Sciences in Cordova (Argentine Republic),

Permission was granted to Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., to have
copies made of Schultze’s Arawak grammar and dictionary
(MSS. owned by the Society), for the use of Mr. E. F. im
Thurn, of Demerara, British Guiana.

Thé Special Committee, appointed May 16 to have the
paintings owned by the Society cleaned and put in good order,
was ordered to ascertain the cost of photographing the same.

The following new members were elected:

Sir John Lubbock, LL.D., Westminster, London.
H. Burnett Tylor, LL.D., Museum House, Oxford.
Wm. W. Keen, M.D., Philadelphia.

N. Archer Randolph, M.D., Philadelphia.

Rev. HE. W. Syle, D.D., Philadelphia.

Rev. H. Clay Trumbull, D.D., Philadelphia.

New nominations, Nos. 1029, 1080, were read, and the meet-
ing was adjourned.

Correction of Minutes of January 18.

Professor Cope remarked that the formation which forms the banks of
the Rio Grande at Laredo, Texas, is in all probability the Laramie. It con-
tains at that point a thick bed of pure lignite. Above Laredo, on both
sides of the river, an excellent lignite is mined, The wide valley of the
Rio Grande as far as the eastern ranges of the Sierra Madre is probably of
Laramie age, as Dr, C. A. White reports fossil mollusca of that age from
near Lampazas, at the foot of the mountains. Wm. Arthur Schott (U. 8.
Mex. Bound. Survey I, Geology, p. 35) first observed these lignites, and
Mr. Conrad pointed out the existence of Claiborne Eocene beds in the same
region (loc. cit., p. 141). Professor Cope stated that the Claiborne beds
rested immediately on the Laramie at Laredo.

PROC. AMER, PHILOS. 800. xxI. 116. 82. PRINTED AUGUST 20, 1884,

>
Phillips.] 616 [Oct. 19,

Notes upon the Codex Ramirez, with a translation of the same, By Henry
Phillips, Jr.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 19, 1883.)

Perhaps one of the most valuable fragments of antiquity that has sur-
vived the bigoted fury of the Spanish ecclesiastics is the Codex Ramirez, a
history of the Mexicans as shown forth by their hieroglyphical and sym-
bolical writings. It was prepared shortly after the Conquest by the orders
and for the use of Sefior Ramirez de Fuen Leal, Bishop of Cuenca, Presi-
dent of the Chancelleria, to be used in deciding upon questions of all na-
ture that were likely to arise before that tribunal. He caused the Aztec sages
and priests to come together before him, and to agree upon an explanation
of the characters and signs in which the law, history and mythology of the
Mexicans were written. Asan authentic exposition of such, it is unique
and of the greatest value to students.

Brinton (Am. Hero Myths, 78), calls it ‘‘the most valuable authority
we possess ;’’ Pinelo (Vol. IT, 603), refers to its having been used by Her-
rera ; Chavero (Anales del Museo Nacional, III, iv, 120), ‘‘se considera
como la mejor fuente, acaso la unica verdaderamente autorizada, para cono-
cer los hechos pasados en Tenochtitlan.’? When Bishop Ramirez returned to
Spain, he took with him this MS., which now exists in Madrid in a volume
of twelve leaves folio entitled Libro de oro y Thesoros Indicos, and bears
upon it various memoranda attesting its authenticity.

The work is extremely difficult to understand, and full of obscurities
arising partly from errors in transcription, partly from the use of anti-
quated expressions, and a most involved and puerile style, and partly from
incorrect and vulgar orthographies.

In the following translation I have endéavored to reproduce the sim-
plicity and meaning of the original, adding copious notes of explanation
and conjecture wherever a passage seemed to demand it.

(Norr.—7z is pronounced likethe MayaQ; X like the sound of sh in English ;

t between two “1’’s is dropped; o and w were pronounced almost identical (Mo-
lina). Anales de Museo Nacional, I, v1, 242.)

HISTORY OF THE MEXICANS AS TOLD BY THEIR PAINTINGS.
CHAPTER 1ST.

Of the Creation and Beginning of the World and of the Original and Supe-
rior Deities,

Through symbols and writings formerly used, through the traditions of
the old and of those who in the ‘days of their infidelity were priests and
pontiffs, and through the narrations of the lords and chief men to whom
they were accustomed to teach the law and educate in their temples in
order to render them learned, brought together before me with their books
and hieroglyphics, which according to what is demonstrated are believed

i |

Codex Ramirez, Proc. Amer. Philos, Soc., Vol. XI p. 616.

Carre DES ENVIRONS
DE LA VILLE DE Mrxico

Reguhguis

PLlune de
Abies we Teco byes Prchuew

Sia doris bu.

me or it A
Oe
~

ae ee . Va
pay Let

cess

LEER

fit arma.

Os vn ao
Checonaale
GFoete Merse

ae Me Sa mS
Li of , Dy syle
ties oa eat \ wg Led Margin _
ne a OY aa aa it 3 isin
ut yee oY Marre x
Lae de Chaleo

Echelle def Lreues commanes .

he Es “ee “ey
a a 3 1 Ps wh Be ee Se a

a0 eI atl Wor Lon Nan eA PRS he OT Nea, >!

This Map of the Environs of the City of Mexico is reproduced from Le Petit
Allas Maritume * * * (par Le Sieur Bellais, par ordre de M. Le Duc de Choi-
sdul. Paris, 1764). Vol. 2, Pl.5. The configuration of the Lakes of Mexico and
Chalco, however, is incorrectly represented,

1888.] 617 [Phillips.

to be of ancient origin, many of them anointed with human blood, it ap-
pears that there was originally one god named Tonacatecli,’ who took for
wife Tonacagiguatl, or as she is sometimes called Oachequacalt, who created |
themselves, and were perpetual inhabitants of the thirteenth heaven ; i
of whose creation and beginning likewise there is nothing known
ie . except the fact that it also originated in the thirteenth heaven. Of this
god and goddess were engendered four sons, the eldest was called Tlaclaw
queteztzatlipuca,* whom the peoples of Quaxocingo and Tascala reverenced
as their chief divinity under,the name of Camaatie,® and who was said to
have been born of a ruddy color all over. They had a second son named
| Yuyanque tezcatlipuca ; he who was the greatest and the worst, who over- |
powered and bore sway over the other three, because he was born in the
middle of all (wagio en medio de todos) ; he was totally black at birth. The
third was called Quegalcoatl,* and for another name Yaguelicatl. To the
fourth and the smallest they gave the appellation of Omitecilt,5 and Ma- |
\ queecoatl, whom the Mexicans termed Vehilobi, because he was left-handed, |
and looked upon him as their chief deity, because in the land from whence
they came, he was so considered, and was more especially the god of war-
fare than were the other divinities. Of these four sons of Tonacateclé and
Tonacagigulatl (sic), Teecatlipuca was the one who knew all thoughts, and i
was in all places and read all hearts, for which he was called Moyocoya,® |
which is to say ‘‘the all-powerful,” according to which idea he is repre-
sented in painting only as the air, by which name he isnot commonly known.
Vehilodi,’ the younger brother, and god of the Mexicans, was born without Vf
flesh (nacid sin carne), but only bones, in which condition he lived six
hundred years, during which period of time the gods did nothing what-
ever, the father as well as the sons, and in their representation there is no
eae account taken of these six hundred years, counting them as they do from
twenty to twenty, according to the sign which he holds, which stands for
| twenty. These gods were known by these and many other names, accord-
ing to how their attributes are understood, for each community called them
differently by reason of their dialects, and so they were given diverse
appellations,

CHAPTER 2D.

Of how the World was created and by whom.

the sons of Tonacatecti, had passed away, they all four came together, and

| said that it was good that they should arrange what they had to do, and the
law they were to be governed by, and they all committed to Quezatcoatl and
Vehilobi, the performance of this task, in pursuance of which they created, |
under the orders and judgment of the others, the fire, and this being done
|

|
When the six hundred years after the birth of the four brethren-gods,
|

they made the half-sun, which, on account of not being entire, gave not
much but only aslender light. Presently they created aman anda woman ;
the man they called Vewmuco, and the woman Qipastonal,® and to them
they gave command that they should till the ground, and that the woman

}

} |
|

i

|

618 [Oct. 19,

Phillips.]

should spin and weave, and that of them should be born the Maceguales,
and that they should find no pleasure, but should always be obliged to
work ; to the woman the gods gave certain grains of maiz,® so that with
them she should work cures, and should use divination and witchcraft, and
so it is the custom of women to do to this very day. Then they created
the days which they divided into months, giving to each month twenty
days, of which they had eighteen, and three hundred and sixty days in
the year, of which will be spoken subsequently. Then they created
Mitlitlatteclet and Michitecagigiat, husband and wife, and these were
the gods of the lower regions (infierno), in which they were placed;
then the gods created the heavens below the thirteenth, and then they
made the water and created in it a great fish similar to an alligator
which they named @ipaqli, and from this fish they made the earth
as shall be told; and to create the god and goddess of water, all the
four divinities joined themselves together, and made Jalocatectli,” and
his wife Chalchiutlique,!! whom they assigned to be the gods of water,
to whom they betook themselves in prayer whenever it was needful.
Of this god of water it was said that he had his dwelling of four apart-
ments, in the middle of which was a large courtyard, where stood four
large earthen pans full of water. In one of these pans the water was excel-
lent, and from it the rain fell which nourished all manner of corn and
seeds and grain, and which ripened things in good season ; from the
second rained bad water from which fell cobwebs on the crops, and
blight and mildew ensued; from another fell ice and sleet; when from
the fourth rain fell nothing matured or dried. This god of rain water
created many servants, small of body, who were in the rooms of the
aforesaid house, and they held money boxes,” in which they aught
the water from the great earthen pans, and various rods in the other hand ;
and when the god of water sent them to irrigate any especial places, they
started off with their boxes and sticks, and let fall the water where they
were directed, and when it thunders the noise is caused by their striking
the boxes with their rods, and when it lightens it comes from within these
boxes. It is eighty years since Sefior de Chalco wished to sacrifice to these
servants of the gods of water one of his hunchbacks 8 and took him to the
Volcano, a very high mountain always covered with snow, fifteen leagues
distant from the City of Mexico, and placed the humpback inside of a
cave of which the entrance was closed up, and from lack of food
he became drowsy, and was carried to where he could see the aforesaid
palace and the manner of life of the deity ; sometime later the servants of
Sefior de Chalco came to look for him to see if he were dead, but finding
him living, took him home where he told what he had seen; in this very
year the people of Chalco were subdued by the Mexicans, and became en-
slaved, and it was said that this had been the signal for their loss as it took
place. Afterwards all the four gods, being united in work, they created
from the fish Cipacuatli* the earth, which they called Tialtecli, and repre-
sent as the god of the earth, extended over a fish as having been made of it.

619 [Phillips.

1883.]
CHAPTER 38D.

Of the Creation of the Sun, and how many Suns there have been, and how
long each one lasted, and how the Maceguates ate in the time of each Sun,
and of the Giants in those Days.

All the aforesaid was made, and created without any account being
taken of the year, except that it was all in one, and without any difference
of time, and it is narrated that of the first man and woman who did as has
been already said, about the time when these things began to be per-
formed, there was born a son to whom was given the name of Pileetecti,
and as there was lacking some woman for him to marry, the gods made of
the hairs of Suchiquegar,!® a woman with whom his first marriage took
place. When this was done all the four deities took notice that the half
sun which they had created gave but very little light, so they resolved to
make another half sun, so that it should illumine the whole earth. When
Tozoatlipuca saw this he became himself a sun in order to give light, as we
represent him in painting, and they say that what we see is only the bright-
ness of the sun and not the sun himself, because the sun rises in the morning,
traverses till midday, and then returns to the east in order to start again
next day, and that which is visible from noon till sunset is its brightness,
and not the sun itself, and that at night it neither shows itself nor has
motion. So from being a god Tezcatlipuca made himself a sun, and then
all the other deities created giants, who were very large men, and of such
extreme strength that they could tear up trees with their hands, and they
lived on the acorns of evergreen oak trees, and nothing else.!’ This state
of affairs lasted as long as this sun did, which was thirteen times fifty-two
years, which make 676 years.

CHAPTER 47TH,
Of the manner which they have of reckoning."

And since they commence to count time from this first sun, and their
reckoning runs on from it continuously, leaving behind the 600 years, the
period of the birth of the gods, and while Vehtlobus was in his bones, and
without flesh, as has been narrated, I shall now proceed to tell the manner
and order in which they reckon their year, and this is it. As has been
already said, each year contains 860 days, and 18 months, each month of
20 days; and of how they use up 5 days in festivals, which became fixed,
we shall speak later in our chapters touching on the feasts and their cele-
brations. Holding the year as has been said they correct from four
to four, and neither in their language nor in their paintings, take any ac-
count of more than four years. The first they call tectapatl, and paint it
as a stone or flint with which they cut open the body in order to draw out
the heart; the second, cal, which they represent as a house, for by this
name they call a house ; the third, tocAili, whom they paint with a rabbit's

ese

ee

et

Wop pee

- Phillips.] 620 [Oct. 19,

head, for by this term they name a rabbit; the fourth, acal, which they
represent as a sign for water. They reckon with these four numbers and
objects till they come to the thirteenth year, which then rounds the great
cycle, like the indiction or lustrum of the Romans ; and when finished
four times thirteen, the four years being run four times thirteen,
making fifty and two, this they call an age (epoch), and when
fifty and two years are ended, with much pomp they celebrate: the
great year, and place the period with those already passed, and re-com-
mence anew their four year computation ; the festival of which and the en-
trance into the new cycle was celebrated among the Mexicans by extin-
guishing all the lights that existed, and the priests would go to seek light
again at a temple situated on a high mountain near Astapalapa, where the
ceremonies took place, about two leagues distant from Mexico. They then
continued henceforth their count of four years, and then of thirteen, till
they had reached their fifty-two, and so on from fifty-two to fifty-two
for all time.

Returning to the giants who were created at the time when Tvacatlipuca
was the sun, it is said that when he ceased to be the sun, they all perished,
and tigers made an end to them and ate them up, so that no one remained ;
and these tigers were created in this fashion ; that after thirteen times
fifty-two years had passed Quequcoatl became the sun, and Teacatlipuca
ceased to be it, because he gave him a blow with a great stick, and threw
him over into the water, and there he was metamorphosed into a tiger, and
issued forth thence to slay the giants; and this appeared in the heavens,
for it is said that the wrsa major came down to the water because he is Tez-
cathipuca, and was on high in memory of him.

In these eras the Maceguales ate the nuts of the pine trees and nothing
else, which lasted while Quecalcoatl was the sun, during thirteen times
fifty-two years, which was 676 years, which being come to an end Tezcatli-
puca, on account of being a god did the same actions as his other brothers,
and hence was made a tiger, and gave a kick in the breech to Quecaleoatl,
which upset him and finished his term of being the sun ; and then a terri-
ble wind arose which carried away all the Maceguales, except a few who
remained suspended in the air, and the rest turned into apes and mon-
keys; then Tlalocateclt, the god of the lower regions, became the sun, and
remained so seven tithes fifty-two years, which are 364 years, in which
time the Maceguales had nothing to eat, but agigdutli, which is a species of
seed of a grain which is born in the water, When these years were over,
Quecalcoatl sent down a rain of fire from heaven, and deprived Atlalocateclt
of being the sun, and made his wife Chalehiutlique, the sun in his place,
who remained so six times fifty-two years, which are 312 years, and during
that time the Maceguales ate only a seed of a grain like maize named cin-
trococopi.” And so from the birth of the gods to the fulfillment of the sun
according to the count were 2000 and 600 and 20 and 8 years.

sy)
1883.] 621 (Phillips.

CHAPTER 5TH.

Of the Deluge, and of the Full from Heaven and of the Restoration.

In the last year of the sun Chalehiutlique, as has been told, it rained so
much water and so great an abundance thereof that the heavens them-
selves fell, and the waters carried away all the Maceguales that were, and
from them were made all manner of the fishes that exist at the present
day ; and so there ceased to be any more Maceguales, and the heaven
itself had ceased to exist, for it had fallen upon the earth.”? And when
the four gods had seen that the heaven had fallen on the earth, which took
place in the first year of the four after the sun had ended, and the rain had
fallen, which was the year tochili, they ordained that all the four should
make through the centre of the earth four roads by which to enter it in
order to raise the heaven, to assist in which task they created four men ;
one they called Ootemuc, another Yezcoaclt, another, Yzmali, and the fourth
Tenesuchi. These four men having been created, the two gods, Tezcatlipuca
and Qui¢vcoatl, then formed themselves into enormous trees,” Tezcatlipuca
becoming the one known as Tazecaquavilt, meaning the tree of the mirror,
and Quigalcoatl, the Quegilhuesuch, and gods and men and trees together
raised on high the heaven and the stars, just as they are to-day, and as a
recompense for having raised them, Tonacatecli, the father, made them
lords of the heaven and thestars ; and when the heaven was raised, 7ezcat -
Upuca and Quigalcoatl walked through it, and made the road which we
now see there, and met in it, and remained there in it, and held their
abode there.

CHAPTER 61TH.

What happened after the Raising of the Heaven and Stars.

After that the heaven was lifted up, the gods renewed life to the earth
which had expired when the heaven fell upon it, and in the second
year after the deluge which was acalt, Tezcatlipuca altered his name, and
changed himself into Mixcoatl,” which means viper of snow, and for this
reason he is painted among the godsa viper. In this year he desired to feast

-the gods, and for this purpose drew a light from the rods whence they were

in the habit of drawing it, and hence the origin of drawing fire from flint,
which are rods that have a heart. The fire being once drawn, it was the
festival of making many and large flames.

From this second year in which fire came forth until the sixth, nothing
happened noteworthy, except that in the sixth year after the deluge Qinteul
was born, son of Picenticli, eldest son of the first man, who, because he was
a god and his wife a goddess, being made of the hairs of the goddess mother,
could not die ; two years later, which was the eighth year after the deluge,
the gods created the Maceguales, just as they had formerly existed, and
there is no record of any other event till this cycle of thirteen years was ac-
complished. In the first year of the second cycle of thirteen years there-
after all the four gods came together and said that the earth had no light

———

wn

Phillips.] 622 [Oct, 19,

but was in darkness, there being nothing else to give any light save the
fires, so they created a sun to illuminate the earth, and this sun should eat
hearts and drink blood ; so to feed it they were obliged to carry on con-
tinual warfare to obtain for it blood and hearts. And since it was the will
of all the gods that it should be so, in the first year of the second cycle of
thirteen, which was the fourteenth after the deluge, they made a war
which lasted two years till it was tinished ; again in three years they made
war, in which time Zezcatlipuca created 400 men and five women, so as to
have some people for the sun to eat,”* these men lived only four years after
which the women were the sole survivors. In the decennial year of this
second thirteenth it is said that Suchigicar, first wife of Pigigiutecli, son of
the first man, died in the war, being the first woman to expire in warfare,
and much the next powerful of all women, so many as died in war,

CHAPTER 7TH.
How the Sun was made and what took place afterwards.

In the thirteenth year of this second cycle of thirteen, which is in the
twenty-sixth year after the deluge, we have seen how the gods agreed to
make the sun, and how they made war in order to give it something to
eat, Quicalcoatl wanted to make his son the sun, of whom he was the father
but who had no mother, and at the same time talocatecli, the god of water,
made to himself a son by Chalchiutli,* his wife, which is the moon,
eating nothing until (here there is a lacuna in the original), and they
drew blood from their ears,”* and with this they fasted, and they drew blood
from their ears, and their body in their prayers and sacrifices ; and this being
done Quicalcoatl took his son and heated him red hot in a great fire, from
whence he issued asasun to illumine the earth ; and after the fire died out,
Talocatecli,> came and threw his own son in the cinders from whence he
issued forth as the moon, for which reason he appears ashy colored and
obscure. In the last year of this thirteen, the sun began to give his light,
for before that time it had always been night, and the moon began to run
after the sun, and never to catch up with him, and they traversed the air
perpetually without ever arriving at the heavens,

CHaprTer 8TH,
Of what happened after the Sun and Moon were made.

One year after the sun was made, which was the first of the third thirteen
after the deluge, Camasale, one of the four gods, went to the eighth heaven,
and created four men andone woman for a daughter, so that they should go
to war, that there should be hearts for the sun and blood forit to drink ; and
being made they fell into the water, and then returned to heaven, and as
they fell and there ensued no war, the next year, which was the second of
the third thirteen,the same Camasale, or as he is sometimes called Miacoatl,
took a rod and struck with it on a rock from which sallied forth forty Chi-

*See Note 12,

a, q

Of
1883. | 623 [Phillips.

chimecas,® and this they say was the beginning of the Ohichimecas, which
we call Otomis, which in the language of Spain signifies mountaineers, and
these, as we shall narrate hereafter, were the inhabitants of this country be-
fore the Mexicans came to conquer, and to dwell there ; and in the eleven
years following of this third thirteen, Camasale*” did penance, taking the
thorns of the maguéy and drawing blood from his tongue and ears, and for
this reason it isthe custom to draw blood from such places with the thorns
whenever they supplicate the gods. He did this penance so that his
four sons and daughter that he had created in the eighth heaven
should descend and slay the Ohichimecas, so that the sun should have
hearts to eat; and in the eleventh year of the third thirteenth, down came
the four sons and the daughter, and placed themselves in some trees
whence they fed eagles; and now it was that the Camasale invented the
wine of the maguéy and other kinds of wines in which the Ohichimecas
busied themselves, and knew nothing better than drunkenness ; and being
in the trees the sons of Camasale, they were seen by the Ohichimecas, who
went to them, so they descended from the trees, and slew all the Chichi-
mecas, only three escaping ; one was called Xémbel, another Mimichil, and
the third was the Camasale, the god who had created them, and who
transformed himself into a Chichimeca., In the eighth year of the fourth
thirteen after the deluge there was a great noise in the heaven from
whence there fell a deer with two heads, and Camasale caused it
to be caught, and ordered the men who then inhabited Cuitlalavacu,
three leagues distant from Mexico, that they should capture that deer and
regard it as a god, and they did so, and they gave it for four years to eat
of rabbits and vipers and butterflies ; and in the eighth year of the fourth
thirteen Camasale had a war with some of his adjoining neighbors, and
in order to conquer them he took the aforesaid stag and carrying it to them
overcame them; and in the second year of the fifth thirteen did this
sane god Oamasale celebrate a festival in heaven, making many fires ; and
until there was completed the fifth thirteen after the deluge did Camasale
keep on continuously making war, and with it he gave nutriment to the
sun,

They say, and the paintings likewise show it, that in the first year of
the sixth thirteen the Chichimecas waged war against Camasale, and took
away his deer, through which he was enabled to be victorious; and the
reason why he lost it was that while wandering about the field he fell in
witha female relation of Zezcathipuea, a descendant of the five women whom
he had made at the time when he created the 400 men which latter died,
but the females remained alive, and this one was descended from them,
and bore a son who was known as Oeacalt ;°* and in this thirteen they rep-
resent that afterwards when Qeacalt (sic) was a youth he did seven years of
penance; wandering alone through the mountains, and drawing blood
from himself that the gods might make him a mighty warrior, And in the
sixth thirteen after the deluge began, this Veacalt to wage war, and he was
the first lord of Tula whose inhabitants chose him for their chief on ac-

PROG. AMER, PHILOS. SOC. XxI. 116. 44, PRINTED AUGUST 20, 1884,

a
Phillips.] 624 [Oct. 19,

count of his valor. This Qeacalt lived until the second year of the ninth
thirteen, being lord of Zula, and four years before that time he built a very
large temple in Zula, and when he had done it there came to bim Tezcatli-
puca, who told him, that towards Honduras, in a place which is now
called Tlapalia, there was a house built for him, and that there he should
betake himself and breathe his last, for that he must go away from Tula,”
in which town Geacalt was reverenced as a god; to what Zezcathipucu
said to him, he replied that the heavens and the stars had told him that
it-was his-fate1o leave.there within four years. .And so when these four
years were completed, he departed and took with him all the Afaceguales of
Tula, and left them at the city of Chulula, whence are descended all its
inhabitants, and others he left in the province of Ouzcatan, whence de-
scends the present popwiation of that place, and in the very same manner
he left behind him in Gempoal others who settled there, and he proceeded
on his journey till he reached Tlapala (sic), and on the very day in which
he arrived there he fell ill, and on the day following he died. Then Tula
remained depopulated, and without a lord nine years.

CHAPTER 9TH.

Of the beginning and coming of the Mexicans to this New Spain.

It is said that after the completion of ten thirteens after the deluge, which
are 130 years, the Mexicans were settled in a community named Azcla to
the west of the New Spain slightly trending toward the North, which was
very much populated, and in whose centre stood a mountain whence issued
a fountain which became a river, like Chapultepeque™® is in Mexico, and on
the other side of this river was another settlement, and a very large one,
named Ouluacan ;*' and since their computation begins with the first year
of their emigration, so from now on for the future we shall reckon time
starting from the year in which this Mexican agreed to sally out to find
new lands that they might conquer, and for that reason they chose
three war chiefs or captains, one they named Xinei, another Tee-
pagi, and the third Coantlque, and with these three started off many
Mexicans (the paintings do not set out their number), and they carried
with them the figure and manner of constructing their temples, so as to be
able to erect them to Vehilobi wherever he should come. So they took
their adieu of the temple they had in Agcla,* and began their journey,
for which reason the painting representing their expedition, makes its be-
ginning with the temple.

CHAPTER 10TH.
How they Departed, the People of Culuacan, and what Peoples went with
them, and how they were named.

As has been already narrated on the eastern side of the river they represent
the City of Culuacan, a very large city with many populous places around
it filled’ with people, on the account of which the inhabitants determined

—_

Or
1883. } 625 (Phillips.

to seek a country to settle in, and being united they took for captain and
war-chief one named Frqualtlatlangui, and they took the names of the
old towns and places they had left, and gave them to new ones in the
country to which they immigrated. It is ‘said that the following people
went with them, and each one took its own god which it worshiped, and
the manner of its own temple, for in each one the service was different,
and no, one was identical with another, for which reason they are painted
dissimilar; and so there went forth with them those of Qulwacan, which

was the principal city, and was placed in the new settlement distant two
leagues from the one whence they populated it as they came, of which
more will be said in the hereafter. They took their gods, named (inteul,
son of Pingetecli, Suchimulco™ went with them, taking his god named Que-
lazcl, who was the stag of Méacoatl** as has been told; <Atdtlalabaca,
went forth with his god Amémicl’, which was a rod of Mixcoatl whom they
reverenced as a god, and carried that rod in memory of him ; Mizquique,
went forth with Quicreoatl as his god; Ohalco* went forth with Tezcatli-
puca napatecti for his god. The people went forth of Tacuba, and Culu-
can and Ascapugalco, which was called Tenpanecas,*® and these took as their
god Ocotecli, which is fire, and for this reason they are accustomed to con-
sume in the fire all whom they capture in war. These people, say the Mexi-
cans, and no more sallied forth, although those of Zwzeuco"", and Tascala
and Guejogingo boast and vaunt themselves that they too came when the
others came from Mexico, and are also of that land. All these people with
their gods set out in this first year, which was tecpalt, and there went
forth of them forty bands.

CHAPTER 111TH.

Of the Road they journeyed and of the Places they went, and of the Time
they tarried in each Place where they were.

All having departed they came to two lofty mountains, in whose midst
they encamped and remained there two years, and as the days are not
painted that they occupied in reaching this spot, nothing appears more
clearly than that up to the time of their resting in these sierras they
reckon one year, and two years they spent there sowing what they had to
eat and carry off with them, and here they erected their first temple to
Vehilobo, according as they had done in that city.

These two mountains stood opposite each other, and their habitation was
in their middle.

After three years had passed since their departure from Astla (sic), from
when the Mexicans came forth, as has been told, they left the place or site
of the two hills where they had remained two years, after having built a
temple to Uchilogos (sic), as has been said, and came to a valley where
there were many great trees, which they named Quausticaca,* on ac-
count of the many pine trees that were there, and there they stayed a
year, which completed the four years since they had left their homes,

a)
Phillips.] 626 [Oct. 19,

Thence they traveled onward till they came to a place which they named
Chicomuatoque,® and they settled there and remained nine years, and
so here they completed the thirteen years from the time of their departure,
and when they left there they laid the place waste ; and there was born
in this place, Tlacuaquin, and Mangamoyagual and Minaqueciguatle, who
were the two males, and one woman, their chief personages, and here
was accomplished the thirteenth year of their exodus, and they began
to reckon the second thirteen.

When they had departed from Chivomueztoque (sic), they came to a plain,
which is the spot where at the time dwelt the Chichimecas, whose home
was in front of Panuco, and here they remained three years, and to this
valley they gave the name of Cuatlicamat. At the end of the three years
they went forth and came to a ranche which they called Matlauaoala,
where they dwelt three years, and erected a temple to Vehilogos, thence
they came to another ranche, named by them near the one where the
Otomies lived, the indigines of the land; and here they rested five years,
and erected another temple to Vehilogos, and here was fulfilled eleven
years of the second thirteen since their departure,

From this sojourning place they came to a mountain opposite Tula named
Joatebeque,”” and when they came the Mugeguales held in great veneration
the mantas of the five women whom Tezcatlipuca made, and who died the
day the sun was created, as has been said, and from these mantas the afore-
said five women came again to life, and wandered in this mountain, doing
penance, drawing blood from their tongues and ears; and when four
years of their penance had passed by, one named Quatlique who was a
virgin, took a small quantity of white feathers and placed them in her
bosom, from which she conceived without having known man, and there
was born of her Vehilogos, for a new birth, in addition to his other nativi-
ties, for he was a god all-powerful, and could do whatever he wished.

And here came again to life the 400 men whom Tezcutlipuca created, and
who died before the sun was made, and when they saw the woman was
pregnant, they sought to burn her, but Vehilogos was born of her fully
armed, and slew the whole of the 400 men ; and this the feast of his na-
tivity and the slaughter of the 400 men they celebrate every year, as will
be narrated in the chapter relating to their festivals ; and before the feast
there is a great general fast who shall participate, lasting eighty days,
during which they only eat once a day ; and these 400 men whom Ve/ilo-
gos slew, the inhabitants of the province of Cuzco” burnt up and took for
their gods, and reverence them as such down to the present day, and in
this way they celebrated for the first time the festival of the birth of Vehilo-
gos and the massacre of the 400 men by him.’

When thirty-three years had elapsed since their departure from their
home, they went forth from Coatebeque and came to Chimaleoque, where
they remained three years; thence they came to Hnsicow, where they
dwelt another three years, and built a temple and placed the mast of
Vehilobos (sic) ; and after the thirty-ninth year from their departure they

1883.] 627 (Phillips.

drew out the mast of Vehilobos (sic), and gave it to Vingualti, to
carry it with the greatest veneration on their journey, and they came
to Tlemaco, which is near to Tula, and raised a temple to Vehilogos (sic),
and remained there twelve years, and these twelve years being passed,
they departed thence and took up the mast of Vehilogos, and gave it to
Cagigi to carry. And after all this had happened, they came to Thitlala-
quia, © well known town, and it was on the borders of Tula, where they
rested two years and built a temple to Vehilogos ; and after these two
years the Mexicans came to the town of Tula itself, which in these days
was peopled with its aborigines, who were the Chichimecas, and when
they came to the said town they erected a temple to Vehilogos, and
placed before’ it the “andelabras that are now in use, in which they
placed cepal and other savory things; and as soon as the Mexicans
had come Vehilogos appeared to the inhabitants of the country in a
black form, and they heard Vehilogos wailing beneath the earth, and
they asked wherefore the god of the Mexicans was weeping below the
ground, and the answer because every inhabitant of Zula was doomed to
death. Four years later, an old woman, a native of Tula, went about
giving out flags of paper fastened to rods, and making it manifest to them
that they should get ready to die, because their time had come ; and pres-
ently they all cast themselves upon the stone on which the Mexicans were
wont to offer up their sacrifices, and the one of them who took charge of
the temple which was in Tula, by name Tequipuyul, who was a stranger
and a vagabond without employ, and whom they believed to be the devil,
slew them all; and before the Mexicans erected their temple, that stone
was a temple to the inhab‘tants of Tula; and so were put to death all the
inhabitants of Tula, so that not one remained alive, and the Mexicans
were lords of Tula.

Departing afterwards from Tula they came to the place where now
stands the town of Atvtoniltengo, where they remained one year, and
thence they came to the town of Tecuequiciac where they rested four years ;
thence they came to the town of Apazco, and from Pazco (sic) to Zumpango,
where they stayed three years, and as they arrived near the town of (um-
pango (sic), they encountered one sole Chichimeca, named Tlavizcal Poton-
gui, who went out to meet the Mexicans, as he saw them coming ; and they
sacrificed to Vehilogos, god of the Mexicans another Chichemeca, whom they
had made prisoner in battle, and they placed his lead upon a pole tor
which reason this town is called Zumpango, which signifies a pole that
transfixes human heads. Thence after four years they departed and came
to Tlilac, where they tarried seven years, and leaving there, as they were
on their road to Clautitlan, they lost one of their women who had been
captured by the Chichimecas, and taken to Michwacan, and from her were
born all the dwellers in Michuacan, who before that time were all Chichi-
mecas, and they pursued their road to Quatitlan, where they were one
year. Thence they proceeded and come to Heatebeque, where they stayed
one year, and when they left Cutebeque (sic), they reached Nepopoaleo,

.
Phillips.] 628 (Oct. 19,

which signifies a narrow passage where a shepherd can count’ his
flocks for here they took the number of those who came; and no
one knows how many there were of them, nor is there any memorial of
the number in their paintings. Here they built a house to Ovpan and to
Xincaque, who were those who took the census of the people as they came,
and from here went forth three Mexicans, one named Navaled, another
Tenugi, and the third Chiautotolt ; and these three went forth to settle Mari-
nalco, a town that exists at this day ; and being there the Mexicans built
atemple to Vehilogos at Gimalpal, two leagues from the City of Mexico,
and then the Mexicans gave the name of Tlutlatevique to a mountain near
Chimalpa, snd thence they came to another mountain named Quatitlan
which is two leagues from Mexico, where they rested four years, and
thence they came to a mountain named Visachichitlan, where at
the present the inhabitants of the suburb of Santiago live, thence they
came to the mountain called Teubulco, thence to Tenayucan, and here a
leading Mexican died, Tepayuca or Tehayuco, which was his name, and
they found a Chichimeca in this place for their ruler named Zloci ; here
they raised a temple to Vehdlogos, and sacrificed a woman and made a
grand festival, taking her there highly ornamented, as was their custom
when they offered up a woman-sacrifice. Having made the feast to Vehi-
logos, they departed and came to a mountain named Zepewaquilla where
they settled for nine years; and when the nine years were passed, they
descended from this mountain, and dwelt near a lofty rock which issues
warm water, now known as Hl Penoleiilo, which divides the suburbs of
Mexico and Santiago, and all was. barren up to the said rock, and there
flowed the stream of Chapultepeque, and they made a certain enclosed
place of chalk and stone to keep these waters, and they dwelt by them for
four years ; thence they came to Chapultepeque, where they gave a direc-
tion to the stream, and placed behind it many rods with pennons such as
the old woman gave to the people of Tula, when they wished to sacrifice
themselves, for which see what has been already narrated; then the
Mexicans ceased being in Chapultepeque, and went forward and came to
Tlachetongo, which is now San Ldzaro, near to Tianguee of the Mexi-
cans, and thence they proceeded to the suburb called Agualeomac, which
is nigh to the said Tianguez, and thence to Vetetlan, and thence to Lvocan,
which is the road of Cuyacan, and thence they came to Tenculwacan,
where at the present they make salt, and thence to a mountain named 7e-
petocan, which is near to Ouyoacan (sic), and thence to Vehilobusco, dis-
tant two short leagues from Mexico, named Olavuhilat in the Ohichimeca
tongue, because it was peopled by them, and in their religion they wor-
ship Vouchilti, who was the god of water ; and this god of water met* the
Indian who carried the mast and plumes of Vehilogos, and as he did
so he gave him certain arms which are those with which they slay the
water fowl, and a dart; and because Vehilogos was left-handed as well

* Topé means, first, to meet; second, to strike, It may be that it should read
“ touched,” be

9
1888. 629 [Phillips.

as was the god of water, they said that it must be his son, and the
four were close friends, and they changed the name of the town where
they had met with him, which was formerly called Vichilat, so that for
the future it was known as Vehilobusco.

CHAPTER

From thence they came to Culuacan, where they found for ruler Achi-
tometl, and then they passed onwards to the mountain named Visa-
chitla, which stands near Hstapalapa, and from there they came to Quesu-
male, where they dwelt three years ; and thence they went to Capulco, and
made a detour to Tacuxcalco, which is the road of Talmanatco, where they
built a temple to Veddlogos, and all the Mexicans assembled togetherat this
place, Tucuacalco, Xintega and Caley and Hscualt, being their war-chiefs, and
they spoke to all the people ; and because the Ohichimecas, the aborigines
of this land would not join themselves against them, but divided them-
selves off into many places, and in order not to be recognized altered their
fashion of wearing the hair, so it was all done ; because as they said Vehi-
logos had commanded them to act in this manner, and every one of those
who went away, carried off his weapons, and those who remained took
the plumes and deer skin of icoatl, and his darts for arms, and the
sack into which he was in the habit of throwing wild figs, because in
those days people ate nothing else; then they kept on still farther
to adjoining places in the neighborhood, and the war-chiefs addressed
the people, telling them that four years they had to be dispersed, hidden.
andat the end of the said time they should all be reunited at Cacaguipa ;
and when the four years were passed they came together and returned to
the mountain and bridge” of Chapultepeque, and there they captured
Copil, the son of the woman whom the Chichimecas had taken prisoner,
whence descends the people of Mechuacan, and they offered him up as a sac-
rifice, tearing out his heart towards the sun, and they remained dwelling
in Ohapultepeque fifteen years.

CHAPTER

Whilst they remained in Chapultepeque they had three war-chiefs,
one named Clautliqueg?, son of the chief who brought them, and
was known by the same name, as has been told, and Acipa, son
of Cipaytavichiliutl, son of Tlautzcal Potongui, and they chose this
latter as their ruler to rule over them, and he governed them all the
fifteen years they were in Ohapultepeque. This Vichiliutl (ste), had two
daughters, one named Tuzcasuch, and the other Chimalasuch ; and, as
we have already narrated, there was sacrificed in Chapultepeque, a son of
the woman whom the Chichemecas took to carry off to Mechuacan, whence
are descended those of Mechuacan, so they say that in this place also the
aforesaid gon of the said woman came to Mecbuacan to see two Mexicans,”
and when they wanted to sacrifice him, he said that he was not to be sac-
rificed except in Mechuacan, where his mother was, so over that they had

Phillips.] 630 [Oet. 19,

a fight by command of Vichiliutl and Quatliqueci, and conquering him
offered him up for sacrifice, and buried his heart in a place called Temestd-
tan, which was a City of Mexico, afterward founded in this place, and the
head they interred in Tluchitongo.
CHAPTER

These nine years being passed, they rested likewise twenty-five years
additional in peace and quiet, Vichiliutl governing them, and they built
on the hill of Ohapultepeque a grand temple to Vehilogos ; and while they
were here, the Mexican aborigines, who were all Chichimecas, joined them-
selves together and assaulted them, and sat down-their camp to besiege
them near to the southward of Chapultepeque, and when night came
on they fell upon the Mexicans and slew them, so that but few
escaped by flight and took refuge among the canebrakes and recesses of
the lagoon which was near by ; and they burnt the temple which had
been built, and the people of Caléoca captured the two daughters of Vehi-
Wutl, and carried them away captive ; and also was Vehiliutl taken priso-
ner, and the men of Culwacan slew him after he was captured ; and those
who fled and escaped were hidden for eighty days in the canebrakes, and
ate nothing but herbs and vipers, and they bore with them Vehilogos
being (here occurs apparently a lacuna in the MS.).

CHAPTER

We have told how the heart of Qopil, the son of the woman who went
to Mechuacan* was interred at Tinustitan, and the reason why was that one
day when Coautliqueegt was standing beneath a hut built of branches
there appeared before him Vehilogos, and ordered him to bury the heart in
that place, for in that place was to be his home, and he went there for
that reason, and was buried there.

CHAPTER

When all the aforesaid had taken place, the Mexicans who had been in
hiding among the canebrakes and herbage were driven out by the great
hunger they felt, and came to Oulwacan to seek for food ; and they told the
people of that place when they reached there that they had come to serve
them, that they should not slay them, and they prayed to Veddlogos, for
him to give his orders that they should not be put to death ; and they gave
to the men of Culuacan the plume and the staft of Vehdlogos, and re-
mained in their service. In these days Achitomel was lord of Culuacan,
and Ohalchiutlatonac the chieftain, and they had a very fine temple in
which the people of Oulwacan celebrated a feast to Qiguacoatl, the wife
of the god of the infernal regions, whom the people of Oulwacan reverenced
as their especial god.

CHAPTER

For the space of twenty-five years the Mexicans remained under the

dominion of the people of Culuwacan during which time the people of Cul-

* Mechoacan, El tierra de pescado (Garcia, v, 825).

1888.] 631 [ Phillips.

wacan waged warfare against the people of Suchimilco, and in order
to prove if the Mexicans were really warriors, they ordered them to
go with them to help them; and the Mexicans thinking they were
regarded as women, sent ten Mexicans, and no more, with them to the
war, and the remainder stayed in their houses, which they possessed in 7%-
qupan", at that timea domain of Culuacan, and they gave orders to the ten
men who went, that they should not slay any of the Suchimilcans, but
that they should make them captives and cut off their ears; and the ten
Mexicans did as they were directed so well, that they made prisoners of
eighty of Suchimilcans, and from whom they cut off the ears, and from
this the men of Oulwacan recognized that the Mexicans were men of war.

JHAPTER

At the end of the aforesaid twenty-five years the Mexicans left a temple
which they had built to Vehdlogos in Culuacan, and erected another very
large one at Ticapaa"”, and when the Culuacans saw so grand a temple they
asked the Mexicans what they were going to have in that temple, and
what they should place in it’; to which they were answered hearts, and
when the Culuacans heard this reply, they threw straw and filthy things
into the temple, mocking at the Mexicans. Then the Mexicans* who was
called Avengi, and sacrificed her to Vehilogos smeared blood on the walls
with one of her legs ; and when the Ouwluacans saw this sacrifice they were
astounded, and arose against the Mexicans, and they allran near to Cat-
itlan, a river which flows close to Culwacan, and kept on flying all the way
to Neatiquipaque in which place at this day there are ten households that
are subject to Mexico, and Cowcogi, chief of Culuacan, looked favorably
upon the Mexicans, and because they had risen against the Mexicans, he
slew many Culuacans,

CHAPTER

When all the aforesaid twenty-five years already written about had
elapsed, there began the first year in which they commenced to enter into
the bounds of Tenustitlan, Mexico, and to populate it, and they came to
Istacaico, which is a country near Mexico, and thence they went to
Mizuacan, where a woman bore a child to which they gave this
name, which signifies the fertile, and from there they settled in a
suburb named Temaecaltitlan which signifies the suburb of the bath,
and is in these days the district and suburb of St. Peter and St. Paul,
and in the place it said that some Mexicans who carried Vehilogos went
astray, murmured against him, and Vehélogos told them in their dreams that
things must be as they had been, but that they were near to the place
where they were to take their final rest and home, and that those who had
murmured against him had sinned like men of two faces and two tongues ;
and in order that they should obtain pardon, they made themselves
a head with two faces and two tongues, and having made the head of it
of the grains that they ate, they shot arrows at it, and covering up their

PROC, AMER, PHILOS. SOC. XxI, 116, 48. PRINTED AuGusT 19, 1884.

Phillips.] 632 (Oct, 19,

eyes, those who had shot at the figure, sought to find it, and finding it
they ate it up, dividing it up among them all; and so it was performed,
and they all came together and settled in Zatiluleo, which was a small
island, and is now known as the suburb of Santiago. In this first year in
which the Mexicans came to the aforesaid place, Vehilogos appeared to one
of them named Jiunche, and told him that his home was to be in this
spot, and that the Mexicans would not have to wander any farther, and he
should tell them that when it was morning they should go seck a man of
Culuacan, because he had abused them, and take him and sacrifice him, and
give him to the sun to eat. So Xomemitleuts went forth and found a man
of Culuacan named Chichilquautli, and sacrificed him to the sun on going
out; and they named this place Quanmiwtlitlan,’® which afterwards was
called Tenustitan, because they found there a wild fig tree grown on a
stone, and the roots thereof grew forth out of the place where lay buried
the heart of Copil as has been already narrated,

CHAPTER

In the second year of the settlement of Mexico the Mexicans began to lay
the foundations of the large and important temple of Vehdlogos, which
kept on increasing at a great rate, for every ruler of the dwellers in
Mexico who succeeded another in power added to it a building equally as
large as the original one which the first inhabitants had erected there ; and
this the Spaniards found very tall and strong and broad, and it was much
to look at.

In these days the Mexicans had for their ruler Jiancweitl, a woman of
importance who had power over them ; and she was the wife of Acama-
pichi,” a native of Culwacan, and she was of Coatlixan, and although of
OCuluacan, descended from the Mexicans, for her mother married there one
of the chief men of Culuacan, and the mother was a Mexican; and her
husband, at the suggestion of his wife, came to Mexico, and she told them
that as he was of the best family and they had no lord, they should take
liim for their ruler, and so he was the first ruler, and his wife died in
twenty-fourth year after the foundation of Mexico ; and after her death
they chose him for lord because in her life he was only looked
upon as the chief man ;°° three years before this, which was reck-
oned as twenty-one years from the foundation of Mexico, the Mexicans
made war upon the people of Culuacan, and burnt their temple. In the
next year, the twenty second from the foundation of the city, the Culua-
cans took notice of the great progress the Mexicans had made in those
twenty-two previous years, and were smitten with fear, and placed their
gods in a canoe with which they went to Suchimitco ; and when they had
reached the town of QOuantlecaatan, the sun shone forth with so much
brilliancy that his rays struck them blind, and so they could not see until
they had come close to Mexico ; and when they kad recovered their sight

they placed their gods ih Mexico, and built for them a small temple a

short distance further on than the place where now stand the shambles.

1883.] 633 [ Phillips.

In the twenty-eighth year from the foundation of the city in which the
fifty-two years were fulfilled, there was held a great public festival in
which all light was extinguished throughout the land, and when it was
all extinct they would draw fire anew from the mountain of Lstapatapa.
This festival took place from every fifty-two to fifty-two years, so that the
year that completed the four times thirteen years was the fifty-second one.

At the thirty-first year from the foundation of the city fire first began
to issue forth from the volcano, and in the forty-seventh the Mexicans
conquered Tenayuca, and burnt its temple, which was of straw, and the
people of Tenayuca were Chichimecas.

In the fifty-second year of the foundation of the city the people of Tati-

lulco petitioned for aruler Teguxomutli, the lord of Escapucalco, and he gave
them for their master Zeutlewac, whose rule did not endure forty days, for
he bore too hardly upon their braves, and they helped him in no manner,
Tecucumutli, who was a Mexican, was chosen for their lord by those of #s-
capugaleo, as one of the two which it was their custom to have, and they
have always had that number, and have to this day.
a Quaquanpuanaque was the second ruler of the Tatilulcans whom the
lord of Hscapugaleo gave them; his reign lasted fifty days, at the end of
which time they fled away from him; he is represented with claws on his
feet. In the fifty-third year of the foundation, Acamapichi was made
ruler of Mexico. In the fifty-sixth year the Mexicans made war upon the
Suchimileans, and burnt their temple; and in the year 59 Acamapichi
conquered Mezquiqué. In the year 68 from the foundation of the city there
went forth from Mexico forty men and women by Guaximalpan, and the
Otomis of Matalgingo found them, and slew them by treachery in Outtra-
lawaca (sic).

In the seventieth year from the foundation of the city Acamapicht con-
quered Cuttralavaca, and burnt for them their temple. In the seventy-
third year Lord Acamapichi died, and they made Vichilivei, the son
of Acamapichi, their ruler. In the year 75 Miciugixiuci, the daughter of
Liscoagi, lord of Cuernavaca,® wife of Vieilivgi, bore Mutiguma, the
elder, who first was called Iluccan Minagi, and afterward Mutiguma ;
because his father was lord against the will of very many people, the
son changed his name into Mutiguma, which signifies angry lord. In
the year 79a sister of Viedliues married with Jsélisuchile?, lord of Tezcuco,
and bore Negavaleuyuct, who became lord of Tezcuco. In the year 81 the
Mexicans conquered Quaximalpan from the Otomies.

In the year 85 from the foundation of the city the Mexicans conquered
Capiscla, and in the same year Quaneimalco, in the province of Chulco,
and in the next year they waged war against all the aforesaid peoples, and
in that year they gave themselves up. In the ninetieth year from the
foundation they conquered Tezequiaque. In the ninety-second year the
Mexicans sent out seven of their chieftains to ascertain if the peoples of
Puchitlan were for war, and as they passed by Xaltocan three of them were
treacherously made captive and murdered, and the other four escaped by

Phillips.] 634 [Oct. 19,
flight. In the next following year they conquered the province of Taz-
cuco, and they began upon Zepepan, much against the wishes of its ruler,
who, when he saw them, went away and fled to Teemuluco, a town of
Suyocingo ; the father (here occurs a lacuna) being dead, because they were
at peace with the Mexicans,

In the following year 94, Vigtluicin died, and they took for their lord a
brother of his named Ohimalpupucagi. In the year 97 the people of Tue-
cuco gave themselves up to Ohimalpupucagt, and in the same year they
captured Tulancingo, and the Mexicans were a whole year in making
themselves masters of it. In the year 99 the people of Tatiluco fled
to Tula, andas they had died out, and had left their god, named
Tlacauepan there, so they took him and carried him to Tatilulco. In
the year 105 from the foundation of Mexico, Tegocumuc, lord of Hsca-
pucaleo, died, and as Mactlato, son of VYocwmuc was lord of Cuiua-
can in the lifetime of his father, and as his father was now dead, he came
to be lord of Heapuqalco ; and this one gave orders that there should be «
general uprising against, Mexico, and when Ximalpupacagi saw that the
land was in rebellion, he slew himself, and being dead the Mexicans chose
as their lord one of his brothers named Jzewagi ; and when Tlacateulti lord
of Tatilulcoco saw the great force and command that the lord of Ascapu-
calco had, he fled away from him, but to no avail, for he was captured
near the fountain of Saltoca, and there they slew them ; and it was because
formerly, when he was lord of Hscapugatco, the lord of Tatiluco seduced his
wife, and for that reason the captive was ordered to be slain; and in this
year Necagualeuyuci fled from Zezcuco,* because the Tezcucans were in re-
volt against Mexico. In the following year 106, the natives of the country
endeavored to make war against Mexico, by order of the lord of Hscapugal-
co, but one of the chiefs of Hscapugaleo, named Totolayo, made peace with
Mexico in the year 108, and the inhabitants of Mexico would not permit of
a peace unless they slew the lord of Hscapugatco, and seeing how on ac-
count of their desire for a peace they could do no other thing, they caused
him to be slain, and so it was done (Jn the year 109 Tatiluleo rose in re-
volt), and in the year 112 they came into conflict with the Mexicans, In
the next year, 118, Quautlatoagi, the lord of Tatiluco (sic), revolted against
Mexico, and one night in his dreams there appeared to him one of the gods
they worshiped who told him he had done wrongly, and for this reason he
rendered himself up at Mexico, and the Mexicans were unwilling to slay
him, so they handed him over to his own people that they might put him
to death, and go they killed him, In the 117 the Mexicans gained Guau-
titlan, and in the next year Izcoact died, and they raised to be their lord
Mutiguma, the elder. In the year 125 of the foundation of Mexico, Vehilo-
dos (sic), renewed himself, and made himself enormous,

Tn the 128 at the Easter-of-Bread season there fell such a terrible hail,
and so much of it that the houses were destroyed and fell in ruins, and the
lagoon froze up. In the year 132 there was terrible hail and famine, so much

* Tetzeuco, (Molina); Tetzcoco (Buschman, 697).

~
1883,] 635 [Phillips.

so that in the next year it was ordered that if one took but a thread of maize,
even if the maize field belonged to him, he should die for the act. In the
year 136 Moteguma the elder, having made a round buckler (or disk*) of
stone, the same which Rodrigo Gomez drew forth, caused it to be buried at
the door of his house, and placed a hole in the middle of it, and it was a very
big hole, and in that hollow they placed the captives taken in war, fas-
tening them to it, so that they could command only their arms, and gave
them a shield and a sword of wood, and they brought in three men dressed
respectively as a lion, a tiger, and an eagle, and all these fought the prison -
er, and wounded him; then they took a large knife and cut out his
heart ; they made these knives out of stone, under this enormous large and
round stone ; and afterwards the others who were lords of Mexico made
two other stones and placed them, each lord his own, one over the other,
and the one they took away, and it stands to this day underneath the
baptismal font ; and the other was broken up and burned when the Span-
iards entered, and the very first persons who used this stone were the peo»
ple of Cuaistravaca.

In the year 189 Orwistravaca was taken, and much precious stones were
brought to Mutecuma In the year 141 the Mexicans took Quetlasta.
In the year 147 Motecuma (sic), died, and. Avayacagin, his son, was raised
to be lord. Inthe year 151 Mochiugi, the lord of Tutilulco, surrendered him-
self to Mexico, and in the next year the people of Quetlasila revolted on
account of the annual tribute of twenty men, and they took refuge in a
house filled with red pepper (agt), and consumed themselves with fire ;
but soon in the year 158 they were subjugated. Next year Avayacagi made
Oitlaleoagi the lord of Malinalco. In the year 155 Axaycagi seized three
men himself, and was wounded, and so he personally gained Matalgingo.
The following year, 159, Avayacag? died, and they made his brother, 7vzqo-
gteact, lord of Mexico.

The following year, 160, they endeavored to make Vchilobi very large,
and almost all, even to the infants, set to work on him. Next year they
held a festival in the temple of Vehilové (sic), with the blood of the Matal-
gingos and Tlaulans, for they slew many of them. In the year 164 Tizcogi-
cagi died, and his younger brother Awigogi was raised to be lord of Mexico.
Next year Vehilovi (sic) was finished by Audgogi and he sacrificed many
people on that occasion. In 176 the water rose so high in the lake, espe-
cially the river of Oudwacan, that all the houses were drowned, and the
water came up to the first circle of Vehilodi, and the houses which were of
adobe fell in ; and it is said that the water that rose was black and full of
vipers, and it was looked upon as a miracle. In 180 Arcogi (sic), died, and
was succeeded by his brother Muteguma, who was the last lord. In 182
Mutecuma built a temple to Quigaleoatla, where, at the present time, stands
the house of the bishop, and covered the roof with straw. Next year the
lightning fell on it, and consumed it, ’twas said that the bolt was sped by
Tlaloque, the god of water. They built a very large temple to the honor

* Rodela,

Phillips. 636 [Oct. 19,

of Qintelil, the son of Piciutetl. In the year 184 the inhabitants of Mexico
slew many of those of Qvgola, whom they had captured in war; having
stretched them out on two pieces of wood in the form of a St. Andrew’s
cross, they shot them to death with arrows, and every year they celebrated
this festival. In the 185th year from the foundation of Mexico, the fifty-two
years were completed, and Mutecuma celebrated the festival for the last
time. In the 189 there appeared an omen in the heavens, which arose from
near the summit of the volcano and floated on high over the city, and it
was of a white color as broad as two arms ; and Moteguma endeavored to
discover what this thing might portend, and his wise men responded that
it foretold his decease in that year, and it turned out that this was the very
year in which the Christians appeared on their journey to this land, In the
year 193 the Zascalans®* laid siege to Guawocingo, and they were reduced
to great straits through hunger, until Muteguma brought them assistance,
and took some of them to Mexico, and others of them he placed there for his
defence ; and they prayed to Camastle, their god, and after that they had
made an end of prayer, they rose in revolt so that the Mexicans let go
their prisoners and returned to the city ; and the people of Guavocingo slew
the Mexican women who had intermarried with the men of Guaaocingo,
and all their sons, because they were of Mexican blood.

In the year 196 in Guagacalco (sic), came two ships which were received
at Vera Oruz de Paz, to spy on whom Mutecuma sent one of his people,
and soon Mutecuma said that these were his gods; the ships remained at,
Guacacualco (sic), and said they would return a year later ;*° the day they
arrived at Guacacaleo was called centochil ; the port of Vera Cruz bore the
name of Chalchuecan. In the year 197 came the Marquis to New Spain to
whom Mutecuma sent an envoy to Vera Cruz with many shields and
plumes, and a sun made of gold, and a star of silver; they made them-
selves understood by the Indians by means of an interpreter named Marina,.5*
Afterwards the Marquis came to Cempoal, where they received him with
trumpets. Thence he proceeded to Zascala, where the warriors sallied
forth to battle, and all who came forth were slain; and he being
informed that the Tascalans desired to massacre the Ohululans, he
joined with them in another place and slew them all. It is said
that whilst the Marquis was in Ohulula, he sent Alvarado to the proy-
ince of Chalco, who returned with the information that the land and
the people were both bad, and that he should turn back ; on which Za.
maya, the lord of Yempoat said that he had better march to Mexico, where
Mutecuma lived very richly, and that everything he owned was made of
gold, and that he styled himself lord. The Marquis was forty days in Chu-
lula. Then there came on the behalf of Mutequma, Vienagual, the father
of Zapia, who was with the Marquis, to tell him by the orders of Mute-
cuma, that he would give him much gold and silver if he would turn
home again ; him the Marquis caused to be seized which caused great fear
to Mutecuma, (In this year 198 was held the festival of Vehdlobi), and
Mutecuma died from the effect of a blow with a stone thrown by one of his

1883.] 637 [Phillips.

own subjects, who would not listen to him, but used opprobrious language
to him; and they put in their Veilobé beams, and the bravest soldiers
whom the Spaniards were unable to rescue when they left the city, and
who were all put to death. One night the Marquis left the city and went
to Tascula, where he was received by its lord, Xicotenga.

On the death of Muteguma, the Mexicans chose for their lord Cuitlavagi,
lord of Hstapalapa, a brother of Mutecuma, he ruled eighty days, the
smallpox® broke out throughout all the Indians, and many perished be-
fore they returned to subjugate the city. :

The Marquis came to Zezcuco having conquered all the land in its vicinity,
and the people of Chalco made war on it ; while he was in Tezcuco, Guwate-
mucd, son of Vigogi, was chosen: lord, and he made war on Chalco, and
without cause he slew six of their chiefs (in the year199). It took the Mar-
quis eighty days to conquer his way to Mexico. The Marquis made Jstisucht
lord of Mexico, who in the year 200 died, lord of Tezcuco, and Juan Velas-
quez, deposed him, and reigned eighty days. Guatemuga was made lord of
Tatiluleo (year 201), and presently sent to all the surrounding people to
call them to a war against Mexico; and these people came at once and in-
formed Juan Velasquez of the matter, and he said it made no odds to him,
for he was not its lord. The Marquis left new Spain in peace and went to
Honduras (called in Indian Guaimula), and left his subordinate deputy,
Peralmildez, as Captain-General, and returned to Castile. Don Martin, son
of Mutecuma (year 202), and the deputy who were named in place of the
Marquis, made requisitions on the Mexicans for gold and silver, and they
put to the torture one Rodrigo De Paez, because he would not tell where
the Marquis kept his gold and valuables, and finally as he would not give
them the information, they hung him (year 203) ; when the Marquis re-
turned, he seized the factor and overseer, but did not punish them as they
had deserved, but sent them back to Spain (year 204). The Marquis
made Zapia, Governor of Mexico, his Deputy, and in this year 295, Nuno
de Guzman came to Panuco. The Marquis departed for Castile. In the
year 206 there were rains of bloody drops, and it was the Sabbath about
two o’clock, and everybody saw them, and in this year there appeared an
omen in the sky of a white color, and shaped like a lance. In the year 207
Nutio de Gueman left for Neuwwa Galicia, and the four councillors of Cas-
tile came, Salmeron, Maldonado, Gainos and Quiroga ;© they made Don
Pablo, Governor.

(Nore sy H. P., Jr.—Here follows what should have been a chapter by
dtself, being entirely disconnected from the subject already treated of. The
historical part has come to an end, and this seems like an addition by another
hand, being somewhat of a repetition of matters previously touched upon. J

They calculate their year from the March equinox, when the sun casts a
direct shadow, and as soon as they can notice that the sun is beginning to
rise” they count it as the first day, and from the twenty to twenty days,
which make their months ; they reckon their year, with five days omitted,
so their year only comprises 860 days; and from the day which was the

Phillips.] 638 [Oct. 19,

equinox they reckon the day of their feasts, and so the feast of bread,
which was the day of the nativity of Vedélobi from the vlume, was the
day when the sun was in declination, and so as to the other festivals.

The Mexican Indians believed that in the first heaven there was a star,
Vitalmene,®® which was a woman, and Tetal Latorras (sic), who was a male,
whom Tenacatecli (sic) made for guardians of the skies, and the woman
never is seen because she is on the road that the heavens make.

In the second (heaven) they say there are certain women who have no
flesh whatever, but are all bones, named Tecaucigua,® and otherwise called
QYigimine ; and that these are placed there so that when the world comes
to end, their duty will be to eat up all the men.

And when the old people are asked when the end of the world shall
come, they say they don’t know unless it is when the gods themselves
shall all become extinct, and 7lazquitlepuca (sic) shall carry away the sun,
and then all things shall pass away.

In the third (heaven) are the 400 men whom Tezcatlapuca (sre) created,
and who were of five colors, yellow, black, white, blue and red, so these
kept ward in the heavens.”

Tn the fourth were all manner of birds who from thence descended to
the earth.

In the fifth were vipers of fire, whom the Mire-god had made, and from
them issue the comets and omens of the heavens. ’

In the sixth were all the winds.

The seventh was full of dust which thence came down on earth.

In the eighth all the gods came together, and from there no one could
ever ascend higher, to where dwelled Tenacatli (sic) and his wife ; and no
one knows what is in the rest of the upper heavens.

Being questioned as to the sun’s whereabouts, they replied that he
dwelt in the air, and traveled in daytime and not at night, because he
returned to the east when he had reached the summit at midday, and that
his light then was that which already shone forth towards his setting-
place ; and that the moon is always traveling after the sun, and never
catches up with him.

Being questioned as to the matter of thunder and lightning, they said
that the Water-god had many subjects made by him, who carried each one
an earthen money-jug' and a rod, and that from these earthen vessels
they cast down the rain, and that the thunder was when they struck the
vessels with their rods, and that the lightning flashed from these vessels.

The people of Culuacan say that they came, conjointly with the Mexi-
cans, to Tula, and there they split and went direct to Ouluacan, and
thence to Suchimiteo and Malinaleo and Ocuyla. These four towns they
settled and on the way peopled Cuitralavaca, and so 120 years passed
away, and afterwards the Mexicans came and arrived at Chapultepec, as
has been said, and waged war on the people of Culuacan.

In the histories of Mexico, represented by Indian paintings, are shown
many naked Indians, at whose beginning are some clothed in plants,

1883.] 639 [Phillips.
thereby meaning to convey that when they fled to Mexico they were
dressed in that manner, and that they subsisted on what they could obtain
by fishing, and that they had to undergo great hardships ; and they paint
no more valiant warriors. And these were forty years without a lord.
The first lord of the Mexicans was named Acamapichil, who lived twenty
years. In this time it happened that two women misbehaved, the one
with the other, and they stoned them to death close to Hsceapucalco, which
is called Teculuapa ; before this judicial act was performed, the lord of
Hscapucalco reported it to him of Guatlinchan, and the two reported it to
the lord of Mexico, and all of them ordered it to be done, And likewise
came to pass that Xilot Iztac, daughter of Anil Mixtlt, was married to the
brother of the lord of Ascapugalco (sic), and when he died his brother, the
lord of Ascapucaleo, took her for his wife ; and she went off to Suchimilco,

and did wickedness with Ananacalt, and when it became known to the
three lords, they took them and stoned them to death. They say it was
the custom that a brother’s widow could not lawfully remarry except
with a surviving brother, and if she married any one else she forfeited her
lands and all her possessions. The first lord of Ascapugalco was named
Tecocomucli.

At this very same time it came to pass that two lads stole the grains of
maize that had been sowed in the earth, and they were taken and sold
for slaves, and the price paid for each one was five mantas.

And in these days it happened that a woman stole certain maize from a
granary, and a man saw her and told her that if she would let him lie
with her he would not inform on her, and she did so; but afterwards the
man accused her of the deed, and the woman confessed all that had taken
place, whereupon she was acquitted, and the man was given as a slave
to the owner of the maize.

At this time it happened that two lads robbed five ears of maize before
it had ripened, and they were ordered to be hung, as it was a greater
crime to take them before they were mature than afterwards. And when
the first lord of Mexico was dead, the Mexicans remained three years
without a ruler, after which they chose Vi¢iliwtli, son of their first lord,
who lived twenty-five years. In his time it came to pass that a man of
Tezcuco kept a watch over his wife, and three days after her confinement
he caught her with the sacristan of the temples, and he seized them and
the three lords condemned them to death. And it also happened that a
man found his wife with another man, slew the man and not the woman,
and she came back to live with her husband, for which reason both she
and he were put to death.

When the second lord died the Mexicans chose Chimalpupuca fot their
ruler, who lived eleven years. In the days of this third lord it happened
in Chimaloacan that a woman saw a drunken man and went to him and
lay with him, and for this they stoned the woman, but inflicted no pun-
ishment whatever upon the man.

And at this time it happened that a man of Tenayuca had a granary of

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. soc. xx1. 116. 4c. PRINTED AUGUST 19, 1884.

Phillips.J 640 [Oct. 19,

maize, anda man from Guatlitlan robbed him by an enchantment cast
upon it, for he fell into a deep sleep by this contrivance, and the man and
his wife took all they found ; and when this was known to the three lords
they were both condemned to death, the man and his wife.

He who stole a hen was enslaved, but he who took a dog was not pun-
ished, for they said that the dog had teeth wherewith to defend itself,

When the third lord died the Mexicans elected to that power Tzcoagt.
And at this time the Hscapugaleans commenced a war against the Mexicans,
and called on the people of Tezcuco and Tultitlan, Quautitlan, Ten-
ayuca, Tlacuba, Atlacubaya, Ouhwacan, Ouliacan, Suchimiwo, Cuitlavaca,
and Mizquique ; all these peoples marched against Mexico, and were van-
quished,

Whilst the Mexicans were ruled by lords that part of Tutiluleo, which
now is known as Santiago, was likewise under rulers, for whilst Acamapi-
chiland Vichiliuitli reigned in Mexico, which was for forty years, in Tati-
lulco ruled Quaquapuauaque, the father of the lord of Hscapulgateo ; this
latter was for two years ruler of Mexico before they had a lord in Mexico ;
he lived forty years. And while there ruled in Mexico Chimalpupuci and
Jzcoags, there reigned in Tatilulco, Tlacateuci, son of the first, who lived
twenty-three years. Whilst Mutequma the elder reigned in Mexico, in Ta-
tululco ruled Quatlatloagi, son of Tlatecugi, and he slew the former, and
liyed thirty years. Whilst in Mexico ruled Avayaeagi, in Tutileulco ruled
Moquiuigin, brother of the last, and married to the sister of Aaayacact,
and on her account there was war between the two because she gave out
her husband was a man of war who had conquered the Cotastans and
Mexicans, and on that account his neighbors hired his services. Whilst
Teereicagi ruled in Mexico, in Tatilulco ruled Ouacolze'¢i, Tacaxcal
Lecli and Tlaueloquigi, and Tutilulco. Whilst Augogi ruled in Mexico,

1 Tatilulco reigned Qiguac Pupueu, who was the son of Tucatecal, and
son of Quatlatoagij, and Yulocoauigi. Whilst in Mexico Mutecuma then
reigned, in Tatiluleo there raled Zopantemitgi, Ticoque and Aguatal,
grandson of Muquinigi and Yezeiagi Tucuxcalcotlequinal, and this one could
now* with Muteguma. While Muteguma and Juan Velazquez and Tapia
were governors of Mexico, he who at first was not a chief personage
in the time of the Marquis, Don Juan, was governor of ZJuttlulco, the
father of him who is governor to-day, and he was a common man and
macgegual of Mexico,

They held certain laws in war which they executed in grand style ; and
it was the custom that if the captains sent out a messenger and he did not
tell the truth he died for that; and likewise they had another law that
any one who should give advice to their adversaries should die for it; and
likewise they slew any man who lay with a captive woman, and like-
wise he who was captured alive was slain. And if one captured a pris-
oner alive and another tried to rescue him, it was punished with death,
In war-time they had five captains who at the same time were judges,
There was a person who hunted up crimes and painted them, and gave the

1883.] : 641 (Phillips,

information to the five lords jointly, and after consultation with the chief
lord there were other five who carried into execution what the five had
decreed.

There were other laws in their Tianguez or fairs which are as follows :
If the son of the lord turned out a gambler and a swindler (tahur),
and sold his father’s possessions or other portion’ of land, he was
secretly choked to death, and if he was a macegual or fisherman, he
was sold into slavery. Likewise, if one stole magueys to the number
of twenty to make honey, they should pay as many ma~véas as the judges
should ordain, and if the party did not own sufficient or if there were
more magueys, he or they became a slave or slaves. Whoever should
borrow mantas asa loan, and neglect to repay them, should be a slave,
A. theft of a fishing net was to be paid for in mantas,and if the party did
not own them he became a slave. If one stole a canoe or vessel in which
people went, he should pay the value of the canoe in mantas, and if he
had not enough he became a slave. If a man lay with a woman slave
who was under age he became a slave also with her, and if she became
sick and died, he became a slave, and if she did not die he paid for her cure.

If any one brought a slave to Mscapucrico, where there was a slave
mart, and the purchaser gave mantas for him, and the seller unfolded
them and was content with them, if afterward he rued his bargain he
should return the mantas, but the slave became free. If any one did not
grow up to natural size, and the relations sold him, and it was known after-
wards, when he had come of age, the judges should order as many
mantas to be paid as to them seemed fit to give his owner, and the slave
became free. If a slave woman fled away and was sold to another per-
son, upon its being discovered, she should return to her master and the
price be lost that was paid for her.

Ifa man lie with a slave, and she dies, being pregnant, he shall become
the slave of her master, but if she conceive and bring forth a child, the
child is free, and shall belong to its father. If any conspire to sell a free-
man for a slave, and the fact become known, all who took part in the
affair shall become slaves, and one of them shall be given to the pur-
chaser, and the others be divided between the mother of the person wrong-
fully enslaved, and the informer who discovered the transaction. Any per-
sons who administer potions with intent to procure death shall be strangled
for the same, but if the person murdered was a slave, the murderer
shall become the slave of his master. If any one shall steal as much as
twenty arribas of maize, he shall die for it, but if less he shall be redeemed
by a ransom.

He who steals unripened maize shall be beaten to death with rods. He
who steals the yetecomatl, a species of gourd fastened with thongs, and
worn on the head with tufts of feathers, such as the lords wear, sprinkled
with green tobacco, he who steals it shall be garroted to death. Me who

“steals a chalchui, which was a string with certain computations forbid-
den to be owned by men of low degree, shall be stoned to death in the

Phillips.] 642 (Oct. 19,

Tianguez, wherever he may be. And he who in the Tianguez® shall
steal anything from the dwellers within the Tianguez, shall be stoned
to death. Highway robbers were also to be publicly stoned to death.
Any priest who got drunk was to be slain in the house where he became
intoxicated, and to be beaten to death with clubs ; and the marriageable
youth who got drunk was taken to a house known as tepuacali, where he
was choked to death; and any person of importance who held public
office and got drunk, was deprived of his position, and if he was a warrior
they took away from him the title of valiant man. Ifa father lay with his
daughter, both were to be strangled to death by a rope passed around both
their throats. He who lay with his sister was to be strangled with the gar-
rote, a crime they considered detestable; and if one woman lay with
another, they strangled them with the garrote. Ifa pontiff was found with
a woman, they slew him secretly with the garrote or burned him alive,
tearing down his house, and forfeiting all his possessions, and all who
knew the matter and kept silence about it and concealed it, were likewise
put to death. There was no punishment for adulterers unless they were
taken in flagrante delictu, in which case when caught they were stoned
to death publicly.
CHAPTER TH.
Whence originated the Lords of Tochimiteo.

The beginning of these lords was one Yzcocutl who came from Tula, and
dwelt in Atlivco where they received him for their ruler, and afterwards he
left them and settled in Xwetectitl and Vepevcan, now known as Tuchomilco,
and there he died. His wife was named Chimalmagi, and likewise she
came from Tula. On his death his son Tonaltemitl succeeded him, whose
wife was Qulpaloci, a native of Petlauca. On his death Qintlavilgs suc-
ceeded to his father’s power, his wife was Teyacapangi ; he was a native
of Ouyuacan, and left sons, who, however, did not inherit his position.

On Cintlavilgi’s death his two brothers, named Yateveyugi and (iva-
coagi succeeded him in reign, and they held equal powers; their wives
were natives of Vepetlavea. On the death. of these two lords they were fol-
lowed in their seignory by two others, Cacamagi and Civacoagi ; Caca-
maci was uncle of Civacoagi, who was the son of Yoteveyuc?, and their
wives were natives of Vepetlavaca. . On the death of these two lords, Cua-
pilé succeeded to the throne, and he was a grandson of Oivacvact; who was
lord before the other two; and Quapili, while still living, made his son,
Miwcoaci, ruler of a certain portion of the people ; the wives of the father
and son were from Petlauca, and in the days of these came the Xpianos.*
When these were dead, Don Miguel and Don Juan succeeded them, of
whom Don Miguel was the more powerful; and he came to the seignory,
because his uncle was Ouapili, and the former came forth in peace to the
Christians, while the latter fled away. The Marquis made him lord with
the consent of the people. Don Juan was his brother Miacoaci, and for

* Meaning Christians ?

|

1883.] 643 (Phillips.

this reason succeeded to the seignory ; the wife of Don Miguel was of
Quizuquechula, and that of Don Juan of Aupetiavaca.

Of the Manner in which they Reckon their Months and Days.

It is to be remarked that they consider twenty days as their week or
month, counting in both the first and the last as being but one day, as if
we should say there were eight days in the week, reckoning Sunday as
both first and last. Also they count time from four years to four years, be-
cause they do not number their years higher. Also (a leduTiay remy

In these festivals when the sacrifice is offered by the pontiffs,° they
cover up their heads with certain white mantas on which they arrange
white plumes, I mean on their heads, and they robe themselves in a
painted shirt open in front, and in this manner they sacrifice.

APPENDIX.

Annotations and Corrections to the Codew Ramirez.

1 Tonacatecli, called by Brinton (who follows the classical authorities) Tonaca-
teculli and his wite 7onacacihuatl, The name Tonacatecutli is supposed to sig-
nify Lord of our Existence, and Tonaca Cihuatl to mean Queen of our Existence,
(Vide Am, Hero Myths, p, 73 and note.)

2There were two Tezeatlipocas, the red and the black, of whom the myths
blended. (Brinton, A. H. M.,73.) The names of these four brothers are differently
stated by various authors, ezcatlipoca-Camaxtli was the spirit of darkness
(eo. lib., 68). (Lhe shining mirror.) Stone seats were placed around the streets
for him to repose on, on which no native ever dared to sit. Clavigero, 1, 244.

His principal image was Teotetl (divine stone), black and shining like marble
and richly dressed, He was called by Herrera (III, 11, ch. xv) Tezcaltiputqa;
by Boturini (p. 11) Tezcatlipoca; by Garcia (ry, 800) Tlezeatipuca ; Titlacauan was
also one of his common names, meaning ‘‘ we are his slaves.” (A. H. M., 106.)

Ofthe three names, the one given by Boturint is correct. According to Men-
doza (Anales de Museo Mexicano), the meaning of the word is brightness, dark-
ness and smoke, being the silver resplendency of the moon illuminating the
darkness of the night, breaking through a smoke-like obscurity.

Brinton (Am. Hero Myths, p. 71), leans to the more generally received inter-
pretation of smoky mirror (from Tezcapoctli), meaning the rising of the mist
from the surface of the waters. Tezcatlipoca was the god of gods, compared by
Garcia to Jupiter, the supreme invisible essence, “the most sublime figure in
the Indian Pantheon” (Brinton, lib. cit., 69) ; also the youth, omnipotent, exact.
ing of prayer, creator and disposer of men; the enemy, the worker and night
wind, The divine Providence according to Boturini, See note 7,

3 Camaatli. Also called Teotlamacazqui (the hieroglyphic of the priests). Tez-
catlipoca-Camaxtli the spirit of darkness, (American Hero Myths, Brinton, ch.
3. p. 68.) TiitlacAhuan, we are thy slaves. (Bot, xi.) (Cf, Note 27),

4Quatzalcoatl (Bot. 11.) Herrera 3, 8, xiv. Quetzalcoatl] (Brinton A. FL solves
passim, Quetzaleohuatl (Bot, 25) hieroglyphic of the Air. Quetzalcoatl (Garcia,
IV, vit, 262), wasa “ white man with a beard, of industry and intelligence, who
fled from the tyranny of Huemac (the great hand), King of Tula, and took refuge
at Cholulla. He is the spirit of light and culture, ever engaged ina continual
warfare with his brother, Tazcatlipoca, the spirit of darkness, (A. I, M.)

Quetzalcoatl (Clavigero, 1, 248), feathered serpent,” god of the air,

Vetancourt (Clav. 1, 250), Coatl, a twin, Quelzalli, a gem,

Phillips.] 644 (Oct. 19,

Quegaleoatl, por otro nombre yagualiecatl, The name was applied to him in
his relation to the winds, whose ruler he was, the words Yahualli ecatl, meaning
“ihe Wheel ofthe Winds,” Yahualli is from the root yvaual or youal, circular
or round, and the towers where he was worshiped were of this form, (A, H.
M., 121.)

5 Om tecilt. Qy. Ometochtli (two rabbits), the god of wine.

Omiticult. Clavigero 1, 245.

Ometeuctli and omicihuatl, god and goddess residing in heaven, propitious to
mortals, Also known as Cit/allalonac and Oitlalicue,

6 Moyocoya, or more properly moyocoyatzin, is the third person singular of the
verb yocoya, to do, with the respectful or reverential termination tain (A. H.
M., 70), meaning “ he who acts or does,’”’ Ramirez translates it as the omnipo-
tent” (todo poderoso); Brinton, the determined doer. The title is given himin
reference to his demiurgic power,

TEvidently an error for the terrible war-god, Huitzilopochtli, (Boturint 27;
Herrera ILI, rrr, 17, Vitzilipuztli, Lorenzana, I. Huitzilo-potzti.)

In the sixteenth century it was customary to express the same sound indis=
criminately by Viand JTui, (Orozco y Pérra. Anales 11, i, 71.)

Garcia (LV, 300) Huitzilopuctli answers to Mars. In this author the name oc-
curs most frequently as Vitzilipactli,

Vehilobos. Clavigero (Cullen 1, 254). Huitzilin, a humming bird, Opochtli, left.

Boturini wrong. The Spaniards, unable to pronounce the name, usually
ealled him Huichilobos, Orozco y Berra (Anales II, 1, p, 71), thinks that of all
the forms Vi(ziliutl is the most correct,

8 (Gipactonal, Boturini 46, the father superior to the son.) Gipastonal and
Uxumuco, more properly Gipactonal and Oxomuco. (Oxomozco, Botwrini, p. 46),
whose names have not been as yet satisfactorily explained, * Zonal is no doubt
from tena toshine,andecipactli * * * fromehipauac, beautiful or clear, (A, A,
M., 74. Vide Chavero, Anales, IT, 116.)

9Maize. Maize was the emblem of Centeotl, goddess of cereals, who was the
same as Xilomen (from Xi/otl,a young grain of maize), She was also the same as
Tzazolteoti, the Venus vaga, goddess of impurelove, L’Heriture hieratique Maya
par Leon de Rosny, p. 185,

10 Tlalocatecli, Tlaloe was, according to Boturini (p. 72), the second deity and
quasi minister of the Divine Providence. Brinton (A. H, M., 75, 123) considers
him as the god of darkness; his name being, according to some, wine of the
earth. Tal (Halli, earth) o¢ (ocquit), wine of the maguey plant; according to
others, dweller on earth, dlaili (the earth) and onae (being).

The name according to Brinton (A. EH. M., 123) should be Tlaloctecutli, lord of
the wine of the earth,

Garcia (LV, 11, 139, ch, vil) Tlalocatecutli is the god of water; Tlaloce (LV, virr,
ii, 143).

Clavigero 1, 251, Tlaloe, god of water; he resided on the highest mountains
where the clouds are formed

1 Chalchiuhcueitl (Boturini 25). La della Saya de Piedras preciosas, hiero-
glyphic of water; is generally shown with reeds. Probably took her origin
among canebrakes, Cf, Venus sprung from the Sea, 4

Chalchiuitlicue, Chalchihuitlicue, Brinton, (A. MH. M., 123, p.75), From Ohal-
chihuitl, jade. Cueitl, skirt, petticoat. Cf. Wilt.

If Tlaloc was the god of water and tropical rains, may not his wife have sig-
nified the verdant results from his beneficial showers,

Chalchihuitlicue. Clavigero (tr. Cullen I, 240), goddess of water, 252. The high
priest wore the same habit in which they represented her as the goddess of
water. Cf. p. 252, for names given by Torquemada and Boturint.

Chalchihuitlique was the goddess of water and companion of Tlaloc, Torque-
mada calls her Xochiquetzal, and Boturini, Macwirochiquezallé (Clavigero TI, 252).
According to the Codex Jelleriano-Remensis, Chalchiutli saved herself from the

1888,] 645 (Phillips.

deluge, Her name signifies “The woman adorned with a dress of precious
stones, According to Sahagun she was the sister of the Tlalocs, the rain gods
(Codex Troano, 102).

Chalchiuhtteuh, a modo de Esmeralda, Sandoval, Gram, Mex.,, 53.

12 Aleangia, literally, © money-jug of earthenware,

138 JTunchback. It was the custom among the Aztec lords to have among their
attendants for their diversion hunchbacks, just as the Mediseval barons had in
their train their fools and jesters, The sacred cavern was that of Cincaleo.

Quetzalcoatl was followed in his passage of the Sierra Nevada by hunchbacks,
who mostly froze to death (A. H. M., 115), These formed part of the suite of the
last Montezuma, They were interred with their Caciques., (Herrera ii, 165.)
Chalco, seems to be derived from Challi, an emerald. Buschman, 689.

M4 Qalled Qipagli in preceding part of the chapter,

Cipactli (A. A. M., 74, 126), the great fish. Cf, the fish Oannes in the Chaldean
mythology, Dagon of the Philistines and Phoenicians, Pisces of the Syrian and
Egyptian Zodiac; supposed to be sun myths, the sun rising out of the Kast.

Cipoconal and Oxomuco, the first created pair, qy. pisces of the Zodiac, &e,
Note 9. Chavero (Anales I, vir, 245) considers Cipactli the first light below the
horizon.

Jesus is represented as a fish, because the Messiah in the Talmud is called Dug,
i.e, the fish. King’s Gnostie’s and their remains, 138,

b Tlaltecli, the earth, from tlalli, the earth,

The wife of this son was made of the hairs of the divine mother of
the four brethren—gods, whose name was Xochiquetzal (Beautiful rose), (A.
H. M., 73, 74.)

VW Gareiu (Origin de los Indios, V, 1v, 327), gives a different account of the crea-
tion of which the following is a résumé:

“At the distance ofa league anda half from Guaxaca, in an Indian settlement
named Cuilapa, there is a convent of my order whose Vicar, at the time of my
coming there, owned a MSS, volume, * * * writtenin the figures used by the
Mexicans, and with the explanations thereof, setting forth the origin and crea-
tion of the world, and the deluge, &c. This book I tried by all manner of means
to obtain, but the holy father set too great a store on it to part with it, but
permitted me to make such extracts from it as I desired.

“In the yearand in the day of darkness and clouds, before there were any
days or years, the world was plunged into total obscurity, and all was chaos and
confusion; the earth was covered with the waters, and there was nothing but
mud and débris over the face of the globe. In these days there appeared
visible to sight a god whose name was the stag (Ciervo), and whose sur-
name was Lion-viper (Culebra de lion), and a very charming and beautiful
goddess, whose name was likewise Ciervo, and whose surname was Tiger
viper (Culebra de tigre). From these divinities originated all the other gods of
the Indians. As soon as these two gods appeared they took on human shape,
and being omnipotent and omniscient, they founded a huge rock (Pefia), on
which they built sumptuous palaces, made with the greatest art, where was
their home, and their abode on earth; and on the summit of the most lofty part
of the palaces, there stood an axe of copper with its edge upwards, upon
which the heavens rested, This rock and the palaces of the gods were on avery
lofty mountain peak (Cerro) near the pueblo of Apoala, in the Province known
as Mixteca Alta, This rock, in the language of that people, bore for its name
The-place-where-the-heaven-was, by which they meant to express that it was
the Paradise and abode of all manner of pleasure and happiness, and where there
was an abundance of everything that was good, and where not the slightest ele-
ment was ever.lacking to complete felicity. This place was where the gods
abode at their first coming on earth, where they remained many ages in quiet
and contented rest,as the locality was so pleasant and charming, but the world
was all in darkness and clouds, * * * Of these gods, the father and mother of

Phillips.] 646 (Oct. 19,

all the other divinities, in their palaces, and court, were born two sons, very
beautiful, shrewd and learned in all the arts and sciences, The first was called
The-wind-of-the-nine-vipers, which he took from the name of the day on which he
was born; the second received the appellation of the Wind-of-the-nine-caverns,
that being likewise the name of the day on which his nativity occurred, These
two youths were brought up in great pomp. The elder when he would amuse
himself, took the form of an eagle and went flying through the highest skies,
the second transformed himself into a tiny animal in the form of a winged
snake, with which he flew through the air with so great a velocity and subtlety
that he penetrated the hardest rocks, and became invisible. The effect of which
was that those who were over his head could hear the noise and turmoil that
was made below. The meaning of these figures was to exhibit the power that
these gods possessed of transforming themselves and of their returning to their
own shapes.

“These brothers then remained in their paternal home, living in comfort and
peace; they bethought themselves that they would make an offering and sacri-
fice to the gods, their parents, to effect which they took censers of clay with burn-
ing embers upon which they cast a certain quantity of ground poison in lieu of in-
cense, This, say the Indians, was the first offering ever made inthe world, After
they had made this oblation, the brothers created a pleasure garden for their rec-
reation, In which they placed trees and flowers, fruits and roses, sweet-smelling
plants and other varieties of vegetation, Here in this garden and orchard, they
refreshed and recreated themselves all the time and they made near it another
pleasure-ground (Prado), in which were stored all manner of things necessary
for the oblations and sacrifices which they had to make and offer to the gods,
their parents.

* Whenever these brothers left the house of their parents, they disported them-
selves in this garden, taking care of the trees and plants, and seeing to their in-
crease and preservation, and offering from time to time the aforesaid oblation
of poison, &c. They prayed to their parents at the same time, making vows and
promises, and supplicating them by virtue of the oblation which they were offer-
ing, and through the other sacrifices they gave them, that they would think
well of creating a heaven, and that they should shed a light upon the world,
thut they should create the earth, or rather let the waters sink and the dry
ground appear, for that they had no other abode and resting place than the
narrow limits of their garden and orchard, And still more to force the gods to
accede to their request, the suppliants pierced their ears with lancets of flint,
drawing blood from them in torrents, This they did also to their tongues, and
with the blood they sprinkled the branches and trunks of the trees by means of
a sprinkler made of the branches of the willow tree as a thing holy and
blessed, This action they performed to show their entire submission to the will
of their parents whom they regarded as being greater gods than themselves.
* * * These gods had children * * * after which there was a general
deluge in which many of the gods were drowned, When this had ceased, the
creation of the heavens and the earth was begun by a god whom they name
Creator of all things, who restored the human race, from which was populated the
Mixtec kingdom,’’

18 OF THE MEXICAN: YEAR,

Boturini 2, Gemelli (Anales I, '7, 299).
1 Tecpatl, (pebble) 1 Callt

2 Acatl, (reed) 2 Acatl

% Tochtli, (rabbit) 8 Tecpatl

4 Calli, (house) 4 Tochtli

Veytia agrees with Boturini,and Orozco y Berra (Anales 1,7, 299), accepts their
arrangement and nomen*“lature,

1882.] 647 [Phillips.

The eighteen months of the year are named as follows:

NAMES OF THE MONTHS.

(Lorenzina, 2.) Orozco v Berra (Anales IT, vrt, 294).

1, Atemoztli (water month) 1. Itzealli, Xochilhuitl.

2. Tititl (things evenand just) 2, Xilomanalzltli, atlacahu-
alco, Cuahuitlehua, Ci-
huailhuitl,

8. Yzealli (new creation) 8. Tlacaxipebnaliztli, cohu-
ailhuitl.

4. Xilomanizte (offerings of the new maize) 4, Tozoztontli.

5, Coanilthuitl (grand festival ofthe viper) 5, Hueytozoztli.

6, Tozcotzintli (lesser fast) 6. Toxcatl,Tepepochuiliztli.

7, Muey Tozcoztli (greater fast) 7. Etza)cua liztli.

8. Toxcatl (dangerous for the fields) 8. Tecuil Nuitzintli.

9, Kzalqualliztle (eating of dry fruits) 9, Huey tecnilhuatl.

10, Tecuilhuitzintli (feast of the youthful cava. 10, Micailhuitzuitli, Tlaro-

liers) chimaco,
ll, Muey Tecuithuitl (feast of elder lords) ll. Huey micail huitl, Xoco-
tlhuetzi.

12. Micta ilhutzintlil (lesser feast of the dead) 12, Ochpaniztli, Tenahuati-
latli.

13. Huey mictail huit (greater feast of the dead) 18. Pachtli, Teotleco,

14, Ochpanitzli (broom) 14, Hueypachtli,Tepeilhuitl,

15, Pachtlizintli (early grains) 15, Quecholli,

16. Hueypachtli ‘(grains and large trees) 16. Panquetzaliztli.

17, Quecholli (the flamingo ?) 17, Atemoztli.

18. Panquetzallitzli (pennons or banners) 18, Tititl.

DAYS OF THE MonrT HS,

Lorenzana (2) Chavero (Anales I, VIT, 245).
Cipactli (serpent) 1. Cipactli (the first light from be-
low the horizon)

Eheeatl (air) 2, Ehecatl (the wind)
Calli (house) 8. Calli
Jueztpallin (lizard) 4, Cuetzpalin
Cohuatl (viper) 5. Cohuatl
Miquitzli (death) 6. Miquitali
Mazatl (deer) 7. Mazatl
Tochtli (rabbit) 8. Tochtli
Atl (water) 9, Atl
Ytzecuintli (a common dog) 10. Itzeuintli
Ozmatli (a she ape) ll, Ozomatli
Malinalli (a mesh of cords) 12, Malinalli
Acatl (reed) 18. 1. Acatl

Then follows the second group:
Ocelotl (tiger) 14, 2. Ocelotl
Quaotli (eagle) 16, 8. Cuauhtli
Temtlatl (grindstone) 16. 4, Cozvacuauhtli
Quiahuit] (rainy water) 17,6 Olin,
Xochitl (flower) 18. 6. Tecpatl

19 7, Quiahuitl
20. 8 Xochitl
9 Ointrococopi, qy. from. cintli, spindles (Mazoreas), full of dry and cured maize
and cocopatic, something that burns the mouth greatly. (Molina sub vocibus,)

PROC, AMER. PHILOS, soc, xx1, 116. 4D. PRINTED AUGUST 21, 1884.

—

Phillips.] ', 648 {Oct. 19,

The story of the falling down of the heavens appears among the myths of
Samoa, where two trees are reported to have grown up and pushed them into
proper place. The natives of Vaitupu have a tradition in which two of the sons
of the first couple “ distinguished themselves by raising the heaven higher,”’ In 4
Nikundu, the legend runs of an universal da rknessin the beginning ofall things H
and that the heavens were down and resting upon the earth until raised by two
brothers. (Samoa, by George Turner, pp, 198, 283, 291.) A

21The two trees into which the gods changed themselves; more properly, Tez-
caquahuitl, the tree of the warrior, Quetzalveixochitl, the beautiful rose tree.
—A. H. M., 75.

“%Mixcoatl,a name of Tezcatlipoca, Brinton, A, H. M., 84, Iztac Mixcoatl
(A. H, M. 92), white-cloud, twin.

23 Four hundred men created. Brinton considers them to be the stars, espe-
cially as they later were translated to the sky. Codex Chimalpopoca (Myths,

New World, 207). Four birds devoured the antediluvian dwellers on earth,

4 They drew blood from their ears, &c, Inch, 8 (seq.) Camaxtli takes a maguey
thorn and draws blood from his tongue and ears, The Persians drew blood from
ears, arms and face, Cf. Garcia, iv, 801. |

% Talocatecli threw his son into the cinders, Should be Zlaloe, (Cf. Abraham [
and Isaac.) .

% Chichimecas (Garcia, V, 2, 822), offered no let or hindrance to the immigrants
who drove them away, but were filled with fright and astonishment, and hid
themselves among the most inaccessible rocks,

But the C.on the other side of the Sierra Nevada, where the Tlascaltecans
came, did not behave in this manner, but valiantly resisted the invaders, being
of gigantic stature, endeavored to drive them out of the land, but were ulti- 4
mately overcome by the force of the Tlascaltecans, Then they had resort to it
stratagem, and feigning peace and submission invited their conquerors to a |
banquet at which concealed men precipitated themselves upon the Tlascalte-

sans when they had become drunken and helpless, However, the Tlascaltecans
rallied to the assistance of their comrades, and being better armed and disci-
plined, ultimately defeated the giants, leaving not one man alive, After many
generations the barbarous Chichimecas became civilized, wore clothes and be-
came as other people, forming themselves a state. (Cf. Garcia, V, 802,)

Chichimeca, (Clavigero tr, Cullen, I, 91), according to some from Techichiani, my
sucking, because they sucked the blood of the animals which they hunted, ©,
‘calls them Chechemecatl, (Betancourt), from Chichimi, dogs’ beans, If the name
had been one of contempt they would not huve prided themselves upon it, as
‘they did, Another point to show it was an indigenous word.

A number of conjectural etymologies have been assigned for this name, but
all unsatisfactory, As this people appear to have been aboriginal it seems to
me that any attempt to explain its name by means of the language of the con-
querors must be futile, Those who speak an alien tongue have always been }
looked upon by their neighbors as barbarians, and even as not possessed of i
‘rational speech, but as using only an unintelligible jargon, The Latin dramatist
expresses the feeling in his lines, Barbarus hic ego, quid non intelligor nulli,

According to Garcia (V, 8,821), the word Nahuatl means the people that speaks
distinetly and makes itself understood (Cf. Sahagun X, 29.) (Buschman, 685),
“well sounding, clear, distinct.”

Boturini, 78. Chichimécatl, el que’ chupa, from their sucking the blood of
‘animals. Ohichimeans mamar, to nurse. Anales 3, 2, 60,

27 Camasale, more properly, Camaatli, qu.,a name of Tezcatlipoca (A. H. M.,
90) 3 la faja noturna (Anales 8, 863). He was worshiped by the Tlascallans, being
there the same as Huitzilopochtli. Clavigero 1, 2, 111. (Cf. Note 38.)

28 Co acatl, one reed, the day of Quetzalcoatl’s birth, and by which he was often
ealled. It was a day of evil omen, and no one born on it could hope for success,
This year which returns but once in the Mexican cycle of fifty-two years, was

Scope

1883.] 649 [Phillips.

the one in which the god Quetzalcoatl was expected to reappear; and it so hap-
pened that in this very year Cortez entered the land of Mexico, Gloomy
prophecies had preceded his advent, and he meta sovereign predisposed to sub-
mission,

* Tlapalla, This is the Tlapatian which Brinton (A. H. M., 89) believes to be
the “City of the Sun,” the original home of the Aztecs, All this he considers a
sun myth, The word signifies ‘the red land” (Codez Mendoza, Anales I, 4, 178),
It was to this country that Quetzalcoatl was to take his journey (Buschman, p,
684),

“ Tlapatlan, the red land, and Tizapan, the white land, were really the names
for the land of the sun. Tizapan from tizatl, white earth, and pan in.” (Am,
Hero Myths, 135.) The idea holds ground among some scholars that this long
record is only one of journeyings up and down through the valley of Mexico.

%° Chapultepeque. Monte des Conejos, (Garcia, IV, 28.) Cerro del Chapulin
(Bot, 78), See note 48,

3. Ouluacan. Golhnanen ¢ A Er owe ae

ERRATUM.

On page 648, 12th line from bottom, for quid non intelligor read quia

non intelligor

the goddess of flowers.

Asimilar myth is narrated (A. H.M., 90) of the birth of Quetzalcoatl, “the
feathered serpent,” which seems more probable from the connection of this
name with the hunch of feathers, the virgin is stated here to have placed in her
bosom,

42 Cii2c

omeans (Garcia, IV, 293) the navel of the earth.

#8 Bridge of Chapultepeques this is probably a clerical error of pwente for fuen‘e,
asin the preceding chapter a (fountain or) stream of water (fuente) is spoken of
as existing at that place. The word means hill of the locust, from chapulin,
locust, and tepee, a hill. . (Of, Note 80.)

“Tn the original ¢es, meaning evidently tres.

Tn the original dos, probably an error for los.

*®Ciquacoatl, more properly Cihuacoatl; the serpent woman (Myths New
World, 120); Cihuacohuatl (Clavigero, I, 216).

yi,

1883.] 649 [Phillips.

the one in which the god Quetzalcoatl was expected to reappear; and it so hap-
pened that in this very year Cortez entered the land of Mexico. Gloomy
prophecies had preceded his advent, and he met a sovereign predisposed to sub-
mission,

2” Tlapalla, This is the Tiapaltlan which Brinton (A. H. M., 89) believes to be
the “City of the Sun,” the original home of the Aztees. All this he considers a
sun myth, The word signifies “the red land” (Codez Mendoza, Anales I, 4, 178),
It was to this country that Quetzalcoatl was to take his journey (Buschman, p.
684),

“ Tlapatian, the red land, and Tizapan, the white land, were really the names
for the land of the sun. Tizapan from tizatl, white earth, and pan in.” (Am,
Hero Myths, 185.) The idea holds ground among some scholars that this long
record is only one of journeyings up and down through the valley of Mexico.

80 Chapultepeque. Monte des Conejos, (Garcia, IV, 23.) Cerro del Chapulin
(Bot, 78), See note 48,

‘OCuluacan, Oolhuacan (A, AH. M., 92). The bent or curved mountain, the
home of the mother of the gods; on it the old become young and remain at any
age they desire; years leave no trace upon them, In the legends of the Choc-
taws occurs mention of a bending hil (Myths New World, 225), Duran (I, i) con-
Siders it another name for Aztlan. Of, Buschman, 691,

2 Azclan, rerio de gargas, land ofthe heron. (Garcia, 4, 298) Bright or white
land, (Brinton A. H. M., 92. Buschman, 612.) The latter the more generally re-
ceived; cf. Mapallan, Note 29.

®8 Suchimilco, first people (gente de sementeras de Flores), occupied the banks
of the great lagoon of Mexico and founded a city of the same name. Garcia, V
@ 2, 822,

3 Xochimilco. Place of the field of flowers. (Buschmann, p. 700; Clavigero, 2,
228; Boturini, 78) Sometimes written Suchimilco.

8 Mixcoall (Brinton A. H. M., 92, Iztac-Mixcoatl, the white cloud twin), god-
dess of hunting, Clav., i. 126. Same as Camasale (Notes 8, 27).

% Ohaleas. The name signifies Gente de las Bocas, Garcia, V, 2, 822.

86 Tenpaneca (Garcia, V, 2, 822). Gente de la puente, settled on the west side of
the lagoon. They soon founded a large city, Azcapuzalco (Hormiguero),

87 Tezcuco. Garcia (V, 2, 322) says the Tezcucans were the fourth population of
Mexico, coming from Qulua (Gente corva), because in their country there was a
very crooked Cerro.

These four nations encircled the lagoon, and of them all, the Tezcucans were
considered as the most polisned,

8 QQuausticaca ? lugar de los Pinos.

*® Chicomuxtoque, more properly should be Ohicomoztoc, the Seven caverns,
(GARCIA, V, 825: BOTURINT, 78. BUSCHMANN, tiber die Aztek. Ortsnamen, 688.)

Coatebeque, more properly Coatepec, the hill of serpents, :

| Quittlique, more properly Coatlicue, “one of the serpent skirt” (A,H. M., 77)
from whom Huitzilopochtli was born. Aceording to Clavigero (1257), she was
the goddess of flowers.

Asimilar myth is narrated (A, H. M., 90) of the birth of Quetzalcoatl, “the
feathered serpent,” which seems more probable from the connection of this
name with the bunch of feathers, the virgin is stated here to have placed in her
bosom,

® Quzco means (Gareta, IV, 293) the navel of the earth.

*® Bridge of Chapultepeque: this is probably a clerical error of pwente for fuen’e,
asin the preceding chapter a (fountain or) stream of water (fuente) is spoken of
as existing at that place. The word means hill of the locust, from chapulin,
locust, and ¢epee, a hill. . (Cf, Note 80.)

“Tn the original ¢es, meaning evidently tres.

®Tn the original dos, probably an error for los.

*®QGiquacoatl, more properly Cihuacoatl; the serpent woman (Myths New
World, 120); Cihuacohuatl (Clavigero, I, 216),

’

~
Phillips.] 650 [Oct. 19,

# Tigapan ~_— same place. (Garcia, 826, Tizaapdn, aguas blancas, white
Tigapaa water). The general view entertained by scholars is that the

word means the white land (A, H, M., 135), and is the same as Tlapalan, the
home in the distant sun, See note 29.

4/* Here there is something omitted, probably the words “a woman,” as the
rest of the sentence requires it.

Clavigero (Book II, 2 2i, Cullen, p, 124, tells a horrible story of a woman’s
sacrifice (too long to copy), which may be the one here referred to.

#8 Quanmixtitlan, postea Tenustitan. Garcia, 325; Cuidad del popul, Bot., 78.

Tenoxtitlan, more correctly Tenochtitlan, from fetl, a stone, and Nochtli, a
nopal (meaning the wild fig on the rock, Zunal en piedra, Garcia, V, 326).
Buschmann, p. 702.

4” Acamapictli. Garcia, V,?38, 334. Third king of the Mexicans, Coringio, be-
ing second, and Yenuch first. (Clavigero, I, rr1, 127; Lorenzana, p. 9.)

Names ofthe kings of Tenochtitlan according to

Olavigero, i, III, 127. TLorenzana, 9.
1, Acamapitzin 1, Acamapixtli
2. Huitzilibuitl 2. Huitstlibuil
8. Chimalpopoca 8, Chimalpopoca
4. Itzcoatl 4. Ixcoatl
5. Monteuczoma or Montezuma 5. Montezuma, the elder
6. Axajacatl 6, Tizotzin
7, Tizoc 7, Axaiacac
8. Ahuitzotl 8. Ahuitzol

9, Montezuma 9, Montezuma

Anales IT, 1, 58.

1, Tenuch, A.D, 1824,

2. Acampichi, A.D. 1370.

8. Huicilyhuitl, A.D, 1396,

4, Chimalpupuca, A.D. 1417.

5. Ixcoaci, A.D. 1427.

6, Huehue motecguma, A.D, 1440,
7. Axayacaci, A.D. 1469,

8. Tigocicatal, A.D, 1482,

9. Ahuigocin, A.D, 1486,

10, Motecguma, A.D. 1502,

Garcia (V, iii, 824), makes Acamapictli the third ruler,

50Seems to resemble the title of Prince Consort.

5l Cuernavaca, Garcia (Origin de los Indios, Lib. V, 2 rr, p. 822) says that Quauh«
nahuac (a word meaning the place whence the voice of the eagle sounds) was
corrupted in common language into Quernavaca, He states that it was the
capital city of a fertile and populous province, which, in his days, was known,

52 They took away. (Qy. the original one?)

bak Tlascaltecas (gente de pan). Garcia, V, 1, 822. Were the sixth people;
built and settled, and their chief city was named Tlascala, This nation aided
the Spaniards, ‘

53 Dende un ufio ynvernan ?

‘4 The Indian woman, Marina, who fellin love with Cortez, and accompanied
him as his interpreter, The words in the original are, ‘‘Por una lengua dicha
Marina.’

5 Sahagun, Lib. XIT, ch. 29, also speaks of this epidemic of small-pox.

56 Oydores, auditors, councillors of state,

57 T.e., the days to lengthen,

/
{

ind
1883.] 651 (Vaux.

58 Toaugigua (fleshless women), alias Gigemine, More properly, Tzitzimimine
(Anales II, 7, 7), the dreadful ones, ‘Lhe conclusion of a cycle was a grave event
for the Mexicans, for, according to their religious ideas, it was possibly the date
for the end of the world. ‘All the inhabitants,” says Torquemada, ‘were in
great fear and trembling lest when the lights were extinguished they should
never more be rekindled, but on that very night the human race would come
to an end, and darkness eternal would reign over all; nosun should ever appear
again, but the 7zitzimimes, fearful demons, would descend and eat up all man-
kind,” <Anales, ée, II, t, 7.

591. Se echaron wna con otra.

59k Quey, ver, omitted? In which case the sentence read ste no pudo (ver), a
Montezuma, could not bear with Montezuma, detested him,

6 How much more humane than the maxim ofthe civil law, partus sequitur
ventrem! One who lay with animmature girl, oranother’s slave, became a slave,
(Garcia, 8, 2, 111; Torquemada, x11, 8; Herrera, IV, 8, 10 )

ot Tianguez should be more properly Tianquitzli, (Anales ITT, 2, 66.)

® Paps, “The Mexicans called in their tongue the Supreme Pontiffs by
the name of Papa.” (Herrera ITT, rr, vv, p. 690. Similiter, Garcia V, X11, 300.)

Papachtic. “ He of the flowing locks,” corrupted to Papa, was one of the names
of Quetzalecoatl (A. H. M., 69), hence the title may easily have been transferred
to his priests,

The Pennsylwania Prison System. By Richard Vaua.
(Read before the American Philosophical Society, June 20, 1884.)

The Pennsylvania Prison System had its origin in an effort to correct
the abuses in the place of incarceration of all classes of violators of law.
The common jail, under the colonial government of the Province of
Pennsylvania, was the receptacle of every such offender.

In the city prison of Philadelphia, located at Market and Third streets,
in 1770, young and old, black and white, men and women, boys and girls
were congregated indiscriminately in custody, for misconduct, misdemea-
nor, and felony, either before trial, after conviction, or for want of bail
for surety of the peace. It was a moral pest-house. Bad as it was, it was
better than Newgate, for England was without a rival in the infamous
management of her then chief public prison in London.

So early as 1775 a sensible, thoughtful man—a merchant—Mr. Richard
Wistar, residing near by, had his attention directed to the horrible condi-
tion of this city prison. In 1776, on the Vth of February, a society was
formed, styled the ‘Philadelphia Society for Assisting Distressed Pris-
oners.’”? The occupation of Philadelphia by the British army terminated
the labors of this society in the month of September, 1777. In the year
1787, May 8th, the first society was revived by its successor ‘‘'The Phila-
delphia Society for Alleviating the Misery of Public Prisons.”’ Some of
the members of the first Society, and others like-minded, engaged in this
revival of the organization of 1776.

On the 16th of August, 1787, William White, D,D., Bishop of the Prot-

|
|

Vaux.) 652 [June 20,

estant Episcopal Church, as president of this society, addressed the citizens
of Philadelphia for aid—aid for a practical benevolence which found the
evil, and undertook to apply the remedy. It was not humanitarianism—
that restless agitation of the sympathies of try-to do-something people,
which usually is converted into mist.

The criminal laws from 1718 to 1794 were ametiorated. In 1718 ten
crimes were capital. On the 15th of September, 1786, by the influence of
an already developed interest, an act of Assembly was passed to markedly
modify the criminal code of the province. This was the first legislative
reform. It substituted for robbery, burglary, and the crimes against
nature, imprisonment at hard labor, for the death penalty. On the 27th
of March, 1789, this first act was amended. The act of April 5th, 1790,
repealed both acts, and the act of 1794 made murder only, a capital crime.
No important legislation, as to the criminal code, occurred from 1821 to
1860,

The first Constitution of the State in 1776, chapter 2, section 28, pro-
vided ‘‘ That punishments be made in some cases less sanguinary ;’’ and
by section 39, hard labor in prisons be substituted. In 1786 some of these
provisions were enforced. ‘‘Penn’s Great Law’ of 1682, enacted for his
province, 10th section, provided that ‘all prisons shall be workshops for
felons, vagrants, and loose and idle persons.’’ Prior to the Revolution
these laws were generally disregarded.

From Mr, Richard Wistar’s first efforts in 1775, till April 5th, 1794,
slow but effective measures were taken to reform the penal laws and the
prison system of Pennsylvania. They were the outcome of the earliest
practical thoughts on this subject in America,

It is to be noticed that in Italy, 1718, the Hospital of St. Michael was
founded, and there was first introduced in Europe reforms in prison dis-
cipline, It was an experiment suggested by philosophy and benevolence,
and remained for nearly a century the only like instance on that continent,

It was a successful undertaking. Parenthetically it may be said, with-
out too broad an assertion that, so far as is known, the present congregate
prisons of the United States in some features are copies of the St. Michael,
originated one hundred and sixty-six years ago.

In 1718, February 22d, a law was passed for erecting houses of correc-
tion and work-houses in the Province of Pennsylvania, While this law
of 1718 authorized these establishments, they were intended simply as
receptacles for vagrants and incapables.

In 1775 a work appeared on “The State of Prisons in England and
Wales,’’ which first directed the attention of the English people to the
subject of the then terrible condition of these institutions.

During this progress of a thoughtful investigation into the needed reform
of existing methods of prison management, it became apparent to those in
Philadelphia engaged in the examination, that a radical change in both the
crime code, and the punishment of convicts was the only possible relief
for the abuses and miseries existing in the prisons. ‘The crime code was

Ré
1884.] 653 (Vaux.

severe without discrimination, the prison treatment of convicts was irra-
tional, disgraceful, and produced those results both were intended to
prevent.

The evil was at the root of convict treatment, atthe foundation on which
the plan rested. Incarceration at hard labor was the only specific for all
felonies or crimes of aggravation.

The public mind considered public safety secured if violators of Jaw
were imprisoned, and there it ceased to regard the crime or the criminal.

This actual condition of the law and its administration convinced the
able men interesting themselves in the question, that in the incarceration
of criminals a thorough change of method must be established by law.

The associating or congregating convicts at work or otherwise while in
prison was deemed so unwise, degrading, and irrational, if any benefit to
the prisoner or advantage to society was expected from imprisonment, that
this form of treatment must primarily be abolished. This was the initial
step in prison reform, The leading minds investigating this subject reached
this conclusion so early as 1787.

A memorial from the Society for Alleviating the Miseries of Public
Prisons was addressed to the representatives of the freemen of the Com-
monwealth of Pennsylvania in General Assembly met, on the shocking
treatment of prisoners then existing, in which it is stated ‘‘that punish -
ment by more private or even solitary labor would more successfully tend
to redeem the unhappy objects.’’ The memorialist recommended for the
consideration of the General Assembly “the very great importance of a
separation of the sexes in public prisons.’’ Legislation to this end was
asked. In this memorial is to be found the first suggestion of two prin-
ciples, which either in their assertion or presentation, gave no promise of
the signal importance they were to exercise over the subject of prison
reform, or that they were to become the basis of the Pennsylvania prison
system. They were.the origin of the system of separation of prisoners
during their incarceration, and that labor was an element in their pun-
ishment,

To this memorial the Supreme Executive Council of Pennsylvania, on
the 20th of November, 1788, replied by the adoption of a resolution ask-
ing information as to its subject-matter,

The society made a full statement to this resolution of inquiry, and it
was presented to the Council in 1788.

In the following year the society presented a plan for the positive im-
provement of the prison discipline of the State.

The propositions contained in this plan were enacted into the law of 1790.

In 1778 the erection of a State prison was begun, located at the south-
east corner of Sixth and Walnut streets, in Philadelphia, and on its com-
pletion the test was applied of the reforms suggested.

The Legislature, by the act of April 8th, 1790, to reform the penal laws
of this State and try the separate confinement principle of imprisonment,
declared its purpose in this act as follows: * * *

ji ’
Vaux.) 654. {June 20,

“ And whereas, the laws heretofore made for the purpose of carrying
the said provisions of the Constitution into effect have in some degree
failed of success, from the exposure of the offenders employed at hard
labor to public view, and from the communication with each other not
being sufficiently restrained within the places of confinement; and it is
hoped that the addition of unremitted solitude to laborious employment,
as far as it can be effected, will contribute as much to reform as to deter.

‘* Section 8 of the act provides for the erection of cells in the gaol yard for
the purpose of confining there the more hardened and atrocious offenders.
Section 10 declares the cells to be a part of the gaol and requires all per-
sons who cannot be accommodated in the cells to be kept separate and
apart from each other, as much as the convenience of the building will
admit.

‘Section 18 restricts the visitors to the prison to various officials and
persons having a written ‘license’ signed by two inspectors.’’

This law was a decided triumph for those engaged in prison reforms. It
was the first authoritative endorsement by the Legislature of Pennsylvania
of the two principles to which attention has been called. Though tenta-
tive in its object, it placed the Pennsylvania prison system on its trial,
limited as it was to the most ill-devised and circumscribed opportunities.

In the year 1801 the society again addressed the Legislature stating the
progress made by former Legislatures in preventing crime and reforming
criminals were satisfactory, * * * ‘though it was not expected that
the practical part could be suddenly or completely effected.’’ It was con-
sidered then only as an experiment. The society again urged the Legis-
lature to make a fair experiment of solitude and labor on convicts.

In 18083 a marked confidence is shown by the memorial of the society to
the Legislature, as the following extract proves :

“Placed as we are in a situation to observe the salutary effects of soli-
tude and labor in preventing crimes and reforming criminals, we trust you
will as heretofore receive our application with indulgence, and therefore
again respectfully submit to your consideration the propriety of granting
another building for the purpose of making such separation amongst pris-
oners as the nature and wants of this truly benevolent system requires,’’

Persistent in its efforts, and gaining knowledge and faith from experi-
ence, in 1818 the society more broadly expressed itself in a memorial to
the Legislature. Confirming the satisfaction which thus far had attended
the trial of the system, imperfect as it was, the memorialist * * ‘‘there-
fore respectfully request the Legislature to consider the propriety and ex-
pediency of erecting penitentiaries in suitable parts of the State for the
more effectual employment and separation of prisoners, and of proving
the efficacy of solitude on the morals of those unhappy objects.’’

After such earnest appeals, asserting the confident belief in the princi-
ples of separation of convicts during imprisonment by men whose high

edd
1884.] 655 | Vaux.

character and large ability gave great weight to their opinion, the Legisla-
ture could not fail favorably to regard the prayers of the society.

But it was not till 1821, that, after the last effort of the society to ob-
tain the necessary and essential legislation, the law was passed on March
20, 1821, for the erection of a State Penitentiary within the city and
county of Philadelphia.

Justice, simple justice, to the labors which resulted in the enactment of
this law, and the men who secured its passage, makes it proper to give
this memorial of the society on which the Legislature was induced to act.
It is a statement, or the epitome of the reform, for the half century pre-
ceding its publication :

To the Senate and House of Representatives of the Commonwealth of Penn-
sylwania in General Assembly met :

The memorial of the Philadelphia Society for Alleviating the Miseries
of Public Prisons, respectfully represents :

That it is now nearly forty years since some of your memorialists asso-
ciated for the purpose of alleviating the miseries of public prisons, as well
as for procuring the melioration of the penal code of Pennsylvania, as far
as these effécts might be produced through their influence.

In performance of these duties which they believed to be required of
them by the dictates of Christian benevolence and the obligations of hu-
manity, they investigated the conduct and regulations of the jait, and
likewise the effects of those degrading and sanguinary punishments which
were at that period inflicted by the laws of this Commonwealth. The
result of these examinations was a full conviction that not only the police
of the prison was faulty, but the penalties of the law were such as to frus-
trate the great ends of punishment by rendering offenders inimical, instead
of restoring them to usefulness in society.

With these impressions, alterations in the modes of punishment and im-
provements in prison discipline were from time to time recommended to
the Legislature, by whose authority many changes were adopted, and
many defects remedied.

These reforms, from the nature of existing circumstances, were, how-
ever, of comparatively limited extent, but as far as the trial could be
made, beneficial consequences were experienced.

Neighboring States and remote nations directed their attention to these
efforts, and, in many instances, adopted the principle which had influenced
the conduct of Pennsylvania.

At the time of making the change in our penal code, substituting soli-

tude and hard labor for sanguinary punishments, the experiment was |

begun in the county jail of Philadelphia, rather than the execution of the
laws should be deferred to a distant period, when a suitable prison might
be erected. Under all the inconveniences then subsisting, the effects
produced were such as to warrant a belief that the plan would answer the
most sanguine wishes of its friends, if it could be properly tried. But

PROC, AMBR. PHILOS. SOC. xxz, 116. 4m. PRINTED AUGUST 21, 1884.

Vaux,] 656 [June 20,

the construction of that prison and. its crowded condition, being the only
penitentiary used for all the convicts of the State, leave but slender hopes
of the accomplishment of the humane intentions of the Legislature.

Your memorialists believe that they discover in the recent measures of
the Commonwealth, a promise which will fulfill the designs of benevo-
lence in this respect. The edifice now in progress at Pittsburg for the
reception of prisoners, constructed upon a plan adapted to strict solitary
confinement, will go far towards accomplishing this great purpose ; and
your memorialists are induced to hope that the same enlightened policy
which dictated the erection of a State prison in the western, will provide
for the establishment of a similar one in the eastern part of the State.

Reasons of the most serious and substantial nature might be urged to
show the absolute necessity which exists for « penitentiary in the city and
county of Philadelphia, whether we regard the security of society or the
restoration of the offenders against its laws. It will not be necessary here
to recite the alarming proofs which might be adduced in support of their
opinions, but refer to the documents herewith furnished, which exhibit
the actual condition of the prison, Your memorialists, therefore, respect-
fully request that you will be pleased to take the subject under your seri-
ous consideration, and if you judge it right, to pass a law for the erection
of a penitentiary for the Eastern District of the State, in which the benefits
of solitude and hard labor may be fairly and effectually proved.

Signed by order and on belialf of the Society.

WILLIAM WHITE, President.
WILLIAM ROGERS, Vice: President.
THOMAS WISTAR, Vice-President.

NICHOLAS COLLIN,
SAMUEL POWEL GRIFFITHS,
JOSEPH REED,
ROBERTS VAUX.
Attest: Canmp Cresson, Secretary.

This agitation of the reform in both the penal laws and system of
convict punishment, though originating and developed in Philadelphia,
extended to the western part of the State. On the 8d of March,
1818, the Legislature authorized the erection in the county of Allegheny,
of a State penitentiary on the ‘solitary’? plan, and in 1820 it was in the
course of completion.

The non-association of prisoners being the primary object of the friends
of the movement at its inception, and the congregation of all ages, sexes,

“and degrees of criminality being the gross evil sought to be abolished, it
was necessary to suggest a method of incarceration which was in radical
antagonism to the existing abuse. More intent in the trial of the proposi-
tion than in designating it by any special term, the word solitary seemed
almost unconsciously to assert itself as the descriptive name of the re-
formed system. It was not in any sense the technical definition, and it

»

ponamenpemnarageen ba

me.

}
|
|
}
|
]

B55
1884.] 657 ' [Vaux.

in some degree eliminated the idea of solitary, as contradistinguished to
the associate or congregate relations of all prisoners in the county prisons
or jails.

The use of this term ‘‘solitary’’ was most unfortunate in the first days
of the trial of the new theory. Very much of the opposition that arose
against it came from the misconception of the subject by the use of this
word.

The Allegheny prison was designed by Mr. Haviland, an architect of
Philadelphia, of very high professional repute. As there was no example
on which to rely for the plan of the building intended for the complete
and unexceptional separation of convicts during imprisonment, Mr. Havi-
land had to conceive the plan of the building from the information he
could obtain from its advocates, and those few who were enlisted as its
promoters.

The drawings for the Pittsburg prison, as it was called, were from the
first impressions of what was necessary.

In 1821, when the Eastern or Philadelphia State Penitentiary was
erected, Mr. Haviland’s experience suggested many improvements, so
that the Eastern Penitentiary, in 1829, when it was opened for the recep-
tion of convicts, was of course regarded as the true exposition of the sepa-
rate, called however the solitary, system.

An examination of the corridors first erected prior to 1829, and those
erected in 1872, will give the best idea of the improvements which experi-
ence made manifestly necessary.

Naturally so radical a change in the criminal law, act April 28d, 1829,
and the mode of convict punishment, act March 20th, 1821, and the act
of 28th March, 1831, as followed the partial completion of the solitary
prison, and the enactment of these laws relating to crimes and penalties,
caused discussion, hostilities, and opposition.

Better to condense the arguments of the friends and opponents of the
Pennsylvania prison system, as it was then styled, the following extracts
are given from then accepted authority :

Roberts Vaux, in his reply, 1827, to Mr. William Roscoe, of London,
thus answers his chief objections :

“Tt is very evident to my mind that the true nature of the separate con-
finement which is proposed, requires explanation. I will, therefore, en-
deavor to describe what is intended by its friends. Previously, however,
it ought to be understood that the chambers and yards provided for the
prisoners are like anything but those dreary and fearful abodes which the
pamphlet before me would represent them to be, ‘ destined to contain an
epitome and concentration of all human misery, of which the Bastile of
France and the Inquisition of Spain were only prototypes and humble
models.’ The rooms of the new penitentiary at Philadelphia are fire-
proof, of comfortable dimensions, with convenient courts to each, built on
the surface of the ground—judiciously lighted from the roof—well-venti-

pf
Vaux.] 658 [June 20,

lated and warmed, and ingeniously provided with means for affording a

continual supply of excellent water, to insure the most perfect cleanliness °

of every prisoner and his apartment. * They are, moreover, so arranged
as to be inspected and protected without a military guard, usually though
unnecessarily employed in establishments of this kind in most other
States.

‘Tn these chambers no individual, however humble or elevated, can be
confined, so long as the public liberty can endure, but upon conviction of
a known and well-defined offence, by a verdict of a jury of the country,
and under the sentence of a court fora specific time. The terms of im-
prisonment it is believed can be apportioned to the nature of every crime
with considerable accuracy, and will no doubt be measured in that mer-
ciful degree which has formerly characterized the modern penal legisla-
tion of Pennsylvania. Where, then, allow me to inquire, is there in this
system the least resemblance to that dreadful receptacle constructed in
Paris during the reign of Charles the Fi‘th, and which at different
periods, through four centuries and a half, was an engine of oppression and
torture to thousands of innocent persons; or by what detortion can it be
compared to the inquisitorial courts and prisons that were instituted in
Italy, Portugal and Spain, between the years 1251 and 15372

“With such accommodations as I have mentioned, and with the mod-
erate duration of imprisonment contemplated on the Pennsylvania plan,
[ cannot admit the possibility of the consequences which thy pamphlet pre-
dicts, ‘that a great number of individuals will probably be put to death
by the superinduction of diseases inseparable from such mode of treat:-
ment.’ Ido not apprehend either the physical maladies so vividly por-
trayed, or the mental sufferings which, with equal confidence it is prom-
ised, shall ‘cause the mind to rush back upon itself and drive reason from
her seat.’ On the contrary, it is my belief that less bodily indisposition,
and less mortality, will attend separate confinement than imprisonment,
upon the present method, for which some reasons might be given that
would be improper here to expose.

““By separate confinement, therefore, it is intended to punish those who
will not control their wicked passions and propensities, thereby violating
divine and human laws; and, moreover, to effect this punishment, with-
out terminating the life of the culprit in the midst of his wickedness, or
making a mockery of justice by forming such into communities of har-
dened and corrupting transgressors, who enjoy each other’s society, and
contemn the very power which thus vainly seeks their restoration and
idly calculates to afford security to the State from their outrages in the
future,

“In separate confinement every prisoner is placed beyond the possibility
of being made more corrupt by his imprisonment, since the least associa-

* The exact size of the chambers is eight feet by twelve feet, the highest point
of the ceiling sixteen feet, The yards are cigut feet by twenty feet,

i

~
1884.] 659 [Vaux,

tion of convicts with each other must inevitably yield pernicious conse-
quences in a greater or less degree.

“Tn separate confinement the prisoners will not know who are under-
going punishment at the same time with themselves, and thus will be
afforded one of the greatest protections to such as may happily be enabled
to form resolutions to behave well when they are discharged, and be bet-
ter qualified to do so; because plans of villainy are often formed in jail
which the authors carry into operation when at large, not unfrequently
engaging the aid of their companions, who are thereby induced to commit
new and more heinous offences, and come back to prison under the
heaviest sentences of the law.

‘‘In separate confinement it is especially intended to furnish the crimi-
nal with every opportunity which Christian duty enjoins for promoting
his restoration to the path of virtue, because seclusion is believed to be
an essential ingredient in moral treatment, and, with religious instruction
and advice superadded, is calculated to achieve more than has ever yet
been done, for the miserable tenants of our penitentiaries.

“Tn separate confinement a specific graduation of punishment can be ob-
tained, as surely and with as much facility as by any other system. Some
prisoners may labor, some may be kept without labor ; some may have
the privilege of books, others may be deprived of it; some may experi-
ence total seclusion, others may enjoy such intercourse as shall comport
with an entire separation of prisoners.

“In separate confinement the same variety of discipline for offences
committed after convicts are introduced into prison which any other mode
affords can be obtained, though irregularities must necessarily be less fre-
quent, by denying the refractory individual the benefit of his yard, by
taking from him his books or labor, and, lastly, in extreme cases, by
diminishing his diet to the lowest rate. By the last means the most fierce,
hardened, and desperate offender can be subdued.’”’

The attention of leading minds in Europe was directed to these experi-
«ments in Pennsylvania.

England sent, in 1834, Mr, Crawford, a commissioner, to examine the
Eastern State Penitentiary. They were followed by Mr. Beaumont and
Mr. DeTocqueville, from France, and by Dr. Julius, from Prussia. The
investigations made by these very able men were so satisfactory that in
those countries reforms were adopted which largely partook of the princi-
ples incorporated in the Pennsylvania prison system.

From the date of the opening of the Eastern State Penitentiary for the
reception of convicts (1829) until 1845, the subject of the adaptation of
the system to its design received the careful attention of those so earnestly
devoted to the success of the experiment. There has been no legislative
change in the system as adopted in the Eastern State Penitentiary since
the act establishing it, 1821.

It would burden this paper to give the results reached as they were

Vaux.) 660 [June 20,

developed. The criticisms which were made by those who doubted its
practicability, who opposed its principle, who believed it would be injuri-
ous in its effects on those subjected to its operation, and who feared the
cost would not pay for its benefits, were continued, and, strange it is to
say, yet continue, though the experience of half a century refutes them.

The philosophy of ‘‘separate or individual treatment’’ of prisoners dur-
ing incarceration is the basis on which this system rests.

The originators and early advocators of a method of convict punish-
ment, which as they then knew was only to be the non-association of all
criminals in a common jail, were content if this reform could be secured.
Such a plan having been adopted and putin operation, the principle of
the experiment of constant separation of individual convicts in prison be-
came the subject of careful study.

The objections were magnified as it became apparent that the idea of
making profit out of the associate labor of prisoners was, though a super-
ficial, a popular view, addressed to both the prejudices and the susceptibili-
ties of the tax-payer. In every other State then, but Pennsylvania, the
congregate system was accepted because it was claimed that these prisons
could be self-supporting, ‘This delusion is now being dispelled. Yet
these self-supporting prisons demanded the public favor, and to secure
this result prisoners were sold to contractors, who paid a fixed sum per
diem for their toil, and made from their associate work in shops, large
profits for these employers. So great a stimulus to the greed of those in-
terested, and the indifference of the public, at last resulted in changing
the Pittsburg Penitentiary from the separate into a congregate prison.

It was left to the Eastern State Penitentiary to defend the separate meth-
od. The progress made inthe adaptation of punishment to each individual
case, as experience and careful study demonstrated was practically for the
best interest of the prisoner and the community, became singularly satis-

. factory.

From 1845 to 1855 the advance in the development of the promised ad-
vantages to the convict and society of this reform in prison discipline,
marked a new era in the history of convict punishment,

During this period the experience gained by the advocates of the sepa-
rate system enabled the authorities of the Eastern Penitentiary to ascer-
tain the improvements that were necessary both in the architecture of the
building, and the method of administering the discipline.

The corridors and the cells as they then existed were found to be ill-
suited to the special mode of management then being inaugurated. To
indicate these changes, it may be stated that the rooms now, 1884, con-
structed for each prisoner, are eight feet wide, eighteen feet long, fourteen
feet high, with double skylights in the ceiling, each five feet long by five
and one-half inches inside width. There are air-tubes near the floor for
outside ventilation, Each room has gas, fresh water, and a closet with
perfect, drainage, through a pipe four inches in diameter, into a ten-inch

saan Sa .

1884.] 661 (Vaux,

main filled with water, flowing into a sewer, all flushed daily. The moral
effect of these surroundings of each prisoner cannot be overestimated.

It was not until 1870 that the knowledge acquired by those directly con-
nected with the administration of the Eastern State Penitentiary, was so
thoroughly digested as to justify them in establishing the changes in the
treatment of the prisoners, and the improvements in the buildings erected
in 1877, which give to this institution its present. characteristics. It is now
attracting the close examination of the most enlightened men of America
and Europe, France is earnestly investigating it, and the Prison Society
of Paris preéminently leads the exposition of its methods. These changes
from the original structure of the cells, and the relations of the prison au-
thorities with the prisoners are best described as radical. Philosophy has
consummated what philanthropy originated, and experience has developed
what the founders of the Pennsylvania prison system were not gifted to
foresee. These men, worthy as they are of the highest commendation,
began an experiment out of which have been evolved principles of science
that, now in operation, create new and distinctive duties and responsibili-
ties between society and its criminals.

The present system of convict punishment as administered in the Hast-
ern State Penitentiary can best be described as the individual treatment
method of applying punishment for crime. It formulates this reform on
positive philosophic principles.

The individual commits crime from motives with which the will, char-
acteristics, inherited traits and training are related, This crime-cause is
different in each case. The crime is the development of these concurrent
influences, Society has suffered by the act of this person. It demands
an expiation in some sort for the premeditated wrong. Security for either
the rights of property or the rights of persons has been impaired by this
act. The offender must be punished. It must be an example expressing
the supremacy of law, the prevention of crime, and the purpose of restor-
ing the offenders to society, instructed and strengthened, if so be, for good
citizenship. The offender is convicted for the crime and the court sen-
tences him to imprisonment. He is thus placed where his punishment
can be applied. From the conception of the crime, in its commission, at
the trial, conviction and sentence, the prisoner’s individ uality asserts
itself. These antecedents crystallize round the individual. His punish-
ment, to be effective, should therefore be applied to him as an individual.
Separated from all other prisoners, the means which his case requires can
be best discovered and best adapted to obtain the result society demands.

Under these conditions each prisoner is subjected to the discipline.
Whatever may serve to elevate his moral character and strengthen it, to
induce reform and inspire better aims in life, are uddressed to his devel-
oping remorse, Special aptitudes and particular capacities are cultivated.
Books for instruction and labor for training to industry are regarded as
essential. A certain sum is allowed, over the cost of maintenance, for the
prisoner to aid in’ the support of his family, or for himself when he is

Vaux.) 662 [June 20,

released. Visits from his family and judicious persons are encouraged.
Every prisoner is, therefore, treated as his case requires. The purpose as
to each of all is to try and change his course of life, and thus benefit him
and society. It is believed this method is successful in a large majority of
first convictions of first offenders.

Incarceration is not punishment, it is only the condition under which it
may reasonably be applied. Continuous labor during incarceration does
not in itself constitute the entirety of punishment. It should be, how-
ever, adopted as an instruction, an element or marked feature in the dis-
cipline, with other instructions in the process of making punishment a
personal benefit and an advantage to the public. Teaching a prisoner a
trade, by which he may become self-supporting on his release from pun-
ishment, is a gain both for him and the community, hat is labor which
pays in morals, and as an industry intended to be both punitive and refor-
matory, it pays as an economy, It is doubtful if the man or the State
gains any practical good by the incarceration at labor only, of violators of
luw. It is not doubtful that the outcome of congregating convicts at labor
as their only punishment is dangerous to the general security. From this
association a crime-class is established to war on the general welfare as its
occupation. Punishment should attempt to reconstruct the enfeebled or
irrational or misdirected character.

To discover the crime-cause, the weaknesses, the untaught and corrupted
conditions and the positive needs of each convict is the antecedent of any
rational method for his treatment in prison, and for the application of any
moral alterative or corrective. This is undoubtedly the purpose, the aim
and the gain of punishment. In this view the subject is elevated out of
the domain of benevolence to the character of an important social science.
It is this philosophy which regulates and characterizes the individual
treatment of the Eastern State Penitentiary. To attain this purpose re-
quires trained and competent officials, who, by long service, become qual-
ified for their duties. It must be for them a vocation. Their tenure of
positions must originate in high character, and continue with their useful-
ness in their responsible trust.

In the fifty-three annual reports of the Inspectors of the Eastern State
Penitentiary will be found the history of the growth of the experiment
which originated in Philadelphia a century ago, These reports, from the
year 1829 to the present time, contain very interesting descriptions of the
merits, and the objections to the separate system, and, from 1870 to 1883
inclusive, a thorough explanation of the changes and improvements in the
system, and an exposition of the scientific principles which underlie them.

It may be justly claimed that the reforms in prison systems, or their
administration; in the United States, as well as in foreign countries, are
the out-come of the century of labors, efforts, and experience of the be-
nevolent and philosophic men who in Philadelphia originated and have
given to the Pennsylvania system its renown.

And it may with equal justice be maintained that those reforms in con-

a

1884, | 663 [Vaux.

vict punishment which are now so general are identified with the initial
experiment in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania,

It would doubtless be out of place in this paper to discuss the evils
which attach to the profit-making congregate prisons.

The peril to society, the corrupting influences, the degradation and
training in crime, which are inseparably connected with association of
convicts, must exist while it is maintained.

It need only be stated that in old communities, or States where those
who are convicted of crimes, of whatever physical and mental condition,
capables and incapables, are indiscriminately incarcerated in a prison on
the congregate, profit-making, self-supporting plan, the outcome exceeds
the income. As a fact, underall the circ umstances, such institutions can-
not be proved to yield a profit to the State.

The theory of self-supporting congregate prisons under the conditions
just mentioned is not always sustained. The sturdy adults, selected from
the aggregate of all persons convicted in a State, m: iy yield by their asso-
ciate labor a profit to the prison. If so, then such a prison is a State man-
ufactory. This is not regarded as a judicious adaptation of the purpose
of a penal institution for the punishment of offenders against social
security.

The State Penitentiary at Philadelphia is the only institution in the
United States in which the “Individual treatment system ’’ is administered.
In England some of its features are engrafted on the penal discipline ot
its prisons, so far as the social conditions of that country accept them as
practical. In France, Belgium, and Italy, greater progress than elsewhere
in Europe has been made in adopting the separate plan in the prisons of
those nations.

In some of the States of the Union there is a gradual approach to the
principle of separation of convicts in prison, and a tacit acknowledgment
of the value of the Pennsylvania system. ‘The chief obstacle to a more
thorough conformity is the proclaimed cost. It is hardly possible to con-
vince those who legislate for, or conduct State penal institutions, even in
States claiming to be enlightened, that any plan which does not pay its
expenses is for the general interest of the people. Under this pretext this
general delusion is vitalized. ‘Till it shall be acknowledged ‘a delusion,
and the substantial interests of the public best considered by adopting the
reform which is slowly manifesting its value, the Pennsylvania system
must wait for its coming triumph. How long a period may intervene is
problematical. Be it ag it may, it must not deter ordishearten. The pro-
cess of development in social science is necessarily deliberate. The con-
sideration and clear comprehension of the relations of society to the vio-
lators of its laws are unattractive to the mind of the public. The code
defining crimes changes as social conditions change. Education, hered-
ity, customs, prejudices, false training, insubordination, and bad associa-
tion, are among the incentives to unregulated individual conduct in com-
munities, and thence crime is the outcome. How to deal with these

PROC, AMER. PHILOS. 800, xx1. 116. 47. PRINTED OcT. 29, 1884.

Gill.) 664 [July 18,

changing social growths is best to be found in the philosophy of the indi-
vidual treatment of crime-cause, and its appropriate remedies.

That such a conclusion will be reached, as penology is studied, is most
likely. If so, it will be the conviction of the judgment which comes from
the demonstration of the principles which, since 1790, in this city have
been taught as the science of convict punishment. This advance will be
slow. It must be remembered that Beccaria in his essay on ‘‘ Crimes and
Punishment”’ in 1764; Filangieri in his ‘‘ Science of Legislation ’’ in 1780
and Montesquieu in his ‘Spirit of the Laws,’’ 1748, were among the first
to invite attention to penal jurisprudence. A century elapsed before
practical advantages testified to the effect produced from this discussion of
the subject. The Pennsylvania prison system rests its claim for recogni-
tion and adoption on the suggestions of philosophy, and the teaching of
experience, confirmed by half a century of trial. It must teach, and wait.

| Notes on the Stromateida. By Theodore Gill.
(Read before the American Philosophical Soctety, July 18th, 1884.)

The grave errors into which Dr. Giinther seems to have fallen in the
treatment of certain forms of this family furnish my excuse for the pres-
ent communication. Dr. Giinther has reiterated, without change, opin-
| ions enunciated twenty years ago, and he still separates widely forms of
I] one of the subfamilies of this family, dispersing representatives thereof
| among four of his ‘“families’’ and associating them in several cases with
}

forms with which they have no aflinity. Following Dr. Giinther in the
first instance Dr. Day has also misunderstood one of the types in question,
and Dr. Liitken has likewise been deceived as to the relationships of the
same form.

The family, as here understood, is co-equal with the Stromateida of Dr.
tiinther, with the addition of several types widely scattered by that gen-
tleman. It embraces in fact, (1) the Stromateide recognized as such by
Dr. Giinther, (2) the genus Pammelus of his Carangida, (3) the species
genes anomalus of his Nomeida, and (4) the genus Schedophilus of his Cory-
phanide. There are two quite distinct types in the group thus constituted,
(1) one represented by Stromateus and its allies, and (2) the other by
Oentrolophus and relatives. These are distinguished by differences in
the development of the vertebra, the former having 14-15 abdominal and
17-21 caudal vertebree, and the latter 11 abdominal and 14 caudal verte-
| bre ; these differences are supplemented by variations in the degree of
complexity of the peculiar appendages representing and homologous with
the gill-rakers of ordinary fishes, developed from the last branchial arch,
and extending into the cesophagus. It is quite possible, therefore, that
the two types, now retained as sub-families under the old names Stroma-

1884.] 665 (Gill.

teine and Oentrolophine, should be distinguished as families. It is only the
want of sufficient data respecting the several genera that delays such a
recognition at the present time.

The Centrolophine appear to be the most generalized type, the ventrals
being fully developed and retained in all stages, the dorsal and anal spines
normally developed, and the preoperculum in some always retaining the
spines characteristic of the youth of the Scombroid fishes, while the Stro-
mateins contrast more or less in all these several features, and also have
more specialized gill-rakers or processes.

A summary of the known types of the family will give the means of
better appreciating the relations of the forms to be specially considered.

Family STROMATEID &.
Synonymy.

>Stromatini, Rafinesque, Indice d’Ittiolog. Siciliana, p. 89, 1810.
X Fiatolides, Risso, Hist. Nat. de l'Europe Mérid., t. 8, pp. 107, 287, 1826.
XStromateide, Adams, Manual Nat. Hist., p. 98, 1854.
>Stomateidex, Giinther, Archiv fir Naturg., 28. Jahrg., B. 1, p. 59, 1862.
——, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. [v. 14], p. 126, 1862.

(Indicated but not named or defined. )
>Stromatei, Ftzinger, Sitzungsber. K. Akad. der Wissench. (Wien), B.

67, 1. Abth,, p. 82, 1878,
>Stromateide, Giinther, Int. to Study of Fishes, p. 452, 1880.
=Stromateide, Jordan and Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 449, 1882.
Scombroides gen., Ouvier et al.
Psettoidei gen., Bleeker.
Corypheenoidei gen., Bleeker.
Jorypheenide gen., Giinther.

Carangide gen., Giinther.
Nomeidex sp., Gisnther.

Scombroidea with an elongated dorsal whose foremost rays only are more
or less spiniform and the gill-rakers of the upper segment of the last branch-
jal arch enlarged and dentigerous or sacciform, and projecting backwards
into the @sophagus.*

Body generally compressed, with the form regularly ovate or sub-or-
Dicular, but sometimes more or less oblong or elongate, highest near the
scapular region, and with the caudal peduncle suddenly constricted and
slender,

Anus in the anterior half of the body.

Scales small, cycloid and smooth.

Lateral ine nearly concurrent with the dorsal outline.

Head compressed, generally higher than long, with the profile more or
less decurved in proportion to the height, and with the snout more or less
convex. HWyes submedian or anterior.

*“"The cosophagus is armed with numerous bony, barbed teeth,” Gunther, Cat,
Fishes B. M., y. 2, p. 807.

666 [July 18,

Gill.}

Suborbital bones small.

Opercular bones normally developed

Nostrils double, in front of each eye.

Mouth terminal, moderate or small, with the cleft lateral and little
oblique.

Upper jaw in some (Stromateine) not protractile, in others (Centro-
lophinge) protractile.

Teeth small and pointed, absent from the palate.

Branchial apertures variable.

Branchiostegal rays variable (5 to '7).

Dorsat fin commencing at the nape or behind the bases of the pectorals,
elongated, and with few small or rudimentary and often modified spines in
front; the soft rays branched.

Anal fin commencing behind the anus and coterminal with the dorsal, to
which it is similar in form and structure, but with fewer spines in front.

Caudal fin more or less emarginated or forked.

Pectoral fins inserted rather high on the sides, well develeped and pointed
or rounded.

Ventral fins thoracic or jugular when present, often absent (obsolete in
the old, but developed in the young of some species).

Branchie 4, with a cleft behind the last,

Pseudobranchia developed.

The pharyngeal bones beneath are separated.

The stomach is coecal, and the pyloric appendages in some numerous or
dendritic, and in others developed in moderate number.

Subfamily CENTROLOPHIN 4.
Synonymy.

=Centrolophing, Gill, Cat. Fishes E. Coast N. Am., p. 34 (not defined),
1861,

=Centrolophingy, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 127 (not defined,
but genera enumerated), 1862.

=Centrolophinx, Jordan and Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 450, 1882.

Corypheninie gen., Bonaparte, 1831, 1888, 1840, 1846, 1850.

Stromateina gen., Giinther.

Corypheenina gen., Giinther.

Carangina gen., Giinther.

Nomeina sp., Giinther.

Stromateide with complex elongate gill-rakers, extending backwards
from the epibranchials of the last branchial arch, 11 abdominal and 14
caudal vertebrae, protractile premaxillaries, and normally developed ven-
tral fins (1.5) persistent through life.

Although the constituents of this subfamily have been widely scattered,
and still continue to be, their relations were appreciated and contended

———

1884.] 667 [Gill

for more than a score of years ago, One of the genera has had a singular
history, which may be detailed more at length hereafter. Suffice it now
to state that one species was originally described as a Oentrolophus, and
subsequently differentiated as a peculiar generic type under the names
Letrus and Mupus, while another closely related was originally intro-
duced as a Ooryphena, again as a Trachynotus, and afterwards distin-
guished as a new genus Palinurus, near Trachynotus. The name Pali-
nurichthys, was substituted for it Nov., 1859, by Bleeker and about the same
time,* in Jan., 1860 (Proc, Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1860, p. 20), Gill also in-
dependently proposed the name Palinurichthys asa substitute for Palinurus.
In the “Catalogue of Fishes of the Eastern Coast of North America,”’ pub-
lished in Feb., 1861 (p. 84), it was referred to the sub-family Centrolo-
phine. In critical remarks on Dr. Giinther’s composition of the Scom-
broid families (‘‘On the Limits and Arrangement of the Family of Scom-
broids’’), published in March, 1862 (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1862,
p. 127), it was claimed that “nearly allied to the preceding [Stromateins ]
are the Centrolophine, with the genera Ovntrolophus Lac., Leirus Lowe, and
Palinurichthys Gill, Blkr. (=Pammelas Gthr.). Closely connected to the
Jentrolophine are the genera Schedophilus Cocco and Hoplocoryphis Gill
(type Schedophilus maculatus Gthr.).’? A few lines further it was again
remarked that among the forms that should be withdrawn from the Caran-
gide was ‘‘ Pammelas Gthr., which is nearly allied to Centrolophus.’’
Finally, in Gill’s new ‘Catalogue of the Fishes of the Eastern Coast of
North America’’ (1872, p. 9 ), Palinurichthys was enumerated under the
family ‘‘Stromateidm’’ and the subfamily ‘‘Centrolophine.’’ Notwith-
Standing these explicit statements the genus has been retained by Dr,
Giinther and Dr. Day next to Zrachynotus, with which it has no affinity
whatever. Its anatomy conclusively shows that the view, originally
formed by the author from a consideration of its exterior, is perfectly cor-
rect. It has the number of vertebra, epibranchial processes, &ec., of Cen-
trolophus, and in fact is scarcely, if at all, distinguishable from GC, ovalis
of European authors.
CENTROLOPHUS.

Synonymy.

=Centrolophus, Lacépéde, Hist. Nat. des Poissons, t. 4, p. 441, 1802.

<Centrolophus, Cuvier, Régne Animal, 2 ed., t. 2, p. 216, 1829.

<Acentrolophus, Wardo, Prodr. Ichthyol. Adriat., sp.

<Centrolophus, Owotier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. des Poissons, t. 9, p.
880, 1888.

=Pompilus, Lowe, Proe. Zool. Soc. London, 1839, p. 81.

Coryphena sp., Linnaeus, ete.

Perca sp., Gmelin.

Holocentrus sp., Lacépede,

*The paper in the Proc. Acad, was probably published earlier than Dr,
Bleeker’s, but happily the question is immaterial.

668 [July 18,

Hil.)

Centrolophinse with an elongated body, and very slender spines,

scarcely distinguishable externally from the succeeding rays.

Type C. pompilus =Coryphana pompilus Linn.
ScHEDOPHILUS.
Synonymy.

=Schedophilus, Cocco, Giorn. Innom. Messin., anno 8, No. 57, p. 57% (fide
Bon.) 1884?

=Schedophilus, Bonaparte, Fauna Italica, iv, Pesci, fol. 127 (marked

182), 1889.
Centrolophus sp., Cocco.
Crius sp., Valenciennes.

Centrolophinee with an oval contour, about four short, stout spines con-
stituting the foremost part of the dorsal, and a declivous or slightly pro-
tuberant snout.

S. medusophaqus =Centrolophus medusophagus Cocco.

The generic vharacters of this type, if distinct, have not yet been satis-
factorily contrasted with those of Leirus. There is a singular discrepancy
between the several figures of the types, most of which can, however, be
satisfactorily accounted for.

Lurrvs.
Synonymy.

2?Lepterus, Rafinesque, Caratteri di alcuni n. gen, en. sp. Animali e
Piante della Sicilia, p. 52, pl. 10 (D. ii, 80; A. i, 14; P. 20; V. i,5),
1810.

2? Lepipterus, Rafinesque, Indice d’Ittiologia Siciliana, p. 16, 1810.

==Leirus, Lowe, Proc. Comm. Zool. Soc., London, pt. 1, p. 143; Trans.
Jambridge Phil. Soc., v. 6, p. 199, pl. 5, 18838.

==Mupus, Cocco, Giorn. Innom. Messin. ann. —, p. —.

<Orius, Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. des Iles Canaries, par Webb and Berthe-
lot, t. 2, part 2, Poissons, p. 45, 1836-44.

=Palinurus, Dekay, Zoology of New York, pt. 4, p. 118, 1842.

=Mupus (Cocco), Bonaparte, Cat. Met. dei Pesci» Kuropei, p. 77 (name
only), 1846,

==Palinurichthys, Bleeker, Enum. sp. Pisc, Archipel. Ind., p. 22, Nov.,
1859.

=Palinurichthys, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila, [v. 12], p. 20, Jan.,
1860.

==Pammelas, Giinther, Cat. Fishes in Brit. Mus., v. 2, p. 485, 1860.

=Leirus,.Jordan and Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 452, 1882.

Jorypheena sp., Mitchiil.

Trachinotus sp., Storer.

Centrolophus sp., Cuv.and Val., Gunther, etc.

Pompilus sp., Lowe.

dn

4
4

1884,] 669 [Gill.

Centrolophine with an oval contour, six to eight short stout spines con-
stituting the foremost part of the dorsal, and a protuberant snout.
Type L. ovalis =Centrolophus ovalis, C. V.

It. is possible, perhaps probable, that the fish from which the following
very unsatisfactory description was taken by Rafinesque was a specimen
of the typical species of this genus.

“XXXII. G. Lerprarus.—Capo troncato senza squame, dei denti alla
mascella, inferiore sola nente, opercolo doppio, l’ésterne spinoso, l’interno
dentelato, base dell’ale dorsale, anale e caudale [p. 58] ricoperte dé
squame, una sola ala dorsale con pochi raggi spinosi.— Oss, Il Carattere
che distingue particolarmente questo genere dall’ Holocentrus si 6 quello

delle sue ale squamose,

“142. Sp. Lerrerus reTutaA.—Nero al disopra, bianco al disatto,
linea laterale curva nel mezzo, coda forcata, ala dorsale con 82 raggi di
cui 2 spinosi, Vala anale con 15 di cui 1 ¢ spinoso.— Oss. Porta il nome di
Fetula, & raro e poco stimato, ha aleuni piccoli denti acuti alla parte an-
teriore della mascella inferiore, ’ iride bianca, le ale pettorali con 20 raggi
ele toraciche con 6 di cui il primo 6 spinoso ; la sua lunghezza é di circ
mezzo piede,’’

Subfamily STROMA'TEIN Ai.
Synonymy.

<Stromatia, Rafinesque, Analyse de la Nature, p. —, 1815.
<Stromateini, Bonaparte, Iconografia della Fauna, Italica, t. 3, Pesci, fol.
125 (contains Stromateus, Peprilus, Luvarus and Kurtus), 1834.
<Stromatine, Swainson, Nat. Hist. and Class. Fishes, ete., v. 2, Dpw ld (5
258, 1839. (Includes Sestrinus, Stromateus, Peprilus, Kurtus and
Keris.)
<Stromateini, Bonaparte, Nuovi Annali delle Sci. Nat., t. 2, p 188, 1838 ;
t. 4, p. 275, 1840.
<Stromateina, Giinther, Cat. Fishes in Brit. Mus., v. 2, pp. 855, 897, 1860.
=Stromateine, Gill, Cat. Fishes E. Coast N. America, p. 35, 1861.
=Stromateins, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1862, p. 126, 1862.
=Stromateine, Jordan and Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. Am., p. 450, 1882.
Stromateidee with 14-15 abdominal and 17-21 caudal vertebree, sacci-
form processes extending backwards from the hindmost b ranchial arch,
non-protractile premaxillaries, and with the ventral fins generally early
atrophied or lost, and absent in adult—rarely persistent.
Dr. Liitken recognizes two genera of Stromateine, viz. :

I. StROMATEUS.

Stromateinse with ample branchial apertures.
In 1862 Gill proposed to subdivide this type into four genera or subgenera,
Viz. *

rd
Gill] 670 [July 18,

1. Srromarnus.
Synonymy.
<Stromateus, Arted/, Genera Piscium, p. 19, 1788.
<Stromateus, Linneus, Systema Nature, ed. x, t. 1, p. 248, 1758; ed.
xil, t. 14.482, 1766,
xChrysostrome, Lacépéde, Hist. Nat. des Poissons, t. 4, p. 698, 1802,
<Fiatola, Cuvier, Régne Animal [1'° 6d.], t. 2, p. 842, 1817. (Subge-
nus.)
<Stromateus, Owoler, Régne Animal [2° 6d.J, ti 2, p. 212, 1829,
>Seserinus, Ouvier, Régne Animal [2° ad. ],’t. 2, p.' 214, '1899,
<Stromateus, Ow. & Val., Hist. Nat. des Poissons, t. 9, p. 872, 1888.
<Stromateus, Giinther, Cat. Fishes in Brit, Mus., v. 2, p. 897, 1860.
==Stromateus, Gil, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. [v. 14], p. 126, 1862.
Stromateus sp. awct.
Stromatei with uniform dorsum, little produced dorsal and anal fins, and
without an obvious pelvic spine.
Type 8. fiatola Linn.

2. PEPRILUS.
Synonymy.
<Peprilus, Cuvier, Régne Animal [2¢ ed.], t. 2, p. 218, 1829.
<Rhombus, Ouvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. des Poissons, t. 9, p. 401,
1883,

Cheetodon sp., Linn.
Sternoptyx sp. Bloch and Schneider.
Stromateus sp., Mitchill, ete,

Stromatei with uniform dorsum, dorsal and anal fins extended vertically
in front, and with a trenchant pelvic spine.

Type P. alepidotus == P. longipinnis Cuv., ex. Mitchill.

3. Poronorus.
Synonymy.
=Poronotus, Gill, Cat. Fishes E, Coast N, Am., p. (not defined), 1861,
Stromateus sp., Peck, etc.
Peprilus sp., Owo.
Rhombus sp., Cuv. and Val.

Stromatei with a row of vertical slits on each side of the back between
the dorsal fin and lateral line, with little extended vertical fins, and with
a trenchant pelvic spine.

Type P. triacanthus = Strom. triacanthus Peck.

4, APOLEOTUS.
Synonymy.

=Apolectus, Ow. and Val. Wist. Nat. des Poissons, t. 9, p. 488, 1888.
Stromateus sp. Bloch, Bleeker, ete.

Stromatei with the lateral line keeled and shielded behind.

Type A. niger = A. stromateus Cuv. and Val.

1884.] 671 (Gill.

II. STROMATEOIDEs.

Stromateinse with restricted branchial apertures and without ventrals.
There appears to be two types under this group, viz :—

1. SrRoMATEOIDES,.
Synonymy.

<(Pamples, Cuvier, Régne Animal [2° ed.], t. 2, p. 212, 1829.
<Pampus, Bonaparte, Fauna Italica, iii, Pesci, fol. 125,* 1834.
<Stromateoides, Bleeker, Bijdrage tot de kennis der makreelachtige Vis-
schen van den Soenda-molukschen archipel, pp. 19-20, 7 Verhandl.
bataav. Genootsch., v. 24, 1857.
<Stromateoides, Litthen, Vidensk Selsk. Skr. (5), Nat. og Mathem. Afd.,
v. 12, pp. 528, 602, 1880.
Stromateus sp., Bloch, Giinther, ete.
Stromateoides with higher body, elevated vertical fins, and prominent
and extended trenchant dorsal and anal spines.
Type &. cinereus Blkr., ex Bloch.

2, CHONDROPLITES.
Synonyny.
==Chondroplites, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. [v. 14], p. 126 (not
defined), 1862.

Stromateus sp., Huphrasen, ete.
Stromateoides sp., Bleeker. Litken.

Stromateoides with more oblong body, little elevated dorsal and anal
fins, and concealed and subcartilaginous dorsal and anal spines.

Type C. sinensis = Strom. sinensis, Buphrasen.

PsENOpSIS.
Synonymy.

=Psenopsis, Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1862, p. 157, 1862.
Trachinotus sp., Zemminck and Schlegel.
Psenes sp., Bleeker, Giinther, Litthken.

Stromateinw with persistent perfect ventrals (I, 5) and about 6 normal
spines constituting the front of the dorsal fin.

Type P. anomalus = Trachinotus anomalus, T. and 8.

The following genus may be mentioned in this connection because the
Leirus perciformis as well as Psenopsis anomalus have been referred to it.
Its affinities are uncertain,

*“Diamo il nome di Pampus al secondo sottogenere in cui accogliamo quelle
Specie che non hanno pinine ventrali, e portano innanzi ai raggi delle dorsali e
dell’ anale parecchie spine terminate superiormente da una lamina tagliente,”
Bonaparte,

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. Xxr. 116. 4G. PRINTED OCT. 29, 1884,

672 (Aug. 15,

PSENES.
Synonymy.

Psenes, Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. des Poissons, t. 9, p. 259.
Cubiceps, Lowe, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 82, 1843.
Atimostoma, Smith, Illust. Zool. 8. Africa Fishes.
Navarchus, Filippi and Verany, Mem. Acad. Sci. Torin. (2), t. 18.
Trachelocirrhus, Dowmet, Revue et Mag. de Zool., t. 15, p. 212, 425, ete.,
1863,
Cubiceps, Giinther, Cat. Fishes in Brit. Mus., v. 2, p. 388, 1860.
Psenes, Ginther, Cat. Fishes in Brit. Mus., v. 2, p. 494, 1860.
These synonyms are given chiefly on the authority of Dr. Liitken
(Vidensk. Selsk. Skr. (5), Nat. og Math. Afd., v. 12, pt. 6, pp. 518, 601).
The genus named Schedophilopsis by Dr. Steindachner* under the sup-
position that it was nearly related to Schedophilus, has considerable super-
ficial likeness to that genus, but apparently does not belong to the same
family, and had received the slightly prior name Jcostews. It is the repre-
sentative of a peculiar family, Zcostedd@, in Jordan and Gilbert's Synopsis
(p. 619).

Stated Meeting, Auy. 15, 1884.
Present, 2 members.

An acceptance of membership was received from Dr. W. W.
Keen, dated Philadelphia, July 19th, 1884.

Letters of acknowledgement were received from the New
Bedford Library; Yale College; University of the City of
New York and Prof. J. J. Stevenson; U.S. Naval Institute ;
Library of Congress; United States Surgeon-General’s Office ;
United States Naval Observatory; United States Geological
Survey, and the Chicago Historical Society (all for No. 115).

Donations to the Library were received from the Hgyptian
Institute; the Department of Mines, Melbourne; the Geologi-
sal Survey of India; the Netherland Archives; the Royal So-
ciety of Northern Antiquaries; the Geological Society of Switz-

*Schedophilopsis = Schedophilopsis Steindachner, Anzeiger Math. Nat, cl R.
Akad. Wissensch,. zu Wien,, 1881, p. 100 (S. spinosis), 1881.

=

673

1884. ]

erland ; Prof. EH, Renevier; the Society of Sciences at Liége; M.
Hi. Folie; M. Paul rane the Reale Accademia dei Lincei ;
the Observatory at Turin; M. Alessandro Dorna; M. Damiano
Muoni; the Revue Pol thane the Keole des ines: the Geo-
graphical Societies of Paris and Bordeaux; the R. Academy of
History in Madrid; the Royal Meteorological Society ; London
Nature; Mr. Benjamin Ward Richardson; M. F. Hugh
O’Donnell; Rev. John Presland; Mr. Lewis Appleton; the Hs-
sex Institute; Prof. C. H. Hitchcock; the Boston Sloeidiy of
Natural History; the American Academy of Arts and Sci-
ences; the Astronomical Observatory of Harvard College; the
American Journal of Science; the New Yor kk Meteorological
Observatory; the American Museum of Natural History ;
Mr. A. N. Bell; J. & J. D. Nolan; the College of Pharmacy ;
Franklin Institute; Pennsylvania Historical Society; the Hn-
gineer’s Club; Mr. Benjamin 8. Janney; M. Leopold Delisle;
Dr. Persifor Frazer; Mr. E. D. Cope; Major M. Veale; the
United States Naval Institute; Johns Hopkins University ;
Chief of Engineers, United States Army; United States Na-
tional Museum; United States War Department; Mr. Jed.
Hotchkiss; Mr. Wm. A. Courtnay; Rev. Stephen D. Peet;
and the Academy of Science at St. Louis.

The death of Ferdinand Von Hochstetter, at Vienna, July
18, 1884, aged 55 years, was reported by the Secretary.

Gniinstininatione from Prof, E. D. Cope were received as
follows:

“On the Structure of the Feet in the Extinct Artiodactyla
of North America.”

“Fifth Contribution to the Knowledge of the Fauna of the
Permian Formation in Texas.”

The President reported that he had appointed Messrs. Lesley,
Phillips, Ingham, Rushenberger, Barker and Brinton, to meet
the requirements of the resolution of the Board and Council,
adopted Feb. 8, 1884.

And the meeting was adjourned.

674 [Sept. 19,
Stated Meeting Sept. 19, 1884.
Present, 4 members.

Letters accepting membership were received from Edward
W.Syle, D.D., 609 Walnut Street, Philadelphia, August 29th ;
from Sir John Lubbock, dated High Elms, Hayes, Kent, August
6; and from N. A. Randolph, M.D., University of Pennsylva-
nia, Medical Department, August 9, 1884.

Acknowledgments were received from the Cambridge
Library, England (110, 111, 112); W. L. Stevens (11: ); the
Royal Academy of Sivannes and Royal Zodlogical Society,
Amsterdam nae 111, — 112); the Franklin Institute (115);
and the Maryland Historieal Society (115).

Letters of envoy were soddindl from the Musée Guimei,
August 23; the Manchester Library and P hilosophie al Society ;
and the CbciBridie Library, Eng] nes June 80,

An invitation was received to assist at the Twenty-fifth An-
niversary of the Natural History Society, at Chemnitz.

A circular letter was received from Gen. CO. B. Norton, re-
specting the American Exhibition of 1886, at London.

Donations to the Library were received from the Geological
Survey of India; the Academy of Sciences at Batavia; the
Royal Society of New South Wales; the Office of Mines at
Melbourne; the Royal Society of Tasmania; the Physical-
Central Observatory at St. Petersburg; the Imperial Society
of Naturalists at Moscow; the Imperial Royal Central In-
stitute, Geological Reichsanstalt, Zodlogico-Botanical, and
Geographical Societies at Wien; M. August Tischner at Leip-
zig; the Scientific Society of Upper Lusatia; the Royal Prus-
sian Academy and German Geological Society at Berlin; the
Royal Danish Society of Sciefices; the Institute of the Grand
Duchy of Luxembourg; the Royal Academy of Sciences at
Amsterdam ; the Holland Society of Sciences, and Tyler Mu-
seum ; the Royal Academy of Sciences, Royal Observatory and
Department of the Interior at Brussels; the Venetian Institute
of Sciences; the Royal Academy of Sciences at Turin; the

4
|
|

1884.] 675

Academy of the Lincei; the Royal Geological Committee of
Italy ; the Tuscan Society of Natural Sciences; the Anthropo-
logical, Zodlogical, and Geographical Societies at Paris; the
Musée Guimet ; the Royal Academy of History at Madrid;
the Philosophical Society of Great Britain, the British Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science, Royal Observatory,
Meteorological Office, International Forestry Exhibition, the
Royal Asiatic, Geographical, Zodlogical, Geological, Astro-
cage nea and Antiquarian Societies and Nature, Lon-
don; the Royal Cornwall Polytechnic Society ; the Manchester
tise and Philosophical Society; the Royal Irish Academy;
the Royal Society of Canada; S. E. Cassino & Co.; American
Philological Association ; A, Agassiz and F. D, Whitney; the
American Aniquanien Souieéy ; the American Journal of
Science ; the Torrey Botanical Club of New York; Dr. Wil-
liam G, Stevenson, of Poughkeepsie; the Prankin Institute,
the College of Pharmacy, J. P. Lesley and Henry Phillips, Jr.;
the American: Chemical Journal, American Journal of Phi-
lology, Johns Hopkins University, and Kdward Ingle, of Balti-
more; the United States National Museum, the United States
Fish Commission, the Smithsonian Institution, and Mrs Ermin-
nie A. Smith, eW: ishington; J. Hotchkiss, of Staunton, Vir-
ginia; Bieta: ‘Giles kk Jones Jr., of Atlanta, Georgia; the
Colorado Scientific Society, and M. Rafael Mallen, of Mexico.

The death of Mr. Henry M. Phillips, at P hiladelphia, August
29th, aged 78, was announced,

The death of Prof. Robert E. Rogers, M.D., at Philadelphia,
September 6th, aged 77, was atindo teioedl

“'Thermometrical Observations at Quito, Hequador, taken by

Wile SLOMAN Brockway, from September 17, 1858, to June 18,
1859,” was presented by the Secretary, with a letter from Mr.
Brockway, dated September 6th, 1884, in which he says

“ I would call the attention of whoever examines the table
to the equability of the temperature and that the heavy earth-
quake shocks did not materially vary it. Since Humboldt’s
stay at the Hquator I think that no official observations have
been taken,”

And the meeting was adjourned.

Thermometrical Observations in Quito, Heuador. Farenheit. C. B. Brockway.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, September 19, 1884.)

DATED 1858.

September 17
ad 18
“

“cc
é
ce
“6
6c“
“6
66
‘6
“6

73

October
a4

‘é
73
‘é

“6

12 M.

3 P.M.

9 P.M.

REMARKS.

66°
65
63

65

64°
61
61
62
61
61

62

Elevation above sea level 9492 feet.
Latitude 0° 15’ S., Longitude 78° 45’ W.

Rain in the afternoon.
Rainy until near evening.
Clear.
&
Hail and rain in afternoon.
Clear.
Cloudy after 4 P.M.
Cloudy from 4to 6 p.m. Comet visible in evening.

Morning and evening clear. A little rain in afternoon.

Clear.
ee

73

[ ABM yOOIg

‘61 “4dog]

October

“c
(73
“6
“ce
“6
‘e
“ce
66

“ec

“cc
“6
“cc
“ce
“6
“c
a3

ce
November
“eé

ce
66
“ec
“cs
é
‘6
73
“ce
6
‘eé
““c

““

Clear.
Cloudy all day.

[F881

Clear.

Clear in forenoon. A little rain towards evening.
Cloudy part of the day.
Clear morning and evening. Cloudy at noon.
Clear morning. Sudden haze at dark for a few minutes.
Clear.
Clear in forenoon. Towards evening rain, thunder and
lightning.
Clear in forenoon. Cloudy from 3 to 4 P.M.
Clear until evening, then rain.
Cloudy day and rainy evening.
Clear day and cloudy evening.
Clear day.
Clear forenoon. Rain in afternoon.
Hard shower in the afternoon.
Rain in afternoon.
Rain in afternoon and heavy thunder.
Hail large as peas ; thunder and lightning all afternoon.
Cloudy ; slight rain ; a beautiful rainbow ; first seen.
Cloudy all day. Heavy shower at 1 p.m.
Cloudy all day ; gloomy ; rainy all day.
Rain, thunder, lightning, in afternoon.
Clear morning. Rain in afternoon.
Rain in afternoon.
Clear morning. Rain in afternoon.
‘ ce

6c 6é “cc

LL9

Very little rain during the day.

Gloomy and rainy day. Beautiful and moonlight eve.
Slight rains in the afternoon.

A very hard shower accompanied by loud thunder.

oo
ics]
8
°
é
ie
4
©
ms

REMARKS.

November 15
“ce 16

“““

6

sé

December
oe

“6
«s
“é

“6

Cloudy all day. Rainy in afternoon.

Pleasant forenoon. Rainy in afternoon.
Rained in the night, a thing unusual.
Beautiful morning. Hard shower at 9 A.M.
Cloudy in the forenoon. Rain in afternoon.
Gloomy day, accompanied with rain.

Gloomy day ; cloudy ; no rain.

Gloomy day ; cloudy ; misty; no rain.

Sun again scen. Rain in afternoon.

Sun seen again. Shower at noon.

Gloomy day ; a little rain; clear evening.
Gloomy day ; hard shower in the evening.
Rained all day and night.

Pleasant morning. Hard showers all afternoon.
Clear day.

Hard shower at 9 P.M.

Forenoon pleasant. Showers at 3 P.M.
Cloudy all day ; some rain.

Fine morning. Hard rain all afternoon.

A dismal day ; hard rains.

A dismal day ; some rain.

A dismal day ; constant rains.

A shower about noon ; pleasant afterwards.
Fine forenoon. Heavy showers all afternoon.
A pleasant day.

Rained some.

Fine forenoon. Showers in afternoon.
Pleasant until 3 p.m., then had a heavy thunder storm.
Thunder in afternoon. Rain in evening.
Pleasant forenoon ; stormy afternoon.

Heavy thunder and hail storm about 2 P.M. ; some rain.

(484 yoorg

‘Hp ‘QT “IXX ‘008 *SO'lIHd “UHWV OTE

“DOCL ‘60 ‘MHANAAON CHLNIVA

December
oF

1859.
January

‘c
“cc

“

16

Pleasant forenoon ; some rain after.
Some rain forenoon. Beautiful evening.
Hard showers in afternoon.
Clear day ; rain about 9 p.m.
Fine morning. Rain in afternoon.
Fine day.

os

[eet

Rain in the afternoon. Fine evening.

Fine morning. Rain most of the afternoon.
Fine morning. Rain towards evening.
Gloomy, drizzly, and rainy all day.

A fine morning ; the day ending in rain.
Clear.

Pleasant day; thunder, but no rain.

Rain about 9 a.m. Afternoon cloudy.

Drizzly rain from 3 p.m. and during the night.

Rain from 1 to 3 P.m., afterwards clear. ‘a
Rain from 6 to 9 A.m., afterwards clear until 4 P.M.

Constant showers from 4 p.m until dark.

Rain, with sharp lightning and loud thunder from 2 to 5}. P.M.

Clear and beautiful.

Clear except a short time afternoon.

Cloudy afternoon ; Rain began at 8 P.M.

Rain during the afternoon.

Rainy day and evening.

Clear.

se

“ec

Rain and hail between 3 and 4 p.m.
Cloudy morning. Clear afternoon.
Slight rain towards night.

A few drops of rain about 5 P.M,

oe

*£BMOOIT]

DaTED 1859. |

REMARKS.

January
“se

Cloudy day ; a little rain towards night.
Some rain last night. Cloudy day.
Clear.

Clear, except morning cloudy.

Hard showers ; loud thunder ; sharp lightning.

Pleasant forenoon, A little rain in afternoon.
Cloudy morning. Rain set in about dark.
Clear day ; rain about 8 P.M.

A little rain about 3 P.M.

Clear.

Clear forenoon. Cloudy afternoon.

Rain during the afternoon.

“6 “cc

sé 6c

Cloudy.
Rain in afternoon.
Rain at 3 P.M.
Hail at 1 P.M.
Clear.
ee
Clear; rain night.
Cloudy ; a little rain in night.
sé “es ce
Rain 1p. M.
Little.rain 1 P.M.
Cloudy afternoon.
Rain between 8 and 4PM.
Clear.
ee

“cc

“cc

[ sUM yoOIg,

‘er “ydog]

February 18 | 64 66 66 | 57 Clear. B
i 19 64 68 69 57 Slight fall of rain. 3
= 20 | 62 65 66 58 Clear.

‘ 21 64 65 66 7 Alittlerain about dark. (There is no dusk under the Equator. )
se 22 64 66 66 56 | Rainy afternoon.
‘$ 23 | 64 65 66 | 56 | Ke
‘ 24 64 | 65 65 | 56 | A little rain afternoon.
25 | 63 65 63 | 54 At noon commenced hailing, but finally turned to rain.
“ 26 | 62 64 62 54 Rain most of the afternoon.
a 27 61 63 64 53 Clear.
28 | 63 65 66 57 $f
March | 61 63 65 57 Some rain after 4 p.m., and slight one in the morning.
“ce 2 62 64 | 63 55 sé of “e “ec “é
6 3 60 62 63 54 Rain in afternoon and night.
os 4 60 61 61 54 Heavy shower in morning and afternoon.
Me 5 60 62 59 49 Rainy day.
“ 6 60 61 60 52 Rainy afternoon. for)
“ 7 59 60 60 48 Rainy from 11 a.m. until night. es
ff 8 59 62 64 54 No rain until after 4 P.M.
s¢ 9 61 63 63 57 ff rs ¢
ai 1g 62 63 Oo to be “ « “
sf 11 60 63 62 57 fs aS f Earthquake shock at 8 A.M.
es 1 61 64 64 54 a & ne
ss $34 62 64 65 56 se “ “
fe 14 | 61 63 64 55 Clear,
sf 15 62 64 Os re ee
“6 16 61 63 ee te Rain in afternoon.
S oe 63 65 65 | 57 sé es
ss ieee 61 Gas] 625 be 5 a
& 194 59 61 Grn | 55 &¢ ss ra
fs 20 | 59 64 | 60 | 56 Hail and rain in afternoon. a
9 62 ae ee Rain after 2 P.M. &
& 22 59 62 62 | 57 | Rain after dark. Heavy earthquake shock at 83 A.U* Zi
“ 20. | OS 62 | 62 ke og | Rain after 4 P.M. g

*For note see page 684,

DATED 1859. | AM | YM. 3 Pp. M. ~M. | REMARKS,

[ SCM yoorg

March é | 5 | Very little rain afternoon,
“ce F | | | 6s

66

Rain most all day.
‘6 «6

“cc 66

ee ce
Clear morning. Rain and hail from noon until 4 P.m.; then
clear.
Rain from noon till night.
Rainy.
ia}

Clear until noon, after which, rain.
A little rain about 4 p.m.
Clear forenoon. Cloudy afternoon.
Some rain between 4 P.M. and dark.
sf a6 es and at 9 P.M.
Rain in evening.
Clear.

“6

A little rain at noon.
Clear.
ee

“6

A little rain about noon. Rained hard at 9 p.m.
A little rain about noon
Clear.

“ce

“et yds]

April 23 61 | 62
cs 4 ie ak - 58 | Cloudy. — >
o 5 61 a 56 | A little rain about noon. Eg
‘ 26 | 59 @ ee ce | A hard shower a little after noon. =
- 27 | . 60 a He 53 Cloudy afternoon anda little rain.
y 28 | 60 68 a 5d | Rain and clouds most of the day.
“ 29 60 63 -* 56 | Rain at noon and at 3 P.M.
is 30 | as a on 55 | Rain about 2 P.m.
May ip Soe 58 57 54 | Lightning, thunder and rain.
if: 2 58 Pa a 51 | Rainy.
‘6 3 | 59 50 te 53 | Clear,
i 60 | 62 2 ae
a ie ~ 62 ie | e ree Se = afternoon, with hail.
Ge 7 | 59 | 39 i 9) ain, hail, t 1under and lightning i r
‘s 8 58 H = Me a | ry reabe xe about 4P.M. ee nt
ss ed 54 57 | | Cloudy anc windy afternoon ; thick fog betw
ss 2 | b4 51 58 | 4s fay Gal Steer sane ; thick fog between 7and 8 P.M.
‘ 41 58 62 & | Bt Hard showers with rain after 3 P.M. D
12 58 ed = | ep Lightning, thunder and rain during afternoon. by
‘. 13 57 | 59 59 BL Cloudy. afternoon ; a little rain about sunset
14 57 50 5B i A drizzling rain all day. :
i 15 57 59 | 53 oy A cloudy day ; rainy afternoon and evening.
16 BY 58 oS a Rain afternoon and night.
re 17 56 BT BY Rainy day and night.
3% 18 5G 59 | 5 a Rainy afternoon.
e 19 55 BB | 56 Fy Hee ; rain after 4 P.M.
* 2 56 58 | 5 tainy afternoon. Heavy earthquake shock 7 9h
bi a 55 58 | 86 Me Pe amt and windy ; rain in bs organ mae ae
: 2 55 59 ¢ ) sek
i a 56 61 60 Ba Biondy and wiid
: 4 56 58 = oudy and windy ; in afternoon tl ‘ i ‘ c
% 95 56 59 yi ps ; windy afternoon for Quito. sundae Dene 3
26 56 59 61 51 pra z

REMARES.

Daten 1859. | | Mw | SPs,

620
62
61
62
65

(Ava yoorg

considerable wind.

and windy.
. about noon.

“eé
Some clouds ; rain after 4 P.M.
Clear until noon, then a shower.
Floating clouds all day.
Clear.

“

ce
ce

“ce

|
|
|
{

* On the 22d of March was one of the heaviest earthquakes that ever occurred in Ecuador, not only as to loss of life, but as to

surface transformations. It may be noted that the temperature was eomparatively unchanged.—C. B. B,

1884.] 685

Stated Meeting, October 3, 1884.
Present, 7 members.
Mr. IneHAM in the Chair.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from MeGill
University (114) and J. H. C. Coffin (115).

Donations to the Library were received from the Depart-
ment of Mines at Melbourne; the Geological Survey of India ;
the Imperial Society of Naturalists, at Moscow; the Venetian:
Athensum; Baron Ferd. von Mueller; Revue Politique; Lon-
don Nature; the Philosophical and Literary Society at Leeds ;
the Alchemist of Montreal; the Boston Society of Natural
History; the American Journal of Science; Mr.. B. Silliman ;
the Connecticut Academy of Sciences; the Meteorological
Observatory at New York; the Academy of Natural Sciences
at Philadelphia; Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr.; the United States
Geological Survey, the United States Fish Commission; the
American Antiquarian; and Mr. J. B. Stallo.

Mr. J. Sutton Wall, of Monongahela City, Pa., exhibited a
canvas tracing of a group of Indian pictures cut on the top and
sides of a half-buried block of sandstone perched on the bluff
of the Monongahela valley, in Fayette county, Pa., opposite
Millsborough, at a height of 290 feet above the river. A pho-
tograph of the canvas was exhibited.

Also a photograph of a tracing of similar figures on the
rock shore of the river near Geneva, now submerged by a new
slackwater dam.

Also one of a carved rock on the Hamilton farm near the
Evansville turnpike, six miles south-east from Morgantown, in
West Virginia. This rock surface is vertical.

In answer to a question respecting the safety of such monu-
ments, Mr. Wall replied that a fourth fine group, of which he
had heard, was destroyed before he could obtain a tracing of it,
the farmer who owned the land having blasted it up for foun-
dation stone for his new house; and that the owner of the

686 (Oct. 3,

large group on the canvas informed him of his intention to
treat the perched rock in the same way, when he built his new
barn.

On motion of Mr. Phillips, it was

Resowed, That the subject be referred to the consideration of the Board
of Officers and Council at its next meeting, whether any steps can be
taken by the Society to preserve such monuments from destruction,

Mr. Lesley read a Note on a possible origin of the Pshent.

Mr. E. B. Harden exhibited, through the Secretary, a square
pipe of limonite, which had been deposited against the inside
walls of a vertical wooden box, leading down to ‘the sump of
the Eagle shaft near Pottsville, Pa. The outside layer, first de-
posited, was a beautifully perfect fac-simile of the inside rough
face of the boards, showing the grain, saw cuts, and knots in
the wood. The whole specimen admirably illustrated the forma-
tion of selvage veins.*

Dr. Syle presented a copy of the Chinese translation of
Herschel’s Outlines of Astronomy, in three volumes, published
at Shanghai, December, 1859.

Pending nominations Nos, 1029, 1030 were read.

The Kansas Academy of Science at Topeka was ordered to
be placed on the list of corresponding societies for exchange of
publications.

The request of the Journal of Associate Engineering Socie-
ties, Washington University, St. Louis, Mo. (Sept. 27), was re-
ferred to the Secretaries.

An appropriation was made for publishing a plate illustra-
tion for the Proceedings, No. 117.

The Hall Committee was authorized to prepare the north
garrets for the reception of the stock of publications.

And the meeting adjourned,

*This specimen was analyzed by FH. Bachman, Chemist of the Phoenix Tron

Co., und found to consist of 76.17 per cent sesquioxide of iron, The residue con-
tained very little silica,

PICTURE ROCK,

On Hamilton Farm, near ihe Evansville Pike,
SIX MILES SOUTH-EAST OF MOBGASTOWS,

Wrst VIRGINIA.

j. SUTTON WALL

B. PF. BENTLEY.

>
=
®
=
Vv
=
oy
>
wn
}
©
je)
=
&
co
—

J. SUTTON WALL

WILLIAM ARISON.

>
3
®
=
vu
a
=
nN
}
9
oO
=
&
co
RS

3
4 L rf

SCALE OF FEET.

Reduction of Tracing on Muslin of

Photographic

Amer. Philos. Soc. Oct. 1884. 7 ‘Trae
PICTURE ROCK,

MONONGAHELA RIVER,

VION Yo
4S NO PHI OG

Fo

Tw
CNA E BRET AGOVE GROUND.

soen OF ROCK

3 ao |

A

FIGURE ON SIDE EAST END,
OF ROCK, B, \

Ye

ees.

_ petiteanmunsecmenitsiaitisaniiti

1884, ] 687 (Wall,

On some Indian picture rocks in Fayette County, Pa. By Mr. J. Sutton
Wall.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, Oct. 3, 1884.)

The tracing on muslin (Plate I.), exhibited this evening, was made by
Mr. William Arison, of Monongahela City, and myself, in the month of
September, 1882.

This rock is perched on the crest of the hill facing the Monon-
gahela river, opposite the town of Millsborough, at an elevation of 290
feet (by barometer) above water level of the river. It is a detached portion
of the Waynesburgh sandstone which outcrops in the vicinity. Rather
coarse in texture, it has a fairly even and smooth top surface, and is ap-
proximately sixteen feet square, with perpendicular sides. The top of the
hill, next to the river, terminates rather sharply, and the ground surface
receding from the river has a gradual fall of about ten feet per hundred
for a distance of perhaps eighty yards, and then rises into a more elevated
hill to the eastward of the rock. The rock occupies a position from
which a very fine view of the river and Ten Mile valley can be had. The
edge of the rock next to the river rests about even with the ground sur-
face surrounding it, while the opposite edge rests about three feet above
ground. It is not fissile and the top surface would be difficult to remove,
The outlines of the figures are formed by grooves on channels smoothly
and regularly cut or incised in the top surface and on two sides, of the
width shown on the tracing, and: are from three-fourths of an inch to a
mere trace in depth. The foot-prints and cup-shaped cavities are carved
about the same depth, except the large circular disc, which also is a cupped-
shaped cavity, about five inches in depth. There are the outlines of two
animals carved on the sides, one on the south side, which is shown on the
tracing, and the other on the east side, not shown.

The figure composed of three connected links, with three lines or per-
haps arrows drawn across them, I am inclined to place to the credit ot
vandalism, which is still in rapid progress, and will ultimately destroy the
original carvings. Some of the lines are becoming quite faint, owing no
doubt to erosion by the atmosphere. We only traced those lines and pores
tions of lines that were distinctly legible.

Mr. Joseph Horner, and old resident of Millsborough, informs me that
the figures were much more distinct, when he first saw them fifty years
ago, than at the present time. A tradition exists in the neighborhood that
the early settlers were informed by the Indians, that they had no knowl-
edge of the authors of the carvings, but that they found them as the
“white men’’ then saw them. The tracing shows all the figtres res
versed, but by looking through the canvas from the other side you can
see them in their true position, which may be done by placing lights be»
hind it. The tracing was made by painting the grooves and indentations
with a mixture of lamp-black and turpentine, and then spreading strips of
muslin over the portions painted, and by using a brush and our fingers,

PROC, AMER. PAHILOS. SOC. xxr, 116, 417. PRINTED NOVEMBER 29, 1884,

Wall.] 688 [Oct, 3,

the lines were transferred to the muslin ; afler which it was sewed together
in proper connection, and the lines made more permanent by repainting
with diluted printers’ ink. Mr. E. B. Harden, of the State Geological Sur-
vey, recently photographed asmall portion of the top surface of the rock ;
but was unable to obtain a proper position for photographing the whole sur-
face. To do this properly an elevated position would be necessary at some
distance from the rock. This could be done by the aid of a small amount
of lumber and tools, which we did not have at hand at the time of our
visit.

Plate 2 is a reduction from a tracing on muslin (natural size), showing
the figures carved on the surface of a rock located on the east shore of the
Monongahela river, a half mile below Geneva, in Fayette county, Penn-
sylvania, The rock has a fairly even and smooth upper surface, falling
slightly toward the water, and is an eroded portion of the Morgantown
sandstone in place. A portion of this rock containing figures was removed.
some years since, and used in constructing a building in Geneva. The
figures thus removed I did not see.

The execution of the carvings appears to be of the same character as
that on the rock shown by Plate 1. The marked resemblance of many of
the figures leads me to consider it of the same age and origin as the other
sarved rocks in this region. At the time of my visit, in 1881, the upper
portion of the rock rested only about four feet above low water, and I
have since learned that the portion containing the figures copied has been
rendered inaccessible by the back water, formed in the pool from the con-
struction of Lock and Dam, No. 7, at a point nearly two miles farther
down the river.

Plate 8 is also a reduction from a tracing of a carved rock located in
West Virginia, near the north side of the Evansville pike, six miles south-
east of Morgantown. This is along the crest of an elevated ridge, com-
manding a fine view of the surrounding country. The ridge on either
side of this pike is strewn with numerous large blocks of sandstone, evi-
dently detached from their native bed, and many of them present excel-
lent surfaces for carving. But I only found two of them to contain any
figures, out of a large number which I examined in the vicinity.

The figures shown on this plate were all found on one rock, and are
represented in their true position. They are incised or cut in the top suface,
evidently in the same manner as the rocks already mentioned. The small
pot-shaped holes, buffalo and bear tracks form a common feature of all
these pictured rocks. Hach individual rock is however usually found to
contain some figures not shown on others, Slight variations are also
noticeable in the manner of representing certain animals and reptiles ; as
for instance difference in posture. The rattlesnake is distinguishable by the
line or bar which marks the termination of the body proper and shows the
beginning of the rattles. The semi-circular figure on the left side of the
plate forms, in my judgment, an interesting feature of this rock. It strikes
me that this figure has been intended to represent a horse’s track or foot-

1884.] 689

print. If this interpretation be a correct one, it goes toward fixing the
age of the workmanship, and brings it within the historic period of North
America,

Stated Meeting, October 17, 1884.
Present, 15 members.
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

A letter requesting exchanges was received from Mr, J. C,
Rowell, Librarian of the University of California, dated Berke-
ley, October 1. On motion, the University of California was
placed on the list to receive the Transactions and Proceedings
from the beginning.

A letter requesting missing numbers of T'ransactions and
Proceedings American Philosophical Society was received
from the Imperial Society of Nature, Moscow, dated Sep-
tember 1.

Donations to the Library were reported from the Royal So-
ciety of Victoria; the Annales des Mines and Revue Politique;
the Royal Academy of History at Madrid; the Meteorologi-
sal Office, the Journal of Foresty and London Nature; Dr.
Edward Jarvis, of Boston; Harvard University; the New
York Academy of Sciences; the College of Pharmacy, the
Franklin Institute, the Engineers’ Club, the American Journal
of Medical Sciences, Rev. HE. W. Syle, Mr. Heary Phillips, Jr.,
and L. R. Hamersly, of Philadelphia; the Maryland Histori-
sal Society; the Bureau of Education, the United States
National Museum and the Surgeon-General’s Office at Wash-
ington,

A paper on /Terderite was read by Dr. F. A. Genth.

A paper on the Language and Ethnographic position of the
Xinka (Shinka) Indians of Guatemala was read by Dr. D. G.
Brinton. The paper embraced two vocabularies of three dia-
lects, the only known existing specimens of the language.

Dr, Syle objected to the statement made in the memoir that the absence
of native names of salt, maize, &c., must necessarily be taken as evidence
that the aboriginal Xinkas did not know, or possess the articles until the
advent of their Aztec and Maya conquerors ; adducing the fact that the

690 [Oct 17,

Japanese now use many Chinese names for things which they had before,
and for which they had and still have their own names.

Mr, Phillips instanced the adoption of the word ‘‘alcohol’’ by the En-
glish, and their abandonment of ‘spirits of wine.”

Dr. Brinton replied that the evidence was made stronger by the foreign.
words being repeated in all three dialects ; and that comparative philologists
recognize the rule as a good one, and the inference as reasonable, that if
the Xinka vocabularies have no native word for hat, and have instead the
Spanish word sombrero, the hat was probably not an article of native dress.

Mr. Ashburner described observations at the Luray caverns,
and at the Natural Bridge, in Virginia, which he had made
recently.

He found by barometric and by direct measurements that the tradition-
ary data of the French Engineers were exaggerated. Instead of 215’, he
made the crown of the arch 185/ and 187 above the stream. Instead of
the popularly received 2000’ above tide, his connections with the nearest
railway station made the stream 915’, and the crown of the arch 1102/
A. T., and the Hotel 1040’... The thickness of the bridge at the north side
is 46’; at the south side 36/.

Cedar creek flows beneath the bridge southward. The rock of the bridge
is nearly horizontal. The rocks north of the bridge dip steeply towards
it (¢. ¢., downstream, southward) ; those south of the bridge dip percepti-
bly also towards it (/. ¢, upstream, northward). There is, therefore, a
local synclinal at the bridge ; and Mr. Ashburner would thus account for
the existence of the bridge at that particular point. The last remnant of
the roof of a long cavern, following a special stratum across a synclinal,
would necessarily be left precisely in the axial line of the trough.

The Luray cavern ramifies to great, distances, but always in a particular
group of limestone beds, limited to 65 feet. The cavern of the Natural
Bridge must have been limited to a certain soluble horizon of the forma-
tion. Its great height now is no safe index of the height of the cavern
formerly ; nor of the width of the soluble rock zone ; but is to be ascribed
to the vertical erosion of its channel by Cedar creck, in adjusting its water
slope to the neighboring open lower country.

Dr. Frazer remarked that when he visited the Bridge three years ago he
noticed steep (45°-++) dips further south ; and therefore that the synclinal
must be very local.

Dr. Frazer desired to place on record his dissent from Prof.
H. ©. Lewis’s paper on a great trap range through Southern
Pennsylvania, read at the late meeting of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science; because the discus-
sion which followed the reading of that paper would not appear
in the volume of the T'ransactions of the Association.

1884.] 691 [Frazer.

Trap Dykes in the Archean Rocks of Southeastern Pennsylwoaniu.
By Dr. Persifor Frazer,

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 17, 1884.)

Among the geological papers announced to be read in Section E of the
late meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science,
in Philadelphia, was one by Prof. Henry Carvill Lewis on a Trap dyke in
Eastern Pennsylvania. It describes a dyke which (its author asserted)
had been overlooked by the speaker and other geologists in this portion of
the State, and which was distinguished, both by its great length and by
certain peculiarities of position,* from other dykes in Pennsylvania.

This faulted dyke is supposed to have been laterally thrown for a dis-
tance that was understood to be five miles as Prof. Lewis described it.
But on hearing that the ‘“hade’’ or dips were nearly vertical in both
parts which it was thought were once in contact, Prof. James Geikie
thought that any previous continuity of the two dykes must be aban-
doned. + 4

In describing the course of his dyke, Prof. Lewis remarked, ‘Dr,
Frazer failed to trace it through: Chester county, though he has a small
portion of it on his geological map in Easttown township ; nevertheless I
have followed it over the surface, foot by foot, by the loose boulders on
the surface ; and found it to be continuous,’’ or words to this effect.

There happened to be on the wall the joined maps of the four counties
which the speaker had prepared for the Second Geological Survey, viz:
Adams, York, Lancaster and Chester, and he referred to them as follows: {

The great amount of disintegration of the surface rocks of Chester
county has caused a deep soil, which overlies a large portion of the rocks
of the county on the line of this dyke, and the constant movement of this
soil renders it very difficult to trace the buried outcrops by loose boulders
and fragments. The consequence of this is that if one maps all the locali-
ties where masses of trap are found, and attempts to connect them by lines,
the irregularity of the latter will inform him that he is probably not
representing the facts of structure as they exist. In Adams county, where
the decomposition is generally much less profound than in Chester, in the

* The text of this paper is not at hand and the writer must trust his memory
for its contents. It is very unfortunate that in the reports of the proceedings
of Sections of the A, A. A.S., there should be no account taken of the discus-
sions on papers; especially in cases where statements are observed and
pointed out which seem to be at variance with a cautious judgment of the
facts, The disadvantage of this state of things to the cause to which the
Association is nominally devoted is still further increased by the long period
which must elapse before a paper finds its way into print. Error is notoriously
fleet of foot, and with a year’s start may defy pursuit.

+ In a rather exceptionally full notice of this paper (omitting however men-
tion of the objections to it) given in Science subsequently, the fault is stated to
pe several thousand feet, but the extent of the lateral displacement is men-

tioned only as “large.’’
{The following remarks are quoted from memory and somewhat amplified,

Frazer. ] 692 (Oct. 17,

region of the dykes, a great deal of work was necessary before the seeming-
ly capricious outcrops could be brought into anything like order. Let any
one look at the regularity of the three threads of trap passing from N. E. to
§. W. on the map of Adams county of the First Geological Survey, and
compare it with the irregular and broken lines of the trapin the map of
the same county by the present Survey, and he will find a case in point.

It will not suffice to find three or four occurrences of fragments of trap,
lying more or less ina straight line, ina distance of a mile or more, in order
to assume a dyke of trap connecting them under the soil.

On looking over the maps of the townships south of the Chester valley,
which the speaker carried into the field when engaged in the Geological
Survey, he remarks in a great many places notes of trap fragments on the
surface. But with some experience in tracing the outcrop of this rock,
he did not feel justified in connecting these isolated indications together,
and he still doubts whether this should be done. The absence of a map
of the dyke prevents him from saying how many of these occurrences are
included within the dyke mentioned by Prof. Lewis, but no single dyke
can include many of them.

It is a very different matter if it is merely claimed that this supposed
new dyke indicates the direction of a zone or belt of disturbance along
which two, twenty, or fifty outbursts of igneous rock may have taken
place, just as it is shown that in north-western York and central Adams
counties, notwithstanding all the irregularity of the outcrops, there is a
general zone along which the main outflows have taken place.

The considerations which the speaker has so often urged in connection
with this region, make the existence of such a belt exceedingly probable,
(See Mémoire sur la partie 8. E. de la Pennsylvanie, pp. 90, 109 +, ete.) It
has been abundantly urged, both in this memoire and elsewhere, that the
exceedingly straight southern limit of the Chester valley implies other
causes at work than those of ordinary deposition : in other words, a great
longitudinal crack along the southern side of which the lower measures
were brought up ; that this great crack would in all probability be connected
with others crossing or diverging from it hardly needs to be stated; but
if the speaker was unable to represent this line of fracture by a single
well defined dyke, there are abundant allusions both to outflows of
trap and to the existence of a belt of dislocation, as the following from
O,* will show, p. 286. ‘The trap dyke, traceable only by its broken
fragments} on the surface, which has been alluded to as occupying the
southern edge of Tredyffrin township, enters Hasttown,”’ etc. (here follows
a detaiied statement ofits course), * * * ‘when its traces cease to be
apparent, though a few scattering boulders and fragments of trap are met
with.’’f ;

*Geology of Chester county, Persifor Frazer, edited by J. P. Lesley,

+Of course, a trap dyke may be assumed when the whole ground is made up of
the larger or smaller fragments, but the question how many trap fragments will
enable one to assume the presence of a dyke 1s, like many others, not capable of
a general answer,

{The trap here referred to is part of the “great dyke” which forms the sub-
ject of the paper above alluded to,

1884.) 693 {Frazer.

In the succeeding township, Willistown, it is stated of the rocks: ‘** * *
Southernmost of all, a broad band of syenitic granite and hornblendic
gneiss, in which latter are dykes of dolerite (as near Lukens’), and
another band of serpentine. How would these facts agree with the
hypothesis hinted at above, that the lower Primal was represented by the
pseudo-quartz porphyry and feldspar porphyry ; that this was overlain
by the quartzite proper; this by schists, and this by limestone ; that there
had been first a synclinal valley of all these, and finally a break in or on
the side of the valley, by means of which’ the lower measures had been
thrown up on the south and planed off evenly,’’ ete.

Under West Goshen township ‘fragments of dolerite are frequent, but
no dyke was apparent.’’ In the description of West Marlborough town-
ship, ‘‘Syenite apparently belonged toadyke, of which the exact position
‘was not determined,’’ is noticed south of Doe run, and ‘loose pieces of
dolerite were deemed insufficient to warrant the placing of this formation
on the colored map’’ (p. 807). In the description of Hast Nottingham,
fragments of syenite are mentioned, &e., &e. (p. 843).

In addition to the above references in the text of ©, to trap, there are marks
in the following localities on township maps used in the field by the speaker,
which indicate the presence of igneous rock fragments which were not
placed upon the county map because not sufficiently indicative of the
position of the parent dyke: Hast Goshen, N.E., N. and N.W. of Goshen-
ville; West Goshen, near water works; Hast Bradford, near Copesville ;
Hast Marlborough, near Unionville ; West Marlborough, 8.W. and N.W.
of Upland, near and W. of Woodville, etc. ; Lower Oxford, near Lincoln
University, etc.; Hasttown ; Willistown, near White House P.O., N. and
N.W. of Sugartown ; Highland, near Gum Tree and near Fairview School
House ; Kennett; New Gardon, near Toughkenamon, ete.

It is not pretended that these citations cover all the places where trap
was found, but they will serve to indicate that in the opinion of some field
workers, there is a long step to be taken from the occurrence of a num-
ber of trap fragments on the surface to the establishment of a dyke in
place.

Prof. Lewis concluded his description by saying, that such a dyke
would form an important feature in the geology of the State. In this the
speaker agreed with him, though whether or not the line of the trap be as
continuous as he has represented it, the belt of disturbance had been
established long ago.

But this dyke, if established, would be singularly confirmatory of the
long fault and southern upthrow, which constitute the kernel of the speak-
er’s hypothesis of the structure of the rocks in Southeastern Pennsylvania :
for, that there should be a fracture filled with injected rock, following
just the course which the speaker has ever maintained the fault to occupy,
for ‘‘ninety miles ;’’ and that the upthrow in one place (not in Chester
county) was, ‘‘several thousand feet,’’ in extent, would be clearly cor:
roboratory of the speaker’s view.

Genth.] 694. (Oct. 17,

The position of this belt is indicated, ©, (l. ci.), as follows: * * *
“These slates are bordered by a great belt of serpentine, of which
the northern boundary is nearly parallel with the southern margin of the
limestone itself, as if the mass of schists intervening had about a uniform
thickness, and that the serpentine were a true contact formation occurring
between these schists and the lower rocks.”

Attention was drawn to another statement of Prof. Lewis, viz: that the
lithological characteristics of this dyke were constant throughout its range.
This was entirely at variance with the speaker’s observation. There were
strongly marked differences of texture, structure, and constitution between
many of these outcrops in the townships south of the Chester valley, and
near Conshohocken.

On Herderiie. By F. A. Genth.

(Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 17, 1884.)

In the American Journal of Science [8], xxvii, 185-188, in an article on
Herderite, by William Earl Hidden and James B. Mackintosh, the latter
published his analysis of this rare mineral from Stoneham, Me. In aletter
{o the editors of the ‘Neue Jahrbuch der Mineralogie, &c.,’’ of 1884, ii,
134-136, Professor A. Weisbach gives the results of a comparative exami-
nation of the original herderite from Ehrenfriedersdorf, Saxony, and of
that of Stoneham, Me., made at his suggestion by Dr. Cl. Winkler.

These investigations, showing remarkable discrepancies not only be-
tween Dr. Winkler’s analyses of the herderite from the two localities, but
also between those of the two analysts of the Stoneham mineral, it was
desirable to re-examine this interesting species.

Tam under great obligations to Mr. George F. Kunz, who has kindly
furnished me with the material for this investigation, from which I was
able to pick out over 2.5 grms. of pure crystals,

Referring to the occurrence of herderite, he has sent me the following
communication, dated New York, October 14th, 1884 :

“On revisiting the Stoneham locality I found that the herderite had all been
‘obtained from a vein of margarodite, four feet wide, about twenty feet long,
“worked to a depth of ten feet. This vein is on the side of the top of Harndon
“hill, about one hundred feet from the place where was found the topaz obtained
“py me (see Proceedings New York Academy of Scieuce, November and De-
“cember, 1842, and American Journal of Science, Feb,, 1883), and not in the same
“pocket, as stated in the article, in the American Journal of Science, Jan. 7,
«1884. The vein is almost entirely margarodite, occurring here in unexampled
“crystals. These at times cover spaces four or five inches square with distinet
“perfect crystals of margarodite, also altering to serpentine, and associated
“with it what is possibly topaz, altered into serpentine,

“The herderite occurs almost invariably in erystals, implanted on the mar-
“ varodite, crystals of quartz, and in a few instances on columbite,

“ Between the herderite vein and the topaz vein worked by me were found the
“large columbite and triplite, Two distinet crystals of triplite have been found

“recently.
“Signed, GHORGE F, KUNZ.”

~
1884] 695 [Genth.

The analysis of herderite presents great difficulties, and the following
methods have been used in the different analyses :

I. A portion of the material was slightly yellowish, and probably con-
taminated with a trace of mica, 1.0334 grm. were slowly ignited toa
bright red heat in a well covered platinum crucible, and lost 4.80 per cent ;
after ignition, the lid and outside margin of the erucible were found
coated with a film, which, when moistened with water, gave a strongly
acid reaction.

About equal weights of silica and the mineral were fused with about six
parts of sodium carbonate for one hour. The well-fused mass, which was
greenish from a minute quantity of manganese, was lixiviated with water
and should now have contained all the phosphoric acid, and fluorine. ‘The
silica in the solution was precipitated by ammonium carbonate, and from
its filtrate the remaining silica by zinc oxide, dissolved in ammonium car-
bonate and ammonia. From the filtrate of the zinc silicate after evapora-
tion to dryness and dissolving in water, the greater portion of the sodium
carbonate was neutralized with dilute nitric acid, then precipitated with
silver nitrate, keeping the liquid slightly alkaline. In the filtrate the
balance of the fluorine (which had not been expelled by ignition), was
precipitated together with calcium carbonate by calcium chloride. The
mixed precipitate was ignited, dissolved in acetic acid, evaporated to dry-
ness, the calcium acetate dissolved out by water and the calcium fluoride
determined. It gave 1.57 per cent which would give, with that driven off
by ignition, about 6,4 per cent,

The zine silicate precipitate was found to contain phosphoric acid.

The portion insoluble in water was dissolved in a little hydrochloric
acid and the clear solution precipitated by ammonia, and. this separation.
twice repeated, and washed, until the filtrate was free from lime. The
precipitate was ignited and weighed. It gave over 87 per cent and con-
tained a large quantity of phosphoric acid. It was then re-dissolved in
hydrochloric acid, the excess driven off by evaporation, then dissolved in
water and enough sodium hydrate added to re-dissolve the greater portion
of the precipitate. From the filtrate of the insqluble partion the phosphoric
acid was precipitated by baryum hydrate as baryum phosphate ; in the fil-
trate from this the excess of baryum was removed by sulphuric acid, and
from the filtrate of the baryam sulphate, the glucina and alumina were

precipitated with ammonia, The residue insoluble in sodium hydrate _

contained about 4.5 per cent of lime, nearly 8 per cent of phosphoric
acid, a little iron and glucina and alumina, which latter were added to
the ammonia precipitate.

These were then re-dissolyed in as little acid as possible, precipitated by
ammonia, and the separation of glucina from alumina attempted by that
method, recommended by the highest authorities as the most perfect,
namely, boiling these hydrates with a concentrated solution of am-
monium chloride. The strength of the solution was kept so, that on

PROC, AMER. PHILOS, 800. xxJ. 116, 4g. PRINTED DECEMBER 19, 1884,

i
!
|
i
i

Genth.] 696 [Oct.17,

cooling a small quantity of ammonium chloride crystallized out. It
was boiled briskly for.a whole day, and did not show any bumbing
at all; a large insoluble residue remained. It had a slightly yellow-
ish color from a little iron, but had not the slimy gelatinous appear-
ance which alumina would have présented, but, on the contrary, it
was, without being erystalline, more granular and resembled beryl-
lium hydrate precipitated on boiling from a dilute solution in, sodium
hydrate. The filtrate was precipitated with: ammonia and gave 5.61
per cent of ignited beryllium oxide. That portion insoluble in am-
monium chloride dissolved readily in a minute quantity of dilute hydro-
chloric acid. Sodium hydrate was now added and the whole evaporated
in a platinum dish to a pasty consistency, then diluted with cold water
and the little ferric hydrate filtered off, which was subsequently dissolved
in hydrochloric acid, precipitated by ammonia. In washing the iron
precipitate the filtrate became gradually more and more turbid. It was
still more diluted with water and boiled for about one hour, when it was
filtered off and washed; it gave 8.99 per cent.* The filtrate was now
acidulated with hydrochloric acid and precipitated by ammonia and gave:
0.17 per cent of alumina, which was dissolved in hydrochloric acid and
precipitated by ammonia and was found to be insoluble in ammonium car-
bonate. ‘

The different constituents were added together and gave the results
given below. A considerable quantity of phosphoric acid was Jost proba-
bly in the zine silicate before I was aware of the fact that this retained such
a large portion of it, and only 41.76 per cent were obtained.

II. 0.8608 grm. of finely powdered perfect crystals, dried over one week
over sulphuric acid, were fused with twice their weight of silica and
sodium carbonate, and the mass treated asin I. It was found, however,
that for this mineral this method, even with such an excess of silica, can-
not be used advantageously, as the phosphoric acid, notwithstanding the
most careful operations, was contaminating almost every precipitate and
was largely contained in the zinc silicate. After the greater portion of the
phosphoric acid was obtained, there was still about 4.5 per cent with the
glucina and ferric oxide, from which it was separated by ammonium

* This unexpected behavjor of glucina with a boiling solution of ammonium
chloride induced me to make the following experiments: A quantity of
beryllium carbonate, prepared from beryl], from Acworth, N. H., was dissolved
in hydrochloric acid, to the strongly acid solution ammonia was added until it
showed a slightly alkaline reaction, It was boiled briskly for one day, then fil-
tered, the undissolved residue was again dissolved in an excess of hydrochloric
acid, precipitated by ammonia and boiled for another day and filtered. The two
filtrates were mixed and precipitated by ammonia and gave 0,1158 grm. of bery1-
lium oxide, The insoluble residue was dissolved in just enough hydrochloric
acid precipitated and redissolved by sodium hydrate, diluted with much water
and boiled for one hour, The precipitate weighed after ignition 0,1422 grms,
Both were converted into anhydrous sulphates, the first furnishing 0.4742 grm,
containing SO, = 75,58 and BeO == 24,42; the second gave 0.5912 grm. sulphate of
beryllium with SO, =75.95 and BeO = 24.05,

1884. ] 697 {Genth,

molybdate. The excess of molybdic acid was removed by precipitating
the slightly acid solution by nitrate of lead. The excess of lead and trace
of molybdenum were precipitated by hydrogen sulphide, and from the
filtrate the glucina, ferric oxide and alumina separated by sodium hydrate
asin I. Iam afraid that a portion of the fluorine was lost in a similar
way. The ignited calcium fluoride was treated with sulphuric acid and
weighed as calcium sulphate, and, as probably a little silica was there
which was volatilized as silicon tetrafluoride, it lost 1 per cent, and gave
only 6.04 per cent of fluorine.

III. 0.83808 grm. of the same material as I, was intimately mixed with a
known quantity of freshly ignited plumbic oxide, and put in a small
platinum crucible with close cover, this was placed in a larger plati-
num crucible which had some magnesia in the bottom, it was then tightly
covered and gradually heated to a strong red heat, which was continued
for twenty minutes. After cooling the small crucible had sustained a loss
of 0.0020 grm., which would represent 0.61 per cent. The contents of
the crucible were completely fused and the lid showed a slight film. As
lead fluoride is slightly volatile, it is a question whether this very small loss
may not be owing to this, and that the mineral is anhydrous,

The fused mass was dissolved in acetic acid and filtered, the residue,
consisting mostly of lead phosphate and fluoride, was dissoived in diluted
nitric acid. A pulverulent residue, containing amongst other substances
calcium fluoride, was filtered off, the fluorine driven off by sulphuric acid
and the sulphates added to the other portion of the analysis. It was
found that a considerable portion of the lead phosphate had gone in
solution, therefore all the liquids, from which the lead had been removed
by hydrogen sulphide, were united and the analysis finished as under IT.

IV. 0.5860 grm. of the very finely powered perfect crystals from an-
other specimen with traces of albite was placed in a platinum crucible
moistened with water, and then sulphuric acid was added and it was
evaporated until copious fumes of sulphuric acid went off. It was dis-
solved in water and hydrochloric acid. A very slight portion, 0.0070
grm., escaped the decomposition and was therefore deducted from the
original quantity. The solution was precipitated by ammonia which
would precipitate all the glucina, alumina, ferric oxide and a part of the
lime in combination, with all the phosphoric acid, and would leave the
calcium which was in combination with the flourine in solution, I found
that 13.16 per cent had not been precipitated, which corresponds to 8.93
per cent of fluorine, which is probably more correct than 6.04 per cent as
found by direct determination, The precipitate by ammonia was dissolved
in nitric acid, the phosphoric acid precipitated by ammonium molybdate
and the analysis finished as ahove.

Genth.] 698 (Oct. 17,

To my four analyses I add for comparison those of Mr. Mackintosh and 4
| Dr. Winkler.
| | Ehren-
| Stoneham, ‘a friedersdorf, ;
{| I Ir Ais IV Mackintosh, Winkler, Winkler, |
P.O, == 41.76 — 48.01 — 48.88 — 43.48 — 44.381 — 41.51 — 42.44
| BeO = 14,60 — 15.01 — 15.17 — 15.04 — 15.76 — 14.84 — 8.61
Al,O, = 017— 0.22 — 0.009— 0.20 -— —— — 2.26 — 6.58
Fe,0; = 0.48— 0.81—- 0.49— 0.15 —- ——- — 118 — 1.77 \
MnO = 0.09— 0.08— 0.12— 011 — — — — — —- |
| JaO = 33.96 — 34.06 — 33,74 — 33.65 — 33.21 — 33.67 — 34.06
| H,O = — ——= 70.61 — 70.61 — — 659 — 6.54
Fl= ——?6.04— ——— 8,93 11.82 ‘
| 102.12 104.06
| LessO = 8.76 4.76
| cae '

98.36 99.84

Silicic acid and the alkalies belonging to the albite, etc., have not been
determined, it should be remembered however that 0.20 alumina repre-
sents one per cent of albite.

The analysis made by Mr. Mackintosh and myself show that herderite
is anhydrous beryllium-calcium phosphate and fluoride,—with traces only
i of alumina and ferri¢ oxide and perhaps a little water. The traces of alu-
| mina are owing to slight admixtures of traces of mica and albite.

Somewhat doubtful is the exact quantity of fluorine which it contains,
Mr. Mackintosh determined its quantity from the excess of lime which he }
i found, <A determination which I have made in the same manner gave me
|
i

a far lower result, instead of 11.32, only 8.93 per cent. My direct fluorine
determination is probably too low, owing to the incomplete decomposi-
tion of the mineral by fusion with silica and sodium carbonate and the
difficulties in the separation of fluorine from such a solution. A doubt
also exists as to the 0.61 per cent loss by fusion with plumbic oxide,
whether it is water or lead fluoride.

As all my material was used up I could not attempt any other determi- \
nation for clearing up these doubtful points.

It is to be regretted that the results of Dr. Winkler’s two analyses are
| so very unsatisfactory, and that he has sacrificed the very precious Ehren-
friedersdorf herderite by employing incorrect methods for his analyses.
By ignition he has volatilized the greater portion of the fluorine, then
by evaporation with nitric acid the rest may have gone (although nitric
acid is less liable to drive off hydrofluoric acid than hydrochloric acid
would be); therefore when he subsequently tested for fluorine, there was
no more left than sufficient to give a doubtful reaction. ¥

Although it is stated (Rose’s Qual, Analyse, Leipzig, 1867, p. 212), in-
correctly as I believe, that hoiling with sodium acetate does not precipitate

1884.] 699 (Ashburner,

glucina, I am not aware that this method has ever been suggested to sep-
arate glucina from alumina by boiling a solution, nearly neutralized with
sodium carbonate, with sodium acetate. It is a known fact (see Graham-
Otto’s Anorganische Chemie, by Michaelis, iii, 2 Hilfte, p. 694) that from
a solution of beryllium chloride the glucina is precipitated on boiling with
sodium acetate,*

Dr. Winkler does not state that he has tested his so-called alumina for
its purity, which is unfortunate, or he would have found thata slight trace
of it might have been present, but that the precipitate was nearly pure
glucina. There can be very little doubt that the Hhrenfriedersdorf and
Stoneham mineral are identical in composition. There is also a larger
percentage of ferric oxide in Dr. Winkler’s analysis than found by me.
Might this not have come from the molybdic acid which he used? The
ammonium molybdate—prepared from Merk’s molybdic acid—which I
use contains in 100° 0.002 grms. ferric oxide. As I used measured
quantities, a corresponding amount of ferric oxide was deducted.

University oF Pennsyivanta, Philadelphia, October 17, 1884.

Notes on the Natural Bridge of Virginia. By Charles A, Ashburner.
(October 3, 1884; see page 690.)

During a recent trip to Virginia (September 2 to 6), I visited the Natural
Bridge, and although in possession of the tourist guide book of the lo-
cality (edition of 1884) and the admirable articles published by Major Jed.
Hotchkiss in ‘The Virginias,’’ I failed to obtain certain information relat-
ing tothe bridge which would be of special interest to the topographer
and geologist. Some of the observations which I made, although of a
general character, may be of interest to members of the American Philo-
sophical Society.

The bridge is undoubtedly the remnant of the top of a cave which was

*In order to show the value of the method used by Dr. Winkler for the
separation of alumina and glucina, a quantity of beryllium carbonate was
dissolved in hydrochloric acid, evaporated to dryness, diluted with about
150° of water, nearly neutralized with sodium carbonate, then about 2 grams
of sodium acetate were added and the solution heated. At about 80° it be-
came turbid, and after two hours boiling a considerable precipitate had

formed, which was filtered off and washed, It was dissolved in dilute hydro-,

chloric acid, then sodium hydrate was added to redissolve the precipitate, then
it was diluted with much water and gave on boiling beryllium hydrate, which
after ignition weighed 0,0855 grams, The filtrate from the precipitate produced
by sodium acetate was precipitated by ammonia and gave 0.2705 grm,. This
shows that 24.8 per cent were precipitated by boiling, and that the method is
worthless for the separation of glucina from alumina, By a greater dilution
and a more strict neutralization perhaps all the glucina might have been
precipitated,

700 [Nov.7,

probably formed long before the Luray Cavern, which is excavated out of
the same limestone formation. The bridge seems to be located in the
centre of a gentle basin or syncline in the strata, which may account for
the roof of the ancient cavern being left at this special point. The height
of the bridge has evidently been much augmented by a lowering of the
bed of Cedar creek through the agency of chemical and mechanical
erosion after the destruction of the original cavern. The height of the
cavity at the point where the bridge now exis!s being in consequence very
much less than the present height of intrados of the bridge arch.

The elevation above ocean level of the railroad track at Natural Bridge
Station on the Shenandoah Valley R. R., is 760 feet, and the elevation of
Cedar creek under the north face of the bridge arch is 915 feet, as deter-
mined by two independent lines of barometric levels which I ran from the
railroad station to the bridge. The height of the crown of the arch on the
north side at the ‘“‘Lookout Point’”’ is 188 feet above the creek, measured
with a cotton twine, which was the only line of the required length which
could be obtained. The same measured by barometer (Short and Mason
aluminium aneroid), was determined as 186 feet. Neither of these methods
of measurements are sufficiently exact to permit of a final statement, but
are of interest in the absence of more definite data. The thickness of the
arch under the crown on the north side is approximately 46 feet, and on
the south side 36 feet. ‘

Much has been written and published about this Natural Bridge since
the appearance, a century ago, of the Travels of the Marquis de Chastellux
in North America, in 1780-2, but there appears to be a lack of a complete
description of the bridge and its surroundings which is readily available,
which would prove of special value to the topographer and geologist.

Stated Meeting, November 7, 1884.
Present, 18 members.
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

Col. Ludlow, Dr. Randolph, and Mr. Dickson, new members,
were introduced to the presiding officer and took their seats,

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Royal
Academy at Madrid (XVI, i, 118, 114); the Society of Antiqua-
ries of London (415); and the Maine Historical Society (115).

A letter of envoy was received from the Meteorological
Office, Royal Society, London. °

—

1884.) 701

Donations to the Library were reported from the Royal
Academy of Belgium; the Annales des Mines; the Revue
Politique; the Meteorological Council of the Royal Society, and
London Nature; the Cambridge Philological Society; the
Natural History Society at Montreal; the Boston Society of
Natural History ; the American Philological Association at
Cambridge; the American Journal of Science; the American
Chemical Journal; the Franklin Institute ; Pennsylvania His-
torical Society; Prof. J. P. Lesley; Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr. ;
Mr. A. E. Foote; the Wyoming Historical and Geographical
Society ; the Commissioners of Education; the Secretary of the
Navy; the United States Fish Commission; the United States
National Museum; the United States Naval Observatory; the
Smithsonian Institution; the American Journal of Mathe-
matics; Major Jed. Hotchkiss, of Staunton, Va.; the editor of
the Western Magazine, Cleveland; the Colorado Scientific
Society; ‘the Astronomical Observatory of Mexico, and the
Imperial Observatory of Rio de Janeiro.

Dr. Rushenberger accepted his appointment to prepare an
obituary notice of Dr. R. EK. Rogers.

Mr. Vaux accepted his appointment to prepare a notice of
Mr. Henry M. Phillips.

The death of Mr. John Biddle, of Philadelphia, October 19,
aged 70 years, was announced,

The death’of Mr. ©. E. Rawlins, of Liverpool, aged 71 years,
was announced,

Dr. Syle exhibited copies of the Shanghai Chinese Illustrated
News, picturing the defeat of the French troops by the Chinese
in the late battles; and described the peculiarities of the struc-
ture of the Chinese language.

Prof. Cope presented “An Analysis of the bark of the Mou-
quieira splendens,” by Miss Helen C. D, Abbott.

Prof. KE. D. Cope mentioned some of the results of his studies
on the Batrachian and Reptilian fauna of Mexico and Central
America, which had been prosecuted by the use of material
mainly placed at his disposal by the Smithsonian Institution.

702 [Novy, 21,

The total number of species described up to date is six hundred
and ten, which is described as follows :
Genera. Species.

TOCIGIENS wielviivie:civ's W Vieisiwnayssieiesajy Viatbia’e 3 15
BaTRACHIA, | Grmnoniin Haider Fee * 4 7} 120

POTENT: Cinch ae paih maeidcinin tlh » Ws '6 win teen inane ne Bl 98 |

( Crocodilia....ceceessesesteeeeseeenes 2 3)
HEFT. | Sgeeliensvvavecsciconcrsieus. as: Meat

a, lain iscepedianmnan ni sits earl a and |

On motion of Dr. Brinton it was

Resolwed, The expediency of preparing and printing a Dictionary of the
Lenni Lenfpé language, based on that of the Rev. David Zeisberger, and
thus completing the presentation of that language, begun in our TRANS.
ACTIONS in 1827 by our former President, Peter Stephen Duponceau, be
referred to the Publication Committee, with instructions to report at the
first regular meeting in January, 1885,

Pending nominations Nos, 1031, 1032 and new nomination
No. 1088, were read, and the meeting was adjourned,

Stated Meeting, November 21, 1884.
Present, 15 members,
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

An acknowledgment of the receipt of Proceedings Nos. 112,
114, 115 was received from the Royal Zodlogical Society of
Amsterdam.

A letter of envoy was received from the Librarian of the
University of California,

A letter was received from the United States Department
of the Interior, offering copies of the Blue Book, or Official
Register of the United States.

A circular invitation was received from the Natural History
Society at Bamberg, to assist at the celebration of its Fiftieth
Anniversary, on November 8, 1884.

i

.

1884.] 708

Donations for the Library were received from Mr. Paul
Albrecht, of Brussels; the Geographical Society at Paris;
Royal Academy of History at Madrid; Royal Meteorological
and Astronomical Societies of London; London Nature; the
Boston Society of Natural History; Science Record; New
York Meteorological Observatory ; American Journal of Phar-
macy; Mr, Henry Phillips, Jr.; the Maryland Historical So-
ciety; Johns Hopkins University; United States Fish Com-
mission; United States Department of the Interior; Kansas
State Historical Society, and University of California.

The death of Eli K. Price, senior Vice President of the
Society, at his residence, in South 15th street, Philadelphia, on
the 11th inst., in the 88th year of his age (born July 20, 1797),
was announced,

The following contributions to the Society were read:

1. Notes on the Geological Structure of Tazewell, Russell
: jon ’ ’
Wise, Smyth, and Washington counties, of Virginia, by John
? iy ) oo ) oO o] WY.
J. Stevenson, Professor of Geology in the University of New
York, with seven cross sections and a geological map.
Mr, Lesley remarked that—

This memoir was a continuation of Prof. Stevenson’s description of the
Geology of Southwestern Virginia, read before the Society, August 20,
1880, January 21, 1881, and October 7, 1881; but without further reference
to the economies of the region.

The absence of the Chemung and Portage and Genesee formations VIII
f, ¢, d, from long outcrops in Lee, Wise and part of Scott counties (although
the Chemung is present on Indian creek, &c. further east) ; the absence of
the coarser members of the Hamilton VIII ¢, and the Marcellus VIII 8,
80 that only 900 feet of black slate is left; the absence of the Upper Helder-
berg VIII a, Oriskany VII, Lower Helderberg VI, and Onondaga V d—
leaving merely the Clinton V a, and Medina IV 4, c, which, however, thin
out and disappear themselves, but dn a southeasterly direction—are facts of
importance to the proper understanding of the original source, or rather
sources of our Paleozoic deposits.

The logical discussion of facts relating to the anomalous salt and gyp-
sum deposits along the Holston, at Saltville and elsewhere, is speciaily
valuable. The independence of the gypsum clays as regards the Paleozoic
floor-rocks on which they rest, and the evident erosion of the gypsum
before the deposit of the blue clay, upon which again the Mastodon con-
glomerate lies, are important steps of an argument resulting in a theory

PROC. AMER, PHILOS. SOC. xxr. 116. 4K. PRINTED DECEMBER 19, 1884.

we
104 [Nov, 21,

that the gypsum is not older than Tertiary times, and that it owes its
origin (as in the Great Salt Lake of Utah) to the meeting of two systems
of drainage witers, one from a region furnishing an abundance of lime
water, and the other from a region furnishing an abundance of copperas
water.

This memoir is not only valuable for its new facts, but for its correction
of mistakes made by me in my survey of the region in 1870,. A re-survey
of any geological field by another, or by the same competent geologist, is
sure to produce such results; and the ‘‘constants of science’’ can only
be obtained by this process of reiteration. My mistake of identifying the
fault at Saltville with the Walker mountain fault is a case in point. Prof,
Stevenson shows their distinction.

The total absence of the Catskill formation No. TX, and the nearly total
absence of the Pocono formation No. X, two formations measuring
together in Middle and Eastern Pennsylvania at least 8000 feet, is worthy
of especial notice, as it goes far to confirm the apparent lack of IX and
thinness of X at no great distance behind the Allegheny mountain in
western Pennsylvania. As we know nothing of the south-eastern limit
of these formations, and. merely see them at their last outcrop growing
thicker in that direction, and also north-eastward, the idea of a closed basin,
however large—perhaps extending to Scotland—may challenge respectful
consideration,

On motion, the Secretaries were authorized to publish a
colored map of the district like that in Vol. XIX, page 219.

2. The Limits of Stability of Nebulous Planets, by Prof.
Daniel Kirkwood.

3. On the Genealogy of the Vertebrata, and the Theory of
Degradation as demonstrated by it, by Prof. E, D. Cope.

The minutes of the last meeting of the Board of Officers and
Members in Council were read, and on motion the recommen-
dations therein contained were approved, and adopted.

1. Resolwed, That the Proceedings be hereafter published quarterly,’ or
oftener, at the discretion of the secretaries.

2. Resolved, That all members not paying an annual cotta tivation be
charged one dollar annually for the printed Proceedings,

It was explained that the Post-Office laws of the United States require

not only a quarterly issue, but a bona fide subscription list, for placing any
printed matter under the head of third-class matter.

The Secretaries will not only make this notification and explanation,)

but will send a circular letter to such members of the Society soliciting
their assent,

3. Resolwed, That the Indian Picture Rock be obtained at a total cost
not exceeding $50 for purchase, preparation and transportation.

705

1884.]

4. That an appropriation of two hundred and seventy-five dollars ($275)
be made for heliotype views of the Society’s Hall, within and without, to
illustrate the forthcoming Volume I, Part i, Proceedings of the Society

from 1744 to 1837.
5. That a circular letter be sent to members, urging them to take meas-

ures for the preservation of the monuments of antiquity in their several

localities.
6. That it is not expedient for the Society to take any part in the pro-
posed American Exhibition in London in 1886.

The alterations made in the garrets of the Hall for purposes
of storing and arranging the Society’s stock of publications,
were reported and approved, and the meeting was adjourned,

Stated Meeting, December 5, 1884.
Present, 13 members.
President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair.

Letters accepting membership were received from Judge
Jas. R. Ludlow, Prof. G. vom Rath, Dr. A. 8. Gatschet, and
Rey. Dr. H. OC, Trumbull.

Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Societas
Flora et Faun Fennica, at Helsingfors (107, 108, 118), asking
for back numbers; from the London Royal Society (XVI, 1;
112, 118, 114); from the Verein fiir Vaterliindische Natur-
kunde at Stuttgart (XVI, i; 112-114); and from De Lau &
Co., London (see MS. Minutes).

A letter proposing exchange of duplicates was received from
the Mercantile Library.

Letters of envoy were received from the Meteorological
Office of the Royal Society, London, and the Society at Hel-
singfors,

Donations to the Library were received from the Royal
Academies at Berlin, Turin, Modena, London and Edinburgh ;
the Observatories at Adelaide, Oxford and Brussels; the Geologi-

706 [Dec. 5, 1884,

cal Survey of India; the Society at Helsingfors; the Archives
of Physical and Natural Sciences at Geneva; the Anthropo-
logical Society and Royal Geological Institute at Vienna; the
‘Natural History Societies at Altenburg, Bremen, Bonn and
Stuttgart; the German Geological Society; the Society of
Natural and Medical Sciences at Giessen; the Horticultural
Society at Gorlitz; the Physical-Economical Society at Kénigs-
berg; the Geographical and Natural History Societies at Leip-
| sic; the Astronomical, Geological and Geographical Socie-
| ties at London; the Boston Society of Natural History; the
Essex Institute ; Museum of’ Comparative Zodlogy ; American |
Journal of Science; New Jersey Historical Society ; Franklin
Institute, Henry Phillips, Jr., Prof. E. D. Cope; Kosmos; the
Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania; Prof, Ira Remsen,
il of Baltimore, and Major Hotchkiss, of Stanton, Virginia.

i Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., presented two valuable catalogues
of collections of coins; one of Jerome de Vries, Jr. of Amster-
dam; the other of the Marquis Remedi of Sarzani, hand
somely illustrated with heliotype plates.

Prof. John J. Stevenson of the University of the City of
New York communicated a paper entitled: “Some notes re- Ri
specting metamorphism,”

Mr. Carson read by appointment an obituary notice of the
late Gen. A. A. Humphreys.

Dr. Frazer exhibited and explained his invention of a form
of hand-compass, in which the needle is preserved from injury
by carriage.
| Mr. Ashburner exhibited and described a new map of the
| anthracite coal region with columnar lists of the production
HH of each mine.

The Treasurer read his annual report, which was submitted |
to the Committee on Finance.

Pending nominations Nos. 1081 to 1038 were read, and the
meeting was adjourned.

_caremvemsiaaees

INDEX TO VOL. XXI.

Papers and Communications.
Asznort, Miss Hreuen C. D. Page.
An Analysis of the bark of Mouquiera splendens.. 6+ + oe ee eee eo VOL

Autrn, H. |
On a case of human congenital malformation. . « . 6+ +6 6+ + + «880, 413 |!

AsHBURNER, C. A.

On Kintze’s flre-damp indicator.......+.+. LEC Ce « 283 |
hs Verbal GomMuUnGatIONG . 660 66) yin 6 ee bale e ee Wye ee ee 6 0 6 BG) 480 j
| On the Natural Bridge in Virginia .......6-6-. Ce eee ete vibe eNO, Coe
Buazrus. |
| Verbal communtoation... ccc vce w se eee ete ote es ge AOk ,
: Buiopenrr,
i Verbal communication... cer sc cee tec cee ee ee ee we 0 Med |
1 Branner, J. C.
i The course and growth of the. fibro-vascular bundles in palms .. . 281, 459 |
i Brinton, D. G.
i A grammar of the Cakchiquel language of Guatemala . . + « » « »« . 800, 345 |
t On the Xinka Indian language, &o 2... sc eee te we eo ee 8 we COU |
Ri Brockway, C. B.
Thermometric Observations in Quito, Houador . .. . 6 6 + + 6 © « « 675, 676 q
|
CaRuu, J. F.
Communication on the wrong placing of Hurypterus pennsylvanicus . 450, 451
Cuasn, P. HE.
| Photodynamic notes No, VIII. ..c.0 ee ee eee eee wee ew oo 10, 210 i
| Photodynamio notes No.IK. 1... ee te te ot 6 tw 0.4 B08, 690
CLaypour, BE. W. |
| The Perry county faults. .... Gy EN ER te 6G aut Sh EBA ENG TS) iW
4 Note on a relic of the native flora of Pennsylvania . 6 6 66 + ee wo » 226 |
On the equivalent of the N. Y, Portage in Pennsylvania... ..... «230 i
Note on the Genus Renssaleriain the Hamilton group in Perry Co., Pa, 285 q
» Note on a large crustacean from Catskill group of Pennsylvania... . , 236 i
| Corn, E. D. |
| COMMUNICATION B60 6 a ule Mim es 800, 807, 419, 422, 426, 487, 611, 612, 615, 678 |
Letter from Little Missouri, Dakota... 6+ ese eee ee 8 ebro 6 MnO |
Distribution of the Loup Fork formation in N. Mexico... .... «« . 808
Second addition to the knowledge of the Puerco epoch , «1. + eee + « B09
On the Trituberculate type of tooth in the mammals... .. «24+. . 824 i
Synopsis of the species of Oreodontid@. ... . PEW ele Muse aoe ener DOS
V] On the structure of the skull in the Elasmobranch Genus Didymodus . . 572

On the Batrachian and Reptilian Fauna of Mexico and ©, America, . . 702 i)
On the genealogy of Vertebrata and the theory of degradation, .... . 703 H

op |

708

Crane, T. F. Page.

Medieval sermon books and stories... . 6.6 ee eevee vere eeee AD
Cresson, H. T.

Communication on Mexican flutes .. 1. ss eeeeeos em ae 281
Davis, Morris.

On the conversion of chlorine with hydrochloric acid as observed in the

deposition of gold on charcoal... cece reer nervvvrevne » a0

Day, F. M.

The microscopic examination of timber, with regard to its strength. . . 833
FRAZER, P.

Communications. .....66. Na ar aor hae, » ee © e111, 281, 419, 421, 458

On Trap Dykes in the Archsean rocks of 8. E, Pennsylvania, ..... + 691.
Grunrn, F. A.

ERTL fig Gilh V GEE ie pe cobs wis io Way by we eure hey oe) er ep eM UEe
Gri, THxro.

Notes on the Stromatetd@. 2. se ec nee adaee a 0 Ale one & miter a Vom,
GrarFrF, Fre.
Obituary notice of Strickland Kneass........+. EP ENS eure niga, 3

Grorn, A. R.

Introduction to the study of the N. American Noctwid@... 1... 4 + «184
Haann, J. G.

On the reversion of series, and its application tothe solution of numeri-

GGL CQUAETOIB, 10s j0- oes on es v9.04 on On by 0d On bn on oer de Oe) ia 6 lee wea BO

Have, Horatio.

The. Tavetotrivé amd language. «6 sed ee eels bee wield ede
Harpen, J. H. & E. B,

Models of Nittany valley and Jones mine .....0e6c8e0e58 ole 6 468

On a square pipe Of Limanite., ..00 6 ee ew be ele be we ee ee ieie . 686

Horn, G. H.
Obituary notice.of J. L.LeConte, .. 6 ee tee wee ee eo ow © oe OO, B07

Hovston, EH. J.
On the synchronous multiplex: telegraph, . 6 6.6 6 6 eee wo + 807, 826
Harpy 0. 8:
Verbal COMMUBICNON. 1.6. cchreiecece cb Me ol ble a whale Bin ae ea BB

Krrxwoop, D:
The zone of asteroids and the ring of Saturn. . . 6 ee 6 ew oie ew wo AB

The Hmits.of stability of nebulous planets... ew ew tie oe Ci A
LEsiey, J.’ P.

Condmunicatiome ss v0 6.0 bee ee 8 oe «0 ee « 204, 880, 848, 458, 686, 705

Obituary notice of J, L. LeConte,...... CN Th cele, Wud We carl ¥yube Ne ant onal

On the meaning of the Ser amimal 06 ee oc et to 8 wee 6 we ONS, 400

LesQuerzeAvx, Luo.
Obituary notice of Oswald Heer... tt tt ee te te OO
Liutey,. A.. T.

The Chemung. rocks at LeROy ss bbe 6 eie dbo Wie ee o's ai 6 00d, B07

»

Lockxinatron, W.-N.
The role of the parasitic protophytet. . eee ee ee ee ee he 8S
McOCavuuey, E. Y.
Inscription on a mummy case of the XIX Dynasty in Memorial Hall,
PRUACCIDRIGr 6 68 Se ae oe t e eww rh ee wel we ae ele 6 MLBy 288

709

Packarp, A. 8. Page.
A feviston ofthe Lystopetalida@, Se wee eee ew we ee eo ww oA p Le

PEPPER, W.

Obituary.notice of J. F. Meigs..... Oe were tetererwretatetete 6 9 200, 280
Puriurrs, Henry, JR.

Communications... 6 Gs ogee AR Be Gh uh 8 hs MLS Pa st + +» « 110, 280, 880, 485

A. brief account of the more important public collections of American

archeology in the United States. 2. 6 wet te tt we te tw e lll

| A note respecting the correct name of the last letter of the English alpha-
DOU iis eRe ele eR RRR Dee NET VOU, aut Tee cme Gea WE, hails Dhak ac) ONO

On a supposed Runic inscription at Yarmouth, N.S. ..... Aree OM OM

Notes upon the Codex Ramirez, with a translation of thesame.... . 616
Register of Communroatlone ee bees 0 ee pies ae ow 6 eye ee 6 AOe

Rozsrnson, Moncursr.

Obituary notice of HV Seypert oe ee ew eee wk lw 241
! RuscHuENBERGER, W. S. W.
Obituary notice of R. Bridges, ... 16.5 se oe CR yaar ex We ran cna TMrenraD 7 4
‘ SHARPLESS, ISAAC.
| The latitude of Haverford College Observatory ......ese.s0+-. eee |
| SHEAFFER, P. W. |
DOTTIE I Wee My ee arcs eure ac i6) Sie is Ww a alana W oo . 458
' Simpson, Gro.
| LOlapcohoahthobtel Qi lols Mme eee eure aC ae Tem a er ar eink are 843
i\ Strvenson, J. J.
INOUOR CM ONO: COLORY OL AOU WV is VM ATELE: ©. eiovt eo ekg euelbi Cais’ wlipline oe Oe j
Syrup, Ep. W. |
i On the Chimese lame wag ev.) Wise eee whee rel a celia pun lannnagin vie FOL |
1 |
Bs THAYER, RussELL. ‘
Poe ay. 0) ae ne ie enn Mer Hay al ulna race CRT gry aman rey te - . 801 f
Vaux, RIcHarp.
The Pennsylvania prisan BY Stem oii el ek oe ge cea eee ete seis ree WOOL
ak Warn, J. 8.
On some Indian pioture Tooke. . 6. ees eee we et rere 685, 87
WiviiaMs, H. 8.
On a-crinold with Movable splinewys es Fe ke ee we 48,81
; Members Elected.
Ashhurst, Ji... 66 + ee «6420, 420,408 ) Manders, Hy, (declined)... vee iis 420 |
AO TUOE TST ey tu ys ee Wechbs wwe. g 458, 484 | Myieze; FSi eee kw le so M58, 48d
| DOTTIE Perr Ware sb cea: ww pic SNM ge Ghat 420 | Gerrett, Pain ewe we. 6 oe « » 468, 484
| TAAL Aue CN et ees) wee ke ieee Wy F 420) Garrison ds By vies ce oreeerns ooadbsy 484
} BOR Te Bie ee swe ee ces 4, AOR) ABM 1 BVOTEDII IY Aur. hati ei ie lwity + 6 6 49, 209 |
Barer Wiss cee ee cela MBS 408 FLUTOD IDB OM Te Ears ee wie ee 458, 611.
OAD Ney Ny ALA SO e ig sonic! Arlo nh sae yw Baal BQO IRV RS UCR She wily cae ace atime 458, 484
PU ARGC ae ek aes 420, 424: | Jordan, Fr,dr... sees . . 458, 484 |
ARN SCE Cc ds GS Lames Rl ee Nene cain CTY C00 Ran BLS Wa egg Peat SP) ENG, eR Rn nl a UY 49 |
OTT sk een whlb Glue i 420, $28,424. | Reon, WeoWee ovis wie ele as 615, 672
Ooleridge, Lord. ...... 6 eho ge RD RB | TOU ESWE DE a ail lhe Meek Sh Oey 420
LO yt: 0 OP Ogee Ba UU Te eae hi tg BOO) 1 TOT AM AG RON add Med el’ + «49, 424
MANOIEBOU, ONAN ee Gute e ln eo why 468,486 | LubbockySir dd... 6 vie ewe O15, O74
ee

710

Page. Page.
OTE ids) Evi. boise Wii. cee i okey h EO LOR VY chi eye ae coh Wi, ay mew CLE Gite
TOTO, WV vile ale Cee ie Ee ARO TOMER Al On de ea aiete.e © « « 6 420
DIOMERTCE OCD soe Ue ne hve AR) MMOMAPHON, ELC. vieicu el w lien loam
Dea TM sb ee vo o.oo Ap AGS, | ECORI PH, Os, sevi leiiett ele ee) 4 O1S
MCL OEN I) Wok Tdi cca ii C10 Co Wl eee | EV TOR, By dd yb eis eee ial poalid LA #. caiee Oe NL
Parrish, Div cee be ee be GR | VaUe, RIOR aso en's os a6 6 420
Rendolpn, NiA vs vss e's + + O18, O71 |) Wallace, Mane ee ets « 420, 424
Sharpless, Tedacy ose be ee 5 420 | Welsh, Merbert, o6 5 5 oh oe es . 458

Snyder; M. Beckie.
Stevens, W.L.. wa ee

oe ee os 6 420: | Wharton, Fr. (declined) .
« + » » 420, 447 | Worrell, Jas ....20-
Members Resigned.

CRRA Wie cio cee Gt ele ete a ee ae aoe le ed ba ens
TRAY Ol) DUUBO'h vie Cee CL wheel ee Cee we ea Ee Bee leit. e

oe meee

Members’ Photographs Receiwed,

. « « « 458 (484)
auger eae)

COORG cee ek eve ww oe ee ee ee eC geen re . 45

Frieze, H, 8.05 6 Fie ce ee eA TEN eh MCC Cee Te EMC 486

Muont, Damiano, cis. ee eee ee ew ele ie ei eae . he eee)
Members’ Ohange of Address.

FROG TIOIGR,, Walls cee eo) Wie ee WOM oO ee wee Muay leer eae one ara 618

VOC, Gla 6 eee 8 ee ee ee

Members Deceased.

#90, 0-5, 0 288

Alexander, Stephen........ .218 | Lepsius, K.R... 20. sees ites OLB
ADTHON, Oy Brie e) eee e eee win end QS) | ews, di Jeo 6s oo 6 ee peewee 48
BIGGIE, Oey kee ee re eee e TOL INETISO Dy SVCD, «ete Ae miele, 4 Oe

ROIW HT, Aly GH WE Ree eee oii. 4 O50 | OLUIND My Ea Nye oy 4 ly
Bnglemann, Go. vee eee ee A EPICS, Tiare oleae ene
G&ppert, H.R... wee eee ee we Oll | Rawlins,C.B....-..
Gross, BD. ce eee oe oe 8 to 5 400 | ROCs, Ry B. e cae te

CUP Oty Acie 6 bean W478 ee atin eee: | BOUIN BIOS 9) gc 6) w.6. 4, 9450 9 o Al8
Hochstetter, FP. Von... ..cees O70 | BUOUEWOOU, Gs + v5 woe 5 6 8 & Kd wk
Humphreys,A.A.....5 . 948,419 | Slemena,O.W...... Pg oh OUT
Be Te os aa Wy Cec $45, 410: | Bebtlay Ti Bi ev ew Oe ek ve BO
RVR PITO ike akan eo oe vO, Oe | Trnntwine,. J. 04. 6 i ee Ue ee
TenOese, Bic cc eV eeere vy bie 4 A1O: | Wie On By Be re oon sie ngyes cay HOe
LeConte, JiLin wee ve ere ow so ALD
Members Appointed to Prepare Obituary Notices,
Chase, P. E.. Of Di By BOG yi rhe eee ee Wee i a woe bee haa ee
DeCosta, FE Die GROMER 6 ee einh i eh Waa Oe ha Fe eure 6 or eeiw esl
Horn, Dr, TMCOR. cee ek eee ee ere ey viele ete COUN
Lesley, Ee OUG Shela Riv ur ee ee heb dey AO omc ae at aa te DRT EL IA Da WB so.)
McKean, Oe Ky ROR siya ae” a ee wie a oa ee a ee
Morton, FRPP OTIS os 6 aie ee RE. Cae eB ae miei i
Walter (excused) * Trautwine....... CRE Cie Cas Bice Rue, eae aaa Te 280
Ruschenberger, ‘“ Dr. R. BE. Rogers... . eevee ver neve Vwi ice ee TOL
Vaux, Ey Mv PRT pee ie eee eG PU ee Gk Laan sek RE et a kT aa yt!
Business.

Agreement for rent with city... ..... bain iio Wa! ae: NA ORE: awa, ee VO OU
Ammerioan Exhibition Of 1886 oi seek we ek ale WA ne la ey eae ROTI OD
Appropriation to A. A.A ’smeeting......6... Probe deed Kee ye oe LD ERY,
Arrangement ofNorth Garretts... 1.1. + eee cer env vvne vel ew) 886
California, University placed on the List. ......6.5.206. PRC aE 689

Chl
Page.
‘ Cincinnati Society N. H, put on the List. He NNN a he mu aging t ping aed)
City loan . . ai CNRS DAN RU Rese NEO eT SORTS MU AmRAR A eee yur yine 111
Committee on Private DOCUMENTA BPO HOH) iG Cie Gua « . 210, 448
nt ARIS DSNReR MOS ici y gecins Payee hho neonates manele
a ‘| OPCen OF BURinGss.ih electione i) ogo ee, . 284, 800, 449, 485
sts MG MIGHT MSS OR Nir y tee tenure ke Ci Gay Gece wera nee . B44, 422
by 1 CRC OS RITE Cie ue ahh ea ae eins omy.
iy ** Resolutions of Board of Officers. . AEE IOK siya CRUE WU aL ACO Om
| COMMITIGes, BUEN AD MOLNTOM sora Warr aye ea ey kee a
Congres desi Amenicghistes eo Gul eae Ce Pa CORMAMAD el Huta Sc) 0)
Hey Duan IMstiotie COMMERPONMSHCO 164 ee ee a8
VOnHS Hopkins Umi versity, qulbexGnanees vies yi won vk a kG cn . 421
Kansas Academy of Sctences placed on the List. ............. 4... . 786
Lounl Lenape: Diction any Orderedi ty wan Ns flere ae lt May R08
LONGO StatistiGalsodtely TransuGtrons.: i) sos oees se a ne ee DLS
COVERS Cieat KOA we Onda CEN aS MAGA ath Oy Ueias eat lve walse mri e iM Mie cage)
DENSA IS Trem oy a OM gl NE Wine NGA We Nea oa ae 829, 612
Michaux Legacy receipts . gare RO Tie ‘ ’ ‘ 284, 422, 485
i Ly COMMITS TONGRb he cumin seen wed y! eee ok eau mn dO
Oil paintings to be restored ....... De ee aN Wea AR ok we tautig en gh MeN 880, AS'7
v Penn MSS. (Denson’s letter) IN ' STAI RINT esr POE MORI MERE Ta Leo (7
Penn and Logan MSS, . isa NA MH MNCTIN al Goncgnnh Par Wang SU eAte ty Whuigs ecru ta at sina Ghee
PHOVOETEA DUS MEGSIVEG ies aii, PS a ev ya RNC CO Meanie ine an ie Sia
ui of Hall ordered tobe made... CUCL en aE aR une K Sr riccenet we met ) 5)
PRSserVAtON On LAA Di MOMUMGON TR Advis Wl bc uliycd ¥ de klal ete sey AROp NLS
Private Documents . Paar yh Mink we we goea pie ese
Proceedings of 1744—1837, ordered. aR TRE TL MO tek Ske RAT URNON 18
ae to be. published quarterly and subscribed for.......... . 705
Register Of papersiordeved printed io yee ek el Para ea ae tuo)!
Schultz’s Arawak Grammar.,..... SAS OC AT OS MEP ne RS NAN Ahan Etec cat av tigi olf
U.S.Geological Survey, full exchange ay el iati! catieenD

PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. Xx1. 116, 4n. PRINTED DECEMBER 22, 1884,

YIGS |

Mariife y

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY,
HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE,

VOL. XXI. Aprin, 1883, to January 4, 1884. No. 114,

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE,

The Tutelo Tribe and Language. By Horatio Hale........-- scan i

Stated Meeting, April 20... ...ecereeeeeaeeens 45

Mediseval Sermon Books and Stories. By 7. # Crane..... iasicaes 49

The Latitude of Haverford College Observatory. By Isaac Sharpless, 78

On a Crinoid with movable spines. By Henry 8. Williams........+ 81

The Role of Parasitic Protophytes. By W. WN. Lockington.......... 88
On the Reversion of Series, and its Application to the Solution of

Numerical Equations. By J. @. Hagen..... Miele Uiiiels bla via aie ah ve De

On the Conversion of Chlorine into Hydrochloric Acid as observed
in the Deposition of Gold by Charcoal. By Wm. Morris Davis.. 102
Stated: Mecting, MOY Bivee veisescscsavee Oe OsI0)))

A Brief Account of the more Important. Public Collections of Ameri-
can Archeology in the United States. By Henry Phillips, Jr...... 111
Photodynamic Notes, No. VIII. By P. H. Ohase.......e.seeseeees S120:
Introduction toa Study of the N. American Noctuidae. By A. R. Grote 134

A Revision of the Lysiopetalide, a Family of Chilognath Myriopoda,

with a Notice of the Genus Oambala, By A. S. Packard, Jr....- 0 Lie

Stated Meeting, May 18....0.6.eeceeeeeeeees 209

Stated Meeting, June 16.....++. 1+. eee Ar vane NE

Stated Meeting, July 20...+.6.0++0e Se Cnt 212

Stated Meeting, August 17 .....see.ees waeese | a0

Letter from Loup Fork. By H. D. Cope.....++se+seeeeee Mice an piainee 216

Note on Growth in Ice, By Joseph Lesley... .+.2+essereceseeees Wee NAL,

The Perry County Faults. By 2. W. Claypole.....s..sseeseeevees 218
Note on a Relic of the Native Flora of Pennsylvania surviving in

Perry County. By #. W. Olaypole....+-++» Wott wie gah arnt ss caub 226
On the neesige je of the New York Portage in Perry County, Penn-

sylvania. By H. W. Claypote......0+++++ CMa Otis ee bre ills 230
Note on the Genus Rensseleria in the Hamilton Group in Perry

County, Pennsylvania. By H. W. Claypole....cessserenseees eee 285
On a Large Crustacean from the Catskill Group “of Pennsylvania.

By HF. W. Claypole (with a wo0d-cut)..veesversserses Wee Cece oe) 286

Stated Meeting, October 5......s.sevev evens 239

Obituary notice of Henry Seybert. By Moncwre Robinson......... «241

{Continued on 2d page of cover.)

| TABLE OF CONTENTS—Conrrnurp.

PAGH.

The Zone of Asteroids and the Ring of Saturn. By Daniel Kirkwood. 263

| Obituary notice of John Forsyth Meigs. By Wm. Pepper, M.D..... 266
Stated Meeting, October 19.....2...+ iiss haw EieOO
Stated Meeting, November 2...ce.cevvecesace 282
On Kintze’s Fire-damp Indicator. By @. A. Ashburner....... Sie. 1 eOO
| The Zeisberger and Perleus MSS........... Rarer EN dln Sewn 285
Obituary notice of Oswald Herr. By Leo Lesquerewa...........4- . 286
Stated Meeting, November 16..... Piya sana 290

Obituary notices of John L, LeConte. J. P. Lesley and George H. Horn 291
Stated Meeting, November 16 (continued)..... 800

Aerial Ships, Byes Dhayer, OC. Bis. swisia de cess sls + Oe ae 301
| Section of Chemung Rocks at Le Roy, Bradford County, Pennsyl-
Weamiae By As De ea vod vases Lass REO Urals UD lature be cur uni ye 304.
| Stated Meeting, December 7...... tinea Ate 306
On the Distribution of the Loup Fork Formation in New Mexico.
BY EA Wa CODE Uma an bie rd bee aly Sie COMM AN Sida eld alin iy wal te eae BUS

Second Addition to the Knowledge of the Puerco Epoch. #.D. Oope 809
On the Trituberculate Type of Tooth in the Mammalia. #. D. Cope 324.
On the Synchronous Multiplex Telegraph. By Hdwin J. Houston... 326

Stated Meeting, December 21, 1883.........++ 829
A Note Respecting the Correct Name of the Last Letter of the Eng-
Teh Aloha bet. “BY ene Piney I «al ecwieis rere diy Ui 6 veel ones 330
The Microscopic Examination of Timber, with regard to its Strength.
By Frank M. Day.. ee eiecbiris WUT na uC Geena ents SA a 333
" Blaved Weathag, Neon YO OAUG wate Feat AN 843

Note of a Quartz Pebble found in his Coal Bed, by J. # Mansfield.. 348
Note of drawings of Mr. Mansfield’s Eurypterids from Coal Slates,

by George Simpson. . navel Se Kew!) 6 9 iyeruie eect cers encceveres O40
On the Meaning of the ‘Bet thule By Jed LOSE ys vcie ls else bie y at oad:
Election of Officers for 1884............. aeead opie Vel We Web Gate ah meee

EXTRACT FROM THE By-Laws.

CHAPTER XII.

OF THE MAGELLANIC FUND.

Sxorron 1. John Hyacinth de Magellan, in London, having in the year
1786 offered to the Society, as a donation, the sum of two hundred guineas,
to be by them vested in a secure and permanent fund, to the end that the
interest arising therefrom should be annually disposed of in premiums, to

YLAS
Gu ku, 16/8 >ROCE +8
i“ op 6 tat PROCEEDINGS
OF THE

AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY,
HELD AT PHILADHLPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE.

VOL, XXT. January 4 TO May 16, 1884. No. 115.

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE,
A Grammar of the Cakchiquel Language of Guatemala. By D.

Ge BION AE De A RINE UCN ee va UG CL tren NG) ara pe tea 6 845
On a case of Human congenital malformation. By Harrison Allen,

VE De COUN VO CUI. CC ORE EC Mii as ROR CLV OS TON ey 6 Gate 413
Stated Meeting, January 18.0... e006 Ms cthinre te 418
y Stated Meeting, February 1..... prec 420

Stated Meeting, Hebruary 15......00. eee es 42%
Stated: Meeting, Man. ct iver rene ven 424
Obituary notice of Dr. Robert Bridges. By W. S. W. Ruschen-
CONTE Da eek sais atc Maat see APRA se Oey MCR NT TR as 42
Stated. Meeting; Mane 2h ice estes 447
Stated Meeting, April b.rccccecssecrveevees 450
Obituary notice of Strickland Kneass. By Hrederte Grajf......+++ 451
Note on a possible geographical meaning for the Set Griffin. By
De TR LCBLY soa Cbs eee eis ate Rasa dea Nave ASRS OEN SCHON | oBIEE "hie! a siaiay DO
Stated Meeting, April 18... .c0er.sesenesees 457
The course and growth of the fibro-vascular bundles in Palms.
By John CO. Branner, B.S. (avith five CUt8).ccererervveenreerrens 459
Stated Meeting, May 2...ersesevsvereesvens 484.
Stated Meeting, MAY 16....cvecveneseeveans 486
Inscription on a Mummy Case of the X[Xth Dynasty in Memorial

Hall, in Philadelphia. Copied and translated by Com. H. Y.

Me Cauley, U. 8. N. (with a plate), .cerercceveerevvcrereraces 74 2 A88
On a Supposed Runic Inscription at Yarmouth, N. 8. By Henry

Phillips, Jr. (with a plate)........00. Ee RGA a UE A ecre leo haere 491

On the Clinton and other shales, &e., composing the Fifth Group
in the First Survey of Pennsylvania. By Prof. 2. W. Claypole. 492

|

EXTRACT FROM THE By-Laws.

CHAPTER XII.

OF THE MAGERLLANIC FUND,

Snorron 1, John Hyacinth de Magellan, in London, having in the year
1786 offered to the Society, as a donation, the sum of two hundred guineas,
to be by them vested in a secure and permanent fund, to the end that the
interest arising therefrom should be annually disposed of in premiums, to
be adjudged by them to the author of the best discovery, or most useful
invention, relating to Navigation, Astronomy, or Natural Philosophy
(mere natural history only excepted) ; and the Society having accepted
of the above donation, they hereby publish the conditions, prescribed by
the donor and agreed to by the Society, upon which the said annual pre-
miums will be awarded.

CONDITIONS OF THE MAGELLANIC PREMIUM.

1, The candidate shall send his discovery, invention or improvement,
addressed to the President, or one of the Vice-Presidents of the Society,
free of postage or other charges; and shall distinguish his performance
by some motto, device or other signature, at his pleasure. Together with
his discovery, invention, or improvement, he shallalso send a sealed letter
containing the same motto, device or siznature, and subscribed with the
real name and place of residence of the author.

2. Persons of any nation, sect or denomination whatever, shall be ad-
mitted as candidates for this premium,

3. No discovery, invention or improvement shall be entitled to this pre-
mium, which hath been already published, or for which the author hath
been publicly rewarded elsewhere.

4, The candidate shall communicate his discovery, invention or improve-

ment, either in the English, French, German, or Latin language.

Toe Oh
fe 8b ea

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY,
HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USRFUL KNOWLEDGE,

VOL. XXI. 1884. No. 116,

TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE.
/ Synopsis of the Species of Oreodontide. By H. D. Cope (with plate). 508
On the Structure of the Skull in the Elasmobranch genus Didymodus.

By BD CGD ay avy slelnaie side eine is ales ure eniewnenalivs 0d sie'leiaia's eons O72

Photodynamic Notes, No. IX. he Pliny Harte Chase ...e.vcoevves 590

Stated Meeting, Jwne 20.... 0065 VV) RR OL

Stated Meeting, July 18......+ Rue an 618

Correction of Minutes of January 18. By #. D. Oope.........- wiewre GLO
Notes on the Codex Ramirez, with a translation of the same. By

OUND LEN UUUU ON EU's tuach \isieie Wee Ute ENNIS Cohth MW UATE y Veen weer GLO

The Pennsylvania Prison System. By Richard Vaudi...ccccccecees 651

Notes on the Stromateide. By Theodore Gill......... vesesovseeeees O04

: Stated Meeting, AUGUat Lbs... ees ie neceesecs 672

{ Stated Meeting, September 19...cecceesseevees B%4
i. Thermometrical Observations in Quito, Ecuador. By @. B. Brock-

\ WANs sss ee eie Ce bib e wlacebierdle Vieldyely be@ibly GIG OU bv isiwele'yn wibin’ 4 pole’ ee CLO
A" Stated Meeting, Coneten fA Ore cin to 685
On some Indian Picture Rocks in Fayette Co. By J. Sheth Wail. 687

Stated Meeting, October 17....... eesees weve! O80

Trap Dykes in the Archean Rocks of Southeastern Pennsylvania.

j By Dr. Persifor Frazer... ccicceees RHEL uae Mer huNN is Mouser aioe 691

On Herderite. By F. A, Genth.......0.005 RON Sfrimale shi ghiniee couih iy 694.

Notes on the Natural Bridge of Virginia. By (0. A. Ashburner...... 699

| Stated Meeting, November 7...... RE 700

| Stated Meeting, November 21...... ee Gay 702
ie Stated Meeting, December 5...... UNG Rau hades 705

\ :

;
vA

CHAPTER XII.
OF THB MAGELLANIC FUND,

Snorron 1. John Hyacinth de Magellan, in London, having in the year
1786 offered to the Society, as a donation, the sum of two hundred guineas,
to be by them vested in a secure and permanent fund, to the end that the
interest arising therefrom should be annually disposed of in premiums, to
be adjudged by them to the author of the best discovery, or most useful
invention, relating to Navigation, Astronomy, or Natural Philosophy
(mere natural history only excepted); and the Society having accepted of
the above donation, they hereby publish the conditions, prescribed by the
donor an’ agreed to by the Society, upon which the said annual premiums

will be awarded.
CONDITIONS OF THE MAGELLANIC PREMIUM,

1. The candidate shall send his discovery, invention or improvement,
addressed to the President, or one of the Vice-Presidents of the Society,
free of postage or other charges ; and shall distinguish his performance by
gome motto, device, or other signature, at his pleasure, Together with
his discovery, invention, or improvement, he shall also send a sealed letter
containing the same motto, device, or signature, and subscribed with the
real name and place of residence of the author.

2, Persons of any nation, sect or denomination whatever, shall be ad-
mitted as candidates for this premium.

3. No discovery, invention or improvement shall be entitled to this pre-
mium, which hath been already published, or for which the author hath
been publicly rewarded elsewhere.

4. The candidate shall communicate his discovery, invention or im-
provement, either in the English, French, German, or Latin language.

5. All such communications shall be publicly read or exhibited to the
Society at some stated meeting, not less than one month previous to the
day of adjudication, and shall at all times be open to the inspection of
such members as shall desire it. But no member shall carry home with

Ky
f

UNH

ne

ey
Mi, (1 ew!
ie i nd
Aan 5